Auerbach_Standard_EDP_Reports_196609_Volume_2_Autonetics CDC Auerbach Standard EDP Reports 196609 Volume 2 Autonetics
User Manual: Pdf Auerbach_Standard_EDP_Reports_196609_Volume_2_Autonetics-CDC
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 1041
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
AUERBACH STANDARD EDP REPORTS
An Analytical Reference Service
for the Electronic Data Processing Field
Prepared and Edited by
AUERBACH Corporation
Philadelphia, Penna.
2
Published by .
I
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
I
AUERBACH Standard EDP Reports
Prepared and Edited by AUERBACH Corporation
Editor ............ '" .................................. John R. Hillegass
Associate Editor ........................................Alan E. Taylor
Assistant Editors ........................................ Fonnie H. Reagan, Jr.
Myra C. Weisgold
Consulting Editors ........................................ John A. Gosden
Roger l. Sisson
Norman Statland
Production Manager ..................................... Cecil C. Hamilton
Staff ................................................. Lenna W. Holt
Susan J. Lehman
Frances G. Maslin
Robert O. MacBride
George [\Jeborak
Sally D. Nester
.Director of Customer Relations ............................. R. G. Scott
President ............................................. Isaac L. Auerbach
Director of Information Products Group ................... Robert E. Wallace
Publisher ............................................. Richard K. Ridall
The information contained herein has been obtained from reliable sources
and has been evaluated by technical teams with extensive working experience
in computer design, selection and application. The informatioll, however, is
not guaranteed.
/
AcknowledgemE!'nt is made of the inspiration and guidance provided by the
Information Systems Branch of Office of Naval Research which has supported
data gathering activity by Auerbach Corporation in fields similar to some
covered in these reports. The data contained and formats used in STANDARD
EPD REPORTS were not prepared under any contract with the U. S. Government; and they are the exclusi've property of the copyright holders.
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
55 n. seventeenth street
philadelphia, pa. 19103
215-locust 7-2930
7/64
COMPUTER SYSTEM REPORTS
\
"
/
I
~
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
.
.'
COMPUTER SYSTEM REPORTS
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
RECOMP II
Autonetics Division
North American Aviation, Inc.
\
'''--- /
(
\
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN
u. s.
A.
RECOMP II
Alitonetics Division
North American Aviation, Inc.
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
1.
161:011.100
sm,,,,
RECOMP II
SUMMARY REPORT
AEDP
;
J,
AUERBAC~
REPORTS
SUMMARY REPORT: RECOMP II
.1
AVAILABILITY
RECOMP II is a small scientific computer system that was manufactured from 1958 to 1963
by the Autonetics Division of North American Aviation, Inc. Autonetics announced the discontinuance of manufacture of the RECOMP line of computers on April 24, 1963. A total of
approximately 120 RECOMP II computers were manufactured.
Autonetics states that a limited number of used RECOMP II systems are currently available
for either lease or purchase. Prices for used RECOMP II's will be quoted upon request to
prospective customers. Autonetics is continuing to provide maintenance and "limited software support" for installed RECOMP systems .
•2
HARDWARE
RECOMP II is a fully-transistorized desk-sIze computer designed primarily for low-volume
scientific applications. Paper tape is the basic input-output medium, but a card reader/
punch, up to four slow magnetic tape units, and a digital plotter can be added if desired.
Despite the close hardware similari1;y between the RECOMP II and the later RECOMP III
(page 162:011. 100), there is no direct program compatibili1;y between the two systems.
RECOMP II's 40-bit word size - unusually long for computers in this class - provides
about 12 decimal digits of precision. Each word can contain two instructions or one fixedpoint operand. Floating-point numbers are represented by pairs of words.
All internal storage is provided by a single magnetic disc. The disc contains 70 tracks
served by fixed read and write heads. Six1;y-four tracks form the 4, 080-word Main Memory,
two "recirculating" tracks form a 16-word Fast Memory, and the remaining four tracks are
used for special registers. The disc revolves at about 3,500 rpm, so the average access
time to Main Memory is about 8. 5 milliseconds. Each 8-word Fast Memory track has two
read heads and one write head; maximum Fast Memory access times are 1.1 milliseconds for
reading and 2.2 milliseconds for writing. A special instruction permits eight-word data
transfers between Main Memory and Fast Memory. No pari1;y checking is performed upon
transfers to or from the disc.
The Central Processor operates in the binary mode on either fixed-point or floating-point
operands. The instruction structure is one-address, but because the 20-bit instructions
are accessed from the disc in pairs, a pseudo one-pIus-one addressing scheme (in which
the second instruction of each pair is an unconditional transfer to the next instruction pair)
can be used to increase execution speeds by minimizing disc rotational delays.
The instruction repertoire is well-designed for most scientific computations. It includes a
full complement of arithmetic operations - i.ncluding square root - in both fixed-point and
floating-point modes. There are, however, no facilities for indexing or indirect addressing.
Instructions in typical programs are executed at the rate of about 50 to 200 per second.
Decimal-to-binary conversion for input data is automatic, but binary-to-decimal conversion
for output operations requires a special subroutine which is rather slow. Some 40 basic
subroutines have been provided to handle a varie1;y of four-, five-, and six-bit input-output
codes, but the output operations are awkward.
Simultaneous operations cannot be performed in RECOMP II systems; the Central Processor
is interlocked during all input-output operations.
The standard input-output devices are a 400-character-per-second paper tape reader, a
20-character-per-second paper tape punch, and a 10-character-per-second 1;ypewriter, all
of which are supplied with the basic RECOMP II system. The basic tape reader and punch
use 5-channel tape and the Baudot code, so no parity checking can be performed, although
echo checking is used to verify the punching operation. The console typewriter is a modified
IBM unit that can be used for both keyboard input and printed output. A convenient desk-top
Console Unit provides a digital display of data in selected registers or storage locations.
Other peripheral equipment that can be used with RECOMP II systems includes: a Facitape
Console containing a 600-character-per-second paper tape reader and a 150-character-persecond paper tape punch; a Connector unit that permits an IBM 24 or 26 Card Punch to be
used for low-speed card input and/or output; a digital X-Y plotter; and up to four low-speed
magnetic tape units. Peak data transfer rate for the magnetic tape units is 1,850 characters
per second, and Autonetics considers them to be more useful for auxiliary storage than for
conventional input-output purposes. The Facitape paper tape units can accommodate tape
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH info, inc.
11/65
161 :011. 200
.2
RECOMP II
HARDWARE (C ontd.)
with 5, 6, 7, or 8 channels; they provide higher speeds and more flexibility than the basic
Autonetics paper tape units •
.3
SOFTWARE
A fairly wide range of software facilities is available, a large proportion of which has been
prepared by individual RECOMP n users. An interpretive system, RAFT IV, provides a
simple machine-oriented language for limited engineering applications; the structure of the
language is quite similar to the type of instructions given to operators of desk calculators,
so RAFT IV is well-suited for open-shop operations. SCOP AC is an algebraic compiler
language that is closely related to FORTRAN, but SCOPAC lacks FORMAT and library
facilities, holds all variables in floating-point form, and cannot handle arrays of more than
. two dimensions. Several other compilers and assemblers have been developed for the
RECOMP n, but they are less widely used than RAFT IV and SCOPAC.
The RECOMP II program library contains routines for various engineering and mathematical applications using both fixed-point and floating-point arithmetic.
Despite the various software programming systems available to RECOMP II users, machine-language programming is common because the computer j.s relatively straightforward and easy to program. Autonetics estimates that 80 percent of all user programs
are written in machine language. RECOMP II's simplicity and ease of programming make
it suitable for use as a training device to teach digital computer principles and programming.
11/65
fA
AUERBACH
s
161:221. 101
1&
AUERBACH
STANDARD
ED:!?
RECOMP II
PRICE DATA
REPORTS
PRICE DATA: RECOMP II
''--
The rental and purchase prices shown below were those in effect for new RECOMP II equipment
while it was in production. Autonetics states that current prices for used RECOMP II equipment
will be quoted upon request to prospective customers.
The monthly maintenance charges shown below are those currently in effect; they cover a preventative maintenance program plus all parts and labor necessary to maintain the equipment in
good operating condition. As an alternate plan, Autonetics will supply maintenance service on a
call-to-call basis for a fixed price per day, plus parts and transportation.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
No.
D4A-AB
D4G-AB
Name
RECOMP II Standard System
RECOMP II Magnetic Tape System
PRICES
Monthly
Rental
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchase
$
$
$
2,495
2,795
550
550
95,000
99,850
Either system includes 4,080word Main Memory, 16-word
Fast Memory, Central Console
and Display, Console Typewriter,
400-cps Paper Tape Reader, and
20-cps Paper Tape Punch.
STORAGE
INPUTOUTPUT
Included in basic system, above.
AFPC
Facitape Console, including 600cps Paper Tape Reader and
150-cps Paper Tape Punch
500
100
16,950
D4K
Connector for IBM 24 or 26 Card
Punch (for card input/output)
150
30
4,250
M906II
Magnetic Tape Unit
625
125
25,000
D4H
X-Y Digital Plotter
220
45
5,450
Consolette (required for above I/O 50 per unit
connected
devices)
10
3,800
225
Versatape II (off-line 10-key paper
tape preparation unit)
100
20
2,500
266
Computeriter
100
20
2,600
-
I
\
"
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
RECOMP III
Autonetics Division
North American Aviation, Inc.
(
\
(
\
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
RECOMP" III
Autonetics Division
North American Aviation,
,/
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
Inc~
162:011.100
~
AUERBACH
STANDARD
EDP
RECOMP III
SUMMARY REPORT
REPORTS
SUMMARY REPORT: RECOMP III
.1
AVAILABILITY
RECOMP III is a small scientific computer system that was manufactured from 1961 to
1963 by the Autonetics Division of North American Aviation, Inc. Autonetics announced
the discontinuance of manufacture of the RECOMP line of computers on April 24, 1963.
A total of approximately 60 RECOMP III computers were manufactured.
Autonetics states that a limited number of used RECOMP ill systems are currently available for either lease or purchase. Prices for used RECOMP ill's will be quoted upon request to prospective customers. Autonetics is continuing to provide maintenance and
"limited software support" for installed RECOMP systems .
•2
HARDWARE
RECOMP m is a fully-transistorized desk..:size computer designed for low-volume scientific applications. The basic input-output device is a 10-character-per-second Flexowriter, although faster paper tape input-output equipment is available. Despite the fact
that RECOMP m was designed as an "economy model" of the earlier RECOMP II (page
161:011.100), there is no direct program compatibility between the two RECOMP systems
because of significant differences in their instruction repertoires and data formats.
RECOMP Ill's 40-bit word size - unusually long for computers in this class - provides
about 12 decimal digits of precision for fixed-point operands. Floating-point numbers are
represented by an 8-bit exponent, a 31-bit fraction, and a sign bit. Each RECOMP m
word can contain two 20-bit instructions or one fixed-point or floating-point operand (whereas RECOMP II uses two words to hold each floating-point operand).
All internal storage is provided by a single magnetic disc. The disc contains 70 tracks
served by fixed read and write heads. Sixty-four tracks form the 4, 080-word Main
Memory, two "recirculating" tracks form a 16-word Fast Memory, and the remaining four
tracks are used for special registers. The disc revolves at about 3, 500 rpm, so the
average access time is about 8.5 milliseconds to Main Memory and 1. 1 milliseconds to
Fast Memory. A special instruction permits eight-word data transfers between Main
Memory and Fast Memory. No parity checking is performed upon transfers to or from the
disc.
The Central Processor operates upon fixed-point binary operands. Floating-point arithmetic is a hardware option; if the optional feature is not installed, its facilities can be
simulated (at a considerable reduction in speed) by a standard software package. The instruction structure is one-address, but because the 20-bit instructions are accessed from
the disc in pairs, a pseudo one-pIus-one addressing scheme (in which the second instruction
of each pair is an unconditional transfer to the next instruction pair) can be used to increase speeds by minimizing disc rotational delays.
The RECOMP II instruction repertoire is well-designed for most scientific computations,
although it lacks some of RECOMP II's convenient but costly facilities such as built-in
square root and decimal-to-binary conversion. One index register is available, but it
can be referenced only by the second instruction of each instruction pair. Instructions in
typical programs are executed at the rate of about 50 to 200 per second.
All editing and radix conversion operands must be programmed, and standard subroutines
are available to facilitate them. Any code of 5 to 8 bits can be used for input and output
operations, but every data character is handled as though it contained eight data bits;
characters are packed five to a 40-bit word.
There are no facilities for simultaneous input-output operations, and only a limited amount
of overlapping of Flexowriter and Central Processor operations is possible.
The standard RECOMP m input-output device is a Friden Flexowriter, which is an electric
typewriter with an integrated paper tape reader and punch. The Flexowriter provides key'board or paper tape input and printed or punched output, all at a rated speed of 10 characters per second. Paper tape with 5, 6, 7, or 8 channels can be used. The Flexowriter's
low speed and uncertain reliability make the basic RECOMP m configuration suitable only
for applications whose ratios of input-output to computational volume are very low.
The standard Flexowriter can be augmented by faster Facitape paper tape input-output
units. The Facitape reader has a rated speed of 600 characters per second and a maximum
effective speed of 285 characters per second when used with a RECOMP III. The Facitape
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
RECOMP III
162:011. 200
.2
HARDWARE (Contd.)
punch, rated at 150 characters per second, achieves a maximum speed of about 90 characters per second in RECOMP III systems. The Facitape reader can be used as an independent unit, or the reader and punch can be combined in a Facitape Console.
Also available for use with RECOMP III systems are a digital X-Y plotter and a Connector
unit that permits an IBM 24 or 26 Card Punch to be used for low-speed (20 columns per
second maximum) card input and/or output•
.3
SOFTWARE
RECOMP ill is a relatively straightforward, easy-to-program computer. so many user
programs are written in machine language. The RECOMP III program library contains
an assortment of input-output control routines and mathematical functions to simplify
machine-language programming.
An interpretive system called RIP-3000 permits the RECOMP III to be programmed as if it
were an even more convenient - but slower - pseudo-computer with built-in floating-point
arithmetic, radix conversions, and mathematical functions. RIP-3000 provides a convenient coding language, but the instructions are executed interpretively at a rate of only
about 12 instructions per second.
Also available for the RECOMP III are a FORl'RAN II compiler and NUCOM, a numerical
control compiler that generates control tapes for a variety of machine tools.
11/65
IA
AUERBACH
•
-A
162:221. 101
SIIM'IID
Au~1~E~p;'
RECOMP III
PRICE DATA
-
PRICE DATA: RECOMP III
The rental and purchase prices shown below were those in effect for new RECOMP III
equipment while it was in production. Autonetics states that current prices for used
RECOMP III equipment will be quoted upon request to prospective customers.
The monthly maintenance charges shown below are those currently in effect; they cover a
preventative maintenance program plus all parts and labor necessary to maintain the
equipment in good operating condition. As an alternate plan, Autonetics will supply maintenance service on a call-to-call basis for a fixed price per day, plus parts and transportation.
IDENTITY. OF UNIT
CLASS
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
No.
Name
RECOMP III Computer, including:
4, OSO-word Main Memory,
16-word Fast Memory,
Console, and Flexowriter
PRICES
Monthly
Rental
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchase
$
$
$
1,495
Floating-Point Arithmetic (optional)
65,000
41. 66
STORAGE
Included in basic system, above
INPUTOUTPUT
Facitape Paper Tape Reader
125
25.00
4,750
Facitape Console, including 600-cps
Paper Tape Reader and 150-cps
Paper Tape Punch
500
100.00
16,950
75
30.00
2,625
X- Y Digital Plotter
195
45.00
4,950
Flexowriter for remote operation
(inquiry station)
260
50.00
5,650
One additional input plug (for optional or special devices; 3 max.)
25
5.00
750
One additional output plug (3 max.)
25
5.00
750
Connector for IBM 24 or 26 Card
Punch (for card input/output)
/
425.00
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
I"
\
'-.
BURROUGHS B200 SERIES
Burroughs Corporation
'1(.
.........
iI
U
c
(
\.
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN
u.s.
A.
BURROUGHS B200 SERIES
Burroughs Corporation
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
201 :001.001
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Contents
CONTENTS
Introduction • . . • . • . . • • • . . • . . . • . . . • . . . • . • . . . • . . • . . . . .
Data Structure . • . • . • • . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Qonfiguration Table of Permissible Corifigurations ...••••.•• : .••.
I
Typical Card System • . . . • . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . .
II
4-Tape Business System . • . . • . . . . . • • . . . • . • • . • . •
III
6- Tape Business System . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
V
6-Tape Auxiliary Storage System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • .
Special Configuration for Unit Records . . . • • • • . . • . • .
Special Configuration for Proof-Transit Operations •. ' . . .
Internal Storage Core Storage . . . . . . . • . . • • • . • • . . • • • • • . . • . . • •
Disk File System . . . • . . . . . • . • • . . . • . . • . . . • • • . .
Central Processors B 100/200 10-microsecond Central Processor . • . . . . . .
B 200/300 6-microsecond Central Processor . . . . • • • . .
Console Processor Console • . . • . . • . . . . . . . • . . • • • • • • • • . .
Supervisory Printer.' . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . ' . . . .
Input-Output: Plinched Card and Tape B 122 Card Reader (200 cards/min) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B 123 Card J;teader (475 cards/min) . . • • • . • • . . • . . . . . . . . . .
B 124 Card Reader (800 cards/min) . . • . . • • . • . . . . . . . . . . . '.
B 129 Card J;teader (1,400 curds/min) . • • • • . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B 303 Card Punch (100 cards/min) . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B 304 Card Punch (300 cards/min) . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . •
B 141 Paper Tape Reader . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B- 341 Paper Tape PunCh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input-Output: PrintersB 320 Line Printer (475 lines/min) . . . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . .
B 321 Line Printer (700 lines/min) . . • . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B 325 Line Printer (700 lines/min) . • • . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B 328 Line Printer (1,040 lines/min) . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .
B 329 Line Printer (1,040 lines/min) . • • • • . • . . . . . . . . . • . . .
Multiple Tape Listers . . . • . . . . • • . . . . • • . . . . . • . • • .
Input-Output: Magnetic Tape B 421 Magnetic Tape Unit (18,000 or 50,000 char/sec) . • . . . . . • .
B 422 Magnetic Tape Unit (24,000 or 66,000 char/sec) . . . . . • . . .
B 423 Magnetic Tape Unit (24,000 char/sec) • • • . . • . . . . . . . . . .
B 424 Magnetic Tape Unit (66,000 char/sec) . . • • • • . . . . . . • • . .
B 425 Magnetic Tape Unit (18,000, 50,000, or 72,000 char/sec) ..
Input-Output: OtherB 401 Record Processor . . . • . • • • • • • . • . . • . . . • . • • • • . . • .
MICR Sorter-Readers • . . . • • . • . • • . . . • . • . • . . . • . • . . . . . . ,
Data Communications System . • • . . • . . . . . . . • • . • . • . . • • • . .
B 248 Data Communications Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B 450 Disk File and Data Communications Basic Control . • . . . . .
B 481 Teletype Terminal Unit . • • . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B 483 Typewriter Terminal Unit . • • . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B 484 Dial TWX Terminal • . . • • • . . • . . • . . • . . . . • . . . . . . . .
B 486 Central Tei'minal . . . • . • . • • . • • . . • . • • . . . . . . . • • . .
B 493 Typewriter Inquiry Station . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simultaneous Operations . • . . . . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . • • • • • • . .
Instruction List . . . • . . • . . • . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coding Forms Basic Assembly Language . . . . . • , . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . . •
Advanced Assembly Language . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . • .
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
201:011
201:021
201:031. 011
201:031.1
201:031. 2
201:031. 3
201:031.4
201:031. 5
201:031. 6
201:041
201:042
201:051
201:052
201:061
201:061
201:071
201:072
201:072
201:072
201:073
201:073
201:074
201:075
201:081
201:081
201:081
201:082
201:082
201:083
201:091
201:091
201:091
201:091
201:091
201:101
201:102
201:103
201:103
201:103
201:103
201:103
201:103
201:103
201:103
201:111
201:121
201:131
201:131
6/65
201 :001.002
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
Data Codes Internal, Printer, Lister, Sorter-Reader, Disk File •••...•.•
Alphameric Card· .•••••..•••••••••••..•••••.•.•••••
Magnetic Tape ••.•.••••••.•••••••.•••.••••••••••••
Record Processor .••••••••••••••.•••••••••••••••••
Paper Tape •••••••••••••••••..••••••••••.••••.••
Collating Sequence. • • • • • • . • • • • . • • . • • • • • . • . • . • . • • • • •
Problem Oriented Facilities •••.••••.•..•••.•••••••••••••
Simulation by B 220 .•••••••••.•••...•.••••.••••.••.
Sort Generator I • . • • • • • • • . • . . • . . . . • . . • . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generalized Three-Tape Sort •.••••••..•....••.•.•.....
Disk File Sort Generator III •••••.•....•....•..••••••.•
Disk File Chained Records Sort . • • • • • . . . • • . . • • . . . . . • • . .
Report Generator I, IA .•••••••••.•.••••..•••.•.•••..
Data Conversion Program .•.••••••.•••..•••••••••••••
Disk File Utility Programs ••••...••••...•••.•••••••••
Magnetic Tape CopyIV erify. • • • • • . • • • • • . • • • •• • • . • • • • • .
Disk File Record Maintenance and Recovery. • . • • • • • • • • . . • • .
Demand Deposit Accounting Programs ••••••••••••••••••••
Proof/Transit Programs •••.•.•••••••••.•.•.•••.•••••
Installment Loan Programs .••••••••••.•••••••••.••••.•
Bond Analysis and Accounting • • • • • • • • • . • • • . • • • . • . . • • • •
·Loan Payment Schedular ••••••••••••.••••••••••••••••
Bank Customer Service Model •••••••••.••.•.••••.••••.
On-Line Teller System ••••.•••••••.••••••.•..••.•••.
Flow Chart Generator. • • . • • • • • • • • . . • • • • • • • . • . • • • • • • .
Process Oriented Languages Compact COBOL •••••••••••••••••••••.••.••••••••.
B 200/300 Full COBOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Machine Oriented Languages Basic Assembly Language •••••.•••.••••••••••••••••..
Advanced Assembly Language ••••••••••••••.•.••.•...•.
Program Translators Basic Assembler ••.••••.••••.••..•••••••••••••••••
Advanced Assembler •••••••..•••.•••••••••••••••••.
Compact COBOL Compiler .••.•..••••.•••••.••.••••••.
SPS Translator .•••••••••••.•.•..•.•.••••••.••.•••
Operating Environment .
General •••••.•• '.' ••••••••••.••••.•..•••••••••••
Multiprocessing ••••.•••...•••••••••••..•••••.•••••
Tape/Disk Operating System .•••.•.•...••..•..••..••.•
System Performance •••••.••••••••••••••.••.•.••••••••.
Worksheet Data •••••.••••••••••..•••••••.•••••••••
Generalized File Processing .•.••••.••••.••••••••••.••
Sorting •.••.••••••••••••••.••.••.••..••.••..•.•
Physical Characteristics •••.•••••••.••••••.••••.••••••••
Price Data ••••••••.••••••••••......••••••••••••.•••
201:141
201:142
201:143
20:).:144
201:145
201:146
201:151
201:151.12·
201:151.13
201:151.13
201:151.13
201:151.13
201:151.14
201:151.15
201:151.15
201:151.16
201:151.16
201:151..17
201:151.17
201:151.17
201:151.17
201:151.17
201:151.17
201:151.17
201:151.17
201:161
201:162
201:171
201:172
201:181
201:182
201:183
201:184
201:191
201:192
201:193
201:201
201:201. 011
201:201.1
201:201. 2
201:211
201:221
/
6/65
201:011.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Introduction
INTRODUCTION
.1
SUMMARY
The B 100/200/300 Series designates a group of three similar, small-to-medium-scale,
business-oriented computer systems manufactured by Burroughs Corporation. The
original entry in the Series was the B 200 line of computer systems, first delivered in
October 1962. The B 200 Series provided 4,800 characters of core storage and a memory
cycle time of 10 microseconds. Peripheral device flexibility was limited to punched
card, line printer, MICR document, magnetic-striped ledger card, and magnetic tape
input-output units. Buffered card reading, punching, and line printing were offered as
standard features.
Fourteen months later the B 200 Series was significantly improved: memory cycle time
was reduced to 6 microseconds; the instruction repertoire was increased from 37 to 49;
4,800 additional charapters of core storage were offered; and paper tape, disk file, and
data communications peripheral facilities were added. The upgraded systems were designated as "level threes", such as the B 263 and B 283 computer systems, and the original 10-microsecond systems were reduced in price and presented to the market as the
economy B 100 Series. Previously-announced peripheral devices, such as the card
reader, MICR sorter-reader, and line printer, were offered in new models with lower
speeds and prices to meet the needs of the low-priced B 100 Series market.
The next major announcement by Burroughs occurred in May 1964, when the B 370 System
for banking applications was released. The B 370 System included a 16-pocket MICR
Sorter-Reader and up to 3 high-speed multiple tape listers. The first stirrings of a
revamped marketing policy were perceptible when the B 370 central processor was offered
with modular control and instruction features; the power and flexibility of the central processor could be tailored in price and rerformance to individual customer requirements.
In February 1965, more peripheral devices were announced - high-speed models such
as a 1,400-card-per-minute reader and aI, 040-line-per-minute printer. Concurrently,
further design improvements were incorporated into the B 200 "level three" central processor, and the B 300 Series was officially born. Emphasizing modularity, the B 300
Series was publicized to include under one title all possible system configurations, including the archetype B 370 system. The capability to add 9; 600 more characters of
core storage, for a Series maximum of 19,200 characters, became possible, and several
new and powerful instruction options were unveiled. ' The memory cycle time of 6 microseconds, however, was not further improved in the new processor.
Thus, today's B 100/200/300 Series offers a wide range of peripheral devices that can
be connected, with few restrictions, to two basic central processors with cycle times
of 10 or 6 microseconds and with core storage capacities of 4,800, 9,600, or 19,200
characters. Monthly rental rates can vary from $2,500 for a B 100 Series card system
to $20,000 for a B 300 Series system with extensive random access disk file and data
communications capabilities. A wide variety of proven software is available to facilitate
the programming of business applications. (The limited core storage and lack of floatingpoint arithmetic make the B 100/200/300 Series systems unsuitable for most scientific
applications. )
In this Introduction, several significant topics are discussed, as listed below. The true
scope of the B 100/200/300 Series can be best understood if each area of discussion is
read. However, the topics that follow can be read separately if desired.
,1
Summary
.2
Central Processor
•3
Peripheral Units
.4
Software
.5
Compatibility with Competitive Equipment
.6
Compatibility within the B 100/200/300 Series
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
201:011. 200
•2
CENTRAL PROCESSORS
The B 100/200/300 Series offers two basic central processors, with memory cycle times
of 10 and 6 microseconds. All B 100 central processors have the slower cycle time, and
all B 300's have the faster time. The B 200 central processor can be ordered with either
cycle time. B 100 Series core storage capacity is limited to 4,800 characters, but the
capacity of the 6-microsecond B 200/300 processors can be increased to 9,600 or 19,200
characters.
Each B 100/200/300 Series central processor is a character-oriented unit containing
core storage facilities, an arithmetic and control unit, two input buffers, one output
buffer, and an integrated console. Each instruction has a fixed length of 12 characters
and is divided into an operation code, two variant characters, and three 3-character
addresses. Operand lengths can vary from 1 to 12 characters and are specified in the
individual instructions; no "word marks" are required in the data fields. Instructions
in typical routines are executed at the rate of about 1,800 per second in the B 200/300
6-microsecond central processor.
The instruction list includes a full complement of decimal arithmetic and comparison
operations as well as automatic editmg facilities. Multiply and divide instructions are
standard. There are no index registers and no indirect addressing facilities, but all
B 200/300 central processors include an address modification instruction to increment
individual operand addresses. Among the instructions recently added to the Series with
the advent of the B 300 central processor are Transfer and Translate, Unit Interrogate,
Transfer and Branch, Data Compress and Expand, and Binary Card Read and Punch.
All B 100/200/300 Series input-output operations are buffered except those involving
magnetic tape, the ledger-card processor, and the disk file. Instruction execution by
the central processor is inhibited for the duration of the latter three types of operations, with the exception of magnetic tape rewinding. Card reading and punching, paper
tape reading and punching, printing, MICR sorter-reader input, and data communications
operations can proceed in parallel with each other and with internal processing.
Computer system designations within the B 100 and B 200 Series are determined by the
class of input-output controllers that must be added to the central processor in order
to satisfy configuration requirements. For example, punched card configurations without
magnetic tape or MICR facilities utilize B 160, B 260, or B 263 systems; MICR/magnetic
tape operations demand B 170, B 270, or B 273 systems; and if magnetic tape is desired
without MICR capabilities, then a B 180, B 280, or B 283 system is required. The MICR
and ledger-card processing Visible Record Computer (VRC) is controlled by a B 250 or
B 251 central processor.
The B 300 central processor is a single model designed to function with any available
peripheral unit, provided that the appropriate, separately-priced input-output control
module is added either at the time of manufacture or in the field .
.3
PERIPHERAL UNITS
The principal peripheral units available with the B 100/200/300 Series are listed in
Table I along with their chief characteristics. A complete list of peripheral devices,
indicating model numbers and performance data, is provided in the Price Data section
of this report, page 201:221.101. The configuration possibilities for the B 100 Series
are limited to one card reader, one card punch, one MICR sorter-reader, one line
printer or multiple tape lister, and up tofour magnetic tape units. The! B 250/251 central processors are the only ones capable of controlling the B 401 Ledger Processor.
The B 200 Series 10-microsecond central processor permits the connection of two card
readers or one card reader with one sorter-reader, one card punch, two line printers
or multiple tape listers, and up to six magnetic tape units. TheB 200 Series 6-microsecond
central processor offers the additional capability of controlling one 'paper tape reader and
punch, up to 50 Disk File storage modules,and up to 15 data communications terminal
units. The still more comprehensive B 300 Series central processor can control all
these peripheral devices, plus an additional 6-tape multiple tape lister.
Burroughs card readers offer speeds between 200 and 1,400 cards per minute. The line
printers can operate at peak speeds ranging from 475 to 1,040 lines per minute. Top
printing speed for the multiple tape listers is 1, 600 numeric lines per minute on each
of up to three listing tapes.
(Contd.)
6/65
201:011.300
INTRODUCTION
TABLE I: PRINCIPAL B 100/200/300 SERIES PERIPHERAL UNITS
Peripheral Type
Model
No.
Punched Card
Equipment
B
B
B
B
B
B
122
123
124
129
303
304
Name
Card
Card
Card
Card
Card
Reader
Reader
Reader
Reader
Punch
.Characteristics
Reads 200 cpm.
Reads 475 cpm.
Reads 800 cpm.
Reads 1,400 cpm.
Punches 100 cpm.
Card Punch
Punches 300 cpm; has
Punched Paper Tape B 141
Equipment
Paper Tape
"Reader
B 341
Paper Tape
Punch
Reads 5, 6, 7. or 8
level tape at 500 or
1. 000 ch~r/sec.
Punches 5, "S, 7, or
8 level tape at 100
char/sec.
B 320
Line Printer
Line Printer
Line Prinh.~r
Multiple Tape
Lister
Multiple Tape
Lister
Prints
Prints
Prints
Prints
B 107
Sorter~Readcr
Reads 1,200 documents/
B 116
Sorter-Reader
min; sorts to 13 pockets.
Reads 1,560 documentsl
min: sorts to 16 pockets.
Magnetic Tape Units B 421
B 422
Magnetic Tape
Unit
Magnetic Tape
B 423
Magnetic Tape
B 424
Magnetic Tape
Unit
Magnetic Tape
Unit
Transfers Data at66KC.
B 450
Disk File Basic
B 475
Disk File 8tor-
Controls 9.6 to 4BO
million characters.
Stores 9.6 million
characters: 20 msec
average access time •
Stacker Select option.
Printers
B 321
B 329
B 326
B 332
MICR Equipment
Unit
475 lpm.
700 Ipm.
1,040 lpm.
1,200 numeric
lpm.
Prints 1,"600 nwncric
Ipm.
Transfers data at IB or
50KC.
Transfers data at 24 or
66KC.
Transfers Data at24KC.
Unit
B 425
Random Access
Storage
Control
age Module
.3
Transfers data at 18,
50. or 72KC.
PERIPHERAL UNITS (Contd. )
The Burroughs magnetic tape units provide a range of transfer rates from 18,000 to
72,000 characters per second and packing densities of 200, 556, and 800 rows per inch.
Data is recorded. on O. 5-inch, 7 -track magnetic tape, providing compatibility with the
tape units used. in IBM 1400 and 7000 Series systems. All magnetic tape operations
(except rewinding) require the use of the central processor throughout the entire operation, so there is no read/compute. write/compute, or read/write simultaneity.
The Burroughs Disk File System is a modular storage system that combines high on-line
storage capacity (up to 480 million characters) with rapid random access (20 milliseconds
average). The rapid accessing is made possible by the use of a fixed read-write head
serving each data track, which completely eliminates head-positioning delays and provides relatively high reliability. Peak data transfer rate is 100,000 characters per
second. Prices· are competitive with those of other currently-available mass storage
systems whose averltge access times are 5 to 10 times as high.
An array of data communications devices can be attached to any B 200/300 Series central
processor. Up to four such processors can share the same communications network,
which can consist of up to fifteen terminal units of varying capacities. The B 481 Teletype Terminal Unit provides buffered interfacing for up to 399 remote teletype stations,
the B 483 Typewriter Terminal Unit can control up to 8 typewriter inquiry stations, and
the B 484 Terminal Unit regulates the use of up to 8 stations of the Dial TWX network.
Burroughs has recently alUlOunced another terminal unit, the B 486 Central Terminal,
to channel transmissions between. the central processor and up to 96 remote Teller
Consoles in its On-Line Banking System. All of the terminal units are buffered. and
can Simultaneously accept inquiries from as many remote devices as their individual
buffer sizes will accommodate. Buffer sizes are specified at the time of manufacture.
An operating system to control the operations of a data communications network has
been announced, with delivery expected in June, 1965.
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201:011;400
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
.4
SOFTWARE
A wide variety of proven software is available for the B 100/200/300 Series. Most of
the existing software is designed to be used with 4,800 characters of central processor
core storage. As a result of this severe storage limitation, the's.oftware is characteristically simple and straightforward, and makes extensive use of multiple passes and
phases.
The most important programs provided include a basic and an advanced symbolic assembler, a Compact COBOL compiler, tape and Disk File sorts, and report generators. A
translator program is also provided to convert IBM 1401 SPS source-language programs
into Burroughs symbolic assembly-language programs.
Burroughs has announced a full COBOL compiler for B 200/300 Disk File systems, with
delivery expected by July, 1965. A Tape/Disk Operating System is anticipated for delivery in June, 1965.
Programs currently supplied by Burroughs include:
•
Compact COBOL Compiler: Provides that group of language facilities that
comprise the Compact COBOL subset of COBOL-61; designed for use with
4 magnetic tape units and 4,800 characters of core storage.
•
Basic Assembler: A straightforward card or tape assembly program that
provides one-for-one conversions from source code to machine language.
There are no provisions for use of a program library, and only two macro
instructions are permitted. The coding form makes use of coding-form
page and line numbers for symbolic references. All elements of every
instruction must be specified in every statement.
•
Advanced Assembler I: An improved assembly program designed for use'
on B 200/300 Series magnetic tape systems. A system library can be
utilized to call utility routines, diagnostics, error routines, and other
subroutines that the user inserts him selL Seven macro instructions are
provided, including tape and disk instructions that call forth and set linkages
to their required error routines. Symbolic names and reusable program
points can reference both data and instructions. Operand sizes, once
described in the Data Division, need not be specified again in individual
instructions.
•
Sort Generator I: Generates magnetic tape sort programs within five miIiutes.
Sort programs can be generated that utilize from 3 to 6 tape units. The object sort program operates within 4,800 characters of core storage.
•
Generalized Three-Tape Sort: A multi-phase sort program modified according
to the user's parameter cards; designed for use with 9,600 characters of core
storage and three magnetic tape units.
•
Disk File Sort Generator III: Generates object sort programs that utilize a
Disk File for intermediate storage. Tag sorting is possible, enabling most
sorts to be completed significantly sooner than would be the case with record,
sorting. Source and result files can be contained on either magnetic tape
or Disk File.
•
Report Generator I: Generates specially-tailored programs that process
input from punched cards, magnetic tape, or Disk File and produc'e, reports
on either punched cards or line printer.
•
Utility Routines: A variety of programs designed to handle data transcription,
diagnostic, and file-maintenance operations using minimal equipment configurations.
"
•
Demand Deposit Accounting Programs: A series of standard financial programs designed for use with the Visible Record Computer (B 250 or B 251)
exclusively.
•
Demand Deposit/Proof and Transit Finaricial Application Package: A series
of programs written for banks that have '4 magnetic tape units and 4,800
characters of core storage. Complete documentation is included with the
package.
(Contd.)
6/65
201:011.401
INTRODUCTION
.4
.5
SOFTWARE (Contd.)
•
Installment Loan Financial Apphcation Package: A group of programs
that process MICR loan payments. All master file information is maintained on magnetic tape. Four tape units and 4,800 characters of core
storage are required.
•
Bond Analysis and Accounting Package: A series of programs that provide bond portfolio management with detailed analyses and evaluations of
current and proposed bonds. A B 200/300 Series central processor is required for use of this program, as well as a card reader and line printer.
•
On-Line Teller System: A thoroughly documented systems approach to online banking operations is provided; a complete operating system is not yet
available.
•
Flow Chart Generator: A program that generates detailed logic charts
from Basic or Advanced Assembly Language source programs. The programmers' remarks, as punched into the source card, are printed in
the symbol generated for each source statement. Three magnetic tapes
are required to use the generator, in addition to a B 200/300 6-microsecond
central processor with 4, 800 positions of core storage .
COMPATIBILITY WITH COMPETITIVE EQUIPMENT
Certain hardware options available with the improved B 200 and B 300 central processors
provide some degree of input-output compatibility with other commercially-oriented
computer systems. Binary card reading and punching are available, as well as the
reading and punching of Bull and ICT card codes. Magnetic tapes can be read and
written using any 6-bit binary code. Direct compatibility is possible between the
Burroughs tape units and the IBM 729 and 7330 tape units.
The B 100/200/300 Series instruction code is not directly compatible with that of any
other computer system. Burroughs has developed a program translator to convert
IBM 1401 SPS source code into a source code acceptable to Burroughs assemblers.,
but the SPS Translator is too limited in scope to serve as a really productive tool in
most conversion operations. Hardware dissimilarities that could not be circumvented
within the 4,800 characters used by the SPS Translator program limit the candidates
for effective translation to small and relatively basic IBM 1401 card and tape programs.
Even so, some manual changes will usually be required before the translated program
can be assembled and run .
•6
COMPATIBILITY WITHIN THE B 100/200/300 SERIES
The standard inclusion of many additional instructions in the B 200/300 6-microsecond
central processor has made downward compatibility with the slower B 200 and B 100
Series systems almost impossible unless the use of these additional features is
deliberately restricted. However, upward compatibility throughout the line is completely feasible. The great majority of the available peripheral devices can be used
with any central processor in the Series, although in some cases a special inputoutput control module is a prerequisite.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201 :021.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Data Structure
DATA STRUCTURE
.1
.2
STORAGE LOCATIONS
Name of location
Size
Purpose or use
Character:
Block:
Input buffers:
Output buffer:
6 bits + parity bit
group of characters
80 characters (sorterreader, 84 char)
80 characters
Print buffer:
Lister buffer:
120 characters *
44 characters
alphamerics.
magnetic tape record.
store input for cards, paper
tape, or sorter-reader.
store output for cards or
paper tape.
store output for printer.
store output for lister.
DATA FORMATS
Type of information
Representation
Letter:. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... .
Numeral: . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special symbol: . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operand: . . . • . . . • • . . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . • . .
1 character.
Instruction: . . . .
Block on tape: ..
Arithmetic operand: . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data for mask: .... . . . . . . . . . . .
Edit mask: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ledger stripe: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line of print for Record Processor: . . . . . . . . .
One MICR document: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal block for transfer: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
* 132 characters for
"6/65
, !~,
t '. , •
~
B 325 and B 329 printers.
•!
1 character.
1 character.
1 to 12 characters, as specified in
instruction.
12 char-acters.
any number of characters greater
than 6.
1 to 12 characters.
1 to 12 characters.
1 to 24 characters.
1 to 80 characters.
160 characters.
84 characters in core storage.
1 to 132 characters.
201 :031.00;
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
System Configuration
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The following table shows the number of peripheral devices of each available type that
can be connected to each of the central processor models in the B 100/200/300 Series. The next
six pages show the components and prices of Burroughs systems in representative standard
configurations, arranged in accordance with the specifications on page 4:030.120 of the Users' Guide.
TABLE OF PERMISSIBLE CONFIGURATIONS
CENTRAL PROCESSOR MODEL
PERIPHERAL UNITS
B 160
B 170
1
1
1
1
1
,1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
B 303 Card Punch
B 304 Card Punch
B 341 Paper Tape Punch
B
B
B
B
122
123
124
129
Card
Card
Card
Card
Reader
Reader
Reader
Reader
VRC
B 260
B 270 B 280 B 263
Sorter-Reader
Sorter-Reader
Sorter-Reader
Sorter-Reader
Sorter-Reader
116 Sorter-Reader
102
103
104
106
107
B 273
B283
B 300
0
1
1
1
0
2
2
2
0
2
2
2
0
2
2
2
0
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
2*
2*
2*
2*
It
It
It
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1*
1*
1*
1*
i*
1*
1
1
1
1
1
1
1*
1*
1*
1*
1*
1*
1*
1*
1*
1*
1*
1*
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1*
1*
1*
1*
2
2
0
2
0
2
2
0
2
0
2
2
0
2
0
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
It
It
It
-
B 141 Paper Tape Reader
B
B
B
B
B
B
B 180
Note: Any combination of one
sorter-reader and up to two
paper tape and punched card
readers, to a maximum of
two units, can be connected to
the two input buffers provided.
1
Note: Either the B 303,
B 304, or B 341 punch
unit c an be attached to
the one output buffer
provided.
B
B
B
B
B
320
321
325
328
329
Line Printer
Line Printer
Line Printer
Line Printer
Line Printer
Multiple Tape Lister
Multiple Tape Lister
Multiple Tape Lister
Master Multiple Tape
Lister
B 333 Slave Multiple Tape
Lister
B
B
B
B
322
323
326
332
It
1
1
It
It
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
It
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
1
Note: Printers and Listers,
which contain their own
buffers. cannot operate on-line
in combination with each other.
t Adapter required for use with B 100 Series.
* Appropriate input-output control module required.
(Table continued overleaf)
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc,
6/65
201 :031.002
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
TABLE OF PERMISSmLE CONFIGURATIONS (Contd.)
CENTRAL PROCESSOR MODEL
PERIPHERAL UNITS
B 160
B
B
B
B
B
421
422
423
424
425
Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
B 170
B 180
VRC
B260
B 270- B 280
B 263
B 273
B283
B 300
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
6
0
0
6
0
6
0
0
6*
6*
6*
6*
0
6
6
6
6
0
6
6
6
6
0
6*
6*
6*
6*
6*
B 401 Ledger Processor
and Printer
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
B 495 Supervisory Printer
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1*
1*
1*
1*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
Note: B 421 Tape Units
cannot be used in combination with B 422 or
B 423 tape units. All
other combinations are
permissible.
B 450 Basic Disk File/Data
Communication Control
II 247 Disk File Control
B 451 Disk File Expanded
Control
B 471 Disk File Electronics
Unit
B 475 Disk File Storage
Module
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
10
10
10
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
50
50
50
50
B 248 Data Communication
Control
B 481 Teletype Terminal
B 483 Typewriter Terminal
B 484 Dial TWX Terminal
B 486 Central Terminal
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
15
15
15
0
4
15
15
15
4
15
15
15
0
o·
4
15
15
15
15
0
0
0
Note: All 4 terminal units
contain their own inputoutput buffers; up to 15
terminal units in any combination can be attached to
a B 248 Data Communication
Control.
Central Processor
Ol2tional Features
Sense Switches
Card Reader Early Release
Printer-Lister Selector
Switch
Card Reader Busy Branch
132-Print Position Capability
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
6
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
i#
1
i#
1
i#
1
1#
0
i#
t Adapter required for use with B 100 Series.
Appropriate input-output control module required.
# Standard feature.
*
(Contd.)
6/65
201:031;100
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.1
TYPICAL CARD SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION I
Deviations from Standard Configurations: . . . . . . . . . . . . . no index registers.
card reader is 20% slower.
card punch is 33% faster.
Equipment
Rental
Core Storage: 9,600 char.
$
B 263 Central Processor and
Console
Card Reader:
800 cards/min.
1,600
400
Card Punch:
300 cards/min.
650
Line Printer:
1040 lines/min.
1,325
TOTAL RENTAL:
Note:
550
$4,525
A typical card system that uses slower peripheral devices (200-cpm reader,
100-cpm punch, and 475-lpm printer) and the B 100 Series 10-microsecond
central processor (with only 4,800 positions of core storage) rents for $2,510
per month.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
201:031.200
.2
4-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION II
Deviations from standard Configuration: .•••••..••.•• magnetic tape is 60% faster.
Equipment
Rental
Core Storage: 9,600 char.
$
B 283 Central Processor and
Console (tape and disk file
capabilities are included)
550
1,785
Card Reader:
475 cards/min.
320
Card Punch:
100 cards/min.
450
Line Printer:
475 lines/min.
810
Magnetic Tape Units (4):
24,000 char/sec.
TOTAL RENTAL:
Note:
$5,895
If this same configuration is used with a B 10D Series 10-microsecond central processor
(providing only 4, 800 positions of core storage), the monthly rental is $4,590.
(Contd.)
6/65
201 :031.300
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.3
6-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION III
\
'"
Deviations from Standard Configuration:
. . . . no index registers.
console typewriter input is included.
magnetic tape is up to 67% faster.
Equipment
Rental
Core Storage: 19,200 char.
$
B 283 Central Processor and
Console (tape and disc file
capabilities are included)
1,785
Card Reader:
475 cards/min.
320
Card Punch:
100 cards/min.
450
Line Printer:
475 lines/min.
810
Magnetic Tape Units (6):
18,000 or 50,000 char/sec.
Supervisory Printer
TOTAL RENTAL:
Note:
875
4,200
400
$8,840
A similar configuration connected to the B 300 Series Central Processor and using high-speed peripheral
devices rents for $10,070 per month. This price includes a 1400-cpm card reader, 300-cpm card punch,
1040-lpm line printer, and six 72 KC magnetic tape units with a recording density of 800 bpi.
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201:031.400
.4
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
6-TAPE AUXILIARY STORAGE SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION V
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . . . . • . . . . . magnetic tape is up to 67% faster.
no index registers.
console typewriter input is included.
Equipment
Rental
Disk FUe Storage Unit:
9,600,000 char .
$1,700
. Disk File Storage Module:
9,600,000 char.
990
Disk File Control Unit and
Adapter
730
Core Storage:
19,200 char.
875
B 283 Central Processor and
. Console (tape and disc file
capabUities are included)
1,785
Card Reader:
475 cards/min.
320
Card Punch:
100 cards/min.
450
Line Printer:
475 lines/min.
810
Magnetic Tape Units (6):
18,000 or 50,000 char/sec.
Supervisory Printer
TOTAL RENTAL:
4,200
400
$12,260
(Contd.)
6/65
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.5
201 :031.500
SPECIAL CONFIGURATION FOR UNIT RECORD HANDLING
Core Storage: 4,800 char.
VRC Central Processor and Console
Card Reader: 200 cards/min.
Record Processor
B 102 MICR Sorter-Reader:
1,565 items/min.
TOTAL RENTAL:
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
$4,400 per month
(special VRC
System package).
6/65
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
201 :031.600
.6
SPECIAL CONFIGURATION FOR PROOF-TRANSIT OPERATIONS
Equipment
Rental
Core Storage:
4,800 char.
(included in price of Processor)
B 270 10-microsecond
Central Processor and
Console (tape and MICR
capabilities included).
Card Reader:
200 cards/min.
220
Card Punch:
100 cards/min.
450
Multiple Tape Lister:
1, 565 lines/min.
1,600
Magnetic Tape Units (6):
18,000 or 50,000 char/sec.
4,200
B.103 MICR Sorter-Reader
without endorser:
1, 565 items/min.
2,000
TOTAL RENTAL:
6/65
$ 1,650
$10,l20.
201 :041.1 00
Burroughs B 1001200/300 Series
Internal Storage
Core Storage
INTERNAL STORAGE: CORE STORAGE
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . . . .
Magnetic Core Storage .
Part of B 100/200/300
Series Central Processors.
.12
Basic Use: . . . . . ..
.13
Description
'"
Availability:
immediate for B 100, VRC,
260, 270, 280.
6 months for B 263, 273,
283.
6 to 8 months for B 300.
.15
First Delivery:
.16
Reserved Storage:
September 1961 for B 200
Series.
January 1963 for 9,600
characters of storage.
April 1964 for B 100 Series.
May 1965 for B 300 and
19, 200 characters of
storage.
none.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
. 21
Storage Medium:
magnetic core .
. 23
Storage Phenomenon:
direction of magnetization .
.24
Recording Permanence
working storage.
Magnetic core storage for the B 100/200/300 Series
is available in storage capacities of 4, 800, 9, 600,
and 19, 200 alphameric characters. Each character
position is individually addressable and consists of
seven bits, six for data and one for odd parity.
Every system in the series can ftinction with the
basic 4,800 positions of core storage, but the addition of successive modules of 4,800 and 9,600 characters is possible only in the B 263, B 273, B 283,
and B 300 Systems. Memory cycle time is either
ten microseconds (B 100, VRC, B 260, B 270,
B 280) or six microseconds (B 263, B 273, B 283,
B 300), providing potential transfer rates of
100,000 or 166,000 characters per second, respectively.
,"
.14
Storage positions are referenced by three-character
addresses. The most significant character designates one of 40 sections within a 4, 800-character
block of storage, the mid-order character of the
address specifies one of ten fields within the section, and the least significant character indicates
the character position (1-12) within the data field.
Zone bits over the ten's position of the address
reference one of the four possible 4, 800-character
logical blocks.
.241 Data erasable by
program: • . . • . .. yes.
.242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . . . .• no.
. 243 Data volatile: ..•.. no .
.244 Data permanent: .•. no.
. 245 Storage changeable: . -no .
_28
Access Technique: ..
.29
Potential Transfer Rates
coincident current.
.292 Peak Data Rates Unit of data: _ . . . . character.
Cycle rate:
see Table I.
Conversion factor: • 7 bits per character.
Data rate: . . . . . . . see Table I.
TABLE I: B 100/200/300 SERIES CORE STORAGE CHARACTERISTICS
Processor Model
Potential cycle and data rate,
char/sec
Available capacities, characters'
Uniform access and cycle time,
microseconds
Effective transfer rate,
char/sec
B 100, VRC, B 260,
B 270, B 280
100,000
4,800
B 263, B 273,
B 283, B 300
166,000
4,800,9,600
19,200
10
48,000
6
80,000
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201:041.300
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
.3
DATA CAPACITY
. 31
Module and System Sizes
.6
Minimum Storage
Characters:
Instructions:
Modules:
.32
Maximum Storage
4,800
400
1
Rules for Combining
Modules: .•..••
19,200
1,600
3
see Table I for available
capacities.
.4
CONTROLLER: .
.5
ACCESS TIMING
.53
Access Time Parameters and Variations
6/65
see Table I.
none .
.7
STORAGE PERFORMANCE
.72.
Transfer Load Size:.
1 to 132 characters.
.73
Effective Transfer
Rate: • . . . . . • • •.
see Table I.
.8
ERROR, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
Interlock
no separate controller.
.531 For data unit of 1
character: ..••..
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . -. . . ..
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
Invalid character:
Recovery of data:
none.
none.
send parity bit.
all valid.
parity check
Recording of data: record parity bit.
Action
stop computer;
alarm.
201:042.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Internal Storage
Disk File System
INTERNAL STORAGE: DISK FILE SYSTEM
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: ..
. 12
Basic Use: ..
. 13
Description
age capacity per system, therefore, is 480 million
alphameric characters. Multiple processors and/
or more than five B 475 storage modules are controlled by the B 451 Disk File Expanded Control
Unit. Table I shows the potential Disk File System
sizes with the corresponding configuration demands.
. B 450 Disk File and Data
Communication Basic
Control.
B 247 Disk File Control
Unit.
B 451 Disk File Expanded
Control Unit.
B 471 Disk File Electronics
Unit.
B 475 Disk File Storage
Module.
The following is a breakdown of the storage capacities of the Disk System components:
. . auxiliary storage.
The Burroughs Disk File System is a largecapacity random access storage facility available
forusewith the B 263, B 273, B 283, andB 300 systems. The Disk File features a fast average ac"':
cess time of 20 milliseconds, high-density recording, high reliability through elimination of movable
access arms, and capabilities for shared usage by
multiple processors.
The B 450 Disk File and Data Communications
Basic Control serves as an interface between up to
two processors and the Disk File System (a maximum of four processors can access the same
mass storage). Each B 471 Disk File Electronics
Unit can have 1 to 5 four-disk modules, each containing 9.6 million* character locations. From 1
to 10 Electronics Units can be connected to the
B 247 Disk File Control Unit. The maximum stor-
Segment - can be 96, 240, or 480 characters
in size, as specified during manufacture.
•
Data track - can store 24,000 alphameric
characters (250, 100, or 50 segments, depending on segment size) .
•
Disc face - has 50 data tracks (2 faces per
disc).
•
Module - has 4 vertically-mounted diSCS, on
one horizontal shaft.
•
Electronics Unit - can contain 1 to 5 modules.
•
Control Unit - can control 1 to 10 Electronics Units.
•
Disc System - can have one control unit per
processor.
Each physical track has a fixed read-write head.
Since.positioning time is eliminated, access time
is a function of the rotation time. The time for
the rotation of a disc record is 40 milliseconds,
so access to each record will take from 0 to 40
milliseconds, or an average of 20 milliseconds.
One case where the average access time is greater
than 20 milliseconds is updating a record. This
takes two references (to read the original record
and then rewrite the updated version), but the
*Module capacity can be increased to 14.4 million packed
decimal digits through use of the B 300 optional Data
Compress instruction (see Instruction List, Section
201:121).
i
•
TABLE I: CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS FOR DISK FILE SYSTEMS
\
\
B 475 Disk File
Storage Modules
(9.6 million char/u:odule)
Number of Processors
1 Processor
2 Processors
3 Processors
4 Processors
lA, 2B, lC, lD
2A, 3B, lC, lD
2A, 4B, lC, lD
1 to 5 Modules
lA, lB, lD
6 to 25 Modules
lA, lB, lC, 2-5D
lA, 2B, lC, 2-5D
2A, 3B, lC, 2-5D
2A, 4B, lC, 2-5D
26 to 50 Modules
lA, lB, 2C, 6-l0D
lA, 2B, 2C, 6-l0D
2A, 3B, 2C, 6-l0D
2A, 4B, 2C, 6-l0D
Key to TABLE I:
(
"----
A
B
C
D
-
B
B
B
B
450
247
451
471
Disk
Disk
Disk
Disk
File
File
File
File
and Data Communications Basic Control.
Control Unit.
Expanded Control Unit.
Electronics Unit.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
201:042.130
.13
•
Description (Contd.)
second reference is not a random reference and
will often cost almost a full revolution (40 milliseconds). Thus, the average reference time for
file maintenance applications will be about 30 milliseconds.
Average data transfer rate is 100,000 characters
per second. Data transfers are executed as eightcharacter words which are assembled in the controller. Up to 10 segments can be transferred by
one instruction (a maximum of 4,800 characters).
The method of addressing the Disk File Control
Unit is by a 7-character address. One character
designates the storage unit and six characters
designate the segment address. Segment addresses
are assigned starting at some point on the initial
disc surface of the first module and continuing in
direct sequential order. There is a positive check
on the address itself. No timing synchronization
between different modules is pOSSible; this prevents
attempts to optimize programming by minimizing
disc latency.
The heads are embedded in a soft material
so that the disc will not be damaged if contact is made with the disc.
. 15
First Delivery: .
third quarter of 1964.
.16
Reserved Storage:
none (but write lockout)
switches are provided for
each individual disc).
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Storage Medium:
.22
Physical Dimensions
.222 Disc
26.5 inches.
Diameter:
Thickness or length: 0.125 inch.
4 (shaft is horizontal).
Number on shaft:
. 23
Storage Phenomenon: . direction of magnetization.
.24
Recording Permanence
A "multiple character check" is produced in the
control circuitry and recorded with each 48-bit
data word. These codes are always checked automatically upon reading data from the disc; they can
also be examined by a programmed read-back
operation after recording. The checking procedure
does not compare the original data with the recorded data but merely regenerates and examines the
check code associated with the recorded data.
.241 Data erasable by
instructions:
.242 Data regenerated constantly:
. 243 Data volatile: .
.244 Data permanent:
.245 Storage changeable:
Burroughs Corporation does not appear to rely
heavily on this programmed read-after-write check,
pointing out the reliability of head-per-track switching. They also point out the cost in time of such
checking (it can reduce effective speeds by twothirds), and instead recommend a simultaneous tape
write-out of the data.
Words: .' ..
Characters:
Digits:
Instructions:
Segments: . .
Disk File programming is facilitated by a compact
and comprehensive set of three basic instructions:
Read, Record, and Interrogate. The Interrogate
instruction checks the conditions of controller
readiness, data transfer error, and Disk File address validity.
When multiple processors access the same Electronics Unit, one processor is serviced while the
others wait. Consecutive references to the same
record are possible and must be regulated according to individual installation requirements.
A number of physical precautions are taken to
safeguard the information on the discs.
.25
· 26
•
The head design is such that if the heads
approach the disc too closely, a fail-safe
technique moves the heads away and switches
the unit off.
Each individual disc has its own manual lockout circuits which can prevent it from being
written upon, while allowing reference to be
made to its contents.
yes.
no.
no.
no.
no.
Data Volume 2er Band of 1 Track
variable.
24,000.
24,000.
2,000.
50, 100, or 250.
Bands 2er Physical
Unit: . . . . . . . .
50 per disc surface.
.27
Interleaving Levels:
1.
.28
Access Techniques
.281 Recording method: .
every track on each disc
surface has an individual
fixed head.
.283 Type of accessDescription of stage: wait for selected segment
for reading or recording.
Possible start ing
stage: . . . . . .
uniform.
· 29
•
multiple magnetic discs.
Potential Transfer Rates
· 291 Peak bit ratesCycling rates:
Bit rate per track:
· 292 Peak data rates Unit of data: '"
Conversion factor:
Gain factor: .
Data rate: . . . . .
1,500 rpm.
700,000 bits/sec/track.
character.
7 bits per character.
1 track/band.
100,000 char/sec.
(Contd.)
6/65
201:042.300
INTERNAL STORAGE: DISK FILE SYSTEM
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and System Sizes
(See Table Below.)
.32
Rules for Combining
Modules: . . . . . .
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:
.42
Connection to System
.53
Simultaneous
Operations:
only one disc file operation
at a time is permitted.
Access Time Parameters and Variations
.532 Variation in access time-
4, one per processor.
none.
.6
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller:
.432 Restrictions: . . .
Variation
Positioning:
Latency (rotational
delay):
Total:
B 247 Disk File Control
Unit.
.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:
· 44
. 52
Stage
.4
.43
1 to 10 Disk File Electronics Units may be connected to the control unit;
one 4-disc module is included in each Electron
ics Unit; up to 4 additional modules can be
connected to an Electronics Unit.
. 512 Stack Movement:. . . none.
.513 Stacks that can access
any particular
location:
1.
.514 Accessible locations:
24, POO chars. (50, 100, or
By single stack:
250 segments).
By all stacks:
9,600,000 per module.
0
'0.
o to 40msec.
o to 40msec.
20 msec.
20 msec.
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: .
none .
.7
AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE
. 72
Transfer Load Size
1 to 10 Electronics Units.
refer to Table 1.
With core storage:
1 to 10 segments; number
of segments is selected
by program.
Data Transfer Control
. 73
· 441 Size of load: . . . . . 1 to 10 segments (each can
be 96, 240, or 480 characters in size).
· 442 Input-output area:
core storage.
.443 Input-output area
,
acc,ess:
each character.
· 444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . . .
none.
. 445 Synchronization: . .
programmed .
.446 Synchronizing aids:
test busy; branch on not
ready.
. 447 Table control: . . .
none.
.448 Testable conditions:
Busy Controller,
Recording Lock,
Recovery Error,
Transfer Error.
·5
ACCESS TIMING
· 51
Arrangement of Heads
· 511 Number of stacks: . . one read-write head per
track.
.31
Effective Transfer Rate
With core storage:
.8
Average
62,000 char/sec.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Invalid
address:
Receipt of
data:
check
parity check
on addresses
error indicator set,
operation terminated
indicator set, operation terminated, no
data transferred .
Recording of
data:
optional programmed
readback
Recovery of .error check
data:
code
Dispatch of
parity bit indata:
cluded. Not
ready check
Timing
interrogate
conflicts:
command
Reference to check
locked area:
set indicator.
set indicator.
branch.
branch on busy, error,
or write interlock.
indicator set, operation terminated.
Module and System Sizes
Minimum
Storage
Maximum
Storage
B 475 Disk
File Storage
Module
Identity:
B 471 Disk
B 450 Disk
File Electronics File SubUnit
System.
Disks:
Characters:
Instructions:
0
4
20
200
0
0
9,600,000
800,000
48,000,000
4,000,000
480,000,000.
40,000,000.
Modules:
0
1
5 (max.)
50 (max.)
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation. and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201 :051.1 00
Burroughs B 1001200/300 Series
Central Processor
10.Microsecond Cycle Time
CENTRAL PROCESSOR: B 1001200 (lO.MICROSECOND CYCLE TIME)
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
The B 100 Series Processor, economy version of
the original B 200 Line, restricts the control of
input-output devices to one card reader (minus a
busy-test option), one printer (700 lines per minute
maximum), and six B 423 Magnetic Tape Units
(24,000 characters per second data transfer rate).
Standard card punches and MICR sorter-readers
can also be connected according to the configuration
rules on page 201:031. 001.
.•.....•• Central Processor (identified
by system): B 260, B 270,
B 280, VRC, B 160, B170,
and B 180.
The B 200 Series Central Processor, first produced
by Burroughs in 1961, still forms the basis of the
entire B 100/200/300 Series of computer systems.
It functions in its original form in the VRC, the
entire B 100 Series, and the B 260, B 270, and
B 280 systems. The improved and enlarged version, currently available in the B263, B 273, B 283,
and B 300 systems, is treated on page 201:052.100.
The Basic B 200 Series Processor is a threeaddress, character-oriented processor containing
core storage facilities, an arithmetic and control
unit, input-output buffer areas, and an integrated
console. The arithmetic and logical capabilities
of the various B 200 Series Processors are essentially the same; they differ, however, in the configurations of peripheral equipment and optional
features that can be attached, as shown in the System Configuration chart (page 201:031. 001). The
B 100 Processor is offered with somewhat less
peripheral flexibility than the B 200, but at a substantially reduced price (see the Price Data
section, page 201:221.101).
Core storage capacity in the original line of B 200
Processors is fixed at 4, 800 alphameric characters.
Each character position is individually addressable.
The core storage cycle time is 10 microseconds
both for instructions and data. Instructions have
a fixed length of 12 characters each, whereas data
fields can be of variable length.
Due largely to the three-address command structure, the instruction repertoire contains good
decimal arithmetic, comparison, and editing
capabilities. The lengths of the operands can vary
from 1 to 12 characters and are specified in the
instructions themselves. An address modification
instruction, available in all systems except the
B 100 Series and the VRC, can increment one 3character address. Index registers and indirect
addressing, however, are not provided in any of
the B 100/200/300 Series processors. Another
shortcoming, with regard to real-time operations,
is the lack of automatic interrupt facilities.
However, the capability to test all peripherals for
busy status is optional with the B 300 Processor;
see Paragraph 201:052.12.
©
.13
Availability: . • . . . . . immediate.
. 14
First Delivery: .••.. July, 1962 .
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
.21
Operations and Operands
Provision
Radix
Size
automatic
decimal
1 to 12
digits.
none.
automatic
decimal
1 to 12
digits.
Divide No remainder: none.
Remainder:
automatic
decimal
1 to 12
digits.
Oj2eration
and Variation
.211 Fixed point Add-subtract:
Multiply Short:
Long:
.212 Floating point: ...•. none.
. 213 Boolean: . . . . . . . . . . none.
. 214 ComparisonProvision
Size
Numbers:
automatic
(sign ignored)
1 to 12
digits.
Absolute:
automatic
Letters:
automatic
Mixed:
automatic
Zone:
automatic
1 to 12
digits.
1 to 12
char.
1 to 12
char.
1 to 12
char.
Collating
sequence:
specials, A tol,specials, J to R,
specials, StoZ, Ot09.
.215 Code translation: . . . . none.
.216 Radix conversion: ... none.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
201:051.217
• 217 Edit format
Provision
Alter size:
Suppress zero:
Round off:
Insert point:
Insert commas:
Insert dollar:
Insert spaces:
Insert special
char.:
,
Size
none.
automatic use b char
none.
automatic.
automatic.
automatic.
none
only replace
leading
zeros
!tUtomatic
Replace by
special char:
Comment
automatic
1 char in
LSD of
mask inserted
if sign of
field is
negative
12 char
field
max.
>
24 char
mask
max.
leading zeros
replaced by
any desired
char placed
in mask
(except
• 234 Basic address structure: ••••.••..•. 3 + O•
• 235 Literals: ••.•••..• none.
.236 Directly addressed
operands: •••.•..• 1 to 12 characters; from
anywhere in core storage.
.237 Address indexing: .•• none.
.238 Indirect addressing: •• none.
.239 Stepping: •.•••••.. none.
.24
Special Processor
Storage: ••••••••• 2 80-character input buffer
areas.
1 80-character output buffer
area.
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
.31
Instruction Sequencing: sequential.
• 32
Look-Ahead: ••.•••• none •
• 33
Interruption: .•••.•• none •
. 34
Multiprogramming: •• none •
• 35
Multi-sequencing: .•• none •
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
.41
Instruction Times in Microseconds
$ .• )
Float dollar:
Protection:
none.
automatic
1 of the replacement
possibilities.
~
Notes: 1. Special character insertion ends at
decimal point.
2. Character in mask between point. and
LSD may be used for addressable
storage.
.218 Tilble lookup: •••••. none.
• 22
Special Cases of Operands
• 221 Negative numbers: ••• absolute value with sign in
zone bits.
.222 Zero: ••• , ••..••.• positive except in some
multiply or divide results;
treated as equal in branch
tests .
• 223 Operand size
determination: •••.. counter, set by instructions.
• 23
.231 Instruction structure: . 12 characters.
• 232 Instruction layout:
0
Size (char): 1
M
N
AAA
BBB
1
1
3
3
CCC
3
.233 Instruction parts Name
.418 Shift: .• , •••.••••• none.
.42
Instruction Formats
Part:
.411 Fixed point Add-subtract: .•••• 40 + 130 D, where D is
operand length in digits.
Multiply: .••••••• 30 + 60D + 210D2.
Divide: . . . . . . . . • • 600D2 - 110D - 470.
.413 Additional allowance
for re-complementing: •••.••...•.• 10D
.414 ControlCompare: •••••••• 40 + 100C, where C is
operand length in characterB.
Branch (on sign): ••• 70 •
.416 Edit: .•••••••.••• 120 + 120M + 80N;
where M = operand
length and N = number
of inserts ($), (.), (,).
.417 Convert: ••••••••• none.
Purpose
0: . • • • . • . . • . . . operation code.
M, N: .•••••..• field length, variations,
or device control.
AAA, BBB, CCC: . operand address or jump
location.
Processor Performance in Microseconds
.421 For random addresses
c = a + b: .••.••••
b = a + b: .•••••••
Sum N items: ..•••
c = ab: .•••••••••
c = alb: .••••••••
.422 For arrays of data ci = ai + bj=. , .••..•
bj = ai -: bj: •.•••...
Sum N Items: ..• , ••
c = c + aib j : " •••••
,423 Branch based on comparison Numeric data: ••.•
Alphabetic data: ..•
40 + 130D .
40 + 130D.
(40 + 130D) N.
70 + 190D + 210D2.
600D2 + 20D - 470.
750 + 260D.
620 + 260D.
(490 + 260D)N.
650 + 320D + 210D2.
720 + 200C.
720 + 200C.
(Contd.)
6/65
CENTRAL PROCESSOR: B 100/200 (lO-MICROSECOND CYCLE TIME)
.424 SwitchingUnchecked: .•.•••• 410.
Checked: .•••.••• 760.
List search: .•••.• 450 + lOON.
.425 Format control, per
character Unpack: .••••••• 31.
Compose: .•••••. 65.
.426 Table look-up, per
comparison For a match: .•... 240 + 100C.
For least or
greatest: . . . . . . 520 + 100C.
For interpolation
point: . . . . . . . . . 240 + 100C.
.427 Bit indicators -Set bit in separate
location: . . . . . . . . 120.
Test bit in separate
location: . . . . . . . . 140.
Test AND for B bits: 170B.
Test OR for B bits: . 30 + 134B •
• 428 Moving: . . • . . . . . . . 40 + 80C for VRC system.
100 + 20C for B 260, B 270,
and B 280 systems.
©
.5
201:051.424
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Overflow:
Zero divisor:
none.
check
Invalid data:
Invalid operation:
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
check
none.
none.
none.
parity
check
none.
Dispatch of data:
Divisor and dividend
same length:
check
Improper significant
digits in dividing:
check
Processing of data:
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
parity
check
Action
quotient set to
zero.
haIt, alarm.
haIt, alarm.
haIt. alarm
quotient set to
zero.
halt. alarm.
6/65
201 :052.1 00
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Central Processor
6-Microsecond Cycle Time
CENTRAL PROCESSOR: B 200/300 (6-MICROSECOND CYCLE TIME)
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
•
Data Compress: Packs three numeric digits
into the space normally occupied by two alphameric characters. The Data Expand instruction (included in this Command Module) performs the converse function. Through the use
of the Data Compress command, the storage
capacity of both magnetic tape reels and Disk
Files can be increased by up to 50%, assuming
all-numeric data.
•. Binary Card Read: Reads the contents of a
punched card and stores in memory the 160character binary card image. This instruction
permits reading any card code (including pure
column binary), with the necessary translation
being performed by the stored program.
• Binary Card Punch: Punches binary card images
from core storage. (Neither Binary Read nor
Binary Punch are buffered operations.)
. . . . . . . . . Central Processor (identified
by system): B 263, B 273, .
B 283, and B 300.
Description
The B 200/300 Central Processor offers higher
internal speed and more core storage than the
original B 200 Processor described on page
201:051.100. The upgraded model, featuring a
core storage cycle time of six microseconds, is
used in the B 263, B 273, B 283, and B 300 Series
systems. Core storage capacity can be increased
from the series base of 4,800 3J.phameric characters
to either 9,600 or 19,200 characters.
The internal design and functional capabilities of the
B 100/200 Central Processor are repeated in the
more comprehensive B 200/300 Series Processor.
Provisions have been added to control a random
access Disk File System, data communications
network paper tape reader and punch, supervisory
printer, high-speed card reader (1,400 cpm), and
high-speed magnetic tape units (66 KC). Features
optionally available for this line of processors
. include a combination Transfer and Branch instruction, selective stacking with the B 304 Card Punch,
132-print-position control with the B 325 and B 329
Line Printers, and a Card Reader Early Release
device. The latter option frees the Processor
immediately after the 80th card column is read
into the buffer area.
Incr-easing the level of B 200 Central Processor
design one step further, Burroughs has developed
the B 300 Processor. This is a single processor
model designed to serve the entire B 300 Series.
The unique concept introduced in the B 300 Processor is the use of optional Input-Output Control
Modules for each peripheral unit connected (card
reader, punch, and line printer are the only
exceptions). In effect, every B 300 Central Processor will be custom-designed according to
individual installation requirements.
Similarly, optional Processor Command Modules
can be added whenever certain instructions are
desired. The Command Modules, available for
the B 300 Processor exclusively, can control the
following instructions:
•
•
Transfer and Translate: Permits translation of
any 6-bit code to any other code of up to 12
bits. This is accomplished through the use of
translation tables, which utilize from 92 to
184 characters of core storage.
Unit Interrogate: Tests the status of all peripheral devices and initiates further program
control upon detection of not-readiness, busy
status, or error condition. The line printers
are regarded as not busy when spacing or
skipping; hence, the processor must wait for
paper motion to cease.
•
B300 Lister Command: Controls the B 322 and
B 333 Multiple Tape Listers; provides the
ability to select up to 18 listing tapes and to
print simultaneously on any 3 selected tapes.
Page 201:082.100 describes the operation of
the various Burroughs Multiple Tape Listers .
• Six externally-controlled Sense Switches are
also available with the B 300 Central Processor.
The Sense Switches can be tested by means of
the Unit Interrogate Command.
Two improved peripheral devices can operate only
with the B 300 Central·Processor: the B 332/333
Multiple Tape Lister (1,565 lines per minute),
and the B 425 Magnetic Tape Unit. The B 425
provides data transfer rates of 18,000, 50,000 or
72,000 characters per second.
All B 300 optional features, including memory
modules, Input-Output Control Modules, and
Processor Command Modules, can be installed
in the field. As a result, the expansion of B 300
Series systems can be accomplished easily as
installation demands increase.
.14
First Delivery:
. 13
Availability: . • . . . . . 6 to 8 months for B 300 •
•
0
January 1964 for B 263, 273,
283.
May 1965 for B 300.
PROCESSING FACILITIES
Operations and Operands
Operation
Provision
and Variation
.211 Fixed point Add- subtract: automatic
.2
.21
Radix
Size
decimal
1 to 12
digits.
none.
automatic
decimal
Divide No remainder: none.
Remainder:
automatic
1 to 12
digits.
decimal
1 to 12
digits.
Multiply Short:
Long:
(Contd.)
6/65
CENTRAL PROCESSOR: B 200/300 (6.MICROSECOND CYCLE TIME)
.212 Floating point: .• '•... none.
. 213 Boolean: .•...•.•.. none.
.214 ComparisonProvision
Numbers:
automatic
(sign ignored) .
Absolute:
automatic
Letters:
automatic
Mixed:
automatic
Zone:
automatic
Bit:
Collating
sequence:
automatic
Size
1 to 12
digits.
1 to 12
digits.
1 to 12
char.
1 to 12
char.
1 to 12
char.
1 bit.
specials, A to I, specials, J to
R, specials, S to Z. 0 to 9.
.215 Code translation (B 300 only) Provision: .••.... automatic (using optional
command and code table
constructed by
programmer) •
From: . . . . . . . . • . any 6-bit code.
To: . • . • . . . . . . • . any code from 6 to 12 bits.
Size: . . . • . . • . . . . 1 to 120 characters.
.216 Radix conversion: .•. none .
. 217 Edit format Provision
Alter size:
Suppress zero:
Round off:
Insert point:
Insert commas:
Insert dollar:
Insert spaces:
Insert special
char:
none.
automatic
none.
automatic.
automatic.,
automatic.
automatic
Note: 1. Special character insertion ends at
decimal point .
2. Character is mask between point and
LSD may be used for addressable
storage.
• 218 Table lookup: . . . . . . none .
.22
. 23
Float dollar:
Protection:
Part:
0
1\1:
N
Size (char):
1
1
1
. 233 Instruction parts Name
.234
automatic
none.
automatic
Instruction Formats
.231 Instruction structure: • 12 characters.
.232 Instruction layout:
• 235
.236
automatic
Special Cases of Operands
.221 Negative numbers: ... absolute value with sign in
zone bits.
.222 Zero: . . . . . . . . . . . . positive except in some
multiply or divide results;
treated as equal in branch
tests.
.223 Operand size
determination: . . . . . counter, set by instructions.
. 237
. 238
. 239
Replaced by
special
char.
201:052.212
AAA BBB
3
3
CCC
3
PUrpose
0: . • . . . . • • • • . . operation code.
M, N: " •••.•.. field length, variations,
or device control.
AAA, BBB, CCC: . operand address or jump
location.
Basic address structure: . . . . • . . . . . . 3 + O.
Literals: . . . . . • . . . none •
Directly addressed
operands: . . . . . . . . 1 to 12 characters; from
anywhere in core storage.
Address indexing: " . none .
Indirect addressing: .. none .
Stepping: . • • . . . . . . none .
.24
Special Processor
Storage: .•••....• 2 80-character input buffer
areas.
1 80-character output buffer
area .
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
.31
Instruction Sequencing: sequential.
.32
Look-Ahead: ....•.• none.
.33
Interruption: .••.•.. none .
. 34
Multiprogramming: .. none .
. 35
Multi-sequencing: ... none .
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
.41
Instruction Times in Microseconds
.411 Fixed point Add-subtract: ...•. 24 + 78D.
Multiply: . . . . . . • . 18 + 36D + 126D2.
Divide: ..•..•.•. 360D2_ 66D-262.
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201:052.413
.413 Additional allowance
for re-compl!'Jmenting: ....•...••.• 6D.
.414 Control
Compare: .••••••• 24 + 60C.
Branch (on sign): .•• 42.
.416 Edit: .••••••••••• 72 + 72M + 48N;
M = operand length
and N = number of
inserts ($), (.), (,).
• 417 Convert: .••••••.•. none .
• 418 Shift: •..•.••••••• none .
.42
Processor Performance in Microseconds
.421 For random addresses c = a + b: .••••••. 24 + 78D.
b = a + b: .•••.••• 24 + 78D.
Sum N items: ••••• (24 + 78D)N.
c = ab: •••••••.•. 42 + 114D + 126D2.
c = alb: .••.••••• 360D2 + 12D-258.
.422 For arrays of data ci = ai + b j : . • . • . . . 450 + 156D.
b. = a. + b.: .....•• 372 + 156D.
S~m Niteths: .•••• 372 + 156D.
2
c = c + aib j : •••••• 390 + 192D + 126D .
.423 Branch based on
comparison Numeric data: ..•• 432 + 120C.
Alphabetic data: .•. 432 + 120C.
.424 Switching Unchecked: •.••.•. 246.
Checked: •••••••• 456.
List search: .••••• 270 + 60N.
.425 Format control, per
character Unpack: •••••••• 19.
Compose: ••••••. 39.
6/65
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
.426 Table look-up, per
comparison For a match: ..••• 144 + 60C.
For least or
greatest: ••.•.. 312 + 60C.
For interpolation
point: ••••.•.. 144 + 60C.
.427 Bit indicators Set bit in separate
location:. . • • • • . • 72.
Test bit in separate
location: •••••.•. 84.
Test AND for B
bits: .••••••.•. 102B.
Test OR for B bits: . 18 + 84B •
• 428 Moving: .••••••..• 60 + 12C.
.5
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Overflow:
Zero divisor:
none.
check
Invalid data:
Invalid operation:
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
check
none.
none.
none.
parity
check
none.
Dispatch of data:
Divisor and dividend
same length:
check
Inproper significant
digits in dividing: check
Processing of data: parity
check
Action
quotient set to
zero.
halt, alarm.
halt, alarm.
halt, alarm.
quotient set to
zero.
halt, alarm.
201 :061.1 00
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Console
CONSOLE
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
. . . . Console Panel: a sub-unit
of Processor.
Processor Console is built
into end of Central Proc.essor cabinet and consists of sloping panel and
horizontal work space.
.12
Associated Units: .•. B 495 Supervisory Prmter·
(described below).
.13
Description
The Console contains the control and visible
indicators used in the operation and maintenance
of the computer. It includes facilities for display
of device operation, display and manual entry of
binary-coded data, and single-instruction operation.
The B 495 Supervisory Printer, with an output
rate of 10 characters per second, can be used
with the B 200/300 6-microsecond Central Processors only. It is unbuffered and uses the
Burroughs Common Language (BCL) character set.
Appropriate commands have been added for progl'ammed control of the Supervisory Printer, which
uses a modified electric typewriter as an inputoutput device. Print format is 10 characters
per inch horizontally, and six lines per inch
vertically.
The Printer accepts continuous fanfold paper 8. 5
inches in width (9.875 inches including sprocket
hole tracks). No provision is made for automatic
indexing to a specific location on a pre-printed
form. Two carbons can be printed. Left and right
hand margins cannot be pre-set by the operator.
The left hand margin is set at one inch. Maximum
length for a printed line is 72 characters. Carriage
return is caused by:
•
pressing carriage return key,
•
printing of the 72nd character,
•
a left pointing arrow (_) in the output
data (in memory as 01 1111), or
•
pressing the end-of-input key during
input.
•2
CONTROLS
.21
Power
• 22
Connections:....... none .
.23
Stops and Restarts
. 24
Power on:
Power off:
Emergency off:
Form
Comment
Halt:
indicating
switch
Continue:
indicating
switch
system halts
after all
operations in
progress have
been completed.
starts system
after halt, or
stop with
error conditions removed.
Stepping
Form
Comment
Single
Instruction:
switch
instruction
stored at
displayed
address is
executed.
Name
Form
Comment
Clear:
switch
Bit Reset:
switch
clears all
indicators and
registers.
allows clearing
of any selected
bits which are
displayed.
Name
Form
Comment
Load:
switch
causes reading
and sequential
storage of deck
of cards (may
be used with
paper tape in
B 200/300 Series
6-microsecond
central processors) •
.25
.26
.27
Form
Name
Loading
Program Branching
Name
Form
Comment
Sense Switches
toggle
switches (6)
Testable by program to control branching
(optional with
B 300 Series).
Comment
indicating
switch
switch
pull switch.
©
controls power
} to Processor
and all system
components.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
201 :061. 300
.3
DISPLAY
.31
Alarms
.34
Form
Disk File/Data
Communications: static lamp
Tape:
static lamp
Name
Form
Comment
Comment
Memory
Display:
binary coded
indicating
push-buttons
display 1
character.
error. or Disk
File control
busy or not
ready. System
halts.
Memory
Address:
binary coded
indicating
push-buttons
switch
display address
of displayed
character.
char in Memory
Address location
displayed in
Memory Display.
static lamp
error or not
ready in
printer.
System halts.
Punch:
static lamp
error or not
ready in punch.
System halts.
static lamp
error or not
ready in reader.
System halts.
Reader 2/
Sorter: *
static lamp
error or not
ready in reader /
sorter. System
halts.
Central
Processor:
static lamp
parity error in
Central Processor. System
halts.
*
Increase Address
and Read
Memory:
switch
.4
ENTRY OF DATA
.41
Into Control Registers
Name
Instruction
address:
. 42
Conditions:
.33
Control Registers
Instruction:
Instruction
address:
Memory Address
increased by
one and char
at that location
displayed in
Memory
Display.
Form
Comment
binary coded
indicating
push-buttons
depress display
buttons to
set up address.
Form
Comment
binary coded
indicating
push-buttons
depress display
push-buttons
to set up
character.
switch
Memory Display
char stored in
Memory
Address
location.
Into Storage
Name
Memory
Display:
These alarms are labeled Card 1 and 2 on
VRC Console.
.32
6/65
Read Memory:
error or not
ready in
magnetic tape.
System halts.
Printer:
Reader 1:*
Storage
Write
Memory:
••••••. none.
.5
CONVENIENCES
Comment
. 51
Communication: . . . . . no facilities .
binary coded
indicating
push-buttons
display of instruction to be
executed.
.52
Clock: . . . . • .•
.53
Desk Space:
binary coded
indicating
push-buttons
display starting
location of instruction to be
executed.
.54
.•. optional.
... approximately 10 by 28
inches, situated below
console panel, at a
height of approximately
40 inches from floor.
View: . • . . • . . . . . . standing; height of Central
Processor is 55 inches.
201 :071.1 00
Burroughs B 1001200/300 Series
Input-Output
B 122 Cord Reoder
INPUT-OUTPUT: B 122 CARD READER
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: ••••••.•. B 122 Card Reader.
.12
Description
The B 122 Card Reader reads SO-column punched
cards of standard or post-card thickness at a maximum rate of 200 cards per minute. Reading is performed by 13 photoelectric cells (one for timing),
serially by column and parallel by bit. The time
required to read each card, normally 300 milliseconds, is increased by 15 milliseconds when the
reader is used intermittently rather than at its
peak rate. The B 122 Card Reader automatically
translates Hollerith code into Burroughs Common
Language (BCL) code before transferring the information to the buffer area of the central processor.
The B 100/200/300 Series Central Processor contains two SO-character input buffers which can
accommodate one or two B 122 Card Readers per
system. A Read instruction transfers the contents
of the buffer, containing the data read from the
previous card, to core storage within 3. 2 milliseconds; then the next card is read, refilling the
buffer. The buffer-refilling operation proceeds
independently of the central processor. Buffered
card reading permits the peak speed of 200 cards
per minute to be maintained if processing time
per card does not exceed 296. S milliseconds.
Cards are fed by a pinch roller device on demand
from the central processor. The input hopper
has a capacity of 500 cards and can be refilled
while cards are being read. The single stacker
provided also holds 500 cards, but it cannot be
emptied while the unit is in operation.
When the B 122 Card Reader is connected to a
B 200/300 Series Central Processor, its status can
be tested by the Read instruction. If the reader is
not available, program control is transferred,
enabling the processor to perform alternative
functions before attempting another Read operation.
The validity of each character being read is checked
before it is sent to the buffer, provided that the
Validity On indicator-switch is set. Reader
operational failure causes a system interlock
and displays a Read Check indicator. Failure to
feed a card or a feeder jam (maximum of two
cards involved) also causes an interlock and
illuminates a Feed Check indicator. After all
cards in the hopper have been read, the central
processor will halt on the next Card Read instruction. If the operator then depresses the End of
File button on the Reader, a program branch will
occur.
Unlike the Burroughs card readers, described on
page 201:072.100, there are no optional features
available for the B 122 Card Reader. First
delivery of the B 122 occurred late in 1961. It
is currently available immediately.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201 :072.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Input.Output
B 123/124/129 Card Readers
INPUT.OUTPUT: B 123/124/129 CARD READERS
GENERAL
.1
. 11
Identity:
.12
B 123 Card Reader .
B 124 Card Reader.
B 129 Card Reader.
Description
The Burroughs B 123, B 124, and B 129 Card
Readers provide punched card reading speeds of
475, 800, and 1400 cards per minute, respectively.
Except for this considerable difference in rated
speeds, the three readers are essentially the same.
The only significant restriction upon connecting any
one or two of these readers to any central processor in the B 100/200/300 Series is that the B 129
Card Reader can be used with the B 200/300 sixmicrosecond Central Processor only. If a
Burroughs MICR Sorter-Reader is part of the system, . utilizing one of the two input buffers of the
central processor, then only one card reader can
be connected. The B 122 200-card-per-minute
Card Reader described in the preceding report
section can be paired with a B 123, B 124, or
B 129 model.
The B 123, B 124, and B 129 Card Readers can
read standard or post-card thickness punched
cards of 51, 60, 66, or 80 columns. The standard
types of scored cards are acceptable when the stubs
are removed. An immediate-access clutch provides
demand feeding of the cards. Photoelectric reading
by column initiates the automatic transfer of data
from the card to a cod.e translator, en route to the
central processor's buffer. (The Binary Card
Read option enables cards to.be read without any
code translation.) A Read instruction transfers
the contents of the buffer, containing the data
read from the previous card, to core storage
within 3.2 milliseconds; then the next card is read,
refilling the buffer. During the buffer refilling
operation, the processor is free for computation;
but without the Early Release optional processor
modification described below, the processor must
wait for the full card cycle to be completed before
performing any magnetic tape, data communication,
or Disk File operations. Comparative timings for
the B 123, B 124, and B 129 Card Readers are
shown in the table below.
Times in Milliseconds
Read cycle time,
per card:
Buffer Wlloading time:
Processor delay before
tape, Disk File, and
data commWlications
operations:
Processor delay before
above operations using
Card Read Early Release
option:
6/65
Card Reader Model
B 123
B 124
B 129
475 cpm 800 cpm 1400 cpm
126
3.2
75
3.2
42.8
3.2
122.8
71.8
39.6
55.8
55<8
39.3
Contributing to an increased compatibility with
equipment and input media in the field are several
optional card reader features. The options listed
below are applicable to the B 123, B 124, and
B 129 Card Readers only:
.
•
Bull Code Compatibility: A special version
of the Card Reader can read and translate
80-column cards punched with a modified
Bull T-8 code.
•
ICT Code Compatibility: Another speciallymanufactured version of the card reader
provides for both ICT code and Bull code
compatibility, but not during the same run.
With a manual switch, the operator can select
the mode of operation desired.
•
Post Money Order Modification: Allows the
reading of 51-column punched cards using
round holes that occupy the space of two
standard-size rectangular holes.
•
Binary Card Read Command: A B 300 Central
Processor option that allows the reading of
any card code. The 12-bit binary image of
each card column code is stored directly in core
storage, in two con'secutive characterpositions.
Binary card reading is an unbuffered operation.
•
Card Read Early Release: Allows the release
of the central processor immediately following
the reading of the 80th card column. The
resultant time savings for magnetic tape,
Disk File, and data communication operations
are indicated in the table at left.
•
Card Read Busy Test: Provides the ability
to test the card reader's status. If the reader
is busy, program control is transferred to
another alternative routine. This feature is
not applicable if the card reader is connected
to a B 100 Series Central Processor.
Cards are fed by a belt-drive mechanism past the
stack of 13 photoelectric read cells (one for timing)
and transported to the single stacker. Both the
hopper and the stacker have capacities of 2,400
cards and can be filled and emptied while the card
reader is in operation. Should a jam occur in the
card transport device, the unit will halt with a
maximum of two cards jammed.
The validity of each character being read is checked
before it is sent to the buffer, provided that the
Validity On indicator-switch is set. Card reader
operational failure causes a system interlock and
displays a Read Check indicator. Failure to feed
a card after two attempts (the second try is automatic) will cause a system interlock and illuminate
a Feed Check indicator.
The availability of the B 123, B 124, and B 129
Card Readers is from three to four months. First
deliveries of the prototype B 124 Card Readers
occurred during the last quarter of 1963.
201 :073.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Input-Output
Card Punches
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD PUNCHES
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
. . B 303 Card Punch.
B 304 Card Punch.
Description
The B 303 and B 304 Card Punches operate at
maximum rates of 100 and 300 cards per minute,
respectively; either can function with any central
processor in the B 100/200/300 Series. Standard or
postcard thickness SO-column cards can be punched
(but not both thicknesses during the same run).
Pre-scribed and/or pre-punched cards can also be
punched if the post-punch checking device is inactivated by the operator. Formatting of the punched
card is controlled exclusively by the stored program.
Cards are punched by a single row of SO punch dies,
one row at a time. When a card punch instruction
is initiated, data in core storage is loaded into the
central processor's SO-character output buffer. A
row of information is then transferred to the pUnch
unit's self-contained SO-bit row buffer and punched.
During the time required to punch each row, the
central processor is free for processing. Throughout the punching cycle the output buffer in the central processor is interlocked against any other
potentially destructive accesses.
A checking operation is performed at the punch
station to insure that SO data bits are received
for each,Tow and that 12 rows are punched in each
card. In addition,· a post-punch sensing station
compares the card just punched to the image in the
buffer to insure accuracy. Detection of a punching
error causes a central processor halt When the next
punch instruction is initated. Processor halts also
occur upon detection of abnormal conditions such as
empty hopper, full stacker, card jam, or improper
card registration .
Translation from Burrough's internal code to
Hollerith punched card code is automatically performed within the punch unit itself. By adding a
Bull Code and/or ICT Code compatibility module to
a B 200/300 6-microsecond central processor, the
standard punch units are rendered capable of
punching these special card codes as well as the
standard card code.
Another option, available only with the B 300 Series
central processor, is the capability to punch cards
in the binary mode. A binary card image of the
contents of 160 core memory positions is punched,
with the contents of single character positions
stored in the upper and lower six positions of every
card column. Binary card punching is an unbuffered
operation.
From hopper to stacker, cards are transported by
positive-action pinch rollers. Hopper and stacker
capacities of the B 303 Card Punch are SOO cards
each. The B 304 Card Punch is equipped with three
stackers: primary, auxiliary, and error. The
primary stacker can hold 3,000 cards, the same
capacity as the unit's hopper. Error cards are
segregated in the error stacker, holding 750 cards.
The S50-card auxiliary stacker is normally used as
an alternative to the primary stacker, controlled
by a switch on the control panel, but selective
auxiliary stacking under control of the program
can be obtained as an option with B 200/300 Central
Processors.
Significant timing considerations and a comparison
of the B 303 and B 304 Card Punches are provided
in Table 1.
TABLE I: B303/B304 CARD PUNCH TIMING FACTORS
B 303
B 304
Rated speed
100 cpm
300 cpm
Total card cycle time in synchronous
mode, msec
Model
\
'.
600
200
Overhead in asynchronous mode, msec
50
200
Total buffer load time per card, msec
14.74
14.74
Processing time available to maintain synchronous operation, msec
585.26
185.26
Maximum punching rate if available
processing tim e is exceeded
(cards/min. )
92.3
Central Processor delay if magnetic
tape, Disk file, or data communication operations follow a punch
instruction, msec
539.26
150
154.46
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201 :074.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300, Seri~,s
Input-Output""
B 141 Paper Tape Reader<
INPUT-OUTPUT: B 141 PAPER TAPE READER
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity:
.12
Description
. • . . . . . . . B 141 Paper Tape Reader .
This unit reads data from punched paper tape into
core storage at a speed of 500 or 1,000 characters
per second. Either one or two B 141 Paper Tape
Readers can be used with all B 200/300 Series
six-microsecond central processors. The unit
makes use of the same input buffers as the card
readers. The B 141 can accommodate 5, 6, 7, or
8 level tape, as selected by the operator. Standard
tape code ,is the BCL paper tape code (see Data
Code Tabte,No. 5).
Function
Forward:
switch
Rewind:
switch
Strip-Reel:
switch
Control Code:
3 sets of
switches
High-Low:
switch
Parity On-Off:
switch
Teletype
On-Off:
switch
Load Reader:
switch
Ready:
switch
Backspace:
switch
Unit Selected:
switch (and
light)
Parity check:
light
No Tape:
automatic
switch
Two optiona:l features are available: an Input
Code Transiator and a Reader Selector Switch.
The translator allows automatic translation of
any code (5, 6, 7, or 8 level) to one of the 64
Burroughs Common Language (BCL) characters
used by the central processor. The manual selector switch permits selection of the paper tape,
reader or card reader.
'
Reading speed is 500 or 1,000 characters per
second. Fanfold tape, whether in strips or in
reels, and metalized Mylar tape must be read at
500 characters per second. Other punched tape
may be read at either speed. Start and stop times
are 5 and 20 milliseconds, respectively. The
reader stops on the stop character or between
characters at both high and low speeds.
A minimum of four feet of tape leader is required
with reels, and at least one foot is needed for strip
reading. Tape widths of 0.675,0.875, or 1 inch
can be handled. Reel diameters of either 5.5 or
7 inches can be accommodated. Beginning and
end-of-tape indicators are sensed by means of
adhesive conductive strips on the tape being read.
The operator can select different paper tape
channels by use of a plugboard which is supplied
as part of the B 141 Reader. A code punched in all
channels (whether 6, 7, or 8 level tape) is considered a delete code and is not transferred to the
Processor when operating without a translator.
Reading can be performed in a buffered or unbuffered mode. Maximum use of the buffered mode is
realized if the data is arranged in 80-character
blocks. Paper Tape Space Forward, Space Backward, and Rewind instructions are provided. Upon
detection of an information parity error, the reading
is completed and a branch is taken to a subroutine.
The following switches and indicators are provided:
Form
Function
Comment
Local:
Remote:
Stop:
6/65
switch (and
light)
switch (and
light)
switch
reader' not ready for
instruction.
reader is ready for
instruction.
stops reader (Local
mode).
Guide
Selection:
switch
Comment
moves tape forward
to next control code
or 'end-of-tape
marker (Local mode).
moves tape in reverse
until beginning-oftape marker is
reached and then
stops (Local plus
Reel modes) .
selects Reel or Strip
input.
provides manual
selection of three
different control
codes, any combination of which can
be used; each set
has OFF (ignore),
STORE AND STOP,
DELETE AND
STOP, and
DELETE AND
CONTINUE
positions.
selects high or
low tape speed.
determines whether
parity checking
will take place.
provides for the use
of teletype tape
as input.
allows loading of
tape (Local mode) .
starts motors, etc.
(Local mode) .
tape moves in reverse to next control code or
beginning-of-tape
marker (Local
mode).
indicates when the
B 141 is selected
by operator.
Interchanges card
reader with B 141.
indicates a parity
error has occurred.
if in Reel mode and
no tape is loaded
(or tape breaks),
the reel motors
are shut off.
adjusts tape
guiding mechanisms
to the width of the
tape.
. 13
Availability: .••.•.• 3 to 4 months .
. 14
First Delivery: ....• September. 1963 .
/
201 :075.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Input-Output
B 341 Paper Tape Punch
INPUT-OUTPUT: B 341 PAPER TAPE PUNCH
.1
GENERAL
,11
Identity:.........
. 12
Description
Tape Feed:
switch
The B 341 Paper Tape Punch punches data from
core storage onto paper tape at a speed of 100
characters per second. One paper tape punch can
be used with all B 200/300 Series six-microsecond
central processors. The B 341 is capable of
punching 5, 6, 7, or 8 level tape. Standard code is
the BCL paper tape code (see Data Code Table No.5).
Local:
switch and
light
switch and
light
4-position
switch
The following switches and indicators are provided:
B 341 Paper Tape Punch.
Function
Remote:
Control Code:
Two optional features are available: an Output
Code Translator and a Punch Selector Switch. The
translator allows translation of Burroughs Common
Language (BCL), code to any 5, 6, 7 ,or 8 level
code, for up to 64 different characters. The manual
selector switch provides interchangeability between
the paper tape punch and the card punch.
The punch is capable of punching paper or plastic
tape in widths of 0.675, 0.875, and 1 inch.
Maximum reel diameter is eight inches. and it is
not necessary to have a take-up reel. An end-oftape indication is produced whenever 35 feet (or
less) of tape is left on the supply reel. The
operator can select different paper tape channels
by use of a plugboard which is supplied as part of
the B 341 Punch.
Level
Designation:
Comment
switch
Unit Selected:
switch and
light
Low Tape:
light
tape is fed with all
holes punched.
punch is not ready for
an instruction.
punch is ready for
an instruction.
determine action by
punch when a control
code is detected:
OFF (ignore),
PUNCH AND STOP,
DELETE AND STOP,
and DELETE AND
CONTINUE.
selects number of
channels and width
of paper tape.
indicates paper tape
punch is on-line.
Selects card punch
or B341.
35 feet of tape or less
remains on supply
reel.
.13
Availability:
..••.. 3 t04 months.
.14
First Delivery: . • . . . January, 1964.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201 :081.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Input.Output
B 320/321/325 line Printers
INPUT·OUTPUT: B 320/321/325 LINE PRINTERS
•1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: .•••••.••• B 320 Line Printer.
B 321 Line Printer.
B 325 Line Printer.
.12
Description,
The B 321 Line Printer prints at the maximum rate
of 700 single-spaced alphameric lines per minute.
When average line spacingocc:urs at one-inch
intervals, the speed is reduced to about 540 lines
per minute. Sixty-four characters (10 numeric,
26 alphabetic, and 28 special symbols) can be
printed in a line of 120 print positions. The comprehensive character set is listed in the Data Code
Table on page 201:141.100.
The B 320 Line Prin~er is a slower version of the
B 321 and is offered at a substantially reduced
price. This slower model operates at a peak speed
of 475 lines per minute. The B 325 Line Printer
increases the printing flexibility by providing 132
print positions. Except for these differences in '
speed and print-block size, respectiv:ely, the
B 320 and B 325 Line Printers are functionallyidentical with the B 321 modeL' Therefore, in the
description that follows, reference is made only
to the characteristics and capabilities of the B 321.
The B 321 Line Printer contains its own 120character buffer, as well as the necessary control
equipment. At the peak speed of 700 lines per
minute, the total print-cycle timeis85;7 milliseconds. Of this time, only 1. 3 milliseconds is
consumed in loading the buffer. As soon as the
buffer is loaded, printing commences and the central processor is free for other processing.
Line advance can occur before or after printing
and can be specified as 0, I, or 2 lines. Skipping,
before or after printing, is controlled by a 12channel punched tape lpop and can occur at a rate
of 25 to 40 inches per second.
Printing is performed on continuous' card or paper
forms. Forms width can extend from 5, to 20 inQhes;
the maximum length is 22 inches per form. Ou:tput'
format spacing is 10 characters per inch horizontally
and 6 or 8 lines per inch vertically.
As many as five carbons plus the original form will
function properly in the printers. The forms are
loaded in the cabinet beneath the printing mechanism
and are transported through the unit by means of
pin-fed tractors to the self-maintaining stacker .
A Paper-Exhausted indicator/switch and several
broken-paper detectors provide error-condition
indications and serve to interlock the central
,processor.
Line formatting, spacing, and skipping are under
control of the stored program. When a print
instruction is initiated, 120 alphameric characters
from anywhere in core storage are loaded into the
printer's buffer. As soon as the buffer is ftill,
the central processor is freed and the 'printing
cycle begins. The translation from Burroughs
Common Language (BCL) internal code to the
64-character print set is performed automatically.
The actual printing is accomplished by hammer
strokes against a continuously-rotating engraved
drum. Once the drum has made a complete revolution, every character will have been printed,
and the paper motion can begin. The next printing
cycle cannot begin until all paper motion has
ceased.
A number of functional controls are provided to
enable the operator to adjust for variances in the
size of the forms and the number of interleaved
c!lrbons. The operator can also adjust the horizontal and vertical alignment of the forms and
the print quality of individual print positions.
Error checks are made for 'Proper character
parity in the bUffer, for :drum rotation synchronization,and for the presence of paper. Errors
are signalled by a' ,control panel indicator and
restilt in a halt of the system. Error conditions
and unoperational statUs can be tested by the Unit
Interrogate command, which is optional in the
B 200/300 Series central processors. Printer
timing conflicts res tilt in an interlock of the printer
until execution of the print instruction is possible.
The differences between the B 320, B 321, and
B 325 Line Printers, with regard to both capabilities
and configuration requirements, are indicated in
Table I. A noteworthy feature, the Dual Printer
Control, is optional for any central processor
in the Series except the B 100 Series models and
the VRC. With this feature two line printers,
utilizing the print buffering to ftill advantage, can
theoretically operate simtiltaneously and at their
rated ~peeds.
'
The graph on the following page illustrates the
effective speeds of the three Line Printers under
various spacing conditions.
(Contd.)
6/65
,/
201 :081.801
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
TABLE I: LINE PRINTER CHARACTERISTICS
Line Printer Model
B 320
B 321
B 325
Maximum speed (lines per minute)
475
700
700
Number of print positions
120
120
132
B 100/200/300 Series availability
All models
All, with
adapter
for B 100
Series
B 200/300
Series
6-ILsec
Processor
Effective Speed:
B 320, B 321, and B 325 Line Printers
1,000
900
800
700
i"""
600
Effective Speed:
Printed Lines
Per Minute
500
......
400
r... .......
r--.
""
300
.............
.............
"-
~
...............
r-...-
~ r--..-
- -~ ~
----
B 320
-
200
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
a
1/2
1
2
3
4
5
Inter-Line Pitch in Inches
©
1965 AUERBACH Corpor.ation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201 :082.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Input-Output
B 328/329 Line Printers
INPUT-OUTPUT: 8328/329 LINE PRINTERS
.1< .. GENERAL
-.UIdentity: . . • . • . . . . . B 328 Line Printer.
B 329 Line Printer.
• 12
Description
The B 328 and B 329 Line Printers operate at a
··maximum rate of 1,040 lines per minute at single
spacing when the characters to be printed are
limited to those in a continuous 37 -character segment
of the print drum. The peak rate can also be maintained while printing and triple-spacing if a 16character "numeric and edit" set is used. As
larger character sets are used, the operational
speeds are reduced, as shown in Table· I below.
When the entire 64-character set is utilized, the
single-spaced speed will not fall below 734 lines
per m~ute_
The only differences between the B 328 and B 329
Line Printers are in the number of print positions
provided per line and in the configuration requirements for each model. The B 328 has 120 positions
on a line and can be connected to any B 100/200/300
Series central processor except the B 100 line. The
B 329 has 132 print positions and can function only
with the B 200/300 Series six-microsecond central
processor.
operations as soon as the buffer is loaded (within
1.3 milliseconds). As each character in the buffer
is printed, its buffer position is set to a blank.
Immediately upon detection of a completely blank
buffer, paper motion begins. (A minimum of 16
characters on the drum must pass the printing
mechanism before paper advancing can begin.) The
start of paper motion is therefore not contingent
on the completion of a full drum revolution.
The operational speeds of the printers are governed
by the rotational speed of the print drum and the
paper advance speeds. The rotational speed is
1,040 rpm, or one revolution every 57.7 milliseconds. The printing or bypassing of each character on the drum requires 0_ 9 millisecond. To
advance the form a single space requires 24 milliseconds for the first space and 7 milliseconds for
each additional space. Therefore, to maintain
printing speeds of 1,040 lines per minute, the
total printing and spacing time must not exceed
57.7 milliseconds. On this basis, up to 37 con~
secutive alphameric characters can be printed
and single spacing can occur during a single drum
revolution. The chart below indicates effective
speeds as character sets and spacing demands
are varied.
Standard features of the B 328 and B 329 Line
Printers include a ribbon-tracking device to
sense and control ribbon mistracking, and duplicate controls and indicators on the rear of the
cabinets to assist the operator. Except for these
added features, the B 328 and B 329 Line Printers
have the same physical characteristics, forms
controis, and error-checking devices as the B320,
B 321, and B 325 printers described in the previous
report section, page 201:081.100.
Burroughs' standard 64-character drum printer set
has been statistically analyzed and regrouped on
the drum according to frequency of use. The 37
most frequently used characters (10 numeric, 26
alphabetic, and the period) are arranged in consecutive locations around the drum. The revised
drum arrangement and a "quick cancel" memoryresult in the improved performance of the B 328
Line Printer over the 700-line-per-minute B 321
model.
Printing occurs after the central processor loads·
the printer's buffer with 120 or 132 characters from
core storage. The processor is free for additional
The first deliveries of the B 328 and B 329 1,040line-per-minute printers are scheduled for June,
1965. Availability has been set at eight months.
TABLE I: EFFECTIVE SPEEDS OF B 328 AND B 329 LINE PRINTERS
Printed Lines per Minute Using
Various Consecutive Character Sets
Lines Advanced per
Line Printed
1
2
3
4
5
6/65
16
Characters
37
Characters
64
Characters
1040
1040
1040
692
624
1040
692
692
624
560
734
677
626
584
546
A
.01111,,,,,,,,1111,
AUERBACH
201 :083.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Input-Output
Multiple Tape Listers
i
"'INPUT-OUTPUT: MULTIPLE TAPE LISTERS
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: .••••.•... B
B
B
B
B
.12
Description
322
323
326
332
333
Multiple
Multiple
Multiple
Multiple
Multiple
Tape- Lister.
Tape Lister.
Tape Lister.
Tape Lister.
Tape Lister.
The Burroughs Multiple Tape Listers provide highspeed master and detail listings of MICR documents
as they are read by a MICR Sorter-Reader. From 6
to 18 ,individually-controlled listing tapes can be
controlled by a single central processor, enabling
the contents of each Sorter-Reader pocket to be
listed on a separate tape. In addition, master and
difference tapes can be printed without interrupting
the flow of MICR documents. Up to three listing
tapes can be printed upon simultaneously, at
speeds up to 1,600 lines per minute for each tape.
All the tapes can be skipped 2.5 inches or slewed
10 inches simultaneously, if desired. From one
to three Multiple Tape Listers can be connected to
a B 100/200/300 Series Central Processor. Each
lister unit controls six paper tapes.
Printing is performed on 2. 5-inch-wide, single or
two-ply adding machine forms. Print lines can
extend to 22 print positions on each tape, with a
horizontal spacing of 10 positions per inch and
vertical spacing of 6 lines per inch. Each lister
unit contains an engraved print drum composed of
six 22-column segments mounted on a horizontal
shaft. Printing occurs whenhammer strokes drive
the paper forms against the symbols on the revolving
drum. The drum's character set can range from
a-ilumeric-and-special-symbol 24-character set
to a 40-character set with full numeric and alphabetic printing capability.
Each configuration of one, two, or three Multiple
Tape Listers includes a 44-character buffer and a
self-contained set of controlling devices. The
buffer is interlocked from the time it is loaded by
the central processor until printing is completed
and paper motion begins. An attempt to gain access
• 121
to the buffer during the print cycle will cause the
central processor to be delayed until the print
cycle is completed.
I
\
"--
The central processor loads the buffer in 0.7
millisecond. Immediately after the brief bufferloading operation, the central processor is released for further operations. Contents of the
first 22 positions of the buffer are then printed
on one listing tape, and positions 23 to 44 are
simultaneously printed on another. Individual tape
and lister unit designations 1J.re controlled by the
stored program. The two sections of the buffer
can contain the same or different information.
Single spacing of the tapes after printing is
performed automatically. The tapes can also be
individually spaced, skipped, or slewed at any
time. Skipping a tape 2.5 inches after printing
interlocks the print mechanism for 100 milliseconds,
but it should be noted that multiple tape listing
operations will normally be single-spaced.
The paper listing tapes are 2. 5 inches wide and
are provided in rolls or in fan-fold form in
lengths up to 1,000 feet. The paper advance
operations are controlled by pressure rollers
that direct the tapes to stackers at the rear of
the cabinets. Stacker capacity for each tape is
1,000 feet. Forty-five minutes of consecutive
printing on a single tape could be accomplished
before exhausting the paper supply and halting
the system.
'
The Print on Lister command provides for
branching to alternative routines when a print
error occurs. However, this capability is present only when the listers are used with the B 200/
300 Series 6-microsecond central processor.
This level of central processor also has the optional capability to test the operational status of
the listers and to continue processing if they are
found to be unavailable.
Duplicate control panels are located at the front
and rear of the lister cabinets. Any or all listing
tapes can be manually skipped by a paper-advance
switch. Also, since two listers can be used alternatively with up to two Burroughs Line Printers
on the same system, a manual Printer/Lister
Selector switch can be provided.
A print check indicator will be illuminated if data
is received in the buffer with improper parity or if
the buffer and drum-revolution timings are out of
synchronization. If branching upon error indicators
has not been specified by the program, the central
processor will halt on the next instruction that references the lister.
The individual characteristics and capabilities of
Burroughs' five Multiple Tape Lister models are
described below.
B 322 Multiple Tape Lister
The B 322 Lister prints 22-position lines at speeds
up to 1,600 lines per minute. It has a 24-character
print set consisting of 10 numeric, 10 alphabetic
(B, C, D, L, M, R, S, T, X, and y), and 4 editing
characters. The alphabetic set is designed to
provide indicative symbols for most banking operations. One or two 6-tape B 322 Listers can be
attached to any central processor in the B 100/200/
300 Series. Optional features are available to
allow the simultaneous skipping or slewing of all
listing tapes (either 6 or 12), or of all but the
master tape. First delivery of the B 322 Lister
occurred during the second quarter of 1962.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporotion and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201:083.122
.122 B 323 Multiple Tape Lister
The 323 Lister prints at a maximum speed of
1,600 lines per minute, provided that a 16character set of 10 numeric and 6 special symbols
is used exclusively. The noteworthy feature of the
B 323 Lister is the expansion of the character set
to 40 characters. Full alphabetic printing capability
is thereby offered, although at a greatly reduced
rate of speed. The lister will print at 600 singlespaced lines per minute in the alphameric mode,
as opposed to the 1,600 line-per-minute rate in
the special 16-character numeric mode. One or
two B 323 Listers can be connected to any B 200
or B 3.00 Series Central Processor. Simultaneous
tape skipping is a standard feature, but simultaneous tape slewing is optional. First delivery of
this version of the Multiple Tape Lister occurred
in January, 1964.
.123 B 326 Multiple Tape Lister
The B 326 Lister differs from the B 322 model
described in Paragraph .121 above only in its
printing speed. The B 326 prints at a·maximum
rate of 1,250 lines per minute. It was designed
to operate efficiently with the B 106 and B 107
l,200-document-per-minute Sorter-Readers.
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
.124 B 332 and B 333 Multiple Tape Listers
The B 332 18-tape Multiple Tape Lister subsystem
is formed by combining a B 332 Master. Lister with
two B 333 Slave Lister sections with six listing
tapes each. The 44-character buffer and controlling
devices are contained within the B 332 unit. Singlespaced printing speeds range from 800 alphameric to 1,600 numeric lines per minute. Up to
three listing tapes can be printed upon simultaneously, The characters in buffer positions 1 to 22
can be printed on both the master tape and a
selected detail tape. The second section of the
buffer can be loaded with information unrelated to
the document-processing operation. This information can be printed concurrently on a selected
third tape.
The provision to print on 18 individually-controlled
tapes provides functional compatibility with
B 116 16-pocket MICR Sorter-Reader. Full
tape skipping and slewing flexibility is offered
as standard equipment. One B 332 Lister and 0,
1, or 2 B 333 Slave Listers are available only for
use" with the B 300 Series Central Processor;
they cannot be used with older B 100/200 Series
systems. The availability of these units is quoted
as 6 to 8 months.
/
6/65
201 :091.1 00
Burroughs B 1001200/300 Series
Input-Output
Magnetic Tape Units
INPUT-OUTPUT: MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
.......• B
B
B
B
B
421
422
423
424
425
Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
end-of-information mark in storage is sensed .
The tape must come to a complete stop after
either of these operations before any other tape
operation can be initiated by the central processor.
Unit.
Unit.
Unit.
Unit.
Unit.
Data is recorded in variable-length blocks. The
size of the blocks can extend from seven characters to the limit of core storage. At a block
size of 1,000 characters, the 200, 556, and 800bit-per-inch. tape units can store 4,900, 11,100,
and 13,800 blocks, respectively, on a 2, 400-foot
reel of tape. Given the same 1, OOO-character
blocks, the effective data transfer rates of the
18KC and 72KC tape units will be 14,400 and
41,800 characters per second, respectively.
Relative speeds and capacities of the five
Burroughs tape unit models are listed in Table I.
A graph is also provided (page 201:091. 801) to
demonstrate the variation in effective speed of
each model as the size of the data blocks increases.
Description
The Burroughs Magnetic Tape Units provide a
range of transfer rates from 18,000 to 72,000
characters per second and packing densities of
200, 556, and 800 characters per inch. Alphameric
characters in binary-coded decimal form are
stored on O. 5-inch Mylar-based tape on reels 10.5
inches in diameter. The reel capacity is 2,400
feet, allowing a maximum of 22. 1 million characters per reel at the 800 characters-per-inch
density. Magnetic tape operations are not buffered,
and, .with the exception of tape rewinding and
stopping, they require the use of the central
processor throughout.
In addition to the provisions for tape reading
and recording, the capability is provided to
backspace the tape until an interblock gap is
sensed, and to erase the tape forward until a
group mark is encountered in core storage. The
time required to set the tape in motion in a backward direction is 11.2 milliseconds. By comparison, the start time for a tape read operation
will be from 5.0 to 6.8 milliseconds. Start-stop
overhead timings are also supplied in Table I.
Each central processor in the B 100/200/300
Series can control up to six magnetic tape units.
Operational problems with anyone tape unit will
not affect the performance of the others. Reading
and recording operations are performed only in
the forward direction. The tape reading operation transfers data from tape to core storage
until a 0.7 5-inch interblock gap is sensed. A
special end-of-information mark is stored in
memory following the last character transferred.
The recording operation transfers information
from core storage and records it on tape until the
Binary tape reading and recording capabilities
are provided when any of the tape unit models
are used with a B 200/300 Series 6-microsecond
TABLE I: CHARACTERISTICS OF BURROUGHS MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
Model
No.
I
\.
Tape
Speed,
inches
per sec
Recording
Density,
bits per
inch
Peak
Speed,
char
per sec
Interblock Gap Lengths
inches
msec (1)
chars (2)
Efficiency,
% (3)
100-char
blocks
l,OOO-char
blocks
Demand
on Core
Storage,
%
Rewind
Speed,
inches
per sec
B 421
90
200
556
18,000
50,000
0.75
13.8
248
690
27.7
13.0
80:5
60.0
100
320
B 422
120
200
556
24,000
66,000
0.75
11.0
264
726
26.2
12.1
75.0
59.0
100
320
B 423
120
200
24,000
0.75
10.0
240
26.2
75.0
100
320
B 424
83
800
66,000
0.75
10.0
660
13.1
60.2
100
320
90
200
556
800
18,000
50,000
72,000
0.75
10.0
180
500
720
27.7
13.0
12.2
80.5
60.0
58.1
100
320
B 425
(1)
(2)
(3)
Time in milliseconds to traverse each interblock gap when reading or writing consecutive blocks.
Effective number of character positions occupied by each interblock gap.
Effective speed at the indicated block size, expressed as a percentage of peak speed.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65.
201 :091.120
. 12 Description (Contd.)
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
.121
central processor. Any binary-coded decimal
code can thereby be read and stored in memory,
where a programmed code translation can be
effected if desired. The binary recording operation is terminated When every character in
memOFY from the point of origin to the upper end
of core storage has been recorded, in a single ,
tape block.
The tape units used in the B 100/200/300 Series
are fully compatible with those of the Burrough~
B 5500 system. Compatibility is also achieved wlth
the IBM 729 and 7330 tape units using binarycoded-decimal coding at 200, 556, or 800 rows
per inch. The ability to read tape in the binary
mode adds still further possibilities in the area of
tape compatibility.
When reading or recording, tape is pulled from a
vacuum-column buffer by a moving capstan and
pinch-roller assembly and passed under a dualgap read/write head. Tape speed past the head.
varies from 83 to 120 inches per second accordmg
to the tape unit model (see Table 1). The read
section of the head follows the write section by
0.15 inches to allow for immediate read-afterwrite checking. Tape is then drawn into another
vacuum column preceding the take-up reel to
minimize tape damage and breakage.
Data on tape is arranged in seven-bit rows, six
bits for information and one for even-parity checking.
The number of rows per block is limited only by
the size of the available core storage. When
recording information in the binary mode, the
parity scheme is odd, consistent with that of core
storage.
In addition to the data-transfer validation provided by the read-after-write check, several ,
other checks are provided. Row parity is checked
during both reading and recording. A longitudinal
check character for each block is developed during
recording and checked during subsequent readings.
Data transfer errors of any kind cause an immediate program branch to a corrective routine.
Program branching will also occur when a reflective tape marker is sensed at the end of a tape
reel during recording, and when a special finalblock character is recognized during reading.
Reel loading is facilitated by a latch-leader device
affixed to every reel. The leader is latched to
a section of tape permanently attached to the
take-up transport, and a Load button is pushed.
Tape positioning for proper operation is then
performed automatically. Density-switching and
high-speed rewinding (320 inches per second)
can also be controlled at the tape unit's control
panel.
The differentiating characteristics between the
five models of Burroughs magnetic tape units are
described in the paragraphs that follow and in
the associated chart and graph.
B 421 MagnetiC Tape Unit
The B 421 provides peak data transfer rates of
18 000 or 50 000 characters per second at
pa~king densities of 200 or 556 rows per inch.
It can be connected to any model B 200 or B 300
Series Central Processor, but cannot be combined with any other tape unit model except the
B 425. First delivery occurred during the third
quarter of 1962.
.122
B 422 Magnetic Tape Unit
The densities of the B 422 Tape Unit are the
same as those of the B 421 model, but its peak
data transfer rate has been increased' to 24,000
or 66,000 characters per second. The B 422
Tape Unit can be connected to the B 200/300 ,
Series 6-microsecond Central Processor only.
It can function in combination with both the B 423
and B 424 models. The B 422 unit has been available since January, 1964.
.123
B 423 Magnetic Tape Unit
The B 423 Tape Unit is basically the same as the
B 422, except that it lacks the high speed and
high density options. Its peak data transfer rate
is 24 000 characters per second. Tape start
time
the B 423 has been reduced to 5.0 milliseconds, as compared with 6.8 milliseconds for
the B 422 model. The B 423 can be connected
to any central processor in the B 100/200/300
Series and can be used in combination with the
B 422 and B 424 models. First delivery was
made in February, 1964.
in
.124 B 424 MagnetiC Tape Unit
The increased packing density of 800 rows per
inch was introduced to the Burroughs line of tape
units when the B 424 model was delivered in
May, 1965. Its peak data transfer rate is a
non-variable 66,000 characters per second at
a tape speed of 83 inches per second. Up to six
B 424 Tape Units can be used with any B 200/300
Series 6-microsecond Central Processor, but
the B 424 cannot be used in the same system with
any other Burroughs tape unit except the B 422.
.125 B 425 MagnetiC Tape Unit
With the announcement of its B 300 Series in
February, 1965, Burroughs introduced the ~ ~25
Tape Unit. This unit provides packing denslties
of 200 556 and 800 rows per inch, and a tape
speed ~f 90'inches per second. Thu~, in a s.ingle
unit, full compatibility has been achleved wlth
all of the IBM 7330 and 729 tape units. The B 425
Tape Unit can be connected j:o the B 300 Series
Central Processor only. Its use requires a
special processor control module.
(Contd. )
6/65
201:091.801
INPUT·OUTPUT: MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
Effective Speeds: Burroughs Magnetic Tape Units
1,000,000
7
4
2
100,000
7
4
Effective Speed:
Chara:cters per
Second
,.
IV,
2
V, ~ ~ ~ ,."
10,000
~ ~ ~ i-"" ......
~ ~ ~ ......
..t.;;
4
1,000
7
II
III
~~
I
~!-
,,-'
'"
./
7
2
~
y-
~ ~~
~
~
"
II'rL
4
2
100
10
2
4
7
100
2
4
7 1,000
2
4
7 10,000
Characters per Block
LEGEND
I.
II.
Ill.
IV.
V.
©
Models B 421 and B 425 at 200 char/inch.
Models B 421 and B 425 at 556 char/inch.
Models B 422 and B 423 at 200 char/inch.
Model B 422 at 556 char/inch.
Model B 425 at 800 char/inch.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201:101.100
Burroughs B 1001200/300 Series
Input-Output
B 401 Record Processor
INPUT-OUTPUT: B 401 RECORD PROCESSOR
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity:.......... B 401 Record Processor.
. 12
Description
The Console of the B 401 provides for manual
operation of the Record Processor. The Console
contains a 12-column numeric keyboard and a set
of special character keys. These keys can be
read by the VRC Central Processor, under program control. Ledger cards are fed from one of
three hoppers: main, auxiliary, and a singlecard hopper. Two stackers can be selected:
primary or auxiliary. All hopper and stacker
selection is under program control.
The B 401 Record Processor and Console provides the VRC System (Page 201:031.500) with
the capability for automatic handling, reading,
and updating of unit records. Ledger cards, such
as those used in banking and inventory applications,
are accepted as direct computer input for processing and updating, providing visual account
histories on the records.
By means of a programmed cycle of read,
process, print, and update, ledgers can be
handled at 45 per minute at 100 percent account
activity, printing one line of new information on
each ledger. Inactive accounts are passed by at
180 per minute.
On a magnetic stripe on the reverse side of each
.ledger, information is stored about the account
status and the position of the most recent line of
printing. This information (maximum of 80
characters) is read as the ledger is moved from
a "ready" station past a magnetic read head.
The VRC Central Processor determines whether
the ledger should be stopped at the print area of
the Record Processor, or ejected as inactive, on
the basis of other data read into the Central
Processor (from an MICR Sorter-Reader, for
example).
If the account is to be updated, new balance information is calculated and printed on the ledger.
As the ledger is ejected, new information is
recorded on the magnetic stripe on the reverse
side of the ledger. A check head reads the
information just recorded for comparison with
the information in core storage.
The print station may also contain one or two
continuous forms (side by Side), which can be
printed upon separately or together with ledgers.
Presence of a ledger will mask some of the form
printing area. If forms printing is desired in
this case, it can be done after the ledger is
ejected. Printing is done with automatic single
spacing at a maximum speed of 214 lines per
minute while printing on one ledger, or on forms.
Printing format is 160 positions per line and six
lines per inch. Four of the print positions are
blocked by ribbon guides, leaving 156 positions
available for actual printing. Since the ribbon
guides are movable, a print instruction transfers
160 characters per line. Instructions are available
for spacing the forms and ledger one line without
printing. The two forms and the ledger mi.n be
moved in any combination in this instruction.
Printing is accomplished with a 12-character set
on each type bar, containing only the 0-9 and 2
special symbols.
6/65
An Optical Reader (optional) aids in comparison
of account numbers during balance transfer
operations .
· 14
First Delivery: ..•.. 3rd qtr. 1961.
·2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
.211 Drive past' the head: .. ledgers: pinch rollers.
forms: sprocket drive.
· 22
Sensing and Recording Systems
.221 Recording system: ... printed characters: type
bars.
magnetic characters:
magnetic head.
· 222 Sensing system: ..•. magnetic head for magnetic
characters.
optional Optical Reader
for special digits at
auxiliary read station.
.23
Multiple Copies
.231 Maximum number: ... forms: 1 + 2 carbons.
ledgers: none.
· 24
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: ....• reading ledger magnetic
stripe . .
Stacks: .....•..•.• 1.
Heads/stack: ..•.•.. 1.
Method of use: ..•.•• ledger passes head.
Use of station: .•...• writing onto ledger magnetic stripe.
Stacks: ..•..••.••• 1.
Heads/stack: ., ..•.. 1.
Method of use: .•..•• ledger passes head.
Use of station: •..... checking data recorded on
magnetic stripe.
Stacks: .•••.•.••.. 1.
Heads/stack: ..•.•.• 1.
Method of use: . . . • . . ledger passes head.
(Contd.)
/
INPUT-OUTPUT: B 401 RECORD PROCESSOR
_24
Arrangement of Heads (Contd.)
.35
Use of station: . . . . . . printing on ledger or
forms.
Stacks: • • . . . . . • . . • 1.
Heads/stack: .•...•• 160.
Method of use: .•••.. one line at a time.
Use of station: •.•.•• reading special binary
characters on ledger.
Stacks: . • • . • . . . . • . 1.
Heads/stack: . . . . • . . 1.
Method of use:. . . • . . optical; ledger passes
head.
• 25
Range of Symbols
Numerals: . . . . . . . . 10
0-9.
Letters: . . • . • • • • .• 5
see below. *
Special: . . . . • . • . .. 9
see below. *
Alternatives: .•••.•
upon special request.,
FORTRAN set: •. . • •
no.
Req. COBOL set: ••.
no.
Total: .•.•.••.•.• 12 at one time on any type
bar.
*
Special symbols and
letters: •.•..••• one type bar contains numerals 0-9 plus 1 of the
groups of 2 characters
shown:
LS and
X and
and
OD and
and
RT
R
Y
,
A
SC
Y
DM
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
• 31
Form of Storage
and CM
and ,
and D
and SC
Unit Record Cards
.311 Medium:
ledger cards with
magnetic stripe
on rear side
.312 Phenomenon: printing on front
side; magnetization on rear
side
· 32
201: 101.240
Physical Dimensions
.351 Overall width: .•.••• Ledger: allowable width
6.5, 7, 8, 9, 10,. 11, 12,
13, or 14 inches.
Forms: 3.25 to 18 inches
by vernier.
Combined width of both
forms used may not exceed 18 inches, including
the space between them.
Minimum space is 0.375
inch.
.352 Length
Ledger: • . • • • • . .• 11 inches.
Forms: •..••.. '.• 3.5, 5.5, 7, or 11 inches •
• 353 Maximum margins
Ledgers
Left: . •
Right: .
Top: ..
Bottom:
.
.
.
•
•
.
.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
.
.
•
•
•
•
.
.
.
•
•
.
•
•
•
•
•
•
.
•
•
•
0 inch
0 inch
2 inches
1 inch
.4
CONTROLLER: ..••. built into central processor.
• 42
Connection to System
.421 On-line: • . . • • . . . . • one B 401 Record Processor, in VRC System only.
.422 Off-line: .•.•••••.• none.
• 44
Data Transfer Control
• 441 Size of load
Printer: •...•.•••
Magnetic stripe: •••
.442 Input-output areas: ••
• 443 Input-output area
access: . . . • • • . . •
• 444 Input-output area
lockout: • • • • . . . • •
· 445 Table control: ••.•• '.
.446 Synchronization: .•••
160 char.
80 char. max.
core storage.
each character .
none.
none .
automatic.
Journal Forms
paper, fanfold,
multiset.
printing by
type bars.
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
Printer
• 511 Size of block:
· 512 Block demarcation
Input:
Output:
.322 Parallel by:
• 324 Track use:
.325 Row use:
Unit Record Cards
Journal Forms
printing: 1 row of
140 char max at
6 rows/in
magnetic char:
serial by 80 char.
140 col max at 10
col/in
all for data
all for data
1 row of 160
char at 6
rows/in.
.52
none
counter
Printer
.521 Input:
.523 Stepping:
.524 Skipping:
.33
Coding:.......... as in Data Code Table
No.4.
.34
Format Compatibility: none.
©
end-of file symbol.
group mark ($) in
core storage.
Input-Output Operations
.522 Output:
160 col at 10
col/in.
all for data.
all for data.
Magnetic Stripe
160 char up to 80 char.
Positional Arrangement
.321 Serial by:
1 inch.
1 inch.
0.5 inch.
0.5 inch.
.525 Marking:
.526 Searching;
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
MagnetiC Stripe
none
up to 80 char specified by $.
160 char up to 80 char
specimarked by group
fied by
mark in core
counter
storage $.
single
none.
space
to start none.
of next
form
none
none.
none
none.
6/65
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
201: 101.530
.72
.53
Code Translationt
automatic.
.54
Format Control: • , •. by program.
.55
Control OperationS·
.73
, .731
Select hopper: ••.••. yes.
Select stacker: •.... yes.
Select format: •..... no.
• 56
Testable Conditions:, • none.
•6
PERFORMANCE
• 61
Conditions
I: .. . . • • • • . . • • . . passing inactive account.
II: .•..•..••••.•• reading activeaccounts;
printing one line per
ledger.
III: • •. • . • . • . . • • • single-space printing.
• 62
Processor: I
Processor: II
Processor: In
.7
6/65
.733
• 734
Speeds
• 621 Nominal or peak
·speed: • • •. . • • . • . I; 180 ledgers/min.
II; 44 ledgers/min.
In; 214 lines 'per min.
• 622 hnpQrtant parameters
Read ledger: ....•• 282 msec.
Read data entry
keyboard: ••.•••• 1.23 sec.
Processing time on
Condition II: . • • • . 31 msec.
Line advance time
when printing consecutive lines: •••• 35 msec.
Align ledger: ~ • • . . . 189 to 345 msec depending
,
on line on ledger.
Write on magnetic
stripe and eject
ledger: •.•..•••• 630 to 474 msec depending
on starting line on ledger.
Print one line on
ledger: ....•••.• 250 msec.
.623 Overhead: .•• ; ••••• none; feeding rate depends
on program. However,
if printing successive
lines on same ledger,
print cycle goes from
281 msec to 316 msec if
processing .time exceeds
31 nisec .
• 624 Effective speeds: •.•• II; 214/(3.82 + N) ledgers/
min. N = No. lines
printed/ledger.
66 msec IWailable processing time/line printed.
• 63 Demands on System
msec
Component Condition per ledger .Q!:. Percentage
.71
• 732
282
1,084 avo
250
84.
80.
89.
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
Adjgstments '
Adjgstment
Method
Comment
Form width
Form depth
tractor
cam
by operator.
by operator.
.8
Other Controls
Form
Comment
Function
keyboard for entry of data.
Data entry:
Form and record
!ll..anual positioning.
movement:
switches
Loading and Unloading
Volumes. handled
Storage
Capacity
Forms: .•..••••. stack of 6 inches .
Ledgers:
Primary hopper: .. 1, 000 ledgers.
Auxiliary hopper: .. 500 ledgers.
Manual feeder: •.. 1 record.
Primary stacker: •. 1, 000 ledgers.
Auxiliary stacker: . 150 ledgers.
Replenishment time: •. 1 to 2 minutes; unit needs
to be stopped.
Adjustment time: ...• 1 to 5 minutes.
Optimum reloading
period: • . . . . • . . . . ledgers; 22 minutes if
printing on each ledger.
forms; 76 minutes if
printing at maximum
speed on 300 3-part sets
11 inches long.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
Interlock Action
Error
post-rec- . halt; ledger ejected;
Recording:
ord read
alarm. *
check
stop computer;
Reading
alarm; records
sent to auxiliary
stacker; B 401
console alarm. *
Input area overnone.
flow:
Output block
size:
none.
Invalid code:
none.
Nearly exhausted
alarm.
forms:
check
hnperfect medium: none.
Timing conflicts:
interlock wait.
Two documents
check
stop computer,
fed:
alarm; records
sent to auxiliary
stacker,; B 401
console alarm. *
Missing information:
check
. program branch.
check
Stacker full:
halt and alarm.
Hopper empty:
halt on read
check
instruction.
End of form when
printing:
program branch.
check
Record out of
alignment:
halt; alarm, reccheck
ord ejected.
Program continues in sequence
when Continue
button on B 401
console is depressed.
spacing suppressed;
check
Print error:
halt, alarm. *
check
Ledger missed:
halt; alarm; ledger
ejected.
* Program branch when Continue button on B 401
console depressed.
./
201:102.100
Burroughs B 1001200/300 Series
Input-Output
MICR Sorter-Readers
INPUT-OUTPUT: MICR SORTER-READERS
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
BIOI
B 102
B 103
B 104
B 106
B 107
B 116
Sorter-Reader.
Sorter-Reader.
Sorter-Reader.
Sorter-Reader.
Sorter-Reader.
Sorter-Reader.
Sorter-Reader.
Description
The Burroughs Sorter-Readers are designed to read
magnetically-encoded documents at speeds up to
1,560 documents per minute and to sort these items
into one of 13 or 16 different pockets. The SorterReaders can serve as high-speed input devices to
-any of the B 100/200/300 Series banking systems,
or as off-line, general-purpose MICR document
sorters. On-line reading speeds are matched by
the printing speeds of the Burroughs Multiple Tape
Listers (see Section 201:083), providing integrated
systems for most banking operations.
Documents are fed into the Sorter-Reader from a
hopper-holding up to 3,000 documents of intermixed
sizes. Two belts separate and feed items at a
speed of 150 inches per second. The documents are
accelerated to 400 inches per second and aligned for
passage past the read head. The encoded characters are reinforced by a magnetic charge and then
read serially from right to left. If the characters
are defectively encoded or improperly formatted,
or if the documents do not meet specification sizes,
the item is directed to a reject pocket. After the
items are read, they pass an optional endorsing
station, where the individual bank's endorsement
can be printed on each document without reducing
the Sorter-Reader's rate of speed. In place of
the endorsing station, a standby station can be
provided to allow for the feeding and reading of
individual documents in a demand mode under control of the central processor.
After the magnetically-encoded information is read
into the second of the central processor's input
buffers and then transferred to core storage (within
two milliseconds), the stored program determines
the document's proper pocket selection and transfers
this information back to the Sorter-Reader. A
specific blade is then activated and the document
enters the proper blade-transport, where it is sped
by belts to its selected pocket. The capacity of each
standard-sized pocket is 800 items, and both the
pockets and the input hopper can be emptied and
replenished while the Sorter-Reader is in highspeed operation.
The Sorter-Reader has the ability to read 14
magnetic characters printed in Font E-13B, the
standard adopted by the American Bankers'
Association. Included in the character set are
the numerals 0 through 9 and four special symbols:
amount, on us, transit, and dash. Up to 59 characters can be encoded on each document, according
to strict ABA formatting rules. The characters
are spaced automatically in core storage into
seven 12-character fields.
The Sorter-Reader has been designed to handle
paper documents ranging in thickness from
0.0040 to 0.0075 inch. Document size tolerances
vary if the items are not uniform in size:
Length:
Width:
Uniform Size
Intermixed Sizes
5.75t09.5
inches
2.5 to 4.25
inches
5.9375 to 9.0625
inches
2.6875 to 4.0625
inches
The Sorter-Readers can operate on-line in one of
two modes: demand and flow. When a document
is read in demand mode, it will remain in the
standby station indefinitely until a pocket-select
instruction routes it to its pocket. A maximum
rate of 400 items per minute can be achieved in
this mode. Flow mode operation establishes continuous feeding of documents at the full speed of
the Sorter-Reader. In order to maintain this flow,
each read instruction must be followed by a
pocket-select instruction within approximately 10
milliseconds. After pocket selection, approximately 10 milliseconds of additional processing
time remain before the next read instruction must
be initiated. If these timing restrictions are exceeded by the stored program, the items in transport will be rejected and the system will halt.
In the flow mode, the reading operation can be
buffered or unbuffered. From 14.4 to 19.4 milliseconds are required to read the document and
transfer the data either to the buffer or directly to
core storage. Buffered reading permits this time
to be utilized for processing. Buffer unloading
requires only two milliseconds of the central processor's time, but this time occurs during the
critical period before pocket selection. The
advantage of unbuffered reading lies in the extra
two milliseconds of processing time available
before the pocket-select instruction must be given.
Sorting speeds are determined by the length of the
documents being read. The peak speed of 1,560
items per minute can be maintained only when
processing a batch of items with a uniform length
of 5.75 inches. Speeds for longer documents can
be conveniently estimated by multiplying the
feeding speed of 150 inches per second, times 60,
and dividing by the average length of the documents
being processed. Thus, for 9-inch documents,
sorting proceeds at 1,000 documents per minute.
(This relationship is not valid for the B 106 and
B 107 models, which have a peak speed of only
I, 200 docum ents per minute.)
In order that each document can be read and sorted
properly, proper spacing between documents must
be maintained. Improper spacing is detected by
strategically-located beams of light, causing the
potenWllly erroneous documents to be routed to
the reject pocket. Document feeding is stopped
for 300 milliseconds for the rejecting process,
© J 965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201: 102.120
.12
6/65
Description (Contd.)
after which it resumes automatically. Such rejects
will also occur if the documents fail to meet size
specifications. During continuous or flow-mode
operations, as well as during off-line sorting, the
documents must be within 7.75 and 10.0 inches
from each other in order to maintain SorterReader speed and insure accuracy of data
transmission.
An optical sensing device, the Batch Ticket Detector, automatically halts the flow of items at the
conclusion of a controlled batch of documents.
Summary operations can then be as lengthy as
desired. This sensing device is located just
beyond the mouth of the feeder, preventing the
feeding of any document from the following batch
before the transport can be halted. Another type
of feed halt can occur if feeding is unsuccessful
after 180 milliseconds. Mter halts of this. type,
a Start Flow instruction cannot be subsequently
initiated for 300 milliseconds.
When MICR documents are read, the pulse sensed
from each character is transferred to the SorterReader's character recognition device for testing
of density and validity of encoding. If the character is not recognized as one of the 14 valid
symbols, a binary 15 is transferred to memory in
place of the unrecognizable character. Then, at
the conclusion of the read instruction, an automatic
program branch is taken if an error character
(the binary 15) is discovered in the core storage
input area. A similar program branch will occur
if the first character read is not the Amount
symbol. Corrective routines will usually reject
the faulty item and resume the document flow.
Document jams are detected in each of the two
principal areas of the Sorter-Reader: the feed,
align, and read areas; and the sorting area. If a
jam is detected in the fir'st area, the transport
mechanism halts immediately, preventing the
feeding of any additional documents. The documents
traveling to their selected pockets will continue
their course. Should a jam occur in the sorting
area, the feeder is also halted immediately, but
all items that .have passed the read head will attempt
to continue to their selected pockets.
When any pocket reaches 75% of its capacity
(approximately 600 documents), a warning indicator above the pocket is illuminated. If
the warning is ignored and the pocket becomes
full, the feeding mechanism ceases operations
and a full-pocket indicator is displayed on the
control panel of the Sorter-Reader. Displays
also indicate: the specific area in the SorterReader where an item jam has occurred; the
current mode of operation (on-line or off-line);
the activation of the endorser; the inability to
feed an item; and empty hopper conditions. Start,
stop, and end-of-job controls are provided on
the control panel, as well as along the length
of the Sorter-Reader, to increase the operator's
efficiency.
The Sorter-Reader can be operated off-line for
general MICR document sorting. Field and digit
selection for sorting is accomplished by pushbuttons on the control panel, which function in
conjunction with a plugboard. Override code
detection is available to allow for two-way segregation of high-volume items. In 'lddition, a zerokill feature segregates items that need no further
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
sorting because they contain non-significant
zeroes in all fields that remain to be sorted. In
the off-line mode of operation, all timing synchronization is controlled by the Sorter-Reader
itself.
The various models of the Burroughs SorterReaders function in basically the same manner as
described above. Individual differences in performance and configuration requirements are
described in the paragraphs that follow.
.121 BIOI and B 102 Sorter-Readers
The BIOI Sorter-Reader operates in an off-line
mode only, and can sort items into 13 pockets at
a maximum speed of 1,560 documents per minute.
The B 102 model has the ability to perform the
same functions in an on-line mode as well. A
standby station is provided to enable documents to
be processed singly if desired. The B 102 is
designed for operation with the B 251 (VRC) central processor.
.122 B 103 and B 104 Sorter-Readers
The B103 Sorter-Reader is also capable of speeds
up to 1,560 documents per minute over a 13-
pocket selection area, but it adds the provision for
an endorsing station instead of the standby station.
As a result, the flow mode is the only possible
mode of operation. TheB 103 model is available
with every B 100/200/300 Series Central Processor.
A special Start-Stop Bar is optionally available
with this model, providing the operator with
immediate access to the controls along the entire
extent of the pocket-select area. The B 104 is
the same model as the B 103, except that no
endorser can be attached.
.123 B 106 and B 107 Sorter-Readers
The Burroughs 13-pocket Sorter-.Reader is offered
with a slower peak rate of 1,200 documents per
minute as the B 106 and B 107 models. Originally
designed for use with the economy B 100 Series of
central processors, the B 106 and B 107 are
currently available for use with any level of central processor in B 100/200/300 Series. The B 106
Sorter-Reader is provided with an item standby
station in place of the B 107's endorsing station.
.124 B 116 Sorter-Reader
The B 116 model represents an enlarged version of
the Sorter-Readers listed above. Three more distribution pockets have been added, thereby reducing the number of passes required to complete
many sorting operations. The 16-pocket SorterReader also operates at a peak speed of 1,560
,
documents per minute while printing endorsements
on the reverse side of every item. The 16th
pocket has a capacity of 2,000 items, as compared
with the standard 800-item capacity. When the
. number of documents in any pocket reaches a programmed tally point, an indicator can be lit above
. that pocket and the system halted. Special features
include the full-length Start/Stop Bar and a powerdriven transport area cover. The B 116 SorterReader is designed for use with the B 300 Series
Central Processor when a 16-Pocket Control
Module js attached. It is also currently available
with every level of central processor in the
B 100/200/300 Series except the B 100 line; the
16-Pocket Control Module must be added to the
central processor in every case.
201: 103.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Input-Output
Data Communications System
INPUT-OUTPUT: DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .•••••.••• B 450 Disk File and Data
Comm unications Basic
Control.
B 248 Data Communications
Control Unit.
B 481 Teletype Terminal
Unit.
B 483 Typewriter Terminal
Unit.
B 493 Typewriter Inquiry
Station.
B 484 Dial TWX Terminal.
B 486 Central Terminal.
. 12
Description
The Burroughs B 450 Disk File and Data Communications Basic Control Unit houses the B 247 Disk
File Control (Section 201:042) and the B 248 Data
Communications Control. It is available for use
with the B 200/300 Series 6-microsecond central
processor only.
The B 248 Data Communications Control Unit provides the interface between the Central Processor
and 1 to 15 terminal units which are capable of
handling a variety of inquiry traffic requirements.
Up to four B 248 Control Units can be attached to
a system - one for every on-line central processor.
The B 248 can be located up to 50 feet from the
Processor, and is under control of the Processor
only while loading or unloading a terminal unit
buffer. The nominal data transfer rate between a
terminal unit buffer and the Processor core storage is 30,000 characters per second.
The principal functions performed by the B 248
Data Communications Control are:
• Selection and connection of from 1 to 15 Teletype,
Typewriter, Dial TWX, or Central Telephone
Terminal units, in any combination.
• Determination of "ready" status of any of the
attached t.erminal units within 20 microseconds.
• Generation of a Processor "interrupt" signal
when a selected terminal unit is ready to supply
input data or receive output data from the
Processor.
• Translation between Burroughs Common
Language (BCL) code and Baudot 5-level or
ASCII 8-level code.
The B 481 Teletype Terminal Unit is a Teletype
Model 28 Sequential Selector with selective calling
features, which provides the interface between the
B 248 and a network of teletype stations. The
B 481 provides buffer storage and performs
serial-to-parallel (input) and parallel-to-serial
(output) conversions of the teletype character
codes. From 1 to 399 teletype stations can be
serviced by a single terminal unit, allOWing a total
of 5,985 teletype stations in the network if only
teletype terminals are used. Each B 481 can
service only one teletype station at a time. The
B 481 has a buffer storage capacity of either 120
or 240 characters; access time is 20 microseconds.
A character control device provides for the insertion and deletion of special teletype control
characters and station disconnect signals. An
optional Teletype Page Printer can be included as
part of the B 481 Terminal Unit and used to
monitor all messages on the network .
The B 483 Typewriter Terminal Unit provides
facilities for connecting from 1 to 8 Typewriter
Inquiry Stations to the communications system.
The unit contains an input buffer which is capable
of storing simultaneous inputs of 60 characters
from each of 8 inquiry stations. An input scanning
device accepts data as it becomes available (a
character at a time) from any of the 8 stations,
and directs it to the proper portion of the buffer.
An interrupt and latch facility holds the input
buffer to a station while data is transferred
through the B 248 Data Communications Control
. to the Central Processor.
The input buffer is also utilized as an output
buffer ,and stores reply messages from the
Processor under control of timing signals
generated in the terminal unit. Output buffer
readout to the Typewriter Inquiry Station is also
under control of the terminal unit.
The B 493 Typewriter Inquiry Station utilizes a
Teletype Send-Receive Paper Printer set. It
communicates with the B 483 Terminal Unit via a
multiple-conductor cable which can be up to 1
mile long, and it can be used for input and output
of alphameric data at up to 10 characters per
second.
The B 484 Dial TWX Terminal Unit provides the
facilities required to use stations of the Dial TWX
network as inquiry and transmission devices. The
B 484 unit contains 480 positions of input-output
buffering that can accept messages from up to
eight stations of the Dial TWX network simultaneously. The buffer size can be segmented into
groups of 60, 120, 240, or 480 positions, depending
on the number of channels to be utilized - 8, 4, 2,
or 1. A Model 103A Data-Phone subset must be
used as an interface between each channel and the
TWX network. Normal telephone dialing procedures
are followed in establishing contact between one of
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
'201:103,120
. 12
Description (Contd.)
the eight channels and each Terminal Unit. If it
is not desired to provide each channel with its own
number, a sequential calling device is available
from the telephone company. This device connects
the caller to the next available input-output channel,
rather than directing him to a specific path. With
this arrangement, the caller will receive a busy
signal only if all of the buffered channels are
unavailable.
After a connection between a TWX station and the
B 484 Terminal Unit has been established, the
operator types an input message on the Dial TWX
statiOn keyboard, using a Model 33 or 35 Teletypewriter unit. The message is transmitted and
loaded into the Terminal Unit's buffer as it is
keyed in. After the message has been processed,
the Terminal Unit sends the central processor's
response to the awaiting channel. Until the station
has received the "disconnect code," it can continue to communicate with the processing center.
The B 484 Terminal Unit can accept messages
larger than the buffer size established for each
channel, but only one such message can be accepted
at anyone time. All input-output-Plessages controlled by the Dial TWX Terminal Unit can be
monitored by connecting a B 493 Typewriter
Inquiry Station to the Terminal Unit. When the
monitor station is disconnected, the typewriter
can be used in its normal manner.
The B 486 Central Terminal Unit serves as an
interface between the central processor and up to
96 Burroughs On-line Teller Consoles. Each
branch of a bank can communicate with the main
office through its Teller Consoles and normal
telephone lines. Up to eight Teller Consoles can
be controlled by a Remote Terminal Unit. The
Remote Terminal Unit in each office monitors the
input-output status of all local Teller Consoles,
converts and checks information being transmitted
to and from the processing center, and initiates
all message and reply transmission. A Model
202D Data-Phone subset is required in each office
for every Remote Terminal Unit used, to convert
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
that unit's signals into a form acceptable for
telephone-line transmission. A central office
bridge, available from the telephone company,
can connect up to nine lines from several different
offices into one transmission channel in order to
maximize the use of the six communication channels
available in each Central Terminal Unit.
The Central Terminal Unit at the processing center controls six communications input-output
channels. Each channel can control up to 16
Teller Consoles, providing a maximum of 96
Consoles for each Central Terminal Unit. If
the input messages have been sent via Data:"Phone
subsets, they must be reconverted to signals
acceptable to the Central Terminal Unit by DataPhone subsets at the processing center. The
Central Terminal Unit accepts and stores mes-,
sages until the central processor is ready to process them. Replies can be sent back to the
originating Teller Console through the Central
Terminal Unit according to a channel-queueing
discipline established by the B 248 Data Communications Control Unit.
Burroughs estimates that the average transaction
time for its On-line Teller System is 8 seconds.
To achieve and maintain that rate requires that
no more than 1,000 transactions per channel, or
62 per Teller Console, be processed every hour.
The B 200/300 Operating System I has been
announced for use with the On-line Teller System.
Program library calls and operator interrupts
can be controlled by the Operating System, but
no provisions have been included for the automatic
control of all input-output demands on the central
processor.
First delivery of Burroughs data communications
equipment occurred in November, 1964. The Online Teller System was first installed during the
second quarter of 1965.
/
6/65
201:111.100'
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Simultaneous Operations
SIMU L T ANEOUS OPERATIONS
Buffer storage facilities are the same for each of the B 100/200/300 Series Systems.
These facilities include two input buffers and one output buffer in the central processor, as
well as local buffers in the printer, tape lister, and data communications terminal units. The
assignment of the processor buffers is as follows:
• Input Buffer 1 - card reader or paper tape reader.
• Input Buffer 2 - card reader, paper tape reader or MICR sorter-reader.
• Output Buffer - card punch or paper tape punch.
The use of the various buffers permits several input-output operations to take place
simultaneously while internal processing proceeds unhindered (except during the short periods
required to load and unload the buffers). For example, as many as nine input-output units can
be operating during computation (two card readers, one card punch, three tape listers, and up
to three data communications devices).
The maximum number of peripheral units that can be connected to each of the central
processors is listed on Page 201:031. OIl. Two line printers can be used (with all but the
VRC System) if a special dual-printer module is added to one of the printers. Two tape
listers can be used as alternatives to the line printers, but a combination of one printer and
one lister is not allowed. Both printing and paper advance operations can occur on the line
printer(s) or tape lister(s), in parallel with other operations.
The B 401 Record Processor is used only in the VRC System, and its data transfer
operations are not buffered. However, forms and ledger card movements can occur independently. In a similar manner, magnetic tape read and write operations cannot occur in
parallel with any other operation, but up to six simultaneous tape rewind operations are permitted.
Disk File read and write operations are not overlapped, so the processor is locked
out for an average of 20 milliseconds rotational delay plus the full data transfer time (at
100,000 characters per second) for each read or write instruction. The processor can,
however, be released during programmed read-backs to check for Disk File recording errors.
Multiple data communications operations can occur in parallel with other operations
because of buffer facilities in the following units:
• B 481 Teletype Terminal Unit - one buffer of 120 or 240 characters
capacity.
• B 483 Typewriter Terminal Unit - eight 60-character input-output
buffers.
• B 484 Dial TWX Terminal Unit - eight 60-character input-output
buffers.
• B 486 Central Terminal Unit -
twelve 86-character input-output
buffers.
To summarize, the following operations are mutually exclusive; i. e., only one
operation from this group can be performed at a time:
• Internal processing.
• Magnetic tape reading or writing.
• Disk File reading, writing, or rotational delay.
• B 401 Record Processor data transfer operations.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201: 121.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Instruction list
INSTRUCTION LIST
These instructions are common to all B 100/200/300 Series systems.
INSTRUCTION
Op.
M
N
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
M
M
M
M
N
N
N
N
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
C
C
C
C
5
0
N
A
B
C
5
1
N
A
B
C
5
2
N
A
B
C
5
4
N
A
B
C
5
5
N
A
B
C
5
6
N
A
B
C
6
0
A
B
C
6
b
1
A
9
M
N
7
M
M
N
N
B
C
C
B
C
8
If
A
A
A
N
@
A
A
M
N
B
M
N
A
" ..
If
4
B
A
Arithmetic
A + B - C,B, or A. M, N specify length of operands.
A - B ~ C, B, or A. M, N specify length of operands.
A x 13 - C. M, N specify length of operands.
A -<- B _ C. M, N specify length of operands.
Logic
Compare A to B alphameric, branch to C if equal. N specifies
field length.
Compare A to B, zone bits only, branch to C if equal.
N specifies field length.
Compare A to B, numeric, branch to C if equal •.. N specifies
field length.
Compare A to B alphameric, branch to C if unequal.
N specifies field length.
Compare A to B, zone bits only, branch to C if unequal.
N specifies field length.
Compare A to B, numeric, branch to C if unequal.
N specifies field length.
Jump to A, B, or C depending on low, equal, or high com-,
parison indicators.
Jump to A.
No operation; proceed to next instruction in sequence.
Halt after all operations in progress have been executed.
Opcode, M, N displayed on console.
Data Transfer
Transfer M fields, N char starting at A to C.
Transfer M char starting at A to C thru mask starting at B.
In:Qut-OutEut; Punch Cards
Transfer contents of card buffer specified by N to storage
starting at C and read 1 card to buffer or go to B if End of
File.
Transfer 80 char from storage starting at A to punch buffer
and punch 1 card.
In:Qut-OutEut; Printer and Lister
Transfer 120 char to print buffer for printer (or 44 char for
lister) starting at A. Print lline with spacing specified by
M or skipping specified by N. For lister, M specifies
lister and N specifies tape number. B specifies branch
addres s if end of page (printer) or out of paper (lister).
Space or skip without printing on printer or lister, specified
by M and N. B specifies branch address if end of page
(printer) or out of paper (lister).
B
\
\
OPERATION
C
B
©
In:Qut-Out:Qut; Sorter-Reader
Transfer all fields from Sorter-Reader document to core
storage starting at C, in flow mode. A, B are branch
addresses.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
201: 121.200
INSTRUCTION
N
A
B
C
#
5
A
B
C
#
6
A
B
Gp.
.2
M
N
N
C
C
0
C
C
C
C
4
7
N
D
1
N
A
B
C
D
2
N
A
B
C
D
3
N
A
B
D
D
4
N
N
2
6
8
5
N
N
OPERATION
Transfer char thru transit field only from Sorter-Reader
document to core storage at C, in flow mode. A, Bare
branch addresses.
Transfer all fields from Sorter-Reader document to buffer,
in flow mode. A, B are branch addresses.
Pocket select in Sorter-Reader. Pocket set by N.
Demand feed and pocket select in Sorter-Reader. Pocket
set by N.
stop flow mode in Sorter-Reader; select pocket set by N.
Start flow mode in Sorter-Reader; select pocket set by N.
Increase batch counter by 1 (B 103 and B 116 only).
Start buffered flow and pocket select. Pocket set by N.
In:eut-Out:eut; M~etic Ta:ee
Read one block forward on unit N to storage starting at C.
A, B are branch addresses.
Write one block on unit N from storage starting at A. B, C
are branch addresses.
Erase one block on unit N from storage starting at A. B is
branch address.
Backspace one block on unit N.
Rewind unit N.
These instructions, and instruction modifications, are common to all systems except VRC.
INSTnUCTION
Op.
M
E
M
F
M
NAB
F
4
N
F
&
N
F
8
NBC
NAB
ABC
C
B
C
A
J
P
M
N
A
9
M
N
A
OPERATION
C
In:eut-Out:eut; Paper Ta:ee
Transfer 80 characters from storage starting at A to output'
buffer and punch paper tape. B, C are branch addresses.
Punching insiructions are indicated by M.
Transfer characters (buffered or unbuffered) from paper
tape unit N into C. A, B, are branch addresses. M indicates buffered or not.
Space paper tape forward on unit N to next control code .. 'B is,
branch on End-of-Tape address.
. .,~ '..
Space paper tape backward on unit N to next control code.' '
C is branch on Beginning-of-Tape address.
Rewind paper tape on unit N. B, C are branch addresses.
Address Modification
Modify one 3-character address, specified by B, by the
quantity stored in A.
B
C
-Data Transfer
Transfer zone bits of characters from A to C. M selects
number of words; N selects number of characters.
LogiC
Halt after all operations in progress have been executed.
Opcode, M, N, and A are displayed on console. If the 2
bit of the M variant is on, a branch to the address specified
by A occurs after the system is restarted. B 103 or B 116
Sorter-Reader pocket indicators are lit as specified by N.
,/
(Contd.)
6/65
201: 121.300
INSTRUCTION LIST
.3
These instructions pertain only to the VRC System.
INSTRUCTION
Op.
M
NAB
C
G
M
N
C
1
NAB
C
2
NAB
C
3
NAB
C
4
5
8
N
0
A
C
C
C
G
G
H
9
o
1
NAB
C
H
1
NAB
C
OPERATION
Input-Output; Record Processor
Select hopper and read magnetic stripe on record into core
storage starting at C. N selects feed or feed and read
where applicable.
M operation
primary feed
N function
as above
N
Spacing
Spacing suppressed.
Form A only.
Form B only.
Forms A and B.
Record only.
Form A and record.
Form B and record.
Forms A and B and record.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
B
N
Restore Forms A and B.
Single-space record and/or forms without printing. B is branch
address. Spacing controlled by N as in table below.
N
01
2
3
4
5
6
7
I
4
B
branch
stripe read
address
control
branch
stripe read
as above
manual feed
address
control
branch
stripe read
auxiliary feed
as above
address
control
optical reader
N/ A
N/ A
N/ A
R. P. keyboard
select lamp N/ A
N/ A
Eject record to primary stacker, write on stripe from storage
starting at A. C is branch address.
Eject record to auxiliary stacker without writing.
Print and single space on record and/or forms from storage,
starting at A. Spacing controlled by N as shown below. B,
C are branch addresses.
Print and single space on forms only from storage, starting at
A. Spacing controlled by N as shown below. B, C are branch
addresses.
0-
I
I
A
Spacing
Spacing suppressed.
Form A only.
Form B only.
Forms A and B.
Record only.
Form A and record.
Form B and record.
Forms A and B and record.
Align record to line specified by information in core storage
starting at A.
A
,
i
\
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
201: 121.400
.4
These instructions, and instruction modifications, are available in the B 200/300 Series 6-microsecond
central processor.
INSTRUCTION
Op.
M
NAB
C
8
M NAB
C
#
M
B
C
@
M
A
M
Q
1
Q
2
B
C
D
8
NAB
C
D
9
NAB
C
D
10
NAB
C
K
o
NAB
C
K
2
NAB
C
K
4
N
C
K
8
L
1
NAB
L
2
NBC
L
4
NAB
N
A
NAB C
A
A
ABC
C
OPERATION
Date Transfer
Transfer M characters starting at A to C. thru mask
starting at B.
N = 0: standard mask (fiscal).
N = 1: inverted mask (fiscal).
N = 2: alphameric mask.
Input-Output; Punched Cards
Transfer contents of card buffer specified by N to storage
starting at C and read 1 card to buffer, or go to B if Endof-File. M = halt or branch on Not Ready condition.
Transfer 80 characters from storage starting at A to punch
buffer and punch 1 card.
M = BCL, Bull, or ICT code designation.
Input-Output; Lister
Transfer 44 char to buffer from memory starting at A.
Print 1 line on lister speCified by M and tape specified by
N. B specifies branch address on out-of-paper. C specifies
a print-error branch.
Input-Output; Supervisory Printer
Print on supervisory printer starting at A. Continue until
group mark is encountered.
Read from supervisory printer into storage locations starting
at C. B is branch address upon end of input message.
Input-Output; Magnetic Tape
Write one record on unit N starting at A and continuing to
end of storage. Band C are branch addresses.
.
Read one binary record on unit N into storage beginning at C.
A and B are branch addres ses .
Write one binary record on unit N starting at A and continuing
to end of storage. Band C are branch addresses.
Input-Output; Disk File
Write N segments on disk file starting at A from processor
storage locations starting at B. C is branch on "Not Ready"
address.
Read N segments from disk file starting at A into storage
starting at B. C is branch on "Not Ready" address.
Transfer the addressing word at A to disk file control, release the central processor, and read N segments for read
errors.
rD.terrogate disk file and branch on "Busy," error, "Write
Lockout," or invalid address.
Input-Output; Data Communications
Interrogate inquiry ready on unit N. A, C, are branch
addresses. B is store address on terminal unit.
Transfer contents of terminal unit N buffer to processor
storage starting at C. B is branch address.
Transfer to terminal unit N buffer data from processor
storage starting at A. B is branch address.
(Contd.)
6/65
201: 121 500.
INSTRUCTION LIST
.5
These instructions, except those marked with asterisks, are available in the B 300 Series. central processors
only. Asterisks denote those instructions that can also be obtained on the B 200 Series 6'-microsecond
central processor through field or factory modifications.
Op.
INSTRUCTION
M NAB
C
NAB
C
M
U
N
A
A
* @
M
N
A
M
NAB
B
M
N
C
M
N
R
M·N
*
7
*
P
*
C
B
A
C
M
NAB
C
M
NAB
C
ABC
N
ABC
M
Input-Output; Punch Cards
Transfer contents of card buffer specified by N to storage
starting at C, and one card to buffer if Mis 0 or 1. Go to B
if End-of-File, and go to A if reader is busy or not ready
when M is 1. A 2 in M reads the binary card image into
storage starting at A.
Transfer 160 characters from storage starting at A and punch
the binary image in one card.
Transfer 80 characters from storage starting at A to punch
buffer and punch one card. M designates punching in BCL,
BULL, or ICT code. N determines stacker selection with
B 304.
Input-Output; Lister
Transfer 44 characters to buffer from memory starting at A.
Print chars 1-22 on master lister and tape designated by M;·
print chars 23-44 on lister and tape designated by N.
B specifies branch address on out-of-paper.C specifies a
print-error branch.
Space, skip, or slew master lister. as specified by M, and any
designated non-master lister and tape as specified by N.
Input-Output; Sorter-Reader
Pocket select in sorter. Pockets 1-16 are selected by N.
M determines starting, stopping, or maintaining demand or
flow mode of sorter operation.
M
T
OPERATION
NAB
C
Data Transfer
Transfer M fields and N characters from storage starting at A,
translate the characters to any 6- or 12-bit code, and store
the result starting at C.
Transfer M fields and N characters from lJlemory starting at A
to memory starting at C, and go to location specified by B if
a "B" bit is over M.
Transfer zone bits of characters from memory. starting at A
to memory starting at C, and go to location specified by B
if a "B" bit is over M. M and N specify the size of the transfer.
Compress a field of numeric data starting at the memory location
specified by A and store the packed data starting at the address
specified by C. The size of the field to be compressed is expres sed by B.
Expand a field of numeric data compressed in storage beginning
at the addref!s specified by A and store the expanded digits
starting at the address specified by C. The size of the expanded
record is specified by B.
Unit Interrogate
Interrogate the input-output unit designated by M and N, and go
to memory location specified by A, B, or C if the unit is busy,
not ready, or in an error state, respectively.
\
"'-..
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201 :131.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Coding Forms
Assembly Languages
CODING FORMS: ASSEMBLY LANGUAGES
.1
BASIC ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE (B 100/200/300 Series Systems)
0,
D
.
M
N
1
2
,• "
It 12 I
. . • ,. •
A
3
a ADDIUS
ADDIlISS
, •
C
9
6
I
,
14 IS 16 17
,.:"
ADDU"
I
,AGI
CONSTANTS
I
REMARKS
LINE.
SIl!
I
2021 22 23 2' 2S I I . , •• 29 3031
I
a
1 2 3 4 5 67 8 9 T E
n
3::1 3.. 3! 36 37 3139 40 4' 4243 ....
"
56
.,
" "
,.
I
2
I
.
I
,
i
I
,
I
i
I
.
i
I
J
0
4
0
S
0
6
0
7
I
4, I •
IVM.OL.IC
L.A.IIL.
OP
VARIAN'
CODII
MIN
7.1101111 13 141S Ie 17
011
011
ulllle
OIJ
II I2U 24 ZllIe
I
_lENT.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
J
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
1
I
L
I
I
CHAR.
.neo 11I1I2n 15458 !II !l7151 01.0 It 112
I
I
I
I
42411144 114'474'
I
II
I
T••
I
071
I
Z7ulu 1031 !1 UUUUS7U ,,4041
C ADDRIISS
CHAR.
I
I
I
I
_lENT.
I
I
.1
• ADDRIU'
TA.
CHAR.
D
E
G
H
I
0
I
I
L
I
2
M
K
/
I
oil
0-1
10J
IIJ
III
tjENT
I
I
041
011
oil
A ADDRII ••
fA.
8
C
9
ADVANCED ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE (B 200/300 Series Systems)
1L.lr
NO. r
A
0
I
I i
.2
0
0 8
i
I
•
787910
I
REMARKS
U U!e'I'" ''''''oJ71 71t1J 7411117117 7ulilel
. I
i
I
i
.i
6/65
201:141.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Data Code
'
Internal, Printer, ,Lister,
Sorter-Reader, Disk File
DATA CODE: INTERNAL, PRINTER, LISTER,
SORTER-READER, DISK FILE, '
.23
Character Codes
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
0
16
32
_3
0
A
B
C
0
BLANK
J
I
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
@5
12
13
14
15
?
:6
>1
<
$1
;
K
L
M
N
0
P
Q
R
$
W
&
*-
Jci
(
)
=
D
E
F
G
H
#4
~
48
+2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
©
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
[
~
S
T
U
V
X
y
Z
,
F
..]
Group mark in storage; printed as-.
Printed as +.
Printed as x.
Code for MICR amount symbol.
Code for MICR transit number symbol.
Code for' MICR on us symbol.
Code for MICR dash symbol.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201 :142.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
DatI! Cqde
Alphameric Card
DATA CODE: ALPHAMERIC CARD
.1
USE OF CODE: •••.• Alphameric Card Code.
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
.23
Character Codes
OVER PUNCH
UNDERPUNCH
.21
Character Size: . . . . . 1 column.
12
11
&
-
0
1
2
3
4
+
x
A
5
E
F
None
None
12
0
11
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
IS-O
8-7
6/65
6
7
8
9
e'IQj" '
:
>.
.~
J
K
/
B
C
L
M
T
U
V
W
X
y
D
G
'.
H
I.
N
0
P
Q
R
. !Ii'
[
...
J
)
<
+--
S
'L,
l'
I
-.19
-
J
~
"
201: 143.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Data Code
Magnetic Tape
DATA CODE: MAGNETIC TAPE
.1
USE OF CODE: . • . • . Magnetic Tape.
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
.21
Character Size:. . •
.22
Character Structure
.221 More significant
pattern: . . . .
. 222 Less significant
pattern: • . • •
6 bits + even parity bit.
. 2 bits; 16, 32.
• 4 bits; I, 2, 4, 8.
• 23
Character Codes
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
48
0
16
32
'!
Blank
&
1
A
/
J
2
S
K
B
C
3
T
L
4
M
D
U
E
V
N
5
6
W
0
F
X
P
G
7
Y
H
8
Q
z
R
I
9
0
CR
+
-#
11
'IF
,
$
12
13
@
%
-
*)
..
.;;
~
15
:
>
*1
[
(
<
Note 2
Notes: 1. Tape mark.
2. Group mark in core
storage.
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201 :144.100
Burroughs B 1001200/300 Series
Data Code
.
Record Processor
DATA CODE: RECORD PROCESSOR
.1
USE OF CODE: . . . . . B 401 Record Processor.
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
.21
Character Size: . . • . . 4 bits + even parity bit .
. 22
Character Structure
.221 . More significant
pattern: . . . . . . . . none.
.222 Less significant
pattern: . . . . . . " 4bi1!:s; 1,2,4,8.
.23
Character Codes
PATTERN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SYMBOL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
6/65
)
201:145.100
Burroughs a 100/200/30D Serie~
Data Code
Paper Tape
..'
..
DATA CODE: PAPER TAPE
•1
USE OF CODE: .••.. B 141 Paper Tape Reader
and B 341 Paper Tape
Punch.
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
. 21
Character Size: . . . . . 6 data tracks + 1 odd parity
track + 1 track for endof-line symbol.
.22
. . 23
Character Codes
Less
Significant
Pattern
0
16
32
48
0
BLANK
0
-
&
1
1
/
J
A
2
2
S
K
B
3
3
T
L
C
4
4
U
M
D
5
5
V
N
E
6
6
W
a
F
7
7
X
P
G
8
8
Y
Q
H
9
9
Z
R
I
10
:
f
x2
+
11
#
,
$
12
@
%
*
[
13
?3
=
)
(
14
>
1
;
<
15
~
"
More Significant Pattern
Character Structure
.221 More significant
pattern: . . . . . • . . . 2 zone bits; X = 32, 0=16.
.222 Less significant
pattern: . . . . . . . . . 4 numeric bits; 8, 4, 2, 1.
Notes:
©
~
Note 1
1. Tape feed code.
2. Multiplication sign.
3. Invalid code (as punched).
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201:146.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Data Code
Collating Sequence
DATA CODE: COLLATING SEQUENCE
,1
USE OF OODE. • . •
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
internal collating
sequence.
In ascending sequence:
blank
[
(
<
+ (group mark)
&
$
•
"/
H
I
-0
J
K
L
M
N
0
p
Q
R
/
s
T
%
=
U
V
W
X
#
Y
@
Z
0
>
~, • (tape mark)
+0
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
6/65
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
? (invalid code)
201:151.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Problem Oriented Facilities
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
.1
UTILITY ROUTINES
.11
Simulators of Other
Computers: . . . . . . . none.
.12
Simulation by Other Computers
blocked 10 records in and 14 out, using three 50KC
tape units, within 34 minutes. In order to use
this program, a B 200/300 6-microsecond central
processor with 9,600 characters of core storage
is required, in addition to three magnetic tape
units and a line printer (any models).
By Burroughs B 220
Disk File Sort Generator ill
Reference: . . . . . . . . Burroughs Corporation.
Date available: . . . . . January, 1961.
Description:
Reference: . . . . . . . .
Record size: . . . . . . .
Block size: . . . . . . . .
Key size: . . . . . . . . .
File size: . . . . . . . . .
A general computer simulation of the B 200 Series
equipment, including the Multiple Tape Listers,
Sorter-Readers, and Record Processor, by using
combinations of B 220 printers and magnetic tapes.
Designed primarily to enable early B 200 Series
users to test their programs on the earlier B 220
system, this simulator is no longer in use.
.13
Data Sorting and Merging
Sort Generator I
Reference: . . . . . . . .
Record size: ..• , ...
Block size: . . . . . . . .
Key size: . . . . . . . . .
File size: . . . . . . . . .
Number of tapes: . . . .
Date available: . . . . .
Description:
URS-035.
600 characters max.
800 character max.
23 characters max.
one reel.
3 to 6.
May, 1963.
Auto-load routines for magnetic tape sorting are
produced and are claimed to be about 95%
efficient. The generator can be run on either
a card or tape system. It is a one-pass generator, and less than 5 minutes are required to generate a sort program. Operating instructions and
complete documentation are printed, and a Restart
Program is produced.
Generalized Three- Tape Sort
Reference: . . . . . . . .
Record size: . . . . . . .
Block size: . . . • . • . .
Key size: . . . . . . . . .
File size: . . . . . . . . .
Number of tapes: ...•
Date available: . . . . .
Des cription:
\
URS-043.
I, 200 characters max.
1,200 characters max.
47 characters max.
one reel.
three ..
April, 1964.
Two specification cards containing the input-output
parameters and sorting requirements are loaded with
the object sort program. After about one minute
of initialization operation, during which the best
sorting techniques for the tape block length are
selected, the multi-phase sort begins. Specification
card editing is provided, but no provision is included
for restarts once the actual sort has begun. With
this program it is possible to sort 20,000 80character records with a sort key of 20 characters,
©
URS-053.
1,200 characters max.
1,920 characters max.
60 characters max.
dependent on number of
Disk File modules
available.
Input form: . . . . . . . . magnetic tape or Disk File.
Output form: . . . . . . . magnetic tape or Disk File.
Date available: . . . . . January, 1965.
Description:
Sort Generator III is designed to produce auto-load
object sort programs that utilize a Burroughs
Disk File for intermediate storage. Generation
requires about six minutes and can be performed
on a B 200/300 central processor with either 4,800
or 9,600 characters of core storage. In addition,
at least one module of Disk File storage (9.6 .
million characters) is required. The generated
object program accepts records from either magnetic tape or Disk File and sorts them in about
haIf the time required for tape sorts, according
to the manufacturer.
Two types of sort programs can be generated:
record sorts or tag sorts. Tag sorting eliminates
the need to process the entire data record during
each sort phase by generating a short control
record that corresponds to each data record, and
then sorting the control records. During the final
phase of the sort operation, the full records are
drawn in sequence from input area storage and
written on tape or another area in the Disk File.
One module of Disk File storage provides enough
intermediate storage to sort up to 84,000 80character records.
Disk File Chained Records Sort
Reference: . . . . . . . . URS-048.
Date available: . . . . . January, 1965.
Description:
The Chained Records Sort program is designed to
relocate Disk File records within a chain based
on the activity of each record. At the conclusion
of the sort, the Home location of each chain of
records will contain the most active record;
successive records in the chain will be arranged
in the order of descending activity. Processing
chained records arranged according to degree of
activity will reduce the number of accesses required
to find each record.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
201:151.130
• 13
Data Sorting and Merging (Contd.)
• Reset Disk File - clears and resets speciHed
areas to any preselected character.
The Chained Records Sort program sorts each chain
of records within either 4,800 or 9,600 characters
of B 200/300 core storage. Magnetic tape units
are not required. The user must insert his own
randomizing formula into the program in order to
direct the discovery of successive Home addresses
prior to each chain sort.
. 14
• Disk-to-Card - punches the contents of
specified areas of the Disk File .
Report Writing
Revised Report Generator I
• Tape-to-Disk - writes the contents of magnetic tape records onto specified areas of the
Disk File. Direct addressing is used.
Reference: . . . . . . . . URS-022, Tech. Bulletin
170R.
Date available: ....• April, 1962.
Description:
• Disk-to-Tape - writes the contents of specified
areas of the Disk File onto magnetic tape.
This routine generates specially-tailored object
programs that process input data from either
punched cards or magnetic tape to produce reports
on either punched cards or the on-line printer.
The only required peripheral devices are a card
reader, card punch, and printer; an optional magnetic tape version, however, reduces report program generation time to about 2. 5 minutes. An
80-card auto-load object program deck is produced
by the one-pass generator. Facilities a~e pro~ided
for controlling the printed format, for s1mulatmg
listing and tabulation of up to seven running totals,
and for maintaining up to four levels of totals. Each
report produced by a generated object program
includes a printed description of itself.
Report Generator -IA performs functions similar to
those of Report Generator I, except that the generated program is _produced in symbolic assembly
language in order to facilitate any necessary pro~
gram patching. An additional pass for assembly' 1S
therefore required in order to produce the machmelanguage object program.
.15
• Card-to-Disk - writes the contents of punched
cards onto specified areas of the DiE!k File,
using indirect addressing.
Data Transcription
• Disk-to-Printer- prints the contents of specified areas of disk storage.
• Disk-to-Disk - transfers information from
one section of Disk File storage to another.
.16
File Maintenance
Magnetic Tape COpy/Verify
Reference: . . . . . . . . DRS-031.
Date available: . . . . . January, 1963.
Description:
The Magnetic Tape Copy/Verify Program provides a means of reproducing and/or verifying
magnetic tape files. Reproduction is performed
on a record image basis. Up to five control totals
can be accumulated for each file being copied, in
addition to a record count. The program will
process either multiple-reel files or multiplefile reels. In the case of multiple-file reels, the
files to be processed are selected by the user.
Magnetic tape files can also be processe~ for
establishing or verifying control totals WIthOut
copying.
Data Conversion Program
Reference: • . . . . . . . URS-027.
Date available: . . . . . March, 1963.
Description:
This program allows data to be converted, in image
form, from one medium to another. Conversions
which can be performed include card, paper tape,
or magnetic tape input to any combination of card,
paper tape, printer, and/or magnetic tape output.
Anyone of 45 possible conversion operations may be
selected.
Disk File Utility Programs
Reference: . . . . . . . . URS-047.
Date available: . . . . . January, 1965.
Description:
The following programs are provided:
Disk File Record Maintenance System
Reference: . . . . . . . . URS-049.
Date available: . . . . . February, 1965.
Description:
Three routines are provided for Disk File
maintenance:
• Record Load Routine - loads records onto
the Disk File from punched cards.
• Record Change Routine - changes selected
portions of specified records. Input must be
punched card, and random addressing is used.
• Delete Record Routine - provides for deleting
a specified record from the Disk File. Direct
addressing is used.
(Conte!. )
6/65
201: 151.170
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
.17
Other
Library of Demand Deposit Accounting Programs
Reference: • • . . . . . . FAS-OOI through -13.
Date available: .•.•• October, 1962.
Description:
This is a library of standard financial programs to
assist in the preparation and installation of the
Visible Record Computer (VRC) System. These
programs are based on the MICR concept and direct
item input. They are:
,
',,-
FAS-002; MICR Conversion: .•••.•... prepares customer ledger
cards from magnetic ink
characters encoded on
documents prepared by
the Burroughs P 703
Amount and Account
Number Printer.
FAS-003; Preliminary Proof: •••. performs the first sort and
proving pass for documents
that affect the demand
deposit ledger.
FAS-004; Secondary
Proof: . . . • . . . . . . further proves all demand
deposit documents and
sorts them by ledger
control.
F AS-005; Sequence
Check and Stop Pay
Control: . • . . . . . . • assures that documents
have been sorted according
to ascending account
number (and stated
sequence).
F AS-006; Daily Account Updating: . . . . posts the daily activity to
the demand deposit ledger
(may be last program
used).
FAS-007; Daily Reversal and Correction: • . • . • . . • • a) Daily reversal and correction - posts documents
on a daily basis;
b) File maintenance used on a weekly basis to
adjust stored data on
ledger card magnetic
strips.
FAS-OOS; Balance
Transfer and
Analysis: .••••••. processes the customer
ledger cards for the last
time during the accounting
period.
FAS-009; Balance
Transfer and
Analysis Correction: ••.....•.•• selectively processes customer ledger cards not
processed in the preceding program.
©
FAS-OlO; Analysis
.. ,"
History: . . . • . . . . . provides hard copy .
record of analysis data.
FAS:-Oll; Management Report: . . • . . . a) New and Closed Accounts - Significant
Balance Changes - Large
Transactions Report use documents and ledger
cards as input.
b) Daily Consolidated
Control Report - uses
ledger proof cards to
obtain daily settlement
figures.
c) Monthly Consolidated
Income Report -.:. run
after Balance Transfer to
provide analysis data in
report form.
FAS-012; Trial
Balance: .•••..•.. provides a listing by account balance and number
of all ledger cards in the
ledger control.
FAS-013; Ledger
Card Preparation: .• uses punched cards which
are punched directly
from formats of the
ledger cards to be prepared.
Demand DepOSit/Proof and Transit Financial
Application Package
Reference: •••..••. Technical Bulletin 20022017.
Date available: . . . . . August, 1964.
Description:
The Financial Application Package provides a set
of 23 programs designed to process MlCR documents
and their associated records from the proof and
distribution of all items entering a banking institution to the updating of customer accounts. The
package includes full documentation for each program.
The programs are written in the Basic Assembly
Language, and are designed for use with any
B 100/200/300 Series tape-oriented central processor
and 4 magnetic tape units of any model. A MICR
sorter-reader, card reader, and line printer
(any available models) are also required. The
package includes the following programs:
Counter Proof: ..•.. converts all deposit information to magnetic tape;
segregates outgoing transit
work; develops cash-in
and cash-out totals for up
to 15 branches or tellers.
Transit: •••••••••. lists,. segregates, and
totals outgoing transit
work.
Preliminary Proof: .• proves, lists,' and totals
all checks drawn on the
bank; writes all valid
items onto magnetic tape.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201: 151.171
. 17
Q!illg: (Contd. )
Credit Tape Sort; Debit
Tape Sort: •••.•.• sort the credit item magnetic tape created in
Counter Proof and the
debit item tape created
in Preliminary Proof.
Correct Credit Tape: • performs a preliminary
file maintenance on the
sorted credit item tape.
Daily Transaction
Merge: •••••••••. merges the sorted credit
and debit tapes; develops
control totals for audit
trail purposes.
Transaction Journal: • produces a printed listing
of all items on the merged
input tape; balances to
control totals; lists separately any large transactions.
Stop Pay/List Post: •• lists any items that have
possible stop payment
orders against them;
produces a list of
individual items to be
posted to high activity
accounts.
Update: •••••••••. posts items from transaction tape to proper
accounts on the tape
master file; prints a
complete trial balance
report.
Reversal and Correction: • • • • • • • • • corrects the master account
file if necessary; reverses payment of items
that are to be returned.
Service Charge
Analysis: .••••••. analyzes each type of
account according to
service charge rules;
produces a tape to serve
as an input to preparation
of customers' statements.
Merge Month-to-Date
Transaction Tape: •• merges items on daily
transaction tape with
month-to-date items;
writes all transactions
for a cycled group of
accounts on tape for
monthly statement
printing.
Statement Preparation: prepares completely
addressed customer
statements with service
charges applied.
Report Programs Daily Referral Journal;
New and Closed
Accounts;
Significant Balance
Changes;
Overdrafts;
Unposted Transactions: •....••. produce 5 management
reports from an exception
item/account tape developed as an output to Update.
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
File Maintenance Programs Name and Address;
Master File: ..•••. provide capability of keeping
both magnetic tape files
up to date.
Conversion Programs Name and Address File;
Master File: .....• convert account and name/
address information
from punched cards to
magnetic tape for use in
this programming system.
Installment Loan Financial Application Package
Reference: . . . . . . • . FAS-015 Application Bulletin.
Date available: .•.•• May, 1965.
Description:
The Installment Loan Package provides 9 documented
programs that process loan payments through a
MICR sorter-reader and apply them to the master
file on magnetic tape. The package requires four
magnetic tape units. a line printer, and any
B 100/200/300 Series central processor, in addition
to the sorter-reader. The programs inclUded in
the package are listed as follows:
Preliminary Proof: .. converts information from
MICR loaD. payments to
magnetic tape; separates
items by type of account;
prints a transaction
journal with control
totals.
Daily File Maintenance:accepts any new loan
accounts; processes all
changes to loan master
file on magnetic tape.
Update: ••....•... processes daily transaction
tape. and master file
tape, applying all loan
payments; prints a Daily
Reference Journal; prepares an exception
item/account output tape.
Exception Report: •.. produces daily printed
reports of zero balances,
unposted payments, and
payments over 15 days
delinquent; other-thandaily reports include
delinquent loans, new
loans exceeding $5,000,
weekly dealers' and weekly
past due reports.
Dealer Earnings or
Employee Loan
Report: .••.•.••• lists all bank employee
loans and their status;
lists the four high-volume
dealers and shows earnings
of each.
Loan Classification or
Dealer Loan Report:. lists all loans according
to 10 classifications,
shOWing totals and delinquencies; categoriz es
loans by dealer, showing
totals and delinquencies.
(Contd. )
6/65
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
I
~-
. 17
201:151.172
Other (Contd.)
Bond Analysis and Accounting Program Package -
Customer Interest
Report: •••••••.• prepares a form for each
customer indicating his
yearly loan interest paid
for tax purposes.
Loan History Report: . provides a monthly picture
of the loan's history,
including accl'llal
information.
Loan Conversion: .•.. converts initial loan acco-.mt
information on punched
cards to magnetic tape;
develops conversiontotals for balancing.
The Bond Accounting Package provides four programs capable of analyzing a bond portfolio file
on punched cards and producing reports designed to
assist the portfolio management in the evaluation
of proposed and existing bond earnings. Program 1
projects the cash flow of future interest and maturity
payments resulting from an existing bond portfolio.
Program 2 calculates the effective rate of interest
for bonds being considered for purchase. Amortization schedules for premiums or discounts of
purchased bonds are developed by Program 3. The
final program in the package computes various
accounting entries for user-specified accounting
periods for the entire bond portfolio. The Bond
Analysis Package can operate with any B 200/300
6-microsecond central processor that has a card
reader and line printer as peripheral devices.
Management Science Series
Reference: .•.•.. , . MSS-044, MSS-005, and
MSS-006.
Date available: .•... January, 1965.
Des criptions:
Loan Payment Schedular Program The Loan Payment Schedular Program develops a
month-by-month schedule for any monthly-payment
loan, showing the portions of each payment that
are applied to interest and principal. The term of
payment or the payment itself can be fixed: the
program calculates whichever quantity is not
specified. The Loan Payment Schedular Program
functions with any B 200/300 6-microsecond
central processor and any model card reader and
line printer.
Bank Customer Service Model This 3-phase program simulates the interaction
between banking customers and specified facilities
of the bank. Banking equipment configurations,
both on-line and off-line, and tellers' schedules
can be evaluated in terms of total customer service
offered. By means of this program, proposed
operations changes can be evaluated with respect
to resulting customer service before any changes
are actually put into effect.
!
(
\
',,--
The user of this program must provide as input
the total number of customers expected for the
day, the number and length of the periods in the
day, and the distribution of the various customer
transaction types. The user must also specify the
number of tellers' windows available and the amount
of time a typical customer demands in order to be
completely serviced.
The printed output shows simulated customers'
movements through the bank, indicates waiting times
and processing times, and lists the number of
various types of customers serviced and the cumulative time for each type. In addition to the line
printer required to produce this report, the computer system configuration required to run the
program includes any B 100/200/300 Series tapeoriented central processor, two magnetic tape units,
and a card reader (any model) .
©
On- Line Teller System
Reference: . . . . . . . . Burroughs Corp.
Date available: ....• January, 1965. '
Description:
The On-Line Teller System is basically a special
configuration of on-line and off-line banking-oriented
hardware designed to permit direct -communications
between tellers located in branch offices and a
centrally-located data processing center. Burroughs
has prepared good documentation on the overall OnLine Teller System, and has designed an input-output
controller program to regulate all messages and
replies to and from the processing center. The data
communications equipment that functions as the data
link between Burroughs Teller Consoles and the
B 200/300 central processor is described in detail
in Report Section 201:103. _
B 200/300 Flow Chart Generator
Reference: . . . . . . . . Burroughs Corp.
Date available: . . . . . June, 1965.
Description:
The Flow Chart Generator produces detailed logic
flow charts, using standard symbols, for programs
coded in either the Basic or Advanced Assembly
Languages. The program provides numbered exit
connectors with flow chart page numbers for ease
of program logic tracing. The remarks-portion
of each symbolic source statement appears within
the statement's charted symbol, justified and
hyphenated as required. The symbol also contains
the mnemonic operation code for the statement
represented by the symbol. Charting proceeds
horizontally on the printed _output and includes all
program segment headings and symbolic labels or
references. Multiple-branch program switches
are clearly charted. Any invalid or nonexistent
exit points are checked and indicated as being in error.
In order to use the Flow Chart Generator, an input
tape must first be created during a Basic or
Advanced Assembly operation. Equipment configura-'tion requirements include a B 200/300 Series 6microsecond central processor, three magnetic
tape units. one card reader. and one line printer.
in any available models.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201: 161.1 00
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Process Oriented Language
Compact COBOL
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: COMPACT COBOL
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: •••••••••• B 200 Compact COBOL.
• 12
Origin:' .••••••••• Burroughs Corporation.
• 13
Reference: .•.••••. Compact COBOL for
Burroughs B 270/B280
Series Systems, Utility
Routine Series URS-052 •
Description
• 14
Compact COBOL is a subset of COBOL-61 that is
designed primarily for use in small-scale computers.
The standard language specifications for Compact
COBOL used in this section are those published in
the American Standards Association's X3.4 COBOL
Information Bulletin #5 in October, 1964. (It
should be noted that Compact COBOL has not been
adopted as an American standard to date.)B 200
Compact COBOL incorporates most of the features
of Compact COBOL listed in the ASA document.
Some features of COBOL-61 which are not provided
in the specifications for the Compact version have
been included in B 200 Compact COBOL. These
are listed below in the paragraphs headed "Restrictions" and "Extensions."
The B 200 Compact COBOL Translator requires a
B 273, B 283, or B 300 Central Processor with
4,800 positions of core storage, a card reader,
a printer, and four magnetic tape units. A descriptionof the translator canbe found in Section 201:183.
(6)
The ADD and SUBTRACT verbs permit only
two quantities to be added or subtracted.
The words TO or GIVING must be used with
these verbs .
(7)
The words TO or GIVING must be used with
the verbs MULTIPLY and DIVIDE .
(8) The DISPLAY and ACCEPT verbs cannot be
~ed.
.
(9)
.143 Extensions of B 200 Compact COBOL with respect
to ASA X3.4 CIB #5
(1) Data-names and procedure-names do not
need to have an alphabetic as the first
character.
(2) Section-names are allowed.
(3)
The following figurative constants are allowed:
ZEROS, ZEROES, SPACE, TAPE-MARK,
and GROUP-MARK.
(4)
The SOURCE-COMPUTER and OBJECTCOMPUTER paragraphs of the Environment
Division can have the MEMORY SIZE clause
and can indicate the number of CARD
READERS, LINE-PRINTERS, etc.
.141 Availability
Language specifications:. • • • • . . • • • • Burroughs B 200 Compact
COBOL Programmed
Instruction Course:
June, 1964.
Compiler: ••••••••• November, 1964.
.142 Restrictions of B 200 com~act COBOL with
Respect to ASA X3. 4 CIB, 5 .
(1)
Limits are placed upon the number of
data-names and procedure-names used in
a program.
(2)
The decimal point in numeric literals
cannot be at the left end of a number.
(3)
There are no SPECIAL-NAMES or 1-0CONTROL paragraphs in the Environment
Division.
(4)
(5)
6/65
The MULTIPLE REEL clause of the FILECONTROL entry is not permitted.
The VAL UE 'OF clause of the File DeSCription
entry is restricted to the use of non-numeric
literals.
The REEL option for the CLOSE verb is not
allowed.
. (5) Indentation is allowed in the Record Description
entry of the Data Division.
(6) In Record Descriptions, the SIZE, SIGNED,
and CLASS clauses are permitted.
(7)
The phrase OTHERWISE (ELSE) is permitted
in conditional statements.
(8) The phases EQUALS and EXCEEDS are permitted in relation tests.
(9)
The EXAMINE verb with the REPLACING ALL
option is provided.
(10) Option 2 of the PERFORM verb (TIMES) is
allowed.
(11) An AT END OF REEL ciause is added to the
WRITE verb.
(12) The symbol j (semicolon) and the word THEN
can be used as separators.
(13) The word CHANNEL is reserved for spacing on
the line printer.
201: 162.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Process Oriented Language
Disk File COBOL
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: DISK FILE COBOL
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . . . . . . . ..
B 200 Disk File COBOL .
.12
Origin: . . . . . . . . .
E. Saumets Associates
(under contract to Burroughs Corp.)
.13
Reference: .. . . . ..
"Burroughs B 200 Disk File
COBOL Compiler Description" (preliminary
information) .
.14
Description
The B 200 Disk File COBOL Compiler will accept
most of the language facilities of Required
COBOL-61 and a number of the facilities of Elective COBOL-61. This new compiler is designed to
take advantage of the fast-access, high-capacity
storage provided by the Burroughs Disk File during
both compilation and (when desired) object program
execution. Equipment requirements for compilation are a B 200/300 6-microsecond central processor with 9, 600 positions of core storage, one
module of Disk File storage, one magnetic tape
unit, a card reader, and a printer. A card punch
is also required if object program decks are to be
produced on punched cards. Burroughs expects the
compiler to use a total of 12 Disk File data tracks
of 24,000 characters each.
Although no detailed definition of the B 200 Disk
File COBOL language is available to date, present
indications are that it will include all of Required
COBOL-61 except for the minor deficiencies listed
in Paragraph. 142 below. Approximately ten of the
elements of Elective COBOL-61 will be implemented, including the COMPUTE, ENTER, and USE
verbs, the ADVANCING option of the WRITE verb,
compound conditional statements, the I-O-CONTROL paragraph, and segmentation of the object
program.
The most significant extensions to the COBOL-61
language in B 200 Disk File COBOL are those provided to facilitate Disk File processing. A special
File Description entry (type MD) permits the programmer to specify FILE-LIMITS, ACCESS MODE
(SEQUENTIAL or RANDOM), and ACTUAL KEY,
in addition to most of the entries in the type FD '
File Description entry used for files stored on sequential media. The OPEN verb can specify that
a file will be used for both input and output. In the
READ and WRITE verbs, a branch to any imperative statement can be executed upon detection of an
invalid key.
Sequential access to Disk File records will be provided automatically by the compiler. The programmer is responsible for file organization and
layout, and for any indirect addressing techniques
he chooses to use. The Disk File records can be
©
divided into header and trailer records, which can
be physically separated from one another. No file
may extend over more than one Disk File Storage
Unit consisting of one B 472 and up to four additional
B475 modules (a maximum of 48 million characters).
Compilations can be performed in any of three
modes: Compile and Go, Compile Deferred, and
Compile stack. Compilation speeds of about 75
source-program cards per minute are antiCipated
by the manufacturer on typical, "well-balanced"
source programs. Burroughs expects the compiler
to detect and flag all syntax errors in the Data and
Procedure Divisions during the first compilation
attempt unless a sentence contains more than one
error; in this case only the first error encountered
will be flagged during each compilation attempt.
Error diagnostics will be interspersed among the
lines of source coding in the source program listing.
Data and procedure names can be up to 30 characters in length; in the absence of qualification,
only the first 23 characters will be scanned to determine uniqueness. When data and procedure
names average seven characters or less in length,
it will be possible to store up to 600 unique names
in the symbolic dictionaries. There are no limitations upon the total number of referenced data
names nor on the number of Procedure Division
literals. A maximum of 24 files can be described
in anyone source program. A standard labelhandling technique is provided.
.141 Availability
Language: . . . . . . ..
Compiler: . . . . . . "
July, 1965.
July, 1965.
. 142 Deficiencies with Respect to Required COBOL-61
• TheSYNCHRONIZED and FLOAT DOLLAR
SIGN clauses of the Record Description entry
are not permitted.
•
No more than three nested levels are permitted in the OCCURS clause of the Record
Description entry.
•
Only simple conditions can be specified in the
UNTIL options of the PERFORM verb.
. 143 Extensions to COBOL-61
•
Features added to facilitate the use of mass
storage include a special MD File Description entry and special options for the READ,
WRITE, OPEN, CLOSE, and USE verbs; see
the Description above.
•
A WRITE verb option permits branching to any
imperative statement at the end of a page or
reel of the output file medium.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201: 171.1 00
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Machine Oriented Language
Basic Assembly Language
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: BASIC ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
REMARKS: . . . . . . •
Columns 72-77: . . . .
LINE: . . . . . . . • . • .
coder's remarks.
reserved for translator use.
3 digit input sequence number for lines of coding.
.23
Corrections: . . • . ..
use inserts in the LINE
numbers and manual replacement.
Description
. 24
SpeCial Conventions
This is a straightforward symbolic assembly language usable on any B 100/200/300 Series system
that includes a card (or punched tape) reader and
punch. Magnetic tape can be utilized when available
to speed up the translation process and reduce card
handling. The only unusual language features are
those which are necessitated by the machine address digit radices of 12, 10, and 40. A special
macro operation is provided to step an address by
a chosen value. Pseudo-instructions are provided
to control the allocation of storage.
.241 Compound addresses:
.242 Multi-addresses: .••
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
B 100/200/300 Series Basic
Assembly Language.
. 12
Origin: . . . . . .
Burroughs Corp.
.13
Reference:
Manual URS-O.41.
. 14
The B 200 Series Basic Assembly Language offers
less flexibility in label naming than most symbolic
assembly systems. A two-character "page" field
(used to assign coding sheet page numbers) and a
one-character "reference symbol" together make
up the three-character symbolic address of an instruction and/or data field.
.15
Publication Date: . ..
.2
LANGUAGE FORMAT
.21
Diagram:
.243 Literals: . . . . . . . .
. 244 Special coded addresses: . . . . . . .
.245 Other Axxx:
xxxJ:
xxxK:
xxxL:
Mxxx:
August, 1961.
refer to Assembly Language
Coding Specimen, Page
201:131.100.
.3
LABELS
.31
General
OP:
M:
...••..•..••
N:
A, B, C ADDRESS: ••
PAGE:
REF:
SIZE:
CONSTANTS: .•...
6 alphameric character
program identification
number.
3 alphabetic character
mnemonic operation code.
2 alphameric character
operation code variant.
2 alphameric character
operation code variant.
operand addresses, in 3
parts.
2 alphameric character
coding sheet.
optional 1 alphameric character line label.
3 digits; number of characters in a constant.
12 alphameric characters,
for literals or data areas.
bb*J is "This address plus
12" (b denotes blank).
- in first column of an Address field indicates address of next instruction
is to be inserted.
address of xxx.
address xxx+12.
address xxx+24.
address xxx+36.
actual data to appear in
machine coding.
.311 Maximum number of labels -
. 22
IDENT NO.:
none.
one per column; usually
three addresses per line.
* in first column of Address field plus literal in
Constants field.
.312
. 313
. 314
.315
.32
Procedures: . • . ..
Constants: . . . . • .
Items: . • . . • • • ••
Common label formation rule: ..•••.•
Reserved labels: •..
Other restrictions: •
Designators Address value: .. .
Absolute value: .. .
Literal: • . . • . . . .
1,800 .
200.
1,800.
yes.
yes.
see.315.
initial letter A.
initial letter M.
* in col 14 and 18.
Universal Labels
.321 Labels for procedures
Existence: ..•..•
Formation rule: ..
.322 Labels for library
routines: .••.•..
. 323 Labels for constants:
• 324 Labels for files: •..
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
mandatory.
address of first statement.
yes.
address .
none .
6/65
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
201: 171.325
.325 Labels for records: . none.
.326 Labels for variables:. address.
.. 33
Local Labels:
.4
DATA
. 41
Constants
none.
. 411 Maximum size
constants: .••...
.412 Maximum size
literals: . . • . . . .
.543 Label adjustment Set labels equal:. .
Set absolute value:
Clear label table: .
.544 Annotation Comment phrase: .
Title phrase: •...
.545 Other End of program: .•
12 characters.
.6
12 characters.
.7
.5
PROCEDURES
. 51
Direct Operation Codes
. •:51~. Mnemonic . Existence: ••....
Number: •••....
Example: . . . . . . •
Comment: •.•..•
.512 .Absolute: ••...••.
.52
.. . . .
. . . .. . . .
2.
. ... .
LNK.
none.
.......
none.
.53
Interludes:
.54
Translator Control
SPECIAL ROUTINES
AVAILABLE:
see Section 201:151.
LIBRARY
FACILITIES:
none .
.81
Macros
Code
LNK:
AAR:
.542 Allocation counter Set to absolute:
SLC •
Set to label:
OVR.
step forward:
ALC .
Step backward:
SLC .
Reserve area: • . . • CST.
...
.....
. ...
...
Description
sets linkage for subroutines.
steps an address value (by
creating a linkage to a
closed, 30-instruction address modification subroutine) .
Pseudos
Code
SLC:
ALC: •.•••.••.
END: . . . • . . . . •
OVR: ••......•
"
.541 Method of control Al~ocation counter: • pseudo.
Label adjustment: •• none.
Annotation: • . . • • • REMARKS columns
END.
MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES
. 82
.521 Number available Addressing:
.522 Examples Simple:
. 523 New macros:
special columns.
HDG pseudo.
special box.
.8
yes.
30 (VRC), 37 (B 260, B 270,
B 280). 49 (B 263. B 273,
B 283). or 58 (B 300).
ADD.
all 3 characters in size.
none.
Macro-Codes
no.
no.
no.
SAD: .....••••
HDG:
CST:
IGM:
Description
set allocation counter to
absolute value .
step allocation counter
forward •
end assembly.
sets allocation counter to
any value (absolute or
symbolic) and assembles
balance of first 4,800
characters in auto-load
form with literals.
permits M and N columns
to be used together for a
symbolic address.
allows identification or ex- ",
planatory remarks.
defines I/O areas, working
storage, constants, and
masks.
inserts a group mark
character in core
storage.
./
./
6/65
201: 172.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Machine Oriented Language
Advanced Assembly Language
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: ADVANCED ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
.1
GENERAL
· 11
Identity:
. 12
Origin:
· 13
Reference:
· 14
Description
•
Furnished library subroutines include
input-output error procedures and their
linkages, as well as a debugging package
of dumps, snapshots, and tracers .
•
Automatic.field-length definition is provided to facilitate the coding of all arithmetic, compare, data transfer, and
editing commands.
•
Symbolic address incrementing by up to
999 characters is provided, in addition to
entry incrementing and decrementing by
up to 99 entries.
•
Symbol tables or cross-reference listings
of labels can be provided if desired.
. . . . . Advanced Assembler I.
. . Burroughs Corp .
Manual URS-044.
Advanced Assembler I is an expanded version of
the Burroughs Basic Assembler (see page
201:171.100). The principal features of this new
assembly language include the capability to use up
to 10,000 six-character name labels and the provision for use of a comprehensive and expandable
library of program subroutines. The limited labelnaming facilities of the Basic Assembly Language
have been further improved in the new version by
the inclusion of up to 10,000 program point labels
to complement the use of symbolic name labels.
A fixed field-length coding form, similar to the
IBM Symbolic Programming System (SPS) coding
form, has been retained. Operand lengths need not
be specified in every instruction. The size of the
operand is specified once, in the Data Division
section of the program. All subsequent references
to the operand will then have the correct size inserted by the translator.
The Advanced Assembler I translator requires a
B 200/300 6-microsecond Central Processor and
3 magnetic tape units, in addition to a card reader,
line printer, and card punch, in any models. If
Disk File storage is available, only one magnetic
tape unit is required for use in conjunction with.
one Disk File storage module. Programs written
in the Basic Assembly Language can also be
assembled by the Advanced Assembler I in order
to utilize the increased capabilities of the improved
translator. See Section 201: 182 for further details
about the Advanced Assembler I translator.
The major improvements of the Advanced Assembler
lover the B 200 Basic Assembler can be summar~
ized as follows:
o
Either Basic Assembler or Advanced
Assembler I is acceptable as symboliclanguage input.
•
Up to 10,000 six-character symbolic name
labels and 10,000 program point labels can
be utilized.
•
Up to 100 program point labels of the same
character are permitted within a program
segment.
•
Up to 20 library subroutine call entries are
permitted within a program segment.
©
. 15
Publication Date: . . . . May, 1964.
.2
LANGUAGE FORMAT
.21
Diagram: . . . . . . . . . refer to Assembly Language
Coding Forin, page
201:131.100.-
.22
Legend:
Page:
. . . . . . . . . . . 3-alphameric-character
coding form sequence
number.
Line: . . . . . . . . . . . 3-alphameric-character
entry sequence number;
units position is used for
insertions.
Symbolic Label: . . . . 6-alphameric-character
field or instruction
name; or a decimal
point .and a reusable _
alphabetic character
program point marker.
Op. Code: . . . . . . . . . 4-alphameric-character
mnemonic operation code.
Variant: . . . . . . • . . . 4-numeric-digit operatiori
code modifier; for many
commands it is separated
into 2-digit M and N
Variant modifiers;
A, B, C address.: . . . . operand addresses, in
3 parts.
Tag: . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-alphameric-character
operand base address,
in the form of labels,
± program points,
self-addressing, machine
language, or literals.
Literals cannot be used
in the calling string of
library subroutines.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201:172.220
· 22
Legend (Contd.)
ENT: .••••....... 1-character-sign and
2-numeric-digit Tag
address entry-modifier.
Entry modifications
cannot be used with
machine language coding
or literals.
Char: . • . • . . . . . . . . 3-alphameric-character
increment factor added
to the net address formed
by the Tag and Entry
modifier.
Remarks: •.•....•. 24-alphameric-character
field for coder's
comments.
• 23
Corrections
.231 Insertions: •••..... use units position of line
field as insert number
and manually insert card.
· 24
Special Conventions
.241 Compound addresses: • Tab ± entry-modifier +
character increment =
address.
• 242 Multi-address: •.... one per column, three
per entry.
; 243 Literals: . • . . . . . . • from 1 to 6 characters
in arithmetic, compare,
and transfer commands.
• 244 Special coded
addresses: . . . . . . . ± alphabetic character
indicates next instruction
labeled with same
character .
• 245 Others *Xxxxx: ••••••••. address of instruction
in which it appears.
@XXX: •••••••••• actual data can be entered
in machine l!!Jlguage.
#xxxxxx:. . . . . . . . . literals.
•3
LABELS
.31
General
. 311 Maximum number of
labels: . • • . . . . . . . 10,000 universal and
10,000 local labels.
.312 Common label formation rule: . . . . • . yes.
.313 Reserved labels: .... none.
• 314 Other restrictions: .•. see next entry.
.315 DeSignators Symbolic name: • . . . initial character must
be alphabetic.
Program point: . . . . initial character must
be a decimal point,
followed by an alphabetic
character •
• 316 Synonyms permitted: . any symbolic name can
be equated to any other
prior name.
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
.32
Universal Labels
.321 Labels for procedures
Existence: •.•.... mandatory if referenced
. by other instructions.
Formation rule First character:. . . alphabetic.
Other: . • . . . . . . . any alphameric
characters.
Number of
characters: . . . . 1 to 6.
· 322 Labels for library
routines: . . . . . . . . none.
.323 Labels for constants: • same as Procedures.
.324 Labels for files: •... none.
.325 Labels for records: .. same as Procedures.
.326 Labels for variables: . same as Procedures.
· 33
Local Labels
.331 Region: . . . . . . . . . • local to the closest
point of reference.
· 332 Labels for procedures Existence: . . . . . . . mandatory if referenced
by other instructions.
Region: . . . . . • . . • local to the closest
point of reference.
Formation rule First character: ... decimal point •
Last character: • . . alphabetic character.
Number of
characters: .•.. two.
· 333 Labels for library
routines: . . . . . . . . none.
.334 Labels for constants: • same as Procedures.
.335 Labels for files: .... none.
.336 Labels for records: •• same as Procedures.
.337 Labels for variables: . same as Procedures.
.4
DATA
.41 . Constants
.411 Maximum size constants
Numeric: . . . . . . . . 60 characters.
Alphabetic: •..•.•. 60 characters .
Alphameric: •..... 60 characters .
. 412 Maximum size literals Numeric: . . . . . . . . 12.characters.
Alphabetic: . . . . . . . 12 characters .
AlphameriC: . . . . . . 12 characters.
.42
Working Areas
.421 Data layout Implied by use: ....
Specified by
program: . . . . . . .
· 422 Data type: ••....•.
.423 Redefinition: ....••.
· 43
no •
yes.
not required.
yes; EQU pseudo
operation.
Input-Output Areas
.431 Data layout: . . . . . . . explicit layout.
• 432 Data type: ....•.•. not required.
· 433 Copy layout: . . . . . . . no provision.
(Contd.)
6/65
201: ]72.500
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: ADVANCED ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
\
'- ..
.5
PROCEDURES
.65
Input-Output Control
.51
Direct Operation Codes
.651
. 652
. 653
.654
.655
File labels: . . . . . • .
Reel labels: . . . . . . .
Blocking: . . . . . . . . .
Error control: . . . . .
Method of call: . . . . . •
.66
Sorting:
.67
Diagnostics
.511 Mnemonic -
Existence: .•..
Number: ... .
Example: .. .
Comment: ... .
· .. yes; mandatory.
· .. 58.
. .. CRD.
· .. all are 3 characters in
size .
• 512 Absolute: . . . . . . . . . none.
.52
none.
none .
none .
input-output operations.
macros.
. . . . . . no routines that can be
embedded in a program.
Macro-Codes
.671 Dumps:
.521 Number available Input-output: . . . . . .
Arithmetic: . . . . . .
Math functions: . . . .
Error control: . . . . .
Restarts: . . . . . . . .
Program control: ..
.522 Examples: . . . . . . . .
.523 New macros: . . . . . . .
.53
Interludes: . . . .
.54
Translator Control
.
5.
none.
none.
contained within input
output macros.
none.
2.
see Paragraph. 81
inserted into library
in separate run.
none.
.541 Method of control Allocation counter: .. pseudo operations.
Label adjustment: .. pseudo operations.
Annotation: . . . . . . . coder's comments.
.542 Allocation counter Set to absolute: .... SLC, OVR pseudos.
Set to label: . . . . . . OVR pseudo.
Step forward:.
. ALC pseudo.
Step backward:. . ... SLC pseudo.
Reserve area: . . ... CST, RSV, pseudos.
.543 Label adjustment Set labels equal: . . . . EQU pseudo.
Set absolute value: .. EQU pseudo.
Clear label table: ... none.
.544 Annotation Comment phrase: ... HDG pseudo.
Title phrase: . . . ... HEAD card.
.6
SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE
. 61
SpeCial Arithmetic: .. none .
. 62
SpeCial Functions:
.63
Overlay Control
none .
. OVR macro sets allocation
counter to any value,
absolute or symbolic,
and assembles balance
of first auto-load program deck to end of
memory.
. 632 Method of call: . . . . . OVR macro.
. . . . . . . . . specified section of core
storage is printed at
object time by means
of DUMP pseudo.
DBUG control card
removal negates all
diagnostic pseudos.
.672 Tracers: . . . . . • . . . traces all instructions
following TRAC pseudo
up to the address spec ified in the B address,
in TRAC. DBUG pseudo
is required for use of
tracers •
. 673 Snapshots: • . . . . . . . SNAP pseudo prints at
object program time
the symbolic name,
machine address,
and 120 characters
starting with the
address specified in
the SNAP pseudo.
Up to 9 addresses can
be controlled by the
SNAP and DBUG pseudos.
.7
LIBRARY FACILITIES
.71
Identity:
· 72
Kinds of Libraries
.721 Fixed master:
· no.
· 722 Expandable master: . · yes.
· 723 Private: . . . . . . • . . · private facilities can be
added to master library.
.73
Storage Form:
.74
Varieties of Contents: . macro instructions and
their linkages, inputoutput error' routines,
and subroutines for
debugging .
.75
Mechanism
.631 Facilities: . . . . . .
. 64
Data Editing
.641 Radix conversion: ... none .
. 642 Code translation: . . . . not required due to hardware code translation
capability.
. 643 Format control: . . . . not required due to
hardware editing
capabilities.
· Advanced Assembler I
System Library
. . . . . tape (supplied on cards
for transcription to
tape).
.751 Insertion of new item: . special library assembly
run .
. 752 Language of new item:. Advanced Assembler I.
.753 Method of call: .••.. CALL pseudo with routine
name in A address of
entry, or any macro
entry.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201: 172.760
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
. 76
.761
.762
• 763
Insertion in Program
Open routines exist: •. yes; user-defined macros.
Closed routines exist: • yes .
Open-closed is
optional: •.•..... no .
. 764 Closed routines
appear once: ..•.• yes.
,8
MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES
. 81
Macros
Description
MTR:
.82
. . , . . . . . . . . sets linkage to and calls
in the magnetic tape
read error routine;
generates tape read
instruction.
MTW: .. , . • . . . . . . sets linkage to and calls
in the magnetic tape
write error routine;
generates tape write
instruction.
DRD: , . . . , . . . . . . sets linkage to and calls
in disk read error
routine; generates disk
read and interrogate
commands.
DWR: . . . , . . . . . . . sets linkage to and calls
in disk write error
routine; generates
disk write and interrogate commands.
DWC: ••.•...•... functions the same as
DWR except that a
disk check command
and its linkage are
also generated.
LNK: ••....••... creates the necessary
two- instruction linkage
to and from a routine
and branches to the
routine.
SET: • . . • . . . . • . . . functions the same as
LNK except that no
branch is taken.
Pseudos
Code
Description
SLe: .••.••...•.. sets location counter to
a specified absolute or
symbolic value.
ALC: • . . . . . . . . . . sets location counter
ahead by a specified
number of fields and
characters.
EQU: . . . . . . . . . . . . symbolic name in label
field is given the same
absolute value as
another speCified name
or machine value.
CST: •. . , . . . . . . . . loads a constant field up
.
to 60 characters in
length; if more than
60 characters are
specified, the balance
will be reserved with
blanks.
6/65
.82
Pseudos (Contd.)
Code
Description
RSV: . . . . . . • . . . . . reserves a speCified number of characters in
storage.
HDG: . . . . . . . . . . . . generates coder's remarks
on output listing .
OVR: . . . . . . . . . . . . sets location counter to
any value, absolute or
symbolic, and causes
overlaid routines to
follow the main object
program deck.
SAD2: . . . . . . . . . . . generates a two-character
machine address constant
for each symbolic address
specified.
SAD3: . . . . . . . . • . . generates a three-character
machine address constant
for each symbolic address
specified.
LORG: . . . . . . . . . . . specifies that all literals
following LORG be packed
in an area of memory
subsequent to the current
setting of the location
counter to prevent
destruction by overlays.
GPMK: . . . . . . . . . . generates a one-position
group mark character.
TPMK:
. . . . . . generates a two-position
constant consisting of
end:"of-tape and group
marks.
CALL: . . . . . . . . . . . calls in a specified library
routine for assembly at
end of program.
SUBR: . . . . . . . . . . . functions the same as
CALL, but also functions
within overlays.
TEMP: . . . . . . . . . . inserts a temporary
routine into the library
for use in the program
being assembled only.
END:
. . . . . . . terminates every temporary
library routine and every
program.
FINI: . . . . . . . . . . . terminates any given
.
number of consecutive
assembly operations.
DBUG: . . . . . . . . . . . controls use of all DUMP,
TRAC, and SNAP pseudo
operations.
DUMP: ••.......•. prints at object program
time the contents of a
specified section of core
storage.
.
TRAC: . • . . . . . . . . selectively traces specified
program areas at object
program time.
SNAP: . . . . . . • . . . prints symbolic name,
machine address, and
120 characters of
address speCified.
201 :181.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Program Translator
Basic Assembler
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: BASIC ASSEMBLER
.1
GENERAL
· 11
Identity:....
· 12
Description
B 100/200/300 Series Basic
Assembler. _
Translation requires three passes and is limited in
speed by the output equipment: a punch or magnetic
tape unit.
• 13
Originator:.......
Burroughs Corp.
.14
Maintainer:
Burroughs Corp.
.15
Availability:
March, 1961.
.2
INPUT
· 21
Language
.211 Name: ...................
.212 Exemptions: . . . ....
.
\
Size Limitations: . . .
.3
OUTPUT
. 31
Object Program
.41
Phases and Passes
.42
Optional Modes
.421
. 422
. 423
.424
.425
Translate: . . ........ .
Translate and run: ..
Check only: • • . . • . .
Patching: .........
..
Updating: .......... .. . .
yes .
no.
no.
no .
no .
. 43
SEecial Features: ...
none.
. 44
Bulk Translating: . . .
yes.
.45
Program Diagnostics: none.
. 46
Translator Library: .
·5
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE
.51
Object Program Space
punched cards or paper
tape.
in line sequence order.
limited by hardware; maximum of 1,800 labels and
200 constants.
.311 Language name:
.312 Language style:
.313 Output media: ..........
Basic Assembly Language.
machine code.
auto-load card deck or tape;
printer listing.
.32
Conventions:
none.
.33
Documentation
Subject
Provision
Source program
Object program:
Storage map: .........
Language errors:
listing.
listing.
implied.
listing.
..
...
none.
.511 Fixed overhead: . . .• none.
.512 Space required for each
input-output file: .. as coded.
.513 Approximate expansion
of procedures: ... unity.
· 52
. 222 Obligatory ordering: .
(
Burroughs Basic Assembly
Language, described in
Section 201: 171.
none .
Form
.221 Input media: ...........
. 23
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE
Label table pass: .•. check op. codes, etc.
Translate pass: . . . . assign addresses.
Auto-load deck output: final output.
This translator can be run on any B 100/200/300
Series configuration with a card or paper tape
reader and punch. Listings can be provided if a
printer is available. The translator can take advantage of any magnetic tapes available on the
translating computer to speed up the translation
process and reduce card handling.
.22
·4
Translation Time
· 521 Normal translating:
usually output limited.
5 minutes maximum on
cards; 300 cards/niinute.
3 minutes maximum on tape;
700 instructions/minute.
· 53
Optimizing Data:
none.
· 54
Object Program
Performance:
unaffected; i. e., same as
hand coding •
.6
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS
.61
Translating Computer
.611 Minimum configuration: . . . . . . . . . .
.612 Larger configuration
advantages: . . . . . •
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation .. and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1 card or paper tape reader.
1 card or paper tape punch.
1 central proces sor .
use printer for program
listing ..
use magnetic tape to speed
up run and avoid card
handling •
6/65
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
201: 181.620
. 62
Target Computer
.7
.621 Minimum configuration: . . . . . . • . . . . 1 card or paper tape reader
and 1 output device.
Error
Missing entries:
Unsequenced entries:
Duplicate names:
Improper format:
Target computer
overflow:
. 622 Usable extra facilities: all.
.8
6/65
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
ALTERNATIVE
TRANSLATORS:. ..
Check or
Interlock
none.
check
check
check
listing .
listing.
listing.
check
listing.
Advanced Assembler I
translates either Basic
Assembly language or
Advanced Assembly
language programs.
201:182.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Program Translator
Advanced Assembler I
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: ADVANCED ASSEMBLER I
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: .•••.•.•.. Advanced Assembler 1.
• 12
Description
The Advanced Assembler I translator is a multiphase tape or disk oriented program designed to
translate relatively large source programs (including up to 10,000 symbolic labels) within 4,800
characters of core storage. The minimum requirements for the translation process include a
B 200/300 6-microsecond Central Processor and
either three magnetic tape units or one tape unit
and one module of Disk File storage. The translator can accommodate programs written in either
the Basic or Advanced Assembly Language and
contained in card image form on either cards,
paper tape, magnetic tape, or disk storage. A
program listing and the machine-language autoload output are produced as desired on cards,
printer, paper tape, and/or magnetic tape.
The translator program itself is contained on
magnetic tape. During the translation process, a
mfuimum of 11 functionally-distinct phases are
called in and performed. Resultant translation
times fall between 75 and 150 entries per minute,
depending upon the speed of the output equipment
and the number of output options elected. All
translator phase loadings and modifications are
self-performed and require no monitor.
.222 Obligatory ordering: .. must be in correct
sequence according to
coding sheet page and
line numbers .
.223 Obligatory grouping: .. none.
· 23
.3
OUTPUT
.31
Object Program
.311 Language name: .•... Burroughs Common
Language •
. 312 Language style: . . . . . machine language.
.313 Output media: . . . . . . punched cards, paper tape,
or magnetic tape.
. 32
· 33
.13
Originator:
.••.... Burroughs Corp.
.14
Maintainer: ••.•.•• Burroughs Corp.
.15
Availability: ••.•••• October, 1964.
•2
INPUT
. 21
Language
.211 Name: •••...•...• Advanced Assembly or
Basic Assembly Language.
.212 Exemptions: ...•.•. none.
.22 ~
. 221 Input media: . . . . . . . card images on cards,
paper tape, magnetic
tape, or disk file.
Conventions
.321 Standard inclusions: .. input-output error routines.
.322 Compatible with: . . . . Advanced Assembler
Program Library.
The Advanced Assembler I translator provides subroutine library facilities, automatic operand
length definition, complete language error checking,
entry and character adjustments to symbolic
addresses, and cross-referenced symbol tables.
The output program listing consists of the machinelanguage instruction and its location in core storage, the source coding, error messages derived
from invalid or defective coding, all generated
instructions and routines, and the location of each
entry in the auto-load card deck.
Size Limitations
· 231 Maximum number of
source statements: .• unlimited.
.232 Maximum size of
source statements: .. 80 characters.
· 233 Maximum number of
named data items: .. 10,000.
.234 Maximum number of
program point labels: 10,000.
Documentation
Subject
Provision
Source program: . . . . listing.
Object program: . . . . listing.
Storage map: . . . . . . implied.
Restart point list: ... none.
Language errors: . . . . messages on listing.
Label table: . . . . . . . listing with crossreferencing.
.4
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE
.41
Phases and Passes
Phase 1: .•••...•.. edits parameter card; calls
in appropriate inputoutput routines .
Phase 2: . . • . . . . . . . translates source language,
assigns operation codes,
and adds temporary
library routines.
Phase 3: .••••••••• calls in any necessary
library routines; checks
validity of operation
codes and library routines.
Phase 4: . • . • • . . . . . checks M and N variants;
assigns machine-language
equivalents.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
201: 182.410
.41
Phases and Passes (Contd.)
Phase 5: ••••••.••• constructs literal table;
packs literals into unused
addresses of instructions.
Phase 6: ••••.•.•.• writes labels and program
points to tape; assigns
machine addresses to instructions and constants.
Phase 7: .•••...••. transfers addresses called
for from library calling
strings to library routine
skeletons.
Phase 8: .•••.....• assigns addresses to
symbolic labels, flagging
duplicate or unused labels.
Phase 9: •••.•••.•. builds entry increment
table; modifies machine• language addresses by
entry increments.
Phase 10: •••.•••.. assembles final machinelanguage instruction; performs any necessary
character incrementation.
Phase 11: . . . . . . . . • generates object-coded
auto-load output; formats source'code for
listings.
Phase 12: •...••... produces symbolic listing
on specified output media;
develops label crossreference list •
. Phase 13: •••••••.• sorts label table; calls
in and modifies Phase 12
for outputting of edited
labIe table or cross-·
reference list.
.42 Optional Mode
.421
• 422
.423
.424
.425
Translate: .•••••.. yes.
Translate and run:. . • no.
Check only: ••••.... no.
Patching: ••••••••• no.
Updating: ••••••..• no.
• 43 Special Features
.431 Alter to check only: .• no.
.432 Fast unoptimized
translate: • • • • • . • • no.
.433 Short translate on
restricted program: • Phases 12 and 13 can be
skipped if symbolic
output is not desired.
.44 Bulk Translating: ••• yes, but only When source
programs are on punched
cards.
• 45 Program Diagnostics
. 451 Tracers: .• . • . • . • • can be integJ;'ated into
object program; removal
of DB UG source card
causes diagnostics to
be ignored during subfrequent assemblies.
. 452 Snapshots: ..•...•• same as in .451, above.
. 453 Dumps: .••••..... same as in .451, above.
.46
Translator Library: .• see Paragraph 201:172.7.
.5
TRANS LA TOR PERFORMANCE
.51
Object Program Space
.511 Fixed overhead: . . . . . none.
6/65
.512 Space required for
each input-output
file: . . . . . . . . . . . • same as block length.
.513 Approximate expansion
of procedures: . . . . . one to one, exclusive
of macros.
.52 Translation Time
.521 Normal translating: .• O. 013S minutes, reading
source cards at 800 cpm
and punching auto-load
deck at 300 cpm, .where
S is number of statements
in source program.
. 522 Checking only: . . . . . • none .
.523 Unoptimized
translating: •.••... none.
. 53
Optimizing Data: .•.• none .
.54
Object Program
Performance: .•... unaffected by translation;
i. e., same as hand coding.
.6
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS
.61
Translating Computer
.611 Minimum configuration: B 200/300 6-microsecond
Central Processor with
4,800 positions of core
storage.
3 magnetic tape units
(any model).
1 card reader (any model) .
1 card punch (B 303 or
B 304).
.612 Larger configuration
advantages: .••.•.. additional core storage
can reduce number of
translator passes per
phase by handling more
labels per pass; any
model line printer provides variety of output
doculnentation .
.62 Target Computer
.621 Minimum configuration: . . . • • . . . . . no limitations.
.622 Usable extra facilities: . • . . . . . . . . . everything except B 401
Record Processor with
VRC systems.
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
.7
Check or
Error
Interlock
Action
none •
Missing entries:
Unsequenced entries: check
noted in listing .
check
Duplicate names:
noted in listing.
Improper format:
noted in listing.
check
Incomplete entries:
check!
noted in listing.
Target computer
overflow:
check
noted in listing.
Inconsistent program: none .
Undefined names:
check
noted in listing .
Parameter card
errors:
check
noted in listing;
source deck is
bypassed .
ALTERNATIVE
.8
TRANSLATORS: '" none available (but see also
the Basic Assembler,
Section 201:181).
/
201: 183.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Program Translator
'
Compact COBOL
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: COMPACT COBOL
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
.12
Description
•••.•.... B 200 Compact COBOL .
The B 200 Compact COBOL Translator converts
source programs written in the B 200 Compact
COBOL language (as described in Section 201:161)
into machine code. Compilation proceeds at the
rate of approximately 50 source cards per minute.
Minimum configuration requirements for the translator are a B 273, B 283, or B 300 Central Processor with 4,800 positions of core storage, a card
reader, a line printer, and 4 magnetic. tape units.
Additional core storage and a card punch can be
utilized when available. Object programs can be
run on any B 263, B 273, B 283, or B 300 Series
system equipped with the appropriate peripheral
devices. B 200 Compact COBOL does not provide
for the use of MICR sorter-readers, Disk Files,
data communications devices, paper tape equipment,
or listers.
.232 Maximum size source
statements: .•...•. limited to use of one
verb and one to three
operands per statement.
.233 Maximum number of
data names: . . • . . . 190.
.234 Others Maximum number of
object code
instructions: ..•.. 2,800.
Procedure names: .. 40.
Elements in an array: 119.
.3
OUTPUT
.31
Object Program
.311 Language name: ...•• B 200 Series machine
language.
.312 Language style: . . . . . machine code.
.313 Output media: . . . . . . magnetic tape or punched
cards.
.33
The B 200 Compact COBOL Translator provides
debugging aids, printer listings, and diagnostic
printouts. The programming manual (Burroughs
publication URS-052) lists various methods for
optimizing compilation times and/or object program
efficiencies for all COBOL divisions and each B 200
Compact COBOL verb.
.13
Originator:
.14
Maintainer: .•••••. Burroughs Corp.
• 15
Availability: .•••••• November, 1964.
.2
INPUT
• 21
Language
. 22
Form
. 221 Input media: .•••..• punched cards.
· 222 Obligatory ordering:. • Identification Division
Environment Division
Data Division
Procedure Division
• 223 Obligatory grouping: .. by division, section,
paragraph.
· 23
Subject
Size Limitations
.231 Maximum number of
source statements: .. limited by size of target
computer's core storage.
Provision
Source program: ..•. listulg.
Object program: •••• listing (optional).
Storage map: •••••.. listing (optional).
Restart point list: .•. none.
Language errors: . . . . listing.
Object programsource program
cross-reference
table: . . . . . . . . • . • listing .
.•.•••. E. Saumets Associates.
.211 Name: .•..•••.... B 200 Compact COBOL;
see Section 201:161.
.212 Exemptions: .••••.. none.
Documentation
.4
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE
.41
Phases and Passes
Phase 1: . . . . . . . . . . reads source program,
edits, performs lexical
checks, lists source
program, and stores
it on tape •
Phase 2:. . . . • . . • . • reduces symbols and processes labels .
Phase 3: .••.•..•.. reduces data-names, prescans Pictures, performs
label definition look- up.
Phase .4: ..•.••..•• analyzes symbols and processes Picture items ..
Phase 5: .••••..•.. processes Data Division,
Procedure Division
syntax, memory allocation, and mask interpretation; replaces data
items with sets of
properties.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
201:183.410
.41
Phases and Passes (Contd.)
Phase 6: .••••••... generates literals, operand
calls, descriptor calls,
and subroutine calls.
Phase 7: .•••••.• '.• processes value literals,
,
assembles object program,
optimizes masks, writes
loader, trace, and value
literals on object tape,
optimizes space occupied
by literals, prints diagnostic messages.
.42
Optional Model
.421
.422
.423
• 424
.425
Translate: ..•••... yes.
Translate and run: . • . yes.
Check only: .•••••• no.
Patching: ..••••.•• no.
Updating:......... no.
• 43
Special Features
.431 Alter to check only: •. no .
. 432 Fast unoptimized
translate: •.••.•.• no.
• 433 Short translate on
restricted program: . no.
.44
Bulk Translating: •.. yes.
. 45
Program DiagnostiCS
.451 Tracers: •.•.•••.. object time routine,
included with object
program.
.452 Snapshots: •••••••• File Status Table can be
printed at object time.
.453 Dumps: .•.••.•... routines available at compile or object time.
.6
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS
· 61
Translating Computer
.611 Minimum configuration:B 273, B 283, or B 300
Central Processor with
4,800 positions of core
storage.
B 122, 123, or 124 Card
Reader.
B 320 or 321 Line Printer.
Four B 421, 422, or 423
Magnetic Tape Units.
• 61 Larger configuration
advantages: .•••.•. 4,800 additional core
positions permit compilation of larger programs
with a maximum of 400
data names •
B 303 or 304 Card Punch
provides punched card
output of object program .
· 62
Target Computer
.621 Minimum configuration: any B 263, B 273, B 283,
or B 300 Series System .
.622 Usable extra facilities: . . • . . . . . . • . all except MICR sorterreader, Disk File, data
communications devices,
paper tape, and listers .
.7
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Missing entries:
check
none .
check
. 46
Translator Library: •• none.
.5
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE
Unsequenced
entries:
Duplicate names:
• 51
Object Program Space
Improper format:
check
Incomplete entries:
check
Target computer
overflow:
check
Inconsistent program:
check
• 511 Fixed overhead: ..•.. none.
· 512 Space required for
each input-output
file: ..•••••••.• as specified in Data Division
of source program.
· 513 Approximate expansion
of procedures: .••.• 3 to 1.
.52
• 53
• 54
6/65
Translation Time: .•• approximately 50 source
cards/minute.
Optimizing Data: . • • • a list of ways in which
the programmer can
optimize both compile
time and execution time
is provided in the manual.
Object Program
Performance: ••... uses approximately 30%
more core storage than
good hand coding requires,
but execution times are
about the same, according
to the manufacturer.
Limitations on data
and procedure names
exceeded:
check
.8
ALTERNATIVE
TRANSLATORS:
none .
Action
halt and/or
diagnostic
message .
diagnostic
message .
diagnostic
message .
halt and/or
diagnostic
message.
precautionary
message.
halt and/or
diagnostic
message.
halt and diagnostic
message.
201: 184.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Program Translator
1401 SPS. Translator
.
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: 1401 SPS TRANSLATOR
The principal capabilities of the SPS Translator
can be summarized as follows:
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: .•••..••.. Burroughs B 200/300 Series
Symbolic Program
Translator .
Description
. 12
The Burroughs Symbolic Program Translator (SPS
Translator) converts IBM 1401/1460 SPS programs
into Burroughs Assembly Language. The scope of
the Translator is limited to translating Symbolic
Programming System source code (see Section
401:171 of the IBM 1401 report) in single load format. Condensed SPS or Autocoder source programs
cannot be translated.
The minimum configuration requirements for the
translating computer are a B 200/300 6-microsecond
Central Processor with 4,800 characters of core
storage, three magnetic tape units of any model,
and any model card reader, card punch, and line
printer.
•
• Decimal machine-language operand addresses
are permissible, but only When they reference
the fixed card read, punch, and print inputoutput areas.
• Other decimal machine-language addresses
can be used if defined and labeled by a
special Define entry prior to translation.
• Address modifications are performed
correctly.
• Up to six 1401 Sense Switches are simulated
by means of six reserved character positions
of core storage.
II
The complete translation process consists of three
distinct phases: translation from SPS to Burroughs
assembly language; post-translation patching of the
assembly language coding as directed by notes on
the translation listing; and assembly of the intermediate assembly-language program into Burroughs
machine language. If any non-standard features
or programming techniques have been utilized in
the 1401 source program, direct translation of
these program areas is impossible. Disk file
instructions also require extensive hand translation and modification during the post-translation
edit phase of the translation process.
The Burroughs SPS Translator can be expected to
perform efficiently When it is applied to the task of
translating card-oriented SPS programs of modest
size. No 1401 source program larger than 8,000
characters should be considered for translation and
operation on a 9, 600-character B 200/300 Central
Processor, because the eventually-produced object
program consumes between 30% and 60% more core
storage than the source program. Object program
running times for translated card programs will
nearly always be faster than on the 1401, and can
be up to four times faster. The improvement is
due partially to efficient use of the Burroughs threeaddress instruction format, but primarily to the
completely buffered card input-output devices and
printers in the Burroughs system.
Translation times average about 5 minutes for
4, 000 charact~rs of IBM 1401 program volume.
If the Translator has been applied within the
scope of its design, the post-translation edit
phase can usually be completed within an hour.
Another five to ten minutes is then required
to assemble the patched intermediate-language
program into the auto-load object program deck.
©
Up to 35 IBM 1401 machine-language or
mnemonic operation codes can be translated.
Definition of constants and equation of symbolic
labels are performed correctly.
• Tape read/write error routines and printer
page-overflow simulation routines are automatically generated.
• Compare and Branch instructions, chained
data transfers, and other sequences of 1401
instructions are -replaced by single instructions wherever possible.
The standard card and tape 1401 SPS instructions
are classified by the SPS Translator into four
different categories:
(1)
The 27 instructions that are directly and
accurately translated.
(2)
The translated instructions that require
modification as noted on the translation
listing.
-
(3)
The instructions utilized by the Translator
but not actually translated because they are
of no use to the object program (e.g., Set
Word Mark).
(4)
The group of 1401 instructions associated
with special programming or hardware
features that cannot be directly translated
and will require special attention.
,Ina typical 1401 card processing program, approximately 60% of the instructions will normally fall
into category (1), 38% into categories (2) and (3),
and 2% into category (4).
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
201: 184.120
. 12
Description (Contd.)
The principal IBM 1401 capabilities that cannot be
handled by the SPS Translator include:
.313 Output media: . . . . . . punched card decks or
card images on magnetic
tape.
.32
Index registers.
•
Store Address Register instructions.
•
Pa,Per tape devices.
•
Disk file devices.
.321 Standard ·inclusions: .. magnetic tape read/write
error routines and
linkages are automatically
generated; printer pageoverflow routine is
automatically simulated.
•
Any other non-standard features or devices.
.33
•
Operation code modifications by arithmetic
quantities.
.
• 13
Originator: •.••••. Burroughs Corporation.
.14
Maintainer: ••••••• Burroughs Corporation.
.15
Availability: .•••••• January, 1964.
.2
~
• 21
Language
.211 Name: .•••••••.•• mM 1401 Symbolic Programming System (SPS).
.212 Exemption: •••.••. , statements aSsOCiated with
all non-standard programming features and
peripheral devices, and
with 1401 capabilities not
handled by the SPS Translator (see list above),
.22 Form
.221 Input media: ••••.•• mM 1401 SPS single load
format program deck (or
card images of the same
type on magnetic tape) •
• 222 Obligatory ordering: •• none •
• 223 Obligatory grouping: •• none •
.3
Size Limitations: •••• target computer must provide 30% to 60% more
core storage than the
amount utilized in the
original 1401 target
computer.
OUTPUT
.31
Object Program
.311 Language name: .•.•• Burroughs Modified Basic
Assembly Language is the
intermediate result of the
translation process;
final object program is
in Burroughs machine
code.
Documentation
Subject
Provisions
analyzed listing of both
source program and
symbolic intermediate
Object program:
program; listing of
object program is produced after assembly.
Storage map: .••.... implied on assembly
listing.
Restart point list: •.. none .
Language errors: •.•• any unrecognized 1401
operation codes are
noted on the translation
listing; decimal machinelanguage operand addresses
referring to other than
the fixed input-output
areas are also noted as
untranslated.
Instructions to read and write magnetic tape can
be directly translated. Therefore, the SPS Translator can be effectively utilized to produce functional object programs from tape-oriented source
programs of up to 6,000 characters in volume,
provided they use primarily standard mM 1401
programming techniques and features.
.23
Conventions
•
Source program: }
.4
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE
.41
Phases and Passes
Pass 1: •••.•••••• loads translator program
on tape; writes 1401
SPS source deck on tape.
Pass 2: " •••.•.•• determines size of all
named fields (instructions
or data); writes all named
fields on a label tape.
Pass 3: •••••••••• compares A and B operand
addresses to label table;
creates symbolic labels
for input-output areas;
flags (for listing purposes) invalid operand
addresses.
Pass 4: •••••••••. constructs a table of all
word marks used; affects
operand lengths as necessary.
Pass 5: .••.••...• translates SPS operation
codes; constructs entire
B 200/300 symbolic instruction.
Pass 6: ••••.••••. optimizes use of symbolic
instructions by combining
chained, compare, and
editing instructions whenever possible.
Pass 7: .•••••••.. generates standard subroutines according to
input-output requirements.
(Contd.)
6/65
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: 1401 SPS TRANSLATOR
.42
Optional Mode: •••.• none provided.
.43
Special Features
201: 184.420
.54
Object Program Performance: •••.••.• execution speed will
generally range from 1
to 4 times as fast as
that of original 1401
program, depending upon
type of program and speeds
of peripheral devices.
.6
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS
.61
Translating Computer
• 431 Alter to check only: •• no •
.432 Fast Unoptimized
translate: •••••••• no.
.433 Short translate on
restricted program: • no.
.44
Bulk Translating: • . • after initial loading of
translator card deck on
tape, SPS programs can
be bulk-translated without
reloading the translator.
.45
Program DiagnostiCS: •• none directly; the translation listing records
the original and intermediate instructions, the
data constants, and notes
to aid post-translation
editing.
.46
Translator Library: •• none provided.
.5
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE
.51
Object Program Space: uses 30% to 60% more core
storage than the SPS
source program;
tailoring of the intermediate symbolic program
by the programmer can
improve this performance
considerably.
• 512 Space required for
each input-output
file: •••••.••••• same as coded in source
program.
• 513 Approximate expansion of procedures: • 1 to 1 (high core storage
demands are caused
primarily by B 200/300
Series 12-character
fixed instruction length).
• 52 Translation Time
.521 Normal translating: •• 0.0125S minutes, where
S is number of source
program statements.
.522 Checking only: .••.•• none provided.
.523 Unoptimized
translating: ••••••• none provided.
• 53
Optimizing Data: . . . . when possible, translator
combines chained Move
instructions, Compare
and Branch instructions,
carriage tape control,
and editing operations
into single instructions.
©
.611 Minimum configuration: ••••....... B 200/300 6-microsecond
Central Processor with
4, 800 positions of core
storage; 3 magnetic
tape units of any model;
and 1 line printer and
card punch of anyavailable models.
· 612 Larger configuration
advantages:. • • • • • • additional core storage
allows translation of
larger 1401 programs
and use of larger magnetic tape input-output
blocks.
• 62
Target Computer
.621 Minimum configuration: .••••.•• any B 100/200/300 Series
system with sufficient
input-output equipment
to make it logically
equivalent to the
original 1401 system.
• 622 Usable extra facilities: •••••.••.•• all except paper tape,
MICR readers,
Disk File, and data
communications equipment.
.7
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Missing entries:
Unsequenced entries:
Duplicate names:
Improper format:
Incomplete entries:
Target computer
overflow:
Inconsistent program:
Invalid operation
codes:
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
none.
none.
none.
check
none.
Action
noted on listing .
check
none.
noted on listing.
check
noted on listing.
6/65
201: 191.1 00
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Operoting Environment
General
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: GENERAL
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:.......... individual Burroughs
service routines,
as identified below.
. 12
Three groups of routines are provided to assist in
general computer operation: input-output control,
dumps, and magnetic tape editing.
A variety of dumps are available to print and/or
punch the contents of core storage. They may be
used as subroutines. There is also a set of trace
routines.
Check or
Interlock
Action
In-out error single:
check
reread magnetic
tape, or stop.
check
none.
stop.
In-out error perSistent:
Overflow:
Invalid instruction:
Program conflicts:
Description
A straightforward input-output control subroutine
is used to attempt several rereads for handling
magnetic tape errors. In addition, a magnetic
tape edit routine is provided to test for tape flaws.
Error
none.
not possible.
.45
Restarts: . . . . . . . . . as incorporated in user's
program.
.5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
.51
Dynamic
Trace routines are available for all B 100/200/
300 Series Systems. Each Trace routine is capable of printing or punching the following information for specified instructions: 'the instruction's location, the instruction itself, comparison indicators, and the contents of two areas of
core storage before and after execution. Core
storage requirements range from 729 to 823
characters, depending upon the processor model.
.2
PROGRAM LOADING
.21
Source of Programs:
.22
Library Subroutines: . no special provisions.
. 23
Loading Seguence: ... as loaded by operator .
.3
HARDWARE
ALLOCATION:. . . . . as incorporated in user's
program.
.4
RUNNING SUPERVISION
.41
Simultaneous Working:. as incorporated in user's
program.
. 42
Multiprogramming:... a pre-determined set of
small independent routines
can be run in an intermingled mode, each able to
stop and start independently; see Section201:192.
.6
OPERATOR
CONTROL: . . . . . . . as incorporated in user's
program.
. 43
Multi-seguencing: ..• none •
•7
LOGGING: . • • • • • • • manual .
.44
Errors, Checks, and Action
.8
PERFORMANCE
.84
Program Loading
Time:. . . . . . • . . . . maximum of 6 seconds,
using B 124 Card Reader, to load 4,800character core storage.
punched cards, punched
tape, magnetic tape, or
Disk File.
Check or
Interlock
Loading input
error:
6/65
check
stop.
.52
Post Mortem
A number of standard dump routines are available to punch and/or print the contents of specified areas of core storage. Printed output can
be produced either in full, 120-character lines or
as five annotated, 12-character fields per line.
Punched-card output can be in either auto-load
format or in un-numbered cards. Core storage
requirements range from 42 to 384 characters,
depending upon the function or pair of functions
to be performed.
201:192.100
Burroughs B 1001200/300 Series
Operating Environment
Multiprocessing
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: MULTIPROCESSING
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
the Program Schedular concept becomes somewhat
more practical than when sm'iller memory sizes are
considered. This multiprocessing approach,is
designed for programs that are input-output limited
and written in a cyclic manner. Because the number
of input-output units available per computer system
is severely restricted, and because magnetic tape
operations are unbuffered, an efficient fiveprogram mix is difficult to achieve in practice.
Small data transcription programs appear to be
best suited for effective multiprocessing with the
Program Schedular.
. . . . . . . . . B 200/300 Series Multiple
Program Productivity
Advisor.
B 200/300 Series Program
Schedular.
"Multiprocessing" in B 200/300 Series systems is
implemented by two closely related routines: the
Multiple Program Productivity Advisor and the
Program Schedular.
&
Productivity Advisor:
This program has been designed primarily to
serve as an aid in determining the most efficient
manner of using the Program Schedular in a
given situation. The Productivity Advisor
accepts basic data regarding the programs to
be run simultaneously and produces a series of
tables displaying the productivity which would
be realized for each possible combination of
priority ratios. Depending upon the particular
jobs under consideration, the productivity
tables show this information in terms of lines
per minute, cards per minute, or records per
minute. By reviewing the productivity figures
for various ratio combinations and considering
the volumes associated with each job, the user
can select the ratio that will most efficiently
accomplish his purposes. He may then use
this information as input to the Program
Schedular.
("--
When it becomes necessary to add, delete, or
modify any of the programs being run together,
the Program Schedular must be used to prepare a
new multi-program package.
.13
Availability: . . . . . . . June, 1963 (date released
for general use).
.14
Originator:
Burroughs Corp.
.15
Maintainer:
Burroughs Corp.
.16
First Use: . . . . . • . . demonstrated in January,
1963.
.2
PROGRAM LOADING
.21
Source Programs
.211 Programs from online libraries: .•.•. none.
.212 Independent programs: up to 5 programs are input
to the Program Schedular.
.213 Data: . . . . . . . . . . . . must be supplied as called
o Program Schedular:
for by each of the
programs being run toIn many applications of B 200/300 Series systeJ;Ils,
gether.
the cycle time of the input-output units exceeds
.214 Master routines: . . . . executive routine (3 inthe internal processing time, so that a surplus
structions); one routine
of computing capability is available. The Proper program is created
gram Schedular permits users to package
by the Program Schedular
multiple programs for processing at the same
and included in the multitime, thereby maximizing the use of the central
program deck.
processor. During this packaging operation,
a specially-conditioned executive routine, a
.22 Library Subroutines: . none.
fully documented program listing, and an autoload object program deck are prepared. Up to
. 23 Loading Sequence: ... all programs to be run tofive programs can be packaged together for
gether (maximum of 5)
subsequent multiple processing. Since each
are contained in the multiprogram functions independently of all other
program deck. The comprograms, runs may be combined, started, or
plete deck is loaded in one
stopped whenever the user desires.
operation.
Up to five independent and unrelated programs can
be run simultaneously. Since all programs mustbe
stored in core storage at the same time, the size
of each program is severely limited. When the
maximum core storage available for B 20'0/300
Series processors (19,200 characters) is utilized,
©
.3
HARDWARE ALLOCATION
.31
Storage
.311 Segmentation: . . . . . . no provisions.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201:192.312
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
.312 Occllpation of working
storage: . . . . . . . . . assigned in scheduling
phase of the Program
Schedular. Programs
must be loaded in relocatable form.
• 32
Input-Output Units
.5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
.51
Dynamic
.511 Tracing: . • . . . . . . . . none.
.512 Snapshots: . . . . • . . . none.
.52 Post Mortem: . . . . . . none.
.6
• 321 Initial assignment: ... by program.
• 322 Alternation: . • . • • . . as indicated by user.
• 323 ReaSSignment: . . . . . by scheduling phase of the
Program Schedular (to
increase simultaneity) .
OPERATOR
CONTROL:
.7
LOGGING: . . . . . . . . as incorporated into user's
individual routines.
•4
RUNNING SUPERVISION
.8
PERFORMANCE
.41
Simultaneous Working: implemented in sequencing
of programs by Program
Schedular. Reassignment
of input-output units is
also made wherever
decided.
· 81
System ReqUirements
• 42
Multiprogramming: .• maximum of five programs.
Each program is assigned
a priority number and
status (active or inactive)
by the programmer.
During actual operation
the operator can change
the priority or status of
a run.
• 43
Multi-sequencing: ••. none .
.44
Errors, Checks, and
Action: • • . . . . . . . . the following checks for
errors are made during
the editing phase of the
Program Schedular
routine. No checks are
made during object program execution time.
Check or
Interlock
Loading input
error:
none.
Allocation
impossible:
check
Storage Overflow: check
In-out error single:
Invalid instructiOI)S:
Program conflicts:
Arithmetic overflow:
Invalid operation:
ImprQper forma~:
Invalid address:
• 4(i
6/65
check
either restart or
continue, depending on circumstances.
check
print message.
check
print message.
none.
check
check
check
print message.
print message.
print message.
Restarts: •.•..•... none .
• 811 Minimum
configuration: •.•.. central processor plus
those input and output
devices required by
individual programs.
.812 Usable extra
facilities: . . . . . . . . larger core storage.
1 or 2 card readers.
card punch.
1 or 2 line printers.
magnetic tape (1 to 6
units).
lor 2 paper tape readers.
paper tape punch.
.813 Reserved equipment: . all of core storage is
available; "executive
routine" consists of only
3 instructions per program.
.82 System Overhead
• 822 Reloading frequency:
Action
print message.
print message and
halt.
as incorporated into user's
individual routines .
for each new set of routines
to be run, the Multiple
Program Productivity
Advisor and Program
Schedular routines must
be run, and the resulting
program deck loaded.
For a multi-program deck,
that is already prepared,
reloading must take
place each time a routine
in the deck is to be run.
• 83
Program Space
Available: . . . . . . . all of core storage except
for "executive routine"
requirements of 3 instructions per program.
• 84
Program Loading
Time: . . . • . . • . . . maximum of 6 seconds,
using B 124 Card
Reader, to load 4,800character core storage.
.85
Program
Performance:
generally as predicted by
the Productivity Advisor
(Paragraph. 12), unless
central processor time
becomes the limiting
factor for a particular
combination of programs.
201: 193.100
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Operating Environment
Tape/Disk Operating System
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: TAPE/DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: ..
.12
Description
B 200 Tape/Disk Operating
System.
The B 200 Tape/Disk Operating System is a Control
System designed to operate with magnetic tape or
Disk File subsystems. One of four executive routines contained within the Operating System is in
core storage at all times. The four executive
routines are:
•
.13
Tape Executive Routine - controls all processing and program segmentation by calling
in control routines, utility programs, system
functions, user programs, and overlays from
a magnetic tape source.
•
Disk File Executive Routine - controls all
processing and program segmentation by
accessing a Disk File to bring in control
routines, utility programs, system functions,
user programs, and overlays.
•
Multiprocessing Control - controls all user
programs of a relatively-addressed nature by
means of a cycle-time clocking scheme de.signed to make effective use of peripheral
equipment. Core memory is allocated according to a predetermined priority code and
memory-availability scheme. Multiprocessing Control is provided for use with Disk File
systems only.
•
Program Debugging Control - provides formatted output of memory dumps, trace points,
control state running, and file dumps as directed by specification cards. Program Debugging Control is available for use with
either magnetic tape or Disk File Systems.
"
.211 Programs from on-
line libraries ....
.212 Independent programs: . . . . • . . .
.22
Library Subroutines: . called in from User Program Library, Operating
System Library, or as
loaded from some peripheral source.
.23
Loading Sequence: .. sequential loading of programs as provided by
operator on User Program Library tape or on
card reader. The system
operator can interrupt
this sequence by calling
in specific programs
through the Supervisory
Printer. stored programs
can also call in other predetermined programs.
.3
HARDWARE ALLOCATION
.31
storage
June, 1965.
June, 1965.
July, 1965.
July, 1965.
. 14
Originator:
Burroughs Corp .
.15
Maintainer:
Burroughs Corp.
.16
First Use: .
Bankers Data Processing,
Boston, Mass.
July, 1965.
.2
PROGRAM LOADING
. 21
Source of Programs: .
. 311 Sequencing of program
for movement between levels: . . . •.
i
\"
all programs of a checkedout nature can be added
to a Program Add Tape.
© 1965
Disk File or magnetic tape.
can be called in from
punched cards, paper
tape, or disk ·file.
.213 Data: . . . . . . . . . . . as required by users'
programs.
.214 Master routines: ... either the Tape Executive
or Disk File Executive
Routine is loaded into 480
character positions of
core storage by means of
a Tape start or Disk
Start Card. Any executive
routine can then call in
any other executive routine.
Availability
Tape Executive Routine:
Disk File Executive
Routine: . . . . . . . .
Multiprocessing Control:
Program Debugging
Control: . . . . . .
I
The Permanent User Program Library, including
all error routines and
special situation subroutines, can be maintained
on either the Program
Add tape or on the' Disk
File. Programs can contain absolute or relative
addresses and input-output unit numbers.
AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
programs are assembled in
a single-instruction format adaptable to relative
addressing and relative
unit assignment by the
Executive Routine.'
6/65
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
201: 193.312
· 312 Occupation of working
storage: . . . . . . . . once programs are allocated to a portion of
core storage, they are
not disturbed except by
operator request. If the
interruption calls for a
high priority program
change, the original program is stored on tape or
disk in a "saved" state.
32
.42
Multiprogramming: .
the number of programs in
the mix is arbitrarily set
at a maximum of three,
with five more permitted
in a call-in stack. The
normal program processing cycle-time, stored as
a notation with the program
call record, determines
the individual program
time allotment. A call for
change of priority can alter, suspend, or replace
programs that are currently in process or still in
the program stack.
• 43
Multi -sequencing:. . .
not provided.
.44
Errors, Checks, and Action
(See table below. )
.45
Restarts:........
Input-Output Units
.321 Initial assignment: ..
. 322 Alternation: . . . . . .
• 323 Reassignment: .... .
performed by the Multiprocessing Control based
upon program need and
available equipment.
not provided•
provided by re-calling the
Program with input-output configuration speCified
differently.
·4
RUNNING SUPERVISION
.41
Simultaneous Working: the programs in the mix
will be allocated their required input and output
units as available at load
time by a system test of
the configuration available
and the priority rating assignment. The degree of
simultaneous working of
input-output units depends
exclusively on the amount
of skill with which the
source program was
written .
. 44
.451 Establishing restart
points: . . . . . . . ..
.452 Restarting process:.
handled by the executive
routine when pOSSible, or
by user-written utility or
maintenance programs.
dependent upon individual
user programs.
automatic system recovery
brings the End-of-Job
Function into memory.
Individual user programs
must provide for restarts
if required.
Errors, Checks, and Action
Error
Check or Interlock
Action
Loading input error:
Allocation impossible:
system check
system check
Input-output errors:
system and I/O
equipment checks
message to the operator.
delay processing of the
program until allocation
becomes possible.
all errors detected during
control state initiate
automatic retries where
possible.
system assumes a program
added to the User Library
is tested and does not exceed available core
storage.
hardware can allow execution of some properlyformatted invalid instructions; in some cases
the hardware will cause
an alarm and stop when
an invalid instruction is
detected.
Storage overflow:
user program
check
Invalid instructions
hardware
Improper format:
Invalid address:
Reference to forbidden
area: . • . . . . . . . . .
none.
none.
/
none.
(Contd.)
6/65
201:193.500
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: TAPE/DISK OPERATING SYSTEM
.5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
·8
PERFORMANCE
.51
Dynamic
· 81
System Requirements
.511 Tracing:. . . . . . . ..
. 512 Snapshots: . . . . . . .
. 52
Post Mortem: . . . ..
.6
OPERATOR CONTROL
.61
Signals to 0Eerator
.611 Decision required by
operator: .... "
.....
Program Debugging Control
executive routine allows
trace points to be set by
memory location, instruction type, control points,
or change of control
points.
specifications are entered
as each program is
loaded. Dumps of any
nature can be called in
under Program Debugging
Control. Under any executive routine's control,
a dump can be executed
by operator interrupt.
printer or tape dumps, as
well as storage dumps,
can be executed by means
of an operator function
call.
.62
0Eerator's Decisions: keyboard entry.
.63
0Eerator's Signals:
.7
LOGGING
. 71
0Eerator Signals: ...
. 72
0Eerator Decisions: .
.812 Usable extra
facilities: . . . . . . .
.813 Reserved Equipment:
typed message on the
Supervisory Printer.
.612 Action required by
operator: ........... typed message.
.613 Reporting progress
of run: . . • . . • • . • typed message.
.631 Inquiry: .................
.632 Change of normal
progress: . . . . . . .
· 811 Minimum configuration: . . . . . . . . . .
keyboard entry.
· 82
Program SEace
Available: . . . . . . .
keyboard, card, or paper
tape entry to alter priorities or speCified inputoutput configurations.
typed record of keyboard
entry.
typed record of keyboard
entry.
.84
.73
Run Progress: . . . . .
typed messages.
.74
Errors: . . . . . . . . .
typed messages.
From magnetic tape:.
.75
Running Times: ...
typed messages indicate
end-of-job conditions.
Operator can then type
any desired supplements.
From Disk File: . . . .
.76
MultiErogramming
Status: ....
Program Performance: . . . . . . . . .
keyboard inquiry of program
status results in a report
on the Supervisory Printer
of status of current program and those remaining
in the call-in stack.
©
programs and Operating
System controls are transferred from magnetic tape
to core storage at up to
66KC in binary mode, and
from Disk File to core
storage at lOOKC .
all but 480 characters of
core storage, and all
available Disk File storage
except the portion that is
reserved according to the
number of functions included within the Disk File
Control.
Program Loading Time
From cards: . . . . . .
.85
any available keyboard
card, paper tape, and
magnetic tape devices will
increase the number and
variety of programs permitted in the "multiprocessing" mix.
1 magnetic tape unit or a
user-designated portion of
Disk File storage, the size
of which will be determined
by the size of the User's
Permanent Program
Library and desired Disk
File Controls, and 480
characters of core storage.
System Overhead
.821 Loading time: .. . ..
. 83
B 273 or B 283 Central
Processor with 9, 600
characters of core storage.
B 495 Supervisory Printer.
Card or paper tape reader
(any model) .
Line printer (any model).
3 magnetic tape units, or 2
magnetic tape units and 1
Disk File (any model tape
units).
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
200, 475, 800, or 1400
cards per minute, depending upon card reader
model.
varies with tape unit speed
and position of user program on the tape.
100 KC transfer rate.
during each program cycle,
less than 1 millisecond
will be required for control purposes in most
cases; if a specific system function is called for,
Multiprocessing Control
is not available.
6/65
2Ql:201.001
Burroughs B 1001200/300 Series
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
Generalized File Processing (201:201.100)
These are a series of typical commercial data processing applications that involve the
processing of a detail file against a master
The detail file contains data used to update the
master file by inserting new records, deleting old records, and recording changes to records in
the file. A printed record of each transaction is produced. This type of processing occurs, for
example, in a payroll routine in which the master file is the payroll file, the detail file contains
the data from the periodic time sheets, and the output is largely in the form of paychecks.
file.
.
TheStandard File Problems are fully described in the Users' Guide, Section 4:200.11,
and the Standard Configurations used as a basis for measuring the performance of·B 100/200/300
Series Systems are shown in Section 201:031 of this report. The master files in Standard Configuration I are on punched cards; in Configurations II and Ill, the master files are on magnetic
tape. All configurations use the card reader for input of the detail file and the printer for output
of the report file.
In Standard File Problems A, B, C, and D, the controlling factor for Configuration I
is card punching time. For Configurations II and III, the sum of central processor computational
tinie and tape time (which cannot be overlapped) is the controlling factor under most conditions;
at high activity ratios, however, the total processing time is controlled by the printer speed.
Sorting (201:201. 200)
Times are presented for sorting SO-character records on magnetic tape. These times
are estimated both by the standard procedures described in the Users' Guide, Section 4:200. 21,
and for routines produced by.the manufacturer's Tape Sort Generator I.
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
BURROUGHS B 1001200/~00 SERIES
201 :201. 011
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1
CONFIGURATION
ITEM
I
1
(File 1)
Char/block
Records/block
K
msec/block
File 1 = File 2
80
0.5
(File 1)
1,080
1 .. 080
10
75 (File 1); 200 (File 2)
REFERENCE
m
II
10
35.4
55.0
1 - - - - - - - ~------ 1 - - - - - - - - ~126126
File 3
75
1------
JnputOutput
Times
msec/switch
msec penalty
2
Central
Processor
Times
msec/block
msec/record
msec/detail
msec/work
msec/report
1 " - - - - - - ~ --11-1--- ....,.f-----158
158
File 4
4:200.112
0
0
0
File 1 = File 2
t - - - - - 1 - : - - - - - -1 - - - - - - f - - - - - 0
0
0
File 3
~4---- r----- - - - -1 - - - - - - - - - ~----0
0
0
28.3
50.0
1.0 (File 1); 1. 2 (File 2)
File 1 = File 2
1 - - - - - - 1 - - - - - - - ' -1 - - - - - - - f - - - - - 1.0
1.0
1.0
File 3
- - - -1 - - - - - - 1 - - - - - - ~---- f - - -0.8
0.8
0.8
2.7
2.7
- - -1 - - -3.1- ~---- - - -3.1
~+~9
~8
- - - - - -1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -38.8
--1-------- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
-
C.P.
Plinch
2.7
msec/block
Standard
File
Problem A
F
=1.0
dominant
column.
Standard
File
Problem A
Space
Printer
C.P.
2.7
C.P.
Printer
2.7
~---- 1 . 6 ----- ---a1:O-1 - - - ---al.o 1 - - a2 K
"il3"K ----. -
File 1: Master In
-
1'9":'4
- - - ""388:0- - - 50.0
1.0
388.0- 1 - - 28.3
- -I - 28."3 - - I--- - - -- - - - - -I - - ---10.0
File 3: Details
- --- - - - - -0.5
- I - - - - -10.0
- -1,580
8.0-'"T,5ao-8.0
File 4: Reports
0.4
~--...",....,..
File 2: Master Out
Total
4
4:200.1132
. - I - ---38.-8-- - - - - 3 - 8 . 8 - - -
3
for C.P. and
2.7
I - - - --'-3-.1 -
---r:2'" ~oo- -5Q."ij'"""'"
26.8
200
1,580
539.7
496.3
4:200.114
1,580
Unit of measure (character)
520
232
Std. routines
-- - - ! - - - -520- - - - - - - - - - - -100
100
Fixed
--~-360
3 (Blocks 1 to 23)
360
360
---==--.
--:::2
,
"
8
0
8--"2,808--I
2,808
6 (Block 24 to 48)
- - ' - - - _ . -'-- --------- ! - - - - - - - - - --2,360 520
2,360
Files
1-------- - -108- - - - '-----_.108
Working
0
Total
4,020
6,256
4:200.1151
6,256
(Contd.)
6/65
201 :201.1 00
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
. 11
Standard File Problem A
. 112 Computation: . . . . . . . standard •
.113 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.113 .
. 114 Graph: . • . . . . . . . . . see graph below .
. 115 Storage space requiredConfiguration I: . . . . 4,020 characters.
Configuration II:. . . . 6, 256 characters.
Configuration III: ... 6, 256 characters.
. 111 Record sizesMaster file: . . . . . . 108 characters.
Detail file: . . . . . . . 1 card.
Report file: . . . . . . . 1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
I
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
2
~
10.0
7
----
-
./
./
/
4
2 -
~
./
~
1.0
7
4
/
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporatio~ and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
201 :201.120
. 12
Standard File Problem B
. 122 Computation:.. . . . . . standard •
.123 Timing basis: • . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.12.
. 124 Graph: • . • • . . . . . . . see graph below.
. 121 Record Sizes Master file: . . . . . . 54 characters.
Detail file: . . . . . . . 1 card.
Report file: . . . . . . . 1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
2
10.0
.-
7
--~
~
I
~
./
/'
4
2
1.0
/
I
~
7
4
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
(Contd.)
6/65
201 :201.130
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
. 13
.132 Computation: . . • . . . . standard .
.133 Timing basis: ••.... using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.13.
• 134 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
standard File Problem C
.131 Record SizesMaster file: ....•• 216 characters.
Detail file: •.•..•. 1 card.
Report file: . . . . . . • 1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
~~ I
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
2
10.0
7
4
--'
-~
-'
~
.-
-- -
/
\\}.. V
~
2
1.0
7
4
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporotion and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201 :201.140
• 14
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
Standard File Problem D
· 142 Computation: .••.... trebled.
• 143 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
• 141 Record Sizes -
Master file: ....•. 108 characters.
Detail file: • . • • . . . 1 card.
Report file: • . . . . . . lIllie.
4:200.14.
· 144 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . • see graph below.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
I
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
2
~
10.0
-
.-
7
~
l/"~
4
2
~~ V
/g
I
1.0
7
4
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
(Contd.)
6/65
201 :201.200
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.2
SORTING
.213 Timing basis: ••.... as in Paragraph 4:200.213,
using 2-way merge for
Standard Configuration IT
and 3-way merge for
Configuration ill.
.214 Graph: . . . . . • . . . . . see graph below.
.21 Standard Problem Estimate
.211 Record size: . . . . . . . 80 characters.
. 212 Key size: . . • . . . . . • 8 characters.
1,000
7
4
2
~I
1I
100
,
7
/
/
4
V
2
Time in Minutes to
Put Records into
Required Order
10
II
~
L
V
V
1/
,
7
~
/
4
Y
2
/
Y
1
~'
,
/
/
7
/
I'
4
2
0.1
/
/
~
V -IV
100
2
/
4
7
1,000
2
4
7
10,000
2
4
7
100,000
Number of Records
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
201 :201.220
. 22
.223 Timing basis: •••••• times supplied by Burroughs
Corporation .
. 224 Graph: ..•••••••.. see graph below .
Tape Sort Generator
• 221 Record size: •.•.••• 80 characters.
. 222 Key size: .•••.•••• 8 characters.
1,000
7
4
2
100
"7
7
7
,J
4
2
V
Time in Minutes to
Put Records into
Required Order
10
II
r~
7
7
4
/
~y
2
I/"
V
1
7
~
4
2
7
V
l...o"
1/
V
/
0.1
100
2
4
7
1,000
2
4
7
10,000
2
4
Number of Records
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
6/65
7
100,000
201 :211.1 01
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Physical Characteristics
\
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Width,
inches
Depth,
inches
Height,
inches
Weight,
pounds
Power,
Central Processor
(all models)
29
66
55
1,200
0.7
2,000
B 122 Card Reader
Card Reader (all
other models)
B 303 Card Punch
B 304 Card Punch
Line Printer (all
models)
29
48
17
29
41
50
102
920
0.20
1.3
700
3,000
44
73
74
28
27
29
53·
47
55
4,000
5,500
4,480
B 333 Multiple Tape
Lister
Multiple Tape Lister
(all other models)
40
29
55
800
1.4
2.2
2.3 idle
3.5 printing
1.7
74
29
55
1,750
Magnetic Tape Unit
(all models)
B 116 Sorter-Reader
Sorter-Reader (all
other models)
29
28
74
900
180
144
35
35
58
58
Paper Tape Reader
Paper Tape Punch
Supervisory Printer
Record Processor
30
30
22
63
24
24
22
116
Teletype Terminal
Typewriter Terminal
Typewriter Inquiry
Station
Dial TWX Terminal
Central Terminal
24
24
18
Basic Disk File/Data
Communication Control
Unit
Disk File Storage
Module
Disk File Electronics
Unit
Unit
655
1,283
1,738
KVA
BTU
per hr.
1,740
4,480
3,800
3,580
2.3 idle
3.5 printing
2.05/
3.35
9.6
8.0
24,000
22,000
60
60
50
65
437
426
200
2,800
0.91
0.59
0.3
4.5
3,100
1,500
negligible
12,000
38
38
20
42
42
40
500
500
60
0.23
0.23
0.26
800
800
800
24
24
38
44
42
43
500
525
0.23
0.4
800
1,000
32
46
73
1,000
1.5
5,000
22
46
53
3,800
1.46
3,800
45
46
53
450
1.1
4,100
7,200
General Requirements
Temperature: •••••••••• between 66° and 80°F.
Re1ativehumidity: ••••••• between 30% and 65%.
Power: ••••••••••••••• 115/230-volt, 1-phase,
60-cycle, 3-wire; or
120/208-volt, 1phase, 60-cycle, 3wire.
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201 :221.101
Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series
Price Data
. PRICE DATA
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
CENTRAL
PROCESSORS
No.
Name
PRICES
*
Monthly
Rental
$
Monthly
Maintenance
$**
Purchase
$
B 160
B 170
B 180
Card Processor
MICR/Tape Processor
Tape Processor
1,030
1,340
1,195
105.00
110.00
105.00
67,500
74,250
71,325
B 250
B 251
1,650
4,400
110.00
1,175.00
56,100
175,000
B 260
B 270
B 280
MICR/Ledger Processor
VRC System (includes B 102,
B 122, and B 104)
Card Processor
MICR/Tape Processor
Tape Processor
1,500
1,650
1,585
105.00
115.00
110.00
67,500
74,250
71,325
B
B
B
B
Card Processor
MICR/Tape/Disk File Processor
MICR Processor
Tape/Disk File Processor
1,600
1,850
1,665
1,785
110.00
125.00
115.00
115.00
72,000
83,250
74,925
80,325
Basic Processor
1,645
110.00
74,025
263
273
275
283
B 300
(Note: Each Central Processor
includes 4,800 character
positions of core storage.)
CORE
STORAGE
MODULES
Additional 4, 800 characters
Additional 9,600 characters
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
OPTIONAL
COMMANDS
Transfer and Branch
16-Pocket Sorter-Reader Control
Selective Stacking (B 304 Card
Punch only)
20.00
10.00
24,750
14,625
450
450
550
325
50
50
50
25
30
15
-
1,250
1,350
675
50
50
50
50
50
25
65
50
100
25
-
1,125
3,325
2,250
4,500
1,125
250
95
85
50
50
50
50
40
45
40
15
50
50
15
5.00
-
1,800
1,800
1,610
675
2,250
2,250
675
(Note: above options are
available with B 200/300 6-/.Isec
Processors. )
Transfer and Translate
Unit Interrogate
Data Compress and Expand
Binary Card Read/Punch
B 332 Lister Control
(Note: above commands are
available with B 300 Processor
only.)
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
OPTIONAL
FEATURES
*
**
132-Printer-Position Capability
Card Reader Busy Branch
Printer/Lister Selector
Card Reader Early Release
66KC Magnetic Tape Control
72KC Magnetic Tape Control
Sense Switches
5.00
5.00
5.00
One-tIme charge apphcable When certam unIts are added to an eXlstmg system mstaIlatlOn.
Maintenance charges are slightly higher in rural:areas.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
201:221.102
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
No.
Name
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
OPTIONAL
FEATURES
(Continued)
(Note: see System Configuration
chart, page 201:031. 001, for
feature applicability.)
INP.uTOUTPUT
CONTROL
MODULES
MICR Sorter-Reader
Paper Tape
MICR Sorter/Paper Tape
Supervisory Printer
Magnetic Tape
Disk File
Data Communications
PRICES
*
Monthly
Rental
85
85
130
50
85
130
50
65
120
185.
15
155
15
15
10.00
10.00
10.00
-
2,925
5,400
8,325
675
6,975
675
675
1,890
2,000
2,000
465.00
500.00
500.00
85,050
90,000
90,000
1,900
500.00
85,500
1,800
2,000
500.00
550.00
90,000
99,000
2,300
615.00
103,500
1,080
200
50.00
9,000
40.00
70.00
75.00
115.00
145
220
320
400
600
20
9,900
18,000
18,000
27,000
800
$
Monthly
Maintenance
$**
10.00
Purchase
$
(Note: B 300 Series requires one
module for each class of inputoutput device used; B 200 Series
requires the modules only for
extra input-output devices
attached in the field.)
INPUTOUTPUT
BIOI
B 102
B 103
B 104
B 106
B 107
B 116
MICR Sorter-Readers
l3-Pocket Non-System (1560 dpm)
13-Pocket With Standby (1560 dpm)
13-Pocket With Endorser
Capability (1560 dpm)
13-Pocket Without Standby
(1560 dpm)
13-Pocket With Standby (1200 dpm)
13-Pocket With Endorser
(1200 dpm)
16-Pocket With Endorser Capability (1560 dpm)
Endorser (B 103 and B 116 only)
B 122
B 123
Bl24
B 129
*
-
B 303
B 304
Card Punch (100 cpm)
Card Punch (300 cpm)
450
650
65.00
115.00
20;250
29,250
B 141
Paper Tape Reader (500-1000
char/sec)
Input Code Translator
Card Reader/Paper Tape
Reader Selector Switch
400
70.00
18,000
50
180
10.00
8,100
50
15
Paper Tape Punch (100 char/sec)
Output Code Translator
Card Punch/Paper Tape Punch
Selector Switch
50
50
190
170
15
B 341
**
Readers and Punches
Card Reader (200 cpm)
Card Reader (475 cpm)
Card Reader (800 cpm)
Card Reader (1,400 cpm)
Postal Money Order Option
40.00
10.00
-
675
8,550
7,650
675
One-time charge applicable when certain units are added to an existing system installation.
Maintenance charges are slightly higher in rural areas.
.
(Contd.)
6/65
201:221.103
PRICE DATA
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
INPUTOUTPUT
(Continued)
Name
No.
B
B
B
B
B
320
321
325
328
329
Printers and
Line Printer
Line Printer
Line Printer
Line Printer
Line Printer
B 323
B 326
B 332
B 333
B 421
B 422
B 423
B 424
B 425
B 495
B 401
B 481
B
B
B
B
AUXILIARY
STORAGE
*
**
483
493
484
486
B471
B 475
*
Listers
(475 lpm; 120 p.p.)
(700 lpm; 120 p.p.)
(700 lpm; 132 p.p.)
(1040 lpm; 120 p.p.)
(1040 lpm; 132 p.p.)
$
Monthly
Maintenance
$**
Purchase
$
170.00
175.00
185.00
195.00
205.00
54,000
54,000
57,375
59,600
63,000
200
10.00
9,000
1,600
1,200
290.00
245.00
72,000
72,000
1,700
1,300
1,290
310.00
260.00
290.00
76,500
76,500
72,000
1,800
325.00
81,000
750
200.00
33,750
10
-
Units
Unit (18/50KC
700
145.00
31,500
Unit (24/66KC
800
155.00
36,000
Unit (24KC at
495
145.00
31,500
Unit (66KC at
850
165.00
38,250
Unit (18/50/72KC
850
165.00
38,250
300
35.00
13,500
1,150
83
540.00
25.00
63,100
3,475
460
480
660
55
700
1,095
55.00
55.00
75.00
10.00
80.00
100.00
20,700
21,600
29,700
2,475
31,500
49,275
710
990
80.00
115.00
31,950
44,550
Multiple Tape Lister
(1600 lpm) First
Additional
Multiple Tape Lister
(1600Ipm) First
Additional
Multiple Tape Lister
(1250 lpm)
Master MUltiple Tape Lister
(1600 lpm)
Slave Multiple Tape Lister
(1600 lpm)
Simultaneous Tape Skipping
(B 322 only)
Magnetic TaEe
Magnetic Tape
at 90 ips)
Magnetic Tape
at 120 ips)
Magnetic Tape
120 ips)
Magnetic Tape
83 ips)
Magnetic Tape
at 90 ips)
Monthly
Rental
810
1,200
1,275
1,325
1,400
Dual Printer Control
B 322
PRICES
85
240
Typewriter
Supervisory Printer
Record Processor
Ledger Processor and Printer
Optical Reader
Data Communications
Teletype Terminal 120-char buffer
240-char buffer
Typewriter Terminal
Typewriter Inquiry Station
Dial TWX Terminal
Central Terminal
Disk File
Electronics Unit
Storage Module
50
400
One-time charge applicable when certain units are added to an existing system installation.
Maintenance charges are slightly higher in rural areas.
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6/65
BURROUGHS B 100/200/300 SERIES
201: 221.104
IDENTITY OF UNIT
,.
CLASS
CONTROLLERS
No.
B 450
B 247
B 248
B 451
B 100
SERIES
ADAPTERS
*
**
6/65
PRICES
Name
*
Monthly
Rental
$
Monthly
Maintenance
$**
Purchase
$
Basic Disk File/Data Communication Control
Disk File Control
Data Communication Control
Disk File Expanded Control
330
40.00
14,900
400
340
200
45.00
45.00
25.00
18,000
15,300
9,000
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
235
150
195
235
150
195
150
-
150
-
160 Adapter to use
170 Adapter to use
180 Adapter to use
160 Adapter to use
170 Adapter to use
180 Adapter to use
170 Adapter to use
B 103, and B 104
B 170 Adapter to use
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
124
124
124
321
321
321
102,
B 322
One-time charge applicable when certain units are added to an existing system installation.
Maintenance charges are slightly higher in rural areas.
--
BURROUGHS B 5500
Burroughs Corporation
,', .
,r
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
BURROUGHS B 5500
Burroughs Corporation
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U.S.A.
&.
203:001 • 001
$liND ...
BURROUGHS B 5500
CONTENTS
AEDP
AUER'lJAC~
.,
IEnlJS
CONTENTS
Introduction • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • • . • • • • . • •
Data Structure •••••••••••••.•••••••••.•.••.•.•••...••••
203:011
203:021
System Configuration Table of Permissible Configurations . . . . • . . . . • . . . • . . . . . . .
III:
6-Tape Business System •••••••••.•.••.•••••...
V:
6-Tape Auxiliary Storage System ..•••.••.•••..•••
VIlA:
Integrated 10-Tape General System •••..•.•.••..•••
VIm:
Paired 10-Tape General System •.••...•.••••.••••
203:031.011
203:031.1
203:031. 2
203:031.3
203:031.4
Internal Storage B 460/461 Memory Modules •.•••••••••••••••••.•...•..
B 430 Magnetic Drum .••••••••..••••••..••••••••••••
Disk File System. • . . . . . • • • • • • • • • . . • • • • • • . • • . • • • . • •
203:041
203:042
203:043
Central Processor B 5280 Basic System ..••••••.•••.•...•••••..•....••
B 5281 Processor ...•••••••..•.•.•.••..•••••••.•••
203:051
203:051
Console B 5310 Console •..••••••.•.••••••••••.••••••••.•••
Display and Distribution Panel •.••••••••••.••••..•.••••
Supervisory Printer and Keyboard •..••••.•••••.•••.••••
203:061·
203:061
203:061. 6
Input-Output: Punched Card and Tape B 122 Card Reader (200 cards/min) ••••••••••••••••••.••
B 123 Card Reader (475 cards/min) " .••••••••••••••••••
B 124 Card Reader (800 cards/min) ••••••.•••.••••••••••
B 129 Card Reader (1,400 cards/min) ••••••••••.•••••••••
B 303 Card Punch (100 cards/min) .•.•.•.••••••••••.•.••
B 304 Card Punch (300 cards/min) ••••••••••••••••••••••
B 141 Paper Tape Reader ..•••••••••••••••••••.• ' ...••
B 341 Paper Tape Punch .•••••••••••••••••••.••..••••
203:071
203:072
203:072
203:072
203:073
203:073
203:074
203:075
Input-Output: PrintersB 320 Line Printer
B 321 Line Printer
B 325 Line Printer
B 328 Line Printer
203:081
203:081
203:081
203:082
(475 lines/min) ....•••.•••••.••••••••
(700 lines/min) ..•...••.••••.•••.••..
(700 lines/min) .•••••.••.••••••••••••
(1, 040 lines/min) ••••••• . • . • • • . • • • • . •
Input-Output: Magnetic Tape B 422 Magnetic Tape Unit
B 423 Magnetic Tape Unit
B 424 Magnetic Tape Unit
B 425 Magnetic Tape Unit
\
(24,000 or 66,000 char/sec) •.•.•••.•
(24,000 char/sec) •••.•••.•••.••••
(66,000 char/sec) •.••••.•...••...
(18,000, 50,000, or 72,000 char/sec) ••
203:091
203:091
203:091
203:091
Input-Output: OtherData Communications System •••••••..••.•.•.•.••••••.•
B 5480 Data Communication Control Unit .••.•••••.•.••••.•
B 450 Disk File and Data Communication Basic Control ••••••..
B 481 Teletype Terminal Unit .••..•••.••••..•••••••.••
B 483 Typewriter Terminal Unit •••••.••..••..••.••.••.•
B 493 Typewriter Inquiry Station •••••.•.•••..•..•••.•••
B 484 Dial TWX Terminal Unit ••••••.••.•••••••.•••..••
B 487 Data Transmission Terminal Unit .••••.••••.••.••••
203:101
203:101
203:101
203:101
203:101
203:101
203:101
203:101
Simultaneous Operations B 5283 Input/Output Channel ••••••.•••••••••••.•••..••
Instruction List. • • • • • • • • • • . • • • . • • • • • • • • • • • . • • • . • • • • • . • . •
Data Code Tables ••.••••••••••••••••.••••••••••••••.•••.•
203:111
203:121
203:141
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
203:001.002
10/65
BURROUGHS B 5500
Problem Oriented Facilities Tape Sort Generator .••..••.•••••••••••••••••..••.••
Disk File Sort Generator. . • • . • . • • . • . . . • • • • • • • • • • • • . • •
Scientific Library Procedures ..•.•••••••.••.••••.••.••
203:151.13
203:151.13
203:151.17
Process Oriented Languages Extended ALGOL .••••••.••.••••••••..••••••.•.••••
COBOL 61 Extended •...•••..•••.•.••••.•••....•••••
FORTRANIV ••••••••••••••..••••.•.....•.•......
203:161
203:162
203:163
Program Translators Extended ALGOL .••.•••••••..•••.••••••.....•.••..
COBOL 61 Extended •••.•••••.••••••••••.•...••••.••
FORTRANIV .••••••..•..•••••..•.•...••.•.••.•••
203:181
203:182
203:183
Operating Environment Drum Master Control Program .•..•..••.••...•••.••..•
Disk File Master Control Program • . . • . • • . . . . • • . . • . . . . . •
203:191
203:192
System Performance General •.•••••.••.•••.••...•••..•••.•.•..•.•.••
Worksheet Data Tables •..•.•.•.••.•....•.•••••.•..••
Generalized File Processing . . . . . . . . . • • . . . • . . • . . . . . . . .
Sorting . . • • . . . • • . • . . . . . • . • • . . . • . . • . . • . . . . • • . . . •
Matrix Inversion • . • . . • • • • • . . • • . . . . . . . . . • . . • . . . • . . .
Generalized Mathematical Processing • • . . • . • . • . . • . . . . . . . .
203:201.001
203:201. 011
203:201.1
203:201. 2
203:201. 3
203:201.4
Physical Characteristics •...•.••..•••.•.•••...•...••••..•.•
Price Data •••••••••••••••••••••••.•••.•.••.•.••••..•••
203:211
203:221
A
AUERBACH
~
-
203:011. 100
~
\
"AN"'D
BURROUGHS B 5500
INTRODUCTION
AEDP
"
-
AUERBAC~
I£,GRTS
•
INTRODUCTION
.1
SUMMARY
The Burroughs B 5500 Information Processing System is a medium-scale computer
system that is suitable for both scientific and commercial data processing. Flexibility
in the choice of system configurations results in monthly rentals that range from $16,700
to $160,000. Typical B 5500 systems, however, fall within the $20,000 to $35,000 rental range.
The B 5500 system is an upgraded, improved version of the highly unconventional and
imaginative B 5000 system, which was first delivered in March, 1963. Burroughs
announced the B 5500 in October, 1964, as a replacement for all B 5000 systems in the
field at that time, and dropped the B 5000, as such, from its product line. In most
cases, field modifications permitted on-site conversion of the installed B 5000's to
B 5500's.
Changes in hardware have centered principally on the central processor. The processor
read access time has been reduced from 6 to 4 microseconds, the execution time of many
instructions has been improved, and several new and powerful operators have been added
to the repertoire. Software changes included a reworked version of the Drum Master
Control Program - designed to take full advantage of the expanded instruction list and a new Master Control Program that is oriented toward the use of Burroughs' highperformance Disk File. In addition, the COBOL and ALGOL compilers were refurbished to provide improved compilation times and greater efficiency in the generation of
machine-language instructions.
It should be noted that the B 5500 is basically a more efficient and, therefore, more
productive version of the B 5000; but the B 5500 system retains all the design characteristics that made the B 5000 appear so unconventional when it was announced in 1961.
Primary emphasis is still placed on the exclusive use of process-oriented languages
(ALGOL, COBOL, and FORTRAN) for coding all user programs. Because of this emphasis, Burroughs has developed hardware and software that is oriented toward fast
and efficient compilation, with the hope that no user will feel the need for any machineoriented languages. The B 5500 also features the capability that has come to be called
multiprogramming - the ability to execute more than one independent program concurrently on the same computer system. Both the B 5500's hardware and its Master
Control Program (MCP) have been designed specifically to facilitate the support of
efficient multiprogramming. Benefitting from several years of experience in this
area, Burroughs does not hesitate to market the B 5500 primarily on the basis of its
ability to process more than one program simultaneously, leading in most cases to
increased job throughput.
Some of the unusual hardware facilities that have been incorporated to help achieve
the B 5500's design objectives can be summarized as follows:
•
Automatic temporary storage for operands and subroutine parameters
is provided by a "stack", which operates on the "last-in, first-out"
principle.
•
Internal operations can be performed in either the Word Mode, upon
48-bit binary operands, or in the Character Mode, upon strings of
6-bit alphameric characters.
•
A common representation is used for integers and floating-point
numbers.
•
Recursive use of subroutines is largely automatic and unrestricted.
•
All machine-language addressing is relative and/or indirect, facilitating program segmentation and relocation.
•
The same two registers are used for both indexing and arithmetic
operations; no index registers of the usual type are provided.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
BURROUGHS B 5500
203:011. 101
.1
•2
SUMMARY (Contd.)
•
There is effective (but not infallible) storage protection against coding errors,
invalid data, and inter-program interference.
•
Comprehensive interrupt facilities are provided to detect and service special
conditions arising anywhere in the system.
•
Each of up to 8 core storage modules can accept or transmit data independently
of the other core modules and of the processor.
•
Magnetic drums and/or disc files provide rapid-access auxiliary storage for
the operating system, compilers, program segments, and data arrays.
•
All input-output operations are controlled by independent Input/Output Channels; up to four channels can be connected, and any channel can reference
anyone of up to 39 peripheral devices in a system.
•
A second, virtually independent central processor can be added to any B 5500
system; the two processors share all storage and input-output facilities .
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
The B 5281 Processor of the B 5500 Information Processing System is the control center of a unique arrangement of memory and input-output control units, arithmetic units,
and interrupt networks. All internal operations can be performed in either the Word
Mode, using 48-bit binary words as operands, or in the Character Mode, using variablelength alphameric fields packed eight characters to the word. In the Word Mode, the
central processor can perform fixed-point or floating-point arithmetic operations upon
single or double word-length binary operands. A variety of logical and comparison
operations is also provided in this mode. The Character Mode is designed mainly for
data manipulation operations such as editing and scanning. Many processor functions,
including addition, subtraction, branching, and table lookups, can be performed in
either mode.
A program word consists of four 12-bit "syllables", and each syllable can specify an
operation, a relative address, or a literal to be placed in the stack. The Program
Reference Table is a relocatable table containing single data items and 48-bit "descriptors," which are used for supplementary control and indirect addressing of data
arrays, input-output areas, and program segments. The "stack" consists of the two
arithmetic registers (A and B) in the central processor and a relocatable area of core
storage; it provides automatic temporary storage of the "last-in, first-out" type for a
list of operands and control words. In a multiprogramming environment, each program has its own stack and its own Program Reference Table. Whenever an interrupt
occurs during the execution of one program, the contents of the A and B registers
and all necessary control information are automatically pushed down into the appropriate stack in core storage; then the Processor transfers control to the Master Control Program, which initiates the processing of the next available program.
Operands in the Word Mode are considered to be 48-bit binary words. The integer
part of an operand is represented by 39 bits plus sign, and the octal exponent by 6
bits plus sign. Since the fixed-point part of a B 5500 floating-point number is represented as an integer rather than a fraction, fixed-point and floating-point operands can
be intermixed without conversions.
The comprehensive interrupt system informs the Processor when any of 40 possible
special conditions arises anywhere in the system. All interrupt conditions are sampled
continuously and processed on a priority basis, so that a high-priority interrupt condition
(such as a storage parity error) can interrupt the servicing of a lower-priority interrupt
condition (such as a free Input/Output Channel).
The Processor of the B 5500 system initiates all peripheral input-output operations
by sending a descriptor to a free I/O Channel. The processor is then free to perform
its operations independently of the peripheral operation. Up to four "floating" Jnput/
Output Channels can be connected to the B 5500 system, and each Channel can transfer data between core storage and any of the connected input-output devices. Up to
four input-output data transfer operations can be performed simultaneously, one per
installed I/o Channel, since each I/O Channel functions independently of the others.
(Contd.)
10/65
A
AUERBACH
~
I NTROD UCTION
.2
203:011. 200
CENTRAL PROCESSOR (Contd. )
The B 5500's Processor includes many improvements to the original B 5000 Processor
design. Processor read access time - the total time required to transfer a word of
information from core memory to the Processor or an I/O Channel - has been reduced
from 6 to 4 microseconds. Syllable overlap techniques have been improved, stack
manipulation operations have been accelerated, and 19 new operators have been added.
The primary objective in the inclusion of these and other improvements in the B 5500's
Processor has been to enable the compilers to generate more efficient object programs
and to permit the Master Control Program to perform its program-segment switching
and multi-programming control routines more quickly and more effectively •
.3
INTERNAL STORAGE
From three to eight B 460 or B 461 Memory Modules of core storage can be connected
to a B 5500 system. Each Memory Module contains 4,096 words, providing a maximum
system capacity of 32,768 words, or 262,144 6-bit characters. Each word location
consists of 48 data bits and one parity bit and can hold one binary data item (in floatingpoint or integer form), eight alphameric characters, or one program word. The B 460
Memory Module has a memory cycle time of 6 microseconds, as compared with the
newer B 461 's 4-microsecond cycle time. The B 460 and B 461 are functionally identical, but they cannot be intermixed in the same B 5500 system.
Each core storage module contains its own addressing and read/write circuitry. Operating in conjunction with a switching network called the Memory Exchange, the Memory
Modules can transmit data independently of the central processor. Both the Processor
and the I/O Channels can communicate with the Memory Modules, but always through
the Memory Exchange. Using the maximum B 5500 complement of two Processors and
four I/O Channels, six different Memory Modules can be accessed simultaneously.
However, only one processor or I/O Channel can access anyone Memory Module during
anyone memory cycle.
The B 430 Magnetic Storage Drum provides an 8. 3-millisecond average access time
to 32,768 words of auxiliary storage. Up to 1,023 consecutive words can be transferred
at the rate of 15,360 words per second. Two Storage Drums can be connected to a
B 5500 system. Customers who choose to have their B 5500 system controlled by the
Drum Master Control Program (see Section 203:191) must have at least one Storage
Drum on-line for MCP and system program residence; two Storage Drums are required
for Drum MCP-oriented installations that wish to use COBOL. Use of the Storage Drum
provides the MCP with rapid access to program segments, subroutines, and blocks of
data.
Burroughs' head-per-track Disk Files can also be utilized as auxiliary storage with the
B 5500 system. The Disk File system is a modular on-line storage system that provides storage capacities of up to 960 million characters in modules of 9.6 million characters. Any randomly-addressed block of characters can be accessed within a maximum
of 40 milliseconds, and the average access time is only 20 milliseconds. Transfer of
information between the Disk File system and the Input/Output Channels proceeds at an
average of 100,000 characters per second. From 1 to 1,890 48-bit words of information can be read or written by a single instruction. If two B 5470 Control Units are
connected to a B 5500 system, two simultaneous Disk File accesses are possible. Disk
File accessing can also proceed simultaneously with computation and up to three additional input-output operations.
In addition to providing the standard random processing capabilities, the use of Disk
File storage with the B 5500 system permits the storage of on-line program libraries.
The Disk File-oriented MCP (see Section 203:192) is thereby enabled to gain rapid
access to all scheduled programs, a fact which adds to the efficiency of the B 5500's
multi-programming capability .
•4
INPUT-OUTPUT EQUlPMENT
Most of the input-output equipment offered for use with the B 5500 computer system is
conventional in design and performance. Table I lists all of the current peripheral
devices (other than the auxiliary storage units described in the preceding paragraphs),
together with their principal characteristics. A B 5500 system can include a maximum
of two card readers, one card punch, two line printers, three paper tape units (readers
or punches), 16 magnetic tape units, and 15 data communications terminal units.
Four different types of data communications terminal units are offered by Burroughs for
use with the B 5500 system. The B 481 Teletype Terminal Unit provides buffered interfacing for up to 399 remote Teletype stations; the B 483 Typewriter Terminal Unit can
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERPACH Info, Inc.
10/65
203:0 II. 400
BURROUGHS B 5500
TABLE I: B 5500 INPUT-OUTPUT DEVICES
Type of Device
Model
No.
Characteristics
Name
Card Reader
Card Reader
Card Reader
Card Reader
Card Punch
Card Punch
Reads 200 cpm.
Reads 475 cpm.
Reads 800 cpm.
Reads 1,400 cpm.
Punches 100 cpm.
Punches 300 cpm.
B 141
Paper Tape Reader
B 341
Paper Tape Punch
Reads 5, 6, 7, or 8-level
tape at 500 or 1,000
char/sec.
Punches 5, 6, 7, or 8-level
tape at 100 char/sec.
B
B
B
B
B
320
321
325
328
329
Line Printer
Line Printer
Line Printer
Line Printer
Line Printer
Magnetic Tape Units
B
B
B
B
422
423
424
425
Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic
Data Communications
Devices
B 5480
Punched Card Equipment
B
B
B
B
B
B
Punched Paper Tape
Equipment
Printers
r-'
122
123
124
129
303
304
B 481
B 483
B 484
B 487
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Prints
Prints
Prints
Prints
Prints
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
475 Ipmj 120 print positions.
700 lpmj 120 print positions.
700 lpmj 132 print positions.
1,040 lpmj 120 print positions.
1,040 lpmj 132 print positions.
Transfers
Transfers
Transfers
Transfers
data
data
data
data
at
at
at
at
24 or 66KC.
24KC.
66KC.
18, 50, or 72KC.
Data Communications
Transfers data between Processor
Control Unit
and Terminal Units at 30KC.
Teletype Terminal Unit Controls up to 399 remote Teletype
stations.
Typewriter Terminal
Controls up to 8 typewriter
inquiry stations.
Unit
Controls up to 8 Dial TWX stations.
Dial TWX Terminal
Unit
Data Transmission
Provides buffering and interfacing
Terminal Unit
for wide variety of remote devices .
•4
INPUT-OUTPUT EQUIPMENT (Contd.)
.5
• 51
control up to 8 tYPewriter inquiry stationsj and the B 484 Dial TWX Terminal.regulates
the use of up to 8 stations of the Dial TWX network. The B 487 Data Transmission
Terminal Unit, unlike the other Burroughs terminal units, is general in purpose, permitting a B 5500 system to communicate with a varied mix of data transmission devices
without the use of additional terminal units. Most remote devices that can use the lowspeed and voice-grade lines of the telephone companies can be connected to a B 487,
and ultimately to a B 5500, via Burroughs line adapters. All four models of Burroughs'
terminal units are buffered and can simultaneously accept inquiries from as many remote
devices as their individual buffer sizes will accommodate. Buffer sizes are specified
at the time of manufacture .
SOFTWARE
Compilers
,/
Users of the B 5500 Information Processing System normally do all of their programming
in the ALGOL, COBOL, or FORTRAN languages. Two additional languages, OSIL and
ESPOL, are available for special-purpose programming. OSIL, or Operating Systems
Implementation Language, is a symbolic assembly language that was developed for
writing Burroughs' Drum Master Control Program. ESPOL, or Executive System
Problem Oriented Language, is a modified version of the ALGOL language that was
designed to facilitate the writing of the Disk File Master Control Program.
Extended ALGOL for the B 5500 includes virtually all of the facilities of ALGOL 60 and
a number of useful machine-dependent extensions that enable the programmer to take
advantage of the hardware capabilities of the B 5500. Some of these extensions include
device-oriented input-output constructs, partial-word and double-precision arithmetic
operations, B 5500 Character Mode statements, and constructs to control the operations
of Burroughs data communications terminal units. The ALGOL compiler delivers translation speeds that range between 600 and 800 source-program cards per minute, or up
to/65
A
AUERBACH
e
(Contd. )
INTRODUCTION
. 51
203:011. 519
Compilers (Contd. )
to 2500 magnetic tape card images per minute. More than 100 standard mathematical
functions are included in the ALGOL library of subroutines.
COBOL-61 Extended for the B 5500 is a comprehensive version of the Department of
Defense's COBOL-61 Extended language. All of Required COBOL-61 has been implemented, as well as most of the Elective features of COBOL-61. Two of the three principal extensions of COBOL-61 Extended - the SORT verb and the Mass Storage language
facilities - have also been implemented. (Tape or Disk File sorting on the B 5500
system, using Burroughs-supplied software, is possible only through the use of the
COBOL SORT verb and the Sort Generator within the COBOL compiler.) The Mass
Storage facilities provide the programmer with direct control over both sequential
and random processing of records on the Disk File. COBOL language facilities are
also provided to permit the effective use of Burroughs' various types of data communications terminal units. Translation speeds of up to BOO source-program cards per
minute have been achieved with the COBOL compiler, and the practicality of programming and debugging exclusively in COBOL has been effectively demonstrated
through more than two years of successful user experience.
FORTRAN IV for the B 5500 includes virtually all of the language features proposed
by the X. 3.4.3 FORTRAN group of the American Standards Association. In comparison
to this standard, B 5500 FORTRAN lacks only the provisions to handle double-precision
and complex variable items. Burroughs has designed its FORTRAN language to duplicate, wherever possible, the facilities of the IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV language in
order to facilitate conversions of scientific and engineering installations to the B 5500.
Burroughs' FORTRAN translator (called FORGOL 4) converts FORTRAN IV source
statements into Extended ALGOL for eventual compilatirn by the ALGOL compiler.
No FORTRAN language facilities have been implemented to date by Burroughs to provide direct control of Disk File storage or remote terminal devices.
Almost all program debugging on the B 5500 system is done at the source language level.
MONITOR and DUMP statements are provided in the ALGOL and COBOL languages to
produce tracers, dumps, and snapshots as requested by the programmer •
• 52
Master Control Program (MCP)
The Master Control Program, or MCP, is a comprehensive operating system that controls the scheduling, loading, and execution of every program that is run on a B 5500
system. By means of close integration with the hardware interrupt facilities of the
B 5500 system, the MCP controls multiprogramming, or the simultaneous processing
of two or more independent program segments.
To use multiprogramming effectively with the B 5500 system, the only prerequisites
are that the programs be written in small, logical segments, and that sufficient inputoutput equipment be available to service the needs of the multiple program segments.
The MCP continually analyzes the list of scheduled jobs and decides, on its own, when
and to what degree multiprogramming is possible. The sole criterion used by the
MCP in making this decision is the continuous use of as many as possible of the processing and input-output facilitiefl of the B 5500 system.
Other functions performed by the MCP include automatic handling of most error conditions, monitoring and control of communications between the system and the operator,
complete logging of processing and input-output times for each program processed,
and maintenance of the system and problem program libraries.
Two versions of the Master Control Program are offered for use with the B 5500
system: the Drum MCP and the more recent Disk File MCP, both designated according
to the system device on which the MCP and its control routines reside. The Drum MCP
is slightly less flexible than the Disk MCP in that the Drum MCP lacks the facilities
to control Disk File and data communications operations. In addition, the Drum MCP
gathers its scheduled programs on a Program Collection Tape and scans this tape to
access programs that are appropriate for inclusion in a multiprogramming mix at any
given time. By contrast, the Disk File MCP has direct access to any object program
stored in the on-line program library. This advantage can lead to significant improvements in multiprogramming performance under control of the Disk File MCP. It
should be noted that the storage of frequently-accessed program segments on the magnetic drum will be advantageous even when the Disk File MCP is used, due to the
drum's faster average access time of B.3 milliseconds.
Both versions of the MCP require the permanent use of the first 1,600 words of core
storage for basic control routines; other portions of theMCP are called into core storage from drum or disc storage as required. Burroughs estimates that the MCP's control functions consume between 2 and 10 per cent of the system's total processing time
in typical applications; yet the improvements in throughput gained by means of MCPcontrolled multiprogramming can far overshadow the small MCP overhead time.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
203:021. 100
.&.
STANDARI
.IA
EDP
AUERBAC~
-
BURROUGHS B 5500
DA TA STRUCTURE
",o",s
DATA STRUCTURE
.1
STORAGE LOCATIONS
Name of
Location
Word:
Row:
Line:
Column:
Block:
Block:
.2
DATA FORMATS
Type of Information
Size
Representation
Purpose or Use
Instruction . . . . . . . . four 12-bit "syllables" per
word; each can be an
operator, literal, operand
call, or descriptor call.
Descriptor ..•.•... 1 word; used for indirect
addressing and supplementary control.
Integer number . . . . . 1 word: 39 data bits + sign.
Floating-point
number . . . . • . . . . 1 word: 39 bits + sign for
integer part, 6 bits + sign
for exponent.
Character .....•.•. 6 bits (internal), 1 row
(tape), or 1 column
(cards) •
Card image . . . . • . . 4 card columns per word;
20 consecutive words
per card.
basic addressable
48 data bits
plus 1 parity
unit; holds a data
item, 8 characters,
bit.
or 4 syllables.
magnetic tape; holds
6 data bits
1 character or 1/8
plus 1 parity
of a binary word.
bit.
Line Printer reports.
120 or 132
characters
12 positions
punched cards.
magnetic tape, and
1 to N
Disk File in alphacharacters
numeric mode.
magnetic tape and
1 to 1,023
Disk File in binary
words
mode.
,/
10/65
A
AUERBACH
~
-
203:031.011
BURROUGHS B 5500
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The upper and lower limits of on-line system configuration for the B 5500 are summarized in the
following table.
Max.
No.
Unit
Min.
No.
B 5280
B 5281
Processor A
Processor B
1
0
1
1
B 460
Memory Module (4,096 48-bit
words, 6 /Lsec cycle time)
Memory Module (4,096 48-bit
words, 4 /Lsec cycle time)
3
8
3
8
B 430
Storage Drum (32,768 words)
0
2
No B 430 Storage Drum
is required if Disk File
storage is available.
B 5283
Input/Output Channel
1
4
Up to 32 input/output devices
can be supported.
B 422
B 423
B 424
Magnetic Tape Unit (24-66KC)
Magnetic Tape Unit (24KC)
Magnetic Tape Unit (66 KC)
1
1
1
16
16
16
From 1 to 16 tape units per
system can be supported;
B 422 and B 423 units cannot
be intermixed; B 422 and B 424
can be intermixed if B 422
operates at 120 ips.
B 320
Line Printer
120 char)
Line Printer
120 char)
Line Printer
132 char)
Line Printer
120 char)
Line Printer
132 char)
(475 lpm,
1
2
(700 lpm,
1
2
Either 1 or 2 line printers
per system can be supported;
B 325 and B 329 models require
use of a special adapter.
(700 lpm,
1
2
(1,040 lpm,
1
2
(1,040 lpm,
1
2
Card Reader
Card Reader
Card Reader
Card Reader
(200 cpm)
(475 cpm)
(800 cpm)
(1,400 cpm)
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
Model No.
B 461
B 321
B 325
B 328
B 329
B
B
B
B
122
123
124
129
B 303
B 304
Card Punch (100 cpm)
Card Punch (300 cpm)
0
0
1
1
B 141
Paptlr Tape Reader (5001,000 cps)
Paper Tape Punch (100 cps)
0
2
0
2
Disk File/Data Communications Basic Control
Disk File Expanded Control
Disk File Control Unit
Disk File Electronics Unit
Disk File Storage Module
0
1
0
0
0
0
4
2
20
100
Data Communication Control
Unit
Teletype Terminal Unit
Typewriter Terminal Unit
Dial TWX Terminal Unit
Typewriter Inquiry Station
0
2
0
0
0
0
15
15
15
120
Supervisory Printer and
Keyboard
1
1
B 341
B 450
B 451
B 5470
B471
B475
B 5480
B 481
B483
B484
B493
-
©
Notes
B 460 and B 461 modules
cannot be intermixed in
one system; COBOL requires a minimum of 4
memory modules.
Either 1 or 2 card readers
can be supported per
system.
Up to 3 paper tape units can
be supported per system.
Up to 960 million characters
of Disk File storage can be
supported, in modules
(B 475) of 9.6 million
characters.
Up to 15 terminal units can be
supported per system.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
203:031.100
.1
BURROUGHS B 5500
6-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION m
Deviations From Standard Configuration: . . . ..
Disk File storage is used by Master Control
Program.
Core storage capacity is 10 times larger
than standard.
Card Reader is 60% faster.
Line printer is 40% faster.
Magnetic tape units are 20% slower.
Equipment
Rental
4 B 461 Memory Modules: 16,384
words total (4 J.lSec cycle time)
$ 5,800
Disk File storage
(9.6 million characters) and
controllers
2,620
Processor
7,400
2 Input/Output Channels
2,500
r.----il
I
I
I
I
I
I
j
Supervisory Printer & Keyboard
*
B 124 Card Reader:
800 cards/min.
400
B 303 Card Punch:
100 cards/min.
450
B 321 Line Printer:
700 lines/min.
1,200
6 B 423 Magnetic Tape Units:
24,000 char/sec.
2,970·
Total:
$23,340
* Included in Processor rental.
Note: This system also meets all requirements for Standard Configuration VI, the 6-Tape Business/
Scientific System.
(Contd.)
10/65
A•
AUERBACH
203:031. 200
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.2
6-TAPE AUXILIARY STORAGE SYSTEM: CONFIGURATION V
Deviations from Standard Configurations: • • • One Disk File Storage Module
(9.6 million chars.) is used by
Master Control Program.
Core storage capacity is 10 times
larger than standard.
Card Reader is 60% faster.
Line printer is 40% faster.
Magnetic tape units are 20% slower.
Equipment
Rental
4 B 461 Memory Modules: 16,384
words total (4 Ilsec cycle time)
$ 5,800
Disk File controllers
920
3 Disk File Storage Modules
(28. 8 million characters)
3,610
Processor
7,400
2 Input/Output Channels
2,500
1-----i1
I
I
I
I
I
I
J
Supervisory Printer & Keyboard
*
*
B 124 Card Reader:
800 cards/min.
400
B 303 Card Punch:
100 cards/min.
450
B 321 Line Printer:
700 lines/min.
1,200
6 B 423 Magnetic Tape Units:
24,000 char/sec.
2,970
Total
$25,250
Included in Processor rental.
\
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
203:031.300
.3
BURROUGHS B 5500
INTEGRATED 10-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION VlIA
Deviations from Standard Configuration: ., Core storage is 82% larger than standard.
Disk File storage is used by Master
Control Program.
Card reader is 60% faster.
Printer is twice as fast as standard.
Equipment
Rental
B 461 Memory Modules:
16,384 words total
(4 p.sec cycle time)
$ 5,800
/
I
Disk File storage
(9.6 million characters)
and controllers
2,620
Processor
7,400
4 Input/Output Channels
5,000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.... Supervisory Printer & Keyboard
B 124 Card Reader:
800 cards/min.
400
B 303 Card Punch:
100 cards/min.
450
B 328 Line Printer:
1, 040 lines/min.
1,325
10 B 422 Magnetic Tape Units:
24,000 or 66,600 char/sec.
8,000
Total
*
*
,/
$30,995
Included in Processor rental.
(Contd.)
10/65
A.
AUERBACH
203:031.400
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.4
PAmED 10-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION VIIB
Deviations from Standard Configuration
On-line: . . . . Core storage is more than twice as large as standard.
Disk File storage is used by Master Control Program.
Card reader is twice as fast as standard.
Off-line: . . . . Magnetic tape units are 25% slower.
Multiply-Divide hardware is standard.
Card reader, punch, and printer are buffered.
No console typewriter is available with B 180
processor.
Rental
Equipment
I
I
I
,-- ---
I
I
I
I
l
L:_.:J
I
L
$ 5,800
Disk File storage
(9.6 million characters)
and controllers
2,620
Processor
7,400
2 Input/Output Channels
2,500
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4 B 461 Memory Modules:
16,384 words total
(4 J.!Sec cycle time)
_-oJ
Supervisory Printer & Keyboard
B 122 Card Reader:
*
220
200 cards/min.
8 B 422 Magnetic. Tape Units:
24,000 or 66,000 char/sec.
*
Included in Processor rental.
©
Total:
Total, including
off-line equipment
(next page):
'965 AUERBACH Corporotion and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6,400
$24,940
$28,705
10/65
203:031. 401
•4
BURROUGHS B 5500
CONFIGURATION WB (Contd.)
Off-Line Equipment (Burroughs B 180)
Equipment
Rental
Core Storage:
4,800 characters
$1,195
B 180 Processor
(10 jJSec cycle time)
B 123 Card Reader:
475 cards/min.
320
B 303 Card Punch:
100 cards/min.
450
B 320 Line Printer:
475 lines/min.
810
2 B 423 Magnetic Tape Units:
24,000 char/sec.
990
3,765
10/65
fA
AUERBACH.
~
-1.
203:041. 100
STAND'"
BURROUGHS B 5500
INTERNAL STORAGE
B 460/461 MEMORY MODULES
/AEDP
AUERBAC~
.,
REPORTS
INTERNAL STORAGE: B 460/461 MEMORY MODULES
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . . . . • . • . • B 460 Memory Module
(6-J.!sec cycle).
B 461 Memory Module
(4-J.!sec cycle).
.12'
Basic Use: ...••••• working storage.
• 13
Description
Each of the 4,096 word locations in a memory
module holds 48 data bits and one parity bit.
Therefore each location can store one singleprecision fixed-point or floating-point data item,
eight alphameric characters, one 4-syllable program word, or one Program or Data Descriptor.
Each memory module also contains a 12-bit Memory
Address register, which holds the address of the
location currently being accessed, and a 49-bit
Information Buffer register, which receives each
word to be stored and transmits each word that is
read from storage.
Working storage for B 5500 systems is provided by
either B 460 or B 461 Memory Modules. The B 460
has a memory cycle time of 6 microseconds, as
opposed to the newer B 461' s 4-microsecond cycle
time. Except for this difference in memory cycle
time, the B 460 and B 461 Memory Modules are
functionally identical. However, they cannot be
intermixed in the same B 5500 system.
Each B 460 or B 461 Memory Module provides
4,096 48-bit words of coincident-current magnetic
core memory. A minimum of three and a maximum
of eight memory modules can be utilized with each
B 5500 computer system, providing core storage
capacities ranging from 12,288 to 32,768 words.
If the COBOL language is to be used in a B 5500
installation, the minimum core storage requirement is four memory modules (16,384 words).
Each individual memory module contains its own
addressing and read-write circuitry. Operating in
conjunction with a switching network called the
Memory Exchange, a section of the B 5500 Central
Control Unit, the memory modules can transmit
data independently of the central processor. The
effective memory read access time of the B 460
Memory Module is 3 microseconds per word; that
of the B 461 Memory Module is 2 microseconds per
word (or 250 nanoseconds per 6-bit character).
Both the Processor and the Input/Output Channels
can communicate with the memory modules, but
always through the Memory Exchange. When the
maximum complement of two Processors and four
Input/Output Channels is connected to a B 5500
system, up to six different memory modules can be
accessed simultaneously. However, only one Processor or I/O Channel can access the same memory
module at the same time.
The address of each word of available core storage
is formed by means of a 15-bit binary field. The
first three bits of the address field designate the
memory module to be accessed, and the remaining
twelve bits refer directly to the specific add:r:ess
within the 4,096 possible addresses of the designated memory module. The selection of the designated memory module is performed by the Memory
Exchange network, but the memory module itself
independently locates the addressed location within
its core storage. This method of memory'access
contributes to the B 5500's ability to communicate
with up to six memory modules simultaneously.
©
A parity bit is generated when a word is stored
and checked when it is read out of storage. Checks
are also made for invalid storage addresses and
for references to segments not currently in core
storage. Any of these error conditions will cause
an interrupt and a transfer of control to the Master
Control Program.
Burroughs anticipates that the use of the 4-microsecond B 461 Memory Module, rather than the 6microsecond B 460, will improve B 5500 processing
times by as much as 25%.
.14
Availability: ••.•... immediate for B 460 and
B 461.
• 15
First Delivery: . . . • . April 1963 for B 460 .
April 1965 for B 461.
.16
Reserved Storage: .•. 1600 words in 1 module are
reserved for most
frequently-used portion of
Master Control Program
and are not normally
available as working
storage. Attempts to
access this area in the
Normal State cause
invalid address interrupts.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
• 21
storage Medium: . . . . magnetic cores .
.23
Storage Phenomenon: . direction of magnetization.
.24
Recording Permanence
· 241 Data erasable by
instructions: •••.•.
• 242 Data regenerated
constantly: ••..•.•
• 243 Data volatile: " ••..
• 244 Data permanent: ••..
.245 Storage changeable: .•
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
yes.
no.
no.
no.
no.
10/65
BURROUGHS B 5500
203:041.270
.27
Interleaving Levels: .. no interleaving.
.5
ACCESS TIMING
• 28
Access Techniques
.51
Arrangement of
Heads: •••.•••••. 1 access device per module.
• 52
Simultaneous
Operations: ••••••• each module operates independently; maximum
number of simultaneous
accesses is N, where N
is either the number of
Memory Modules or the
total number of Processors
and I/O Channels, whichever is smaller.
.53
Access Time Parameters and Variations
• 281 Recording method: •.• coincident current.
.282 Reading method: •••• sense wire.
.283 Type of access: ••••• uniform; read-out followed
by rewrite.
· 29
Potential Transfer Rates
.292 Peak data rates Cycling rate: •••••• 166,667 cps for B 460.
250,000 cps for B 461.
Unit of data: .••••• word.
Conversion factor: •• 48 data bits per word.
Data rate: ••••.•.• 166,667 words/sec for
B 460.
250,000 words/sec for
B 461.
Compound data rate:. when 2 Processors and 4
I/O Channels each access
a separate Memory
Module, the B 460 transfers up to 1,000,000
words/sec and the B 461
transfers up to 1,500,000
words/sec.
.
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and System Size
Identity:
Modules:
Words:
Characters:
Syllables:
• 32
Minimum
Storage
Maximum
Storage
B 460 or
B 461
3
12,288
98,304
49,152
B 460 or
B 461
8
32,768
262,144
131,072
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity: ••.•..•••• Central Control Unit,
model B 5220 (part of
B 5280 Processor).
.42
.7
PERFORMANCE
.72
Transfer Load Size
With self: •.••.••.. 1 to 63 words.
With storage
drum: .•••...... 1 to 1,023 words.
With Disk File: ••..• 1 to 1,890 words.
.73
Rules for Combining
Modules: .••••••• 3 to 8 Memory Modules per
system; B 460 and B 461
cannot be intermixed.
.4
• 531 For uniform access Access time: ...•.. 3 J.Lsec for B 460.
2 J.Lsec for B 461.
Cycle time: •...••. 6 J.Lsec for B 460.
4 J.Lsec for B 461.
For data unit of: ••. 1 word of 48 data bits
and 1 parity bit.
With self (via
Processor): .••.•• 44,168 words/sec for B 460;
55,555 words/sec for B 461.
.8
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Recording of
data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
Timing conflicts:
Connection to System
check
parity check
interrupt.
interrupt.
record parity bit.
parity check
send parity bit .
check
interrupt•
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per
controller: •••••.• 3 to 8 Memory Modules.
.432 Restrictions: •.•••.. none.
10/65
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Check
or1irterlock
• 421 On-line: •••.••••.. 1 Central Control Unit.
• 422 Off-line: •.•••••••• none.
.43
Effective Transfer Rate
Physical record
missing:
presence check
A
AUERBACH
~
form· access
request
queue
according to
priority.
interrupt.
203:042. 100
&
SImARD
BURROUGHS B 5500
INTERNAL STORAGE
8 430 MAGNETIC DRUM
/AEDP
-
AUERBAC~
REPORTS
~
INTERNAL STORAGE: B 430 MAGNETIC DRUM
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . • . . • . . . . . B 430 Magnetic Drum
Memory.
• 12
Basic Use: . . . . . . . • auxiliary storage .
.13
Description
The B 430 Magnetic Drum Memory (or Simply,
Storage Drum) is an auxiliary storage device that
provides rapid access to program segments, subroutines, and blocks of data. Up to two Storage
Drums can be connected to a B 5500 system. Each
drum provides 32,768 word locations of storage,
arranged in 64 bands of 512 words each. At least
one Storage Drum is required with each B 5500
system that is controlled by the Drum Master Control Program (MCP). Business-oriented installations using COBOL require two Storage Drums
when operating in the Drum MCP environment.
However, if the newer Disk File MCP is alternatively selected as the B 5500's operating system,
then a Storage Drum is not essential to the B 5500
configuration.
Each of the B 430 Storage Drum's 64 bands consists of 6 tracks that are read and recorded in
parallel. Each word location contains eight 6bit data rows and one 6-bit parity row. The 512
words in each band are recorded in the form of 2
interleaved groups of 256 words each.
Therefore,
any location can be accessed within one drum revolution, but two revolutions are required to transfer a full band. Drum speed is 3,600 revolutions
per minute, so the average access time is 8.3
milliseconds. Peak data transfer rate is 15,360
words or 122,880 characters per second.
The B 430 is considered an input-output device, and,
as such, all data transfers are performed through
the Input/Output Channels. Drum read or write
operations are initiated when the Processor sends
an Input or Output Descriptor from the A register
to an idle Input/Output Channel. The descriptor
specifies the number of consecutive words (from
1 to 1,023) to be transferred between a storage
Drum and a Memory Module, and the drum and
core address of the first word to be transferred.
~eading or writing can start at any drum address.
When a drum read or write operation is completed,
the Input/Output Channel sets an interrupt bit and
places an External Result Descriptor in a fixed
storage location. If any of the following error conditions has occurred, it is indicated by a specific
bit in the result descriptor: incorrect parity, reference to a locked area, not ready, malfunction,
busy, or drum storage overflow.
\
'-
Protection against overwriting sections of the Storage Drum is provided by four manual switches,
each capable of locking out attempted write operations within a 4, 096-word block. Drum read or
write operations are not directly provided in the
available B 5500 programming languages, such
as COBOL, ALGOL, and FORTRAN. Instead,
the Master Control Program controls the use
of the Storage Drum for storing and retrieving
frequently-used blocks of data and program
segments. In addition, when the drum version
of the MCP is used, the COBOL, ALGOL, and/or
FORTRAN compilers, as well as the MCP itself,
are resident on Storage Drum 1. Consequently,
this storage Drum is unavailable for use by the
MCP as auxiliary storage.
.14
Availability: .•....• immediate.
.15
First Delivery: . . . . . April, 1963.
.16
Reserved Storage
.161 Hardware: . . . . . . . . 4 manual lockout switches
per Storage Drum protect
4, o96-word blocks of
storage.
· 162 Software: • . . . • . . . . the Drum MCP and its
compilers reserve exclusive use of one Storage
Drum.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Storage Medium: . . . . magnetic drum.
.22
Physical Dimensions
.222 DrumDiameter: . . . . . . . . 8 inches.
Length: . . . . . . . . . 22 inches.
Number on shaft: ... 1.
· 23
Storage Phenomenon: . magnetization.
.24
Recording Permanence
· 241 Data erasable by
instructions: . . . . . .
· 242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . . . . . .
.243 Data volatile: . . . • . .
.244 Data permanent: ..•.
· 245 Storage changeable: ..
.25
yes.
no.
no.
no.
no.
Data Volume per Band of 6 Tracks
Words: . . . • . . . . . . . 512.
Characters: . . . • . . . 4,096.
Syllables: . . . . . . . . . 2,048.
.26
Bands per Physical
Unit: ..••.••.•.• 64.
.27
Interleaving Levels: .• 2.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
BURROUGHS B 5500
203:042. 280
.28
Access Techniques
• 281 Recording method: •.• fixed heads .
.283 Type of access: ••••. wait for specified sector to
pass under read/write
heads.
.29
Potential Transfer Rates
.291 Peak bit rates Cycling rate:. • • • . . 3, 600 rpm.
Track/head
speed: ••.••..•. 1,510 inches/sec.
Bits/inch/track: ..• 183 (average).
Bit rate per
track: .•••••... 276,480 bits/sec/track.
.292 Peak data rates Unit of data: .••••. word.
Conversion
factor: ...••...• 48 data and 6 parity bits
per word.
Gain factor: ....•• {; tracks per band.
Loss factor: .•.... 2 interleaving levels.
Data rate: •.•.•.. 15,360 words/sec.
Compound data
rate: •..•••••.• 30,720 words/sec (2 drums).
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and System Sizes
Minimum
Storage
Identity:
Drums:
Words:
Characters:
Syllables:
Maximum
Storage
B 430
1
B 430
2
32,768
262,144
131,072
65,536
524,288
262,144
.444 Input-output area
lockout: . • . . . . . . . yes; program reference to
a descriptor of an inputoutput area being filled
or emptied causes an
interrupt.
. 445 Synchronization: .... automatic .
• 447 Table control: . . . . . . none •
.448 Testable conditions: •. parity error;
reference to locked area;
busy unit;
not ready;
core storage overflow.
.5
ACCESS TIMING
Stage
Variation, jJ.sec
Switch bands:
Wait for specified sector:
Read or write:
o or 25
o to 16,667
65 to 66,500*
65 to 83,192
Example, jJ.sec
25
8,333
16,700
25,058
.52
Simultaneous
Operations: .•...•. maximum of 1 read or write
operation per drum; two
drums can be accessed
simultaneously.
.53
Access Time Parameters and Variations
.6
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: .•..•.. no.
.7
PERFORMANCE
.72
Transfer Load Size
With Memory
Modules: ..••.... 1, to 1,023 words.
Rules for Combining
ModUles: ••••••.• 0 to 2 Storage Drums per
system.
.73
Effective Transfer Rate
.4
CONTROLLER
.8
With Memory
Modules: ...••... 15,360 words/sec or
122,880 char/sec .
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
.41
Identity: .•••..•.•. Input/Output Channel,
Model B 5283.
• 42
Connection to System
.32
Check or
Interlock
Invalid address:
Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
RecordIDg of
data:
.421 On-line: •.••....•• 1 to 4 channels.
.422 Off-line: •..•.•.••. none.
.43
record parity
bits.
Recovery of data: parity check
set bit
Dispatch of data: send paritybit.
Timing conflicts: "busy" check
set bit
Reference to
locked area:
check
set bit
Descriptor parity: check
set bit
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per
system: .••...•.• 0 to 2 drums; either drum
can use any available
channel; switching is
performed automatically.
.432 Restrictions: .••..•• none.
.44
indicator.
indicator.
indicator.
indicator.
Note: All ''hit indicators" are set in the External
Result Descriptor that is returned to core
storage at the end of each input-output
operation .
Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load: •.•.•.• 1 to 1,023 words.
• 442 Input-output area: ..• core storage .
• 443 Input-output area
access: .•••••... each word.
10/65
check
set bit indicator.
all codes valid.
parity check.
* 65 Ilsec per word transferred.
A
AUERBACH
~
203:043. 100
~
SI .." "
BURROUGHS B 5500
INTERNAL STORAGE
DISK FILE SYSTEM
/AEDP
AUERBAC~
REPORTS
~
INTERNAL STORAGE: DISK FILE SYSTEM
TABLE I: SELECTED DISK FILE SYSTEM SIZES AND
CONFIGURATION REQUffiEMENTS
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . . • . . • . . . B 450 Disk File/Data
Communications Basic
Control Unit.
B 5470 Disk File Control
Unit.
B 451 Disk File Expanded
Control.
B 471 Disk File Electronics
Unit.
B 475 Disk File Storage
Module.
.12
. 13
Basic Use: . . . • . . . . random-access auxiliary
storage.
Description
The Burroughs B 5500 Disk File System is a largecapacity random-access storage facility that provides the capability to store up to 960 million 6-bit
characters and to access any selected block of
characters within an average of 20 milliseconds.
The high data capacity and fast access time of the
Disk File System result largely from high-density
recording and a fixed read/write head for every
data track. Electronic switching between tracks
in place of movable access arms contributes to the
improved speed and reliability of the B 5500 Disk
File System.
The B 450 Disk File/Data Communications Basic
Control Unit serves as an interface between the
B 5500 and up to two B 5470 Disk File Control Units
or B 5480 Data Communication Control Units. The
B 5470 Disk File Control Unit is the control center
for the B 5500 Disk File System; it regulates the
transfer of 48-bit words of data to and from the
Input/Output Channels. Since the B 5500 system
can accommodate two independently-operating
B 5470's, two simultaneous Disk File accesses are
possible. Disk File access can also proceed simultaneously with computation and with three additional
input-output operations.
Each B 5470 Disk File Control Unit contains the
control and checking circuitry to support up to
480 million characters of data. The B 5470 controls from one to ten B 471 Disk File Electronics
Units, and each Electronics Unit contains the circuitry to control from one to five B 475 Disk
Storage Modules. Each Storage Module contains
four magnetic discs that together provide storage
for up to 9.6 million characters of data, the
smallest available unit of Disk File storage. The
B 451 Disk File Expanded Control is required when
on-line Disk File storage exceeds 48 million characters. Up to four B 451's can be required, one
for each additional block of 240 million storage
locations that is included in the Disk File system.
Table I shows the potential B 5500 Disk File System"
sizes and the configuration requirements for each
size.
©
Disk File System Components
Size in
Millions of
Characters
B 475
9.6
4B
96
240
4BO
960
1
5
10
25
50
100
B471
1
1
2
5
10
20
B 451
0
0
1
1
2
4
B 5470
1
1
1
1
1
2
B 450
1
1
1
1
1
1
The following is a breakdown of the storage capacities of the Disk File system components:
•
Segment - contains 240 6-bit characters or
30 48-bit words; it is the smallest addressable
area of Disk File storage.
•
Data Track - contains up to 24,000 characters,
divided into 100 segments.
• Disc Face - contains 50 data tracks. (Both
disc faces are used for data storage.)
• Storage Module - includes 4 verticallymounted discs on one horizontal shaft. Each
Storage Module contains 9.6 million character
locations.
•
Electronics Unit Modules.
controls 1 to 5 Storage
•
Control Unit - controls 1 to 10 Electronics
Units, providing from 48 to 480 million character locations of disc storage.
• Basic Control - Supports the B 5500 system
maximum of two Control Units.
The magnetic discs rotate at 1500 rpm, and since
no repositioning of the read/write heads is required,
the maximum access time to any data record is
40 milliseconds (one disc revolution) and the average is 20 milliseconds. One situation in which the
average access time is greater than 20 milliseconds is that of updating a record in a non-sequential
file. This operation requires two accesses (to
read the original record and then rewrite the updated version); but the second access is not a
random reference and will often cost almost a full
revolution (40 milliseconds). Thus, the average
access time for file maintenance operations will be
about 30 milliseconds. No timing synchronization
between different Storage Modules is possible; this
prevents attempts to optimize programming by
minimizing disc latency.
Transfer of information between the Disk File system and the Input/Output Channels proceeds at an
average rate of 100,000 characters per second.
Data transfers are executed as 8-character, 48-bit
1965 AUERBACH Corporotion ond AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
BURROUGHS B 5500
203:043. 130
. 13
Description (Contd.)
.14
Availability: . . . . . . . immediate .
words that are assembled in the B 5470 Control
Unit. From 1 to 1,890 words (63 segments) of
information can be read or written by a single
instruction.
· 15
First Delivery: . . . . . 3rd quarter of 1964.
· 16
Reserved Storage: ... the Disk File MCP reserves
use of 1,000 segments of
Storage Module 1; a manual
lockout switch can prevent
access to each disc.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Storage Medium: .••. multiple magnetic discs.
· 22
Physical Dimensions
Disk File segments are addressed through the
B 5470 Control Unit by means of a 7-character
address. The first character designates the
Storage Module to be accessed, and the remaining
six characters designate the segment address.
Segment addresses are assigned starting at some
point on the first disc surface of a Storage Module
and continuing in direct sequential order through
the 40,000 segments of the module. The validity
of each Disk File Address is checked by the Control
Unit prior to any transfer of data. Detection of an
invalid address terminates execution of the Disk
File instruction and sets a specific error indicator
in the appropriate I/O Result Descriptor.
A "check character" is generated in the B 5470
Control Unit and recorded with each 48-bit data
word. This check-character code is automatically
regenerated and compared with the code read from
the disc during every read operation or during a
special Disk File Check operation. If the checkcharacter comparison is unequal, a special error
bit is set in the Disk File Result Descriptor.
Burroughs Corporation does not emphasize the use
of the programmed read-after-write check for two
reasons: first, the readback-and-check operation
can triple the time normally required to. write a
segment of data; and second, the reliability of the
head-per-track Data File design is allegedly high
enough to render such a checking operation unnecessary. Instead, Burroughs recommends, in some
situations, a simultaneous tape write-out of the data
recorded on the Disk File.
A number of physical precautions are taken to safeguard the information on the discs:
.222 Disc Diameter: . . . . . . . . 26. 5 inches.
Thickness or length: . 0.125 inch.
Number on shaft: ... 4 (shaft is horizontal).
.23
Storage Phenomenon: . direction of magnetization.
· 24
Recording Permanence
.241 Data erasable by
instructions: . . . . . .
.242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . . . . . .
.243 Data volatile: . . . . . .
. 244 Data permanent: . . . .
.245 Storage changeable: ..
.25
no.
no .
no.
no.
Data Volume per Band of 1 Track
Words: . . . . . . . . . . .
Characters: . . . . . . .
Digits: . . . . . . . . . . .
Instructions: . . . . . . .
Segments: . • . . . . . . .
.26
yes.
3,000.
24,000.
24,000.
12,000.
100.
Bands per Physical
Unit: . . . . . . . . . . . 50 per disc surface.
• The head design is such that if the heads approach
the discs too closely, a fail-safe technique moves .27 Interleaving Levels: .. 1.
the heads away and switches the unit off.
.28 Access Techniques
• The heads are embedded in a soft material so that
.281 Recording method: ... every track on each disc
the discs will not be damaged if the heads come
surface has an individual,
into contact with the discs.
fixed head .
. 283 Type of access: ...•. wait for selected segment
• Each individual disc has its own manual lockout
for reading or recording;
circuits which can prevent it from being written
no repositioning of access
upon, while allowing reference to its contents.
mechanisms is involved.
Programming of the Disk File system with the
B 5500 is made possible by special language con· 29 Potential Transfer Rates
structs provided in the ALGOL and COBOL compilers. (Report Sections 203: 161 and 203: 162
.291 Peak bit rates describe these language facilities.) The Disk File
Cycling rates: . . . . . 1,500 rpm.
Master Control Program makes use of the Disk
Bit rate per track: .. 700,000 bits/sec/track.
File's high storage capacity for storing all its con.292 Peak data rates trol programs and language compilers, as well as
Unit of data: . . . . . . word.
all the programs in the installation's library. The
Conversion factor: .. 48 bits plus parity bit.
Disk File's relatively fast access time permits the
Gain factor: . . . . . . 1 track/band.
MCP to make all programs and on-line data blocks
Data rate: . . . . . . • . 12,500 words or 100,000
available quickly for use by the problem program.
characters per second.
(Contd. )
10/65
fA.
AUERBACH
~
/
INTERNAL STORAGE: DISK FILE SYSTEM
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and System Sizes
203:043.300
Maximum
Storage
Minimum
Storage
Identity:
Discs:
Words:
Characters:
Instructions:
Modules:
o
o
o
o
o
B 475 Disk
File Storage
Module
4
1,200,000
9,600,000
4,800,000
1
.53
.4
CONTROLLER
•6
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . . . . . . . none .
• 41
Identity: ..•.••.... B 5470 Disk File Control
Unit.
.7
AUXILIARY STORAGE PERFORMANCE
.42
Connection to System
.72
Transfer Load Size
.43
.73
Connection to Device
. 431 Devices per
controller: ..•.•.. 1 to 10 Electronics Units.
. 432 Restrictions:...... . refer to Table I.
. 44
Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load: .••.... 1 to 63 240-character segments, or 1 to 1,023
words.
. 442 Input-output area: .. , core storage.
.443 Input-output area
access: ..•...••. each character.
.444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . • . . . . • none.
• 445 Synchronization: . . . . automatic.
.446 Synchronizing aids: .. none.
.447 Table control: .•.•.. none.
.448 Testable conditions: .• busy controller;
recording lock;
recovery error;
transfer error;
address error.
Access Time Parameters and Variations
Stage
Variation
Average
Positioning:
Latency (rotational
delay):
Total:
0
O.
.5
ACCESS TIMING
.51
Arrangement of Heads: one read-write head per
track.
.52
Simultaneous
Operations: • • . . . . . only one Disk File operation
at a time per B 5470
Control Unit can be performed.
©
msec.
msec.
20 msec.
20 msec .
Effective Transfer Rate
With core storage: .•. 80,000 char/sec •
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Invalid address:
check
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
\
o to 40
o to 40
With core storage: .•. 1 to 63 segments; number
of segments is selected
by program .
.421 On-line: . . . . . . . . . . lor 2 B 5470's.
. 422 Off-line: ..•••....• none.
I
\
B 450 Disk
File Basic
Control
400
120,000,000
960,000,000
480,000,000
100 (max.)
Rules for Combining
Modules: ....•.••• 1 or 2 Control Units can be
used per B 5500; 1 to 10
Electronics Units can be
connected to each Control
Unit; 1 to 5 Storage
Modules can be connected
to each Electronic Unit.
.32
i
B 471 Disk
File Electronics
Unit
20
6,000,000
48,000,000
24,000,000
5 (max.)
Timing conflicts:
Reference to
locked area:
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
Action
error indicator
set, operation
terminated .
parity check
indicator set,
on addresses
operation
terminated,
no data transferred .
optional proset indicator.
grammed
readback
regenerate
set indicator.
and compare check
character
parity bit inbranch.
cluded; notready check
interrogate
branch on busy,
command
error, or
write interlock.
check
indicator set,
operation
terminated.
10/65
-&.
203:051. 100
STANDARD
/AEDP
-
'UER.'C~
BURROUGHS B 5500
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
maRTS
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.122 States, Levels, and Modes
.1
GENERAL
· 11
Identity:... . . . . . . . B 5280 Basic System B 5220 Central Control;
B 5281 Processor;
B 5282 I/O Subsystem;
B 5290 Display and
Distribution;
B 5370 Power Supply.
• 12
Description
• 121 Summary
The B 5281 Processor of the B 5500 Information
Processing System represents an upgraded, improved version of the central processor originally
supplied with the Burroughs B 5000 systems. Production of the older processors has ceased, and all
processors in the field have been modified to include
the improved performance features of the B 5281
Processor. All existing B 5000 systems have thus
been transformed into B 5500's. Paragraph .129
below enumerates several changes that have been
incorporated into the design of the original central
processors.
One or two functionally independent Processors can
be included in a B 5500 system. Access to instructions and data in the B 460 or B 461 Memory
Modules is accomplished through the Memory Exchange of the Central Control - a general switching
network. All information transfers between the
Processor and Memory Modules are made in units
of 48-bit words.
Internal operations can be performed in either the
Word Mode, using 48-bit binary words as operands,
or in the Character Mode, using variable-length
alphameric fields packed eight characters to the
word. In the Word Mode, a common representation
is used for floating-point and integer numbers, so
conversion routines are not required. Complete
arithmetic facilities for single and double-length
operands are provided in the Word Mode. The Character Mode is designed mainly for data manipulation
operations such as editing and scanning.
Instructions are 12-bit "syllables," packed four per
program word. Each syllable specifies an operation, a relative address, or a 10-bit literal. Processor fetch overlap is provided to mask the access
to successive instruction syllables and words with
the execution of the current syllable. "Descriptors"
are 48-bit words used for indirect addressing and
supplementary control; they, along with single operands, are stored in a relocatable core storage area
called the Program Reference Table. The "stack"
consists of two Processor registers and a reserved
area of core storage, and provides temporary storage for an ordered list of operands and control
words.
The Processor will at all times operate in either
the Normal or Control State, in either the Program
or Subprogram Level, and in either the Word or
Character Mode.
Operation is in the Normal State except when a bit
is set in the Interrupt Register to indicate that a
special condition has arisen in the system. Then
the Processor enters the Control State to deal with
the interruption. Certain operations can be performed only in the Control State; these are listed
in the Instruction List, Section 203:121.
The Program Level is the level in which a user's
main program operates. Whenever the program
calls upon a subroutine, the Processor switches
automatically to the Subprogram Level. In the
Program Level, direct reference can be made
only to the top operand in the stack and to the Program Reference Table. The Subprogram Level
permits direct reference to other stack locations,
enabling the stack to be used for subroutine parameters and working storage. In both levels,
reference can be made to elements of data arrays
in core storage through the use of Descriptors (see
Paragraph .123).
Subroutines can be nested, and a subroutine can call
itself recursively. The level of nesting is limited
only by the capacity of the stack. Before entering a
subroutine, the original contents of the stack are
marked, and all necessary parameters are loaded
onto the top of the stack. Then a reference to the
subroutine's Program Descriptor in the PRT
causes placement of a return control word in the
stack, effects entrance to the Subprogram Level,
and transfers control to the first location of the
subroutine addressed by the descriptor.
In the Word Mode, operands are considered to be
48-bit binary words. A parallel binary adder is
used for arithmetic and comparison operations.
The integer part is represented by 39 bits plus
sign, and the octal exponent by 6 bits plus sign.
Since the fixed-point part of a floating-point number
is an integer rather than a fraction, fixed and
floating-point operands can be intermixed without
conversion, and numbers ranging from 10- 46 to
10+69 can be represented.
Each program word consists of four 12-bit "syllables," and in the Word Mode each syllable can
specify an operation to be performed, a 10-bit
literal, or the address (relative to the start of the
Program Reference Table) of an operand or descriptor. These functions are described in more
detail in the Instruction List, Section 203:121.
In the Character Mode, each data word consists of
eight 6-bit alphameric characters. All operations
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
BURROUGHS B 5500
203:051. 122
.122 States, Levels, and Modes (Contd.)
stack; the process is the reverse of the push-down
procedure just described. The address in the S
register is automatically incremented by one befor~
each push-down 9peration and decremented by one
after each push-up. Each push-down operation requires 3 microseconds and each push-up requires
5 microseconds. The A and B registers have flipflops which indicate the presence or absence of information, and push-ups and push-downs are performed only when necessary. The automatic temporary storage provided by the stack can significantly reduce the number of explicit fetch and
store operations required in a program .
are performed serially by character, and fields of
up to 63 characters can be handled in a single
operation. Although decimal addition and subtraction operators are included, the Character Mode is
intended primarily for editing, scanning, comparison, and general data manipulation. Each Character Mode program syllable consists of a 6-bit
repeat field and a 6-bit operation code. Functions
of the Character Mode operators are described in
the Instruction List, Section 202:121.
• 123 Descriptors
A descriptor is a 48-bit word used for indirect
addressing and/or for supplementing the program
syllables in controlling the Processor's internal
functions. A Program Descriptor specifies the size
(up to 1,023 words) and current locations in both
core and auxiliary storage of a program segment.
A Data Descriptor specifies the base address of a
data array or input-output area; this address can
be indexed to locate a specific item in the array.
If the address formed by indexing a Data Descriptor
exceeds the array size limit (up to 1,023 words)
specified in the descriptor, an interrupt occurs.
This is a fairly effective means of automatic storage protection against coding errors and invalid
data. Data Descriptors are also used to initiate all
input-output operations. The general layouts of
both Program and Data Descriptors are shown in
Paragraphs. 232 and. 233 of this report section.
When multiprogramming is performed in a B 5500,
each program has its own stack. Whenever an interrupt occurs, the contents of the A and B registers
and all necessary control information are automatically pushed down into the appropriate stack in
core storage before the Processor enters the Control State. The Master Control Program allocates
storage to each stack, as well as to the Program
Reference Table, program segments, data arrays,
and input-output areas of each program. If the
capacity of any program's stack is exceeded, an
interrupt occurs, and the Master Control Program
causes an error message to be printed and terminates the job.
.126 Interrupts
A comprehensive interrupt system is provided to inform the Processor when special conditions arise
anywhere in the system. The occurrence of anyone
of 40 interrupt conditions causes a specific bit to be
set in the Interrupt Register. Depending upon the
nature of the interrupt condition, execution of the
current program syllable may be completed or terminated immediately. Then the A and B registers
and all necessary control information are pushed
into the stack, the address of the associated
interrupt handling routine is placed in the Interrupt
Address Register, the Processor enters the Control State, and control is transferred to the Master
Control Program for initiation of the required
action.
.124 Program Reference Tables (PRT)
The PRT is a relocatable core storage area of up
to 1,023 words. One PRT is required for each
program that is running simultaneously in a B 5500
system, including the Master Control Program.
The PRT is'used primarily for storage of Program
and Data Descriptors, but it may also contain
single operands such as counts and index values.
The R register contains the base address of the PRT
for the program being executed. The program syllables contain no direct addresses, but only 10-bit
relative addresses which are added to the contents
of the R register to access descriptors or operands
anywhere in the PRT. The facts that the PRT is
relocatable and that only relative addresses are
used in program segments assure complete program relocatability and facilitate operation of the
Master Control Program.
All interrupt conditions are sampled continuously
by the hardware andprocessed on apriority basis , so
a high-priority interrupt condition (such as a storage parity error) can interrupt the servicing of a
lower-priority interrupt condition (such as a free
Input/Output Channel). For a detailed description
of the interrupt facilities, see Paragraph. 33 of
this report section .
• 125 Stacks
.127 Dual Processors
The stack is a list of operands and control words
which are stored temporarily in the sequence in
When two Processors are included in a B 5500 syswhich they are to be processed. Physically, the
tem, true multiprocessing is possible. The two
stack consists of the Processor's A and B (arithmeProcessors share the same Memory Modules,
tic) registers and an area of core storage addressed
Input/Output Channels, and peripheral devices,
by the S register. The stack operates on the "last
but each Processor contains all the control and
in, first out" principle. An operand fetched by a
arithmetic facilities and operating registers
program is placed in the A register; the prev:ious
contents of the A register (if any) are pushed down
required for independent program execution.
Furthermore, through use of the interrupt facilities
into the B register; and the previous contents of the
and the Master Control Program, each of the two
B register (if any) are automatically transferred to
Processors can effectively control multiprogramming
the storage location addressed by the S register.
operations. It is important to note, however, that
Push-up operations are automatically performed
only Processor 1 can operate in the Control State.
Consequently, if an interrupt occurs in Processor 2,
when an operator requires information from the
10/65
A
(Contd.)
AUERBACH
~
/
203:051. 127
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
Input/Output Channel - has been reduced from 6
to 4 microseconds. Syllable and word fetch-overlap
techniques have been improved, and the execution
times of the most frequently-used operators have
been reduced. For example, the execution time
of the logical AND and logical OR operators has
been reduced from 17 to 3 microseconds. In addition, stack adjustment times have been improved,
permitting push-down operations to be performed
in 3 microseconds instead of 4, and push-up
operations to be performed in 5 microseconds
instead of 8.
. 127 Dual Processor (Contd.)
Processor 1 is forced to halt its processing in
order to handle Processor 2's interrupt. By contrast, Processor 2 will be unaffected by interrupt
conditions occurringinProcessor 1. Either Processor Module (A or B) can be logical Processor 1,
depending upon the setting of a Console switch.
.128 Performance
The performance of the B 5500 Processor is summarized in Paragraphs. 41 and. 42 of this section.
Average times for the basic instructions are listed
in Paragraph. 41, and times to perform the standard
central processor tasks are listed in Paragraph. 42.
In general, times for arithmetic, logical, and
switching operations are based on use of the Word
Mode with one-word operands, while times for format control are based on the Character Mode.
Where either the Word or Character Mode can be
used effectively, as in table lookups, both times
are listed. There are usually numerous ways of
coding a given task for the B 5500, and timing of
internal operations is complex. The times listed
here are for coding similar to that produced by the
Extended ALGOL translator.
Nineteen new operators have been added to the instruction repertoire to speed up Master Control
Program functions such as automatic storage
allocation and program segment overlay control.
Time-consuming algorithms f.ormerly required to
switch from Word Mode to Character Mode have
been completely eliminated. It is now possible to
embed Character Mode coding directly in-line with
Word Mode coding. All of these improvements in
the Processor's logic design have been added to
enable the compilers to generate more efficient
object programs and to permit the Master Control
Program to perform its program-segment
switching and multiprogramming control routines
more quickly and more effectively .
. 129 Processor Improvements
The Processor used in B 5500 systems includes
many improvements to the original B 5000 Processor design. Processor read access time the total time required to transfer a word of information from memory to the Processor or to an
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
. 21
Operations and Operands
.211
.212
.213
.214
Operation and
Variation
Fixed point Add-subtract
Word Mode:
Character Mode:
Multiply
Short:
Long:
Divide
No remainder:
Remainder:
Floating point Add-subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
Boolean AND:
Inclusive OR:
Equivalence:
Negate:
Comparison Numbers:
Absolute:
Letters:
Mixed:
Collating sequence:
.13
Availability: . . . . . . . immediate.
.14
First Delivery: . . . . . April 1963 for B 5000 Processor.
December 1964 for B 5500
Processor .
Provision
Radix
Size
automatic
automatic
binary
decimal
39 or 78 bits and sign.
1 to 63 digits.
automatic
none.
binary
39 or 78 bits and sign.
automatic*
none*
39 or 78 bits and sign.
automatiC}
automatic
binary
automatic
39 or 78 bits for fraction;
6 bits for exponent.
ootomatic}
automatic .
automatic
automatic
binary
47 bits.
~tom.tic }
no~e.
1 full or partial word,
automatic
or 1 to 63 characters.
automatic
see Data Code Table, Section 203:141.
* Either quotient or remainder can be retained, but not both; singlelength division is rounded.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
BURROUGHS B 5500
203:051. 215
.215 Code translation:
.216 Radix conversion:
Provision
none.
automatic
From
To
Size
decimal
binary
automatic
binary
decimal
1 to 8 dec.
digits.
1 word.
· 217 Edit format: . . . . • . . no automatic facilities;
editing is accomplished
by strings of program
syllables in the Character
Mode.
• 218 Table lookup: •...•. the Link List Lookup operator
compares the contents of
the A register to a linked
list of data; a ~ condition
sets the A register to the
address of the "found"
data item.
.219 Others: . . . . . . . . . . see Instruction List,
Section 203:121.
· 22
Special Cases of Operands
· 221 Negative numbers Word Mode: ....•. absolute value with sign bit
of 1.
Character Mode: ... absolute value, with zone bit
of low-order character
used as sign.
.222 Zero: • . . . . . . • . • . +0 and -0; no difference in
arithmetic or comparisons.
· 223 Operand size
determination: ..•.. fixed at 1 or 2 words in
Word Mode; variable from
1 to 63 characters
(specified by repeat field)
in Character Mode.
.23
Instruction Formats
.231 Instruction structure: • four 12-bit syllables per
word.
.232 Instruction layout Word Mode Syllable:
Op. code or data
Syllable type
10
2
Character Mode Syllable:
Op. code
Repeat field
6
6
.233 Instruction parts Purpose
Name
Syllable type: .•... denotes whether a Word
Mode syllable is an operator, literal, Operand
Call, or Descriptor Call.
Op. code or data
(Word Mode): ••.• (1) specifies operation to be
performed upon data in
A and/or B register; or
(2) specifies a 10-bit literal
value to be placed in A
register; or
(3) specifies the address
(when modified by contents of R register) of
an operand or descriptor to be placed in the
A register and
examined.
Op. code
(Character Mode): • specifies operation to be performed.
Repeat field: . . . . . . specifies number of times
(up to 63) the operation
shall be repeated; or a
6-bit literal character.
.2331 Descriptor partsName
Purpose
Flag: . • • . . . . . . denotes type of word: descriptor or operand.
I/D: ...•••.•.. denotes type of descriptor.
Presence: ..•..• denotes whether program
segment or data is in core
storage.
Mode: .••....• denotes Word or Character
Mode syllable.
Parameter: . . . . . indicates that parameters
are required for the program segment.
Size: . . . . . . • . . number of words in segment,
array, or input-output
load.
Drum or disc
address: •...• drum or disc location of
segment.
Core address: .. core location of first word
of a segment, array, or
input-output area.
Unit: . . . . • . . . • input-output device designation.
Control: ••. ~ •.• detailed specifications for
input or output operation,
error indications or drum
address.
Program Descriptor:
Disc/Drum address
15
Core address
15
Data and Input-Output Descriptors:
I Name
l FlagJ
I Size (bits) I
10/65
1
J
I/D
1
I Presence
I
1
Unit
5
I Size
I
10
Control
Core address
15
15
A
(Contd.)
AUERBACH
~
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
203:051. 234
. 234 Basic address structure: . . . . . . . . . . . one lO-bit address per Operand Call and Descriptor
Call syllable; no address
is specified in an Operator
syllable.
.235 LiteralsWord Mode Character Mode
Arithmetic:. . . . . .• 10 bits
none.
Comparisons and
tests: . . . . . . . . . 10 bits
1 character.
Incrementing
modifiers: . . . . .. 10 bits
none.
.236 Directly addressed operands Internal storage type: core.
Minimum size: . . . . 1 word.
Maximum size: .... 63 words.
Volume accessible: .1,024 words.
Increased address
capacity: . . . . . . . 32,786 words, using indexing and/or indirect
addressing as described
in following entries.
. 237 Address indexing .2371 Number of methods: .3.
.2372 Names: . . . . . . . . . R-register indexing (occurs
whenever a program
syllable is an Operand Call
or Descriptor Call).
B-register indexing (occurs
only when the word
brought to the A register
by R-register indexing is
found to be a Data Descriptor for an array, or when
the "index" operator is
executed).
R/F-register indexing (occurs when a "store" operator is given and the A
register contains an operand.
.2373 Indexing rules R-register indexing: add the 10 high-order bits
of the Operand Call or
Descriptor Call syllable
to the contents of the R
register and store the resulting address in the M
register; bring the word
found at this address to
the A register.
B-register indexing: add the 10 low-order bits of
the B register's contents
to the 15 low-order bits of
the Data Descriptor in the
A register.
R/F - Register
indexing: ..•.••. add the 10 low-order bits
of the operand in the A
register to the contents
of the R register (if, in Program Level) or the F register (if in Subprogram
Level); store contents of
B register at the resulting
address.
.2374 Index specification: .. none required; see. 2372
above.
. 2375 Number of potential
indexers: ....•.• 3: R, B, and F registers.
.2376 Addresses which can be indexed Application
Type of Address
Descriptors and
operands in Program Reference
Tab~, using Rregister
indexing: .•..• facilitates relocation of
programs.
Data items in arrays, using Bregister
indexing: •...• specifies particular element
of an array whose base
address is in the Data
Descriptor.
Temporary storage
areas for subroutines, using F
register indexing: facilitates dynamic storage
allocation and recursion.
.2377 Cumulative indexing:. when an Operand Call syllable references a Data
Descriptor, R and Bregister indexing occur
successively.
.2378 Combined index and
step: . . . • . . . . . . no •
• 238 Indirect addressing · 2381 Recursive: .•..••. no.
· 2382 Designation: ...••• occurs automatically whenever an Operand Call syllable
references a Data Descriptor: contents of the
location specified by the
descriptor, indexed by
contents of the B register,
are brought into the A
register.
· 2384 Indexing with
indirect addressing: B-register indexing occurs
after indirect addressing;
see. 2382 above.
.239 Stepping: . . . . . . . . . R register, in Character
Mode only.
.2391 Specification of
increment: . . . . . . in repeat field of the "increase tally" syllable.
.2392 Increment sign: . . . . always positive.
.2393 Size of increment: .• 0 to 63.
· 2394 End value: . . • • . . . . no direct test available.
· 2395 Combined step and
test: . . . . . . . . . . no.
· 24
Special Processor Storage
Register Size in
Bits
Name
P
48
C
15
T
12
Word
Mode
Usa~e
Character
Mode Usage
holds program
same as Word
Mode.
word being
processed
sequence counter; same as Word
Mode.
contains address
of next program
word
holds program syl- same as Word
lable being.
Mode.
executed
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
203:051. 240
. 24
BURROUGHS B 5500
Special Processor storage (Contd.)
Register Size in
Name
Bits
L
2
A
48*
M
15
G
3
.31
.311
.312
. 313
.314
Character
Mode Usage
denotes position in
word in P of the
syllable in T;
overflows into C
arithmetic register;
top location in
stack
address of storage
location associated with A
register
generally not used
same as Word
Mode.
source register
for data to be
edited.
same as Word
Mode.
addresses a character within the
A register;
overflows into M.
generally not used addresses a bit
within the character addressed
by G.
arithmetic register; destination regissecond location
ter for edited
in stack
data.
address of storage same as Word
location associMode.
ated with B register
generally not used addresses a character within
the B register;
overflows into S.
generally not used addresses a bit
within the character addressed
byK.
contains stack
same as Word Mode.
location where
subroutine return point is
stored
contains base loca- tally register for
tion of Program
counting.
Reference Table
extension of A or
contains a loop conB register
trol word.
.32
Look-ahead: .•..••. fetch of next syllable and
program word is accomplished during execution of
current syllable.
. 33
Interruption
.331 Possible causes I/O units: . . . . . . • . unit free, error, malfunction, end of file, write
lockout.
48*
B
I/O controllers: .... channel free.
Storage access: .... drum or disc write lockout,
parity error, malfunction,
S
15
stack overflow, invalid address, flag bit (end of a
K
3
data array), presence
(reference to information
not in core storage).
Processor errors: •. integer overflow, exponent
V
3
overflow, exponent
underflow, division by
zero, invalid index.
F
15
Other: •.•..••.•• time interval, keyboard request, Processor B busy,
program release (I/O
area free to receive or
R
9
transfer data), continuity
bit (designating multiple
I/O areas).
X
39
.332 Control by routine: ... none; all possible interrupts
are sampled continuously
* A and B registers have associated one-bit flip-flops
and simultaneously, and
to indicate the presence or absence of data.
they are processed acNote: There are other Processor registers which serve
cording to a fixed priority
specific logical functions; only the registers
list.
directly associated with Word and Character
• 333 Operator control: . .•. none; see. 332 above.
Mode operations are listed here.
.334 Interruption conditions: .•.....•. none; see. 332 above •
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
.335 Interruption process Disabling interInstruction Sequencing
ruption: ••••• . . • automatic; Processor enters
Control State, and further
Number of sequence
interruptions set Intercontrol facilities: •.. 1.
rupt Register bits which
Arrangement: . . . . . . 1 sequence counter per
remain set until interProcessor (C register).
rogated .
Precedence rule: . . . . when 2 Processors are
Registers saved: ••• B register, A register
used, they operate
CN ord Mode only), and
independently.
specially-formed control
Special sub-sequence counters words containing the
Purpose
Name
settings of registers M,
L register: . . . . . . . specifies which syllable of
R, C, F, K, V, G, L,
word in P register is being
and S; all are pushed into
El'xecuted; overflows into
the stack.
C register.
Destination: ..•••• enter Control 5~ate and transG, H registers: •.. locate individual character
fer to fixed location.
and bit of word in A
register.
K, V registers: ... locate individual character
and bit of word in B
register.
(Contd. )
H
•3
Word
MOde Usage
.315 Sequence control
step size: . . . . . . . . 1 word for C register; 1
syllable for L register.
.316 Accessibility to
routines: ...••... contents of C and L registers
can be stored and reloaded
by instructions.
.317 Permanent or
optional modifier: .. no.
10/65
3
fA
AUERBACH
s
./
203:051. 336
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
. 336 Control methods Determine cause: ••. "interrogate Interrupt
Register" instruction transfers control to location
corresponding to the interrupt bit that is set.
Enable interruption: • automatic when control is
returned to Normal State.
• 34
Multiprogramming
• 341 Method of control: ••• interruption and/or two
separate Processors;
usually controlled by
Master Control Program
(MCP).
• 342 Maximum number of
programs: .•.•••. limited by hardware and
program requirements .
• 343 Precedence rules: •.. assigned priorities.
.344 Program protection Storage: ..••••••. storage areas are assigned
by Master Control Program. There is no
positive protection, but an
interrupt occurs if a data
address formed by indexing
exceeds the area assigned
the array by the Data Descriptor, or if a referenced
program segment or data
array is not present in core
storage.
I/O units: •.•••••• assigned by Master Control
Program; no positive
protection.
Maximum separate
sets: . . . . . . . . . . limited by system
configuration.
. 35
.413 Additional allowance for Recomplementing: .. 2.
Indexing: " .•.••. see Paragraph .419.
Loading of registers: see Paragraph .419.
.414 Control:
Word ModeCompare: .••••. 2.
Branch: .••.•••. 5.
Character Mode Compare: • . . • . . . 10+3C •
Branch: •.•.••.. 9 to 20 •
.415 Counter control (Character Mode) Step: . . . . • • . . . . . 2 to 62.
Test: . . • • • . . . . . . 2 to 10.
.416 Edit: . . . . . . . . . . • • no automatic facilities.
.417 ConvertDecimal to binary: .• 37 + 2D •
Binary to decimal: .• 43+2D.
.418 Shift: • . . • • . • . . . . . no automatic facilities.
.419 Others:
Fetching an operand Single value from
PRT: .••••.... 5.
Single value, using
descriptor: ••••• 10.
Array element,
using descriptor: • 11 minimum.
Storing an operand Single value into
PRT: ..•.••.•• 3.
Single value, using
descriptor: ••.•• 3.
Array element,
using descriptor: • 13 minimum.
Fetching a program
word: •.•••••••• 4.
Note: fetch time is completely overlapped if
execution time of last syllable in preceding word exceeds 4 J),sec •
Multisequencing: ••.. possible when two Processors
are used, but the facility
is not incorporated into the
Master Control Program.
.36
Multiprocessing: .•.• maximum of 2 independent
Processors per system.
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS*
.41
Instruction Times in Microseconds
All B 5500 Processor timings in this report
assume the use of B 461 4-microsecond Memory
Modules, currently the standard memory units
with B 5500 systems.
C = operand length in characters.
D = operand length in decimal digits.
©
o.
Stack adjustment Push-down: .••••• 3.
Push-up: ..•••.• 5 .
.42
.411 Fixed-point (average) Single length Double length
Add- subtract Word Mode:
1
15
Character Mode:
13 + 4D
Multiply:
32
133
Divide:
36
159
.412 Floating-point (average)
Single length Double length
Add-subtract:
4
24
Multiply:
32
133
Divide:
36
159
*
Fetching a program
syllable: ••••••••
Processor Performance in Microseconds
.421 For typical tasks
Fixed point Floating point
All operands and
results in core
storage c = a + b:
b = a + b:
Sum N items, per
item:
c = ab:
c = alb:
17
17
17
17
7
44
76
7
44
76
All operands and results
in optimum stack
locations c = a + b: • • •
2
b = a + b:
2
Sum N items, per
item:
7
30
c + ab:
c = alb:
61
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2
2
7
30
61
10/65
BURROUGHS B 5500
203:051. 422
• 422 For arrays of data
Fixed point
85
85
.423
.424
.425
.426
.427
c. = ai +b.:
bj = ai + b~:
Sum N ite~s, per
item:
56
c = c + aibj:
112
Branch based on comparison
(Word Mode) Numberic data: ••. 114.
Alphabetic data: •.• 114.
SWitching (Word Mode) Unchecked: ••••••• 39.
Checked: ••..•••• 66.
List search: .••••• 16 + 50N.
Format control, per character:
Unpack Mathematical: . . . . 18.
Commercial: ...•• 9.
Compose Mathematical: ..•. 23.
Commercial: ••..• 37.
Table lookup, per comparison:
Word ModeFor a match: •••.. 50.
For least or
greatest: . . . . . • 56.
For interpolation
point: ..••....• 44.
Character Mode - '
For a match: •..• 46 + 4C.
For least or
greatest: . . . • . . 50 + 4C.
For interpolation
point: . . • . • . . . . 46 + 4C.
Bit indicators:
Word ModeSet bit in separate
location: .•••..• 7.
Set bit in pattern: .. 17.
Test bit in separate
location: •••.•.• 14.
10/65
Floating point
85
85
56
112
Test bit in pattern:.
Test AND for B
bits: .•..••..•
Test OR for B bits:.
.428 Moving, for N words:
Word Mode Using programmed
loop: •...•.•••
Using straight-line
coding: ...•...•
Character Mode Within same
Memory Module:
Between two
Memory
Modules: •..•.
.5
21 •
27.
27.
7 + 50N.
ION.
24 + 4N.
24 + 4N.
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Action
Exponent overflow:
Exponent underflow:
Integer overflow:
Zero divisor
Invalid operation:
check
check
check
check
programmed
check
none.
check
parity check
send parity
bit.
check
check
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
error routine.
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
Invalid index:
Stack overflow:
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
Note: "Interrupt" indicates that the Processor sets
a specific bit in the Interrupt Register and
enters the Control State; the Master Control
Program then deals with the error condition
(see Paragraph 203:191. 44).
A.
AUERBACH
•
-£.
203:061. 100
.
SII"'''
BURROUGHS B 5500
CONSOLE
AEDP
-
AUERBAC~
"\,
REPORTS
CONSOLE
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: •••••..... B 5310 Console.
.12
Associated Units: ...• Supervisory Printer and
Keyboard.
Distribution and Display
Panel.
• 13
Description
• 24
Stepping:••.•••.••• none.
The Console of the B 5500 Information Processing
System consists of a simple, elongated L-shaped
desk containing a row of basic controls and indicators along a narrow ridge at the rear of the desk.
On the short end of the L is the Supervisory Printer
and Keyboard, a modified electric typewriter used
for direct communication between the operator and
the B 5500's Master Control Program (MCP);
Paragraph. 6 describes the characteristics of this
unit.
• 25
Resets: ..••..•.•• none •
.26
Loading
• 23
Simplicity in system operation has clearly been a
goal in the design of the B 5500. The few controls
on the Console reflect this purpose. However, online program debugging and tracing are made impractical, if not impossible, by the lack of register
displays and of direct methods for data insertion.
Power on-off and loading operations are the only
control facilities provided at the Console.
The normally-covered cabinet that houses the
Display and Distribution Panel provides binary
displays of all processor and Input-Output Channel
registers in the form of button-lamps that can also
be used for entry of data. Buttons are also provided to clear all or selected registers. The
Display and Distribution Panel is normally used
only for system maintenance purposes, although
its use is in no way restricted to this purpose.
Comment
Halt:
Load:
Card Load
Select:
button
loads a program (usually
the MCP) into core
storage, beginning at
location 00016, and
begins processing it.
2-way
button
selects Card Reader or
Disk File/Drum Storage
as input device for load
operations.
Sense Switches: .••.• none •
.3
DISPLAY
.31
Alarms
Condition Indicated
Memory
Check:
.32
red lamp storage parity error.
Conditions
Condition Indicated
Power On:
Halt:
Card Load
Select:
CONTROLS
Not Ready:
A Normal:
Form
Comment
A Control:
Power On:
button
B Normal:
Power Off:
button
initiates power-on cycle
for all units.
initiates power-off cycle
for all units.
Connections:
••••.. none.
©
places Processor(s) in an
idle condition; they can
be restarted only by a
subsequent load operation •
• 27
.21
.22
button
Comment
The System Control section of the B 5500 is an
internal synchronization and switching network
that also contains the master clock, a 1/60-of-asecond interval timer, and an interrupt system.
The interval timer is used continuously by the
Master Control Program in its compilation of
logging and accounting information for eventual
printing on the Supervisory Printer and Keyboard.
.2
Stops and Restarts
B Control:
• 33
green
power on.
lamp
red lamp Processor(s) in idle
condition.
yellow
lamp
white
lamp
yellow
lamp
yellow
lamp
yellow
lamp
yellow
lamp
Card Reader selected for
load operation.
one or more units not
available for normal use.
Processor A in normal
state.
Processor A in control
state.
Processor B in normal
state.
Processor B in control
state •
Control Registers: ••• no display provided at
Console.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
203:061. 340
· 34
Storage: • . . . . . . • . . no display provided.
.4
ENTRY OF DATA: •.. no Console provision;
Supervisory Printer keyboard can be used under
program control.
BURROUGHS B 5500
Since the Supervisory Printer functions as an inputoutput device, under direct control of an InputOutput Channel, processing is not halted during the
printer's operations.
The Supervisory Printer prints one character at a
time at a spacing of ten characters per inch horizontally and three or six lines per inch vertically.
Continuous fanfold sprocket-punched stationery is
used; its width may be up to 12 inches.
.5
CONVENIENCE
• 51
Communication: •...• none.
· 52
Clock: ••.••..•.•. none (interval timer provides
no visual display of time).
· 53
Desk Space: .••.... Console provides ample work
space at desk-top height.
.54
View: ...••.....•. operator seated at Console
has unobstructed view in
all directions.
.6
• 61
• 62
The keyboard contains the standard B 5500 set of
63 characters. The following controls are located
on the keyboard.
Name
Form
Comment
Local:
key
Remote:
key
disconnects unit from system and unlocks keyboard for normal typing.
locks keyboard until Ready
light is on.
INPUT-OUTPUT UNIT
Input
Request:
key
sets Keyboard Request interrupt bit in the B 5500.
Identity: ....•••.•. Supervisory Printer and
--Keyboard.
End of
Input:
key
Error:
key
Ready:
lamp
transfers a group mark to
storage as the last character of a message.
transfers a group mark
with incorrect parity,
signifying that a typing
error was made.
indicates that messages
can be entered via the
keyboard.
Description
The Supervisory Printer and Keyboard is a modified
single-case Smith-Corona Marchant electric typewriter. It is used for two-way communication between the operator and the B 5500 system. The
operator can use the keyboard to type inquiries and
instructions to the Master Control Program. Under
control of the Master Control Program, in turn, the
printer can type instructions to the Operator anli
answers to his inquiries. An Input-Output Channel
is used for information flow to and from the Supervisory Printer. Data transmission is serial by
character.
10/65
• 63
Performance
Input: • . • . . . . . . . . . limited by manual typing
speed.
Output: . . . • . . . . . . . 10 characters per second.
fA.
AUERBACH
e
~
203:071. 100
srmno
l!~E~p:
BURROUGHS B 5500
INPUT-OUTPUT
B 122 CARD READER
____--~,.....----.I
INPUT-OUTPUT: B 122 CARD READER
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . . . . . . . . . B 122 Card Reader.
.12
Description
The B 122 Card Reader reads SO-column punched
cards of standard or postcard thickness at a maximum rate of 200 cards per minute. Reading is
performed by 13 photoelectric cells (one for timing),
serially by column and parallel by bit. The time
required to read each card, normally 300 milliseconds, is increased by 15 milliseconds when the
reader is used intermittently rather than at its
peak rate.
The B 122 Card Reader automatically translates
Hollerith code into Burroughs Common Language
(BCL) code before transferring the information to
the Input/Output Channel control. The I/O Channel
acts as an input buffer and allows computation to
proceed independently of the card read operation.
The Input/Output Channel being used is dedicated
to the card read operation until the last card column has been read. A maximum of two card
readers, in any combination of models (see Report
Section 202:072 for additional card readers), can
be connected to a B 5500 through up to four
"floating" Input/Output Channels.
The card read operation is initiated when the
B 5500 Processor sends a Card Read Input/Output
Descriptor from its A register to the D register
of the I/O control unit. The control unit selects
an idle I/O channel and initiates the card read
command. Single cards are read either in alphameric mode (and then decoded by the card reader
into 6-bit alphameric characters) or in the column
binary mode. Groups of eight 6-bit characters, or
four 12-bit binary card column representations,
are assembled into a 48-bit B 5500 word in the
W register of the control unit, and then transferred
to a Descriptor-specified address in core storage.
After the 80th card column has been read and the
last input word has been transferred to core
storage, a Result Descriptor is constructed that
indicates the results of the card read operation by
means of various bit settings. End-of-file, busystatus, and not-ready conditions, as well as
invalid-character and read-check errors, are
indicated in the Result Descriptor for subsequent
testing by the Master Control Program. The input
storage address contained in the I/O Descriptor is
checked for validity and proper parity, and errorcondition bits are set in the Result Descriptor when
necessary. Card jams and full-stacker conditions
also set testable error indicators.
Input data transfers from the I/O control unit to
the Memory Module consume only 40 microseconds
(or 80 microseconds in binary mode) per card, and
in no way inhibit the concurrent performance of
the Processor. The sole function of the Processor
in a card read operation is to issue an Initiate
Input-Output command, thereby causing the Descriptor contained in its A register to be transferred to the I/O control unit. The Processor
then proceeds independently until a bit is set in
the External Interrupt Register, which interrupts
the Processor and indicates that the card read
operation has been terminated. Interrupt bits are
also set if another Data or I/O Descriptor references
an area of memory currently being filled by the
card read operation.
Cards are fed by a pinch-roller mechanism on
demand from the I/O control unit. The input
hopper has a capacity of 500 cards and can be refilled while cards are being read. The single
stacker provided also holds 500 cards, but it
cannot be emptied while the unit is in operation.
Stacker select options are not available.
Unlike the Burroughs card readers described on
page 203:072.100, there are no optional features
available for the B 122 Card Reader. First delivery
.of the B 122 occurred late in 1961. It is currently
available for immediate delivery.
I
'"
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
-&.
203:072. 100
SlIm ..
/Ii& E D P
AUERBA~\
BURROUGHS B 5500
INPUT-OUTPUT
B 123/124/129
CARD READERS
-
•
REPOITS
INPUT·OUTPUT: B 123/124/129 CARD READERS
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: ..•••••..• B 123 Card Reader.
--B 124 Card Reader.
B 129 Card Reader.
.12
Description
After the SOth card column has been read and the
last input word has been transferred to core storage., a Result Descriptor is constructed that indicates the results of the card read operation by means
of various bit settings. End-of-file, busy status,
and not-ready conditions, as well as invalid
character and read-check errors, are indicated in
the Result Descriptor for subsequent testing by the
Master Control Program. The input storage
address contained in the I/O Descriptor is checked
for validity and proper parity, and error condition
bits are set in the Result Descriptor when necessary.
Card jams and full-stacker conditions also set
testable error indicators.
The Burroughs B 123, B 124, and B 129 Card
Readers provide punched card reading speeds of
475, SOO, and 1400 cards per minute, respectively.
Except for this considerable difference in rated
speeds, the three readers are essentially the same.
Any of these readers, and the B 122 Card Reader
described in the previous report section, can be
paired in any combination for use with a B 5500
system; the maximum number of card readers per
system is two.
The sole function of the Processor in a card read
operation is to issue an Initiate Input-Output command, therby causing the Descriptor contained in
its A register to be transferred to the I/O control
unit. The Processor then proceeds independently
until a bit is set in the External Interrupt Register,
indicating that the card read operation has been
terminated. Interrupt bits are also set if another
Data or I/O Descriptor references an area of
memory currently being filled by the card read
operation.
The B 123, B 124, and B 129 Card Readers can
read standard or postcard thickness punched cards
of 51, 60, 66, or SO columns. The standard types
of scored cards are acceptable when the stubs
are removed. An immediate-access clutch provides demand feeding of the cards. Photoelectric
reading by column initiates the automatic transfer
of data from the card to a code translator within
the card reader, en route to the input/output control unit. (No code translation occurs when the
reader is operating in the 3lternative binary mode.)
Since the B 123, B 124, and B 129 Card Readers
make use of immediate-access clutching, and
since the read operations proceed independently
of the Processor, the rated speeds of 475, SOO,
and 1400 cards per minute will always be achieved,
provided that successive Initiate I/O instructions
are issued within the readers' read cycle times.
The read cycle times for the B 123, B 124, and
B 129 Card Readers are 126, 75, and 42.8 milliseconds, respectively.
One of up to four "floating" Input/Output Channels
is selected for the card read operation by the
I/O control unit. The channel that is selected
remains dedicated to the card read process until
the last card column has been read. However, the
Processor is entirely free throughout the reading
operation, and the Memory Module to which input
data is transferred is accessed for a total of only
40 microseconds (80 microseconds in binary mode)
during the entire card read cycle.
Cards are fed by a belt-drive mechanism past the
stack of 13 photoelectric read cells (one for timing)
and transported to the single stacker .. Both the
hopper and the stacker have capacities of 2,400
cards and can be filled and emptied while the card
reader is in operation. Should a jam occur in the
card transport device, the unit will halt with a
maximum of two cards jammed, and a bit will be
set in the Result Descriptor. An empty hopper
condition sets the not-ready bit and, in the B 129
Card Reader, turns off the unit's card transport
mechanism.
The card read operation is initiated when the B 5500
Processor sends a Card Read Input-Output Descriptor from its A register to the D register of the
I/O control unit. The control unit selects an idle
I/O Channel and initiates the card read command.
Single cards are read either in the alphameric or
column binary mode. Groups of eight 6-bit characters, or four 12-bit binary card column representations, are assembled into a 4S-bit B 5500 word
in the W register of the control unit, and then
transferred to a Descriptor-specified address in
core storage.
10/65
A
The av:ailability of the B 123, B 124 and B 129
Card Readers is from three to four months. First
deliveries of the prototype B 124 Card Reader
occurred during the last quarter of 1963.
AUERBACH
•
203:073.100
\
A
SUKDUII
BURROUGHS B 5500
INPUT-OUTPUT
CARD PUNCHES
EDP
AUERBACH
RIPORTS
~
INPUT·OUTPUT: B 303/304 CARD PUNCHES
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: .•••••.•.. B 303 Card Punch.
B 304 Card Punch.
.12
Description
The B 303 and B 304 Card Punches operate at maximum rates of 100 and 300 cards per minute, respectively. Only one card punch can be connected
to a B 5500 system. Standard or postcard thickness 80-column cards can be punched (but not both
thicknesses during the same run). Pre-scribed
and/or pre-punched cards can also be punched if
the post-punch checking device is inactivated by the
operator. Formatting of the punched card is controlled exclusively by the stored program.
Cards are punched by a single row of 80 die punches,
one row at a time. An 80-bit, one-row buffer in
the punch unit is used to compare the row just
punched with the input row in the buffer. Cards can
be punched in alphameric or binary mode. In the
alphameric mode, the punch unit translates the
BCD character codes from the B 5500 into standard
Hollerith card code. In the binary mode, data is
punched exactly as it appears when transferred from
the I/o Channel.
The card punch operation is initiated when the
Processor sends a Card Punch I/O Descriptor to
the I/O control unit. From that point on, the
Processor is entirely disassociated from the
punching operation and is free to continue processing. The I/O control unit receives the address
of the output data in the B 5500's Memory Module
and selects the highest-priority free I/O Channel.
The I/O control unit then accesses the designated
Memory Module and fetches a 48-bit data word for
temporary storage in the I/O Channel's one-word
buffer (JV register). This word contains either
eight 6-bit alphameric characters or four 12-bit
binary data representations. The data word is
then sent to the card punch, one character at a time,
and assembled for punching. Ten accesses to the
Memory Module (20 in binary mode) are required
before the card can be punched. The Memory
Module being accessed is tied up for a total of either
40 or 80 microseconds for each card punch cycle.
The I/O Channel is completely dedicated to the
punching process once it senses the Initiate I/O
instruction. When the card punch cycle has been
completed, a specific bit is set in the External
Interrupt Register.
After each card has been punched, an I/O Result
Descriptor is constructed with bit settings that
indicate the results of the punching operation. Improper or invalid punches set the punch error
indicator, and data-transfer parity errors set a
specific indicator. The "not-ready" bit is set for
any of the follOWing conditions: empty hopper,
feed check, full stackers, punch die not in place,
and power off. The address- of the output data in
the Memory Module is checked for validity and
proper parity. If the punch unit is found to be
currently assigned to another I/O Channel, a
"busy" bit is set in the Result Descriptor. The
External Interrupt Register is examined continuously by the Master Control Program. When
it finds that an input-output operation has ended,
the MCP examines the I/O Result Descriptor to
determine whether or not further action is required.
From the punch unit's hopper to stacker, cards
are transported by positive-action pinch rollers.
Hopper and stacker capacities of the B 303 Card
Punch are 800 cards each. The B 304 Card Punch
is equipped with three stackers: primary, auxiliary,
and error. The primary stacker can hold 3, 000
cards, the same capacity as the unit's hopper.
Error cards are segregated in the error stacker,
holding 750 cards. The 850-card auxiliary
stacker is normally used as an alternative to the
primary stacker, controlled by a switch on the
control panel.
Significant timing considerations and a comparison
of the B 303 and B 304 Card Punches are provided
in Table I.
TABLE I: B 303/B 304 CARD PUNCH TIMING
FACTORS
Model:
B 303
B 304
Rated speed
100 cpm
300 cpm
Total card cycle time in
synchronous mode
600 msec
200 msec
Overhead in asynchronous mode
50 msec
200 msec
Maximum punching
rate in asynchronous
mode
92.3 cpm
150 cpm
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
203:074. 100
A
BURROUGHS B 5500
INPUT-OUTPUT
B 141 PAPER TAPE READER
AUERBACH
STANI1ARB
EDP
REPDRTS
~
INPUT ·OUTPUT: B 141 PAPER TAPE READER
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . • . . . . . • . B 141 Paper Tape Reader.
B 5410 Paper Tape Adapter.
B 142 Input Code Translator.
Description
.12
.are sensed by means of adhesive opaque strips on
the tape being read. If the tape breaks, the tape reel
motors are shut down automatically.
In addition to its use as an on-line input device to
the B 5500 system, the B 141 Paper Tape Reader
can be used off-line to check punched tape for parity
errors. The B 141 will stop when improper parity
is detected.
The B 141 Paper Tape Reader reads data from
punched paper or metalized Mylar tape at speeds
of either 500 or 1,000 characters per second. Up
to two B 141 's can be connected to a B 5500 system
via the B 5410 Paper Tape Adapter. A maximum of
three paper tape readers and punches (see Section
202:075) can be connected, in combination, to one
system. The B 141 Paper Tape Reader can accommodate 5, 6, 7, or 8-level tape, as selected by the
operator. The standard tape code is the 8-level
Burroughs Common Language (BCL) paper tape
code (see Data Code Table, Section 203:141).
The Processor initiates the read operation by
transferring a Paper Tape Input Descriptor from
its A register to the I/O control unit by means of
anlnitiate I/Oinstruction. The processor is subsequently entirely free of the input operation.
The Input Descriptor contains information such
as the reader unit designation, the number of
48-bit words that are to be read, the input address
in a Memory Module, and the type of paper tape
reader operation to be performed: read, space,
or rewind.
The optional B 142 Input Code Translator allows
automatic translation of any code (5, 6, 7, or 8level) to anyone of the 64 six-bit BCL characters.
If the B 142 is not used, programmed translation
will be required unless the tape is punched in the
8-level BCL code.
The I/O control unit then selects the highestpriority free I/O Channel and activates the reader.
Input data is transferred to the I/O Channel control's W register and assembled into 48-bit words.
When the W register is full, the designated Memory
Module is accessed and the data word is transferred.
The Memory Module is occupied for 4 microseconds
for each word transferred. The maximum number
of input words that can be transferred to core
storage in one read operation is 1,023.
The operator can enable different paper tape
channels to be read by use of a plugboard which
is supplied as part of the B 141 Reader. A code
punched in all channels (whether 6, 7, or 8-level
tape) is considered a delete code and is not transferred to the Processor when operating without a
translator.
When the read operation is terminated, a specific
indicator bit is set in the External Interrupt
Register, and an I/O Result Descriptor is constructed. The Result Descriptor indicates, with
bit settings, the results of the just-completed
read operation. These bits are then tested by the
Master Control Program to determine whether any
further action is necessary. If the B 141 Paper
Tape Reader was discovered to be not-ready or
busy, specific indicator bits are set. Likewise,
if the I/O Descriptor's address has improper
parity when transferred from core storage to the
I/O control unit, or if data parity errors have
occurred in the transfer of data from the reader
to the I/O control unit, other bit indicators are
set.
Reading speed is 500 or 1,000 characters per
second. Reading is entirely buffered, since it is
performed by the Input/Output Channel control,
independently of the B 5500 Processor. Fanfold
tape, whether in strips or in reels, and metalized
Mylar tape must be read at 500 characters per
second; other punched tape can be read at either
speed. Start and stop times are 5 and 20 milliseconds, respectively. The reader can stop on the
stop character or between characters at both high
and low speeds.
A minimum of four feet of tape leader is required
when reels are used, and at least one foot is needed
for strip reading. Tape widths of 0.675, 0.875, or
1.000 inch can be handled interchangeably. Reel
diameters of either 5.5 or 7 inches can be accommodated. Beginning- and end-of-tape indicators
10/65
• 13
Availability: ..••... 3 to 4 months.
.14
First Delivery: •.•.. September, 1963.
fA.
AUERBACH
203:075. 100
&
STI"'"
~EDP
AUERDAC~
REPORTS
BURROUGHS B 5500
INPUT-OUTPUT
B 341 PAPER TAPE
PUNCH
•
INPUT·OUTPUT: B 341 PAPER TAPE PUNCH
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
B 341 Paper Tape Punch.
B 5410 Paper Tape
Adapter.
B 342 Output Code Translator.
The B 341 is basically a Teletype paper tape
punch that is capable of punching data from a
B 5500 Memory Module at a "minimum" speed
of 100 characters per second, spaced 10 characters per inch. The B 341 can punch either 5,
6, 7, or 8-level tape, according to operator selection. The standard code punched is the 8level Burroughs Common Language (BCL) paper
tape code. Up to two B 341's can be connected
to a B 5500 system via the B 5410 Paper Tape
Adapter. A maximum of three paper tape punches
and readers can be connected, in combination, to
one system.
The optional B 342 Output Code Translator allows
automatic translation of the 64 six-bit BCL characters that can be sent from the Memory Module
to the punch into any 5, 6, 7, or 8-level paper
tape code. If the Code Translator is not installed,
the 6-bit BCL characters from core storage are
punched in the 8-level BCL paper tape code (see
Data Code Table, Section 203:141).
The level of paper tape punching is operatorselectable. The choice between 5, 6, 7, or 8level punching is made possible through the use
of a plugboard that is supplied as part of the
B 341 Punch.
The B 341 is capable of punching data into several
forms of tape, such as oiled or dry paper tape,
laminated fiber tape, and metalized or laminated
Mylar tape. Tape widths can be either 0.675,
0.875, or 1. 000 inch. The size of the supply reel
can range up to 8 inches in diameter, and the
take-up reel can be either 5. 5 or 7 inches in diameter. Take-up reels are not required during
the punching process. When the tape supply reel
has 35 feet or less remaining on it, an end-of-tape
signal is produced to alert the Processor.
',,--
The B 5500 Processor initiates the punch operation by transferring a Paper Tape Write Output
Descriptor from its A register to the I/O control
unit by means of an Initiate I/O instruction. The
Processor is free during the remainder of the
completely-buffered punching operation. The
Output Descriptor contains information such as
punch unit designation, starting address of the
output data in a Memory Module, indication to
perform a tape feed operation only (punching all
holes). specification of binary or alphameric
punching. and an output word counter. If punching
is specified as binary, the word counter limits
the punching operation to from 1 to 1,023 48-bit
words of output data. In the alphameric punching
mode, the word counter specifies the maximum
number of words that can be punched, but allows
for earlier termination of punching if an end-offile character is recognized.
The I/O control unit selects one of the four possible "floating" I/O Channels and initiates the transfer of data from the designated Memory Module to
the B 341 Punch. Data is transferred in 48-bit
words. Each memory access occupies the Memory Module for four microseconds. The I/O
Channel is dedicated to the punching process for
the duration of the output operation, but the associated Memory Module can be accessed by the
Processor(s) and other I/O Channels during the
tape punching operation.
When the punch operation is terminated, a specific
indicator bit is set in the External Interrupt Register and an I/o Result Descriptor is constructed.
The Result Descriptor indicates, with bit settings,
the results of the just-completed punch operation.
These bits are then tested by the Master Control
Program to determine whether any further action
is necessary. If the B 341 Paper Tape Punch was
discovered to be not-ready or busy, or if the
physical end-of-tape marker has been sensed,
specific indicator bits are set. Likewise, if the
I/O Descriptor's address has improper parity
when transferred from core storage to the I/O
control unit, or if data parity errors have occurred
in the transfer of data from the I/O control unit to
the punch unit, other bit indicators are set.
.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
203:081. 100
BURROUGHS B 5500
INPUT-OUTPUT
B 320/321/325
LINE PRINTERS
INPUT-OUTPUT: B 320/321/325 LINE PRINTERS
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
. 12
Description
Printing is performed on continuous card or paper
forms. Forms width can extend from 5 to 20
inches; the maximum length is 22 inches per form.
Output format spacing is 10 characters per inch
horizontally and 6 or 8 lines per inch vertically .
B 320 Line Printer.
B 321 Line Printer.
B 325 Line Printer.
As many as five carbons plus the original form
will function properly in the printers. The forms
are loaded in the cabinet beneath the printing
mechanism and are transported through the unit
by means of pin-fed tractors to the self-maintaining
stacker. A Paper-Exhausted indicator/switch and
several broken-paper detectors interlock the
.
printer when required in order to provent runaway
printing without forms.
The B 321 Line Printer prints at a maximum rate
of 700 single-spaced or 650 double-spaced alphameric lines per minute. When average line spacing
occurs at one-inch intervals, the speed is reduced
to about 540 lines per minute. Sixty-four characters (10 numeric, 26 alphabetic, and 28 special
symbols) can be printed in a line of 120 print positions. The B 5500's line printer character set is
listed in the Data Code Table on page 203.141.100.
The format of the printed line is under control of
the problem program or the Master Control Program's Output Writer. The code translation from
Burroughs Common Language (BCL) internal code
to the 64-character print set is performed automatically. The actual printing is accomplished by
hammer strokes against a continuously-rotating
engraved drum. Once the drum has made a complete revolution, every character will have been
printed, and the paper motion can begin. Each
line spaced after printing consumes 5.95 milliseconds. The graph on the next page illustrates
the maximum printing speeds of the B 320, B 321,
and B 325 Line Printers at varying line spacings.
The B 320 Line Printer is a slower version of the
B 321 and is offered at a substantially reduced
price; this slower model operates at a peak speed
of 475 lines per minute. The B 325 Line Printer
increases the printing flexibility by providing 132
print positions. Except for these differences in
speed and print-block size, respectively, the B 320
and B 325 Line Printers are functionally identical
with the B 321 model. Therefore, in the description that follows, reference is made only to the
characteristics and capabilities of the B 321.
Up to two line printers can be connected to a B 5500
system. The B 320 and B 321 can be paired in any
system, but the 132-print-position B 325 cannot be
used in the same system with either the B 320 or
B 321. Since the printing operation is completely
buffered, two line prin~rs can operate simultaneouslyand at their rated speeds. Information is
transferred from core storage to the B 321 Printer
through an I/o Channel in the form of fifteen 48-bit
(8-character) words per line. The printer stores.
this information consecutively in its 120-character
buffer. As soon as the buffer is full, the I/O channel is released and the printing cycle begins.
Printing, spacing, and skipping operations proceed
independently of the I/o Channel once the buffer is
full and the paper motion signals are received.
A number of functional controls are provided to
enable the operator to adjust for variances in the
size of the forms and the number of interleaved
carbons. The operator can also adjust the horizontal and vertical alignment of the forms and the
print quality of individual print positions.
Error checks are made for proper character parity
in the buffer, for drum rotation synchronization, and
for the presence of paper. Errors are signalled
by a control-panel indicator and result in a halt of
the printer. Error conditions set individual bits in
the printer's Result Descriptor, which is returned
to core storage at the conclusion of the printing
operation.
The B 321 's total print cycle time is 85.7 milliseconds. Of this time, only 3 milliseconds is consumed in loading the buffer by the I/o Channel.
The B 5500 Memory Module containing the output
data is occupied for a total of 60 microseconds, the
time required to access 15 consecutive words of
data. The Processor is entirely free of the printing
operation once it has sent the Line Printer Output
Descriptor to the I/o control unit.
As soon as the printer's buffer has been loaded,
an interrupt bit is set to inform the Master Control
Program that the I/O Channel is free. Another
interrupt bit is set when the actual printing and
spacing operation is complete. At that time, the
MCP tests the Result Descriptor to determine such
conditions as end-of-paper, parity errors in data
transfer, unit non-readiness, busy status, and
improper drum synchronization. The MCP then
initiates whatever corrective action might be
necessary.
Spacing and skipping operations are specified in the
Output Descriptor, and can be performed in conjunction with printing or independently. Spacing can
be specified as 0, 1, or 2 lines, and skipping can be
regulated by a 12-channel punched tape loop. Paper
advance can occur at a rate of 25 to 40 inches· per
second.
10/65
A
The chart and graph on the next page show comparative performance figures for the B 320, B 321,
and B 325 Line Printers.
(Contd.)
AUERBACH
.
~
,/
203:081. 120
INPUT-OUTPUT: B 320/321/325 LINE PRINTERS
TABLE I: LINE PRINTER CHARACTERISTICS
Line Printer Model
B 320
B 321
B 325
Maximum speed (lines per minute)
475
700
700
Number of print positions
120
120
132
Effective Speed:
B 320, B 321, and B 325 Line Printers
1,000
900
800
.....
700
600
500
......
400
~
" ............r--.......
r-... """-
300
~
~
~ ............
...............-. --.
~
•
r--.
~
B3JO
325
---
200
Effective Speed:
Printed Lines
Per Minute
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
o
1/2
1
2
3
4
5
Inter-Line Pitch in Inches
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
-&.
203:082.100
SIAlDARD
~\\EDP
-
BURROUGHS B 5500
INPUT-OUTPUT
B 328/329 LINE PRINTERS
AUERBACH
REPOITS
~
INPUT·OUTPUT: B 328/329 LINE PRINTERS
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: ••••••.••• B 328 Line Printer.
B 329 Line Printer.
.12
is therefore not contingent on the completion of
a full drum revolution •
The operational speeds of the printers are
governed by the rotational speed of the print
drum and the paper advance speeds. The
rotational speed is 1,040 rpm, or one revolution
every 57.7 milliseconds. The printing or bypassing
of each character on the drum requires 0.9 millisecond. To advance the form a single space requires 24 milliseconds for the first space and 7
milliseconds for each additional space. Therefore,
to maintain printing speeds of 1,040 lines per
minute, the total printing and spacing time must
not exceed 57.7 milliseconds. On this basis, up
to 37 consecutive alphameric characters can be
printed and single spacing can occur during a
sing-Ie drum revolution. Table I indicates effective
speeds as character sets and spacing demands
are varied.
Description
The B 328 and B 329 Line Printers operate at a
maximum rate of 1,040 lines per minute at single
spacing when the characters to be printed are
limited to those in a continuous 37-character segment of the print drum. The peak rate can also be
maintained while printing and triple-spacing if a 16character "numeric and edit" set is used. As
larger character sets are used, the operational
speeds are reduced, as shown in Table I below.
When the entire 64-character set is utilized, the
single-spaced speed will not fall below 734 lines
per minute.
The only difference between the B 328 and B 329
.Line Printers is the number of print positions available for each line. The B 328 provides 120 print
positions, and the B 329 provides 132 print positions
Up to two line printers can be connected to a B 5500
system, but the B 328 and B 329 cannot be paired in
the same system. The B 320 and B 321 Printers
(described in the previous report section) can be
intermixed with the B 328, and the B 325 Printer
(also described in the previous section) can be
paired with the B 329.
Spacing and skipping operations are specified in
the Output Descriptor, and can be performed in
conjunction with printing or independently. Spacing
can be specified as 0, I, or 2 lines, and skipping .
can be regulated by a 12-channel punched tape
loOp. Each line spaced after printing requires 7
milliseconds. Paper advance can occur at a rate
of 24 inches per second.
standard features of the B 328 and B 329 Line
Printers include a ribbon-tracking device to
sense and control ribbon mistracking, and duplicate controls and indicators on the rear of the
cabinets to assist the operator. Except for these
added features, the B 328 and B 329 Line Printers
have the same physical characteristics, program
requirements, forms controls, and error-checking
devices as the B 320, B 321, and B 325 printers
described in the previous report section, page
203:081.100.
Burroughs' standard 64-character drum printer
set has been statistically analyzed and regrouped
on the drum according to frequency of use. The 37
most frequently-used characters (10 numeric, 26
alphabetic, and the period) are arranged in consecutive locations around the drum. The revised
drum arrangement and a "quick cancel" memory
result in the improved performance of the B 328
Line Printer over the 700-line-per-minute B 321
model.
The first deliveries of the B 328 and B 329 1,040line-per-minute printers were made in June, 1965.
Availability is eight months.
The printing process is initiated when the Processor
sends a Line Printer Output Descriptor to. the I/O
control unit. The Processor is then completely
free for further processing. A free I/O Channel
is selected by the I/O control unit and 15 consecutive
words of output data are transferred from a designated Memory Module to a 120-character buffer
(132 characters in the B 329) within the printer
itself. The Memory Module is occupied for a total
of 60 microseconds in accessing the data. As soon
as the buffer has been filled (a process that consumes about three milliseconds), printing begins
and the I/O channel is released.
TABLE I: EFFECTIVE SPEEDS OF B 328
and B 329 LINE PRINTERS
Lines Advanced per
Line Printed
As each character in the buffer is printed, its buffer
position is set to a blank. Immediately upon detection of a completely blank buffer, paper motion
begins. (A minimum of 16 characters on the drum
must pass the printing mechanism before paper
advancing can begin.) The start of paper motion
10/65
A
AUERBACH
e
Printed Lines per Minute Using
Various Consecutive Character Sets
10
37
64
Characters
Characters
Characters
1
2
3
4
5
1040
1040
1040
1040
700
1040
780
715
660
610
734
680
625
584
546
6
12
18
30
648
446
340
230
572
409
318
220
510
380
300
211
-&.,
203: 091. 100
sTlNam
IA\EDP
.
AUERBACH
BURROUGHS B 5500
INPUT-OUTPUT
MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
REPORTS
_--'------1
INPUT-OUTPUT: MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity:.
••.• B
B
B
B
422
423
424
425
Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic
Magnetic
Tape
Tape
Tape
Tape
Unit •
Unit.
Unit.
Unit.
.12· Description
The magnetic tape units available for use with the
B 550.0. provide data transfer rates ranging from
1S,0.0.0. to 72,0.0.0. characters per second and packing
densities of 20.0., 556, or So.o. rows per inch. Each
row can consist of one 6-bit character or two octal
digits, depending upon whether the recording was
performed in alphameric or binary mode. In
addition to the six data bits per row, a seventh
channel is provided for a parity bit. Data is recorded on 0.. 5-inch Mylar-based tape on reels 10..5
inches in diameter. The reel capacity is 2,40.0.
feet, allowing a maximum of 22.1 million alphameric characters per reel when recording at the
so.o. characters-per-inch density.
Tape reading can be performed in either a forward
or backward direction, and all tape operations,
including read, write, forward and backward space,
erase, and rewind, are carried out independently of
the B 550.0. Processor. Up to four magnetic tape
operations can be performed simultaneously, since
each operation is controlled by an independently
functioning, "floating" I/O Channel, four of which
can be used in a B 550.0. system. A maximum of
16 magnetic tape units can be connected to a B 550.0..
The B 422, B 423, and B 424 Magnetic Tape Units
are functionally identical, but they differ among
themselves in several performance categories.
The B 425 Magnetic Tape Unit, also similar to the
other models, features "drive holdover," which
improves its performance by preventing tape movement from stopping when a read or write command
is initiated within 2 to 3 milliseconds after com-
pletion of the prior tape command. Table I illustrates the differentiating characteristics between
the four tape unit models, and the associated graph
demonstrates the resulting variances in performance. Only the B 422 and B 424 Magnetic Tape
Units can be intermixed on the same B 550.0. system.
Tape operations are initiated when the Processor
sends a Magnetic Tape I/O Descriptor to the I/O
control unit. At that point the Processor is free
to continue with its processing task. The I/O control unit then selects a free I/O Channel and begins
the transfer of data between a tape unit and a B 550.0.
Memory Module. The selected I/O. Channel remains
fully occupied for the duration of the tape operation.
The I/O Descriptor specifies the tape operation to
be performed and all other necessary parameters
such as unit designation, input or output Memory
Module address, alphameric or binary reading or
recording mode, direction of read, and data word
count when required. When recording in the alphameric mode, BCL-coded 6-bit characters are
written from core storage until a special groupmark character is encountered. Thus, the size of
core storage is the only limiting factor on the tape
record length when recording in the alphameric
mode. Binary recording is terminated when a
specified number of 4S-bit words (eight tape rows
per word) have been written. The maximum
number of binary words that can be written in or
read from each block is 1,0.23. Binary tape
reading is also terminated by satisfying the word
count. Alphameric reading is terminated either
by satisfying the word count or by sensing the
0.. 75-inch interblock gap on tape, whichever is
encountered first.
After the tape operation has been completed, a
special I/O-complete bit is set in the External
Interrupt Register, and an I/O Result Descriptor
is constructed and sent to core storage. The
Result Descriptor indicates if the assigned tape
TABLE I: CHARACTERISTICS OF BURROUGHS MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
Tape
Speed,
inches
per sec
Recording
Density,
bits per
inch
Peak
Speed,
char
per sec
B 422
120
200
556
24,000
66,000
Model
No.
\
Interblock Gap Lengths
inches
msec (1)
0.75
8.7
Efficiency, % (3)
100-char
hlocks
1,00{}-char
blocks
209
574
32.3
14.8
63.5
64.4
chars (2)
Demand
on Core
Storage,
%
Rewind
Speed,
inches
per sec
1.2
3.3
320
B 423
120
200
24,000
0.75
8.7
209
32.3
63.5
1.2
320
B 424
83
800
66,000
0.75
8.7
574
14.8
64.4
3.3
320
B 425
90
200
556
800
18,000
50,000
72,000
0.75
6.25
113
313
450
46.9
24.2
18.0
89.8
76.1
68.9
0.9
2.5
3.6
320
(1) Published time in milliseconds to traverse each interblock gap when reading or writing consecutive
blocks; the interblock gap time for. the B 425 assumes the use of the "drive holdover" feature.
(2) Effective number of character positions occupied by each interblock gap.
(3) Effective speed at the indicated block size, expressed as a percentage of peak speed.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
BURROUGHS B 5500
203:091. 120
.12
In addition to the data-transfer validation provided
by the read-after-write check, several other checks
are provided. Row parity is checked during both
reading and recording. A longitudinal check character for each block is developed during recording
and checked during subsequent readings. Data
transfer errors of any kind cause specific bits to
be set in the I/O result descriptor.
Description (Contd.)
unit was not ready or busy, if an end-of-file or
physical end-of-tape marker was sensed, or if
data transfer parity errors occurred. The Master
Control Program tests the bit settings of the
Result Descriptor and initiates any corrective
action that may be required.
.The B 422, B 423, B 424, and B 425 Magnetic Tape
Units are fully compatible with the tape units used
with the Burroughs B 100/200/300 Series. Computer
systems of this smaller Burroughs series can thus
be readily used as satellites to the larger B 5500
systems. Compatibility is also achieved with the
mM 729 and 7330 tape units, and with the newer
mM 2400 Series tape units equipped with the 7Track Compatibility feature.
When reading or recording, tape is pulled from a
vacuum-column buffer by a moving capstan and
pinch-roller assembly, and passed under a dualgap read/write head. Tape speed past the head
is 120 inches per second in the B 422 and B 423,
83 inches per second in the B 424, and 90 inches
per second in the B 425. The read section of the
head follows the write section by 0.15 inches to
allow for immediate read-after-write checking.
Tape is then drawn into another vacuum column
preceding the take-up reel to guard against tape
damage and breakage.
According to published specifications, the transport
mechanism provides tape start times of 4.5 milliseconds and stop times of 4. 2 milliseconds, although there are indications that these published
times are somewhat faster than the times actually
achieved in installed transports. By means of its
"drive holdover" Feature, Burroughs states that
the B 425 is capable of writing consecutive records
with a total interblock overhead time of 6.25
milliseconds.
Reel loading is facilitated by a latch-leader device
affixed to every reel. The leader is latched to a
section of tape that is permanently attached to the
take-up transport, and a Load button is pushed.
Tape positioning for proper operation is then performed automatically. Density-switching and highspeed rewinding (320 inches per second) can also
be controlled at the tape unit's control panel.
First Delivery: .•..• January 1964 for B 422.
February 1964 for B 423.
May 1965 for B 424.
Un~pecified for B 425.
.14
EFFECTIVE SPEEDS: BURROUGHS MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
100,000
25 -~t 80 0 bpi
1'>!-- _ _ .
556b
~
4cz,cz, a.t
1'>
7
4
~
~~
2
~V
V-
10,000
~
,,
pl
f1'
422
&,
B 423 at 200 bpi
".. ",,"
7
1/
Effective Speed,
Characters per
Second
~
4
2
1,000
~~ ~
~~
~
7
4
2
.r'.
100
10
2
4
7
100
2
4
7
1,000
Characters per Block
10/65
A
AUERBACH
~
2
4
7
10,000
203: 101. 100
1.
ST"""
BURROUGHS B 5500
INPUT-OUTPUT
DATA COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM
/AEDP
AUERBAC~
REPORTS
~
INPUT·OUTPUT: DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: .••...••.
• 12
B 450 Disk File and Data
Communication Basic
Control.
B 5480 Data Communication
Control Unit.
B 481 Teletype Terminal
Unit.
B 483 Typewriter Terminal
Unit.
B 493 Typewriter Inquiry
Station.
B 484 Dial TWX Terminal
Unit.
B 487 Data Transmission
Terminal Unit.
B 5480 notes the condition and sets an indicator
bit in the I/o Result Descriptor. The maximum
time required for the B 5480's scanner to examine
the status of all its terminal units is 220 microseconds.
The nominal data transfer rate through the B 5480
DCCU is 30,000 six-bit characters per second.
Transfers are serial by character and parallel by
bit.
The paragraphs that follow describe the several
types of terminal units and inquiry stations that can
be connected to a single B 5480 Data Communication
Control Unit. Up to 15 of these terminal units, in
any combination, can operate under control of each
B 5480, and two B 5480's can be connected to a
B 5500 system .
Description
.121 B 481 Teletype Terminal Unit
The Burroughs B 450 Disk File and Data Communication Basic Control Unit consists of a standard
B 5500 cabinet module housing the power supply
and circuitry to control up to two B 5480 Data Communication Control Units. Each B 5480 Control
Unit provides the interface between a B 5500 I/O
Channel and up to 15 data communications termi.nals of several varieties. The B 5480 can be
located up to 50 feet from the I/O control unit; it
operates independently of the I/O control unit except when loading or unloading the buffers of its
associated terminal units to or from the I/O Channel.
The prinCipal function of the B 5480 Data Communication Control Unit (DC CD) is to scan its terminal units to determine their input and output
readiness, and to alert the processor of these conditions by sending interrupt signals to the I/o control unit. The B 5480 DCCU also provides automatic code translation facilities between Burroughs
Common Language (BCL) and Baudot codes.
The B 5480 DCCU's scanner can recognize that any
terminal unit is in one of four possible states: busy,
input-ready, output-ready, or not-ready. The
B 5480 cannot communicate with a "busy" terminal;
instead it sets a "terminal busy" interrupt bit in an
I/o Result Descriptor that is sent to core storage.
The Master Control Program tests all Result Descriptors and initiates whatever action is appropriate. When a terminal unit has received a complete
message from an inquiry station, the B 5480 recognizes the terminal as input-ready and selects a
free I/o Channel for transfer of the inquiry to core
storage. The terminal unit is in the output-ready
state when it has emptied the contents of its buffer
to an inquiry station and still has not detected an
end-of-reply (group mark) character. In this case
the B 5480 latches its scanner to the output-ready
terminal until the full response is transmitted. If
the I/O control unit attempts to send a response to
a terminal unit that is in the not-ready state, the
©
The B 481 Teletype Terminal Unit is a Teletype
Model 28 Sequential Selector with selective calling
features, which provides the interface between the
B 5480 DCCU and a network of Teletype stations.
A maximum cable length of 50 feet is permitted
between the B 481 Teletype Terminal Units and the
B 5480 DCCU. The B 481 provides buffer storage
and performs serial-to-parallel (input) and parallel-to-serial (output) conversions of the Teletype
character codes. From 1 to 400 Teletype stations
can be serviced by a single terminal unit, allowing
a total of 6,000 Teletype stations in the network
if only Teletype Terminals are used. Each B 481
can service only one Teletype station at a time.
The B 481 has a buffer storage capacity of either
120 or 240 6-bit characters; buffer access time is
20 microseconds. A character control device provides for the insertion and deletion of special Teletype control characters and station disconnect signals. An optional Teletype Page Printer can be
included as part of the B 481 Terminal Unit and
used to monitor all messages on the network.
. 122 B 483 Typewriter Terminal Unit
The B 483 Typewriter Terminal Unit provides
facilities for connecting from 1 to 8 Typewriter
Inquiry Stations to the communications system.
The unit contains an input buffer which is capable
of storing simultaneous inputs of 30 characters
from each of 8 typewriter inquiry stations. An
input scanning device accepts data as it becomes
available (a character at a time) from any of the 8
stations, and directs it to the proper portion of the
buffer. When an end-of-input character is recognized, an interrupt and latch facility holds the input
buffer to the station while data is transferred
through the B 5480 Data Communication Control
Unit to the I/O Channel and to core storage.
A 240-character output buffer is also provided in
the B 483 Typewriter Terminal Unit. This buffer
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
BURROUGHS B 5500
203:.101. 122
· 122 B 483 Typewriter Terminal Unit (Contd. )
Burroughs terminal units, is general in purpose.
Various remote input-output devices can be interfaced to it by means of up to 16 line (or channel)
adapters. Therefore, a single B 487 DTTU can
provide a B 5500 system with a mix of data transmission services without the use of additional terminal units.
is used to store reply messages from the I/O control unit while the terminal. is latched to a Typewriter Inquiry Station. The terminal unit remains
latched to its receiving station until the end-ofreply character from core storage is recognized.
Output buffer read-out to the Typewriter Inquiry
Station is under the independent control of the
B 483 Typewriter Terminal Unit.
Most remote devices that can use the low-speed
and voice-grade lines of the telephone companies
(with data transmission speeds up to 2,400 bits per
second) can be connected to the B 487, and ultimately to the B 5500, via Burroughs' line adapters.
• 123 B 493 Typewriter Inquiry Station
The B 493 Typewriter Inquiry Station utilizes a
Teletype Send-Receive Page Printer set. It communicates with the B 483 Terminal Unit via a multiple-conductor cable which can be up to 1 mile
long, and it can be used for input and output of
alphameric data at up to 10 six-bit characters per
second. Up to 8 Typewriter Inquiry Stations can
be connected to each B 483 Terminal Unit.
The B 487 DTTU contains buffer units to control
the flow of data between the remote devices and
the B 5500 I/o control unit. The total capacity of
the B 487's buffer is 448 characters, providing a
minimum (and basic) buffer size of 28 characters
for each of the 16 possible transmission channels.
The 448-character buffer can be divided into from
1 to 16 smaller-sized buffers in increments of 28
characters. Since each of the 16 possible buffers
is individually addressable by means of the B 5500's
I/O and Result Descriptors, up to 16 messages can
be stored or transmitted simultaneously by each
B 487. A maximum of 15 B 487 terminal units can
be connected to a B 5500 system.
• 124 B 484 Dial TWX Terminal Unit
The B 484 Dial TWX Terminal Unit provides the
facilities required to use stations of the Dial TWX
network as inquiry and transmission devices. The
B 484 unit contains 480 character positions of inputoutput buffering that can accept messages from up
to eight stations of the Dial TWX network simultaneously. The buffer size can be segmented into
groups of 60, 120, 240, or 480 positions, depending
on the number of channels to be utilized - 8, 4, 2,
or 1. A Bell System Model 103A Data-Phone subset must be used as an interface between each
channel and the TWX network. Normal telephone
dialing procedures are followed in establishing
contact between one of the eight channels and each
Terminal Unit.
Automatic code translation can be provided for the
B 487 DTTU by using the B 249 Data Transmission
Control Unit in place of the B 5480 DCCU. The
B 249 includes the facilities to translate into Burroughs' 6-bit BCL internal code input data in 5level Baudot, 6-level ASCII, or 8-level ASCII
codes. Similar code translations on output data
can also be performed automatically.
The B 249 Data Transmission Control Unit is required, in place of the B 5480 DCCU, when automatic code translation is desired, when multiple
B 487 DTTU's are connected to one B 5500 system,
and/or when any of the previously-described Burroughs terminal units are intermixed with a B 487
in the same B 5500 system. However, the B 249
can provide individual buffer address ability only for
the B 487 DTTU. The B 249 Control Unit provides
the interfacing to accommodate up to 15 B 487
Data Transmission Terminal Units, or any combination of B 487's and the other Burroughs terminal units (described above) to a maximum of 15.
After a connection between a TWX station and the
B 484 Terminal Unit has been established, the
operator types an input message on the Dial TWX
station keyboard, using a Model 33 or 35 Teletypewriter unit. The message is transmitted and
loaded into the Terminal Unit's buffer as it is
keyed in. The message is then sent to the B 5480
Data Communication Control Unit, and from there
to the I/O control unit at the rate of 30,000 six-bit
characters per second. After the message has
been processed, the Terminal Unit sends the processor's response to the awaiting channel. Until
the station has received the "disconnect code," it
can continue to communicate with the processing
center. The B 484 Terminal Unit can accept messages larger than the buffer size established for
each channel, but only one such message can be
accepted at anyone time.. All input-output messages controlled by the Dial TWX Terminal Unit
can be monitored by connecting a B 493 Typewriter
Inquiry Station to the Terminal Unit. When the
monitor station is disconnected, the typewriter can
be used in its normal manner.
The B 452 Disk File/Data Transmission Terminal
Unit must be used in conjunction with the B 487;
each B 452 supplies the power and cabinet space
for up to two B 487 DTTU's.
With the addition of the B 487 Data Transmission
Terminal Unit to its line of data communications
equipment, Burroughs now offers B 5500 users the
equipment needed to operate the computer system
from a remote site, to perform message switching,
to perform medium-speed batch data transmission,
to compile programs from a remote location, and
to service simple inquiries.
• 125 B 487 Data Transmission Terminal Unit
The B 487 Data Transmission Terminal Unit
(DTTU) was announced by Burroughs in August,
1965. The B 487, unlike the previously-available
10/65
/'
First delivery of Burroughs' data communications
equipment for the B 5500 occurred in November,
1964.
fA.
AUERBACH
~
/
203:111. 100
&
~EDP
ST ... ' "
AUERBACH
BURROUGHS B 5500
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
REPORTS
~
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
The Burroughs B 5500 Information Processing system can concurrently execute:
• One or two machine instructions (one per Processor); and
• Up to four input-output operations, one for each available B 5283
I/O Channel.
Because each of the core storage Memory Modules has its own independent addressing and read/write circuitry, simultaneous memory accesses are possible. The maximum number of truly simultaneous accesses to core memory in a fully-expanded B 5500
system is six: one access by each of the two Processors and one access by each of the four
I/O Channels. Six interleaved (not simultaneous) accesses to the same Memory Module are
also permitted, although no more than two of these accesses can result from magnetic tape
operations.
The B 5500 Processor initiates all peripheral input-output operations by sending
a 48-bit I/O Descriptor to the I/O control unit. Normally the Processor is then free to perform its operations, unaffecting and unaffected by the concurrent peripheral operations. The
Processor's performance is delayed only when it accesses a Memory Module that is already
being simultaneously accessed by another Processor or I/O Channel. Since data is transferred
to and from the Memory Modules one word at a time, and since the memory cycle time per
word is either four or six microseconds (for the B 461 and B 460 Modules, respectively), the
Processor will normally be delayed only a minimal amount of time while awaiting access to
a "busy" Memory Module.
Each I/O Channel is totally dedicated to its assigned input-output task once it has
been selected by the I/O control unit. The line printers and data communications terminals
have their own internal buffers, and therefore the I/O Channels are released immediately
after loading or emptying these buffers. Up to four input-output operations can be performed
simultaneously, one per installed I/O Channel, since each I/O Channel functions independently
of the others.
Jnput-output data transfers utilize the accessed Memory Module only during each
48-bit, single-word transfer; the memory access time per word is either four or six microseconds, depending on whether the B 461 or B 460 Memory Modules are used. The number
of memory accesses required for each input-output operation, or, alternatively, the time
required for memory accesses as a percentage of the total time for the I/O operation, is
specified in the report sections describing the individual B 5500 peripheral units.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
203:121. 100
~
BURROUGHS B 5500
INSTRUCTION LIST
STANDARD
EDP
REPORTS
AUERBACH
INSTRUCTION LIST
.1
WORD MODE
the descriptor address, and bring the word at
this address to A.
Each Word Mode syllable is 12 bits long and may
be one of the following four types, as designated by
the two low-order bits.
• 11
.12
•
• 13
Literal (bit code 00)
If (A) is a Program Descriptor, enter the
addressed subroutine •
Descriptor Call (bit code 11)
The ten high-order bits are placed in A as a positive
integer.
The ten high-order bits are added to (R); the word
at this address is brought to A. Then:
Operand Call (bit code 10)
•
If (A) is an operand, construct a descriptor
of that operand and place it in A.
The ten high order-bits are added to (R); the word
at this address is brought to A. Then:
•
If (A) is a Data Descriptor whose size field
is zero, no further action occurs.
•
If (A) is a Data Descriptor whose size field
is non-zero, add the ten low-order bits of
(B) to the descriptor address.
•
If (A) is a Program Descriptor, enter the
addressed subroutine.
•
If (A) is an operand, no further action occurs.
•
If (A) is a Data Descriptor whose size field
is zero, bring the word at the descriptor
addres s to A.
•
If (A) is a Data Descriptor whose size field is
non-zero, add the ten low-order bits of (B) to
• 14
OPERATOR
Operators (bit code 01)
OPERATION
.Arithmetic
ADD
SUB
MUL
DIV
IDV
RDV
DLA
DL8
DLM
DLD
LND
LOR
LQV
LNG
GTR
LSS
LEQ
EQL
NEQ
GEQ
(B) + (A)-+B
(B) - (A)-+B
(B) x (A)-+B
(B) :- (A) ~ B; quotient is normalized and rounded.
Normalize (A) and (B); then (B) ;. (A) ~ B
NormSllize (A) and (B); divide (B) by (A); store remainder in B.
(53 & 84) + (A & B) ~ A & B; i. e., double length add.
(53 & 54) - (A & B) ~A & B
(53 & 54) x (A & B) ~A & B
(53 & 54) ;. (A & B) ~ A & B
AND: If 1 appears in corresponding bit position of both A and B,retain the 1 in B; otherwise
place a 0 in B. Mark A empty.
OR: If 1 appears in corresponding bit pOSitions of either A or B, place a 1 in B; otherwise
place a 0 in B. Mark A empty.
EQUIVALENCE: If corresponding bits of A and B are equal, place a 1 in B; otherwise place a
o in B. Mark A empty.
NEGATE: Change all zeros to ones and all ones to zeros in Register A, except flag bit is
unaltered.
If
If
If
If
If
If
(B) > (A),
(B) <' (A),
(B):::;; (A),
(B)= (A),
(B)¥- (A),
(B);::(A),
1 -+ B;
1 -+ B;
1 -+ B;
1 -+ B;
1 ~ B;
1 -+ B;
otherwise
otherwise
otherwise
otherwise
otherwise
otherwise
0 ~ B.
0 ~ B.
0 ~ B.
0 ---»- B.
0 ~ B.
0 -+ B.
,/
(Contd. )
10/65
A
.,
AUERBACH
203: 121. 141
INSTRUCTION LIST
.14
Word Mode Operators (Contd.)
OPERATOR
OPERATION
Logic (Contd.)
nnFCE
nnFCL
nnTFB
nnDIA
nnDffi
Compare nn bits of (A) to nn bits of (B); If equal, 1-7A; otherwise 0-7A.
Compare nn bits of (A) to nn bits of (B); If (B) < (A), I-?A; otherwise 0 ---3!0A.
Copy nn bits from A to B.
nn-7 G & H unless nn = o.
nn-7 K & V unless nn = o.
MDS
MOP
TOP
SSN
SSP
CHS
Set flag bit of (A) to 1, making (A) a descriptor.
Set flag bit of (A) to 0, making (A) an operand.
If flag bit of (A) is 0, 1-7A; otherwise O-?A.
Set sign of (A) to 1.
Set sign of (A) to o.
Change sign of (A).
FBS
Search for word with flag bit on (Le. , descriptor) beginning at address in A.
Place in A the address of first descriptor found.
Compare a field in (A) to a list of words beginning at the address in B,
placing each list word in (B) for the test. When (A) is < (B), place the
address of the word in B into A.
-
LLL
Data Transfers
XCH
DUP
DEL
SSF
Exchange (A) and (B).
Adjust stack until A is empty and B is full; duplicate (B) in A.
Delete the top word of stack; L e., (A).
If two low-order bits of (A) are zeros, store (F) in B; if they are ones,
store (B) in S; if only the low-order bit is zero, set subprogram switch
and store (B) in F; if only the low-order bit is one, store (8) in B.
In the following store operators, if A contains a descriptor, (B) is stored in
the address it specifies. If A contains an operand, (B) is stored at the address
formed by modifying (A) by (R) or (F).
SND
STD
IBN
ISD
CND
cm
Is1S0
CTC
CTF
FTC
FTF
Store (B); mark A empty, but retain (B).
Store (B); mark A and B empty.
Convert (B) to an integer and store; mark A empty, but retain (B).
Convert (B) to an integer and store; mark A and B empty.
If low-order bit of (A) is 1, proceed as in ISN, above; otherwise proceed as in
SND, above.
If low-order bit of (A) is 1, proceed as in lSD, above; otherwise proceed as in
STD, above.
Store a G- and H-specified field from (A), with a length of Is, in the low order
bits of A, and set rest of (A) to zero.
Store the 15 low-order bits of (A) in the 15 low-order bits of (B).
Store the 15 low-order bits of (A) in bits 16 through 30 of (B).
Store bits 16 through 30 of (A) in the 15 low-order bits of (B).
Store bits 16 through 30 of (A) in bits 16 through 30 of (B).
\
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
BURROUGHS B 5500
203: 121. 142
• 14
Word Mode Operators (Contd.)
OPERATION
OPERATOR
Branching
In all branching operations, if (A) is an operand it specifies number of syllables
to be jumped. If (A) is a descriptor, it specifies destination address.
BFW
BBW
BFC
BBC
Branch forward unconditionally.
Branch backward unconditionally.
Branch forward unless low-order bit of (B) is 1 (set by compare operations).
Branch backward unless low-order bit of (B) is 1 (set by compare operations).
CFD
If a G- and H-specified.field of (B) is not zero, mark B empty, and proceed as in
BFW, above.
If G- and H-specified field of (B) is not zero, proceed as in BFW, above.
If a G- and H-specified field of (B) is not zero, mark B empty, and proceed as
in BBW, above.
If a G- and H-specified field of (B) is not zero, proceed as in BBW, above.
CFN
CBD
CBN
Subroutine Operators
MKS
XlT
RTN
BRT
CMN
MARK STACK: Push down (A) and (B) into stack. Construct Mark Stack control
word containing (F) and (R), store it in stack, and copy its stack address
into F.
EXIT: (A subroutine return in the Word Mode) Reset contents of C, L, G, H,
K, V. R. and F from the Return and Mark Stack control words. Mark A and
B empty.
RETURN: (A subroutine return in the Character Mode) Adjust stack until A is
full and B is empty. Reset contents of C, L, G, H, K, V, R, and F from the
Return and Mark Stack control words.
BRANCH RETURN: If presence bit is 1, set S and C from (A); restore R and F
from Mark Stack control word; mark A and B empty.
ENTER CHARACTER MODE IN-LINE: Push (A) and (B) into stack. Construct
Return control word containing (C) and (L), store it in stack, and copy its
stack address into F. Store the word below the Return control word in S,
and set sub-program and Character-Mode switches.
Miscellaneous Operators
PRL
COC
CDC
COM
LOD
INX
TUS
TIO
PROGRAM RELEASE
CONSTRUCT OPERAND CALL
CONSTRUCT DESCRIPTOR CALL
COMMUNICATION: Store (A) in a specific location and set communication bit
in Interrupt register.
LOAD OPERA TOR
INDEX: Add 15 low-order bits of (B) to (A).
Store in A a peripheral unit's status word, and set a bit indicating each unit's
readiness or non-readiness.
Store in A an integer indicating the lowest-numbered currently-available 1/0
Channel. Store a zero if all Channels are busy.
/
Control State Operators
Note: The following operators may be used only when the Processor is in the
Control State as a result of an interrupt. All the preceding Normal State
operators may also be used in the Control State.
HP2
no
IPI
IP2
ITI
RTR
lOR
Cause Processor 2 to store its registers in the stack and halt.
Store (A) in a specific location; send an Initiate 1/0 signal to Central Control
for selection of an 1/0 Channel.
Set Processor 1 's registers from fixed storage location and exit from Control
State.
Store' (A) in a specifiC location and activate Processor 2.
Interrogate the Interrupt Register; if any interrupt bit is on, transfer control
to the corresponding storage location.
Timer setting~A.
1/0 RELEASE: Set presence bit to 1 in location formed by modifying (A) by
(R) or (F).
(Contd. )
10/65
fA..,
AUERBACH
203: 121.200
INSTRUCTION LIST
.2
CHARACTER MODE
Each Character Mode syllable is a 12-bit operator consisting of a 6-bit repeat field and a 6-bit
operation code. The following operators are available.
OPERATION
OPERATOR
REPEAT
OP. CODE
Arithmetic
Note: Zone bits are ignored; T/F toggle..-.?>l if field overflow occurs.
nn
nn
FAD
FSV
(DC) + (SC)--7DC, for nn successive chars.
(DC) - (SC)..-.?> DC, for nn successive chars.
r
r
r
r
r
r
b
TLS
TEQ
TNE
TGR
TEL
TEG
BIT
If
If
If
If
If
If
If
(SC)
(SC)
(SC)
(SC)
(SC)
(SC)
(SB)
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
CEQ
CNE
CGR
CEL
CLS
CEG
If
If
If
If
If
If
(SC) =
(SC) -#
(SC) >
(SC) <
(SC)"<
(SC) ~
< r, T IF toggle -7 1.
= r,
01 r,
> r,
< r,
:; r,
-;;;; b,
T/F toggle -71.
T IF toggle -7 L.
T IF toggle -7 i.
T IF toggle -71.
T/F toggle -71.
T IF toggle -71.
(DC),
(DC),
(DC),
(DC),
(DC),
(DC),
for nn chars,
for nn chars,
for nn chars,
for nn chars,
for nn chars,
for nn chars,
T/F
T/F
T/F
T/F
T/F
T/F
toggle -71.
toggle-71.
toggle-71.
toggle-71.
toggle-71.
toggle -71.
Data Transfer
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
TRW
TRP
TRS
TRN
TRZ
TBN
(SW) -7 DW, for nn successive words.
(PC)-7DC, for nn successive characters.
(SC) -7DC, for nn successive characters.
Same as TRS, but transfer numeric bits only.
Same as TRS, but transfer zone bits only.
Replace with blanks all characters in a.field specified by S and K
that are equal to or less than zerOB-. Terminate operation when a
greater-than-zero character is encountered.
Skip Operators
\
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
SFS
SRS
SFD
SRD
BSS
BSD
Skip
Skip
Skip
Skip
Skip
Skip
forward over nn source characters.
backward over nn source characters.
forward over nn destination characters.
backward over nn destination characters.
nn successive source bits.
nn successive destination bits..
Address Operators
\
SSA
SDA
SES
SED
TSA
TDA
SCA
Set source address: next 3 source chars ~M & G; 0 --7H.
Set destination address: next 3 destination chars ~S & K; 0--7V.
Set source address from a word in stack.
Set destination address from a word in stack.
Store source address in stack.
Store destination address in stack.
Store control address (contents of C & L) in stack.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporotion ond AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
BURROUGHS B 5500
203: 121.201
.2
CHARACTER MODE (Contd.)
OPERATOR
REPEAT
OPERATION
OP. CODE
Jump Operators
nn
JFW
JRV
JFC
JRC
BNS
ENS
JNS
nn
JNC
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
-
Jump forward nn syllables.
Jump backward nn syllables.
Jump forward nn syllables unless T/F toggle = 1.
Jump backward nn syllables unless T/F toggle = 1.
Execute the following loop nn times.
Identifies end of a program loop.
Jump forward nn syllables to a syllable following end of loop (ENS),
do not count around loop.
If T/F toggle = 0, proceed as in JNS.
Conversion Operators
nn
OCV
nn
ICV
Convert 1 octal word in source string to nn decimal digits (8 max.)
in destination string.
Convert nn decimal digits (8 max.) in source string to 1-word octal
integer in destination string.
Miscellaneous Operators
-
SEC
INC
STC
BIS
Bm
CRF
EXC
-
CMX
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
.3
Set R (tally register) to nn.
Increment (R) by' nn; ignore overflow.
Store (R) in stack at location (F + nn).
Set nn successive bits in destination string to 1.
Set nn successive bits in destination string to zero.
Use 'the 6 low-order bits of (F + nn) as repeat field for next syllable.
Exit from Character Mode and re-enter Word Mode, resetting Registers
C, L, G, H, K, V, S, F, and R from control words in the stack.
EXIT CHARACTER MODE IN-LINE (same as EXC, above, except that
Registers C and L are not set).
INSTRUCTION LIST NOMENCLA TURE
PC: ••••••••••••• next character in the program segment.
R: ..•••.•..•.... R register.
r: ••••.•.•.•••.. a character used as a
literal.
S: • • • • • . • . • • • • . . S register.
s: •••.••.....••. number of bits to shift a
result (included in
operator syllable).
SC: •••.•••...••. next character in the
source string.
SW: • . • . • • • • . . . • . next word in the source
string.
S3:} . . . • • • . . . . . . . the third and fourth locaS4:
tions in the stack (core
storage locations addressed by the S register).
T/F: ...•...•••.• True/False toggle.
V: • • . . . • • . . • • . • • V register.
( ):. . . • • . • • • . . • • the contents of a register
or location.
Note: The functions of all Processor registers are
described in Paragraph 203:051. 24.
A: •••••••••••••• A register; top location
in stack.
B: •••••••••••••• B register; second location in stack.
b: •••••••••••••• a bit used as a literal in
repeat field of a Character Mode syllable.
C: •••••••••••.•• C register.
DC: ••••••••••••. next character in the destination string.
DW: •••••••.••... next word in the destination string.
F: •••••.•••••••• F register.
G: • • • • • • • • • • • • . . G register.
H: ••••••••••••.• H register.
K: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • K register.
L:" • • • • • • • • • • • • . • L register.
1: •••••••••••••• number of characters (included in operator syllable) .
M: ••••••••••••.. M register.
nn: ••••••••••••• a 6-bit literal.
10/65
fA
AUERBACH
•
1.
203:141. 100
SlANDARD
BURROUGHS B 5500
DATA CODE TABLE
/AEDP
AUERBAC~
e
RUGUS
DATA CODE TABLE
The B 5500 Information Processing System can manipulate data internally either in
48-bit binary words or in 6-bit BCD characters. Input-output operations can utilize three
basic coding systems: binary, 6-bit Burroughs Common Language, and the standard Hollerith
card code. Card readers and punches can accept data in Hollerith or binary code. The magnetic drum storage unit reads and records only in the binary mode. The supervisory printer
and line printers accept and print data only in BCL code, but the magnetic tape units and Disk
File can utilize binary-coded information as well as BCL. Burroughs Common Language code
is also the standard input-output data code for the paper tape devices and data communications
equipment, although a paper tape code translator permits use of any 5, 6, 7, or 8-level code
in read and punch operations, and the 5-level Baudot code can be used with Teletype terminal
units.
The table of data codes below consolidates in one chart the several types of internal
and external codes used in the B 5500 system.
CHAR.
Blank
INTERNAL CODE
OCTAL
8421
SA
CODE
11
0000
60
BCL CODE
SA
01
8421
0000
CARD CODE
ZONE
CHAR.
SA
NUM.
- -
INTERNAL CODE
OCTAL
8421
CODE
BCLCODE
CARD CODE
SA
8421
ZONE
NUM.
H
01
1000
30
11
1000
12
8
I
01
1001
31
11
1001
12
9
•
10
0000
40
10
1010
11
0
J
10
0001
41
10
0001
11
I
K
10
0010
42
10
0010
11
2
3
01
1010
32
11
1011
12
8-3
[
01
1011
33
11
1100
12
8-4
(
01
1101
35
11
1101
12
8-5
<
01
1110
36
11
1110
12
8-6
L
10
0011
43
10
0011
11
01
1111
37
11
1111
12
8-7
10
0100
44
10
0100
11
4
&
01
1100
34
11
0000
12
-
M
N
10
0101
45
10
0101
11
5
.
10
1010
52
10
1011
11
8-3
0
10
0110
46
10
0110
11
6
10
1011
53
10
1100
11
8-4
P
10
0111
47
10
0111
11
7
S
)
10
1101
55
10
1101
11
8-5
Q
10
1000
50
10
1000
11
8
;
10
1110
56
10
1110
11
8-6
R
10
1001
51
10
1001
11
9
~
10
1111
57
10
1111
11
8-7
-
10
0000
11
-
I
1100
01
1010
0
8-2
54
74
1100
II
10
S
II
0010
62
01
0010
0
2
/
11
0001
61
I
T
11
0011
63
01
0011
0
3
11
1010
72
11
1011
73
=
11
1101
75
01
J
11
1110
76
01
"
11
1111
77
01
1111
%
0001
a
01
1011
0
8-3
U
II
0100
64
01
0100
0
4
01
1100
0
8-4
V
11
0101
65
01
0101
0
5
1101
0
8-5
W
11
0110
66
01
0110
0
6
1110
0
d-6
X
11
0111
67
01
0111
0
7
0
8-7
V
11
1000
70
01
1000
0
8
Z
11
1001
71
01
1001
0
9
0
GO
=
00
00
1010
-
0
1
00
0001
01
00
0001
2
00
GOl0
02
00
0010
01
1111
-
8-7
3
00
GOII
03
00
0011
11
1010
12
a
4
GO
0100
04
00
0100
11
0001
12
I
5
GO
0101
05
00
0101
;
CO
1010
12
00
1011
@
CO
lDll
13
00
1100
:
00
1101
15
00
1101
>
00
1110
16
00
1110
~
00
1111
17
00
+
01
0000
20
A
01
0001
21
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
B
01
0010
22
II
0010
12
2
6
00
0110
06
00
0110
C
01
0011
23
11
0011
12
3
7
00
0111
07
00
0111
D
01
0100
24
II
0100
12
4
8
00
1000
10
00
1000
E
;'1
0101
:;5
11
0101
12
5
9
GO
lGOI
11
00
1001
F
01
0110
26
11
0110
12
6
G
01
0111
27
11
0111
12
7
?
00
1100
14
00
0000
-
-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ALL OTHER
CARD CODES
Table reproduced from Burroughs B 5500 Information Processing Systems Reference Manual,
Appendix A, p. A-I.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
&
203. I 51 . 100
STAND ...
BURROUGHS B 5500
PROBLEM ORIENTED
FACILITIES
/AEDP
AUER8A~
R£PIIRTS
~
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
·1
UTILITY ROUTINES
· 11
Simulators of Other
Computers: ..•..
· 12
· 13
Simulation by Other
Computers: .•...
initializing and can therefore be re-executed as
desired. In addition, any number of SORT statements canbe used within a single COBOL program.
none.
An example of the speed of the Tape Sort Generator
is offered by Burroughs. A sort of 50,000 100character records, blocked at 10 records per block
and using a 10-character sort key, will take 12
minutes and 50 seconds on a'single-processor
B 5500 that has two I/O Channels, 32K words of
core storage, and six available 66KC magnetic
tape units.
none.
Data Sorting and Merging
B 5500 Tape Sort Generator
Reference: ...••.•
Record size: . . . . . .
Block size: ...•.
Key size:
File size:
Number of tapes:
Date available:
Description:
Sorting on the B 5500 Using
COBOL-61 Extended,
Burroughs Publication
1021334.
from 1 to 512 eight-character words.
from 1 to 1,023 words.
up to 25 fields within each
key, with a maximum of
63 characters per field.
any number of input reels
that can be accommodated
before any of the available
scratch tapes is filled.
from 3 to 8.
April 1963.
B 5500 Disk Sort Generator
Reference: . . • . . . .
Record size:
Block size: . . . • . . .
Key size: . . . . . . . •
File size: ...•..••
Number of discs:
The B 5500 Tape Sort Generator is an integral part
of the COBOL Compiler, described in Report Sections 203:162 (COBOL language) and 203:182 (COBOL
translator). The generator is activated by the SORT
verb, an elective feature of COBOL-61 Extended.
File and record descriptions are entered in the
source program's Data Division section, and the
maximum amount of core storage to be used for
sorting is specified in the Environment Division.
Number of tapes: ...
Date available:
Description:
B 5500 users with available Disk File storage can
utilize the more recent Disk Sort Generator. The
Disk Sort is also an integral part of the B 5500's
COBOL compiler, and is activated by the SORT
verb in the same manner as the Tape Sort Generator.
The Tape Sort Generator sorts input records from
magnetic tape in ascending or descending sequence
according to key information contained in up to 25
fields of each record. Only fixed-length records
can be sorted, and the record length must be a multiple of eight characters (one B 5500 word). From
three to eight magnetic tapes can be used for intermediate storage during the sorting operation, and
the sorted output records are written on magnetic
tape. The generator uses a "vector sort" technique'
during the internal sort or "stringing" phase, and a
polyphase Fibonacci merge during the output phase.
A simple sort of all records results when the SORT
statement with the USING File Name Option is specified in the Procedures Division. However, the INPUT PROCEDURE and OUTPUT PROCEDURE can
be utilized to enable the programmer to manipulate
the records both before and after the actual sorting
operation. The RELEASE verb can be used within
the INPUT PROCEDURE to specify only selected
records to be sorted. Each SORT statement is self-
preliminary information.
from 1 to 1,023 eightcharacter words.
from 1 to 1,023 eightcharacter words.
up to 25 fields within each
key, with a maximum of
63 characters per field.
limited only by the amount
of available intermediate
storage (disc and tape).
any number that can contain between 1. 1 and 2.2
times the amount of data
in the input file.
two.
November, 1965.
Functionally, the Disk Sort program attempts to
make exclusive use of Disk. File storage. However;
if the amount of available disc storage is exhausted
before the sort or "stringing" phase is complete,
the Disk Sort program will use magnetic tapes as
overflow storage units. All the strings are then
merged, and the sorted output file is written on
any available output device. In order to ensure
that the Sort program will function in a disc-only
mode, disc storage must be made available in an
amount at least 2.2 times the size of the input file.
The Disk Sort program will function with any
B 5500 system capable of performing COBOL compilations.
Sort times for the B 5500 Disk Sort program have
not been made available to date.
. 14
Report Writing: • • ••
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
none •
10/65
BURROUGHS B 5500
203:151. 150
. 15
Data Transcription
Integration: . . . . .
Interpolation and
approximation: ..
Matrix algebra and
determinants: . ..
Linear programming: . . . ..
Statistics: •.....
Data correlation: ..
The only transcription routines announced to date
are integral parts of the Master Control Program.
The card-to-tape routine can be used to keep the
card reader(s) operating at maximum speed by
transcribing input data from cards to magnetic tape,
and then reading it from the tape when the program
is ready to utilize the .data. If the operator indicates
that no tape unit is available for the transcription,
data is transcribed instead from cards to the Storage
Drum or Disk File.
Square root:
Exponential:
Logarithm:
Sine: . . . . . . . . .
Cosine: . . . . . .
Arcsine: . . . . . .
Tangent: . . . . . .
Arctangent: ....
"Partial List of Scientific
Library Procedures for
the Burroughs B 5500. "
immediate.
The document referenced above lists 99mathematical
and scientific routines that will be provided for the
B 5500 by the manufacturer. These routines range
in scope from "Tangent" to "Non-linear Multiple
Regression." The major categories, and the number
of routines falling into each, are as follows:
Trigonometric
functions:
Hyperbolic
functions: . . . . ..
Exponential and
logarithmic
functions: . . . ..
Root functions:
Polynomials,
differential
equations, and
special functions:.
10/65
Time, msec
Double-Precision
Functions
none.
Scientific Library Procedures
Date available:
Description:
3.
7.
4.
Square root:
Exponential:
Logarithm:
Size: . . . • . . . . . .
Cosine: . . . . . . . .
Arcsine: . . . . . . .
Tangent: . . . . . . .
Arctangent:
.17
Reference: . . . . . ..
6.
Single-Precision
Functions
Data transcriptions can also be performed off-line
on the I/O-compatible Burroughs B 100/200/300
computer systems.
File Maintenance: ..
6.
Execution times and storage requirements for
some of the standard functions and matrix algebra
routines are listed below.
The tape-to-printer routine is used when the number
of simultaneously-running programs requiring
printer output exceeds the number of Line Printers
in the system. Data to be printed is written on
magnetic tape. A job number identifies each file,
so the output from several programs can be written
on the same tape reel. When a printer becomes
available, the Master Control Program transcribes
the accumulated output data from tape to printer.
.16
8.
.
.
.
.
.
Addition or subtraction of MxN
matrices: .•....
Multiplication of 50 x
50 matrices:
Inversion For symmetric
matrices:
For non-symmetric
matrices: •.•.••
Transposition: .•..
3.
4.
3.
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
1.13
1.19
1. 28
1.33
2.58
1. 70
1. 71
28
32
29
38
40
64
52
59
Time, mseci
Matrix Algebra
7.
0.96
0.96
0.66
0.83
0.88
2.44
1. 33
1. 20
/
1. 55
10.50 to 12.47
6.22 to 13.06
9. 15 to 14.12
9.62 to 14.59
26.84 to 28.37
14.64 to 18.66
13.16 to 18.75
Time, msec
0.180NM + O. 070N + 0.082
33,440.
(N + 1)3 x 0.181.
0.163NM + O. 080N + 0.093.
Note: Accuracy is at least 11 significant decimal
digits for Single-precision functions and 23
for double-precision functions.
37.
A
AUERBACH
'"
-&
203:161.100
m"",
~EDP
AUERBAC~
REPURTS
-
BURROUGHS B 5500
PROCESS ORIENTED
LANGUAGE
ALGOL
~
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: ALGOL
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: ..•.•••••. Extended ALGOL.
.12
Origin: •••••••.••. Burroughs Corporation.
.13
References: ••••••• Burroughs B 5500 Extended
ALGOL Reference
Manual.
B'iiITOii'ghs B 5500 Stream
Procedure Reference
Manual.
B'iiITOii'ghs B 5500 Extended
ALGOL Input-Output
Reference Manual.
• 14
Description
ALGOL is a computation-oriented programming
language designed primarily for scientific and
engineering applications. Extended ALGOL for
the B 5500 includes virtually all of the facilities of
ALGOL 60 and a number of machine-dependent
extensions to take advantage of the capabilities of
the B 5500. Among the extensions to ALGOL 60
are:
• Input-output constructs to permit effective
utilization of all peripheral devices, including
the Disk File.
•
Standard file label-checking facilities.
•
Input-output buffer control.
•
Data formatting and editing facilities.
•
B 5500 Character Mode operations.
•
Partial-word and double-precision arithmetic
operations.
• Ability to insert specialized corrective routines
for arithmetic error-condition interrupts.
•
Source language debugging facilities.
•
Constructs to assist in multisequencing control.
•
Data communications inquiry statements.
The input...,output facilities are patterned after those
of FORTRAN, in that the standard forms of the
READ and WRITE statements control the input or
output of one logical record. Special forms of these
verbs, however, can be used to control multiple
data records. The READ and WRITE statements
normally must reference a FILE declaration, a
FORMAT declaration, and a LIST declaration. The
FILE declaration specifies the name of the file, the
size and number of buffer areas to be allocated,
the class of output medium desired, and magnetic
tape label and blocking information. The FORMAT
©
declaration concisely describes the editing and
conversions to be performed upon each item of
input or output data. The LIST declaration specifies
the list of variables whose values comprise the
input or output record; alternatively, the list can
be included in the READ or WRITE statement
itself.
When a READ statement is encountered at execution
time, the contents of one input buffer are selected
according to the specified FILE declaration, edited
according to the FORMA T declaration, and stored
according to the LIST. Then the Processor is
freed to execute succeeding program statements
while the buffer area is refilled from the appropriate input device. When more than one buffer
area is declared for a file, they are sequenced
on a first-in first-out basis. The RELEASE
statement fills an input buffer or empties an output
buffer with no editing or internal transfers; it is
used mainly in conjunction with user-coded editing
operations in the Character Mode.
Two additional READ and WRITE constructs have
recently been added to Extended ALGOL: an Edit
and Move READ and an Edit and Move WRITE.
When these versions of READ and WRITE are used,
I/O files and buffer areas do not need to be explicitly designated. With the Edit and Move optil'ns,
data is edited according to format information
within the READ/WRITE statement and is assigned
to program variables designated in a supplied list.
Extended ALGOL permits utilization of the B 5500's
Character Mode operations through implementation
of STREAM PROCEDURE declarations. This
facility is described in detail in Paragraph .43
of this report section.
Extended ALGOL for the B 5500 also provides
language facilities to read and write data records
on Burroughs Disk Files. In the Disk File declaration statement, many parameters can be entered
to furnish the ALGOL Compiler with detailed information concerning the manner in which the
input-output file shall be controlled. The file can
be reserved for exclusive use by the current program. The file can also be designated as a temporary or permanent member of the system. The
record access technique can be specified as
SERIAL, RANDOM, or UPDATE, and the number
and size of input-output buffers can be designated.
The data record specifications include the blocking
considerations and the record size.
The SERIAL access technique is specified when
records are to be read or written in a sequential
order. The RANDOM technique is used when the
primary objective is either to read and write
records in random order, or to update records
in a random order. The UPDATE technique is
used only when the primary programming goal is
to update records in a sequential manner.
1965 AUERBACH Corporotion and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
203:161. 140
.14
BURROUGHS B 5500
Description (Contd.)
TABLE I: EXTENDED ALGOL SOURCE AND
OBJECT PROGRAM
Disk File I/O statements include specialized versions of READ and WRITE that require specification
of the relative address of the file's record that is
to be read or written. The FORMAT and IJST declarations are used exactly as in other input-output
operations - to edit and store the record after
input or just prior to output. The READ SEEK
statement can be used with RANDOM files to find
a relatively-addressed record and to store it in a
buffer area in anticipation of a subsequent READ or
WRITE statement. The relative address of the
current record within the file (i. e., the "record
pointer") is adjusted a specified number of times
by the SPACE statement. The REWIND statement
caus'es the record pointer to be reset to the address
of the first record in the file. After a temporary
file has served its purpose in the program, it will
be automatically deleted from the system unless
the LOCK statement is issued to change the file's
status to permanent.
An example of a brief Extended ALGOL source
program and its generated object code is presented
in Table I.
The restrictions and extensions of B 5500 Extended
ALGOL relative to the ALGOL 60 Reference Language are summarized below. The language specifications for ALGOL 60 were published in the
Communications of the ACM, Volume 3, No.5,
May, 1960.
.141 Restrictions Relative to ALGOL 60
(1) Due to limitations of the B 5500 character
set (64 characters), lower-case letters are
not permitted and different symbols are
substituted for ten ALGOL operations (see
Paragraph .411).
INTEGER I;
INTEGER ARRAY A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H [0:100];
FOR 1-- 1 STEP 1 UNTIL 100 DO
BEGIN
A [I]-B [I]
D[I]--E[I]
H [I].-A [I]
OBJECT PROGRAM (Symbolic listing; not produced
by the Compiler)
LITC 1
LlTC 3
BFW
OPDC I
LITC 1
ADD
LITC I
ISN
LITC 144
LEQ
LITC 40
BFC
OPDC I
DESCA
OPDC I
OPDCB
OPDC I
OPDC C
ADD
XCH
OPDC I
DESCD
OPDC I
OPDC E
OPDC I
OPDCF
ADD
OPDCI
OPDC G
ADD
XCH
ISD
OPDC I
DESC H
OPDC I
OPDCA
OPDC I
OPDCD
MUL
XCH
ISD
LITC 51
BBW
NOTES
(3) Every statement label must be declared in a
LABEL declaration at the head of the innermost
block in which it appears.
(4) A procedure or switch must be declared before
it can be referenced in a program. (The
FORWARD'reference declaration makes it
pos~ible to handle cases in which, for example,
procedure A calls procedure B, which in turn
calls procedure A. )
DESC A = Descriptor Call for descriptor of the
array A.
OPDC I = Operand Call for the operand I.
LITC 40 = Literal Call for the value octal 40
(decimal 32).
Operator syllables are defined in the Instruction
List, 203:121.14.
There are 56 reserved words which can never
be used as names.
(4)
The functions TIME, REAL, and BOOLEAN
are provided in addition to the nine functions
recommended in the ALGOL 60 report (see
Paragraph .411) •
(5)
The aritlunetic operator MOD facilitates operations on moduli; e. g., P MOD 8 is 3 when P
is 19.
• 142 Extensions Relative to ALGOL 60
(1) Complete input-output facilities are provided
(see Description above).
(2) STREAM PROCEDURE declarations pern;lit
explicit use of the B 5500 Character Mode for
operations on "strings" of alphameric characters.
(3) Data items may be of type ALPHA (i. e., a
set of up to 6 alphameric characters), in
addition to the types REAL, INTEGER, and
BOOLEAN.
10/65
+ C [IJ;
+ F[I] + G[I];
x D [I]
END;
ISD
(2) Unsigned integers may be used as statement
labels.
(5)
SOURCE PROGRAM
A.
AUERBACH
(6) Parial Word Designators allow operations on
specified portions of the word designated by
any simple or subscripted variable, function
designator, or aritlunetic expression enclosed
in parentheses; e. g., X. [3:6] specifies use
of 6 bits, beginning with bit 3, of the current
bit representation of X.
(Contd. )
203:161. 142
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: ALGOL
.142 Extension Relative to ALGOL 60 (Contd.)
. 22
Statement: ••.•.... an imperative description
of procedural steps.
a sequence of words; basic
statements are separated
by semicolons.
Declaration: ..•..•. defines the characteristics
of and assigns identifiers
to one or more entities;
e.g., variables, arrays,
files, switches.
Compound statement: . any number of basic statements, delimited by
BEGIN and END.
Block: . . . • . . . ., . . any number of declarations,
followed by any number of
basic statements, compound statements, or
blocks, delimited by
BEGIN and END.
Program: . . . . . . . . . a block or compound statement.
Procedure declaration: PROCEDURE, procedure
name, formal parameter
list, followed by a statement, compound statement, or block.
Procedures may be subroutines or functions and
may be called recursively.
(7) The DEFINE declaration causes an identifier
to be replaced by its definition wherever it
occurs within the block that contains the declaration.
(8) The FILL statement fills one row of an array
with a list of specified values.
(9) The MONITOR and DUMP declarations perform
useful diagnostic functions, as described in
Paragraph 202:181.45.
(10) An additional form of the FOR loop control
statement is provided: FOR V -- AEI STEP
AE2 WHILE BE DO . . • , where AE1 and AE2
are arithmetic expressions and BE is a Boolean
(true-false) expression.
(11) Two additional iterative statements are provided: DOS UNTIL BE, in which the statement S is repeated until the Boolean expression
BE becomes true; and WHILE BE DO S, in
which the iteration ceases When the Boolean
expression BE becomes false.
(12) A Concatenate expression provides the facility
to link together selected bits of named varabIes to form a concatenated, integer result.
The ampersand (&) is used as the Concatenate
operator.
. 23
(13) A generalized ZIP statement causes all information enclosed by ZIP and END to be recognized
by the MCP as Control Card or Program Parameter Card information.
(1~
(15) A WHEN statement provides the means to suspend
the processing of a program or program segment for a specified number of seconds.
(16) Data communications terminals can be called
upon to enter input data by means of a FILL
WITH INQUffiY statement. A special form
of the WRITE statement is available to send
responses to designate terminal units.
(18) Specialized versions of the READ and WRITE
statements, as well as the new READ SEEK,
SPACE, REWIND, and LOCK statements, are
provided to control data files stored on Disk
File storage.
.15
Publication Date: .... November, 1962 (preliminary specifications).
December, 1964 (current
language manuals) .
.2
PROGRAM STRUCTURE
.21
Divisions: .••.•..•• programs are not separated
into divisions.
Data Entities
File: • . . • . . . . . • . . a group of related records;
e. g., a tape, a deck of
cards.
Record: . . • . . . . . . . a group of items transferred by a single input or
output statement.
Block: .••.••••••• the data held in a section of
external storage.
Array: ••.....•... a multidimensional
arrangement of similar,
subscripted items.
Item: ......••..•• an INTEGER variable or
constant.
a REAL (floating point)
variable or constant.
a BOOLEAN variable or
constant.
an ALPHA item.
String: ..•....•.•. a group of alphameric characters delimited by quotes
A WAIT statement suspends processing of one
program or program segment until a specified
condition exists in a designated word location
in core storage.
(17) Specialized versions of the READ and WRITE
statements are available to utiliZe directly
the B 5500's Console Printer-Keyboard.
Procedure Entities
(")
.24
.
Names
.241 Simple name formation Alphabet: . . . • . . . . A to Z, 0 to 9.
Size: . . . . . . . . • . . 1 to 63 characters.
Avoid key words: •.. yes; 56 reserved words.
Formation rule: . . . . must begin with a letter,
and cannot contain spaces
or special characters.
.242 DesignatorsProcedures: . . . . . . none; LABEL and
PROCEDURE declarations
must be used to define the
type of entity associated
with each identifier .
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
203:161. 242
BURROUGHS B 5500
.242 Designators (Contd.)
Data: ••..••..••• none; type, ARRAY, FILE,
and SWITCH declarations
must be used.
Equipment:. • . . • . . no unit designators in
Extended ALGOL; I/O
files are specified by
label names recognized
by the Master Control
Program.
Comments: . . . . . . . delimiters COMMENT and
";" or a sequence of
characters following
END.
Translator control: . none.
· 25
Number of Names
Region of Meaning of Names
. 271 Universal names: . . . . none.
. 272 Local names: . . . . . . all identifiers are local to
the block in which they
are declared.
• 273 Non-local names Designator:. . . . . . • all identifiers not declared
in a block are non-local
to that block. A non-local
identifier has the same
meaning as it has in the
region within which the
current block is nested.
Restrictions: ...•.• none.
Note: The value of a variable is lost after exit from
the block in which it is declared unless it is
declared as OWN.
.3
DA TA DESCRIPTION
.31
Methods of Direct Data Description
.311 Concise item picture: . yes; FORMA T declarations;
e. g., FORMAT IN F3
(A6, X2, 416, 2E9.2,
F6.1).
10/65
Files and Reels: .••. standard B 5500 Label
Record is used at beginning
and end of all files and
reels. File-control portion is 80 characters long
and has fixed format.
.33
Records and Blocks
.331 Variable record size: • dynamic .
• 332 Variable block size: .. fixed for cards and printer;
preset variable for tape.
.333 Record size range: ... 1 to N blocks.
.334 Block size range Punched cards: .•.. 80 columns.
PrlDter: .•••••••• 120 or 132 characters.
Magnetic tape: .••.• 1 to 1,023 words (1 to
4, 096 in Read Only mode).
.33p Choice of record size: input-output LIST declarations.
.336 Choice. of block size: . FILE declarations or within
tape labels.
.337 Se"quence control: ..•• 1 or more logical records
per READ or WRITE
statement .
. 338 In-out error control: • automatic, by MCP.
.339 Blocking control: ..•. FILE declaration or tape
label .
".261 All entities: ••...•. practically unlimited.
• 264 Equipment: . . . . . . . . limited by system configuration; equipment is assigned by Master Control
Program at run time.
• 27
.32
Structure of Data Names
· 251 Qualified names: . . . . none.
· 252 SubscriptsNumber per item: •• unlimited.
Class may beAny numeric
variable: • . • • • yes.
Literal: • . . . . . . yes.
Expression: •..• yes.
Form maybeSigned:. . . . • • . • yes.
Truncated fraction: ..•.•••• no.
Rounded fraction:. yes.
· 255 SynonymsPreset: •• ~ •...•. by DEFINE.
Dynamically set: •.. no.
• 26
.312" List by kind: .•...•. yes; type declarations;
e.g., INTEGER I, J, K.
.313 Qualify by adjective: .. no.
.314 Qualify by phrase: ••• no.
.315 Qualify by code: •...• no .
. 316 Hierarchy by list: ... no.
.317 Level by indenting: ... no.
.318 Level by coding: ..•• no.
.34
Data Items
.341 Designation of class: • type declarations.
.342 Possible classes Integer: ..•.•.... yes; INTEGER.
Fixed point: •••••• no.
Floating point: •••.• yes; REAL.
DOUble precision
floating: •••..... yes; DOUBLE statement .
LOgical: . . . . . . . . . yes; BOOLEAN •
Alphameric: .•.••• yes; ALPHA.
Complex: . . • • • . . . no .
· 343 Choice of external
radix: • • • . • • . . . . yes.
· 344 Possible external radices Decimal: ..••.•.•. yes.
Binary: .•.••••.• yes (not for card or printer
output).
• 345 Internal justification: . automatic right justification
for integer, logical, and
alpha items.
.346 Choice of external
code: • • • • . • . • • • . FORMA T declarations.
.347 Possible exte.rnal codes Punched cards: •... Hollerith as in Data Code
Table or (input only)
column binary.
Magnetic tape: . . . . . alphameric as in Data Code
Table (203:141.100) or
binary.
.348 Internal item size Variable size: ..••. fixed, except strings are
preset variable.
(Contd.)
fA..
AUERBACH
"
/
203: 161. 348
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: ALGOL
. 348 Internal item size (Contd.)
Arithmetic (Contd.)
Designation: •....• none, except strings are
delimited by quotes (").
Range Integer: •.....• 1 word; 39 bits + sign.
Floating point numeric Single precision
(REAL): •.... 1 word; 39 bits + sign for
integer part; 6 bits + sign
for exponent.
Double precision
(DOUBLE): ... 2 words; 78 bits + sign for
integer part; 6 bits + sign
for exponent.
Logical (BOOLEAN): 1 word.
Alphameric
(ALPHA): .•.... 1 word; 6 characters max.
String (in Stream
Procedures): .... 1 to 63 characters.
Note: Partial Word Designators permit operations
on specified portions of the 48-bit word assigned to each variable; e. g., X. [3:6] specifies 6 bits, beginning with bit 3, of X. Also,
the Concatenate operator (&) permits linking
of specified portions of 48-bit words.
. 349 Sign provision: . . . . . optional.
• 35
Data Values
Special Description Facilities
.361 Duplicate format: .... by multiple references to a
single FORMA T declaration.
. 362 Re-definition: . . . . . . none .
.363 Table description Subscription: ....•. mandatory.
Multi-subscripts: ••• unlimited number.
Level of item: .••.. variables.
.364 Other subscriptible
entities: . . . . . . . . . none.
!
\
.4
OPERATION REPERTOmE
.41
Formulae
.411 Operator list -
i\
""
Functions
ABS (E) ••••••••• absolute value of E.
SIGN (E). • . • . • . • • produces + 1 if E > 0, 0 if
E = 0, or -1 if E < O.
SQRT (E) ••••••.• square root of E.
SIN (E) •••••••••• sine of E.
COS (E) .•••.•••• cosine' of E.
ARCTAN (E) •••••• arctangent of E.
LN (E). • • • • • • . • • natural log of E.
EXP (E) • • . • • • • • • exponential of E.
ENTlER (E) ." ••••• converts type REAL to type
INTEGER with truncation.
REAL (E) •••••.•. permits arithmetic on type
BOOLEAN quantities.
BOOLEAN (E) ••••• permits Boolean operations
on arithmetic quantities •
TIME (E) ••.••••• provides access to an internal clock .
Relational
. 351 Constants:
Possible sizes 39
Integer: . . . . • • . 0 to 2 .
Fixed point: .•.• none. -56
68
Floating point: ... 7. 8 x 10
to 4.3 x 10
Alphameric: .••."1 to 6 characters.
Subscriptable: .•.•• yes.
Sign provision: ••.. optional.
• 352 Literals: . . . . . . . . . same as constants, except
alphameric literals of up
to 63 characters can be
used in output FORMA T
declarations and in
Stream Procedures.
. 353 Figuratives: . . . . . . . none .
.354 Conditional variables:. Boolean conditions (truefalse) only.
.36
I . ............. divide.
DIV • • • • • • • • • • •• integer divide; result is
truncated.
*. "............. exponentiate.
MOD ••••••••••• modulus.
_
.••..•••••• assignment; value of right
hand side is assigned to
left hand side.
& • • • • • • • • • • • • • concatenate.
Arithmetic
+ •••••••••••••• add (can be unary).
•••••••••.•••• subtract (can be unary).
x •••••••••••••• "multiply.
< ••••••••••••• is less than •
~
••••••••.•••• is
. . • • • • • . • • • • • is
~ .••••••••••.• is
> ••••••••••••• is
I- ••••••••••••• is
less than or equal to.
equal to.
greater than or equal to.
greater than.
not equal to.
Logical
NOT •••.•..•••• negation •
AND . • • • • • • • • • • logical product.
OR •••••••.•••• logical sum.
IMP. . • • • • • • • • • . implication.
EQV ••••••••••• logical equivalence.
Note: All logical operations are performed on the
entire 48-bit word.
.412 Operands aliowed Classes: ••••••••• integer or real for arithmetic
operators (except DIV
and MOD); integer or real
for standard functions
(results are always real);
Boolean for logical
operators.
Mixed scaling: ••••. yes.
Mixed classes: •••• yes; types integer and real
can be mixed in arithmetic expressions, subject to certain restrictions.
Mixed radices: •••• no.
Literals: •••••••• yes •
. 413 Statement structure:
Parentheses a - b - c means: .. (a - b) - c.
a + b x c means: .. a + (b x c) .
albic means: .... (alb)/c .
abC means: .....• (ab)c.
Size limit: . . . . • . . 4,092 generated B 5500
syllables.
Multi-results: ..••. yes; e. g., A_ B-- C X+Y.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
BURROUGHS B 5500
203:161. 414
.414 Rounding of results: .. automatic when variable on
left side of__ operator is
type INTEGER.
• 415 Special cases x = -x: . . . . . . . . • . X---X.
x=x+l: ..•..•.. X ... X+l,
x=4.7y: . . . . . . . . X .... 4.7 xY.
x = ,5 x 10 7 + y2: ... X -- 5 @ 7 + Y * 2.
x = y integer part: .• X ... ENTlER (Y) •
. 416 Typical examples: .•. X_(-B + SQRT (B x B -4
x A x C» I (2 x A).
.42
Operations on Arrays: by own ALGOL coding.
.43
Other Computation
'STREAM PROCEDURE declarations permit use of
the B 5500 Character Mode for operations on
"strings" of alphameric characters. Stream Procedures can be used to facilitate editing, packing and
unpacking, and scanning operations. Their overall
structure is similar to that of standard ALGOL
procedures; but since all ALGOL statements
cause the B 5500 to operate in the Word Mode,
they cannot be used within a Stream Procedure.
Stream statements, in turn, cause operation in
the Character Mode and can be used only within
,Stream Procedure declarations.
The basic function of a Stream Procedure is to
operate upon a string of characters from a "source
area" and to transfer the edited string to a "destination area. " The source index (SI) contains the address of the word, character, and bit currently being processed. The destination index (DI) contains
the address of the location where the processed
data will be stored.
Stream Statement Types
• Stream address statement: Sets, increments, or
stores source or destination index value; e.g.,
SI .... LOC D sets source index to stack location
of stream variable D.
• Destination string statement: Transfers information to destination string from source string
or a literal. From 1 to 63 words, characters,
or the zone or numeric bit portions of characters can be transferred; octal-to-decimal or
decimal-tc-octal conversions can be performed
on numeric data in I-word units; or the source
characters can be added to or subtracted from
the corresponding destination characters.
Examples:
DS ..... 15 CHR transfers next 15 characters
from source string to destination string.
DS -- 6 OCT converts next 6 decimal digits
in source string to an octal word in
destination string.
DS ... 7 LIT "HEADING" places the 7-character
literal "HEADING" in destination string ..
'. Stream GO TO statement: transfers control to a
labelled statement within the stream block; e. g. ,
GO TO START.
• Skip bit statement: skips the specified number
of bits in the source or destination string; e. g. ,
SKIP 5 SB.
10/65
•
Stream tally statement: Sets, increments, or
stores contents of the counter register TALLY,
whose value is modulo 64; e.g., TALLY TALLY + ALPHA •
•
Stream release statement: Causes one buffer of
an input file to be filled with new data or the contents of one buffer of an output file to be sent to
an output device; e.g., RELEASE (FILEA).
•
Conditional stream statement: Compares source
string with destination string or a literal; tests
value of a source bit; tests true-false toggle setting, or tests whether a source character is a
letter or digit. If tested condition is false, the
stream statement follOWing THEN is ignored;
e. g., IF SC = "-" THEN GO TO NEG transfers
control to NEG if the source character is a
minus sign.
• Stream nest statement: Controls the execution of
a loop formed from stream statements; e. g. ,
10 (IF SC = "E" THEN JUMP OUT; SI -- SI + 1;
TALLY- TALLY + 1) increments both source
index and TALLY by 1 ten consecutive times unless a source character "E" is found, in which
case control is transferred to next statement after
the right parenthesis.
• 44
Data Movement and Format
.441
.442
.443
.444
Data copy example: ..
Levels possible: ...•
Multiple results: •..•
Missing operands: ..•
Y-X.
items only.
yes; e.g., X- Y--Z.
not possible.
.445 Size of operands Exact match: .••.•• implied, except in inputoutput editing and Stream
Procedures.
Alignment rule Numbers: .•.•.•. right justified or normalized.
Alpha: .•..•••.• right justified.
Filler rule Numbers: ..•••.. zeros.
Alpha: •...•..•. zeros.
Truncating rule Numbers: ...••.. truncate at left.
Alpha: • . • • . . • • . truncate at left.
Variable size
'
destination: .••.. no.
.446 Editing possible Change class: ...•. yes.
Change radix: . • • . . yes.
Insert editing symbols Actual point: ••••• automatic.
Suppress zeros: •.• automatic.
Insert: •••.•••.• sign, point.
Float: •.•..•• . . - sign only.
.447 Special moves: .•••• in Stream Procedures:
transfer 1 to 63 characters or words from source
string to destination string;
see Paragraph. 43.
'
.448 Code translation: .... performed automatically as
necessary.
.449 Character
manipulation: ••••. in Stream Procedures; see
Paragraph .43.
(Contd. )
A
AUERBACH
~
/
203:161. 450
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: ALGOL
. 45
File Manipulation
Open: •...••.•••.. automatic, by first reference
to a file.
Close: . • . • • . . • . . . automatic when exit is made
from block in which the
FILE declaration or
CLOSE statement appears.
For magnetic tape files
the follOWing options are
available: rewind for
further program use; rewind and lock; rewind and
release to system; or do
not rewind.
Advance to next record: READ, WRITE, SPACE, or
RELEASE.
Step back a record: .• SPACE or READ REVERSE.
Set restart point: •.•• none.
Restart: ..•••••••. none.
Start new reel: .•... automatic, by MCP.
Start new block: ••.•. automatic.
Search on key: . . • . . . none.
Rewind: . . . • . . • . • . see "Close," above.
Unload: .•••.••... none.
.523
.524
• 525
Note: READ REVERSE specifies that a magnetic
tape file shall be read backward.
• 46
Operating Communication
.461 Log of progress: •••• typed messages, controlled
by MCP.
.462 Messages to operator:_ typed messages.
.463 Offer options: . • . . . . typed messages .
• 464 Accept option: ..•••• keyboard entries.
.47
Object Program Errors
Error
Discovery
hardware
interrupt
In-out:
hardware
interrupt
Invalid data: hardware
check
• 51
• 511
• 512
.513
.514
• 515
.52
.521
• 522
• 528
permit programmerspecified action; if
none, type message and • 53 Subroutines
terminate program.
.• 531 Designationtype message.
Single statement: ••• same as set.
Set of statements PROCEDURE SEQUENCE CONTROL
First: ••••••••• PROCEDURE P (where P is
name of subroutine).
Jumps
Last: •••••••••• END •
.532 Possible subroutines: • block, compound statement,
Destinations allowed: • any named statement within
or basic statement.
current block, or begin• 533 Use in-line in program: no.
ning of any named block.
• 534 MechanismUnconditional jump: .• GO TO N.
Cue with parameters: P (X, Y + Z, 25) •
Switch: •..••...•.• SWITCH S ..... N, P, Q; GO
Number of
TO S [I].
parameters: ••••• 128.
Setting a switch: •••• I -- 2.
Cue without
Switch on data: .•••. as above.
parameter: •••••• P •
Formal return: •••• implied after last procedure before END
Conditional Procedures
delimiter.
DesignatorsAlternative return:. • GO TO implied formal
Condition:. • • • • • • • IF.
return or to explicit
Procedure: ••••••• THEN.
statement outside of
Simple conditions subroutine.
Expression vs.
.535 Namesexpression: •••••• yes.
Parameter call by
Expression vs •
value: ••••••••• yes, if listed in VALUE
variable: ••••••• yes.
declaration.
Overflow:
.5
Special Actions
.526
• 527
Expression vs •
literal: ••••••••• yes.
Expression vs.
figurative: •••••• no.
Expression vs.
condition: ••••••• no.
Variable vs.
variable: ••••••• yes.
Variable vs. literal:. yes.
Variable vs. figurative: •••••••••• no.
Variable vs. condition: •••••••.•• no.
Conditional value: •• no.
Conditional relations Equal: •••••••.•• =
Greater than: • • • • • >
Less than: • • • • • • • <
Greater than or
equal: ••••••••• >
Less than or equal: • <:
Variable conditions: •• true/false implied.
Compound conditions IF x AND y: •••••• IF X AND Y THEN •••
IF x OR y: ••••••• IF X OR Y THEN •••
IF x DO a AND y DO
b: •••••••••••• IF X THEN A - A + 1;
IF Y THEN B - B + 1.
IF x DO a OR y DO
b: .••••••••••• IF X THEN A-A + 1 ELSE
IF Y THEN B ..... B + 1 •
Alternative designator: ELSE (optional).
Condition on alternative:. • • • • • • • • • unrestricted •
Typical examples: ••• IF A > B THEN A ..... A + 1
ELSE IF C = D THEN
GO TO N ELSE GO TO
ERROR.
IF X AND Y THEN FOR
1-1 STEP 1 UNTIL 20
DOA [1] -- B [I] + C.
}
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
BURROUGHS B 5500
203: 161. 535
.535 Names (Contd.).
Parameter call by
name: ..•..•.•. yes, if not listed in VALUE
declaration.
Non-local names: ••. yes, implied by no local
definition.
Local names: ••..• yes.
Preserved local
variables: . • . . . . . only those declared OWN.
• 536 Nesting limit: . . . . . . limited only by stack size,
which is variable.
• 537 Automatic recursion
allowed: . . . • . . . . . yes.
· 54
Function Definition by Procedure
· 541 DesignationSingle statement: .•. same as set.
Set of statements First: •••.•..•. Type PROCEDURE F
(where F is function name
and Type is REAL,
INTEGER,BOOLEAN,
or ALPHA).
Last: •.•••••••• END.
• 542 Level of procedure: •. block, compound statement,
or basic statement.
.543 MechanismCue: ••..••.•••• function name in expression,
followed by parameter
list; e. g., X-Y + F
(A, B + C).
Formal return: • • • . implied after last procedure before END
delimiter •
. 544 NamesParameter call by
value: • . • • . . . • • yes.
Parameter call by
name: .•.•••.•. yes.
Non-local names: ... yes.
Local names: ...•. yes.
Preserved local
variables: . . • . . . . only those declared OWN.
EXTENSION OF THE
LANGUAGE: •••••• none, except by user-coded
A LGOL or Stream
Procedures.
.7
LmRARY FACILITIES
.71
Identity: ••••••.••. B 5500 Program Library.
• 72
Kinds of Libraries
.73
Storage Form: •••••. magnetic tape (punched
cards in non-tape systems).
.74
Varieties of Contents:. compiled programs in machine code.
procedures (subroutines) in
source language .
.75
Mechanism
Operand Definition by Procedure
.551 Designation: .••.••. same as . 541.
.552 Level of procedure: •. same as . 542 •
. 553 Mechanism: ••....• same as .543, but no parameters are used.
• 554 NamesNon-local names: ••. yes.
Local names: •••.• yes.
Preserved local
variables: .•..•.• only those declared OWN.
• 56
·6
.721 Fixed master: •••••• no.
• 722 Expandable master: • . yes.
.723 Private: .••••••••• yes.
Note: Variable having same name as function must
appear on left side of an assignment statement within the function procedure body.
. 55
.562 Control by count: •••• no.
• 563 Control by step Example: •••••••• FOR V-- 2 STEP 1
UNTIL NDO ••..
Parameter: .•••••• arithmetic expression.
Step: •.•••..•••. arithmetic expression.
Criteria: .• • • . • . • until greater than end value
when step is positive,
less when negative.
Multiple parameters: yes •
· 564 Control by condition Example: •••.•.•. FOR V- 3 x V WIDLE
A> B DO .•.
Combined with step:. optional; e.g., FOR V+- 1
STEP 1 WHILE A > 0
DO •••
• 565 Control by list: ••... FOR V-1, 5, 6 STEP 2
UNTIL 20, 25 DO ••.
.566 Nesting limit: •••..• none.
.567 Jump out allowed: ••• yes.
· 568 Control variable
exit status: ••••••• available while in loop and
after jump out via GO TO;
not available after FOR
list has been satisfied.
Loop Control
.751 Insertion of new item:. by MCP, using control
cards .
.752 Language of new item: ALGOL, COBOL, or machine code.
.753 Method of call: ••••• procedures called by use of
their names in source
program.
.76
• 561 Designation of loop: •• simple statement immediately following the FOR
clause, or compound
statement delimited by
BEGIN and END.
.761 Open routines exist: •. yes.
.762 Closed routines exist:. yes.
.763 Open-closed is
variable: •••••••• no.
A
10/65
AUERBACH
'.:::.
Type of Routine
'"
203:161. 800
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: ALGOL
.85
Program Documentation
Control: ••....... compile with or without
source program listing.
.9
TARGET COMPUTER ALLOCATION CONTROL
• 91
Choice of Storage
Level: . . . . . . . . . . none.
.92
Address Allocation: .. none.
.93
· 821 Process usage
statements: .••.... none.
· 822 Data usage statements: none.
Arrangement of Items
in Words in Unpacked Form: ..•.. standard for numeric.
.94
Assignment of InputOutput Devices: .... none; performed by MCP.
• 83
Translator
Environment: " ... none.
.95
• 84
Target Computer
Environment: ....• none.
Input-Output Areas: •• size (in words) and number
of buffer areas for each
file are specified in FILE
declaration or in the
input tape label.
.8
TRANS LA TOR CONTROL
· 81
Transfer to Another
Language: •.•.•.•. Stream Procedures, described in Paragraph .43,
permit use of the B 5500
Character Mode for operations on "strings" of
alphameric characters.
• 82
Optimizing Information Statements
I
\,
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
203:162.100
A
BURROUGHS B 5500
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
COBOL
AUERBACH
ro
SUNDARIa
EDP
REPORTS
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: COBOL
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . . . . . . . . . COBOL-61 Extended.
.12
Origin: . . . . . . . . . . . Burroughs Corporation.
.'13
Reference: . . . . . . . . COBOL Reference Manual
for the Burroughs B 5500.
. 14
Description
COBOL-61 Extended for the Burroughs B 5500 is a
comprehensive version of the Department of
Defense's COBOL-61 Extended language. All of
Required COBOL-61 has been implemented, as
well as most of the elective features of COBOL-61.
Two of the three principal extensions of COBOL-61
Extended - the SORT verb and the Mass Storage
features - have been implemented in varying
degrees of completeness, and Burroughs has also
included several other useful extensions to permit
the direct use of data communications terminal
units. The Report Writer facility of COBOL-61
Extended has not been implemented. The extensions of B 5500 COBOL-61 with respect to Required
COBOL-61 are listed in Paragraph .142, and the
COBOL-61 elective features implemented are listed
in Paragraph .143.
The Mass Storage language exte·nsions of B 5500
COBOL are designed to permit efficient use of the
Burroughs Disk File system while programming
in the COBOL language. The constructs provided
in B 5500 COBOL represent a subset of the Mass
Storage language accepted by the CODASYL Maintenance Committee. The principal area of Mass
Storage language facilities not implemented in
B 5500 COBOL is that of asynchronous or "out-ofline" processing. However, provisions are included
in the language to permit overlapping of record
accessing and normal processing.
Data record accessing can be specified as RANDOM or SEQUENTIAL in the special Mass Storage
(MD) File Section.of the Data Division. The sequential access mode can utilize multiple buffer
areas as specified in the ASSIGN nn ALTERNATE
AREAS clause of the Environment Division's
SELECT statement. Within the Mass Storage File
Description section, it is possible to specify the
size of the data blocks and records, the type of file
label records, the file's SAVE-FACTOR, the
symbolic or actual record address key, the size of
the file, and the limits of the portion of the file that
can be accessed during the execution of this program.
Based on this information, the COBOL compiler
and the Disk File Master Control Program make
provisions to read and record data records in one
of two modes, called Technique-A and TechniqueP. Technique-A calls for a fixed number of fixedlength records within a data block. If a block does
10/65
.
A
AUERBACH
ro
not utilize all of the character positions of the 240character Disk File segment, the unused character
positions are wasted. Technique-A can support
either the Random or Sequential access methods.
TechniqUe-P - not implemented to date - packs
records consecutively onto the Disk File, without
regard to whether the beginning or end of a record
coincides with the beginning or end of a Disk File
segment. Variable-length records can be used
with this data-organization technique, but can be
accessed only in the sequential mQde. Fixed-length
records can also be used with Technique-P, and
can be accessed in either the sequential or random
mode.
The Mass Storage procedural statements provide
special versions of READ, WRITE, OPEN, and
CLOSE to provide input-output routines specifically designed for the Burroughs Disk File. The
WITH LOCK option of the OPEN and CLOSE statements permits the program to have exclusive use
of named files unless overruled by operator
intervention. The CLOSE statement can also
specify that specific files be PURGED from the
system after their current use is terminated. The
INVALID KEY clause of the READ and WRITE
statements permits control to be transferred if an
actual key address is recognized as being beyond
the preset limits of the program. The verb SEEK
enables a record search to begin without delaying
the direct-line processing. Two special versions
of the MOVE statement and the USE FOR KEY
CONVERSION statement provide flexible facilities
to control programmer-supplied key conversion
algorithms.
In May, 1965, Burroughs announced its implementation of several new COBOL constructs to permit
the B 5500's data communications terminal units
to be controlled directly by COBOL programmers.
The ACCEPT DATA statement makes input messages entered thru a data communications network
available to the program. If no message is in the
specified terminal unit's input buffer, the Master
Control Program suspends processing until a
message is available. The WRITE •.. ON •.•
construct provides the facility to output computer
responses to specified terminal units. Normal
COBOL constructs, such as OPEN OUTPUT and
CLOSE, are also used with data communications
devices.
Several additional language facilities have been
added that will increase programming flexibility
in data communications environments. The MOVE
END statement moves the end-of-message character (~) to its desired location when formu1ating computer responses. The WHEN and UNTIL
statements suspend processing of the current
program segment, either for a specified number of
seconds (WHEN), or until a specified condition
is satisfied (UNTIL). The ASSIGN TO MEMORY
(Contd.)
203:162.140
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: COBOL
. 14
Description (Contd.)
(4)
.••••.••.. equal to.
declaration with the Data Division reserves, for the
named data array, a permanent residence in the
system's storage in preparation for later transmission to another computer or to a remote data
communications device. All data communications
output files are also identified in the Environment
Division by means of a new ASSIGN TO DATA
construct.
COBOL for the B 5500 also includes a complete
implementation of the SORT extension to COBOL-6!.
Both the Basic and Extended SORT facilities are
provided, enabling any number of SORT statements
to appear within the Procedure Division of a program. The amount of core storage and the number
of magnetic tape or disc units to be used for the
sorting operation can be specified in the Environment Division. The file to be sorted is specified in
a separate File Description (SD) section within the
Data Division, where the approximate file size and
record characteristics are entered. The SORT
verb itself contains several options that permit
specifying either ascending or descending sorting
sequence, and whether a simple sort or a programmer-monitored sort should take place. The INPUT
PROCEDURE option enables the programmer to edit
records before sorting and to present only selected
records to the sort operation by means of the
RELEASE clause. Similarly, the OUTPUT
PROCEDURE option of the SORT verb allows the
programmer to access each sorted record through
use of the RETURN clause.
> •••••••••• greater than.
< •••.....•• less than.
. 143 Extensions of B 5500 COBOL-61 With Respect
to Required COBOL-61
(1)
(2)
(3)
The verbs SORT, MERGE, RELEASE, and
RETURN.
Various Mass Storage statements, including
the SEEK verb, control sequential or random
processing on Disk Files.
Various data communications device constructs, such as ACCEPT DATA, WRITE ON,
and MOVE END.
©
. . • . . . • . . . equal to or greater than.
. • . . . . • . . • equal to or less than.
i' .......... unequal to.
The source language debugging aids
MONITOR and DUMP.
(6)
The CORRESPONDING option of the ADD and
SUBTRACT verbs.
(7)
The intrinsic functions: ABS, ARCTAN, COS,
EXP, LN, SIGN, SIN, and SQRT.
(8)
The ability to refer to a data item either by
its name or by an arbitrary synonym.
(9)
The use of arithmetic expressions as subscripts.
(10)
The use of a virtually unlimited number of
subscripts.
(11)
The ability to use abbreviations for certain
terms in the Data Division, such as CMP for
Computational, PT for Point Location, and
PC for PICTURE.
(12)
The ZIP function for communicating with
other COBOL or ALGOL programs .
(13)
The RERUN statement for program restarts.
(14)
Formulae are permitted in the GO TO .••
DEPENDING ON statement, and in the FROM
and BY clauses of the VARYING option of the
PERFORM verb.
(15)
I/O Channel specification is permitted in the
WRITE statement .
(16)
Unlimited AFTER clauses within the
PERFORM statement.
(17)
The WHEN and UNTIL statements to suspend
processing.
(18)
The sequence of procedures associated with a
PERFORM statement may overlap or intersect the sequence associated with another
PERFORM statement, even if either sequence
includes the PERFORM statement associated
with the other sequence.
.142 Deficiencies of B 5500 COBOL-61 With Respect
to Required COBOL-61
No deficiencies are known to exist.
~
~
(5)
• 141 Availability
Language: . • . . . . . . . March 1963 and May 1965.
Compiler: • . . . . . . . . April 1963.
The following relational symbols:
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
203: 162. 144
BURROUGHS B 5500
.144 COBOL-61 Electives Implemented in B 5500 COBOL (see 4: 161. 3)
Key No.
1
2
3
6
7
Elective
Comments
Characters and Words
Formula characters
Relationship characters
Semicolon
Figurative constants
PREPARED FOR Computer-Name
12
File Description Clauses
Block-size
FILE CONTAINS
SEQUENCED-ON
HASHED
13
16
17
18
19
Record Description Clauses/Options
Table-length
RANGE IS
RENAMES
SIGN IS
Item-length
8
9
11
20
Verbs
COMPUTE
INCLUDE
USE
27
28
29
30
32
Verb Options
LOCK
MOVE CORRESPONDING
OPEN REVERSED
ADVANCING paper
Formulas
33
34
35
36
37
38
Operand-size
Relationships
Tests
Conditionals
Compound conditions
Complex conditionals
39
ON SIZE ERROR
46
/, **. =, ().
always ignored.
HIGH-VALUE(S); LOW-VALUE(S).
labels data descriptions applicable to
several computers.
allows a range to be specified.
indicates approximate file size.·
gives a list of keys to be sequence-checked.
hash total checking can be specified.
allows variable-length tables and arrays.
gives value range of item or character.
permits overlapping of variable items.
allows sign of data item to be named.
allows variable-length items to be specified
in SIZE clause (see also 16).
allows a conditional-value to be a range.
Conditional-range
22
25
26
41
+, -, *,
=, <, >.
algebraic formulae.
calls library routines.
amplifies I/O error and labeling routines.
locks rewound tapes and files on disc storage.
moves and edits matching records.
allows reading tapes backwards.
gives specific paper advance.
algebraic formulae, as used in COMPUTE
verb.
up to 18 digits.
IS UNEQUAL TO. EQUALS, and EXCEEDS.
IF
~ IS NOT ZERO.
imp ied objects with implied subjects.
ANDs or ORs.
additional conditions following OTHERWISE
and ELSE.
provides extension of error routines.
1
Environment Division
OBJECT-COMPUTER
allows selective use of previous descriptions;
MEMORY SIZE clause is used only by the
SORT generator; size is determined automatically by MCP.
allows programmer control; SAME AREA
clause not implemented.
I/O Control
47
Identification Division
DATE
gives compilation date.
48
Special Features
LIBRARY
allows calls of library routines.
./
/
(Contd.)
10/65
A
AUERBACH
~
203: 162. 145
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: COBOL
.145 COBOL-61 Electives Not Implemented (see 4: 161. 3)
Key No.
Elective
Comments
Characters and Words
Long literals
Figurative constants
more than 120 characters.
UPPER-BOUND(S); LOWER-BOUND(S).
10
File DescriEtion Clauses
Label formats
allows new or library formats.
14
Record DescriEtion Clauses/Options
Item-length
4
5
15
21
Bit usage
Label-handling
23
24
Verbs
DEFINE
ENTER
31
Verb Options
STOP
40
42
Environment Division
SOURCE-COMPUTER
SPECIAL NAMES
constructs new verbs and statements.
changes to another language.
43
44
File Description
PRIORITY is
45
I/O Control
49
allows length specification in PICTURE
clause (see also 19).
allows items to be specified in binary.
provides free handling of labels.
Special Features
SEGMENTATION
non-alphabetic display provision; B 5500
always has an alphabetic display device
on-line.
allows selective use of previous description.
specifies switches for ACCEPT, WRITE,
and DISPLAY verbs; B 5500 has no sense
switches.
can be taken from library.
allows priorities to be given for multiprogramming; B 5500 priorities are
provided by control cards and altered as
required by the MCP.
can be taken from library.
allows assignment of segment priorities by
programmer; B 5500 segmentation is
handled by MCP.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
-.&..
203: 163. 100
STmAID
~~EDP
BURROUGHS B 5500
PROCESS ORIENTED
LANGUAGE
FORTRAN IV
AUERBAC~
'"
-
REPORTS
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN IV
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: •••••••••• B 5500 FORTRAN IV.
.12
Origin: •••••••••.• Burroughs Corporation.
• 13
Reference: ••.••••• Preliminary Edition of
FORTRAN IV for Burroughs B 5500.
.14
Description:
Burroughs has not implemented any FORTRAN
language facilities to permit direct use of its Disk
File storage units, although the Disk File Master
Control Program (MCP) can make the Disk File
facilities available in an indirect manner. Similarly, there has been no implementation of FORTRAN language constructs to make use of the
several varieties of B 5500 data communications
devices.
.141 Availability
FORTRAN IV for the Burroughs B 5500 Information
Processing System is a virtually complete implementation of the FORTRAN programming language
as proposed by the X.3.4.3 FORTRAN Group of
the American Standards Association, and as published in Communications of the ACM, October,
1964. (This proposed standard version of the
FORTRAN language corresponds to what is commonly known as FORTRAN IV.) In comparison to
this standard, B 5500 FORTRAN lacks the provisions to handle double-precision and complex
variable items. All other FORTRAN IV language
facilities have been included.
FORTRAN IV for the B 5500 is designed to duplicate, wherever poss:ible, the facilities of the IBM
7090/7094 FORTRAN IV language to facilitate conversions of scientific and engineering installations
to the B 5500. Burroughs has developed a translator program called FORGOL 4 (see Section
203:183.100) that converts FORTRAN IV programs
into Extended ALGOL; Burroughs' time-proved
A LGOL compiler then completes the translation/
compilation operation.
Language specifications: . • • . . . . . . . • December, 1964.
Translator (FORGOL
4): •••••••••••.• October, 1964.
.142 Restrictions of B 5500 FORTRAN IV Relative to
IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV
(1)
(2) All intrinsic functions concerned with doubleprecision or complex variables have been
excluded.
.143 Extension of B 5500 FORTRAN IV Relative to
IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV
39-1
(1) Integer constants fan range to 2
as
compared to 235- in 7090/7094 FORTRAN
IV; real (floating-point) constants can range
from 1O-l!6 to 10+69 as compared to the 10- 38
to 10+38 range of 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV.
(2)
A general description of the IBM 7090/7094
FORTRAN IV language is presented in Section
408:162. The restrictions and extensions of B 5500
FORTRAN IV relative to the IBM version are
listed in Paragraphs .142 and • 143, respectively,
of this report section.
The B 5500's relational symbols can be used
as desired in place of the standard FORTRAN
relational operators, as follows:
> for .GT.
> for .GE.
203:181.100
~..
SUNDARD
BURROUGHS B 5500
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR
EXTENDED ALGOL
EDP
REPDRTS
AUERBACH
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: EXTENDED ALGOL
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: ..•.•....
. 12
•
Extended ALGOL
Compiler.
Description
The Extended ALGOL Compiler is a s·ingle-pass
routine that translates source programs written
in the Extended ALGOL language (see Section
203: 161) into B 5500 object programs in segmented, relocatable machine-language form. The
Compiler occupies about 10,000 locations on Storage Drum 1 or 10 tracks of the Disk File, and is
called into core storage by the Master Control
Program when a header card indicates that an
ALGOL source program is to be compiled and
added to the program library, or checked for syntactic errors without compilation.
The ALGOL compiler delivers translation speeds
ranging between 600 and 800 source program
cards (or up to 2500 magnetic tape card images)
per minute. Object program efficiencies of 90 to
95 percent relative to the best hand coding have
been achieved, according to Burroughs.
The combination of fast translation and high object program efficiency was the primary goal in
the design of the B 5500 hardware and the Master
Control Program. Among the factors that contribute to the efficiency of the B 5500 ALGOL compiler are the following:
•
(
\
'. '-
•
Recursive use of procedures is implemented
at the hardware level. (The ALGOL Compiler .itself consists of about 90 procedures,
each of which can use any other procedure,
including itself.)
•
Fixed-point and floating-point numbers are
represented in the same form, so conversions and checks for mixed arithmetic are
unnecessary.
•
Any Input/Output Channel can reference any
peripheral device.
•
The B 5500 Character Mode facilitates editing,
scanning, and radix conversions, while the
Word Mode permits efficient arithmetic and
logical operations.
•
Automatic temporary storage for intermediate
results and subroutine parameters is provided by the stack.
•
Overlays of program segments and data arrays are handled automatically by the Processor and the MCP.
©
Storage protection for data arrays and program segments is provided by the hardware.
The same registers are used for indexing
and arithmetic operations .
•
Floating-point numbers can be automatically
converted to integers during indexing and
storing operations.
•
Literals between and 0 and +1,023 can be
incorporated directly into the program
stream.
•
Comprehensive hardware facilities are provided for detection and servicing of interrupt
conditions.
Segmentation of the object program is performed
by the compiler. Each ALGOL block becomes a
separate program segment that is referenced by
a Descriptor in the Program Reference Table.
The Descriptor specifies the current drum or disk
and core addresses of the segment and indicates
whether or not it is currently loaded in core storage. No segment may exceed 1,023 words in
length, so very long source language blocks may
have to be divided into sub-blocks by the programmer. The use of short blocks is recommended for efficiency in storage allocation and in
multiprogramming situations. The main restriction on overall object program size is the Program Reference Table, which is limited to 1,023
entries. The ALGOL Compiler itself requires
about 650 PRT entries.
The compiler has access to the procedures, or
subroutines, which are stored on the Program
Library Tape in ALGOL source-language form.
When a procedure is required, it is called from
the library and translated along with the source
program. This system facilitates multiprogramming and makes possible a listing of the complete
source program, including all procedures; it also
means that a single frequently-used procedure
may require multiple storage areas (one area for
each program being run at the same time which
uses the procedure).
Input-output editing and format control operations
are carried out by standard routines. Intrinsic
functions are called in at object time, except for
ABS, SIGN, and ENTlER, which are inserted inline at compile time. No instructions are generated for REAL and BOOLEAN; they are temporary declarations to prevent error messages
at compile time.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
BURROUGHS B 5500
203:181. 120
· 12
.32
Diagnostics can be incorporated into the object
program by the source-language declarations
MONITOR and DUMP, which are described in
Paragraphs. 451 and .452. The printouts produced by these declarations facilitate sourcelanguage debugging. This facility, together with
the high translation speeds of the B 5500, makes
it practical to do all debugging in the ALGOL
language and retranslate the whole program at
each stage of the debugging process.
.321 Standard inclusions:
none
.322 Compatible with:
Master Control Program
· 13
Originator: ..•••.
Burroughs Corporation.
• 14,
Maintainer: •.•.••
Burroughs· Corporation.
· 15
Availability:
April, 1963.
.2
INPUT
.21
Language
• 211 Name: . . . . . . . . .
.212 Exemptions :
.22
Extended ALGOL for the
Burroughs B 5500,
Section 203:161.
none.
Form
.221 Input media:
punched cards or magnetic tape.
.33
ordering:
header card first, then
source deck in logical
sequence; all declarations for a block must
appear at the head of
the block, and procedures and switches
must be declared before they can be used
(unless a FORWARD
reference is used).
Documentation
Subject
Provision
Source program:
Object program: .••
Storage map: ••••.
Restart point list: ••
Language errors: •.
optional listing.
optional listing.
none.
none.
listing.
.4
TRANSLA TING PROCEDURE
.41
Phases and Passes:
.42
Optional Modes
.421
• 422
• 423
.424
.425
Translate:
Translate and run: •
Check only: •.•..•
Patching:
Translate and add
to library:
.43
..... .
.......
. ....
translate: •.....
no.
.433 Short translate on
restricted program:
........
.44
Bulk Translating: . •
.45
Program Diagnostics
.451 Tracers: •.•..••
limited by target computer storage,
• 232 Maximum size
4,092 generated B 5500
syllables per ALGOL
block.
• 452 Snapshots: ...••.
• 233 Maximum number of
data items: ••.••
.3
OUTPUT
.31
Object Program
.311 Language name: ..•
• 312 Language style: •••
.313 Output media: ••..
10/65
yes.
no.
.231 Maximum number
source statements: .••...••
yes •
yes.
yes.
no.
Special Features
Size Limitations
of source statements: .•..••..
one-pass translator.
.431 Alter to check only:
.432 Fast unoptimized
• 222 Obligatory
.23
Conventions
Description (Contd.)
practically unlimited.
B 5500 machine code.
fully relocatable .
magnetic tape or disc
storage.
A
AUERBACH
.~
-
no.
yes.
MONITOR declarations
cause the identifier and
current value of each
listed variable to be written on the designated file
each time it is used as a
"left-hand part" in an assignment statement.
Listed switch identifiers,
label identifiers, and procedure identifiers used as
function designators are
also written each time
they are encountered in
the object program.
DUMP declarations cause
specified data to be written on a designated file
whenever a labelled statement has been executed a
specified number of times.
The output may include:
variable identifiers with
their current values, array identifiers with current values· of all their
elements, and statement
labels with tallies of the
number of times they have
been executed.
(Contd.)
203: 181. 453
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: EXTENDED ALGOL
.453 Dumps:
.46
........
not incorporated in source
programs.
.52
Translation Time
.521 Normal translating:.
approx. 600 to 800 sourceprogram cards per minute (up to 2,500 sourceprogram card images per
minute when I/o is via
magnetic tape).
• 522 Checking only: ...•
same as above times.
Translator Libra!X
. 461 Identity: . . . . . . . .
• 462 User restriction: ..
.463 Form -
Storage medium: .
Organization:
B 5500 Program Library.
general.
magnetic tape or disc file.
multi-file tape and disc
libraries.
.464 Contents -
Routines: .••.••
. ....
Functions:
Data descriptions:
Compiled
programs:
....
• 53
Optimizing Data: .•
.54
Object Program
Periormance: .•.
yes; closed procedures in
source language.
yes .
no.
yes, in relocatablemachine
code.
.465 Librarianship -
Insertion: • • • • . .
Amendment: •.•.
Call procedure: .•
by MCP, using control
cards.
by MCP, using control
cards.
use of name in source
program.
.5
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE
.51
Object Program Space
no explicit data.
manufacturer recommends
coding in long statements
(to reduce number of unnecessary storage accesses) and short blocks
(to facilitate segmentation).
allocation of target computer. storage and inputoutput devices is performed by the MCP.
according to Burroughs,
typical object program
efficiency is 90 to 95%
relative to best hand
coding for both time and
space.
.511 Fixed overhead -
Name
Master Control
Program: •••..
Read-Write
routine: .•...
File Control
routine:
.. ...
Space
1,600 core locations.
15,000 drum locations.
1,000 Disk File segments.
.6
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS
.61
Translating Computer
.611 Minimum configur-
ation: •...••••.
included in MCP on drum
or disc storage.
included in MCP on drum
or disc storage.
.612 Larger configuration
advantages: •.•.•
.512 Space required for
each input-output
file: .••...•.•.
number and size of buffer
areas for each file are
specified in FILE declarations.
.513 Approximate expan-
sion of procedures: ••.••.••.
Statement
FORI ~STEP
1 UNTIL 100 DO:
J
~J
+2: .•..
C [I] ~'I
">-1
2
~iI
V
~'Y
~q/
Time in
100
Milliseconds
per Input Record 7
R
1.0
R-0.1,O.01
"',
4
"
./
~,
c
2
~/
10
~
7
4
~-
~
2
1
2
0.1
4
7
2
1.0
4
2
7
10.0
4
7
100.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
LEGEND
-------------------- Elapsed time
Central Processor time
-CP--~
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH info, inc.
10/65
203:201. 415
BURROUGHS B 5500
.415 Graph: • . . • . . . . . • • see graph below, for
Configuration VIm only;
magnetic tape input and
output.
CONFIGURATION VIIB
10,000
7
4
2
1,000
7
4
Ii~
2
~~,.,
'\.,
Time in
100
Milliseconds
per Input Record 7
~.
~.
-,/'L
~/
~~
2
R
10
4
"
/
4
7
~
'\.,
V
= 1.0
V
0.1, 0.01
f--R
cP"
1----
~
...
2
1
0.1
2
4
7
2
4
1.0
7
10.0
2
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
LEGEND
- - - - - - - - - Elapsed time
- C P - - - Central Processor time
10/65
fA..
AUERBACH
~
4
7
100.0
-1.
-
203:211. 101
Slm ...
BURROUGHS B,5500
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
~~EDP
\.
AUERBAC~
REPDRTS
~
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Unit
Depth,
inches
Height,
inches
Weight,
pounds
KVA
BTU
per hr.
Power,
B 5281 Processor
B 5282 I/o Subsystem
B 5220 Central Control
B 5290 Display and
Distribution
B 5370 Power Supply
45
45
45
32
32
32
74
74
74
1,000
1,000
1,000
1.8
1.5
2.0
6,800
5,400
7,400
45
45
32
32
74
74
1,000
1,000
1.1
3.8
4,000
13,000
B 5310 Console
72
24
29
250
2.4
900
B 460/461 Memory
Module
45
32
74
1,000
5.4
18,500
B 430 Drum Subsystem
45
32
74
1,300
1.8
5,000
45
32
74
1,000
1.5
5,000
45
46
53
450
1.1
4,100
22
46
53
3,800
1.4
3,800
B 122 Card Reader
B 123/124/129
Card Readers
29
17
41
102
0.20
48
29
50
920
1.3
3,000
B 303 Card Punch
B 304 Card Punch
44
73
28
27
53
47
655
1,283
1.4
2.2
4,000
5,500
Line Printers (all
models)
74
29
55
1,738
Magnetic Tape Units
(all models)
29
28
74
30
24
30
B 450 Basic Disk File/
Data Communications
Control Cabinet
B 471 Disk File
Electronics Unit
B 475 Disk File
Storage Module
B 141 Paper Tape
Reader
B 341 Paper Tape
Punch
B 481 Teletype Terminal
B 483 Typewriter
Terminal
B 493 Typewriter Inquiry
Station
B 484 Dial TWX Terminal
B 487 Data Transmission
Terminal Unit
700
2.3
(idle)
3.5
(printing)
4,480
900
2.0 to
3.3
7,200
60
437
0.91
3,100
24
60
426
0.59
1,500
24
38
42
500
0.23
800
24
38
42
500
0.23
800
18
24
20
38
40
42
60
500
0.26
0.23
800
800
?
?
?
?
?
?
General Requirements
i
I
\
Width,
inches
'-
Temperature: . . . • • • . ••
Relative humidity: .• . • •.
Power: •••..••••.•..
between 60° and 100°F.
between 10% and 90%.
120-volt, I-phase, 60-cycle, 3-wire.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporotion ond AUERBACH Info, 'Inc.
10/65
-.£
203:221.101
SlAmRD
BURROUGHS B 5500
PRICE DATA
/AEDP
I
\,--
-
AUERBACS'.
REPORTS
~
PRICE DATA
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
No.
PROCESSING
AND
CONTROL
UNITS
B 5280
$
$
Central. Processor (an optional.
second Processor)
4,500
120.00
186,750
B 5283
I/o Channel (maximum of 4)
1,250
65.00
51,875
B 460
Memory Module (6 IJsec core,
4,096 words)
Memory Module (4 IJsec core,
4,096 words)
Magnetic Storage Drum (32,768
words)
Disk File Control
Basic Disk File/Data
Communications Cabinet
Disk File Expanded Control
Basic Disk File/Data Transmission Terminal Unit Cabinet
Disk File Electronics Unit
Disk File Storage Module
(9.6 million char)
1,250
55.00
51,875
1,450
60.00
60,175
1,700
590
65.00
65.00
70,550
26,550
255
200
40.00
25.00
11,475
9,000
255
710
40.00
80.00
11,475
31,950
990
115.00
44,550
220
320
400
600
40.00
70.00
75.00
115.00
9,900
18,000
18,000
27,000
450
650
65.00
115.00
20,250
29,250
400
180
190
170
70.00
10.00
40.00
10.00
18,000
8,100
8,550
7,650
810
1,200
1,275
1,325
1,400
100
170.00
175.00
185.00
195.00
205.00
20.00
54,000
54,000
57,375
59,600
63,000
4,000
B 461
B 451
B 452
:8471
B 475
INPUTOUTPUT
Readers, Punches, Printers
B
B
B
B
122
123
124
129
B 303
B 304
B 141
920
B 341
930
B
B
B
B
B
*
$
Monthly
Maintenance ** Purchase
307,100
B 5470
B 450
**
Central. Processor System,
including:
B 5220 Central. Control
B 5281 Processor
B 5282 I/O Subsystem (without
I/O Channels)
B 5290 Display and Distribution
B 5310 Console
B 5370 Power Supply
Monthly
Rental
265.. 00
B 430
(
OneTime
Charge*
7,400
B 5281
MAIN AND
AUXILIARY
STORAGE
Name
PRICES
320
321
325
328
329
871
Card
Card
Card
Card
Reader
Reader
Reader
Reader
(200 cpm)
(475 cpm)
(800 cpm)
(1, 400 cpm)
Card Punch (100 cpm)
Card Punch (300 cpm)
Paper Tape Reader (500-1,000
char/sec)
Input Code Translator
Paper Tape Punch
Output Code Translator
Line Printer (475lpm; 120 pos.)
Line Printer (700 lpm; 120 pos.)
Line Printer (700 lpm; 132 pos.)
Line Printer (1,040 lpm;120 pos.)
Line Printer (1,040 lpm; 132 pos.)
132 Print Position Capability,
per I/o Channel
$105.00
One-time charge is applicable when certain features are added to an existing installation.
Maintenance charges .are slightly higher in rural. areas.
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
10/65
203:221.102
BURROUGHS B 5500
PRICES
IDENTITY OF UNIT
OneTime
Charge*
CLASS
No.
INPUTOUTPUT
(Continued)
Name
.Monthly
Rental
$
Monthly
Maintenance** Purchase
$
$
Magnetic TaEe Units
B 422
B 423
B 424
B 425
872
Magnetic Tape
at 120 ips)
Magnetic Tape
120 ips)
Magnetic Tape
83 ips)
Magnetic Tape
KC at 90 ips)
Unit (24/66 KC
800
155.00
36,000
495
145.00
31,500
850
165.00
38,250
850
165.00
38,250
100
20.00
4,500
460
295
55.00
45.00
20,700
13,275
460
480
660
55
700
495
55.00
55.00
75.00
10.00
80.00
95.00
20,700
21,600
29,700
2,475
31,500
22,275
100
40
60
45
35
·170
85
20.00
5.00
10.00
10.00
5.00
30.00
15.00
4,500
1,800
2,700
2,025
1,575
7,650
3,825
Unit (24 KC at
Unit (66 KC at
Unit (18/50/72
Extended Magnetic Tape
Capability, per I/o Channel
(provides three-transfer-rate
capability, beginning of tape,
.end of tape, and blank tape
sensing)
$500.00
Data Communications Devices
B 5480
B 249
B 481
B
B
B
B
483
493
484
487
873
980
981
982
983
984
985
Data Communications Control
Data Transmission Control Unit
Teletype Terminal Unit:
120-Character Buffer
240-Character Buffer
Typewriter Terminal Unit
Typewriter Inquiry Station
Dial 'IWX Terminal Unit
Data Transmission Terminal Unit
B 487 Capability, per I/o
Channel
Dial 'IWX/Typewriter Adapter
Teletype Adapter
Dataspeed Type 2 Adapter
801A Auxiliary Data Set Adapter
UNIVAC 1004 Adapter
mM 1050 Adapter
$50.00
$50.00
$50.00
$50.00
$50.00
$50.00
$50.00
* One-time charge is applicable when certain features are added to an existing installation.
** Maintenance charges are slightly higher in rural areas.
10/65
A
AUERBAC~
BURROUGHS 500 SYSTEMS
!
~
Burroughs Corporation
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
./
BURROUGHS 500 SYSTEMS
L·~
\'
~
Burroughs Corporation
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
-1.
fa
AUERBAC~
-
•
210:001. 010
srm ...
EDP
BURROUGHS B 2500 & B 3500
ADVANCE REPORT
REPORTS
ADVANCE REPORT:
BURROUGHS B 2500 AND B 3500
.01
INTRODUCTION
Burroughs Corporation announced two new small-to-medium-scale computer systems, the
B 2500 and B 3500, on March 29, 1966. The two new systems are billed as the newest members
of the "Burroughs 500 systems" computer family. The only previously-introduced members of
this family are the B 5500 and the B 8500. There will, however, be no direct program compatibility between the two new systems and either the B 5500 or the B 8500.
The Burroughs B 5500 (Report 203:) is a medium-scale computer of highly unusual design; it
has been in use for some time and has demonstrated the practicality of multiprogrammed operation and of programming and debugging exclusively in higher-level languages (ALGOL, COBOL,
and FORTRAN). The B 8500 is an ultra-large-scale computer, announced last summer, with
extensive capabilities for modular expansion, multiprocessing, and multiprogramming. The
B 2500 and B 3500 are considerably more conventional in design (i. e., more like most of the
other computer systems currently on the market) than the B 5500 or B 8500, although the designers of the two new systems have borrowed certain important concepts from the larger
Burroughs systems. These concepts include operation under an integrated Master Control
Program, emphasis upon multiprogrammed operation, and use of a "stack" to store subroutine
parameters.
The Burroughs 500 Systems computer family is due for further expansion during the next few
months, probably through the announcement of a small-scale system to compete with IBM's
System/360 Model 20 and a large-scale system to fill the gap between the B 5500 and the
B 8500. With these additions, Burroughs' computer line should approach the IBM System/360
line in range and suitability for varied applications.
The B 2500 and B 3500 systems are fully program-compatible with one another. The only
significant differences between the two systems are in internal speed (the B 3500 is twice as
fast), maximum number of I/O channels (6 for the B 2500 and 20 for the B 3500), and maximum
core memory capacity (60,000 bytes for the B 2500 and 500,000 bytes for the B 3500). Compatibility with the second-generation Burroughs B 200/300 Series and IBM 1401/1440/1460
systems will be achieved through optional emulators. Although the B 2500 and B 3500 use the
Figure 1. A small B 2500 tape system. A 4-drive Magnetic
Tape Cluster is in the foreground.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
4/66
BURROUGHS B 2500&B 3500
210:001. 020
.01
INTRODUCTION (Contd.)
same data structure and codes as the IBM System/360, there will be no program compatibility
between the two lines.
The new Burroughs systems are definitely "third-generation" in their use of monolithic integrated
circuits and a read-only memory. The read-only memory in the processor holds microprograms
which initiate and control all processor operations, thereby reducing the amount of wired logic
that must be built into the processor and facilitating the emulation of dissimilar computers.
A fairly wide variety of peripheral equipment is offered, though most of it is quite conventional
and similar to Burroughs' second-generation peripheral equipment. The only distinctively new
peripheral devices are the Magnetic Tape Cluster, which is a compact, economical unit containing up to four tape drives, and the Systems Memory, a low-priced, fast-access disc unit designed to hold the Master Control Program and other software facilities. New single-line and
multi-line communications controls provide flexible facilities for data communications and realtime applications. Burroughs continues to stress the speed and reliability of its head-per-track
Disk Files.
Software support is divided into two levels, Basic and Advanced. Each level is designed for
use with a separate operating system. An assembler, sort generator, and report generator
are provided at each level. COBOL and FORTRAN compilers, however, are offered only
at the Advanced level, and no ALGOL compiler has been promised. At the Basic level - intended
for small configurations - the Basic Control Program controls simple stacked-job processing
and straightforward I/O operations. Systems equipped with disc storage and at least 20,000
bytes of core memory will usually use the Advanced software. At this level the Master Control
Program schedules and controls multiprogrammed operations and performs many other functions usually found only in the operating systems for much larger computers.
First deliveries of B 2500 systems (and the Basic Control Program) are scheduled for January
1967. Deliveries of B 3500 systems (and the Master Control Program) will begin in May 1967.
The COBOL compiler is scheduled for delivery in July 1967. Burroughs states that typical
lease prices will range from $4,195 per month for a small B 2500 tape system to $20,720 per
month for a large B 3500 system with 100 million bytes of disc storage and 8 tape units .
. 02
DATA STRUCTURE
The B 2500 and B 3500 systems provide facilities for convenient handling of variable-length
fields composed of either 8-bit bytes or 4-bit digits. Core memory is addressable by digit
position. The basic unit of data, however, is the "word, " which consists of 16 data bits plus
one parity bit.and is the amount of information that can be read from or written into core
memory during each cycle. A word can hold either two 8-bit bytes or four 4-bit digits.
Data represented in the 4-bit format can be either signed (with a 4-bit sign digit preceding the
most significant numeric digit of the field) or unsigned. Data in the 8-bit format is always
unsigned, but all-numeric fields represented in the 8-bit mode can be used as operands in
fixed-point arithmetic operations without the need (as in the IBM System/360) for prior conversion to the 4-bit digit mode. Data may be represented internally in either of two codes,
EBCDIC or ASCII, as discussed in Paragraph . 14.
Floating-point numbers can have variable-length mantissas of up to 100 digits. Every floatingpoint number consists of: one digit that specifies the sign of the exponent, two decimal digits
that specify the exponent's value, one digit that specifies the sign of the mantissa, and from
:', to 100 decimal digits that specify the mantissa's value. The mantissa always represents a
whole number (rather than a fraction as in most computers), with the decimal point assumed
to the right of the last digit.
/
Instructions can consist of one, two, three, or four 6-digit "syllables" or of a single 8-digit
syllable. See Paragraph. 051 for a detailed description of the instruction format •
. 03
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The B 2500 "central system" consists of a 2501 Central Processor and one combined input/
output and memory cabinet. Core memory capacity can range from 10,000 to 60,000 bytes
in 10, OOO-byte increments. Four I/O channels (two type A and two type B) are included in
the basic system; a maximum of two additional channels (one type A and one type B) can
be installed.
The B 3500 "central system" consists of a 3501 Central Processor, one or two input/output
cabinets, and from one to six memory cabinets. Core memory capacity can range from
10,000 to 500,000 bytes in 18 different sizes (see Price Data, Section 210: 221).
4/66
(Contd.)
A
AUERBACH
'"
210:00 I. 031
ADVANCE REPORT
.03
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Contd.)
Six I/O channels (three type A and three type B) are included in the basic system; a maximum of 14 additional channels (seven type A and seven type B) can be installed.
Optional features available for both central processors include the B 200/B 300 Emulator,
the mM 1401/1440/1460 Emulator, floating-point arithmetic, and a desk-level console.
The operations of all peripheral devices are controlled by I/O control units. One I/O control can be connected to each B 2500 or B 3500 I/O channel, and each type of peripheral
device requires a different I/O control. Most of the I/O controls (card reader, punch, printer, paper
tape, etc.) can accommodate only one peripheral unit each, but the controls for magnetic tape and
disc storage devices can accommodate multiple units, as explained in the descriptions of these devices. Further flexibility in the control of magnetic tape and disc operations is provided by a series
of Exchange units, which permit a group of tape or disc units to communicate with the central
processor via either of two or more I/o control units and the associated I/O channels.
The two types of I/o channels differ in their modes of communication with the processor and,
therefore, in the data rates they can accommodate. Type A channels transfer only one character
at a time to or from core memory and are limited to handling the following low-speed peripheral
devices: card readers orpunches, paper tape readers or punches, buffered line printers, listers,
MICR sorter/readers, on-line banking subsystems, or the console printer. Type B channels transfer two characters in parallel to or from core memory and can handle the following types of peripheral devices: magnetic tape units, Disc Files, Systems Memory, unbuffered printers, and
data communications controls. Through the use of "type B" controls, type B channels can alternatively be used for low-speed peripheral devices.
To indicate the range and general makeup of practical system configurations, the components
and features required for three of our Standard Configurations (as defined in Section 4:030 of the
Users' Guide) are listed below, along with their one-shift monthly rentals •
. 031 4-Tape Business System; Configuration
n (B 2500)
Equipment
Rental
1 - 2501 Central Processor with Console and
4 I/O Channels
1 - 2001 Memory Module (10,000 bytes)
1 - 9381-4 4-Station 36KB Magnetic Tape Cluster
1 - 2381-1 36KB Tape Cluster I/O Control
1 - 9240 Printer (700 lpm)
1 - 2241 Printer I Output Control
1 - 9111 Card Reader (800 lpm)
1 - 2110 Card Reader Input Control
1 - 9210 Card Punch (100 cpm)
1 - 2210 Card Punch Output Control
Total Rental:
$1,195
450
1,300
200
800
75
325
50
350
50
$4,795
.032 6-Tape Auxiliary Storage System; Configuration V (B 3500)
Equipment
Rental
1 - 3501 Central Processor with Console and
6 I/O Channels
1 - 3002 Memory Module (20, 000 bytes)
1 - 9371 Disk File Electronics Unit
2 - 9372 Disk File Modules (20 million bytes total)
1 - 3373 Disk File I/O Control
2 - 9381-3 3-Station 36KB Magnetic Tape Clusters
1 - 3381 36KB Tape Cluster I/O Control
1 - 9240 Printer (700 lpm)
1 - 324i Printer I Output Control
1 - 9111 Card Reader (800 lpm)
1 - 3110 Card Reader Input Control
1 - 9210 Card Punch (100 cpm)
1 - 3210 Card Punch Output Control
1 - 9340 Console Printer and Keyboard
1 - 3340 Console Printer I/O Control
Total Rental:
$1,695
1,000
650
1,650
250
2,200
235
800
75
325
50
350
50
55
100
$9,485
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
4/66
BURROUGHS B 2500&B 3500
210:001.033
.033 10-Tape General-Purpose System; Configuration VIlA (B 3500)
Rental
Equipment
1 - 3501 Central Processor with Console and
6 I/o Channels
1 - 3510 Additional Type A I/O Channel
1 - 3012 Memory Module (120,000 bytes)
1 - 9370-1 Systems Memory (1 million bytes) *
1 - 3371 Systems Memory I/o Control*
10 - 9392 72KB Free-Standing Magnetic Tape Units
2 - 3393-1 Magnetic Tape I/O Controls
1 - 3491 Magnetic Tape Exchange (2 x 10)
1 - 9240 Printer (700 lpm)
1 - 3240 Printer I Output Control
1 - 9111 Card Reader (800 lpm)
1 - 3110 Card Reader Input Control
1 - 9210 Card Punch (100 cpm)
1 - 3210 Card Punch Output Control
1 - 9340 Console Printer and Keyboard
1 - 3340 Console Printer I/O Control
1 - 3530 Floating-Point Arithmetic Feature
Total Rental:
$1,695
35
4,500
375
150
5,750
750
250
800
75
325
50
350
50
55
100
100
$15,410
* Included to provide the disc storage needed for Master Control Program use .
. 04
INTERNAL STORAGE
.041 Core Memory
Core memory cycle times are two microseconds in the B 2500 and one microsecond in the B 3500.
Read access times are 700 nanoseconds and 350 nanoseconds, respectively. Both processors
access one word, consisting of 16 data bits plus one parity bit, per cycle. Because core memory
is addressable by digit position and each word can hold four digits, all word addresses are
modulo-4. Whenever a specific digit or byte position is addressed, the entire word in which it
is located is accessed. Data can be transferred to or from core memory by either the central
processor or any of the I/O control units.
B 2500 core memory capacities can range from 10,000 to 60,000 bytes in increments of
10,000 bytes (i. e., 5,000 words). B 3500 memory capacities can range from 10,000 to 500,000
bytes in 18 different sizes; see the Price Data section (210: 221) for the available capacities
and the associated model numbers.
The first 1,200 digit positions of core memory are reserved for use by certain processor instructions, the interrupt ·system, the I/O control units, and the Master Control Program (when
used) . In addition, the first 64 digit positions of the core area assigned to each program are
usually reserved to hold that program's index registers and other specific information.
To prevent accidental over-writing of one program by another during multiprogrammed operation, each core memory address is checked to ensure that it lies between the boundaries
established by the base register and the limit register (see Paragraph. 053). If not, the program is interrupted and control is transferred to the Master Control Program.
. 042 Address Memory
The B 2500 and B 3500 Central Processors contain an Address Memory unit with a 100-nanosecond cycle time. Address Memory is an array of from 24 to 120 word locations, expandable
in increments of 12 words. Each word is six 4-bit digits in length - long enough to hold the
absolute address of any core memory location. Address Memory's purposes are to reduce the
number of core memory accesses required and to perform a number of functions that usually
require separate processor registers. The first eight words are used by the processor, and
two words are assigned to each installed I/o channel. The I/O channel words contain the
initial and final core memory addresses for the I/O operation in progress on the associated
channel; these words are used by the I/O control units to determine the core memory locations
where output data is to be accessed or input data stored .
• 043 Systems Memory
Burroughs' 9370 Systems Memory is a new, ~ingle-disc storage unit designed to provide, at a
fairly low cost, the random-access storage required to hold the systems software and the
user's program library. As in Burroughs' larger Disk Files, one read/write head serves each
track, so no access-arm movement is required. Average access time is 17 milliseconds,
and the peak data transfer rate is 291,000 bytes per second.
4/66
fA
AUERBACH
®
(Contd.)
210:001. 044
ADVANCE REPORT
.043 Systems Memory (Contd.)
Two models of Systems Memory are offered. Model 9370-1 uses only one face of the disc and
has a capacity of 1,000,000 bytes; Model 9370-2 uses both disc faces and holds 2,000,000
bytes, There are 100 data tracks per disc face. Each track is divided into 100 segments, and
each segment holds 100 bytes (or 200 digits) of information. A longitudinal parity character
is recorded at the end of each segment. Systems Memory is connected to a B 2500 or B 3500
Processor by means of a Systems Memory I/O Control. Two Systems Memory units can be
connected to a single I/O Control by adding a Systems Memory Exchange .
. 044 Disk File Subsystem
The 9371/9372 Disk File Subsystem is similar to the Burroughs Disk Files that have been in use
for nearly two years with B 200/300 Series and B 5500 systems (see Report Sections 201:042
and 203:043). The use of a fixed read/write head for every data track provides fast access
times (20 milliseconds average) and high reliability. Average data transfer rate is 200,000
bytes per second. The Disk File Subsystem is compatible with the 9370 Systems Memory
in segment size (100 bytes) and addressing structure, so either unit can be used to hold the
systems software and program library.
Each 9372 Disk File Module contains four non-removable discs and holds 10 million bytes.
From one to five 9372 Modules can be connected to a 9371 Disk File Electronics Unit,
providing up to 50 million bytes of storage. Disk File Exchanges (usable only in B 3500
systems) permit up to ten 9371 Electronics Units and the associated Disk File Modules
to be connected to from one to four Disk File I/O Controls. The available Exchanges are
designated 1 x 5, 2 x 5, and 4 x 10: the first number is the maximum number of Controls
and the second is the maximum number of Electronics Units that can be interconnected.
Since each I/o Control is connected to a separate channel, the 2 x 5 and 4 x 10 Exchanges,
in effect, provide "floating" I/O channels and two-way or four-way simultaneity for Disk File
operations .
. 05
CENTRAL PROCESSORS
The central processors used in B 2500 and B 3500 systems are functionally identical and
completely program-compatible; they differ only in internal speeds. The processor
contains the arithmetic unit, logic controls, and interrupt facilities for a B 2500 or
B 3500 system. No facilities for multiple-processor configurations have been announced to
date .
. 051 Instruction Formats
There are two basic types of instructions: I/O instructions (called "descriptors" and
discussed in Paragraph .11) and processor instructions. Processor instructions may
be one, two, three, or four 6-digit "syllables" in length and may contain - respectively zero, one, two, or three core memory addresses. (Branch instructions are eight
digits in length, and therefore constitute an exception to the normal instruction format. )
The first two 4-bit digits of a processor instruction designate the operation code and
initiate execution of the appropriate string of microprograms stored in the system's
Read-Only Memory, a resistive-type memory with a 100-nanosecond access time. These
microprograms fetch the remainder of the instruction and perform the specified operation.
In most instructions, the third, fourth, fifth, and sixth digits of the first syllable specify
the lengths of the A and B operands, which can range from 1 to 100 digits or bytes, or up to
10, 000 words (depending upon the operation).
In multi-syllable instructions, the second, third, and fourth syllables (when present)
specify the A-field, B-field, and C-field addresses, respectively. The first digit of each
address syllable specifies: (1) which, if any, of three index registers shall be used in forming
the machine address, and (2) the format of the data field. Each program has its own
complement of three 8-digit index registers, which are held in reserved locations in core
memory. There are four format possibilities: signed 4-bit, unsigned 4-bit, unsigned
8-bit, or indirect address (which means that the data field's address, rather than the data
field itself, will be found in the memory location specified by the address syllable). The
remaining five digits of each address syllable specify the data field address itself.
In many instructions, the second syllable may contain a literal operand rather than the A-field
address. Literal operands are limited to a maximum length of three bytes (or six digits).
'"
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
4/66
BURROUGHS B 2500 & B 3500
210:001. 052
.051 Instruction Formats (Contd.)
All addresses in processor instructions are "base-relative." This means that each program
is written as if it started in the first location of core memory. At execution time, each
address is automatically incremented by the contents of a three-digit, modulo-1000 base
register to form an absolute address (which can be further modified by indexing if desired).
The base-relative addressing technique facilitates program relocation and segmentation;
it also permits up to 1 million digits (500,000 bytes) of core memory to be addressed although
the instruction addresses are only five digits long •
. 052 Processing Facilities
The instruction repertoire includes efficient facilities for arithmetic, data movement, comparison, and editing of variable-length decimal and alphanumeric data fields. No binary arithmetic facilities are available, although logical AND, inclusive OR, and exclusive OR instructions
are provided. Fixed-point decimal arithmetic instructions include three-address addition,
subtraction, multiplication, and division, as well as two-address addition and subtraction.
The optional Floating-Point feature provides three-address instructions to add, subtract,
multiply, and divide floating-point operands with 2-digit exponents and mantissas varying from
1 to 100 digits in length. Representative execution times are shown in Table 1.
A novel feature of the new Burroughs processors is their ability to combine numeric
operands in the 4-bit and 8-bit data formats in a single operation, without prior transformation.
The programmer can specify the format in which the results of such mixed-format operations
shall be expressed: signed 4-bit, unsigned 4-bit, or 8-bit.
A group of Scan instructions facilitates the coding of search operations by enabling the programmer, by means of a single instruction, to search a string of up to 100 characters for the
presence (or absence) of a specified character or group of characters. A Translate instruction
effects translations from any 4-bit or 8-bii code to any 8-bit code through the use of a table in
core memory. The Edit instruction moves up to 100 characters or digits from a source field
to a destination field under the control of a string of "micro-operators" in core memory, which
can specify that any character shall be inserted, suppressed, or floated under a variety of
conditions. This flexible instruction permits normal dollar-and-cent punctuation and either
floating dollar sign or check protection to be accomplished in a single operation.
Two special instructions, Enter and Exit, facilitate entry to and exit from subroutines, especially
when the subroutines are used in nested or recursive fashion. The Enter instruction causes
return control information and subroutine parameters to be moved into the "stack," which is a
core memory area that has been reserved by the programmer. If another subroutine is entered
prior to exit from the first subroutine, additional return control information and parameters will
be moved into the stack, causing the previously-stored parameters to be "pushed down" deeper
into the stack. Thus, subroutines can be nested or used recurSively to any level up to the
capacity of the stack .
. 053 Operational States
The central processor always operates in one of two states: the Normal State, in which user programs are executed, or the Control State, in which the functions of the MCP or BCP operating
systems are performed. Several "privileged" instructions can be executed only in the Control
state. These instructions permit the MCP or BCP to initiate I/o operations and to control the
program mix by setting and clearing registers and flip-flops.
/
TABLE I: REPRESENTATIVE EXECUTION TIMES, IN MICROSECONDS
Task
c=a+b
b=a+b
c=axb
c = alb
Move a to b
Compare a to b
Fixed Point
(signed 5-digit operands)
Floating Point
(5-digit mantissas)
B 2500
B 3500
B 2500
75
66
416
1810
54
60
37.5
33
208
905
27
30
102
-
462
1860
-
B 3500
51
-
231
930
-
(Contd. )
4/66
A
AUERBACH
®
210:001. 060
ADVANCE REPORT
.053 Operational States (Contd.)
A powerful interrupt system causes the processor to enter the Control State and branch to the
MCP or BCP whenever any of the following conditions occurs: completion of an I/O operation,
memory parity error, memory address error, invalid instruction (including attempted execution
of a privileged instruction in the Normal State), instruction time out (failure to complete the
execution of an instruction within a preset time limit), and clock interrupt. Memory address
errors can result from the formation of an address beyond the bounds established by the base
and limit register settings, a non-decimal digit in an address, or a "non-synchronized" address
(i. e., an address that is not modulo-2 or modulo-4 when a particular instruction or data format
requires such an address). A clock interrupt occurs when the processor's six-digit timer, which
is incremented once each millisecond, reaches a programmer-specified control value.
Memory protection - an essential feature for successful multiprogramming - is provided by the
hardware, using the base and limit registers and the interrupt system. When the MCP initiates
execution of a program, it sets the base register to the program's initial core memory location. The limit register's setting is made equal to the base register setting plus the total core
memory requirement for the program. Before data is fetched, all machine addresses are
checked against the base and limit register settings. An out-of-bounds address causes an
interrupt and a transfer of control to the MCP, which suspends execution of the offending program .
. 06
CONSOLE
The operator's console for both the B 2500 and B 3500 systems is mounted on the front of the
central processor cabinet, above a shelf that serves as a small worktable. The console consists
of a sloping control panel and a vertical display panel. The display panel features two six-digit
Nixie tube displays that can be used, under console control, to display instruction syllables,
addresses, and the contents of selected memory locations and registers.
The 9340 Console Printer and Keyboard is an optional Teletype Model 33 or Model 35 Keyboard
Send/Receive set that uses one type A I/O channel and provides keyboard input and printed
output at a maximum speed of 10 characters per second. The 9340 is required for operation
under the Master Control Program .
. 07
INPUT-OUTPUT; PUNCHED CARDS AND PUNCHED TAPE
Burroughs offers three card readers, two card punches, a paper tape reader, and a paper tape
punch for use with B 2500 and B 3500 systems. Except for certain difference in codes, all
of the new units are similar to previous Burroughs peripheral units used with B 100/200/300
Series and B 5500 systems, as described in Report Sections 201:071 thru 201:075 .
. 071 Card Readers
The 9110 Card Reader is a compact unit that reads standard SO-column cards photoelectrically,
in column-by-column fashion, at a peak speed of 200 cards per minute. An immediate-access
clutch permits the reading of an SO-column card to be completed within a maximum of 350
milliseconds after a "start feed" signal is received. The input hopper and output stacker have
a capacity of 450 cards each.
The 9111 Card Reader uses an immediate-access clutch, a belt drive mechanism, and
photoelectric read cells (one for timing) to read cards of 51, 60, 66, or SO columns at
rate of 800 cards per minute. The input hopper and output stacker can each hold up to
cards and can be loaded and unloaded while the reader is operating. Optional features
40-column Treasury Checks or the round holes in Postal Money Orders to be read.
13
a peak
2400
permit
The 9112 Card Reader has a peak reading rate of 1400 cards per minute. Its appearance and
physical characteristics are the same as those of the 9111 Card Reader described above.
All three card readers can read either the EBCDIC or the generally similar BCL (Burroughs
Common Language) card code and translate it automatically to EBCDIC internal code. Binary
card images can be read and stored in memory without conversion; the contents of each card
column are stored in the six low-order bit positions of two consecutive bytes .
. 072 Card Punches
(
\
The 9210 Card Punch can punch standard 80-column cards at a peak rate of 100 cards per
minute. Cards are punched one row at a time by a single row of 80 die punches. Punching
accuracy is checked by the hole-count method. The input hopper and output stacker can each
hold up to 800 cards and can be loaded and unloaded while the punch is operating.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
4/66
210:001.073
BURROUGHS B 2500 & B 3500
.072 Card Punches (Contd.)
The 9211 Card Punch punches 80-column cards, in row-by-row fashion, at a peak rate of 300
cards per minute. Punching accuracy is checked by the hole-count method. The input
hopper can hold up to 3500 cards. There are three stackers: a 3000-card primary stacker,
a program-selectable 850-card auxiliary stacker, and a 750-card error stacker.
Both card punches can perform automatic translations from the EBCDIC internal code to
EBCDIC card code. Alternatively, binary cards can be punched; the contents of the six
low-order bit positions of two consecutive bytes of core memory are accessed and punched into
each card column. A standard feature in the Card Punch Control permits automatic translation from EBCDIC internal code to the 64-character BCL (Burroughs Common Language) code,
or optionally to the BULL or ICT card code .
. 073 9120 Paper Tape Reader
The 9120 can read punched tape with 5, 6, 7, or 8 code levels at a peak speed of either 500 or
1,000 characters per second. Rated start and stop times are 5 and 20 milliseconds, respectively, and the reader can stop between consecutive characters. A standard plugboard permits
the bit configurations read from tape to be interchanged and/or inverted. Automatic translation from either 5-level Baudot or 6-level BCL tape code to EBCDIC internal code is standard.
For other punched tape codes, users can either add the optional 9926 Input Code Translator,
which provides flexible code conversions under plugboard control, or read the tape codes
directly and use programmed translation .
. 074 9220 Paper Tape Punch
The 9220 can punch 5-, 6-, 7-, or 8-level tape at a peak speed of 100 characters per second.
A standard plugboard permits the bit configurations from core memory to be interchanged
and/or inverted prior to punching. Automatic translation from EBCDIC internal code to either
5-level Baudot or 6-level BCL tape code is standard. For other punched tape codes, either
programmed translation or the optional 9928 Output Code Translator can be employed •
. 08
INPUT-OUTPUT; PRINTERS
.081 Line Printers
Four line printers of the conventional drum type are available for use with B 2500 and B 3500
systems. Users can choose a buffered printer with a peak speed (at single spacing) of either
700 or 1040 lines per minute, or an unbuffered model with a peak speed of either 815 or 1040
lines per minute. Table II lists the peak printing speeds and skipping speeds of the four models.
All four printers have 120 print pOSitions, with 12 additional positions available through use
of the 9941 option. All models use the 64-character Burroughs Common Language character
set. (Other character sets are available on a special-order basis.) Forms can be from 5 to 20
inches in width and can have a maximum length of 22 inches (when printing at 6 lines per inch)
or 16.5 inches (at 8 lines per inch). Vertical format control is provided by a 12-level carriage
control tape loop.
TABLE II: LINE PRINTER SPEEDS
Model No.
Peak Printing
Speed,
lines/minute
Skipping
Speed,
inches/ second
Buffer
9240
9241
700
1040
25 to 40
25 to 40
Yes
Yes
9242
9243
815
1040
25 (75 with option)
25 (75 with option)
No
No
/
.082 9244 Tape Lister
The Burroughs Tape Lister is designed primarily to provide high-speed printed listings of
MICR documents as they are read by a MICR Sorter-Reader. From 6 to 18 listing tapes can be
individually advanced and printed upon, enabling the contents of each Sorter-Reader pocket
to be listed on a separate tape. The six-tape 9244-1 master unit can be used alone, or one or
two six-tape 9244-2 slave units can be connected to it.
The peak printing rate of 1565 lines per minute can be maintained when printing is restricted
to a 16-character set (the digits 0-9 and six special symbols). When the full, alphanumeric
4/66
(Contd.)
A
AUERBACH
greater than
" and
IV or
,not
r+ arrow right
.t arrow up
+ arrow down
~ identity
%percent
[ open bracket
] close bracket
; semicolon
S;;
~
Note: For business applications
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
~ %$
replace I\V,
10/62
cpc 1604-A
243:081.300
§
081.
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
. 31
Form of Storage
.52
.521 Input: . .
. 522 Output:
· 523 Stepping: .
• 311 Medium: • • •
• continuous fanfold sprocketpunched stationery.
• printing of engraved chars.
.312 Phenomenon:
.32
.524 Skipping:
Positional Arrangement
. 321 Serial by: .
.322 Parallel by:
.323 Bands:
. 324 Track use: .
. 325 Row use:
.33
Coding: .
. 34
Format Compatibility: . . . . .
. 35
Input-Output Operations
one line at 6 lines/inch .
120 columns at 10 chars/
inch.
1.
all for data .
all for data .
as in Data Code Table No.
1.
. 525 Marking:
· 53
Code Translation:
automatic translation from
internal BCD code as in
Data Code Table No.!.
.54
Format Control: .
none.
· 55
Control Operations
Disable: . . . . .
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code: . . .
. none.
Physical Dimensions
.56
. 351 Overall width: . .
. 352 Length: . . . . .
.353 Maximum margins
Left:
Right: . . . • .
4 to 19 inches .
up to a 17 inch form.
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:
.42
Connection to S},:stem
. 421 On':line:
.422 Off-line: .
.43
Printer ready: . . .
3.5 inches.
3.5 inches.
24 .
none.
.6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions
.431 Devices per controller: 1.
.432 Restrictions:. . . . . none.
IA:
.44
I B:
Data Transfer Control
. 443 Input-output area
access:
.444 Input-output area
lockout:
. 445 Table control:
. 446 Synchronization:
no .
no .
provided power is on, 1604
is selected, paper is not
in motion, and printer is
not out of paper.
if power is off, or 1604 is
not selected, or paper is
in motion, or printer is
out of paper.
Blocks
. one line of 120 characters .
. address limits in instruction.
restricted FORTRAN set,
print drum 1, 000 rpm.
restricted FORTRAN set,
print drum 667 rpm.
full character set, print
drum I, 000 rpm •
full character set, print
drum 667 rpm.
Speeds
.621 Nominal or peak speeds
IA: .
II A: •
I B:
lIB: .
. 622 Important parameters
Paper speed:
none.
none.
automatic.
. 51
II B:.
.62
each word.
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
10/62
II A: .
1 to 120 characters.
core storage; 1 char per
word, in 6 low-order bit
positions .
•5
. 511 Size of block:
. 512 Block demarcation
Output: . .
yes.
Print Control Unit .
Connection to Device
. 441 Size of load: .
•442 Input-output areas:
no .
Testable Conditions
Printer not ready:
.4
none.
print one line •
print and step 0, 1 or 2
lines .
step 1 or 2 lines.
8 levels of skipping are
possible.
skipping is controlled by a
tape loop .
none.
I, 000 lines/min.
500 lines/min.
667 lines/min.
333 lines/min.
25 inches/sec., max •
9, 000 lines/min., max.
Line length:
120 columns .
Line spacing:
6 lines/inch.
Character spacing:
10 chars/inch .
Drum cycle, I A & IIA: 60 m. sec •
Drum cycle, I B & II B: 90 m. sec •
623 Overhead: . . . . . . single clutch point.
,
I AUERBACI£L@Il
INPUT·OUTPUT: CDC 1612 PRINTER
§
243:081.624
.71
081.
.624 Effective speeds
I A: .
Adjustment
1,000/ (1+ [ (N + 6)/9])
lines/min.
1,000/(2+ [N/9]) lines/min.
667/ (1+ [ (N + 6)/9])
lines/min.
677/ (2+ [N/9] ) lines/min.
interline spacing in lines.
Note: [x] means "integer
part of x."
II A:.
I B:
II B: .
N:
These are shown graphically at end of the section.
Adjustments (Contd.)
.72
button
Single line feed:
Paper tractor adjustment,
button
adjustable
form tractor
Comment
moves to top of form
under control of format channel 8.
advances paper.
provides horizontal
positioning for paper
Widths of 4 to 19
inches.
Other Controls
Form
Comment
Motor Speed:
switch
Printer Ready:
combination
buttonlamp
switch
selects print drum
speed of either 1,000
or 667 rpm.
indicates that printer
is "ready."
Function
.63
Method
Top of form:
Demands on System
Component
m.sec
Condition per line
Processor:
IA
IIA
IB
lIB
or
Percentage
0.6
0.3
0.4
0.2
0.384
0.384
0.384
0.384
This is based on a full line of 120 characters. It
would be proportionately less for shorter lines
measured from the left margin. The time taken
in setting the data in storage is not taken into
account.
160/1604 Selector
Switch:
.73
Loading and Unloading
. 731 Volumes handled: .
.732 Replenishment time:
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments
Adjustment
Character phasing:
Penetration control:
Method
Comment
knob
performs fine adjustments of print quality
to corres pond to
motor speed selec o
tion.
adjusts hammer mounting plate print cylinder gap to accomodllte
different thicknesses
of paper.
adjusts line of print on
form.
adjusts paper tension.
knob
Form positioning:
knob
Paper tension:
knob
©
selects the correct inputs for 1604· A or 160
computer.
paper stack 12 to 14 inches high.
1 min.
printer must be stopped •
1 to 3 mins.
. 733 Adjustment time: .
.734 Optimum reloading
period:. . . . .
34 mins.
Basis: using 1,000 17 -inch 2-part forms, printing
full character set, 1 line every inch.
•8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION:
Check or
Error
Interlock
Action
Recording:
Output Llock size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
stop printer.
Imperfect
medium:
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
none.
none.
all codes valid.
micro-switch
check
micro-switch
check
stop printer.
10/62
CDC 1604-A
243:081.800
EFFECTIVE SPEED
CDC 1612 PRINTER
Condition: Print cylinder revolving at 1,000 r.p.m.
6,000
5,000
4,000
3,000
2,000
1,000
900
800
700
600
500
400
Effective Speed: Printed
Lines Per Minute
Restricted ,FOR TRAN. Set
300
Fuil Character Set
200
I
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
o
1/2
1
2.
Inter-Line Pitch in Inches
10/62
4
5
243:081.801
.INPUT-OUTPUT: CDC 1612 PRINTER
EFFECTIVE SPEED
CDC 1612 PRINTER
Condition: Print cylinder revolving at 667 r.p.m.
6,000
5,000
4,000
3,000
2,000
1,000
900
800
700
600
500
400
Effecti ve Speed: Printed
Lines Per Minute
300
Restricted FORTRAN Set
200
Full "Character Set
I
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
o
1/2
1
2
3
4
5
Inter-Line Pitch in Inches
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243:091.100
•
SImARD
II
REPORTS
EDP
CDC 1604-A
Input-Output
CDC 606 Magnetic Tape
INPUT-OUTPUT: CDC 606 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
§
.12
091.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .
.12
Description
Magnetic Tape Unit.
CDC 606.
The CDC 606 Magnetic Tape Unit provides the following facilities under program control.
While writing:
(1) Packing density either 200 or 556 rows per
inch.
(2) Binary or BCD coding.
(3) Interrupt on either next error, or when
ready.
(4) Skip bad spot.
(5) Write end-of-file mark.
(6) Rewind with or without interlock.
While reading:
(1) Binary or BCD coding.
(2) Read one file, or one record.
(3) Skip one file or one record, forward or
backward.
(4) Interrupt on either next error or when
ready.
(5) Rewind with or without interlock.
At any time, individual sense instructions can be
used to test for the following conditions:
(1) Parity Error.
(2) Length Error.
(3) End-of-tape mark sensed.
(4) Tape positioned at Load Point.
(5) Interrupt requested on unit.
(6) Unit available.
(7) Certain types of program error have occurred and have been suppressed (e. g.,
read selection while writing is in progress).
The CDC 606 Magnetic Tape Unit, controlled by the
CDC 1615 Control Unit, forms a magnetic tape system which can be attached to one or two computers.
If attached to two computers, such as a CDC 1604-A
and a CDC 160-A, control can be switched manually
or by program from one computer to the other.
The 606 has a peak data rate of 83,400 characters
per second. At this peak speed, one 606 requires
3.3 percent of the 1604-A running time. Any 1615
Control Unit can operate on two channels simultaneously and if three controllers are present, the
maximum of six tape units can operate simultaneously at this peak speed. The total load on the
central processor is 20 percent, and the character
rate is 500,400. No restrictions in the number (up
to six) of I/O units operating simultaneously are
necessary, provided no faster I/O unit is attached.
This is one of the major differences between the
CDC 1604 and CDC 1604-A.
©
Description (Contd.)
The tapes are completely compatible with IBM 729
written tapes having densities of either 200 or 556
characters per inch. Both CDC and IBM tape units
are similar except that the CDC uses pneumatic
capstans instead of pinch rollers. Reading and
writing can only be done in a forward direction;
searching for EDT, and rewinding can be done in
either direction. The maximum rewind time of a
2, ~OO foot tape is 80 seconds.
Data is stored in the computer in multiples of eight
characters; i. e., sets of full words. If a block
being read from tape does riot fill an exact number of;
words, the least significant end of the last word is
filled with zeroes before being put into the. core
storage. If this occurs, a length error is recorded,
and program examination of the Buffer Control Word
can determine the cause. However, it is not possible to determine how many zeroes have been incorporated in the record. The adding of zeros will
never occur when tapes written on the CDC 1604 or
CDC 1604-A are being used, but may occur when
·tapes written on other machines (including the CDC
160 and 160-A) are used.
.13
Availability:..
. 14
First Delivery:
.2
. 21
PHYSICAL FORM
Drive Mechanism
2 to 4 months.
. . . August, 1962.
. 211 Drive past the head: .
.212 Reservoirs
Number: .
Form: . .
Capacity: .
.213 Feed drive:
. 214 Take-up drive: .
.22
pneumatic capstan .
2.
vacuum.
each about 7 feet.
motor.
motor.
Sensing and Recording Systems
. 221 Recording system: .
. 222 Sensing. system: .
.223 Common system:
. 23
Multiple Copies: .
.24
Arrangement of Heads
magnetic head •
magnetic head.
two heads.
none.
Use..of station: .
Stacks: . . . . .
erase.
1.
Use of station:
Distance: . . .
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/ stack:.
Method of use:
recording.
0.4375 inches.
1.
.
.
•
.
Use of station: •
Distance: . . •
Stacks: • . . . .
Heads/ stack:. .
Method of use: •
1962 by Auerbach Corporotion and BNA Incorporated
7.
1 row at a time.
sensing.
0.3 inch.
1.
7.
1 row at a time.
10/62
CDC 1604-A
243:091.300
§
091.
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.31
Form of Storage
. 312 Phenomenon: .
· 322 Parallel by:
· 324 Track use
Data: . . .
Redundancy check: .
Timing:. • . •.
.
Control signals:
Unused: •
Total:
. 325 Row use
Data: •
Redundancy check: •
Timing: • . . . .
Control signals:
. 34
• 35
Blocks
plastic tape with
magnetizable sur.face.
magnetization .
.512 Block demarcation
Input: . . . . . . .
1 to N rows at 200 or 556
rows/inch.
7 tracks.
.52
1 to N words, limited by
available core storage;
8 rows per word.
gap on tape or cut-off specified in buffer control
word.
Output: • . . . . . . . cut-off specified in buffer
control word.
Input-Output Operations
6.
· 521 Input:. . . . . • . . . . 1 block or file forward,
with cut- off available at
N words; zeros fill in the
O.
last word.
O.
· 522 Output: . .
1 block forward of N
7.
words •
none.
· 523 Stepping: •
1 to N.
1 block or file forward.
· 524 Skipping: .
l.
1 block or file backward.
O.
erase 3 .. 5 inches forward
o(record and segment
(to skip defective tape
marks are optional).
areas).
unused: .
O.
· 525 Marking: • . . . . . . . end-of-file mark, preCap: .
0.75 inch inter-block gap.
ceded by an automatic
6.0 inch end-of-file mark.
six-inch gap, followed by
a longitudinal parity
Coding: . . . . . . • • . BCD mode; one tape row per
character and the regular
character as in Data Code
interblock gap.
Table No.3, even parity. · 526 Searching: . • . .
none •
1.
o (self clocking).
Format Compatibility:. mM BCD and binary codes
at 200 and 556 rows per
inch.
Physical Dimensions
0.50 inches .
2, 400 feet per reel.
. 351 Overall width:
.352 Length:. . . .
· 53
Code Translation:
matched codes.
.54
Format Control: .
none.
· 55
Control Operations
Disable: . • . . . .
Request interrupt: .
Select format:
Select code:
.4
CONTROLLER
. 41
Identity: . . . .
. 42
Connection to System
• Control Unit 1615.
6.
. 421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:
can be switched manually
or by program between
main and satellite computers.
. 43
Connection to Device: . up to 8 per 1615.
.44
Data Transfer Control
. 441 Size of load: . . .
. 442 Input- output areas:
·.443 Input- output area
access: . . . . .
• 444 Input- output area
lockout: . . .
. 445 Table control: . .
. 446 Synchronization: •
..
10/62
.51
Positional Arrangement
· 321 Serial by: •
.33
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.511 Size of block:
.311 Medium: . . .
· 32
·5
1 to N words, limited by
available core storage.
core storage.
each word.
none .
none.
automatic .
Rewind:
Unload: .
.56
only by unload.
yes, either for error or
when free.
no .
yes, binary mode or BCD
mode .
yes.
yes .
Testable Conditions
no.
yes.
yes.
yes, end-of-tape mark indicates a minimum of 8
feet remaining (approx.
20,000 chars).
Busy controller: . • . . no.
End of medium marks: end-of-tape mark
(reflective spot).
load point •
yes.
Ready to read: . •
Ready to write: •
yes. .
parity or length error
Error condition: .
separately.
whether selected to
Interrupt condition:
interrupt.
Disabled: • . . . .
Busy device: • . .
Output lock: . • .
Nearly exhausted:
243:091.600
CDC 606 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
§091 •
.72
•6
PERFORMANCE
· 61
Conditions
Function
I: .
I
Full rewind time: .
Interblock gap:
· 623 Overhead: . • . • . .
• 624 Effective speed,
characters/ sec:
30,000 •
Condition
Processor:
Processor:
max4m.sec
max 4
1. 3 min.
0.75 inch
max8m.sec/
block
m.sec.
1.3 min.
0.75 inch.
max 8
m. sec/
block.
83,400N/(N
+698)
(See Graph)
30,000N/
(N+240).
• 73
absence of ring inhibits tape writing.
Load Point:
plastic ring
affixed to
tape reel
button
Unload:
button
• 0032
• 0032
or
. 732 Replenishment time: •
. 734 Optimum reloading
period: . . • • . . .
reel.
2,400 feet; for 1, 000 char
blocks, 5,000,000 at 200
char/inch; 11,300,000
chars at 556 char/inch .
1. 0 to 1. 5 minutes .
4 minutes.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Percentage
3.3•
1.2•
Error
Check or
Interlock
Recording:
read after write with
lateral parity check
Reading:
lateral and longitudinal parity checks
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
Input area overflow:
check
• 71
Adjustments
Output block,size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
present.
all codes valid
reflective spot on
tape
none.
none.
check
Adjustment:
Method: .
Comment: .
recording density.
switch.
selects high or low density,
but is overridden by program changes.
©
lowers tape into reservoirs and winds
tape forward to load
point.
removes tape from
reservoirs and
raises upper portion
of head assembly.
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled
Storage:
Capacity: • . . .
.8
m. sec per word
II
select 1 of 8
addresses.
200 char/
inch.
Demands on Sxstem
Component
Comment
II
• 621 Nominal or peak speeds: 83,400
· 622 Important parameters
Name
Density:. • . . •.
556 char/inch
Start or stop time:
Form
dial
File protection ring:
Speeds
Condition
.63
Unit Number
Selector:
high density
(556 char/inch).
low density
(200 char/inch).
II:
.62
Other Controls
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Parity error:
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Action
indicator, alarm
and program
sense.
indicator, alarm
and program
sense.
stop transfer, set
counter.
stalls computer.
programmed sense.
programmed sense.
10/62
243:091.800
§
CDC 1604-A
091.
EFFECTIVE SPEED
CDC 606
1,000,000
7
4
2
----
100,000
7
~'b ~~
4
~,.
'O'(s:J~~~\.~ .... "'"
~o~«X
~
~
~.,,~
2
~~ ~\.o
Characters Per
Second
'O~~ee~
/~
7
/
/
4
2
1,000
/
'/ /
/
//
,
/
7
4
2
100
2
10
7
100
2
4
1,000
Characters Per Block
.--_ _..,-A
10/62
I AUERBAC~~
2
4
7
10,000·
243: 101.100
_STANDARD·
EDP
•
REPORTS
CDC 1604-A
Input-Output
161O-A Control Unit
INPUT-OUTPUT: 1610-A CONTROL UNIT
§
.12
101.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:. .
.12
Description
Description (Contd.)
In the output mode it can operate one:
• mM 5·33 Card Read Punch, used as a card
Control Unit.
161O-A.
punch at 100 cards per minute.
• mM 407 Accounting Machine, used as a line
printer at 150 lines per minute.
• mM 523 Gang Summary Punch, used as a card
The CDC 161O-A Control Unit contains independent
input and output connections which can link a group
of mM peripheral units to either the CDC 1604,
1604-A, 160, or 160-A computers. In the case
where a 1604 or 1604-A is operating in conjunction
with a CDC 160 or 160-A, the CDC 161O-A and its
associated units can be switched manually, but not
by program, from one computer to the other.
punch at 100 cards per minute.
The printer, either punch and either card reader
can be physically connected at one time, and each
may be separately addressed. The mM 88 and 407
units may be used in their normal off-line manner.
No gang or summary punch is available with either
the 523 or 533. On-line control of the 88, 407 and
523 by the computer requires modification of the
control panels so that each unit is wired in the
CALCULATE ON state (the 533 is wired directly and
has no provision for control panel modifications).
The CDC works in row binary; that is, it treats a
card as containing twelve 80-bit words. Cards
punched in column binary or Binary Coded Decimal
require programmed conversion.
All data transfers correspond to a card image. Each
80-bit row of a card corresponds to the least significant 40-bit patterns of two computer words. The
information on a card, therefore, is stored in 24
core storage locations (as opposed to 10 words when
BCD format is used).
In the input mode the 1610 can operate one:
• mM 88 High Speed Collator, used as a card
reader; either one or both independent card
feeds at 650 cards per minute individually or
1,300 cards per minute jOintly; or one feed
with a second read station at 650 cards per
minute.
All external function code instructions relevant to
the 1604-A computer are listed in Section :121.
.13 Availability:. .
2 months.
• mM 533 Card Read Punch, used as a card
reader at 200 cards per minute.
©
. 14
First Delivery: •
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
1961.
10/62
243: 111. 100
CDC 1604-A
Simultaneous Operations
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
~
.2
Ill.
•1
SPECIAL UNITS
. 11
Identity:....
. 12
Description
CONFIGURATION
CONDITIONS: .'. . . none .
incorporated in central
processor •
CLASSES OF OPERATIONS
A 1604-A computer contains seven input-output
channels. Six of these channels are arranged in
pairs of one for input and one for output. These
three pairs are used for the input-output devices
and are fully buffered. The seventh channel is
not buffered and requires central processor control.
Class
Members
A:
int;erna1 processing.
transmit output data to any
one device connected
with channels 2, 4, 6.
C: . . . . . . . . . . transmit input data from any
one device connected with
channels 1, 3, 5.
D:
transmit output data on
channel 7.
E:
transmit input data on chllnnel 7.
paper advance.
F:
magnetic tape rewind.
B: •.
Logically, up to eight controllers can be connected
to each pair of channels, and up to eight devices can
be connected to some controllers; however, power
supply considerations impose lower practical limits
on many combinations.
Each channel operates independently during data
transfers between an input-output device and a block
of loca tions in the store.
Magnetic tape rewind and paper advance are independent operations.
The CDC 1604-A has an Auxiliary Sequence Control
which controls single word transfers betweeen core
storage and the buffered input-output channels. This,
unlike the CDC 1604, is independent of the instruction sequence. Provided no unit with a transfer rate
of greater than 125,000 characters per second is
attached, there are no limitations to the simultaneity
of the input-output units; that is, the CDC 1604-A
can simultaneously compute, input from three channels, and output to three channels.
©
.4
RULES
a + d + e = at most 1.
b
= at most 3.
c
=atmost3.
f
=atmostN.
N = number of appropriate devices attached.
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243: 121.1 01
•
STANDARD
ED:!?
_
CDC 1604-A
REPQRTS
Instruction List
INSTRUCTION LIST
§
121.
OP
INSTRUCTIONt
Index
Designator Addr.
OPERATION
Octal Code
Arithmetic
ADD
SUB
MUI
DVI
b
b
b
b
m
m
m
m
14-----15-----24-----25------
MUF
DVF
b
b
m
m
26-----27 ------
RAD
RSB
RAO
RSO
INA
b
b
b
b
b
m
m
m
m
Y
70-----71-----72-----73-----11------
INI
b
Y
51------
ENA
ENQ
ENI
b
b
b
Y
Y
Y
10-----04-----50------
(A) + (M) ---+ A
(A) - (M)~ A
(A) x (M) ---+ QA; least significant portion in A
(QA) + (M) --;.. A; remainder~ Q; Sign of Q must be preset
to the sign of A
(A) x (M) ~ AQ; least significant portion in Q.
(AQ) + (M)~ A; remainder ~ Q; jf A is zero, it must be
preset to the sign of Q
(M) + (A)~ A --;.. M
(M) - (A)~ A~M
(M)+ 1~A~M
(M) - 1~A~M
y + (A)~A. Y is a 14-bit plus sign literal in the y field of
the i!\5'truction
Y + (B )~ Bb; if the b designator has a zero value then this
instruction becomes a pass, or do nothing
Y~(A)
Y~(~
Y~(B
)
Floating: Point Arithmetic
FAD
FSB
FMU
FDV
b
b
b
b
m
m
m
m
30-----31-----32-----33------
SCA
b
k
34------
SCQ
b
k
35------
(A) + (M)--;" A
(A) - (M) ~ A
(A) x (M) ~ A
(A) + (M) -+ A
rounded;
rounded;
rounded;
rounded;
rounding
rounding
rounding
rounding
residue'-+ Q
residue ~ Q
residue ~ Q
residue ~ Q
A left until (A47) =I (A46) or K = 0
Reduce K by one per shift; Kfinal ~ Bb
AQ left until (A47) =I (A46) or K = 0
Reduce K by one per shift; Kfinal--;" Bb;O:s.. K.$. 777778
Logic
SST
b
m
40------
Set (An) = 1 for (Mn) = 1
SCL
b
m
41------
Clear (An) to zero for (Mu) = 1
SCM
b
m
42------
SSU
b
m
43------
(Mn)~
LDL
ADL
SBL
STL
b
b
b
b
m
m
m
m
44-----45-----46-----47------
(A) + [logical product of (Q) and (M) ] ~ A
(A) - [logical product of (Q) and (M)]--;" A
Logical product of (A) and (Q)~ M
Complement (An) for (Mn) = 1
An for (Qn) = 1
Logical product of (Q) and (M) ~ A
Logic Shift
ARS
QRS
LRS
b
b
b
k
k
k
01-----02-----03------
ALS
QLS
LLS
b
b
b
k
k
k
05-----06-----07------
Shift (A) right K binary places; sign bit is extended to the right.
Shift (Q) right K binary places; sign bit is extended to the right.
Shift (AQ) right K binary places; sign bit of A is extended to the
right, lowest order bits of A shift into highest order bits of Q.
Circular shift (A) left K binary places.
Circular shift (Q) left K binary places.
Circular shift (AQ) left K binary places.
t For definition of symbols used, see Instruction List Nomenclature at end of Instruction Listing.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
CDC 1604-A
243:121.102
INSTRUCTION LIST-Contd.
§121.
OP
INSTRUCTION t
Index
Designator Addr. Octal Code
OPERATION
Data Transfers
12-----13-----16------
LDA
LAC
LDQ
LQC
STA
STQ
LID
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
20-----21-----52------
LIL
b
m
53------
17------
(M)-"""'A
Complement of
(M)~A
(M)~Q
Complement of
(M)~
Q
(A)~M
(Q)~M
(M38-24~Bb; the upper address of file M replaces the contents of the indicated index register.
(M14-0)~ Bb; the lower address field of M replaces the contents of the indicated index register.
SID
b
m
56------
(Bb)~ M38-24; store the contents of the designated index
register into the upper address field of M.
SIL
b
m
57------
SAU
SAL
b
b
m
m
60-----61------
(Bb)--;..M14_0; store the contents of the designated index
register into the lower address field of M.
(AOO -14)---;' M38 -24
(AOO-14)~ MOO-14
Branching - no indexing
AJP
AJP
AJP
AJP
AJP
AJP
AJP
AJP
QJP
QJP
QJP
QJP
QJP
QJP
QJP
QJP
SLJ
SLJ
SLJ
SLJ
SLJ
SLJ
SLJ
SLJ
SLS
SLS
SLS
SLS
SLS
SLS
SLS
SLS
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
J
j
j
j
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
220----221----222----223----224----225----226----227 ----230----231----232----233----234----235----236----237----750----751----752----753----754----755----756----757----760----761----762----763----764----765----766----767 - ----
Jump to M if (A) = 0 i.e., positive or negative zero.
Jump to M if (A) t- o.
Jump to M if (A) is positive.
Jump to M if (A) is negative.
Return Jump to M if (A) = O.
Return Jump to M if (A) t- o.
Return Jump to M if (A) is positive.
Return Jump to M if (A) is negative.
Jump to M if (Q) = O.
Jump to M if (Q) t- o.
Jump to M if (Q) is positive.
Jump'to M if (Q) is negative.
Ruturn Jump to M if (Q) = O.
Return Jump to M if (Q) t- o.
Return Jump to M if (Q) is positive.
Return Jump to M if (Q) is negative.
Jump to M unconditionally.
Jump to M if lever key 1 is set; lever keys are on the console.
Jump to M if lever key 2 is set.
Jump to M if lever key 3 is set.
Return Jump to M: unconditionally.
Return Jump to M if lever key 1 is set.
Return Jump to M if lever key 2 is set.
Return Jump to M if lever key 3 is set.
Stop Unconditionally
Stop if Stop Key 1 is set}
{if the Console Run-Stop Key is
Stop if Stop Key 2 is set and in the step condition; otherwise,
Stop if Stop Key 3 is set
IJump to M.
Stop Unconditionally
Stop if Stop Key 1 is set}
{ if the Console Run -Stop Key is
Stop if Stop Key 2 is set and in the step condition; otherwise,
Stop if Stop Key 3 is set
Return Jump to M.
t For definition of symbols used, see Instruction List Nomenclature at end of Instruction Listing.
10/62
INSTRUCTION LIST
243:121.103
INSTRUCTION LIST -Contd.
§ 121.
OP
INSTRUCTION t
Index
Designator Addr.
OPERATION
Octal Code
Branching on Index
ISK
b
y
54------
IJP
b
m
55-----~
if (Bb) = Y; Clear Bb and Exit to the Upper Instruction of the
next storage word.
if (Bb) :f Y; (BD) + 1~ Bb and Half Exit, advance to the lower instruction.
if no Index Register is indicated (b = 0 or 7) then a Half Exit
is taken.
ISK is normally restricte'fi to the upper instruction.
if (B~) :f 0; (BJj) - 1-»- B , Jump to M.
if (B ) = 0; Continue.
Branching on Storage
SSK
b
m
36------
SSH
b
m
37------
if (M) is negative; Full Exit.
if (M) is positive; Half Exit.
Shift (M) circularly left one bit, then
if (MOO) = 1; Full Exit
if (Moo) = 0; Half Exit.
Branching on Storage Search
In the following instructions
if b = 0, only the word at storage location M is searched.
if b = 7, indirect addressing is used to obtain the execution
address and the b designator.
if (Bb) = 0, no search is made.
Search (Bb~words starting with the last address M + (Bb ) -1;
reduce (B ) by one, continue search until condition specified
is met or search is exhausted.
ESQ
b
m
64------
If (M + (B b ) - 1) = (A), Full Exit.
If search is exhausted, Half Exit.
Positive zero and negative zero are recognized as the same
quantity.
THS
b
m
65------
If (M + (Bb) - 1) > (A), Full Exit.
If search is exhausted, Half Exit.
Positive zero is greater than negative zero.
MEQ
b
m
66------
If the logical product of (Q) and (M
+ (Bb)
- 1) = (A),
Full Exit.
If search is exhausted, Half Exit.
MTH
b
m
67 - -----
If the logical product of (Q) and (M
+
(Bb ) - 1) > (A),
Half Exit.
Input-Output
!NT
b
m
62------
OUT
b
m
63------
Transfer (Bb) words from an external equipment into memory,
beginning at the last address, M + (Bb) - 1.
Transfer to an external equipment (BD) words from memory
beginning at the last address, M + (Bb) - 1.
External Functions
See Instruction List Appendix for the large variety of operations
provided. They are specified by considering "m" as three
parts:
Channel
-one octal digit
Equip. No
-one octal digit
Operation
-three octal digits
and the Index Designator as:
Select/Sense
-one octal digit
t For definition of symbols used, see Instruction List Nomenclature, at end of Instruction Listing.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
CDC 1604-A
243: 121.1 04
INSTRUCTION LIST NOMENCLATURE
Symbol
A: •
Ac~mul.ator •
b: .
IndEtx Designator.
desfgnated index register ••
condition designator for jump and stop instructions.
unmodified count.
tno4nied count; K = k + (Bb).
~m~odified operand address.
modified operand address; M = m + (Bb).
Unmodified operand.
modified operand; Y = Y + (Bb).
tontents of a register or storage location.
Bb: •
j :
k:
K:
m:
M: •
y:
Y:
0:
10/62
j?efprition
243:121.105
INSTRUCTION LIST
§
INSTRUCTION LIST APPENDIX
EXTERNAL FUNCTIONS
121
OP
EXF
74
INSTRUCTION
Address
Index
Equip. No.
Select/Sense Channel
o or 7
o to
1 to 6
7
OPERATION
Sub- Opena tion
000 to 777
SELECT INTERNAL
INTERRUPTS AND REAL TIME 'CLOCK
74
74
74
0
0
0
0
0
C
0
0
0
OCO
OCI
000
74
74
74
74
74
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100
101
000
000
070
1
2
0
Interrupt on Channel C inactive.
Remove Interrupt Selection on Channel C.
Clear all Channel C Selection
C = channel = 1 - 6.
Interrupt on Arithmetic Faults.
Remove Interrupt on Arithmetic Faults.
Start Real- Time Clock.
Stop Real-Time Clock.
Clear Arithmetic Faults.
SENSE INTERNAL
74
74
7
7
0
0
0
0
OCO
OCI
74
74
7
7
0
0
0
0
lAO
lAI
CONSOLE EQUIPMENT
Exit on Channel C active.
Exit on Channel C inactive
C = channel = 1 - 6.
Exit on Arithmetic Fault A.
Exit on no Arithmetic Fault A.
A = 1: Divide
= 2: Shift
= 3: Overflow
= 4: Exponent
SELECT (Using Console Equipment)
Input
Select Typewriter for Input, and Interrupt
on Carriage Return.
Select Typewriter for Input, and No Interrupt
on Carriage Return.
Select Paper Tape Reader, and No Interrupt
on End of Tape.
Select Paper Tape Reader, and Set End of
Tape Indicator.
Select Paper Tape Reader, and Interrupt on
End of Tape.
74
0
1
1
140
74
0
1
1
100
74
0
1
1
200
74
0
1
1
210
74
0
1
1
220
74
74
0
0
2
2
1
1
100
110
74
74
74
0
0
0
2
2
2
1
1
1
200
210
240
Output
Select Typewriter for Output, Assembly Mode.
Select Typewriter for Output, Character
Mode.
Select Paper Tape Punch, Assembly Mode.
Select Paper Tape Punch, Character Mode.
Turn Paper Tape Punch Motor Off.
1:jENSE (Using Console EqUipment)
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
200
201
210
211
140
141
100
101
Input
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
74
74
7
7
2
2
1
1
200
201
Output
Exit on Paper Tape Punch Out of Tape.
Exit on Paper Tape Punch Not Out of Tape.
©
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
Paper Tape Reader, End of Tape.
Paper Tape Reader, No End of Tape.
Paper Tape Reader in Assembly Mode.
Paper Tape Reader in Character Mode.
Typewriter in Lower Case.
Typewriter in Upper Case.
Carriage Return from Typewriter.
No Carriage Return from Typewriter.
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243: 121.1 06
CDC 1604-A
INSTRUCTION LIST APPENDIX-Contd.
§ 121.
OP
EXF
74
INSTRUCTION
Address
Index
Select/Sense Channel
Equip. No.
o or 7
1 to 6
o to 7
OPERATION
Sub: Operation
000 tP 7Y7
SELECT (Using CDC 1610-A Control Unit)
CDC 161O-A CARD CONTROL UNIT
74
74
74
74
74
74
0
0
0
0
0
0
74
74
74
74
0
0
0
0
I
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
001
002
003
005
006
007
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
001
002
005
006
Input
Select Primary Read Station.
Select Secondary Read Station.
Select Primary and Secondary Read Stations.
Select Primary Read Station and Interrupt.
Select Secondary Read Station and Interrupt.
Select Primary and Secondary Read Stations
and Interrupt.
Output
Select Printer.
Select Punch.
Select Printer and Interrupt.
Select Punch and Interrupt.
SENSE (Using CDC 161O-A Control Unit)
74
74
74
74
7
7
7
7
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
002
003
004
005
74
74
74
74
74
74
7
7
7
7
7
7
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
002
003
004
005
010
Input
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
74
74
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
7
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
~ll
SELECT (Using CDC 1612 Printer).
Output Only
Select Printer.
Single Space the Printer.
Double Space the Printer.
Select Format Channel 7.
Select Format Channel 8.
Clear Monitor Channels 1 - 6.
Select Monitor Channel N: N = 1 - 6.
OPO
001
OP2
003
ob4
r~
SENSE (Using CDC 1612 Printer)
Output Only
Exit on Printer Ready.
Exit on Printer Not Ready.
OpO
o~n
I
10/62
Reader Ready.
Reader Not Ready.
1604 Selected.
1604 Not Selected.
Output
Exit on Printer Ready.
Exit on Printer Not Ready.
Exit on Punch Ready.
Exit on Punch Not Ready.
Exit on 1604 Selected.
Exit on 1604 Not Selected.
CDC 1612 PRINTER
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
on
on
on
on
243:121.107
INSTRUCTION LIST
INSTRUCTION LIST APPENDIX-Contd.
§
121.
OP
EXF
74
INSTRUCTION
Address
Index
Sub-Operation
Equip. No.
Select/Sense Channel
o or 7
o to 7
1 to 6
OPERATION
000 to 777
CDC 1615 MAGNETIC TAPE CONTROL UNIT
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
ON!
ON2
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
400
401
402
403
404
Output
Select Tape N to Write Binary.
Select Tape N to Write Coded.
Prepare Selected Tape to Write Binary.
Prepare Selected Tape to Write Coded.
Write End-Of-File Mark on Selected Tape.
Select Interrupt When Write Tape Next Ready.
Rewind Selected Write Tape.
Backspace Selected Write Tape.
Rewind-Unload Selected Write Tape.
Clear Interrupt Selections on Write Tape.
Set Low Density on Selected Write Tape.
Set High Density on Selected Write Tape.
Skip Bad Spot on Selected Write Tape.
Select Interrupt on Next Error.
SENSE
--
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
74
74
74
74
74
0
0
0
0
0
C
C
C
C
C
2
2
2
2
2
ON1
ON2
2Nl
2N2
001
74
0
C
2
002
74
0
C
2
~01
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
202
003
203
004
005
006
206
007
400
401
402
404
©
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
on Ready to Write.
on Not Ready to Write.
on Write Reply Parity Error.
on No Write Reply Parity Error.
on Write Reply Length Error.
on No Write Reply Length Error.
on End-of-Tape Marker.
on Not End-of-Tape Marker.
on Ready to Select.
on Not Ready to Select.
on Load Point.
on Not Load Point.
on Interrupt on Write Tape.
on No Interrupt on Write Tape.
on Write Program Error.
on No Write Program Error.
Input
Select Tape!:! to Read Binary One Record.
Select Tape!:! to Read Coded One Record.
Select Tape!:! to Read Binary One File.
Select Tape!:! to Read Coded One File.
Prepare Selected Tape to Read Binary One
Record.
Prepare Selected Tape to Read Coded One
Record.
Prepare Selected Tape to Read Binary One
File.
Prepare Selected Tape to Read Coded One F.ile.
Move Selected Read Tape Forward One Record
Search File Mark Forward.
Select Interrupt When Read Tape Next Ready.
Rewind Selected Read Tape.
Backspace Selected Read Tape.
Search File Mark Backward.
Rewind-Unload Selected Read Tape.
Clear Interrupt Selections on Read Tape.
Set Low Density on Selected Read Tape.
Set High Density on Selected Read Tape.
Select Interrupt on Next Error.
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243:121.108
CDC 1604-A
INSTRUCTION LIST APPENDIX-Contd.
§
121.
OP
EXF
74
INSTRUCTION
Index
Address
Equip. No.
Select/Sense Channel
o or
7
1 to 6
o to 7
OPERATION
Sub-Opemtion
000 to 777
SENSE
---
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
CDC 1617 CARD READER
74
74
74
74
74
0
0
0
0
0
C
C
C
C
C
4
4
4
4
4
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
Ready to Read.
Not Ready to Read.
Read Parity Error.
No Read Parity Error.
Read Length Error.
No Read Length Error.
End of-File Mark.
Not End-of-File Mark.
Ready To Select.
Not Ready To Select.
Load Point.
Not Load Point.
Interrupt on Read Tape.
No Interrupt on Read Tape.
Read Program Error.
No Read Program Error.
SELECT
000
001
002
005
006
Channel Clear.
Read continuously (Free Run).
Read Single Cycle.
Read continuously and Translate.
Read Single Cycle and Translate.
SENSE
--
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
74
10/62
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
4'
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Q02
003
004
d05
010
011
020
021
040
041
100
~01
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
Exit
if Ready.
if Not Ready.
on Reader Normal.
on Reader Not Normal.
on Input Hopper Empty.
on Input Hopper Not Empty.
on Stacker Full.
on Stacker Not Full.
on Amplifier Failure.
on No Amplifier Failure.
on Feed Failure.
on No Feed Failure.
243:131.100
.STANOARD
EDP
•
CDC 1604-A
Coding Specimen
Machine Coc!e
REPORTS
CODING SPECIMEN: MACHINE CODE
§
131.
.1
PROBLEM
This program adds one record to the end of magnetic tape 1. It is assumed the end of data on tape is marked by
an end-of-file mark. The program advances the tape past the end of file mark, backs up two records, advances
one record and then writes the additional record from memory 60000-60177, and then writes a new end-of-file
mark.
The reason for backing up two after reading end-of-file, then advancing by one, is so that writing shall follow a
forward movement. If writing follows a back-up, especially over an end-of-file mark, the spacing between records will not be constant •
.2
FLOW CHART
l'
~NO-.J
~I---------Yes
No
NO--®
No
~------~--Yes~~~~:r----~
,---------------------------------------------yes
"(I--------Yes
~------------------------------Yes
Write
Addi.tional
Record
~~~~---------Yes
Note: "Ready to read" implies
"previous function completed."
Yes
8
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243: 131.300
§
CflC 1604-A
131.
.3
CODING
(50000)
=
EXF
SLJ
32010
50000
Is mag. ~pe 1 ready to read?
If not re1Ldy, wait.
6
6
Temp + 1
00003
Set B6 to temp. address 1
Store term address in lower (0003)
(50001) '" ENI
SIL
7
0
(50002)
=
EXF
EXF
0
3
32010
Temp
Select Mag. Tape 1 to read
Read one word to memory - tape moves
one block.
(50003)
=
EXF
SLJ
7
0
32010
50003
Sense if ready to read again
If not ready, wait.
(50004)
=
EXF
SLJ
7
0
32012
50001
Sense if end-of-file read
If not end-of-file - read again.
(50005)
= EXF
0
32011
Move back one record
Pass
(50006)
=
EXF
SLJ
7
0
32010
50006
Sense, if ready to read
If not ready, wait.
(50007)
= EXF
0
32011
Move back one record.
SLJ
7
0
32011
50010
Sense, if ready to read
If not ready, wait.
Pass
(50010)
= EXF
(50011)
=
ENI
SIL
6
6
Temp + 1
00003
Set B6 to Term Address
Store term. add. in 00003.
(50012)
=
EXF
EXF
0
3
32010
Temp
Select mag. tape 1
Activate read
(50013)
= EXF
7
0
42012
50013
Sense end-of-file on tape 1
If not ready, wait.
SIL
6
6
Rec+200
00004
Set B6 to term address
Enter term. add. in 00004.
SLJ
(50014)
= ENI
(50015)
=
EXF
EXF
0
4
42010
Rec
Select Write
Write activate
(50016)
=
EXF
SLJ
7
0
42012
50016
Sense end of write indicator
If not ready, wait.
(50017)
=
EXF
Pass
0
42016
Write end-of-file mark on tape
(50020)
=
EXF
SLJ
7
0
42012
50020
Skip if ready
Wait
(50021) = EXF
Pass
0
32015
Rewind
(50022) = EXF
SLJ
7
0
32010
50022
Sense end of rewind
Wait
0
50000
0
Stop
(50023)
= SLS
0
Reprinted from CDC 1604 Programming Training Manual, pp. G-1 through G- 3.
10/62
243: 132.1 00
•
STANDARD
EDP
_
CDC 1604·A
REPORTS
Coding Specimen
CODAP
§
CODING SPECIMEN: CODAP
132 .
.1
CODING SHEET
©
1962 by Auerbach Carporatian and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243:133.100
•
II
STANDARD
EDP
CDC 1604·A
RlPORTS
Coding Specimen
FORTRAN·60
CODING SPECIMEN: FORTRAN·60
§
133 .
.1
CODING SPECIMEN
PROGRAM TEST
DIMENSION A(20000),~(20000)
COMMON A,R
EQU!VA~ENCE (A,R)
1=7
END
TfiST. n, 24, 47041
AAA - nonon,
RAA - nOOln,
WA~
·
&
AAA01
~AA·
00006,
PAA. 00010
= 30736
WAA
750 00000 :;on 00000
571 RAA01 501 00000
MAIN PROGRAt1
RAtlOD
120 KAAOl 61n RAAOI
RAII01
531 RAA07 50n 00000
561 RAAOl 531 RA.AOl
RAA02
BAA03
·
IAA - 00006,
VAA - OU020
PROGRAM PRf::AMLJLE
AAAOO
•
30736,
8AA. 00002.
TAA. 00020.
750 AAAOO
ann
00000
}
MAP Language
CO~~TANTS
KUOO
KH01
000 00000 000 4704U
oon 00000 000 00005
• ASSIGNED VAHIARLES
• REASSIGNEU VAHIABLES
• NORMAL VARJA8LES
• ARRAYS
WAAOD
WASOO
••
000 OOUOO
000 oouoo
oon
ono
00000
00000
A
B
END
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
12/62
243: 134. 100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
CDC 1604-A
Coding Specimen
FORTRAN-62
R!PORTS
CODING SPECIMEN: FORT.RAN-62
§
134 .
•1
CODING SPECIMEN
'START MONITOR ~UN.
BEGIN JOH 006
08/31/62
COOP.AAA9-001.S.ANSON.
.3.10UO.3.PROGRA~ FIL~TAPE REEL 60S;
---.£:QR-T-R-A-N-.-t.:1-!:;~ROQRAfn.. ILTAp_e_-- ---- . - - . -..- - - - - - - - - - j
DIMENSION JJll00)
DO 20 1=1.100
JJ I 1)=1
20 CO~TINUE
--------c·-3no,----nl~~-~un-----------·· -. -.--.-- ---.------111=IL+9
WRITE OUTPUT TAP. 14.920.IJJII).I=IL.IU)
E"D FILE 14
IFIIU-100)30.40.40
________~4~0~Cg_~tN~~ITS
920
FOR~AT«020»
END
,ILTAPE
__.-------_._------------_.
------_.
IDENT
FiL '(Ape-;
LWA+l
I
00214
~8LtQl!t.LL---o-0-0-0-0 --,-iLTiiP"'E---------1
E~TERNAL SYMBOLS
00001
GOUT
ERROR
00U02
00003
INGOUT
r.0004
RANGE
,WA
00000
EN~~~~r-·------_---
0'0 0 05 .
r. 0 0 06
77777
~u
~l 000 I.)
00" U
5U
51
7S
2
00026+
75
4
~000U4
50
0
OoOOu
50
10
75
75
000011
00041+ +
X00005
X00002
n 00000
0 00210+ +
0 77~3,1
0 00035+
u0007+
3
0 00035+
0 '1000 0
00U30+
00031+
~i)
-ifou32+
l2
11
ENTRY
F!LTAPE
SLJ
0
00001
000l~+
o0 o2T+--Y-~---- XooOO'2
QUITS
uOOuu+
75
; 00025+
I
l'Ou33+
'I.LTAPE
••
~2
22
75
00034+
I,
,0
10uB) IN!
SLJ
•
~TJ
+
~TJ
ENA
RTJ
RTJ
2
0
1
(OOA)
ENDGOUT
ERROR
ri --.14
0
WREOF
ERROR
LOA .- -·o"'Ti./
INA
AJP
AJP
SLJ
0
Z
M
-100
(40)
13U)
(40)
-----'-~.
110010-
IJG212+
n0212.
aoou.
i': n 011+
00210+
00012 ...
10
04
00013+
75
50
00014+
o0 ul'5~ -
7':>
50
~3
51
00016.
10
00017.
20
15
11
UOO?o.
,,0021.
00022+
--
00-023+
00024+
22
50
10
61
75
50
uo
oli
75
50
OC U41+ +
001140+
XDOOQ3
II 0 0 IJ!!
4 XOOO02
00000
0
2 00212+ +
2 77776
2 00001 10UA)
0 00207+
0 1/ U21-;+
0 77776.
2 001126+
0 00000
2 00043+ 100 I
0 00023.
4 XOUOOl. ell)
0 OUOOII
0 00042+
0
77777
•
~1]0002
OOOOU
IN.i1
STA
IL
LOA
IL
INA
9
STA
0 I~
_._. __JL.lL ___....!._4___
ENA
0 .14
ENQ
0 F,920
RTJ
-- -- INGOU-r--
Uou43+
n0207+
00210+
00211.
JJ
I
III
K (1)
~0212+
~.?U
IL
... ______ _
T '.21
00001
00002
00003
L19
LIB
LIB
00004
L
1t:-----2IL---
IN!
ENA
STA
sue
I~L_
AJP
2-1
2 +1
0 I
0
IU
[I
-1
-p--(00BI.1
JJ
ENA
SAL
RTJ
C(l)+l
GOUT
ZRn
ZRn
••
~TJ
Ll9
r'-o 0 05
RTJ
.DOqO~
NO
ass
ess
ass
KSS
ass
ess
LIe
___ .
OOii'u-n---
DEFINEU
NO llNOEI'-fNED SYMaOLS
NULLS
(201
LIB
ENO
100
1
1
1
1
1
---- ----.GOUT
ERROR
INGOUT
END GOUT
WRcOF'-QUITS
j:' I LTA'P-E---
nOU~LY
.K.I1I .•
._--_._--- ._------------- --._------_.!-.
·0
ERROR
© 1962 by Auerbach
"0 MINUTES. 21 SE'CONOS.
E.NO JaR
ryo~,.
Corporation and BNA Incorporated
12/62
243:141.100
•
II
STANMRD
EDP
CDC 1604-A
Data Code Table
1612 Printer
REPORTS
DATA CODE TABLE NO.1
§
· 22
141.
Character Structure
.1
USE OF CODE: • • • . CDC 1612 Printer, internal.
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
• 222 Less significant
pattern: • . . • • • • 3 bits: 4, 2 and 1 •
. 21
Character Size: • • • • 6 bits.
• 23
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
.221 More significant
pattern: . • • • • • • 3 bits: 4, 2 and 1.
Character Codes
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
:
8
Blank
Y
-
Q
+
H
1
1
9
/
z
J
R
A
I
2
2
¢
S
]
K
%
B
<
3
3
=
T
.
L
$
C
4
4
of
U
(
M
*
D
)
5
5
:5
---il>-
N
t
E
~
6
6
.
V
W
0
~
F
'1
7
7
[
X
P
>
G
;
NOTE:
==
~
Characters~, %, and $ appear for business application and are replaced
respectively by /\ • v. and.., for scientific application.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA
Incor~rated
10/62
243: 142. 100
.srANDA..
II
ED]?
CDC 1604-A
,[PO,rs
Data Code Table
Typewriter
DATA CODE TABLE NO.2
§
• 22
142.
•1
USE OF CODE: • • • • Input-Output Typewriter.
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
.21
Character Size:
6 bits.
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
0
1
2
0
1
T
L
Z
2
3
4
5
6
7
• 221 More significant
pattern:
• • • 3 bits: 4, 2 and 1.
.222 Less significant
pattern:
• • • 3 bits: 4, 2 and 1.
· 23
Character Codes
MORE SIGNIFICANT PA'ITERN
UPPER CASE
LOWERCASE
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
A
W
E
R
0
G
Space I
H
P
N
C
M
V
Character Structure
D
,
-
J
i
B
S
Y
F
U
Q
:
Tab
@
$
¢
t
1
-
r
g
i
p
c
v
0
'1
CR
"
0
)
K
( Upper ILower
X
&
Back
Space
#
%
*
Space
h
n
m
Case Case
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
e
z
a
w
,
-
d
j
b
B
s
y
u
/
q
cr
f
k
9
x
;
Tab
+
6
7
7
2
Back
Space
4
6
•
3
¢
5
1
Upper Lower
Case Case
10/62
243:143.100
•
STANOARD
EDP
_
REPORlS
CDC 1604-A
Data Code Table
Magnetic Tape
DATA CODE TABLE NO.3
§
.22
143.
.1
USE OF CODE:
.221 More signficant
pattern: •
• magnetic tape BCD
internal.
.2
STRUCTURE CODE
.21
Character Size:
. 222 Less significant
pattern: .
.23
. 6 bits.
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
• 3 bits: 4, 2 and 1.
.
. 3 bits: 4, 2 and 1.
Character Codes
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
a
a
1
Character Structure
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(blank)
Y
-
Q
&
H
9
/
z
J
R
A
I
K
(minus)
B
(plus)
a
2
2
0
S
record
mark
3
3
#
T
,
L
$
C
4
4
@
U
%
M
*
D
5
5
V
N
E
6
6
W
0
F
7
7
X
P
G
©
tape
mark
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
a
(period)
):l
group
mark
10/62
243:144.100
•
II
STAnDARD
EDP
CDC 1604-A
Data Code Table
Card Code, Internal
REPORTS
DATA CODE TABLE NO.4
§
144.
· 22
Character Structure
.1
USE OF CODE:
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
· 222 Less significant
pattern: • • • • • • 3 bits: 4, 2 and 1.
.21
Character Size: • . • 6 bits.
· 23
punched card BCD inputoutput, internal
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
.221 More significant
pattern: • • • • • • 3 bits: 4, 2 and 1.
Character Codes
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BLANK
Y
-
Q
+
H
1
1
9
/
z
J
R
A
I
2
2
¢
S
]
K
%
B
<
3
3
=
T
,
L
$
C
4
4
'f
U
(
M
*
D
)
5
5
5
V
N
t
E
~
w
---
0
t
F
?
X
,.....,.
p
>
G
;
6
6
7
7
©
I
[
-?>o
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243: 145.1 00
•
II
STANDARD
EDP
CDC 1604-A
Data Code Table
Card Code, External
RfPORTS
DATA CODE TABLE NO.5
§l45.
.1
.23
USE OF CODE: .
punched card BCD inputoutput, external.
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
.21
Character Size:. . . . . 1 column.
Character Codes
OVER PUNCH
UNDERPUNCH
None
None
12
11
+
-
0
12
11
0
0
1
1
A
J
/
2
2
B
K
S
3
3
C
L
T
4
4
D
M
U
5
5
E
N
V
6
6
F
0
W
7
7
G
P
X
8
8
H
Q
y
9
9
I
R
Z
<
%
]
$
.
8-2
10/62
©
8-3
=
8-4
'f
)
*
(
8-5
::::
~
t
-'J>o
8-6
I
?
~
-
8-7
[
;
>
""'-'
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
243: 146.100
CDC 1604-A
Data Code Table
Flexowriter
OAT A CODE TABLE NO. 6
§
146.
.1
· 22
USE OF CODE: • • • • Flexowriter .
Character Structure
· 221 More significant
pattern:
• . . 3 bits: 4, 2, and 1.
• • • 3 bits: 4, 2, and 1.
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
• 222 Less significant
pattern:
.21
Character Size:. • • • 6 bits.
.23
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
Tape
Feed
T
Color
Shift
0
Space
H
N
M
1
2
Character Codes
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
UPPER CASE
LOWERCASE
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
5
4
:
E
A
L
Z
W
R
D
J
-
G
I
P
C
V
B
S
Y
F
X
8
U
Stop
Q
K
9
CR
©
•
+
UC
7
Tab Back
Space
4
(
0
LC
3
5
2
e
a
1
z
w
iColor r
Shift
0
g
1
Space i
p
h
n
c
Delete m
v
d
j
b
s
8
u
Stop
V
Q
CR
f
k
,
x
9
UC
6
trape
Feed
t
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
;
6
7
7
2
Tab Back
Soace
4
-
/
)
3
0
LC
5
6
1
Delete
10/62
243: 1S1.1 00
.STINGARG
EDP
_
RE1'QRTS
CDC 1604-A
P. O. Facilities
PROBLEM ORI ENTED FACILITIES
§
151.
·1
UTILITY ROUTINES
• 11
Simulators of Other Computers
.16
File Maintenance: . • • only routines for specific
installations are
available •
.17
Other
Aritlunetic Functions
IBM 650
Reference:
02 NBSB.
Date available: •
1961.
Description
The routine simulates an IBM 650 computer containing a 2,000 word drum, index registers and
floating point. The simulator operates on a CDC
1604 with an IBM 407, 088 and 523 unit.
Double Precision,
Floating Point
Complex Numbers,
Floating Point
• 13
-
x
500
500
1000
173.6
173.6
353.6
TIME SPACE
(JJ. sec)
Simulation by Other Computers
CDC 160-A: • . • • ••
+
Mathematical Functions (Representative cases, all
floating point)
CDC 1604-A:. . . • • • by a s:witch on 1604-A
console.
• 12
( fJ.. sec. )
TIME
INTERFOR system simulates 20 of the 62 operations, and includes other
facilities.
Sine
964
68
ERROR (Max)
2.1 x 10- 11
2.1 x 10- 11
Cos
964
68
Tan
1129
53
2.4 x 10- 11
115
8.7 x 10- 11
8.7 x 10- 11
Data Sorting and Merging
Arc Sine
1610
Reference: .•
Record size: .
Block size: •
Key size: •••
Arc Cos
1085
Arc Tan
985
71
8.7 x 10- 11
Exponential
540
32
8.7 x 10- 11
Natural log
677
45
8.7 x 10- 11
M4 CODA KSM.
80 or 120 characters.
1 record per block.
any number of keys of any
length.
any number of tape reels.
4 upwards.
1961.
File size: ••
Number of tapes:
Date available: . .
Description
The routine provides data editing facilities and
operates only on BCD data. No other sorting
routines are listed in the July, 1962 CO-OP Index.
.14
Report Writing: . . • • none.
• 15
Data Transcription
Polynomial Evaluation
TIME (I" sec)
Hermite
130 + 165 (N-1)
SPACE
24
Laguerre
130 + 238 (N-1)
24
Legendre
123 + 247 (N-1)
25
Other
Hypergeometric Functions
Convert Symbolic Magnetic-Tape-to-Paper-Tape
Reference: • • • •
M 2 CODA MAGPT.
Date available: . • •• 1961.
Description
Converts 80 or 120 character BCD magnetic tape
to Flexowriter tape.
Performance limited by Flexowriter output.
©
.2
Space: 2,491Iocations, timing
unknown.
PROBLEM ORIENTED LANGUAGES
PERT: . • . • • • • .
Linear Programming
Package: • • • • • •
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
RIP.
RIP.
10/62
243: 162. 100
•
STANDARD
ED:!?
•
CDC 1604-A
REPORTS
Process Oriented Language
FORTRAN-60
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN-60
§
162.
14
.1
GENERAL
· 11
Identity:
FORTRAN- 60.
· 12
Origin:.
Computer Division, Control
Data Corporation.
· 13
Reference:....... Control Data Publications
087A and 027A.
· 14
Description
Description (Contd. )
Restrictions (Contd.)
(5) All allocation statements (DIMENSION, EQUIVALENCE, and COMMON) must precede the first
executable statement in a source program.
(6) The CHAIN feature, which facilitates segmentation of programs too large to fit into core storage, has not been implemented.
(7) Independently-compiled subprograms cannot be
linked together at execution time.
FORTRAN-60 for the 1604 is a restricted version of
the FORTRAN II language as implemented for the
IBM 709/7090. Two newer, more powerful versions
of the FORTRAN language are available for the 1604.
FORTRAN- 62 has been released, and the FORTRAN63 translator is in field test status. The FORTRAN60 system, however, is still in use; it provides
faster compiling speeds in the compile-and-execute
mode and permits intermixed FORTRAN and symbolic statements. Furthermore, certain language
incompatibilities (summarized in Section :163.14)
necessitate manual conversions before programs
coded in FORTRAN-60 can be compiled by the newer
CDC FORTRAN systems.
A curious feature of FORTRAN- 60 is the permanent
assignment of the six machine index registers to the
specific integer variables named I, J, K, L, M, and
N. Routines using these six variables as subscripts
and loop indices can, therefore, be compiled and executed rapidly, whereas severe inefficiencies will result if any other integer variables are used as subscripts or loop indices. The names I, J, K, L, M,
and N may not be assigned to subscripted variables.
Other restrictions and extensions of the FORTRAN60 language relative to IBM 709/7090 FORTRAN II
are summarized below.
Re strictions :
(1) Double preCision and complex arithmetic are not
permitted.
(2) It is not possible to test for arithmetic errors;
IF ACCUMULATOR OVERFLOW, IF QUOTIENT
OVERFLOW, and IF DIVIDE CHECK result in
unconditional branches to the second statement
listed.
(3) The 1604 has only three sense switches.
If more are reqUired, a SWITCH routine is used
to set or clear pseudo switches in six core storage locations.
(4) The following statements have not been implemented: FREQUENCY, END FILE, READ
DRUM, WRITE DRUM.
©
Extensions:
(1) Names may be up to eight characters in length.
(2) The following number ranges can be handled:
Floating point:. 10- 308 to 10+ 308 .
Integers: . . •. _247 to.+247 (except 16,383
is maximum value for
variables I, J, K, L, M,
and N, which are stored
in index registers).
Boolean: . . . . 16 octal digits (48 bits).
(3) No parenthesized statement number list is required in an assigned GO TO statement.
.15
Publication Date:. . . . November, 1960.
.2
PROGRAM STRUCTURE
.21
Divisions: . . . . • . . one division, composed of
the following types of
statements.
Procedure statements:. algebraic formulae.
comparisons and jumps.
input and output.
Data statements: . . . . FORMAT: describes the
layout, size, scaling, and
code of input-output data.
EQUIVALENCE: used to
cause two variables to
have a common location
or to specify synonyms.
COMMON: used to cause a
name to be common to
more than one segment
rather than local to each.
DIMENSION: describes the
elements in each dimension of an array or set of
arrays.
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243:162.220
§
CDC 1604-A
.252 Subscripts (Contd. )
162.
.22
Procedure Entities
Program: ..
Subroutine: .
Function: •
Statement: .
.23
Data Entities
Arrays:
Item: .•
Hollerith item: •
Alphameric: . •
.24
subroutines and functions.
statements.
statements.
characters; blanks .are
ignored.
all variables.
floating point variable or
constant.
integer variable or
constant.
Boolean variable or
constant.
Hollerith item.
alphameric item.
alphameric item that can
only be used for output.
alphameric item that can
only be input during a run;
it can be used for output,
or as a format statement.
Names
.241 Simple name formation
Alphabet:.
. ..
Size:
...•
Avoid key words:.
Formation rule:
. 242 Designators
Procedures
Statement label:
Function label:
Subroutine label:
Data
Integer variables:
Floating point
variables: .
Equipment
Card: • . . .
Magnetic tap~:
Printer: • . .
Index registers:
Comments: • . . •
Translator control:
. 25
.26
Number of Names
.261 All entities: . . . . . . no practical limit.
.262 Procedures
Numbered statements:}
Subro~tines: • . . . . all inte.r-rel~t~d; no
FunctIOns: . • . . . .
practicaillmlts.
Others: . . • • . . . .
.263 Data
Files: • . . . . .
no limit.
Record formats:
no practical limit.
Items: • . .
no practical limit .
. 264 Equipment
48.
Tape units: •
Card readers:
1.
1.
Card punches:
Printers: . . .
1.
.27
Region of Meaning of
Names: . . • • . • .
all names are local to the
program, subroutine, or
function in which they are
defined unless specified
in a COMMON statement.
unsigned integer.
same as variable being
defined.
no designator.
.3
DATA DESCRIPTION FACILITIES
any other initial letter.
.31
Methods of Direct Data Description
implied by verbs READ,
PUNCH.
use key word TAPE.
implied by verb PRINT.
variable names I, J, K, L,
M, N.
C in col. I of statement.
key words EQUIVALENCE,
COMMON.
.311
.312
".313
.314
.;315
.316
.317
.318
.319
Concise item picture:
List by kind: • . • . .
Qualify by adjective: .
Qualify by phrase: .
Qualify by code: . .
Hierarchy by list: .
Level by indenting:
Level by coding: .
Others
Array size:. . .
Four-digit integer:.
Four-digit integers,S:
Floating point items:.
FORMAT statement only.
no.
no.
no.
yes, first letter of name.
no.
no.
no.
.32
Files and Reels: . .
own coding.
.33
Records and Blocks
initial I,
J,
K, L, M, N.
Structure of Data Names
. 251 Qualified names: •.•
.252 Subscripts
Number per item:
Applicable to:
Class may be·
Special index
v.ariable:
Any variable: .
Literal: . . .
Expression: . .
10/62
A to Z, a to 9.
I to 8 char.
no.
first char must be letter.
do not use final F if name
is more than 3 char long .
Form may be
Integer only:
yes.
no.
Signed: • . .
Truncated fraction: . no.
Rounded fraction: .
no.
• 253 Synonyms
Preset: • . . . . . .
EQUIVALENCE statement
causes sharing of storage
locations.
Dynamically set: .
no.
none.
a to 3.
all variables.
no.
only integers.
yes.
any integer expression.
.331 Variable record size:
. 332 Variable block size: .
.333 Record size range:
DIMENSION (4, 7).
FORMAT (14).
FORMAT (514) .
FORMAT (F8. 3, Ela.4)
for +999.999 and
+. aaaOE+9
dynamic.
fixed.
1 to N blocks.
243: 162.334
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN·60
§
162.
.334 Block size
READ TAPE, WRITE
TAPE: . • • . . . .
READ INPUT TAPE,
WRITE OUTPUT
TAPE: . . ' . . •
· 335
. 336
• 337
.338
· 339
· 34
.36
54 words (binary format).
120 characters (BCD
format).
READ, PUNCH:
80 columns.
120 characters.
PRINT: . • • . .
Choice of record size: . READ, WRITE statement.
fixed for each input-output
Choice of block size:
statement type.
own coding.
Sequence control: ••
In-out error control:
automatic.
none; 1 or more full blocks
Blocking control: .
per logical record.
.4
OPERATION REPERTOIRE
.41
Formulae
+:
*.
/
:
**: .
ABSF ( )* :
INTF ( )* :
MODF (A, BH :. • .
MAXOF (A, ..• )*:.
MAX1F (A, ... H: .
MINOF (A, ... )*:
MIN1F (A, .•• H :
DIMF (A, BH: .
SIGNF (A, B)* : .
FLOATF ( ) :
XFlXF ( ) :
LOGF ( ):
LOGlOF ( ) :
SINF ( ) :
ASINF ( ):
COSF ( ) :
ACOSF ( .):
EXPF ( ) :
SQRTF ( ) :
ATANF ( ) :
TANHF ( ) :
SINH ( ) :
COSH ( ):
..
.
.
±247 .
none.
10- 308 to 10+ 308 .
120 characters.
16 octal digits.
yes.
optional.
same as constants.
own coding; e. g., TEN =
10.0.
. 354 Conditional variables:. computed GO TO.
©
addition, also unary.
subtraction, also unary .
multiplication.
division.
exponentiation.
is set equal to.
absolute value.
entire.
remainder A .;. B.
max value; fixed argument •
max value; floating
argument.
min value; fixed argument •
min value; floating
argument.
diminish A by B.
transfer sign of A to B.
float an integer.
fix a floating pointvariable.
natural log.
common log.
sine.
arc sine.
cosine.
arc cosine.
exponential.
square root.
arctangent.
hyperbolic tangent.
hyperbolic sine.
hyperbolic cosine.
* denotes function may have prefix X to denote fixed
point result •
. 412 Operands allowed
Classes: . . . .
Mixed scaling: .
Mixed classes: .
Data Values
.351 Constants
Possible sizes
Integer: •.•
Fixed point: .
Floating point:
Alphameric:
Boolean: . . . .
Subscriptable: .
Sign provision: .
. 352 Literals: . .
.. 353 E'igurative~: . . .
.361 Duplicate format: . • . by multiple references to a
single FORMAT
statement.
.362 Re-definition: . •
COMMON statement.
EQUIVALENCE statement.
.363 Table description
Subscription: . .
mandatory, in DIMENSION
statement.
Multi - subscri pts:
1 to 3.
Level of item: . .
variables .
.364 Other subscriptable
entities: . . . • •
tape units .
.411 Operator List
Data Items
.341 Designation of class:
by name.
• 342 Possible classes
Integer: • • . .
yes.
Fixed point:. •
no.
Floating point:
yes.
Logical: • . . .
yes.
Alphameric: .
yes.
· 343 Choice of external
radix:. . . . . . .
FORMAT statement.
• 344 Possible external radices
Decimal: . • • . . .
yes.
Octal:. . • • . • . .
yes.
• 345 Internal justification:
alpha automatic left
justified.
integers automatic right
justified.
· 346 Choice of external code: FORMAT statement and
READ, WRITE statement.
.347 Possible external codes
Decimal: "
yes.
Octal: • . . .
yes.
Hollerith:. .
yes.
Alphameric:
yes.
· 348 Internal item size
Variable size:
fixed.
Designation: . .
none.
Range
Fixed point numeric: fixed, 1 word.
Floating point
numeric: .
fixed, 1 word.
Alphameric:
fixed, 1 word of up to 8
characters.
· 349 Sign provision: •
optional.
· 35
Special Description Facilities
Mixed radices: •
Literals: . . . .
.413 Statement structure
Parentheses
a - b - c means:
a + b x c means:
a t: b.;. c means:
a b means: . . .
Size limit: .
Multi-results:
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
numeric only.
yes.
only in exponentiation and
functions.
no.
yes.
(a-b)-c.
a + (b x c).
(a .;. b) .;. c.
illegal; parentheses must
be used
660 char •
no.
10/62
243:162.414
§
CDC 1604-A
162.
.45
.414 Rounding of results: . . truncation of integers at
each step in expression.
Floating
.415 Special cases Fixed
X= -X.
x = -x: . . .
K= -K
x = x + 1: ••
K=K+1
X=X+l.
x = 4.7 y; ••• K = 47*K/1O
X=4.7*Y.
x = 5x107 +y2: 50000000+ L**2 X= 5.E7+Y**2.
x=
X = ABSF(Y).
K = XABSF(L)
x = entire
(3.5): . . . . K = XINTF(L)
X = INTF(Y).
X =(-B + SQRTF(B*B-4. 0
.416 Typical examples: ..
*A *C»/(2. O*A).
Step back a record:
Set restart point:
Restart: . . . .
Start new reel: .
Start new block:
,y,: ...
.42
Operations on Arrays
.421 Matrix operations: .
. 422 Logical operations
Sizes of operands:
AND: . • . . .
Inclusive OR: .
Exclusive OR:
NOT: . . . .
Designation:
.423 Scanning:. . .
.43
Other Computation:
none.
48 bits.
*
+
none.
B in col. 1 of each Boolean
statement.
none.
Data Movement and Format
.441
.442
. 443
. 444
. 445
Data copy example:
Levels possible: . .
Multiple results:. .
Missing operands: .
Size of operands
Exact match: . .
Alignment rule
Numbers: .
Alpha: . . .
Filler rule
Numbers: .
Alpha: . . .
Truncating rule
Numbers: .. .
Alpha: . . . . .
Variable size
destination:
.446 Editing possible
Change class:
Change radix:
Insert editing symbols
Actual point: . . .
Suppress zeroes: .
Insert: .. .
Float: . . . . . . .
. 448 Special moves: . . . •
.449 Character manipUlation:
Search on key: •
Rewind:
Unload: • . • • .
.46
.47
Operating Communication
Object Program Errors
Error
Discovery
Overflow:
In-out:
Invalid data:
Special Actions
none.
automatic
format checks
.5
PROCEDURE SEQUENCE CONTROL
.51
Jumps
./
typed messages.
y=X.
items.
none.
not possible .
.511 Destinations allowed:
. 512 Unconditional jump:
.513 Switch: . . . . • .
implied, except for alpha
or input-output.
. 514 Setting a switch: .
.515 Switch on data:. .
right justified or
normalized.
left justified.
· 52
zeros.
blanks.
truncate at left.
truncate at right.
.523 Conditional relations: .
no.
yes.
yes.
automatic.
automatic.
automatic point.
- sign only.
none.
none.
statement .
GO TO N.
GO TO M, or GO TO M,
(35, 47,18) .
ASSIGN 35 TO M.
GO TO (35, 47, 18) I.
Conditional Procedures
.521 Designators
Condition:
Procedure:
. 522 Simple conditions: .
. 524 Variable conditions: . .
. 525 Compound conditionals:
• 528 Typical examples: . . .
.53
.45
BACKSPACE.
none.
none.
own coding.
implied in each input-output
statement.
none.
REWIND.
none.
.461 Log of progress: . . . . PRINT uses on-line printer •
. 462 Messages to operator: . same as log (error
messages are.automatically typed on console
typewriter) •
PAUSE and type decimal
· 463 Offer options:
integer.
PRINT message .and PAUSE.
· 464 Accept option: . . . . . IF SENSE SWITCH n.
symbolic machine instructions may be inserted in a
FORTRAN source
program.
.44
File Manipulation (Contd. )
IF.
implied.
expression or variable
versus zero.
IF (A) n1, n2, n3: If value
of expression A is less
than, equal to, or greater
than zero, respectively,
go to statement n1, n2, or
n3.
expression always against
zero .
no.
IF (X**2. 0 - 3.0) 29, 37,
18; go to 29, 37, or 18 if
x 2 -3 is respectively less
than, equal to, or greater
than zero.
Subroutines
File Manipulation
own coding.
Open: . . . . . . .
own coding.
Close: . . . . . .
Advance to next record: READ, WRITE, PUNCH,
PRINT.
10/62
.531 Designation
Single statement:.
. Set of statements
First: .
Last:
. .....
not possible.
SUBROUTINE .
END.
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN-60
§
162.
.532 Possible subroutines:
· 533 Use in -line in program:
· 534 Mechanism
Cue with parameters:
Number of
parameters:
Cue without
parameters:
Formal return: .
Alternative return: .
. 535 Names
Parameter call by
value: •
Parameter call by
name: .
Non-local names:
Local names: •
Preserved own
variables: .
.536 Nesting limit:
.537 Automatic recursion
allowed:
.. 54
. 542 Level of procedure:
· 543 Mechanism
Cue:
Formal return: .
.544 Names
Parameter call by
value: .
Par~meter call by
name: .
Non-local names:
Local names: .
Preserved own
variables: •
· 55
• 56
Operand Definition by
Procedure:
LIBRARY FACILITIES
.71
Identity: ..
CALL XXX (X, Y, Z).
· 72
Kinds of Libraries
maximum of 64.
.721 Fixed master:
.722 Expandable master,:
no.
yes.
CALL XXX.
RETURN at least once.
none.
.73
Storage Form:
magnetic tape; 54-word
blocks in "tag binary"
format •
none.
.74
yes.
use COMMON.
all.
· 75
Varieties of Contents:. subroutines.
functions.
service routines.
Mechanism
all.
no limit.
no.
.562 Control by count:
· 563 Control by step
Parameter
Special index: .
Any variable: .
Step:
Criteria:
Multiple parameters:
· 564 Control by condition:
• 565 Control by list:
.566 Nesting limit:
.567 Jump out allowed:
. 568 Control variable exit
status:
EXTENSION OF THE
LANGUAGE: ~
FORTRAN-60 Reference
Library.
.751 Insertion of new item:. separate run, using
FORTLIB or MAPTLIB
Compiler.
.752 Language of new item:. FORTRAN or MAP, a regional assembly language
specific to FORTRAN-60.
.753 Method of call: .
named in procedures .
. 76
Types of Routines
same as set.
FUNCTION.
END.
any number of statements .
by name in expression.
RETURN.
.761 Open routines exist:.
no.
.762 Closed routines exist:. yes.
.763 Open-closed is variable: no.
.8
TRANSLATOR CONTROL
· 81
Transfer to Another
Language:
none.
yes.
use COMMON.
all.
.82
none.
.83
none.
.84
current place to named end;
e.g., D0173I=1, N, 2.
.85
none.
no.
integer only.
positive integers.
greater than.
no.
no.
no.
no limit.
yes •
none.
COMMON.
EQUIVALENCE.
Translator
Environment: • •
no .
Target Computer
Environment: .
no.
Program Documentation
Control:
no.
.9
TARGET COMPUTER ALLOCATION CONTROL
. 91
Choice of Storage Level: no .
.92
Address Allocation:
none.
.93
Arrangement of Items
in Words in Unpacked
Form:
standard for numerics.
available.
.94
can write new function in
library.
.95
©
strings of symbolic machine instructions, separated by commas, can be
inserted in the source
program.
Optimizing Information Statements
.821 Process usage
statements: •
.822 Data usage statements:
all.
Loop Control
• 561 Designation of loop
Single procedure:
First and last
procedures: .
·6
.7
any number of statements.
no.
Function Definition by Procedure
.541 Designation
Single statement: .
Set of statements
First: .
Last:
243: 162.532
Assignment of InputOutput Devices:
Input-Output Areas:
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
specified in input-output
statements.
automatic.
10/62
243: 163.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
_
REPORTS
CDC 1604-A
Process Oriented Language
FORTRAN-62
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN-62
§
163 .
14
.1
GENERAL
· 11
Identity:
FORTRAN-62.
· 12
Origin:.
Computer Division,
Control Data Corporation.
. 13
Reference:....... Control Data Publications
No. 506 and PSB-AS06621.
· 14
Description
The main advantages of the FORTRAN-62 system
over FORTRAN-60 are the more efficient object
programs it produces and its ability to link subroutines compiled independently. Language extensions
include buffered input-output, division of the COMMON data area into named blocks, and more flexible
subscripting. As in FORTRAN-60, there are no facilities for complex or double precision arithmetic
or for the detection of arithmetic errors.
The incompatibilities between the FORTRAN-60 and
FORTRAN-62 languages that must be considered in
source program conversions can be summarized as
follows:
(1) FORTRAN-62 treats Hollerith constants or literals as floating point mode and identifies them
by floating point variable names; FORTRAN-60
treats them as fixed point mode.
(2) FORTRAN-62 allows symbolic coding (in
CODAP-l) to appear only as a subroutine;
FORTRAN- 60 permits intermixed symbolic and
FORTRAN statements or symbolic subroutines.
(3) There are certain differences in the naming conventions for functions.
(4) The COMMON and EQUIVALENCE statements
are implemented differently; this can lead to
differences in the correspondence of shared variables between two or more subprograms.
(5) FORTRAN-62 treats all integer variables as
modulo 247 _1; in FORTRAN-60, the variables
named I through N are treated as modulo 16,383
because they are stored in the index registers.
(6) There are differences in implementation of the
E conversion in the FORMAT statement.
Description (Contd. )
(9) FORTRAN-62 places certain restrictions on
names to avoid conflicts with the library program names.
(10) The different operating systems require the control cards for FORTRAN- 62 to be totally different from those for the FORTRAN-60 system .
(11) The FORTRAN-60 service routine library is not
available to the FORTRAN-62 system; other
service routines are available in the CO-OP
Monitor.
In FORTRAN-62, magnetic tape input and/or output
can be overlapped with internal computation by the
use of BUFFER IN and BUFFER OUT statements.
Each BUFFER statement causes one block of data to
be read into or written from sequential core storage
locations, in either binary or BCD format. ENCODE
and DECODE statements facilitate the internal packing, unpacking, and format control of buffered input
and output data. ENCODE (i, n, v) L causes the
variables in list L to be converted according to
FORMAT statement n and stored in array v as a unit
record i characters long ready for output; DECODE
(i, n, v) L performs the complementary function of
unpacking input data. The statement IF (UNIT, i)
permits checking of a buffered input-output operation
for completion, end-of-file condition, and parity
error; it should always appear before any statement
referencing a variable involved in a buffered transfer.
When the standard FORTRAN input-output statements are executed, the central processor is occupied throughout the operation with format conversions, so no simultaneity is possible. The buffered
input-output facility of FORTRAN-62 permits the
programmer to take advantage of most of the hardware facilities for simultaneous operations, and it
can significantly decrease the execution time for
routines where the ratio of input-output to computation is high.
Translation and execution of programs written in the
FORTRAN-62 language are controlled by the CO-OP
Monitor System.
Restrictions and extensions of the FORTRAN-62
language relative to IDM 709/7090 FORTRAN II are
summarized below. Extensions (4) through (9) represent the main improvements over CDC's
FORTRAN-60 language.
(7) There are minor implementation differences in
the END, STOP, PAUSE, and SENSE SWITCH
statements.
Restrictions:
(8) Differences in the required source program
order may necessitate some shuffling of the
source cards.
©
(1) Double precision and complex arithmetic are not
permitted.
1962 by Auerbach Corporatian and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243: 163.140
§
163
CDC 1604-A
.14
.14
Description (Contd. )
Extensions (Contd. )
(9) The COMMON data storage area can be divided
into numbered or labeled blocks; this facilitates
the transfer of information between
subprograms.
Restrictions (Contd. )
(2) It is not possible to test for arithmetic overflow;
IF ACCUMULATOR OVERFLOW, IF QUOTIENT
OVERFLOW, and IF DIVIDE CHECK result in unconditional branches to the second statement
listed.
(3) IF SENSE SWITCH and IF SENSE LIGHT test the
status of specific core storage locations. The
monitor system must be used to alter the settings of the pseudo sense switches.
. IS
Publication Date:. . . . June, 1962.
.2
PROGRAM STRUCTURE
.21
Divisions: . . . . . . . one division, composed of
the following types of
statements.
Procedure statements:. algebraic formulae.
comparisons and jumps.
input and output.
(4) The following statements have not been implemented: FREQUENCY, READ DRUM, WRITE
DRUM.
(5) All allocation statements (DIMENSION, COMMON, and EQUIVALENCE) must precede the
first executable statement in a source program.
(6) The CHAIN feature, which facilitates segmentation of programs too large to fit into core storage,. has not been implemented. (The CO-OP
Monitor, however, includes an overlay system
that can be used by programs in any source language.)
(7) Symbolic coding can be incorporated only in the
form of separate subroutines called by the
FORTRAN program.
Extensions:
(1) Names may be up to 8 characters in length.
. 22
(2) The following number ranges can be handled:
Floating point: .
10- 308 to 10+ 308
Integer: . . . . . -247 to +247
Boolean: • . • . . 16 octal digits (48 bits).
(3) No parenthesized statement number list is required in an assigned GO TO statement.
Description (Contd.)
Data statements:. . . . FORMAT: describes the
layout, size, scaling, and
code of input-output data.
EQUIVALENCE: used to
cause two variables to
have a common location
or to specify synonyms.
COMMON: used to cause a
name to be common to
more than one segment
rather than local to each.
DIMENSION: describes the
elements in each dimension of an array or set of
arrays.
EXTERNAL: declares the
following identifiers to be
function names.
Procedure Entities
Program: . .
Subroutine: .
Function: .
Statement: .
.23
Data Entities
Arrays:
Item: . .
(4) Subscripts may be integer constants, integer
variables, integer functions, or any fixed point
arithmetic expressions.
(5) BUFFER IN and BUFFER OUT initiate the buf-
fered reading or writing of one block on magnetic tape from sequential core storage locations' beginning and ending with specified
variables.
Hollerith item: .
Alphameric: . .
(6) The statements IF (UNIT), IF (EOF), and IF
(IOCHECK) permit tests for completion of buffered input-output operations, for end-of-file
conditions, and f9r parity errors.
.24
(7) ENCODE and DECODE control code or radix
conversions and packing into and unpacking from
sequentiallotations of a list of variables (usually those involved in a buffered input or output
operation).
(8) The statements READ and WRITE may designate
any available input or output device.
10/62
subroutines and functions.
statements.
statements.
characters; blanks are
ignored.
all variables.
integer variable or constant.
floating point variable or
constant.
Boolean variable or
constant.
Hollerith item.
alphameric item.
alphameric item that can
only be used for output.
alphameric item that can
only be input during a run;
it can be used for output,
or as a format statement.
Names
.241 Simple name formation
Alphabet: . • • . .
Size: . . . . . . .
Avoid.key words:.
Formation rule:
A to Z, 0 to 9.
I to 8 char.
no.
first char must be letter.
do not use final F if name
is more than 3 char long.
243: 163.242
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN-62
§
163.
.242 Designators
Procedures
Statement label:
Function label: .
Subroutine label:
Data
Integer variables:
Floating point
variables:
Equipment
Card: . • .
Magnetic tape:
Printer: . . • .
Comments: . . .
Translator control:
. 25
initial I,
J,
K, L, M, N.
any other initial letter.
implied by verbs READ,
PUNCH.
use key word TAPE, or
READ, WRITE.
implied by verb PRINT.
C in col. 1 of statement.
key words EQUIVALENCE,
COMMON.
Structure of Data Names
.251 Qualified names: •.
.252 Subscripts
Number per item:
Applicable to: . .
Class may be
Special index variable: . . . •
Any variable: .
Literal: • . .
Expression: •
Form may be
Integer only:
Signed: . . .
Truncated fraction:
Rounded fraction:
· 253 Synonyms
Preset: .
Dynamically set: •
· 26
unsigned integer.
same as variable being
defined.
none.
Number of Names
none.
Region of Meaning of
Names: • . . . . . .
DATA DESCRIPTION FACILITIES
.31
Methods of Direct Data Description
.311
. 312
. 313
. 314
. 315
.316
.317
.318
.319
Concise item picture:
List by kind: . . . • •
Qualify by adjective: .
Qualify by phra,se: .
Qualify by code: ..
Hierarchy by list:
Level by indenting:
Level by coding:
Others
Array size: •.
Four-digit integer: .
Four-digit integers, 5:
Floating point items: .
FORMAT statement only.
no.
no.
no.
first letter of name.
no.
no.
no.
.32
Files and Reels: . .
own coding.
· 33
Records and Blocks
. 331 Variable record size:
.332 Variable block size: .
o to 3.
all variables.
no.
only integers.
yes; only integers.
any integer expression or
function.
. 333 Record size range:
.334 Block size
READ TAPE, WRITE
TAPE: . . . • . • .
READ INPUT TAPE,
WRITE OUTPUT
TAPE: . • . . .
DIMENSION (4, 7).
FORMAT"(I4).
FORMAT (514).
FORMAT (F8. 3, EI0.4)for
+999.999 and
+. 0000E+99.
dynamic •
fixed (preset variable for
buffered input-output).
1 to N blocks •
128 words (binary format).
120 characters (BCD
format).
80 columns.
120 characters.
READ, PUNCH:
PRINT: • . . .
BUFFER IN, BUFFER
OUT: '" . . • . . variable.
. 335 Choice of record size: . READ, WRITE statement •
· 336 Choice of block size:
fixed for each non- buffered
input-output statement
EQUIVALENCE statement
type; BUFFER statements
causes sharing of storage
specify names of first and
locations.
last variables in block.
no.
· 337 Sequence control: . •
own coding.
.338 In-out error control:
own coding, using IF
clauses.
I
! . 339 Blocking control: .
none; 1 or more full blocks
no practical limit.
per logical record.
yes.
no.
no.
no.
· 261 All entities
· 262 Procedures
Numbered statements:}
Subro~tines: . . . . . all inte.r-rer.at~d; no
FunctlOns: . . . . . .
practical hmlt.
Others: . . . . : . . .
.263 Data
Files:. • . . . .
no limit.
Record formats:
no practical limit.
Items: .••
no practical limit.
· 264 Equipment
Tape units: .
Card readers:
: } ,otal of 64 unl<'
Card punches:
Printers: . . .
· 27
.3
all names are local to the
program, subroutine, or
function in which they are
defined unless specified
explicitly or by block
name in COMMON
statement.
©
.34
Data Items
. 341 Designation of class:
by name •
.342 Possible classes
Integer: . . . .
yes.
Fixed point: .
no.
Floating point:
yes.
yes.
Logical: •.•
Alphameric: •
yes.
· 343 Choice of external
radix:. • • . • • .
FORMAT statement.
.344 Possible external radices
Decimal: • . • . . .
yes.
Octal:. . . • . . . .
yes.
· 345 Internal justification:
alpha automatic left
justified.
integers automatic right
justified.
.346 Choice of exte.rnal code: FORMAT statement and
READ, WRITE statement.
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorparated
10/62
243: 163.347
§
CDC 1604·A
163.
.411 Operator list (Contd. )
. 347 Possible external codes
Decimal: •
Octal: . . . .
Hollerith:. .
Alphameric:
· 348 Internal item size
Variable size:
Designation: .•
Range
Fixed point numeric:
Floating point
numeric: .
Alphameric:
'. 349 Sign provision: .
.35
fixed.
none.
fixed, 1 word.
fixed, 1 word.
fixed, 1 word of up to 8
characters.
optional.
Special Description Facilities
. 361 Duplicate format:
• 362 Re- definition:
float an integer .
fix floating point variable.
natural log.
sine.
arc sine.
cosine.
arc cosine.
exponential.
square root.
arctangent.
hyperbolic tangent.
produce random number
(even distribution).
produce random number
(Gauss distribution).
t denotes function may have prefix X to denote fixed
point result.
247.
none.
10- 308 to 10+ 308 .
120 characters.
16 octal digits.
yes.
optional.
same as constants .
own coding; e ..g., TEN =
10. O•
. 354 Conditional variables: . computed GO TO.
by multiple references to a
..
. 363 Table description
Subscription:. .
Multi - subscripts:
Level of item:
• 364 Other subscriptable
entities: . .
.
..
..
single FORMAT
statement .
COMMON statement .
EQUIVALENCE statement .
mandatory, in DIMENSION
statement.
1 to 3.
variables .
input- output units .
·4
OPERATION REPERTOIRE
.41
Formulae
.411 Operator List
+:
*.
1:
**: .
ABSF ( )t:
INTF( )t: ..
MODF (A, B)t : ..
MAXOF (A, .•. >t.: .
MAX1F (A, ... )t: .
MINOF (A, .•. )t:
MIN1F (A, .•• )t:
DIMF (A, B)t: .
SIGNF (A, B)t : .
10/62
RNDEVF ( ):
Data Values
· 351 Constants
Possible sizes
Integer: . . .
Fixed point: .
Floating point:
Alphameric: .
Boolean: . . • .
Subscriptable: .
Sign provision: .
.352 Literals: . .
. 353 Figuratives: . . .
· 36
FLOATF ( ):
XFIXF( ):
LOGF ( ):.
SINF(): .
ASINF ( ):.
CaSF ( ): .
ACOSF ( ):
EXPF ( ): .
SQRTF( ):
ATANF ( ):
TANHF ( ):
RANIF ( ):
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
addition, also unary.
sl.!btraction, also unary.
.multiplication.
division.
exponentiation.
is set equal to.
absolute value.
entire.
remainder A + B.
max value; fixed argument.
max value; floating
argument ..
min value; fixed argument.
min value; floating
argument.
diminish A by B.
transfer sign of A to B.
.412 Operands allowed
Classes: . . . .
Mixed scaling: .
Mixed classes: .
Mixed radices: .
Literals: . . . .
.413 Statement structure
Parentheses
a - b - c means:
·a + b x c means:
a + b + c means:
abC means:
numeric only.
yes.
only in exponentiation and
functions.
no.
yes.
(a·b) - c.
a + (b x c).
(a + b) + c.
illegal; parentheses must
be used.
Size limit: .
660 char.
Multi - results:
no .
. 414 Rounding of results: .
truncation of integers at
each step in expression.
.415 Special cases
Fixed
Floating
X= -X.
x = -x: . .
K = -K
x = x + 1: ..
K=K+1
X=X+1.
X= 4.7 * Y.
x = 4.7 y: . . . K = 47*K/IO
x = 5x107 + y2: 50000000+ L**2 X = 5. E7+ Y**2.
X= ABSF(Y).
x= \yl: . . . K=XABSF(L)
x = entire
(3.5): . . • . K = XINTF(L)
X = INTF(Y) .
.416 Typical examples: .'.
X= (-B+SQRTF{B*B-4 .. 0
.
*A *C »/(2. 0*A).
.42
0Eerations on Arrays
. 421 Matrix operations: .
.422 Logical operations
Sizes of operands:
AND:
Inclusive OR: .
Exclusive OR:
NOT:
Designation:
.
. 423 Scanning: .
none.
48 bits.
*
+
none.
B in col. I of each Boolean
statement .
none.
.43
Other Computation: . • subprograms in FORTRAN,
COBOL, or symbolic languages may reference one
another.
.44
Data Movement and Format
.441 Data copy example:
.442 Levels possible: •
Y=X.
items.
243: 163.443
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN-62
163.
. 443 Multiple results: .
. 444 Missing operands:
. 445 Size of operands
Exact match: . .
§
none.
not possible.
im plied, except for alpha
or input-output.
Alignment rule
Numbers:
Alpha: . .
Filler rule
Numbers: .
Alpha: . • .
Truncating rule
Numbers: . . .
Alpha: . . . . .
Variable size
destination:
. 446 Editing possible
Change class:
Change radix:
Insert editing symbols
Actual point:
Suppress zeroes:
Insert: .•
Float: • • . . . .
. 448 Special moves:. . .
. 449 Character manipulation:
.45
right justified or
normalized.
left justified.
zeros.
blanks.
truncate at left.
truncate at right.
no .
yes.
yes.
automatic.
automatic.
automatic point.
- sign only.
none .
none.
File Manipulation
own coding.
Open: • . . . . . .
own coding.
Close: . . . . .
Advance to next record: READ, WRITE, PUNCH,
PRINT, BUFFER.
BACKSPACE.
Step back a record:
Set restart point:
none.
none.
Restart: . . . .
Start new reel: .
own coding.
implied in each input-output
Start new block:
statement.
none.
Search on key: .
REWIND.
Rewind:
Unload: . . . . .
none.
. 46
Operating Communication
.461 Log of progress: . . . . PRINT uses on-line printer.
. 462 Messages to operator: . same as log (error messages are automatically
typed on console
typewriter).
PAUSE and type decimal
. 463 Offer options:
integer.
PRINT message and PAUSE.
. . IF SENSE SWITCH n.
. 464 Accept option: . .
. 47
Object Program Errors
Error
Discovery
.512 Unconditional jump:
.513 Switch:. . . . . .
.514 Setting a switch: .
.515 Switch on data: . .
.52
Conditional Procedures
.521 Designators
Condition:
..••
IF.
Procedure: . . . .
implied.
.522 Simple conditions: . . . expression or variable
versus zero .
IF (A) nl, n2, n3: If value
. 523 Conditional relations:
of expression A is less
than, equal to, or greater
than zero, respectively,
go to statement n1, n2, or
n3 .
. 524 Variable conditions: . . expression always against
zero.
.525 Compound conditionals: no.
.528 Typical examples: . . . IF (X**2.0 - 3.0) 29, 37,
18; go to 29, 37, or 18 if
x 2 -3 is respectively less
than, equal to, or greater
than zero .
. 53
Subroutines
.531 Designation
Single statement: .
Set of statements
First: . . . . . .
Last: . . . . . .
.532 Possible subroutines:
.533 Use in-line in program:
. 534 Mechanism
Cue with parameters:
Number of
parameters:
Cue without
parameters:
Formal return: .
Alternative return: .
.535 Names
Parameter call by
value: . . . . . .
Parameter call by
name: . . . . . .
Non-local names:
Local names: .
Preserved own
variables: .•
.536 Nesting limit:
.537 Automatic recursion
allowed: . • . • . .
not possible.
SUBROUTINE.
END.
any number of statements.
no.
CALL XXX (X, Y, Z).
maximum of 64.
CALL XXX.
RETURN at least once.
none .
none.
yes.
use COMMON.
all .
all.
no limit .
no .
Special Actions
.54
Overflow:
In-out:
Invalid data:
I/O device busy:
GO TO N~
GO TO M, or GO TO M,
(35, 47, 18).
ASSIGN 35 TO M .
GO TO (35, 47, 18) 1.
Function Definition by Procedure
none.
IF (10 CHECK)
format checks
IF (UNIT)
own coding.
typed messages.
own coding. .
.5
PROCEDURE SEQUENCE CONTROL
• 51
Jumps
. 511 Destinations allowed: . statement.
©
.541 Designation
Single statement: .
Set of statements
First: . . . . . .
Last: . . . . . .
. 542 Level of procedure:
.543 Mechanism
Cue: . . . • . .
Formal return: .
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
same as set.
FUNCTION.
END .
any number of statements .
by name in expression .
RETURN.
10/62
CDC 1604-A
243: 163.544
§
163.
· 75
.544 Names
Parameter call by
value: . . . . . .
Parameter call by
name: . . . . . .
Non-local names:
Local names: .
Preserved own
variables: . .
• 55
Operand Definition by
Procedure:
· 56
yes.
use COMMON.
all.
· 562 Control by count:
· 563 Control by step
Parameter
Special index: •
Any variable: .
Step:
.....
Criteria:
..
Multiple parameters:
• 564 Control by condition:
· 565 Control by list: . • .
.566 Nesting limit: . . . .
. 567 Jump out allowed: . .
· 568 Control variable exit
status: . . . • . . .
EXTENSION OF THE
LANGUAGE: . . _ .
.7
LIBRARY FACILITIES
· 71
Identi!l: . . . . . .
· 72
Kinds of Libraries
none.
Types of Routines
.761 Open routines exist:.
no.
.762 Closed routines exist:. yes.
.763 Open-closed is variable: no.
TRANSLATOR CONTROL
none.
.81
Transfer to Another
Language: . . . . .
current place to named end;
e.g., DO 1731= 1, N, 2.
none.
· 82
no.
integer only.
positive integers.
greater than.
no.
no.
no.
no limit.
yes.
available.
can write new function in
library.
CO-OP Monitor Library.
.73
magnetic tape; variable
length blocks in relocatable binary format.
Varieties of Contents: . subroutine s.
functions.
service routines.
10/62
named in procedures.
·8
no.
yes.
.74
.753 Method of call:. •
.76
.721 Fixed master: . . .
.722 Expandable master:
Storage Form: .
.751 Insertion of new"j,tem:. separate run, using
FORTLIB Compiler.
.752 Language of new item:. FORTRAN, CODAP 1, or
COBOL.
all.
Loop Control
.561 Designation of loop
Single procedure:
First and last
procedures:. .
.6
none.
Mechanism
only by calling a subroutine
written in that language.
Optimizing Information Statements
.821 Process usage
statements:. . . . . . none.
· 822 Data usage statements: COMMON.
EQUIVALENCE.
.83
· 84
Translator
Environment: .
. . . no .
Target Computer
Environment:. .
no .
· 85
Program Documentation
Control: . . . . . . . no .
.9
TARGET COMPUTER ALLOCATION CONTROL
.91
Choice of Storage
.92
Address Allocation:
none.
.93
Arrangement of Items
in Words in Unpacked
Form: . .
standard for numerics.
.. 94
.95
Leve~:
Assignment of InputOutput Devices:
Input-Output Areas:
no.
specified in input-output
statements; re-assignable
at load time.
automatic (ENCODE and
DECODE permit packing
into and unpacking from
named input-output areas
for buffered operations).
243: 164.100
•
STANDARD
ED]?
•
REPORTS
CDC 1604-A
Process Oriented Language
FORTRAN-63
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN-63
§
,14
164.
Description (Contd.)
Restrictions (Contd. )
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
· FORTRAN-63.
.12
Origin:
· Computer Division,
Control Data Corporation.
.13
Reference:
· FORTRAN-63 General Information Manual (Preliminary).
.14
Description
FORTRAN-63 contains all the facilities of its predecessor, FORTRAN-62, and a number of valuable
extensions. It will be implemented for both the 1604
and the more powerful CDC 3600 computer system.
FORTRAN-63 has most of the capabilities of mM
7090/7094 FORTRAN as contained in the mJOB Processor ("FORTRAN IV"), but will not be directly
compatible with it.
The most significant improvement over CDC FORTRAN -62 is the provision for eight distinct modes of
arithmetic. Single and double precision floating
point, integer, complex, and logical arithmetic are
standard; the remaining three types are "arbitrary"
in mode and execution. No changes in the compiler
are required when a new type of arithmetic is inserted. The user specifies the variables involved
in a TYPE declaration and inserts library routines
which execute the cues generated by the compiler.
Each library routine for a non-standard type of arithmetic contains 12 arithmetic sections and two inputoutput sections; each section implements a particular
instruction type.
FORTRAN-63 is a part of the CO-OP Monitor System, which controls translation of source programs
and execution of object programs.
Restrictions and extensions of the FORTRAN-63 language relative to mM 709/7090 FORTRAN II are
summarized below. Extensions (10) through (18) also summarize the improvements over CDC's FORTRAN -62 language.
Restrictions:
(1) The following statements have not been implemented: FREQUENCY, READ DRUM, WRITE
DRUM.
(4) The following declarative statements (if used)
must procede the first executable statement in
a source program: PROGRAM, SUBROUTINE,
FUNCTION, DIMENSION, COMMON, EQUIVALENCE.
(5) The CHAIN feature, which facilitates segmentation of programs too large to fit into core storage, has not been implemented. (The CO-OP
Monitor, however includes an overlay system
that can be used by programs in any source language.)
(6) Symbolic coding can be incorporated only in the
form of separate subroutines called by the FORTRAN program.
Extensions:
(1) Names may be up to 8 characters in length.
(2) The following number ranges can be handled:
Floating point: . . . 10- 308 to 10+308
Integer:
_2 47 to + 247
Boolean: . . .
16 octal digits (48
bits) .
(3) No parenthesized statement number list is required in an assigned GO TO statement.
(4) Subscripts may be integer or floating point constants, variables, functions, or expressions.
(5) BUFFER IN and BUFFER OUT initiate the buffered reading or writing of one block on magnetic tape from sequential core storage locations,
beginning and ending with specified variables.
(6) The statements IF (UNIT), IF (EOF), and IF
(IOCHECK) permit tests for completion of
buffered input-output operations, for end-offile conditions, and for parity errors.
(7) ENCODE and DECODE control code or radix
conversions and packing into or unpacking from
sequential locations of a list of variables (usually those involved in a buffered input or output
opera tion) .
(8) The statements READ and WRITE may designate
any available input or output device.
(2) IF ACCUMULATOR OVERFLOW and IF QUOTIENT OVERFLOW result in unconditional
branches to the second statement listed; but see
Extension (16).
(9) The COMMON data storage area can be divided
into numbered or labeled blocks; this facilitates the transfer of information between subprograms.
(3) Six sense switches and 48 sense lights are simulated by programmed binary flip-flops; alteration of the switch settings is a Monitor function.
(10) Data values can be assigned at load time to
variables in labeled COMMON storage by means
of the DATA statement.
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243: 164.140
§
CDC 1604-A
164.
. 14
.21
Divisions (Contd. )
Data statements: .
Description (Contd.)
Extensions (Contd.)
(11) Arithmetic and input-output may be performed
in any of eight modes: integer, real (single
precision floating point), double precision
floating point, complex, logical (Boolean), and
three "arbitrary modes" (see text above).
(12) TYPE declarations (e.g., TYPE LOGICAL A,
B, C) are used to designate the modes of lists
of variables. Variables that do not appear in
TYPE statements are considered type integer
if their names begin with I, J, K, L, M, or N;
otherwise, they are type real.
(13) Mixedarithmetic is permitted. The mode of an
expression is the same as the highest order
TYPE of operand in it. The order of types,
from lowest to highest, is integer, real, double, complex. Mode conversions are performed as necessary.
(14) The following symbols may be used in arithmetic/conditional statements:
. EQ.
.NE.
.GT.
. GE.
. LT.
. LE.
.AND.
. OR. :
. NOT.
· equal.
· not equal.
· greater than.
· greater than or equal to.
· less than.
· less than or equal to.
· logical and.
· logical or .
· not.
.22
Procedure Entities
Program:
Subroutine:
Function:
Statement:
.23
(15) Conditional statements may be of the type IF
(e) nl, n2; where e is a simple or compound
logical expression. A branch to statement nl
is executed if e is true, or to n2 if e is false.
(16) IF OVERFLOW FAULT and IF EXPONENT
FAULT test the status of the corresponding indicators and branch accordingly.
(17) $ can be used as a statement separator, permitting more than one source statement to be
written on a line.
Hollerith item:
Alphameric:
.15
Publication Date:
.2
PROGRAM STRUCTURE
.21
Divisions:.
. Procedure statements:
10/62
July, 1962 (preliminary
specifications; translator
is currently in field test
status) .
one division, composed of
the following types of
statements.
algebraic formulae.
comparisons and jumps.
input and output.
. 24
subroutines and functions .
sta tements .
statements .
characters; blanks are ignored .
Data Entities
Arrays:
Item:
(18) Non-subscripted variables can be used as array
dimensions; e.g., DIMENSION A (J, K).
FORMAT: describes the
layout, size, scaling,
and code of input-output
data.
EQUIVALENCE: used to
cause two variables to
have a common location
or to specify synonyms.
COMMON: used to cause a
name to be common to
more than one segment
rather than local to each.
DIMENSION: describes the
elements in each dimension of an array or set of
arrays.
TYPE: specifies mode of a
list of variables; INTEGER, REAL, DOUBLE,
COMPLEX, LOGICAL.
DATA: assigns constant
values to variables at
load time.
EXTERNAL: declares the
following identifiers to be
function names .
Names
.241 Simple name formation
Alphabet:
Size:
Avoid key words:
Formation rule:
. 242 Designators
Procedures
Statement label: .
Function label:
Subroutine label:
all variables.
integer variable or constant.
floating point variable or
constant.
double precision floating
variable or constant.
complex variable or constant.
Boolean variable or constant.
Hollerith item.
alphameric item.
alphameric item that can
only be used for output.
alphameric item that can
only be input during a
run; it can be used for
output, or as a format
statement .
A to Z, 0 to 9
I to 8 char.
no.
first char must be letter .
unsigned integer.
same as variable being
defined.
no designator.
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN·63
§ 164.
.242 Designators (Contd. )
Data (if not specified
in a TYPE statement)
Integer variables: . . . .
Floating point
variables:
Equipment
Card:
Magnetic tape:
Printer: . . .
Comments: . . .
Translator control:
. 25
.3
DATA DESCRIPTION FACILITIES
implied by verbs READ,
PUNCH.
use key word TAPE; or
READ, WRITE.
implied by verb PRINT.
C in col. 1 of statement.
.31
Methods of Direct Data Description
none.
o to 3.
all variables.
Hierarchy by list:
Level by indenting: .
Level by coding:
Others
Array size:
Four-digit integer: . . .
Four-digit integers, 5: . .
Floating point
items: . . . .
. 32
Files and Reels: . .
.33
Records and Blocks
yes.
FORMAT statement only.
yes; TYPE declarations .
no.
no.
first letter of name if not
listed by TYPE .
no .
no.
no.
DIMENSION (4, 7).
FORMAT (14).
FORMAT (514).
FORMAT (F8.3, ElO.4)
for +999. 999 and
+. 0000E+99.
own coding .
no .
EQUIVALENCE statement causes sharing of
storage locations.
no.
all inter-related; no practical limits.
•
Others:
.263 Data
Files:
Record formats:
Items:
. 264 Equipment
Tape units:
Card readers:
Card punches:
Printers:
.316
. 317
.318
.319
yes.
yes.
. 262 Procedures
Numbered statements: . .
Functions:
.311 Concise item picture: . . . . .
. 312 List by kind:
.313 Qualify by adjective: . . . . .
.314 Qualify by phrase
.315 Qualify by code: .
no.
yes.
yes; except H"ollerith.
yes.
all inter-related; no
practical limits.
Subroutines:
all names are local to the
program, subroutine, or
function in which they are
defined unless specified
explicitly or by block
name in COMMON statement.
any other initial letter.
Number of Names
.261 All entities:
Region of Meaning of
Names: • . . . . .
initial I, ], K, L. M, N.
Structure of Data Names
Dynamically set: . .
. 26
.27
key words EQUIVALENCE,
COMMON, TYPE.
.251 Qualified names:
.252 Subscripts
Number per item:
Applicable to: . .
Class may be
Special index variable: . . .
Any variable:
Literal:
Expression:
Form may be
Integer only: ..
Signed: . . . .
Truncated fraction: . . . .
Rounded fraction:
. 253 Synonyms
Preset:
243: 164.242
no limit.
no practical limit.
no practical limit .
: } to..l of
©
64 unit,.
.331 Variable record
size: . . . .
.332 Variable block
size: . . . .
dynamic.
fixed (preset variable for
buffered input-output).
1 to N blocks .
.333 Record size range: .
. 334 Block size
READ TAPE, WRITE
TAPE: . . . . • . ', 128 words (binary format) .
READ INPUT TAPE,
WRITE OUTPUT
TAPE: . . . .
. 120 characters (BCD format) .
. 80 columns.
READ, PUNCH:.
PRINT: . . . .
. 120 characters.
BUFFER IN, BUFFER
OUT:
. variable.
.335 Choice of record
size:
· READ, WRITE statement.
.336 Choice of block
size: . . . .
· fixed for each non-buffered
input-output statement
type; BUFFER statements
specify names of first and
last variables in block.
. 337 Sequence control:
· own coding .
.338 In-out error control: . . . . .
· own coding, using IF
clauses.
.339 Blocking control:
· none; I or more full blocks
per logical record.
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243: 164.340
§
CDC 1604-A
164 •
. 34
.36
Data Items
.341 Designation of
class:
. 342 Possible classes
Integer: . . .
Fixed point: .
Floating point:
Logical: . . .
Double precision:
Complex: . .
Alphameric: .
.343 Choice of external
radix:
.344 Possible external
radicies
Decimal:
Octal: . .
.345 Internal justification: . . . . .
. 346 Choice of external
code: . . . . .
.361 Duplicate format:
· by name or TYPE declaration.
Multi-subscripts: .
Level of item: . .
. 364 Other subscriptable
entities: . . . . .
· yes.
· yes.
· yes.
· FORMAT statement.
. 354 Conditional variabIes:
· FORMAT statement and
READ, WRITE statement.
10/62
.± 247
· computed GO TO.
• mandatory, in DIMENSION
statement.
.1 to 3.
· variables.
· input-output units.
.4
OPERATION REPERTOIRE
.41
Formulae
+:
· alpha automatic left justified.
integers automatic right
justified.
· none.
· 10- 308 to 10+308 .
· 120 characters.
· 16 octal digits.
· yes.
· optional.
• same as constants.
· own coding; e.g., TEN
10.0.
· by multiple references to a
single FORMAT statement.
· COMMON statement .
EQUIVALENCE statement .
.411 Operator List
· yes.
· yes.
Data Values
. 351 Constants
Possible sizes
Integer: . .
Fixed point:
Floating point:
Alphameric:
Logical: . .
Subscriptable:
Sign provision:
.352 Literals: . .
.353 Figuratives:. . .
. 362 Re-definition: . .
.363 Table description.
Subscription:. .
· yes.
· no.
· yes.
· yes.
.347 Possible external codes
Decimal:.
· yes.
Octal:
· yes.
Hollerith:
· yes.
Alphameric:
· yes.
. 348 Internal item size
Variable size:
· fixed.
Designation:
· none.
Range
Fixed point
numeric:
· fixed, 1 word.
Floating point
numeric:
· fixed, lor 2 words.
Complex:
· fixed, 2 words.
Logical
Subscripted:
· fixed, 1 bit.
Non-subscripted: . · fixed, 1 word.
Alphameric:
· fixed, 1 word of up to 8
characters.
.349 Sign provision:
· optional.
. 35
Special Description Facilities
=
· addition, also unary .
· subtraction, also unary.
· multiplication.
I:
· division.
**.
· exponentiation.
=: . . . . .
· is set equal to.
ABSF ( H:.
· absolute value.
INTF ( )t:.
· entire.
MODF (A, B) t:
· remainder A.;. B.
MAXOF (A, ... ) t:.
· max value; fixed argument.
MAXIF (A, ... ) t:
· max value; floating argument.
· min value; fixed argument.
MINOF (A, . .. )l:
· min value; floating arguMIN1F(A, ... ) t:
ment .
DIMF (A, B) t:
· diminish A by B.
SIGNF (A, B) t:
· transfer sign of A to B.
FLOATF ( ):
· float an integer.
XFIXF ( ):
· fix a floating point variable.
.
LOGF ( ):
· natural log.
SINF ( ):.
· sine.
ASINF ( ):
· arc sine.
COSF ( ):
· cosine.
ACOSF ( ):.
· arc cosine.
EXPF ( ):
· exponential.
SQRTF ( ):.
· square root.
ATANF( ):.
· arctangent.
TANHF ( ):
· hyperbolic tangent.
RANIF ( ):.
· produce random number
(even distribution)
RNDEVF ( ):
· produce random number
(Gauss distribution).
t denotes function may have prefix X to denote
fixed point result .
.412 Operands allowed
Classes: . . .
· any of eight.
Mixed scaling:
· yes.
Mixed classes:
· yes.
Mixed radices:
· yes.
Literals: . . .
· yes.
.413 Statement structure
Parentheses
a - b - c means: .
· (a-b) - c.
a + b x c means:
.a+(bxc).
a .;. b .;. c means:
· (a .;. b) .;. c.
abC means:
illegal; parentheses must
be used.
Size limit: .
.660 char.
Multi -results:
· no.
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN·63
§
164.
243:164.414
· 45
.414 RouncUng of results:
. truncation of integers at
each step in expression.
• 415 Special cases
Fixed
Floating
x= -x: . .
K= -K
X= -X.
x = x + 1: .•
K = K+ 1
X = X + 1x = 4.7 y: . . • K = 47*K/10
X = 4.7 * Y.
x = 5x107 +y2: 50000000+L**2 X = 5.E7+Y**2.
x = Iyl: • . • . K = XABSF(L)
X = ABSF(Y).
x = entire (3.5): K = XINTF(L)
X = INTF(Y).
.416 Typical examples: •.
X = (-B + SQRTF(B*B-4. 0
*A *C»/(2. O*A).
.42
Operations on Arrays
. 421 Matrix operations:.
.422 Logical operations
Sizes of operands:
AND: . • • . .
Inclusive OR: .
Exclusive OR:
NOT: • • . .
Designation: •
.423 Scanning:. . . .
.43
Data Movement and Format
.441
.442
. 443
.444
. 445
Data copy example:
Levels possible: . .
Multiple results: . .
Missing operands: •
Size of operands
Exact match: • .
Alpha: . . •
Filler rule
Numbers: •
Alpha: ••.
Truncating rule
Numbers: ••.
Alpha: • • . • .
Variable size
destination:
• 446 Editing possible
Change class:
Change radix:
Insert editing symbols
Actual point: • • .
Suppress zeroes: •
Insert: '"
Float: . • . • . . •
.448 Special moves:. • . .
. 449 Character manipulation:
none.
own coding.
implied in each input-output
statement.
none.
REWIND.
none.
Search on key: •
Rewind:
Unload: • • • . .
.46
Operating Communication
.461 Log of progress: . • . . PRINT uses on-line printer •
• 462 Messages to operator: • same as log (error messages are automatically
typed on console
none.
typewriter) •
.463 Offer options:
PAUSE and type decimal
48 bits (1 bit if subscripted).
integer •
. AND.
PRINT message and PAUSE .
. OR.
• 464 Accept option: • • . • . IF SENSE SWITCH n.
none .
. NOT.
TYPE LOGICAL.
.47 Object Program Errors
none.
• 44
. 45
Restart: •••.
Start new reel: .
Start new block:
Error
Other Computation: • . subprograms in symbolic
or COBOL language may
reference or be referenced by FORTRAN
subprograms.
Alignment rule
Numbers: •
File Manipulation (Contd.)
Y=X.
items •
none.
not possible.
implied, except for alpha
or input-output.
right justified or
normalized.
left justified.
zeros.
blanks.
truncate at left.
truncate at right.
no.
yes.
yes.
automatic.
automatic.
automatic point.
- sign only.
none .
none.
File lvianipulation
Open: . • • . . • •
own coding.
Close: . . . . . .
own coding.
Advance to next record: READ, WRITE, PUNCH,
PRINT, BUFFER ..
Step back a record:
BACKSPACE.
Set restart point: •
none.
©
Overflow:
In-out:
Invalid data:
I/O device busy:
Discovery
Special Actions
IF clauses
IF (10 check)
format checks
IF (UNIT)
.5
PROCEDURE SEQUENCE CONTROL
.51
Jumps
.511 Destinations allowed:
. 512 Unconditional jump:
. 513 Switch:. • • . . •
.514 Setting a switch: .
.515 Switch on data: ••
· 52
own coding.
own coding.
typed messages.
own coding .
statement •
GOTON•
GO TO M, or GO TO M,
(35, 47, 18).
ASSIGN 35 TO M.
GO TO (35, 47, 18), 1.
Conditional Procedures
.521 Designators
Condition:
Procedure:
.522 Simple conditions: •
• 523 Conditional relations
Equal: . • . •
Not equal: • . • • •
Greater than:. . . .
Less than: • • . . .
Greater than or equal:
Less than or equal:
.524 Variable conditions: .•
IF.
,implied.
expression or variable
versus zero.
.EQ.,=.
.NE.
.GT.
• LT.
.GE.
.LT.
true or false for logical
expressions.
less than, equal to, or
greater than zero for
arithmetic expressions.
· 525 Compound Conditionals
IF x AND y: •. • . •
IF x OR y: • • . . • .
IF x DO a AND y DO b:
IF x DC - OR Y DO b:
.526 Alternative designator:
yes .
yes.
no.
no.
branch to second named
statement if logical
expression is false.
.527 Condition on alternative: no.
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243: 164.528
CDC 1604-A
§ 164.
. 528 Typical examples: .
· 53
Subroutines
.531 Designation
Single statement:.
Set of statements
First: .
Last:
....•.
. 532 Possible subroutines:
· 533 Use in -line in program:
• 534 Mechanism
Cue with parameters:
Number of parameters: .•
Cue without parameters: .
•
Formal return: ••.
Alternative return: .
• 535 Names
Parameter call by
value: .
Parameter call by
name: .
Non-local names:
Local names: .
Preserved own
variables: .
· 536 Nesting limit: . ,. .
· 537 Automatic recursion
allowed:
.••
• 54
SUBROUTINE.
END .
any number of statements.
no.
.6
.7
LlliRARY FACILITIES
CALL XXX (X, Y, Z).
.71
Identity:
.72
Kinds of Libraries
maximum of 64.
CALL XXX.
RETURN at least once.
none •
Operand Definition
by Procedure:
· 56
10/62
......
no.
integer only.
positive integers.
greater than.
no •
no .
no .
127 .
yes.
available.
can write new function in
library.
CO-OP Monitor Library .
no .
yes.
.73
Storage Form: •
magnetic tape; variable
length blocks in reloeatable binary format.
yes.
use COMMON.
all.
.74
Varieties of Contents: . subroutine s.
functions.
service routines.
all.
no limit.
.75
Mechanism
none.
.751 Insertion of new item:. separate run.
.752 Language of new item:. FORTRAN, CODAP 1, or
COBOL .
. 753 Method of call:. .
named in procedures .
no.
same as set.
.76
FUNCTION.
END.
any number of statements •
.761 Open routines exist: . . no.
.762 Closed routines exist:. yes.
.763 Open-closed is variable: no .
by name in expression.
RETURN .
TRANSLATOR CONTROL
· 81
Transfer to Another
Language: . . • • . • only by calling a subroutine
written in that language.
.82
Optimizing Information Statements
none.
yes.
use COMMON.
all.
Types of Routines
.8
· 821 Process usage
statements:. • • • • • none.
.822 Data usage statements: COMMON.
EQUIVALENCE.
all.
. . none.
· 83
Loop Control
. 561 Designation of loop
Single procedure:
First and last
procedures: .••
EXTENSION OF THE
LANGUAGE: . • . .
none .
.721 Fixed master: . . •
. 722 Expandable master:
Function Definition by Procedure
• 541 Designation
Single statement: .
Set of statements
First: . . . . . .
Last: • . . . . •
. 542 Level of procedure:
. 543 Mechanism
Cue: . . . . . . .
Formal return: .' .
• 544 Names
Parameter call by
value: . . • • . .
Parameter call by
name: . • . . • .
Non-local names:
Local names: . .
Preserved own
variables: . . .
. 55
.562 Control by count: . . .
IF (X**2. 0-3. 0) 29, 37, 18; '.563 Control by step
Parameter
go to 29, 37 or 18 if X2-3
Special index: .
is respectively less than,
Any variable: •
equal to, or greater than
Step:.. • . . •
zero.
Criteria: . • .. •
IF «(A*B). GT. C). AND. (D.
Multiple parameters:
EQ. E» 7, 12; go to 7 if
the expression is true and • 564 Control by condition:
• 565 Control by list: . • .
to 12 if false.
• 566 Nesting limit: . . . .
. 567 Jump out allowed: .•
'.568 Control variable exit
status: . . . . • . .
not possible.
.84
none.
current place to named end;
e. g., DO 173 1= 1, N, 2.
. 85
Translator
Environment: .
Target Computer
Environment:. .
. • . no .
no.
Program Documentation
Control: . . . . . .-. no.
I AUERBACH I @
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN-63
243:164.900
.94
H64.
•9
TARGET COMPUTER ALLOCATION CONTROL
. 91
Choice of Storage Level: no.
.92
Address Allocation: •. none.
.93
Arrangement of Items
in Words in Unpacked
Form: • • • • • . . • standard for numerics.
.95
©
Assignment of InputOutput Devices: •.
specified in input-output
statements; re-assignable.
at load time •
Input-Output Areas: . . automatic (ENCODE and
DECODE permit packing
into and unpacking from
named input-output areas
for buffered input- output
operations ).
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243: 165.1 00
.STA"ARD
II
EDP
CDC 1604-A
REPORTS'
Process Oriented Language
COBOL
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: COBOL
§
165
.14
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identi~:
1604 COBOL.
.12
Origin:
CODASYL committee; implemented by Control
Data Corporation.
.13
Reference:
. 14
Introduction
STM 07-09
September, 1962 .
Introduction (Contd.)
Deficiencies: . . . . . none in prospect.
Electives:
These are listed below by reference to the keys under which they are discussed in the Users' Guide
(4:161).
NO
'The CDC implementation of COBOL 1961 is scheduled
to become available at the start of 1963; however,
prelim inary information is now available. It is stated
that it will include all of Required COBOL 61, the
electives defined below, and the SORT provision
of Extended COBOL 61. Compilation will take place
under the supervision of the CO-OP Monitor, and,
therefore, a programmer is able to mix COBOL languages with FORTRAN 62, or CODAP 1 assembly
language within the same program. 'The actual
choice of I/O units does not take place until object
time in this system and, therefore, the RECORDING
MODE IS clause of the file description is meaningless. 'This choice also requires that the operating
instructions be written in terms of the CO-OP Monitor names for I/O units, such as "Standard Input
Medium, "instead of "Tape No.7."
In addition to the SORT and ENTER functions, the
most important electives that provide new procedural
facilities are:
#16: RANGE IS ... clause, which allows a condition name to be associated with one or more
values or ranges of value.
#26: USE verb, which allows standard, library
or own COBOL coding procedures to be implemented when file or reel labels are being processed, or when input-output errors have been
detected. A separate section allows the items in
a label block to be named and described.
#33: Fourteen decimal digits are used in arithmetic.
There are three other features, which simplify the
writing of programs rather than adding to the available facilities:
#1: COMPUTE, which allows the use of+, -,
*,/, **,=, in formulae.
#28: MOVE CORRESPONDING, which simplifies
the movement of relevant portions of one data
area to another, and performs any necessary
editing.
#25: INCLUDE verb, which allows procedure
paragraphs to be extracted from a library at
compilation time.
©
TITLE
1f1 Further- characters
#2
#4
#5
Further characters
Long literals
Figurative Constants
#6
Figurative Constants
#8
Variable Length
Blocks
FILE CONTAINS
Table Size
#9
# 13
#16
#20
#21
#22
#24
#25
#26
#27
#28
#32
#33
#34
#35
#36
#37
#39
#43
#45
#47
RANGE IS
VALUE option
Labels
COMPUTE
ENTER
INCLUDE
USE
LOCK
MOVE CORRESPONDING
Formulas
Operand size
Specific relationship
COMMENT
+, -, *,/, **,=.
= only; not > or <
Up to 225 characters
UPPER-BOUND(S);
LOWER BOUND(S).
HIGH-VALUE(S); LOW
VALUE(S).
Allows table and array
sizes to be set at object time.
see description above.
see description above.
see description above.
see description above.
see description above.
see description above.
see description above.
see description above.
IS UNEQUAL TO,
EQUALS, EXCEEDS
IF ... NOT ZERO
Implied subjects
ANDS or ORS
Labels and Errors
File Description
Library
I/O Procedures Library
DATE - COMPILED
Extensions
The SORT facility allows the sorting of a file on a
number of keys. Each record in the file can be
processed before and/or after the sorting process.
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243:166.100
•
II
STANDARD
EDP
REPORTS
CDC 1604-A
Process Oriented Language
CXA
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: CXA
§
166.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
CXA
gontrol Data
E~tended ~lgol.
The CXA language has not been fully released, but
preliminary information is available. Control Data
Corporation expects to release the CXA translator in
January, 1963.
©
CXA is stated to be based on ALGOL 58 and is to inelude BALGOL as a subset. As CXA is designed to
run under the control of the CO-OP Monitor, however,
the BALGOL External Statement, which allows the
use of machine language, has not been implemented.
The CXA translator is being produced by a Compiler
Generating System. This system uses one set of
tables to describe the source language and other
tables to describe the object language to produce a
compiler. It is, there.fore, possible by modifying
the tables and re ~running the CGS to produce a modified version of the.CXA compiler for a modified
language, thereby giving a user some freedom to
select his own ALGOL dialect if he wishes to do so.
1962 by Auerbach Corporalion and BNA Incorporaled
10/62
243: 172.1 00
·STAiD/'D
_EDP
."
CDC 1604-A
REPORTS
M. O. Language
CODAP-1
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: CODAP-1
§
.22
172.
B: . . . . . . .
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:. . . . . . . CODAP-l.
. 12
Description
designates an index register, a jump key, a stop
key, or a subinstruction;
can be written in absolute
or mnemonic form.
M:. . . . . . . . . . (a) for machine code instructions, an address,
in absolute or relative
form, or a literal constant.
(b) for pseudo-ops a series
of parameters extending into remarks column .
CODAP-1 is an outgrowth of CODAP, which is the
assembly routine that has been available for the
CDC 1604 since 1960. The assembly language performs two roles; first, it allows a programmer to
write machine instructions and constants in a convenient form, and second, it provides a systematic
means of using any library, monitor, or subprogram as desired.
Labelling is unusually free, requiring one letter
with an option of being followed by up to seven further alphameric characters for all labels, except
one type of data area which uses an all numeric label.
There are two types of data areas; both called
"COMMON" areas. These are differentiated in the
language by having alphameric (called "Labelled
COMMON") or numeric (called "Numeric COMMON")
labels, and in use by being able, or not able, to preset the contents of the areas at load time only if
"Labelled COMMON" is used.
Communication with other independently written
routines is arranged by the EXTernal Symbol linkage and Lffirary pseudo-ops. These operations provide for a label to be common to more than one routine and also control the library call and the setting
of parameter values in the Lffirary routines. The
actual linkage is created at loading time.
.2
LANGUAGE FORMAT
.21
Diagram
LOCN
8
OPN
B
M
6
2
21
REMARKS
40
size in card
[columns
. 23
Corrections: .
.24
Special Conventions
.241 Compound addresses:
. 242 Multi -addresses:
. 243 Literals:.
. 244 Special coded
addresses:
.245 Other
Radix definition:
.3
LABELS
.31
General
.311 Maximum number of
labels: .
. 312 Common label formation rule:
.313 Reserved labels:
. 315 Designators:
.316 Synonyms:
. 32
.22
Legend (Contd.)
Universal Labels:
Legend
LOCN:
OPN:
unique label allowing cros s referencing within or outside the subprogram.
(a) Machine code, in abso.33 Local Labels
lute or numeric form.
(b) Pseudo-op codes, which
.331 Labels for procedures
produce parameters
Existence: . . .
used by a supervisor
Formation rule
routine, controlling
First character:
storage allocation, linkOthers:
age with other programs,
Number of charand input assignments.
acters:
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
no special facilities.
e.g., SYMBOL + 5 .
none .
up to 40 char, any code .
* means this address.
** means - O.
OCT, DEC, BCD, FLX
pseudo ~odes preceeding
the literals and constants.
no practical limit .
1 to 8 alphamerics including certain special characters with no embedded
blanks. First character
must be non -numeric.
none .
none.
yes, via EQUivalence
pseudo-op .
none, but individual labels
can be made local to
several independent subprograms, being called an
External Table Entry to
each subprogram.
optional.
non -numeric character.
any non-blank character.
1 to 8.
10/62
243: 172.332
§
CDC 1604·A
172 •
. 332 Labels for library
routines: .
.333 Labels for con'
stants:
same as for procedures, or
as an element of an array
within a numbered-COMMON statement.
none.
none.
Constants
PROCEDURES
.51
Direct Operation Codes
.511 Mnemonic
Existence:
Number:
Example:
Comment:
same as for procedures.
optional.
1 to 8 alphabetics, "Labeled Common Blocks. "
optional.
8 numeric or blank characters, an all blank label
is acceptable, "Numbered
Common Blocks. "
same as for procedures.
Labels for arrays: .
.41
.5
same as for procedures.
Labels for reserved
blocks for working
storage
Existence:
Formation rule:
DATA
Input-Output Areas:
.512 Absolute
Existence:
Number:
Example:
Integer:
Fixed numeric:
Floating numeric:
Alphameric, BCD,
Flexowriter or Teletype coding:
64 characters.
.412 Maximum size literals
Integer
Decimal:
32,767.
Octal:
77,777.
Fixed numeric:
none.
Floating numeric:
none.
Alphameric:
64 characters.
.42
Working Areas
.421 Data layout
Implied by use:
Specified in program:
.422 Data type:
.423 Redefinition:
10/62
no.
BLOCK and COMMON statements.
implied by use.
use of'BLOCK statements.
optional with mnemonic.
64 (only 62 used).
45 for Add Logical.
Macro-Codes:
none, nor any facilities
for programmer
insertion.
.53
Interludes:
none.
.54
Translator Control
.541 Method of control
Allocation counter:
Label adjustment:
Annotation: .
.542 Allocation counter
Set to absolute:
External Language
14 decimal digits plus sign.
16 octal digits plus sign.
not allowed.
14 digits with a decimal or
binary exponent of lip to
3 digits, plus sign.
optional with absolutes.
64 basic with 8 true alternatives .
FDV; Floating Divide.
where one op code has more
than one type of operation,
specified by "B, " different mnemonics may be
used for the common code.
.52
.411 Maximum size constants
Machine Form
. specified in program.
same as for procedures.
. 334 Labels for files:
. 335 Labels for records: .
.336 Labels for variables:
.337 Labels for other subprograms:
.338 Others
Labels for blocks
containing preset
data
Existence:
Formation rule:
.4
.43
Set to label:
Set relative to
label:
Step forward: .
Step backward:
Reserve area:
.543 Label adjustment
Set labels equal:
Set label relative:
Set absolute value:.
Clear label table:
.544 Annotation
Comment phrase:
Title phrase:
. 545 Other
Allocation mode:
various pseudo-op.
various pseudo-op.
REMark pseudo-op.
yes. (ORG pseudo-op; absolute or predefined entry in location).
yes.
yes.
implied by set relative to
label.
implied.
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
not within single subpro"
gram; yes, by dividin& in-.
to separate subprograms.
yes.
no .
absolute or relocatable.
none.
.55
Facilities Omitted:
.6
SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE
.61
S~ecial
.62
Seecial Functions
Arithmetic:
none.
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: CODAP-1
§
172.
.753 Method of call: .
. 621 Facilities:
. 622 Method of call:
.63
.64
Overlay Control:
none, any could be added in
installation library .
LIDrary pseudo-op.
none, but reserved space,
called COMMON, can be
redefined for each subprogram.
Data Editing
. 641 Radix conversion: .
Code translation:
.642 Format control:
.65
Input-Output Contro1: .
decimal-to-binary for
initial constants.
alphabetic-to-BCD, Flexowriter and Teletype.
none.
own program, with I/O
pseudo-op check on I/O
units involved.
.66
Sorting:
none.
.67
Diagnostics:
none in CODAP.l system, up
to 10 snapshots and various dumps incorporated
in CO-OP Monitor.
.. 7
.76
Identity: .
.72
Kinds of Libraries
no.
yes.
.73
Storage Form:
magnetic tape.
.74
Varieties of Contents:
yes .
Macros:
.82
Pseudos
Code
BCD:
BES:
BLOCK: .
BSS:
COMMON:
DEC: .
EJECT: .
END: .
ENTRY:.
EQU: .
EXT: .
FINIS:
FLX: .
IDENT:
I/O:
LID:
OCT: .
ORG: .
ORGE:
R.SM: .
SPACES:
TEL: .
via CO-OP Monitor.
©
./
.81
as determined by installation.
CODAP 1, or FORTRAN62.
yes .
INSTRUCTION CODE REPERTOIRE
Mechanism
. 751 Insertion of new
item:
. 752 Language of new
item:
"l
.8
installation library.
.721 Fixed master:
. 722 Expandable master: .
LID code identifies routine.
EXT identifies entry point .
Manual lists special calls.
Insertion in Program
.761 Open routines exist: .
.762 Closed routines
exist:
. 763 Open-closed is optional:
.764 Closed routines
appear once:
LIDRARY FACILITIES
• 71
.75
243:172.621
. 84
Direct: .
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
none.
Description
Binary Coded Decimal.
Reserve Block, End with
Symbol.
Identify Data Region.
Reserve Block, Starting
with Symbol.
Identify COMMON arrays.
Decimal Constant.
Eject Line Printer Page .
Physical End of Subprogram.
Entry Point Symbol.
Equivalence.
External Symbol.
Physical End of Source
Program.
Flexowriter Code.
Identifier.
Input/Output Assignements.
Identify Library Routine.
Octal Value.
Origin Address.
Origin Address Relocatable.
Remarks Only .
Space Listing.
Teletype Codes.
see Section 243:121. 100.
10/62
243:182.100
_SlA,oARo
II
EDP
R£I'ORTS
CDC 1604-A
Program Translator
CODAP·1
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: CODAP·1
§
182.
.223 Obligatory grouping: . . • . .
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .
.12
Description:
.23
The CODAP-1 Translator produces output in either relocatable or absolute binary coding. The output is always on magnetic tape. The input may be either
punched cards, paper tape, or magnetic tape in card
format. This translator will also assemble CODAP
source language programs provided that certain restrictions (described below) are observed.
.231 Maximum number of
source statements: .
.232 Maximum size source
statements:
.233 Maximum number of
data items:
.234 Other
Maximum number of
Symbols:
. . . • . CODAp·!,
The translator produces a listing of language errors
and of the volume of storage required for the subprogram. An optional listing on tape or on-line
printer of both the source and object programs is
available.
Relocatable Binary Output.
Compatibility with CO-OP Monitor.
Pseudo-ops. BLOCK, COMMON, ENTRY, EXT.
If any of the following are desired, use CODAP:
Compatibility with AUTOMONITOR.
Pseudo-ops. WST, RST.
· 13
Originator:.
Control Data Corporation.
. 14
Maintainer:.
Control Data Corporation .
· 15
Availability:
presently available in 1604
version.
.2
INPUT
.21
Language
· 211 Name:
. 22
.3
OUTPUT
.31
Object Program
.311 Language name:
.312 Language style:
. 313 Output media:
.32
Form
. 221 Input media:
.222 Obligatory ordering:
magnetic tape .
punched card.
punched paper tape.
none.
©
80 coIU):Ilns.
no practical limit.
4, 096, with 4, 096
Equivalent names.
62, with 62
Equivalent names.
.321 Standard inc1usions:
.322 Compatible with:
.33
absolute or relocatable
binary.
binary coding suitable for
CO-OP Monitor.
magnetic tape .
Conventions
none.
CO-OP Monitor.
Documentation
Subject
. . '. . . . CODAP-1.
no practical limit.
Maximum number of
Named Entry Points: 100, with 100
Equivalent names.
Maximum number of
Pseudo-operation
Names: . • . . . • . 31.
Maximum number of
Machine Operation
Names: . • . • • • . 64.
The relationship between the CODAP-1 and CODAP
translators is summarized below.
If any of the follOWing are desired, use CODAP-1:
Size Limitations
Maximum number of
Block Common
Names:
CODAP-1 is particularly designed to produce Relocatable Binary Output suitable for the CO-OP Monitor. The translator is stored on the CODAP Monitor tape as a subsidiary control system. It can be
used as part of the CO-OP Monitor facilities as a
"Translate and Run" assembler.
BLOCK, defining data area,
is immediately followed
by associated COMMON
defining arrays .
Source program: .
Object program: .
Storage map:
Provision
listing 2 (optional).
listing 2 (optional).
top and bottom limits only
(listing 1) .
none.
listing 2 (mandatory).
Restart point list:
Language errors:
Entry points to subroutines: • . .
listing 1.
External symbols
used in subroutines: . . . . . . . listing 1.
1962 by Auerbach Corporatian and BNA Incorporated
11/62
g43: 182.4 00
§
CDC 1604·A.
182.
.52
.4
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE
.41
Phases and Passes
Pass 1: .
Pass 2: .
•42
Optional Mode
. 421
.422
.423
. 424
.425
Translate:
Translate and run:
Check only:
Patching:
Up-dating:
.43
Special Features
.431 Alter to check
only:
.432 Fast unoptimized
translate: •
.433 Short translate on
restricted program:.
.44
.45
Bulk Translat~
Conditions
I :
stores the input; if necessary uses a scratch tape.
a) produces IDCcoding
from program Identity
card, and BLOCK and
COMMON sequences.
b) produces a binary pro·
gram tape.
c) optionally produces the
Entry Point Symbol
Table, and the Linkage
Address Table for use by
the CO-OP Monitor
loader.
d) produces a transfer address to initiate the routine.
yes •
yes.
yes .
no.
no.
. . . .......
using mM 088 Card Reader
at 650 cards/min input
and CDC 1607 Tape
output.
using CDC 1607 Tape input
and output.
using CDC 606 Tape input
and output.
II:
III:
. 521 Normal Translating .
I :
500 cards/min (*).
? + O. 002S mins (*).
2000 cards/min (*).
? + O. 005S min (*).
?
II:
III:
(*) Manufacturer's estimate considered to be
reliable but not final.
.53
Optimizing Data:
· none .
.54
Object Program Performance: •
· unaffected .
.6
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS
.61
Translating Computer
.611 Minimum configuration:
no.
no.
no.
yes under CO-OP Monitor
'facUities; otherwise none.
CDC 1604 or 1604-A with
32K core store and 4
magnetic tapes.
.612 Larger configuration advantages:
.62
none,
Target Computer
.62.1 Minimum configuration:
.622 Usable extra facilities:
CDC 1604 computer with
one input device •
· all available ,facilities.
Program Diagnostics
.451 Tracers: .
.452 Snapshots:
.453 Dumps:
.46
Translation Time
Translator Library:
none.
up to 10 in CO-OP Monitor.
yes, automatically or under operator's control in
CO-OP Monitor.
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE
.51
Object Program Space
none, but see CO-OP Monitor
.512 Space required for each
input-output file:.
implied in program.
.513 Approximate expansion of procedures:
1 to 1.
11/62
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
Error
Interlock
Action
MisslIig entries:
Unsequenced entries
Duplicate names:
Improper format:
Incomplete entries:
Target computer over·
flow:
Inconsistent program:
none.
.5
• 511 Fixed overhead: . • .
•. 7
.8
none.
none.
check
check
check
listed on output.
listed on output.
listed on output.
checked at load time.
none.
ALTERNATIVE TRANSLATORS
Computer:
Identity: .
Date:
Comment:,
CDC 1604.
CODAP .
1960.
ancestor of CODAP-l that
is not compatible with
CO-OP Monitor, has
slightly different pseudoops.
243: 183.100
CDC 1604-A
Program Translator
COBOL
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: ADVANCE REPORT
§
183.
.12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:.
. 12
Description
. . . . . . 1604/1604-A COBOL.
The 1604/1604-A COBOL is scheduled to become
available in December, 1962, and to compile COBOL
statements at a rate of 450 cards per minute. It
will require a 32K CDC 1604 or 1604-A as a translating computer, and will use between two and five
tape units. An on-line printer, card reader, punch
may each be substituted for one of the tape units.
Currently, no details of advisable styling are
available.
Description (Cont'd)
b. The statements are checked for format, conflicting or illegal descriptions, and incomplete or duplicate definitions. As errors are
detected. diagnostics are generated following
the source statement or group of source
statements that are in error.
c. The File Environment and Reference Tables
are partially created. The File Environment
Table contains the descriptions of internal and
external files. The Reference Table lists all
data descriptions required to create the symbol table for Phase II processing.
If certain critical errors have been detected during
Phase I, processing is terminated. Otherwise. the
two tables are firialized. This consists of:
Available listings will be:
a. Additional checking and diagnostic generation.
• Error Messages.
• Reference listing of the source program.
b. Assigning of relocatable addresses to the data
items.
• Optional Data Map (see illustration).
c. Preparation of constants.
• Optional Listing of Object Program.
d. Generation of a map of memory allocated to
the data items.
• Optional Relocatable binary card deck.
After this final processing. the Reference Table is
complete enough to serve as a symbol table for
Phase II processing.
Modes of operation are:
• Compilation only.
.. Compile and execute.
• Compile only selected portion of a program.
The File Environment Table will have information
added during Phase II processing. It will become a
part of the object program to serve as a directory
for the handling of files.
This last facility is designed to allow fast error
correction in source language. This is practical
because no scratch tape is used during the
compilation.
During finalization of the tables, critical errors may
be detected. These errors will not stop the processing, but will prevent execution of the program.
The translator is divided int~ two phases: Phase I,
which operates on the Identification, Environment,
and Data Division; and Phase II, which operates on
the Procedure Division. Only one pass through the
source tape is required, and the speed, quoted
above, of 450 cards per minute is applicable for a
five tape system, with listing of the object program
suppressed.
Phase II
The following description of the two phases is taken
from CDC's memorandum dated September 12, 1962.
Phase I
During this phase, the source statements of the
Identification. Environment. and Data Division are
read. As they are read:
a. A reference listing of the statements is
generated (if requested).
©
The statements of the Procedure Division are read.
As the statements of each paragraph are read:
a. The statements are checked for format, legal
wording, completeness, and continuity. As
errors are detected, diagnostics are generated following the source statement or
group of statements in error.
b. Data items referenced by the statements are
looked up in the Reference Table and an object
code generated to perform the action. Checks
for correct use of data items are performed
as the object code is generated.
c. As each paragraph is completed, it is formed
into a closed subroutine. It is then output in
one or all of the forms:
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
11/62
243:183.120
§
CDC 1604-A
d. Information is added to the File Environment
Table to complete it .
183.
. 12
Description (Contd.)
e. The logical flow of the program is catalogued
in the Sequence Table.
1. An object code listing.
The entire Procedure Division is processed even
though errors have been detected. Detection of a
critical error will cause suppression of card decks,
load-and-go tape, and program execution.
2. A relocatable binary card deck.
3. A subroutine on the load-and-go unit
for execution.
OPTIONAL DATA MAP
tjUPt<
!i"~G
u: III: L
~'i"
SI0RA!;!:
N,~MI:
•
OF DATA r:N1HY
r~
CHAkPQS
p
LOG
SlZE CLASS
USAGE SYNCIoI JURT AI.NK POINT OCCJ~SDepeDIT
IF 0
LOC
04
MEr.;EJ.Vt::R
n 0 00044
2!3~
NUM
O~
tilUO
n 0 00044
1
NUM
FX DEC
n~
biOi
n 1 00044
1
NUM
FX
n~
\jli.l?
n 2 00044
1
NUM
FX DEC
131.
ll?
bl03
n 3 00044
1
NUM
FX
Dec
21L.
11?
t.J1U4
n 4 00044
1
NUM
FX DEC
SOL
11?
U1U?
n 5 00044
5
NUM
FX DEC
O?
81U6
n 2 00047
5
NUM
FX
11/62
R
DEC
DEC
5L
R
5L
::IN
243:184.100
.STAIWARD
EDP
•
CDC 1604·A
Program Translator
FORTRAH·60
REPORTS
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: FORTRAN.60
§
184.
. 23
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
. 12
Description
A number of tables are prepared dUringcompilation. While none of these tables have a fixed
size (they are pUsh-down type tables), the sum of
their entries must not exceed 16,000 locations .
The main tables are listed below; alongside is
given the number of locations each entry uses .
FORTRAN-60
Table
The FORTRAN-60 Translator is a load-and-go
type which solves most of its allocation problems
by calling the six index registers by the fixedpoint variables I through N. These registers are
called whether or not a programmer actually uses
them. It can be seen, therefore, that programs
written to take advantage of this feature will run
very much faster than ones written without such
planning.
Address Assignment
Table:
Storage of location
symbols from tha
generated code:
Equivalence Table:
Information from
equivalence
statements: .
Constants Table:
Storage of constants
used by object
program: • . .
Assigned Variables:
Variables which have
been assigned
locations: •
Format Numbers:
Format Statement
Numbers: .
••
DO-Exits:
Statement number at
end of range of a
DO:
Statement Numbers:
Statement numbers
assigned locations:
Common Variables:
Names appearing in
COMMON statements:
Arrays:
Names appearing in
DIMENSION
statements:
In general, given well-designed programs, comparisons to good hand-coding show a 20 per cent
increase in time usage and a doubling of space
requirements (see Paragraph .54).
An interesting feature is the comparative lack of
size limitations (see Paragraph .234).
FORTRAN-60 runs under its own monitor and is
not presently available to operate under CO-OP
Monitor control. A systematic translation of
FORTRAN-60 programs to FORTRAN-62 is under
way and is being coordinated by the CO-OP Users
Group. At present it is not possible to forecast
whether or not FORTRAN-62 and FORTRAN-63
will entirely supersede FORTRAN-60.
.13
Originator:
Control Data Corporation.
.14
Maintainer:
Control Data Corporation.
.15
Availability:
1959.
.2
.21
Locations/Entry
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
Language
.211 Name:
. 212 Exemptions:
.22
Size Limitations
FORTRAN-60 .
none.
.3
OlITPUT
.31
Object Program: •
Form
.221 Input media:
. 222 Obligatory ordering:.
. 223 Obligatory grouping:.
punched cards or magnetic
tape .
all statements must be in
correct sequence .
none.
© 1962 by Auerbach
Carp<>ratian and BNA Incorporated
none necessarily. An
intermediate assembly
(MAP) listing can be
output; but frequently
this is converted to
machine language and
left in storage at the end
of compilation. See
paragraph .32.
12/62
243: 184~'320
§
CDC 1604· A
184.
•32
.463 Form
Storage medium:
Organization:
Conventions
.321 Standard inclusions:
• 33
FORTLm Compiler. run on
"FORTLm Compiler". This
adds a FORTRAN program,
presently in storage, onto
a library tape.
Documentation
Subject
Source program:
Object program:
Storage map:
Restart point list:
Language errors: .
Provision
optional (Listing 1).
MAP listing (Listing 2).
none.
no.
error printouts placed on
tape; errors in FORMAT
statements noted at
object time.
.4
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE
•41
Phases and Passes
Statements are read in, decoded, and the appropriate code generated in an intermediate language
called MAP. The statement may then be listed
(Listing 1). After all statements have be;en read,
passes are made over the MAP language to satisfy
all conditions. The MAP may then be output as a
listing (Listing 2). It is converted to machine
language and stored ready for execution.
.464 Contents
Routines:
Functions:
Data Descriptions:
.465 Librarianship
Insertion:
Amendment:. •
Call Procedure:
Translate:
Translate and run:
Check only:
Patching: • • . •
Updating: • . • .
.43
S~cial
yes •
yes .
yes •
no .
no.
Features
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE
.51
Object Program Space
.511 Fixed overhead
Name:
Space:
.44
Bulk Translating:
no.
.45
Program
Diagnostics:
none.
'Translator Libra!y
.461 Identity:
.462 User restriction:
12/62
resident' package.
2, 054 words .
.513 Approximate expansion
of procedures:
.52
averages approx. 5 or 6
instructions per
FORTRAN statement
(* *).
Translation Time
Condition I: .
CDC 1607 Tape input, no
output.
CDC 1607 Tape input and
output.
Condition II:
I:
II:
.54
.••••..
reference library.
general.
0.16+ 0.0023 S min .
0.16 + 0.0025 S min.
(where S is the number
of elementary statements.)
Object Program Performance
Type
.431 Alter to check only:
yes.
.432 Fast unoptimized
translate:
not applicable.
.433 Short translate on
restricted program: . no.
.46
system s run.
systems run.
name followed by parameters. Some can be
used in procedural statements (such as LooF),
others are called by
service and debugging
programs.
. 521 Normal Translating:
Optional Mode
.421
•422
•423
•424
. 425
closed.
yes.
no •
.5
It is possible and normal for small enough programs
to be compiled in a manner such that the MAP is
stored in memory and converted to running 'code
without restoring to intermediate tape passes.
. 42
magnetic tape.
grouped by:
Compiler and compiler
subprograms •
Mathematical
subprograms.
Service programs.
Elementary
algebra:
Complex
formulae:
Deep nesting:
Heavy
branching:
Complex
subscripts:
Data editing:
Overlapping
operations:
Time
Space
increased by 20%
doubled.
increased by 20%
increased by 20%
doubled.
doubled.
increased by 20%
doubled.
increased by 50%
unaffected
doubled.
unaffected.
not possible.
(* *) Analyst'S estimate, provided as a guide .only.
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: FORTRAN-60
§
243: 184.600
184.
.7
.6
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS
• 61
Translating Computer
. 611 Minimum
configuration: • • •
.612 Larger configuration
advantages: • . • •
.62
CDC 1604 with at least 2
tape units.
additional tape units save
tape handling time and
on -line card and printer
time.
Error
Check or
Interlock
Missing entries:
check
unsequenced entries:
check
Duplicate names:
check
Improper format:
check
Incomplete entries:
check
Target computer
overflow:
check
Inconsistent program: equivalence check
Target computer
.621 Minimum
configuration:
. 622 Usable extra
facilities:
ERRORS! CHECKS AND ACTION
Size limitations
exceeded:
CDC 1604.
paper tape.
CDC 1605 card units and
printer.
CDC 1607 tape units.
CDC 1610 card units and
printer.
CDC 1612 printer.
©
.8
check
Action
halt compilation
before running •
halt compilation
before running•
halt compllation
before running.
halt compilation
before running.
halt compllation
before running.
halt compllation
before running.
halt compllation
before running.
halt compilation
before running•
ALTERNATNE TRANSLATORS
Computer
Identity
Date
CDC 1604
CDC 1604
FORTRAN 62
FORTRAN 63
1962
1963
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA In<:orporoted
12/62
243:185.100
CDC 1604·A
Program Translator
FORTRAN·62
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: FORTRAN·62
§
185.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . .
. 12
Description
.22
Form
.221 Input media:
FORTRAN·62.
.23
Size Limitations
.232 Maximum size source
statements: .
FORTRAN-62 operates under the CO-OP Monitor,
and translates programs or portions of programs
.234 Others
into relocatable binary code suitable for use in the
No. of nested parenCO-OP Monitor system. In this system, each
separate subprogram is an independent entity, wiiththeses: . . . .
No. of nested DO
out the restriction that the subprograms which are
statements:
compiled, or which are executed together, need be
Dimensioned variwritten iD. the same language. CODAP I, the CDC
1604 Assembly Program, is the only other language
abIes: . . . . .
besides FORTRAN-62 presently available. However, •
COBOL and FORTRAN 63 will be available shortly.
.3
OUTPUT
Under CO-OP Monitor techniques, compile or loadand-go techniques are possible, although this is no
part of the translator. Object program diagnostic
features are also handled in this way. The integration of subprograms, or routines to be performed at
object time, does not require them either to be available at compilation, or to be manually integrated
before running. All such librarianship is done
automatically by the CO-OP loade .. at object time,
with the translator merely generating the necessary parameters.
.31
.32
.13
Originator:
Control Data Corporation.
.14
Maintainer:
Control Data Corporation.
. 15
Availability:
currently in field test.
.2
INPUT
. 21
Language
FORTRAN-62.
none.
©
100 variables and constants.
39.
20.
300.
Object Program
.311 Language name:
. 312 Language style:
. 313 Output media:
relocatable binary .
relative machine code .
magnetic tape, or cards.
Conventions
. 321 Standard inclusions: .
.322 Compatible with:
.33
By comparison with FORTRAN -60, the translation
process for FORTRAN 62 is approximately 20 per
cent quicker. The object program performance is
not much different than that of the FORTRAN-60:
20 per cent more time and twice as much space as
hand - coded routines. However, the recommended
style is very different. In FORTRAN-62, I, J, K,
L, M, N are ordinary fixed point variables, in no
way different from any others. Index Registers are
reserved to control DO-loops, so that the recommended style is to use DO-loops, and not to nest
them deeper than five at anyone point. Subscripts
are evaluated each time they are used; therefore, it
is also desirable to avoid unnecessary multiple
subscripts.
. 211 Name:
. 212 Exemptions:
magnetic tape; paper tape;
cards.
Master Control System.
CO-OP Monitor.
Documentation
Subject
Source program:
Object program: .
Storage map: . .
Restart point list:
Language errors:
Provision
Listing 1.
Listing 3.
Listing 2 (partially; only
external symbols mapped).
no.
Listing 3, and at object
time.
.4
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE
.41
Phases and Passes
Each statement is processed as it is input;
machine language object programming is produced and stored, while the source program is
listed along with any error checks. At the end of
the compilation, the program, still in storage, is
available for optional punch out or listing .
· 42
Optional Mode
.421
· 422
. 423
· 424
.425
Translate:
Translate and run: .
Check only:
Patching:
Updating: .
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
yes .
yes .
yes .
no .
subroutines can be
assembled separately.
12/62
243: 185.430
§
CDC 1604·A
185.
.43
.54
Special Features
.431 Alter to check only:
.432 Fast unoptimized
translate:
.433 Short translate on
restricted program:
automatic
OIl
no.
.45
Program Diagnostics:
see CO-OP Monitor,
Operating Environment.
.46
Translator Library
magnetic tape.
as loaded.
closed only.
no.
yes, (can have been in
CODAP, COBOL, or
FORTRAN) .
LmEDIT routine.
LmEDIT routine.
CALL, or use as a function, causes calling sequence to be formed,
which in turn initiates the
relocatable loader of the
CO-OP Monitor system to
locate and load the actual
routines from tape at
object time.
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE
• 51
Object Program Space
• 511 Fixed overhead
Name: . . . . . . . CO-OP Monitor.
doubled.
Deep nesting
increased by
approx 20%
increased by
approx 20%
doubled.
Complex
subscripts
doubled
doubled •
Data editing
unaffected
unaffected.
Overlapping
operations
unaffi:cted, if
programmer
checks translator methods
unaffected
.6
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS
.61
Translating Computer
.611 Minimum configuration:
..... .
.612 Larger configuration
advantages:
.62
.621 Minimum configuration: . . . . . . .
.622 Usable extra facilities: • . . • . . .
0.1 + 0.002 S min, where S
is the number of statements; includes card
input, source and object
program listings, and
binary tape output.
Optimizing Data
Index Registers:
.8
the control variables of the
first 5 DO loops in any
nest are allocated to index registers.
doubled.
CDC 1604 with 4 tape units.
none.
Target Computer
Translation Time
. 521 Normal translating: .
12/62
increased by
approx 20%
Heavy branching
Library Tape .
none.
.5
. 53
Complex
formulae
no.
yes, via CO-OP Monitor.
. 52
Space
doubled.
Elementary
algebra
error.
Bulk Translating: .
.465 Librarianship
Insertion:
Amendment:
Call Procedure:
Time
increased by
approx 20%
Type
.44
.461 Identity: • . . . .
. 462 User restriction: •
. 463 Form
Storage medium:
Organization: .
. 464 Contents
Routines: .
Data Descriptions: . . . .
Subprograms: .
Object Program Performance
CDC 1604 with 2 tape units.
CDC 1604-A central processor.
CDC 1605 card equipment.
CDC 1607 tape units .
CDC 1608 tape units.
CDC 1610 card equipment .
CDC 1612 printer.
CDC 606 tape unit.
CDC 1617 card reader.
ALTERNATIVE TRANSLATORS
Computer
Identity
CDC 1604
CDC 1604
FORTRAN 60 1959
FORTRAN 63 1963
Date
243:]86.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
_
REPORTS
CDC 1604·A
Program Translator
FORTRAN·63
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: FORTRAN·63
§
186.
.12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
. 12
Description
The FORTRAN-63 program is designed to run under
control of the CO-OP Monitor and automatic buffering on card and printer output is provided by the
system .
. FORTRAN·63.
Publication No. 514.
The FORTRAN -63 translator operates on both the
CDC 1604 and 1604-A computers, and provides a
tape output for use under the CO-OP Monitor System.
No limit on the various storage tables is imposed by
the translator. A single push-down type of storage
allocation is used, and if the entire area allocated to
table storage in core memory is actually filled,
then a scratch tape is used to hold the overflow.
This technique allows freedom from counting the entries of particular tables and gives good utilization
of storage during the compilation.
Description (Contd.)
.13
Originator:
· Control Data Corporation.
.14
Maintainer:
· Control Data Corporation.
.15
Availability:.
· January, 1963 for CDC
1604.
April, 1963 for CDC 3600.
.2
INPUT
.21
Language
Analyses are made during compilation to determine:
1. The flow throughout each DO loop.
2. Any possible simplification of each arithmetic
expression by the removal of common
subexpressions.
3. Whether subscript modification is dependent
on input data at object time. (If so, a small
generator program is operated at object time
to determine modification methods.)
During the running of a FORTRAN-63 program,
-some 3,000 locations are taken up by the CO-OP
Monitor, FORTRAN-63, resident programs, etc.
The FORMAT statements are used interpretively,
being processed each time an input or output occurs.
Beyond this and the subscript modification mentioned above, no translation occurs at object time.
An interesting change in the translating technique is
the treatment of multisubscripts. Instead of these
subscripts being computed each time they are used
(which may involve tWo multiplications and an addition), the basic value of each subscript combination
is stored and modified each time an alteration to one
of its components is made. This modification only
involves one multiplication or one addition, and is
thus considerably shorter tIui.n the time involved in
anyone evaluation of a single subscript. The overall effect of this depends on the number of times a
subscript value is used, as opposed to the number
of times its value changes whether or not it is actually used. In straightforward, lightly branched,
comparatively short subprograms there will almost
always be a gain in using this subscripting method.
In other cases the gain is more problematical, and
losses are possible (see paragraph .533).
©
.211 Name:
.212 Exemptions:
. 22
Form
.221 Input media:
.23
· FORTRAN-63.
· none .
· magnetic tape, cards,
paper tape.
Size Limitations
.231 Maximum number of
source statements:
.232 Maximum size source
statements:
.233 Maximum number of
data items:
· no limit (A scratch tape is
used if necessary.)
· 660 characters.
· no limit (A scratch tape is
used if necessary.)
.234 Others
The following tables are contained in storage. The
total amount of storage allocated to tables must be
used up prior to the use of a scratch tape to augment
this space. However there is no limit as to how
much space any table or group of tables may take,
provided there is room in internal storage.
1. Declared Identifier List. An entry is made
for each unique identifier appearing in a TYP2,
COMMON, SUBROUTINE, FUNCTION, EQUIVALENCE, or DATA statement. Associated
with the entry are the definition and properties
associated with the identifier; e.g., its mode,
size, dimenSionality, etc.
2. Index Variable List. An entry is made for
each unique identifier appearing in a standard
index function (given below).
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
12/62
243: 186.234
§
CDC 1604-A
186.
.432 Fast unoptimized
translate:. . . . . . no .
. 234 Others (Contd.)
.433 Short translate on
3. Index Function List. An entry is made for each
unique index function, in the form:
i *l\ i + j * l\ j + k * l\ k, where i, j, k are the
subscript variables associated with an array
indentifier and l\ i, l\ j, l\ k are the corresponding multipliers.
4. List of Constant Values. An entry is made for
each unique number (converted to a common
base) appearing in the source code.
5. Arithmetic Statement Function List. An entry
is made for each identifier used to define an
arithmetic statement function.
6. Local Identifier List. An entry is made for
each identifier not appearing in the declared
identifier list.
7. String List. This is an internal representation of the source statement.
8. Assembly List. An entry is made for each
(assembly language) order generated.
.3
OUTPUT
.31
Object Program
.312 Language style:
.313 Output media;
.32
machine code.
magnetic tape, or cards.
Conventions
.321 Standard inclusions:
.322 Compatible with:
CO-OP Monitor Library.
CO-OP Monitor.
details not yet available.
.33
Documentation:
.4
TRANSLATING PROCEDURE
.41
Phases and Passes
Statements are compiled into a symbolic assembly
language, a statement at a time, until a DO statement is encountered. Following this, and until the
right bound of the 00 is encountered, a global
analysis involving the flow, use of index registers,
depth of nesting, etc., is performed. The processing into assembly orders then continues. Finally,
an assembly into relocatable binary format is
performed.
.42
Optional Mode
. 421
. 422
.423
.424
Translate: . .
Translate and run:
Check only:
Patching:
.425 Up-dating:
. 43
.44
Bulk Translating:
.45
Program Diagnostics:
....•
.46
no.
yes, using CO-OP Monitor.
introduced in CO-OP Monitor. These are controlled
in CODAP 1 Assembly
Language.
Translator Library
.461 Identity: . . . .
.462 User restriction: .
.463 Form
Storage medium:
Organization:
.464 Contents
Routines: . .
Functions:
Data Descriptions: . . .
Subprograms:
CO-OP Monitor Library .
general .
· magnetic tape.
· as loaded.
· closed.
· yes.
· no.
· yes.
.5
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE
.51
Object Program Space
.511 Fixed overhead
Space
Name
2,000 words.
CO-OP Monitor:
FORTRAN 63
Resident
40 words.
.512 Space required for each
input-output file:
70 words (BCD)
500 words (Binary files).
300 words (mixed BCD
and binary).
.513 Approximate expansion of procedure:
?
. 52
Translation Time:
. 53
Optimizing Data
· details not yet available .
.531 Explicit:. . . . . . . BUFFER IN, BUFFER Ou'!
statements.
.532 Implicit:
00 loops should be used to give the advantage of
I. R. modification.
No more than 5 00 loops should be nested.
Mixed mode expressions within a main loop should
be examined for possible simplification.
.533 Automatic
• Common subexpressions are removed from
any single expression and only evaluated once .
• Subscripting is done by reference to a special
entry for each unique subscript, irrespective of
how many times it appears in the program .
When any variable used in any subscript is
changed, each entry is conditionally updated .
Special Features
. 431 Alter to check
....
only:
12/62
yes.
via CO-OP monitor .
yes.
anyone subprogram can be
recompiled separately.
no.
restricted program: . . . .
no.
• Three output buffers, one'for each Channel, are
maintained in storage for use with card or printer equipment,
243: 186.540
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: FORTRAN-63
§
186 .
. 54
Object Program Performance
Type
Elementary
algebra:
Complex formulae
Deep nesting
Based on
constants:
Based on
variables:
Heavy branching:
Complex subscripts
With use of style
rules:
Written directly:
Data editing:
Overlapping operations'
With magnetic
tapes:
With card
input
With card or
printer output:
Time
Space
unaffected
increased
.6
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS
.61
TranslatingComEuter
.611 Minimum configuration: •
unaffected.
increased.
• 612 Larger configuration
advantages:
unaffected
unaffected.
doubled
doubled.
.62
increased
increased.
.621 Minimum configuration:
.622 Usable extra
facilities:
unaffected
doubled (* *)
unaffected
unaffected.
doubled.
(* *).
unaffected.
BUFFER IN,
unaffected.
OUT"can be used
to obtain unaffected performance
unaffected
unaffected.
one buffer per
channel
available.
unaffected.
(* *) Analyst's estimate, provided as a guide only.
©
CDC 1604 Computer.
1 tape.
1 input and 1 output
medium .
larger programs can be
translated.
Target ComEuter
CDC 1604 Computer.
magnetic tapes, (1607,
1608, or 606).
cards via CDC 1605, 1610,
1617or1609.
CDC 1612.
.7
ERRORS, CHECKS
AND ACTION: . . • • information not yet available.
.8
ALTERNATIVE TRANSLATORS
Computer
Identity
Date
CDC 1604
CDC 1604
FORTRAN 60
FORTRAN 62
1959.
1962.
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporat~d
12/62
243: 191.1 00
.STI'OIRO
_
EDP
CDC 1604-A
Operating Environment
Machine Code
REPORTS
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: MACHINE CODE
§l91.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
co-op Index, July, 1962 .
(program numbers are quoted in the body of the text.)
.12
Description:
.511 Tracing:. . . . . . . available for every, or each
specifically quoted instruction, address, or jump .
Output on magnetic tape
or paper tape.
CO-OP Program 134 or 103.
.512 Snapshots: . .
see above (.511).
.52
Post Mortem:
.6
OPERATOR CONTROL: . . . . .
There are two operating systems available with the
CDC 1604-A: the Three Phase Automonitor, and the
CO-OP Monitor. Apart from these a number of unintegrated routines exist, which provide an operating
environment for a user not wishing to use the other
systems. The advantage of such an approach is the
ability to' use the repertoire of routines in the library,
many of which are not compatible with the monitors
without modifications.
.13
Availability:
via CO-OP Users Group.
.14
Originator:
issued by CO-OP.
.15
Maintainer:
CO-OP Users Group.
. 16
First Use: .
1960 onwards.
.2
PROGRAM LOADING
.21
Source of Programs
.211 Programs from on-line
libraries:
.212 Independent programs: . . . .
magnetic tape.
Library subroutines: . only with specific systems
(see Operating Environments, CO-OP Monitor and
Three Phase Automonitor).
. 23
Loading Sequence: . . . manual sequencing of card
decks, paper tapes or
magnetic tapes.
.4
HARDWARE ALLOCATION:
RUNNING SUPERVISION:
.5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
.51
J)ynamic
LOGGING:
.8
PERFORMANCE
.81
System Requirements
.811 Minimum configuration: . . . . . . .
. 812 Usable extra facilities: . . . . .
.813 Reserved equipment:
magnetic tape.
paper tape.
.22
.3
.7
dumps onto magnetic tape
or CDC 1612 printer in
various formats, induding "restorable, " "listable, " "card image, "
"binary, " "octal, " or
"decimal. "
CO-OP Programs 049, 071,
066, 109, 136, 024, 025.
as incorporated in user's
program.
as incorporated in user's
program .
any CDC 1604- A .
all.
(a) CO-OP loader uses 659
location.
(b) traces use 666 locations
plus "director. "
(c) restorable dump uses
55 locations.
(d) other dumps use from
151 to 853 locations .
.82
System Overhead:
none.
.83
Program Space
Available:
....
variable, see .813 above .
.84
as incorporated in user's
program.
Program Loading
Time: .
as incorporated in user's
program.
.85
using CO-OP loader from
magnetic tape approximately 60 + O. 0002 (I + 2D)
seconds; where I is the
number of instructions,
D is the number of data
items. (* *)
Program Perform. . negligible overhead.
ance:
@ 1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243: 192.1 00
_STANDARD
II
EDP
CDC 1604-A
Operating Environment
CO-OP Monitor
REPORTS
OPERATING-ENVIRONMENT: CO-OP MONITOR
§
192.
.12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . . . . . . . CO-OP Monitor.
. 12
Description
The MCS contains a set of routines to control inputoutput transfers. They include tests for logical consistency of control linkage requests (e. g., that rewind operations apply only to magnetic tape units and
not to other I/O devices) and translation between data
codes (e. g., data prepared in column- binary for a
device requiring row-binary) but no radix conversion. The programmer must provide for hardware
error control. A large variety of routines are included to cover the various input-output formats.
Simultaneous operations are still program dependent.
The CO-OP Monitor is a system for run-to-run control of programs on a 1604. Multi-running of programs is not possible. The monitor works with any
configuration of I/O equipment and can operate at
several levels. The highest level (level 1) is the
Master Control System (MCS). The next level (level
2) is usually the CO-OP Control System (CCS). At
level 3 there are the production programs, or program translators. Routines that are to be run in the
system must be prepared with the special control
linkage routines to communicate with the MCS, and
must have control data available for CCS (instead of
direct instructions) for such tasks as input-output,
interruptions, and loading. The programs produced
by CODAP- 1 (see Section : 172) conform to the se requirements. The system operates under the control
of special control cards, occasionally supplemented
by the operator's use of the typewriter. Programs
can be accepted from input devices, or can be requested from a library tape.
In addition to the dumps at termination of a program,
CCS provides snapshots specified by control cards
that are inserted at load time. The CCS can also
provide an index of allocated storage locations so
that absolute dumps can be interpreted by the
programmer.
The system requires: a standard input device for
control cards, and sometimes data and programs; a
standard output device to record dumps and snapshots; a typewriter for short coded messages to the
operator; and an accounting output device for longer
messages to the operator and entries to a log. The
accounting device is usually the paper tape punch.
There is also a library tape which contains operational routines and subroutines, including CODAP-1,
FORTRAN-62, and later COBOL and CXA (Control
Data Extended Algol).
The MCS is a run-to-run supervisor which can
transfer control to one "level 2" program after
another. Usually the "level 2" programs are control routines that arrange smooth intra-run flow.
They control abnormal run terminations and provide
a flexible means of conditionalload-and-go or translate-and-run procedures. In addition, they provide
an automatic procedure for pre-loading tapes and
internal storage.
The MCS provides a systematic allocation of inputoutput units and also of storage by an allocator/loader which sets linkages between independently prepared routines.
The MCS provides an automatic termination of runs
that exceed their time limit or output volume limit
by a fixed tolerance. At each termination, the CCS
provides alternative degrees of post-mortem dumps
and an optional preset entrance to a short, limited
termination routine provided by the user.
The MCS controls all interrupts, but parameters
specifying the type of interrupts and the routines required after an interrupt must still be incorporated
in each program. The MCS provides for the housekeeping of requesting interrupts and of determining
which interrupt has occurred.
©
Description (Contd.)
The overall operating efficiency of the CO-OP
Monitor System is difficult to assess.
Running intra-run overheads are strongly dependent
on the style of the level 3 program. The overheads
are probably low relative to hand coding except for
the input-output transfer and code translation control
routines. The intra-run overheads are also likely to
be low compared to manual operation, unless con'siderable tape searching is necessary.
. 13
Availability:
in CDC 1604 version .
• 14
Originator: .
Control Data Corp .
assisted by a CO-OP
subcommittee.
.15
Maintainer:
Control Data Corporation.
.16
First Use: .
July, 1962.
.2
PROGRAM LOADING
. 21
Source of Programs
.211 Programs from on-line
libraries:. . . . . . . loaded from magnetic tape
files as called for in table
used by relocatable
loader.
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243: 192.212
§
CDC 1604-A
192.
.32
.212 Independent programs:
from magnetic tapes in card
format.
from paper tape in card
format.
from cards in card format.
from magnetic tape in
binary relocatable format.
. 213 Data: . . . . • . . . . . via any input device, under
the control of I/O routines
incorporated in the MCS,
whenever called from individual program.
. 214 Master routines:. . . . the Master Control Routine
is called in from magnetic
tape by a button on the
Console. Further subsidiary master routines are
called in by the Job Sequencer using the MCS
control record.
.22
. 23
Library Subroutines:
Loading Sequence:
. 321 Initial assignment: .
.322 Alteration: . •
.323 Reassignment:
RUNNING SUPERVISION
. 41
Simultaneous Working: . controlled by standard routines incorporated in MCS .
.42
Multi - pr08!amming:. . not presently available.
.44
Errors, Checks, and Action
Error
Check or
Interlock
Loading input error:
program check
Allocation impossible:
program check
In-out error - single:
In-out error - persistent:
Storage overflow:
Invalid instructions:
Program conflicts:
Arithmetic overflow:
program check
program check
not possible.
not possible.
some I/O checks.
hardware/program
check.
Underflow:
hardware program
check.
no check.
program check.
no check.
loaded from on-line
magnetic tape library.
normally each job is processed as loaded. The operator can also initiate by
instructions to:
(a) Abandon present job
and start on next job.
(b) Re-start this job.
(c) Start job XXX.
During processing, operator can instruct termination of GO-OP Monitor run either (1) at end of
present job, (2) at end of
present job, or (3) at end
of job XXX.
.3
HARDWARE ALLOCATION
.31
Storage
10/62
assigned for each job based
on Available Equipment
Table.
not available.
by operator typed into
Available Equipment
Table .
.4
Invalid operation:
Improper format:
In valid address:
Reference to
forbidden area:
.45
.311 Sequencing of program
for movement
between levels: .
.312 Occupation of
working storage:
Input-Output Units
not necessary.
determined by relocatable
binary loader on basis of
RANGE (first and last
words) statement for each
subprogram; and requirement of MCS.
Action
record fact on log
and on "communication to operator medium...
proceed to next
job.
not specified.
not speCified.
depends ·on routine.
determined by Interrupt routine
being used.
no check.
Restarts.
.451 Establishing restart
points: . . . . . . .
no special provision, can
use:
(a) automatic, set, and
dump on abnormal exit
from program.
(b) own coding initiating
dump at programmer
selected interval.
.452 Restarting process: .• (a) use of dump as new
program.
(b) manual intervention by
operator to recover
control in case of total
system failure.
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: CO-OP MONITOR
§
192.
. 632 Change of normal
progress: . .
.5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
.51
Dynamic
none.
up to 10 snapshots in any
one program.
. 511 Tracing:
.512 Snapshots:
.52
243: 192. 500
Post Mortem:
.7
LOGGING
.71
Operator Signals:
.72
Operator Decisions: . . listed on typewriter and
"comment from operator"
medium.
.73
Run Progress:
listed on typewriter and
"accounting medium. "
.74
Errors:
listed on typewriter and
"comment to operator
medium. "
output via typewriter
and/or loud speaker .
.75
Running Times:
listed on typewriter and
"accounting medium. "
listed in Operator's Manual, if standard.
as required by programmer, if own coding message .
.76
Multi-running Status:
not applicable.
.8
PERFORMANCE
.81
System Requirements
. . . . . dumps taken automatically
in case of abnormal exit
from routine. Dump formats range from record
of console conditions to
full dumps in various
formats.
.6
OPERA TOR CONTROL
.61
Signals to Operator
.611 Decision required by
operator: . . . . .
. 612 Action required by
operator: . . . . .
. 613 Reporting progress
of run: . . . . . .
amendment of Available
Equipment Table, or instructions to ignore some
or all jobs still awaiting
processing .
listed on typewriter and
"comment from operator"
medium.
.811 Minimum configuration: 4 tape CDC 1604 system.
.812 Usable extra facilities: all except reserved Jump
Keys .
. 813 Reserved equipment:
? words. ,
all Jump Keys.
option to mask out arith.62 Operator's Decisions: . via keyboard, in accordmetic errors not
ance with action described
available.
in Operator's Manual or
by previous type out.
. 82 System Overhead:
?
.63 Operator's Signals
.83 Program Space
Available: . .
?
carriage return on type.631 Inquiry: . . . . . .
writer with standard message following. This can .84 Program Loading Time: ?
only produce the Available
Equipment Table.
.85 Program Performance: ?
end of job and time, placed
on "comment to operator"
medium and "accounting
medium. "
©
1962 by Auerbach Carp oration and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243: 193.1 00
CDC 1604-A
Operating Environment
AUTOMONITOR
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: THREE PHASE AUTOMONITOR
§
193 •
• 123 LIBRARY EDIT ROUTINE
•1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity:........ Three Phase
AUTOMONITOR System.
· 12
Description
The LIBRARY EDIT ROUTINE is used to prepare,
copy, or update the library tape used in the AUTOMONITOR system.
• 124 SYMBOLIC ASSEMBLY ROUTINE
· 121 General
AUTOMONITOR differs from the CO-OP Monitor by
its inability to provide for mixed, production and
assembly runs, or for a choice of subsidiary control
systems.
There is no compatibility betwe~n the outputs produced by AUTOMONITOR and those required by the
CO- OP Monitor.
The following commentary is a rewrite of the official
description.
The Three Phase AUTOMONITOR is a programming
system for the 1604 computer. It provides for the
batched assembly and the execution of programs prepared in symbolic assembly language. A Simple,
but flexible, system of buffered input-output is incorporated.
The execution of batched jobs is handled in three
phases: Phase one in which the stacked input for all
jobs is translated into a binary input tape; phase two
in which each job is executed sequentially using the
binary input tape and producing a binary output tape;
and phase three in which the binary output tape is
translated into a BCD listable tape.
Batched assemblies may also be handled by the system. The assembly routine used is the CODAP assembly program. The system handles assembly and
execution runs separately and does not permit intermixing.
The system is maintained on a library tape that contains the system' s six main routines and all associated subroutines. The first file on this tape is reserved for the six routines which are described
briefly as follows (paragraphs • 122 to • 127):
• 122 SUPERVISOR
The SUPERVISOR, first routine on the AUTOMONITOR library tape, distinguishes between assembly
or execution runs and brings the correct processing
routine into memory. SUPERVISOR also will respond to certain key settings and call in the Library
Edit routine to prepare a new library tape, or it can
initiate an execution restart procedure.
©
The SYMBOLIC ASSEMBLY ROUTINE (CODAP) converts the programmer's symbolic notation into machine language and binary coded decimal (BCD), and
prepares two magnetic tapes. The machine language
tape can be used to produce either binary or octal
cards and the BCD tape is used to provide off-line
symbolic assembly listings. The performance times
are similar to those listed under CODAP- 1.
• 12~ INPUT TRANSLATOR
The INPUT TRANSLATOR (INTRAN), phase one, receives an input card image on a tape. This tape is
prepared off-line and contains all the jobs to be run
in one batch. INTRAN reads this tape, performs all
needed conversions, and writes a binary tape (referred to as binary input tape) of uniform record
length. This binary input tape contains the information together with flags denoting the type and amount
of information. All jobs in the batch are processed
by INTRAN before control is turned over to the next
phase, INTRAN is only loaded once per batch processing.
• 126 EXECUTION COORDmATOR
The EXECUTION COORDINATOR (EXEC), phase
two, receives control from lNTRAN and uses as input the binary input tape prepared by INTRAN.
EXEC loads a program into memory and turns control over to it. If input of data is reqUired during
execution, the programmer uses a calling sequence
to obtain data from the binary input tape through
EXEC. It is also possible, by use of the input calling sequence, to overlay a program in core. In this
case, the programmer would furnish a transfer address. Three types of output are available to the
programmer during the execution phase: core
dumps, general purpose output, and custom output
(output according to FORTRAN-type format statements).
All input and output during the execution phase is on
an interrupt basis. EXEC sets up parts of the store
as input and output buffers (three of each). Each internal input buffer is filled from the binary input
tape as soon as all the information previously contained in that buffer has been processed by EXEC.
When the programmer calls for output, EXEC writes
the output in pure binary into one of the internal buffers, adding flags which describe the amount of output and the type of conversion and format. When a
buffer has been filled, EXEC writes the information
contained therein as one record on a binary tape
(here called binary output tape).
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243:193.126
§
CDC 1604-A
193.
· 126 EXECUTION COORDINATOR (Contd.)
OUTPUT
BUFFER
I
OUTPUT
1----:>1 BUFFER
f------;~
2
OUTPUT
BUFFER
3
Since the program being executed has control of the
computer during execution, it is not inconceivable
that a part or all of EXEC may be destroyed. If this
occurs, an execution restart procedure is available.
.128 Equipment (Contd.)
However, if more than one 1607 is available, it may
be used by the programmer through a special set of
calling sequences.
• 127 OUTPUT TRANSLATOR
The minimum equipment configuration necessary.for
the AUTOMONITOR is as follows:
The OUTPUT TRANSLATOR (OUTRAN) phase three,
receives control after the last program of a batch
has been executed. OUTRAN reads the binary output
tape prepared by EXEC and performs the necessary
conversions. The type of conversion is terminated
by the flags which are furnished with the data. A
BCD listable tape is prepared for off-line listing with
identifying information accompanying each job.
On-line - Control Data Corporation 1604 Computer and 4 1607 or 606 Tape Units.
(More may be used.)
Off-line - Card reader, card punch, and line
printer. Card-to-tape, tape-toprinter, and tape-to" punch capability.
· 128 Equipment
Certain programming conventions such as reserving
the stop instructions and interrupts must be followed
when using the AUTOMONITOR. Most external
function instructions, particularly those involving
tapes, are reserved for the use of the AUTOMONITOR. The AUTOMONITOR uses all the tapes on one
1607 and also monopolizes the 1607 input and output
channels.
.13
Availability:...... presently available in 1604
version.
. 14
Originator: •
Control Data Corporation.
.15
Maintainer:
Control Data Corporation.
.16
First Use: •
April, 1961.
I
10/62
@
1"-A-U-ER-BA-CH-'
243:201.100
.STANOARO
II
EDP
CDC 1604-A
RE"RES
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
201.
.113 Timing basis (cont'd)
.1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
.11
Standard File Problem A
.111 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file: •
Report file: .
. 112 Computation: .
.113 Timing basis:
the files and means that all records have to be physically moved from one area to another in storage.
In other problems with different requirements and a
low activity, such moving might be costly. It would
then be possible to use dynamic control of the buffer
control words, together with cycle storage allocation, in order to avoid such moving.
108 characters.
1 card.
lline.
standard.
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users Guide,
4:200.113
.114 Graph: . • . • . . . . . see graph below .
.115 Storage space required
Configuration VI. B: . 8, 000 words.
Configuration VII. B:. 8,000 words.
Configuration VIII. B:. 8,000 words.
A straightforward approach was made to the problem
with input and output areas being kept separate.
This facilitates handling insertions and deletions to
2
1.0
7
~
~
4
Time in Minu tes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
2
V
VII~
~
-/'
~ll Band VUl B
~
~
.....
./
l1i:t
0.1
7
4
2
0.01
7
2
0.001
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
Roman Numerals denote Standard Configurations
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243:201.120
§
CDC 1604-A
201.
· 12
Standard File Problem B
· 121 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file: .
Report file: .
· 122 Computation:.
.123 Timing basis:
54 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
standard.
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.12.
.123 Timing basis (cont'd)
A straightforward approach was made to the problem
with input and output areas being kept separate.
This facilitates handling insertions and deletions to
the files and means that all records have to be physically moved from one area to another in storage.
In other problems with different requirements and a
low activity, such moving might be costly. It would
then be possible to use dynamic control of the buffer
control words, together with cycle storage allocation, in order to avoid such moving.
• 124 Graph: . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
10.0
7
4
2
'1\\
1.0
7
~
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
7
.JIll'
.-
..--- ,,-
a~
~
/ IL
V ----
/1
2
0.1
-
'B
~
-
;/
i
~'\.
VIII B
4
2
0.01
7
4
2
0.001
0.0
0.1
0.33
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
Roman Numerals denote Standard Configurations
10/62
1.0
243:201.130
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
.133 Timing basis (cont'd)
201.
.13
This facilitates h3.nciling insertions and cteletions to
the files and means that all records have to be physically moved from one area to another in storage .
In ·other problems with different requirements and a
low activity, such moving might be costly. It would
then be possible to use dynamic control of the buffer
control words, together with cycle storage allocation' in order to avoid such moving .
Standard File Problem C
• 131 Record size s
216 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
standard.
using estimated procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.13.
Master file:
Detail file: .
Report file: .
.132 Computation: •
. 133 Timing basis:
.134 Graph: . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
A straightforward approach was made to the problem
with input and o~tput areas being kept separate.
10.0
7
4
VIB _
2
----
1.0
7
y,
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
~ndVUIB
"
.-
-'
'1~/
4
-
/'
~
VIII B
2
0.1
7
4
2
0.01
7
4
2
0.001
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
Roman Numerals denote Standard Configurations
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243:201.140
CDC 1604-A
§ 201.
• 14
. 142 Computation:.
.143 Timing basis:
trebled •
using estimated procedure
outlined in Users' Guide.
4:200.13.
.144 Graph: . • • • . . . . . see graph below.
Stan,cla.rd File Problem D
141 Record sizes
Master file:
Detail file: .
Report file: .
108 characters.
1 card.
lline."
10.0
7
4
2
.----
VIB
1.00
7
.....
Time. in Minutes to
Proct!ss 10, 000
Master File Records
2
-
~
./
7
V"
4
~ndVlllB
/
-
r-~\\-~~
V~~
0.1
7
4
2
0.01
7
4
2
0.001
0.0
0.1
0.33
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
Roman Numerals denote Standard Configurations
10/62
1.0
243:201.200
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
20l.
8 characters •
using estimated procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.213.
• 214 Graph: . . . . . . . . . see graph below .
• 212 Key size:. . .
,.213 Timing basis:
.2
SORTING
. 21
Standard Problem Estimates
.211 Record size: . • . . . . 80 characters.
,
/
,/
/
l't
VIIU
11.0
/
V
V
/
V
Time in Minutes to
Put Records Into
Required Order
I~
0.1
'tit
/
/
,
'I'
~
~
/vn
and VIn B
f
, 'I
/
~
/
1/
'I'
0.01
,
/
V
'I
0.001
1,000
100
10,000
100,000
Nun " ~r of Records
Roman Numerals denote Standard Configurations
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
CDC 1604-~
243:201.300
§
20l.
.312 Timing Basis:
.3
MATRIX INVERSION
. 31
Standard Problem Estimates
. using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.312 .
• see graph below .
. 313 Graph: . . .
.311 Basic Parameters: . • • general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating
point to at least 8 decimal
digits.
100.00
7
4
1.
2
V
10.00
L
7
I
I
I
4
I
1
2
Time in Minutes for
Complete Inversion
~
1.00
7
IJ
4
11
IJ
2
II
I)
0.10
7
I
I
4
I
2
/
0.01
2
4
7
10
2
Size of Matrix
10/62
4
7
100
2
4
7 1,000
243:201.320
S.YSTEM PERFORMANCE
.322 Timing Basis: . . . .
§ 20l.
.32
CO-OP Library.
Times shown are times for
one iteration .
Fl LMSD MATIN Times
. 321 Basic Parameters: . . . general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating
point to at least 8 decimal
digits.
.323 Graph: . . . . . . . . see graph below.
100.00
7
4
2
I
J
10.00
I
7
I
I
I
4
I
II
Time in Minutes fOri
Complete Inversion
1.00
7
I
I
4
J
'I
2
/
0.10
I
II
7
4
I
J
2
I
I
If
0.01
2
4
7
10
2
4
7
100
2
4
7 1,000
Size of Matrix
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243:201.400
§
CDC 1604-A
201-
S fifth-order polynomials .
S divisions .
1 square root.
using estimating procedure
.413 Timing basis:
outlined in "Users , Guide
4:200.413 .
.414 Graph: . . . . . . . . . Configuration VI B; paper
tape input, typewriter output, floating point machine
coding.
• 412 Computation:.
•4
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING
.41
Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates
. 411 Record sizes: . . . .. 10 signed numbers, avg.
sizeS digits, max. size 8
digits.
Configuration VI B; Single Length (Ii digit precision); Floating point.
R = Number of Output Records per Input Record
Time in Milliseconds
per Input Record"
I
I~
100
II'
, -'
.I
~
P
10
V
./
~
-?
~i-"
'
~'\-
~.
I,;
~
~.'\-.
~~
1
0.1
1.0
10
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
10/62
100
243:201.415
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
201.
.415 Graph:
Configuration VII B; paper
tape input, typewriter output, floating point machine
coding.
Configuration VII B; Single Length (11 digit preCision); Floating point.
R = Number of Output Records per Input Record
1000
Time in Milliseconds
per Input Record
~
100
-"
//
L.,...oo
~i-'
10
P
V'
V
~
"
~
100"
",. .
.,",
"
....~.
"''\.,
~~
~~
"
1
0.1
1.0
10.0
100.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
CDC 1604-A
243:201.416
§
201.
Configuration vnr B; paper
tape input, typewriter output, floating point machine
coding.
.416 Graph:
Configuration VIn B; Single Length (11 digit precision); Floating point.
R = Number of Output Records per Input Record
1000
Time in Milliseconds
per Input Record
~
100
~
~'"
..,
..A
./7
~
9
10
- -R::O. 1
--==-R ::G.o l
.... ~II'"
-
", ~ ....
r
..".. ~
V
/
--
~
1
0.1
1.0
10.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
10/62
100.0
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
243:201.500:
201.
.512 Computation:.
.5
GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING
. 51
Standard Statistical Problem A Estimates
augment T elements in
cross-tabulation tables .
. 513 Timing basis:
using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.513 .
.514 Graph: . . . . . . . . . see below .
. 511 Record size: . . . . . . thirty 2-digit integral
numbers.
10,000
1,000
Time in Milliseconds
per Record
100
-
L
10
VIB
/
lL
Ii'
"
~
/
~
/
VII B, VIII B
1
I
I
1
10
100
1,000
T. no of Augmented Elements
Roman Numerals denote Standard Configurations
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
24.3:211.101
CDC 1604·A
Physical Characteristics
CDC 1604·A
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
CDC 1604-A
243:211.102
CDC 160,4-A PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Central
Computer
and Console
Adapter
CDC 1604
CDC 1605
CDC 1607
68)( 28 )(89
43 )(20)(48
Weight, lbs.
3,450
Maximum Cable Lengths
Unit Name
Magnetic
Tape Control Control Uni t
Unit
Card Unit
Control Unit
Printer
CDC 1608
CDC 1609
CDC 1610
CDC 1612
68)(28X68
43 )(20X48
51 )(40)(26
43 )(20 )(48
56)(72)(31
575
2,500
650
755
600
890
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Temperature, of.
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
Humidity, "I.
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
IDENTITY
Model Number
Height X Width XDepth, in.
PHYSICAL
Storage
Ranges
Temperature, of.
ATMOSPHERE
Computer room temperature should not exceed 70°F.
i
I
Working
Ranges
Humidity, "I.
Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.
I
I
colputer room JumidHY shoJld be 40 to
)0"1"
26,400
4,000
30,000
4,000
5,680
4,000
6,400
Air Flow, cfm.
3,000
800
3,000
800
800
800
---
Internal Filters
Yes
---
---
---
---
---
---
Nominal
208
208
208
208
208
208
208
208
115
117
Tolerance
--
--
-- -- --
--
-- -- -- --
--
--
---
Nominal
400
60
400
400
60
60
Tolerance
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
208
208
208
Voltage
ELECTRICAL
LoadKVA
1Q/62
60
400
60
60
400
60
Cycles
Phases
NOTES
400
---
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
8.0
1.2
2.0
0.9
2.0
2.4
2.0
0.9
2.0
0.9
2.0
0.9
1.9
Where two types of power
are shown for a unit, both
are required.
I AUERBACH 11Bn
243:211 ~ 10.3
CDC 1604·A
CDC 1604·A PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS-Contd.
Unit Name
Card Reader
Magnetic
Tape Unit
IDENTITY
Model Number
CDC 1617
CDC 606
HeighfX Width XDepth, in.
4lX30X19
72 X28 X33
210
800
---
---
Tempe"rature, of.
---
---
Humidity, '7'.
---
---
Temperature, of.
---
---
Humidity, '7'.
---
---
Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.
708
---
Air Flow, cfm.
100
---
Internal Filters
---
---
115
115
Toleranc e '7'.
5
5
Nominal
60
60
---
---
Phases and Lines
---
---
Load KVA
0.21
Weight, Ibs.
PHYSICAL
Maximum Cable Lengths
Storage
Ranges
Working
Ranges
ATMOS·
PHERE
Nominal
Voltage
ELECTRICAL
Cycles
Tolerance '7'.
3.0
NOTES
©
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
10/62
243:221.101
·STA"ARD
EDP
•
_
REPORTS
CDC 1604-A
Price Data
PRICE'DATA
• 221.
PRICES
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
Name
No.
Central
Processor
1604-A
Basic Computer with:
8, 192 words of core storage
16, 384 words of core storage
32,768 words of core storage
Monthly
Rental
Monthly
Maintenance
$
$
24,000
26,500
31,600
Maintenance
contracts
are
individually
negotiated
Purchase
$
790,000
870,000
1,030,000
Price includes following features:
Fixed and floating point 9.r~thmetic
Indirect addressing
Console
Motor-generator
Paper tape reader and punch
Typewriter
Included in Basic Computer
Storage
Input-Ou~ut
1609
1617
1612
606
16.i.5
Card Reader and Punch
Card Reader
Line Printer
Magnetic Tape Unit
Magnetic Tape Control Unit
©
1,175
580
1,840
825
1,980
1962 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
47,000
22,500
73,700
36,000
66,000
10/62
L/
CDC 160-A
Control Data Corporation
I\
'-,
/'
l
(
"--,
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
CDC 160-A
/-
Contr-ol Data Corporation
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
244:001.001
CDC 160-A
Contents
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Introduction:....
Data Structure:
System Configuration
Configuration I; Card System:
Configuration II; 4-Tape Business System:
Configuration III; 6-Tape Business System:
Configuration VI; 6-Tape Business/Scientific System:
Configuration IX; Desk Size Scientific System:
Configuration X; Punched Tape/Card Scientific System:
Internal Storage
Core Storage; Basic Core Storage: . . . .
Core Storage; 169 Auxiliary Memory Unit:
Auxiliary Storage; 8951 Magnetic Drum
Central Processor
160-A
Central Processor: . .
Arithmetic Unit (fixed point):
168-1
Console:
......... .
Input-Output; Punched Tape and Card
350
Paper Tape Reader:
BRPE-11
Paper Tape Punch:
167
Card Reader:
170
Card Punch:
Printers
1612
Printer System:
166-2
Line Printer: .
Magnetic Tape
603
Magnetic Tape Unit:
162-1
Controller:
606
Magnetic Tape Unit:
162- 2
Controller:
Input-Output; Other
161
Typewriter:
1610-A
Card Reader- Punch Control:
ruM 088
High Speed Collator:
ruM 533
Card Read Punch:
....
ruM 407
Accounting Machine/Line Printer:
ruM 523
Gang Summary Punch:
Simultaneous Operations:
Instruction List: .
Coding Specimens
OSAS/OSAS-A:
FORTRAN-A: •
16O-A FORTRAN:
INTERFOR: •
SIC OM: . . •
AUTOCD MM:
244:011
244:021
244:031.1
244:031.2
244:031.3
244:031.4
244:031.5
244:031.6
244:041
244:041
244:042
244:051
244:052
244:061
244:071
244:072
244:073
244:074
244:081
244:082
244:091
244:091.4
244:092
244:092.4
244:101
244:102
244:102.12
244:102.12
244:102.12
244:102.12
244:111
244:121
244:131
244:132
244:133 INA
244:134
244:135
244:136
INA ... Information not available
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
.244:001.002
c;DC 160-A
CONTENTS (Contd.)
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
5/63
Data Codes
Card Input-Output: .
Printer: ••
BCD: • • • . • • .
Binary: . . . . . .
Typewriter Input-Output:
Printer Collating Sequence:
Problem Oriented Facilities: •
Simulation of Other Computers: •
Sort 3X: • • • • .
Data Transcription
General: • • • .
SIMO: • . • . •
Peripheral Processing Package (PPP):
Peripheral Processing Package (PPPP):
Paper Tape Edit: • • . • • • • •
OSAS- A Master Paper Tape Edit:
Floating Point Arithmetic:
Floating Point Functions:
Radix Conversion:
Binary Arithmetic:
Matrix Inversion:
Decimal Computations Programming System (BCK):
Equation Solver: • • • • •
Other: • • • • • . • • •
Process Oriented Languages
160 FORTRAN-A:
160-A FORTRAN: • • •
AUTOooMM: • • • • •
Machine Oriented Language
OSAS/OSAS- A:
SICOM: ••
INTERFOR: ••
Translators
OSAS/OSAS- A:
160-A FORTRAN :
INTERCOM: • • •
FORTRAN-A: . • •
Operating Environment
General: . . . •
SlooM:
••••••
System Performance
Notes on System Performance:
Worksheet Data: • . • . • • .
Matrix Inversion; Standard Problem:
Matrix Inversion; Standard Routine:
Generalized Mathematical Processing: •
Generalized Statistical Processing:
Physical Characteristics:
Price Data: . . . • . • • • • . • •
244:141
244:142
244:143
244:144
244:145
244:146
244:151
244:151.11
244:151.13
244:151.151
244:151.152
244: 151. 153
244: 151. 154
244:151.16
244:151.16
244:151.171
244: 151. 172
244:151.173
244:151.174
244: 151. 175
244:151.176
244: 151.177
244:151.178
244:161
244:162
244:163
244:171
244:172
244:173
244:181
244:182
244:183
242:182 (CDC 160)
244:191
·244:192
244:201.001
244:201.011
244:201.31
244:201.32
244:201.4
244:201.5
244:211
244:221
244:011.100
DP
CDC 160-A
REPORTS
Introduction
INTRODUCTION
§
011.
The CDC l60-A system, essentially a CDC 160 with larger core storage and a single
buffered input-output channel, is a solid-state desk-size computer oriented toward scientific
applications which can also be used for off-line data transcription and as a satellite to larger
systems. The basic system consists of the processor and NorIJlal input-output channel, 8,192
words of core storage with Buffer channel, and a fast paper tape reader and punch. Data
transcriptions are effected by standard card-to-tape and tape-to-printer conversion subroutines,
by SIMO (simultaneous card-to-tape and tape-to-printer), and by PPPP (a peripheral processing package which can perform four tape-to-printer operations and a card-to-tape operation simultaneously). The basic system rents for $2,250 per month.
Core storage is supplied in from one to four modules, with each module containing
two banks of 4,096 words. Cycle time for the core storage is 6.4 microseconds, and addition
of a word in storage to the accumulator requires 19. 2 microseconds. Because the 12- bit
address word can address only 4,096 locations, the l60-A requires a bank-control register
to permit addressing of the entire core storage.
Core storage can be expanded by addition of a Model 169 Auxiliary Memory Unit, which
has a maximum capacity of 24,576 words. The Model 169 provides an additional buffered
channel, usable only with the core store of the Model 169. Use of this channel permits an
additional independent input or output transfer of data. An interrupt system is also provided
with the processor; however, use of this feature in an integrated system is not emphasized
in the manufacturer's literature.
The processor performs single-address instructions sequentially on 12-bit words
(11 bits plus sign bit) giving a significance of 3.3 decimal digits. Alphameric input and
output is stored internally as one or two 6-bit BCD characters per computer word, and radix
conversion on four- and six-bit decimal digits is performed by subroutines. Instructions are
one or two words. Programming for the 160 series computers is complicated by the short
computer word length. Instructions that reference operands in general storage must be two
words long.
The buffered channel supplied with the basic 160-A handles one input or output block
transfer at a time. The basic l60-A therefore can perform computation or an input or
output transfer on the Normal channel, while simultaneously transferring a block of data on
the Buffer channel.
Two card readers are available for the 160-A. The Model 167-2 reads 250 cards per
minute, and the IBM 088 Collator, which is connected through the 1610- A Input-Output
Control, reads 650 cards per minute. Two card punches are also available: the IBM 523,
which operates under control of a Model 170 Card Punch Controller, and the IBM 533, which
operates under control of.a l6l0-A Control. Both can punch 100 cards per minute. The fast
paper tape reader and punch, which can be used only by the Normal channel, operate at 350
and 110 rows per second, respectively. Control Data offers two printers, the Model 166-2
buffered line printer, which prints either alphameric or numeric data at a rate of 150 lines
per minute, and the 1612 Line Printer, which prints 500 alphameric and I, 000 numeric lines
per minute. Two magnetic tape drives are available, the 603 Tape Units with 15,000 or
41,667 character per second transfer rates, and the 606 rape Units with 30,000 or 83,333
character per second transfer rates. The older 163 and 164 Tape Units are no longer being
manufactured.
The 160-A has an instruction repertoire of 134 instructions, most of which are variations of several basic instructions. These variations provide restricted relative or indirect
modes of addressing. Floating point and multiple precision fixed point operations are
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244:011.101
CDC 160-A
INTRODUCTION (Contd.)
§
011.
performed by subroutines or optional hardware units. The central processor performs no
parity checking on internal word transfers or on data transferred to and from peripheral
devices. Longitudinal and transverse parity is checked by the magnetic tape units, and the
processor must test for parity errors.
Problem oriented facilities include subroutines for multiple precision arithmetic and
data transcriptions, as well as sorting, matrix inversion, and a number of industrial design
and statistical programs.
The 160-A assembly language translator, OSAS-A, is the 160-A version of the 160
OSAS and offers a larger symbol table than OSAS. No macro instructions can be included,
but library subroutines can be assembled with the source statements.
Two floating point interpretive systems, SICOM and INTERFOR, are available for
the 160-A. Both systems use four 160-A words to hold each data item and two storage words
to hold each instruction. SICOM offers a large instruction repertoire, flexible input-output
facilities, alphameric data handling capabilities, and a built-in trace mode. INTERFOR has
a repertoire of only 22 instructions, most of which correspond directly to a limited group of
machine language instructions in the large-scale CDC 1604 and 1604-A computers. The main
feature of the INTERFOR system is an assembly routine that makes it possible to code
source programs in.a convenient symbolic language; SICOM programs must be written in
absolute numeric code. This INTERFOR feature permits 1604/1604-A floating point routines
to be run on the 160-A if they include only the mnemonics accepted by the assembler.
160 FORTRAN-A, a version of 160 FORTRAN modified to operate on the 160-A, is
currently available and can be used on systems with only punched tape input-output equipment. An improved system called 160-A FORTRAN is now in field test status. It will
require at least two magnetic tape units for compilation. Both systems use restricted versions of the FORTRAN II language. The only significant FORTRAN II facilities not included
in 160-A FORTRAN are the FUNCTION statement and double precision and complex variables.
Both systems permit the use of Boolean statements and mixed arithmetic. Object programs
produced by both FORTRAN systems are executed interpretively. Compile-and-run operation is possible with 160-A FORTRAN.
AUTOCOMM is a COBOL-like programming system designed for pseudo-English
coding of commercial data processing applications. An AUTOCOMM source program consists of a Data Section, which describes the files and items to be processed, and a
Procedure Section, which describes the operations to be performed. The operation repertoire
includes decimal arithmetic, multi-word transfers, alphabetic and numeric comparisons,
format conversions, and editing. AUTOCOMM object programs consist largely of return
jumps to a library of standard macro routines that implement the source statements.
AUTOCOMM should be somewhat Simpler to learn and use than the COBOL language, but its
facilities are considerably more limited than those of COBOL.
SWAP, the 160/160-A users' group, publishes an updated list of routines and has defined the minimum SWAP computer as the basic paper tape system with basic core storage
and no typewriter.
Control Data offers program-controlled satellite operation of the 1604 or 1604-A
system and the 160 or 160-A system. Either processor can transfer data to or from common
magnetic tape units via a tape controller, or can set up a direct communication path between
the systems by using the read and write data registers of the controller. These connections
are set up under control of a program which can also test the status of the controller. The
1607 Tape Control with Ampex Tape Units was available earlier. At present, the 1615
Tape Control, which uses CDC 606 Tape Units, is offered for satellite operation. The
satellite system is more a capability than an actual system; no manuals exist for the 1615
Satellite system, and no such system has been installed.
The 160 and 160-A processors can transfer data to and from peripheral equipment of
the new CDC 3600 computer, using the CDC 3681 Data Channel Converter. In addition, the
CDC 160-A can operate with the 3681 Converter and CDC 3600 Computer in a satellite mode.
Further information must be obtained from the manufacturer.
3/63
/
244:021.100
_STANDARD
EDP
_
REPORTS
'-
CDC 160/160-A
-
Data Structure
DATA STRUCTURE
§
,2
021.
,I
STORAGE LOCATIONS
Type of Information
Name of Location
Size
Purpose or Use
Word in storage:
Row on punched tape:
12 bin
5 to 8 bin
basic storage location,
BCD or binaty character on
punched tape,
BCD or binaty character on
punched tape,
1 Hollerith character or 1
binaty word,
(tracks)
Row on magnetic tape: 6 bits + parity
Column on card:
bit
12 rows
INFORMATION FORMATS
© 1963
Numeral:
Octal digit:
Number:
Instruction:
Block:
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Representation
1 BCD digit on external medium,
3 binaty bits,
1 word of 11 bits plus sign bit,
lor 2 words,
group of words in core storage between
2 specified addresses,
group of words on external medium,
3/63
244:031. 100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
§
CDC 160-A
System Configuration
REPORTS
031 .
.1
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
CARD SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION I
Deviations From Standard Configuration:
paper tape equipment supplied with processor.
core storage higher by. 4,000 words.
card reader slower by 35% .
card punch slower by 50%.
printer slower by 50%.
no indexing.
Equipment
Rental
Basic Core Storage: 8, 192 words
Processor and Console
$ 2,250
168-1 Arithmetic Unit
390
Buffer
Channel
Paper Tape Reader: 350 rows/sec.
Paper Tape Punch: 110 rows/sec.
1612 Printer Control
' - - - -..lf) .
o
1612 Printer: 500 lines/minute
)
161O-A Card Reader-Punch Control
1,840
1,500
IBM 088 Collator: 650 cards/minute
IBM 523 Card Punch: 100 cards/minute
Optional Features Included:. .
Multiple- Divide.
Rental:
$5,980 per month plus IBM equipment.
© 1963
by Auerbach Carporali9n and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244:031.200
§
CDC 160-04
031.
.2
4-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION II
Deviations From Standard Configuration: • . . . .
paper tape equipment supplied with processor.
core storage higher by 4, 000 words.
card reader 30% faster.
1 extra input-output channel.
magnetic tape 27, 000 char/sec faster.
Equipment
Rental
Basic Core Storage: 8,192 words
$ 2,250
Processor and Console:
Buffer
Channel
Paper Tape Reader: 350 rows/sec.
Paper Tape Punch: 110 rows/sec.
161O-A Card Reader-Punch Control
1,500
IBM 088 Collator: 650 cards/minute
IBM: 523 Card Punch: 100 cards/minute
162-1 Magnetic Tape Control
500
603 Magnetic Tape Units (4):
15,000 or 41; 700 char/sec.
2,200
1612 Printer Control
1612 Printer: 500 lines/minute
3/63
)
Optional Features Included: ..
none.
Rental:
$8,290 per month plus mM equipment.
I AUERBPCH / .$J
1,840
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
244:031.300
031 .
.3
6-TAPE BUSINESS SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION 111
Deviations from Standard Configuration:
paper tape equipment supplied with processor.
card reader 30% faster.
magnetic tape 40% faster.
no indexing.
only I simultaneous transfer while
computing, rather than 2.
Equipment
Rental
Basic Core Storage: 8,192 words
Processor and Console
Buffer
Channel
$ 2,250
Normal
Channel
161 Typewriter
262
168-1 Arithmetic Unit
390
Baper Tape Reader: 350 rows/sec.
Baper Tape Punch: 110 rows/sec.
1610- A Card Reader- Punch Control
1,500
IBM 088 Collator: 650 cards/minute
IBM 523 Card Punch: 100 cards/minute
1612 Printer Control
1612 Printer: 500 lines/minute·
)
162-1 Magnetic Tape Control
500
603 Magnetic Tape Units (6):
15,000 or 41,700 char/sec.
3,300
Optional Features Included:
Multiply- Divide.
161 Typewriter.
Rental:
$10,042 per month plus IBM equipment.
© 1963
1,840
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244:031.400
§
CDC 160-A
031
.4
6-TAPE BUSINESS/SCIENTIFIC SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION VI
Deviations from Standard Configuration:. . . . . . . . paper tape equipment supplied with processor.
card reader 30% faster.
magnetic tape 40% faster.
no indexing.
only one simultaneous transfer while computing,
rather than 2. Additional buffered channel supplied in 169 Auxiliary Memory Unit may be used
for an additional simultaneous data transfer.
fixed point multiply-divide by subroutine.
Equipment
Rental
169 Auxiliary Memory Unit: 3 modules
of 8, 192 words each of core storage.
$ 2,750
Basic Core Storage: 8, 192 words
2,250
Processor and Console
Buffer
Channel
Normal
Channel
262
161 Typewriter
Paper Tape Reader: 350 rows/sec.
Paper Tape Punch: 110 rows/sec.
1,500
161O-A Card Reader-Punch Control
mM 088 Collator: .650 cards/minute
mM 523 Card Punch: 100 cards/minute
450
168- 2 Arithmetic Unit
1612 Printer Control
1612 Printer: 500 lines/minute
l
162-1 Magnetic Tape Control
603 Magnetic Tape Units (6):
15,000 or 41,700 char/sec.
Optional Features Included: . • . . . . • . . . . . . . 3 modules of core storage.
168-2 Arithmetic Unit
161 Typewriter.
Rental:
3/63
$12,852 per month plus mM equipment.
1,840
500
3,300
244:031.500
SYSTEM CONF.\GURATION
§
031 .
.5
DESK SIZE SCIENTIFIC SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION IX
Deviations from Standard. Configuration: . . . . . ..
core storage smaller by 1,300 words.
paper tape input faster by 340 rows/ sec.
paper tape output faster by 100 rows/sec.
Equipment
Rental
Basic Core Storage: 8,192 words
Processor and Console
Buffer
Channel
$
2,250
Normal
Channel
Paper Tape Reader: 350 rows/sec.
Paper Tape Punch: 110 rows/ sec.
161 Typewriter
262
168-1 Arithmetic Unit (fixed point)
390
Optional Features Included: .
161 Typewriter.
Rental:
$2,902 per month.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporalion end BNA Incorporoled
3/63
CDC 160-A
244:031.600
§
031 .
.6
PUNCHED TAPE/CARD SCmNTIFIC SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION X
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . . . . core storage smaller by 2,280 words.
paper tape input faster by 75%.
only 1 simultaneous transfer while computing,
rather than 2. Additional buffered channel supplied in 169 Auxiliary Memory Unit may be used
for an additional simultaneous data transfer.
no indexing.
fixed point multiply-divide by subroutine.
Equipment
Rental
169 Auxiliary Memory Unit:
1 module of 8, 192 words of core storage
$ 1,250
Basic Core Storage: 8, 192 words
Processor and Console
Buffer
Channel
2,250
Normal
Channel
Paper Tape Reader: 350 rows/sec.
Paper Tape Punch: 110 rows/ sec.
161 Typewriter
262
168- 2 Arithmetic Unit
450
Optional Features Included: . . . . . . . • . • . . . . 1 module of core storage.
161 Typewriter.
168-2 Arithmetic Unit
Rental:
3/63
$4,212 per month.
244:041.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
CDC 160-A
Internal Storage
Core Storage
R[PORTS
INTERNAL STORAGE: CORE STORAGE
§
041.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
. 12
Basic Use: .
· 13
Description
basic core storage; part of
160-A Processor.
169 Auxiliary Memory Unit.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Storage Medium:
• 22
Physical Dimensions
. magnetic core .
• 221 Magnetic core storage
Core diameter:
working storage.
Array size:. .
The basic storage capacity of the 160-A Processor is
8,192 12-bit words, which is twice the capacity of
the 160 Processor.' This capacity may be increased
to a total of 32,768 words by the addition of one, two,
or three modules of 8,192 words each, using the
Model 169 Auxiliary Memory Unit. Each group
(module) of 8,192 words is considered as containing
two banks of 4,096 words. The Model 169 includes
a buffered input-output channel which permits an
input-output transfer to overlap computation. The
manufacturer states that this feature permits two
160-A processors to share core storage.
.23
Storage Phenomenon:
.24
Recording: Permanence
.241 Data erasable by
instructions:
. 242 Data regenerated
constantly:
• 243 Data volatile:
• 244 Data permanent:
. 245 Storage changeable:
.28
The read-restore cycle time is 6.4 microseconds
per word. Each word stores one character from an
input device, or one 12-bit binary number, including
its sign. No parity bit is included. One or two
words are required to hold an instruction, as the
processor has both one-word and two-word
instructions.
Words are not directly addressable within the normal addressing scheme permitted by the 12-bit word
(4 octal digits). The processor contains four storage bank control registers, each of which can store
an octal digit used for selecting one of the eight
storage banks. Instructions and operands use the
digit in one of the four registers for bank selection,
and addressing in any of seven modes is done within
the selected bank. Instructions are available to load
bank selection digits into the four storage control
registers.
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and Sx:stem Sizes
.14
Availability: . .
4 months.
· 15
First Delivery: .
1961, basic storage.
1962, 169 unit.
.16
Reserved Storage:
56 words per bank held by
convention for indirect
addressing (00008 to 00678)'
8 words per bank held by
• 32
convention for temporary
storage (00708 to 0077 8)'
© 1963
yes •
no .
yes •
no .
no.
coincident current.
same as recording.
uniform.
Potential Transfer Rates
.291 Peak data rates
Cycling rates: .
Unit of data:.
Conversion factor: •
Data rate:
No areas of storage are reserved, although locations
00708 to 00778 in each bank are used by programming
convention for temporary storage as counters, etc.,
and locations 00008 to 00678 in each bank are
reserved in a similar manner for indirect addressing
direct addresses.
direction of magnetization.
Access Techniques
.281 Recording method:
.282 R~ading method:
. 283 Type of access: .
.29
0.050 inch o. d.
O. 030 inch i. d •
64 bits by 64 bits by 12 bits.
156, 250 cycles/sec.
word.
12 bits/word.
312,500 char/sec.
468,750 digits/sec.
1,875,000 bits/sec.
Minimum
Storage
Identity:
Words:
Characters :
Insuuctions:
Banks:
Digits:
Modules:
Maximum
Storage
basic
basic
storage
storage
plus 169-1
plus 169-1
16,384
8,192
16,384
32,768
6,000,
12,000,
approx.
approx.
4
2
24,576
49,152
2
1
Rules for Combining
lVIodules:
.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
basic
storage
plus 169-2
24, 576
49,152
18,000,
approx.
6
73,728
3
basic
storage
plus 169-3.
32,768.
65,536.
24,000,
approx.
B.
98,304.
4.
anyone of the above
columns may be selected.
3/63
244:041.400
§
CDC 160-A
041.
.4
CONTROLLER:
.5
ACCESS TIMING
• 51
Arrangement of Heads:
.52
Simultaneous
Operations:
.53
. . . no separate controller .
.6
3/63
PERFORMANCE
• 71
Data Transfer
Pair of storage unit possibilities
. . by programming•
With self:
1 access device.
•72
using Model 169 Auxiliary
Memory Unit.
A block of data from a
storage bank of the Model
169 can be transferred to
an external device via
buffer register of the 169
at the sam~ time as the
160-A and the remainder
of the storage modules of
the 169 operate normally.
Access Time Parameters and Variations
.531 For uniform access
AGcess time: .
Cycle time: . .
For data unit of:
.7
6.4", sec.
6.4", sec.
1 word of 12 bits.
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . . . . . none.
Transfer Load Size
With self via
Accumulator:
.73
Effective Transfer Rate
With self:
.8
1 word.
22,300 words/sec, using
straight-line coding.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or Interlock
Action
Invalid Address:
Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
Timing conflicts:
Timing error in
equipment:
non-existent bank check
all valid.
none.
none.
none.
none.
interlock. wait.
halt; alarm.
interlock in 169
halt. alarm.
244:042.100
.STAN'AR'
EDP
•
CDC 160-A
REPORTS
Auxilary Storage
8951 Magnetic Drum
AUXILIARY STORAGE: 8951 MAGNETIC DRUM
§
042.
. 13
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
. 12
Basic Use: . . . . . . auxiliary storage.
The 8951 Magnetic Drum is a new drum storage
unit which stores 32, 864 words and has a transfer
rate of 32, 000 words per second. No further
information on the unit is available.
Magnetic Drum.
Model 8951 .
© 1963
Description
• 14
Availability:. .
4 to 6 months •
.15
First Delivery: .
first quarter 1963.
by Auerbach Carporation and BNA incorporated
3/63
244:051.100
_STANDARD
EDP
•
REPORTS
CDC 160-A
Central Processor
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
051.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
.12
Description
.12
Description (Contd.)
CDC l60-A ADDRESSING MODES
. . . . . l60-A Processor .
The basic l60-A Processor operates at the same
speeds as the 160 Processor, but has a larger basic
core storage, a buffered input-output channel, an
interrupt system, and additional instructions. The
160-A also provides for additional core storage and
the facility to connect an arithmetic unit which speeds
up floating point calculations.
The 160- A Processor is capable of relatively high
processing speeds, but handles operands of only 11
data bits plus a sign bit. The instruction repertoire
contains few basic instructions, but almost every
instruction has eight possible addressing modes,
with the result that programming to realize the full
capabilities of the processor is complex. Instructions are performed in the single-address mode and
consist of one or two words. The 11-bit data word
provides a precision of only 3.3 decimal digits.
Double or greater precision arithmetic, if used,
must be sUPIllied by subroutines or through use of
the optional 168-1 Arithmetic Unit. Floating point
operations are perlormed -by stibroutines, or by
subroutines and the optional 168-2 Arithmetic Unit.
Single precision arithmetic operands in the l60-A
are treated as 11 bits plus a sign bit. A single
precision add-to-accumulator operation requires
three storage cycles of 6.4 microseconds each.
Words in storage contain no parity bits, and parity
is not checked automatically on input or output.
The instruction repertoire includes add-to-storage
and Boolean commands, but lacks compare and radix
conversion instructions. Three sense switches and
three selective stop switches are provided. Automatic multiply and divide are not provided as
standard; however, the Model 168 -1 Arithmetic Unit
is available for double precision add-subtract operations, and for single or double precision multiply and
divide operations (see Section 244:052). Double
precision add or subtract requires 145 microseconds
using the 168-1 Arithmetic Unit; performing the add
or subtract operations by subroutine requi:r:es 225 or
300 microseconds, respectively.
Indexing and indirect addressing are two of the eight
addressing modes under which an instruction may
operate. The usual single-address instruction, which
calls for an operand anywhere in core storage, requires two successive computer words, and is found
as one of the addressing modes. The modes are
distinguished by the instruction operation codes, and
are applicable to most instruction types. These
eight addressing modes, and their operand locations,
are summarized in the table which follows. The
Relative mode is counted as two modes.
© 1963
Address
Mode
NoDirectIndirectRelativeConstantMemorySpecific-
Instruction
Length
(Words)
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
Operand
Location
t
E l'
(E)
Contents of (E)
P -FE .t
P+1
(P + 1)
77778
t E is 2-octal-digit field in instruction.
" ( ) means "contents of."
P is value of instruction counter.
+
Literals can be provided by the No Address and
Constant Address modes of instructions. In the No
Address mode, the E field of the instruction is used
as the operand (two octal digits), and in the Constant
Address mode the word follOwing the instruction
word is used as the operand (four octal digits).
The storage bank to be referenced is specified
through one of four bank control registers. DeSignated as the direct, indirect, relative, and buffer
bank control registers, these registers correspond
to three of the instruction address modes and to
Buffer channel data transfers. All instructions are
obtained using the relative bank control. Operands
are found in banks corresponding to the addressing
modes: full details are in the manufacturer's l60-A
Computer Programming Manual.
The additional instructions in the l60-A not present
on the 160 provide the following: additional internal
shifting; a return jump; selective stops and
selective jumps; a conditional jump, depending on
the status of the Buffer channel; control for the
storage bank control registers and the Buffer channel
control registers; clear of interrupt lockout; and
several other miscellaneous functions.
The interrupt system contains four separate interrupt
channels: one for the operator, one which occurs at
the end of every buffered data transfer. and two for
external equipment. Occurrence of an interrupt
causes automatic program transfer to one of four
fixed locations, one location for each interrupt
channel. All further interrupts are locked out until
cleared by the program.
The l60-A has two types of input-output commands:
external function commands and data transfer
commands. These commands are similar to the
input-output commands of the l604/1604-A computers.
The external function commands select devices and
specify the operation to the device. The data trans-
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244:051.120
§
051.
. 12
Description (Contd.)
CDC 160-A
• 13
• 14
fer commands specify the block of data to be transferred, and initiate the transfer. In addition, the
.2
external function command can request the external
device to present its status, for interpretation by the .21
central processor.
Availability:. •
4 months •
First Delivery:
1961.
PROCESSING FACILITIES
Operations and Operands
Provision
Radix
Operation
Size
and Variation
The recommended general procedure for an input.211 Fixed point
output operation is as follows: status request,
Add-subtract: automatic
binary
11 bits + sign bit.
status test, select unit, initiate data transfer; then
"Multiply
status request and status' test after the operation is
binary
22 bits.
subroutine
Short:
finished. Status checking is recommended to avoid
subroutine
Long:
binary or depends on routine.
indefinite delays in case a unit is not capable of
decimal
being operated (for example, power to the unit may
11 or 22 bits.
optional 168-1 binary
be off). If power to a unit is off, its status can still
Divide
be determined. The paper tape reader and punch are
No rebuilt into the processor and have no status codes.
mainder: subroutine
22 bits.
binary
Remainder: subroutine
binary or depends on routine.
Peripheral devices can be connected to either the
decimal
Buffer channel or the Normal channel. Exceptions
11 or 22 bits.
optiona1l68-1 binary
are the paper tape reader and punch, which are
always connected to the Normal channel. The other
devices can easily be changed from one channel to the
.212 Floating
other. A peripheral unit connected to the Normal
binary operations
point:
Channel can transfer data over the Normal channel
using either subroutines
connected
to
the
Buffer
channel
can
only, but a unit
or subroutines and
transfer data over either channel, depending on the
optional 168.2.
input-output command used. A peripheral device
.213 Boolean
connected to the Buffer channel and transferring data
binary
12 bits.
automatic
AND:
via ·the Normal channel prevents use of the Buffer
Inclusive OR: none.
bianry
channel during the transfer. Simultaneous operations
12 bits.
Exclusive OR: automatic
are effected by initiating a transfer on the Buffer
(same as
channel, then either executing instructions in the
Selective
processor or transferring data via the Normal
Complement
channel.
instruction) •
. 214 Comparison:
none.
Programming the l60-A system is necessarily
• 215 Code translation:
subroutine.
complex because of the short computer word length. .216 Radix conversion: .
subroutine.
One immediate consequence of the short word is
.217 Edit format:
no edit facilities.
that instructions which reference arbitrary core
.218 Table look-up:
none.
locations are two words long. A second consequence
.219 Others
is that a computer word cannot specify the complete
Add and replace
address of a core storage location, and the contents
operand with sum:
automatic.
of a bank control register must be used implicitly
Replace operand with
to select one of eight available core banks.
operand + binary
one:
automatic.
When an instruction references a location through
relative addressing (plus or minus 63 locations of
the program counter) or through indirect addressing .22 Special Cases of Operands
(using 64 standard locations per bank) it requires
only 1 word. These instructions are easy and con.221 Negative numbers:
"1" in most significant bit
position (one's complevenient to use within short loops. However, when
using symbolic locations, it is easy to exceed the
ment).
63-word limit by mistake (or when patching), thereby • 222 Zero: • . . • . • • . + or -; either usable in
causing errors.
arithmetic. Must be +
zero for branch on zero.
The disadvantages of this multi-mode programming
.223 Operand size deterfixed at 11 bits + Sign bit
are:
mination:
• Non-uniform instruction forms
(12 bits one's complement).
• The attendant changes in thinking while
programming
• 23 Instruction Formats
• Potential for making mistakes
• The requirement for changing bank control
1 or 2 words .
• 231 Instruction structure:
register contents.
.232 Instruction layout
.2321 I-word instruction:
Since the addresses are l2-bit numbers, address
modification can be difficult. The address is treated
by the arithmetic unit as an 11-bit number with a
Execution Address
Function Code
range of ±2, 047 rather than an absolute address with
6
6
a maximum value of 4, 095.
..
3/63
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
244:051.2322
051.
.238 Indirect addressing:
. 2381 Recursive: .
.2382 Designation:
. 2322 2-word instruction:
Word 1
Function Code
6
Word 2
Address or Operand (G)
12
. 2384 Indexing with indirect
addressing: . • . • not possible.
• 239 Stepping: • • • . . . none.
.24
.233 Instruction parts
Name
Function code (F):
Execution
address (E):
Purpose
operation code.
specifies absolute address,
or increment to present
program counter contents
(max value of 77 octal),
or 6-bit value.
Address or
Operand(G):
absolute address, or 12-bit
value.
.234 Basic address structure: single address ~
.235 Literals
1 word.
Arithmetic: . . .
Comparisons and
tests:
none.
.236 Directly addressed
operands: . . . .
operands are 1 word long.
The structure of the instruction permits addresslng of only 4.096 words
directly; a bank control
register is used to select
which 1 of the 8 possible
banks of 4, 096 words is to
be used. Basic storage
contains 2 banks. The
Model 169 Auxiliary Unit
adds 2. 4. or 6 more
banks.
· 2361 Internal storage
type:
core storage.
Minimum size:
8,192 words.
Maximum size: .
8,192 words.
8,192 using bank contro~
Valume accessible:
register; but note that
sequential states of address
counter skip an address at
two different counts. These
are usable by setting
counter.
.237 Address indexing:. •
none as such; see. 2373.
.2371 Number of methods:
1.
effective operand address
· 2373 Indexing rule:
is formed by incrementing
or decrementing contents
of instruction counter by
"E" value in instruction.
Maximum value of 'iE" is
decimal 63.
operation code.
· 2374 Index specification:
.2375 Number of potential
indexers: • . . .
1.
.2376 Addresses which can
be indexed:
no restrictions.
.2377 Cumulative indexing: not possible.
.2378 Combined index and
step:.. . • . . • not possible.
© 1963
none as such; see. 2382 •
no .
operation code specifies indirect addressing mode;
"E" value in instruction
specifies one of 64 indirect
addresses, located in addresses 0000 to 0077 (octal).
Special Processor Storage
.241 Category of
Number of Size in Program usage
locations
bits
storage
Instruction
counter (P):
1
12
stores loca tion of present
insU'uction.
Accumulator
(A):
1
.242 Category of Total number
locations
storage
P~
A:
1 word
1 word
arithmetic accumulator
register.
Physical Access time. Cycle time.
form
/Lsec
/Lsec
12
flip-flops
flip-flops
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
.31
Instruction
Sequencing:
6.4
6.4
6.4
6.4
. . . . single address.
.311 Number of sequence control
facilities:
1.
.314 Special sub-sequence
counters:
none.
.315 Sequence control step
size:
1 instruction (lor 2 words).
.316 Accessibility to
routines: . • •
yes.
.317 Permanent or optional
modifier: .
none.
.32
Look-Ahead:
.33
Interruption
.331 Possible causes
Standard:
Special:
none.
operator pressing any combination of a Selective Stop
and a Selective Jump
switch (interrupt line #10).
termination of every Buffer
channel data transfer
(interrupt line #20).
any input-output device or
controller which can
generate an interrupt
signal (interrupt lines
#30 and 40).
.332 Program control
Individual control:
none.
Method
The 4 interrupt lines are serviced on a priority
basis, with # 10 first and #40 last. Whenever an
interrupt takes place, or whenever an external
function instruction is executed, all further interrupts are locked out until the lockout is cleared
under program control by a Clear Interrupt Lockout instruction. Thus, if each interrupt routine
has a CIL instruction, all active interrupts will be
serviced. Any interrupt line which becomes
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
CDC 160-A
244:051.332
§
051.
332 Program control (Contd.)
Method (Contd.)
active remains active until it is accepted, or until
a console master clear is performed. This
master clear removes interrupt lockout.
Restriction:
none; see description of
operation under Method
above.
• 333 Operator control: . • _. operator can clear pending
interrupts but cannot
prevent them from becoming active again.
.334 Interruption conditions: none •
. 335 Interruption process
Disabling interruption: further interruptions on
other lines are locked ollt
and saved., .
Registers saved:. . _ contents of program counter
saved in one of four locations depending on which
interrupt line is activated.
Accumulator saved only if
inter:rupt routine does so.
Destination:
program control transferred
to one of four locations
depending on which interrupt line is activated.
Transfer back depends on
the interrupt routine.
.336 Control methods
Determine cause:
one interrupt routine for
each interrupt line (#10,
20, 30"and 40.).
Enable
interruption:
interruption re-enabled when
CIL instruction executed.
.34 Multi-Running:
as programmed using the
interrupt facilities.
.
. 35
Multi-sequencing: .
•4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
none •
.414 Control
Compare: •
Branch: •.
no compare.
6.4, short jump. 12.8,
unlimited.
25.6 or 32.
no counters.
no edit instruction .
no convert instruction .
6.4 IJ.sec for 1 to 6 bits;
circular .
• 415
• 416
• 417
.418
Compare and branch:
Counter control: .
Edit: . .
Convert:
Shift: •.
.42
Processor Performance in IJ. sec
Conditions
fixed point, single precision.
fixed point, programmed
double precision.
floating point using subroutines; 8 decimal digits.
floating point using 168-2
Arithmetic Unit.
I: .
II: ..
III:
IV:
.421 For random addresses
I
II
c = a + b: 64
480
b = a + b: 45
480
SumN
items:
19
314
2,000 t 7,700av.
c =ab:
2,000 t 10,200
c =alb:
III
4,350
4,350
4,120
14,200
19,200
IV
1,000.
1,000.
1,000.
1,500.
1,500.
t programmed.
.422 For arrays of data
II
I
ci =ai +bj :
bj = ai +bj:
Sum N items:
c = c +aibj:
192
147
115
2,000 t
698
698
390
8,420
III
4,640
4,580
4,430
18,700
IV
1,290.
1,240.
1,080.
2,740.
t programmed •
.423 Branch based on comparison
Numeric data: •
154 (1 word of 4 octal
digits).
.411 Fixed point
not applicable.
Alphabetic data:
Single precision (11 bits)
Switching
Add-subtract:. . . . 19.2.
Unchecked: .
154.
Multiply: . . . . • • 650, by subroutine.
Checked: . •
256.
Divide: . . . . . . • 2,000, by subroutine.
List search:
45 + 128N.
Double precision using 168-1 Arithmetic Unit
.425 Format control per character
Add-subtract: •
145.
Unpack
Multiply:. • . • . • . 250.
Scientific
Binary: • . • . . . O.
Divide: • . • • . .• 295 to 365.
Double precision using subroutines
BCD input to double
Add:. . .
225.
precision fixed
Subtract:
• • •. 300.
251.
point: . . • .
Multiply:. . . . . 5,000 to 10, 000.
BCD input to
Divide: •. .••• 10, 000.
floating point:
1,125 (***).
.412 Floating point
Compose
By subroutines and 168-2 Arithmetic
Scientific
Units
14, for moving.
Binary: • • . • .
Add - subtract:
4, 000
1, 000 (**).
BCD from double
1,500 (**).
Multiply:
14,000
precision fixed
1,500 (**).
Divide:
19,000
4,345.
point: ••••.
.413 Additional allowance for
BCD from floating
Indexing: . . . • ••
no indexing.
point: • . . • .. 13, 040 (***).
Indirect addressing:
O.
Re-complementing:
O.
(***) Estimate by editorial staff (see 1 :010.400).
.41
3/63
Instruction Times in IJsec
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
244:051.426
051.
.5
.426 Table look-up per comparison
For a match: .
115.
For least or greatest: 160.
For interpolation
point:
109.
• 427 Bit indicators
Set bit in pattern:
58.
Test bit in pattern: .
26.
Test AND for B bits: . 45.
Test OR for B bits:.
26.
.428 Moving:
45 per word.
© 1963
ERRORS. CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Overflow:
Zero divisor:
InvaVd operation:
Invalid data:
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
Timing fault:
Interrupt lockout:
Output unit not selected
properly:
Input unit not selected
properly:
by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated
Check or
Interlock
Action
n<;>ne.
none.
none •
none.
none.
check on non-existent bank
?
none.
none.
interlock
?
?
?
interlock
alarm.
interlock
alarm.
3/63
244:052.100
.STANOARO
EDP
•
CDC 160/160-A
R£IIlRTS
168-1 Arithmetic Unit
CENTRAL PROCESSOR: ARITHMETIC UNIT
§
052.
.212 Floating point:
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .
.12
Fixed Point Arithmetic Unit.
168-1.
Description
The 168-1 Arithmetic Unit performs double
precision fixed point add and subtract operations for
the 160 and 160-A Processors; it also performs fixed
point single or double precision multiply and divide
operations. The Processor addresses the
Arithmetic Unit and transfers the ll-bit binary
number (Plus sign) operands to it. After the
calculation has been completed within the
Arithmetic unit the Processor program initiates
transfer of the results to the Processor. Duri~g the
computation, both the 160 and 160-A Processors have
some free time to execute other program steps.
Paragraph .411 summarizes these times. The free
times include loading and unloading the operands
from core storage to the Arithmetic Unit and back
to core storage.
.4
Availability:. .
4 months .
. 14
First Delivery:
1962.
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
· 21
Operations and Operands
Operation
and Variation
· 211 Fixed point
Add-subtract:
Multiply
Short:
Long:
Divide
No remainder:
Remainder:
Provision
Note: 160/160-A Processor has some free time
available for its own processing, during
operation of the 168-1, as follows:
Add-subtract:. .
5 ",sec.
Single preCision
mUltiply: . . .
38 ",sec.
Double precision
multiply: . . .
n ",sec.
Single precision
divide: . . . .
39 to 74 ",sec.
Double precision
divide: . . . .
72 to 142 Il sec.
t Times given include loading and unloading times
of the 168-1 Arithmetic Unit.
.5
Radix
binary
22 bits.
none.
automatic
binary
11 or
22 bits.
binary
© 1963
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Size
automatic
none.
automatic
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
.41 Instruction Times in ",sec
.411 Fixed point t
Add-subtract
Double preCision
(22 bits): . . . . . 145.
Multiply
Single preCision
(11 x 11 bits): .
120.
Double precision
(22 x 22 bits): .
250.
Divide
Single precision
(22 -:- 11 bits): .
145 to 180.
Double preCision
(44 .;. 22 bits): .
295 to 365.
The 160 and 160-A Processors can interrogate the
Arithmetic Unit to determine its status, to help the
program run efficiently. The status responses
possible are: Unit Ready, Add/Subtract Overflow,
Divide Fault, Unload Not Completed, and Busy
Computing. The 168-1 Arithmetic Unit does not
contain an Accumulator, and hence operations on
strings of operands are not possible without
reloading.
. 13
. . . . none .
22 or 44
bits.
Overflow:
Zero divisor:
Quotient too large:
Arithmetic error:
Check or Interlock
~
check
check
check
timing check
**
* on
alarm
168-1,
halt (?).
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
=1=
none.
none.
Signal available for sensing by 160/160-A
Processor.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244:061.100
.STANMHD
EDP
•
REPORTS
CDC 160·A
Console
CONSOLE
§
061.
.1
.25
Name
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .
Console; built into 160-A
Processor.
.12
Associated Units:
none.
.13
Description
The Console is a small sloping panel located toward
the rear of the desk-size work area on the top of the
Computer unit. The paper tape reader is on the
right-hand end of the work area. The Console
displays the register and storage contents in octal
form using the Arabic numerals 0 through 7. In
addition, the status indicator panel displays
computer conditions using alphabetic symbols
(SEL, IN, OUT, etc.).
The Program, Accumulator, and Storage Registers
have their contents displayed, and each of the three
displays permits entry of binary data into the
registers. The other registers of interest in the
160-A may also be displayed (BER, BFR, bank
controls, etc.). The A and Z Register display
groups, and the status indicator panel, have colored
background lamps for further status indications.
Displays light only when the computer is halted.
CONTROLS
• 21
Power
Name
.26
3 push buttons
on register
displays
1 push button next
to bank selection
entry buttons
Connections:
.23
Stops and Restarts
blue button
red button
button
button
button
button
1
Sense Switches
Name
Form
S elective Jump;
4,2, 1:
Selective Stop;
4, 2, 1:
DISPLAY
.31
Alarms
Name
Form
Name
Form
none:
none:
RUN-STEP.
3-position switch.
see . 23 above.
© 1963
Function
indicates computer
timing fault.
indicates
reference to nonexistent storage
bank.
Conditions
Stepping
Name: .
Form: .
Function: .
control stop conditions.
red background to A
Register display
red background to P
Register display group
no name:
. 32
control juml> conditions.
Margin
3-position switch .
set marginal conditions for
test of computer; Hi-Lo.
Normally on center; not
an operator control.
no name:
RUN-STEP.
3-position switch.
RUN starts program.
Center halts program.
STEP executes 1 storage
cycle of instruction each
time switch moved from
center to STEP.
Function
3 two-position
switches
3 two-position
switches
Special
.3
none.
cleats selected bank
control.
LOAD-CLEAR.
3- position switch.
sets Load Mode on paper
tape input; see .25 above.
turns system power on.
turns system power off.
control power to
respective units.
central is neutral•
CLEAR is momentary;
clean registets and
master controls.
LOAD sets
condition for Load
Mode paper tapes
to be read
properly.
clear P, A, or 1.
Register contents.
Loading.
Function
Form
.22
. 24
Clear:
Name: . .
Form: •.
Function:
.27
Function
3 -position switch
Name:.
Form:.
Function:
On:
Off:
Punch On:
Punch Off:
Reader On:
Reader off:
Name: . .
Form: . .
Function:
Form
WAD-CLEAR:
Clear:
.28
.2
Resets
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
green background to
status indicator
red backgroul}d to
status indicator
Function
computer in RUN
status.
STOP or STEP status.
Appears 1'Ihen HLT
or ERR instruction
executed, RUN
switch removed
fram RUN position,
or selective stop is
executed.
3/63
CDC 160-A
244:061.320
§ 061.
.32 Conditions (Contd.)
Name
none:
Form·
none:
none:
ERR:
SEL:
alphabetic symbols
OUT:
alphabetic symbols
IN
alphabetic symbols
IBA:
alphabetic symbols
DBA:
alphabetic symbols
Storage:
.4
ENTRY OF DATA
.41
Into Control Registers
Function
blue background to A
Register display group
blue background to Z
Register display
red bac kground to Z
Register group
alphabetic symbols
.34
indic!ltes interrupt
lockout.
shows instruction is
in Z Register rather
than data.
punch low on tape.
computer halted on
ERR instruction.
computer transmitting
selection code.
output "operation
proceeding or being
initiated: normal
channel.
input operation
proceeding or being
initiated: normal
channel.
buffer channel input
operation proceeding.
buffer channel output
operation proceeding.
Into storage bank
controls: . . •
use button to select 1 of 4
controls and enter binary
data to select bank, using
buttons provided.
Into P Register: . . . . press binary-coded buttons
below P display to enter
data. Press RUN-STEP
switch.
set ENTER -SWEEP switch
Into A Register:
to ENTER. Press binarycoded buttons below A
display. Press RUN-STEP
switch.
A, B, C,
or D:
REL,IND,
DlR, or BFR:
o to
. 33
7:
alphabetic symbols
shows next instruction
cycle.
alphabetic symbols
in status display: shows
which storage bank
control is to "be used
on next storage
reference.
in status display: shows
contents of displayed
bank control.
numeric symbol
p Register group
F code:
Form
2 octal digits in
p register:
Arabic form
4 octal digits in
Arabic form
S register:
4 octal digits in
Arabic form
A Register group
BFR register:
A register:
A· register:
Into Storage:
.5
CONVENIENCES
.51
Communications:
none.
4 octal digits in
Arabic form
4 octal digits in
Arabic form
4 octal digits in
Arabic form
• 52
Clock: . . .
none.
.53
Desk Space:
desk height work area 62 in.
by 30 in., less small
amount for console panel
and paper tape reader.
.54
View:
unobstructed in all
directions by seated
operator.
.6
INPUT-OUTPUT UNIT:
none at console. Optional
Model 161 Input/Output
typewriter has own cabinet
near console. Typewriter
can output at approximately
10 char/sec.
Function
current op code: P
selector switch up.
contents of program
counter: P selector
switch in center.
address of word to be
transferred to pr from
storage: P selector
switch down.
BFR contents: A selector
switch up.
contents of A register: A
selector switch in center.
results of last add
operation: A selector
switch down.
Z Register group
BER:
4 octal digits in
Arabic form
Z register:
BXR:
3/63
.42
Control Registers
Name
4 octal digits in
Arabic form
4 octal digits in
Arabic form
address of last word
transferred on buffer
channel: Z selector
Switch up.
contents of Z register: Z
selector switch in center.
indicates terminating
address of buffer
operation; Z selector
switch down.
in Z register display. To
observe contents of a
storage location, set
ENTER -SWEEP switch on
SWEEP. Set relative bank
control to bank desired.
Set core storage location
into P register via buttons
and press RUN-STEP
switch to STEP. Z will
display one word of core
storage as in . 33 above.
into storage via Z and A
Registers. Set ENTERSWEEP switch to ENTER.
Set relative bank control
using buttons provided .
Press binary coded buttons
below Z display. Press
RUN-STEP switch. Data
goes to Z, A, and storage
location specified by
setting of relative bank
control and setting of P.
244:071.100
.SlANDAAD
EDP
•
CDC 160/160-A
REIIlR1S
Input-Output
Paper Tape Reader
INPUT-OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE READER
§
071.
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
· 31
Form of Storage
.1
GENERAL
.11
.2
paper tape; tape made of
parchment, Mylar or Mylar-aluminum laminate.
Description
Lightly-oiled black tape is
recommended for the
The 350 Paper Tape Reader is a photoelectric reader
punch .
mounted on the 160 Console desk that always oper. 312 Phenomenon: . . . . . . fully punched holes.
ates on the Normal Channel in the 160-A Processor.
The reading head employs transparent windows which · 32 Positional Arrangement
direct light to the photo cells. This construction
provides a smooth reading surface that has no holes · 321 Serial by: .
1 to N rows at 10 rows per
which can accumulate dust to calise reading errors.
inch.
5, 6, 7, or 8 tracks at
· 322 Parallel by:
The reader operates at a rate of 350 rows per second
standard spacing.
when reading blocks of data, and accepts five-, six-, · 324 Track use
Normal Mode
Load Mode
seven, or eight-track paper tapes of standard widths.
Data:
6
5,7,or8.
Reading can be performed on either strips or loops
Redundancy check: o
O.
Timing:
of tape. The tape can be made of paper, parchment,
1 sprocket
1 sprocket.
Control signals:
1, in alternate O.
Mylar, or Mylar-aluminate laminate. Slightly-oiled
black paper tape is recommended for use on the
rows
Unused:
paper tape punch.
depends on
o.
width
Total:
7
Under program control, the reader can input either
5, 7, or 8 plus
one row, or an entire block of data. The end of the
sprocket .
block is defined by the instruction and is specified as . 325 Row use: .
all for data; no inter-block
the final core storage location desired. These progap required.
grammed inputs are known as the NORMAL mode of
input, and one row is placed in the least significant
· 33 Coding:......... matched; see Data Code
Table No.3.
bits of one 12-bit word. The LOAD mode, or automatic load input mode, causes input of two 6-bit
rows per core storage 12-bit word, and is halted
· 34 Format Compatibility:. all devices using standard
5- to 8-track punched
when a unique control code is read from the tape.
tape.
There is no automatic parity check on reading.
· 35 Physical Dimensions
4 months .
Availability: .•
.351 Overall width: . . . .
0.6875 inch for 5-track tape.
1960.
First Delivery:
0.875 inch for 7-track tape.
1 inch for 8-track tape •
PHYSICAL FORM
. 352 Length:. . . . . . . •. 1,000 feet per reel.
.21
Drive Mechanism
.12
. 13
.14
Paper Tape Reader.
350.
Identity:
. 211 Drive past the head: .
.212 Reservoirs:
• 213 Feed drive:
.....
· 22
Sensing and Recording Systems
· 221 Recording system: .
• 222 SenSing system: .•
· 24
pinch roller friction.
none •
motor.
none.
silicon photoelectric cells .
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:
.42
Connection to System
.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: •
Stacks: . . . . .
Heads/stack: •.
Method of use: .
.311 Medium: . . • • .
.43
reading.
1.
8.
1 row at a time.
© 1963
built into Console.
1.
none.
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller: 1.
.432 Restrictions: .
none.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244:071.440
§
CDC 160/160-A
071.
. 44
Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load: . . . . . . 1 to N rows, 1 row per
word (NORMAL Mode).
2 to N rows, 2 rows per
word (LOAD Mode).
core storage .
. 442 Input-output area:
.443 Input-output area
each word of core storage.
access: . . . . .
.444 Input-output area
yes; serial operation.
locko-ut: • . . . .
• 445 Table control: • .
none.
automatic .
• 446 Synchronization: .
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
. 51
Blocks
. 511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation
Input: . . . . . . .
.52
· 622 Important -parameters
Density: .
Speed: ..
Start time:
Stop time:
Selecting device: •
• 623 Overhead: ~ . . .
• 624 Effective speeds: .
· 63
Demands on System
processor.
2.9.
100 (on 160 or on Normal
channel of 160-A) .
Component:
Msec/row: .
Percentage:
1 row, or 1 to N rows .
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
address specifications in
instruction (NORMAL
Mode).
· 71
Adjustments
number of tracks.
tape width guide.
set for 5, 7, or 8 level
tape.
Adjustment:
Method: .
Comment: .
Input-Output Operations
.521 Input
LOAD Mode:
. 523 Stepping: •
. 524 Skipping: .
.526 Searching:
.72
N rows forward, terminated
by missing control punch.
1 row (INA instruction).
1 to N rows (INP instruction), terminated by final
address specification in
instruction.
.73
none.
none.
.731
none.
.53
Code Translation:
matched codes.
Volumes handled
Storage
Reel: . . . . .
.732 Replenishment time:.
.54
Format Control: .
none.
.733 Adjustment time:
.55
Control Operations:
none.
• 56
Testable Conditions: .
none.
.734 Optimum reloading
period: . . . . . .
NORMAL Mode:
.8
.6
PERFORMANCE
. 61
Conditions: .
. . . none.
• 62 . Speeds
. 621 Nominal or peak speed: 350 rows/sec.
3/63
10 char/inch.
35 inches/sec.
3 msec to next row.
1 msec; stops before next
row.
0.032 msec.
start time.
350 rows/sec if less than
O. 25 msec elapse between
completion of reading one
block and initiation of next
input operation .
Other Controls
.
mode selector.
LOAD-CLEAR key on
Console.
selects LOAD mode or
NORMAL Mode.
Function: .
Form: •.
Comment:
Loading and Unloading-
Capacity
1,000 feet.
0.5 to 1.0 minute; unit
needs to be stopped.
1. 0 minute including
replenishment.
6 minutes.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Reading:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Transmitting data:
none •
all valid.
none.
none •
244:072.100
.STAtfDARD
II
R[PORTS
EDP
CDC 160/160-A
Input-Output
Paper Tape Punch
INPUT-OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE PUNCH
§
072.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
. 12
Description
Paper Tape Punch.
Teletype BRPE -11 Punch.
.324 Track use
Data: . .
Redundancy check:
Timing: . . . .
Control signals: .
Unused: .
Total:.
.325 Row use:
The Paper Tape Punch is a standard BRPE-11 unit
mounted on a hinged rack at the rear of the right
wing of the console desk. Punched tape is fed out of a .33
slot in the compartment door.
.13
. 14
The Punch operates at a rate of 110 rows per second .34
and punches five-, six-, seven-, or eight-track
widths as required. The punch can be programmed
to punch either one character at a time or a block at
a time. It is always connected to the Normal channel .35
in the 160-A Processor.
.351
Black, lightly-oiled tape is recommended for the
punch. No parity check is made on data transmitted
to the punch, nor is any recording check made.
,352
4 months.
Availabili!y:
.4
First Delivery:
1960 .
.41
matched as in Data Code
Tables No. 3 and 4.
Format Compatibili!y:
all devices using standard
5, 7, or 8-track paper
tape.
Physical Dimensions
Overall width: . . • .
Length: • . . .
Identi!y:
.42
.21
Drive Mechanism
.421 On-line:
built into console.
Connection to System
.422 Off-line:
.43
.22
0.6875 inch for 5-track
tape.
0.875 inch for 6- or 7-track
tape.
up to I, 000 feet per roll.
CONTROLLER
PHYSICAL FORM
sprocket drive.
none.
1 (sprocket hole).
punch in alternate rows,
when punching a LOAD
tape .
depends on tape width.
5 to 8.
all for data.
Coding: .
.2
.211 Drive past the head:
. 212 Reservoirs: .
5, 6, 7, or 8.
O.
1 (on Normal channel in
160-A).
none .
Connection to Device
Sensing and Recording Systems
. 221 Recording system:
. 222 Sensing system: .
die punch .
none.
.23
Multiple Copies:
none.
.24
Arrangement of Heads
.431 Deyices per controller: 1 .
• 432 Restrictions: . . . . . none .
· 44
Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load:
1 to N rows; 5 to 8 bits of
each word per row.
core storage .
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access: . . . .
· 444 Input- output area
lockout: . . . .
· 445 Table control:
.446 Synchronization:
• 31
Form of Storage
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
Use of station:
Stacks: . . . .
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:
.311 Medium: . .
. 312 Phenomenon:
punching
1.
8 plus sprocket punch.
1 row at a time.
paper tape.
fully punched holes .
.511 Size of block:
.32
Positional Arrangement
.321 Serial by:
. 322 Parallel by: .
1 to N rows at 10 rows/
inch.
5, 6, 7, or 8 tracks .
© 1963
.512 Block demarcation:
by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated
each word of core storage.
in 160 only.
none.
automatic .
1 row or 1 to N rows
normally.
2 to N rows in punching
LOAD tape.
address specifications in
instruction.
3/63
244:072.520
§
CDC 160/160-A
072.
. 63
· 52
Input- Output Operations
.522
. 523
. 524
. 525
· 526
Output:.
Stepping:
Skipping:
Marking:
Searching:
punch 1 block forward.
none .
none .
none.
none.
. 53
Code Translation:
matched codes .
. 54
Format Control:.
none.
. 55
Control Operations:
none.
.56
Testable Conditions: .
none.
Demands on System
Component: .
Msec/row: •
Percentage: .
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments
Adjustment: .
Method:. .
Comment: .
.72
.73
PERFORMANCE
· 61
Conditions:
. 62
Speeds
. 621 Nominal or peak speed:
.622 Important parameters
Tape speed: . .
Packing density: . .
Start time: . . . .
Stop time: . . . . .
Time to select device:
. 623 Overhead: . . . .
.624 Effective speeds:. . .
3/63
110 rows/sec .
11 inches/sec.
10 rOWS/inch.
?
?
0.032 msec.
start time .
no rows/sec if less than
9 msec elapsed between
completion of punching one
block and initiation of next
output operation.
tape feed.
lever.
Loading and Unloading
Storage:
Capacity: .
. . . none.
number of tracks.
tape width guide.
set for 5-, 7, - or 8-track
tape.
Other Controls
Function: .
Form:
.6
. processor.
9.1.
• 100 (on 160, or Normal
channel of 160-A) .
reel.
1,000 feet.
.732 Replenishment time: .
2.0 to 3.0 minutes; punch
needs to be stopped.
. 733 Adjustment time:
.734 Optimum reloading
period:
3.0 to 4.0 minutes .
.8
18.2 minutes.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or Interlock
Recording:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Receipt of data:
none.
not possible.
not possible.
none.
none.
244:073.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
R[I'()",
CDC 160/160-A
Input-Output
167 Card Reader
INPUT-OUTPUT: 167 CARD READER
§
073.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
167 Card Reader, Modell.
167-1.
167 Card Reader, Model 2.
167-2.
.12
Description
The CDC 167 Card Reader reads 80-column cards by
means of a photoelectric sensing head, at a maximum
rate of 250 cards per minute. The reading mechan.ism is a Burroughs 200 card per minu~ mechanism,
modified by Control Data to run at 250 cards per
minute and enclosed in a Control Data cabinet. An
infinite- tooth clutch is used so that the effective reading rate is smoothly reduced to match any system
limiting factors. Because there is only one reading
station, verification of the reading is a responsibility
of the program. However, an automatic check of the
reading amplifiers is performed for every card read.
Failure of the check provides a testable signal to the
processor.
Reading is accomplished serially, column-bycolumn, starting at column number one. Each
column is transmitted to the processor as one 12bit word. With the 167 Model I, the reader selection External Function code initiates either a single
card read or a free-run read. The Model 2 automatically translates each column from Hollerith to
BCD code, and packs a pair of BCD characters into
each computer word. The automatic translation may
be overridden for reading binary cards in the Model
2. A command is available to stop the card reader.
Only one stacker (which can hold 500 c.ards) is
available.
The data input command can specify a block of core
storage for input data, in which case data from each
card column is placed automatically in sequential
locations until the block is full. Alternatively,
there can be a single-word transfer command for
each word to be transferred. Synchronization of the
data transfer is automatic, but the computer pro gram timing must be watched so that the data is not
lost by delayed execution of a data transfer command
The program can test for this potential condition
(Program Error Status Code). Data from each card
column is available at intervals of 1.88 milliseconds.
This reader is a relatively new unit and is offered
as an economical reader that is slower than the
161O-A Control Unit with an IBM 088 Reader, which
operates at 650 cards per minute. The reading
mechanism is the same as that in the CDC 1617
Card Reader (refer to Report 24'3:074, CDC 1604-A);
however, the 1617 has the facility of being manually
switchable between two different computers. For
example, the two systems may be the 1604/1604-A
and the 160/160-A.
© 1963
. 13
Availability:
4 months .
. 14
First Delivery: .
1962.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
.211 Drive past the head:
• 212 Reservoirs:
.22
pinch rollers •
none.
Sensing and Recording Systems
.221 Recording system:
. 222 SenSing system:
none.
photoelectric .
.23
Multiple Copies:
none.
.24
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: •
Method of use:
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.31
form of Storage
.312 Phenomenon:
12.
1 column at a time.
Positional Arrangement
80 columns at standard
spacing •
12 rows. at standard
spacing.
all for data .
all for data .
.321 Serial by:
. 322 P'arallel by:
. 324 Track use:
. 325 Row use:
.33
1.
standard 80-column
punched cards.
rectangular punched holes.
.311 Medium:
.32
reading.
Coding
167-1
column binary
card image; 1
column per word
External:
Internal:
167-2
Hollerith.
2 BCD char per
word.
.34
Format Compatibility:
all devices using standard
80-column cards.
.35
Physical Dimensions:
standard 80-column cards.
.4
CONTROLLER
Al
Identity:
.43
Connection to Device
•
no separate controller;
functions under control of
processor.
.431 Devices per controller: 1.
.432 Restrictions:
none.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
CDC 160/160·A
244:073.440
§073.
• 44 Data Transfer Control
• 441 Size of load: • • . • • 1 column (1 word input
command).
1 to N cards (free run).
core storage.
. 442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
1 word.
access:
.444 Input-output area
in 160 in block input mode.
lockout:
none.
.445 Table control:
• 446 Synchronization:
automatic, block mode.
by program, I-word mode •
status codes in reader.
. 447 Synchronizing aids:
160 processor, or 160-A
processor using Normal
channel .
1 word per input command.
0.38.
20.2 .
Component:
.522
.523
.524
• 525
.526
Output:
Stepping:
Skipping:
Marking:
Searching:
feed 1 card, or free run;
then input 1 block.
none.
none.
none .
none.
none.
• 53
Code Translation:
matched codes.
.54
Format Control:
none.
• 55
Control Operations
• 56
•6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions: .
.62
Speeds
no.
no.
no.
no.
no.
no.
yes.
no.
no.
no.
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
Condition: .
Msec per column: .
Percentage:
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments:
.72
Other Controls
.73
• . • • none .
disable row 12 "0" check .
illuminated switch.
used when reading cutcorner cards.
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: • . •
Stacker:
.732 Replenishment time:
.733 Adjustment time: •
.734 Optimum reloading
period:
.8
Reading:
yes.
Input area overflow:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
• • • see Paragraph . 63.
Capacity
500 cards.
500 cards •
O. 2 min. Device does not
need to be stopped.
no adjustments required.
2.0 minutes.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
Interlock
Error
yes.
.621 Nominal or peak speed: 250 cards/minute.
3/63
160-A processor using
Buffer channel.
N words per input command.
O. 02; approx.
1. 1.
Function:
Form:
••
Comment:
Testable Conditions
Disabled:
Busy device:
Output lock:
•
Nearly exhausted: •
Hopper empty:
Stacker full:
Ready:
Feed failure: •
Request for data too
late: • • • •
Read amplifier
failure:
100•
Condition: . . • •
Msec per column: •
Percentage:
Input-Output Operations
Disable: • • • • •
Request interrupt:
Offset card:
Select stacker:
Select format:
Select code:
Demands on System
Component:
Blocks
.521 Input:
1.88 msec.
none; infinite tooth clutch •
250 cards/minute. This
can be obtained even
following a single Card
Read if reader is reselected within 4 msec
after column #80 is read •
1 card of 1 to 80 columns.
1 to N cards.
area defined by instruction
addresses.
. 51
• 52
70 msec •
160 processor.
N words per input command .
240.
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
. 512 Block demarcation:
.63
240 msec •
Component:
Condition: . . •
Msec per card: •
Percentage :
.5
.511 Size of block:
.622 Important parameters
Card cycle time:
Time till first column
read:
Time between
columns:
.623 Overhead: • • •
.624 Effective speeds:
check or read
amplifiers
Action
generate status code.
none.
all codes valid.
check
generate status code.
none •
check 00 progra m
timiog
check
interlock
Card oot fed:
Motor power off:
Amplifier failure, feed
fa Uure, or progra m
check
timing error:
generate status code.
generate status code.
generate sta tus code.
generate disconnect
code.
244:074.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
CDC 160/160-A
17Q Card Punch
REPORTS
. INPUT-OUTPUT: 170 CARD PUNCH
§
074.
.12
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity:
• 12
Description
Description (Contll.)
The mM 523 Summary Punch can operate at 100 cards
per minute at maximum speed.
170 Card Punch •
. 13
Availability: •.
4 months •
. 14
First Delivery: .
1960 •
The CDC 170 Card Punch is a unit which combines
an adapter and an mM 523 Summary Punch. The
170 can connect to the 160/160-A, the 1604/1604-A
or the 924/924-A Processors.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244:081.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
_
REICRTS
CDC 160/160-A
Input-Output
1612 Printer
INPUT-OUTPUT: CDC 1612 PRINTER
§
081.
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity:
· 12
Description
High Speed Printer.
CDC 1612 Unit.
• 233 Types of master
Multilith:. . .
Spirit: . . . .
Pressure sensitive:
Heat transfer:. . .
. 24
The 1612 High Speed Printer consists of an Anelex
Series 4-1000 model printer mounted on top of a
1612 Printer Control Unit. The printer system,
which is designed for use as a peripheral unit for the
160 and 1604 series CDC computers, prints the
computer data output on fan-fold forms at a nominal
maximum rate of 1,000 lines per minute. An alternative rate of 667 lines per minute is possible and
may be selected by actuating a single switch in the
printer control unit. This 667 line rate is effected
by reducing the speed of the print dr~m and, as a
result, produces printing with improved vertical
registration.
2 to 4 months.
.14
First Delivery:
1962.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
Range of Symbols
0
10, Ot09.
26, A to Z.
28, see below.
upon request.
yes, see below.
no.
64.
See Data Code Table No.2.
One to 120 words are sent to the print buffer before
printing. Printing is accomplished by the usual
"on -the -fly" technique. .Automatic single-space
paper advance follows printing. and line skipping is
provided by means of a p:I'epunched tape in the
printer. Eight channels on the tape. selected by
programmed instructions. control the vertical
formats.
Availability:
printing.
1.
120.
prints one line at a time.
Numerals
Letters: ••
Special: •.
Alternatives:
FORTRAN set: ••
Req'd COBOL set: •
Total: . • . . .
One print line consists of a maximum of 120 character positions; each position can print from a 64character set. Maximum print rates are achieved
when use is limited to the 48-character FORTRAN
subset of the total character set and a maximum of
two line feeds following each print line, otherwise
speeds are reduced by a factor of two.
.13
krrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: •
Method of use:
.25
yes .
yes.
yes.
yes.
Special characters in
FORTRAN set
Additional characters
in fUll set
• period
- minus
+ plus
=equal
( open parenthesis
) close parenthesis
/ slant
* asterisk
, comma
f not equal
$ dollar
: colon
blank
less than or equal
greater than or equal
< less than
> greater than
1\ and
V or
-, not
+arrow right
+arrow up
+.arrow down
"" identity
%percent
[ open bracket
] close bracket
; semicolon
:s
~
Note: For business applications""" %$ replaceA V -,
.211 Drive past the head: •
• 212 Reservoirs:
• 22
. ..
on-the-fly hammer stroke
against engraved drum.
.31
Form of Storage
.311 Medium: •
.32
.
..
.323 Bands:
.324 Track use: .
• 325 Row use:
5.
1.
© 1963
continuous fanfold sprocketpunched stationery.
printing of engraved chars •
Positional Arrangement
.321 Serial by:
.322 Parallel by:
Multiple Copies
• 231 Maximum Number
Interleaved carbon:
Card stock:
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.312 Phenomenon:
Sensing and Recording Systems
• 221 Recording system:
. 23
sprocket drive push and
pull •
none •
.3
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA incorporated
I line at 6 lineS/inch •
120 columns at 10 chars/
inch •
1.
all for data •
all for data.
5/63
244:081.330
§
CDC 160/160-A
081.
'.56
.33
Coding:
as in Data Code Table No.2.
.34
Format Compatibility:
none.
.35
Physical Dimensions
· · ·· ·
·· ··
.351 Overall width:
.352 Length:
.353 Maximum margins
Left: •
Right:
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:
.42
Connection to System
• 43
.6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions
• • •
·· · ·· .
I B:
1.
none.
Data Transfer Control
··
.441 Size of load:
.442 Input-output areas:
. 443 Input-output area
access:
.444 Input-output area
lockout:
• 445 Table control:
• 446 Synchronization:
1 to 120 words.
core storage; 1 char per
word, in 6 low-order bit
positions.
each word.
yes, in 160.
none.
automatic.
•5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
• 51
Blocks
. 511 Size of block: .
• 512 Block demarcation
Output: . ·
.52
Input-Output Operations
.521
. 522
.523
. 524
Input:
Output:
Stepping: .
Skipping: .
II B:
. 62
Connection to Device
1 line of up to
120 characters,
address limits in
instruction.
.525 Marking: .
status code .
print 1 line.
Step 0, 1, or 2 lines.
8 format channels for skipping are available, controlled by a tape loop.
none.
. 53
Code Translation: .
automatic.
.54
Format Control:
control of skipping using
paper tape loop.
Speeds
· 621 Nominal or peak speeds
I A: .
II A: .
I B: . . . . . . . . .
lIB:. . . . . . . . .
• 622 Important parameters
Paper speed:
Line length:. . . .
Line spacing: . . .
Character spacing:
Drum cycle, I A &
II A: . . . . •.
Drum cycle, I B &
II B:
.623 Overhead: • • •
.624 Effective speeds
I A: . •
Control Operations
5/63
yes.
yes.
as in skipping.
no.
1,000 lines/min .
500 lines/min.
667 lines/min .
333 lines/min.
25 inches/sec., max
9,000 lines/min., max.
120 columns .
6 lines/inch.
10 chars/inch .
60 msec.
90 msec .
single clutch point.
• 63
1,000/ (1+ [(Nt6)/9])
lines/min •
II A:
1,000/ (2+[N/9]) lines/min .
I B:
• 667/ (1+[(N +6)/9]) lines/
min.
II B:
677/ (2+[N/9]) lines/min .
N:
interline spacing in lines •
Note: [xl means "integer
part of x."
These are shown graphically at end of the section.
Demands on System: . 1 to 2 msec. per line .
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
· 71
Adjustments
Adjustment
Character phasing:
Penetration control:
Form positioning:
Disable: .
Request interrupt:
Select format:
Select code:
FORTRAN set, print drum
1,000 rpm.
FORTRAN set, print drum
667 rp{ll.
full character set, print
drum 1, 000 rpm.
full character set, print
drum 667 rpm •
II A:
··..
.55
provided power·is on, paper
is not in motion, and
printer is not out of paper.
I A:
3.5 inches.
3.5 inches.
.431 Devices per controller: 1.
.432 Restrictions: •
none.
• 44
Printer ready:
. Print Control Unit.
· ·
.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line: •
4 to 19 inches.
up to a 17-inch form.
Testable Conditions
paper tension:
Top of form:
Single line feed:
Paper tractor adjustment:
Method Comment
performs fine adjustments
of print quality to correspond to motor speed
selection.
adjusts hammer mounting
knob
plate print cylinder gap
to accommodate different
'thickness of paper.
adjusts line of print on
knob
form.
knob
adjusts paper tension.
moves to top of form
button
under control of format
channel B.
ad vances pa per.
button
adjustable provides horizontal pos!tionlng for paper widths
form
of 4 to 19 inches.
tractor
knob
INPUT-OUTPUT: CDC 1612 PRINTER
§
244:081.720
081.
•72
Other Controls
Function
Comment
Motor Speed:
switch
Printer Ready:
combination
bulton-lamp
switch
160/1604 Selector
Switch:
.73
Form
selects print drum speed
of either 1. 000 or 667
rpm.
Indicates that printer is
"ready...
selects the correct inputs
for 1604-A or 160
computer.
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled:..
pap~r
stack 12 to 14 inches
high.
. 732 Replenishment time:
1 min.
printer must be stopped.
© 1963
.733 Adjustment time: • • • 1 to 3 minutes •
. 734 Optimum reloading
period:
• • • • • . 34 minutes •
Basis: using 1,000 17-inch 2-part forms, printing
full character set, 1 line every inch.
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION:
Error
Recording:
Output block
size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted
medium:
Imperfect
medium:
by Auerbach Corporation ond BNA Incorporated
Check or
InterloCk
Action
none.
none.
all codes valid.
micro -switch
check
micro-switch
check
stop printer •
stop printer.
3/63
CDC 160/160-A
244:081.800
EFFECTIVE SPEED
CDC 1612 PRINTER
Condition: Print cylinder revolving at 1,000 r.p.m.
6,000
5,000
4,000
3,000
2,000
1,000
900
800
700
600
500
400
Effecti ve Speed: Printed
Lines Per Minute
Restricted FOR TRAN Set
300
Full Character Set
200
1
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
o
1/2
1
2.
Inter-Line Pitch in Inches
3/63
3
4
5
244:081.801
INPUT-OUTPUT: CDC 1612 PRINTER
EFFECTIVE SPEED
CDC 1612 PRINTER
Condition: Print cylinder revolving at 667 r.p.m.
6,000
5,000
4,000
3,000
2,000
1,000
900
800
700
600
500
400
Effective Speed: Printed
Lines Per Minute
300
Restricted FORTRAN Set
200
FuJI Character Set
~
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
o
1/2
1
2
3
4
5
Inter-Line Pitch in Inches
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244:082.100
.SIANOARO
EDP
•
CDC 160-A
Input-Output
166 Printer, Model 2
fiU'DRIS
INPUT-OUTPUT: 166 PRINTER, MODEL 2
§
. 24
082.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
. 12
Description:
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:
166 Line Printer.
Model 2 .
.25
The 166 Model 2 Printer is a buffered version of the
166 Model 1 Printer. The Model 2 is now the
standard printer for the CDC 160- A system. The
faster 1612 Printer System can be used where
faster printing is required. Data for a full line of
print is transferred to the 166-2 Printer. and the
processor is free to continue in its program.
.
Availability:
.14
First Delivery:
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
.211 Drive past the head: .
.212 Reservoirs:
· 22
.222 Sensing system:
.23
10
o to 9.
26
28
A to Z.
see Data Code Table
No.2
3 for business or
scientific.
yes.
yes.
Alternatives:
FORTRAN set:
Basic COBOL set:
Total:
...·
64.
DrumB
26
o to 9.
A to Z.
10
. -+=()
10
Numerals:
Letters:
Special:
Alternatives:
FORTRAN set:
Basic COBOL set:
Total:
.
/ * , blank
none.
yes.
no.
46.
DrumC
4 months .
Numerals:
Letters:
Special:
Alternatives:
FORTRAN set:
Basic COBOL set:
Total:
1962.
..·
sprocket drive; paper
punched both sides.
none.
on-the-fly hammer stroke
against interchangeable
engraved drum of 120
print locations.
none.
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.31
Form of Storage
.311 Medium:
. 312 Phenomenon:
.32
Multiple Copies
· 231 Maximum number
Interleaved carbon:
• 233 Types of master
Multilith:. . . . .
Spirit: . . . . . .
Pressure sensitive:
Heat transfer: . . .
Range of Symbols
Numerals:
Letters:
Special:
Sensing and Recording Systems
.221 Recording system:
printing.
1.
120.
one line at a time.
Drum A (standard supplied)
The 166 Printer is a relatively new printer offered
for use with the 160 and 160- A Computers. It prints
alphameric data from a 64-character set in a 120column line. The peak speed is just under 150 lines
per minute when printing the entire character set.
Two other print drums are easily interchangeable
with this one; a 46- and a 16-character model. The
46-character set drum has the numeric field
engraved twice around the circumference, and a
peak numeric printing speed of 300 lines per minute
is obtainable. Another variation of the print drum
contains four repeated 16-character fields around
the drum, and offers a peak printing speed of 600
lines per minute. The printer is made by Holley
Computer Products Company.
.13
Arrangement of Heads
.321 Serial by:
.322 Parallel by:
.324 Track use
Data:
.325 Row use:
© 1963
continuous fanfold sprocket
punched stationery. or roll
paper.
prin1iIi.g .
Positional Arrangement
1- to 6-part forms.
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
·.
·..
10
o to 9.
none .
6.
. - ,+ $ *
none.
no.
no.
16, in 4 fields around drum.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
line of print at 6 lines per
inch.
120 print positions at 10
per inch.
120 max.
all for data.
6/63
244:082,330
§
CDC
082.
.55
.33
Coding:
as in Data Code Table
No.2.
. 34
Format Compatibility:
none.
•35
Physical Dimensions
.351 Overall width:
• 352 Length:
.353 Maximum margins:
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:...
. 42
COIUlection to System
.56
. 442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access:
. 444 Input-output area
lockout:
.445 Table control: .
. 446 Synchronization:
.6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions
I:
II: .
III:
none.
none.
automatic .
.51
Blocks
. 511 Size of block: .
. 512 Block demarcation
Output:
64-char drum.
46-char drum.
16-char drum.
asynchronous.
synchronous.
IV:
V: •
Speeds
.
each word.
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.
no.
see ready.
no.
no.
yes.
no ..
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes •
.621 Nominal or peak speed
I:
first 60 or 62 words output
from computer in 1 output
operation (120 BCD char).
core storage •
.5
Testable Conditions
.
.62
Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load:
no.
no.
no.
select synchronous or
asynchronous printing.
yes .
Disabled:
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted: •
Hopper empty:
Stacker full:
Ready:
Paper moving:
Drum stationary:
Switched off-line: •
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller: 1.
.432 Restrictions:
none.
. 44
Disable:
Select format:
Select code:
Other: .
no separate controller;
part of printer.
.421 On-line: • . . • . • .1.
.422 Off-line:
Use
Associated equipment
Tape-to-printer:
603 or 163 Tape Unit.
Card reader-toprinter: •••
• 167 Card Reader.
. 43
Control Operations
Status request:
12 in. to 22 in. by ? in.
increments.
no limit except storage •
no restrictioris; forms can
be moved to print any 12inch portion of 17 inch
wide paper.
60 or 62 words .
addresses in instruction.
.52
Input-Output Operations
. 521
.522
. 523
. 524
. 525
• 526
Input: • •
Output:
Stepping:
Skipping:
Marking:
Searching: •
none.
output 1 block •
none.
8-channel format tape.
none •
none.
• 53
Code Translation:
automatic •
. 54
Format Control: .
only as programmed •
lines/minute, if 4
. . 150successive
char on drum
ignored and used for advancing paper.
II, numeric: • • • . • 300 lines/minute.
II, alphameric:
150 lines/minute.
III (numeric only): • • 600 lines/minute.
.622 Important parameters
Skipping speed: • •
5800 lines/ minute
(9.67 msec/line) .
Paper advance time
Single space:
25 msec.
Double space: • •
35 msec.
150 rev/mmute
Drum speed: • • •
(400 msec!rev).
Time to fill buffer:. • 1 to 2 msec .
.623 Overhead: • • . ••
single-point clutch
(synchronous print).
infinite-point clutch
(asynchronous print) •
• 624 Effective speeds, lines per minute.
I, IV:
142.
I, V:. . . . . . .
150.
II,
II,
II,
II,
IV, alphameric:
IV, numeric: . .
V, alphameric: .
V, numeric:
III, IV: . . . .
III, V: • . • .
150.
300.
asynchronous only.
asynchronous only.
480.
600.
See graph at end of section.
• 63
l
6/63
l~O-A
Demands on System:
I AUERBACH I @D
. 1 msec per line.
INPUT-OUTPUT:. 166 PRINTER, MODEL 2
§
244:082.700
082.
.732 Replenishment time:
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
• 71
Adjustments
.72
.73
Adjustment
Method
Comment
Horizontal alignment:
operator
Change char code disc:
Replace print drums:
Change ribbon:
operator
operator
operator
coarse and fine tractor
adjustments.
requires less than 1 minute.
requires less than 1 minute.
requires less than 2 minutes.
• 733 Adjustment time: •
.734 Optimum reloading
period: • . • . .
2 to 4 minutes.
printer needs to be stopped,
but not computer •
5 to 10 minutes •
300 minutes. Basis: 750
Single-spaced pages at 150
lines per minute.
Other Controls
Function
Form Comment
Select off-line output:
Initiate off-line operation:
Step:
Backspace:
switch
switch
switch
switch
selects tape-to-printer.
off-line.
1 line of off-line printing.
backspace tape, off-line.
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled
Storage
Hopper: .
Stacker: .
Capacity
? sets of 6-part forms.
? sets of 6-part forms.
© 1963
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Recording:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
none.
none.
none.
interlock
none.
interlock
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Action
halt, program sense.
wait.
3/63
244:082.800
CDC 160-A
EFFECTIVE SPEED
CDC 166·2 PRINTER
6,000
5,000
4,000
3,000
2,000
1,000
900
800
700
600
500
Printed
Lines
per Minute
~
400
~""-
300
Lr-200
/
'" ~
I-t.. 11-0...
VI
""""'""
using only 60 characters,
synchronou's
foooo.
100
90
80
Vi
FORTR'AN drum, asynchronous, numerals
I
I
64-character drum, asynchronous
FORTR'AN drum, a'synchronous
..........................
-..............
~
---If -----------------
It 64-character drum, .............::
(~ 1-00 ...
16-charactr drum, asynchron,u's
70
60
50
40
30
20
o
1/2
1
2
Interline Space, in Inches
3/63
3
4
5
244:091.100
_'STANDARD
EDP
_
REF()~TS
CDC 160/160-A
Input-Output
CDC 603 Magnetic Tape
INPUT-OUTPUT: CDC 603 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
§
091.
•1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity:
.12
Description
Magnetic Tape Unit.
603.
• 212 Reservoirs
Number:
Form: . .
Capacity: .
.213 Feed drive:
.214 Take-up drive: .
· 22
Sensing and Recording Systems
'. 221 Recording system: .
The CDC Magnetic Tape Unit, which uses pneumatic
capstan drive, is a new addition to the 160-4 system · 222 Sensing system: .
and provides a replacement for the 163 and 164 Mag- · 223 Common system:
netic Tape system units. Tapes of the 163 and 164
units are recorded at low density (200 rows per inch) · 23 Multiple Copies: .
and can be read with the 603 unit set (by manual
· 24 Arrangement of Heads
sWitch) at low density. Tape speed is 75 inches per
second, resulting in data rates of 15,000 and 41,667
Use of station: .
rows per second for recording densities of 200 and
Stacks: . . . . .
556 rows per inch, respectively. Tapes recorded on
the 603 are compatible with the IDM 729 magnetic
Use of station: .
tape units, which can operate at the above densities
Distance: .
(mM 729 Models II, IV, V, and VI). The 603 used a
read-after-write check. Transverse and longitudinal
Stacks: . .
parity are checked at the controller, and a parity
Heads/stack: .
error condition can be checked by the processor.
Method of use: •
The Model 603 Tape Unit is physically identical to
Use of station: .
the CDC Model 606 Tape Unit, but has a tape speed
Distance: .
of 75 inches per second, which provides a data rate
half that of the 606. Tapes recorded by either
Stacks: . .
model are compatible with the other. Detailed inforHeads/stack: .
mation about program control of the 603 is not yet
Method of use: .
available.
The 162-1 controller normally has four tape units
connected to it; up to eight can be connected on specialorder. A feature of the 162-1 is that one tape
unit can be used for tape-to-printer transcription at
the same time the other tape units are available for
on-line use. Alternatively, a card-to-tape transcription may proceed (using the 162-1 controller),
but this operation prevents the use of the other tape
units.
The 160/16o-A previously used the 163 or 164 Magnetic Tape Systems, which produced IDM-compatible
tape at 200 bits per inch only. A number of
160/160-A systems willstill use these tape systems.
CDC systems also used the Model 1608 Control Unit
and IBM 729 II or IV Tape Units; this controller is
now supplied only if available.
. 13
Availability: . .
4 to 6 months.
· 14
First Delivery:
early 1963.
·2
PHYSICAL FORM
· 21
Drive Mechanism
. 211 Drive past the head: .
pneumatic capstan.
© 1963
·3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
· 31
Form of Storage
· 311 Medium: . . .
. 312 Phenomenon: .
· 32
2.
vacuum.
each about 7 feet.
motor.
motor.
magnetic head.
magnetic head.
two heads.
none.
erase.
1.
recording.
O. 4375 inch from erase
head.
1.
7.
1 row at a time.
sensing.
O. 3 inch from recording
head.
1.
7.
1 row at a time.
plastic tape with
magnetizable surface .
magnetization.
Positional Arrangement
.321 Serial by:
1 to N rows at 200 or 556
rows/inch.
7 tracks.
· 322 Parallel by:
· 324 Track use
Data: . . .
6.
Redundancy check: .
1.
Timing: . . . . .
o (self-clocking).
Control signals:
O.
Unused: •
O•
Total: .
7•
• 325 Row use
Data: .
.' 1 to N.
Redundancy check: .
1.
Timing: . . . • .
O.
Control signals:
o (record and segment
marks are optional).
Unused: .
O.
Cap: "
O. 75-inch inter-block gap •
6. O-inch end-of-file mark.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244:091.330
§
CDC 160/160-A
091.
.33
Coding: . . . . . • . • • BCD mode; one tape ~w per
character as in Data Code
Table No.3, even parity.
• 34
Format Compatibility:. IBM BCD and binary codes
at 200 and 556 rows per
inch.
.35
Physical Dimensions
• 351 Overall width:
• 352 Length:. . . . .
•4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:....
. 42
Connection to System
0.50 inch•
2,400 feet per reel.
.525 Marking: . . . • • . . • end-of-file mark, preceded
by an automatic six-inch
gap, followed by a longitudinal parity character
and the regular interblock
gap •
none.
• 526 Searching: . . • .
• 53
Code Translation:
matched codes .
· 54
Format Control: .
none.
• 55
Control Operations
Disable: . . . . . .
Request interrupt: .
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind: " .
Unload: . • • .
Request status:
• Control Unit 162-1.
. 421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:
1.
one of the tape units can op- .56
erate in an off-line mode
with the printer while the
other tapes are used online. A tape unit can be
used in a card-to-tape offline conversion, but this
prevents use of the other
tapes connected on-line to
the 162-1.
• 43
Connection to Device: . up to 4 per 162-1; up to 8
by special order •
. 44
Data Transfer Control
• 441 Size of load: . . . .
.442 Input-output areas:
. 443 Input-output area
access: . . . . .
• 444 Input-output area
lockout: . . • . •
.445 Table control: . .
.446 Synchronization: .
1 to N words, limited by
available core storage.
core storage •
each word.
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
Disabled: . . . • .
Output lock: : . .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: .
End-of-file mark:
End-of-medium marks:
Odd or even parity
selected: . . . . . . •
Transverse or longitudinal parity error: .
PERFORMANCE
· 61
Conditions
I: .
II:
III:
IV:
.62
.5
Testable Conditions
.6
yes, in 160.
none.
automatic.
by rewind and unload.
no .
write 1 or 2 rows per word.
odd/even parity.
yes.
yes .
yes .
yes.
no.
no.
?
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes .
high density (556 char/in. ).
low density (200 char/in. ).
unit on Buffer channel.
unit on Normal channel.
Speeds
Condition
. 511 Size of block:
1 to N words, limited by
available core storage; 1
or 2 rows per word,
selected by program.
. 512 Block demarcation
Input: . . . . • • •
gap on tape or cut-off specified in instruction
address.
Output: . . . . . • . • cut-off specified in
instruction address.
.52
Input-Output Operations
.521
• 522
. 523
.524
Input:. • •
Output: . .
Stepping: .
Skipping:.
3/63
1 block forward.
1 block forward.
backspace 1 record •
forward or backward to
end-of-file mark.
II
· 621 Nominal or peak
speeds: . . . . . 41,667
• 622 Important parameters
Name
Tape speed:
75 ips
Density:
556 char/in.
Start or stop
time:
4 to 8 msec (*)
Full rewind
time:
1. 3 min.
Interblock gap: 0.75 in.
.623 Overhead:
16 msec/block
(***)
• 624 Effective speed,
characters/sec: 41, 667N(N +698)
15,000.
75 ips.
200 char/in .
4 to 8msec (*)
1. 3 min.
0.75 in.
16 msec/block
(***)
15,000N/
(N+240) •
(See Graph)
(*)
Estimate. See 1:010.400.
(***) Estimate. See 1:010.400.
INPUT-OUTPUT: CDC 603 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
§
091.
.63
244:091.630
.73
Demands on System
Component
Condition msec per or Percentage
char
160 Processor: I
0.024
100.
160 Processor: II
0.0667
100.
160-A Core
Storage:
I, III
0.0192
80.
160-A Core
. 0.0192
Storage:
II, III
29.
160-A
Processor:
lor II;
0.024 or
100.
0.0667
IV
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
,71
Adjustments
Adjustment:
Method: .
Comment: .
recording density.
switch.
select high or low density.
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled
Storage:
Capacity: . . • .
• 732 Replenishment time: •
.734 Optimum reloading
period: ••. , . . •
.8
Other Controls
Function
Form
Comment
Unit Number
Selector:
dial
digit 1 to 4.
File protection ring:
plastic ring absence 6f ring inhibits
affixed to
tape writing.
tape reel
Load Point:
button
lowers tape into reservoirs and winds tape
forward to load point.
Unload:
button
removes tape from reservoirs and raises upper portion of head
assembly.
© 1963
4 minutes.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
,72
reel.
2,400 feet.
5, 000, 000 char for 1, 000
char blocks at low density.
11, 300, 000 char for 1, 000
char blocks at high
density.
1. 0 to 1. 5 minutes.
Check or
Interlock
read after write
lateral and longitudinal
parity checks,
Input area overflow: none,
OUtput block size:
none.
Invalid code:
?
Exhausted medium: interlock
Imperfect medium: recording check.
Timing conflicts:
?
check in controller
Parity error:
Transmitting data: include parity bits.
Recording:
Reading:
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA incorporated
Action
program source.
program source,
program source.
program source.
3/63
244:091.800
§
CDC 160/160-A
091.
EFFECTIVE SPEED
CDC 603 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
1,000,000
7
4
2
100,000
7
4
~~rtY
V'\\\G\\ D
2
Effective
Speed,
char/sec.
/'
10,000
"
./
7
~
~~
10-
1
LOW DENSITY
~
/~
~
4
~y
~
2
~
1,000
7
~
~V
~
I
II"
4
2
100
2
10
4
7
2
100
4
7
1,000
Characters Per Block
3/63
2
4
7
10,000
244:092.100
•
_
STANDARD
EDP
REPORl'S
CDC 160-A
Input - Output
CDC 606 Magnetic Tape
INPUT-OUTPUT: CDC 606 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
.§
092.
• 12
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .
.12
Description
CDC 1604-A and a CDC 160-A, control can be
switched from one computer to the other either
manually or by program.
Magnetic Tape Unit.
CDC 606.
The CDC 606 Magnetic Tape Unit, which uses
pneumatic capstan drive, is a new addition to the
160/160-A system and provides a replacement for
the 163 and 164 Magnetic Tape system units. Tapes
of the 163 and 164 units are recorded at low density
(200 rows per inch), and can I;>e read with the 606 unit
set at low density. Data rates of the 606 are 30,000
and 83,400 characters per second for recording densities of 200 and 556 rows per inch, respectively.
Tapes recorded on the 606 are compatible with the
IBM 729 magnetic tape units, which can operate at
the above densities (IBM 729 Models II, IV, V, and
VI). The 606 uses a read-after-write check. Transverse and longitudinal parity are checked at the controller, and a parity error condition can be checked
by the processor. Reading ahd writing can be performed only in a forward direction; searching for Ear,
end of record, file mark; and rewinding can be performed in either direction. The maximum rewind
time for a 2, 400-foot tape is 80 seconds.
The Model 606 Tape Unit is physically identical to
the CDC Model 603 Tape Unit, but has a tape speed
of 150 inches per second, which provides a data rate
twice that of the 603. Tapes recorded by either
model are compatible with the other.
Data is transferred as either one or two characters
per computer word, and selection is under program
control. High density recording is not allowed with
one character per word format, as the data rate
would be high enougIJ. (one word every 12 microseconds) to cause loss of data. During high density operation (one word every 24 microseconds), when running
properly, this tape transfer should be the only transfer
occurring in the system, to avoid loss of data. A tape
transfer using the Auxiliary Memory Unit (Model 169)
is independent and usable for a simultaneous transfer
if the computer does not use the 169 storage during
the transfer.
The 162- 2 controller normally has eight tape units
connected to it. A feature of the 162- 2 is that one
tape unit can be used for tape-to-printer transcription at the same time the other tape units are available for on-line use.. However, a card-to-tape transcription using the 162- 2 controller prevents the use
of the other tape units.
The CDC 606 Magnetic Tape Unit, when controlled
by the CDC 1615 Control Unit, forms a magnetic tape
system which can be connected to one or two computers. If connected to two computers, such as a
© 1963
Description (Contd. )
The 160/160-A Computer previously used the 163 or
164 Magnetic Tape Systems, which produced IBMcompatible tape at 200 bits per inch only. A number
of 160/160-A systems win still use these tape systems. CDC 160/160-A systems also used the Model
1608 Control Unit and IBM 729 II or IV Tape Units;
however, this controller is now supplied only if
available.
.13
Availability: • .
2 to 4 months.
.14
First Delivery:
August, 1962.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
• 211 Drive past the head: .
.212 Reservoirs
Number: •
Form: .•
Capacity: •
.213 Feed drive:
. 214 Take-up drive: •
• 22
pneumatic capstan.
2.
vacuum.
each about 7 feet.
motor.
motor.
Sensing and Recording Systems
• 221 Recording system: •
• 222 Sensing system: .
• 223 Common system:
magnetic head.
magnetic head •
two heads.
.23
Multiple Copies: •
none.
.24
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: •
Stacks: • • • . .
erase.
1.
Use of station: .
Distance: .
recording.
O. 4375 inch from erase
head.
1.
Stacks: .•
Heads/stack: .
Method of use: •
Use of station: •
Distance: . . .
Stacks: • . • • .
Heads/stack: ••
Method of use: .
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
• 31
Form of Storage
• 311 Medium:
. . • . .
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
7.
1 row at a time.
sensing.
O. 3 inch from record head.
1.
7.
1 row at a time.
plastic tape with
magnetizable surface.
5/63
244:092.312
§
CDC 160-A
092.
.312 Phenomenon: .
· 32
magnetization.
· 322 Parallel by:
· 324 Track use
Data: . . .
Redundancy check: •
Timing: • . . . .
Control signals:
Unused: •
Total: •
. 325 Row use
Data: .
Redundancy check: .
Timing: • . . . .
Control signals:
Unused: •
Gap:
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
.511 Size of block:
Positional Arrangement
· 321 Serial by:
.5
1 to N rows at 200 or 556
rows/inch.
7 tracks.
.512 Block demarcation
Input: .
6.
Output:
1.
o (self clocking).
O.
O.
7.
1 to N.
1.
O.
. 52
.521 Input:. . .
1 block forward, with cut-off
available at N words.
. 522 Output: . .
.523 Stepping:.
.526 Searching: . . . .
1 block forward of N words .
1 block forward.
I block backward.
erase 3. 5 inches forward
(to skip defective tape
areas).
to end of file mark in either
direction •
end-of-file mark, preceded
by an automatic 6-inch gap,
followed by a longitudinal
parity character and the
regular interblock gap •
none.
.53
Code Translation:
matched codes.
. . 54
Format Control: •
none .
.55
Control Operations
.524 Skipping:.
. 525 Marking:.
.33
Coding: .
• 34
Format Compatibility:. IBM BCD and binary codes
at 200 and 556 rows per
inch.
• 35
. 351 Overall width:
. 352 Length:. . . .
.4
CONTROLLER
. 41
Identity:
.421 On-line:
.422 Off-line:
. 43
· 44
Connection to Device:
0.50 inch .
2,400 feet ,Per reel.
162-2 Control Unit, used
only with 160/160-A.
Also 1615 Control Unit can
be used, usually for CDC
1604-A. 1615 can be
switched manually or by
program between ~604-A
and 160/160-A computers.
Disable: . . . . .
Request interrupt: .
Select format:
Select code:
Rewind: . . .
Unload: • . . .
Request status:
.56
Testable Conditions
Disabled: • . • . .
Output lock: . . .
Nearly exhausted:
Busy controller: •
End-of-file mark:
End-of-medium mark: .
Odd or even parity
selected: • . . • . . .
Transverse or longitudinal parity error: . .
1.
none.
up to 8 per 162-2 or 1615.
1 tape unit using the 162- 2
can be operating in a tape
to printer mode while the
7 others are available to
the computer.
by rewind and unload .
no.
write 1 or 2 rows per word.
odd/even parity .
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
no.
no.
?
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
Data Transfer ContI;"ol
.441 Size of load: . • . .
. 442 Input-output areas:
· 443 Input-output area
access: . • . . .
• 444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . . .
· 445 Table control: . .
• 446 Synchronization:.
5/63
as in Data Code Table No. 3
for BCD mode.
also binary mode.
Physical Dimensions
gap on tape or instruction
address.
instruction address.
Input-Output Operations
o (record and segment
marks are optional).
O.
O. 75-inch inter-block gap.
6. O-inch end-of-file mark.
1 to N words, limited by
available core storage;
1 or 2 tape char per word,
selected by program.
1 to N words, limited by
available core storage •
core storage.
•6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions
each word.
I: .
none.
none.
automatic.
II:
III:
IV:
high density;
556 char/inch.
low density; 200 char/inch.
1 char per computer word.
2 char per computer word.
INPUT - OUTPUT: CDC 606 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
§ 092.
.62
• 72
Speeds
Other Controls
Function
. 621 Nominal or peak speeds
High density: . • . . • 83, 400 char per second.
Low density: . . • . . 30, 000 char per second.
.622 Important parameters
High density Low density
Density: . . . • . .
556 char/in. 200 char/in.
Time between char:
121J.s, avg.
331J.s, avg.
Tape speed: .••
150 in/sec
150 in/sec.
Start time; msec: •
3.0
3. O.
Stop time; msec: •.
2. 7
2.7.
Time from tape select
till start recording;
msec: • . • . • . • • 3.3
3.3.
Time from tape select
till start reading;
msec: . . . . • •
5.3
5.3.
Full rewind time:
1. 3 minutes
1. 3 minutes.
Interblock gap:..
O. 75 inch
0.75 inch.
.623 Overhead: . • •
8 msec/block 8 msec/block.
.624 Effective speed, char/sec
High density: . . . . • 83,40ON/(N + 698).
Low density: • • . . . 30,000N/(N + 240).
(see graph at end of this section)
. 63
244:092.620
Form
Comment
Unit Number
dial
Selector:
File protection
plastic ring
ring:
affixed to
tape reel
button
Load Point:
Unload:
.73
button
select I of 8 addresses.
absence of ring inhibits
tape writing.
lowers tape into reservoirs and winds tape
.forward to load point.
removes tape from.
reservoirs.
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled
Storage: •
Capacity: • . . .
• 732 Replenishment time:.
.734 Optimum reloading
period: • . . • . • •
reel.
.2,400 feet; for 1,000 char
blocks, 5, 000, 000 at
200 char/inch; 11,300,000
chars at 556 char/inch.
l. 0 to l. 5 minutes •
4 minutes •
Demands on System
Component
160 Processor:
Condition Msec per block Percentage
4.0 + O. 0l2C
4.0 + O. 033C
I
II
160-A Core
Storage:
I, III
not an allowable condition.
O.OlOC, max.
83, max.
0.02OC, max.
60, max.
O. OlOC, max.
30, max.
I, IV
II, III
II, IV
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
.71
Adjustments
Adjustment:
Method: •
Comment: •
100.
100.
recording density.
switch.
selects high or low density,
but can be overridden by
program changes.
© 1963
•8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Recording:
read after write with
lateral parity check
Reading:
lateral and longitudinal
parity checks
lnput area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
none.
Imperfect medium:
'Timing conflict:
Parity enor~ .
by Auerbach Corporation and RNA Incorporated
none.
all codes accepted.
reflective spot on tape
Action
indicator, alarm
and program
sense.
indicator, alarm
and program
sense.
halts tape: programmed sense.
none.
none.
check in controller
available to program
depends on
program.
5/63
244:092.800
§
CDC 160.A
092.
EFFECTIVE SPEED
CDC 606 MAGNETIC T'APE UNIT
1,000,000
7
4
-41
2
100,000
7
.,'fI"
4
Effective Speed:
Characters per 2
Second
~
10,000
7
,..
4
2
1,000
,..,
/
I-'
';I"
~
---
...HIGH DENSITY
~LOW
DENSIh
"",.. I"'"
V
~
~
V
V
7
4
2
100
2
10
4
7
2
100
4
7
1,000
Characters per Block
5/63
2
4
7
10,000
244: 101.100
CDC 160/160-A
Input-Output
161 Typewriter
INPUT-OUTPUT: 161 TYPEWRITER
§
101.
.25
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: . .
• 12
Description
Typewriter.
161.
The 161 Typewriter is a modified IBM electric typewriter which is mounted on a stand, separate from
the processor. Upper and lower case shift codes are
.3
provided, and both cases can be printed. The typewriter is not usable off-line, but can be connected to
either the Normal or the Buffer channel of the 160-A. .31
Range of SymboLS
Numerals:
Letters: .
Special:
Alternatives:
FORTRAN set:
Req. COBOL set:
Total: .
EXTERNAL STORAGE
Form of Stora~
.13
.311 Medium:
The 161 either types output data or receives input
data, performing both operations. under program control. Input provides by-product hard copy. Input is . 312 Phenomenon:
terminated by carriage return, manual keying by the
.32 Positional Arrangemen~
operator, or upon filling a specified core storage
area. Output carriage returns must be programmed.
.321 Serial by:
.324 Track use
Several status conditions of tile typewriter may be
Data:
sensed (see Paragraph .56). No parity checking is
.325 Row use:
performed on data transfers, and invalid codes are
not detected.
.33 Coding:
Availabilit~:
4 months.
. 14
First
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
Deliver~:
.
. 211 Drive past the head:
. 212 Reservoirs: .
. 22
.34
.35
friction drive.
none.
.223 Common system:
· engraved hammers.
· typewriter keyboard for
manual input.
· no.
. 231 Maximum number
Interleaved carbon: . · depends on stationery .
. 233 Types of master
Multilith: . . . . . yes.
Spirit:. . . . . . yes.
. 24
Ph~sical
85 print positions.
all for data.
as in Data Code Table
No.5.
Dimensions
.351 Overall width:
.352 Length:
.353 Maximum margins:
.4
CONTROLLER
. 41
Identity: .
.42
Connection to
.43
character at 10 per inch.
none .
8.5 inches .
no limit .
no limits .
part of 160/160-A Processor .
S~stem
.421 On-line: .
.422 Off-line:.
Multiple Copies
continuous fanfold stationery .
printing.
Format Com2atibilit~:
SenSing and Recording Systems
.221 Recording system:
. 222 SenSing system;
. 23
1960 .
0-9.
10
52
A - Z (U .C. & L.C.).
26.
none.
yes.
no.
88, plus 6 control codes not
used as data.
1.
not usable off-line .
Connection to Device
.431 Devices per controller:
.432 Restrictions:
2.
none .
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:
· printing.
1.
1.
1 character at a time.
Use of station:
Stacks:
Heads/stack: .
Method of use:
keyboard input.
1.
44 keys.
1 character at a time.
© 1963
.44
Data Transfer Control
.441 Size of load: . . .
. 442 Input-output areas:
.443 Input-output area
access:
.444 Input-output area
lockout:
by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated
under program control; no
limit .
core storage.
each word.
yes, in 160.
3/63
244: 101.445
§
CDC 160/160-A
101.
.624 Effective speeds:
. 445 Table control:
. 446 Synchronization:
no.
automatic.
.63
.5
PROGRAM F ACILITIES AVAILABLE
.51
Blocks
.511 Size of block:
.512 Block demarcation: .
.52
InEut-Ou~ut
. address set by instruction.
. 524 Skipping:
.525 Marking:
.52Q Searching:
input 1 block into core
storage.
output 1 block from core
storage.
step 1 or 2 lines at end of
printed line; set by
operator.
none.
none.
none.
.53
Code Translation:
automatic.
.54
Format Control:
set by program.
. 55
Control Operations: .
none.
.56
Testable Conditions:
.522 Output:
.523 Stepping:
.6
PERFORMANCE
.61
Conditions:
. 62
SEeeds
.621 Nominal or peak
speed:
3/63
processor.
100, approx.
100.
100, on Normal channel.
O. 01, on Buffer channel.
.7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
• 71
Adjustments: .
.72
Other Controls
.73
typewriter ready.
typewriter power off.
typewriter not in computer
status.
input character ready.
character being typed.
Demands on System
Component: . .
Msec/char: . . .
Percentage
160 Processor: .
160-A Processor:
same as load size; see. 441
above.
Operations
.521 Input:
same as peak speeds, less
allowance for carriage returns .
typical typewriter
adjustments.
Function
Form
Comment
Places unit under
computer control
switch
includes momentary
Clear posi tion .
Provides termination signal after
input operation
switch
terminates in 3 ways:
after next carriage
return.
immediately.
only as programmed
(by storage address) .
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volumes handled: • . • depends on feed facilities.
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
none.
Parity:
Reading:
Input area overflow:
10 char/sec for output;
manual typing speed for
input.
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflict:
Dispatch of data:
Check or
Interlock
none.
none.
check on last word
address
any size possible .
none.
none.
none.
interlock
attach parity bit.
Action
?
wait.
244: 102.100
CDC 160/160-A
Input-Output
1610-A Control Unit
INPUT-OUTPUT: 1610-A CONTROL UNIT
§
102.
.12
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: . . . . . . . . Control Unit.
161O-A.
. 12
Description (Contd.)
In the output mode it can operate anyone of the
following:
III
Description
II
The CDC 161O-A Control Unit can connect a group of.
mM peripheral units to either the CDC 1604, 1604-A,
160, or 160-A computers. In the case where a 1604
or 1604-A is operating in conjunction with a CDC 160
or 160-A, the CDC 1610-A and its associated units
can be switched manually, but not by program, from
one computer to the other.
o mM 533 Card Read Punch, used as a card reader
at 200 cards per minute.
© 1963
mM 407 Accounting Machine, used as a line
printer at 150 lines per minute.
o mM 523 Gang Summary Punch, used as a card
punch at 100 cards per minute.
The printer, either punch, and either card reader
can be physically connected at one time, and each
may be separately addressed. The mM 088 and 407
units may be used in their normal off-line manner.
No gang or summary punching is available with
either the 523 or 533. On-line control of the 088,
407 and 523 by the computer requires modification of
the control panels so that each unit is wired in the
CALCULATE ON state (the 533 is wired directly and
has no provision for control panel modifications).
In the input mode the 1610-A can operate either one
of the following:
o mM 088 High Speed Collator, used as a card
reader. Either one or both independent card feeds
can each operate at 650 cards per minute; or one
feed utilizing a second read station can operate at
650 cards per minute. The latter is the usual
mode of operation.
mM 533 Card Read Punch, used as a card punch at
100 cards per minute •
.13
Availability:...... 2 months.
. 14
First Delivery:. . . . . 1961.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244: 111. 100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
CDC 160-A
REPORTS
Simultaneous Operations
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
§
.3
Ill.
.1
SPECIAL UNITS
.11
Identity:
A: . . . . . . . . • . input or output on Normal
Channel (cards, magnetic
tape. paper tape).
B: • • • • • • • • • • input or output on buffered
channel (cards. magnetic
tape).
C: .
print a line.
PI: •
compute. or compute while
doing floating point
operations using subroutines and 168. 2 •
P2:
process fixed point operands
in 168-1.
168 Arithmetic Unit, Model
1 (fixed point).
168 Arithmetic Unit, Model
2.
169 Auxilary Memory Unit
with its own buffer
channel.
.12
CLASSES OF OPERATIONS
Description
The basic 160-A system is capable of simultaneous
operations, using the Buffer channel for a data
transfer and the processor for either program
execution or data transfer on the Normal channel.
The Buffer operation must be initiated before the
processor can proceed.
.4
The 166-2 Buffered Line Printer provides simultaneous printing facilities. The 168-1 and 168-2
Arithmetic Units provide independent computation
facilities. Very little free tirrie is available with the
168-1 except during multiply-divide operations.
Virtually no time is available for processing when
using the 168- 2 Arithmetic Unit, because the. processor is processing exponent values while the
Model 168-2 unit is doing arithmetic.
A completely independent channel exists for
transferring a block of data using the 169 Auxiliary
Memory Unit (core storage).
RULES
(Note that the time required to do one p2 operation
is much shorter than input-output times.)
Condition I
a + b + c + pI + p2 = at most 4.
a+ pI
=1.
= at most 1.
b
= at most 1.
c
p2
= at most 1.
Condition II
•2
CONFIGURATION CONDITIONS
I:
II:
without 169 Auxiliary
Memory Unit.
with 169 Auxiliary Memory
Unit.
© 1963
a + b + c + pI + p2 = at most 5.
= 1.
a+ pI
= at most 2.
b
= at most 1.
c
= at most 1.
p2
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incarparated
3/63
244: 121.101
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
CDC 160-A
REPORTS
Instruction list
INSTRUCTION LIST
INSTRUCTION
F
E
01
01
12
13
MUT
MUH
06
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
ee
ee
00
ee
00
ee
00
ee
ADN
ADD
ADM
ADI
ADC
ADF
ADS
ADB
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
07
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
ee
ee
00
ee
00
ee
00
ee
SBN
SBD
SBM
SBI
SBC
SBF
SBS
SBB
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
50
51
51
52
52
53
53
ee
00
ee
00
ee
00
ee
XXXX
RAD
RAM
RAI
RAC
RAF
RAS
RAB
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
54
55
55
56
56
57
57
ee
00
ee
00
ee
00
ee
YYYY
AOD
AOM
AOI
AOC
(E) + 1 -.A; then (A) _E.
(m) + I_A; then (A) ___ m.
«E» +-1 - A; then (A) (E).
G + 1 --+ A; then (A)-. G.
(P +E) + l--+A; then (A)_ P +E.
«0)7777) + 1 _ A; then (A) _ (0)7777
(p - E) + 1 - A; then (A) _ P - E.
02
10
12
12
13
13
ee
ee
00
ee
00
ee
00
ee
03
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
ee
ee
00
ee
00
ee
00
ee
60
ee
11
11
G
OPERATION
Mnemonic
Opcode
yyyy
XXXX
YYYY
XXXX
yyyy
XXXX
AOF
AOS
AOB
yyyy
XXXX
yyyy
XXXX
LPN
LPD
LPM
LPI
LPC
LPF
LPS
LPB
Arithmetic
10 (A) -.A.
100 (A) --+A.
(A)+E _A.
+ (E) --+ A.
+ (m) --+A. m =YYYY.
+ «E» -..A.
+G --.A.
+ (p + E) --+ A. P = present contents of instruction counter.
+ «0)7777)-. A.
+ (p - E)-.A.
-
E --.A.
(E) --+ A.
(m) ___ A.
«E» -.A.
G --.A.
(p + E)---+ A.
«O}7777)---+A.
(p - E) _A.
+ (E) --. A; then (A) _
+ (m) _ A; then
E.
(A) --. m.
+ «E» - A; then (A) - . (E).
+ G --. A; then (A) ---+ G.
+ (p + E) _ A; then (A) ---t> P + E.
+ «0)7777) - . A; then (A) _ (0)7777.
+ (p - E) - . A; then (A) --+P - E.
(X)c, 'LOGICAL
(A) "LOGICAL
(A) "LOGICAL
(A) "LOGICAL
(A) "LOGICAL
(A) "LOGICAL
(A) "LOGICAL
(A) "LOGICAL
AND"
AND"
AND"
AND"
AND"
AND"
AND"
AND"
"EXCLUSIVE
"EXCLUSIVE
"EXCLUSIVE
"EXCLUSIVE
"EXCLUSIVE
"EXCLUSIVE
"EXCLUSIVE
"EXCLUSIVE
SCN
SCD
SCM
SCI
SCC
SCF
SCS
SCB
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(i\)
ZJF
(P) + E _
© 1963
E ___ A.
(E) - . A.
(m)_A.
«E»--+A.
G _A.
(P +E) -.A.
«0)7777) _ A.
(p - E) --+ A.
OR"
OR"
OR"
OR"
OR"
OR"
OR"
OR"
E _ A.
(E)-.A.
(m) - . A.
«E» _A.
G _A.
(p + E) _ A.
«0)7777) _ A.
(p - E) --. A.
P if (A) = 0000; otherwise continue.
by Auerbach Carparatian and DNA Incarparated
3/63
244:121 .. 102
§
CDC 160-A
INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)
121.
INSTRUCTION
OPERATION
Mnemonic
Opcode
F
E
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
ee
ee
ee
ee
ee
ee
ee
70
71
71
ee
00
ee
01
01
PTA
(P)---. A.
04
ee
ee
00
ee
00
ee
00
ee
yyyy
LDN
LDD
LDM
LDI
XXXX
LDC
E ....... A.
(E)--.A.
(m) ....... A.
«E» - - A.
G-A.
(p +E) ___ A.
«0)7777) -+A.
(p - E) ---+ A.
G
NZF
PJF
NJF
ZIB
NZB
PIB
NIB
yyyy
JPI
JPR
1FI
(p~c (Contd. )
(P)
(P)
(P)
(P)
(P)
(P)
+ E __ P if
+ E ..... P if
+ E --. P if
- E _ P if
- E - P if
- E ---+ P if
- E - P if
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
of 0000; otherwise continue.
> 0; otherwise continue.
< 0; otherwise continue.
= 0000; otherwise continue.
of 0000; otherwise continue.
> 0; otherwise continue.
< 0; otherwise continue.
(E)-+P.
(P) + 2--. (r)m.
M+l ..... P.
«P) +E) -Po
Data Transfers
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
LDF
LDS
LDB
05
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
ee
ee
00
ee
00
ee
00
40
41
41
42
42
43
43
ee
00
ee
00
ee
00
ee
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
00
05
06
07
30
5e
6e
76
ee
HWI
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
03
10
LSI
LS2
LS3
LS6
RSI
RS2
44
45
45
ee
00
ee
3/63
yyyy
XXXX
ee
yyyy
XXXX
yyyy
yyyy
yyyy
11
14
15
yyyy
E ....... A.
or =l's complement of the operand. )
LCN
LCD
LCM
LCI
LCC
LCF
LCS
LCB
(E")-+A.
(m)---+A.
A.
G---+A.
(P+E) ....... A.
«0)7777) ....... A.
""(P'"=E") - A.
STD
STM
STI
STC
STF
STS
STB
(A)-+E.
(A)-+m.
(A) __ (E).
(A)-+ G.
(A)--- P + E.
(A)-+ (0)7777.
(A)_ P - E.
BLS
ATE
ATX
ETA
CTA
STP
STE
Set an area of core storage to value present in Accumulator.
Transfer contents of Accumulator to Buffer Entrance Register (BER).
Transfer contents of Accumulator to Buffer Exit Register (BXR).
Transfer contents of BER to Accumulator.
Transfer contents of the 4 bank controls to Accumulator.
Store contents of Program Counter (P) to location (d)005e.
Transfer contents of BER to location (d)006e, and transfer contents of
Accumulator to BER.
Transfer E portion of contents of Accumulator to E portion of word in indirect
bank whose address is at (d)OOee.
SRD
SRM
SRI
mm .......
Shifting
Circular
Circular
Circular
Circular
Circular
Circular
shift
shift
shift
shift
shift
shift
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
(A)
left 1 bit position.
left 2 bit positions.
left 3 bit positions.
left 6 bit positions.
right 1 bit position.
right 2 bit positions.
(E)-- A; left circular shift 1 position; (A)-.E.
(m) --. A; left circular shift 1 position; (A) ....... m.
«E» - A; left circular shift 1 position; (A) - (E).
INSTRUCTION LIST
§
244:121.103
INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)
121.
INSTRUCTION
G
OPERATION
Mnemonic
Opcode
F
E
47
46
46
47
00
00
ee
ee
01
01
72
04
20
00
yyyy
73
72
73
00
ee
ee
yyyy
yyyy
yyyy
INP
OUT
74
76
76
75
ee
00
77
00
XXXX
OTN
INA
OTA
EXC
75
ee
EXF
00
Oe
NOP
00
77
77
77
77
77
00
00
00
00
00
77
Oe
eO
ee
Ie
2e
3e
ERR
HLT
HLT
SLS
SLJ
SJS
SRJ
SIC
IRJ
00
00
4e
5e
SDC
DRJ
00
00
6e
7e
SID
ACJ
01
4e
SBU
Shifting (Contd. )
XXXX
SRS
SRC
SRF
SRB
yyyy
yyyy
CBC
CIL
mI
mo
--aoYJ777) ---. A; left circular shift 1 position; (A) ~ (0)7777.
Operand ~ A; left circular shift 1 position; (A) ~ G.
Operand ---. A; left circular shift 1 position; (A) - . P + E.
Operand ~ A; left circular shift 1 position; (A) ~ P - E.
Input-Output
Stop buffer data transfer. Generate "no buffer complete" interrupt.
Clear the interrupt lockout.
Initiates buffer channel input-output operation. Generate interrupt 20 when
buffer operation complete. Go to YYYY if buffer is busy.
Buffer output operation. See IBI.
Normal channel input operation. Block of data transferred to indirect bank.
Normal channel output operation. Block of data transferred from indirect
bank.
Output one word (OOee) to selected device using normal cnannel.
Input 1 word to Accumulator from selected device, using normal channel.
Output 1 word from Accumulator to selected device, using normal channel.
Transmit External Function (XXXX) to external devices to select and instruct
device.
Transmit External Function to external device. Function is found ee
locations forward of instruction.
Miscellaneous
Proceed to next instruction.
Computer stops; console ERR alarm; use RUN switch to continue.
Computer stops; console alarm; use RUN switch to continue.
Same as 7700.
Stop if e sense switch is set.
Jump to YYYY if e jump switch is set.
Test e jump switch and then e sense switch.
Set relative bank control to e and jump to address present in Accumulator.
Set indirect bank control to e.
Set indirect and relative bank controls to e and jump to address present in
Accumulator.
Set direct bank control.
Set direct and relative bank controls to e and jump to address present in
Accumulator.
Set indirect and direct bank controls to e.
Set direct, indirect, and relative bank controls to e and jump to address
present in Accumulator.
.
Set buffer bank control to e.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
coo
.... ....
w
CONTROL DATA
0
8
CORPORI\TION
PAGE NO.
PAPER TAPE CORRECTION ROUTINE
!"""
2
::tJ"U
O::tJ
cO
-1Ci)
Z ::tJ
("t"1:t>
s::
Z
0
~
0
....
~
~
d'
t;
p.
g
@
0
....
po
~
'"
c:
'0
(1)
t;
po
""<
c-"
S
'0
C
n
(1)
::r
0
0
t;
t;
n
o
-no
a
g.
"c
"c..
'"Z
>
.. •
(1)
~
V>
"U
m
n
~
m
z
::s
0
t;
0
~
>V>
.......
ffi
V>
p.
V>
0
>-
'('
•
,
Z
G)
0
~
0
:;-
n
0
C
~>
~
>-
I
•
ZJF
.3
• •
'"
onn
v>OC
~2:n
....... ::1
0'" 0-
w
.......
0W
v>v>c
>-.....
v>1II>• n
>-3·
III
::I
N
-
~
"""
~
C
C
~
t-.)
0\
c.:>
.......
c.:>
CONTROL DATA
C'l
8
CO!-?F-'OHA IIUN
PAGE NO.
DATE
PROGRAMMER
:::0 "tl
0:::0
CO
-lG)
-:::0
2:
ITI
»
s:
~
N
:t
.....
~
N
C)
C)
Z
G)
~
ttl
~
e:
I"T"I
::0
~
::I:
I~I
~
G)
ITI
r"I
C
r"I
.....
0C)
:i>
244:132.100
•
STANDARD
II
REPORTS
EDP
CDC 160-A
Coding Specimen
FORTRAN-A
CODING SPECIMEN: FORTRAN-A
§
•1
132.
•1
CODING SPECIMEN
CODING SPECIMEN (Contd. )
C
100 FORMAT (I4/(F5.1,Fll.8»
101 FORMAT (F12.3/2F12.3/2F12.3/F12.3)
102 FORMAT (3F12.3)
DIMENSION X(lO),Z(lO)
READIOO, N, (X(I),Z(I), I=l,N)
READIOl, TN2, CHIl,CHI2,A,B,ZO
XBAR=O
ZBAR=O
DO 1 I=l,N
XBAR=XBAR+X(I)/N
1
ZBAR=ZBAR+Z(I)/N
C
ESTIMATE REGRESSION COEFFICIENTS AND
VARIANCE
BETA=O
ALPHA=O
TEMP =0
DO 2 I=l,N
6
C
C
7
BETA=(X(I)-XBAR)'(Z(I)~ZBAR)+BETA
2
TEMP=TEMP+(Z(I)-ZBAR) "2
BETA=BETA/TEMP
C
ALPHA=Y~AR-BETA'ZBAR
3
.C
4
5
VAR=O
DO 3 I=l,N
VAR=VAR+(X(I) -ALPHA-BETA' Z(I» "2/N
PUNCH 102 , ALPHA, BETA, VAR
CONFIDENCE INTERVAL FOR ALPHA
TEMP =0
TEMP 1=0
DO 4 I=l,N
TEMP=TEMP+Z(I) , '2
TEMPl=TEMPl+(X(I)-ALPHA-BETA'Z(I», '2
TEMP 1=TEMP I' TEMP
TEMP=O
DO 5 I=l,N
TEMP=TEMP+N'(N-2) '(Z(I)-ZBAR) "2
TEMP=SQRTF (TEMP/TEMP 1)
TEMP2=(TN2+ALPHA'TEMP)/TEMP
TEMPl=(-TN2+ALPHA'TEMP)/TEMP
PUNCH102, TEMPI, TEMP2
© 1963
8
CONFIDENCE INTERVAL FOR BETA
TEMP 1=0
TEMP2=0
DO 6 I=l,N
TEMPl=TEMPl+(X(I)-ALPHA-BETA'Z(I», '2
TEMP2=TEMP2+(N-2) '(Z(I)-ZBAR) "2
TEMP=SQRTF(TEMPl/TEMP2)
TEMPl=(-TN2+BETA'TEMP)/TEMP
TEMP2=(TN2+BETA'TEMP)/TEMP
PUNCHI02, TEMPl,TEMP2
CONFIDENCE INTERVAL FOR VAR
TEMP 1= (N 'VAR) /CHI2
TEMP2=(N'VAR)/CHIl
PUNCHI02,TEMPl,TEMP2
TEMP ",0
COMPUTE F FOR ALPHA=A AND BETA=B
DO 7 I=l,N
TEMP=TEMP+(Z(I) "2) '(BETA-B)
TEMPl=(N'(ALPHA-A)+2'N'ZBAR'(ALPHA-A),
l(BETA-B)+TEMP)/(N'VAR)
PUNCH 102 , TEMPI
PREDICTION INTERVAL FOR X CORRESPONDING TO Z
TEMP=O
DO 8 I=l,N
TEMP=TEMP+(Z(I)-ZBAR)' '2
TEMP=TN2 'VAR' SQRTF «N / (N-2» , «N+l) /N
1+(ZO-ZBAR)"2/TEMP»
TEMPl=ALPHA+BETA'ZO-TEMP
TEMP2=ALPHA+BETA'ZO+TEMP
PUNCHI02, TEMPI, TEMP2
STOP 7707
END
END
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244: 132.200
§
CDC 160-A
132.
•2
CODING SHEET
160
FORTRAN CODING FORM
PROGRAM
ROUTINE
~ STATE- ~f-
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _....:F.:.OR::.:T::.:RA::.:N,---=-,ST::.:AT:..:E.:.":::EN:..:.T_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-j
SERIAL.
~ MENT ~.
NO.
••••
3/63
NUMBER
• • ALPHA 0
I
NAME
PAGE
DATE
• • • • ,0
~"'I
I I " I ' " 11.1 .. "
.......................
00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...
244:134.100
.STAHDAR~
EDP
•
CDC 160-A
REIORTS
Coding Specimen
INTERFOR
CODING SPECIMEN: INTERFOR
§
134 .
.1
CODING SPECIMEN - INTERFOR
A.
IDENTIFICATION
TITLE:
B.
INTERFOR Subroutine - Sine Cosine
PURPOSE
Given X, compute the Sin X or Cos X (where X is in radians)
This isa relocatable program on Flexowriter tape with entry address of Sin X at 0000/ and Cos X
at 0045/. Basic entry address is at 0033/. Accuracy is within 1 or 2 in the ninth decimal place.
smx cosx
INTERFOR-2
0000
15001177 entrance to sin x subroutine
32000032/
200000]6/
300~0]5/
20000011/
50000000
]20000]4/
15400033/
320000]6/
1500005] /
entrance to basic to
~uate
series
go to check 11m!t of one
004000]1/
00000025/
00410000
00000000
17752421
31403333
1500 1m
5100004]/
exit to basic language
20564061
0404 4056
2016 4220
20144214
0400 4014
4015 4016
2200 4011
4012 1001
3200
1m
5000 0000
LOOP
3060 1177
TABlE
51000033/
exit to basic language
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
244:134;200
CDC 160·A
§ 134 •
•1
CODING SPECIMEN· INTERFOR (Conn!.)
I
20560701
40566205
2061 4056
2341 7051
2202 7057
0040/0000
75007777
30000050/
cos x entrance
75400 000/
00000000
I
1300 0022/
7500 0000/
JII J;
.2
CODING SPECIMEN - INTERFOR FLAP SYMBOliC INPUT
The following example demonstrates how a sequence of instructions in a symbolic
program appears on the listable output. The coding represents a routine that uses
programmable input!output subroutines.
EXAMPLE:
Symbolic Input
Loc
QJ.l
2000
ORG
START
EN!
1
0
LOAD
SLJ
4
1224
STA
1
BLOCK
ISK
1
9D
SLJ
0
LOAD
SLS
0
OUT
BLOCK
EQU
OUT
ENI
1
0
DUMP
LDA
1
BLOCK
SLJ
4
1236
ISK
1
4D
3000
SLJ
0
DUMP
SLS
0
START
END
4/63
M
B
START
244:135.100
CDC 160-A
Coding Specimen
SICOM
CODING SPECIMEN: SICOM
§ 135 .
.1
CODING SPECIMEN
Develop a subroutine to obtain Y with a given X where
Y=
X+A,
X2 - B
A=3.1416,
B=8.765,
and X is stored in location 0050 within the main program.
MAIN PROGRAM
SUBROUTINE
LOC
CODE
NOTES
LOC
CODE
NOTES
0000
0220050
Load X
0200
0000008
Set Non-Trace
0001
0700200
Jump to SR at 0200
0201
0000006
Set Relative Mode
0002
040YOOO
Print Y
0202
0300010
Add X + A
0203
0770013
Store X + A
0204
0310008
Subtract X - A (to restore X)
0205
025YOOO
Multiply X· X = X2
0206
0310008
Subtract X2 - B
0207
0230009
Inverse Divide, Y = X + A
X2 - B
(Y in A. R.)
0208
0000007
Set Absolute Mode
0209
0000009
Reset Trace
0210
0000070
Return to 0002
0212
= 3.1416
0214=8.765
0216 = Storage of X + A
© 1963
by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
244: 136.100
CDC 160.A
Coding 'Speclmen
AUTOCOMM
CODING SPECIMEN: AUTOCOMM
§
•1
136 •
CODING SPECIMEN
- - - _ •..
~
= ALPHA
0
IAlI
0 = ZERO
-
=MINUS
..
__ __. .
=HYPHEN
CODING FORM
I
PAGENO.~
J I I I O A TPROGRAM
E
PROGRAMMER
V/////-
NAME
It:>~
1 LEVEL
LENGTH
~RINT
I I
DESIGNATOR
::iIAIt.Mt.1
COMMENTS
I I
IJIITPIIT
ROCRO STmRE
,I F ERRmR Gm TA
smp I
IF FNn
~ARn
r.1J
Tm
FIJ.I
tim Tm NFXT
IFa.
~EAO MASTER
&Tmp6
WRITE IlIITNST ,STIJP7
EaF
FaT
r.d Till ...
~ liCK NASTFR
lEaF
MARK aUTMST
~ OI~K dllTNST
IEaT
J0a
IHLT
,END IilF
ISTmPI
IHLT
,CARn RFAn .AA!JA
ISTIIlP2
IHIT
,RFAn ... ST.A .AMA
ISTdP~
1,,1 T
,WOtJINr.
ISTIiIP4
IHLT
,WR I TE ERRIJR IlIITNST IC!Jpv\
ISTdP5
IHLT
,AR I TH ERRIIR 7RIlAnn
ISTap6
,HLT
,RFAn FRAIlIR 1.1 NAL CIIlPvl
ISTIlIP7
IHLT
I DATA
isTIlRE
'I
IsERVI
102
«nil. NCO
,WRITE ERRIoIR (FINAL CdPvl
II
,CARn •
110
I. F!JA IIPnn.
.eIJIIIMNS I-R
102
liNK
102
.eIlIIIMNS 11-16
In?
I:;RADI
102
.cIlLUMNS 21-22
102
II = ALPHA
0
0 =ZERO
-
©
=MINUS
..
=HYPHEN
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
244:136.101
CDC 160-A
l36 .
§
.1
CODING SPECIMEN (Contd.)
IAl I u\.uNlM
NAME
IPA'!'l19lJ!
CODING FORM
IIl1r
I
PAGE NO.
--L-.
PROGRAM
PROGRAMMER
V///.-0
' " :IYle
LENGTH
LEVEL
11
102
DESIGNATOR
P2
COMMENTS
11
,CGlLUMNS 3 I - 3 6
02
,CIllLUMNS 41-46
MaSI
02
MASTER
FI
lOO
NAME
102
30
1ST
H
10
'IRST
kJ~
,lQ
MI DOLE
kl3
'10
INK
02
SERVN0
)2
PREF IX
03
BIllDY
n
IIFFIX
02
PAYC00E
02
GRADE
03
IDFN
RDFN
)2
ISERV2
~o
r.HAR
IJIllB COIDE
..P?
MASTER
I~oo
ItlllTMST
ES
,"
l3
M0NPAY
F ILE RECARD-~ F
,SERV 1CE NUMBER
"
MillS
.D-
W
0'>
()
AUTOCOMM CODING FORM
CONTROL DATA
:.JI~":.I[.lI~'~"'.Ir.·
18
PAGE NO.
DATE
PROGRAM
Z
0
PROGRAMMER
~
PROCEDURE STATEMENT
NAME
LENGTH
LEVEL
81
110
131
DESIGNATOR
tIl
COMMENTS
721
115
~
n
0
0
Z
"
V>
"tI
m
n
i'
m
..z
>c:::
a
n
0
~
~
©
~
W
c:
"ag
:J"
n
o
-0o
o·~
:J
Q
:J
a.
co
Z
>
if
o
-0o
a
it
a.
!3 =
FORM 383
ALPHA 0
0= ZERO
- = MINUS
,,= HYPHEN
tV
"'~"
~
-tt
0'>
W
~
o
;....
o
244:141.100
CDC 16G/160·A
Data Code Table
Card Code
DATA CODE TABLE NO.1
§
141.
•1
USE OF CODE: • • • card input- output.
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
• 21
Character Size:. • • • 1 column per character .
• 23
Character Codes
OVERPUNCH
UNDERPUNCH
None
None
BLANK
12
11
+
I(MINUS)I
0
12
11
0
0
1
1
A
J
1
2
2
B
K
S
3
3
C
L
T
4
4
D
M
U
5
5
E
N
V
6
6
F
0
W
7
7
G
P
X
8
8
H
Q
y
9
9
I
R
Z
$
.
*
(
8-2
8-3
8-4
=
-
(DASH)
)
8-5
8-6
8-7
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation ond BNA Incorporated
3/63
244: 142.1 00
_STANDARD
_EDP
."
CDC 160/160-A
Data Code Table
Printer Code
REPCRTS
DATA CODE TABLE NO.2
§
142.
.22
•.
.221 More significant
pattern:
.222 Less significant
pattern:
.1
USE OF CODE:
printer.
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
.21
Character Size: • . • 2 octal digits (6 bits) per
character.
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
Notes:
Character Structure
.23
1 octal digit (0 to 7).
1 octal digit (0 to 7).
Character Codes
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0
1
0
:
8
1
1
2
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
BLANK
Y
-
Q
+
H
9
I
z
J
A
I
0
S
]
K
<
R
NOTE
2
B
C
3
3
=
T
,
L
NOTE
3
4
4
~
U
(
M
*
D
)
5
5
-<
V
--+
N
t
E
~
6
6
I
W
-
0
~
F
?
7
7
G
;
[
X
NOTE
1
P
>
1 A or ....
2v or%
3l or $
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244: 143.1 00
.51""'0
II
EDP
CDC 160l160-A
REroRTS
Data Cade Table
BCD
DATA CODE TABLE NO.3
§
143.
.22
.221 More significant
pattern:
.222 Less significant
pattern:
BCD representation.
.1
USE OF CODE:
.2
STRUcrURE OF CODE
• 21
Character Size: •
2 octal digits (6 bits) per
character.
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
.23
1 octal digit (0 to 7).
1 octal digit (0 to 7).
Character Codes
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0
0
1
Character Structure
1
2
2
3
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BLANK
Y
(MINUS)
Q
+
H
9
/
z
J
R
A
I
B
+
K
-
0
S
=
T
,
L
$
C
U
(
M
*
D
-
(MINUS)
4
4
5
5
V
N
E
6
6
W
0
F
7
7
X
P
G
(DASH)
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
)
3/63
244:144.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
REPORTS
CDC 160/160-A
Data Code Table
Binary
DATA CODE TABLE NO .. 4
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
2
3
4
5
0
1
0
0
8
+
H
(MINUS)
Q
1
1
9
A
I
J
R
2
:2
3
3
=
(DASH)
-
6
BLANK
/
Y
z
B
K
C
L
$
T
.,
M
*
U
(
D
)
S
4
4
5
5
E
N
V
6
6
F
0
W
7
7
G
P
X
© 1963
7
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incarparated
3/63
244:145.100
CDC 160/160·A
Doto Code TobIe
Typewriter Code
DATA CODE TABLE NO.5
§
145.
Character Structure
.22
.221 More significant
pattern:
.222 Less significant
pattern:
Typewriter input- output.
•1
USE OF CODE:
.2
STRUcrURE OF CODE
. 21
Character Size: •
2 octal digits (6 bits) per
character.
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
1 octal digit (0 to 7).
Character Codes
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
2
1
0
0
e
4
3
E
a
A
.,
z
Z
w
W
TAB
r
R
d
D
j
J
-
a
g
G
b
B
8
!
SPACE
i
I
s
S
u
u
2
=
3
0
T
5
h
H
P
P
Y y
q
Q
6
n
N
c
C
f
F
k
K
7
m M
v
V
x
X
9
(
/
?
&
2 @
$
6
¢
3 #
1
*
BS
4
"
I
7
7
:
;
L
t
6
5
1
1
4
.23
1 octal digit (0 to 7).
CR
+
0
UC
)
0
5
%
LC
Note: Both upper and lower case symbols shown in each box.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244: 146.100
CDC 160/160-A
Data Code Table
Collating Sequence
DATA CODE tABLE NO.6
§
146.
.1
USE OF CODE:
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
printer collating sequence .
In ascending sequence
Blank:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
t=
~
[
+
1
J
A
S
T
U
V
W
X
y
Z
K
L
M
N
0
P
B
C
]
-
..... or ".
Q
R
%orV
$ or 7
*
t
+
>
D
E
F
G
H
I
<
~
?
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244: 151.100
•
III
STANDARD
EDP
CDC 160-A
REPORTS
P. O. Facilities
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
§
151.
.1
UTILITY ROUTINES
.11
Simulators of Other Computers
The 160-A INTERFOR assembler and interpreter
subroutines permit the use of floating point
instructions for the CDC 1604/1604-A computers
(see Sections 244:173 and 244:184).
The National Cash Register NCR 310 computer,
made by Control Data Corporation, is a CDC 160
with some instructions omitted. No known efforts
are being made by 160 users to simulate the 310.
.151 General (Contd.)
peripheral equipment found on the 160/160-A
systems and the newer 167 Card Reader and
166-1 Printer. The older eqUipment referred to is
the 1610 Controller for IBM card equipment, the
1612 line printer, the 163, 164, and 1607 magnetic
tape systems, and the 1609 card read and punch
unit. No routines exist specifically for the new
162 magnetiC tape system using 603 or 606 tape
units or the new buffered line printer, Model
166-2. However, the 603 tape unit set at low
density can operate correctly in place of a 163
tape unit.
Card-to-tape transcriptions proceed at reading
speeds of 650 cards per minute using the 161O-A
controller and the IBM 088 Collator, or at 250
cards per minute using the 167 Card Reader.
The CDC 160 can be simulated in most cases. Times
are the same as on the 160. Halt codes must be
checked for proper format, and all bank controls
are set to zero before running.
.152 SIMO
Reference:
SWAP listing, program
.12 Simulation by Other
AD2.02.
Computers: . . . . . none.
Date available:
presently available.
Description
.13 Data Sorting and Merging
This program permits two concurrent data
transcriptions: card-to-tape and tape-to-printer.
Sort 3X
The printer is the 1612 Printer, the tape units
Reference:
SWAP listing, program
are the older Model 163 tape units which run at
H2.0!'
30 KC, and the card reader is the IBM 088
1 item; variilble length, up
Record size:
Collator and 161O-A controller. The 160-A
to 984 char including
which is required contains basic storage
key.
(8,192 words).
Block size:.
1 record.
Key size:-.
1 to 10 variable length
An independent card-to-tape operation proceeds
fields.
at 250 cards per minute (reader speed). An
File size: .
1 tape reel. Number of
independent print operation proceeds at 1,000
characters depends on
lines per minute (maximum 48-character-set
record size; for example,
speed). If both operations proceed concurrently,
125,000 80-char records
a 5 to 10 per cent loss in peak speeds results on
at 556 char/inch, and
each program.
56, 500 80-char records
at 200 char/inch.
Card data can be Hollerith or column binary.
Number of tapes:
4, using #162, 163, or 164
Output records on tape consist of 80 BCD
tape systems.
characters or 160 six-bit binary images, plus
Date available:. .
November, 1962.
optional control characters. The optional
Description
characters are used to store information about
Sort.3X sorts one reel of tape using a two-way
the type of card image of the present record and
merge technique, with internal sorting performed
the next record on tape. In any case, binary
on blocked records. Intermediate tape records
cards may be intermixed with BCD cards.
are blocked in 1,000 character blocks. Time to
sort 20,000 SO-character records, with a 16.153 Peripheral ProceSSing Package (PPP)
character key, on a 30 KC tape, is 89 minutes
Reference: . . . . . SWAP listing, program
(manufacturer's example). The program was
AD2.0I, and CDC Manual,
written for the 160, and makes no use of buffering
Publication 517, July
in the 160-A.
1962.
Date available: . . . . presently available .
. . none.
. 14 Report Writing: .
Description
The Peripheral Processing Package contains all
.15 Data Transcription
input and output subroutines, which are in the
.151 General
160-A at one time. A control subroutine can use
anyone of these as specified by the setting of
A number of data transcription routines are
presently available which use both the older
jump control switches on the console.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporatian and BNA Incorporated
6/63
CDC 160-A
244: 151.153
§
151.
.172 Floating point functions
Function
.153 Peripheral Processing Package (PPP) (Contd.)
Description (Contd.)
When one transcription is complete (for example,
card-to-tape), the operator resets jump control
switches and the next transcription specified
starts immediately. Usable units are the older
163 and 1607 magnetic tape systems (30 KC tapes),
the fast 1612 Printer (1,000 lines per minute with
48-character set), and the 161O-A adapter for the
IBM 088 Collator and 523 card punch (reads 650
cards per minute; punches 100 cards per minute).
The manufacturer has demonstrated a newer
version of a peripheral processing package; see
next paragraPh.
.154 Peripheral Processing Package (PPPP)
Reference: . . . . • publication BR -9.
Date available:
routine demonstrated in
October, 1962.
Description
One to four tape-to-printer operations occur
concurrently, each at 1,000 lines per minute
(48-character printer set), as well as a single
card-to-tape operatiou. (using the 250-card-perminute Model 167-2 reader, and Model 603 tape
units). With auxiliary core storage, it is
possible to perform two card-to-tape or tape-tocard operations and up to eight printing
operations.
. 16
File Maintenance
Arc sin:
Arc cosine:
Exponential (2
exp x, 10 exp
x, e exp x):
Squa re root:
Log to base 2:
Trig onometric
series
expansions:
Time" sec
Subroutine
168-2
200,000
floating
point
option
200,000
?
?
loo.oon
.173 Radix conversion
Binary to 4- bit
decimal: • • .
Decimal to binary:
General Binary-toBCD and BCD to
Binary Conversion:
. 174 Binary arithmetic
Single precision
divide:
Paper Tape Edit
program A2.01A in SWAP
listing.
Date available:
presently available.
Description:. .
permits replacements,
insertions, and deletions
of source statements
prepared for the OSAS
machine oriented
language translator, or
for FLAP, an input to the
INTERFOR interpreter.
OSAS-A Master Paper Tape Edit
Reference:
Reference:
. •
Date available:
Description:. .
.17
Other
. 171 Floating point
arithmetic: .
6/63
program AA2.02 in SWAP
listing.
presently available.
permits additions or
deletions to I/O
subroutines of OASA -A
Master Paper Tape. Also
permits duplicating the
tape.
Integer divide:
?
3,200
?
?
Storage, words
Subroutine
168-2
60
floating
point
option
60
?
29
21
478
98
4,300 ILsec per decimal
digit.
approximately 230 + 198N
/Jsec, where N =no,
decimal digits to be
converted. Result is
double precision (2 words);
6.6 decimal digit precision.
SWAP program listing
AH1. 04. Accepts FORTRANlike statements and
performs internal
conversions. Numeric
conversions are in decimal
or octal and operate on 1
computer word. The A,
X, and H statements are
provided. Program
requires 1,075 locations •
23-bit fraction + 11-bit
fraction, giving rounded
11- bit fraction. Time is
2,000 jJ.sec.
23-bit integer + 11-bit
integer, giving 12-bit
quotient with 11-bit
remainder. Time is
2,000 /Jsec.
Multiple preCision
package: • • . .
Double precision
arithmetic:
Single precision
fractional square
root: • . . . .
N-binary-word preCision
subroutine. Add, subtract,
mUltiply, divide, and
shifting provided. No
timing given. Storage
required is 720 + 1. 5N
words, where N = no. of
words of precision.
2-word binary add, subtract,
multiply, divide provided.
Times are found in Central
Processor (244:051. 411).
timing is 2, 250 jJ. sec per
iteration; max time is
25,000 ILsec.
see Central Processor ,
Section 244:051. 412 for
floating point times.
9-bit quick mUltiply: . product of 2 words formed
as 1 word, accurate to
10 bits. Time is 595 to
660 p.sec.
244:151.174
PROBL_EM ORIENTED FACILITIES
§
151.
. 176 Decimal Computations Programming System (BCK)
(Contd. )
Description (Contd.)
core storage. The operations possible using
BCK are:
.174 Binary arithmetic (Contd.)
9-bit quick sine: . . . obtains sine of an angle
which is less than 90
degrees. Accurate to 9
ADD
MOVE
BCDBCK
bits. Time is
SUB
GOTO(unconditional
(BCD to BCK
approximately 3, 000 /.L sec.
transfer)
conversion)
.175 Matrix inversion: . . . P:t:ogram II.06; written in
RECODE
BCKBCD
MPY
160 FORTRAN-A. Finds
(translate by table
(BCK TO BCD
DIVIDE
inverse of square matrix
COMPAR
look-up)
conversion)
in 160 or 160-A. Size of
SWAP program listing
.177 Equation Solver:
subroutines is 487 words,
AJI. 01. Program will
and it inverts up to a
solve 30 linear equations
17 x 17 matrix in the 160,
with 30 unknowns.
and a 33 x 33 matrix in the
Derived matrix can be
160-A (8,192 word store).
output.
See graph in System
• . . . . . • plot routines using the 165
Performance (244:201.32). .178 Other:
plotter .
• 176 Decimal Computations Programming System (BCK)
Linear
Program I.
Description
7 statistical programs.
The BCK program package, B2. 00, provides a
8 Civil Engineering design
control routine and a number of arithmetic and
programs.
logical subroutines for handling decimal numbers.
Prime Factor Extractor.
Numbers up to 12 decimal digits can be processed;
NIM.
and the subroutines are called by alphabetic
mnemonics. The OSAS assembler and the BCK
.2
PROBLEM ORIENTED
subroutine are used to execute the source proLANGUAGES: • . . . none.
gram interpretively. BCK occupies 550 words of
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244:161.100
•
STANDARD
_EDP
R~
."
CDC 160-A
Process Oriented Language
160 FORTRAN-A
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 160 FORTRAN-A
§
. 14
161.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
CDC 160 FORTRAN-A.
. 12
Origin: •
Control Data Corporation.
.13
Reference: .
OPERATING PROCEDURES
for 160 FORTRAN-A,
Publication PSB-BFOl
(Revised), Sept., 1962.
160 FORTRAN/REFERENCE
MANUAL, Publication 503,
April, 1962.
.14
Description
160 FORTRAN-A is a slightly revised version of the
CDC 160 FORTRAN language and is provided as an
interim language for the 160-A computer until 160-A
FORTRAN is released. Section 244:162 describes
the 160-A FORTRAN language; Section 242:161 describes the 160 FORTRAN language; and Section
242:182 describes the 160 FORTRAN translator. Refer to Section 242:182 for the translator applicable
to 160 FORTRAN-A. Only the main features of 160
FORTRAN-A and the differences between it and 160
FORTRAN are described in this section.
160 FORTRAN-A uses the same language as 160
FORTRAN. Both are versions of IDM 70917090
FORTRAN II, described in Section 408:161. How-
© 1963
Description (Contd. )
ever, the source program for the 160-A may be
placed on punched cards, instead of only on punched
tape as required in 160 FORTRAN. The compiler
and the interpreter are read from punched tapes as
before. Two additional compiler error checks are
provided, one for duplicate label and one for statement out of order. See Section 242:182 for a description of the 160 FORTRAN Translator.
Subroutines are brought in using CALL statements,
and names are formed using the same rules as in
IDM 7090 FORTRAN. Constants and inte~r variables have a maximum size of only 2,04'1. and are
represented as 1 computer word. Floatitig point
variables are represented by three computer words
and f8;l1 within the range of ± 1031 . Boolean operations are permitted, and mixed mode arithmetic
(floating and fixed point in the same statement) is
provided as an extension to mM FORTRAN. The
larger storage of the 160-A (8,192 words compared
to the basic 4,096 word storage of the 160 computer)
permits longer source programs to be used. A
larger matrix can be held in the 160-A. The maxi"mum size matrix which can be inverted by the Il. 06
~trix Inver.sion program in the SWAP user's listing
"1S 33 by 33; m the 160 computer the maximum size
is F by 17. Inversion time for a 30 by 30 matrix is
estimated to be 20 minutes.
Refer to the 160 FORTRAN Translator section
(242:182) for a description of translation.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
244: 162.100
CDC 160-A
Process Oriented Language
160-A FORTRAN
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 160-A FORTRAN
§
. 14
162•
Description (Contd. )
•1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
160-A FORTRAN.
. 12
Origin:.
Control Data Corporation.
b. All 709/7090 FORTRAN statements are permitted
except READ DRUM and WRITE DRUM. The 160
INPUT and OUTPUT statements are no longer
used .
.13
Reference:.
160-A FORTRAN/GENERAL
INFORMATION MANUAL,
Publication 505, no date.
c. Fixed point constants and variables can be as
large as 4,194,303 (two computer words), and
statement numbers can be as large as 99,999.
160-A FORTRAN/
REFERENCE MANUAL,
PUblication 513,
March, 1963.
. 14
Description
CDC 160-A FORTRAN is a more complete version of
the IBM 709/7090 FORTRAN II language than CDC
160 FORTRAN. The 160-A FORTRAN language was
announced late in 1962, and is not yet fully implemented and documented (March, 1963). The references listed in Paragraph .13 contain a description
of the language and the translator.
Section 244:162 describes the 160-A FORTRAN language; Section 242:161 describes the 160 FORTRAN
language; and Section 242:182 describes the 160
FORTRAN translator. Only the main features of
160-A FORTRAN and the differences between it and
160 FORTRAN are described in this section.
Changes tQ 160 FORTRAN are listed listed below:
a. The COMMON statement is permitted, and is used
to link variables in subroutines and main programs. Programs and subprograms which are
to be run together must be compiled together.
© 1963
Subroutines are brought in using CALL statements,
and names are formed using the same rules as in
IBM FORTRAN. The number of subroutines is restricted only by available core storage. Floating
point variables are represented by three computer
words and fall within the range of ±1031 . Boolean
operations are permitted, and mixed mode arithmetic (both fixed and floating point operands in one expression) is provided as an extension to IBM 7090
FORTRAN.
For other details of the 160-A FORTRAN, refer to
the 160 FORTRAN description referenced above.
With respect to IBM 709/7090 FORTRAN II,
FUNCTION and FREQUENCY statements are not
permitted. Complex arithmetic, an addition to the
7090 FORTRAN, is not permitted in 160-A
FORTRAN.
Object programs are executed interpretively, as
before, and compile-and-run operation is possible
with 160':'A FORTRAN.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
244: 163.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
_
RE/'IlRTS
~
-
CDC 160·A
Process Oriented Language
AUTOCOMM
PROCESS ORI ENTED LANGUAGE: AUTOCOMM
§
163.
.14
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
AUTOCOMM.
. 12
Origin:.
Control Data Corp.,
Minneapolis, Minn.
.13
Reference:.....
AUTOCOMM&ENERAL
INFORMATION, CDC
Publication No. 524,
November, 1962.
AUTOC OMM/RE FERENCE
MANUAL, CDC
Publication No. 519,
March, 1963.
. 14
Description
recorded With only one character per word. A
redefine pseudo operation, RDFN, permits the
assignment of more than one file to the same storage
area .
The Procedure Section contains the AUTOCOMM
procedural statements and any OSAS-A symbolic
coding that may be required. Each statement may
be named and can specify only one AUTOCOMM
operation, along with its associated error and
conditional clauses, if any. Most AUTOCOMM
statements result in the generation of a return jump
to a subroutine in the object program, but others
result in the in -line generation of a block of machine
coding •
All AUTOCOMM arithmetic statements have the
following general form, which is quite similar to
that of COBOL:
AUTOCOMM is a pseudo English language programming system desIgned for c~1l1merclal data processing
problems. This language can utilize any of the
standard 160-A input-output devices, and its operation repertoire includes decimal arithmetic, multiword transfers, alphabetic and numeric comparisons,
format conversions, and editing. Seven pseudo
index registers can be set, incremented, and tested
by procedural statements.
ADD data-name-l TO data-name-2, IF ERROR
GO TO procedure-name.
Operands may be up to 12 digits long; literals may
not be specified as operands; and the original value
of "data-name-2" is always replaced by the result
of the operation.
The AUTOCOMM system consists of a source
language translator and a library of macro subroutines that are called by the source language statements. AUTOCOMM source programs are translated
into OSAS-A (the 160-A assembly language) and then
into machine language object programs. OSAS-A
symbolic statements can be used in the Procedure
Section of AUTOCOMM programs. The library of
macro subroutines is stored on magnetic tape in
OSAS-A language. Additional subroutines can easily
be added by the user.
The EDIT verb can be used to suppress leading zeros
or to insert dollar signs, asterisks, commas,
periods, and slashes into numeric data to be listed.
The transmitting field contains the all-numeric data
item. The receiving field contains a COBOL-like
"picture" (specified as an alphameric constant in the
Data Section) that indicates the desired output format.
The picture is destroyed by the EDIT operation (i. e . ,
it is replaced by the edited numeric item).
The COMPARE verb transfers control to one of three
procedural statements, depending upon ~e result of
a comparison of two alphameric items. TEST
determines whether a specified numeric field is
negative, zero, or positive, and transfers c;ontrol
accordingly. AUTOCOMM includes a complete set
of input-output statements, but nQ provision ·has been
made for the blOCking and unblocking of records on
magnetic tape files.
Every AUTOCOMM program is divided into a Data
Section and a Procedure Section. The Data Section
describes the files and items to be processed. Up
to nine levels of data items are permitted. Each
data statement specifies the name of an item or file,
its level number, and its size in characters. For
numeric items, the decimal point location can also
be specified. Names cannot be more than six
characters in length. Special data statements can
be used to define alphameric constants of up to 42
characters, signed numeric constants of up to 12
digits, and working storage areas.
Internal data representation is in standard six· bit
BCD code, with two characters per 160-A word.
Special provisions allow the processing of files
© 1963
Description (Contd)
AUTOCOMM should be useful for the same type of
commercial hatched-processing applications as
COBOL, should be somewhat easier than COBOL to
learn and use, but is considerably more limited than
COBOL in the facilities it offers.
.15
Translator Availability: 1
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
244: 171. 100
•
II
STANDARD
EDP
REPORTS
CDC 160/160-A
M. O. Language
OSAS/OSAS-A
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: OSAS/OSAS-A
§
171.
.2
LANGUAGE FORMAT
.21
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:
. .
.
.12
Origin:
• 13
Reference
OSAS: •
OSAS-A:
• 14
.
160 Assembly System •
OSAS.
.
Legend
Location:
160-A Assembly System.
OSAS -A.
Operation Code:
Control Data Corporation.
Address:
Additive:
Comments:
CDC Publication 501.
CDC Publication 507 A.
Description
OSAS and OSAS-A provide simple, straightforward
assembly systems for the 160 and 160-A Computers.
The system accepts mnemonic or numeric operation
codes for all the computer operation codes, and
several pseudo operation codes. Synonyms can be
defined, but no macro instructions are provided.
Both the 160 and 160-A systems provide relocatable
binary output as object programs. Both systems
will accept library routines for assembly with the
object program. These routines must follow the
source program during assembly.
.15
.22
see coding diagram in
Section :131.
name for statement
location.
operation code or pseudooperation code.
operand address or data for
pseudo-operation •
increment or decrement for
address •
comments by programmer;
also constants.
convention or require. . . . noments.
.23
Corrections:
.24
Special Conventions
.• 242 Multi -addresses:
".243 Literals:
address + contents of
additive field.
none.
permissible for address and
additive fields; followed
byD.
.244 Special coded
addresses:
none •
.241 Compound addresses:
.
Under operator control, a given symbol table can be
entered into the system to link: individually assembled
LABELS
programs or segments of programs. Symbols con.3
sist of one to six alphameric characters. The OSAS
.31 General
symbol table has a maximum usable symbol table
size of approximately 250 symbols, and can be con.311 Maximum number of labels
siderably smaller depending on the media selected
Procedures
for input, intermediate and final output, and the list
OSAS: • • • • • • 340 or fewer, depending on
output.
length of I/O subroutines
specified for use by
The OSAS -A system has a symbol table size of
assembler.
approximately 1,000 symbols in the basic 160-A
OSAS-A:
1,000 - 2C, where C = no.
system using 8, 192 words of core storage. To use
of constants labeled.
more storage of the 160-A system, the assembler
Constants
must be modified.
OSAS:
included with labels for
procedures.
Pseudo operations provide for control of two separate
OSAS-A:
1,000-P, where P =no. of
allocation counters; one for lower core (locations
procedures labeled.
00 to 77 octal) and the other for the remainder of
Files:
•
•
•
same
as Procedures.
core storage. Constants and alphamerics may be
Record:
same as Procedures.
entered as data in the comments field of a statement
Items: . •
same as Procedures.
under pseudo operation control. From 32 to 50
.312 Common label formation
characters are allowable depending on the input
yes.
rule:
•••.•
medium used.
.313 Reserved labels: .
none •
• 314 Other restrictions:
none •
. 315 DeSignators
Publication Date
Decimal address:
decimal number followed by
D.
March, 1962.
OSAS:
yes; EQU pseudo •
• 316 Synonyms permitted:
OSAS-A:
Revised November, 1962.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244: 171.320
§
CDC 16011.60-A
.54
171.
.32
.541 Method of control
Allocation countel!:
Label adjustment:
Annotation: • • •
.542 Allocation counter
Set to absolute:
Set to label: ••
Step forward: •
Step backward:
Reserve area:. •
.543 Label adjustment
Set labels equal:
Set absolute value:
Clear label table:
.544 Annotation
Comment phrase:
Universal Labels
• 321 Labels for procedures
Existence:
Formation rule
First character:
Last character:
Others:
Number of
characters:
. 322 Labels for library
routines:
.323 Labels for constants:
• 326 Labels for
variables:
• 33 Local Labels:
··.
·.
·
···
.4
DATA
.41
Constants
optional.
alphameric.
alphameric •
alphameric.
6 max.
same as Procedures.
same as Procedures.
same as Procedures.
none.
Title phrase: • •
.6
·
···
.421 Data layout:
.422 Data type:
.423 Redefinition:
·
specified in program.
not required.
none.
·
.5
PROCEDURES
•51
Direct Operation Codes
.511 Mnemonic
Existence:
Number
OSAS:
alAS-A:
Example: •
Comment:
.512 Absolute
Existence:
Number
OSAS:
alAS-A:
Example: •
Comment:
MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES
.81
Macros: • • • • • • • none •
.82
Pseudos
Code
PRG:
CON:
optional.
END:
97.
134.
ADM.
add memory.
EQU:
REM:
optional.
BNKX (160-A only):
97.
SUPA:
SUPB:
134.
3100.
add memory.
Interludes:
none.
3/63
.8
BSS:
WAI:
.53
BCD:
,
r-I
see Sections :151, Problem
Oriented Facilities, and
:191, Operating Environment.
Identity:
BLR:
none.
32 char (card input) •
50 char (tape input).
no special title phrase •
.71
specified in program.
not required.
none.
Macro-Codes:
EQUpseudo.
EQU pseudo •
not possible.
LIBRARY FACILITIES
ORG:
.52
ORG, PRG, CON pseudos.
EQU pseudo.
BLR, BSS pseudos.
none.
none •
.7
Input-Output Areas
.431 Data layout:
.432 Data type:
.433 Copy layout:
pseudo-ops •
pseudo-ops.
see paragraph. 544.
SPECIAL ROUTINES
AVAILABLE: •••
.411 Maximum size .cons~s
Machine form
External form
Integer
Decimal:
none.
Octal:
4 octal digits.
Binary:
4 octal digits.
BCD:
alphameric.
Fixed numeric:
none.
Floating numeric:
none.
Alphabetic:
none.
Alphameric: •
none •
•412 Maximum size
literals:
literals are used only in
addresses.
. 42 Working Areas
.43
Translator Control
A-U-ER-BA-CH-;~
no on -line library
accessible; subroutines
may be added for assembly
following source statements.
Description
sets location counter at
beginning of assembly.
sets location counter during
assembly •
sets location for lower core
storage during assembly.
advances location counter,
by a maximum of 64
(decimal) locations •
same as BLR.
stop assembly until operator
re-start.
terminates input on first
pass; can specify program
branch location.
sets symbol equal to specified value.
permits statement of only
remarks.
specifies a particular core
storage bank to loader.
suppress listable output.
suppress binary output.
(normal assembly output).
causes a contiguous string
of characters in comments
field to be assembled; 2
BCD char per computer
word.
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: OSAS/OSAS-A
§
171.
. 82
Pseudos (Contd.)
Code
244:171.82.0
.83
Interpretive:
none .
.84
Direct:
all machine operation codes,
described in Section :121,
Instruction List.
Description
BCDR:
FLX:
as BCD except 1 per word.
causes a contiguous string
of characters in comments
field to be assembled; 2
Flexowriter char per word.
FLXR: • • . • • • • as FLX except I per word.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation ~nd BNA Incorporated
3/63
244: 172.100
_STANDARD
EDP
•
CDC 160-A
REIORTS
M. O. Language
SICOM
MACHINE ORIENTED- LANGUAGE: SICOM
§
• 14
172.
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity:
SICOM Interpretive System.
• 12
Origin:.
Scientific Computers, Inc.,
Minneapolis, Minn.
.13
Reference:.
SICOM Reference Manual,
CDC Publication No. 515.
• 14
Description
Many SICOM instructions offer a choice of relative
or absolute addressing. When the relative mode is
selected (by an instruction), the instruction address
is interpreted as being relative to the location of the
instruction; e. g., the address 0025 would refer to a
location 25 SICOM locations forward from the instruction that contained it. Use of the relative mode is essential in subroutines that must be relocatable; no
means of relocating routines that use absolute addresses is provided in the SICOM system.
SICOM offers the choice of a variety of input-output
media, including punched tape, punched cards, magnetic tape, typewriter, printer, and plotter. Numeric
data can be in floating or fixed point decimal format.
Alphameric data can be input, stored, compared,
merged, and output - an unusual and valuable capability in an interpretive system.
SICOM is an interpretive system that simulates on
the binary CDC 160-A a slower pseudo computer with
decimal addressing, floating point decimal arithmetic, 16 two-dimensional index registers, and a repertoire of 133 one-address instructions. Programs
can be coded in the SICOM language or translated
into SICOM from the INTERCOM 1000 interpretive
language for the Bendix G-1s. The INTERCOM -toSICOM translators are described in Section 244:184.
Operation and performance of the SICOM interpreter
are covered in Section 244:192.
The SICOM instruction repertoire includes such useful facilities as inverse divide and reverse subtract.
Integer operands up to 9,999 in magnitude can be
specified as literals in the address portion of arithmetic instructions. The common mathematical functions such as square root and log, which are built into
the instruction repertoire of many interpreters, require transfers to standard subroutines in the SICOM
system. User-coded subroutines in either SICOM or
160-A machine language can be added to the SICOM
subroutine library.
All computations except index register operations are
done in the floating point mode. Each data item occupies four 160~A words, or two SICOM locations,
and consists of sign, 10 decimal digit mantissa, and
exponent.
Each instruction occupies two 160-A words, or one
SICOM location, and consists of sev~n digits: one
digit to specify an index register, two digits to specify the operation code, and four digits to specify the
operand address. The use of numeric rather than
mnemonic operation codes, which is quite common
among interpretive languages, tends to increase the
time required to learn and code in the system. In
160-A systems with the maximum 32,768 words of
core storage, the SICOM addresses uOOO through
x999 are assigned to the top two banks; otherwise all
SICOM addressing is decimal.
The 16 SIC OM index registers are designated 0
through 9 and u through z. Each index register is
divided into two sections, i and j, and each section
consists of a base, a difference (or increment), and
a limit. Instructions are provided to set any part of
any register to a literal value, to increment or decrement either base by its associated difference and
then compare the resulting base with the limit, to
clear all index registers, and to transfer data between index registers and the accumulator. The
contents of both the i base and the j base of the specified index register are added to the instruction address to form the effective operand address. This
double indexing can greatly facilitate the processing
of two-dimensional arrays.
© 1963
Description (Contd. )
.15
Publication Date: . • • . November, 1962 (Preliminary manual dated June,
1962).
.2
LANGUAGE FORMAT
. 21
Diagram
LOC
• 22
I
K
OP
ADDR
I
NOTES
Legend
LOC: •.
specifies location of the instruction, using a 4-decimal-digit address; not
punched on program tape.
K:
specifies one of 16 index registers numbered 0-9 and u-x.
OP: .
specifies the operation to be
performed, using 2 decimal
digits. (In some cases K and
ADDR also help to define
the operation. )
ADDR: • • . • . • • • . specifies an absolute address
or an address relative to the
command being executed, using 4 decimal digits; or specfies a 4-digit literal.
.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
244:172.220
. CDC 160-A
1172.
· 22
.43
~
•• 431 Data layout:
.432 Data type: . . •
(CDntd.)
NOTES: •••
used for coding sheet
documentation only.
• 23
Corrections:.
no special provisions.
• 24
Special Conventions
.241 Compound addresses: • none.
.242 Multi-addresses:
none.
in certain operation codes,
• 243 Literals: •••••••
contents pf the ADDR'field
are interpreted as a 4digit llteral operand.
· 244 Special coded
none; but in relative adaddresses: •
dressing mode (entered by
special instruction) all addresses are relative to location of command being
executed.
.3
LABELS:........ none; all operands are identified by their pseudo addresses ill 4-digit decimal
form. (Core storage banks
6 and 7, when installed are
assigned addresses uooo
through v999 and wOOO
through x999,
respectively. )
.4
DATA
• 41
Constallts
.411 Maximwn size constants
Machine form
External form
Integer: • • • . ••
none.
Fixed numeric: ••
none.
Floating numeric
Decimal:
1 to 8 decimal digits; with
point, minus sign, and e
(for exponent) as required.
Octal: • .
not used.
Binary: •
not used.
Alphameric:
any length; stored as 8
characters per block of 2
consecutive SICOM
locations.
.412 Maximwnsize literals
Machine form
External form
Integer: ••••••
4 decimal digits; for index
register operations only.
Fixed numeric: • .
none.
Floating numeric
DecimaJ.: •
4 decimal digit integer.
Octal: •.•
not used.
Binary: •.
not used.
Alphameric:
none.
.42
Working Areas
.421 Datt layout:
• 422 Data type: • • •
4/63
Input-Output Areas
.5
PROCEDURES
.51
Direct Operation Codes
• 511 Mnemonic: •
• 512 Absolute
Existence:
Number: •
Example: •
Comment:
not permitted •
mandatory.
60.
30 means "add".
K and ADDR portions are
used to specify variations
of the 00 and 01 operation
codes. See Paragraph. 83
for complete instruction
list.
.52
Macro-Codes:.
none.
.53
Interludes: ••
none.
• 54
Translator Control:
see Section 244:192 .
•6
SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE
.61
Special Arithmetic: • . none.
• 62
Special Functions
.621 Facilities: . • . •
square root, log, exponential, sine, cosine, and arctangent are provided as
standard SICOM
subroutines •
• 622 Method of call:. • . . • load into SICOM storage before use and enter via
operation code 70.
• 63
Overlay Control: •
none.
• 64
Data Editing: •
performed automatically by
the SICOM input and output
instructions.
.65
Input-Output Control
• 651 File labels: . . . . •
. 652 Reel labels: . .
• 653 mocking:. . • .
• 654 Error control: .•
• 66
Sorting: .•
• 67
Diagnostics
• 671 Dmnps:. .
absolute addresses are used.
implied by instruction;
.
floating numeric or
alphameri&.
absolute addresses are used.,
implied by instruction: floating numeric or alphameric.
• 672 Tracers: .
• 673 Snapshots:
SICOM instructions are ,provided to write and search
for magnetic tape file
numbers .
none.
by own SICOM coding.
automatic, by SleOM magnetic tape read and write
instructions.
none.
no special routines; dumps can
be readily coded in SleOM.
optional trace mode is an integral feature of SleOM; see
Section 244:192 •
none.
/
MACHINE ORIENTEP Lt-NGUAGE: SICOM
§
2_44: 172.700
172.
.83
.7
LIDRARY FACIUTlES
.71
Identi~:
• 72
Kinds of Libraries
......
SICOM subroutine libraries.
• 721 Fixed master: • • •
.722 Expandable master:
. 723 Private:
no.
yes •
yes •
• 73
Storage Form: .
punched tape •
• 74
Varieties of Contents: . standard SICOM subroutines
(square root, log, exponential, sine, cosine, arctangent), plus user-developed routines.
....
• 75
Mechanism
• 751 Insertion of new item: • add to subroutine master
tape.
• 752 Language of new item: • SICOM or 160-A machine
language.
.753 Method of call: ••.•
load required routines at
execution time.
.76
Insertion in Program:
each library routine is inserted once, as a closed
subroutine. All addresses
within a routine must be
relative rather tha:n absolute so the routine can be
relocated.
.8
MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES
.81
Macros:
none.
.82
Pseudos:
none.
.83
Interpretive
K
OP
ADDR
K
K
K
*K
"'K
K
K
K
*K
*K
*K
*K
*K
*K
*K
*K
"'K
"'K
*K
*K
*K
"'K
*K
*K
02
03
04
05
06
12
13
14
15
16
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Interpretive (Contd.)
K
OP
ADDR
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
K
36
37
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
K
47
Y
K
K
K
K
K
"'K
*K
*K
*K
*K
*K
"'K
*K
*K
*K
K
K
*K
*K
"'K
*K
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
70
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
K
*K
*K
75
76
77
71
72
73
74
Operation
Set i base.
Set i difference.
Set i limit.
Decrement i base!
Increment i base.
Set j base.
Set j difference.
Set j limit.
Decrement j base.
Increment j base.
Load absolute 'value.
Load negative.
Load.
Inverse divide.
Divide.
Multiply.
Interchange •
Extract.
Add.
Subtract.
Add absolute value.
Reverse subtract.
Replace add.
Compare numeric.
© 1963
Y
Y
Y
00
01
02
03
AD04
05
06
07
08
09
10
l!
K-
00
K
K
K
K
K
K
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
Kf
K
12
13
14
016
17
0018
AD19
0020
0021
AD22
AD23
0024
0025
0027
0028
29
60
61
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
Operation
Output floating point and tab.
Output floating point and cr.
Output fixed point and tab •
Output fixed point and cr.
Set fixed point output format •
Output carriage returns and tabs;
Output tabulating number.
Output a command from memory.
Write file number on Magnetic
Tape.
Search magnetic tape for File
Number.
Group Input.
Single Input.
Read Octal Tape.
Alphanumeric Output.
Load A.N.R •
Compare A.N. R.
Merge into A.N.R.
Extract A. N. R.
JUmp if accumulator is Zero.
Jump if accumulator is Non-Zero.
Jump if accumulator is Positive.
Jump if accumulator is Negative.
Jump unconditionally.
Jump unconditionally.
Jump unconditionally.
Jump unconditionally.
Jump unconditionally.
Selective Jump one.
Selective Jump two.
Selective Jump one and two.
Jump to machine language
Subroutines.
Jump back relative.
A.N.R. to storage.
Accumulator to-storage.
No operation.
Selective Stop 1.
Selective Stop 2.
Stop display 3.
Stop display 4.
Halt and gate input.
Select relative mode.
Select absolute mode.
Select non-trace mode.
Reset trade mode.
Clear index registers.
Select Flexowriter input.
Select Flexowriter output.
Select Typewriter input.
Select Typewriter output.
Select printer.
Select tape to printer.
Select magnetic tape drive.
Backspace AD records.
Write on magnetic tape.
Read magnetic tape.
Index to accumulator.
Accumulator to index.
mock copy.
Block clear.
Punch octal tape.
Punch special tape.
Read special tape.
Return to Mark 60.
Return to Mark 61.
4/63
244: 172.830
§
CDC 160-A
.83
172.
.83
Interpretive (Contd.)
K
1
2
3
4
5
4/63
OP
01
01
01
01
01
ADDR
Operation
62
63
64
65
66
67
70
71
72
73
75
D78
79
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Return to Mark 62.
Return to Mark 63.
Return to Mark 64.
Return to Mark 65.
Return to Mark 66.
Return to Mark 67.
Return to Mark 70 (S. R. Exit)
Return to Mark 71.
Return to Mark 72.
Return to Mark 73.
Output last location.
Set floating point output format.
Punch stop, check and leader.
Load positive constant.
.84
Load negative constant.
Divide into constant.
Divide by constant.
Multiply by constant.
Interl!retive (Contd.)
K
OP
ADDR
6
7
8
9
X
y
Z
01
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
01
01
01
01
01
01
Operation
Add constant.
Subtract constant.
Subtract from constant.
Shift accumulator.
Start automatic computation.
Set address for start trace.
Set address for stop trace.
Where A. N. R. is the alphameric data register.
K is any SICOM index register.Y is any SICOM storage location.
... denotes the address can be relative as well
as absolute.
Direct Codes: • . • • . none in SlooM; 160-A
machine language subroutines can be entered
using SICOM operation
code 74.
244:173.100
CDC 160-A
Machine-Oriented Language
INTERFOR
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: INTERFOR
.§
173.
• 14
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
INTERFOR.
• 12
Origin:.
Control Data Corp. and
Mr. Gordon S(anley, General Motors Corporation.
.13
Reference: . . • . • • . INTERFOR Reference
Manual, CDC PUblication
~, September, 1962 •.
• 14
Description
provide 1,024 locations of INTERFOR storage which
can hold the user's program and data. Bank switching is handled automatically by the interpreter. Core
storage banks 4 through 7 cannot be addressed in the
INTERFOR system •
The INTERFOR repertoire includes instructions to
load or store a particular element of a matrix stored
in columnar form. The starting location of the matrix
and the row and column number of the desired element
are specified in the instruction. The "equality search"
and "threshold search" instructions search a list of
operands in sequential locations and transfer control
when an operand equal to or greater than the value in
the accumulator is found. A conventional set of instructions is provided to load, increment, and test the
six index registers.
INTERFOR is an interpretive system that facilitates
the coding of scientific and engineering problems by
simulating on the 160-A a slower pseudo computer
with a repertoire of 22 single-address instructions,
including floating point arithmetic on operands consisting of a 33-bit signed binary fraction and a lO-bit
signed binary exponent. The word size and instruction repertoire are largely compatible with the more
powerful CDC 1604 and 1604-A.
Input and output operations in INTERFOR programs
are handled by return jumps to standard subroutines
rather than by direct operation codes. Data may be
read in via the 167 Card Reader, the paper tape reader, or the typewriter. Each input subroutine converts
one floating point data item from decimal to binary
form and leaves the result in the accumulator. Date
output may be via the paper tape punch, typewriter,
or 166 Printer. Each output subroutine converts the
data item in the accumulator to decimal form and outputs the item, followed by a tab or carriage return.
No provision is made for magnetic tape input-output.
The standard INTERFOR external subroutines are:
arc tangent, sine, cosine, arc cosine, arc sine,
power series expansion, exponential, square root,
log, and plot. CDC 160- A machine language coding
can be incorporated into INTERFOR programs by
exiting from and re-entering the interpretive
system via special instructions.
.Each INTERFOR storage location occupies four
words of 160-A core storage and is. assigned a fourdigit octal address. An INTERFOR location can hold
one data item or a pair of instructions. Each instruction consists of eight octal digits: two digits to
specify the operation .code; one digit to specify which
(if any) of the six INTERFOR index registers shall be
used to modify the operand address; one digit to
specify a breakpoint halt, depending upon console
switch settings; and four digits to specify either the
base operand address or the operand itself.
INTERFOR programs can be coded directly in the
octal format described above, or they can be written
in symbolic form and assembled by FLAP, the
INTERFOR assembly program. FLAP permits the
use of three-character mnemonic operation codes,
labels of up to eight characters, comments, and decimal constants. Input to FLAP can be on punched
tape or cards. The binary object program is
punched on tape, and a listable output showing both
the symbolic and translated instructions can be
punched on tape or listed by the 166 Printer. FLAP
normally requires two passes for an assembly. lf
the available storage capacity is exceeded, a third
pass is required. Symbol table capacity is approximately 500 labels. FLOADER is a special load routine for the binary program tapes produced by FLAP
assemblies.
The INTERFOR interpretive system fits into storage
bank 0 and leaves 337 INTERFOR locations, which
are usually assigned to the external system subroutines such as square root, exponential, and sinecosine. Banks I, 2, and 3 (when installed) each
© 1963
Description (Contd. )
Execution times for INTERFOR programs are not
available from the manufacturer. When an error is
encountered, the interpreter halts, and the operator
can initiate the type-out or punch-out of an error message consisting of an error code, the instruction
word that caused the error, and its INTERFOR
location.
The main advantages INTERFOR has over the SICOM
interpretive system described in Sections 202:172 and
202:192 are the convenience of symbolic coding and
the similarity of INTERFOR to machine language programming for the CDC 1604 and 1604-A. SICOM, on
the other hand, offers a larger instruction repertoire,
magnetic tape operations, alphameriC data handling
capabilities, and a trace mode.
.8
OPERATION CODES
.81
Macros:
by Auerbach Carparation and BNA IncorJ1Orated
. none.
4/63
244: 173:820
§
CDC 160·A
173.
.83
Interpretive
Octal Code
.82
Pseudos (FLAP Assembly Routine)
REM: ••
EQU: .
ORO: •
DEC: •
BSS: •
OCT: •
END: ••
4/63
identifies comments.
assigns the value of an expression to a label.
defines starting address of
a block of INTERFOR
instructions.
identifies a decimal constant
to be converted to binary
form at load time.
reserves a block of storage
locations.
identifies a signed octal
constant.
indicates end of symbolic
program.
I AUERBACH { .$J
12
13
20
22
30
31
32
33
36
50
51
52
53
54
56
57
64
65
75
76
34
35
FLAP Code
IDA
LAC
STA
AJP
FAD
FSB
FMU
FDV
SSK
ENI
INI
LIU
LIL
ISK
SIU
SIL
EQS
THS
SL]
SLS
MEL
MES
Operation
Load.
Load complement.
Store.
Conditional jump.
Floating add.
Floating .subtract.
Floating multiply.
Floating divide.
Storage skip.
Enter ind~x.
Increment index.
Load index, upper.
Load index, lower.
Index skip.
Store index, upper.
Store index, lower.
Equality search.
Threshold search.
Unconditional jump.
Unconditional stop.
Matrix element load.
Matrix element store.
•
II
244: 181.100
STANDARD
EDP
REPORTS
CDC 160/160-A
Program T ransl afor
OSAS/OSAS-A
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: OSAS!OSAS-A
§
181.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: •
.12
.13
Originator:.
Control Data Corporation •
.14
Maintainer:
Control Data Corporation.
One Sixty Assembly
System. OSAS.
.15
Availability:
OSAS; March, 1963.
OSAS-A; November, 1962.
One Sixty- A Assembly
System. OSAS-A.
.2
INPUT
· 21
Language
Description
OSAS and OSAS-A are two-pass translators. The
version of the translator to be used in a given
assembly can be a previously used translator which
suits the job at hand, or can be specifically set up
,for the occasion. The master version exists on
punched tape, and includes all input-output media
subroutines which may be used during the translation. An input parameter entered into the processor
specifies the media for the four input-output transfers which occur during assembly. These transfers
provide for reading the source program , writing
and reading back the intermediate output, and
writing the object program and output to be listed.
Only those subroutines which are required remain
in storage along with the translator. Obtaining the
desired form of the translator is considered Phase I
of the assembly.
Phase II assembles the program. Pass I reads
symbolic input from punched tape, magnetic tape, or
cards. Intermediate output from Pass I can be recorded on paper tape of magnetic tape, and is read
back in as the input for Pass II. Pass II generates
assembled binary coding and a BCD-coded output
list. Output to be listed can be recorded on paper
or magnetic tape, or directly on a line printer.
Assembled instructions are contained in groups of
up to 71 words, in binary card column format.
. 211 Name:
.212 Exemptions:
.22
Form
.221 Input media:
· 222 Obligatory ordering:
· 223 Obligatory grouping:
.23
In the 160, the input-output subroutines are placed
in the symbol table, which has room for 340 sym boIs; the maximum useful size is approximately
250 symbols because the symbol table area holds
the input-output subroutines. In the 160-A the
symbol table size is approximately 1,000 symbols.
A third pass will be required if both the list output
and the assembled output are put on punched tape.
Note that the assembler cannot produce a list
directly by means of the 161 Typewriter, but can
list on -line by means of the line pririter.
.231 Maximum number of
source statements:
• 232 Maximum size source
statements: • • • •
.233 Maximum number of
data items: ••
•
.3
OUTPUT
.31
Object Program
© 1963
• 312 Language style: •
• 313 Output media:
.32
paper tape.
punched cards.
magnetic tape.
none.
none.
Size Limitations
.311 Language name:
The machine language output includes word count,
starting address, and relocation instructions. This
output can optionally include a checksum. If the
object program output is on paper tape, this image
is placed in six-bit characters, and the record is
only as long as required. The card image, if placed
on magnetic tape, is a fixed length of 160 BCD
characters.
OSAS, OSAS-A .
none.
no limit; programs can be
segmented. Maximum
number in core storage
at one time is approximately 300 .
79 char.
depends on space available
in symbol table (see
Description) •
relocatable binary machine
code •
up to 71 machine words,
with word count, optional
checksum, starting address for the words, and
a code to indicate which
words may be relocated.
This format applies to 1
card, 1 block of 160 BCD
char on mag tape, or to
paper tape, except that
paper tape record may be
shorter according to word
count •
paper tape, punched cards,
or magnetic tape.
Conventions
.312 Standard inclusions: •
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
bank control card (OSAS-A),
and transfer address card.
6/63
CDC 160/160-A
244: 181.330
.46
§lSI.
_33
Documentation
.461 Identity:
Subject
Provision
Source program:
optional; may print, or
may prepare tape or
cards, or suppress output altogether.
optional; see source program entry above.
none.
none.
using listable output.
Object program: •
Storage map:
•
Restart point list:
Language errors:
.4
TRANBLAT1NGPROCEDURE
.41
Phases and Passes
Phase I:
n:
Pass 1lI:
specify input-output
media. Read in
assembly program; set
it up for job at hand.
Optional output of this
version of assembler for
future use.
•••
Phase n
Pass I:
Pass
••
.42
Optional Mode
• 421
.422
.423
.424
.425
Translate: ••
Translate and run:
Check only:
Patching:
Updating:
.43
Special Features
read symbolic input.
store condensed version
of each statement in
core storage as intermediate output of assembIer.
translate op codes.
form symbol table.
generate binary intermediate output if core
storage area is too
small.
scan intermediate output
and generate binary object program.
output listable and assembled programs.
•• optional; used to output
listable object program
on paper tape.
.431 Alter to check only:
.432 Fast unoptimized
translate:
.433 Short translate on
restricted program:
. 44
Bulk Translating:.
. 45
Program Diagnostics:
6/63
Translator Library
.5
TRANSLATOR PERFORMANCE
.51
Object Program Space
.511 Fixed overhead: .
none .
. 512 Space required for each
input-output file:
as coded •
• 513 Approximate expansion
of procedures:
1 complete instruction per
elementary statement.
.52
Translation Time
.521 Normal translating: •
.53
Optimizing Data: • •
.54
Object Program Performance:
essentially as good as hand
coding (***).
.61
Translating Computer
.611 Minimum
configuration:
.62
no.
none.
COMPUTER CONFIGURATIONS'
yes.
no.
no.
no; reassemble.
no. Source program
paper tape can be updated in a separate run
using program A 2.01 A,
Paper Tape Edit.
no.
approximately 75 msec per
statement using lOW-density magnetic tape. In a
card or paper tape system,
speed is limited by these
input-output devices.
.6
•612 Larger configuration
advantages:
no.
none for direct access;
add any routines desired
following source program.
basic 160 (4,096 words of
storage) or 160-A (S, 192
words of storage) with
paper tape input-output •
card, mag tape inputoutput for faster speed •
Using mag tape on either
computer for storing intermediate output, pass
II is initiated automatically.
160-A may have additional
storage added for larger
symbol table.
Target Computer
.621 Minimum
configuration:
.622 Usable extra facilities:
punched tape systems as
above.
card, magnetic tape inputoutput.
larger core storage .
• yes •
by incorporating separate
routines.
(***) Estimate by editorial staff. See 1:010:400
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: OSAS!OSAS·A
244: 181. 700
§lBI.
.7
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
Error
Interlock
Missing ennies:
Unsequenced entries:
Duplicate names:
hnproper format:
Incomplete ennies:
Target computer
overflow:
Inconsistent program:
Direct address mode
assigned too large an
address:
Relative address mode
has modifier out of
range:
none.
none.
check
error flag in listing.
none.
check for undefined error flag in listing.
symbols
none.
none.
check
range error flag in
listable output.
check
range error flag in
listable output. and
E field of instruction
cleared to zero.
error flag in listing.
error flag in listing.
check
megal op code:
check
Illegal character:
E field of instruction
check
out of range:
Location out of range
using lower core counter
(CON):
check
.B
Action
error flag in listing.
error flag in listing.
ALTERNATIVE TRANSLATORS:
none.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244: 182.1 00
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
REl'ORTS
CDC 160.A
Program Translator
160.A FORTRAN
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: 160·A FORTRAN
§
182.
.12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:.
.12
Description
. . . . . . CDC 160-A FORTRAN.
Description (Contd.)
time. Approximately 4,000 words of storage are required, including provision for format control and
Boolean operations; but not including the table of addresses of variables. Each floating point variable
requires three words of storage, and each fixed point
constant or variable requires two.
Summary
The l60-A FORTRAN compiler produces a pseudo
object language in core storage which is ready to be
executed under control of an interpreter ,routine, also
stored in core storage. The compiler equipment required is a basic l60-A computer (8,192 words of
storage), two magnetic tape units, and an input unit
for the source program (which can be on punched
tape, cards, or magnetic tape.) It is possible to
substitute the CDC 167 card reader and punched tape
for the two magnetic tape units.
These fixed storage requirements are not as severe
for the 160-A computer as for the 160. The largest
matrix which can be inverted in the basic 160-A
(8, 192 words of core storage) is 33 by 33, and this
matrix requires approximately 3, 300 words of storage. The inversion routine requires approximately
500 words of storage.
The 169 Auxiliary Memocy Unit provides up to
24,576 additional words of core storage.
Compiling Time
The COMMON statement can provide data linkages
between programs and subprograms. However, in
order to be used together, the programs and subprograms must be compiled together.
Forty-seven types of error codes can be indicated via
listable output during compilation. If an error
occurs, compilation conUnues but no object code is
created.
Operation of the Translator
The only available compiling times are those for
compiling the matrix inversion routine, which has
66 statements. The program contains 11 DO statements. 'These times (supplied by the manufacturer)
are 37 seconds for a magnetic tape system and 5
minutes (estimated) for a card/paper tape system.
The object program is in core storage ready'for interpretive execution. Model 163 magnetic tape units
(30 KC) and the Model 167 card reader (250 cards per
minute) were used.
Compilation is accomplished in two passes. Pass I
reads the translator program from one of the magnetic tape units, reads the source statements, makes
records of names, subroutines, etc., and produces
an intermediate output on the second magnetic tape
unit. Intermediate processing follows based on information extracted from the source program. This
processing includes generating coding for indexing,
and computing storage space required for interpretive and library routines. Pass II loads the intermediate program into core storage and produces the
pseudo object language. Unassigned memory references are completed, library routines are inserted, and the interpretive routine is loaded from
the first magnetic tape unit.
The manufacturer claims an average compiling speed
of 125 statements per minute for 160-A FORTRAN.
At this point the program in core storage can either
be executed or be written out for later use.
Timing of basic operations, executed interpretively,
is listed below in comparison with timing of subroutines by themselves.
Timing of Execution of Pseudo Object Program
Interpretive execution times of object programs are
available for matrix inversion and for basic operations. The subroutine for matrix inversion inverts a
10 by 10 matrix in 53 seconds, and a 20 by 20 matrix
in 7 minutes. The estimate for a 30 by 30 matrix using 160-A FORTRAN was not given, but it is probably I
close to the time estimated for 160 FORTRAN-A (20
minutes).
Optional Compiler Outputs
160-A FORTRAN Subroutine
Interpretation
Alone
a. Memory map.
b. Reloadable object program, in pesudo object
language.
Size Limitations
The interpretive routine, library functions, table for
allocation of variable addresses, and input-output
subroutines must all be in core storage at execution
© 1963
DO loop control:
Fixed point add:
Floating pOint add
(subroutine):
Floating point multiply
(subroutine ):
Floating point divide
(subroutine ):
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
1.4 msec.
4.5 msec
0.02 msec.
7.4 msec.
4 msec.
18 msec.
14 msec.
26 msec.
19 msec.
5/63
CDC 160-A
244: 182.120
§
182.
.12
.12
Description (Omtd.)
Desc:i:-iption (Omtci.)
Library
Timing of Execution of Pseudo Object Program
(Contd. )
160-A FORTRAN Subroutine
Interpretation
Alone
Natural log function:
Exponential function:
Exponentiation:
. Sine function:
Square root:
Single subscripted floatingaddC(I) = C(I) +
C(I + 1):
Double subscripted
floating add
A(I, J) =A(I, J) +
A(I, J + 1):
Triple subscripted
floating add
B(I, J, K) =
B(I, J, K) +
B(I, J, K + 1):
5/63
150 msec.
180 msec.
270 msec.
167msec.
100 msec.
15 msec.
200 msec.
380 msec.
71 msec.
123 msec.
90 msec.
Eight standard functions are supplied for use by the •
program. Other functions may be written as subroutines and compiled with the source program. The
number of subroutines is unrestricted, except by the
core storage available. The limit is seven in 160
FORTRAN-A. A system tape editing routine is
available which can add routines to the library itself.
Computer Configurations
Unlike 160 FORTRAN, which is limited to punched
tape for compiling and execution, 160-A FORTRAN
permits the use of the following magnetic tape,
card, line printer, and punched tape equipment:
CDC 163 or 1607 Magnetic Tape Unit (30 KC)
CDC 167 Card Reader (250 cards/minute)
IBM 088 Collator (650 cards/minute)
CDC 170 Card Punch (100 cards/minute)
CDC 1612 Line Printer (1,000 lines per minute,
numeric)
CDC 166-2 Line Printer (150 lines per minute).
32 msec.
80 msec.
I AUERBACH I ~
244: 183.100
.STMDARD
EDP
•
RElDRTS
CDC 160-A
Program Translator
INTERCOM
PROGRAM TRANSLATOR: INTERCOM
§
183.
12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
which may arise in the translation are preceded by a
"e" on the output tape, denoting a need for analysis
of the INTERCOM program and correction of the
SICOM object program. All data tapes must be manually repunched because INTERCOM uses an "excess
50" exponent notation while SICOM uses straight
powers of 10; e. g., 48. 123.in INTERCOM is • 123e-2
in SICOM.
Double Precision
INTERCOM Translator.
Single Precision
INTERCOM Translator.
These routines translate programs coded in the popular INTERCOM interpretive language for the Bendix
G-15 computer into the SICOM interpretive language
for the CDC 160-A. The SICOM language and interpretive system are described in Sections 244: 172 and
244:192 respectively.
Two versions of the translator have been developed
to accommodate programs written in either single or
double precision INTERCOM 1000. The single precision version can also translate programs coded in
INTERCOM 500X.
An INTERCOM source program tape must be punched
from the original coding sheets on a Flexowriter
with 160-A coding; G-15 program tapes cannot be
directly used. Output from the one-pass translators
is a program tape in SICOM language. Ambiguities
© 1963
Description (Contd.)
A general one-to-one correspondence exists between
INTERCOM and SICOM instructions, but use of certain INTERCOM commands and facilities necessitates
the inclusion of closed SICOM subroutines to perform
the corresponding functions. The translator automatically includes the follOWing SICOM subroutines
wherever their G-15 counterparts are called for:
square root, log-exponential, sin-cos, arctan, magnetic tape.
.13
Originator:. . . . . . • Scientific Computers, Inc.,
Minneapolis, Minn.
.14
Maintainer:
Control Data Corp. ,
Minneapolis, Minri~
.15
Availability:
November, 1962.
by Auerbach Corporolion and BNA Incorporated
4/63
244:191.100
CDC 160/160-A
Operating Environment
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: GENERAL
§
191.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: • . . . . . . • no integrated supervisor
available.
• 12
Description
No integrated supervisor is available for the
160/160-A systems.
.511 Tracing (Contd.): . • • because of conflicting storage allocation conventions.
Storage required is 358
words. Average program
running speed is 75 instructions per second. TRACK
is called in by operator as
needed •
none.
.512 Snapshots: .•
. 52
Post Mortem:
several separate routines
are provided to dump core
storage to magnetic tape,
paper tape, typewriter, or
1612 printer. Printed output is in octal form.
.6
OPERATOR CONTROL: as incorporated in user's
program • Error halts indicate address at console.
•7
LOGGING: • . . . • . . as incorporated in user's
program .
.8
PERFORMANCE
.81
System Requirements
Library subroutines are loaded at translation time
under operator control.
.13
Availability:
• 14
Orig!nator: • .. ..
library routines described
are available now.
. . ..
.. Control Data Corporation
and members of SWAP
Users' Group.
.15
Maintainer: . .. .. .. .. .. Control Data Corporation
and SWAP.
.2
PROGRAM LOADING
.21
Source of Programs
.211 Programs from on -line
libraries: . • • . . . • none.
.212 Independent programs: on punched tape, cards, or
magnetic tape.
.214 Master routines:. . . . punched tape, cards, or
magnetiC tape.
.22
LibrarX Subroutines:
by operator selection;
loaded at translation time.
• 23
Loading: Sequence: .
manually controlled.
.3
HARDWARE
.811 Minimum configuration: computer with minimum core
storage, paper tape reader,
and punch. This is also the
minimum SWAP computer.
.812 Usable extra facilities: punched cards, magnetic
tape.
none.
.813 Reserved equipment:
.82
System Overhead
.821 Loading time:
..
ALLOCATION:. . • • fixed.
.4
RUNNING
SUPERVISION: •
console alarms (display of
halt locations).
.822 Reloading frequency:
•5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
• 51
O}mamic
.83
.511 Tracing:
Program Space
Available: . .
TRACK; SWAP program
listing G1.01. This routine provides a record on
punched tape of initial and
terminal addresses of all
conditional branch in ...
structions of a 160 program. TRACK is not used
with the 160-A computer
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
(all times approximate)
OSAS, OSAS-A - 45 sec.
160 FORTRAN and 160
FORTRAN-A - 70 sec in 3
parts.
AUTOCOMM - 45 sec.
,INTERFOR - 20 sec .
160-A FORTRAN - 5 sec in
2 parts (magnetic tape).
only FORTRAN must be
reloaded •
OSAS-OSAS-A, all of core.
160 FORTRAN, 2, 240 for
object code and data.
160 FORTRAN-A, 1,560for
object code, 4,000 for data.
160-A FORTRAN, 5,000 for
object code and data on
minimum machine. Up to
29, 000 available using
169 AUXiliary Memory Unit
(core storage).
4/63
244:191.830
§
CDC 160/160-A
191.
• 83
Program Space
AvaUib1e (Contd. ):.. AUTOCOMM, 4, 000 for
program, 4, 000 to 28, 000
for data.
INTERFOR, 1,712 INTERFOR words (1 lNTERFOR
word = 4, 16D-A words) for
data and program on minimum machine. Up to
3,760 INTERFOR words
are avaUsble .
• 84
Program Loading Time: ?
4/63
I AUERBACH I .$J
244: 192.100
.STAADARD
EDP
•
REIORTS
CDC 160.A
Operating Environment
SICOM
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: SICOM
§
192.
•2
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:.
.12
Description
·.21
. . . . . . SICOM Interpretive System.
This routine interprets and executes programs
written in the SICOM language, described in Section
244:172. SICOM programs can be run on a minimwn
CDC 160-A system (8K core store, paper tape reader, and punch), but operation is much simpler if a
161 Typewriter is available. All standard 160-A input-output devices can be utilized.
The interpretive routine occupies all 4, 096 locations
of core storage bank 0 and the top 96 locations of
bank 1. The remaining 4, 000 words of bank 1 are
available to hold the user's program, subroutines,
and data. Each decimally addressed SICOM pseudo
location occupies two 160-A words, so the minimwn
160-A provides 2,000 SICOM locations. Each instruction requires one SICOM location and each data
item requires two locations. Each additional 4, 096word bank of core storage increases the nwnber of
available SICOM locations by 2~ 000; a 32K 16D-A
would have 14,000 SICOM locations, with addresses
uOOO through x999 assigned to the top 4, 000 locations.
SICOM programs are normally prepared and stored
on punched tape. Because there are no parity checks
on punched tape operations, the system includes input and output tape verification operations. Verification involves rereading the tape and comparing two
check swns. Library subroutines must be added to
the program tape or loaded separately each time the
program is rim. Programs can be relocated in core
storage only if all addressing is in the relative mode.
The relative mode is therefore standard for generalpurpose subroutines, but its use in complex programs is very inconvenient because the relative address of a particular data item varies with the location of the instruction referencing it.
· 22
Library subroutines:
punched tape.
• 23
Loading Sequence: .
manually controlled•
• 24
Interpreter Input
.241 Language
Name: •
Exemptions:
• 242 Form: ••.•
November, 1962.
.14
Originator: •
Scientific Computers, Inc.,
Minneapolis, Minn.
.15
Maintainer: . • • • . • Control Data Corp.,
Minneapolis, Minn.
© 1963
SICOM.
none.
punched tape.
.3
HARDWARE ALLOCATION
.31
Storage: . . • . . . . • programs can be relocated
only if all addresses are
relative rather than
absolute.
. 32
Input-Output Units: •• selected by instructions •
.4
RUNNING SUPERVISION
• 41
Simultaneous Working:
none •
. 42
Multi-programming: .
none •
• 43
Multi-sequencing: .•
none •
.44
Errors, Checks and Action
Error
Check or
Interlock
reread. using
"verify input
tape" instruction.
Allocation impossible: none.
In-out error - single:
parity check
In-out error - penistent: parity cbeck
Loading input error:
Execution times for SICOM instrUctions are not
available from the manufacturer.
Availability:
Source·of Programs
.211 Programs from on-line
libraries:. . . . . • . none.
• 212 Independent DrogramS: punched tape.
.213 Data: I. . • •• • •
punched tape, punched cards
magnetic tape or typewriter
• 214 Masfer routlnes:. . .
punched tape.
SICOM has a convenient built-in trace Ill,ode that facilitates program testinK and debugging by printing.
when desired, each SICOM instruction, its location,
and the contents of the pseudo arithmetic register
after execution of the instruction.
.13
PROGRAM LOADING
Storage overflow:
Invalid index value:
Arithmetic overflow:
Underflow:
Invalid operation:
Improper format:
Invalid address:
• 45
RestartS:...
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
none.
check
check
none.
check
checks
check
Action
error stop If check sums
do not agree.
try again.
traosfer to user-coded
error routine.
stop; display error code.
stop; display error code.
stop; display error code.
stop; display ,eIfOl :COde.
stop; display error code.
no provisions.
4/63
CDC 160-A
244:192.500
§
192.
.8
PERFORMANCE
Sxstem Requirements
.5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
.81
.51
Dynamic
.811 Minimum configuration: Minimum 160-A (8,192
words of core storage,
punched tape reader and
punch).
.812 Usable extra facilities: 161 Typewriter (recommended for ease of system
operation), 167 Card
Reader, 166 Line Printer,
163 Magnetic Tape Unit,
165 Plotter. 603 and 606
Magnetic Tape Units will
be available in the future.
.813 Reserved equipment:
4, 192 -core storage
locations.
.511 Tracing:
............... trace mode can be entered
.512 Snapshots: . .
and emerged from upon
execution of instructions
in specific locations selected by the "start trace"
and "stop trace" instructions. Jump switch 4
inhibits all tracing. When
tracing, the following information is output on the
specified device after execution of each SICOM instruction: the location of
the instruction, the instruction itself, and the
contents of the pseudo
arithmetic register
(A.R.).
none.
.52
Post Mortem:
none.
.6
OPERATOR CONTROL
• 61
Signals to Operator: •
.62
Operator Decisions: • • keyboard data entry or Selective Jump-switch
settings.
•7
LOGGING: . . . . • . . as incorporated in user's
program.
.82
..
.821 Loading time:
.822 Reloading frequency:
.83
4/63
System Overhead
console displays (4 octal
digits) or programmed
typeouts.
Program Space
:AvailaEle:
..
?
SICOM master routine can
be kept in working
storage.
1+20 ::: 2,OOO(B - I),
where 1 is number of instructions, D is number of
data items, and B is number of 4, 096-word core
storage banks.
.84
ProgramLoadin~
.85
Program Performance:
Time: ?
?
/
244:201.001
CDC 160-A .
System Performance
NOTES ON SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§ 201 .
.1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
Because CDC 160 applications have been on scientific problems, generalized file
processing problems A, B, C, and D have not been timed. The 160 is used for
off-line card-to~tape and tape-to-printer transcriptions, and these proceed at maximum
card and printer speeds .
.2
SORTING
Sort routine Sort 3X is described in Problem Oriented Facilities, Section 244:151. 13 .
.3
MATRIX INVERSION
The standard estimate of the Users' Guide, which is based on the time for floating
point cumulative multiplication, was used. Configuration IX uses floating point
subroutines and Configuration X uses the 168- 2 Floating Point Arithmetic Unit.
CDC's standard routine for floating point subroutine matrix inversion is also timed .
.4
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING
Both double precision fixed point coding using the 168-1 Fixed Point Arithmetic Unit
and floating point subroutines are timed for Configuration IX, with output via the
typewriter. Configuration X is timed using subroutines and the 168-2 Floating
Point Arithmetic Unit, with output via the paper tape punch. Input to both systems
is via the paper tape reader .
.5
GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING
Fixed point machine coding is used. Input is read by the paper tape reader; therefore,
time for both configurations is the same.
© 1963
by Auerbach_Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244:201.011
CDC 160-A
System Performance
CDC 160-A
SYSTEM PERFORMAMCE
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244:201.012
CDC 160·A
CDC 160·A SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 2
Configuration
Worksheet
Item
Reference
IX
5
Fixed/Floating point
IX
IX, X
X
Fixed
Floating
Floating
Paper Tape
Reader
Paper Tape
Reader
Paper Tape
Reader
161 Typewriter
161 Typewriter
Paper Tape
Punch
input
80 digits
120 digits
120 digits
output
80 digits
120 digits
130 digits
input
Unit name
output
Size of record
Standard
Mathematical
Problem
A
input
T1
228
343
343
output
T2
12,000
18,000
1,180
input
T3
228
343
343
output
T4
12,000
18,000
1,180
m. aec/record
T5
26
90 (. . .)
90 ( . . . )
m. sec/5 loops
T6
60
665
90
m. aec/report
T7
155
618 ( . . .)
618 ( ••• )
m, sec/block
4:200.413
m. sec penalty
7
Paper Tapa
Reader
Unit name
Size of block
Standard
Statistical
Problem
A
60 digits
Records/block
B
1
m. sec/block
Tl
171
m.,Bec penalty
T3
171
m. sec/block
T5
0.220
m. sec/record
T6
---
m. sec/table
T7
0.667
4:200.512
C.P.
(*.*) Estimate. Se. 1:010.4.
3/63
I AUERBACH I ~
244:201.300
.ST!"!RO
_EDP
~,
REPORTS
CDC 160-A
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
.312 Timing Basis: . . . . .
201.
.3
MA TRIX INVERSION
. 31
Standard Problem Estimates
. 313 Graph:. . . . . . . . .
using estimated procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.312 .
see graph below .
.311 Basic Parameters:. . . general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating point to at least 8
decimal digits.
100
7
4
IJ
2
7
I
I
4
Time in
Minutes
for Complete
Inversion
~
II
10
I
I
J
1
/
I
2
11-
X
J
I
7
If
I
I
I
4
I
IJ
2
/
V
J
0.10
/
7
II
~
4
2
0.01
j
'I
Ij
rt
II
2
~
4
7
10
2
4
7
2
100
4
7
1,000
Size of Matrix
© 1963· by
Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244:201.320
§
CDC 160-A .
. 32
subroutine from SWAP
listing .
see graph below.
. 322 Timing Basis:
201.
. 323 Graph:. . . •
I 1. 06 Routine
general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating point to at least 8
decimal digits.
.321 Basic Parameters: .
100
7
4
2
/
10
7
I
4
Time in
Minutes
for Complete
Inversion
J
I
/
2
V
7
4
J
J
2
V
0.10
I
7
I
II
4
2
0.01
2
4
7
2
4
10
2
100
Size of Matrix
3/63
7
4
7
1,000
244:201.400
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
201.
.4
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING
.41
Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates
• 411 Record sizes: • • . . • . 10 signed numbers, avg.
size 5 digits, max.
size 8 digits.
.412 Computation: . . • • . . 5 fifth-order polynomials.
5 divisions.
1 square root.
.413 Timing basis: . . • . . . using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.413 .
.414 Graph: • • • . . . • . • see graph below.
CONFIGURATION IX;DOUBLE LENGTH(6.6 DIGIT PRECISION); FIXED POINT
R = NUMBER OF OUTPUT RECORDS PER INPUT RECORD
100,000
7
4
2
R - 1.0
10,000
~
7 -,
4
-
Time in Milliseconds per
2
Input Record
R
---
0.1
1,000 =
7
4
-
~
~
~
10-''''
II
i-'
.........
R _ O.Ol
-.
2
100
7
4
-
2
10
0.1
2
4
7
2
1.0
4
7
2
10.0
4
7
100.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244:201.415
CDC 160-A
§ 201.
.415 Graph: . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
CONFIGURATION IX; SINGLE LENGTH (8 & 2 DIGIT PRECISION); FLOATING POINT
R = NUMBER OF OUTPUT RECORDS PER INPUT RECORD
100,000
7
4
,.,.".-
2
R = 1.0
10,000
,
7
4
--:r
Time in Milliseconds per
Input Record 2
.,.
\\..'"
/
.,
~~
~
",
~
~
,
~
,
~
b~'
~'"
~.
~
1,000
7
4
2
100
7
4
2
10
2
0.1
4
7
2
1.0
4
7
2
10.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
3/63
4
7
100.0
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
244:201.416
201.
. 416 Graph: .
. . . . ..
see graph below .
CONFIGURATION X; SINGLE LENGTH (8 & 2 DIGIT PR ECISION); FLOATING POINT
R = NUMBER OF OUTPUT RECORDS PER INPUT RECORD
100,000
1
4
2
10,000
1
oJ!
IA
./
4
~
Time in Milliseconds per
Input Record
2
R = 1.0
~
1,000
~""
R ",0.\
1
~
~
~
~
,";:0 0.0\
4
2
100
7
4
2
10
2
4
0.1
7
2
1.0
4
7
2
10.0
4
1
100.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244:201.500
CDC 160-A
.512 Computation: .
§ 201.
•5
GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING
.51
Standard Statistical Problem A Estimates
• 511 Record size:. . . . ••
augment T elements in
cross-tabulation tables •
using estimating procedure outlined in
Users' Guide,
4:200.513 .
see graph below •
.513 Timing basis: .
thirty 2-digit integral
numbers.
• 514 Graph:
•..••.•.
10,000
7
4
2
1,000
7
~
4
Time in Milliseconds per
Record
I'
./
I-
2
~
100
7
4
2
10
7
4
2
2
4
2
7
10
4
2
7
100
T. Number of Augmented Elements
3/63
4
7
1,000
244:211.101
CDC 160·A
Physical Characteristics
CDC 160·A
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244:211.102
CDC 160·A
CDC 160·A PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Unit Name
Processor
Paper
Tape
Reader
Paper
Tape
Punch
Fixed
Point
Arithmetic
Unit
Fixed
Point
Arithmetic
Unit
Auxiliary
Memory
Unit
Card
Reader
160-A
350
BRPE-11
168-1
168-2
169-1 169-2 169-3
167
36x 62x30
10x12x9
29x18X30
29X 18x30
43 x48X 20
30X19X41
BI0
25
290
340
600 to 800
210
75 data
100 power
Part of 160
IDENTITY
Model Number
Height x Width x Depth, in.
Weight, Ibs.
PHYSICAL
Maximum Cable Lengths
Part of 160
Temperature, of.
Storage
Ranges
Humidl ty, '7.
ATMOSPHERE
Temperature, of.
80 max
80 max
80 max
80 max
80 max
Humidity, '7.
40-60
40-60
40-60
40-60
40-60
7,860
2,900
4,200
4,700 5,600 6,500
630
Working
Ranges
Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.
Air Flow, cfm.
Internal Filters
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Nominal
115
115
115
115
ll5
115
Tolerance
10'7.
10'7.
10'7.
60
60
60
I
1
1
Voltage
Nominal
ELEC.
TRICAL
60
60
Tolerance
Phases
LoadKVA
3
1
1.8
1
0.1
NOTES
3/63
60
Cycles
I AUERBACH / ~
0.9
1.4
1.6
2.1
0.2
244:211.103
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
CDC 160-A PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS (Contd.)
Unit Name
IDENTITY
Model Number
Height XWidth XDepth, in.
Card
Punch
Adapter
Line
Printer
Typewriter
Incremental
Plotter
Line
Printer
Magnetic
Tape
Unit
Tape
Unit
Controller
Magnetic
Tape
Unit
Tape
Unit
Controller
Card
Reader
Punch
Control
Card
Read/
Punch
Magnetic
Tape
Unit
Magnetic
Tape
Unit
170
166-2
161
165
1612
603
162-1
606
162-2
1610-A
1609
163
164
51X40x26
68 X 27 X 28
68x27x28
690
690
9,500
1st unit
6,500
eachadd'l
5,500
1st unit
2,500
each add'l
Yes
Yes
29x18x30
41X35X19
240
850
Temperature, of.
80 max
Humidity, "I.
Weight, 1bs.
38 X30 X30
56X72X31
72 X28 X.33
890
800
290
800
340
600
775
80 max
70 max
80 max
80 mex
80 max
80 max
70 max
70 max
40-60
40-60
40-60
40-60
40 -60
40-60
40-60
40-60
40-60
2,750
7,500
6,400
10,000
2,400
4,200
4,000
5,680
800
800
Yes
Yes
350
47 X 18 X 14
190
29x 18 X 30 72X28X33
29x 18x30 43X20X48
PHYSICAL
Maximum Cable Lengths
Temperature, of.
Storage
Ranges
Humidi ty, "I.
Working
Ranges
ATMOSPHERE
Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.
2,300
500
Air Flow, cfm.
Internal Filters
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Nominal
115
115
115
120
Tolerance
10"1.
Nominal
60
Tolerance
3
Yes
115
115
115
5"1.
10"1.
Yes
115
115
208
115
208
208
115
115
Voltage
ELECTRICAL
5"1.
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
400
60
400
60
60
60
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
3
3
1
1
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.15
1.9
3.0
2.0
0.9
2.0
0.9
2.5
1.4
Cycles
Phases
Load KVA
0.7
3.0
NOTES
,
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
244:221.101
·STANDIRD
EDP
•
REPORTS
CDC 160-A
Price Data
PRICE DATA
§
221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
No.
Central
Processor
160-A
168-1
168-2
Computer, including
8, 192 words of core storage
Buffer channel
Paper tape reader and punch
Auxiliary Arithmetic Unit (fixed point)
Auxiliary Arithmetic Unit
169-1
169-2
169-3
Auxiliary Core Storage
1 module of 8,192 words
1 module of 16,384 words
I module of 24,576 words
Storage
InputOutput
Name
161
167-1
167-2
170
166-2
1612
1610-A
603
162-1
606
162-2
163
165-2
On-Line Input-Output Typewriter
Card Reader
Card Reader (Hollerith -to- BCD conversion)
Card Punch Controller
Buffered Line Printer
Line Printer
Card Reader, Punch, Printer Control
Magnetic Tape Unit
Tape Synchronizer for 603 M. T. U.
Magnetic Tape Unit
Tape Synchronizer for 606 M. T. U.
Magnetic Tape System, including Control Unit and
1 Tape Unit (163-1)
2 Tape Units (163-2)·
3 Tape Units (163-3)
4 Tape Units (163-4)
Incremental Plotter
© 1963
PRICES
Monthly
Rental
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchase
$
$
$
2,250
225
90,~00
390
450
125
130
15,500
18,750
1,250
2,000
2, 750
100
150
200
50,000
80,000
110,000
262
400
460
335
690
1,840
1,500
550
500
825
700
140
140
150
90
325
400
190
120
105
140
115
10,500
15,700
18,100
13,700
30,000
73,500
57,000
24,000
20,000
36,000
28,000
970
1,482
1,994
2,506
285
235
400
565
730
130
38,800
59,300
79,800
100,300
9,000
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
3/63
CDC 3200
Control Data Corporation
c
c
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
CDC 3200
/.
Control Data Corporation
/
,/
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
245:001.001
CDC 3200
Contents
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
14.
15.
16.
17.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration
............. .
6- Tape Auxiliary Storage System . . . . . .
V
6-Tape Business-Scientific System . . . . .
VI
VnA
10- Tape General System (Integrated) . . . .
VIlB
10-Tape General System (Paired) ..
Typical 8-Tape System.
Internal Storage
Core Storage. . . . . .. .
828, 838
Disk File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1311, 2311 IBM Disk Storage Drives . . . . . . . .
3235
Drum Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
861, 862
Drum Storage .. .
Central Processors
3204
Basic Processor.
3205
Scientific Processor .. .
3210
Data Processor . . . . . . . . .
General Processor .. .
3215
Console..
. ...................... .
Input-Output; Punched Card and Tape
405
Card Reader (and controllers)
415, 523
and 544
Card Punches (and controllers) .. .
3691, 3694 Paper Tape Reader/Punches . . . . .
Input- Output; Printers
3152
Line Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1403
IBM Printer, Models 2 and 3 . . . . .
501
Line Printer.
505
Line Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input-Output; Magnetic Tape
600 Series, 7-track tape units.
600 Series, 9-track tape units ..
Input-Output; Other
3682
Satellite Coupler . . . . . . . . . . .
3681
Data Channel Converter . . . . . .
Incremental Plotter . . . . . . .
3293
Simultaneous Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruction List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .... .
Problem Oriented Facilities . . . .
Process Oriented Languages
3200 COBOL ..
3200 FORTRAN.
Basic FORTRAN II ..
Machine Oriented Languages
3200 COMPASS . . . .
Basic Assembler.
Operating Environment
3200 SCOPE . . . .
System Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Data Table . . . .
Generalized File Processing .. .
Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Matrix Inversion . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generalized Mathematical Processing .. .
Generalized Statistical Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. .... .
Price Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
245:011
245:021
245:031
245:031.1
245:031. 2
245:031. 3
245:031. 4
245:031. 5
245:041
245:042
245:043
245:044
245:045
245:051
245:051
245:051
245:051
245:061
245:071
245:072
245:073
245:081
245:082
245:083
245:083
245:091
245:092
245:101
245:101
245:102
245:111
245:121
245:141
245:151
245:161
245:162
245:163
245:171
245:172
245:191
245:201.001
245:201. 011
245:201.1
245:201. 2
245:201. 3
245:201. 4
245:201. 5
245:211
245:221
. 11/64
245:011.100
CDC 3200
Introduction
INTRODUCTION
§
011.
The Control Data 3200 is a scientific computer system with large-scale performance
capability and a medium-scale price tag. Its large-scale processing ability is derived from up
to 32,768 24-bit words of core storage with a cycle time of only 1. 25 microseconds, a 0.5microsecond control register file, an interrupt system, and up to eight input-output data channels. (For comparative purposes, the processing capacity of the 3200 is somewhere between
that of the older IBM 7044 and 7094, but with a monthly rental of about $18, 000 as compared to
$37,000 for the 7044 and $66, 000 for the 7094. *)
First delivered in May 1964 (just after the announcement of the IBM System/360
computer systems), the Control Data 3200 has since had its competitive position improved by
recent price reductions, by a considerable improvement in the speeds of its decimal arithmetic
operations, by the announcement of the program-compatible CDC 3100 and 3300 systems, and
by the provision of IBM System/360-compatible magnetic tape units.
For scientific processing, the performance of the CDC 3215 General Processor
approximately equals the performance of the Model 60 processor of the IBM System/360.
The comparative shortcomings of the Control Data system (no radix conversions, only three
index registers, and a short word length) are roughly balanced by its comparative assets
(eight available data channels, fast memory search operations, block operations** in parallel
with both computation and I/O, and no restrictions on the type of peripherals which can be
connected). Financially, the performance comparison between the two systems seems to
favor Control Data, with a 10-tape 3200 system renting for $18, 010 per month versus the
$36,395 needed to obtain a comparable System/360.
The lower cost of the Control Data 3200 system is due mainly to reductions in the cost
of the central processor and associated control equipment. Central processor cost is less than
20% of the total cost of a typical 3200 installation, as opposed to more than 40% of the total for a
typical IBM 7044 or 7094 installation. This points up rather vividly the present trend toward reduced internal processing costs, while the input-output equipment remains relatively expensive.
From an economic viewpoint, the 3200 processor is especially attractive for use in multicomputer applications. A Control Data 3200 system using two processors can, for example,
provide the processing capability of an IBM 7094 installation at about half the cost.
The Control Data 3200 system is machine-code compatible only with the CDC 3100
and 3300 systems. It has, in addition, some compatibility through common programming
languages with the Control Data 3400, 3600, and 3800 computer systems.
Hardware
The 3200 system offers a choice of four different processors which differ primarily
in the volume and type of data they can handle most efficiently. The comparative features of
the available processors are as follows:
3204 Basic Processor - contains arithmetic and control logic to perform 24-bit
fixed-point arithmetic, 48-bit fixed-point addition and subtraction, Boolean,
word-handling, and decision-making operations. An equivalent processor, with
slower core storage modules and reduced I/o throughput capabilities, is
available in the Control Data 3100 computer system (Computer System Report
No. 254) .
•
It
3205 Scientific Processor - has the capabilities of the Basic Processor, but can
also handle 48-bit floating-point arithmetic, as well as 48-bit fixed-point multiplication and division.
3210 Data Processor - has the capabilities of the Basic Processor, plus the
ability to handle 6-bit binary-coded decimal characters. This includes add
and subtract (but not multiply and divide) operations on decimal fields up
to 12 characters in length.
* Rates based on comparable 10-tape configurations.
** Block operations include memory searches and mass transfer operations.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
245:011.101
CDC 3200
§
OIL
•
3215 General Processor - an expanded unit that includes all the facilities
of the 3204, 3205, and 3210. An equivalent processor, with faster core
storage units and a few additional instructions to assist in multiprogramming,
is available in the Control Data 3300 computer system (Computer System
Report No. 255).
Each of the four models is essentially a single-address, fixed word-length, binary
processor. The additional capabilities of the 3205, 3210, and 3215 are implemented by extra
hardware packages which enable "scientific" and "BCD" type operations to be performed automatically. However, all commands in the 3200 instruction repertoire can be executed (either by
hardware or software) on any processor model. The Basic Processor, for example, is not
'capable of directly processing instructions that require the floating-point orBCD packages. fustead, these instructions (called "trapped" instructions) are automatically detected and their
functions are simulated by subroutines. To the user then, every 3200 can appear as a system
with all of the facilities of a binary machine plus some of those of a decimal character-oriented
one. This capability is certainly an advantage, but it may also be a disadvantage if improperly
utilized. The ability to use programs from other installations without regard to the processor
model for which the program was written is certainly desirable. On the other hand, a practice
of running programs which were not designed for the actual processor may result in unnecessarily long execution times, due to inadvertent overuse of the subroutines that simulate the instructions which cannot be directly processed.
fustruction execution times are fast: fixed-point 24-bit addition requires only 2.5
microseconds, while a floating-point multiplication with two storage references takes 19
microseconds. fu the optional BCD mode, two 12-character operands can be added in 12 microseconds. No facilities for direct multiplication or division of BCD fields are available. It
appears that the BCD operations will be useful for auxiliary processing of alphabetic and decimal
data, but not particularly suitable for major commercial applications.
An "off-line" search facility allows consecutive locations in core storage to be
searched while the main program continues unhindered. The usefulness of this facility is limited by the fact that, unless the program has been carefully designed, core storage may already
be "saturated" by the other demands of the processor and peripheral devices. Future developments in this area could, however, be of great value in information storage and retrieval applications.
An unusual "power-off" interrupt feature automatically transfers control to a fixed
location in the event of power failure within the 3200 system. A special routine then prepares
the system for an orderly shutdown so that no data will be lost. The whole operation takes 30
milliseconds; 16 milliseconds to detect the power failure and 14 milliseconds to process the interrupt.
The Control Data 3200 system can be equipped with up to eight input-output data channels, enabling the system to compute while simultaneously performing up to eight read-write
operations which use any eight peripheral devices in the system. Use of the available buffered
peripheral units, which require little data channel time, can allow the number of concurrently
operating peripherals to increase to well beyond the number of data channels in a system.
Computation is normally delayed by input-output operations while the data being
transferred is accessed or stored away in core storage. This delay, which amounts to one
core storage cycle per word transferred, can sometimes be avoided by using different core
storage modules for computational and input-output purposes. However, while it is possible
to avoid delaying computation, it is not possible to increase the total system throughput above
666,667 words (2,666,667 characters) per second.
Many of the input-output controllers supplied with Control Data 3200 computer systems
have two or more data channel connections. Such controllers can be used to switch peripheral
units between two computer systems. The use of more than one central processor in an installation is comparatively frequent in Control Data 3000 Series installations, as both peripheral
units and storage modules can easily be switched under program control.
Significant recent announcements by Control Data have included the IBM System/360compatible magnetic tape units mentioned above, the 2,000, OOO-character-per-second transfer rate of the Model 861 and 862 Drum Storage Units, and the provision of controllers for
IBM 1311 and 2311 Disk Storage Drives. The present peripheral units available with the 3200
computer system (and with all Control Data 3000 Series computer systems) include:
•
11/64
Model 828 and 838 Disk Files Capacity: 33 or 66 million characters
Access time: 187 milliseconds average
INTRODUCTION
245:011.102
§ OIl.
•
IBM 1311 and 2311 Disk Storage Drives Capacity: 3 or 9.7 million characters
Access time: 170 milliseconds average
•
Model 3235 Drum Storage Capacity: 0.5 million characters
Access time: 17 milliseconds average
Data transfer rate: 167, 000 characters per second
•
Model 861 and 862 Drum Storage Capacity: 4.2 or 2.1 million characters
Access time: 17 or 8.6 milliseconds average
Data transfer rate: up to 2, 000, 000 characters
per second
•
Punched card equipment Maximum reader speed: 1, 200 cards per minute
Maximum punch speed: 250 cards per minute
•
Paper tape equipment Maximum reader speed: 1,000 frames per second
Maximum punch speed: 110 frames per second
•
Line printing equipment CDC 501: 1,000 lines per minute
CDC 505: 500 lines per minute
CDC 3152: 150 lines per minute
IBM 1403 Model 2: 600 lines per minute
IBM 1403 Model 3: 1, 100 lines per minute
•
7-track and 9-track magnetic tape units Maximum 7-trackspeed: 120,000 six-bit characters per second
Maximum 9-track speed: 90,000 eight-bit characters per second
Software
/
I
The major assembly language for the Control Data 3100, 3200, and 3300 computer systems is called 3200 COMPASS. It bears only a general resemblance to the COMPASS language
used for the Control Data 3600, and programs writtcn in the two assembly languages are not
interchangeable. The 3200 COMPASS assembler requires 8,192 words of core storage and 5
input-output devices, including at least 2 magnetic tape units during the assembly process. The
output of the assembler is machine-language coding suitable for use with the SCOPE Operating
System. (A reduced form of the 3200 COMPASS assembler, with no macro facilities. is available
for Control Data 3100 computer systems which have only 4. 096 words of core storage.)
The standard mathematical compiler is 3200 FORTRAN. This compiler uses a
FORTRAN IV style language which is not simply an exact copy of some other language, but
rather an independently-designed scientific programming language that offers a number of
performance-improving features. In this respect it appears that Control Data is continuing
a policy established in its FORTRAN-63 compiler for the CDC 1604; that of constructively
re-evaluating the "standard" language before implementation. This policy gives promise of
continued improvements in FORTRAN.
Programs writtcn in FORTRAN can be compiled on any Control Data 3100, 3200, or
3300 computer system that has at least 8,192 words of core storage, 3 magnetic tape units, and
2 other input-output devices. The 3200 FORTRAN compiler was released to customers in
November 1964. A Basic FORTRAN II system is available for smaller configurations.
COBOL language processing is provided for the Control Data 3100, 3200, and 3300 computer systems by the 3200 COBOL compiler. The language includes almost all of Required
COBOL-61, and the compiler requires a 4, 096-word svstem with 3 tape units and 2 other inputoutput devices for compilation. Release of 3200 COBOL to customer is scheduled for March 1965.
The SCOPE Operating System helps to assemble programs and to provide input-output
services as required. It uses between 700 and 1,500 core storage locations to hold the resident
program during operation; the exact amount depends upon the number and type of input-output
routines required by a particular program. At present 3200 SCOPE is oriented toward magnetic tape processing, but a random access enhancement, specifically designed to servicc the
IBM 1311 and 2311 Disk Storage Drives, is expected to be released in Spring 1965.
Other program packages under development include a Report Generator (scheduled
for June 1965), a Linear Programming Package (June 1965), and a PERT Package (March 1965).
In summary, the Control Data 3200 is a fast, modestly-priced system that fully upholds Control Data's position in the market as a producer of powerful scientific computers at
attractive prices. The 3200 is also significant in pointing up the growing financial imbalanr
between the cost of internal processing and that of peripheral equipment.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
245:021.100
CDC 3200
Data Structure
DA TA STRUCTURE
§ 021.
.1
.2
STORAGE LOCATIONS
Name of Location
Size
Purpose or Use
Word:
24 bits
Character:
Block:
6 bits
1 to N characters
or 1 to N words
basic addressable unit
(data or instruction).
addressable data unit.
Search, Move, and Inputoutput instructions .
INFORMATION FORMAT
Type of Information
Representation
Operand: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24- or 4S-bit fixed point word.
4S-bit floating point word (optional).
6-bit character.
4-bit BCD character (optional) .
Instruction: .
. 1 or 2 words.
Field: . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . 1 to 13 BCD characters.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
245:031.001
CDC 3200
System Configurotion
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
031.
GENERAL
Every Control Data 3200 computer system includes the following units:
•
A 3204, 3205, 3210, or 3215 Central Processor.
•
A 1. 25-microsecond Core Storage Unit ranging from 8,192 to 32,768 words
(32,768 to 131,072 characters) in capacity.
•
A desk console with detachable keyboard and adjacent I/O typewriter console.
•
A Power Converter and Control Unit.
Two 3206 Data Channels are included in the basic system. Up to six more can be added,
so that a fully-extended Control Data 3200 computer system will have eight data channels. Eight
peripheral units or controllers can be connected to each data channel.
The data channels used in all of the Control Data 3000 Series computers present a common interface with peripheral units. As a result of this, any of the 3000 Series peripheral units
described in this report can be connected through a 3206 Data Channel to a Control Data 3200
computer. Details of the loadings these units place on a Control Data 3200 computer system
are described in the Simultaneous Operations section of this report, starting on page 245:111. 100.
Some peripheral units or controllers can be connected to more than one data channel.
This facility may be used either to allow two concurrent data transmissions to take place, or to
allow the peripheral unit to be switched between two computer systems. A bank of magnetic
tape units connected to a dual-channel controller is a case where multiple data transmissions
would be the normal reason for having the two data channels; while a printer connected to two
different computer systems by way of a dual-channel controller could be used by either system,
as the situation in the computer room demands.
The core storage modules can similarly be connected to, and accessed by, two computers.
Each 8, 192-word module is independent and permits dual access by a second processor or
special device.
SELECTION OF REPRESENTATIVE CONFIGURATIONS
The Control Data 3200 computer system is shown in the following Standard System Configurations, as defined in the Users' Guide, page 4:030.100:
•
•
•
•
Configuration V: 6-Tape Auxiliary Storage Configuration.
Configuration VI; 6-Tape Business/Scientific Configuration.
Configuration VIIA; 10-Tape General Integrated Configuration.
Configuration VnB; 10-Tape General Paired Configuration, using a Control
Data 160 Computer System as the satellite system.
AN ADDITIONAL ILLUSTRATED CONFIGURATION
In addition to the Standard System Configurations illustrated in this section, an additional
8-tape configuration is shown (page 245:031. 500), which allows for the switching of peripheral
units and for the joint use of core storage by two independent computer systems.
11/64
245:031.1 00
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
031.
.1
6-TAPE AUXIIJARY STORAGE SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION V
Deviations from Standard Configuration:
auxiliary storage capacity is 65% larger.
card reader is 140% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
magnetic tapes are 40% faster.
Equipment
Rental
828 Disk File (33 million char)
3432 Controller
$ 2,400
1,050
8,192 words of Core Storage
3204 Basic Processor
Console with Monitor Typewriter
4,300
3206 Data Channels (2)
405 Card Reader (1,200 cpm)
3248 Controller
400
100
415 Card Punch (250 cpm)
3245 Controller
295
330
505 Line Printer (500 lpm)
3256 Line Printer Controller
635
515
603 41. 7KC Magnetic Tape Units (6)
3229 Controller
TOTAL RENTAL:
©1 964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
3,300
600
$13,925
11/64
245:031.200
§
CDC 3200
031.
.2
6-TAPE BUSINESS/SCIENTIFIC SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION VI
Deviations from Standard Configuration: .
card reader is 140% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
magnetic tapes are 40% faster.
Eguipment
16,384 words of Core Storage
$ 1,250*
3215 General Processor
Console with Monitor Typewriter
5,150
3206 Data Channels (2)
405 Card Reader (1,200 cpm)
3248 Controller
415 Card Punch (250 cpm)
3446 Controller
295
450
505 Line Printer (500 lpm)
3256 Line Printer
635
515
603 41. 7KC Magnetic Tape Units (6)
3229 Controller
TOTAL RENTAL:
* Price shown is for the additional 8,192 words over and above the basic
core storage included in the General Processor rental.
11/64
400
100
3,300
600
$12,695
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
245:031.300
031.
.3
10-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (INTEGRATED); CONFIGURATION VITA
Deviations from Standard Configuration: .
core storage is 33 % larger.
3 less index registers are provided.
card reader is 140% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
Equipment
32,768 words of Core Storage
3215 General Processor
Console with Monitor Typewriter
$ 3,500*
}
5,150*
3206 Data Channels (4)
240*
405 Card Reader (1,200 cpm)
3248 Controller
400
100
415 Card Punch (250 cpm)
3446 Controller
295
450
505 Line Printer (500 lpm)
3256 Controller
635
515
604 60KC Magnetic Tape Units (6)
3229 Controller
3,600
600
604 60KC Magnetic Tape Units (4)
3228 Controller
2,400
425
TOTAL RENTAL:
$18,310
* The rental for the 3215 General Processor includes the charges for the first
8,192 words of core storage and for the first two 3206 Data Channels.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and info, inc.
11/64
245:031.400
§
CDC 3200
031.
.4
10-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED); CONFIGURATION VIIB*
Deviations from Standard Configuration: .
3 less index registers.
direct connection to satellite system.
card reader is 1100% faster.
Eguipment
16,384 words of Core Storage
$ 1,250**
3215 General Processor
Console with Monitor Typewriter
5,150**
3206 Data Channels (2)
405 Card Reader (1,200 cpm)
3248 Controller
To Satellite
160 System
(at right)
604 60KC Magnetic Tape Units (4)
3228 Controller
2,400
425
604 60KC Magnetic Tape Units (4)
3228 Controller
2,400
425
TOTAL ON-LINE EQUIPMENT:
$12,550
TOTAL SATELLITE EQUIPMENT:
$ 5,165
TOTAL RENTAL:
$17,715
* This configuration can be rearranged in several
ways: e. g., see "Typical 8-Tape System" on
page 245:031. 500.
*
11/64
400
100
The rental for the 3215 General Processor includes the charges for the first
8,192 words of core storage and for the first two 3206 Data Channels.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
245:031.401
031.
SATELLITE EQUIPMENT (CDC 160)
Deviations from Standard Configuration: .
direct connection to main system.
core storage is 100% larger.
multiply/divide is included.
paper tape equipment is included.
card reader is 140% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
magnetic tapes are 30% slower.
Eguipment
4,096 words of Core Storage
160 Processor
$ 1,500
Console with Monitor Typewriter
Paper Tape Reader (350 cps)
Paper Tape Punch (110 cps)
3681 Data Charmel Converter
3682 Satellite Coupler
275
175
4.05 Card Reader (1,200 cpm)
3248 Controller
400
100
415 Card Punch (250 cpm)
3446 Controller
295
450
505 Line Printer (500 lpm)
3256 Controller
635
515
601 21KC Magnetic Tape Units (2)
3127 Controller
500
320
TOTAL SATELLITE EQUIPMENT:
$ 5,165
To 3200 System
(at left)
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
CDC 3200
245:031.500
§
031.
.5
TYPICAL 8-TAPE SYSTEM
...I -I
To 3204 Basic Processor
(with Option 2)
Equipment
Rental
16,384 words of Core Storage
$ 1,250*
3215 General Processor
Console with Monitor Typewriter
5,150*
3206 Data Channels (2)
r-
405 Card Reader (1,200 cpm)
3649 Controller
400
415 Card Punch (250 cpm)
3644 Controller
295
675
501 Line Printer (1,000 lpm)
3659 Controller
865
700
604 60KC Magnetic Tapes (8)
3423 Controller
4,800
1,600
+
I
0
I
III
11111
I 1 I~
I
I
I I It
I III
I I II
To 3681 Data Channel
Converter or 3206 Standard
Channel of Satellite System
(at right)
3682 Satellite Coupler
TOTAL ON-LINE EQUIPMENT:
SATELLITE EQUIPMENT - 160 SYSTEM:
$16,235
1,775
TOTAL RENTAL:
$18,010
TOTAL ON-LINE EQUIPMENT:
$16,235
SATELLITE EQUIPMENT - 3200 SYSTEM:
TOTAL RENTAL:
* The rental for the 3215 General Processor includes the charges for the first
8, 192 words of core storage and for the first two 3206 Data Channels.
11/64
175
3,050
$19,285
245:031.501
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§ 031.
SATELLITE EQUIPMENT
OPTION 1 (CDC 160)
Equipment
Core Storage: 4,096 words
160 Processor
$ 1,500
Console including
Paper Tape Reader/Punch and
Typewriter
3681 Data Channel Converter
TOTAL SATELLITE EQUIPMENT:
I II I I
tttH
275
$ 1,775
--".-.....
To Controllers
on facing page
OPTION 2 (CDC 3200)
-----,
To Shared Core Storage
of General System
I
3204 Basic Processor
Console with Monitor Typewriter
$ 4,300
3206 Standard Data Channel
I II I I
t tttt
~
To Controllers
on facing page
TOTAL SATELLITE EQUIPMENT:
$ 4,300
Less allowance for 32,768 characters
of core storage included in 3204 Basic
Processor:
$ 1,250
EFFECTIVE TOTAL FOR
SATELLITE EQUIPMENT:
$ 3,050
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
245:041.100
CDC 3200
Internal Storage
Core Storage
INTERNAL STORAGE: CORE STORAGE
§
.13
041.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: ..
.12
Basic Use:
13
Description (Contd.)
3203 Storage Modules. It is not possible to have
one 3209 and one 3203 Module in a single computer
system.
. 3203 Storage Module (16K).
3209 Storage Module (8K).
. 14
Availability:
.4 months .
Description
· 15
First Delivery:
· May, 1964.
A Control Data 3200 computer system can have
8,192, 16,384, or 32,768 24-bit word locations of
core storage. The cycle time is 1. 25 microseconds
per word, and the access time is 0.75 microseconds. The core storage units use a basic 8,192word module, and overlapped accesses are possible
when more than one module is present. Overlapping is used principally to minimize the load
placed on the central processor by input-output
operations. Minimum loading occurs when the
data used for computational purposes is contained
in one module while the input-output areas are
in a different module. As there is some common
circuitry used both by the input-output transfers
and by the central processor, it is not possible to
eliminate completely the loading on the central
processor, but even under worst-case conditions
it can be reduced by over 75%.
.16
Reserved Storage:
· the uppermost 32 locations
are, by convention, reserved for the Autoload
and Autodump routines.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
. 21
Storage Medium: . . . . magnetic cores .
. 23
Storage Phenomenon: .. direction of magnetization .
.24
Recording Permanence
. . . . . . . working storage.
All of core storage is available to the programmer,
with no areas reserved for control functions, index
registers, arithmetic operands, or other system
requirements. By convention, however, the
uppermost 32 words are reserved for the Autoload
and Autodump routines, which can be initiated
from the console.
Each physical storage word consists of 28 bits:
24 data bits plus 4 parity bits. The 24 data bits
are functionally broken down into four 6-bit characters, and one of the parity bits is associated
with each separate character. Addressing of
core storage can be either by word or by character,
using 15 bits or 17 bits per address, respectively.
The 3209 Storage Module contains 8,192 words of
storage and is the basic module mentioned above.
The 3203 Storage Module is functionally equivalent
to two 3209tltorage Modules, having 16,384 words
of storage arranged in two independent banks, each
with its own read/write control.
A Control Data 3200 computer system can have
one 3209 Storage Module, or either one or two
.31
.241 Data erasable by instructions: . . . . . . . yes.
.242 Data regenerated constantly: ...
· no.
· no (safeguarded by power-off
. 243 Data volatile: ..
interrupt) .
. no.
. 244 Data permanent:.
.245 Storage changeable: . no.
· 27
Interleaving Levels:
. no interleaving as such;
however, 3203 Storage
Modules provide asyn'chronous operation with
overlapped module access.
.28
Access TeChniques:... coincident current.
· 29
Potential Transfer Rates
.292 Peak data rates Cycling rates: . . . . .
Unit of data: . . . . . .
Gain factor:
Loss factor:
800,000 cps.
word or character.
two banks can be overlapped.
both program and inputoutput have common use of
some circuitry.
Data rate: . . . . . . . . 800,000 words (or characters)/ sec/module.
Compound data rate: . 1,333,000 words (or characters)/ sec.
.3
DATA CAPACITY
Module and System Sizes
Minimum
Storage
Identity:
Modules:
Words:
Characters:
Tnstructions:
3209 Storage
Module
1
8,192
32,768
8,192
Maximum
Storage
3203 Storage
Module
1
16,384
65,536
16,384
© 1 964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
2 3203 Storage
Modules.
2.
32,768.
131,072.
32,768.
11/64
245:041.320
CDC 3200
§ 041.
.7
. 32
. 72
Rules for Combining
Modules: . . . . . . . . . one 3209, or one or two
3203' s (no combinations
are allowed).
.4
CONTROLLER: . . . . . no separate controller
required.
.5
ACCESS TIMING
.51
Arrangement of Heads: 1 read/write control for the
3209; 2 read/write controls
for each 3203.
.53
Simultaneous Operations: . . . . . . . . . . . accesses to each half (8,192
words or 32,768 characters) of the 3203, or to
each one of 2 3203's, are
asynchronous and independent of each other.
Access Time Parameters
Access time: . . . . . . . 0.75 fJ.sec.
Cycle time: . . . .
. . 1. 25 fJ.sec.
For data unit of: . . . . 1 word or 1 character.
.6
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . . . . . . . none.
11/64
Transfer Load Size
With self: . . . . . . . . . 1 to 128 characters, one
character at a time.
1 to 32 words, four characters (i. e., one word) at
a time.
.73
.52
STORAGE PERFORMANCE
Effective Transfer Rate
With self: . . . . . . . . . 250,000 words/ sec.
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Invalid address: none
Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of
data:
Recovery of
data:
Dispatch of
data:
Timing conflicts:
Action
high-order bits
are truncated.
not possible.
generate parity
bit.
record parity
pit.
parity check
send parity bit.
interlock until
cleared.
halt operation;
console light.
245:042.100
CDC 3200
Internal Storage
828 and 838 Disk Files
INTERNAL STORAGE: 828 AND 838 DISK FILES
. 13
§ 042.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .
828 Disk File.
838 Disk File.
. 12
Basic Use: .
auxiliary storage .
.13
Description
The Model 828 and 838 Disk File Subsystems provide from 33 million to 264 million characters of
random access storage, any part of which can be
accessed within 365 milliseconds. The average access time is approximately 250 milliseconds and is
made up of the positioning time, during which the
access arms are positioned over the appropriate
disc tracks, and a latency time while the discs revolve under the read/write heads and the required
record comes into position.
An independently-positionable access arm serves
each disc; this is the most significant difference
between the Control Data Disk Files and most of the
other currently-available disc storage units, which
use a comb-like access mechanism in which all of
the arms move in unison. The "cylinder" mode of
disc file organization, which is currently being emphasized by mM and other manufacturers, therefore does not apply to the Model 828 and 838 units.
From one to four Disk Files, each with a capacity
of either 33 million (Model 828) or 66 million
(Model 838) characters, can be included in a subsystem. Each Disk File unit can handle two concurrent operations - which may be reading, writing,
searching, or positioning - but the whole subsystem
is limited to one or two concurrent operations which
involve data tr!\llsmission. Whether the subsystem
limit is one or two data transmission operations depends on whether a single-channel or a dual-channel
controller is being used; both types are available.
Operations which require data transmissions are
reading, writing, and searching for data. Searching
for address positions and positioning of the access
arms can proceed without supervision from the central computer once they have been initiated.
Reading and writing operations can handle records
of any size, and data transmission takes place at
either 68,000 or 110,000 characters per second, depending on whether the record is in the Inner Zone
or the Outer Zone. Inner Zone records, which
amount to one-third of the data capacity of the files,
are transmitted at 68, 000 characters per second and
place a load on the computer system's core storage
of 17,000 memory cycles per second - or 2. 1%of a
core storage module's maximum capacity in the case
of the Control Data 3200 computer system. Outer
Zone records, with their faster transmission rate,
make a proportionately higher demand on the core
Description (Contd. )
storage module; this amounts to 27,500 memory
cycles per second, or 3. 4% of a Control Data 3200
core storage module's maximum capacity .
Data searching operations make the same demands
on the core storage as the reading or writing operations. In a Data Search operation, data in the files
can be searched and tested for equal or greater-than
conditions, using information supplied by the program for the necessary comparisons. Data searching continues until either the search is successful
or the area specified as the search area has been
exhausted. At the end of a search, either because
the search has been successful or because no space
remains to be searched, an interrupt request is
sent by the Disk File to the central processor, and
a flag is set showing the result of the operation.
Address searching, in contrast to data searching,
makes no demands on the core storage modules
during its operation, nor does it require a data
channel to be reserved for its use. After an address
search has been initiated, it uses no processor facilities until the address position comes under the
read/write heads. At this time an interrupt request
is signalled, and the address search function is concluded. The address search facility minimizes the
use of the data channels by making their use unnecessary when the desired record position on the
discs is still some distance away from the read/
write heads. A read or write instruction is preceded by an address search, calculated to initiate
an interrupt in sufficient time to allow the original
read or write instruction to be given just before the
desired record itself comes under the read/write
heads. The rotational delay on both the Model 828
and the Model 838 units ranges from zero to 52
milliseconds, so there is a considerable advantage
to be gained by reducing the time a data channel is
engaged but not operating from this average rotational delay of 26 milliseconds to the time taken to
recognize and service the interrupt - about half a
millisecond in most cases.
The data on the· Disk Files can be safeguarded by
means of manual Write-Lock controls which prevent portions of the files from being overwritten.
Accuracy of recording and reading back is checked
by recording and checking parity bits with each
character, and, at the programmer's discretion, by
using the Write Check instruction. This instruction
reads the data back after it has been written and
compares it with the contents of the core storage
locations where it was supposed to have come from.
In addition, a checkword is recorded with each 256character segment. This checkword is recomputed
from the bits actually in the segment whenever readout occurs and checked with the version that was
recorded when the data was originally written onto
the disc.
© 1964 Auerbach Carporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
245:042.130
CDC 3200
.28
Ii 042.
.13
Description (Contd. )
the read/write heads, at which stage data transfer
begins.
The Model 828 and 838 Disk Files themselves are
manufactured by Data Products Corporation for Control Data Corporation. Model 828 uses 16 discs per
unit and has a capacity of 33, 000, 000 characters,
while Model 838 uses 32 discs per unit and has a
capacity of 66,000,000 characters.
• 14
Availability:
4 months .
. 15
First Delivery:
Nov. 1964 (Model 828) .
Apr. 1965 (Model 838).
. 16
Reserved Storage
4 tracks on top disc, with
special fixed heads.
3 tracks per disc surface.
19 bits at the start of each
256-char. block.
Clocking:
Spar,es: .
Address: .
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
. 21
Storage Medium: .
multiple magnetic discs .
.22
Physical Dimensions:
16 or 32 31-inch diameter
discs per unit.
. 23
Storage Phenomenon:
magnetization .
.24
Recording
Permanence:
.25
.29
data once recorded can be
read back at any time until
overwritten by program.
Turning off the electrical
power leaves the data intact. The discs cannot be
removed from the units.
Cycling rate . .
Bit rate per track:
Inner zone tracks
Outer zone tracks
Inner Zone
768
Words:
3,072
Characters:
3,072
Digits:
768
Instructions:
12
256-char. blocks:
. 26
Unit of data: . . .
Data rate:
Inner zone tracks
Outer zone tracks
.27
Interleaving Levels:.
no interleaving is used.
. 28
Access Technigues
An individual, multiple-head positioning arm is used
for each disc. This arm must be repositioned whenever a new track is selected. After repositioning
(where necessary) has been completed, a delay follows until the start of the selected block comes under
11/64
6-bit character .
68,000 char/sec.
110,000 char/sec.
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and System Sizes
There are two modules available: Model 828, which
has the same data capacity as the minimum subsystem,
shown below; and Model 838, which has exactly
twice the data capacity of the Model 828.
Minimum
Subsystem
Number of units: 1 Model 828
Words:
8,500,000
33,000,000
Characters:
8,500,000
Instructions:
131,200
Blocks:
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity
Single-channel
controller: .
Dual-channel
controllers:
Maximum
Subsystem
4 Model 838's
68,000,000
264,000,000
68,000,000
1,049,600
Model 3432 Disk File Controller.
Models 3632 through 3635
Disk File Controllers.
.42
Connection to System: from 1 to 64 Disk File Subsystems can be connected
to a single computer system, depending on the
availability of data channels.
Any dual-channel subsystem
can be connected to two different computer systems if
required.
No off-line connections are
used.
.43
Connection to Device:
.44
Data Transfer Control
1,280
5,120
5,120
1,280
20
256.
350,000 bits/sec.
590,000 bits/sec.
.3
Outer Zone
Tracks per DiscFace:
1,200 rpm.
.292 Peak data rates -
Data Volume per Band of 1 Track
Each disc-face is divided into two zones, an outer
zone and an inner zone. Two-thirds of the data is
stored in the outer zones, which have a greater
capacity per track. Details of track capacity in
each zone are:
Potential Transfer Rates
.291 Peak bit rates -
Number of Locations
Purpose
Access Techniques (Contd. )
.441 Size of load:. . . . .
.442 Input-output area:. .
. 443 Input-output area
access: . . . . . . .
1, 2, 3, or 4 Disk File units
can be connected to a subsystem, depending on the
controller model.
1 to N 256-character blocks,
limited by computer system
core storage size.
core storage.
each word fir character.
INTERNAL STORAGE: 828 AND 838 DISK FILES
245:042.444
§ 042.
.6
· 444 Input-output area
lockout: . . . .
· 446 Synchronization:. . •
.448 Testable conditions: .
·5
ACCESS TIMING
· 51
Arrangement of Heads
· 511 Number of stacks Stacks per file:
Stacks per yoke:
Yokes per file: .
· 512 Stack movement: .
.513 Stacks that can access
any particular location: . . . . . . . .
· 514 Accessible locationsBy single stack:
With no movement:
With all movement:
By all stacks:
With no movement:
.52
.53
Simultaneous Operations: . . . . . . . .
manual switches on the units
prevent data from being
overwritten.
automatic; however an interrupt upon a specific address position passing
under the heads allows
data channel usage to be
optimized.
Ready, Busy, Access Unavailable, On Track, Write
Lockout, Lost Data, Search
Satisfied, Ready and Not
Busy Interrupt requested,
End of Operation Interrupt
requested, Abnormal End
of Operation Interrupt requested, Checkword Error
detected.
PERFORMANCE
.72
Transfer Load Size
With core storage: . . 1 to N blocks.
.73
Effective Transfer Rate
Variable, depending on record size and positioning
requirements.
Peak Transfer Rate for Inner Zone records is
68,000 characters per second, and for Outer Zone
records is 110,000 characters per second.
For random accesses with various record sizes,
see the graph on page 245:042.900.
128.
8.
16 (one for each disc).
horizontal only.
Demands on System
Component
3200 Core
Storage
Module:
1.
3200 Core
Storage
Module:
12 or 20 blocks.
768 or 1,280 blocks.
1/64th of the unit's storage
capacity.
one or two reading, writing,
or data search operations
per subsystem, plus up to
two positioning operations
and one address search per
file unit.
.523 Variation in access time Variation
(msec}
Average
(msec}
Turn on positioning
arm motor:.
Move head to selected track:.
Confirm track address:.
Wait for selected
block:
Transfer 1 block:
52
2.60r4.3
Total:
54.6 to 369.3
o or
11
10.
o 00
250
145.
52
52.
o to
26.
3.
236.
none.
.7
. 74
Access Time Parameters and Variations
Stage
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . .
.8
Condition
msec per
word
Percentage of
data transfer
time
Inner Zone
record
0.00125
2.1%
Outer Zone
record
0.00125
3.4%
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Invalid address: not possible.
Invalid code:
check
Receipt of data: 12-bit cyclic
code check
word per
block
Recording of
generate 12data:
bit check
word.
Recovery of
data:
none.
Dispatch of data: none.
Timing conflicts: none.
Physical record
missing:
check
Reference to
locked area:
check
Wrong block
address comselected:
parison
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
Action
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
11/64
245:042.900
CDC 3200
§ 042.
EFFECTIVE SPEED: 828 AND 838 DISK FILES
Based on random accessing and varying record sizes
1,000,000
7
4
2
100,000
7
.,.
./
4
/'
~~
2
Characters
per Second
V
10,000
7
V
L
"
1,/
4
I~
2
/
1,000
7
4
--
"
/'
/
-'
-'
~
2
100
2
100
4
2
7
1,000
4
7
2
10,000
Characters per Block
11/64
4
7
100,000
245:043.100
CDC 3200
Internal Storage
IBM 1311 and 3211
Disk Storage Drives
INTERNAL STORAGE: IBI.I 1311 AND 2311 DISK STORAGE DRIVES
§
043.
.13
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . .
IBM 1311 Disk Storage
Drive.
CDC 3231 Disk Pack Controller.
IBM 2311 Disk Storage
Drive.
CDC 3233 Disk Pack Controller.
. 12
Basic Use: •
. 13
Description
auxiliary storage; for random or sequential access .
Control Data Corporation has two Disk Pack Controllers available which connect the IBM 1311 and
2311 Disk Storage Drives to the CDC 3200 computer
system. Each controller can service up to eight
Disk Drives, and the controller is in turn connected
to one CDC data channel. No dual-channel controllers have been announced to date for these units.
The two IBM Disk Storage Drives are briefly described in Table I below; the 1311 and 2311 are more
completely covered on page 414:042.100 of the IBM
1440 Computer System Report and page 420:044.100
of the IBM System/360 Computer System Report,
respectively. The Track Record, Direct Seek,
Scan Disk, and Seek Overlap optional features are
expected to be normally used when the IBM equipment is connected to CDC computer systems.
Disk Packs written on IBM 1311 or 2311 Disk Storage Drives connected to a Control Data computer
system can be read back only on an equivalent type
of drive which is connected to the same or another
Control Data computer. It is not possible, for
Description (Contd.)
instance, to write a Disk Pack on an IBM computer
system and then read it on a Control Data computer
system; nor is it possible to write a Disk Pack on a
1311 Disk Storage Drive and read it on a 2311 Drive.
Data transfer operations include Read, Write, Write
with Check Read, Masked Search, and Magnitude
Search operations. The data records on the discs
can be physically arranged either in sectors or in
tracks; in either case the amount of data transferred or searched by a single instruction is limited
only by the size of the computer system's core
storage.
Interrupts can be set by the program to provide for
separate interrupts when the Disk Drive becomes
available, when an operation has been completed
normally (e. g., when a search has been completed
successfully or when a Write and Check operation
has been completed without any recording error
being discovered), or when for some reason the
operation has been completed in an abnormal manner. The abnormal ending condition is signalled
by means of indicator flags, which can be tested by
the program. The four indicator flags associated
with the Disk Storage Drives show the units' available or busy status, whether a search was successful, and whether Write Check or Address Error
conditions have occurred.
The IBM 1311 Disk Storage Drive operates at a
peak transmission rate of 77, 000 characters per
second, which places a loading on the Control Data
3200 core storage units of 2.4% of the total throughput capacity of a single module. The equivalent
loading for an IBM 2311, which operates at 204, 000
six-bit characters per second, is 6.4% of the capacity of a module.
TABLE I: COMPARISON OF IBM 1311 AND 2311 DISK STORAGE DRIVES
AS USED IN THE CONTROL DATA 3200 COMPUTER SYSTEM
Model:
1311 Disk Storage Drive
2311 Disk Storage Drive
Storage capacity of
1 Disk Pack:
2. 0 million characters
(20 sectors per track)
2.98 million characters
(1 record per track)
Discs per pack:
6
Recording surfaces per pack: 10
Tracks per disc surface:
100
Data rate:
77,000 char/sec.
Rotation time:
40 msec
Average positioning time:
150 or 250 msec
Maximum storage capacity:
16 to 24 million characters
per control unit
9. 7 million characters
(1 record per track)
6
10
200
204,000 char/sec.
25 msec
85 msec
77. 3 million characters
per control unit
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
11/64
245:044.100
CDC 3200
Internal Starage
3235 Drum Starage Unit
INTERNAL STORAGE: 3235 DRUM STORAGE UNIT
§
044.
. 13
·1
GENERAL
· 11
Identity:..
3235 Drum Storage Unit.
· 12
Basic Use: •
auxiliary storage.
.13
Description
seconds, the effective data transfer rate for a record of C characters will be:
167,000 C
C + 2840
The record size used with the 3235 Drum Storage
Unit can vary from one character up to the size of
the core storage of the associated computer system.
The effective transfer rate will depend upon the record size and the amount of rotational latency involved. Assuming an average latency of 17 milli-
characters per second.
The load on the core storage modules during the
data transfer operation will be, for CDC 3200
computer systems, 1.25 microseconds per 4-character word, which amounts to about 5% of the total
data transmission time.
Preliminary information indicates that the Control
Data 3235 Drum Storage Unit provides for random
access to 524,788 characters with a maximum access time of 34 milliseconds. The characters are
recorded serially at a track density of 560 bits per
inch, and data transmission takes place at 167, 000
six-bit characters per second.
11/64
Description (Contd.)
No separate controllers are used with the Model
3235 Drum Storage Unit; it is connected directly to
a single data channel. A theoretical maximum of
64 Drum Storage Units can be connected to a Control Data 3200 computer system.
.14
Availability:......
9 months.
. 15
First Delivery:
October 1965.
245:045.100
CDC 3200
Internal Starage
861 and 862 Drum Starage Units
INTERNAL STORAGE: 861 AND 862 DRUM STORAGE UNITS
. 13
§ 045.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .
861 Drum Storage Unit.
862 Drum Storage Unit.
3416 Standard Input/Output
Channel, Augmented.
3806 Standard Bi-directional
Data Channel, Augmented.
.12
Basic Use:
auxiliary storage and intercomputer communication.
.13
Description
The Control Data 861 and 862 Drum Storage units
provide very high data transmission rates - up to
two million characters per second - and moderately
fast access times. The choice between the two units
will be based on whether doubled data capacity or
halved access time is more valuable to a particular
installation; the Model 861 Drum Storage Unit has a
data capacity of 4, 186,304 6-bit characters and a
maximum access time of 34.4 milliseconds, while
the Model 862 has half the data capacity - 2,093,152
6-bit characters - but can access them twice as fast
- its maximum access time is only 17.2 milliseconds.
The physical characteristics of the Model 861 Drum
are summarized, along with its performance characteristics, in Table I below. This table also shows
the performance characteristics of the Model 862,
but not its physical data, which have not yet been announced by Control Data Corporation.
The outstanding characteristic of both these units is
the high data transfer rate which can be obtained.
This has been achieved by recording and reading a
data band of 13 tracks in parallel and using a track
recording density of 560 bits per inch. The 13
physical bits consist of 12 data bits and an associated parity bit. Each data band contains approximately 64,000 data characters in addition to system
storage requirements.
The highest possible data transfer rate, 2,000,000
characters per second, is conditional upon every bit
in the tracks being read sequentially. As an alternative, manual switches on each Drum Storage Unit
can be set so that only every second, third, fourth,
eighth, sixteenth or thirty-second bit is read. This
technique is called ''interlacing'' and allows slower
transfer rates to be used where advisable. As a
result of the interlacing facility, these drum units
can be connected to computer systems which would
be unable to accept the highest available data transfer rates.
In selecting which of the inter lace factors should be
used, an installation must consider the slowest
computer which will be connected to the Drum Storage Unit concerned, and also the peak loading which
Description (Contd. )
will normally occur as a result of the simultaneous
operation of other peripheral units connected to the
system and the Drum Storage Unit(s). However, it
is not 'always necessary to consider and allow for
the absolute worst-case condition, provided that
such a condition is not frequent, as the drum is
simply allowed to revolve again if it is unable to
store away a 12-bit image safely. Such an action,
which reduces the transfer rate to two 6-bit characters per drum revolution, will seriously delay the
data transmission which is then occurring, but this
may well be more desirable than increasing the interlace factor and so permanently reducing the
transmission rate from the Drum Storage Unit.
As the interlace factor is variable, the load placed
on the core storage modules during data transmission also varies. With the Control Data 3200 core
storage modules, where the loading is 1. 25 microseconds per word transmitted, the total loading is
62.5/1 percent of a core storage module's maximum
capacity where I is the interlace factor in use.
Under normal conditions, Control Data expects that
an interlace factor of 2 will most commonly be
used*, which gives a peak data transmission rate of
1,000,000 characters per second and uses 31% of
the maximum throughput capacity of a 3200 core
storage module.
Single- and dual-channel controllers are available
for controlling up to eight 861 and 862 Drum Storage
Units. The single-channel controllers can handle
only a single data transmission at a time, while the
dual-channel controllers allow two simultaneous
data transmissions to take place, one on each data
channel. It is not necessary that both the data channels of a dual-channel controller be connected to the
same computer system; an interconnection ,between
computers can be achieved by connecting them to different systems. Any Control Data 3000 series computer, or a Control Data 160-A computer, can be
used in conjunction with either Model 861 or 862
Drum Storage Units.
In some cases, where the frequency of data arriving
from the Drum Storage Units is greater than the frequency with which it can be stored in the core storage of the computer system concerned, special buffered data channels (called "Augmented" channels by
Control Data) can be used. These channels have two
words of storage which are used for temporary assembling and storage of data, instead of the single
word which is held in the standard data channels.
An Augmented channel would be needed, for example, if a Control Data 3200 Computer system, with
its 1. 25 microsecond memory, were attempting to
use a Drum Storage Unit with an interlace factor of
1. Here, while only 62% of the core storage cycles
* An interlace factor of 2 is assumed in the
associated software systems.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
11/64
CDC 3200
245:045.130
§
045 .
. 13
• 13
Description (Contd. )
would suffice to store the output of a Drum Storage
Unit, it would be necessary to clear the storage
buffer of a standard channel within 1. 00 microsecond
in order to maintain the maximum data transmission
rate. This would not be possible because the cycle
time is greater than 1. 00 microsecond. In an Augmented (buffered) channel it is only necessary to
empty a specific buffer within three microseconds
after receipt of the final characters, and this could
easily be accomplished with the CDC 3200's 1. 25microsecond core storage cycle time.
Description (Contd. )
The Control Data 861 and 862 Drum Storage Units
are manufactured by Control Data Corporation.
. 14
Availability: ••
.15
First Delivery:
9 months .
861 Drum Storage
Unit • . . • • • •
862 Drum Storage
Unit •••••••
April 1965.
August 1965.
TABLE I: FEATURES OF THE MODEL 861 AND 862 DRUM STORAGE UNITS
Model:
861
862
Capacity:
4,186,304
1,046,561
2,093,152
523,288
Minimum (msec)
Maximum (msec)
0.0
34.4
0.0
17.2
Transfer Rate (peak)
2,000,000
char/sec
2,000,000
char/sec
1
full core store
1
full core store
6-bit characters
24-bit words
Access Time:
Transfer Load Size:
Minimum (char)
Maximum (char)
832
Number of Tracks
Track Capacity (bits)
Track Density (bits/inch)
."
32,000 approx.
560
832
16,000 approx.
560
Error Checks:
Recording
Reading
Drum Diameter
11/64
Parity bits
recorded
Parity checked
18 inches
Parity bits
recorded
Parity checked
?
245:051.100
CDC 3200
Central Processors
CENTRAL PROCESSORS
.12
§ 051.
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: .
.12
3204
3205
3210
3215
Basic Processor.
Scientific Processor.
Data Processor.
General Processor.
Description
The CDC 3200 System offers a choice of four
different processors which differ primarily in the
volume and type of data they can handle most
efficiently. The comparative features of each of
the available processors are as follows:
•
3204 Basic Processor - contains arithmetic and
control logic to perform 24-bit fixed-point
arithmetic, 48-bit fixed-point addition and subtraction, Boolean, word handling, and decisionmaking operations.
GI
3205 Scientific Processor - has the capability
of the Basic Processor, but can also handle
48-bit floating-point arithmetic, as well as 48bit fixed-point multiplication and division.
e 3210 Data Processor - has the capability of the
Basic Processor, plus the ability to handle 6bit decimal characters. This ability inclLdes
add and subtract (but not multiply and divide)
operations on decimal fields up to 12 characters
in length.
o 3215 General Processor - an expanded unit
that includes all the facilities of the 3204, 3205,
and 3210.
Each of the four models is essentially a singleaddress, fixed word-length, binary processor.
The additional capabilities of the 3205, 3210, and
3215 are implemented by extra hardware packages
which enable "scientific" and "BCD" type operations
to be performed automatically. However, all
commands in the 3200 instruction repertoire can
be executed (either by hardware or software) on
any processor model. The Basic Processor, for
example, is not capable of directly processing
instructions that require the floating-point or BCD
packages. Instead, these instructions (called
"trapped" instructions) are automatically detected
and their functions are simulated by subroutines.
To the user, then, every 3200 can appear as a
system with all of the facilities of a binary machine
plus some of those of a decimal character-oriented
one. This capability is certainly an advantage, but
may also be a disadvantage if improperly utilized.
The ability to use programs from other installations,
regardless of which processor model the programs
were written for, is highly desirable. On the other
hand, a practice of running programs which are not
designed for the actual processor may result in un-
Description (Contd.)
necessarily long execution times, due to inadvertent
overuse of the subroutines that simulate the instructions which cannot be directly processed.
Word length of core storage locations is 28 bits
(24 data bits plus 4 parity bits). One location can
contain an instruction, a 24-bit fixed-point binary
data word, one half of a 48-bit fixed- or floatingpoint data word, or an alphanumeric word consisting of four 6-bit BCD characters. An instruction word normally consists of a 6-bit operation
{or function) code, an addressing mode bit (indirect or direct), a 2-bit index register deSignator,
and a 15-bit core storage address field. In some
cases the indirect addressing flag, index register
designation, and address bits are used for other
purposes such as operand values, shift counts,
and extensions of the function code or address
field. Only three index registers are prOvided,
and their use is pre-empted by various instructions.
To some extent this limits the programmer in his
use of automatic address modification techniques.
Instruction execution times are fast: fixed-point
24-bit addition requires only 2.5 microseconds,
while a floating-point multiplication with two
storage references takes from 14 to 18 microseconds. In the BCD mode, two 12-character
operands can be added in 11. 5 microseconds. These
times, which are a great improvement over the
initial specifications, are still slower than the
equivalent binary operations, butthey are certainly
fast enough for normal editing operations.
A fast-access 64-word Register File, incorporated
as part of each of the processors, has a cycle time
of 0.5 microsecond. Although the programmer has
access to all registers in the file, certain registers
are reserved for specific purposes such as address
storage during "block" operations. Other portions
of the file can be used freely as temporary storage.
The "block" operations use special processor controls and are of three types: Search, Move, and
Input-Output. After one of these operations has
been activated, the processor can return to its main
program and continue until an interrupt is generated
or the program senses completion of the block operation. Each of these operations requires three
instruction words, which contain the starting and
ending addresses (or source and destination addresses for a Move command) for the operation and
a "reject" instruction. The reject instruction is
used if the block controls or the addressed inputoutput data channel happens to be busy. All three
types of block operations are carried out on a
character-by-character basis. The input-output
instructions, which can also specify a word-byword transfer, are described in more detail under
Simultaneous Operations (Section 245: 111).
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
245:051.120
§
.. CDC 3200
051.
. 12
.12
priate bits in an Interrupt Mask register. In addition, several instructions are available for sensing
and clearing interrupts independently, and for
either enabling or disabling the entire interrupt
system.
Description (Contd.)
The 3200 has a program interrupt system which
peTmits interruption when any of the following conditions occur: arithmetic faults (overflow, divisor
too small, exponent too large), completion of a
block operation (search, move, or input-output),
manual switch operation (console key), an interrupt
request from any of the eight peripheral positions
on each data channel, or a real-time interrupt controlled by the Real-Time Clock. When an interrupt
condition is recognized, the current instruction
address is stored along with a number that indicates
the specific interrupt condition, and program control is transferred to a fixed location. The programmer, however, can choose to honor or ignore
any particular interrupt condition by setting appro-
.2
PROCESSING FACILITmS
.21
Operations and Operands
Operation
and Variation
.211 Fixed pointAdd-subtract:
Multiply Short:
Long:
DivideNo remainder:
Remainder:
• 212 Floating pointAdd-subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
• 213 BooleanAND:
Inclusive OR:
Exclusive OR:
• 214 ComparisonNumbers:
Absolute:
Letters:
Mixed:
Collating
sequence:
Description (Contd. )
A special power failure interrupt automatically
(and unequivocally) transfers control to a fixed
location (location 00010) in the event power fails
within the 3200 system. A special routine then
prepares the system for an orderly shutdown so
that no data will be lost. The whole operation takes
a maximum of 30 milliseconds; 16 milliseconds for
detection, and 14 milliseconds for processing the
interrupt.
.13
Provision
First Delivery: . . . . . May, 1964 .
Radix
automatic
binary
automatic
binary
automatic (2) decimal
Size
24 bits.
48 bits.
1 through 12
BCD chars.
none.
automatic
binary
automatic (1) binary
subroutine
decimal
24 bits.
48 bits.
variable.
none.
automatic
binary
automatic (1) binary
subroutine
decimal
24 bits.
48 bits.
variable .
automatic (1) binary
automatic (1) binary
automatic (1) binary
36 & 11 bits.
36 & 11 bits.
36 & 11 bits .
automatic
nOlie.
automatic
binary
24 bits.
binary
24 bits .
automatic.
none.
automatic.
6-bit characters.
0-9, A-Z, with special characters and
unassigned symbols in various places;
see Page 245:141. 100.
(1) These operations are possible only with 3205 Scientific
and 3215 General Processors.
(2) This operation is possible only with 3210 Data and
3215 General Processors.
11/64
CENTRAL PROCESSORS
§
245:051.215
.216 Radix conversion:
051.
Radix conversion between BCD and binary forms is
performed by standard subroutines. The timings
of these subroutines are listed in Table I.
.217 Edit format: . • . . . . . own coding; the characterby-character search for
equality or inequality appears to be the only instruction specifically
oriented toward this task.
.215 Code translation:
Code translation from external BCD to internal
BCD is automatic when magnetic tapes recorded in
ECD format are being used.
Details of other code translations needed, and the
timings of the subroutines used to accomplish the
translations, are shown in Table I.
.218 Table look-upOperation
Equality:
Greater than:
Greatest:
Least:
.219 Others Character
Search:
Provision
Size
Comment
automatic
automatic
none.
none.
by word If
by word
entries may be spaced
every 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
7, or 8words. Masked
operands are allowed.
automatic
character- the search is made offby-charac- line, using the block
ter
transfer facilities;
single character
equality or inequality
can be searched for.
TABLE I: CONVERSION TIMES FOR STANDARD SUBROUTINES
Microseconds Required For Conversion To:
Original Operand
Type
Magnitude
Internal
BCD (1)
Fixed Point Floating Point
Binary (2)
Binary (3)
Column
BCD (4)
Row BCD
(5)
Internal BCD
< 10 7
-
13/digit
13/digit +
18/operand
5, ODD/card
30,000/card
Internal BCD
> 10 7
-
23/digit
23/digit +
IS/operand
5, ODD/card
30,00O/card
Fixed Point
Binary
< 10 7
22/digit
-
18/operand
22/digit +
5,00O/card
22/digit +
30,OOO/card
Fixed Point
Binary
> 10 7
44/digit
-
18/operand
22/digit +
5,00O/card
44/digit +
30,OOO/card
Floating Point
Binary
<10 7
22/digit +
28/operand
28/operand
-
22/digit +
22/digit +
28/operand + 28/operand +
5,OOO/card
30,000/card
Floating Point
Binary
7
>
- 10
44/digit +
28/operand
28/operand
-
44/digit +
22/digit +
28/operand + 28/ operand +
5,OOO/card
30,000/card
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Note:
Internal BCD is used in decimal arithmetic, for card reader input and for printer output.
Fixed Point Binary is used for 24 or 48-bit binary arithmetic.
Floating Point Binary is used for all floating point operations.
Column BCD is used for output via buffered card punch equipment.
Row BCD is used for output via unbuffered card punch equipment.
"digit" refers to decimal digits in all of the above times.
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
245:051.220
CDC 3200
§ 051.
• 22
Special Cases of Operands
• 221 Negative numbers: •.• one's complement.
• 222 Zl:lro: • . . • . • • . . . . • positive zero and negative
zero.
• 223 Operand size determination: . . . • . • • . normally 24 bits; 48 bits
available in double precision and floating point
instructions, and variable
length of 1-12 decimal
digits in BCD operations.
• 23
Instruction Formats
.231 Instruction structure:. basically I-address.
• 232 Instruction layout
Part:
f
a
b
m
Size (bits):
6
1
2
15
• 233 Instruction parts
Purpose
f: ••
a: • . . • . . . . . .
b: •••••••••.
m: ••••••••••
Note:
function code.
indirect addressing flag.
index register designation.
operand address.
In many cases the indirect addressing
flag and the index register designation
are used for other purposes. These
cases include:
•
when literals are used instead of
operand addresses;
•
when Search or Move operations are
involved;
•
when the operand address is a
register;
•
when selective jumps based on console
keys are involved.
In most BCD character operations, indirect addressing is not available, and
only one specific index register can be
used with a particular instruction.
Register file addresses cannot be indexed
or indirectly addressed.
.234 Basic address structure: • . . . . . .
1 + O.
· 235 LiteralsArithmetic: . . • . . . no facility.
COmparisons and
tests: . . . . . . . . . literals can be compared
with index register counts
and accumulator contents
only; maximum size is
262,145.
Incrementing
modifiers: .
only in the Block Search
operation.
11/64
.236 Directly addressed operands Internal storage
core storage.
type: . . . • . . .
1 character .
Minimum size: .
1 or 2 words.
Maximum size: •
Volume accessible: . all .
. 237 Address indexing
.2371 Number of methods:. two.
.2372 Names: .. . . . . .. normal indexing.
specific indexing.
• 2373 Indexing rule (normal indexing): . . . addition of contents of one
of the 3 index registers
to the address in one's
complement mode.
.2373 Indexing rule (specific
indexing): . • . . . • . same as normal indexing
except that a specified
index register is always
used with the particular
instruction.
.2374 Index specification: . bits 15 and 16, or bit 17, of
instruction word.
.2375 Number of potential
indexers: . . . . . . . 3.
.2376 Addresses which can
be indexed: . • • . . • operand addresses in arithmetic, logical, load, and
store instructions, and
some jump instructions.
BCD operations (which
index by character, not by
word) can only be modified
within 8,192 words.
.2377 Cumulative indexing:. no •
• 2378 Combined index and
step: . • . . . . • . . no .
• 238 Indirect addressing
.2381 Recursive: ..
yes .
. 2382 Designation: • . . . . . single bit in appropriate
instructions and in each
indirect operand address.
.2383 Control: ••.•.•... the last address in the recursive sequence is the
first address reached
which has no indirect
addressing flag •
. 2384 Indexing with indirect addressing: index modification always
takes place first. All
levels of a recursive indirect address sequence
may be indexed.
.239 Stepping
.2391 Specification of
increment: . . .
within instruction.
.2392 Increment sign: •
+ or-.
.2394 End value: •.•.
positive zero; tests are also
available for comparison
with literals.
.2395 Combined step and
test: . . . . . . . .. yes, for ± 1 increments only.
. 24
Special Processor Storage
• 241 Category of
storage
Registers:
Registers:
Registers:
Number of Size in
locations
bits
3
24
4
57
15
24
Program usage
arithmetic and
instructions.
address handling.
I/O control,
clock, temporary storage, etc.
245:051.300
CENTRAL PROCESSORS
.335 Interruption process Disabling interruption: • . . . . . . . .
§ 051.
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
.31
Instruction Seguencing: . . . . . . . . . . . sequential.
. 32
Look-Ahead: . . . . . . . none.
. 33
Interruption
. 331 Possible causesIn-out units: ..•.
operating instruction proceeds to an orderly halt.
Registers saved: •• program address register
only.
A nine-bit interrupt identification code is placed in
a fixed location .
fixed location.
Destination: . . . . . . 00003 or 00010 •
.336 Control methodsDetermine cause: •.. own coding.
Enable interruption:. own coding.
the state of any specific
device connected to one
of the eight I/o controllers
can initiate an interrupt.
Conditions which can
cause interrupts vary for
different types of I/o devices, but usually include
normal end of an operation,
abnormal end, and inability
to respond to an instruction.
In-out controllers: .. the failure of an I/O controller to accept or reject
a Connect or Function
instruction:
Processor errors: .. arithmetic overflow.
divide fault (division by too
small a number; not simply
by zero).
exponent overflow (> 2 10 _1).
BCD fault (irregular characters).
other: . . . . . . . . . . power failure.
real-time clock.
search-move interrupt.
. 332 Control by routine: . . . interrupts may be masked by
the program. In addition,
they are automatically inhibited (except for the
Power Failure Interrupt)
by the entry into any interrupt routine, and a
special instruction must
be used to re-enable the
preselected interrupts
after each interrupt.
.333 Operator control: . . . . none, except that he always
may originate a manual
interrupt, or use the six
Sense switches to set the
mask.
.334 Interruption conditions: . . . . . . . . . . . (1) an interrupt condition
must arise.
\
'.
(2) it must not be inhibited
either permanently or
during the processing
of an interrupt routine.
(3) the priority scanner must
have reached the
priority level of the
interrupt condition.
• 34
Multiprogramming: •
no special provisions •
. 35
Multi-Sequencing: ..
the block operations (search
for character equality/inequality, move characters,
input-output instructions)
can proceed in parallel
with and independently of
the main program, once
initiated.
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
.41
Instruction Times in Microseconds
Binary
(24 bits)
BCD
(12 char)
.411 Fixed point Add-subtract:
2.5
11.5
not available.
Multiply: . • . . .
7.8to11
Divide: . . . . . . . . . 11. 25
not available.
.412 Floating point Add-subtract: . . . • . 10 to 12.
Add-subtract (subroutine): . . . . . . . . 150.
Multiply: . . . . . . . • 14 to 18.
Multiply (subroutine): 240.
Divide: . . • . . . . . • 20.
Divide (subroutine): . 425 .
.413 Additional allowance for Indexing: . . . . . . . . 0.375
Indirect addressing:. 1. 25
Re-complementing: . 0.0
.414 ControlCompare: . • • . . . . . 1. 9
Branch: . . . • . . • . . 1. 25
Compare and branch: 1. 9
. 415 Counter control Step: . . . . . . . . . . . 1. 25
Step and te st: . . . . • 1. 9
Test: . • . . . . . . • . . 1. 9
.416 Edit: . . . • . • . . . . . • not available.
.417 Convert: . . • . . . . . . see Table I.
.418 Shift: . • • • . . . . . . . • 1. 25 to 3.75
.42
Processor Performance in Microseconds
.421 For random addressesFixed Point BCD
Floating Point
(24 bits) (12 char)
(48 bits)
c = a + b:
b = a + b:
Sum N items:
c = ab:
7.5
6.25
2.5N
14.4
c
17.5
=
alb:
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
27.5
27.5
11. 5N
not available
not available
18.5
18.5
11. ON
23.5
27.5
11/64
CDC 3200
245:051.422
§
051.
.422 For arrays of dataFixed Point BCD
Floating Point
(24 bits) (12 char)
(48 bits)
ci
=
ai +b j :
b j = ai + br
Sum N items:
c = c + aibj:
11. 79
10.16
4.78N
20.81
35.16
37.28
13.78N
not available
22.79
22.79
13.28N
38.41
.423 Branch based on comparison Numeric data: . . . . . 15.46
Alphabetic data . . . . 15.46
.5
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Overflow:
Underflow:
Divisor too small:
Shift faults:
Invalid instructions:
Abnorm al end of
an I/O operation:
Storage reference:
Receipt of data:
Internal reject:
Dispatch of data:
11/64
.424 SwitchingUnchecked: . . . . . . . 5. 38
Checked: . . . . . . . . 9.18
List search: . . . . . . 14.58 I- 4. 2N
.425 Format control, per character Unpack: . . • . . . . . . 120.
Compose: . . . . . . . . 120 .
. 426 Table look-up, per N comparisons For a match: . . . . . . 4.2 + 4. 2N
For least or greatest: 4.2 + 4. 2N
For interpolation
point: . . . . . . . . . . 4. 2 + 4. 2N
.427 Bit indicators Set bit in pattern: ... 7. 5
Test bit in pattern: .. 5.65
.428 Moving, per N words: . 3.3 + 3. 9N (250,000 24-bit
words/ sec).
Check or
Interlock
check
} parity check
Action
specific bit is set;
optionally, interrupt
occurs (interrupt system
is deactivated, instruction
address is stored, and a
forced jump is made to a
specific location for each
case) .
optional halt; console light.
parity bits
none.
are included, but
not checked
245:061.100
CDC 3200
Console
CONSOLE
(
'--.
§
. 13
061.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: ..
3201 Desk Console .
. 12
Associated Unit:
Input-Output Typewriter is
included with the 3201.
.13
Description
The 3201 Desk Console is standard equipment in all
Control Data 3200 computer systems. It includes a
movable input keyboard, which can either be operated at the console or removed and carried to a suitable nearby location. An input-output typewriter is
also incorporated in the console design. Both the
keyboard and the typewriter have direct access to
the computational module, and do not use the regular data channels.
Octal or decimal displays are used to display the
contents of the seven operational registers. The
operator sitting at the console has a good view of
these displays, and of the equipment itself (see
photograph) .
The "external" status indicators display the existing condition of the input-output channels, while
six columns of "internal" condition indicators provide the following information:
o
Storage Active - for addressing purposes, the
four possible 8, 192-word sections of storage
are designated by digits 0-3. Whenever one of
these storage sections becomes active, the
corresponding indicator light is lit.
Description (Contd.)
o
Conditions - a Standby light indicates that the
main power switch is on, but that individual
supplies are still off; an Interrupt Disabled light
is on whenever the interrupt system is disabled
by the program.
o
Cycle - four cycles are represented: Read
Next Instruction, Read Address, Read Operand,
and Store Operand. These indicators are lit
whenever the cycles are in progress.
Faults - these lights represent four arithmetic
faults: Arithmetic Overflow, Divide, Exponent
Overflow, and Decimal (BCD).
o
Temperature Warning and Temperature High up to four cabinet sections are represented.
The console switches are divided into two groups those used for normal operations of the system and
those used primarily for maintenance purposes.
Operational switches are included on the main console and on an entry keyboard. The keyboard replaces the Set and Clear pushbuttons that are found
on most Control Data computers for the manual
entry of information.
The main console switches provide for such operating controls as breakpoint/run mode selection,
automatic load/dump initiation for a designated
device, selective jump instruction keys, manual
interrupt, and master clear buttons. The keyboard switches provide for start and stop controls,
register display control, and the manual entry of
information into core storage or a designated
register.
© 1 964 Auerbach Corporation and Into, Inc.
11/64
245:071.100
CDC 3200
Input-Output
405 Card Reader
INPUT-OUTPUT: 405 CARD READER
iii 071.
.12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
A single card read instruction defines an area in
core storage which is to be filled with data read
by the card reader. As many cards as are .necessary to fill this area are read in under the supervision of a card reader controller, without further
program intervention being necessary.
CDC 405 Card Reader.
CDC 3248 Card Reader
Controller.
CDC 3447 Card Reader
Controller.
CDC 3649 Card Reader
Controller.
Interruptions can be set to occur when the card
reader becomes available, when a card read
operation is successfully completed, .or when for
some reason a card read operation ends without
being successfully completed. The program can
inhibit any or all of these three separate and distinct interrupt conditions.
Description
The Control Data 405 Card Reader is a fast, asynchronous photoelectric reader that operates at
1,200 cards per minute when reading full 80-column
cards, and at up to 1,600 cards per minute with
51-column stub cards. The input hopper can hold
4,000 cards. Two output stackers are provided:
one main stacker which can hold 4, 000 cards, and
a reject stacker which can hold 240 cards. The
cards are turned individually as they are being
read so that the card deck in the output stacker is
in exactly the same order as it was before being
read.
In addition to the interrupt system, status indicators
show: whether the unit is currently able to respond
to an instruction; which interrupt conditions are
presently activated; whether the card presently
being read is a binary card; whether a card jam,
empty input hopper, or full output hopper. condition
is present; whether a card read error has been
noted; and whether the operator has set a switch on
the reader indicating that the last card of the card
file being read is physically in the card reader.
The card read operation proceeds serially, columnby-column. Two separate photoelectric read
stations read each column, and the two readings
are checked within the card reader before the
column image is forwarded to the card reader
controller. Conversion from Hollerith to BCD
code is normally execqted automatically on all cards
which do not have positions 5 and 7 punched in
column 1. The conversion can, however, be inhibited by program where desirable.
Each card reader must have its own individual
card reader controller, so the number of card
readers which can be connected to a computer
system is related to the number of data channels
and the number of selectable positions on each
data channel. The theoretical maximum number
of card readers that can be connected to a Control
Data 3200 computer system is 64.
The load on the core storage, for the Control Data
3200 computer system operating in the word mode,
is 25 microseconds per card for Hollerith coding
and 50 microseconds per card for column binary
cards. This loading amounts to 3% of the total
throughput capacity of a single 3200 core storage
module when Hollerith cards are being read at
1,200 cards per minute. Use of the column binary
mode doubles the loading to 6% of a core storage
unit's capaCity; and use of character-mode reading
(where each character read is placed into a separate
word) quadruples the loading to a maximum value
of 12%. Any code conversions subsequently required to convert BCD operands into binary operands
for computational purposes impose an additional
effective load on the central processor.
There are three different Card Reader Controllers.
The controllers differ in their buffering provisions
and in the number of data channels which can be
connected to each controller. The available controller models and their characteristics are:
Model 3248: unbuffered, one data channel
connection.
Model 3447: full-card buffer, one data channel
connection.
Model 3649: full-card buffer, two data channel
connections.
The Card Punch Controllers intervene between the
computer system and the card reader itself. The
program facilities available with the Control Data
405 Card Reader do not differ significantly when
different controllers are used, except that where
the controller can be physically connected to two
data channels, it is possible to switch one card
reader between two computer systems by connecting the two channels to different systems.
11/64
Description (Contd.)
The 405 Card Reader is manufactured by Control
Data Corportion.
.13
Availability: . . . . . . . 4 months.
.14
First Delivery: . . . . . 1963.
245:072.100
CDC 3200
Input-Output
Card Punches
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD PUNCHES
!l 072.
. 12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
Where the controller does contain a fullcard buffer, the data can be supplied in
BCD column-by-column format and automatically "turned around" in the buffer
and converted to the row-by-row format
required by the card punch without any
program supervision. At the same time,
automatic conversion from internal BCD
to Hollerith coding can occur if desired.
. CDC 415 Card Punch.
IBM 523 Card Punch.
IBM 544 Card Punch.
3245 Card Punch Controller.
3445 Card Punch Controller.
3644 Card Punch Controller.
•
A Control Data 415 Card Punch can be connected
to any Control Data 3000 computer system through
a Card Punch Controller. The punch operates at
250 cards per minute and uses a row-by-row
punching technique. The punched data is then
read at a post-punch read station, which counts
the number of holes in the card. Subsequent to
the post-punch read station, a card can be offset
in the output stacker so that the operator can take
any necessary action to remove mispunched cards
from the card files.
Interruptions can be set to occur when the card
punch becomes available, when an operation is
successfully completed, or when for some reason
an operation ends without being successfully
completed. The program can inhibit any or all
of these three separate and distinct interrupt
conditions.
There are three different Card Punch Controllers,
anyone of which can control one card punch unit.
The controllers differ in their buffering provisions
and in the number of data channels which can be
connected. The available controller models and
their major characteristics are as follows:
Model 3245: unbuffered
one data channel
connection.
Model 3446: full-card
buffer
one data channel
connection.
Model 3644: full-card
buffer
two data channel
connections.
In addition to the interrupt system, status indicators
show whether the unit is currently able to respond
to an instruction, what interrupt conditions are
presently activated, and whether there has been a
failure to feed a card.
Each card punch must have its own individual
controller, so the number of card punches that
can be connected to a computer system is related
to the number of data channels and the number
of selectable positions on each data channel.
The Card Punch Controllers intervene between the
computer system and the card punch itself. The
available program facilities differ depending on
which contrQller is used. The differences in
program facilities are:
•
The load on the core storage for the Control Data
3200 computer system is only 25 microseconds per
punched card, which at the rated speed of 250 cards
per minute is negligible. However, the data to be
punched must often be prepared in BCD coding,
and then (where an unbuffered controller is used)
massaged into row-by-row form, so the actual
load on the computer system imposed by card punch
operations may be considerably higher.
Error checking: Where the controller does
not have a full-card buffer, the hole count
reported by the post-punch read station cannot be used because no equivalent hole-count
of the card image exists; therefore, no comparison between the two counts can be made.
Card Punch Coding: Where the controller
does not containafull-cardbuffer, the computer must provide the data in exactly the
form in which it is to be punched.
Switching Between Computer Systems:
Where the controller can be physically connected to two data channels, it is possible to
switch the card punch unit from one computer
system to the other by connecting the two data
channels to different computer systems and
using either channel as required. Special
instructions are available to reserve the
punch for one system at a time, to allow for
controlled operation.
A single card punch instruction defines an area in
core storage whose contents are to be punched out.
As many cards as are needed to accommodate all
of the data in the designated area will be punched
in response to the instruction.
IBM 523 or 544 Card Punches can be used in place
of the Control Data 415 Card Punch. These IBM
card punches operate at 100 and 250 cards per
minute, respectively, and are functionally equivalent to the Control Data 415 except that they have
no provision for offsetting mispunched cards.
•
Description (Contd.)
The 415 Card Punch is manufactured by Control
Data Corporation.
. 13
Availability: ..
.4 months.
.14
First Delivery:
. December 1964.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
11/64
245:073.100
CDC 3200
Input-Output
Paper Tape Reader/Punches
INPUT-OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE READER/PUNCHES
Ii 073.
.121 3691 Paper Tape Reader/Punch (Contd.)
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
. 12
are currently activated, whether the punch tape
supply is low, and whether the punch or the reader
unit were last connected to the data channel.
3691 Paper Tape Reader/
Punch.
3694 Paper Tape Reader/
Punch.
The load on the core storage will depend upon
the operating speed of the unit, and on whether one
character per word or the packed format is being
used. In no case with the Control Data 3200
computer system will the loading exceed 0.05% of
a single core storage module's throughput capacity .
Description
. 121 3691 Paper Tape Reader/Punch
The 3691 Paper Tape Reader/Punch is a freestanding unit, which in its normal version is 36
inches high, 28 inches deep, and nearly 48 inches
wide. A "ruggedized" version, built to withstand
adverse physical conditions, has different dimensions, which are summarized in the Physical Characteristics section of this Computer System Report,
on page 245:211.100.
.122 3694 Paper Tape Reader/Punch
The 3694 Paper Tape Reader/Punch is a freestanding unit, about 60 inches high, 24 inches
deep, and 42 inches wide. A large proportion of
the total space is taken up by the spooling facilities
which are a feature of this unit. Two separate
data channels can be connected to the self-contained
control mechanism within the 3694 Paper Tape
Reader/Punch, so that concurrent paper tape
reading and punching can take place.
The 3691 contains logically separate reading and
punching sub-units and a single data channel connection for their joint use. The single data channel
connection makes it impossible to run the reader and
the punch concurrently. Spooling facilities are
not provided.
ThePaper Tape Reader operates at a peak speed
of 1,000 characters per second, using standard
paper or plastic tape with fully-punched holes.
Reading operates photoelectrically, in either the
forward or reverse direction. Control Data is
currently using a Digitronics Corporation paper
tape reader for this unit.
The Paper Tape Reader operates at a peak speed of
350 characters per second, in the forward direction
only. A Control Data Model 350 photoelectric
reader is currently being used.
The Paper Tape Punch is supplied by the National
Cash Register Corporation, and operates at a
rated speed of 110 characters per second.
The Paper Tape Punch is suppled by the National
Cash Register Company, and operates at a rated
speed of 110 characters per second.
Five, seven or eight-level paper tape can be used
by either unit; a manual switch selection and tape
width adjustment are necessary when a different
type of paper tape is mounted. Character parity
can be optionally used on both reading and punching,
under program control. Each tape character can
be read into, or punched from, a separate computer
word location, or alternatively a packed format
can be used. In the packed format, a 24-bit
computer word stores either four 5-bit characters
or two 7-bit or 8-bit characters. Conversion to
or from the appropriate internal code must be
accomplished by programming.
Five, seven, or eight-level paper tape can be used
by either unit; a manual switch selection and tape
width adjustment are required when a different
type of paper tape is mounted. There are no provisions for automatically checking the parity of the
characters on the paper tape itself, and any required
checking or preparation of parity-checked characters
must be handled by the program. Each tape character can be read into, or punched from, a separate computer word location, or alternatively a
number of characters can be packed into a single
word. In the packed format, a 24-bit computer
word stores either four 5-bit characters or two
7-bit or 8-bit characters. Conversion to or from
the appropriate internal code must be accomplished
by programming.
Interruptions are controlled by the program and can
occur when the unit becomes available, when an
operation ends successfully, or when for some
reason an operation ends without being successfully
completed.
In addition t01l1e interrupt system, status indicators
show whether the unit is ready to respond to an
instruction, which of the three interrupt conditions
11/64
Interruptions can be controlled by the program and
can occur when the unit becomes available, when
an operation ends successfully, or when for some
reason an operation ends without being successfully
completed.
. 13
Availability:
. 14
First Delivery
. . . . . 6 months .
3691 Paper Tape
Reader/Punch: .
3694 Paper Tape
Reader/Punch: .
. 1963.
. July, 1964.
245:081.1 00
CDC 3200
Input-Output
3152 Line Printer
INPUT-OUTPUT: 3152 LINE PRINTER
!l 081.
.12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . . • . . . . • . 3152 Line Printer.
.12
Description
Description (Contd.)
Interrupts can be set to occur when the printer becomes available, when an operation is successfully
completed, or when for some reason an operation
ends without being successfully completed. The
program can inhibit any or all of these three interrupt conditions.
The Control Data 3152 Line Printer operates at up
to 150 single-spaced alphanumeric lines per minute.
It contains its own control unit, which is connected
to a single data channel, and a 120-character line
buffer. The 3152 is a drum printer, normally using
a 63-character drum, although alternative drums
are available. The drum revolution time is 400
milliseconds, and an infinite clutch is used so that
asynchronous printing is possible. Paper control
is handled either by the program directly, or by a
combination of the program and a 6-level format
tape. Skipping over non-printed areas takes place
at apprOximately 100 line-spaces per second. The
effective speed of the 3152 Printer, including allowances for paper advance, is summarized in
Table 1.
Program facilities include printing with single or
double spacing, page ejection, and automatic advancing to the last line of a page. In conjunction
with the 132-position, 6-level format loop which is
mounted by the operator before printing starts, the
program can instruct the paper to be positioned at
the line position corresponding to the next punched
hole in the specified channel of the format tape.
All paper-positioning instructions can take place
either before or after printing, as the program
directs.
In addition to the interrupt system, status indicators
show whether the printer is ready to respond to an
instruction, which of the three interrupt conditions
are currently activated, whether the paper supply
is exhausted, or whether the printed form is positioned at the last line of the page.
The load imposed on the core storage by the print
operation amounts, in the Control Data 3200 computer system, to only 37.5 microseconds per
printed line, which is negligible even at the top
speed of 150 lines per minute. The data to be
printed must be supplied in 6-bit BCD code, packed
four characters per word. Preparing the data in
this form may require many programmed code conversion operations. These operations will usually
form the greater part of the system overhead incurred through a printing operation.
The 3152 Printer is manufactured by Control Data
Corporation.
. 13
Availability: . . . . • . • 4 months.
.14
First Delivery: . . . . . June, 1963.
TABLE I: EFFECTIVE SPEED OF THE CDC 3152 PRINTER
Lines Advanced per
Line Printed
1
2
3
Printed Lines per Minute
Using AUERBACH Standard
Character Set*
5
150
150
150
150
150
6 (1 inch)
12 (2 inches)
18 (3 inches)
24 (4 inches)
30 (5 inches)
150
118
108
100
90
4
* 0-9, A-Z, minus, comma, period, dollar sign.
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
245:082.100
CDC 3200
Input-Output
IBM 1403 Printer
INPUT-OUTPUT: IBM 1403 PRINTER
§
082.
. 12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
Interrupts can be set to occur when the printer
becomes available, when an operation is successfully completed, or when for some reason an operation is ended without being successfully completed.
The program can inhibit any or all of these three
separate and distinct interrupt conditions.
. IBM 1403 Printer, Models
2 and 3.
CDC Line Printer Controller, Model 3258.
In addition to the interrupt system, status indicators
show whether the printer is available to respond to
an instruction, what interrupt conditions are presently in operation, or whether the paper supply
is exhausted.
Either Model 2 or Model 3 of the IBM 1403 Printer
can be connected to a Control Data 3000 Series
computer system by means of a Model 3258 Line
Printer Controller. A separate controller is
required for each printer which is to be connected
to the computer system. Theoretically, up to 64
printers could be connected to a single Control
Data 3200 computer system by connecting 8 printers
to each of the 8 possible data channels.
The IBM 1403 Model 2 operates at a peak speed of
600 lines per minute and uses a horizontal-chain
printing mechanism. The 1403 Model 2 is described in detail in the IBM 1401 Computer System
Report, on page 401:081.100. The newer Model 3
can operate at 1, 100 alphanumeric lines per minute,
using a train of type slugs which move through a
horizontal channel. The 1403 Model 3 is described
in detail in the IBM 1410 Computer System Report,
on page 402:082.100.
11/64
Description (Contd.)
The load imposed on the core storage by a printing
operation on the Control Data 3200 computer system
is only 41. 25 microseconds per printed line, which
is negligible. However, the data to be printed
must be in 6-bit BCD code and must be packed, four
characters per word, into an output area. Preparing
the data in this form may involve many programmed
code conversion operations. These operations,
rather than the transferring of data into the printer
controller buffer, will form the greater part of the
system overhead incurred through a printing
operation.
.13
Availability:
.14
First Delivery:
. Oct. 1964.
245:083.100
CDC 3200
Input-Output
501 and 505 Line Printers
INPUT-OUTPUT: 501 AND 505 LINE PRINTERS
§
.12
083.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
the line position corresponding to the next hole
punched in the specified channel of the format tape.
All paper-positioning instructions can take place
either before or after printing, as the program
directs.
501 Line Printer.
505 Line Printer.
3256 Line Printer Controller.
3659 Line Printer Controller.
. 12
Interrupts can be set to occur when the printer becomes available, when an operation is successfully
completed, or when for some reason an operation
ends without being successfully completed. The
program can inhibit any or all of these three separate and distinct interrupt conditions.
Description
The Control Data 501 and 505 Line Printers operate
at up to 1, 000 and 500 single-spaced alphanumeric
lines per minute, respectively. Except for their
operating speeds, the two units are functionally
identical. Each printer contains its own 136-character line buffer and can be connected to the computer system through either the single-channel 3256
Line Printer Controller or the dual-channel 3659
Line Printer Controller. The major advantage of
the dual-channel control is that the two channels can
be connected to different computer systems, making
it possible to switch the printer from one computer
system to another.
In addition to the interrupt system, status indicators
show whether the printer is available to respond to
an instruction, which of the three interrupt conditions are currently activated, whether the paper supply is exhausted or the paper torn, or whether the
printed form is currently positioned at the last line
of the page.
Each printer must have its own controller, so the
number of printers which can be connected to a
computer system is related to the number of data
channels and the number of selectable positions on
each data channel. There can be 8 data channels on
a CDC 3200 computer system and each channel has
8 selectable positions, so the theoretical maximum
numbers of printers per system is 64.
Physically, the printer is enclosed in a four-foothigh cabinet, similar to those used for peripheral
control equipment. The cabinet has semi-translucent front panels, through which the operator can
observe the printing operation. The use of the cabinet reduces the noise level during printing.
The load on the core storage amounts, in the Control Data 3200 computer system, to only 42. 5 microseconds per printed line, which is negligible even at
the top speed of 1,000 printed lines per minute.
However, the data to be printed must be in 6-bit
BCD code and must be packed, four characters per
word, into an output area. Preparing the data in
this form may involve many programmed code conversion operations. These operations will usually
form the greater part of the system overhead incurred through a printing operation.
Both the 501 and the 505 are drum printers, and both
normally employ a 63-character drum, although alternative drums are available. The drum revolution
time is 60 milliseconds on the 501 and 120 milliseconds on the 505; an asynchronous clutch is used so
that printing of a line can be initiated at any time.
Paper control is handled by the program, either
directly or in conjunction with the 6-level format
tape. Skipping over non-printed areas takes place
at 150 line-spaces per second. The effective speeds
of both printers, including allowances for paper advance, are summarized in Table 1.
Program facilities include printing with single or
double spacing, page ejection, and an automatic advance to the last line of a page. In conjunction with
the 132-position, 6-level format loop which is
mounted by the operator before printing starts, the
program can instruct the paper to be positioned at
Description (Contd. )
The 505 and 501 Printers are manufactured by Control Data Corporation.
. 13
. 14
Availability:..
4 months.
First Delivery
501 Printer:
505 Printer: . .
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
June 1964.
Spring 1965.
11/64
245:083.120
CDC 3200
§ 083.
TABLE I: EFFECTIVE SPEEDS OF CDC 501 AND 505 PRINTERS
Printed Lines per Minute
Using AUERBACH Standard
Character Set*
Lines Advanced per
Line Printed
501 Printer
1
2
3
4
5
1,000
750
714
667
600
500
500
500
400
375
571
416
333
267
227
375
300
250
215
187
6 (1 inch)
12 (2 inches)
18 (3 inches)
24 (4 inches)
30 (5 inches)
505 Printer
* 0-9, A-Z, minus, comma, period, dollar sign.
11/64
245:091.100
CDC 3200
Input-Output
7-Track Magnetic
Tape Units
INPUT-OUTPUT: 7-TRACK MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
§
,
\
',,-
091.
.12
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . .
.12
Description
Description (Contd. )
throughput capacity of a single core storage module,
depending directly on the data transfer rate.
Control Data 601 through 607
Magnetic Tape Units, and
associated Magnetic Tape
Controllers.
The effective data transfer rates are controlled by
the time taken to pass over the inter-block gap and
the length of each physical tape block. All Control
Data 7-track magnetic tape units use the ruM-compatible three-quarter-inch inter-block gaps, so that
their performance when the tape speed is low and
short blocks are in use is not as high as that of other
magnetic tape units which have otherwise identical
specifications but which are able to use shorter inter-block gaps (e.g., the Honeywell 204B Series).
The Control Data 600 Series of magnetic tape units
includes both 7-track and 9-track equipment. The
7-track tape units use one parity bit and six data bits
in each tape row. These units, which are compatible
with the IBM 729 Magnetic Tape Units and other
equivalent units, are described in this section and
summarized in Table 1. The 9-track units, which
use eight data bits and one parity bit in each tape row
and are compatible with the IBM 2400 Series magnetic tape units used in the IBM System/360, are
described in the next section of this Computer System Report, on page 245:092.100. Compatibility
between the two groups of units is limited to their
mutual use of one-half-inch magnetic tape reels as
a recording medium, and to the possible modification of 9-track units so that they can read or write
7-track magnetic tape instead of (gQi as well as) 9track magnetic tape.
The Control Data Magnetic Tape Unit Controllers can
control a maximum of from 4 to 16 tape units each,
depending on which model is selected (see Table II).
All the tape units connected to a particular controller
must be 7-track units with the same physical tape
speed.
The peak data transfer rates of the 7 -track magnetic
tape units vary from 20,850 to 120,000 characters
per second, depending upon which specific unit is in
use. The loading on the Control Data 3200 core storage modules during data transmission is one memory
cycle (1. 25 microseconds) per 24 data bits, and
amounts to between 0.6% and 3. 7% of the total
Each controller can handle as many simultaneous
data transmissions as it has data channels connected
to it. Models are available with one, two, three, or
four possible data channel connections. Where there
are multiple data channels connected to a single
magnetic tape controller, it is not necessary that
each data channel be connected to the same Control
Data 3000 series computer system. Where there
are two computers at a single site, it is common
practice to connect a single tape controller to both
computer systems. This allows both computers to
use any of the magnetic tape units connected to the
controller, and eliminates the necessity for special
switching devices.
TABLE I: CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CDC 7-TRACK MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
Model
No.
Tape
Speed,
inches
per sec
Recording
Density,
bits per
inch
Peak
Speed,
char
per sec
Interblock Gap Lengths
inches
msec(l)
chars (2)
Efficiency, %(3)
100-char 1,000-char
blocks
blocks
Demand
on Core
Storage,
% (4)
Rewind
Speed,
inches
per sec
601
37.5
556
200
20,850
0.75
0.75
20.0
20.0
417
150
19%
40%
71%
87%
0.6%
0.2%
200
603
75.0
556
200
41,700
0.75
0.75
10.0
10.0
417
150
19%
40%
71%
87%
1.3%
0.5%
350
604
75.0
800
556
200
60,000
0.75
0.75
0.75
10.0
10.0
10.0
600
417
150
14%
19%
40%
62%
71%
87%
1.9%
1.3%
0.5%
350
606
150.0
556
200
83,400
0.75
0.75
5.0
5.0
417
150
19%
40%
71%
87%
2.6%
0.9%
350
607
150.0
800
556
200
120,000
0.75
0.75
0.75
5.0
5.0
5.0
600
417
150
14%
19%
40%
62%
71%
87%
3.7%
2.6%
0.9%
350
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Time in milliseconds to traverse each interblock gap when reading or writing consecutive blocks.
Number of character positions occupied by each interblock gap.
Effective speed at the indicated block size, expressed as a percentage of peak speed.
Percentage of total available CDC 3200 core storage cycles used to service magnetic tape units during data transmissions.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
11/64
245:091.120
§
CDC 3200
.12
Description (Contd.)
The 7-track magnetic tape units can use pure binary
or BCD formats and can read backward as well as
forward. Writing must always operate in the forward direction. Searching backward or forward to
find a file mark, and rewinding with or without automatic unloading of the tape reel, can be handled by
the magnetic tape subsystem independently of the
computer once the operation has been initiated.
Program interruptions can be initiated under three
separate conditions: when a tape unit becomes available, when an operation ends normally (i. e., successfully), and when something has prevented an
operation from being successfully completed. The
program can select which types of interruption it
will allow a specific controller to initiate. Different
controllers, or different data channels connected to
the same controller, can be concurrently using different sets of interrupt conditions. There are 11
status codes which can be tested by the program.
These status codes must be used to identify the
cause of an interrupt, but they are also available
for use whenever required. They indicate whether
a tape unit is available or not; whether the tape is
positioned at a file mark, at the load point, or at
the physical end of the tape; what density is currently being used, whether writing is permitted, and
whether data has been lost through timing conflicts
or is of dubious value because of the known occurrence of a transverse or longitudinal parity error.
Because of the wide capability range of both the
magnetic tape units themselves and the associated
controllers, the comparative prices of the different
components are particularly important. These are
listed in the Price Data section of this Computer
System Report, which starts on page 245:221.101.
. 13
PHYSICAL FORM
.2
091.
Availability: .
14
Each tape drive is a single unit. The drive past the
read, write, and erase heads uses pneumatic capstans. The magnetic tape passes through vacuum
reservoirs immediately before and after passing
under the heads themselves. The vacuum reservoirs are vertical and can hold about seven feet of
tape except on the tape units which operate at 37.5
inches per second; on these units the reservoirs are
placed horizontally and have a capacityofaboutthree
feet of tape.
There are three heads, the erase head followed by
the write head and the read head. The gaps between
the heads are 0.4375 inches between the erase and
write heads, and 0.3 inches between the write and
read heads.
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
The Control Data 600 Series magnetic tape units use
one-half-inch plastic tape. Normally 2, 400-foot
reels are used, but some installations are successfully using 3, 600-foot reels with these tape units.
The coding used is exactly the same as that used
with the IBM 729 MagnetiC Tape Units.
.4
CONTROLLERS
All tape units must be connected to a controller.
The wide range of available controllers is shown in
Table II.
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
.5
The tape units can read a single block in the forward
or reverse direction, or write a block in the forward
direction only. The size of the block is determined
by the amount of storage specified as the input or
output area in the instruction, and is limited only by
the amount of core storage available. An end-offile mark can be written and is preceded by a 6-inch
gap. Search operations to find the end-of-file mark
can be conducted in either direction. A special instruction is available to erase 6 inches of tape, in
order to skip over a bad spot on the tape.
6 months .
First Delivery
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
601
603
604
606
607
January 1965.
March 1963.
May 1964.
August 1962.
May 1964.
TABLE II: CONTROLLERS FOR CDC 7-TRACK MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
Controller
Model
3127
No. of
Cbannels
Max. No.
of Tapes
1
4
Acceptable Tape
Unit Models'
601
3228
1
4
604 or 607
3229
1
8
604 or 607
3421
2
4
604 or 607
3422
2
6
604 or 607
3423
2
8
604 or 607
3622
2
16
606 or 607
3625
3
8
606 or 607
3626
3
16
606 or 607
3623
4
8
606 or 607
3624
4
16
606 or 607
• Tape lUlits with different tape transport speeds must not be
connected to the same magnetic tape controller.
11/64
INPUT -OUTPUT: 7-TRACK MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
§ 091.
.5
245:091.500
.7
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE (Contd.)
Single button controls are used to bring the mounted
tape to the load point and to prepare a tape reel for
dismounting. Loading and unloading a reel of tape
takes approximately one minute, and the tape unit
must be stopped while this is done.
The program can select either binary or BCD codes,
and can request interrupts to occur when a tape unit
becomes available, when an operation is completed
normally, or when an operation is completed in
some abnormal manner.
The current status of a tape unit can be tested at any
time. Special status indicators show: whether the
unit is available or not; whether the tape is positioned at a file mark, at the load point, or whether it is
approaching the physical end of the tape; what density is currently being used; and whether the tape
reel presently mounted can be written on. Error
status indicators show whether any data has been
lost through timing conflicts or whether any parity
errors have been found.
.6
PERFORMANCE
The major performance characteristics of the Control Data 600 Series of magnetic tape units (7 -track)
are summarized in Table 1. The effective speed of
any particular tape unit at any particular block size
can be calculated by using the formula "Effective
speed = Peak speed x Block length in chars/ (Block
length + Interblock gap length in chars)." The required values are included in Table 1. Alternatively,
the effective speeds can be read from the graphs at
the end of this section.
.7
EXTERNAL FACIIJTIES
The unit number is displayed on a dial at the top of
the unit. There are ten positions, eight of which are
marked 1 through 8 and two marked "stand-by."
EXTERNAL FACIIJTIES (Contd.)
The peak frequency of reloading is directly related
to the tape transport speed, and is once every 13,
6.5, or 3.25 minutes for units with tape speeds of
37.5, 75, and 150 inches per second, respectively.
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Errors which result in the failure of parity checks
cause an indicator to be set and (at the option of the
programmer) an interrupt. Such errors may be
noted either during the automatic read-back operation, which occurs while writing is in progress, or
during normal reading. Two parity checks are
made, one on each 6-bit data character transferred
and one on the longitudinal parity character at the
end of each physical tape block.
Errors which arise from timing conflicts and which
lead to a loss of data are similarly handled, by
setting an indicator and providing for an optional interrupt.
Checks are made for the approaching end of the tape,
and for a match between the actual length of an incoming tape block and the input area set aside to
receive the block. Interrupt and indicator actions
are available to notify the program of the result of
these checks. No explicit check is made upon the
adequacy of the plastic tape itself; reliance is placed
upon the parity checks on the data recorded on the
tape.
@1 964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
245:091.901
§
CDC 3200
091.
EFFECTIVE SPEED: CDC 601, 603 AND 606 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
(Recording density: 556 char/inch)
1,000,000
7
4
2
100,000
60 G
7
4
.J'
V
/V
Effective Speed,
char/sec.
2
V
7
1,000
/'
7
V
/
/
/
7
~
i..;' 1..-""
i-'"
~
~
....""
/'
17
/
'"
""
7
4
2
/
~
10,000
V
....
;~
V
~
7
7
4
2
100
2
10
4
7
2
100
4
7
2
1,000
Characters Per Block
11/64
4
7
10,000
INPUT-OUTPUT: 7-TRACK MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
245:091.902
§ 091.
EFFECTIVE SPEED: CDC 604 AND 607 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
(Recording density: 800 char/inch)
1,000,000
7
4
2
100,000
I)\)1
."
7
i""
/
/
V
2
Effective Speed,
char/sec.
I' /
10,000
7
~~
/'
7
./
1,000
./
7
4
2
I)~ r-
.J"
4
,/
IL /
1/
7
4
2
100
2
10
4
7
2
100
4
7
2
1,000
4
7
10,000
Characters Per Block
©1964 Auerbach Corporation ond Info, Inc.
11/64
245:092.100
CDC 3200
Input-Output
9-Track Magnetic
Tape Units
INPUT-OUTPUT: 9-TRACK MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
§ 092.
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .
.12
.12
BCD or 4-bit packed decimal codes used in the IBM
System/360.
Control Data Magnetic Tape
Units, Models 692, 694,
696, and associated controllers.
Description
Control Data has announced a series of 9-track magnetic tape units which are to be compatible with the
new IBM 2400 Series tape units. The IBM 2400 Series units are described in the IBM System/360 Computer System Report, on page 420:091. 100; their
major innovations are the use of eight data bits and
one parity bit in each tape row, and the addition of a
cyclic (or diagonal) check character to each tape
block.
The peak speeds of the Control Data 692, 694, and
696 tape units are 30, 000, 60,000, and 90,000 eightbit bytes per second, respectively. These speeds
are functionally equivalent to 40,000, 80,000, and
120, 000 six-bit characters per second, respectively,
unless the data is recorded in the 8-bit Extended
11/64
Description (Contd.)
Models 3825, 3826, and 3827 controllers have been
announced for the 692, 694, and 696 tape units. The
ratio of data channel connections to magnetic tape
unit connections is unusually high, one data channel
being provided for every two magnetic tape units
which can be connected. Preliminary indications
are that it will be possible to connect any of the
three 9-track tape unit models to any of the three
controller models. The number of magnetic tape
units and data channels that can be connected to each
controller model are as follows:
Controller Model;
Magnetic Tape Units:
Data Channels:
3825
3826
3827
4
2
6
3
8
4
Delivery dates of the 692, 694, and 696 magnetic
tape units have not been specifically announced by
Control Data, but first deliveries are expected to
take place as soon as IBM delivers its 2400 Series
tape units.
245: 101.1 00
CDC 3200
Input-Output
Satellite Coupler
INPUT-OUTPUT: SATELLITE COUPLER
§
101.
.12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . . . . . . . . . 3682 Satellite Coupler.
3681 Data Channel Converter.
. 12
Description
The 3682 Satellite Coupler is used to allow a computer system to communicate directly with another,
physically adjacent system. The basic technique
involved is that an input-output channel is used,
and request and control signals from computer
system A to computer system B are received in the
same way as the equivalent status signals from any
input-output unit. When the appropriate signals
have passed, an input-output instruction will transfer data directly from one computer to the other
computer memory at a speed limited only by the
memory cycle timing of the slower computer.
Description (Contd.)
•
Two 3200 systems together;
I!I
A 3200 system to a larger system (Control Data
3600 or 6600);
•
Several like or unlike systems, to form a "ring"
of interconnected computer systems. (System
"A" could be connected to system "B" and "Z";
system "B" to system "C" and "A", etc.).
The programming systems required for the control
of all but the simplest cases of these multicomputer configurations may well be complex. In
general, their design is the responsibility of the installation itself, since at the present time it is
unusual to find two installations with the same
needs.
If one of the interconnected computer systems is the
This arrangement will usually be used to connect a
large computer to a smaller one. Three examples
of such connections are illustrated below. The Control Data 3400 could utilize a Satellite Coupler to
connect:
•
A 3200 to a smaller system (Control Data 160-A
or 3100);
~_D_A_T_A ~_~_!_N_N_E_L ~I-E~------~~~I~__
__
__
Control Data 160-A, a 3681 Data Channel Converter
is required in addition to the 3682. The differentiation between the 3681 and 3682 is that the 3681 simulates the appropriate 3000 series data channel,
while the 3682 (which is made up of two identical
elements acting as buffers between the two systems)
buffers and controls the data transmissions themselves.
C_o_t_;_8L_2_ER
___
~I~~------~;~~_D_AT_A_~_lHA_06_NN_E_L~
__
__
Fig. 1: Coupling of a Control Data 3200 system to a 3100 system.
3206
DATA CHANNEL
-,.,.
,...
I
I
3682
COUPLER
I ,.,.
I-
....
3606
DATA CHANNEL
Fig. 2: Coupling of a Control Data 3200 system to a 3600 system.
3206
DATA CHANNEL
3682
COUPLER
3681
CONVERTER
160-A
COMPUTER
Fig. 3: Coupling of a Control Data 3200 system to a 160-A system.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
245; 102.100
CDC 3200
Input-Output
3293 Incremental Plotter
INPUT -OUTPUT: 3293 INCREMENTAL PLOTTER
. 12
§ 102.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description (Contd.)
from the computer direct pen carriage movement
and drum rotation as well as the movement of the
pen against or away from the recording surface.
. Control Data 3293 Incremental Plotter.
Calcomp Digital Incremental
Plotters, Models 563,
564, 565, and 566.
The pen carriage moves in the X axis (horizontally),
and the drum moves in the Y axis (vertically). The
two movements are independent, so that it is
possible to instruct movements in both directions
to take place at the same time, resulting in slant
movements.
Description
The Control Data 3293 Incremental Plotter incorporates anyone of the Models 563 through 566
Digital Incremental Plotters manufactured by
California Computer Products, Inc. These
plotters vary in speed (from 12, 000 to 18, 000
steps per minute), in step size (0.01 or 0.005
inch), and in chart width (from 12 to 31 inches).
The details of each specific model are shown in
Table 1. (For general 'information about the
characteristics and applications of digital plotters,
see the Special Report on page 23:070.100.)
Interrupts can be set to occur when the plotter
becomes available, when an operation is successfully completed, or when for some reason an operation is ended although not successfully completed.
The program can inhibit any or all of these three
separate interrupt conditions.
In addition to the interrupt system, six indicators
are used to record the present status of the plotter.
These indicators show which of the three interrupt
conditions are active, whether the plotter is busy,
or whether some manual adjustment is in progress.
The possible manual processes include high-speed
vertical and horizontal paper movement for initially
setting the paper and the pen in the proper relative
positions.
The Calcomp plotters are two-axis recorders for
plotting one variable against another. Each plotter
consists of a ballpoint pen mounted on a carriage
and a bidirectional recording drum. Output words
TABLE I: CHARACTERISTICS OF CALCOMP PLOTTERS USED WITH CDC 3293
Calcomp Model No.
Model 563
31. 0
Chart width, inches
29.5
Plotting width, inches
120.0
Chart length, feet
Step size, inches
0.01
Steps per minute
12,000
Milliseconds per
pen movement
90.0
11/64
Model 564
Model 565
Model 566
31. 0
29.5
120.0
0.005
18,000
12.0
11.0
120.0
0.01
18,000
12.0
11.0
120.0
0.005
18,000
90.0
90.0
90.0
245: 111.1 00
CDC 3200
Simultaneous Operations
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
§
1.
111.
.1
GENERAL
After the starting and ending addresses for the
transfer are stored in reserved locations of the
processor's fast register file, the main program
is rcleased [rom further control of the input-output
operation. For each transfer, the Communication Channel issues a data transfer request to
both the input-output equipment and the priority
controls of the register file. The character or
word address is then delivered from the register
file to the core storage address control, and the
data transfer is made between storage and the data
channel. The starting address is incremented and
the entire transfer sequence repeated until the
operation is complete, as evidenced by the starting
address becoming equal to the ending address. An
automatic interrupt can be specified to notify the
program immediately upon completion of the transfer.
The Control Data 3200 system allows for the connection of up to eight input-output data channels.
Each data channel is serviced by a bi-directional,
12-bit parallel interface unit called the 3206 Standard Communication Channel t. Up to eight different peripheral equipment controllers can be connected to one 3206. These facilities make it
possible for up to eight input-output operations on
any of 64 different controllers to proceed simultaneously with computation.
A choice of single- and dual-channel controllers is
available for the card and printer equipment. Full
line buffers are included with each of the printer
controllers, but card buffers are optional depending
upon the choice of card reader or card punch controller. The magnetic tape units, paper tape units,
and typewriter simply have 12-bit interfaces.
Each four-character word transferred uses one
core memory cycle (1. 25 microseconds) during
its accession or storage, and a further three
Register File cycles (0.5 microseconds) are
used to control the transfer operation. During
these operations the central processor is unable
to gain access to the core storage module involved,
or to the Register File, so computation is delayed.
The probable delaying effect which input-output
operations will have on processing can be calculated
using the core storage utilization figures which are
listed for all the standard peripheral units in
Table I. Where two or more core storage modules
are incorporated into a single computer system,
it may be possible to reduce such processor delays
by overlapping storage references.
Magnetic tape controllers can be selected from
among 8 different units that provide from 1 to 4
channel accesses, and which are capable of controlling from 1 to 16 tape transports. Thus, if
enough data channels are available, from one to
four tapes on each controller can be operational in
any combination, in addition to non-magnetic-tape
peripherals and the processor.
The so-called "block" operations (Search and Move)
can also occur in parallel with the main computational process, once they have been initiated. The
Search instruction initiates a search through a
block of character storage addresses looking for
equality or inequality with a character contained in
the instruction word. The Move order is used to
move a block of n characters from one area of
storage to another. It should be noted, however,
that no real advantage results from this feature if
the program requires access to the same storage
module as that involved in the block operation. As
a result, careful program design is required to
realize the potential benefits of these overlapped
internal operations.
The input-output operations are of two types:
character-block transfers and word-block transfers. Character operations permit either 6 or 12
bits to be transferred in parallel between core
storage and the peripheral channel, while word
operations allow 24-bit transfers. Each inputoutput transfer is initiated after a series of
instructions which connect the desired channel,
test for "busy" or other status conditions in the
input-output equipment, and select the desired
function. The input-output transfer instruction (a
two-word instruction) is then issued to start the
transfer.
t A 24-bit interface unit (the 3207 Special Comunication Channel) can be used in place of two 3206 units.
GENERAL (Contd.)
.2
RULES
-The following processes can take place simultaneously:
o
One computation; plus
o
One "block" operation (Search or Move); plus
o
A console key-in operation; plus
o
As many buffered input-output operations* as
there are buffers (up to about 50); plus
o
As many non-buffered input-output operations**
as there are data channels (a maximum of 8
channels); plus
*
The present printers are always buffered; card
equipment is optionally buffered.
**
Paper tape, magnetic tape, and random access
drum and disk operations are non-buffered; the
number of such operations may also be restricted
by the manner in which the controllers are connected to the data channels.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
CDC 3200
245: 111.1 01
§
111.
.2
RULES (Contd.)
.2
RULES (Contd.)
•
** *
The number of concurrent input-output operations
may also be limited by maximum throughput
capacity of the computer system, which is 2,666,666
characters per second.
As many "non-supervised" peripheral operations*** as there are appropriate units.
Magnetic tape rewinding, backspace operations,
and searching for file marks, disk arm positioning
and address search operations are typical "nonsupervised" peripheral operations.
TABLE I: SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
Start Time
Cycle
Time,
DEVICE
Time.
msea.
msee.
Core
Use
Data Transmission
Time,
Channel
Use
msec.
Core
Us.
Stop Time
Channel
Use
Time,
msec.
Core
Use
Channel
Use
828. 838 Disk Files
---
250 av
0.0
1 msec
Var
2.10r
3.4%
Yes
0.0
---
1311 Disk Storage Drive
---
170 or
270 av
0.0
1 msec
Var
2.4%
Yes
0.0
---
---
2311 Disk Storage Drive
---
97.5 av
0.0
1 msec
Var
6.4%
Yes
0.0
---
1 msec
-------
3235 Drum Storage
34.4
17.2 av
0.0
861 Drum Storage
34.4
17.2 av
0.0
862 Drum Storage
17.2
8.6 av
50.0
lB.O
50.0
42.0
240.0
240.0
405 Card Reader
1,200 cpm, unbuffered
405 Card Reader
1,200 cpm, buffered
---
---
Var
5.0%
Yes
0.0
?
Var
(62/1)% Yes
0.0
0.0
?
Var
(s2/I)% Yes
0.0
0.0
Yes
32.0
3.0%
Yes
0.0
---
0.0
Yes
B.O
12.5%
Yes
0.0
---
-----
4B.0
0.0
Yes
190.0
1.1%
Yes
2.0
0.0
No
4B.0
4.4%
2.2 msee 190.0
0.0%
No
2.0
0.0
No
SOO.O
B4.0
0.0
Yes
514.0
0.4%
Yes
2.0
0.0
No
600.0
B4.0
2.8%
2.2 msec 514.0
0.0%
No
2.0
0.0
No
-----
---
415 Card Punch
250 cpm, unbuffered
415 Card Punch
250 cpm, buffered
523 Card Punch
100 cpm, unbuffered
523 Card Punch
100 cpm, buffered
544 Card Punch
250 cpm, unbuffered
544 Card Punch
250 cpm, buffered
48.0
0.0
Yeo
190.0
1.1%
Yes
2.0
0.0
No
240.0
48.0
4.4%
2.2 mscc 190.0
0.0%
No
2.0
0.0
No
3691 Paper Tape Reader
350 cps
2.9
?
?
0.0
Yes
2.9
<0.05
Yes
2.0
0.0
No
3691 Paper Tape Punch
110 cps
0.0
Yes
9.0
<0.02
Yes
3.0
0.0
No
9.0
?
3694 Paper Tape Reader
1,000 cps
1.0
?
0.0
Yes
1.0
<0.2%
Yes
O. B
0.0
No
3694 Paper Tape Punch
110 cps
9.0
?
0.0
Yes
9.0
<0.02% Yes
3.0
0.0
No
3152 Line Printer
150 lpm
400 +
9.7LS
0
---
---
375
<0.01% O.lmsec 25 +
9.7LS
1403 Model 2 Printer
SOO lpm
100 +
5LS
0
---
---
80
<0.1%
1403 Model 3 Printer
l,100lpm
55 +
5LS
0
---
---
35
0.0
No
O.lmsec 20 +
5LS
0.0
No
<0.2%
O.lmsec 20 +
5LS
0.0
No
60 +
S.7LS
0
---
---
45
<0.1%
O.lmsec 13 +
S.7LS
0.0
No
120 +
6.7LS
0
---
---
105
<0.05% 0.1 msec 13 +
6.7LS
0.0
No
601 Magnetic Tape Unit
20.8 KC
---
3.0
0.0
Yes
Var
0.6
Yes
3.0
0.0
No
603 Magnetic Tape Unit
41. 7 KC
---
2.75
0.0
Yos
Var
1.3%
Yes
2.25
0.0
No
604 Magnetic Tape Unit
SO.O KC
---
2.75
0.0
Yes
Var
1.9
Yes
2.25
0:0
No
SOS MagnetiC Tape Unit
83.4 KC
---
2.75
0.0
Yes
Var
2. S
Yes
1.75
0.0
No
607 Magnetic Tape Unit
120 KC
---
2.75
0.0
Yes
Var
3.75%
Yes
1. 75
0.0
No
?
0.0
Yes
Var
1.25%
Yes
?
0.0
No
?
0.0
Yes
Var
2.5%
Yes
?
0.0
No
696 Magnetic Tape Unit
-------
?
0.0
Yes
Var
3.75%
Yes
?
0.0
No
3692 Program Controlled
Input-Output Typewriter
67
0
---
---
Var
<0.001
Yes
0
---
---
3293 Incremental
Plotter
3.3
or 5.0
100
0.0
No
No
<0.05
No
100
0.0
No
501 Printer
1,000 lpm
. 505 Printer
500lpm
692 Magnetic Tape Unit
30 KC
694 Magnetic Tape Unit
av
b
I
LS
Var.
11/64
240.0
Average time - see main report section on thil! device for details.
For the word mode; if character mode is used, the core usage should be quadrupled.
Interlace factor (can be I, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32).
Number of lines skipped between successive printed lines
Data transmission time varies With record length.
245: 121.1 00
CDC 3200
Instruction List
INSTRUCTION LIST
!I 121 .
FORMAT
.1
The instruction format in the 3200 is varied in
that, generally, internal instructions require one
word of storage, while input/output instructions
23
18
17
consist of two words. Figure I presents the format
of an internal instruction:
16
o
15 14
b
m. y. k. or unused
Figure 1. Format of Internal Instructions
f: Operation Code - 6 bits: specifies the operation to be performed.
f: Operation Code - 6 bits: specifies the type of
1/0 to be performed.
d: Auxiliary Operation Code-l bit: its function
varies depending upon the type of instruction
being executed. It is used to denote such
operations as indirect addressing. variations
in shift instructions. and in some cases, combines with f to form a 7 bit code.
d: Interrupt Designator- 1 bit: specifies whether
or not interrupt is to occur upon completion of
the operation.
b: Index Designator-2 bits: specifies one of
three index registers. the contents of which
are used to modify the execution address portion of instructions.
m.y.k: Execution Address-IS bits: specifies the
address of an operand (m). an operand IV). or
a shift count (k).
Usually input/output instructions consist of two
words in the format shown in Figure 2.
23
18
I
x
23 21
20 18
17
16
0
Id
n
Ie
m
17
16
I
x: Communication Channel Designator-3 bits:
specifies which of the eight possible channels
is to be used.
t: Format Definer- 3 bits: is subdivided into g.
h. and i.
g: Choice of BCD conversion or no conversion
h: Choice of storing in a forward or backward
direction
i: Choice of 12 to 24 bit assembly or no
assembly
e: Mode-l bit: specifies input (output) to (from)
storage ?r the accumulator.
m: Beginning Address-17 bits: specifies the
source (destination) of the first word of a data
block.
n: Terminal Address-17 bits: specifies the
source (destination)
1 of the last word of a
data block. If backward storage is being used.
n is the source (destination) -1 and is smaller
than m.
+
0
Figure 2. Format of Input/Output Instructions.
Reproduced from Control Data 3200 Computer System Information Manual.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
4/64
245: 121. 200
CDC 3200
§ 121.
2.
INSTRUCTION LIST
FUNCTION
STOP ANO JUMPS
Unconditional Halt
Selective Jump
Return Jump
Unconditional Jump
Index Jump. Incremental
Index Jump, Decremental
Compare A with Zero, Jump
Compare A with Q, Jump
Compare {within limits test)
SKIPS
Skip if A ~ y
Skip if D ~ V
Skip if Ind,x ~ y
Skip if A ~ V
Skip if D ~ V
Skip if Ind,x ~ y
Index Skip. Incremental
Index Skip. Decremental
Stmage Shift
MNEMONIC
COOE
HLT
SJX. X~ 1-6
RTJ
WP
IJI
IJD
AZJ
ADJ
CPR
000 m
,ASE
DSE
ISE
ASG
DSG
ISG
lSI
ISD
SSH
046 V
047 V
04(1-3) V
056 Y
057 y
05(1-3) V
100 b V
10 I b V
1000 m
00im.i~I-6
007 m
01 db m
020 b m
021 b m
030 b m
031 b m
52 d b m
LDA
LCA
LOD
LDI
STA
STD
S11
SWA
SHA
SHD
ENR
INR
IRT
ADA
RAO
SBA
MUA
OVA
AddtoAO
COOE
DfAD
DfSB
DfMU
DfDV
60
61
62
63
logical Product. AIm
ANA
AND
ANI
XOA
XOI
LDL
SSA
SCA
LPA
17 6 y
17 7'V
17(1-3) V
166 Y
16(1-31 V
27 d b m
35 d b m
36 d b m
37 d b m
CHARACTER
Character Address to A
Load A. Character
Load Q, Character
Store A. Character
Store Character
Store Character Address from A
ECHA
LACH
LDCH
SACH
SDCH
SCHA
11 d V
22 d m
23 d m
42 d m
43 d m
46 d b m
Subtract from AO
Multiply AD
Divid, AD
LOGICAL
logical Product. A/y
logical Product. Q/y
Logical Product.lndex/y
LOAD
LCAD
STAD
SHAD
SCAD
ELD
EUA
EAQ
DEL
AEU
AQE
ADAD
SBAD
MUAQ
DVAD
Exclusive Or. Index/y
Load A logical
Selectively Set A
Selectively Complement A
n.
20 d b m
24d b m
21 db m
54 d b m
40 d b m
41 db m
47 db m
44d b m
120 b k
12 I b k
14 d b V
15 d b V
53 d
30 d b m
34 d b m
31 db m
50 d b m
51 db m
4B-BIT FIXEO POINT ARITHMETIC
Load AD
load Complement AD
StoreAO
ShiftAQ
Seal' AD
E (lower) to Q
E(upper) to A
Eto AD
D to E(lower)
A to E lupper)
AD to E
Add to AD
Subtract from AD
MultiplV AO
Divide AD
MNEMONIC
Exclusive Or. A/y
24-B1T FIXEO POINT ARITHMETIC
Load A
load Complement A
Load D
Load Ind,x
Store A
Store Q
Store Index
Store Word Address
Shift A
ShiftQ
Enter R*
Increase R*
Inter-Register Transfer
Add to A
R,place Add
Subtract from A
MultiplVA
Divide A
FUNCTION
48-BIT FLOATING POINT
25 d b m
26 d b m
45 d b m
130 b k
131 b k
55 1
552
553
555
556
557
32 d b m
33 d b m
56 d b m
57 db m
db m
db m
db m
dbm
DECIMAL ARITHMETIC
LoadE
LOE
StoreE
STE
Add to E
ADE
Subtract from E
SBE
Shift E
SfE
Jump if E ~ 0
EZJ
Jump if E~1~ D_A_T_A_~_6HA_06_N_N_E_L ~
__
__
__
Fig. 2: Coupling of a Control Data 3400 system to a 3600 system.
3406
DATA CHANNEL
3682
COUPLER
3681
CONVERTER
160-A
COMPUTER
Fig. 3: Coupling of a Control Data 3400 system to a 160-A system.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
5/64
246: 111.1 00
CDC 3400
Simultaneous Operations
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
/il111.
.1
GENERAL
The Control Data 3400 system allows for the connection of up to four inputoutput data channels. Each data channel is serviced by a bi-directional, 12-bit parallel
interface unit called the 3406 Standard Input/Output Channel. * Up to eight different
peripheral equipment controllers can be connected to one 3406. These facilities make
it possible for up to four input-output operations on any of 32 different controllers to
proceed simultaneously with computation.
A choice of single- and dual-channel controllers is available for the card and
printer equipment. Full line buffers are included with each of the printer controllers,
but card buffers are optional depending upon the choice of card reader or card punch controller. The magnetic tape units, paper tape units, and typewriter simply have 12-bit
interfaces.
Magnetic tape controllers can be selected from among 10 different units that
provide from 1 to 4 channel accesses, and which are capable of controlling from 1 to 16
tape transports. Thus, if enough data channels are available, from one to four tapes on
each controller can be operational in any combination, in addition to non-magnetic-tape
peripherals and the processor.
All Disk File controllers are dual-channel devices that permit any two of the
three disc operations of reading, writing, or positioning to be overlapped with other
operations.
The input-output operations allow 12-, 24-, or 4S-bit transfers. ** Each
input-output transfer is initiated after a series of instructions which connect the desired
channel, test for "busy" or other status conditions in the input-output equipment, and
select the desired function. The input-output transfer instruction (a full 4S-bit word
instruction) is then issued to start the transfer.
Mter the starting address and word count for the transfer are fetched from
memory and stored in special registers in the input-output channel, the main program
is released from further control of the input-output operation. For each transfer, the
3406 Communication Channel issues a data transfer request to the input-output equipment, and the data transfer is made between storage and the data channel. The starting
address is incremented, the word count is decremented, and the entire transfer sequence is repeated until the transfer count becomes equal to zero. An automatic interrupt can be specified to notify the program immediately upon completion of the transfer.
The delay to the program caused by the core storage accesses required by
any particular input-output unit is 1. 5 microseconds per 12-bit byte. The percentage
of core storage time required by individual peripheral operations is listed in the table
below:
*
**
For special applications, either a 24-bit (Model 3407) or 4S-bit (Model 340S) data channel
can be used, but at least one channel must be reserved for the standard 3406 12-bit unit.
24-bit transfers are only possible with a 3407 channel, and 4S-bit transfers with a 340S
channel.
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
5/64
CDC 3400
246: 111.1 01
§ 111.
.1
GENERAL (Contd. )
Peripheral Operation
Transfer of 12-bit Bytes
607 Tape Unit
120, 000 char/sec:
83,400 char/sec:
30, 000 char/ sec:
8.9%
6.2%
2.3%
604 Tape Unit
60,000 char/sec:
41, 667 char/sec:
15,000 char/sec:
Line Printer, 1000 1pm:
Line Printer, 300 1pm:
Card Reader, 1,200 cpm:
Card Punch, 250 cpm:
Paper Tape Reader or Punch:
4.5%
3.1%
1.1%
0.2%
0.04%
0.1%
0.03%
0.06%
Core Storage Demands (%)
.2
RULES
The following processes can take place simultaneously:
One computation; plus
As many buffered input-output operations* as there are buffers (up to about
50); plus
o
As many non-buffered input-output operations** as there are data channels
(a maximum of 4 channels); plus
o
As many "non-supervised" peripheral operations*** as there are appropriate
units.
*
The present printers are always buffered; card equipment is optionally buffered.
**
Paper tape, magnetic tape, and random access disc operations are non-buffered; the
number of such operations may also be restricted by the manner in which the controllers are connected to the data channels.
*** Magnetic tape rewinding and Search File Mark are the only presently defined "nonsupervised" operations.
5/64
246: 121.1 00
CDC 3400
I nstructi on li st
INSTRUCTION LIST
§
121.
SYMBOLS
k =
K=
m=
M=
y =
y =
Address portion of instruction
k + (Bb), Modified shift count
Address portion of instruction
m + (Bb), Modified operand address
Address portion of instruction
y + (Bb), Modified operand
* = 48-bit instruction
b
= Designator for index register
= Designator for 22, 23, 75, 76
,
= Complemented
= Restrict
() = Contents of
= Next instruction
NI
+ = Floating point option
FULL WORD DATA TRANSMISSION
LDA
LAC
STA
LDQ
LQC
STQ
12
13
20
16
17
21
Load
Load
Store
Load
Load
Store
A
A complement
A
Q
Q comp lement
Q
instruction to upper
PARTIAL WORD DATA TRANSMISSION
* LDC 63 Load character (ByteO_7)-A05_00
(M)-A
(M)...!.....-A
(A)-M
(M)-Q
(M)....!....-Q
(Q)-M
(63 b v0006 50 0 m)
* STC 63 Store character (A05-00)-ByteO_7
(63 b v0006 50 5 m)
SAU 60 Substitute address upper
(A14_00)-MUA
SAL 61 Substitute address lower
(A 14-00)-MLA
INTER - REGISTER TRANSMISSION
INDEXING
IAQ 00 Interchange A and Q (A)-Q, (Q)-A
(00 7 00554)
ATI 00 Transmit A to index (A14_00)-Bb
(00 7 40S4b)
SHIFTING
ARS
QRS
LRS
ALS
QLS
LLS
01
02
03
05
06
07
Shift
Shift
Shift
Sh ift
Shift
Shift
(A) right by K
(Q) right by K
(AQ) right by K
(A) laft by K
(Q) left by K
(AQ) left by K
ENI 50
INI 51
L1U 52
L1L 53
SIU 56
SIL 57
ISK # 54
Enter index
y_Bb
Increase index
y + (Bb)-Bb
Load index upper
(mUA)-Bb
Load index lower
(mLA)-Bb
Store index upper
(Bb)
• mUA
Store index lower
(Bb)
mLA
Index skip:
(Bb) l' y: (Bb) + 1-Bb, continue
(Bb) =y: O-Bb, skip lower
ins truct i on
IJ P 55 Index jump:
(Bb) l' 0: (Bb) - 1-Bb, jump to m
(Bb) = 0: continue
ARITHMETIC
FLOATING POINT
FIXED POINT
ADD
SUB
MUI
DVI
RAD
RSB
RAO
RSO
SCA
SCQ
14
15
24
25
70
71
72
73
34
35
Add to A
(A) + (M)---A
+
Subtract from A
(A) - (M)-A
+
Multiply integer
(M) (A)-QA
+
Divide integer (QA) / (M)-A, rem Q
+
Replace add
[(M) + (A))-M & A
Replace subtract
[(M) - (A)l-M & A
Replace add one
[(M) + l l - M & A
Repiace sub. one
[(M) - l l - M & A
Scale A Shift (A) left unti I A47 l' A46 or k = 0;
Scale AQ Shift (AQ) left until A47 l' A46 or k =0;
FAD
FSB
FMU
FDV
30
31
32
33
Floating
Floating
Floating
Floating
add.
sub.
melt.
div.
[(A) + (M)l-A
[(A) - (M)l-A
(A) (M)-A
(A)/(M)-A
(k - no. of shifts)-Bb
(k - no. of shifts)-Bb
Reproduced from Control Data 3400 Preliminary Reference Manual, Appendix D.
© I 964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
5/64
CDC 3400
246: 121.1 01
§ 121.
INPUT /OUTPUT
LOGICAL
SST 40 Selective set
Set (An) to 1 for (Mn) = 1
SCL 41 Selective clear
Clear (An) to 0 for (Mn) 1
SCM 42 Selecti ve complement
Complement (An) for (Mn) 1
SSU 43 Selective substitute
(Mn)-An for (Qn) = 1
L
LDL 44 Load Logical
[(A) + L
ADL 45 Add logical
[(A) - L
SBL 46 Sub. logical
L
STL 47 Store logical
* CONN 74.0 Connect
*
*
=
*
*
*
*
=
74.1
74.2
74.3
74.4
74.5
74.6
EXTF
BEGR
BEGW
COpy
CLCH
CCWD
Function
Read
Write
Copy status
Clear channel
Change control word
(Q)(M)-A
(A) (M)]-A
(Q) (M)l-A
(Q)(A)-M
GENERAL
NO MEMORY REFERENCE
ENQ 04
ENA 10
INA 11
Enter Q Extend sign Y, Y-Q
Enter A Extend sign Y, V-A
Increase A Extend sign Y,
Y + (A)-A
EUB 77.5 Enter upper bound
ELB 77.6 Enter lower bound
INF
AUG
CIS
SEN
CPR
77.0
77.1
77.2
77.3
77.4
Internal function
Augment
Copy interrupt status
Internal sense
Copy product regi ster
MEMORY TEST
SSK#
SSH#
EQS#
THS#
MEQ#
MTH#
36
37
64
65
66
67
Storage skip (M) neg:
Storage shift (M) neg:
Search (Bb) words, if
Search (Bb) words, if
Search (Bb) words, if
Search (Bb) words, if
skip lower instruction; (M) pos: continue
skip lower instruction, left 1; (M) pos: continue, left 1
(M - 1), or (M - 2), etc. = (A) skip lower instruction; ;t A, continue
(M - 1), or (M - 2), etc. > (A) skip lower instruction; ~ A, continue
L (Q) (M - 1), or (M - 2), etc. = (A) skip lower instruction; ;t A, continue
L (Q) (M -1), or (M - 2), etc. > (A) skip lower instruction; ~ A, continue
A AND Q TEST
SELECTIVE JUMP AND STOP
AJP 22 Jump to m on condition j
QJP 23 Jump to m on condition j
j
22
0
1
2
3
(A) = 0: Jump
(A) ;t 0: Jump
(A) Pos: Jump
(A) Neg: Jump
(A) = 0: Ret. Jump
(A) ;t 0: Ret. Jump
(A) Pos: Ret. Jump
(A) Neg: Ret. Jump
4
5
6
7
5/64
SLJ 75 Jump to m on condition j
SLS 76 Stop on j, and jump to m
23
(Q) = 0: Jump
(Q) ;t 0: Jump
(Q) Pos: Jump
(Q) Neg: Jump
(Q) = 0: Ret. Jump
(Q) ;t 0: Ret. Jump
(Q) Pos: Ret. Jump
(Q) Neg: Ret. Jump
75
Jump
Key 1: Jump
Key 2: Jump
Key 3: Jump
Ret. Jump
Key 1: Ret. Jump
Key 2: Ret. Jump
Key 3: Ret. Jump
76
Stop: Jump
Key 1: Stop: Jump
Key 2: Stop: Jump
Key 3: Stop: Jump
Stop: Ret. Jump
Key 1: Stop: Ret. Jump
Key 2: Stop: Ret. Jump
Key 3: Stop: Ret. Jump
246: 141.1 00
CDC 3400
Data Code Table
DATA CODE TABLE
§ 141.
Internal
BCD Code*
Character
Card
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
.6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
8
9
8
9
8,
8,
8,
8,
8,
8,
=
(dash)
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
+
A
B
C
D
E
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
H
I
F
G
+0
)
Internal
BCD Code*
2
3
4
5
6
7
Character
Card
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
(minus)
J
K
L
M
N
0
P
11
11, 1
11, 2
11, 3
11,4
11, 5
11, 6
11, 7
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
Q
11,8
11, 9
11, 0
11, 8,
11, 8,
11, 8,
11, 8,
11, 8,
R
-0
$
*
12
12,
12,
12,
12,
12,
12,
12,
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
(Space)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
12,
12,
12,
12,
12,
12,
12,
12,
8
9
0
8,
8,
8,
8,
8,
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
Y
3
4
5
6
7
/
S
T
U
V
W
X
Z
,
(
3
4
5
6
7
Blank
0, 1
0, 2
0, 3
0,4
0, 5
0, 6
0, 7
0,
0,
0,
0,
0,
0,
0,
0,
8
9
8,
8,
8,
8,
8,
8,
2
3
4
5
6
7
*Octal representation of 6-bit BCD codes shown.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
5/64
246: 162.100
CDC 3400
Process Oriented Language
3400 FORTRAN
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 3400 FORTRAN
. 14
E! 162.
Description (Contd.)
o
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . . . . .
.12
Origin: . . . . . . . . . . . Control Data Corporation.
.13
Reference: . . . . . . . . 3400 FORTRAN General
Information Manual, Pub.
No. 555.
. 14
Description
... 3400 FORTRAN .
o A multi-branch status statement
The 3400 FORTRAN language incorporates nearly
all the features of FORTRAN IV and a number of
improvements. Among the added features allowed
in 3400 FORTRAN are:
IF (UNIT, u) n 1 , n 2 , n 3 , n 4
which causes the program to jump to statement
ni upon detection of the following conditions of
input-output device u:
o More than one entry point per subprogram,
implemented by the ENTRY statement, which
identifies alternate entry points in a function
or subroutine subprogram.
o
n 1 - not ready;
n 2 - ready and no previous error;
n3 - EOF sensed on last input operation;
Use of mixed mode arithmetic.
n 4 - parity error on last input operation.
o Multiple arithmetic replacement statements,
e.g. :
A=B=C=D=X+Y
which causes the variables A through D to be
replaced by the value of the eXJ?ression X + Y.
o
Eight modes of arithmetic. The five modes
offered in FORTRAN IV - INTEGER, REAL
(single precision floating point), DOUBLE
PRECISION floating point, COMPLEX, and
LOGICAL - are standard; the remaining three
types are arbitrary and must be defined by the
programmer. The user must specify the variable involved in a TYPE declaration and insert
library routines which execute the cues generated by the compiler .
Use of the masking (Boolean) operators. NOT. ,
. AND. , and. OR. on 48-bit arrays.
o Buffering of all input-output operations by use
The input-output statements of FORTRAN II have
been retained in addition to those of FORTRAN IV.
As in FORTRAN II, source statements are used
instead of library calls to test for sense light,
overflow, sense Switch, and divide check or fault
conditions.
The degree of compatibility of 3400 FORTRAN with
Control Data FORTRAN-62, 3600 FORTRAN, and
3200 FORTRAN can be summarized as follows:
of the BUFFER IN and BUFFER OUT statements.
o Use of subscripted subscripts. For example,
the FORTRAN IV statements:
L
M
I(L)
C
D(M)
o 3200 FORTRAN programs can be compiled by
the 3400 FORTRAN compiler if the type CHARACTER is not used and if the library routines
are replaced by source statements in certain
cases.
J(K)
can be expressed by the following single statement in 3400 FORTRAN:
C
o
o
o All 3400 FORTRAN programs are acceptable to
the 3600 FORTRAN compiler.
= D(I(J(K»).
Use of arithmetic expressions in subscripts;
e. g., B(B*K*SINF(J». The form of all subscripts must agree with the standard FORTRAN
forms.
ENCODE and DECODE statements, which permit transfer of data from one location in memory to another. The data is converted according
to FORMAT statements and stored in an array
or list of variables.
o
FORTRAN-62 can be made compatible with
3400 FORTRAN by changing Boolean statements,
FORMAT statements, arithmetic checks,
Hollerith constants, and subroutines as required
to meet the 3400 FORTRAN definitions.
The 3400 FORTRAN compiler consists of a translator and an assembler (COMPASS). The translator reads the source program from an input tape,
and the translator and assembler communicate with
each other via lists which may be recorded on a
scratch tape. Each FORTRAN subprogram is compiled independently, and the object program output
consists of binary card images on magnetic tape.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
5/64
CDC 3400
246: 162.140
§
162.
. 14
.14
Description (Contd.)
Descriptto.n (Contd.)
The compiler operates in conjunction with the 3400
SCOPE monitor system, and the object programs
generated by the compiler are designed for execution under SCOPE control.
(usually those involved in a buffered input or
output operation).
(5)
Conditional statements may be of the type IF
(e) nl, n2. where e is a logical expression.
A branch to statement nl is executed if e is
true, or to n2 if e is false. (Both 3400
FORTRAN and FORTRAN IV have the statement IF (e)s, which causes a branch to statement s if logical expression e is true; if e is
false, the next sequential statement is
executed.)
(6)
Multiple replacement statements (e. g., A =
B = C = D = X + Y) store the value of the expression on the right in each of the variables
appearing on the left, with type conversion if
necessary.
(7)
Up to eight type declarations can be used to
specify the mode of the associated variables.
Five types are standard, and an additional
three can be defined by the programmer in the
"TYPE namet (e) list" statement. Modes can
be mixed in arithmetic expressions. The
mode of an expreSSion corresponds to the highest order of any operand type within the expreSSion. The order of the standard types
from highest to lowest is:
The following lists represent a tabulated comparison of 3400 FORTRAN with the IBM 7090/7094
FORTRAN IV language, as described in Section
408:162.
Restrictions upon 3400 FORTRAN
(1)
The ALOGI0 (real common logarithm) function
is not currently available.
(2) Hollerith constants cannot exceed 120 characters in 3400 FORTRAN; in FORTRAN IV,
the maximum length is 132 characters.
(3)
The logical constants. TRUE. and . FALSE. of
FORTRAN IV are represented by 1 and 0 in
3400 FORTRAN.
(4)
The FORTRAN IV form DATA iI/value list/,
i2/value list/ ... must be changed to DATA
(i1 = value list), (i2 = value list) for 3400
FORTRAN.
(5)
The subprograms EXIT (terminate job execution) , DUMP (dump core storage and then terminate job execution), and PDUMP (dump core
storage and then continue execution) are not
provided.
(6)
The statements calling subroutines BLOCK
DATA, SLITE, SLITET, SSWTCH, OVERFL,
and DVCHK of FORTRAN IV must be replaced
by source statements in 3400 FORTRAN.
(7)
The .END statement is used to mark the physical end of a subprogram in 3400 FORTRAN. It
also acts as a RETURN as the last statement
in a subroutine (the RETURN statement can be
omitted in this case). In FORTRAN IV, the
END statement is used only to terminate a
compilation.
Extensions of 3400 FORTRAN
(1)
Names may be up to 8 characters in length.
(2)
Integer constants can have a maximum value
of 247 - 1 and can be up to 15 digits in size·
floating point constants can range from 10- 308
to 10+308 and can be up to 11 digits in size for
real constants and 25 digits for double precision
constants; Boolean constants can be up to 16
octal digits (48 bits) in size.
(3)
(4)
5/64
BUFFER IN and BUFFER OUT initiate the buffered reading or writing of one block on magnetic tape from sequential core storage locations, beginning and ending with specified
variables.
ENCODE and DECODE control code or radix
conversions and packing into or unpacking from
sequential locations of a list of variables
COMPLEX
DOUBLE
REAL
INTEGER
LOGICAL.
(8)
The ENTRY statement designates an entry
point other than the first executable statement
in a subprogram.
(9)
The PROGRAM statement is the first statement in the main program.
(10) Subscripts may be arithmetic expressions or
subscripted subscripts.
(11) The operators . AND., • OR., and . NOT. can
be used for masking operations upon two 48-bit
operands, thus providing the Boolean capacity
of FORTRAN II.
(12) If a type LOGICAL variable is dimensioned,
up to 32 bits will be stored in a single word.
If the variable is not dimensioned, each bit will
be assigned a separate word location in storage.
(13) Statement numbers can range from 1 to 99999.
(14) Status checking statements - IF(EOF, u) nl,
n2; IF (10 CHECK, u) nl, n2; and IF (UNIT, u)
nl, n2, n3, ll4 - check for end-of-file, parity
errors, and ready conditions.
(15) A LENGTHF (i) function returns the number of
words read during the last input operation on
unit i.
'
(16) The statement IF EXPONENT FAULT n1' n2
checks for exponent overflow.
246:162.141
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 3400 FORTRAN
. 14
I!l 162.
.14
Description (Contd.)
(17) No parenthesized list of statement numbers is
required in an assigned GO TO statement.
(18) The character "$" can be used as a statement
separator, permitting more than one source
statement to be written on a line.
(19) The COMMON statement can designate two
types of common block storage - labeled and
Description (Contd.)
numbered (or blank). Data can be prestored in
labeled common areas by means of the DATA
statement.
(20) In FORMAT statements, the following added
types of conversions are permitted: logical
conversion (Lw); alphanumeric conversion right
justified in storage with zero fill (Rw); and
complex conversion (C(Zw. d, Zw. d), where Z
may be either E or F conversion).
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
5/64
246: 171.1 00
CDC 3400
M. O. Language
3400 COMPASS
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 3400 COMPASS
Ii 171.
• 13
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: •••••.••• 3400 COMPASS.
• 12
Reference: •.•.••• 3400 COMPASS
General Reference Manual.
• 13
Description
COMPASS is the basic assembly language of the
CDC 3400 system and is used with the SCOPE
operating system. This language includes all
the machine code instructions. COMPASS allows
for source language changes to already assembled
programs, and for system, installation, or programmer-provided macro instructions. Programmer-provided macros may be included in the
library. Communication between different subprograms and library subroutines is provided by
use of COMMON blocks and the EXTernal pseudooperation. Communication with the operating
system is by way of the system macros.
There are COMPASS assembly languages for the
Control Data 3200, 3400, and 3600 systems.
While they are based on a common pattern, there
is no overall compatibility between the three
languages. Upward compatibility does exist, in
normal circumstances, between 3400 COMPASS
and 3600 COMPASS.
Use of COMPASS eliminates the need for the programmer to take care of complex format requirements of many of the CDC 3400 instructions. In
particular, the many modifications which are
available in the use of the AUGMENT instructions
can now be contained within the augmented instruction instead of being written separately.
There are three types of macro codes. These are
3400 System macros (provided with the CDC system itself), Library macros (provided by the
installation), and programmer-provided macros
(provided within the program itself). These
macros are normally written in COMPASS language
and are inserted into the assembled coding each
time they are called. However, some control is
included by providing two ps eudo-operations IFN,
and IFZ. During assembly, these operations are
used to test the value of one parameter or expression against another to determine whether or not
to insert the next "n" instructions of the macro
coding.
Description (Contd.)
Closed subroutines may be called into a program by
the use of the EXTERNAL function. These are
only incorporated into the program once •
The assembly language performs two roles: first it
allows a programmer to write machine instructions
and constants in a conventional form: and second, it
provides a systematic means of USing any library,
monitor, or subroutines as desired.
Labeling is unusually free. Address symbols are
normally one letter with an option of being followed
by up to seven further alphameric characters for
all labels. Three other types (+, -, and all
numeric symbols) serve other functions.
There are two types of data areas; both are called
"COMMON" areas. These are differentiated in the
language by having alphameric (called "Labeled
COMMON") or numeric (called "Numbered
COMMON") labels, and in usage by being able to
preset the Qontents of the areas at load time only
if "Labeled COMMON" is used.
Communication with other independently written
routines is arranged by the ENTRY points and the
EXTernal symbol linkage. These operations provide for a label to be common to more than one
routine. The actual linkage is created at loading
time.
The assembly program for the CDC 3400 is designed to accept, as input, cards or card images
containing symbolic 3400 programming instructions. It translates the symbolic instructions
into 3400 machine language programs in relocatable binary, for loading into any portion of
memory at run time. The assembler will produce
as output any co:r:il)"i.nation of:
G
Output listing of the assembled program.
o Relocatable binary card output for subsequent
loading and execution of the assembled program.
o Relocatable binary card images on an "assemble
and run" tape for immediate loading and execution of the assembled program.
o
Compressed symbolic output deck to be used as
input for subsequent modification and reassembly.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
5/64
246:171.200
CDC 3400
§ 171.
.24
.2
LANGUAGE FORMAT
.21
Diagram:
.22
Legend
... same as for 3600 COMPASS;
see Page 247 :171. 100.
Operation Code
Field: • . . . . . . . . This field holds any of the
CDC 3400 mnemonic instruction codes with modifiers, an octal integer
00-77, the name of a
macro instruction, or any
of the pseudo instructions.
If a modifier is used, it
must be separated from
the operation code by a
comma: no blank columns
may intervene.
Address Field: . . . . The address field begins anywhere after the blank which
terminates the operation
field (but before column 41)
and ends at the first blank
column. It may have one or
more subfields, depending
upon the instruction. Subfields, which are separated
by commas on the coding
form, specify the following:
m
word address
y
operand
b
index register
x
shift count
mandatory location
symbol
v
second index register
Comments Field: ... Comments may be included
with any instruction. They
are separated from the
last character in the
address field by a blank
and they may extend to
column 72. Comments do
not affect assembly, but
will be included on the
output listing.
Sequence Number
Field: •.••••.•. Columns 73-80 may be used
for sequence numbers or
for program identification.
This field has no effect
upon assembly, but is
checked for proper sequencing during the
assembly process.
.23
5/64
Corrections: ....... three pseudo instructions,
DELETE, REPLACE, and
INSERT, are available
which operate on a condensed (COSY) deck.
Special Conventions
.241 Compound
addresses: ....• e.g., SYMBOL + 5.
.242 Multi-addresses: .. none .
. 243 Literals: . . . . . . . 8 to 16 characters, depending
on the code .
. 244 Special coded
addresses: . . . . . * means this address.
** means 777778.
.± forces an instruction into
the upper or lower half of
a word.
.3
LABElS
.31
General
.311 Maximum number of
labels: . . . . . . . 1,500.
.312 Common label
formation rule: .. 1 to 8 alphamerics including
certain special characters.
Blanks are not required.
First character must be
alphabetic.
.313 Reserved labels: .. none.
.315 DeSignators: . . . . . none.
.316 Synonyms: • . . . . . yes, via EQUivalence
pseudo-op.
.32
Universal Labels:
. 33
Local Labels
none, but individual labels
can be made universal to
several independent subprograms, being called an
External Table Entry to
each subprogram.
.331 Labels for procedures
Existence: . . . . . optional.
Formation rule
First character:. alphabetic character (A-Z).
others: . . . . . . A-Z, 0-9, or period.
Number of
characters: ... 1 to 8 .
. 332 Labels for library
routines: . . . . . . same as for procedures .
. 333 Labels for
constants: •.... same as for procedures .
. 334 Labels for files: .. none.
.335 Labels for
records: . . . . . . none.
.336 Labels for
variables: . . . . . same as for procedures.
.337 Labels for other
subprograms: ... same as for procedures.
.338 others
Labels for blocks containing preset data
Existence: ..•. optional.
Formation rule: . 1 to 8 alphabetics; "Labeled
Common Blocks. "
Labels for reserved blocks for working storage
Existence: . . . . . optional.
Formation rule: . 8 numeric or blank characters;
an all blank label is acceptable; "Numbered
Common Blocks. "
Labels for arrays: same as for procedures.
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: 3400 COMPASS
~
.54
171.
.4
DATA
• 41
Constants
• 411 Maximum size constants
External Form
Machine Form
Decimal integer:•.• decimal integer, with
optional scaling factor
expressed in binary or
decimal.
Fixed numeric: •.• not allowed.
Floating numeric: • decimal integer or fraction
with scaling factor.
• 412 Maximum size literals
Integer
Decimal: •••••• 14 digits.
Octal: ••••••.• 16 octal digits.
Fixed numeric: ... not allowed.
Floating numeric:
10 ± 308.
Alphameric: .•••• 8 charactflrs.
• 42
246: 171.400
Working Areas
• 421 Data layout
Implied by use: ••• no.
Specified in
program: •••.•• VFD (Variable Field Definition), BLOCK and
COMMON statements •
• 422 Data type: •••.••• implied by use.
• 423 Redefinition: •••••• use of BLOCK statements.
.43
Input-Output Areas: • specified in program.
•5
PROCEDURES
.51
Direct Operation Codes
Translator Control
.541 Method of control
Allocation
counter: •..••
Label adjustment:.
Annotation: .•.••
.542 Allocation counter
Set to absolute: ..
various pseudo-ops •
various pseudo-ops.
Remarks •
no (ORGR relocatable
pseudo-op entry in
location) .
Set to label: ...• yes.
Set relative to
label: ...••.. yes.
Step forward: .•. implied by "set relative to
label. "
step backward: ••. implied.
Reserve area: ••. yes •
.543 Label adjustment
Set labels equal: • yes.
Set label relative:. yes.
Set absolute value: yes.
Clear label table:. not within single subprogram; yes, by dividing into
separate subprograms •
• 544 Annotation
Comment phrase: yes .
Title phrase: •.•• no.
.545 Other
Allocation mode: • absolute or relocatable.
.6
SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE
.61
Special Arithmetic: none •
• 62
Special Functions
.621 Facilities:
.511 Mnemonic
Existence: ••••••
Number: •••••••
Example: •••••••
Comment: •••••••
optional with absolutes.
96.
FDV; Floating Divide.
where one op code has
more than one type of
operation, mnemonic
modifiers are written
after the operation code;
thus, FDV, MG, UR
would indicate that the
magnitude of the addressed
operand be used, and lJ;ht
the operation should be
unrounded •
• 512 Absolute
Existence: . • . . . . optional with mnemonic.
Number: ••••••• 64.
Example: ••••••• 45 for Add Logical.
• 52
.53
Macro-Codes:
•••• yes, as provided by system
installation in the library,
or by programmer at
head of the program.
Interludes: •••••.• none.
••••. none; any could be added in
installation library .
• 622 Method of call: ••. LIBM names the library
macro-operations at the
start of the program.
The use of a declared macro
name in the operation field
of the coding sheet calls
the actual macro.
.63
Overlay Control:. • • handled by operating
system.
.64
Data Editing
.641 Radix conversion: •• decimal-to-binary for
initial constants.
Code translation: . alphabetic-to-BCD, typewriter •
• 642 Format control:. . none.
.65
Input-Output
Control: •.••.. own program, with I/O
pseudo-op check on I/o
units involved •
.66
Sorting:
.67
Diagnostics: ••.•. none can be specified by the
programmer for use at
running time.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
••..••. none.
5/64
246: 171.700
§
CDC 3400
171.
.82
.7
LIBRARY FACILITIES
· 71
Identity:
.72
Kinds of Libraries
COSY: . . . . . . . . . .
DELETE: ••••.••
INSERT: ••••.••.
REPLACE: •••.••
DEC: •••••••••.
COSY identification. *
delete portions of program.
insert portions of program.
replace portions of program.
insert decimal integer
constants.
EJECT: ••••••••. eject a page on output
listing.
END:
••••••.•• specify end of subprogram.
ENDIF: ••••••••• terminate an IF or 1FT
statement.
ENDM: •••..•••. terminate a macro definition •
ENTRY: ••.•.••.• define entry point.
EQU: ••.••..•.. equate undefined symbol to
defined symbol.
EXIT:
••.....•. exit to monitor •
EXT: •••..•.... define external symbol.
IDENT:
. . . • . . . . identify subprogram name •
IF: •••••.•....• conditional assembly numeric.
1FT:
..•..••..• conditional assembly for
macros - literal.
· . • . . • . . . insert input-output transIOTR:
mission control word.
LIBM: . . • . . . . . . library macros.
LIST:
. . . • . . . • . resume output listing.
MACRO:
. . • . . . . definition of macro
instruction •
NOLIST: ..••.•.. supress output listing.
NOP:
•...•.••• inserts a do-nothing operation
code •
· . . . • . • . . insert octal constant.
OCT:
ORGR: · • . . • . . . . set location counter.
· .•.••••• insert remarks.
REM:
SCOPE:
. •..•.•. return to SCOPE control.
..••.••• insert spaces in output listing.
SPACE:
TYPE: • •.•.••.• insert typewriter code.
•..•...• installation library.
.721 Fixed master: •••.• no.
• 722 Expanda1:ile master:. • yes.
.73
Storage Form:
• 74
Varieties of
Contents: •...••. as determined by
installation.
• 75
Mechanism
••.. magnetic tape.
• 751 Insertion of new
item: ••••••.•• via SCOPE Monitor.
.752 Language of new
item: ••••••..• open .
• 753 Method of call: .••• operation code identifies
routine.
ENTRY identifies entry
point.
Operating Manual lists
special calls.
• 76
Insertion in Program
.761 Open routines exist:
• 762 Closed routines
exist: ••..•••.•
.763 Open-closed is
optional: •.•••••
.764 Closed routines
appear once: •••.
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
.8
INSTRUCTION CODE REPERTOIRE
• 81
Macros:......... as provided by installation
library.
.82
Pseudos (Extracted from Control Data 3400
Computer System COMPASS General Information Manual)
BCD:
••••.•...
BES: ••••.•.•.•
BLOCK: •.•.•.•.•
BSS:
•.••...•.•
CALL: ••••.••••
COMMON: •.••...
5/64
insert BCD characters.
reserve block of storage.
specify block of common.
reserve block of storage.
enter subprogram
declare array in common.
Pseudo (Contd.)
*COSY is the name given to an optional compressed reproduction of the symbolic source
program which, in turn, may be used as input
for subsequent assemblies.
• 84
Direct:....... . • All instructions in the
instruction repertoire have
been given mnemonic names
and are allowable in the
COMPASS language. These
mnemonic names are listed
in the Instruction List
(Section 246:121).
246:191.100
CDC 3400
Operating Environment
3400 SCOPE
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: 3400 SCOPE
• 12
13 191.
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:..
. 12
Description
. . . . . . . 3400 SCOPE.
3400 SCOPE is an operating system that allows a
group of programs to be run sequentially - one
program at a time - on a Control Data 3400 computer.
During the running of a program, the operating system occupies the lower portion of core storage; the
actual amount of storage utilized depends upon the
routines called in. Normally SCOPE's demand on
central processor time will be negligible.
The three basic languages (3400 FORTRAN, 3400
COBOL, and 3400 COMPASS) all use SCOPE during
both the testing and production stages. For efficient operation of SCOPE with these translations, a
4-tape system with 32,768 core storage locations is
required.
Description (Contd.)
Like all operating systems, 3400 SCOPE provides a
number of services to the various people involved.
Some of these services naturally restrict the freedom of these involved by predetermining methods of
operation which mayor may not be the best ones
possible under the existing circumstances. Other
services involve giving up areas of storage, the
use of specific peripherals, etc., and to this extent
it can be said that they may have a "cost" involved.
In the following tables the facilities provided by
3400 SCOPE are listed as looked at from various
points of view - those of the FORTRAN or COBOL
programmer, the assembly language programmer,
the user (i. e., the person who uses a "canned"
program he may not have written), the computer
room operator, and the data processing manager.
All these individuals have different points of view,
but all have a vital interest in maximizing the overall effectiveness of the computer system.
For the COBOL &
FORTRAN Programmer
SCOPE Provides
During Writing:
Snapshot facilities in Debug facilities in
assembly language
source language
(191. 5).
(191. 5).
-- -
SCOPE Does Not
Provide
Storage space is
needed for these
facilities.
Trace facilities in
assembly language
(191. 5).
- - --- - - - - - - - - -----
During Testing:
Resultant
Restrictions
Standard Recovery
Dump option.
-- -- ---------
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
5/64
CDC 3400
246: 191.120
§
191.
For the Assembly
Language Programmer
SCOPE Provides
During Writing:
Input-output routines
and radix conversions (191. 2).
f------
-
SCOPE Does Not
Provide
Standard routines
must be used.
Segmentation control
system (191. 3).
~-
- - - - - -- -- -----Restart procedure
(191. 45).
Automatic dumps
on abnormal
operation (191. 4).
Trace facilities
(191. 5).
For the "Canned
Program" User
SCOPE Provides
SCOPE Does Not
Provide
Resultant
Restrictions
During Normal
Running:
Allocation of peripherals (191. 3).
Automatic servo
swap facilities or
printouts (191.32).
Standard I/O
routines and radix
conversion routines
must be used.
Time-shared operation with other
programs (191. 4).
Overlay facilities
(191. 3).
-
-
-
During and After
Abnormal Running:
Automatic segmentation (191. 3).
-- -
--
Automatic dump
Setting up of restart
procedure (4 types)
points.
'(191. 45).
Automatic restart
facilities.
Standard interrupt
processing routines
(SCOPE simply
directs the interrupt
to a programmerprovided routine)
(191.4) .
5/64
---------
Snapshot facilities
(191. 5).
During Testing:
r-
Resultant
Restrictions
Restricted simultaneity for some
peripherals.
Segments must be
predefined.
-
246: 191.121
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: 3400 SCOPE
Ii 191.
SCOPE Does Not
Provide
For the Computer
Room Operator
SCOPE Provides
During Normal
Running:
Standard Procedures
for input-output
unit allocation.
Resultant
Restrictions
Type-outs for loading
and unloading tape.
Re-run ability
(191. 4).
Run-to-run supervision
-
-
Amendment of
running order
(191. 6).
-
-
During and After
Abnormal Running:
-
-
-
-
-
Automatic dump
procedure (4
types).
r- -
-
-
-
-
Setting up of restart points.
-
-
-
-
Automatic restart
facilities.
For the Data Processing SCOPE Provides
Manager
All circumstances:
Originator:
Control Data Corporation
. 15
Maintainer:
Control Data Corporation.
.16
First Use:
.2
PROGRAM LOADING
.21
Source of Programs
.211 Programs from online libraries: . . . .
'-.
Resultant
Restrictions
Accounting records
(191. 7).
.14
..
SCOPE Does Not
Provide
November, 1964
.22
Library Subroutines:
can be called at load time
or during a run from a
library tape .
.23
Loading Seguence:
control card; subroutines
for this run in any order
(these are stored on a
magnetic tape unit if necessary); data for this run
if desired; further runs;
ending with an End of Job
control card.
the SCOPE library tapes
(which can be created as
desired) can contain any
collection of translators,
subroutines and other
data or programs. These
may be incorporated at
load time or during a run.
.212 Independent programs: loaded from card reader or
tape unit with a control
card.
. 213 Data: . . . . . . . . . . . any available type of input
device, as specified in the
program. (The data for a
program is frequently
loaded immediately behind
the program itself.)
.214 Master routines: ... the SCOPE routines are
held on all library tapes,
together with bootstrap
routines to bring them
into memory.
Normally jobs are loaded
and executed sequentially
as physically placed on the
input unit; however, the
operator has emergency
facilities to override this
sequence.
.3
HARDWARE ALLOCATION
.31
Storage
.311 Sequencing of program
for movement
between levels: ... object programs, written as
subprograms, can be
divided into overlays defined by the programmer,
and moved as needed into
memory.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
5/64
CDC 3400
246: 191.312
§
.45
191.
.312 Occupation of working
storage: . . . . . . . . . all addresses are relocated
during loading. Once
loaded, no further change
is made.
. 32
Input-Output Units
. 321 Initial assignment: ... performed by SCOPE, using
equipment availability
table and logical unit
definition.
. 322 Alternation: . . . . . . . automatic, by SCOPE.
.323 Reassignment: . . . . . manual alteration of equipment availability table,
followed by SCOPE operation.
.4
RUNNING SUPERVSION
.41
Simultaneous Working: controlled by the programmer's own coding; each
input-output request is
accepted or rejected depending upon the immediate availability of an
appropriate input-output
channel
Restarts
.451 Establishing restart
points: . . . . . . . . . . recovery dumps are written
when a job is abandoned.
No facility is available to
automatically set up restart points ahead of time .
.452 Restart process:
own coding .
·5
PROGRAM DIAGNOSTICS
.51
Dynamic
no provision .
SNAP is a SCOPE control
statement which prints the
contents of a single core
location.
Post Mortem: . . . . . . a recovery dump can be
written .
· 511 Tracing:
.512 Snapshots: ..
· 52
.6
OPERATOR CONTROL
.61
Signals to Operator
.42
Multi-Programming:
.43
Multi-Sequencing: ... no provision.
.611 Decision required
by operator: . . . .
own coding.
.612 Action required by
operator: . • . . . . . . print-out on output comment
medium .
. 613 Reporting progress of
run: . . . • . . . . . . . print-out on output comment
medium (normally console
typewriter) .
. 44
Errors, Checks, and Action
· 62
Operator's Decisions: console typewriter.
.63
Operator's Signals
no provision.
Check or Interlock Action
Allocation
impossible:
In-out errorsingle:
check by input!
output control
In-out errorpersistent: check by input/
output control
Invalid instructions: check
5/64
i
check by loader flagged during
loading.
status information
list for progrmmer.
transfer to specific
programmer
coding.
transfer to specific
programmer
coding.
.631 Inquiry: . . . . . . .
· 632 Change of normal
progress:
manual interrupt buttom on
console.
SCOPE statements via console typewriter.
.7
LOGGING
.71
Operator Signals:
console typewriter.
. 72
Operator Decisions: .
console typewriter.
. 73
Run Progress: . . . .
console typewriter .
.74
Errors:
errors which will cause
job termination are logged on the console.
console typewriter and,
optionally, the accounting
medium.
Underflow:
check
Invalid
operation:
check
transfer to specific
programmer
coding.
.75
Running Times:
Improper
format:
check by loader
error routine
called in.
.8
PERFORMANCE
Invalid
address:
.81
System Requirements
check
transfer to specific
programmer
coding.
Reference to
forbidden
area:
check
transfer to specific
programmer
coding.
.811 Minimum configuration: . . . . . . • . . . . 1 3402 computer module.
1 3401 console with typewriter.
1 3409 storage module.
1 3447 Card Reader controller with 405 Card
Reader.
246:191.811
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: 3400 SCOPE
I!I 191.
.82
. 811 Minimum Configuration
(Contd. )
1 3655 line printer.
1 3406 bidirectional data
channel.
1 magnetic tape control
(dual channel).
4 magnetic tape units.
.812 Usable extra facilities: additional tapes, I/O channels, and I/O equipment.
.813 Reserved equipment: . the System Units (see
below) are not available
to the programmer except for the specified
purposes. However, it
is not necessary to use
or assign all system units,
and more than one system
unit function can be allocated to a single physical unit.
System Units include the
following:
Standard Input,
Standard Output,
SCOPE Libraries,
System Scratch Record,
Standard Load and Go.
System Overhead
. 821 Loading time: . . . . .
under 1 minute .
.822 Reloading frequency:.
only if the SCOPE resident
routines have been overwritten. Normally this
is not done.
.83
.84
. 85
Program Space Available: . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Loading
Time: . . . . . . . .
Program Performance
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
storage requirements for
the resident 3400 SCOPE
routines are not available
to date.
under 1 minute.
essentially unaffected
during normal production runs, since
SCOPE merely directs
run-to-run changeovers.
5/64
246:201.001
CDC 3400
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
201.
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING (246:201..100)
These problems involve updating a master file from transaction data in a detail file
and producing a printed record of each transaction. This application is one of the most typical
of commercial data proceSSing jobs and is fully described in Section 4:200.1 of the Users' Guide.
The graphs for Standard File Problems A, B, C, and D show the total time required
for each Control Data 3400 standard configuration shown in Section 246 :031 to process 10, 000
master file records. For Configurations VllB and VIllE, where all four input-output files are on
magnetic tape, total times are shown for both unblocked and blocked records in the detail and report files. Central processor time is essentially the same for all configurations.
In integrated Configurations VI and VIlA, in which the detail file is read by the card
reader and the report file is produced by the on-line printer, the printer is the controlling factor
on total time required over most of the detail activity range. The central processor is occupied
for only a small fraction of the total processing time. In most of the cases, it will be more efficient to divide the file processing problem into three separate runs: a card-to-tape transcription of the detail file, a processing run with all files on magnetic tape, and a tape-to-card
transcription of the report file. The curves for paired Configuration VIlE show that the time
required for the all-tape main processing run is tape limited. This is also true for Configuration VIllE, even though faster magnetic tape units are used. The card-to-tape and tape-toprinter transactions will run at card reader and printer-limited speeds, and their demands on
the processor will be small.
The master file record format is a mixture of alphameric and binary numeric items,
designed to minimize the number of time-consuming radix conversion operations required. (Even
so, most of the central processor time is devoted to editing and radix conversion operations,
USing programmed non-standard subroutines.) A moderate degree of packing led to a record
length of 18 Control Data 3400 words.
SORTING (246:201. 200)
The standard estimates for sorting 80-character records by straightforward merging
on magnetic tape (Graph 246:201. 214) were developed from the processing times for Standard
File Problem A according to the method explained in the Users' Guide, Paragraph 4:200. 213.
MATRIX INVERSION (246:201. 300)
In matrix inversion, the object is to measure central processor speed on the straightforward inversion of a non-symmetric, non-singular matrix. No input-output operations are
involved. The standard estimate is based on the time to perform cumulative multiplication (c =
c + aibj) in single-precision floating point (see Paragraph 246:051. 422).
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING (246:201.400)
This problem measures over-all system }.Jo~formance on a simple mathematical application that involves widely varying ratios of input-to-computation-to-output volume, as
described in Section 4:200.4 of the Users' Guide. As in the File Processing problem, the total
elapsed time is shown for both unblocked and blocked input and output files.
All computations are performed in Single-precision floating point. In Configurations
VI and VIlA, input is via the on-line card reader and output is via the on-line printer. If cardto-tape and tape-to-printer transcriptions are carried out in separate runs, the time required
for the all-tape main processing run can be read from the curves for paired Configuration VIIB.
Configuration VIIIB utilizes high-speed tapes.
GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING (246:201. 500)
This problem measures overall system performance on a common statistical application: the development of cross-tabulation tables, as in the analysis of the results of a survey.
The problem is defined in Section 4:200.5 of the Users' Guide, and the performance of the Control
Data 3400 is shown in Graph 246:201.514.
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
5/64
246:201.011
CDC 3400
§ 201.
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 1
CONFIGURATION
WORKSHEET
ITEM
VIIB (Blocked
Files 3 & 4)
VI, VIIA
1
(File 1)
Char/block
Reeords/bloek
msee/bloek
(File 1)
K
2!!.e. 1 =
Fil~
_ _. _
~_3
lnputOutput
Times
File 4
msee/switch
~ --.~
1=File2
File 4
~1=FileL~3
msee/bloek
msec/record
Central
Processor
Times
msee/detail
msee/work
msee/report
3
msee/bloek
for C. P.
Standard
ProblemA
F = 1.0
~---.~---.-
~---.-
Space
1 024
-----12*
---___
1_.4~_
1.092
0.01
4:200.112
0.01
0 . 2 4 * _ I- _ _0_.02 _ _ _
0.03
0.24*
0.119
1------ 0.167
0.119
1----- - - 0.167
I---~- f - - - - - - -
--
0.24*
_
0.24*
0.119
------
---~-
I--~- I--~O_ --~0.230
0.230
0.230
1 - - - - - -1 - - - - - - f - - - - 1. 092
1.092
4:200.1132
1.092
0.12
~---I - - - - -1 - - -1 • 361.36
1.36
1.36
~---- - - - 2 1 . 8 8 - - I---21.88
21.88
21.88
a3 K
4:200.114
0.'260.26
File 1 Master In
0.26
0.26
,------ --I-- 0.26
0.26
0.26
File 2 Master Out
0.26
,------ --.I---- - _ _ _ _0.1_6_ _ _ _~16_ _ _ 1---_0.1~ _
File 3 Details
0.16
1------0.24
0.24
File 4 Reports
0.24
0.24
0.12
0.12
-- -- - - - ---- - - -- - - - - - ------
---
24.28
- - -- - - ----
24.28
24.28
--
24.28
(48-bit word)
----- - - - -2,048
- - - - - - 2,048
- - - - -1 - 2,048
- - - - - - -------189- - 1
8
9
189
Std. routines
2,048
,----,----rFixed
- - = - - ____
3 (Blocks 1 to 23)
189
1----'--- -
6 (Blocks 24 to 48)
----_.--------
- 2 - ; 4 2 4 - t-~4
- - -- -762- - -2,424
- - - - 762
762
Files
762
1 - - - - - - - 1--------.- ,------- -------- - - - 200
200
Working
200
200
2,424
I--'- - - ----'- 1 - - - - - -
Total
• 12 records per block in File 3; 8 in File 4.
5/64
6
0.01
- - - -0.119
--0.167
---
Unit of measure
1 024
_ I-- _ _0_.26_ _ _
I---~- I- _ _ _O.~_
0.12
--
Standard
ProblemA
0.01
_ _ _O...!L-
~9_ _ _. _ _~3_0_ _
b7 + b8
REFERENCE
Files 3 & 4)
---~- I- _ _ _ O~_ t---~-- ~~_ _ _0 _ . 0 1 _
--~- f - _ _0_.0_1_ _ I--~-
0.03
Total
4
24*
____ ____
0.0_2_ _ _ I - -
File 4
2
1 024
VIIm (Blocked
8
8
8
8
___
14_ _ _
_ _ _ 2_7_ _ _ t- _ _ _
27 _ _ _ _
I---~_ _ 5_0_ _ _ 1- _ _2_4*_ _ _ _ r - - _ 6_ _
12*
98
~_3_ _. _
msee penalty
1 024
vum
5,623
5,623
5,623
5,623
4:200.1151
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
246:201.012
§ 201.
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 2
CONFIGURATION
WORKSHEET
ITEM
REFERENCE
VI, VIIA
5
Floating
Fixed/Floating point
input
Unit name
VIIB
r--output
--
--
Card Reader
Floating
1--- --Line Printer
input
604 MTU
VIIrn
Floating
607 MTU
- - 604
--MTU
- - - -607-MTU
SO digits
80 digits
80 digits
- - --SO digits-- -- 80 digit;----SO digits
Standard
input
Mathematical
50
unblocked 12; blocked 4 unblocked 6; blocked 2
Tl
msec/block
I--- - - -- 1 - - - -- -- --- --- --output
unblocked 12; blocked 4 unblocked 6; blocked 2
65
T2
Problem A
input
2
2
2
T3
msec penalty
1 - - - -- -- ,...- --2-- ---2--output
3
T4
msec/record
2.S6
T..5.r-- -I - - - - - -- - ---- 2.S6
---- 2.S6
msec/5 loops
1.80
1.S0
1.80
T6
I - - - -----------2
:
9
0
msec/report
2.90
2.90
T7
Size of record
1.
-output
4:200.413
r-
7
standard
Statistical
Unit name
604 MTU
607 MTU
Size of block
604 MTU
607 MTU
Records/block
B
16
msec/block
Tl
26
msec penalty
T3
.01Yb1ock
T5
.016
Problem A
msec/block
C.P.
I-msec/record
I--msec/table
16
13
-- --- ---:ra - --- -- -- -- -- r-
T7
.007
.049
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
.06/block
.016
I--- - -
."iiii7 -
I- - -
.049 -
4:200.512
5/64
246:201.100
CDC 3400
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§ 201.
· 112 Computation: . . . . . . . standard .
.1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
.11
Standard File Problem A
. 113 Timing basis: . . . . . . uSing estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.113.
. 111 Record Sizes
Master file: . . . . . . 108 characters.
Detail file: . . . . . . . 1 card.
Report file: . . . . . . . 1 line.
· 114 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below .
· 115 Storage space
required: . . . . . . . . 5,623 words.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
2
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
~
10.0
7
...P
../""
4
/'
/
2
/
1.0
/I
7
4
II/'
~
--- -6.-=..:7
7f
/I
VIlB
A
~vmB
V
-
/
~
~
--
~
VIlB
2
==" -
f==-
J...,.. =----
VIIlB
."",-
-
--='--
0.1
0.0
0.33
0.1
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
1.0
(Rom an numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
=
==
Unblocked Files 3 & 4
Blocked Files 3 & 4
© 1964 Auerbach Carporation and Info, Inc.
5/64
246:201.120
§
CDC 3400
201.
. 12
. 122 Computation: ..
. 123 Timing hasis: .
. .. standard .
. . . uSing estim ating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.12 .
.124 Graph: . . . • . . . . . . . see graph below.
Standard "File Problem B
. 121 Record sizes
Master file: . . . . . . 54 characters.
Detail file: . . • . . . . 1 card.
Report file: . . . . . . . 1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
2
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
-
10.0
7
~
./
4
/
2
7
4
2
/'
~
/
1.0
,
~
./
I
./
/
1(.......
..---:.. """"
"' .... 7
~
'-,,"
0.0
-
VillB
~
I
0.1
VI.V~
0.1
VII~
-~~
VIIIB _ _ - - -
...... " , - *
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote Standard Configurations.)
.,.". __ ==
5/64
-
--- ---
~
.-"'-
-
Unblocked Files 3 & 4
Blocked Files 3 & 4
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
246:201.130
201.
. 13
.132 Computation: . • . . . . . standard .
. 133 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.13 .
.134 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
Standard· File Problem C
. 131 Record sizes
Master file: . . . . . . . 216 characters.
Detail file: . . . . . . . 1 card.
Report file: . . . . . . . 1 line.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
2
Time in Minutes to
Process 10, 000
Master File Records
10.0
7
VI. VIIA......
./
4
/'
2
/
1.0
/'
-----------
---
-
VilB
~
-----
VIlB
=----
.,.,....
7
VillB
../
4
...--
-
__
~
VillB_---
----~
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
Unblocked Files 3 & 4
mocked Files 3 & 4
@1964Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
5/64
246:201.140
CDC 3400
III 201.
.14
. 142 Computation: . . . . . . . trebled.
.143 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.14 .
.144 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
Standard File Problem D
• 141 Record sizes
Master file: . . . . . . 108 characters.
Detail file: . . . . . . . 1 card.
Report file: . . . . . . . 1 line.
.-
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
2
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
VI.V~
10.0
7
...,.
4
7
2
.-
7
4
/'
~-
2
.-
.7
7
I
1.0
.AI"
VIIB _
--
-----------
--=---
VIIIB
__
.......0:.-
-- 7
VII~
.......,,-
VII~..---
~
/'
",,,.,P'iiP
---~
~-=
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
Unblocked Files 3 & 4
Blocked Files 3 & 4
5/64
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
246:201.200
.213 Timing basis: . . . . . . uSing estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.213 .
. 214 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below .
201.
.2
SORTING
. 21
Standard Problem Estimates
.211 Record size: . . . . . . . 80 characters .
. 212 Key size: . . . . . . . . . 8 characters.
,
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
I
2
Time in Minutes to
Pnt Records Into
Required Order
1I~
I
.I
10.0
ff
7
#'
4
VI. VIlA.
VIlB,
,
2
I~
.,1
1.0
1I
,/
V
/'
"
/
/'
~B
ff
ff
7
1#
f
If'
4
/
/
2
7
0.1
2
100
4
I
I
#
I'
V
/
7
2
4
1,000
7
2
10,000
4
7
100,000
Number of Records
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
©1964 Auerbach Carporation and Info,lnc.
5/64
246:201.300
CDC 3400
§ 201.
.3
MATRIX INVERSION
.31
Standard Problem Estimates
. 311 Basic parameters: ... general, non-symmetric
matrices, uSing floating
point to at least 8 decimal
digits.
.312 Timing basis: . . . . . . uSing estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.312; 11-digit precision floating point, using
the optional floating point
hardware •
.313 Graph: . • . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
10.0
7
4
2
I
1.0
I
7
I
H
/I
4
2
Time in Minutes for
Complete Inversion
I)
0.1
7
18
4
11
2
I
0.01
H
1/
7
I
I
4
If
J
2
/
0.001
2
1
4
7
2
10
2
100
Size of Matrix
5/64
7
4
7
1,000
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
246:201.400
201.
.4
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING
.41
Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates
(Unblocked Input and Output)
. 411 Record sizes: . . . . . . 10 signed numbers, avg.
size 5 digits, max. size
8 digits .
. 412 Computation: . . . • . . . 5 fifth-order polynomials.
5 divisions.
1 square root.
.413 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users I Guide,
4:200.413; unblocked input
and output records; all
arithmetic in 11-digit
precision floating point,
using the optional floating
point hardware.
.414 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
•
1,000
I
.
7
4
2
~~
,.'/
100
VI, VIA; R
.
7
1L
~
1.0
A'
~:
Time in Milliseconds
per Input Record
4
-
VI, VIIA; R
= 0.01,
0.1
R
VIIB
10
= 1.0
!<>
2
----
VIIIB.
V !?'" ~
~
,#
~
h/.
V
~
~
R= 0.01, 0.1
::?
&"
7
V
[R
4
2
1
2
0.1
4-
7
2
1.0
4-
2
7
10.0
7
100.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
(R = Number of output records per input record;
Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
5/64
CDC 3400
246:201.420
Ii 201.
.42
Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates
(Blocked Input and Output)
.421 Record sizes: • . . . . . 10 signed numbers, avg.
size 5 digits, max.
size 8 digits.
• 422 Computation: • . . . . . . 5 fifth-order polynomials.
5 divisions.
1 square root.
.423 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.413; blocked input
and output records; all
arithmetic in ll-digit precision floating point, using
the optional floating point
hardware .
.424 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
1,000
7
I
4
2
~~
100
7
"
"/
~
4
fl
Time in Milliseconds
per Input Record
R = 1.0
2
.----
VIIB, ViliB
10
.., ~
i.o-"
,
[,..10-
~~
V
R = 0.01. 0.1
~
7
4
~
1,...00- ~
,,-
. VIIB ViliB
2
1
0.1
2
4
7
1.0
2
4
7 10.0
2
4
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
(R = Number of output records per input record;
Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
5/64
7 100.0
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
.5
246:201.500
201.
GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING
.51
.512 Computation: . . . . . . . augment T elements in
cross-tabulation tables .
.513 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users I Guide,
4:200.513 .
. 514 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see below .
Standard Statistical Problem A Estimates
. 511 Record size: . . . . . . . thirty 2-digit integral
numbers.
,
1,000.0
I
7
4
2
100.0
7
,
4
!P
#11
2
Time in Milliseconds
per Record
/
10.0
V
"
7
§
7'
4
II
1.0
,#11
VI, VITA, VIm
2
-i -
1 1
VIllE
/
-
'/
7
4
2
0.1
2
1
7
2
10
4
2
7
100
4
7
1,000
T, Number of Augmented Elements
(Roman numerals denote standard Configurations.)
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
5/64
246:211.101
CDC 3400
Physical Characteristics
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
§
211.
Unit
3404 Central Computer
3401 Console
3409 Core Storage Module
3406 Data Channel
Power Control
All Magnetic Tape Controllers
3446 Peripheral Controller
3691 Paper Tape ReaderPunch
405 Card Reader
604, 607 Magnetic Tape Units
828 Disk File
Width,
inches
Depth,
inches
Height, Weight,
inches pounds
83.8
46.0
40.8
40.8
40.8
45.0
40.8
40.0
20
28
20
20
20
27
20
24
75
40
75
75
75
75
75
39
57.0
28.0
68.3
33
33
35
46
72
63
Power,
KVA
BTU
per hr.
1,800
500
950
950
950
950
950
400
1.8
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.6
3,300
3,300
5,250
5,250
4,300
5,250
5,250
2,000
1,020
1,200
2,575
?
?
3.5
8,730
8,500
?
General Requirements
Temperature: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 to 85°F.
Relative Humidity: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .·40 to 60%.
Power: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208/120 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire,
60-cycle source.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
5/64
246:221.101
~
~
CDC 3400
Price Data
PRICE DATA
§
221.
PRICES
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
STORAGE
AND COMPUTATION
No.
3404
3409
3410
3401
COMMUNICATION
3404
3407
3408
3681
3682
INPUTOUTPUT
3447
405
3446
3256
501
3253
3691
3692
3293
3421
3422
*
Name
Monthly
Rental
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchase
$
$
$
Central Computer; including maintenance control panel, power
converter and control, and
16,384 words of magnetic core
storage.
32K Storage Option; 16,384 additional words of core storage.
Floating Point Option; provides
single precision floating point
instructions.
Console; includes input/output
typewriter.
13,750
Standard Data Channel
Sp.ecial 24-bit Data Channel*
Special 48-bit Data Channel *
Data Channel Converter; permits
160/160-A to use 3400 peripheral
equipment.
Satellite Coupler; permits direct
connection between any two
standard 12-bit bi-directional
channels or Data Channel
Converters.
1,100
1,250
1,400
275
Card Reader Controller; controls
CDC 405 Card Reader
Card Reader; 1,200 cpm
Card Punch Controller; controls
an IBM 523 or 544 card punch
Line Printer Controller; controls
one 501 printer
High-Speed Line Printer; prints
1,000 lines per minute.
Line Printer; 300 lines per minute
Paper Tape Reader-Punch; 350 cps
reader and 110 cps punch
Program Controlled Input-Output
Typewriter
Incremental Plotter
Magnetic Tape Controller; two
read-write controls to control
one to four 604/607 Magnetic
Tape Transports
Magnetic Tape Controller; two
read-write controls to control
one to six 604/607 Magnetic
Tape Transports
525
?
622,000
3,500
165,000
800
34,000
720
33,500
?
16,200
415
?
550
645
715
?
1,750
22,000
57,400
?
280
285
1,250
24,500
30,250
31,500
1,167
735
640
49,500
56,500
63,500
10,800
36,735
25,000
11,000
?
9,000
65,000
83,000
Available for special applications only.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
5/64
246:221.102
CDC 3400
PRICE DATA (Conld.)
§ 221.
PRICES
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
INPUTOUTPUT
(Contd.)
No.
3423
604
607
3632
3633
3634
3635
828
5/64
Name
Magnetic Tape Controller; two
read-write controls to control
one to eight 604/607 Magnetic
Tape Transports
Magnetic Tape Transport; up to
60KC
Magnetic Tape Transport; up to
120KC
Disk File Controller; two readwrite-positioning controls for
one 828 Disk File
Disk File Controller; same as
3632 but controls up to two
828 Disk Files
Disk File Controller; same as
3632 but controls up to three
828 Disk Files
Disk File Controller; same as
3632 but controls up to four 828
Disk Files.
Disk File; dual access.
Monthly
Rental
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchase
$
$
$
2,250
?
101,000
675
32,500
935
41,700
2,750
?
110,000
3,050
122,000
3,350
134,000
3,650
146,000
2,800
122,000
/
CDC 3600
Control Data Corporation
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
CDC 3600
/
Control Data Corporation
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
247:001.001
STANDAAO
REPORTS
CDC 3600
Contents
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Introduction . . . .
Data Structure • . .
System Configuration
Notes on System Configuration .
Configuration VI B:
Paired 6-Tape Business/Scientific System.
Configuration VII B: Paired 1O-Tape General System
Configuration VIn B: Paired 20-Tape General System
Internal Storage
Core Storage
Central Processor
CDC 3604
Processor
Console
Console.
IBM Selectric Typewriter
Input-Output; General • • • • • • • • • • • •
(General Arrangements, Timings, Interrupt
Procedures, Input-Output, Compatibility)
Input-Output, Punched Tape and Card
CDC 3641
Card Reader. . . . . .
CDC 3642
Card Punch . . • • . •
Card Reader Controller.
CDC 3643
IBM 088
Card Reader. • • • . .
CDC 3691
Paper Tape Reader Punch •
Input-Output: Printers
CDC 3655
High Speed Printer •
Input-Output: Magnetic Tape
CDC 606
Magnetic Tape Unit •
Input-Output: Other
CDC 3681
Data Channel Converter.
CDC 3682
Data Channel Converter.
CDC 3692
Program Controlled Input-Output Typewriter
Simultaneous Operations.
Instruction List. . . . . . . • .
Coding Specimens
Machine Code
COMPASS.
FORTRAN . .
Data Codes
Collating Sequence •
Internal . . .
Magnetic Tape
1612 Printer •
Problem Oriented Facilities
Process Oriented Languages
J3
1604
JOVIAL
FORTRAN .
FORTRAN 62
247:011
247:021
247:031.001
247:031. 1
247:031. 2
247:031. 3
247:041
247:051
247:061
247:061. 13
247:070
247:071
247:072
247:073 (INA)
247:074
247:075
247:081
247:091
247:101
247:101
247:102
247:111
247:121
247:131 (RIP)
247:132
247:133 (RIP)
247:141
247:142
247:143
247:144
247:151
241:161 (CDC 1604)
243:162 (CDC 1604-A)
243:163 (CDC 1604-A)
RIP =Report in Process
INA = Information Not Available
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
7/63
CDC 3600
247:001.002
CONTENTS (Contd.)
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Process Oriented Languages (Contd.)
FORTRAN 63 . •
COBOL • • • • •
CXA (Control Data Extended ALGOL)
Machine Oriented Languages
COMPASS.
Program Translators
JOVIAL
COMPASS.
COBOL
FORTRAN-63 •
FORTRAN-60
FORTRAN-62
Operating Environment
Machine Code
Monitor
System Perfqrmance
Notes on System Performance
Worksheet Data • • • . • • •
Generalized File Processing •
Sorting. •• • . • . . . •
Matrix Inversion . • • • . •
Generalized Mathematical Processing
Generalized Statistical Processing .
Physical Characteristics
Price Data • . • • • . • • • • • . • . • • . . . . •
INA = Information not Available
7/63
243:161 (CDC 1604-A)
243:162 (CDC 1604~A)
243:163 (CDC 1604-A)
247:171
241:181
243:181
243:182
243: 183
243:184
243:185
(CDC
(CDC
(CDC
(CDC
(CDC
(CDC
247:191 (INA)
247:192 (INA)
247:201.001
247:201.011
247:201.1
247:201.2
247:201.3
247:201.4
247:201.5
247:211
247:221
1604}
1604-A)
1604-A)
1604-A)
1604-A)
1604-A)
247:011.100
CDC 3600
Introduction
\
I NTRODUCTI ON
§
OIl.
The CDC 3600 computer system can perform nearly half a million additions per
second, thus malting it one of the fastest commercially available internal processing systems.
The core storage capacity ranges from 16,384 to 262,144 words (48 bits), and an elaborate
data channel system featuring a separate communication module permits an almost indefinite
number of peripheral units (or central processors) to be connected. For simultaneous operation standard systems can include up to 512 tape units. The cost of the 3600, which begins at
$45,000, is lower than that of the IBM 7094 and Philco 212, and is higher than that of the
UNIVAC 1107 and the H-1800.
Although the 3600 is basically an advanced version of the CDC 1604 large scale computer system, a number of changes have been made to the CDC 1604 central processor design.
Primarily, these changes include instructions which handle parts of words, or "bytes". The
performance characteristics of the system are thereby greatly changed and the processing
times for many of the problems used as central processor performance criteria, even without considering the faster internal core storage (1.5 compared to 3.2 microseconds), have
improved by 70 percent compared to those for the same functions on the 1604.
A number of additional instructions have been included in the 3600 that do not exist in
the 1604. These instructions include double precision floating point arithmetic, the ability
to perform double indexing of operands, etc., and are particularly valuable in matrix calculation programs. However, they do not have the same impact on the over-all system performance as the byte-handling capabilities.
CDC 1604 programs can be run on the 3600, but the reverse is possible only under
restricted circumstances. FORTRAN 63, CXA (a version of Algol 60), and COBOL-61
translators are being made available for both computer systems; thus programs written in
these languages can be compiled for either system.
Across the board programming compatibility is restricted to that which is obtained by
use of common languages: FORTRAN, COBOL, and ALGOL. For details, see the sections
describing these languages.
The magnetiC tape codes and the internal BCD code for the CDC 3600 and 1604 are
identical to those for the IBM 7090 and 7094 systems with IBM 729 tape units. Tapes can be
exchanged between the systems; i. e., the CDC 606 tape unit can use magnetiC tape reels
written by IBM 729 units and vice versa.
The 3600 central processor is an improved version of its equivalent CDC 1604 unit.
The improvements have been designed to retain compatibility with the 1604, yet give muchimproved performance.
Several powerful instructions have been included in the 3600 repertoire, two of which
act on other ordinary instructions to permit the programmer to perform many extensions of
the basic instruction. For instance, complementation, clearing the operational source, and
changing the sign, can all be performed simultaneously with addition or subtraction.
The main improvements incorporated into the 3600 are the double precision operations,
byte operations, the new D (or Flag) Register, and the table and list instructions:
o
Double Precision Floating Point operations with 84-bit mantissas are possible.
o
Byte- handling instructions process parts of words and considerably reduce the
housekeeping involved in such things as code conversions and almost all types
of character handling operations.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
CDC 3600
247:011.101
INTRODUCTION (Contd.)
§
011.
•
Bit-directed facilities. Single bits can be tested, set, and branched upon when
encountered. These facilities also can direct a I-instruction, 49-way branch
which scans a 48-bit word and jumps to a position based on the most significant
I-bit. Used in conjunction with the input-output and other control registers, this
feature considerably reduces the time involved in getting through a network of
subroutines. Again, the improved performance comes from the elimination of
housekeeping efforts rather than the faster computation.
•
Table-searching and list-construction instructions Single instructions can automatically search tables (within limits) for the following conditions within 2 microseconds: equal, not equal, greater than, less than. Search instructions can
handle any character size from 1 to 48 bits. A list held in a specific prescribed
form can be created and changed continuously.
Input and output are controlled by means of Communication Modules. Rates of up to
133,000 characters per second are always possible, even under worst-case conditions; however, at present no character rate greater than 83,000 characters per second is available.
The Communication Modules have direct access to each 16, 384-word bank of core storage,
which means that the central processor is delayed during input-output operations only if both
the input-output and the central processor are attempting to access the same core storage
bank. The basic system has 2 banks, and expanded versions have up to 16 banks.
Each of the core storage banks initiates its word cycle independently of the others. This
provides for asynchronous operation if different banks are used. Although the cycle time
(1.5 microseconds) is fixed, the extent to which each bank is used is determined only by the
program. For this and other reasons, the actual times quoted for an instruction are only
approximate.
Changes in speed of up to 20 percent are pOSSible, depending upon the actual
Situation, and should be anticipated by each installation manager.
Peripherals for the 3600 system which have been announced include CDC 606 Tape
Units, two card readers (one IBM, one CDC), paper tape equipment, a card punch, and a
1,000 line per minute printer. Full details are available only for the tape units and the
IBM card readers. The other announced units are apparently similar to their predecessors
as used in the 1604 system.
These peripherals provide for three types of interrupts within the central processor,
and for automatic translation to and from internal binary coding.
The means for connecting magnetic tape units into 3600 systems are much more
flexible than in the 1604. Two, three, or four tape units per controller can be used at
one time, and no restriction now exists as to how many units can be reading and how
many can be writing. All can be reading or all can be writing. or any mixture of the
two modes of operation can be utilized.
Direct Data Communication links are available for the 3600 and two controllers are
available which link the 3604 Central Processor to one or more 160 or 160-A computers.
Development appears to have been concentrated on providing controllers fur peripheral units.
A comprehensive body of software exists insofar as a number of routines, assemblers,
supervisors, etc., have been developed for the CDC 1604, which can therefore be run with
little or no modification on the 3600. Faster processing will be achieved, but no advantage
will accrue to the user from the new specialized instructions. Details of these routines are
given in the report on the CDC 1604-A (Report 243:).
New software for the 3600 includes:
,/
•
4/63
A run-to-run supervisory Master Control System, which supervises the inputoutput handling, interrupts, relocation, etc., but deals with only one program at
a time. In view of the high processing speeds of the 3600, these often take little
running time, so that routines like this which reduce operator delays become of
greater importance.
\
I AUERBACH I ~
247:011.102
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION (Contd.)
§
011.
Search operands can be indirectly addressed, os that a search can be conducted
even when the keys are scattered, provided their addresses are listed in a table.
•
FORTRAN-63. An advanced FORTRAN language which is compatible with the
FORTRAN 63 of the CDC 1604-A. The translator is specialized with subscripts
to deal economically with expressions and provides buffer control for the
FORTRAN programmer. The FORMAT statement is still handled interpretively
at running time by being scanned each time it is encountered.
•
An ALGOL dialect, CXA, to be released in 1963.
•
A COBOL-61 Compiler, to be released late in 1963.
\
'-
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
247:021.100
CDC 3600
Data Structure
DATA STRUCTURE
§
021.
.1
.2
DATA FORMATS
Type of Information
STORAGE LOCATIONS
Representation
Operands: ••
Name of
Location
Size
Purpose or Use
Word:
48 bits
Character:
Block:
6 bits
1 to N words
basic addressable unit;
contains data item or
two instructions.
internal BCD code.
magnetic tapes.
© 1963
48-bit fixed point words.
48- or 96-bit floating point
word.
Instructions: • . . . . . 24 or 48 bits. 24-bit instructions are packed two
per 48-bit word.
Fixed Point: ••.•
47 data bits plus 1 sign bit.
Floating Point
(Single Precision):
36 bits plus sign for fixed
point part 11- bit exponent.
(Double Precision):.
84 bits plus sign for fixed
point part 11- bit exponent.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
247:031.001
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
CDC 3600
System Configuration
REPORTS
NOTES ON SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
03l.
The CDC 3600 system is organized along four basic lines:
1. The Core Store
The core store consists of from one to sixteen 16, 384-word modules. Each
module has independent access to all computing modules and communication modules.
2. The Computing Modules and the Communication Modules
At least one of each, and at most a combined total of five can be used in a system.
Note that these modules act in parallel; thus, it is not necessary for input or output
data to pass through the computing modules while passing between the core store and
the peripheral units.
3. Data Channels
From one to eight data channels can be connected to each communication module.
Each channel added allows one further data transmission to proceed in parallel.
4. Peripheral Units, Controllers and Adapters
A combination of up to eight peripheral units, controllers, and adapters can be
connected to anyone channel. Each controller can control up to 16 units, depending on the design of the actual equipment. Additional bits are available which would
theoretically allow 512 units to be referenced by each controller.
Peripheral units, such as printers, card readers, etc., can be connected directly
to the data channels.
Adapters to connect the data channel with satellite computers, data transmission
devices, etc., can also be connected. It is not necessary for the adapter to connect
the satellite computer directly to the store, although this can be done. If required,
the connection can be to other input-output'devices connected to the communication
module.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
.~_D
BDP
•
247:031.100
REPORTS
CDC 3600
System Configuration
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
031.
;
. \\
.1
PAIRED 6-TAPE BUSINESS/SCIENTIFIC SYSTEM (CONFIGURATION VI B)
Main Computer
direct connection to auxiliary computer.
1 additional magnetic tape transfer
while computing.
1 additional input/output transfer
while computing.
3 extra index registers.
Deviations from Standard Configuration:
Equipment
Rental
Model 3603 Storage Module
32,768 words core store.
$14,360
Model 3604 Computation Module
including Real Time Clock:
20,755
Model 3602 Communication
Module.
3,255
4 Model 3606 Standard
Bi-directional Data Channels.
3,600
.Console including:
Typewriter, 10 char/sec;
1,790
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
I
Model 3641 Card Reader:
250 cardS/min.
I
I
695
I
I
I
I
CDC 3621 Magnetic Tape System
with 4 mllgnetic tape units;
peak speed 83,000 char/sec.
I
I
I
I
I
I
CDC 3667 Power Convertor
and Power Control
I
I
L ______________ - - - - - - - - -
2,700
3,300
795
...e- --- ------ -- ----- -----
--~ .
To Auxiliary Computer
TOTAL
$51,250
TOTAL, including both
computerR
$S8,599
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
247:031.101
§
CDC 3600
031.
Auxifiary Computer
Deviations from Standard Configurations:
direct connection to main computer
12- bit words extra storage.
faster printing (1, 000 instead of 500
cards/min. )
slower card-reading (250 instead of 500
cards/min. )
multiply/divide included.
typewriter output.
paper tape input and output.
Equipment
Rental
Core Storage:
12- bit words.
CDC 160 Computer
Central Processor:
$1,762
Console including:
Typewriter, 10 char/sec;
Paper Tape Reader, 350
char/sec;
Paper Tape Punch, 110
char/sec.
CDC 167 Card Reader:
250 cards/minute
400
CDC 1609 Card Read/Punch
Unit: 100 cards/minute
1,175
CDC 1612 Line Printer:
1000 lines/minute
1,840
CDC 163-2 Magnetic Tape
Unit with 2 tape units;
peak speed 30, 000 char/sec;
1,482
CDC 3681 Data Channel Converter
CDC 3682 Satellite Compiler
275
415
To Main Computer
TOTAL
4/63
$7,349
247:031.200
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
031.
.2
PAmED 1O-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (CONFIGURATION
vn B)
Main Computer
Direct connection to auxiliary computer.
tape units 40 percent faster.
Devia tions from Standard. Configuration:
Model 3603 Storage Module
32,768 words core store
Model 3604 Computation Module
including Real Time Clock
I
I
I
$14,360
20,755
Model 3602 Communication
Module
3,255
4 Model 3606 Standard
Bi-directional Data Channels
3,600
Console including:
Typewriter, 10 chari sec:
1,790
I
I
I
I
Model 3641 Card Reader:
250 cards/min.
I
I
695
I
I
I
I
I
CDC 3261 Magnetic Type System,
with 8 CDC 606 tape units;
peak speed 83,400 char/sec:
,
I
I
I
2,700
6,600
CDC 3667 Power Converter
and Power Control
795
TOTAL
$54,550
I
L ________________________ ~.-------------------
(
To Auxiliary Computer
TOTAL, including both
computers:
$61,899
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA .Incorporated
4/63
247:031.201
§
CDC 3600
031.
Auxiliary Computer
Deviations from Standard Configurations: . • • •
~
• . . . . ••
direct connection to main computer
12-bit words extra storage.
faster printing (1, 000 instead of 500
cards/min.)
slower card-reading (250 instead of 500
cards/min. )
multiply/divide included.
typewriter output.
paper tape input and output.
/'
Equipment
C:ore Storage:
12-bit words
CDC 160 Computer
Central Processor:
$1,762
Console including:
Typewriter, 10 char/sec;
Paper Tape Reader, 350
char/sec;
Paper Tape Punch, 110
char/sec.
CDC 167 Card Reader:
250 cards/minute
:\
II
-~-m
To Main Computer
4/63
400
CDC 1609 Card Read/Punch
Unit: 100 cards/minute
1, 1,75
CDC 1612 Line Printer:
1000 lines/minute
1,840
CDC 163-2 Magnetic Tape
Unit with 2 tape units;
peak speed. 30.. 000 char/sec:
1,48.2
CDC 3681 Data Channel Converter 275
CDC 3682 Satellite Compiler
415
TOTAL
$7,349
247:031.300
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
§
031.
PAIRED 20-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (CONFIGURATION VIIm)
.3
Main Computer
direct connection to auxiliary computer
4, 000 48- bit words extra storage.
tape units 30 percent slower.
Deviations from Standard Configuration:
Model 3603 Storage Module
32,768 words core store.
$14,360
Model 3604 Computation
Module including
Real Time Clock.
Model 3602 Communication
Module.
I
I
I
20,755
3,255
6 Model 3606 Standard
Bi-directional Data Channels
5,400
Console including:
Typewriter, 10 char/sec:
1,790
I
I
I
I
I
I
Model 3641 Card Reader:
250 cards/min.
I
695
r
I
I
CDC 3624 Magnetic
Tape Systems, each
with 16 CDC 606 tape
units; peak speed
83,600 char/sec.:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4, 750
13,200
CDC 3667 Power
Converter and Power Control.
795
I
I
I
I ________________________. _ .______________ _
L
To Auxiliary Computer
©
TOTAL
$65,000
TOTAL, including both computers:
$73,910
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
~47:031.301
§
CDC 3600
031.
Auxiliary Computer
Deviations from Standard Configurations:
.direct connection to main computer
12- bit words extra storage.
faster printing (1,000 instead of 500
lines/min. )
slower card-reading (250 instead of 500
cards/min. )
multiply/divide included.
typewriter output.
paper tape input and output.
Equipment
Rental
Core Storage:
8, 19212-bit words
CDC 160-A
Central Processor:
$2,250
Console including:
Typewriter, 10 char/sec;
Paper Tape Reader, 350
char/sec;
Paper Tape Punch, 110
char/sec.
CDC 167 Card Reader:
250 cards/minute
400
CDC 170 Card Punch Controller
IBM 523 Card Punch
335
85
CDC 1612 Line Printer:
1000 lines/minute
..(
I )
To Main
Computer
4/63
1,840
CDC 162-2 Magnetic Tape
System with 4 tape units;
peak speed 82,300 char/sec;
3,300
TOTAL
$8,910
700
247:041.100
•
STANDARD
EDP
•
CDC 3600
Internal Storoge
Core Storoge
REPOllTS
INTERNAL STORAGE: CORE STORAGE
§
041.
· 13
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity:.
Core Storage, Model 3609.
.12
Basic Use:
working storage.
.13
Description
The input-output capacity of each 16, 384-word storage bank is approximately 5 six-bit characters per microsecond, which is approximately 60 times the data
transmission rate of a CDC 606 tape unit. As noted
above, if a system requires additional input-output
storage capacity, this capacity can be obtained by
adding another storage bank.
The core store of the CDC 3600 system consists of
from 1 to 16 storage modules. Each module contains
16,384 48-bit words, and is connected to all the computing modules and the communication modules in the
system.
The bank address is manually set by means of a
rotary switch on the cabinet. Physically, two 16,384word banks are contained in one cabinet, which is
called a 3603 Storage Module. This use of bank
addresses is a restriction only insofar as:
These connections are direct and independent of the
connections between the same units and other storage
modules. Thus, it is effectively possible to:
(1) an additional instruction is needed to change the
bank from which either operand or instructions
are being chosen,' and
(1) Avoid delay in computation by overlapping the
access times of multiple banks.
(2) both base operand addresses in an instruction
pair must be taken from the same bank.
(2) Add additional input-output capability to a system
simply by adding more storage banks. The time
spent in accessing these banks can, if needed, be
totally overlapped with the time used to access
the original banks of the system.
Parity bits are carried with each word. The three
parity bits which are used are formed from parts of
the word as used in instruction pairs. Thus, one bit
is logically attached to each operand address, and
one bit is attached to the two operation code portions.
Words ;ire divided thus whether or not they are actually to be used as instruction pairs.
The cycle time of each bank of store is 1. 5 microseconds. The effective cycle time of the store while
being used for computation is approximately 1 microsecond, taking into account the overlapping of the
bank containing the instructions and the bank containing the operands. (It is assumed'that these are normally in different banks.)
'.
\.
Description (Contd.)
Core storage banks are called "overlapped" whenever
the cycle of one proceeds simultaneously with but independently of the cycle of another. This normally
occurs when an operand is requested from one core
bank very soon after one has been read from another
independent bank. Since the operand which was read
becomes available when the read/rewrite cycle is
only about one-third complete, it is possible (and the
3600 is able) to be ready for the next operand before
the cycle is completed. When this occurs, time can
be saved by requesting the second operand from an
independent store whose read/rewrite cycle can be
initiated before completion of the cycle that obtained
the first operand.
The CDC 3604 central processor normally requests
data from two banks. the instruction bank (I) and the
operand bank (0), in the order: (I), (0), (0); (I),
(0), (0). Fetching of the instruction is always a read
operation; therefore, access to the first operand is
always overlapped with the instruction cycle. However, the second operand, since it is in the same
bank, is not overlapped.
© 1963
.14
Availability: . .
7 months.
.15
First Delivery:
1963.
.16
Reserved Storage: •
none.
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
. 21
Storage Medium:, •
.22
Physical Dimensions
. magnetic cores.
.221 Magnetic core type storage
Core diameter:.
?
Core bore: .
?
Array size:. • . •.
?
.23
Storage Phenomenon:
• 24
Recording Permanence
· 241 Data erasable by
instructions: . .
.242 Data regenerated
constantly: • . .
.243 Data volatile: ••
• 244 Data permanent: .
. 245 Storage changeable:
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
direction of magnetization.
yes.
yes.
no.
no •
no.
4/63
CDC 3600
247:041.270
§ 041.
.27
• 28
• 52
Interleaving Levels: •
Access Techniques
• 281 Recording method: •
• 282 Reading method: •
• 283 Type of access: •.
• 29
none within 1 bank. The use
of multiple core storage
banks effectively provides
interleaving, reducing
access time to approx.
1 ,",sec.
coincident current .
sense wire.
read out followed by
rewrite.
Potential Transfer Rates
· 292 Peak data rates
Cycling rates:
Unit of data:
Gain factor:
up to 667, 000 cps per bank.
one 48-bit word.
use of 2 or more 3609
stores.
667,000 words/sec/bank.
Data rate:
Compound data rate: • 667,000 to 21,333,000
words/sec, depending on
nmnber of banks
connected.
.53
Simultaneous
Operations: •
accesses to each store are
asynchronous and independent of each other.
Access Time Parameters and Variations
.531 Cycle time: • . . . . . 1. 5 ,",sec.
For data unit of: • . • . 1 word.
2 instructions •
. 532 Variation in cycle time: see introduction.
.6
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: . . . • . . none •
.7
STORAGE PERFORMANCE
· 71
Data Transfer
Pair of storage unit possibilities
With self:. • • • • . . yes.
.72
Transfer Load Size
any number of words, using
the transmit instruction.
With self: . • . • .
· 73
Effective Transfer Rate
With self: • . • . • • • 385,000 words/sec .
•3
DATA CAPACITY
• 31
Module and System Sizes
.4
.8
48-bit words: . . .
24-bit instructions:
32,768.
65,536.
CONTROLLER: . .
no separate controller.
.5
ACCESS TIMING
.51
Arrangement of Heads:
4/63
each 16, 384-word store has
independent access
facilities.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Receipt of data:
address parity check
Recotding of data:
Action
computer halted if
parity Is incorrect.
3 parity bits tecotded none at this stage.
with data word
Recovery of data for
transmission to
computing module:
parity check
console lamp lit,
and optional
interrupt.
Recovery of data for
transmission to output:
parity check
parity check bit set,
with optional
interrupt.
247:051.100
CDC 3600
Centrol Processor
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
051.
.12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
Central Processor.
CDC 3604.
The 3600 is a single-address, fixed word length,
binary processor. Many instructions take under 2
microseconds, and each module has the capability
for executing approximately 600, 000 instructions per
second. Arithmetic operations are performed in
binary on 48-bit words. The operations are performed in a parallel mode. Each word normally contains a pair of 24-bit single address instructions but
other instruction lengths are also used. The' address
of an instruction can either be indexed or used as an
indirect address. Three index-bit positions are provided in each instruction to select one of six index
registers. However, one value of the index-bits
specifies an indirect address, and indirect addressing may be recursive.
Operations are provided both in fixed point and in
single and double precision floating point. Fixed
length operands are 48 bits in size while floating
point operands consist of an 11- bit characteristic and
sign plus 84 or 36-bit fixed point parts. Both integral and fractional fixed point multiplication and division are provided.
Indexing by means of anyone of the six index registers is available to almost all instructions. Increments from 1 to 32,768 words can be indexed, but
provide access to the entire store only when a single
32,768 word module is attached.
The augment instructions are 24-bit instructions
which modify the succeeding 24-bit instruction. This
is a powerful device which has been used, among
other things:
(1) To provide double precision floating point
instructions by modifying the basic floating point
instruction.
\
\
(2) To provide double indexing capabilities for most
24-bit instructions. The resultant operand address used in execution of the modified instruction is computed by adding the contents of the index register specified by the augment instruction
to the address of the actual instruction which can
itself have a specified index register. Thus the
instruction pair "Augment, index register 3;
ADD, index register 4, 00500" executed when index register 3 contains 30, and index register 4
contains 4, would add the contents of 00534 to the
contents of register A. (Indirect addressing is
available as an alternative to direct indexing in
both the augmenting and augmented instruction. )
© 1963
Description (Contd.)
(3) To direct which of a number of modifications to
standard instructions should be used. The actual
modifications available are related to the actual
instruction; typical examples are: to not round
results, to not normalize resultJ3, to ignore the
sign of the operand, to clear the operand location
to zero after loading the operand into the register.
Thus, if the instruction pair used in the example
above were amended to read, "Augment, index
register 3, t 4 ; ADD index register 4 00500" then
the complement of the contents of 00534, not the
contents themselves, would be added. A number
of other, more complicated instruction modifications are available and their use will reduce the
over-all number of instructions which must be
executed.
The Execute Instruction, which itself can be augmented to provide a double-indexed instruction
address, executes the instruction pair at specified
locations, and then returns to normal sequencing.
As the instruction pair itself can use one or two
index registers, it is possible to design very
short central loops involving a number of variaabIes. This approach has been used in estimating
the time for the standard statistical problem.
Here, in preparing a table, it is necessary to
compute the address (x - 1) + X(y - 1). Normally,
multiplication is required but this has been
avoided using the augment techniques. (See also
Users' Guide.)
Further details of many of these instructions are
given in the Instruction Code section of the report
and reference should be made to that section.
Searching can be done by word or by byte t, with the
housekeeping being performed within the logic of the
instruction. Conditions which can be searched for include equality, inequality, more than, and less than.
The byte-handling facilities, in addition to being used
in search operations, also can be used in Transmit
and other bit-based or character-based operations,
such as editing and code conversion. One of the major gaps in the instruction repertoire of the CDC 1604
is thereby filled.
Additional instructions which enhance the bit and character handling capabilities of the 3600 are the InterRegister Transmit and the Register Jump instruct.ions.
The registers concerned include those used in computation, some temporary storage registers, and those
reflecting external conditions. These registers can
t A "byte" is part of a computer word, consisting
of from 1 to 48 bits. These bytes can be measured from either the most Significant or the least
significant end of the word.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
247:051. 120
§
CDC 3600
• 213 Boolean
051.
AND:
Inclusive OR:
Other logical and
mask-type
operations:
automatic
automatic
binary
1 word.
1 word.
.12
Description (Contd.)
.13
be tested, interchanged, complemented, etc., as
.
automatic
1 word.
necessary within a single instruction and by the Jump
On Flag instruction, (which jumps to the one of 48 po- .214 Comparison
Numbers: •
yes
by word or by byte.
sitions, if any of the 48 bits of the register are set at
•
yes
by word or by byte.
Absolute:
"I").
Letters: •
yes
by word or by byte.
yes
by word or by byte.
Mixed: • .
Increased processor speeds are normally achieved by
.215
Translation
Code
the use of two storage banks. ntese banks can be
Code translation from external BCD to internal BCD
overlapped only by taking instructions from one bank
normally is automatically provided when magnetic
and data from another.
tapes recorded in BCD are being read. This is not
done in 1604 mode so as to maintain compatibility
Because of the overlapped stores, execution time for
with the CDC 1604.
individual instructions and sequences of instructions
can vary up to 25 per cent above and below average.
Code translation between Hollerith coding and interIt is possible, however, to take some advantage of
nal BCD is a function of the input-output controller
the timing variations by careful planning. The realconcerned, and details on this are given in the intime clock system has two registers. One contains
put-output section.
the clock itself, and is automatically incremented
.216 Radix Conversion
each millisecond; the other is a Time Limit register.
Radix conversion between BCD, fixed point binary,
The programmer can arrange for interruptions when
or floating point binary (single precision or double
the contents of these are equal; he does not have to
precision) is performed by standard program subwait until the actual clock location overflows.
routines. Timing details are not available and will
depend considerably on the amount of storage which
Running more than one program at a time can be
can be allocated to the routines; however, 50 miachieved by the usual method of adding additional
croseconds per number (of 1 through 8 digits) concomputing modules. However, a number of regisverted
fixed point appears to be a conservative estiters in the processing module make it possible to
mate for ~D binary conv~rsion, and 30 microsecachieve multi-running safely within the same computonds for fixed point to floating point conversion.
ing module. These are the bounds registers, which
Edit
Format: .'. • . . . own coding•
•
217
prescribe upper and lower limits of an area that can
.218 Table Look-Up
be used for instructions and data. Reference to data
Tables in the 3600 may be stored in three ways, deoutside these limits can be made" but no instruction
pending on the item size. 'If the item is less than 25
cali be taken from the out-of-bounds area. The acbits
the bits are packed together into a series of
tual programs can be sequenced by means of the incontiguous words, with as many items in a single
terrupt system, using either the real-time clock or
word as 'pOssible. The item size is defined as a
the input-output interrupts to initiate change overs.
"byte"and the search is made byte by ~yte; with the
search instruction going from word to word as
Availability: • . .'.
?
needed.
.14
First Delivery:
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
.21
Operations and Operands
1963.
Operation and
Provision
Variation
.211 Fixed point
Radix Size
automatic
binary
1 word.
none.
automatic
binary
2 words.
automatic
binary
2 words.
automatic
binary
2 words.
Add-Subtract:
automatic
binary
Multiply:
automatic
Divide:
automatic
Add-Subtract:
Multiply
Short:
Long, Integtal:
Divide
No remainder:
Remainder,
integral:
Remainder,
fractional:
none.
If the items of the table between 25 and 48 bits (one
word), they are stored separately in consecutive
words. If the item is longer than a word, an integral number of words is allocated to each item,. and
the search is handled by incrementing the startmg
address by a fixed increment (the item size) between
each key word to be searched.
.219 List Search
Lists are treated in the CDC 3600 by using part of
one item to store the address of the next element in
the list. The arrangement of the actual items and
addresses is not matetial, so that items can be included in ,or dropped from a list by altering one address only.
Lists cannot be searched by a single instruction,
but items can be automatically counted and thus the
address of the nth item can be determined.
.212 Floating point
4/63
36 &
or 84 &
binary 36 &
or 84 &
binary 36 &
or 84 &
11 bUs.
11 bits.
11 bits.
11 bits.
11 bits.
11 bits.
• 22
Special Cases of Operands
.221 Negative numbers:.
.222 Zero: • . . . . • . •
I AUERBACH! .$J
l's complement.
positive zero and negative
zero.
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
247:051. 223
051.
.231 Instruction structure (contd. )
• 223 Operand size
determination:
• 23
• The Register Jump Instruction 62.
variable may be described
in bytes or in 48 or 96bit words.
• The Table Search and List Element Locate
instruction 63.
Instruction Formats
• The Bit Sensing and Byte handling instruction 63.
• 231 Instruction structure
The normal instruction on the CDC 3600 is a 24-bit
instruction. This is illustrated below and described
in Paragraph 232. A number of instructions use
different codes. These include:
• The Inter Register Instructions (00; with its subsidiary instructions 000 through 006, which control arithmetic or logical operations; instruction
007 which can be a Transmit or Swap operation).
23
1817
• The Bank Jump instructions 63.
• The Input-Output instructions 74.
These are illustrated below; but their structure is
not further described here. Details on these are
given in the Instruction List.
.232 Instruction Layout
o -BIT
15 14
m.Y or k
INSTRUCTIONS DESIGNATED BY
THREE-LETTER MNEMONICS
'--_v-.....''--y-J
'=00
o-BIT
~----~~~~----------------~~~~~--~r-----------------~
OPERAND
*
JUMP ADDRESS
'-62
m
o-BIT
14
~----~~rT=---------------~~-=~~~~~--------------~
JUMP ADDRESS
*
ADDRESS
m
USAGE
O-SIT
r---------~~--------------~r_----~--_.------~--------__,*.
REJECT JUMP
ADDRESS
STORAGE ADDRESS
~~\------~------~~'--y-J\~----~
\.
'=74.2
m
Q
v
CONTROL WORD ADDRESS
15
!'"_______
1:""_'
... ___T_ION
___
C_OD_E_...
---'r-'·
O_PE_R_A_ND
______
~\~-------v---------J
'=77.3
* Described in Instruction List (Section
© 1963
:121).
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
CDC 3600
247:051.233
OS1.
• 233 Instruction parts
Designator
a
First Bank
Address
§
• 235 Literals
Arithmetic: .
Incrementing
modifiers: •
IS-bit address part.
Use
IS-bit address part.
With first storage address. 'm'. specifies · 236 Directly addressed operands
an 18-bit composite
• 2361 Intetnal storage
storage location.
Type: •••••••• core.
b
First Index
Specifies index register
Size: • • • . • . . • . 48 bits or 96 bits.
(B) 1,lsed, or whose conVolwne accessible: . 1 bank of 16.384 words.
tents are used iil the
• 2362 Increased address
operation.
up to 16 banks referenced
capacity: . . .
d
Bank Address Indicates whether or not
by change of bank
Usage
bank address designa- :
indicator.
tors ('a' or 'i ') will be .237 Address indexing
interpreted in the oper- • 2371 Nwnber of methods:
1.
ation (if d = 0, not used. 2373 Indexing rule: • • . .
addition modulo store size.
d = I, used).
2374 Index specification:.
3-bit positions within the inf
Function Code A 6 or 9-bit code (destruction to be modified, or
pending on the operain a previous instruction.
tion) which specifies
• 237S· Nwnber of potential
the operation to be
indexers: • . • . .
6.
performed.
.2376 Addresses which can
Condition
j
Conditions operations in
be indexed: • • . . • operand addresses in arithjwnps and stops.
metic, logical, load, and
k
Unmodified
Nwnber of shifts to be
store instructions.
Shift Count
executed.
shift counts.
Unmodified
m
Address of operand.
jwnp locations.
Execution
.2377 Cwnulative indexing: • yes, more than 1 index regAddres s (Adister can be involved.
ress One)
.2378 Combined index and
n
Address Two
Usually used as a jwnp
none.
step: • • . . . . •
address.
.238 Indirect addressing
Operand One
p
Register which holds
• 2381 Recursive: .
yes.
first operand in Inter- .2382 Designation: . . .
"7" configuration of the inRegister and Register
dex designator character
Jwnp instructions.
of the instruction. The
q
Operand Two
Register which holds
new address and index
second operand in Inregister is that of the
ter- Register instruclower instruction in the
tion.
designated word.
r
Destination
Register to which result • 2383 Control:. . . • . . . • the last address in the reis sent after specified
cursive sequence specifies
operation is complete.
a direct address; i.e.,
s
Sub-operation Specifies one or more
other than a "7" index
Code
sub-operations to be
designator in the lower inperformed. (See indistruction of the word.
vidual instructions for • 2384 Indexing with indirect
interpretations of's'. )
addressing: . . • . . only the last address in th~
x
Channel
Specifies data channel;
indirect address chain
Nwnber
also used to specify
may be modified by indexchannel whose status
ing.
will re read or sensed. · 239 Stepping
Unmodified
Used in execution ady
2391 Specification of
Operand
dress portion of inincrement: . .
stepping instructions.
struction; specifies this 2392 Increment sign: •
minus, plus.
address will be used as 2393 Size of -increment:
minus unity, plus unity. or
the operand. Specifies
plus IS-bit literal in stepa IS-bit comparison
ping instruction.
quantity in Register
2394 End value: . . . .
zero, equality.
Jwnp instruction. Des- 239S Combined step and
ignates the quantity
test: • . . . . . .
yes.
used as an addend in
Add to Exponent instruction.
.234 Basic address structure: 1+0, with bank address
taken from special
register.
4/63
247:051. 240
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
051.
· 24
• 33
Special Processor Storage
.241 Category of
storage
Number of
locations
1
A Register:
Q Register:
D Register:
6 Index Register:
Time Register:
Time Limit Register:
Size of
Program usage
bits
48
Main Accumulator.
48
Second Accumulator.
48
Used as temporary
storage.
15
6
27
27
Interrupt Mask Register:
48
lnterrupt Register:
48
lnstruction Bank Register:
1
3
3
Operand Bank Register:
15
Product Register:
Shift Count Register:
7
Miscellaneous Mode
Register:
1
15
All "0":
All "1":
"+1":
1
1
1
48
48
48
.242 Category Total number
of storage locations
. All above:
21
Physical
form
?
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
· 31
Instruction Sequencing
• 316 Accessibility to
routines: . . .
Hold 6 Console
Switch Flags.
Constants.
Access time
(sec)
?
·3
. 311 Ntunber of sequence
control facilities: .
.315 Sequence control step
size: • . . . .
Real-Time Clock.
Used to cause interrupts at speCific
time.
Inhibition of specific
interrupts.
Interrupts condition
for 32 I/O channels and 16 internal
conditiOns.
Bank address added
to obtain instruction address.
Bank address added
to operand address.
Shows interrupt conditiOns which are
not inhibited.
Shift Count; destroyed
when further instructions are executed.
Cycle time
("sec)
0.25.
r
~.
• 32
• 33
Interruption
The 13 internal interruptible conditions listed in
Paragraph • 331 cause an interrupt only when a bit is
in ~e appropriate position of the Interrupt Mask
Register. Otherwise, they merely set a bit in the
Interrupt Register. If the program has allowed the
particular type of interrupt, the interrupt system is
turned off, and a series of forced jtunps are made
into the routine handling the specific condition. In
all, it is possible for 16 different conditions to be
serviced in this way, although, at present, only 13
are specified. Functionally, a typical interrupt has
to unload and restore the operational registers it
uses, and reactivate the interrupt system before returning to the main program. Typically, approximately 15 microseconds is required for each interrupt occurrence in addition to the time spent in the
actual routine.
External interrupts are more complex. Each data
channel can cause an interrupt, which cannot be
stopped by programming action. After this interrupt
has occurred, three forced jtunps enter the routine
associated with the specific data channel. It is necessary at this point to examine where the interrupt
originated. This can be in the data channel itself (a
parity error, or the end of a "chained" input-output
operation) or in any of the eight units connected to
the channel. Two additional forced jtunps are used
to enter the routine concerned with the specific condition. If the interrupt originated from a specified
equipment, it is necessary to read the 12-bit status
data into one of the six index registers (which probably has to be unloaded for the purpose) and perform
an additional jtunp before entering the routines.
Otherwise, the overhead processing is similar to that
for the internal interrupts, but amount to approximately 25 microseconds per interruption in addition
to the time required to handle the actual condition.
Subsequent to completion of the routine, the interrupt
system is re-activated and any interrupt conditions
which have acctunulated are examined prior to return to the major routine •
1 per processor module.
1 word; i. e., moves by
instruction pairs .
. 331 Possible causes
In-out units: .
yes, by means of a "Return
Jinnp" instruction.
· 317 Permanent or optional
modifier: • . . . • • . yes, instruction bank
address.
Look-Ahead: •
Interruption (Contd.)
In -out controllers: •
Program errors: . .
none.
The programmer has completed control of the interrupt system of the 3600 and is able to allow or disallow any or all of the interrupt conditions.
Processor error: •
The four main types of interrupts are:
Other conditions: .
Internal computing errors
External conditions in each I/O unit.
Special operating modes (e. g., 1604 mode which
traps the 1604 instructions which are not available on the 3600, or the Trace mode).
Real-Time Clock interrupt.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corl'0ration and BNA Incorporated
External Unit in "Ready",
"End of File" or "Abnormal end of operation".
The meaning of these
items is as specified for
each individual unit.
pOwer off, missing, or nonfunctioning.
over-capacity shifts.
fixed and floating point operands out of range.
division by zero.
illegal instruction.
illegal reference to locked
out area of store.
parity error in operand or
instruction.
time reading from RealTime Clock.
Console Operator request.
a jtunp instruction (when in
Trace Mode).
a non 3600 instruction (when
in 1604 Mode).
4/63
247:051. 332
§
CDC 3600
051.
• 332 Control by routine
Individual control:
· 333
• 334
• 335
· 336
internal and controller interrupts which are specific in themselves, are
set by masks.
Method: . • • . . • . . external interrupts are individually chosen by function. Three functions are
available for each individual unit. The 3640 Card
Reader, for instance, can
interrupt when ready,
when end-of-file occurs,
or when error has occurred. Each of these can
be individually set or
cleared by the program.
If, however, more than
one is set, then some
cycles are used in addition to the normal interrupt overhead, in housekeeping prior to entering
the interrupt routine.
Operator control: . . • none.
Interruption conditions: interruption condition.
specific interrupt approved
by program.
interrupt routine not in
progress.
interrupt system activated.
Interruption process
Registers saved: .
seqUence control register.
Destination: . . .
fixed location.
Control methods
Determine cause:
2 jumps, in standard sequence identify cause of
interrupt OR data channel
concerned.
Enable interruption:
program.
.34
Multi-running: .•
.35
Multi-sequencing
.351 Method of control: .
. 352 Maximum number of
programs: • . .
• 353 Precedence rules: •
• 354 Program protection
Storage: . . . • .
see description.
in general, by providing
more than one computing
module .
4 (this would allow only 8
data channels among all
four computing modules).
each independent and with
equal access to all stores.
bounds registers within
each module gives upper
and lower addresses beyond which reference cannot be made. Can be
altered by program.
In -out units: . . . . . none.
4/63
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
.41
Instruction Times in ,",sec
.411 Fixed point
Add - Subtract:
Multiply: ••.
Divide: • . • .
.412 Floating point
Add-Subtract:
Multiply: •.•
Divide: • . . .
.413 Additional allowance for
Indexing: . . . . . .
Indirect addressing:
Complementing: ..
Double Precision
Addition/Subtraction:
Double Precision
Multiplication:
Double Precision
Division:
.414 Control
Branch: . .
.415 Counter control
Step: . . . . .
Step down and test
zero: • . . • • •
Step up and test equal:
.418 Shift:. . . . • • . • ••
.42
2.1
6.44
14.8
4.5 average.
6.4 average.
13. 0 average.
none.
1. 0 average, per indirect
reference.
0.1
2.23
22.1
14.1
2.1
1.1
2.07
1.69
1.44
Processor Performance in p.sec
.421 For random addresses Fixed point Floating point
c=a+b:...
6.0
8.4
b =a +b:. • •
5.3
8.4
Sum N items: •
2. IN
4. 5N
c = ab: . . . .
10. 3
10: 3
c=a/b:....
20.0
19.0
. 422 For arrays of data
Fixed point Floating point
ci =ai +bj:. •
9
11.4
bj=ai+bj:..
8.4
11.4
Sum N items:.
2.25+ 4. IN 2.25 + 6. 5N
c = c +aibj: •
15.76
15.76
.423 Branch based on comparison
Numeric data: •
7.4
Alphabetic data:
7.4
.424 Switching
Unchecked: .
4. 0
Checked: • .
15.6
List search:
. . 6. 12 + 2. 38N
. 425 Format control per character (inclUding BCO- binary
conversion)
Unpacking: • • . . .. 10
Packing: • • • • . .• 15
.426 Table look-up per comparison
For a match: •
4. 12 + 2. 38N
For greatest:.
2.38N (or 4.0 whenever new
"greatest" is found).
For least: • .
5.26N (or 5.1 whenever new
"least" is found).
For interpolation
point: . . . • . .
2. 38N from most Significant end-of-table.
247:051.427
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
§
·.5
051.
.427 Bit indicators.
Set bit in separate
location:
Set bit in pattern:
Test bit in separate
location: . . . . .
Test bit in pattern: .
Test AND for B bits:
Test OR for B bits:.
.428 Moving: •• . • • . .
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Check or
Interlock
Error
1. 88
1. 88
1. 88
1. 88
6.4
6.4
290,000 48-bit words/second.
check
specific bit set, option-' 1••
interrupt OCCUIS; intel'··,._
system ~eactivated, instruction address stored,
and forced jump to specific
differing location for each
case.
} parity
check
specific bit set, optionally
interrupt OCCUIS; interrupt
system deactivated, instruction address stored,
and forced jump to specific
differing location for each
case.
Overflow:
Underflow:
Zero division:
Shift fault:
Out-of-bounds
instruction:
Out-of-bounds operand:
Invalid instruction:
Storage reference:
Receipt of data:
Internal reject:
Abnormal end of operation on connected I/O device:
Action
J
check
specific bit set,
optionally interrupt OCCUIS;
interrupt system deactivated, instruction address
stored, and forced jump
to specific differing location for each case.
"
("
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
.~AKIlARD
247:061.100
EDP
•
REroRTS
CDC 3600
Console
CONSOLE
§
061.
• 13
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity:.
Model 3601 Console .
.12
Associated Units:
IBM 731 Selectric Typewriter is built into the
console desk.
• 13
Description
Description (Contd.)
of 48 lamps. The surface of each lamp is labeled
with the appropriate bit number and c:an be easily
read.
• The physical conditions inside each of the units,
and whether or not the computer will shut off automatically if the temperature exceeds the limits
prescribed for the computer •
The operator has available to him:
The operational and the maintenance consoles (see
Figures 1 and 2) are mounted on the left and right
extensions, respectively, of the V -shaped desk. It
is assumed that either the operator or maintenance
engineer will be occupying the console desk at one
time.
Each console handles only one computing module.
If more are connected, special consoles' are needed.
• Nine sense switches (which can be tested by programs while running) to reflect such information
as a program requires about the requisites for the
particular run.
• An Interrupt button, which enables him to make
any alterations required at any time via the
keyboard.
The operator can tell at a glance:
• Whether a fault has occurred, and if so, which of
12 types it is.
• Whether the computing module is operating in
Standard mode, simulating a 1604, being used in
Trace mode (probably for debugging), or is in an
interrupt routine.
• Which bits of the D Flag register are set. The
display is arranged as an 8 by 6 rectangular array
© 1963
• The Auto-load button, which loads and enters boot~
strap routines from a standard peripheral device.
o An "Interlock Bypass" lamp which enables him to
bypass the automatic shut-off when the temperature exceeds the ~ibed limits.
The console has ample desk space, a good view, and
adequate input-output facilities. Supplementary information can be obtained from the maintenance
console.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
247:070.100
STANDARD
REPORTS
CDC 3600
Input-Output
General
INPUT-OUTPUT: GENERAL
§
070.
Each input-output unit in the 3600 system has:
• Three different interrupt conditions which, with program permission can cause
the program to be interrupted.
• Twelve status bits, which provide the program with precise details concerning
the current operating condition of the unit.
Input-Output operations are initiated in the central processor, using the interrupt and
status data of the individual unit as guides. The central processor defines the action to be
taken (reading or writing), defines an input-output area, and transfers control to the communication module. At this point, the central processor is no longer affected until the operation is ended; however, it ~an obtain details of the status of the unit and of the portion of the
instruction still to be performed at any time. It should be noted that a single instruction can
cause many cards to be read to fill up the specified storage area.
The delay to the program caused by any particular inp1,lt-output unit is literally zero
if the input-output area is not in either the instruction core storage bank or the operand bank.
The maximum delays are negligible except for the CDC 606 tape unit. When working at high
density each tape will utilize one and a half storage cycles out of every hundred. If the same
storage bank is used for input-output and for computation, computation can be delayed. The
duration of the delay will be proportional to the use of the storage bank during computation.
Under worst conditions, the delay will not exceed one and one half per cent of the elapsed
time per CDC 606 tape unit. Other details of the maximum delay possible are given below.
Input-Output Area is in the:
Instruction
Bank
Operand
Bank
Instruction and
Operand Bank t
(%)
(%)
(%)
0.5
1.0
1.5
ffiM 088 Card Reader
(650 cards/minute)
0.005
0.01
0.015
ffiM 088 Card Reader
(250 cards/minute)
0.002
0.004
0.006
Punched Paper, Character Mode
(350 frames/second)
0.02
0.03
0.05
line Printer
(1,000 lines/minute)
0.012
0.025
0.037
Input-Output Unit :1=
Each CDC 606 Tape Unit
(83,400 char/sec)
t i. e., the instructions and operands are in the same bank.
:1=
The Card Punch, Paper Tape Punch, Console Typewriter all take negligible times.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
247:071.100
CDC 3600
CDC 3641 Card Reader
INPUT-OUTPUT: CDC 3641 CARD READER
§
071.
.12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:.... CDC 3641 Card Reader.
© 1963
Description
The 3661 Card Reader is an adaptation of the basic
CDC-manufactured card reader. (CDC 167 on the
160 systems; CDC 1617 on the 1604 systems). No
details of its operational characteristics except its
speed (250 cards per minute) have been released.
by Auerbach Carporation ond BNA Incorporated
4/63
247:072.100
·STAHDARD
EDP
_
CDC 3600
Inp uf-Output
CDC 3642 Card Punch
REPORTS
INPUT-OUTPUT: 3642 CARD PUNCH
§
072 .
.12
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:.
. 12
Description
. • . . • • CDC 3642 Card Punch.
The only detail of infonnation on the 3642 Card Punch
which has been issued is its operational speed (100
cards per minute). It can be assumed that the unit
will have the ability to cause an interrupt on any of
the three standard interruptible conditions for I/O
units (Ready, End of File, Abnonnal End of Opera-
© 1963
Description (Contd.)
tion) and that the data channel concerned will also be
able to initiate interrupts on parity errors, or at the
end of a chained input-output operation (i. e. ,
Scatter-Read, Gather-Write) .
Provided that there are sufficient data channels
available, theoretically, there is no restriction on the
number of card punches which can be included in the
256 possible units of input-output equipment which
can be connected directly to the system.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incarporated
4/63
247:074.100
.STANDARn
EDP
•
Rfl'QRTS
CDC 3600
Input-Output
Card Reader
INPUT-OUTPUT: CARD READER
§ 074.
.12 Description (Contd.)
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: •
.12
Description
not occur when a particular punching code is sensed,
but only when an input hopper becomes emptied and
a switch is depressed by the operator.
CDC 3643 Card Reader .
IBM 088 Collator.
Status bits monitor only four conditions: three
standard ones (Ready, Busy, Hopper Empty) and one
in which binary-coded (as opposed to Hollerith) cards
are being read. The status bit acts as a safeguard
against confusing the two types of cards (binary- or
Hollerith-coded) which can be read.
This card reader can read 650 cards per minute
from either 1 or 2 card feeds with automatic translation of data to BCD form. If two feeds are used,
the reading rate is doubled; however, the card read
cannot be checked by the program in this case. Normally, both reading stations are used to read the
same deck of cards in order to permit an internally
programmed card comparison. This action takes
approximately 40 microseconds and the ensuing conversion to binary takes 50 microseconds per number.
This overhead processing can normally be absorbed
within the card read time.
Each read station can be set to interrupt the main
processing whenever it is ready, when an abnormal
end-of-operation is sensed, or when an end-of-file
signal is received. The end-of-file interrupt does
© 1963
Error checking consists of programmed comparison
in the actual computer store. No other checking is
available. However, as the size of the input area is
defined in the original card read instruction, input
area overflow cannot occur.
As the operating systems require a card reader to
be on-line, either this unit or some other card
reader must be included in a system.
• 13
Availability: •.
10 months.
. 14
First Delivery:
1963 •
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
247:075.100
CDC 3600
CDC 3691 Paper Tape
Reader/Punch
INPUT-OUTPUT: CDC 3691 PAPER TAPE READER/PUNCH
§
.11
075.
•1
Identity: . • • . . • • . CDC 3691 Paper Tape
Reader /PUnch .
GENERAL
No details have been released for this unit.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA In corpora led
4/63
247:081. 100
CDC 3600
CDC 3655 Printer
INPUT-OUTPUT: CDC 3655 PRINTER
§
081.
.12
Description (Contd. )
under the 1604 systems (Section 241:081). No details except its operating speed have been released .
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity:........ CDC 3655 Printer.
.12
Description
The 3655 Printer is an adaptation of the Analexmanufactured CDC 1612 Line Printer, described
© 1963
The general method of handling input-output shows
that the printer wilt most probably operate with eight
alphameric characters packed into a word. Storage
loading is thus minimized during printing to a load of
approximately O. 04 per cent of the capacity of a
single bank.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
•
247:091.100
STANDARD
EDP
•
REPORTS
CDC 3600
Input-Output
CDC 606 Magnetic Tape
INPUT-OUTPUT: CDC 606 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
§ 091.
.1
'.11
.12
.12
GENERAL
in either direction. The maximum rewind time of a
2,400 foot tape is 80 seconds.
Identity: • • • . • . . • Magnetic Tape Unit.
CDC 606.
Data is stored in the computer in multiples of eight
characters; i. e., sets of full words. If a block being
.read from tape does not fill an exact number of words,
the least significant end of the last word is filled with
zeros before being put into the core storage. If this
occurs, a length error is recorded and program examination of the Buffer Control Word can determine
the cause. However, it is not possible to determine
how many zeros have been incorporated in the record.
The adding of zeros can never occur when tapes written by CDC 3600 are being used, but can occur when
tapes written by other machines (including the CDC
160 and I60-A) are used.
Description
The CDC 606 Magnetic Tape Unit provides the following facUities under program control.
While Writing:
(1) Packing density either 200 or 556 rows per inch.
(2) Binary or BCD coding.
(3) lnterrupt on: next error, when ready, end of
file, or any combination.
(4) Skip bad spot.
(5) Write end-of-file mark.
(6) Rewind with or without interlock.
(7) Automatic conversion between Jnternal and
External BCD.
While reading:
(1) Binary or BCD coding.
(2) Read one fUe, or one record.
(3) Skip one file or one record, forward or
backward.
(4) lnterrupt on either next error or when ready.
(5) Rewind with or without interlock.
(6) Automatic conversion between Internal and
External BCD.
At any time, individual sense instructions can be
used to test for the following conditions :
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Description (Contd.)
Parity Error.
Length Error.
End-of-tape mark sensed.
Tape positioned at Load Point.
Interrupt requested on unit.
Unit available.
Certain types of program error have occurred
and have been suppressed (e. g., read selection
while writing is in progress).
The CDC 606 Magnetic Tape Unit, controlled by the
CDC 1615 Control Unit, forms amagnetic tape sys~.
'
The 606 has a peak data rate of 83,400 characters
per second. At this peak speed, one 606 requires
0.5 per cent of the store module running time.
The tapes are completely compatible with tapes
written by IDM 729 units having densities of either
200 or 556 characters per inch. Both CDC and mM
tape units are similar except that the CDC uses
pneumatic capstans instead of pinch rollers. Reading and writing can occur only in a forward direction;
searching for end of tape, and rewinding can be done
© 1963
.13
Availability: ••
.14
First
.2
PHYSIC.KL FORM
.21
Drive Mechanism
Deliv~ry:
7
1962
.211 Drive past the head:.. • pneumatic capstan.
.212 Reservoirs
Number:
2.
Form:
vacuum.
Capacity: •
each about 7 feet .
. 213 Feed drive:
motor.
.214 Take-up drive: •
motor.
..
.22
Sensing and Recording: Sl':stems
. 221 Recording system:.
• 222 Sensing system: .
• 223 Common system:
magnetic head .
magnetic head •
2 heads.
· 23
Multiple Copies: •
none.
· 24
Arrangement of Heads
Use of station: •
Stacks: • • • . .
erase.
1.
Use of station: •
Distance: •.•
Stacks: • . . • •
Heads/stack: .•
Method of use: .
recording.
0.4375 inch.
1.
7.
1 row at a time.
Use of station: •
Distance: •••
Stacks: • . • • .
Heads / stack:
Method of use: •
sensing.
0.3 inch.
1.
7.
1 row at a time.
by Auerbach Carporalion and BNA Incorporaled
4/63
CDC 3600
247:091 . 300
§
091.
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
Blocks
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
.51
· 31
Form of Storage
.511 Size of block:
.311 Medium: .••
• 312 Phenomenon: .
.32
• 322 Parallel by:
.324 Track use
Data: •••
Redundancy check: .
Timing: • . • . .
Control signals:
Unused: •
Total: .
• 325 Row use
Data: •
Redundancy check: •
Timing:
Control signals:
Unused: .
Cap:
• 34
.35
Coding: .
........
1 to N rows at 200 or 556
rows/inch •
7 tracks.
.52
6.
1.
o (self clocking).
O.
O.
7.
1 to N.
1.
O.
o (record and segment
marks are optional).
O.
O. 75-inch interblock gap.
6. O-inch end-of-file mark.
BCD mode; I tape row per
character as in Data Code
Table No.3, even parity.
Format Compatibility: • IBM BCD and binary codes at
200 and 556 rows per inch.
gap on tape or cut-off
specified in buffer control
word.
Output: • . • . • • • • cut-off specified in buffer
control word.
.53
Code Translation:
matched codes.
. 54
Format Control: .
none.
.55
Control Operations
......
Disable:
Request interrupt: •
0.50 inch.
2,400 feet per reel.
Select format:
Select code:
CONTROLLER
A variety of controllers can be used, depending on
whether 2, 3, or 4 simultaneous data transmissions
are required and whether 8 or 16 tape units are to
be connected to 1 controller. The maximum practical number of controllers is 32.
. 43
Connection to Device: . up to 8 per 1615.
· 44
Data Transfer Control
• 441 Size of load: ••
..
.442 Input-output areas:
. 443 Input-output area
access: • . . . .
. 444 Input-output area
lockout: . • . . •
. 445 Table control: . .
. 446 Synchronization: •
4/63
Input-Output Operations
.521 Input: . • • • • . • • . • 1 block or file forward,
with cut-off available at
N words; zeros fill in the
last word.
. 522 Output: . .
1 block forward of N words .
none •
. 523 Stepping:.
• 524 Skipping:.
1 block or file forward •
1 block or file backward.
erase 3. 5 inches forward (to
skip defective tape areas).
.525 Marking: . . • . • . . . end-of-file mark, preceded
by an automatic 6-inch gap,
followed by a longitudinal
parity character and the
regular interblock gap.
none .
.526 Searching: • . . •
Physical Dimensions
.351 Overall width:
. 352 Length: . • . .
•4
.512 Block demarcation
Input: •••••••
Positional Arrangement
.321 Serial by:
. 33
plastic tape with
magnetizable surface.
magnetization.
1 to N words, limited by
available core storage.
core storage .
each word.
none .
none .
automatic.
1 to N words, limited by
available core storage; 8
rows per word.
Rewind:
Unload: •
.56
Testable
only by unload •
yes, either for error or
when free .
no.
yes, binary mode or BCD
mode .
yes.
yes.
Condi~ions
Disabled: •.
Busy device:
Output lock:
Nearly exhausted:
no.
yes.
yes .
yes, end-of-tape mark indicates a minimum of 8 feet
remaining (approx.
20,000 char).
Busy controller: . . • . no •
End of medium marks: end-of-tape mark
(reflective spot).
load point.
Ready to read: .•
yes •
Ready to write: •
yes.
Error condition: .
parity or length error
separately.
Interrupt condition:
whether selected to interrupt.
247:091.600
INPUT - OUTPUT: CDC 606 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
§
091.
.72
Other Controls
.6
PERFORMANCE
Function
• 61
Conditions
Unit Nmnber
dial
Selector:
File protecplastic ring
tion ring:
affixed to
tape reel
Load Point: button
high density
(556 char/inch).
low density
(200 char/inch).
I: .
II:
.62
Speeds
I
Condition
Unload:
II
30, 000 .
. 621 Nominal or peak speeds: 83,400
• 622 Important parameters
Name
Density:. . . . . .
556 char/inch 200
char/inch.
max 4 msec
max 4 msec;.
Start or stop time:
1. 3 min.
Full rewind time:.
1. 3 min.
0.75 inch.
0.75 inch
Interblock gap:
max 8 msec/ max 8
• 623 Overhead: . . . . . •
block
msec/
block.
• 624 Effective speed,
83,40ON/(N
30, OOON/
characters / sec:
(N + 240).
+ 698)
(See Graph)
• 63
Comment
Form
.73
button
• 732 Replenishment time: .
.734 Optimmn reloading
period: • . . . . . .
msec per word or Percentage
Error
I
II
•7
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
• 71
Adjustments
Adjustment:
Method: .
Comment: .
.0015
. 0015
recording density.
switch.
selects high or low density,
but is overridden by
program changes.
4 minutes.
Check or
Interlock
Input area overflow:
Output block size:
Invalid code:
Exhausted medium:
Imperfect medium:
Timing conflicts:
Parity error:
present.
check
reflective spot on ta pe
none.
none.
check
1. 5.
0.6.
reel.
2,400 feet; for I, 000 char
blocks,S, 000, 000 at 200
char/inch; 11,300, 000
chars at 556 char/inch.
1. a minute .
read after write with
lateral parity check
lateral and longitudinal
parity checks
check
Recording:
Core Store:
Core Store:
lowers tape into reservoirs and winds tape
forward to load point.
removes tape from
reservoirs and raises
upper portion of head
assembly .
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Demands on System
Component Condition
absence of ring
inhibits tape writing.
Loading and Unloading
.731 Volmnes handled
Storage: .
Capacity: • . . .
.8
select 1 of 8 addresses.
Reading:
Action
interru~t.
Interrupt.
stop transfer.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
interrupt.
\
''-.. ..
© 1963
by Averbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
247: 101.100
CDC 3600
Data Channel Converters
CDC 3681,3682
DATA CHANNEL CONVERTERS
§
101.
.1
IDENTITY: •
.11
General
CDC 3681, 3682 Data
Channel Converters.
3600-TVPE EXTERNAL EQUIPMENTS
3600-TYPE
EXTERNAL
These Data Channel Converters can have the following functions:
EQUIPMENT
(1) To permit a CDC 160 Or
160-A to use 3600-type
peripherals. One or two
3681 converters are connected to a 160 or 160- A
computer and then operate
as 3600 data channels.
(See Figure 1).
Figure'!' Non-Satellite
(2) To permit a CDC 160 or
160-A to be connected as
a satellite computer which
is able to receive or transmit data from the storage
of a 3600 system. This
arrangement requires a
3681 data channel converter
and an additional 3682
converter .. The 3681
simulates a 3601 data channel, and the 3682 interconnects two 3606 data
channels; the 3681 handles
the necessary control and
checking information.
(See Figure 2).
Syst~m
3600-TYPE
EXTERNAL
EQUIPMENT
DATA
3603
3602
3606
COMMUNI-
STORAGE
CATIONS
MODULE
MODULE
-'
0
;!
IE:
I-
ct
0
Z
0
I<
20 - Interrupt Register
21 - All "O's"
{ 22 - ;-1
23 - All "l's"
24 - Instruction Bank Register
25 -
Operand~Bank
26
27
30
31
Shift Count Register
Miscellaneous Mode Selections
P Register
Time Register
-
Register
The operations which may be performed are listed below according to their octal values
of's'.
s =0
Register Or
p v q- r
Forms the logical OR of operands 'pI and 'q' and places the result in 'rIo
s =1
Register Exclusive Or
p¥ q- r
Forms the logical exclusive OR of operands 'pI and 'q' and places the result in 'rIo
>I<
All "O's". +1. and all "l's" are not registers. but are forced operands which may be
referenced in an operation.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
CDC 3600
247: 121.110
§ 121.
s =2
Register And
Forms the logical AND of operands 'p' and 'q' and places the result in 'r'.
s =3
Register Implication
p ::I q - r
Forms the logical implication of operands 'p' and 'q' and places the result in 'r'.
s
=4
Register Equivalence
p' E q - r
Forms the logical equivalence of operands 'p' and 'q' and places the result in 'r'.
s =5
Register Sum
p+ q- r
Adds the contents of 'p' to the contents of "q' and places the result in 'r'.
s
=6
.Register Difference
p - q-
r
Subtracts the operand 'q' from 'p' and places the result in 'r'.
s =7
Register Transmit/Swap (RXT /RSW)
Uses register designators 'q' and 'r' only. The unused 'p' portion of the Inter-Register
instruction format becomes a function modifier with the following designator:
'4121110-BIT
Values for the
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
't'
designator are:
Swap (q) and (r); do not clear q; do not clear r .
Swap (q) and (r); do not clear q; clear r
Swap (q) and (r); clear q; do not clear r
Swap (q)and (r); clear q; clear r
Transmit (q) to r; do not clear q; do not clear r
Transmit (q) to r; do not clear q; clear r
Transmit (q) to r; clear q; do not clear r
Transmit (q) to rj clear q; clear r
TRANSMIT COMMANDS AND TRANSMIT AUGMENT (XMIT)
47
42,"
39 38
2423
2120
18 17
I~ 14
0 -BIT
~-----r--'-----------------.--.'--.---.--------------~
ORIGIN ADDRESS
DESTINATION ADDRESS
~~\~----~vr----~I~~~\~----~vr----~
f=63
1st
BANK
ADDRESS
m
f=.2
2 nd
BANK
ADDRESS
n
The Transmit commands read an operand from the storage location designated by the
first storage address 'a m', perform the specified operations, and place the results in
storage address Ii n'. At the end of the operation, the Operand Bank register is set to
'i'. I~terpretations of the 3-bit suboperation designator 'Sl are given below (the lower ..
order two bits of's' specify the operation):
5/63
247: 121.111
INSTRUCTION LIST
§ 121.
s = XOO Transmit
The contents of storage location la m l are transmitted to storage location Ii nl.
contents of la m l remain unchanged.
The
s = X01 Transmit Complement
The complement of the contents of storage location la ml are placed in storage location
Ii nl. The contents of la m l remain unchanged.
s = X10 Transmit Masked
The logical product of the contents of storage location'a ml and Q is placed in storage
location Ii nl. The contents of la m l remain unchanged.
s = X11 Transmit + Constant
The contents of storage location la mi. are added to a constant (constant is in A) and
transmitted to storage location Ii nl. The contents of la ml remain unchanged.
Values for the upper order. bit of lSi are:
s = OXX
Execute the specified Transmit command without augmentation.
s = 1XX
Augment the specified Transmit command.
The augment portion of this instruction may be used to increase the capability of the
designated command. Commands may be executed without using the augment capability;
in this case, just one word is transmitted.
With augmentation selected, the specified Transmit operation may be repeated a given
number of times. Storage addresses may be increased by an increment quantity for
each repetition of the operation. Five index registers are assigned to hold the necessary control quantities for an augmented Transmit operation. These registers must be
loaded with the appropriate control quantities prior to executing this instruction. Index
register assignment is as follows:
B 1 - Holds word count; i. e., the number of words to be transmitted. Its contents
are reduced by one after each operation. When (B 1) = 0, the operation is.
complete.
B2 - Holds new origin address modifier (increment in B3 has been added to old
origin address).
Normally, this index register is clear at start.
© 1963
by Auerbach Co,rporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
CDC 3600
247:121.112
§ 121.
SINGLE PRECISION AUGMENT
15 14
12.. 10
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 I 0 -
BIT
The 24- bit Single Precision Augment command may be used to perform one or more of
the following operations:
1) Increase the capabilities of certain instructions by specifying additional operations to be performed.
2)
3)
Change the vafue of the Operand Bank register.
Provide additional modification of the address portion of the lower instruction.
When t.his command is used in the lower instruction position of a program step (case 2
above), the following operations occur:
1)
2)
The value of the Operand Bank register is set to 'a' (if 'd' is a "1").
All other designators perform no meaningful operations and have no effect on
subsequent instructions.
When this command is used in the upper instruction position of a program step (case 1
above), the following operations occur:
1) The value of the Operand Bank register is set to 'a' (if 'd' is a "1").
2) Operations using the index designator'lvl are performed (refer to table 3-3),'
3) The augment operation designators It' are stored to condition the operation of
the lower instruction being augmented.
Instructions which may be augmented using 'v' and the augment designators rtf are
listed in tables 3-4 and 3-5. Designators which may be used when augmenting a given
instruction are checked opposite that instruction. Augment operation designators are
tabulated below.
5/63
247: 121.113
INSTRUCTION LIST
§
121.
TABLE 3-2.
Designator
If a "0"
d
Bank address not used
Bank address is used; the vatue of the bank
address designator 'a' is always plaCed in
the Operand Bank register.
to
Rounded arithmetic
Normalized arithmetic
Un- rounded arithmetic':'
Un-normalized arithmetic
t1
t2
Use signed operand
Use magnitude of operand (positive value)
t3
t4
Leave source alone
Clea'" source (source is always a register)
Do not complement operand
Complement operand
t5
t6
Do normal operation
Do replace operation
t7
*
AUGMENT OPERATION DESIGNATORS
Value
If a "1"
Direction of shift determined Direction of shift determined by lower instruction operation code as modified by
by lower instruction operoperand sign value (i. e., if k + (Bb) + (VV)
ation code (normal).
is a negative value, reverse the direction
of the shift being augmented).
Shift being augmented is end Sliift being augment~d is end-off (left or
around (left shift) or end-off right) or sign not extended (right shift).
and sign extended (right shift).
If augmenting Divide Fractional instruCtion, execute Truncated Divide.
When the Augment command is in the upper instruction position of a program step, the
index designator 'v' may be used in the following manner to augment the lower instruction.
TABLE 3-3. AUGMENT OPERATION WITH 'v'
Value
Operation
v =0
If v = 0, this designator has no significance in the operation.
v =1-6
If v = 1-6, address modification rules apply.
v =7
If v = 7, indirect addressing rules apply. The quantity held in the address
portion (bits 00-14) of the lower instruction is treated as a storage address
(whether· 'm', 'y', or 'k'). The lower 18 bits at this storage address are
read from storage and:
a) The upper 3 bits (new 'v') are placed in the 'v' designator position
of the augment instruction,.
b) The lower 15 bits are placed in the address portion of the lower
instruction. If new v = 7, indirect addressing continues until
completed; if new v = 1-6, address modification is performed.
The contents of the index
register specified by 'v' are added to the address portion (bits 00-14) of
the lower instruction to form M, Y, or K, whichever the case.
•
Upon completing the operations specified by the upper (Augment) instruction, the
address portion of the lower instruction now contains a modified value (if 'v' specified
indirect addressing or address modification).
When the instruction being augmented
(the lower instruction) is executed, its index designator is interpreted in the normal
manner.
Indirect addressing or address modification is performed on the address
modified by the Augment operation.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
CDC 3600
247:121.114
§ 121.
DOUBLE PRECISION AUGMENT
23
15 14
12 II 10
a1
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 -
BIT
OPERATION CODE
~
BANK
~
ADDRESS
AUGMENT OPERATION
, UNUSED DESIGNATORS
f=77.2
The 24-bit Double Precision Augment command is used in the same manner as the
Single Precision Augment command.
command are listed in table 3-6.
on 96-bit operands.
Instructions which may be augmented by this
Operations in this instruction category are performed
Designators which may be used when augmenting a given instruc-
tion are checked opposite that instruction.
table 3-7.
TABLE '3-6..
Instruction
to be
Augmented
Augment operation designators are listed in
AUGMENTABLE INSTRUCTIONS
t5
t4
LDA
t3
X
t2
t1
to
I
!
X
?
STA
FAD
X
FSB
FMU
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
AUGMENT OPERATION DESIGNATORS
Designator
Value
If a "0"
5/63
X
X
FDV
TABLE 3-7.
X
If a "I"
to
Rounded ,arithmetic
Un- rounded arithmetic
t1
t2
Normalized arithmetic
Un- normalized arithmetic
Use silmed operand
Use mae:nitude of operand
t3
t4
Leave source alone
Clear source
Do not complement operand
Complement operand
t5
Do nor~al operation
Do replace operation
d
Bank address not used
Bank address is used; the value of the bank
address designator la l is always placed in
the Ope'rand Bank register.
247:121.115
INSTRUCTION LIST
§ 121.
SEARCH ORDER
JUMP ADDRESS
ADDRESS
n
m
BANK
USAGE
Four search operations are conditioned by the designator's I.
S
,= 0 Equality Search (SEQU)
s = 2 Search Within Limits (SEWL)
s
=1
s = 3 Search Magnitude Within Limits (SMWL)
Masked Equality Search (SMEQ)
Each of these operations searches a list of operands to find one that satisfies the
specific criterion. These items may be in sequential or incremented (other than 1)
addresses.
The first item is in the location specified by starting address 'a m' + B2.
If bit 39 is a "1", indirect addressing is used to determine the starting address.
contents of index register B2 are added to 'm' to form 'a M'.
The
The storage word at
address 'a M' is the address of the storage word to be searched. If bit 39 isa "0",
operation proceeds without indirect addressing. (B1) is reduced one count for each
word that is searched until an operand is found that satisfies the criterion or until B 1
equals zero.
If the search is terminated by finding an operand which meets the crite-
rion, an exit is performed to the next instruction. The address of the operand that
meets the criterion is m + (B2) - (B 3 ). If no operand in the list is found that meets the
criterion, a jump is executed to the location specified by the jump address 'n' (jump is
effected within the same storage bank).
Three index registers used in the search operations are assigned as follows:
B1 - Holds the word count; i. e., the number of words to be searched.
B2 - Holds the new operand address modifier (the increment has been added to the old
address modifier).
B3 - Holds the increment quantity; i. e., the quantity which will be added to the operand
address modifier to specify a new operand address.
Index register values are set by program, prior to executing the Search instruction.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
247:121.116
CDC 3600
§ 121.
The search operations are:
s = 0 Equality Search
(M) = (A)
Searches a list of operands to find one such that (M) is equal to (A).
L(Q)(M)
s = 1 Masked Equality Search
= (A)
Searches a list of operands to find one such that the logical product of (M) and (Q) is
equal to (A).
s = 2 Search Within Limits
(A)
2: (M) > (Q)
Searches a list of operands to find one whose value lies between (A) and (Q).
s = 3 Search Magnitude Within Limits
(A) 2: I (M)I > (Q)
Searches a list of operands to find one whose absolute magnitude lies between (A) and
(Q).
(Magnitude refers to the
magnitu~e
of signed operands. )
The flow diagram below outlines the sequence of events during a typical search operation.
Figure 3-4.
5/63
Sequencing for 63.4 Search Operations
247:121.117
INSTRUCTION LIST
§
121.
LOCATE TEST ELEMENT CLSTU, LSTL)
a-BIT
~----~--~~~~nr-~nT.~~r--'~~~nT.~~~~~M7~~
This instruction may be used to locate elements of a list when the elements are scat-.
tered throughout a storage bank or throughout several storage banks.
An element of the
list contains two parts: (1) data, and (2) the location (storage address) of the next element of the list.
An element may occupy one storage word or several.
If the element
occupies several storage words, the words are usually in consecutive storage locations.
The format of the word holding an element (or the format of the first word if the element
occupies several words) is as follows:
(USED IF 5=1)
(USED IF 5=0)
OPERAND
BANK
OPERAND
BANK
ADDRESS OF NEXT ELEMENT
TAKEN FROM UPPER OR LOWER
DEPENDING ON VALUE OF "5'.'
Note that the format permits several options for positioning data within the word:
1)
If the lower 18 bits are used to specify the address of the next element (s = 1 in
the instruction word), the entire upper 30 bits may be used to hold data.
2)
If the upper address portion is used to specify the address of the next eleme:nt
(s
=0
in the instruction word), the lower 24 bits and the uppermost 6-bit portion
may be used to hold data.
Interpreting data is determined by the list containing it, its location in a particular list,
or by an identifying tag in the data portion of the element.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
CDC 3600
247:121.118
§
121.
Executing the Locate List Element instruction locates the 'nth' element of the list.
Before executing the Locate List Element instruction, two operations must have been
accomplished. These are:
1)
The first element of the list is located at the storage address designated by the
contents of VV.
(The first element must be in the storage bank currently in use
as the operand bank.) Therefore, this index register must be loaded with the
appropriate address before executing this instruction.
2)
A second index register (designated by B b ) holds the count field; i. e., a count
b
'n' to enable locating the 'nth' element. Thus, the programmer must load B
with 'n' before the operation.
Operation then proceeds as follows:
1)
Read element from storage at address specified by (VV).
2)
Examine (B b ).
is complete.
3)
If s
=0
If (Bb)
If (B b )
= 0,
the 'nth' element has been located and the operation
~ 0, reduce (Bb) by one.
(refer to instruction format), replace the old (VV) with the upper ad-
dress portion of the new storage word (refer to the format of the word holding
an element).
If s
= 1,
replace the old (VV) with the lower address portion of the new storage word.
NOTE
Once the value of's' is set in the instruction word, it
cannot be changed during the course of the instruction.
For example, if's' is set to "1 ", the lower address
portion of the storage word will be used to locate the
next element each time until the 'nth' element is located.
4)
Examine (V V).
If the new (VV) = 0, the operation is complete.
(The pro-
grammer must previously have loaded all zeros in the designated address portion of the last storage word of the list.) Address 00000 may be used as the
first list element location, but operation will halt (since the check on VV occurs
after the first storage reference) if address 00000 is used to locate a subsequent
list element.
5/63
247:121.119
INSTRUCTION LIST
§
121.
I 0, (VV) now designates the address of the next element. Also, if the new
I 0, the Operand Bank register is switched to 'a' (where 'a' is the bank designator
If (VV)
(VV)
adjacent to the designated address portion of the storage word).
5)
Return to step 1.
At the end of operations:
1)
If the 'nth' element has been located, B
b
holds a count of zero, V
v
holds the
address of the 'nth' element, and the dperand Bank register is set to the bank
containing that element.
2)
If the 'nth' element has not been located and the last element has been reached,
Bb holds a non- zero count (indicating an erroneous count was initially placed in
B b ), VV holds 00000, and the Operand Bank register holds the bank address of
the last element.
D Register Jump (DRJ)#
f=77.6
This instruction scans the D (Flag) register from left to right.
detected, a jump is executed to address P
+ i + 1 (where P is the current address and
Ii' is the location of the first non-zero bit in the D register).
the next instruction is executed.
struction.
*
If a non-zero bit is
*
If the D register is zero,
This instruction is restricted to use as an upper in-
Ii' = the location of the particular bit within the register. Though the register is
numbered from right to lE"ft, scanning is from left to right. The first bit scanned is
bit '47. If a "1" exists in bit 47, i = 47, and a jump is effected to [p + 47 + 1J
(decimal notation).
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
247: 121.120
§
CDC 3600
121.
NBJP, ZBJP
bm
Bit Sensing
O-BIT
~~--~~~~~~~----------------~
JUMP ADDRESS
f=63
UNUSED
f=.6
s UNUSED
m
This instruction examines a single bit of 48 (specified by 'g') in a designated register
('p' specifies the register - see Inter-Register instruction). A 3-bit sub-operation
designator's' specifies the operation to be performed on this bit.
The lower order two bits of's' specify the operation to be performed after the sense
operation:
s = 0 Leave bit alone
s = 1 Set bit to "1"
s = 2 Clear bit
s = 3 Complement (toggle) the bit
If, in the execution of this instruction, an attempt is made to alter the contents of
registers designated by codes 20-31, the following occurs:
1)
That operation which would alter the contents of registers 20-31 is not performed, and
2)
The instruction continues to. completion.
This operation does not constitute a fault or interruptible condition.
The upper order bit of's' conditions a jump operation.
If upper order bit of s = 1 Jump if bit being examined in the specified register
If upper order bit of s
=0
is a "0".
Jump if bit being examined in the specified register
is a "1".
If the condition is met, the jump is to the address specified by M.
is not met, the next instruction is executed.
5/63
If the jump condition
247: 121.121
INSTRUCTION LIST
§
121.
EXEC
Execute
b v m
47
4241
3938
3635
2423
2120191817
1514
0
-BIT
.-----_.--.---v.n~~~~7.nn7.r__.~rT--._--------------__,
ADDRESS
m
'=63
Jumps to M [M
= m + (Bb) + (vv) ]
and executes both instructions at M.
The Operand Bank switch is set to "a' if ~-ci I is a "1". After executing M, the main
sequence continues unless the instruction executed was a jump. In this case, a new
sequence is initiated at the jump address in the same program bank as EXEC. This
instruction is effectiv~ly an indirect instruction, or a subroutine of a single instruction.
Note that the instruction bank address is not changed by the execute instruc-
tion.
Note also that the contents of P remain at the address /Df the EXEC instruction.
RGJB b m
Register Jump
O-BIT
.1514
47
2423 212019
r------r--,-----------------.-~~----_.----------------,
OPERAND
JUMP ADDRESS
y
m
f=62
M [M
Jumps to
= m + (B b )] if, in the operation specified by's', the condition is
met. If the condition is not met, it executes the next instruction.
If, in the execution of this instruction, an operation would attempt to alter the con-
tents of registers designated by codes 20-31, the following occurs:
1) That operation (s = 6 or 7) which could alter registers 20-31 is not performed, and
2)
The instruction continues to completion.
This operation does not constitute a fault or interruptible condition.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
247:121.122
CDC 3600
----------------------------------------------------------------------~-------
§
121.
Octal values for's' and the specific operations.are:
Operation
-s
= y?
0
(p)
1
2
(p) > y?
3
4
(p)
f. y?
(p)
~
5
(p) 2. y?
6
7
(p) < y?}
if (p) < y, then (p) - y - (p)
(p) ~ y?
(p) < y?
y?
In executing the above operations, the following arithmetic properties hold:
a)
If 'pI designates a 48-bit register, the sign bit of 'y' is extended, and
b)
If 'pI designates a 15-bit register, the operands are compared as 48-bit
signed quantities are compared in the operation.
quantities (15-bit quantities with "O's" extended in tQe upper bit positions).
Operand registers are indicated below according to their octal values of 'pl.
00 - Time Limit Register
01 - B1
15 - D Full
02 - B2
17 - Interrupt Mask Register
03 - B3
20 - Interrupt Register
04 - B4
05 - B 5
06 - B6
24 - Instruction Bank Register
10 - A Upper Address
25 - Operand Bank Register
26 - Shift Count Register
12 - Q Upper Address
13 - A Full
14 - Q Full
5/63
*
21 - All "O's"
{ 22 - +1
23 - All "l's"
07 - A Lower Address
11 - Q Lower Address
*
16 - Bounds Register
27 - Miscellaneous Mode Selections
30 - P Register
::, . - Time Register
These are not registers, but forced operands which may be referenced in the
operation.
247:121.123
INSTRUCTION LIST
§
121.
VARIABLEDAT A FrELD
Byte (LBYT, SBYT, SCAN)
ADDRESS
'-------v------
'-------v------'----y--I"-.r--l '----y--I'\--.---"""'\y,----....I
f=63
o
e
f=.5
m
SUB-OP
The byte instruction performs two general operations on specified portions (bytes) of
A, Q, or a designated storage operand.
These operations are:
Transmit
1)
Load - Loads a byte of the specified register (A or Q) with the designated byte
of M.
2)
Store - Stores a byte of A or Q in the selected byte of M.
Scan
Searches storage operands in byte-size increments until the specified condition is met
or until (A)
=0
(the A register holds the byte count).
Operation designators are tabu-
lated below.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
247:132.100
CDC 3600
Coding Specimen
COMPASS
CODING SPECIMEN: COMPASS
§
132 •
•1
COnING SPECIMEN
The following is an example of the COMPASS output listing.
ORIGINAL SOURCE DECK LISTING
A
PROGRAMA
+
B
EXCH
!DENT
SENSLESS
BLOCK
0
COMMON
ARRAYl(lOOB), ARRAYIA(20B)
SLJ
**
STA
TEMP,l
STQ
TEMP,2
LDA,MG
TEMP,l
RTJ
PROGRAMB
EXT
PROGRAMB
LDQ
=07700000
STL
TEMP
ENTRY
PROGRAM A
LIU
PROGRAMB,3
SIL
ARRAYl+20B,3
SLJ
PROGRAMA
BLOCK
0
COMMON
ARRAY2(100)
ORGR
ARRAY2
OCT
0,1,2,3
ORGR
*
**
SLJ
LBYT ,AO,E6,RI,CL
INI
1,3
ENI
42,4
SLJ
EXCH
0,3,4
END
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
247: 132.101
§
CDC 3600
132 •
•1
CODING SPECIMEN (Contd.)
OUTPUT LISTING FROM ABOVE SOURCE DECK
PROGRAM LENGTH
BLOCK NAMES
IDENT
SENSLESS
BLOCK
COMMON
0
00002
ARRAY1(lOOBI,ARRAY1AC20BI 00003
ARRAY1AC20Bl
00004
**
TEMP,l
00005
TEMP,2
00006
00001
00307
00120
00144
A
B
ENTRY POINTS
PROGRAMA 00000
EXTERNAL SYMBOLS
PROGRAMB
00000
00100
00000
A
0
1
2
0
1'7 1
12 1
75 4
77777
P00221
P00221
00000
00004
P00221
X77777
00004
50 0
16 a
47 0
00000
P00306
P00221
00207
52 3
57 3
00301
75 0
50 0
00001
00002
00003
75
20
21
50
LDA,MG
TEMP, 1
00007
RTJ
EXT
PROGRAMB
PROGRAMB
00008
00009
LDQ
STL
ENTRY
=07700000
TEMP
PROGRAMA
00010
00011
00012
XOOO03
COO020
LlU
SIL
PROGRAMB,3
ARRAY1+20B,3
00131
00132
POOOOO
00000
SU
PROGRAMA
00178
BLOCK
COMMON
ORGR
OCT
0
ARRAY2CI001
ARRAY2
0,1,2,3
00179
00180
00181
00182
00001
00002
00003
00302
00303
00304
00305
00306
+.
B
00000
00000
PROGRAMA SLJ
STA
STQ
00 0
00 a
00 a
00 0
00 a
00 a
00 a
00 a
75
50
63
52
51
50
75
SO
00
07
a
a
3
a
3
4
0
a
0
7
COOOOO
00000
00000
00000
00001
00000
00002
00000
00003
P00302
77777
00000
40006
00000
00001
00052
P00302
00000
00000
00000
1
2 •
3
EXCH
ORGR
SLJ
LBYT,AO,E6,RI, CL
INI
ENI
SU
END
5/63
00183
00184
*
**
1,3
42,4
EXCH
0,3,4
00185
00186
00187
00188
00189
CODING SPECIMEN: COMPASS
§
.1
247: 132.102
132.
CODING SPECIMEN (Contd.)
CORRECTION OECK TO BE ASSEMBLED WITH COSY DECK ASSOCIATED
WITH ABOVE LISTING
REPLACE
COMMON
COMMON
REPLACE
DSTA
INSERT
ADD
DELETE
3
ARRAYl!120B)
ARRAYIA
5,6
TEMP+2
10
=0400000
131
OUTPUT LISTING FROM ASSEMBLY OF ABOVE CORRECTION DECK AND
COSY DECK
IDENT
PROGRAM LENGTH
BLOCK NAMES
SENSLESS
00001
0
ARRAYH120B)
ARRAYIA
00002
00003
00004
00005
00310
A
B
00121
00143
ENTRY POINTS
PROGRAMA 00000
EXTERNAL SyMBOLS
PROGRAMB
00000
00120
00000
A
75
50
77
20
77
12
75
a
a
2
0
1
1
4
77777
00000
00000
P00220
00004
P00216
X77777
00005
50 a
16 0
14 0
47 a
00000
P00306
P00307
P00216
00207
57 3
00301
75 0
50 0
00001
00002
00003
00004
00001
TEMP+2
00006
LDA,MG
TEMP,l
00007
RTJ
EXT
PROGRAMB
PROGRAMB
OOOOB
00009
LDQ
ADD
STL
ENTRY
=07700000
=0400000
TEMP
PROGRAMA
00010
00011
00012
00013
COO020
SIL
ARRAYl+20B, 3
00131
POOOOO
00000
SLJ
PROGRAMA
0017B
BLOCK
COMMON
ORGR
OCT
0
ARRAY2(l00)
ARRAY2
0, 1, 2, 3
00179
00180
00181
00182
B
00002
00003
00302
00303
00304
00305
00306
00307
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
75
50
63
52
51
50
75
50
00
07
00
00
0
a
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
3
4
0
0
0
7
0
4
**
DSTA
00000
00000
BLOCK
COMMON
COMMON
PROGRAMA SLJ
COOOOO
00000
00000
00000
00001
00000
00002
00000
00003
P00302
77777
00000
40006
00000
00001
00052
P00302
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
© 1963
1
2
3
EXCH
ORGR
SLJ
*
**
00183
00184
LBYT,AO,E6,RI,CL 0,3,4
00185
INI
ENI
SLJ
00186
00187
00188
1,3
42,4
EXCH
END
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
00189
5/63
247: 141.100
_STANDARD
EDP
•
REPORTS
CDC 3600
Data Code Table No. 1
Collating Sequence (BCD)
DATA CODE TABLE No.1
§ 141.
.1
USE OF CODE:
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
internal collating sequence .
In ascending sequence
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
?
#
@
undefined
undefined
undefined
&
0
undefined
undefined
undefined
J
K
L
M
Y
Z
'f
,
%
undefined
undefined
undefined
N
0
P
Q
R
0
$
*
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
undefined
undefined
undefined
blank
+
W
/
S
T
U
V
X
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
247:142.100
.STAHIlAAD
II
RIIORTS
EDP
CDC 3600
Data Code Table
Internal
DATA CODE TABLE NO.2
§
142.
.1
USE OF CODE:
binary 6- bit code.
internal.
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
.21
Character Size:
.22
Character Structure
...
6 bits.
.221 More significant
pattern: ••••
2 zone bits; B, A = 32, 16.
.222 Less significant
pattern: •••••
4 numeric bits; 8, 4, 2, 1.
.23
Character Codes
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0
16
32
0
0
&
-
Blank
1
1
A
J
/
2
2
B
K
S
3
3
C
L
T
4
4
D
M
U
5
5
E
N
V
6
6
F
0
W
7
7
G
P
X
8
8
H
Q
y
9
9
I
R
Z
10
'1
+
a
-
oj,
U
#
$
,
12
@
•
%
a
0
48
13
14
15
© 1963
by Auerbach Carporation and BNA Incorparated
4/63
·~ANIlWl
II
247:143.100
RIroRTS
EDP
CDC 3600
Data Code Table
Magnetic Tape
DATA CODE TABLE NO.3
§
143.
BCD 6-bit code •
magnetic tape.
•1
USE OF CODE:
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
.21
Character Size:
.22
Character Structure
.221 More significant
pattern: ••••
.222 Less significant
pattern: ••••
.23
...
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0
0
6 bits.
2 zone bits: B, A = 32, 16.
4 numeric bits, 8, 4, 2, 1.
16
Blank
32
48
-
&
1
1
/
J
A
2
2
S
K
B
3
3
T
L
C
4
4
U
M
D
5
5
V
N
E
6
6
W
0
F
7
7
X
P
G
8
8
Y
Q
H
9
9
Z
R
I
10
0
.j.
0
-
+
0
11
#
,
$
12
@
%
*
Character Codes
0
13
14
15
TM
!l.
+
I
\
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
,4/63
247: 144.100
CDC 3600
Data Code Table
1612 Printer
DATA CODE TABLE NO.4
§
• 22
144 •
Character Structure
•1
USE OF CODE: • • • • CDC 1612 Printer, internal.
.2
STRUCTURE OF CODE
• 222 Less significant
pattern: • • • • • • • 3 bits: 4, 2 and 1.
.21
Character Size: • • • • 6 bits.
• 23
LESS
SIGNIFICANT
PATTERN
.221 More significant
pattern: • • • • • • • 3 bits: 4, 2 and 1.
Character Codes
MORE SIGNIFICANT PATTERN
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
:
8
Blank
Y
-
Q
+
H
1
1
9
/
z
J
R
A
I
2
2
1>
S
]
K
%
B
<
3
3
=
T·
,
L
$
C
4
4
'I
U
(
M
*
D
)
5
5
.:::
~
N
l'
E
?
6
6
.
V
W
-
0
t
F
·1
7
7
[
~
P
>
G
;
NaTE:
Characters~.
%.
respectively by 1\
•
© 1963
X
and $ appear for business application and are replaced
v. and""] for scientific application.
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
247:151.100
•
STANDARD
_EDP
."
CDC 3600
P. O. Facilities
REPORTS
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
The following routines were develaped for the CDC
1604 and are available for the CDC 3600.
§
151.
•1
UTILITY ROUTINES
.11
Simulators of Other Computers
.16
File Maintenance: • • • only routines for specific
installations are available
.17
Other
Arithmetic Functions
IBM 650
Reference: • • . • . . 02 NBSB.
Data available: . • •• 1961.
Description
The routine simulates an mM 650 computer containing a 2,000 word drum, index registers and
floating point. The simulator operates on a CDC
1604 with an IBM 407, 088 and 523 unit.
TIME (JLsec)
- x
+
Complex Numbers,
Floating Point
Simulation by Other Computers
Sine
Cos
Tan
Arc Sine
Arc Cos
Arc Tan
Exponential
Natural log
CDC 160-A: . . • • . . INTERFOR system simulates 20 of the 62 operations, and includes other
facilities.
.13
Data Sorting and Merging
Reference: • •
Record size: .
j310ck size: •
Key size:. • .
M 4 CODA KSM.
80 or 120 characters.
1 record per block.
any number of keys of any
length.
File size: • •
any number of tape reels.
Number of tapes:
4 upwards.
Date available:. .
1961.
Description
•
The routine provides data editing facilities and
operates only on BCD data.
• 14
Report Writing: • • • • none.
• 15
Data Transcription
© 1963
100
TIME SPACE ERROR (Max)
(JLsec)
2.1 x 10- 11
275
68
2.1 x 10- 11
68
275
2.4 x 10- 11
53
320
8.7 x 10- 11
460
115
8.7 x 10- 11
310
8.7 x 10- 11
71
280
8.7 x 10- 11
32
156
8.7 x 10- 11
45
190
Polynomial Evaluation
SPACE
24
24
25
Hermite
Laguerre
Legendre
Other
Hypergeometric Functions
,.2
Convert Symbolic Magnetic-Tape-to-Paper-Tape
Reference: . . .
M 2 CODA MAGPT.
Data available: • • .• 1961.
Description
Converts 80 or 120 character BCD magnetic tape
to Flexowriter tape.
Performance limited by Flexowriter output.
50
Mathematical Functions (Representative cases, all
floating point)
CDC 1604-A: . . • • • . by a switch on 1604-A
console.
· 12
50
Space: 2,491 locations,
timing unknown •
PROBLEM ORmNTED LANGUAGES
PERT
Linear Programming Package
Civil Engineering Computation System
by Auerbach Carparation and RNA Incorporated
4/63
.247: 171.100
_STANDARD
EDP
•
REPORTS
CDC 3600
M. O. Language
COMPASS
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: COMPASS
§
171.
. 13
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity:.
COMPASS.
. 12
Reference: .
COMPASS Reference
Manual.
.13
Description
Description (Contd. )
and constants in a convenient form; and second, it
provides a systematic means of using any library,
monitor, or subroutines as desired.
Labeling is unusually free. Address symbols are
normally one letter with an option of being followed
by up to seven further alphameric characters for all
labels. Three other types (+, -, and all numeric
symbols) serve other functions.
COMPASS is the basic assembly language of the CDC
3600 system and is used with the SCOPE operating
system. This language includes all the machine code
instructions. COMPASS allows for source language
changes to already assembled programs, and for system, installation, or programmer-provided macro
instructions. Programmer-provided macros may be
included in the library. Communication between different subprograms and library subroutines is provided by use of COMMON blocks and the EXTernal
pseudo-operation. Communication with the operating
system is by way of the system macros.
There are two types of data areas; both are called
"COMMON" areas. These are differentiated in the
language by having alphameric (called "Labeled
COMMON") or numeric (called "Numbered
COMMON") labels, and in usage by being able to preset the contents of the areas at load time only if
"Labeled COMMON" is used.
Communication with other independently written routines is arranged by the ENTRY points and the
EXTernal Symbol linkage. These operations provide
for a label to be common to more than one routine.
The actual linkage is created at loading time.
Use of COMPASS eliminates the need for the programmer to take care of complex format requirements of many of the CDC 3600 instructions. In particular, the many modifications which are available
in the use of the single and double precision
AUGMENT instructions can now be contained within
the augmented instruction instead of being written
separately.
The assembly program for the 3600 is designed to
accept as input, cards or card images containing
symbolic 3600 programming instructions. It translates the symbolic instructions into 3600 machine
language programs in relocatable binary, for loading
into any portion of memory at run time. The
assembler will produce as output any combination of:
There are three types of macro codes. These are
System macros (provided with the CDC 3600 system
itself), Library macros (provided by the installation),
and programmer-provided macros (provided within
the program itself). These macros are normally
written in COMPASS language and are inserted into
the assembled coding each time they are called.
However, some control is included by providing two
pseudo-operations IFN, and IFZ. During assembly,
these operations are used to test the value of some
parameters or expression against zero to determine
whether or not to insert the next "n" instructions of
the macro coding.
e Output listing of the assembled program.
e Relocatable binary card output for subsequent loading and execution of the assembled program.
e· Relocatable binary card images on an assemble
and run tape for immediate loading and execution
of the assembled program.
e Compressed symbolic output deck to be used as
input for subsequent modification and reassembly.
Closed subroutines may be called into a program by
the use of the EXTERNAL function. These are only
incorporated into the program once.
The assembly language performs two roles: first, it
allows a programmer to write machine instructions
LOCH
, ,
., , .
,
OPERA TlON, MODIFIERS
.2
LANGUAGE FORMAT
.21
Diagram
ADDRESS FIELD
910
II
12
13
14 I::;
16
17
18
19 20 21
IOEHT
COMMENTS
I
I
22
232425 26 21 28 29 30 31
32 33 '4 353637 38 3940 41
I
4243 44 45 46471
686970717273]74757&71787980
I
I
I
I I I
I I
.......
I
I
I
I
, ..
I
1,1.
I
I
I I
I
I
I
\
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
247: 171.220
§ 171.
.22
Legend
LOCATION FIELD (LOCN): The location field,
called an L-term, label, symbol, or identifier, may
consist of one of the following types:
CDC 3600
· 24
Special Conventions
• 241
• 242
· 243
• 244
Compound addresses:
Multi-addresses:
Literals:. . .
Special coded
addresses: .
TYPE 3: A minus (-) anywhere in the field and
blanks in the remaining columns.
TYPE 4: A label consisting of 8 characters all of
which must be either numeric or blank.
.3
LABELS
• 31
General
• 311 Maximum number of
labels: . • . . .
• 312 Common label
formation rule: .
OPERATION FIELD: The operation field may consist
of:
1. One of the mnemonic operation codes listed in
247:171. 84 followed by a blank column or one
or more modifiers. Commas are used to
separate the operation code from the modifiers
and the modifiers from each other.
· 313 Reserved labels: .
· 315 Designators:.
• 316 Synonyms: • . . .
• 33
Local Labels
4. One of the octal numbers 0-77.
Expressions: The address field may contain the
bank, (a), memory address or operand, m, and index registers, b and v, required to identify an operand or a storage location. Each of the terms in
the address field may be defined by an arithmetic
expression involving symbols and constants. The
bank term, if present, must be enclosed in parentheses. Constants must be decimal or octal integers less than 215 • A constant will be interpreted
as decimal. A symbol in an arithmetic expression
must be a TYPE 1 symbol. The four operations
permitted in the arithmetic expression are: addition (+), subtraction (-), multiplication (*), and
division (/).
* (this location).
**(777778 ).
Literals: restricted to single or double precision
constants, in Decimal, Octal, Hollerith, or
Typewriter code.
Special Symbols:
.23
Corrections: . • . . . . three pseudo instructions,
DELETE, REPLACE, and
INSERT, are available
which operate on a
condensed deck.
6/63
1 to 8 alphamerics including
certain special characters.
Blanks are not required.
First character must be
non-numeric.
none.
none.
yes, via EQUivalence
pseudo-op.
Universal Labels: • . . none, but individual labels
can be made universal to
several independent subprograms, being called an
External Table Entry to
each subprogram.
3. The name of a macro-instruction.
ADDRESS FIELD
no practical limit.
• 32
2. One of the pseudo operations listed in 247:171. 82.
A blank in column 10 terminates the operation field
and the operation code is given the value zero.
* means this address.
** means 777778.
+ forces an instruction into
- the upper or lower half of
a word.
TYPE 1: A symbol from 1 to 8 characters; the first
is alphabetic, the rest are alphabetic or
numeric. Leading, imbedded, and trailing
blanks will be ignored and the symbol will
be packed left justified by COMPASS.
TYPE 2: A plus (+) anywhere in the field and blanks
in the remaining columns.
e.g., SYMBOL +5.
none.
up to 40 char, any code.
• 331 Labels for procedures
Existence: . . • .
Formation rule
First character:
Others: . . .
Number of
characters:
.332 Labels for library
routines: . . . . .
.333 Labels for constants:
. 334
• 335
.336
.337
optional.
non-numeric character.
any non-blank character.
1 to 8.
same as for procedures.
same as for procedures, or
as an element of an array
within a numbered
COMMON statement.
none.
none.
same as for procedures.
Labels for files: . . .
Labels for records: .
Labels for variables:
Labels for other
same as for procedures.
subprograms: . . .
.338 Others
Labels for blocks containing preset data
Existence: . . . . . optional.
Formation rule: .. I to 8 alphabetics, "Labeled
Common Blocks."
Labels for reserved blocks for working storage
Existence: .. ,
optional.
Formation rule: . . 8 numeric or blank characters, an all blank label is
acceptable, ''Numbered
Common Blocks."
Labels for arrays: . . same as for procedures.
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: COMPASS
§
247:171.400
171.
.542 Allocation counter
Set to absolute:. .
.4
DATA
.41
Constants
.. .
.411 Maximum size constants
Machine Form
External Language
Integer: . . . . . .
14 decimal digits plus sign.
16 octal digits plus sign.
Fixed numeric: . .
not allowed.
Floating numeric:
28 digits with a decimal or
binary exponent of up to 3
digits, plus sign.
. 412 Maximum size literals
Integer
Decimal:
28 decimal.
Octal: . .
16 octal digits plus sign.
·
Fixed numeric:.
on~ integer.
10_ 308
Floating numeric:
Alphameric:
16 characters.
·.
.
. 42
no. (ORGR relocatable
pseudo-op entry in
location).
Set to label:
yes .
Set relative to label: • yes.
Step forward: . .
implied by set relative to
label.
Step backward: •
implied.
Reserve area:
yes.
.543 Label adjustment
Set labels equal:
Set label relative:
Set absolute value: .
Clear label table:
.544 Annotation
Comment phrase:
Title phrase: . .
.545 Other
Allocation mode: •
absolute or relocatable.
.55
Facilities Omitted:
none.
.6
SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE
.• 61
Special Arithmetic:
.62
Special Functions
. 422 Data type:
• 423 Redefinition: .
no.
VFD (Variable Field Definition), BLOCK and
COMMON statements •
implied by use •
use of BLOCK statements.
• 43
Input-Output Areas:
specified in program.
.5
PROCEDURES
.51
Direct Operation Codes
. . · ..
· ..
.621 Facilities: .
..
. 622 Method of call: .
.511 Mnemonic
Existen£e:
Number:
Example: .
Comment:
. 512 Absolute
Existence:
Number:
Example: •
"-
yes.
yes.
Working Areas
.421 Data layout
Implied by use:.
Specified in program:
\
yes.
yes.
no .
not within single subprogram; yes, by dividing into
separate subprograms.
optional with absolutes.
145.
FDV; Floating Divide.
where one op code has more
than one type of operation,
mnemonic modifiers are
written after the operation
code, thus FDV, CM, MG,
UR would indicate that the
magnitUde of the complement of the addressed operand be used, and that
the operation should be
unrounded •
optional with mnemonic.
145.
45 for Add Logical.
Overlay Control: . • . . handled by operating
system.
.64
Data Editing
.641 Radix conversion:
Code translation:
• 642 Format control: •
.65
Input-Output Control:
.66
Sorting:
..
Macro-Codes:
yes, as provided by system
installation in the library,
or by programmer at head
of the program.
.67
Diagnostics:
.53
Interludes: • . • . .
none.
.7
LIBRARY FACILITIES
.54
Translator Control
.71
Identity:
.72
Kinds of Libraries
various pseudo-ops.
various pseudo-ops.
Remarks.
© 1963
none; any could be added in
installation library .
LIBM declares all used
pseudo operations at the
start of the program.
The use of a declared macro
name in the operation field
of the coding sheet calls
the actual macro.
.63
. 52
• 541 Method of control
Allocation counter: .
Label adjustment:
Annotation: • . . . •
none.
.....
.721 Fixed master: . .
.722 Expandable master:
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
decimal-to-binary for initial
constants.
alphabetic-to- BCD, Flexowriter and Teletype.
none.
own program, with I/O
pseudo-op check on I/O
units involved.
none •
none can be specified by the
programmer for use at
running time in COMPASS
system.
installation library.
no.
yes.
6/63
CDC 3600
247:171.730
§
171.
.82
. 73
Storage Fonn: •
. 74
. 75
magnetic tape •
Pseudos (Contd.)
Code
Description
Varieties of Contents: . as detennined by
installation.
COMPASS
DEC
Mechanism
DECD
Change input to COMPASS format.
Insert single precision decimal
constants •
Insert double precision decimal
constants.
Delete portions of a program.
Replicate a sequence.
Eject a page on the output listing.
Specify the end of a subprogram.
Terminate a macro-definition.
Specify the end of a subprogram.
Define entry points in a
subprogram.
Equate an undefined symbol to a
defined symbol.
Define external symbols.
Identify the subprogram by name.
Macro control pseudo instruction.
Macro control pseudo instruction.
Insert changes in a program.
Declare library macros.
Resume output listing.
Define a macro .
. 751 Insertion of new item: • via SCOPE Monitor.
.752 Language of new item: . open.
. 753 Method of call:. . . • . operation code identifies
routine.
ENTRY identifies entry
point.
Operating Manual lists
special calls.
.76
Insertion in Program
• 761
. 762
.763
.764
Open routines exist: .•
Closed routines exist: .
Open-closed is optional:
Closed routines appear
once: . . . . . . . .
EQU
EXT
IDENT
IFN
IFZ
INSERT
LIBM
LIST
MACRO
MACROINSTRUCTION
NO LIST
OCT
ORGR
REM
yes.
yes.
yes.
yes.
.8
INSTRUCTION CODE REPERTOIRE
.81
Macros:
--
.82
Pseudos
........
DELETE
ECHO
EJECT
END
ENDM
ENDT
ENTRY
as provided by installation
library.
Code
Description
BCD
BES
BLOCK
BSS
CODAP
COMMON
Insert BCD characters.
Reserve block of storage.
Specify block of common.
Reserve block of storage.
Change input to CODAP-l fonnat.
Declare array in common
0peration Field
ROP,s
RSW,CQ,CR
RXT,CQ,CR
LDA,CM,MG
LAC,CM
LDQ,CM,MG
LQC,CM
STA,CM,CL,MG
STQ,CM,CL,MG
LIU
LIL
SIU
SIL
ADD,CM,MG
SUB,CM,MG
MUI,CM,MG
DVI,CM,MG
MUF,CM,MG
DVF,CM,MG,TR
FAD,RP,CM,MG,UN, UR
FSB,RP,CM,MG,UN, UR
FMU,CM,MG,UN,UR
Address Field
p,q,r
q,r
q,r
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m, b, v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m, b, v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m, b, v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m, b, v
(a)m, b, v
REPLACE
SCOPE
SPACE
TYPE
VFD
.84
Calls a macro.
Suppress output listing.
Insert octal constants.
Set location counter.
Insert remarks on the output
listing.
Replace portions of a program.
Terminates assembly process.
Insert spaces in the output listing.
Insert typewriter codes.
Assign data in variable byte sizes.
Direct
Instruction
Register OPeration (Inter Register Transmission).!!
Register SWap.!!
Register TRANSmiT!/
LoaD A.
Load A Complement.
LoaD Q.
Load Q Complement.
STore A.
STore Q.
Load Index Upper.
Load Index Lower.
Store Index Upper.
Store Index Lower.
ADD.
SUBtract.
MUltiply Integer.
DiVide Integer.
MUltiply Fractional.
DiVide Fractional.
Floating ADd.
Floating SuBtract.
Floating MUltiply.
}j In ROP the modifier s is required. In ROP, RSW, and RXT a modifier does not cause
insertion of the single precision augment.
6/63
247:171.840
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: COMPASS
§
171.
.84
Direct (Contd. )
Operation Field
FDV,CM,MG,UR
ADX
ENA,CM
ENQ,CM
ENI
NOP
INA,CM
INI
SAU
SAL
ISK
SST
SCM
SCL
SSU
LDL
ADL,RP,CM
SBL,RP,CM
STL
ARS,EO,SS
QRS,EO,SS
LRS,EO,SS
ALS,EO,SS
QLS,EO,SS
LLS,EO,SS
SCA
SCQ
RAD
RSB
RAO
RSO
SSK
SSH
EQS
THS
MEQ
MTH
AjP,ZR ~/
NZ
PL
MI
QjP,ZR~/
Address Field
(a)m,b,v
y
(a)m,b,v
(a}m,b,v,
(a)m,b,v
Instruction
(a)m,b,v
(a)m, b, v
(a)m, b, v
(a)m, b, v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a}m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a}m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a}m,b, v
(a)m,b, v
(a)m,b, v
(a}m,b,v
(a)m,b, v
(a}m,b, v
(a)m, v
Floating DiVide.
ADd to eXponent.
ENter A.
ENter Q.
ENter Index.
No OPeration (ENl o).
INcrease A.
INcrease Index.
Substitute Address Upper.
Substitute Address Lower.
Index SKip.
Selective SeT.
Selective CoMplement.
Selective CLear.
Selective SUbstitute.
LoaD Logical.
ADd Logical.
SuBtract Logical.
STore Logical.
A Right Shift.
Q Right Shift.
Long Right Shift.
A Left Shift.
Q Left Shift.
Long Left Shift.
SCale A.
SCale aQ.
Replace ADd.
Replace SuBtract.
Replace Add One.
Replace Subtract One.
Storage SKip.
Storage SHift.
Equality Search.
THreshold Search.
Masked Equality Search.
Mashed THreshold Search.
A JumP.
(a)m, v
Q JumP.
(a)m, v
A Return Jump.
(a)m, v
Q Return Jump
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m, v
(a)m,v
(a)m,v
(a)m,v
(a)m,v
(a)m,v
(a)m,v
Index JumP.
SeLective Jump.
Selective Jump Selective Jump Selective Jump ReTurn Jump.
selective Return
selective Return
selective Return
NZ
PL
MI
ARJ,ZR~/
NZ
PL
MI
QRJ,ZRY
NZ
PL
MI
IjP
SLJ
SJl
SJ2
SJ3
RTJ
RJl
RJ2
RJ3
\
'''-.-
~/
key 1.
key 2.
key 3.
Jump key 1.
Jump key 2.
Jump key 3.
In AjP,QjP,ARJ and QR] a modifier is required and does not cause insertion of the
single precision augment instruction.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
6/63
247: 171.8401
CDC 3600
171.
• 84 Direct (Contd. )
§
Operation Field
SLS
SSI
SS2
SS3
SRJ
SRI
SR2
SR3
DLDA,CM,MG
DSTA,CM,CL,MG
DFAD,RP,CM,MG,UN,UR
DFSB,RP,CM,MG, UN, UR
DFMU,CM,MG,UN,UR
DFDV,CM,MG,UR
XMIT,CM,AUG
MK
PC
SEQU, I
SMEQ,I
SEWL,I
SMWL,I
LSTU
LSTL
NBJP,ST
CL
CM
ZBJP,ST
CL
CM
EXEC
RGJP, s
}lJilE
BRTJ
BJSX
LEYT,Ao,Ei, LI,CL
Qo
RI
SBYT,Ao,Ee, LI,CL
Qo
RI
SCAN,Qo,Ee,EQ
GT
LT
NE
LE
GE
INF
CONN
EXTF
BEGR
BEGW
COPY,CW,CWA
CLCH
IPA
ALG
MPJ
CPJ
DRJ
Address Field
(a)m,b,v
(a)m, v
(a)m, v
(a)m, v
(a)m,v
(a)m,v
(a)m, v
(a)m, v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m,b,v
(a)m, b, v
(a)m, (i)n
Instruction
SeLective Stop.
Selective Stop jump key 1.
Selective Stop jump key 2.
Selective Stop jump key 3.
Stop Return Jump.
Selective Stop Return jump key 1.
Selective Stop Return jump key 2.
Selective Stop Return jump key 3.
Double precision LoaD A.
Double precision STore A.
Double precision Floating ADd.
Double precision Floating SuBtract.
Double precision Floating MUltiply.
Double precision Floating DiVide.
TRANSMIT
(a)m, n
(a)m, n
(a)m,n
(a)m, n
b,v
b,v
p,g,m,b
Search for EQUality.
Search for Masked Equality.
SEarch Within Limits.
Search Magnitude Within Limits.
Locate liST element Upper.
Locate liST element Lower.
Non zero Bit JumP.
p,g,m,b
Zero Bit JumP.
(a)m,b,v
p,y,m,b
(a)m,b,i
(a)m,b,i
(a)m,b,i
(a)m,b,i
m,b,v
EXECute.
ReGister JumP y
Unconditional Bank Jum~.
unconditional Bank JumP Lower.
unconditional Bank ReTurn Jump.
Bank Jump and Set indeX.
Load BYTei!
m,b,v
Store BYTe ~/
m,b,v
SCAN byte'y
m
INternal Function.
CONNect.
EXTernal Function.
BEGin Read.
BEGin Write.
COpy status.
CLear CHannel.
InPut to A.
y
perform ALGorithm.
Main Product register Jump.
x
Channel Product register Jump.
D Register Jump.
INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROL WORDS
IOSW,C
(a)m, w
Skip words (write zeros under Word count control).
IOTW,C
(a)m, w
Transmit data under Word count control.
IOSR,C
(a)m,w
Skip words (write zeros) under word count or to
end of Record (and write end of record).
IOTR,C
(a)m,w
Transmit data under word count or to end of
Record (and write end of record).
(a)m
IOJP
JumP to (a)m for next control word.
3/ In RGlP the modifier s is required.
4/ In LBYT, SBYT and SCAN the modifiers Ao or Qo and Ee are required. If neither LI nor RI
- appear, no indexing will be assumed.
x,e,c,n
x,c,n
x, (a)m,n
x(a)m,n
x,b
x
!
6/63
~
'IA-U-ER-BA-CH-_-=-'
247:201.001
CDC 3600
System Performance
NOTES ON SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
201.
File Processing
The main file in the File Processing Problem has been condensed by designing the
system to take maximum advantage of features of the CDC 3600 order code, in particular
the "Jump on Flag" instruction.
Accordingly:
(1) Trailers were used to handle data which might not be physically present.
(2) Flags were added to denote the presence or absence of trailers.
(3) Most data was stored in binary form, reducing the space requirement.
(4) The 20-character field for the name was broken into words. Flags were
used to denote the number of words.
These practices reduced the data volume of the main file to an average of 8.6 words of 48
bits, i.e., the equivalent of Sixty-eight 6-bit BCD characters.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
247:201.011
CDC 3600
System Performance
CDC 3600
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BiolA Incorporated
4/63
CDC 3600
241:201.012
CDC 3600 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE
1
Configuroti on
Worksheet
Reference
Item
VI B, VII B
(Blocked) t
1
msec/block
INPUTOUTPUT
TIMES
1,000
1,000
1,000
(File 1)
15
15
15
IS
File 1 = File 2
17
17
17
17
File 3
17
6
17
6
File 4
17
6
17
6
---
---
---
-----
---
---
-----
---
---
---
File 1 = File 2
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
File 3
0.1
0.004
0.1
0."04
File 4
0.1
0.008
0.1
0.008
al
0.12
0.12
0.12
0.12
~
File 3
File 4
msec penalty
2
msec/b1ock
VIII B
(Unblocked)
1,000
File 1 = File 2
maBc/_witch
VIII B
(Blocked)t
(File 1)
Char/block
Records/block
VI.B, VII B
(Unblocked)
msec/record
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR msec/detai1
TIMES
msec/work
a2
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
b6
0.32
0.32
0.32
0.32
b5 +b9
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
msec/report
b7
0.63
0.63
0.63
0.63
maec
a1
0.12
0.12
0.12
0.12
a2 K
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
a3 K
24.00
24.00
24.00
24.00
0.1
0.1
3
for C. P.
and
dominant
column.
STANDARD
PROBLEM A
F=
1.0
+ b8
File 1 ·Master In
0.1
File 2 Master Out
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
File 3 Details
0.15
0
0.15
0
File 4 Reports
0.2
33.0
24.92
50.0
STANDARD
PROBLEM A
SPACE
17.0
0
24.57
93.0
0.2
33.0
110.0
24.92
33.0
0
93.0
24.57
93.0
Unit of measure (48-bit word)
Std. routines
2,048
2,048
2;048
2,048
Fixed
1,024
1,024
1,024
1,024
3 (Blocks 1 to 23)
400
400
400
400
6 (Blocks 24 to 48)
600
600
600
600
1,000
622
1,000
622
200
200
200
200
5,272
4,894
5,272
4,894
4:200.1151
Filea
Working
Total
t Detail records are blocked 10 recorda per 1,000-character block.
Reports are blocked 8 records per I,OOO-character block.
4/63
0.1
4:200.1132
4:200.114
Total
<4
17.0
4:200.112
~
I AUERBACH I ~
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
247:201.013
CDC 3600 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (Contd.)
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 2
Configuration
Worksheet
/tem
Reference
All
(Blocked)
5
All
(Unblocked)
Fixed/Floating point
input
606 MTU
606 MTU
output
606 MTU
606 MTU
input
SO char
1,000 char
output
IDS char
1,000 char
Unit name
Size of record
STANDARD
MATHE.
MATICAL msec/b1ock
PROBLEMA
input
T1
6
output
T2
6
input
T3
0
0.1
output
T4
0
0.1
msec/record
T5
O.OS
O.OS
msec/5 loops
T6
0.665
0.665
msec/report
T7
0.67
0.67
4:200.413
msec penalty
7
Unit nsme
606 MTU
Size of block
960 char
Records/block
B
STANDARD
STATISTI· moec/block
CAL
PROBLEM A
Tl
t
16
4:200.512
maec penalty
C.P.
st
T3
0.1
msec/block
T5
0.15
maec/record
T6
0.003
msec/table
T7
O.OlS
Detail records are blocked 10 records per 1,000·character block.
Reports are blocked 8 recorda per 1,000·character block.
©
1963 by Auerbach eorp'orotion and BNA Incorporated
4/63
•
247:201.100
STANDARD
EDP
•
R£PQRTS
CDC 3600
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
201.
.112 Computation: .
. 113 Timing Basis: .
.1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
.11
Standard File Problem A (Unblocked & mocked)
. 111 Record Sizes
Master File:
Detail File:
Report File:
. standard.
. using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.113.
• 114 Graph: . . . . . . . . ; . see graph below •
.115 Storage Space Required: 5,272 words •
108 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
100.00
7
4
2
10.00
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
10, 000 Master
File Records
2
1.00
7
VIB, VIIB
~
4
~
~ ",-7
- - ------.~
'-"VI~
..... V - - -
--- 1--'----
2
-
VIIIB
---- ---
VIB, VIlB
0.1 0
7
4
2
0.0 1
0.0
I
\
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per
-
-- -
-
Ma~ter
Record
mocked Records
Unblocked Records
©"1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
247:201.120
CDC 3600
§201.
.12
• 122 Computation: •
.123 Timing Basis: •
standard •
using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.12 .
see graph below •
Standard File Problem B (Unblocked & mocked)
. 121 Record Sizes
Master File:
Detail File:
Report File:
• 124 Graph: . • . . •
54 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
100.00
7
4
2
10.00
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
10, 000 Master
File Records
2
1.00
7
VlB, VIIB __
4
......
~~ ~
-------- --- --
V / _ I-- --
2
ltt.V"
0.1 0
-- -----
-,,"
VIIIB
-----
VIB, VIIB
" , .", VUlB
7
4
2
0.0 1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
-
4/63
-
-
-
Detail File mocked
Detail File Unblocked
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
247:201.130
§ 201.
.13
.132 Computation: .
. 133 Timing Basis: •
Standard File Problem C (Unblocked & mocked)
.131 Record Sizes
Master File:
Detail File:
Report File:
. 134 Graph:. . • . .
216 characters.
1 card.
1 line.
• standard •
• using. estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.13 .
· see graph below.
100.00
7
4
2
10.00
7
Time in Minutes
to .Process
10,000 Master
File Records
4
2
VIB:it VIIB
1.0 0
7
...---
~
4
"=---
-- -- --
-----.--
.......A"
~ 7r---------~
VIIIB/
2
0.1 0
7
4
2
0.0 1
0.0
1.0
0.33
0.1
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
I
\,
-
© 1963
-
-
-
Detail File mocked
Detail File Unblocked
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
247:201.1.40
CDC 3600
§ 201.
.14
. 142 Computation: •
.143 Timing Basis: .
• trebled .
· using estimatinKprocedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.13.
• see graph below •
Standard File Problem D (Unblocked & mocked)
.141 Record Sizes
Master File: •
Detail File:
Report File: .
• 144 Graph: . • • • •
• 108 characters.
.1 card.
. 1 line.
100.00
7
4
2
10.00
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Process
10,000 Master
File Records
2
1.00
7
.-.-
VIB, VIIB
4
~
--""
~
~ ----7
---
2
-- --- -----
VIII~
1----.- ---- -~--
VIB, VIIB
-
---
VIIIB
o. 10
7
4
2
o. 01
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
-
4/63
-
-
-
Detail File Blocked
Detail File Unblocked
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
\
'.
247: 20 1. 200
201.
Timing Bas'is:
using estimate procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.213
Graph: . . . . . . see graph below .
.213
.2
SORTING
.21
Standard Problem Estimates
. 211
.212
Record size: .
Key Size:
. 214
80 characters.
8 characters.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Minutes
to Put Records
Into Required 2
Order
~l'
...J. II
10.0
7
~
.1
'" V
I/"
4
/ /
~/
2
2-WAY MERGE",!;
VWAYMERGE
!~
1.0
,
7
/
4
~
1/
1/
,
~
/ /
2
'I
0.1
2
100
4
V
7
2
1,000
4
7
2
10,000
4
7
100,000
Number of Records
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
247:201.300
§
CDC 3600
201.
.312 Timing basis:
•3
MATRIX INVERSION
.31
Standard Problem Estimates
• • • . using estimating procedure
outlined in User's Guide,
4:200.312 •
• 313 Graph:
see graph below •
.311 "Basic parameters:o • • general, non-symmetric
matrices, usingfloating
point to at least 8
decimal digits.
10,000
7
4
2
J
1.000
I
I
7
I
I
I
4
I
II
2
~
Time in Minutes
for Complete
Inversion
I)
0.100
7
II
I
4
/
2
I
0.010
7
I
I
2'
I
7
0.00 1
2
2
7
I
-
4
100
10
Size of Matrix
4/63
2
7
4
7
1,000
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
§
247:201.400
201.
5 fifth - order polynom ials •
5 divisions.
1 square root.
using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, '4:200.413.
see graph below .
.412 Computation: •
\
.4
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING
.41
Standard Mathematical Problem A Estimates
(Uriblocked & Blocked)
.413 Timing l?asis: .
. 414 Graph:
.411 Record sizes: . . • . . • 10 signed numbers, avg.
size 5 digits, max.
size 8 digits.
ALL CONFIGURATIONS ONE WORD LENGTH (36 BIT PRECISION); FLOATING POINT
R = NUMBER OF OUTPUT RECORDS PER INPUT RECORD
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
Time in Milliseconds per
Input Record
..4'
8
~~
2
R);
10.0
Ie:
= 0.1, 0.01
7
11
4
I./.~
R = 1.0, 0.1, 0.01
\
2
_t.
----- 1-
~ 1--
.;'
-~ ~'
1.0
7
4
2
0.1
2
4
2
7
0.1
1.0
4
7
2
10.0
4
7
100.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
-
-
-
-
Detail File mocked
Detail File Unblocked
© 1963
Auerbach Carporation and Info, Inc.
Reprinted 9/63
247:201.500
CDC 3600
Ii 201.
.5
GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING
. 51
Standard Statistical Problem A Estimates
.511 Record size:
.
. . .
.
. 513 Timing basis:
thirty 2-digit integral
numbers.
\
augment T elements
in cross-tabulation
tables .
using estimating procedure outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.513
see graph below.
.512 Computation:
.514 Graph:
10,000
7
'.
2
0
1,000
7
4
Time in
milliseconds
per record
2
100
7
4
2
~
10
7
/
L
4
/
2
2
4
7
4
2
7
2
100
10
T. Number of Augmented Elements
9/63 Revised
\
/
fA
AUERBACH
®
4
7
1,000
247:211.101
CDC 3600
Physical Characteristics
CDC 3600
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
247:211.102
CDC 3600
CDC 3600 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Unit Name
Console
Data Interchange 1 to 5
Channels
Data Interchango 6 to 8
Channels
Starage
Module
StC»'age
Module
Camputatian
Module
IDENTITY
Model Number
Height X Width X Depth, in.
3601
3602
3602
3603
3609
3604
44xll0x75 a
75 x81 X20
75 Xl21 x78
75x79x81
75x79x81
75 x 161X20
900
2,000
3,100
2,000
1,100
4,000
Weight, Ibs.
PHYSICAL
Maximum Cable Lengths
Temperature, ·F.
Storage
Ranges
Humidity, %
Temperature,
0
50 to 70 (equipment), 60 to 85 (room)
F.
Working
Ranges
ATMOSPHERE
I
I
Humidity, %
40 to 60
Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.
4,300
12,000
18,000
16,000
8,000
17,000
350
700
1,050
700
350
1,400
Air Flow, cfm.
Mechanical filtera with a 30'7. efficiency using N.B.S.b discoloration test with
atmospheric dust. Electrostatic filters with 90'7. efficiency at 500 fpm.
Intemal Filtera
Nominal
208
115
208
115
208
115
208
115
208
115
208
115
Tolerance
10'7.
10'7.
10'7.
10'7.
10'7.
10%
10'7.
10'7.
10'7.
10'7.
10'7.
10'7.
Nominal
400
60
400
60
400
60
400
60
400
60
400
60
Tolerance
5'7.
5'7.
5'7.
5'7.
5'7.
5.,.
5.,.
5.,.
5.,.
5.,.
5.,.
5.,.
3
phase
Bingle
phase
3
phase
single
phase
3
phase
single
phase
3
phase
single
phase
3
phase
single
phase
3
phase
single
phase
1.0
0.175
3.0
0.35
4.5
0.525
4.2
0.35
2.1
0.175
4.0
0.7
Voltage
ELECTRICAL
Cycles
Phases and Lines
LoadKVA
NOTES
5/63
aTwo arms at
120 degrees.
bNational Bureau of Standards.
247:211.103
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
CDC 3600 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS (Contd.)
Magnetic
Tape
Controllers
Peripheral
Controller
Model Number
3621- 3626
3681-3682
Height X Width X Depth, in.
78X96X27
2,000
Unit Name
IDENTITY
Weight, lbs.
Magnetic
Card Reader
Card Punch
High Speed
Printer
Paper Tape
Reader
Punch
606
3641
3642
3655
3691
75X40X20
72x28x33
41 X30X 18
52x40x26
61x47x34
40x53x29
1,100
800
210
700
1,600
600
7,700
5,100
1,200
540
606
Tope Unit
PHYSICAL
Maldmum Cable Lengths
Temperature," of.
Storage
Ranges
Humidity, "/.
Temperature, "F •
Working
Ranges
ATMOSPHERE
...
50"to 70 (equipment), 60 to 85 (room)
Humidity, ,..
40 to 60
4~900
Heat Dissipated, BTU/hr.
to
8,500
4,300
10,000
710
700
350
1,000
100
Air Flow, cfm.
3,600
Mech;..ucal fUters witb a 30% efficiency using N.B.S. b discoloration test with
atmospheric dust. Electrostatic fUters with 90"1. efficiency at 500 fpm.
Intemel Filters
Nominel
2()1I
115
208
115
208
115
115
115
115
Tolerance
10"1.
10,..
10%
10,..
10,..
10,..
10"/.
10"1.
10"1.
Nominel
400
60
400
60
60
60
60
60
60
5,..
5"/.
5"/.
5,..
5%
5,..
5,..
5%
5,..
Voltage
ELECTRICAL
Cycles
Tolerance
Phases and Lines
LoadKW
NOTES
3
elngle
single
3
phase phaBe phase phase
1.0
to
1.5
0.35
1.0
0.175
3
phase
1.2
single phase single phase single phase single phase
0.21
1.06
2.3
1.5
Varia~ons depend on
model used.
©
1963 by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
5/63
247:221.100
_STANDARD
•
EDP
""'RTS
CDC 3600
Price Data
PRICE DATA
§
221.
IDENTITY OF UNIT
\
CLASS
STORAGE
No.
3609
&
COMPUTATION
3603
3604
3601
COMMUNICATION
3602
3606
3607
3608
3681
3682
INPUTOUTPUT
3641
3642
3643
3655
3691
3692
606
;,621
3622
3623
3624
3625
3626
POWER
3667
Name
Storage Module, 16,384 Words Magnetic Core
Storage
Storage Module, 32,768 Words Magnetic Core
Storage
Computation Module; Includes Real Time Cloc;.k
Console; Includes Type\'lI"iter
PRICES
Monthly
Rental
$
Monthly
Maintenance
$
Purchase
$
7,455
800
290,000
14,360
20,755
1,790
1,285
1,825
125
560,000
810,000
70,000
Communication Module
Standard Bi -directional Data Channel
Special 24-bit Data Channe1--See Note 1
Special 48-bit Data Channel--See Note 1
Data Channel Converter for 160/160-A; Permits
use of 3600 peripheral equipment
Satellite Coupler; Permits direct communication
between 160/160-A and 3600
3,255
900
900
900
275
125
150
160
126,000
35,000
35,000
35,000
275
20
10,800
415
25
16,200
Card Reader; 250 cpm
Card Punch; 100 cpm
Card Reader Controller, Controls 088 Card
Reader (include the 088)
High-Speed Line Printer; 1000 1pm
Paper Tape Reader/Punch
Program Controlled Input/Output Typewriter
Magnetic Tape Transport
Magnetic Tape Controller; Two Read-Write
Controls to control one to eight 606 Magnetic
Tape Transports
Magnetic Tape Controller; Two Read-Write
Controls to control one to sixteen 606 Magnetic Tape Transports
Magnetic Tape Controller; Four Read-Write
Controls to control one to eight 606 Magnetic
Tape Transports
Magnetic Tape Controller; Four Read-Write
Controls to control one to sixteen 606 Magnetic Tape Transports
Magnetic Tape Controller; Three Read-Write
Controls to control one to eight 606 Magnetic Tape Transports
Magnetic Tape Controller; Three Read-Write
Controls to control one to sixteen 606 Magnetic
Tape Transports
695
630
150
90
27 ,000
24,500
1,240
1,840
640
280
825
100
400
125
70
140
49,000
73,500
25,000
11,000
36,000
2,700
215
105,000
4,000
305
155,000
3,600
290
140,000
4,750
380
185,000
3,430
250
133,500
4,350
340
169,500
795
80
31,000
Power Converter and Power Control
Note 1: Available for special applications only.
Note 2: Increasing Core Storage from 16K to 32K • • • • • • • . • $350, 000.
© 1963
by Auerbach Corporation and BNA Incorporated
4/63
/
I
CDC 3100
'",- -
j
Control Data Corporation
c
........
(
\.
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
_- ---'
CDC 3100
Control Data Corporation
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN
u. s.
A.
254:001. 001
CDC 3100
Contents
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
11.
12.
14.
15.
20.
21.
22.
Introduction . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . ...... .
Data Structure. . . . . .
. .... .
System Configuration.
. ............ .
6-Tape Business System . . . . . . . . . . . .
III
V
6- Tape Auxiliary Storage System
VI
6-Tape Business-Scientific System ...
VITA
10-Tape General System (Integrated) ..
VIIB
10-Tape General System (Paired)
Internal Storage
Core Storage. . . . . . . . . . . ...
Central Processor. . .
. .... .
Console. . . . . . . . . . ..
. .......... .
Peripheral Equipment ...
Simultaneous Operations .
Instruction List .. .
Data Code Table ... .
Software . . . . . . . . . .
System Performance ..
Wo'rksheet Data Table . . . .
Generalized File Processing .. .
Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Matrix Inversion . . . . . . . . . . .
Generalized Mathematical Processing . . .
Generalized Statistical Processing .
Physical Characteristics. . . .
. ....... .
Price Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
254:011
254:021
254:031
254:031.1
254:031. 2
254:031. 3
254:031.4
254:031. 5
254:041
254:051
254:061
254:071
254:111
245:121*
245:141*
254:151
254:201
254:201. 011
254:201. 1
254:201. 2
254:201. 3
254:201. 4
254:201. 5
245:211*
254:221
*Refer to indicated section of the CDC 3200 Computer System Report.
,/
(
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
254: 011.1 00
CDC 3100
Introduction
INTRODUCTION
The Control Data 3100 computer system incorporates a slower version of the 3204 Basic
Processor used in the Control Data 3200 computer system. It has the same instruction code
(which traps and uses subroutines to handle floating-point and decimal operations), the same
maximum memory size (32,768 24-bit words), and the same number of available data channels
(eight). The core storage cycle time is 1. 75 microseconds (versus 1. 25 microseconds in the
3204), and the maximum system capacity for input-output data is only 450, 000 characters per
second (versus the 2,670, OOO-characters-per-second capacity of the 3200 computer systems).
This drastic change in input-output capacity results from the Register File being held in main
core storage instead of in a separate, faster store as in the 3200. Only one word of input or
output data can be transferred every five machine cycles (four are used by the Register File and
one is allocated to the central processor), so that 8.75 microseconds are required for each word
transferred.
The Control Data 3100 system, scheduled for first deliveries in January 1965, is priced
at up to about $2, 000 per month below comparable Control Data 3200 computer systems. Both
syst.ems can use all the same peripherals, all the same software packages, and, for practical
purposes, all the same programs. In general, however, the subroutines used for decimal
and floating-point simulation in the 3100 take about twenty times longer to execute than the machine
instructions available in some models of the CDC 3200 processor, so it is expected that 3100
systems will be used either where their program-compatibility with the 3200 systems or
their fixed-point binary operating speeds (or both) are found to be valuable.
The Control Data 3100 computer system is machine-code compatible only with the CDC
3200 and 3300 systems. It has, in addition, some compatibility through common programming
languages with the Control Data 3400, 3600, and 3800 computer systems.
Hardware
The 3104 is a single-address, fixed word-length, binary processor. It can execute all
the instructions in the Control Data 3200 computer system repertoire either by hardware or by
software. It is not capable of directly processing instructions requiring floating-point or decimal
arithmetic facilities, so the processor automatically "traps" these instructions and simulates
their functions by the use of subroutines.
The fixed-point binary instruction times are quite fast: 24-bit addition takes 3.5
microseconds, 48-bit addition takes 5.25 microseconds, and 24-bit multiplication takes 20
microseconds. Simulated floating-point operations take conSiderably longer: an addition takes
. 220 microseconds and a multipiication takes 350 microseconds.
An "off-line" search facility allows consecutive locations in core storage to be searched
While the main program continues unhindered. The usefulness of this facility is limited by the
fact that, unless the program has been carefully designed, core storage may already be "saturated"
by the other demands of the processor and peripheral devices. Future developments in this area
could, however, be of great value in information storage and retrieval applications.
The Control Data 3100 system can be equipped with up to eight input-output data channels, enabling the system to compute while simultaneously performing up to eight read-write
operations which use any eight peripheral devices in the system. Use of the available buffered
peripheral units, which require little data channel time, can allow the number of concurrently
operating peripherals to increase to well beyond the number of data channels in a system.
Many of the input-output controllers supplied with Control Data 3100 computer systems
have two or more data channel connections. Such controllers can be used to switch peripheral
units between two computer systems. The use of more than one central processor in an installation
is comparatively frequent in Control Data 3000 Series installations, as both peripheral units and
storage modules can be easily switched under program control.
Significant recent announcements by Control Data have included IBM System/360compatible magnetic tape units and the proviSion of controllers for the IBM 1311 and 2311 Disk
Storage Drives. The present peripheral units available with the 3100 computer system (and with
all Control Data 3000 Series computer systems) include:
•
Model 828 and 838 Disk Files Capacity: 33 or 66 million characters
Access time: 187 milliseconds average
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
254:011.101
CDC 3100
•
IBM 1311 and 2311 Disk Storage Drives Capacity: 3 or 9.7 million characters
Access time: 170 milliseconds average
•
Model 3235 Drum Storage Capacity: 0.5 million characters
Access time: 17 milliseconds average
Data transfer rate: 167, 000 characters per second
•
Model 861 and 862 Drum Storage Capacity: 4.2 or 2.1 million characters
Access time: 17 or 8.6 milliseconds average
Data transfer rate: up to 2,000,000 characters per second
•
Punched card equipment Maximum reader speed: 1,200 cards per minute
Maximum punch speed: 250 cards per minute
•
Paper tape equipment Maximum reader speed: 1, 000 frames per second
Maximum punch speed: 110 frames per second
•
Line printing equipment CDC 501: 1,000 lines per minute
CDC 505: 500 lines per minute
CDC 3152: 150 lines per minute
IBM 1403 Model 2: 600 lines per minute
IBM 1403 Model 3: 1,100 lines per minute
•
7-track and 9-track magnetic tape units Maximum 7 -track speed: 120,000 six-bit characters per second
Maximum 9-track speed: 90,000 eight-bit characters per second
Software
The major assembly language for the Control Data 3100, 3200, and 3300 computer
systems is called 3200 COMPASS. It bears only a general resemblance to the COMPASS language
used for the Control Data 3600, and programs written in the two assembly languages are not
interchangeable. The 3200 COMPASS assembler requires 8, 192 words of core storage and 5 inputoutput devices, including at least 2 magnetic tape units, during the assembly process. The output
of the assembler is machine-language coding suitable for use with the SCOPE Operating System.
A reduced form of the 3200 COMPASS assembler, with no macro facilities, is available for
Control Data 3100 computer systems which have only 4, 096 words of storage.
The standard mathematical compiler is 3200 FORTRAN. This compiler uses a FORTRAN
IV style language which is not simply an exact copy of some other language, but rather an independently designed scientific programming language that offers a number of performance-improving
features. In this respect it appears that Control Data is continuing a policy established in its
FORTRAN-63 compiler for the CDC 1604, that of constructively re-evaluating the "standard" language
before implementation. This policy gives promise of continued improvements in FORTRAN.
Programs written in 3200 FORTRAN can be compiled on any Control Data 3100, 3200, or
3300 computer system that has at least 8,192 words of core storage, 3 magnetic tape units, and
2 other input-output devices. The 3200 FORTRAN compiler was released to customers in November
1964. A Basic FORTRAN II system is available for smaller configurations.
COBOL language processing is provided for the Control Data 3100, 3200, and 3300
computer systems by the 3200 COBOL compiler. The language includes almost all of Required
COBOL-61, and the compiler requires a 4, 096-word system with 3 tape units and 2 other
input-output devices for compilation. Release of 3200 COBOL'to customers is scheduled for
March 1965.
The SCOPE Operating System helps to assemble programs and to provide input-output
services as required. It uses between 700 and 1,500 core storage locations to hold the resident
program during operation; the exact amount depends upon the number and type of input-output
routines required by a particular program. At present 3200 SCOPE is oriented toward magnetic
tape proceSSing, but a random access enhancement, specifically designed to service the IBM 1311
and 3211 Disk Storage Drives, is expected to be released in Spring 1965.
Other program packages under development include a Report Generator (scheduled
for June 1965), a Linear Programming Package (June 1965), and a PERT Package (March 1965).
11/64
254: 021. 1DO
CDC 3100
Data Structure
DATA STRUCTURE
·1
.2
STORAGE LOCATIONS
Name of Location
Size
Purpose or Use
Word:
24 bits
Character:
Block:
6 bits
1 to N characters
or 1 to N words
basic addressable unit
(data or instruction).
addressable data unit.
~earch, Move, and Inputoutput instructions .
INFORMATION FORMAT
Type of Information
Representation
Operand: . . . . . .
24- or 48-bit fixed point word.
48-bit floating point word.
6-bit character.
4-bit BCD character.
lor 2 words.
1 to 13 BCD characters.
Instruction:
Field:
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
254:031.001
CDC 3100
System Configuration
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
GENERAL
Every Control Data 3100 computer system includes the following units:
•
A 3104 Processor.
•
A 1. 75-microsecond Core Storage Unit ranging from 4,096 to 32,768 words
(16,384 to 131,072 characters) in capacity.
•
An integrated console with detachable keyboard.
•
A Power Converter and Control Unit.
One 3106 Data Channel is included in the basic system. Up to seven more can be added,
so that a fully-extended Control Data 3100 computer system will have eight data channels. Eight
peripheral units or controllers can be connected to each data channel.
The data channels used in all of the Control Data 3000 Series computers present a common interface with peripheral units. As a result of this, any of the 3000 Series peripheral units
can be connected through a 3106 Data Channel to a Control Data 3100 computer. The available
peripheral units are described in the Control Data 3200 Computer System Report. Details of the
loadings these units place on a Control Data 3100. computer system are described in the Simultaneous Operations section of this report, starting on page 254:111.100.
Some peripheral units or controllers can be connected to more than one data channel.
This facility may be used either to allow two concurrent data transmissions to take place, or to
allow the peripheral unit to be switched between two computer systems. A bank of magnetic
tape units connected to a dual-channel controller is a case where multiple data transmissions
would be the normal reason for having the two data channels; while a printer connected to two different computer systems by way of a dual-channel controller could be used by either system, as
the situation in the computer room demands.
The core storage modules can similarly be connected to, and accessed by, two computers.
Each 16, 384-word module is independent and permits dual access by a second processor or
special device.
SELECTION OF REPRESENTATIVE CONFIGURATIONS
The Control Data 3200 computer system is shown in the follOwing Standard System Configurations, as defined in the Users' Guide, page 4:030.100:
•
Configuration V; 6-Tape Auxiliary Storage Configuration.
•
Configuration VI; 6-Tape Business/Scientific Configuration.
•
•
Configuration VIlA; 10-Tape General Integrated Configuration.
Configuration VIIB; 10-Tape General Paired Configuration, using a Control
Data 160 Computer System as the satellite system.
,/
11/64
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.1
254:031.1 00
6-TAPE AUXIIlARY STORAGE SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION V
Deviations from Standard Configuration: .
auxiliary storage capacity is 65% larger.
card reader is 140% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
magnetic tapes are 40% faster.
Equipment
828 Disk File (33 million char)
3432 Controller
8,192 words of Core Storage
3104 Computer
$ 2,400
1,050
700*
2,700*
Monitor Typewriter
240
3106 Data Channels (2)
120*
405 Card Reader (1,200 cpm)
3248 Controller
400
100
415 Card Punch (250 cpm)
3245 Controller
295
330
505 Line Printer (500 lpm)
3256 Line Printer Controller
635
515
603 41. 7KC Magnetic Tape Units (6)
3229 Controller
TOTAL RENTAL:
3,300
600
$13,385
* The rental for the 3104 Computer includes the charges for the
first 4,096 words of core storage and for the first 3106 Data Channel.
..
",
©1964 Auerbacn Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
254:031.200
.2
CDC 3100
6-TAPE BUSINESS/SCIENTIFIC SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION VI
Deviations from Standard Configuration: .
card reader is 140% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
magnetic tapes are 40% faster.
no floating point hardware.
Eguipment
16,384 words of Core Storage
3104 Computer
2,700*
Monitor Typewriter
240
3106 Data Channels (2)
120*
405 Card Reader (1,200 cpm)
3248 Controller
400
100
415 Card Punch (250 cpm)
3446 Controller
295
450
505 Line Printer (500 lpm)
3246 Line Printer
635
515
603 41. 7KC Magnetic Tape Units (6)
3229 Controller
TOTAL RENTAL:
* The rental for the 3104 Computer includes the charges for the
first 4,096 words of core storage and for the first 3106 Data Channel.
11/64
$ 1,510*
3,300
600
$10,865
254:031.300
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.3
10-TAPEGENERAL SYSTEM (INTEGRATED); CONFIGURATION VIIA
Deviations from Standard Configuration: .
core storage is 33 % larger.
3 less index registers provided.
card reader is 140% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
no floating point.
Equipment
Rental
32,768 words of Core Storage
$ 3,310*
3104 Computer
"-
Monitor Typewriter
240
3106 Data Channels (4)
360*
405 Card Reader (1,200 cpm)
3248 Controller
400
100
415 Card Punch (250 cpm)
3446 Controller
295
450
505 Line Printer (500 lpm)
3256 Controller
635
515
604 60KC Magnetic Tape Units (6)
3229 Controller
3,600
600
604 60KC Magnetic Tape Units (4)
3228 Controller
2,400
425
TOTAL RENTAL:
*
2,700*
$16,030
The rental for the 3104 Computer includes the charges for the
first 4,096 words of core storage and for the first 3106 Data Channel.
./
©J 964 Auerbach Corporation and info, inc.
11/64
254:031.400
.4
CDC 3100
10-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED); CONFIGURATION VIIB*
Deviations from Standard Configuration: .
3 less index registers.
direct connection to satellite system.
card reader is 1100% faster.
no floating point hardware.
Eguipment
16,384 characters of Core Storage
3104 Computer
To Satellite
160 System
(at right)
2,700*
Monitor Typewriter
240
3106 Data Channels (2)
120*
405 Card Reader (1,200 cpm)
3248 Controller
400
100
604 60KC Magnetic Tape Units (4)
3228 Controller
2,400
425
604 60KC Magnetic Tape Units (4)
3228 Controller
2,400
425
TOTAL ON-LINE EQUIPMENT:
$10,720
TOTAL SATELliTE EQUIPMENT:
$ 5,165
TOTAL RENTAL:
$15,885
* This rental for the 3104 Computer includes the charges for the
first 4, 096 words of core storage and for the first 3106 Data Channel.
11/64
$ 1,510*
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
254:031.401
SATELLITE EQUIPMENT (CDC 160)
Deviations from Standard Configuration: .
direct connection to main system.
core storage is 100% larger.
multiply/divide is included.
paper tape equipment is included.
card reader is 140% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
magnetic tapes are 30% slower.
Equipment
4,096 words of Core Storage
160 Processor
$1,500
Console with Monitor Typewriter
Paper Tape Reader (350 cps)
Paper Tape Punch (110 cps)
/
(
3681 Data Channel Converter
3682 Satellite Coupler
275
175
405 Card Reader (1,200 cpm)
3248 Controller
400
100
415 Card Punch (250 cpm)
3446 Controller
295
450
505 Line Printer (500 lpm)
3256 Controller
635
515
601 21KC Magnetic Tape Units (2)
3127 Controller
500
320
TOTAL SATELLITE EQUIPMENT:
".
$5,165
To 3100 System
(at left)
I
\.
\
"
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
254:041.100
CDC 3100
Internal Storage
Core Storage
INTERNAL STORAGE: CORE STORAGE
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . .
.12
· 13
Reserved Storage: .
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Storage Medium:
magnetic cores.
.23
Storage Phenomenon:
direction of magnetization.
Description
· 24
Recording Permanence
A Control Data 3100 computer system can have
between 4, 096 and 32,768 24-bit word locations of
core storage, operating with a cycle time of 1.75
microseconds per word. Overlapping of storage
cycles, in order to reduce the loading placed on the
central processor by input-output operations, is
only possible in those systems which have 32,768
words; in smaller systems all of the core storage
cycles at the same time, making it impossible to
overlap one cycle with another.
.241 Data erasable by instructions: . . . .
. 242 Data regenerated
constantly: .
· 243 Data volatile: . .
3103 Storage Module (16K) .
3108 Storage Module (4K).
3109 Storage Module (8K).
Basic Use:
working storage and operational control.
Sixty-four words of core storage are reserved for
an Integrated Register File. This file contains the
sequence control registers, input-output controls,
and Autoload and Autodump entries. The functions
of the Integrated Register File are described in the
central processor section of this report, on page
254:051.100.
Each physical storage location consists of 28 bits,
of which 24 are data bits and 4 are parity bits. The
24 data bits are functionally broken down into four
6-bit characters, and one of the parity bits is associated with each separate character. Addressing
of core storage can be by word or character, using
15 bits or 17 bits per address, respectively.
The core storage can be connected directly to a
single Control Data 3104 central processor, or it
can be shared by two independent 3104 processors.
When the core storage is shared, manual switches
on the outside of each module allow the operator to
allocate the store to either computer, or to enable
them to share it on a no-priority basis.
· 14
Availability: . .
?
· 15
First Delivery:
January, 1966.
.31
· 244 Data permanent:.
· 245 Storage interchangeable: . .
yes .
no.
no (safeguarded by poweroff interrupt).
no.
no.
.27
Interleaving Levels:.
no interleaving as such;
however, two 3103 Storage
Modules provide asynchronous operation with
overlapped accesses.
.28
Access Techniques: .
coincident current.
.29
Potential Transfer Rates
.292 Peak data rates Cycling rates: .
Unit of data: .
Data rate: . . .
570,000 cps.
word or character.
570,000 words (or characters)/sec.
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and System Sizes
(See table below.)
.32
Rules for Combining
Modules: . • • . .
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
Identity:.
four possibilities are shown
in preceding entry; there
may be others.
no separate controller
required.
Module and System Sizes
Minimum
Storage
Identity:
\
64-word Integrated
Register File.
.16
Modules:
Words:
Characters:
Instructions:
3108 Storage
Module
1
4,096
16,384
4,096
Maximum
Storage
3109 Storage
Module
1
8,192
32,768
8,192
3103 Storage
Module
1
16,384
65,536
16,384
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
2 3103 Storage
Modules
2
32,768
131,072
32,768
11/64
254:041.420
· 42
Connection to System:
CDC 3100
one core memory can be
connected to one or two
3104 Central Processors.
ACCESS TIMING
.51
Arrangement of Heads: 1 read/write control per
system, except for 32K
systems, which have 2
read/write controls and
permit overlapped operations.
.53
Simultaneous
Operations:
.6
11/64
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: .
.72
Transfer Load Size
.73
none, except in 32K systems, where access to
each 16K module is asynchronous and independent.
?
1. 75 !lsec.
1 word or 1 character.
none.
1 to 128 characters, one
character at a time.
1 to 32 words, four characters (i, e., one word)
at a time.
Effective Transfer Rate
With self: . . . . . .
.8
Access Time Parameters and Variations
.531 For uniform access Access time:.
Cycle time:
For data unit of:
STORAGE PERFORMANCE
With self: . . . . .
·5
· 52
.7
91,000 words/second.
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Invalid address:
Check or
Interlock
none
high-order
bits are
truncated.
Invalid code:
not possible.
Receipt of data:
generate parity bit.
Recording of data: record parity bit.
Recovery of data: parity check
halt operation; console light.
Dispatch of data: send parity bit.
Timing conflicts: interlock until
cleared.
254:051.100
CDC 3100
Central Processor
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . . . . . . . . . 3104 Computer.
. 12
Description
of core storage rather than in a special fast-access
file as in the Control Data 3200 and 3300 computer
svstems .
The "block" operations use special processor controls and are of three types: Search, Move, and
Input-Output. Mter one of these operations has
been activated, the processor can return to its main
program and continue until an interrupt is generated
or the program senses completion of the block operation. Each of these operations requires three
instruction words, which contain the starting and
ending" addresses (or source and destination addresses for a Move command) for the operation
and a "reject" instruction. The reject instruction
is used if the block controls or the addressed inputoutput data channel happens to be busy. All three
types of block operations are carried out on a
character-by-character basis. The input-output
instructions, which can also specify a word-byword transfer, are described in more detail under
Simultaneous Operations (Section 245:111).
The 3104 Computer is the only available central
processor for the Control Data 3100 computer
system. It is a fixed-point binary processor with
built-in subroutines entries for floating-point and
decimal operations, exactly the same as the 3204
Basic Processor. There are no optional facilities
available for the 3104 Computer; the 3100 system
is upward-compatible with both the Control Data
3200 and 3300 computer systems, and it is anticipated that users will move on to these systems
rather than build up the capacity of the '3104.
Word length of core storage locations is 28 bits
(24 data bits plus 4 parity bits). One location can
contain an instruction, a 24-bit fixed-point binary
data word, one half of a 48-bit fixed- or floatingpoint data word, or an alphanumeric word consisting of four 6-bit BCD characters. An instruction word normally consists of a 6-bit operation
(or function) code, an addressing mode bit (indirect or direct), a 2-bit index register designator,
and a 15-bit core storage address field. In some
cases the indirect addressing flag, index register
designation, and address bits are used for other
purposes such as operand values, shift counts, and
extensions of the function code or address field.
Only three index registers are provided, and
their use is pre-empted by various instructions.
To some extent this limits the programmer in his
use of automatic address modification techniques.
The 3100 has a program interrupt system which
permits interruption when any of the following conditions occur: arithmetic faults (overflow, divisor
too small, exponent too large), completion of a
block operation (search, move, or input-output),
manual switch operation (console key), an interrupt
request from any of the eight peripheral positions
on each data channel, or a real-time interrupt
controlled by the Real-Time Clock. When an
interrupt condition is recognized, the current instruction address is stored along with a number
that indicates the specific interrupt condition, and
program control is transferred to a fixed location.
The programmer, however, can choose to honor or
ignore any particular interrupt condition by setting
appropriate bits in an Interrupt Mask regi ster .
In addition, several instructions are available for
sensing and clearing interrupts independently, and
for either enabling or disabling the entire interrupt
system.
Operations which are performed by hardware are
fast, although not as fast as in the 3200 processors.
A fixed-point 24-bit addition requires only 3.5
microseconds. Multiplication operations take from
10.6 to 14.8 microseconds. Search operations
take 5.4 microseconds for each operand inspected.
Floating-point operations, which must be handled
by subroutines, naturally take longer A 48-bit
add operation takes about 200 micros~conds,
multiplication takes 330 microseconds, and
divisiontakes about 600 microseconds. The times
required for simulation of decimal arithmetic
operations have not yet been determined,
The Register File, which controls the input-output
operations, searches, and moves and performs
other control functions, is held in the upper areas
A special power failure interrupt automatically
(and unequivocally) transfers control to a fixed
location (location 00010) in the event power fails
within the 3100 system. A special routine then
prepares the system for an orderly shutdown so
that no data will be lost. The whole operation takes
a maximum of 30 milliseconds; 16 milliseconds for
detection, and 14 milliseconds for processing the
interrupt.
.13
First Delivery: . . . . . January 1965.
\.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
11/64
254:051.200
CDC 3100
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
.21
Operations and 0I!erands
Operation
and Variation
Provision
Radix
Size
automatic
automatic
subroutine
binary
binary
decimal
24 bits.
48 bits.
1 to 12
BCD chars.
none.
automatic
subroutine
subroutine
binary
binary
decimal
24 bits.
48 bits.
variable.
DivideNo remainder: none.
Remainder:
automatic
subroutine
subroutine
binary
binary
decimal
24 bits.
48 bits.
variable.
subroutine
subroutine
subroutine
binary
binary
binary
36 & 11 bits.
36 & 11 bits.
36 & 11 bits.
automatic
none.
automatic
binary
24 bits.
binary
24 bits.
.211 Fixed point Add- subtract:
MultiplyShort:
Long:
.212 Floating point Add- subtract:
Multiply:
Divide:
.213 BooleanADD
Inclusive OR:
Exclusive OR:
.214 Comparison Numbers:
Absolute:
Letters:
Mixed:
Collating
sequence:
automatic.
none.
automatic.
6-bit characters.
0- 9, A-Z, with special characters and
unassigned symbols in various places;
see page 245:141. 100 in CDC 3200
Computer System Report .
• 215 Code translation:
Code translation from external BCD to internal
BCD is automatic when magnetic tapes recorded in
BCD format are being used.
Details of other code translations needed, and the
timing of the subroutines used to accomplish the
translations, are shown in Table I.
. 216 Radix conversion:
Radix conversion between BCD and binary forms is
performed by standard subroutines. The timings
of these subroutines are listed in Table I.
. 217 Edit format: • . . . . . . own coding; the characterby-character search for
equality or inequality appears to be the only instruction specifically
oriented toward this task .
. 218 Table look-upOi?eration
Equality:
Greater than:
Greatest:
Least:
. 219 OthersCharacter
Search:
11/64
Provision
Size
Comment
automatic
automatic
none.
none .
by word
by word
entries may be spaced
every 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
7, or 8 words. Masked
operands are allowed.
automatic
character- the search is made offby-charac- line, using the block
ter
transfer facilities;
single character
equality or inequality
can be searched for.
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
254:051.220
TABLE I: CONVERSION TIMES FOR STANDARD SUBROUTINES
ORIGINAL OPERAND
MICROSECONDS REQUIRED FOR CONVERSION TO:
Magnitude
Internal
BCD (1)
Internal BCD
< 107
-
18/ digit
18/digit +
25/operand
7,000/card
42,000/card
Internal BCD
7
-> 10
-
32/ digit
32/digit +
25/operand
7, OOO/card
42, OOO/card
Fixed Point
Binary
< 107
3I/dig·it
-
25/operand
3I/digit +
7, 000/ card
31/digit +
42, 000/ card
Fixed Point
Binary
7
-> 10
62/digit
-
25/opcrand
62/digit +
7, OOO/card
62/digit +
42, 000/ card
Floating Point
Binary
< 107
3I/digit + 39/openmd
39/operand
-
31/digit +
39/operand+
7, OOO/card
31/digit +
39/operand +
42,000/card
Floating Point
Binary
7
-> 10
62/cligit + 39/operand
39/operand
-
62/digit +
39/operand +
7, OOO/card
31/digit +
39/operand +
42. OOO/card
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Fixed Point Floating Point
Binary (2) Binary (3)
Column
BCD (4)
Type
Row BCD
(5)
Internal BCD is used in decimal arithmetic, for card reader input and for printer output.
Fixed Point Binary is used for 24 or 48-bit binary arithmetic.
Floating Point Binary is used for all floating point operations.
Column BCD is used for output via buffered card punch equipment.
Row BCD is used for output via unbuffered card punch equipment.
Note: "digit" refers to decimal digits in all of the above times.
· 22
Special Cases of Operands
o
.221 Negative numbers: ... one's complement.
.222 Zero: . . . . . . . . . . '.. positive zero and negative
zero.
· 223 Operand size determination: . . . . . . . . normally 24 bits; 48 bits
available in double precision and floating point
instructions, and variable
length of 1-12 decimal
digits in BCD operations.
· 23
Instruction Formats
. 231 Instruction structure: . basically I-address .
.232 Instruction layout
I Part:
b
111
2
15
· 233 Instruction parts
Name
f: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
a: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
b: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
m: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose
function code.
indirect addressing flag.
index register designation.
operand address.
Note: In many cases the indirect addressing
flag and the index register designation
are used for other purposes. These
cases include:
•
when literals are used instead of operand
addresses;
when Search or Move operations are involved;
o when the operand address is a register;
o when selective jumps based on console keys are
involved.
In most BCD character operations, indirect
addressing is not available, and only one specific
index register can be used with a particular
instruction.
Register file addresses cannot be indexed or
indirectly addressed.
. 234 Basic address structure: . . . . . . . . . . . 1+ O.
.235 LiteralsArithmetic: . . . . . . . no facility.
Comparisons and
tests: . . . . . . . . . . literals can be compared
with index register counts
and accumulator contents
only; maximum size is
262,145.
Incrementing
modifiers:. .. . .. only in the Block Search
operation.
. 236 Directly addressed operands Internal storage
type: . . . . . . . . . . core storage.
Minimum size: . . . . . 1 character.
Maximum size: . . . . 1 or 2 words.
Volume accessible: .. all.
.237 Address indexing
.2371 Number of methods: . two.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
254:051.2372
CDC 3100
. 2372 Names: . . . . . . . . . normal indexing.
specific indexing.
.2373 Indexing rule (normal indexing): . . . . addition of contents of one
of the 3 index registers
to the address in one's
complement mode.
· 2373 Indexing rule (specific
indexing): . . . . . . . same as normal indexing
except that a specified
index register is always
used with the particular
instruction .
. 2374 Index specification: .. bits 15 and 16, or bit 17, of
instruction word.
· 2375 Number of potential
indexers: . . . . . . . 3.
.2376 Addresses which can
be indexed: . . . . . • operand addresses in arithmetic, logical, load, and
store instructions, and
some jump instructions.
.2377 Comulative indexing:. no.
.2378 Combined index and
step: . . . . . • . . • . no.
· 238 Indirect addressing
.2381 Recursive: ..
. . yes.
. 2382 Designation: •... . . single bit in appropriate
instructions and in each
indirect operand address.
. 2383 Control:........ the last address in the recursive sequence is the
first address reached
which has no indirect
addressing flag.
.2384 Indexing with indirect addressing: . index modification always
takes place first. All
levels of a recursive indirect address sequence
may be indexed.
.239 Stepping
.2391 Specification of
increment: .. . .. within instruction.
. + or-.
· 2392 Increment sign:
. positive zero; tests are also
· 2394 End value: ...
available for comparison
with literals.
. 2395 Combined step and
test: . . . . . . . . . . . yes, for ± 1 increments only.
. 24
.32
Look-Ahead: . . . . . . . none .
. 33
Interruption
.331 Possible causes In-out units: ...
.332
.333
.334
Special Processor Storage
.241 Category of
storage
Number of Size in
locations
Program usage
bits
.335
Registers:
3
24
Registers:
Registers:
4
57
14
24
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
.31
Instruction Sequencing: . . . . . . . . . . . sequential.
arithmetic and
instructions.
address handling.
I/O control,
clock, temporary storage, etc.
. 336
11/64
· the state of any specific
device connected to one
of the eight I/o controllers
can initiate an interrupt.
Conditions which can
cause interrupts vary for
different types of I/o devices, but usually include
normal end of an operation,
abnormal end, and inability
to respond to an instruction.
In-out controllers: .. the failure of an I/O controller to accept or reject
a Connect or Function
instruction.
Processor errors: .. arithmetic overflow.
divide fault (division by too
small a number, not simply
by zero).
exponent overflow (>2 10_1).
BCD fault ( irregular characters) .
Other: . . . . . . . . . . power failure.
real-time clock.
search-move interrupt .
Control by routine: ... interrupts may be masked by
the program. In addition,
they are automatically inhibited (except for the
Power Failure Interrupt)
by the entry into any interrupt routine, and a
special instruction must
be used to re-enable the
preselected interrupts
after each interrupt.
Operator control: . . . . none, except that he always
may originate a manual
interrupt, or use the six
Sense switches to set the
mask.
Interruption conditions: (1) an interrupt condition
must arise .
(2) it must not be inhibited
either permanently or
during the processing
of an interrupt routine .
(3) the priority scanner
must have reached the
priority level of the
interrupt condition.
Interruption process Disabling interruption: . . . . . . . • . · operating instruction proceeds to an orderly halt.
Registers saved: . · program address register
only.
A nine-bit interrupt identification code is placed in
a fixed location .
Destination: . . . . . · 00003 or 00010 .
Control methodsDetermine cause: ... own coding.
Enable interruption:. own coding.
254:051.340
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.34
Multiprogramming: .• no special provisions.
.35
Multi-Sequencing: •.. the block operations (search
for character equality/inequality, move characters,
input-output instructions)
can proceed in parallel
with and independently of
the main program, once
initiated.
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
.41
Instruction Times in Microseconds
Binary
(24 bits)
. 411 Fixed point Add-subtract:
... 3.5
Multiply: . . . . . . . . 10.6 to 14.8
Divide: . . . . .
. 14.5
.412 Floating point Add-subtract:.
. 210. *
Multiply:. . . . .
. 340. *
Divide: . . . . . . . . . . 600. *
.413 Additional allowance for Indexing: . . . . . . . . . 0.53
Indirect addressing: . 1. 8
Re-complementing: .. zero.
. 414 ControlCompare: . . . . . . . . 2.6
Branch: . . . . . . . . . 1. 8
Compare and branch:. 2.6
.415 Counter control Step: . . . . . . . . . . . 1. 8
Step and test: . . . . . . 2.6
Test: . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
.416 Edit: . . . . . .
. ... not available.
.417 Convert: . . . . . . . . . . see Table 1.
.418 Shift: . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. 8 to 5.3.
.42
Processor Performance in Microseconds
.421 For random addressesFixed point
(24 bits)
c = ~ + b:
b = a + b:
Sum N items:
c = ab:
c
\"
=
alb:
10.5
8.8
3.5N
19.7
23.3
Floating point*
(48 bits)
220.
2220
220N.
350.
600.
* Performed by subroutine initiated by "trapped"
instruction code.
.422 For arrays of dataFixed point Floating point*
(24 bits)
(48 bits)
16.49
230.
ci = ai + bj
14.26
230.
b· = ai + bj
S6.m N item s:
6.63N
230N.
360.
c = c + aibj
28.66
.423 Branch based on comparison Numeric data: . . . . . 21. 53
Alphabetic data: . . . . 31. 53
.424 Switching Unchecked: .
. . 7. 63
Checked:. . .
. . 12.83
List search:
.. 20. 03+5N
.425 Format control, per character Unpack: . . . . . . . . . 170.
Compose: . . . . . . . . 170 .
.426 Table look-up, per N comparisons For a match: . . . . . . 5.4 + 5.4N
For least or greatest: 5.4 + 5.4N
For interpolation
point: . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 + 5. 4N
.427 Bit indicators Set bit in pattern: ... 10.5
Test bit in pattern: .. 7.9
.428 Moving, per N words: .7.0 + 11. ON
(91,000 24-bit words/ sec).
.5
ERRORS, CHECKS AND ACTION
Error
Check or
Interlock
Overflow:
Underflow:
Divisor too
small:
Shift faults:
check
Invalid instructions:
Abnormal end
of an I/O
operation:
Action
specific bit is set;
optionally, interrupt
occurs (interrupt
system is deactivated, instruction address is stored, and
a forced jump is
made to a specific
location for each
case).
Storage refer- }
ence:
·t h k optional halt; conReceipt of data: parr y c ec
sole light.
Internal reject:
Dispatch of
none.
data:
parity bits
are included, but
not checked.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
254:061.100
CDC 3100
Console
CONSOLE
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
3101 Desk Console.
Integrated Console.
. 12
Associated Unit:
Input-Output Typewriter .
. 13
Description
Two consoles, functionally identical to each other,
are available for the Control Data 3100 system the optional 3101 Desk Console and the standard
Integrated Console. Both consoles have indicators
for displaying various register contents and conditions within the system. Binary displays are provided, but not octal or decimal displays. Seven
groups of display lights are used to display the
operational registers of the computer.
A movable input keyboard is incorporated in both
console designs. This keyboard can either be
operated at the console or removed and carried to
a suitable nearby location. An input-output typewriter is included with the 3101 Desk Console, or
it can be separately obtained as the Model 3192 Online Monitor Typewriter. These units (the keyboard and the input-output typewriters) do not use
the regular data channels during operation, but
have their own buffer registers and direct access
to the computational module.
The 3101 Desk Console provides ample desk space
and a good view. The Integrated Console provides
a standup operator control panel for space-limited
or multiple-processor installations.
The "external" status indicators display the existing condition of the input-output channels, while six
columns of "internal" condition indicators provide
the following information:
11/64
•
Storage Active - for addressing purposes, the
four possible 8, 192-word sections of storage
are designated by digits 0-3. Whenever one of
these storage sections becomes active, the corresponding indicator light is lit.
•
Conditions - a Standby light indicates that the
main power switch is on, but that individual
supplies are still off; an Interrupt Disabled light
is on whenever the interrupt system is disabled
by the program.
•
Cycle - four cycles are represented: Read'
Next Instruction, Read Address, Read Operand,
and Store Operand. These indicators are lit
whenever the cycles are in progress.
•
Faults - these lights represent four arithmetic
faults: Arithmetic Overflow, Divide, Exponent
Overflow, and Decimal (BCD).
•
Temperature Warning and Temperature High up to four cabinet sections are represented.
The console switches are divided into two groups those used for normal operations of the system and
those used primarily for maintenance purposes.
Operational switches are included on the main console and on an entry keyboard. The keyboard replaces the Set and Clear pushbuttons that are found
on most Control Data computers for the manual
entry of information.
The main console switches provide for such operating controls as breakpoint/run mode selection,
automatic load/dump initiation for a designated
device, selective jump instruction keys, manual
interrupt, and master clear buttons. The keyboard switches provide for start and stop controls,
register display control, and the manual entry of
information into core storage or a designated
register.
254:071.100
CDC 3100
Input-Output
INPUT-OUTPUT AND RANDOM ACCESS PERIPHERAL UNITS
I
\"
All' of the Control Data 3000 Series computers, including the CDC 3100 system, use
the same input-output units, the same random access storage units, and the same controllers.
The program-compatible Control Data 3100, 3200, and 3300 computers also use the same supporting routines, although naturally both the timing of the routines and the loads placed on the
core storage modules by the input-output operations will vary between the different computer
systems. In order to place proper emphasis upon the family similarities and differences, our
coverage of the Control Data 3000 Series peripheral units as used in the CDC 3100 system is
organized as follows:
The Control Data 3200 Computer System Report includes:
The DESCRIPTION of each unit and controller (see pages
245:042.100 through 245:102.100) .
•
•
The PRICE of each unit and controller (see page 245:221. 101) .
The details of the SUPPORT PROGRAMS (if any) for each
unit.
This Computer System Report includes:
The LOADING that each peripheral unit imposes on the 3100
core storage modules (see the Simultaneous Operations
section, page 254:111. 101).
o
The TIMING details for code and radix conversions used in
connection with peripheral operations (see the Central
Processor section, page 254:051. 220).
© 1 964 Auerbach Carparatian and Infa, Inc.
11/64
254: 111.1 00
CDC 3100
Simultaneous Operations
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
1.
GENERAL
channel. The starting address is incremented and
the entire transfer sequence repeated until the
operation is complete, as evidenced by the starting
address becoming equal to the ending address. An
automatic interrupt can be specified to notify the
program immediately upon completion of the transfer.
The Control Data 3100 system allows for the connection of up to eight input-output data channels.
Each data channel is serviced by a bi-directional,
12-bit parallel interface unit called the 3106 Standard Communication Channel t. Up to eight different peripheral equipment controllers can be connected to one 3106. These facilities make it
possible for up to eight input-output operations on
any of 64 different controllers to proceed simultaneously with computation.
Each four-character word transferred uses one core
memory cycle (1. 75 microseconds) during its
accession or storage, and a further three Register
File cycles (also 1. 75 microseconds per cycle, as
the Register File is contained in core storage) are
used to control the transfer operation. The central
processor is allocated at least one memory cycle
after each input-output word is handled, so that
no more than one word can be transferred during
each five core mem ory cycles.
A choice df single- and dual-channel controllers is
available for the card and printer equipment. Full
line buffers are included with each of the printer
controllers, but card buffers are optional depending
upon the choice of card reader or card punch controller. The magnetic tape units, paper tape units,
and typewriter simply have 12-bit interfaces.
During the input-output operations, the central
processor is unable to gain access to the core
storage module involved, or to the Register File,
so computation is delayed. The probable delaying
effect which input-output operations will have on
processing can be calculated using the core storage
utilization figures which are listed for all the
standard peripheral units in Table I. Where two or
more core storage modules are incorporated into
a single computer system, it may be possible to
reduce such processor delays by overlapping storage
references.
Magnetic tape controllers can be selected from
among 8 different units that provide from 1 to 4
channel accesses, and which are capable of controlling from 1 to 16 tape transports. Thus, if
enough data channels are available, from one to
four tapes on each controller can be operational in
any combination, in addition to non-magnetic-tape
peripherals and the processor.
The so-called "block" operations (Search and Move)
can also occur in parallel with the main computational process, once they have been initiated.
.2
/
The input-output operations are of two types:
character-block transfers and word-block transfers. Character operations permit either 6 or 12
bits to be transferred in parallel between core
storage and the peripheral channel, while word
operations allow 24-bit transfers. Each inputoutput transfer is initiated after a series of instructures which connect the desired channel, test
for "busy" or other status conditions in the inputoutput equipment, and select the desired function.
The input-output transfer instruction (a two-word
instruction) is then issued to start the transfer.
After the starting and ending addresses for the
transfer are stored in reserved locations of the
processor's fast register file, the main program
is released from further control of the input-output
operation. For each transfer, the Communication
Channel issues a data transfer request to both
the input-output equipment and the priority controls of the register file. The character or word
address is then delivered from the register file
to the core storage address control, and the data
transfer is made between storage and the data
I
\
t A 24-bit interface unit (the 3107 Special Communication Channel) can be used in place of two 3206 units.
RULES
The following processes can take place simultaneously:
o
One computation; plus
o
One "block" operation (Search or Move); plus
o
A Console key-in operation; plus
o
As many buffered input-output operations* as
there are buffers (up to about 50); plus
o As many non-buffered input-output operations**
as there are data channels (a maximum of 8
channels); plus
*
The present printers are always buffered; card
equipment is optionally buffered.
**
Paper tape, magnetic tape, and random access
drum and disk operations are non-buffered; the
number of such operations may also be restricted
by the manner in which the controllers are connected to the data channels.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation ond Info, Inc.
11/64
254: 111. 101
.2
The number of concurrent input-output operations
may also be limited by the maximum throughput
capacity of the computer system, which is 456,000
characters per second.
RULES (eontd.)
•
***
CDC 3100
As many "non-supervised" peripheral operations*** as there are appropriate units.
Magnetic tape rewinding, backspace operations,
and searching for file marks, disk arm positioning
and address search operations are typical "nonsupervised" peripheral operations.
TABLE I: SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
Data Transmission
Start Time
OPERATION
Cycle
Time,
Time,
msee.
Core
Use
Channel
Use
Time,
msee.
Coreh
Use
Channel
Use
Time.
msee.
Core
Use
Channel
Use
828, 838 Disk Files
---
250 av
0.0
1 msee
Var
7.8 or
12.5%
Yes
0.0
---
---
1311 Disk Storage Drive
---
170 or
270 av
0.0
1 msee
Var
9.0%
Yes
0.0
---
---
2311 Disk Storage Drive
---
97.5 av
0.0
1 msce
Var
23%
Yes
0.0
---
---
3235 Drum Storage
34.4
17.2 av
0.0
1 msee
27%
Yes
0.0
---
---
861 Drum Storage
34.4
17.2 av
0.0
?
Var
Var
(350/1)%
Yes
0.0
---
862 Drum Storage
17.2
8.6 av
0.0
?
Var
(350/1)%
Yes
0.0
50.0
1B.0
0.0
Yes
32.0
17%
Yes
0.0
-----
-----
---
50.0
42.0
0.0
Yes
B.O
70%
Yes
0.0
---
---
415 Card Punch
250 cpm, unbuffered
415 Card Punch
240.0
4B.0
0.0
Yes
190.0
6.2%
Yes
2.0
0.0
No
250 cpm, bJJffered
240.0
4B.0
4.4% 2.2 maee 190.0
0.0%
No
2.0
0.0
No
405 Card Reader
1,200 cpm, unbuffered
405 Card Reader
1,200 cpm, buffered
523 Card Punch
100 cpm, unbuffered
523 Card Punch
100 cpm. buffered
544 Card Punch
250 cpm, unbuffered
544 Card Punch
250 cpm, buffered
3691 Paper Tape Reader
350 cps
3691 Paper Tape Punch
110 cps
3694 Paper Tape Reader
1,000 cps
3694 Paper Tape Punch
110 cps
600.0
B4.0
0.0
514.0
2.3%
Yes
2.0
0.0
No
600.0
84.0
2.B% 2.2 msee 514.0
0.0%
No
2.0
0.0
No
240.0
4B.0
0.0
190.0
6.1%
Yes
2.0
0.0
No
240.0
4B.0
4.4% 2.2 msec 190.0
0.0%
No
2.0
0.0
No
Yes
Yes
2.9
?
0.0
Yef?
2.9
<0.2%
Yes
2.0
0.0
No
9.0
?
0.0
Yes
9.0
<0.1%
Yes
3.0
0.0
No
1.0
?
0.0
Yes
1.0
<0.6%
Yes
O.B
0.0
No
3.0
0.0
Yes
9.0
<0.1%
Yes
0.0
No
3152 Line Printer
1501pm
400 +
9.7LS
0
---
---
375
<0.1%
0.1 msec 25 +
9.7LS
0.0
No
1403 Model 2 Printer
600 Ipm
100 +
5LS
0
---
---
BO
<0.3%
0.1 msec 20 +5LS
0.0
No
9.0
?
1403 Model 3 Printer
1,1001pm
55 +
5LS
0
---
---
35
<1. 0%
0.1 msec 20 +5LS
0.0
No
501 Printer
1,000 Ipm
60 +
6.7LS
0
---
---
45
<1.0%
0.1 msec 13 +
6.7LS
0.0
No
505 Printer
5001pm
120 +
6.7LS
0
---
---
105
<0.5%
0.1 msec 13 +
6.7LS
0.0
No
601 Magnetic Tape Unit
20.B KC
---
3.0
0.0
Yes
Var
3.4%
Yes
3.0
0.0
No
603 Magnetic Tape Unit
41.7 KC
---
2.75
0.0
Yes
Var
7.3%
Yes
2.25
0.0
No
604 Magnetic Tape Unit
60.0 KC
---
2.75
0.0
Yes
Var
10.5%
Yes
2.25
0.0
No
606 Magnetic Tape Unit
B3.4 KC
---
2.75
0.0
Yes
Var
14.5%
Yes
1. 75
0.0
No
607 Magnetic Tape Unit
120 KC
---
2.75
0.0
Yes
Var
21. 0%
Yes
1. 75
0.0
No
692 Magnetic Tape Unit
30 KC
---
?
0.0
Yes
Var
7.0%
Yes
?
0.0
No
-----
?
0.0
Yes
Var
14.0%
Yes
?
0.0
No
?
0.0
Yes
Var
21.0%
Yes
?
0.0
No
Var
<0.01% Yes
0
---
---
No
<0.05% No
100
0.0
No
694 Magnetic Tape Unit
696 Magnetic Tape Unit
3692 Program Controlled
Input-Output Typewriter
67
0
--- ---
3293 Iner.emental
Plotter
3.3
or 5.0
100
0.0
av
b
I
LS
Var
11/64
msee.
Stop Time
No
Average time - see main report section on this device for details.
For the word mode. If character mode is used, the core usage should be quadrupled.
Interlace factor (can be I, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32).
Number of lines sld.pped between successive printed lines.
Data transmission time varies with record length.
254: 151.1 00
CDC 3100
Software
SOFTWARE
The program-compatible Control Data 3100, 3200, and 3300 computer systems all
utilize the same software. For a complete description, refer to the CDC 3200 Computer System
Report, pages 245:151. 100 through 245:191. 600.
The Instruction List and Data Code Table for the Control Data 3100, 3200, and 3300
systems will also be found in the CDC 3200 report, on pages 245:121. 100 and 245:141. 100,
respectively. (The 3100 uses subroutines to simulate the floating-point and decimal arithmetic
instructions. )
I
/
I
.",
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
254:201.001
CDC 3100
System Performance
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING (254:201. 1)
These problems involve updating a mast~r file from information in a detail file and
producing a printed record of the results of each transaction. This application is one of the
most typical of commercial data processing jobs and is fully described in Section 4:200.1 of
the Users' Guide.
In the graphs for Standard File Problems A, B, C, and D, the total time required for
each standard configuration to process 10,000 master file records is shown by solid lines.
For Configuration VIlB, where all four input-output files are on magnetic tape, total times
for cases using both unblocked and blocked records in the detail and report files are shown by
means of solid and dashed lines, respectively. Central processor time becomes the controlling
factor in Configuration VIlB when moderate activity ratios are reached.
Worksheet Data Table 1 (page 254:201. 011) shows that the printer is the controlling
factor on total time required over most of the detail activity range for the integrated Configuration VI. In these configurations the detail file is read by the on-line card reader and
the report file is produced by the on-line printer. The central processor is occupied for only
a small fraction of the total processing time.
The master file record format is a mixture of alphameric BCD and pure binary numeric
items, designed to minimize the number of time-consuming radix conversion operations required. (Even so, most of the central processor time is devoted to editing and radix conversion
operations, using programmed, nonstandard subroutines.) An optimized degree of packing led
to a record length of 20 words (the equivalent of SO 6-bit characters).
SORTING (254:201. 2)
The standard estimate for sorting SO-character records by straightforward merging on
magnetic tape was developed from the time for Standard File Problem according to the method
explained in the Users' Guide, Paragraph 4:200.213, using a three-way merge.
MATRIX INVERSION (254:201. 3)
In matrix inversion, the object is to measure central processor speed on the straightforward inversion of a non-symmetric, non-singular matrix. No input-output operations are
involved. The standard estimate is based on the time to perform cumulative multiplications
(c = c + aib j ) in 36-bit precision floating point (see Paragraph 254:051.422).
GENERALIZED MATHEMATICAL PROCESSING
This problem is normally executed in floating point, which is available in the Control
Data 3100 only through the use of time-consuming subroutines. The cost of such subroutines can
be seen in the Matrix Inversion graph, so the Generalized Mathematical Processing Problem has
not been programmed for the Control Data 3100 system.
GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING (254:201. 5)
The Generalized Statistical Processing program uses extensive fixed-point computation,
which is probably the strongest feature of the Control Data 3100 system. The problem measures
overall system performance on a common statistical application: the development of crosstabulation tables, as in the analysis of the results of a survey. The problem is defined in
Section 4:200; 5 of the Users' Guide, and the performance of the Control Data 3100 is shown in
Graph 254:201. 500.
© 1 964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
CDC 3100
254:201.011
WORKSHEET DATA TARLE 1
Configuration
Reference
Item
1
Char/block
K
Records/block
960
960
960
12
12
12
~160
File 4
~1=File2
msce/switch
Output
--_.-1-------- 1-------
f--~- _ _1_.~_ I- ___!'-~S_
1- _ _0_.1_2___ - 1--~2_
~--- I-~~File2
o ,.
Fil,
Central
Processor
Times
f-~8 _ _ _
~--- I-----0~_
2.05
~-- I--~---
msce/record
msee/detail
~_+b9 _ _ _
mseel report
Problem A
b7 + b8
~-
and
a3 K
column.
.-
File 1 Master In
~D~
~Reports
Total
_O~_
_2~_
2.70
2.70
C.P.
C.P.
I/O
I/O
1.6
s.r--
1 - - - - js:r-1 - -
6~
1 - - ~- 1---- 62~1 - 1.45
1.45
5.r-1 - -
26
1.45
-----I - - - - 1.45
1.45
1.45
1---- f----t.4~1 - -
1.44
4:200.1132
_O~_
1.6
2.16
~-
I--z:lG -
76.20
1,920
76.20
Std. routines
600
1----_.- - - - - _ . Fixed
1-----_.3 (Blocks 1 to 23)
f---s(ru;;cks 24 to 4·S
Space
I--~---
I---~""-:"""
~
26
1--
1---
~4- -2-:-W--170
4:200.114
76.20
.~
64
(24-bit word)
Unit of measure
Standard
File
Problem A
2,000
600
600
----_.-- -2,000
2,000
-----.- -------- _._--600
600
600
~,ooo-- -1;000--- ~o~-
4:200.1151
f - - = , - - - - - I----:- . - - - - - _._----- - - - - 2,000
Files _ _. 2,000
2,000
1---.
1-------- ' - - - _ . - --------
600
600
600
6, SOO
6,800
6, SOO
Working
Total
*
I/O
1.6
al
~MasterOu
4
I-----0~_
2.70
C.P.
msce/block
for C.P.
dominant
F=1.0
o. ,.
o. ,.
1_.6_
~--- ~~- 1- _ _ 0 _ _. _
msce/block
msce/work
3
Standard
File
4:200.112
38'
File 4
msectPena! ty
2
1- _ _26_*_ _ _ _
12.0
- - - f-------- 1--------
~3_ _ _
Times
_ _ _2_6_ _ _ _ 1- _ _26_ _. _
_5_0_ _ _ f-- _ _l~ _
~3_ _ _
Standard
File
Problem A
Input-
(File 1)
(File 1)
~1=File2
msee/block
VII B (Blocked
Files 3 & 4)
VII B (Unblocked
Files 3 & 4)
VI
12 records per block.
WORKSHEET DATA TABLE 2
Configuration
Item
7
Unit name
Size of block
Standard
Statistical
ProblemA
VIIB
·603 Tape
604 Tape
960 char
B
15
15
msec/block
Tl
34.0
26.0
msee penalty
T3
~Ck
T5
msec/table
T7
mscc/ree~
0.35
0.35
0.01
- - - - - - - - ~._0_1____________
0.01
0.01
--- 1------_.0.055
Reference
960 char
Records/block
C.P.
11/64
VI
0.055
4:200.512
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
254:201.100
.1
GENERALIZED FILE PROCESSING
.11
Standard File Problem A
.111 Record sizes
Master file: . . . . . . . 108 characters (packed into
20 CDC 3100 words).
Detail file: . . . . • • . 1 card.
Report file: • . . . . . . 1 line.
.112 Computation: . . . . . . . standard.
.113 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.113
. 114 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below .
. 115 Storage space required
Configuration VI: ... 6,800 words.
Configuration VII B
(Unblocked Files
3 & 4): . . . . . . . . 6,800 words.
Configuration VII B
(Blocked Files
3 & 4): . . . . . . . 6,800 words.
100.0
7
4
--~
2
10.0
Time in Minutes
to Process 10, 000
Master File
Records
7
-'
./
/
4
/
I
2
7
1.0
7
,
r
4
/"
~
~
.-.-
---
_..
~
v~_
l-
--
-
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
NOTE: Dashed line denotes blocked Files 3 and 4;
Roman numerals denote standard system
configurations shown in Section 254:031.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Inf.o.lnc.
11/64
254:201.120
. 12
CDC 3100
Standard File Problem B
.122 Computation: . . . . . . . standard .
. 123 Timing Basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.12.
.124 Graph: . . • . . . . . . . . see graph below.
. 121 Record sizes
Master file: . . . . . . . 54 characters.
Detail file: . . . . . . • 1 card.
Report file: . . . . . . 1 line.
100.0
7
4
2
~
10.0
Time in Minutes
to Process 10, 000
Master File
Records
./
7
./
4
V
2
/
/
,,
7
../
I
~
.-
./
I
II
2
"
/
1.0
4
-
./
./
V~
....
~
.. -...,..-
~
...
...,..
"<.J}}1l-
-~
..
-
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
NOTE: Dashed line denotes blocked Files 3 and 4;
Roman numerals denote standard system
configurations shown in Section 254:031.
/
11/64
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
. 13
""-
254:201.130
Standard File Problem C
. 132 Computation: ..
. 133 Timing Basis: .
. 131 Record sizes
Master file: . . . . . . . 216 characters.
Detail file: . . . . . . . 1 card.
Report file: . . . . . . . 1 line.
... standard .
. using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.13.
.134 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
100.0
7
4
2
~
10.0
-"'"
7
Time in Minutes
to Process 10,000
Master File
Records
-
./
'7'
4
2
1.0
7
/
/
I
-
VIIB
! --------
~
---VllB
_---
4
2
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
NOTE: Dashed line denotes blocked Files 3 and 4:
Roman numberals denote standard system
configurations shown in Section 254:031.
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
254:201. 140
. 14
CDC 3100
Standard File Problem D
.142 Computation: . . . . . . . trebled .
.143 Timing Basis: . . . . • . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide .
4:200.14.
. 144 Graph: . . . • . . . . . . . see graph below.
• 141 Record sizes
Master file: . . . . . . . 108 characters.
Detail file: . . . • . . . 1 card.
Report file: . . . . . . . 1 line.
100.0
7
4
2
~
10.0
Time in Minutes
to Process 10,000
Master File
Records
7
./
/'
-
"
/
4
/
)
2
I
1.0
7
•
II•
4
II/~
.- ---
~
......
=-
-
::;:;ll~
2
O. 1
0.0
0.1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
NOTE: Dashed line denotes blocked Files 3 and 4;
Roman numerals denote standard system
configurations shown in Section 254:031.
/
11/64
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
254:201.200
.2
SORTING
.21
Standard Problem Estimates
.212 Key size: . . . . . . . . . 8 characters .
. 213 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.213 .
.214 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
• 211 Record size: . . . . . . . 80 characters.
1,000
I
"
7
4
2
,
100
7
4
Time in Minutes to
put Records into
Required Order
V
V ~I
/
2
10
V
,,
7
,
VV
/
/
V
""
/
4
,J'I
/V
2
~y
1.0
/
,,
7
/
~/
2
1/
0.1
2
100
V
4
/
I'"
-I
If
"
/
4
~'$)
/
V
If'
/
~/
2
7
4
7
1,000
2
10,000
4
7
100,000
Number of Records
NOTE: Roman numerals denote standard system
configurations shown in Section 254:031.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
254:201.300
CDC 3100
.3
MATRIX INVERSION
.31
Standard Problem Estimates
.312 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.312; floating-point
arithmetic performed by
subroutines .
. 313 Graph: . . . • . . . . . . . see graph below.
. 311 Basic parameters: ..• general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating
point to at least 8
decimal digits.
10.0
7
4
~
2
I
1.0
7
J
I
4
Time in Minutes
for Complete
Inversion
II
I
2
II
0.1
7
I
L
4
/
2
/
I
V
0.01
7
'I
4
II
:I
2
I
I
0.001
2
1
4
7
2
4
10
2
100
Size of Matrix
11/64
7
4
7
1,000
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
254:201.500
.5
GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING
.51
Standard Statistical Problem A Estimates
.512 Computation: . . . . . . . augment T elements in
cross- tabulation tables .
. 513 Timing basis: . . . . . . using estimating procedures
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.513 .
. 514 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see below.
.511 Record size: . • . . . . . thirty 2-digit integral
numbers.
100.0
7
4
~
/'
2
~'9 V
~,,'7
10.0
,
7
Time in
Milliseconds
per Record
L
4
ILl'
II'
VI
/
2
VUB
/
1.0
7
4
2
0.1
2
1
4
2
7
4
2
7
10
100
4
7
1,000
T, Number of Augmented Elements
Roman numerals denote standard configurations.
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
254:221.101
CDC 3100
Price Data
PRICE DATA
PRICES
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
No.
Name
Monthly
Rental
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchase
$
$
$
2,700
173.00
95,000
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
3104
COMPUTER: 6, 24, and 48-bit
modes, three index registers,
indirect addressing. Includes con
sole, communication channel,
4,096 words of storage, and control for referencing up to 32,768
words of storage and up to four
3106 communication channels.
DATA
CHANNELS
3106
COMMUNICATION CHANNEL:
bi-directional, buffered, 12-bit
data exchange. Permits attachment of one to eight 3100, 3200,
3400, or 36,00 peripheral controllers to a 3100 system.
120
35.00
5,000
3107
COMMUNICATIONS CHANNEL:
bi-directional, buffered, 24-bit
data exchange. Includes 12 to
24- bit assembly/disassembly,
permits attachment of one to
eight peripheral controllers to a
3100 system.
200
50.00
8,500
3108
STORAGE MODULE: 4,096
words or 16,384 characters of
magnetic core storage.
700
102.00
30,000
3109
STORAGE MODULE: 8,192
wcrds or 32, 768 characters of
magnetic core storage.
8io
127.00
42,000
3103
STORAGE MODULE: 16,384
words or 65,536 characters of
magnetic core storage. Each
word or character is parity
checked. One read/write control,
accessible from two processors
or special devices.
1,800
148.00
80,000
3192
ON-LINE MONITOR TYPEWRITER: direct connection into 3104
computer.
240
85.00
9,000
INTERNAL
STORAGE
/
INPUTOUTPUT
NOTE:
All Control Data 3000 Series computers use the same peripheral units. These
peripheral units are described in the CDC 3200 Computer System Report, and
their prices are listed in the Price Data section beginning on page 245:221. 101.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
/
~.
CDC 3300
Control Data Corporation
/
(
\
"-.
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
CDC 3300
Control Data Corporation
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
255:001.001
CDC 3300
Contents
CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
11.
12.
14.
15.
20.
21.
22.
Introduction . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. ...... .
Data Structure . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. .... .
System Configuration .
. . . . . . . .
. .... .
VIlA 10-Tape General System (Integrated) . . . . . . . . . . . .
VIlB
10-Tape General System (Paired) . . . . . . . .
Internal Storage
Core Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central Processor. . . . . . . . .
. .............. .
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peripheral Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Simultaneous Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instruction List . . . . . . .
. .................. .
Data Code Table. . . . . . .
. .................. .
Software. . . . . . . . . . . .
. .................. .
System Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksheet Data Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generalized File Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Matrix Inversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generalized Mathematical Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generalized Statistical Processing . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . .
Physical Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Price Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . .
255:011
255:021
255:031
255:031.4
255:031.5
255:041
255:051
255:061
255:071
255:111
245:121*
245:141*
255:151
255:201
255:201. 011
255:201.1
255:201. 2
255:201. 3
255:201. 4
255:201. 5
245:211*
245:221*
* Refer to indicated section of the CDC 3200 Computer System
Report.
,/
\
/
I
@1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
./
255:011.100
CDC 3300
Introduction
INTRODUCTION
The Control Data 3300 computer system was announced in the summer of 1964 as a
faster version of the CDC 3200 system. First deliveries of the new system probably will not
be made before the Spring of 1966; the 3300 was announced primarily to assure users of the
CDC 3100 and 3200 computer systems that they will be able to move up to a larger, faster
computer without reprogramming and conversion problems. At present, this assurance is
probably the most important single characteristic of the CDC 3300, although as delivery approaches, interest may well focus upon the matured software systems which users will be
able to transfer from the CDC 3200 to the 3300 system. These software systems will include
FORTRAN and COBOL compilers, a report generator, an operating system (SCOPE), a linear
programming package, and a PERT program.
The CDC 3300 is a scientific computer system with large-scale performance capabilities (as judged against 1964 equipment). The cycle time of its core storage modules is
800 nanoseconds, and that of its Register File (used for various control purposes) is 300
nanoseconds. Its instruction times are correspondingly fast. Fixed-point, 24-bit addition
takes 1. 6 microseconds; floating-point, 36-bit preCision addition takes 7 microseconds;
and decimal addition takes 7.6 microseconds for 12-digit operands. The binary multiplication times are 6 microseconds and 11 microseconds for fixed-point and floating-point operations, respectively. There are no hardware facilities for decimal multiplication or division.
The off-line search facilities and the interrupt system used in the Control Data
3200 computer system are included in the 3300 system, without alteration.
The input-output throughput capacity has been increased by 60% over the CDC
3200's capacity, to a maximum of 4,333,333 characters per second. The number of data
channels that can be connected remains at eight, so the number of concurrent operations
that can be simUltaneously supervised by the central processor (also eight) is unchanged.
The maximum amount of addressable core storage has been increased fourfold
from its capacity of 32,768 24-bit words in the CDC 3200 system, to 131,072 words. It
is not yet known whether the whole of this storage will be character-addressable, as well
as word-addressable.
A multiprogramming facility will be included in the Control Data 3300 repertoire.
Presently-announced features (dynamic storage protection and automatic program relocation), while useful in themselves, will not help to l'cduce the time involved in switching
from one program to another. Where this switching is at all frequent, a considerable
executive program overhead may be incurred in interchanging and protecting the contents
of the index registers and parts of the Register File.
The CDC 3300, like the CDC 3200 system, is designed to enable multi-computer
installations to be simply organized. All 16, 384-word core storage modules are independent and permit access by either of two processors. Most of the peripheral units can be
supplied with dual-channel controllers and switched from one processor to another under
program control.
The peripheral units available with the Control Data 3300 ~ystem are exactly
the same as those available for the Control Data 3100 and 3200 systems. They are described in detail in Computer System Report No. 245, on the Control Data 3200. Particularly interesting peripheral units include IBM System/360-compatible magnetic tape units,
and the Model 861 and 862 Drum Storage units which can transfer data at up to 2,000,000
characters per second.
The software for the Control Data 3300 will be taken directly from the Control
Data 3200 system, except for some changes to the SCOPE Operating System to adapt it for
multiprogrammed operation. No alterations in any compilers, assemblers, or utility
programs are expected to be necessary.
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc,
11/64
255:021.100
CDC 3300
Doto Structure
DATA STRUCTURE
·1
.2
STORAGE LOCATIONS
Name of Location
Size
Purpose or Use
Word:
24 bits
Character:
Block:
6 bits
1 to N characters
or 1 to N words
basic addressable unit
(data or instruction).
addressable data unit.
Search, Move, and Inputoutput instructions .
INFORMATION FORMAT
Type of Information
Representation
Operand: . . . . . . .
24- or 48-bit fixed point word.
48-bit floating point word.
6-bit character.
4-bit BCD character.
lor 2 words.
1 to 13 BCD characters.
Instruction:
Field: . . .
© 1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
255:031.001
CDC 3300
System Configuration
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
GENERAL
Every Control Data 3300 computer system includes the following units:
•
A 3300 General Processor.
•
A O. 8-microsecond Core Storage Unit ranging from 8,192 to 32,768 words
(32,768 to 131,072 characters) in capacity.
•
A desk console with detachable keyboard and an adjacent I/O typewriter station.
Q
A Power Converter and Control Unit.
Two 3306 Data Channels are included in the basic system. Up to six more can be added,
so that a fully-extended Control Data 3300 computer system will have eight data channels. Eight
peripheral units or controllers can be connected to each data channel.
The data channels used in all of the Control Data 3000 Series computers present a common interface with peripheral units. As a result of this, any of the 3000 Series peripheral units
can be connected through a 3306 Data Channel to a Control Data 3300 computer. The available
peripheral units are described in the Control Data 3200 Computer System Report. Details of the
loadings these units place on a Control Data 3300 computer system are described in the Simultaneous Operations section of this report, starting on page 255:111.100.
Some peripheral units or controllers can be connected to more than one data channel.
This facility may be used either to allow two concurrent data transmissions to take place, or to
allow the peripheral unit to be switched between two computer systems. A bank of magnetic
tape units connected to a dual-channel controller is a case where multiple data transmissions
would be the normal reason for having the two data channels; while a printer connected to two
different computer systems by way of a dual-channel controller could be used by either system,
as the situation in the computer room demands.
The core storage modules can similarly be connected to, and accessed by, two computers. Each 8, 192-word module is independent and permits dual access by a second processor
or special device.
SELECTION OF REPRESENTATIVE CONFIGURATIONS
The Control Data 3300 computer system is shown in the following Standard System
Configurations, as defined in the Users' GUide, page 4:030.100:
•
•
11/64
Configuration VIlA; 10-Tape General Integrated Configuration .
Configuration VIIB; 10-Tape General Paired Configuration, using a Control
Data 160 Computer System as the satellite system.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.1
255:031.1 00
10-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (INTEGRATED); CONFIGURATION VIIA
Deviations from Standard Configuration:
. core storage is 33% larger.
3 less index registers provided.
card reader is 140% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
Equipment
32,768 words of Core Storage
INA
3300 General Processor
Console with Monitor Typewriter
INA
3306 Data Channels (4)
INA
405 Card Reader (1,200 cpm)
3248 Control
$ 400
100
415 Card Punch (250 cpm)
3446 Controller
295
450
505 Line Printer (500 lpm)
3256 Controller
635
515
604 60KC Magnetic Tapes (6)
3229 Controller
3,600
600
604 60KC Magnetic Tapes (4)
3228 Controller
2,400
425
TOTAL RENTAL:
$ INA
INA: Prices not announced to date.
©1964 Auerbach Carporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
255:031.200
.2
CDC 3300
10-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (PAIRED); CONFIGURATION VIIB*
Deviations from Standard Configuration: .
3 less index registers.
direct connection to satellite system.
card reader is 1100% faster.
Eguipment
16,384 words of Core Storage
INA
3300 General Processor
Console with Monitor Typewriter
INA
3206 Data Channels (2)
405 Card Reader (1,200 cpm)
3248 Controller
To Satellite
160 System
(at right)
INA: Prices not announced to date.
11/64
$ 400
100
604 60KC Magnetic Tape Units (4)
3228 Controller
2,400
425
604 60KC Magnetic Tape Units (4)
3228 Controller
2,400
425
TOTAL ON-UNE EQUIPMENT:
$ INA
TOTAL SATE LUTE EQUIPMENT:
$5,165
TOTAL RENTAL:
$ INA
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
255:031.201
SATELliTE EQUIPMENT (CDC 160)
Deviations from Standard Configuration: .
direct connection to main system.
core storage is 100% larger.
multiply/divide is included.
paper tape equipment is included.
card reader is 140% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
magnetic tapes are 30% slower.
Eguipment
4,096 12-bit words of Core Storage
160 Processor
$1,500
Console with Monitor Typewriter
Paper Tape Reader (350 cps)
Paper Tape Punch (110 cps)
3681 Data Channel Converter
3682 Satellite Coupler
275
175
405 Card Reader (1,200 cpm)
3248 Controller
400
100
415 Card Punch (250 cpm)
3446 Controller
295
450
505 Line Printer (500 lpm)
3256 Controller
635
515
601 21KC Magnetic Tapes (2)
3127 Controller
500
320
TOTAL SATELLITE EQUIPMENT:
i
$5,165
To 3300 System
(at left)
,
..-
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
255:041.100
CDC 3300
Internal Storage
Core Storage
INTERNAL STORAGE: CORE STORAGE
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .
.12
Basic Use: . . . . . . . . working storage.
random access storage.
intercommunication with
other computer systems.
. 13
Description
A Control Data 3300 computer system must contain
8,192 24-bit word locations of core storage, and
can optionally be connected to a 3309 Storage
Module, which is a second, independent 8, 192word module, for a total of 16,384 words. Additionally, the 3300 computer system can be connected to up to seven 3303 Storage Modules, each
of 16,384 words, for a total potential capacity of
131,072 words, or 524,288 characters, of core
storage.
11/64
The 3309 and 3303 Storage Modules differ in their
function as well as in their size. The 3309 is
connected directly to a single 3300 computer
system, while each of the 3303 Storage Modules can
be connected to two different computer systems.
Control Data expects the 3303 Modules to be used
for random access storage and for inter-computer
communication, rather than as regular working
storage.
3300 General Processor,
containing 8K words.
3309 Storage Module (8K).
3303 Storage Module (16K).
All the core storage units have cycle times of 0.8
microseconds and access times of 0.4 microseconds.
Each module is independent, and significant speed
increases can be achieved by placing the instructions in one bank and the operands in another, or
by separating the input-output areas from the
computational areas in a program.
. 14
Availability: ..
?
.15
First Delivery:
Spring, 1966.
255:051.100
CDC 3300
Central Processor
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: . . . . . . . . . . 3300 General Processor .
. 12
Description
and its facilities, reference should be made to the
description of the CDC 3215 General Processor on
page 245:051. 100 .
.13
Preliminary details indicate that the CDC 3300
.14
General Processor will be a faster version of the
CDC 3215 General Processor, with a few additional .2
instructions introduced to simplify multiprogramming, and the ability to address up to 131,072 words
of storage. The reader is referred to the descrip.3
tion of the 3215 General Processor on page
245:051. 100 (in the CDC 3200 Computer System
Report) for details of the facilities of the 3300
Processor.
The faster operation of the CDC 3300 results from
its faster core storage cycle time (0.8 versus 1. 25
microseconds), a reduction in the proportion of the
core storage cycle which is needed simply to access data (50% of the complete cycle, versus 60%
in the CDC 3200), and a reduction in the cycle time
of the 64-word Register File (300 versus 500 nanoseconds). The Register File itself will cycle independently of the core storage; this will help by reducing the load placed on the core storage by
input-output operations rather than by speeding up
the computational operations.
The multiprogramming facilities announced to date
consist of dynamic storage protection and automatic program relocation. Only one set of three index
registers and one Register File are provided, so
that Switching from one program to another will
usually entail unloading and restoring most, if not
all, of these registers.
,/
I
\
"
Only preliminary information about the performance
of the Control Data 3300 computer system is available to date. This infor,mation has been used to
derive instruction times and subroutine times,
which differ from those reported for the Control
Data 3200 computer system. These times are reported below and in Table I. For the rest of the details regarding the Control Data 3300 Processor
First Delivery: . . . . . Spring, 1966.
Availability: . . . . . . . ?
PROCESSING FACILITIES
See Paragraph 245:051. 2 in the CDC 3200 report.
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
See Paragraph 245:051. 3 in the CDC 3200 report.
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
.41
Instruction Times in Microseconds
Binary
(24 bits)
BCD
(12 char)
.411 Fixed point Add-subtract: . . . . . 1. 8
7.4
not available.
Multiply: •.••..•.• 5.0 to 7.0
not available.
Divide: •••••.•.•. 7.3
.412 Floating point Add-subtract: ••••. 6.4 to 7.7
Multiply: ..•••.•. 9.0 to 11. 5
Divide: •••.•••••• 13.0
.413 Additional allowance for Indexing:. • • • • • • • • O. 24
Indirect addressing: . 0.8
Re-complementing: • 0.0
.414 Control Compare: •••••.•. 1. 2
Branch: ••.•••.•. 0.8
Compare and branch: 1. 2
.415 Counter control Step: . . . . . . . . . . . 0.8
Step and test: .••.. 1. 2
Test: •••••••••.• 1. 2
.416 Edit: • • • . • • . • • • • • not available.
.417 Convert:. • • . • • . . • • see Table I.
.418 Shift: •••••.•••.•• 0.8 to 2.4
.42
Processor Performance in Microseconds
Fixed point
{24 bits}
BCD
(12 char)
Floating point
(48 bits}
.421 For random addresses
c = a+ b:
b = a+ b:
Sum Nitems:
c = ab:
c = alb:
4.8
4.0
1.6N
9.2
11.2
17.5
17.5
7.4N
not available
not available
11.9
11.9
7.0N
15.0
15.0
.422 For arrays of data ci = ~ + bj:
b j = ~ + bj:
Sum N items:
c= c + aibj:
7.6
6.8
3.1N
13.4
22.5
23.7
8.8
14.5
14.5
8.5
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
11/64
255:051.423
CDC 3300
For least or greatest:2. 7 + 2. 7N
For interpolation
point: .••••...•. 2.7 + 2. 7N
.427 Bit indicators Set bit in pattern: .•• 4.8
Test bit in pattern: .• 3.6
.428 Moving, per N words:. 2.1 + 2.9N (345,000
24-bit words/ sec) •
.423 Branch based on comparison Numeric data: . . . . . 10.0
Alphabetic data: . . . . 10.0
.424 SwitchingUnchecked: . • . . • . . 3.45
Checked: •••.•..• 5.8
List search: ...••. 9.4 + 2.7N
. 425 Format control, per character Unpack: . • . . . . . . . 76.
Compose: . • . • . . . • 76.
.426 Table look-up, per N comparisons For a match: . . . . . . 2.7+ 2. 7N
.5
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
See Paragraph 245:051. 5 in the CDC 3200 report.
TABLE I: CONVERSION TIMES FOR STANDARD SUBROUTINES
ORIGINAL OPERAND
MICROSECONDS REQUffiED FOR CONVERSION TO:
Magnitude
Internal
BCD (1)
Fixed Point
Binary (2)
Column BCD
(4)
Row BCD
(5)
Internal BCD
<10 7
-
9/digit
9/digit +
12/operand
4,000/card
20,000/card
Internal BCD
>10 7
-
15/digit
15/digit +
12/operand
4,000/card
20,000/card
Fixed Point
Binary
<10 7
14/digit
-
12/operand
14/digit +
4,000/card
14/digit +
20,000/card
Fixed Point
Binary
>10 7
28/digit
-
12/operand
28/digit +
4,000/card
28/digit +
20,000/card
Floating Point
Binary
< 10 7
14/digit +
18/operand
18/operand
-
14/digit +
18/operand +
4,000/card
14/digit +
18/oper and +
20,000/card
Floating Point
Binary
>10 7
28/digit +
18/operand
18/operand
-
28/digit +
18/operand +
4,000/card
28/digit +
18/operand +
20,000/card
Type
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Note:
Floating Point
Binary (3)
Internal BCD is used in decimal arithmetic, for card reader input,
and for printer output.
Fixed Point Binary is used for 24 or 48-bit bjnary arithmetic.
Floating Point Binary is used for all floating point operations.
Column BCD is used for output via buffered card punch equipment.
Row BCD is used for output via unbuffered card punch equipment.
"digit" refers to decimal digits in all of the above times.
/
11/64
255:061.100
CDC 3300
Console
CONSOLE
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . .
3301 Desk Console .
.12
Associated Unit:
Input-Output Typewriter is
included with the 3301.
.13
e
Storage Active - for addressing purposes, the
four possible 8, 192-word sections of storage
are designated by digits 0-3. Whenever one of
these storage sections becomes active, the corresponding indicator light is lit.
o
Conditions - a Standby light indicates that the
main power switch is on, but that individual
supplies are still off; an Interrupt Disabled light
is on whenever the interrupt system is disabled
by the program.
Description
Details of the 3301 Desk Console have not been
completely specified, but in general it will be similar to the 3201 Desk Console used with CDC 3200
computer systems, modified as necessary for the
additional storage capabilities of the newer system
and for its storage protection and automatic relocation features. The following description (taken from
the Console section of the CDC 3200 Computer Sys~
tern Report) describes the 3201 Desk Console, and
contains the best currently available information
about the 3301.
The Desk Console includes a movable input keyboard, which can either be operated at the console
or removed and carried to a suitable nearby location. An input-output typewriter is also incorporated in the console design. Both the keyboard and
the typewriter have direct access to the computational module, and do not use the regular data
chalUlels.
Octal or decimal displays are used to display the
contents of the seven operational registers. The
operator sitting at the console has a good view of
these displays, and of the equipment itself.
The "external" status indicators display the existing condition of the input-output channels, while
six columns of "internal" condition indicators provide the following information:
o Cycle - four cycles are represented: Read
Next Instruction, Read Address, Read Operand,
and Store Operand. These indicators are lit
whenever the cycles are in progress.
o
Faults - these lights represent four arithmetic
faults: Arithmetic Overflow, Divide, Exponent
Overflow, and Decimal (BCD).
o
Temperature Warning and Temperature Highup to four cabinet sections are represented.
The console switches are divided into two groups those used for normal operations of the system and
those used primarily for maintenance purposes.
Operational switches are included on the main console and on an entry keyboard. The keyboard replaces the Set and Clear pushbuttons that are found
on most Control Data computers for the manual
entry of information
The main console switches provide for such operating controls as breakpoint/run mode selection,
automatic load/dump initiation for a designated
device, selective jump instruction keys, manual
interrupt, and master clear buttons. The keyboard switches provide for start and stop controls,
register display control, and the manual entry of
information into core storage or a designated
register.
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
255:071.100
CDC 3300
Input-Output
INPUT-OUTPUT AND RANDOM ACCESS PERIPHERAL UNITS
All of the Control Data 3000 Series computers, including the CDC 3300 system, use the
same input-output units, the same random access storage units, and the same controllers. The
program-compatible Control Data 3100, 3200, and 3300 computers also use the same supporting
routines, although naturally both the timing of the routines and the load placed on the core storage
modules by the input-output operations will vary between the different computer systems. In .
order to place proper emphasis upon the family similarities and differences, our coverage of the
Control Data 3000 Series peripheral units as used in the CDC 3300 system is organized as follows:
The Control Data 3200 Computer System Report includes:
•
•
•
The DESCRIPTION of each unit and controller (see pages
245:042.100 through 245:102. 100).
The PRICE of each unit and controller (see page
245:221. 101).
The details of the SUPPORT PROGRAMS (if any) for
each unit.
This Computer System Report includes:
•
•
11/64
The LOADING that each peripheral unit imposes on the
3300 core storage modules (see the Simultaneous Operations section, page 255:111.101).
The TIMING details for code and radix conversions used
in connection with peripheral operations (see the Central
Processor section, page 255 :051. 423).
255: 111.1 00
CDC 3300
Simultaneous Operations
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
1.
GENERAL
After the starting and ending addresses for the
transfer are stored in reserved locations of the
processor's fast register file, the main program
is released from further control of the input-output
operation. For each transfer, the Communication
Channel issues a data transfer request to both
the input-output equipment and the priority controls of the register file. The character or word
address is then delivered from the register file
to the core storage address control, and the data
transfer is made between storage and the data
channel. The starting address is incremented and
the entire transfer sequence repeated until the
operation is complete, as evidenced by the starting
address becoming equal to the ending address. An
automatic interrupt can be specified to notify the
program immediately upon completion of the transfer.
The Control Data 3300 system allows for the connection of up to eight input-output data channels.
Each data channel is serviced by a bi-directional,
12-bit parallel interface unit called the 3306 Standard Communications Channel t . Up to eight different peripheral equipment controllers can be connected to one 3306. These facilities make it
possible for up to eight input-output operations on
any of 64 different controllers to proceed simultaneously with computation.
A choice of singla- and dual-channel controllers is
available for the card and printer equipment. Full
line buffers are included with each of the printer
controllers, but card buffers are optiOlial depending
upon the choice of card reader or card punch controller. The magnetic tape units, paper tape units,
and typewriter simply have 12-bit interfaces.
Each four-character word transferred uses one
core memory cycle (0.8 microseconds) during
its accession or storage, and a further three
Register File cycles (0.3 microseconds) are used
to control the transfer operation. During these
operations the central processor is unable to
gain access to the core storage module involved,
or to the Register File, so computation is delayed.
The probable delaying effect which input-output
operations will have on processing can be calculated
using the core storage utilization figures which are
listed for all the standard peripheral units in
Table 1. Where two or more core storage modules
are incorporated into a single computer system,
it may be possible to reduce such processor delays
by overlapping storage references.
Magnetic tape controllers can be selected from
among 8 different units that provide from 1 to 4
channel accesses, and which are capable of controlling from 1 to 16 tape transports. Thus, if
enough data channels are available, from one to
four tapes on each controller can be operational in
any combination, in addition to non-magnetic-tape
peripherals and the processor.
/
I
i
"--
The so-called "block" operations (Search and Move)
can also occur in parallel with the main computational proceSs, once they have been initiated. The
Search instruction initiates a search through a
block of character storage addresses looking for
equality or inequality with a character contained in
the instruction word. The Move order is used to
move a block of n characters from one area of
storage to another. It should be noted, however,
that no real advantage results from this feature if
the program requires access to the same storage
module as that involved in the block operation. As
a result, careful program design is required to
realize the potential benefits of these overlapped
internal operations.
The input-output operations are of two types:
character-block transfers and word-block transfers. Character operations permit either 6 or 12
bits to be transferred in parallel between core
storage and the peripheral channel, while word
operationE> allow 24-bit transfers. Each inputoutput transfer is initiated after a series of instructions which connect the desired channel,
test for "busy" or other status conditions in the
input-output equipment, and select the desired
function. The input-output transfer instruction (a
two-word instruction) is then issued to start the
transfer.
t A 24-bit interface unit (the 3307 Special Communication Channel) canbe used in place of two 3206 units.
.2
RULES
The following processes can take place simultaneously:
o One computation; plus
o
One "block" operation (Search or Move); plus
o
A Console key-in operation; plus
o
As many buffered input-output operations* as
there are buffers (up to about 50); plus
o
As many non-buffered input-output operations**
as there are data channels (a maximum of 8
channels); plus
*
The present printers are always buffered; card
equipment is optionally buffered.
**
Paper tape, luagnetic tape, and random access drum
and disk operations are non-buffered; the number
of such operations may also be restricted by the
manner in which the controllers are connected to
the data channels.
© 1 964 Auerbach Corporation and Info, Inc.
11/64
255: 111.101
•
***
CDC 3300
As many "non-supervised" peripheral operations*** as there are appropriate units.
The number of concurrent input-output operations
may also be limited by the maximum throughput
capacity of the computer system, which is
4,444,444 characters per second.
Magnetic tape rewinding, backspace operations,
and searching for file marks, disk arm positioning
and address search operations are typical "nonsupervised" peripheral operations.
TABLE I: SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
Start Time
Cycle
Time,
DEVICE
Time,
msec.
msec.
Core
Use
Data Transmission
Channel
Use
Time,
msee.
Core b
Use
Channel
Use
Stop Time
Time,
msec.
828, 838 Disk Files
250 av
0.0
1 msec
Var
1.4 or
2.2%
Yes
0.0
1311 Disk Storage Drive
170 or
270 av
0.0
1 msec
Var
1. 6%
Yes
0.0
Core
Use
Channel
Use
No
97.5 av
O. a
1 msec
Var
4.1%
YeS
0.0
3235 Drum Storage
34.4
17.2 av
0.0
1 msee
Var
3.2%
Yes
0.0
861 Drum S,torage
34.4
17.2av
0.0
?
Var
(41/1)%
Yes
0.0
862 Drum Storage
17.2
8.6 av
0.0
Var
(41/1)%
Yes
0.0
405 Card Reader
1,200 cpm, unbuffered
50.0
18.0
0.0
Yes
32.0
1. 9%
Yes
0.0
405 Card Reader
1,200 cpm, buffered
50.0
42.0
0.0
Yes
8.0
8.0%
Yes
0.0
415 Card Punch
250 cpm, unbuffered
240.0
48.0
0.0
Yes
190.0
0.7%
Yes
2.0
0.0
240.0
48.0
4.4%
2.2 msee 190.0
0.0%
No
2.0
0.0
No
BOO.O
84.0
0.0
Yes
514.0
0.3%
Yes
2.0
0.0
No
2.8%
2.2 msee 514.0
0.0%
No
2.0
0.0
No
No
2311 Disk Storage Drive
415 Card Punch
250 cpm, buffered
523 Card Punch
100 cpm, unbuffered
523 Card Punch
100 cpm, buffered
BOO.O
84.0
544 Card Punch
250 cpm, unbuffered
240.0
48.0
0.0
Yes
0.7%
Yes
2.0
0.0
544 Card Punch
250 cpm, buffered
240.0
48.0
4.4%
2.2msec 190.0
0.0%
No
2.0
0.0
3691 Paper Tape Reader
350 cps
2.9
0.0
Yes
2.9
<0.03% Yes
2.0
3691 Paper 'Tape Punch
110 cps
9.0
0.0
Yes
9.0
<0.02
Yes
3.0
0.0
No
0.0
Yes
1.0
<0.2%
Yes
0.8
o. a
No
0.0
Yes
9.0
<0.02% Yes
3.0
0.0
No
190.0
No
No
3694 Paper Tape Reader
1,000 cps
1.0
3694 Paper Tape Punch
110 cps
3152 Line Printer
?
400 +
9.7LS
0
375
<0.01%
O.lmsec 25 +
9.7LS
0.0
No
1403 Model 2 Printer
600 Ipm
100 +
5LS
0
80
<0.07%
O.Imsec 20 +
5LS
a.o
No
1403 Model 3 Printer
1,100 \pm
55 +
5LS
35
<0.2%
a.lmsec 20 +
5LS
0.0
No
501 Printer
GO +
0
45
<0.07%
0.1 msee 13 +
6.7LS
0.0
No
0
105
<0.03%
a. 1 msec
13 +
B.7LS
0.0
No
No
150 \pm
1,000 lpm
B.7LS
505 Printer
120 +
6.7LS
500 \pm
601 Magnetic Tape Unit
20.8 KC
3.0
0.0
Yes
Var
0.4%
Yes
3.0
0.0
603 Magnetic Tape Unit
41. 7 KC
2.75
0.0
Yes
Var
0.9%
Yes
2.25
0.0
No
604 Magnetic Tape Unit
60.0 KC
2.75
0.0
Yes
Var
1. 2%
Yes
2.25
0.0
No
606 Magnetic Tape Unit
83.4 KC
2.75
0.0
Yes
Var
1. 7%
Yes
1. 75
0.0
No
607 Magnetic Tape Unit
120 KC
2.75
1. 75
0.0
Yes
Var
2.4%
Yes
0.0
No
692 Magnetic Tape Unit
30 KC
0.0
Yes
Var
0.8%
Yes
0.0
No
694 Magnetic Tape Unit
0.0
Yes
Var
1.6%
Yes
0.0
No
69G Magnetic Tape Unit
0.0
YeS
Var
2.4%
Yes
0.0
No
0.0
No
3692 Program Controlled
Input-Output Typewriter
67
0
3293 Incremental
Plotter
3.3
or 5.0
100
av
b
I
LS
Var
11/64
9.0
0.0
No
Var
'\)'\.
2
I-~
10
-
~ ~ ~j;'
\).'\.'
\).
4
7
".
~~""
i==
f->-"'~'l
7
4
2
1
2
0.1
4
7
2
1.0
2
10.0
4
7
100.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
~
_ _ _ _~ Configuration VI
Configuration VIlE
~ ~~
©1964 Auerbach Corporation and Info,lnc.
11/64
255:201.500
CDC 3300
.5
GENERALIZED STATISTICAL PROCESSING
. 51
Standard Statistical Problem A Estimates
.512 Computation: . . .
. augment T elements in
cross-tabulation tables .
.513 Timing basis: ..
. using estimating procedures
outlined in Users I Guide,
4:200.513 .
.514 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see below.
. 511 Record size: . . . . . . . thirty 2-digit integral
numbers.
100.0
7
4
2
~II
10.0
7
Time in
Milliseconds
per Record
~~
~L
~/
~"'/
4
/
VI
2
VIlB
II'
1.0
7
4
2
0.1
2
1
4
2
7
10
4
7
2
100
T, NumiJer 01' Augmented Elements
Homan numerals denote standard configurations.
11/64
4
7
1,000
CDC 6000 SERIES
Control Data Corporation
(
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
I
CDC 6000 SERIES
Control Data Corporation
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
-&
260:001. 001
Sf"""
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
CONTENTS
/AEDP
-
AUERBAC~
REPORTS
~
CONTENTS
Report 260: Control Data 6000 Series - General
\
\,
Introduction • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • . . • • • • • • • • • . • • . • • • • • • . • • • .
Data Structure ••••••••••••••••••••••••.•...••••.•.•.•
System Configuration (General) •••••••••.•••.••.••••••.••••
260:011
260:021
260:031
Internal Storage Central Memory .••••.••••..••..•••.•...••..•.••••
Peripheral Processor Memory . . . . • . . . . • • . • • • . . . . . . • • • •
Extended Core Storage ....••••••..•••..•••••..••.•••
6603 Disk File .•.•..•••.••••.•.•••••.••••.••.•.••.
6607 Disk File • • • • • . • . . . • . . . . . • • • • • . . . . . • • • . • . . • . .
6608 Disk File • • • • • . . • . • • • • . . . . . . • . . . . . . . • • • • . . • . •
852 Disk Pack Transport •.••••••••.••••••••••••.•....
853 Disk Pack Transport ...••••.•••••.•.•.•••••••.•••
854 Disk Pack Transport •..•••.••..•••••••••.••••••• '.
260:041
260:042
260:043
260:044
260:045
260:045
260:046
260:046
260:046
Central Processors (General) ..••.••.••••••.•••••••.••.••.
Peripheral and Control Processors (General) . • • • . • • • . • . . . . . • . . .
260:051
260:052
Console 6602 Display Console •.•.•.•.•.•••.••••••••••.••.•.•
6060 Remote Calculator ..••••••••.••••.•••••.•••.•••
6090 Entry/Display Console ..•••••••.•••••••..••••••••
260:061
260:062
260:063
Input-Output: Punched Card and Tape 405 Card Reader ••••••••...•••.••••••..••••..•.•••
415 Card Punch •••••••••.•••••••••.•.••••••••....•
mM 523 Card Punch ••••••.•••••••.•••••••••••••.•••
mM 544 Card Punch .•••••••••••••••••••.•••.••••.••
3691 Paper Tape Reader/Punch •.••••.•••••••••.••••..•
3694 Paper Tape Reader/Punch ••.•..••••••••••••...•••
260:071
260:072
260:072
260:072
260:073
260:073
Input-Output: Printers3152 Line Printer ..•••••••••••.•••••••••.•••..•.••
mM 1403 Printer •.••••••.•••.••••••.•••.••••••..••
501 Line Printer ..••.••••.•.•.•••.•••.••••••.••.••
505 Line Printer .••••.•••••••••.•••••.••.•.••••.••
260:081
260.:082
260:083
260:083
Input-Output: Magnetic Tape 600 Series 7-Track Magnetic Tape Units •.•.•••••••.••....
600 Series 9-Track Magnetic Tape Units ••••••.••••..•••.•
626 14-Track Magnetic Tape Unit ••.•••..•••••.•..•.••••
260:091
260:092
260:093
Input-Output: Others 6411 Augmented Input-Output Buffer and Control •••••.••..•••
3276 Communications Terminal Controller .•.••••.••.••••••
6600 Series Data Set Controllers • . . . • . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . .
260:101
260:102
260:103
Simultaneous Operations (general) " .••...••.••.•••••••••••.
Instruction Lists ••••••.••.•••....•..••.•••.••••..•.•.•
Data Codes .••••.••••..••••••••••••••••••••..••••••.•
Problem Oriented Facilities ••.••.••••••••••••.•.••••.••.•
Process Oriented Languages FORTRAN 66 ..••••••••••••••.••••••••..••••••••.
COBOL ...•••••••.•••..••.•.••.••••••.••••.•.••
Machine Oriented Languages ASCENT Assembly Language .•••••.••••••.••.•.•..••••
ASPER Assembly Language ••.•••.•••.•••••••••.••••••
Operating Environment SIPROS (Simultaneous Processing Operating System) ••••••..•.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
260:111
260:121
260:141
260:151
260:161
260:162
260:171
260:172
260:191
2/66
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
260:001.002
System Performance ..•••••.••••..••• "•••.•.•.••••...•..
Physical Characteristics ...•••.•••••••.•.••.•.•.•...••..•
Price Data .••••••.•••.••••••••••••••.•..•.••..•••...
260:201
260:211
260:221
Report 263: Control Data 6400
Introduction • • • . • • • • • • • . • • • . • • • • • • . . • • . . • . . • . . . . • . . . .
System Configuration .••••••• ; .•••••••••.••••••••.•••••.
Central Processor • . . • • • • • • • • . • • . . • . • . . . • . • . . • • . . . • . • . .
Peripheral and Control Processors .•••••••••••••••.•.•...•..
Simultaneous Operations .••••••••••••••••••••.•.•••..•.•.
263:011
263:031
263:051
263:052
263:111
Report 264: Control Data 6600
Introduction . • • • • • . • • • • • • . • • • • . • • • • • • • • . • . • • . • . . . . .
System Configuration . • . • • • • • • • . • . • . • • • . . . . • . . . . . . . . • .
Central Processor ..••..•••••••.••••••.••••..•.••.....
Peripheral and Control Processors •.•••••••••••.••....•.•••.
Simultaneous Operations .•.••.•••.•••••••.•.•.•...••...•.
264:011
264:031
264:051
264:052
264:111
/"
Report 265: Control Data 6800
Introduction . • . . • . • . • . . . . • . • • . • . • . . . . • . . . • • • . . . . . . • . .
System Configuration . . • . . . • . . • . . • • • . . • • . . • • • . • . . . • . . . • .
Central Processor . • • . . . . • • • . . • • • • • • • • • . . • . • • . . . . . . . • • .
Peripheral and Control Processors ....••.••••.••.•••••..••••
Simultaneous Operations . . • . • . . . • • • • • . • • . • . • • • . • • . . . . • . . .
265:011
265:031
265:051
265:052
265:111
/
/
2/66
A.
AUERBACH
-&
260:011. 100
sm,,,,
/AEDP
AUERBAC~
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
INTRODUCTION
REPDRTS
INTRODUCTION
.1
SUMMARY
The Control Data 6000 Series is a group of three very fast, large-scale computer systems
that have been designed to provide users with vast computational power in service of a large
number of concurrently-operating programs. The marketing campaign for the 6000 Series,
directed to both scientific and commercial computer users, emphasizes that the use of a
large central computer system can be more economical for a company than the use of multiple smaller-scale systems scattered over a wide area.
Such operational goals have necessitated the design of specialized central computing equipment, flexible peripheral systems, extensive data communications facilities, and highly
sophisticated software support. Tl:.e minimum hardware configuration for the 6400 computer
system - at the low end of the 6000 Series - includes one Central Processor with· a 100nanosecond clock-cycle time, a I-microsecond Central Memory of 32, 768 60-bit words, ten
independently-operating Peripheral and Control Processors with private core storage units
of 4,096 12-bit words each, and twelve floating input-output Data Channels that are each
capable of transmitting I/O data at a rate of 2 million characters per second. Peripheral
devices can include additional Peripheral and Control Processors, a new Extended Core
storage unit, several new display units, disc files, magnetic tape units, and all of the peripheral units designed for use with the Control Data 3000 Series systems. Control Data also
makes available the controllers, multiplexors, and adapters necessary to control data communications networks that utilize a wide variety of remote terminal equipment.
Software for the 6000 Series represents a determined effort by Control Data to dispel a
once-widespread impression that the corporation was unwilling or unable to develop and
supply full-scale, integrated software support. Effective utilization of the powerful 6000
Series hardware demands a comprehensive, integrated software control system, and Control
Data supplies such an operating system (SIPROS) with each 6000 Series system. The concurrent operation of multiple processors simultaneously executing a large number of programs
is the normal mode of operation for the 6000 Series systems. Standard equipment configurations that include the Extended Core Storage unit are also well suited for time'-sharing operations. The SIPROS operating system coordinates and controls the many levels of concurrent
operations inherent in these multiprocessing, multiprogramming, and time-sharing modes
of operation.
Monthly rentals for the 6000 Series systems range from about $30,·000 for a basic 6400 system to about $170,000 for a large 6800 system. The 6800 computer system appears to be
rivalled only by the recently-announced Burroughs B 8500 in competition for the title of
"largest computer in the world, "both in terms of magnitude of pure processing power and
potential size of system hardware configuration.
The Control Data 6600 was first delivered early in 1965. The less powerful, cheaper Control
Data 6400 system, announced in December 1964, will have its initial delivery early in 1966.
The ultra-high-speed 6800 (more than four times faster than the 6600) was also announced in
December 1964. First delivery of the 6800 system is expected sometime in 1967.
'.
I
~' ..
.2
PROCESSORS
.21
Central Processors
Every Control Data 6000 Series computer system includes a Central Processor, a centrill
core memory, and ten Peripheral Processors, each with a private core memory bank. The
6600 and 6800 Central Processors contain ten specialized, independently-operating functional
units that theoretically enable them to execute up to ten machine instructions simultaneously.
The 6400 Central Processor contains a single general-purpose instruction execution unit.
Additional central processing power can be obtained in 6400 cOIIJ.puter system~ by including
a second 6400 Central Processor in the configuration.
A 6000 Series Central Processor, at anyone time, can access only one continuous segment
of the centr.al core memory, as defined by a Lower Boundary and an Upper Boundary. Any
reference to a location outside this area which is attempted by a Central Processor program
automatically results in an interrupt and a call to the executive program. The processor
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation ond AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
260:011. 210
.21
Central Processors (Contd.)
does not access the central memory directly either for instructions or operands; instead, it
uses an eight-word instruction stack (which holds the present instruction and the previous
seven instruction words) and 24 operating registers: eight A (Address) registers, eight B
(B-line or index) registers and eight X (60-bit operand) registers. Although the B-registers
are used for purposes analogous to index registers, the form of the 6000 Series instruction,
which never directly refers to central core memory operands, precludes the use of indexing
or indirect addressing in the usual sense of these terms.
The relationships among the processors, memory Units, and input-output channels are
shown in Figure 1. On the left, the input-output channels are all shown connected to a tenway switch, so that input-output data can be passed through the independent memory banks
of any of the ten identical Peripheral Processors (numbered 1 through 10). Each of the
Peripheral Processors also has access to the central core memory of the system, and data
can be transferred between the Peripheral Processor memories and the central memory
without any Central Processor operations.
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
PERIPHERAL 80 CONTROL PROCESSORS
*
Figure 1. Structure of the Control Data 6000 Series Processors
* Note:
The 6400 has no instruction stack nor multiple arithmetic processing units.
The instruction stack and the 24 operating registers act as a buffer between the comparatively slow core memory and the ten fast functional units, and allow the simultaneous
operation of more than one of these units. Use of this relatively small number of registers
permits great reductions in the instruction sizes, so that many three-address instructions
require only 15 bits, or one-fourth of an instruction word.
Parallelism of operation is one of the keys to the rapid processing speeds of the 6000 Series
Central Processors. In addition to the ten concurrently-operating functional units in the
6400 and 6600 Central Processors, all Central Processors in the Series have the ability to
access simultaneously up to eight locations in Central Memory. As a result, instructions
and operands can be accessed in anticipation of their actual need, and Central Processor
delays caused by the need to await completion of Central Memory accesses can be greatly
reduced.
The internal clock-cycle time of the 6400 and 6600 Central Processors is identical - 100
nanoseconds. Many instructions within the simplified 6000 Series instruction set consume
only three or four internal Central Processor cycles. The 6600's 8-word instruction stack
and 10 functional units make its performance considerably better than that of the 6400 (see
comparative task timings in Table I). The 6800 Central Processor has a basic clock-cycle
time of 25 nanoseconds and generally performs four times as fast as the 6600. However,
Control Data intimates that the actual performance of the 6800 Central Processor will be
significantly better than its specifications.
Table I lists some characteristics and representative execution times of the Control Data
6400, 6600, and 6800 Central Processors.
(Contd.)
11/65
A•
AUERBACH
INTRODUCTION
260:011. 220
TABLE I: CHARACTERISTICS OF THE 6000 SERIES CENTRAL PROCESSORS
System Identity
CONTROL DATA 6400
Computer System Report No.
,/
Word Length
263
264
265
Binary Bits
60
60
60
18
Decimal Digits
18
18
10
10
10
Radix
Binary
Binary
Binary
Fraction Size
48 or 96
48 or 96 bits
48 or 96 bits
Exponent Size
11 bits plus sign
11 bits plus sign
11 bits plus sign
Model Number
6401, 6404, 6405
6601, 6604, 6605
6801, 6804, 6805
Arithmetic Radix
Binary
Binary
Binary
Operand Length. Words
1
1
1
Instruction Length, Words
1/4 or 1/2
1/4 or 1/2
1/4 or 1/2
Addresses per Instruction
3
3
3
c=a+b
Likely Fixed
Point Execution
0.6*
0.3*
0.08*
-
-
c = alb
-
c=a+b
1.1*
0.4'
0.1*
5.7'
1.0*
0.25'
0.73*
Floating Point
Representation
Times, J.' sec (5
Digits Min.
Precision)
c
= ab
Likely Floating
Point Execution c = ab
Times, J.lsec
c = alb
\
-
5.6*
2.9*
None
None
None
Arithmetic
Interrupt
fnterrupt
Interrupt
Number of Index Registers
Eight
Eight
Eight
Indirect Addressing
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Mathematical
None
None
None
Commercial
None
None
None
AND, INC OR, EXC OR
Checking
Boolean Operations
AND, INO.OR, EXC OR
AND, INC OR, EXC OR
Table Look-up
None
None
None
Yes
Yes
Yes
Console
Typewriter
Input
Output
Features and Comments
*
(
b~ts
Data Transfers
Special Editing
Capabilities
.22
CONTROL DATA 6800
Characters
DATA
STRUCTURE
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
CONTROL DATA 6600
No; displays are used
Supported by 10 Peripheral
Processorsj sequential execu-
tion of one instruction at a time.
. No; displays are used
Supported by 10 Peripheral
Processors; up to 10 instructiona can be executed concur-
rently.
No; displays are used
Four times as fast as the
CDC 6E!QOj otherwise almost
identical . .
..
Execution times are elapsed times for Register-to-Register tasks, with no allowance for transferring data to and
from main core storage; these data transfers can be overlapped and do not necessarily add to the time used,
Peripheral and Control Processors
The ten Peripheral and Control Processors that form an integral part of every Control
Data 6000 Series computer system are logically and functionally independent processors,
each with a private core storage bank of 4, 096 12-bit words. The Peripheral Processors
have an instruction repertoire of 64 instructions, including fixed-point binary addition and
subtraction, testing instructions, incrementing instructions, and an Exchange Jump instruction that facilitates switching between programs.
Due to the power and flexibility of the Peripheral Processors, many tasks that are performed by the central processors in more conventional systems are divided among the
6000 Series Peripheral Processors, permitting the 6000 Series Central Processor to concentrate upon performing the central computational loops of multiple programs. The
principal roles of the Peripheral and Control Processors include controlling all input-output operations, performing executive and monitor services for the entire system, performing data transcription operations, and serving the Central Processor program by performing time-consuming operations such as data conversions, file searching, and array
manipulations.
The Peripheral and Control Processors that are used with the Control Data 6400 and 6600
systems have a clock-cycle time of 1 microsecond and use core storage modules with the
same cycle time. The 6800 Peripheral Processors have an internal clock-cycle time of
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
260:011. 221
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
• 22
Peripheral and Control Processors (Contd.)
250 nanoseconds and a matching cycle time in their core memory modules. Most Peripheral Processor instructions can be executed within one to four processor cycles. Transfer of data between each of the Peripheral Processors and any of the twelve standard inputoutput Data Channels can proceed at up to 2 million characters per second in the 6400 and
6600 computer systems and at up to 8 million characters per second in the 6800 computer
system.
.3
INTERNAL STORAGE
The Control Data 6000 Series offers a wide variety of internal storage devices of diverse
capacities and speeds, designed to serve specific functions within the total integrated
computer system. Central Memory can be considered as the private, high-speed core
storage for the Central Processor, with direct data paths to the Peripheral Processors
and to the optional Extended Core Storage unit. Central Memory capacities range from
320,768 to 1,310,720 six-bit characters; transfer rates extend from 80 to 400 million
characters per second, depending on the unit's size and model. Table II lists the principal
characteristics of the Central Memory units.
TABLE II: CENTRAL MEMORY CHARACTERISTICS
6400 or 6600
Computer System
Core storage Capacities, in
60-bit Words
32,768
65,536
Cycle Time per Word, J1.sec
1.0
1.0
Independent Banks of Storage
8
Interleaved Cycle Time per
Word, J1.sec
0.13
Peak Transfer Rate, Millions
of Words per Second
8
16
6800
131,072
1.0
32
0.10
10
0.10
10
32,768
65,536
131,072
0.25
0.25
0.25
16
8
0.03
32
0.025
32
0.025
40
40
Each of the ten Peripheral Processors has a core memory unit consisting of 4, 096 12-bit
words to serve the general computational needs of the Peripheral Processor, to hold in
residence the system's control programs, and to provide private input-output buffer areas
for data transferred to and from Central Memory. Data can be transferred between a Peripheral Processor memory unit and Central Memory at the rate of 2 million and 8 million
characters per second in the 6400/6600 and 6800 systems, respectively.
Control Data 6000 Series users can optionally include the newly-developed Extended Core
storage unit in their hardware configuration to provide very fast and comparatively inexpensive auxiliary core storage in capacities up to 167 million characters (see Table m).
Blocks of data can be transferred between Extended Core Storage and Central Memory at
the rate of 100 million characters per second in the 6400 and 6600 systems. Similar transfers in the 6800 can be effected at the rate of 400 million characters per second. The entire
1,310,720 characters of a 131K 6800 Central Memory can be exchanged with the same number of characters stored in Extended Core Storage in 6.5 milliseconds. These data transfer
TABLE
m:
EXTENDED CORE STORAGE CHARACTERISTICS
6400 or 6600
Computer System
Extended Core storage Capacities,
in 60-Bit Words*
Number of Memory Banks
Number of Characters
Accessed per Cycle
Cycle Time, in Microseconds
Peak Transfer Rate, Millions of
Characters per Second
*
11/65
6800
131,072
262,144
1,048,576
2,097,152
524,288
1
2
8
16
4
8
80
80
80
80
160
160
3.2
3.2
3.2
3.2
1.6
1.6
25
50
100
100
400
400
1,048,576
Larger Extended Core storage capacities, ranging up to 16,777,216 60-bit words, are available
upon request.
A
(Contd.)
AUERBACH
~
260:011. 300
INTRODUCTION
.3
INTERNAL STORAGE (Contd.)
rates are so impressive that Control Data plans to utilize the technique of swapping programs
between Extended Core Storage and Central Memory as the heart of its time-sharing systems
for the 6000 Series. This "roll-in/roll-out" method provides the Central Processor with
almost immediate access to any program.
No internal parity checking is performed in any of the 6000 Series core storage units.
Control Data emphasizes the high degree of reliability built into its third-generation core
memories and suggests the use of software checking techniques when absolute assurance
of reliability is required. The extra time required to perform some form of software
checking is implied as being insignificant in view of the extremely high processing speeds
of the 6000 Series systems.
Three types of random-access disc storage units are offered as part of the 6000 Series
hierarchy of storage devices. The 6603 Disk File is a Bryant-made unit capable of storing up to 80.8 million characters. Either the 6603 Disk File or the new 6607 or 6608 Disk
File (with a better price/performance ratio) must be included in every 6000 Series configuration as the "System Disk." The 6607 can store up to 84 million characters of data,
and the 6608 can hold up to 168 million characters. These two devices feature rapidaccess actuator arms in a reactively-balanced positioning mechanism developed by Control
Data. The new 850 Series Disk Storage Drives can also be used with the 6000 Series.
These units provide inexpensive "Disk Pack" storage with capacities up to 9.6 million
characters per pack, and Model 852's Disk Packs are compatible with those used by the
mM 1311 Disk Storage Drive. Table IV lists the principal features of these randomaccess disc storage devices.
TABLE IV: DISC STORAGE CHARACTERISTICS
Capacity (millions
of characters
per unit)
Device
80.8
6603 Disk File
84
168
6607 Disk File System
6608 Disk File System
2.0 to 2.9
4.3
9.7
852 Disk Storage Drive
853 Disk Storage Drive
854 Disk Storage Drive
Average
Access Time
(milliseconds)
Data
Transfer Rate
(char/sec)
Report
Reference
93
1, 048, 000 to
1,342,000
260:044
59.3
59.3
1,680,000
3,360,000
260:045
260:045
77.5
70
70
77,730
208,333
208,333
260:046
260:046
260:046
INPUT-OUTPUT EQUIPMENT
Control Data provides a wide range of local and remote peripheral devices for the 6000
Series, emphasizing that input-output equipment considerations should not be permitted
to impede the performance of the powerful 6000 Series processing and core storage units.
Any of the input-output units provided for the Control 3000 Series computer systems (and
described in Report Sections 245:041 through 245:102) can be connected to a 6000 Series
system through use of 6681 Data Channel Converters. Several other devices have been
developed especially for use with the 6000 Series; these units are described below.
"
Ii)
6411 Augmented Input-Output Buffer and Control - a large-scale multipledevice subsystem that can virtually double the input-output capabilities of a
basic 6000 Series configuration. The 6411's components include 12 high-speed
bidirectional Data Channels, 10 Peripheral and Control Processors, each with
a private core storage unit that consists of 4, 096 12-bit words, and one Main
Memory unit consisting of 16,384 60-bit words. The 6411 is, in effect, an additional 6000 Series computer system, minus the Central Processor. Up to
twelve Augmented Input-Output Buffer and Control Units can be connected to a
6400 or 6600 computer system.
6602 Display Console - a dual-display cathode-ray unit used as the basic local
console device in every 6000 Series computer system. The 6602 uses two 10inch cathode-ray tubes as the sole output media and uses a console typewriter
for input purposes. There are no other displays, indicators, switches, or
other special-purpose hardware devices on the console. The system can edit
and display instructions to the operator, messages and/or graphs for the programmer, or any other relevant data, in any appropriate format. The display
can be retained on the scope as long as desired (perhaps until some action such
©
I 965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
260:011. 400
.4
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT EQUIPMENT (Contd. )
as mounting a tape has occurred) and then erased to make room for other displays. Each line in the display can be up to 64 characters wide, and a maximum
of 32 lines can be displayed. Graphical data can be displayed, but at present
there is no provision for light pen input.
During normal operation, one of the two scopes is reserved for communication
with the computer operators and the other is used for messages and displays
initiated by the program itself (see Figure 2). At least one Model 6602 Display Console is used with each Control Data 6000 Series system. Additional
consoles can be used in conjunction with time-shared operations, with each
scope servicing a different program or group of programs.
.5
•
6090 Entry/Display Console - a 14-inch cathode-ray tube display device and
associated typewriter-style keyboard, used as the basic component of a
high-speed data entry and retrieval system. Slow-speed card reader and
printer units can operate in conjunction with the 6090 Console to provide hardcopy records of the data requests and the retrieved information. Either 10 or
20 lines of 50 symbols can be displayed on the 6090's output screen. The
6090 is usually used as a remote unit, communicating with the central computer over voice-grade telephone lines.
•
6060 Remote Calculator - a desk-type electronic calculator that permits
users in remote locations to utilize the mathematical processing capabilities
of a large-scale central computer. Problems can be keyed in on the keyboard, using a simplified FORTRAN-like mathematical notation. Computergenerated solutions are transmitted to the site of the 6060 Calculator over
voice-grade lines and displayed on an illuminated 12-digit display panel.
•
626 14-Track Magnetic Tape Unit - a specially-designed unit capable of
recording at 800 rows per inch, with each row holding two 6-bit characters
and two parity bits. The speed of the one-inch tape is 150 inches per
second, developing a peak data transfer rate of 240, 000 6-bit characters
per second. The 626 is not an industry-compatible unit; it was designed to
provide high-performance data transfer capabilities within a 6000 Series
system. (Standard 7-track and 9-track IBM-compatible magnetic tape units
are also provided for use with the 6000 Series. )
DATA COMMUNICATIONS
Due to the great power inherent in the 6000 Series processing equipment, many installations
will include numerous remote devices communicating with the central computer via communications lines. Control Data offers facilities to connect any of its own remote terminal
equipment and most of the industry-standard terminal devices to the 6000 Series systems.
The 3276 Communication Terminal Controller is a multiplexing control unit that enables a
wide variety of standard and specialized data communications devices to be connected to
the standard 6000 Series Data Channels via a 6681 Data Channel Converter. First used with
the Control Data 3000 Series systems, the 3276 Controller can control up to 32 simplex
telegraph-grade lines (16 sending and 16 receiving), or up to 16 half-duplex or full-duplex
telegraph-grade lines, or up to 8 half-duplex or full-duplex voice-grade lines. The 3276
provides the speed and mode conversions required to communicate with the 6000 Series
systems.
The 6600 Series Data Set Controllers are single-speed communications control units designed specifically for the 6000 Series computer systems. Five different models permit
various types of communications devices and remote computer systems to be connected directly to the 6000 Series Data Channels. The 6600 Series Controllers communicate with the
remote devices over the public or private communications facilities of the telephone or telegraph companies, using standard data set modems as interfacing units at the remote and
central ends of the transmission lines. One model permits computer-to-computer communication at 40, 800 bits per second over Telpak A lines. Another model permits up to 200 Teletype Model 33 or 35 terminals to communicate with a single 6000 Series Data Channel.
.6
SOFTWARE
Five of the first six users of the Control Data 6600 were supplied with an interim software
package centered around the "Chippewa" operating system. In addition to the standard
operating system functions, such as system monitor, loader, peripheral and display device
control, and library supervision, the Chippewa package also provides a FORTRAN IV compiler and a Central Processor assembly language. According to several reports, the performance of the Chippewa operating system and its components has been unimpressive and
has failed to harness the potential power of the 6000 Series hardware. Control Data emphasizes that the Chippewa system is simply an interim software package, designed to permit
early users to begin productive processing as soon as possible.
11/65
fA
AUERBACH
•
(Contd.)
260:011. 600
INTRODUCTION
.6
SOFTWARE (Contd.)
Beginning in December 1965 and continuing through 1967, the SIPROS operating system and
its associated control routines and compilers will be delivered. SIPROS (Simultaneous Processing Operating System) is the official operating system for the 6000 Series. Control Data
expects that overall efficiency of the SIPROS programs will be at least 50% better than that
of the original Chippewa operating system.
SIPROS will be delivered in three phases, with each phase adding new or expanded language
and control modules. SIPROS 1.0, to be delivered in December 1965, includes basic operating system functions, many of which are listed below. Phase 2 will be delivered in January
1966 and includes the routines necessary to handle all 3000 Series peripheral device controllers. SIPROS 3.0, scheduled for delivery in April 1966, will include all announced SIPROS
functions in versions that will operate with any validly-configured 6000 Series system. A
specialized version of SIPROS designed for remote time-sharing operations and centering around
the Extended Core Storage unit is expected to be delivered during the third quarter of 1967.
SIPROS' Executive ar-d Monitor routines assume full control of the system and multiprocess
jobs from a job stack, using priorities to decide schedule details. One of the functions is
to place the output data from a program in temporary storage when this is necessary to
allow the program to run at peak· operational speed. Later, when appropriate equipment
becomes available, the operating system handles the output data transcriptions runs.
The operating system handles the compilation and the execution of programs written in
FORTRAN-66, COBOL, ALGOL, ASCENT (the Central Processor assembly language), and
ASPER (the Peripheral Processor assembly language). It is common practice for a programmer to write a program in more than one language, intermingling FORTRAN statements with ASCENT and ASPER coding, but using a common symbol table. During compilation, the FORTRAN compiler and the assemblers are loaded into Central Memory as one
program in order to save load time when switching from one language to another. The
resulting object program, now in binary machine-language form, can be tested and executed
as one of the programs in the job stack.
SIPROS requires the use of a Model 6603 or 6607/6608 Disk File, two magnetic tape units,
a card reader, card punch, and printer. Two of the ten Peripheral Processors are permanently dedicated to the operating system, and others are used by the operating system
whenever they are needed. Functions which are normally handled by the Peripheral Processors include disc reading and writing (which takes two processors), loading jobs into the
system, bringing jobs from the disc unit into the central memory for execution, job termination functions, data transcription functions associated with jobs being executed, off-line data
transcriptions, and comparisons. These services use the Peripheral Processors on an asavailable basis. A programmer can "take over" one or more Peripheral Processors for
his own program, but of course this will reduce the number of Peripheral Processors available in the pool.
Control cards loaded with each job describe time limits, equipment requirements, termination instructions for normal and error cases, etc. The time limits are specified in terms
of central processor time usage, maximum number of cards punched, maximum number of
lines printed, and maximum length of time the program should spend in a specific inputoutput loop. No provision is made for placing a maximum limit upon total elapsed time for
each program; this is because several programs will normally be processed concurrently,
and anyone program may be delayed as a result of overriding priorities of other programs.
When an error stop occurs (due to an out-of-range address, exponent overflow, or occurrence of an indefinite result), a map and/or a dump of the job's allocated memory area is
produced if previously requested. In any case, upon job termination a Job Accounting Log
will be created for each program and either displayed on the console or written on some
output medium. Charge distribution is a responsibility of the installation. A display of a
typical job accounting record is shown in Figure 2.
\
\
During the execution of a job, an input-output delay or some other occurrence may prevent
that job from making further immediate use of the Central Processor. In such a case the
Executive routine that resides in a reserved Peripheral Processor is notified by the monitor
routine, whereupon it activates one of the other programs which is resident in the central
core memory. That program will continue to make use of the central processing facilities
until it too is interlocked, or until some other program which has a higher priority is able
to make use of the central processing facilities. Each changeover from program to program
can be accomplished within five to ten microseconds through use of a special Exchange Jump
instruction.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH info, inc.
11/65
260:011.601
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY
Jon NAME AND I"'TERNA1.10n NUMBER
~~~O~~~OUNT #
110 l'RIOIllTY
RUN
T[~IF.
ESTIMATED
I· .
TIME USED
ABSOLUTE LOCATION IN ME~IORY
EQUII'~[ENT ASSIGNMENTS
EQUIPMENT TYPE, LOGICAL UNIT #
EQUIPMENT TYPE. LOGICAL UNIT #
IF Jon IS ON ~!JK TI!E~E ~NTR[ES y,roULD
BE REPLACED
ITH IN .JO STACK
EQUIP~'ENT TYPE, PHYSICAL UNIT NUMBER
EQUlI'!l.IENT TYPE. I'HYSICAL UNIT NUMBER
Figure 2. Cathode-Ray Display of a Set of Job Accounting Information as Produced
for Each Job Handled by the SIPROS Operating System
•6
SOFTWARE (Contd.)
Control Data's FORTRAN-66 language is basically the same as FORTRAN-63 for the Control Data 1604-A computer system. The FORTRAN-66 dialect of FORTRAN IV permits
the use of single and double precision floating-point, integer, complex, and logical operations in mixed mode. ENCODE/DECODE statements permit internal transfers of data
within core memory, and other specifie instructions are provided for input-output buffering
purposes when the programmer elects to override the system's automatic buffering facilities. FORTRAN-66 also permits the use of 6000 Series central register names as operands and the use of ASPER and ASCENT assembly-language statements at any place in the
FORTRAN program. The FORTRAN-66 compiler provides an optional code optimization
algorithm which simulates the execution of the initially-generated object code in order to
determine ways to utilize more effectively the Central Processor's 24 central registers
and (in the 6600 and 6800 systems) 10 functional units.
Control Data also supplies an ASA standard FORTRAN IV compiler that can function under
control of SIPROS and a special trllnslation program that can convert existing FORTRANIV
programs to the more flexible (but non-compatible) FORTRAN-66 language.
The ASCENT and ASPER assemblers are parts of the basic integrated software package
that also includes the FORTRAN-66 compiler and a library maintenance system (LIBRIOUS). ASCENT, the assembly language used for coding Central Processor routines, contains standard assembly-language features, including the use of literals, programmerdefined macros, pseudo-instructions, and system macros to control the use of Central
Memory and disc storage areas. Macros are also provided to control program overlays,
to initiate Peripheral Processor programs, and to communicate with SIPROS.
The ASPER assembly language permits direct control of the Peripheral Processors when
specialized tasks are to be executed. (Normally, all Peripheral Processor task assignments and specifications are performed by SIPROS according to the needs of the currentlyoperating Central Processor program). ASPER includes all the facilities necessary to
utilize the input-output functions of the Peripheral Processors, as well as the facilities to
use these processors as standard computational/logical units. ASPER statements can be
coded in-line with ASCENT statements.
SIPROS provides a control system called the File Manager for handling the storage, retrieval, usage, and modification of data files stored on mass storage devices. Routines
are supplied for full control of drum, disc, and Extended Core Storage units, and for
dumping and reloading magnetic tape files. The File Manager can normally perform its
functions through the use of a single Peripheral Processor, using SIPROS control routines
whenever possible.
A COBOL-65 compiler is promised for use with the 6000 Series, but no delivery date has
yet been announced. The 6000 Series ALGOL compiler is scheduled for delivery in August,
1966. Other software packages planned for the 6000 Series include KWIC, SIMSCRIPT,
PERT TIME, PERT COST, a Statistical Programming Package, an IBM 7090/7094 Simulator, a linear programming routine, and a sort/merge routine.
11/65
A
AUERBACH
•
260:021. 100
~ "'ND'"
IABD:!?
AUERBAC~
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
DATA STRUCTURE
REPORTS
DATA STRUCTURE
.1
STORAGE LOCATIONS
Name of Location
Size
Purpose or Use
Word Central Memory:
60 bits
basic addressable storage unit;
holds 10 characters, up to four
instructions, or one singleprecision fixed-point or
floating-point binary operand.
basic addressable storage unit;
holds two characters, one
single-precision fixed -point
binary operand, one 12-bit
instruction, or half of a 24-bit
instruction.
Peripheral Processor Memory:
12 bits
Extended Core Storage 6400 and 6600 systems:
6800 systems:
480 bits
960 bits
Row (magnetic tape) Models 601 through 607:
}
7 bits
Models 692, 694, and 696:
9 bits
Model 626:
14 bits
.",
Sector (Disc Storage)
6603 Disk File:
6607/6608 Disk File:
852 Disk Storage Drive:
853/854 Disk Storage Drives:
.2
"
holds 1 character and 1 parity
bit.
holds 1 byte and 1 parity bit, or
2 decimal digits and 1 parity
bit.
holds 2 6-bit characters and
2 parity bits .
basic addressable storage unit.
basic addressable storage unit.
basic addressable storage unit.
maximum-sized addressable
storage unit.
INFORMA TION FORMATS
Type of Information
(
346 12-bit
words
2,560 12-bit
words
100 7-bit
characters
4,833 6-bit
characters
basic unit of Extended Core
Storage.
Representation
Alphanumeric character: . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-bit portion of a word.
Fixed-point binary operand: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . one word of 12 or 60 bits.
Floating-point binary operand: . . • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • . one 60-bit word; 48-bit fraction
and 12-bit binary exponent.
Floating-point binary operand (double precision): . • . . . . • two 60-bit words; 96-bit fraction
and 12-bit binary exponent.
Instruction Central Processor: . • • . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 or 30 bits.
Peripheral Processors: . • • . . • • . . . . . . . • . . . • . . • . 12 or 24 bits.
I
~
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
-l.
260:031. 100
STINDARD
/AEDP
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
-
AUERBAC~
RUQRTS
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.1
BASIC SYSTEMS
The overall design of the Control Data 6000 Series provides the flexibility for a great
variety of system configurations. Since the 6000 Series centers on the use of ultra-highspeed processors and many independent storage units, there are few, if any, constricting
or conflicting configuration rules regarding the number, type, and mix of peripheral
devices that can be connected to each system.
The nucleus of every 6000 Series computer system consists of a Central Processor, a
large Central Memory, 10 Peripheral and Control Processors with individual small
memories, and 12 bi-directional Data Channels for input-output operations. Figure 1
illustrates this basic configuration.
Figure 2 shows the Dual Central Processor capability of the 6400 computer system. The
two Central Processors are functionally identical, and their use provides the Control Data
6400 user with the multiprocessing power of 12 independently-operating processors (10
Peripheral Processors and 2 Central Processors). Both Central Processors have full
access to all of the storage and input-output facilities of the 6400 system.
Figure 3 represents the Extended Core Storage configuration of the Control Data 6000
Series. This configuration differs from the basic configuration in Figure 1 solely in its
use of Control Data's recently-developed Extended Core Storage Unit, which provides up
to 167 million characters of high-speed auxiliary core storage. This arrangement of processors and core storage provides for extremely rapid (up to 400 million characters per
second) transfers of programs and segments of programs between the Central Processor
and Extended Core Storage, a facility that makes possible a direct, efficient approach to
time-sharing activities.
Ttle 6600 and 6800 computer systems can also be configured in what is termed the Augmented Input-Output System, illustrated in Figure 4. The distinguishing feature of this
configuration is the Augmented Input-Output Buffer and Control device, designed to nearly
double the simultaneously-operating input-output device capability of the basic 6000 Series
computer systems. This device is actually an input-output subsystem that includes the
same number of Data Channels (12) and the same number of Peripheral and Control Processors (10, each with 4,096 12-bit words of core memory) as a full 6400 system, but
has a smaller Main Memory (16,384 60-bit words) and no Central Processor. As many
as 12 of these Augmented Input-Output Buffer and Control devices can be connected to a
6000 Series computer system, thereby providing virtually unlimited I/O flexibility.
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
Figure 1. Basic 6000 Series System
(Contd.)
11/65
A
AUERBACH
~
260: 031. 101
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
CENTRAL MEMORY
Figure 2. Dual Central Processor 6400 Computer System
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
EXTENDED
CORE STORAGE
CENTRAL MEMORY
I~
Figure 3.
Extended Core Storage Configuration
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
AUGMENTED INPUT-OUTPUT
BUFFER AND CONTROL
CENTRAL MEMORY
MAIN MEMORY
Figure 4. Augmented Input-Output System
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
260:031. 200
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
.2
INPUT-OUTPUT EQUIPMENT
The peripheral devices can be classified in three general categories, as follows:
•
System Peripherals, or those used by the computer system for operator
communications and for residence and working storage for its control
and problem programs. Included in this category are the following devices:
Display Console
Disk System
Disk System
Disk System
Extended Core Storage Units
6602
6603
6607
6608
•
Local Peripherals, or those directly connected to the Data Channels and
normally located in the same room as the Central Processor. Devices that
can be used as local peripherals include:
800 Series Disk Files
6603 Disk System
IBM 2311 Disk Storage Drive
IBM 2314 Disk Storage Drive
861 Drum Unit
862 Drum Unit
3265 Drum Unit
Extended Core Storage Units
405 Card Reader
415 Card Punch
3691 Punched Paper Tape Reader/Punch
3694 Punched Paper Tape Reader/Punch
501 Line Printer
505 Line Printer
600 Series Magnetic Tape Transports
3293 Incremental Plotter
•
Remote Peripherals, or those normally connected to the Data Channels from
a remote location by means of communications lines. Devices that can be
used in this manner include:
6060 Remote Calculator
6602 Display Console
Any peripheral device designed for use with the Control Data 3000 Series (and described
in Computer System Reports 245, 246, and 247) can be connected to any 6000 Series
system through the use of a 6681 Data Channel Converter. Special-purpose peripheral
units are available from Control Data Corporation for linking 6000 systems to many
varieties of communications networks, including those using analog input and output.
Diagrams and prices of standard system configurations for each member of the Control
Data 6000 Series are presented in the subreports for the individual 6000 Series models:
Control Data 6400 •••••••.•••••.••••••••••
Control Data 6600 ••••••••••••••••••••••••
Control Data 6800 ••••••••••••••••••••••••
11/65
A
AUERBACH
'"
Section 263:031
Section 264:031
Section 265:031
.&
260:041. 100
STmARD
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
INTERNAL STORAGE
CENTRAL MEMORY
/AEDP
AUERBAC~
REPORTS
i,..---
INTERNAL STORAGE: CENTRAL MEMORY
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . . . . . . . . . . Central Memory for Control
Data 6400, 6600, and 6800
computer systems.
.12
Basic Use: ..
.13·
Description
. . . . . working storage.
The Central Memory units for the Control Data
6000 Series are high-speed, high-capacity magnetic
core storage units designed to provide memory-tomemory communication between the major components of the system at memory access speeds. The
high-speed data transfers contribute significantly to
the multiprogramming and multiprocessing capabilities of the Control Data 6000 Series. Table I
lists the storage capacities and cycle times for the
Central Memory units available with Control Data
6400, 6600, and 6800 computer systems.
The current programs and data blocks stored in the
Central Memory can be simultaneously accessed by
the Central Processor, by all of the Peripheral and
Control Processors, and by the optional Extended
Core Storage unit. As a result of this arrangement,
all of the processors can operate independently of
each other, and yet can communicate with each
other at high speeds. The Central Memory can effectively (and simultaneously) serve as the Central
Processor's private memory, as the buffer between
the Peripheral and Control Processors and the Central Processor, and as storage for job stacking
from the Extended Core Storage unit.
The basic memory module of the Central Memory
consists of a coincident-current magnetic core
memory of 4,096 12-bit words. Five of these basic
modules are stacked together to form one bank of
4,096 60-bit words. Banks of memory are then
grouped in 8, 16, or 32-bank units, forming the
three sizes of Central Memory available with the
Control Data 6000 Series: 32,768, 65,536, or
131,072 60-bit words. Each memory bank is
logically independent, and consecutive memory addresses are assigned to different banks. The number of simultaneous accesses permitted to Central
Memory is eight (one per bank) in 32K systems and
TABLE I:
ten (limited by the capacity of the Central Address
Control) in 65K and 131K systems .
Maintenance of the Central Memory's core storage
banks is facilitated by the design of the banks.
Each of the five core storage modules that comprise a memory bank is constructed in small plugin modules, individually accessible for ease of
examination and/or replacement.
There are two basic core storage cycle times for
the Central Memory units: the 6400 and 6600 computer systems use a Central Memory with a 1microsecond cycle time, and the 6800 computer
system uses a 250-nanosecond Central Memory.
All words in storage are accessed in parallel by
bank, and up to 10 banks can be accessed simultaneously. The resulting peak data transfer
rates range from 8 to 40 million 60-bit words per
second, as shown in Table 1.
The address word for access to Central Memory
locations consists of a 12-bit address quantity and
a 5-bit bank quantity. The bank quantity defines
one of the 8, 16, or 32 storage banks, and the address quantity defines the 4,096 separate word
locations within each bank. All references to Central Memory are evaluated by its Address Control
unit and then sent to the addressed word location
in the appropriate bank. Address Control accepts
addresses from all parts of the system according
to a fixed priority scheme in order to avoid conflicts. For example, memory access requests
from the Central Processor have priority over
requests from the Peripheral and Control Processors.
The memory protection scheme used in the Central
Memory of the Control Data 6000 Series is simple
and yet apparently adequate to fulfill the needs of
a system in which many programs and their data
reside concurrently in the Central Memory. Each
program is assigned a Field Length value at assembly, compilation, or load time. This value
determines the upper boundary limit for all references to the program. Another individual program
6000 SERIES CENTRAL MEMORY CHARACTERISTICS
Computer System
6800
6400 or 6600
Core Storage Capacities, in
60-bit Words
32,768
65,536
131,072
32,768
65,536
131,072
Cycle Time per Word, J.!sec
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.25
0.25
0.25
Independent Banks of Storage
8
Interleaved Cycle Time per
Word, J.!sec
0.13
Peak Transfer Rate, Millions
of Words per second
8
16
0.10
10
32
0.10
10
8
0.03
32
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
16
0.025
40
32
0.025
40
11/65
260:041. 130
. 13
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
Description (Contd.)
.27
value, the Reference Address value, is assigned
to the program when it is initially called into Central Memory. This value determines the basic
core storage address, or lower boundary, of the
program. Any memory reference within the program that exceeds the value of the Field Length
plus the Reference Address register causes an
interrupt, halts the Central Processor, and alerts
the sys tem operator.
Interleaving Levels: .• 8 with 32K Central Memory;
10 with 65E: and 131K Central Memories.
. 28
Access Techniques
.281 Reading and recording
method: . . • . . . • . . coincident current.
.283 Type of access:
. 29
The ReferenceAddress register scheme also facilitates dynamic program relocation, since all addresses within a program are relative to the base
value of the Reference Address. This address can
be altered as the program is relocated in Central
Memory.
.292 Peak data rates; 6400 and 6600 Central Memory Cycling rate: •.... 1,000,000 cps.
Unit of data:
..•• 60-bit word.
Gain factor: . . . . • . 8 or 10 simultaneous
accesses.
Data rate: .•...•• 1,000,000 words per second.
Compound data rate: . 8,000,000 or 10,000,000
words per second.
No parity checking is performed on data transferred
to or from Central Memory. Control Data emphasizes the reliability of the Central Memory's core
storage modules, and indicates that rapi~ software
checks can be utilized whenever desired to ensure
the accuracy of results. In addition, a memory
diagnostic program can be periodically called into
operation and run concurrently with the problem
programs to verify that the memory modules are
functioning properly.
.14
Availability: . . . . . . . 6 months.
.15
First Delivery: . . ..
6400: March 1966.
6600: 1965.
6800: 1967.
· 16
Reserved Storage: ... none.
·2
PHYSICAL FORM
.21
Storage Medium: ..•. magnetic core.
. 22
Physical Dimensions: . each basic memory module
consists of 4, 096 12-bit
words.
.23
Storage Phenomenon: . direction of magnetization.
• 24
Recording Permanence
.241 Data erasable by
instructions: . . . . . .
· 242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . . . . . .
· 243 Data volatile: . . . . . .
· 244 Data permanent: . . . .
· 245 Storage changeable: ..
.25
.26
Peak data rates; 6800 Central Memory Cycling rate: . . . . . 4,000,000 cps.
Unit of data: . • . . . . 60-bit word.
Gain factor: ....•• 8 or 10 simultaneous
accesses
Data rate: • . . . . . • 4,000,000 words per second.
Compound data rate: . 32,000,000 or 40,000,000
words per second.
.3
DATA CAP ACI'IY
.31
Module and System
Sizes: . • . . • . . . . . see table below.
.32
Rules for Combining
Modules: . • . . . . . . all permissible capacities
are shown in Paragraph
.31; modules cannot be
interchanged between
6400/6600 and 6800 computer systems .
.4
CONTROLLER: •••• no independent controller •
.5
ACCESS TIMING
.52
Simultaneous
Operations: . . . . . . 8 or 10 memory accesses .
.53
Access Time Parameters and Variations
yes.
no.
no.
no.
no.
Access time:
Cycle time:
For data unit of:
Data Volume per Memory Bank
Words: . . . . . . . • • .
Characters: . . . . . . .
Digits: . . . • • . . • . . .
Instructions: . • . . . . .
4,096.
40,960.
73,728.
up to 16,384.
6800
0.2 J.!sec
0.25 J.!sec
60-bit word
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: •••••• none.
.7
PERFORMANCE
.72
Transfer Load Size
With Peripheral
Processor Core
Store: . . . . . . . . • 4,096 12-bit words.
Module and System Sizes (for all 6000 Series Central Memories)
Words:
Characters:
Instructions:
Banks:
Modules:
11/65
6400/6600
0.8 J.!sec
1. 0 J.!sec
60-bit word
.6
Banks per Physical
Unit:
..•..••• 8, 16, or 32 •
. 31
. . . . uniform.
Potential Transfer Rates
32,768
327,680
Up to 131,072
8
40
65,536
655,360
Up to 262,144
16
80
fA
AUERBACH
~
131,072
1,310,720
Up to 524,288
32
160
/
(Continued on Page
260: 042. 300. overleaf.)
-&.
260:042. 100
mHOm
~\EDP
-
AUERBAC~
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
INTERNAL STORAGE
PERIPHERAL PROCESSOR
MEMORY
REPORTS
INTERNAL STORAGE: PERIPHERAL PROCESSOR MEMORY
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: ••••.••.•. Peripheral and Control
--Processor Memory.
.12
Basic Use: •.•.•••• working storage for Peripheral and Control Processor programs, and
high-speed buffers between the Peripheral and
Control Processors and
Central Memory.
. 13
Description
Each of the ten Peripheral and Control Processors
included in every Control Data 6000 computer system contains its own independent core storage unit,
consisting of 4,096 12-bit words. The memory
cycle time for the memories associated with the
6400 and 6600 systems is 1 microsecond per word;
the cycle time for the memories associated with
the 6800 system is 250 nanoseconds. Effective
data transfer rates of 2 million characters per
second can be obtained when data is transferred
between the Central Memory and a Peripheral and
Control Processor memory of the 6400 and 6600
computer systems; the corresponding rate for 6800
systems is 8 million characters per second.
I
\"
The Peripheral and Control Processors and their
associated memory units can function independently
of each other and also independently of the Central
Processor and Central Memory. However, the
several roles of the Peripheral Processors result
in intersystem communication activities. The
Peripheral Processor memories hold in residence
the various control programs of SIPROS, the operating system that controls and integrates the operations of the total 6000 Series system. These
memory units also hold the programs that direct
input-output activities, and they act as high-speed
buffers for data transmission to and from Central
Memory. The Peripheral and Control Processor
memory units also act as conventional memory units,
supplying instructions, issuing operands, and
storing results for their respective processors.
The 4,096 individual storage locations within each
Peripheral and Control Processor memory unit can be
addressed in several ways. A six-bit address is
used to access directly the first 64 words of storage. If this six-bit address is zero, another
twelve-bit address is appended to address directly
any of the 4,096 locations. This 18-bit address
scheme can also be used for indirect addressing
of the 4,096 locations by using the first six bits as
an index register to produce operand addresses.
Data from an external I/O device is read into the
memory of a Peripheral and Control Processor,
and then, if necessary, transferred to Central
Memory for use by the Central Processor. There
are four instructions that transfer one word or a
block of words between the peripheral memory
units and Central Memory. Separate input-output
instructions control the transfer of data between
the peripheral memory units and the I/O devices •
The Peripheral and Control Processor memory
units do not utilize parity bits to check the integrity of data transfers. Control Data emphasizes the inherent reliability of the memory units,
and suggests software checking of memory performance whenever checking is regarded as absolutely essential.
There are no memory protection features in the
peripheral memory units. However, Peripheral
Processor memory accesses are normally under
strict control of reliable system programs assigned
by SIPROS to perform specific tasks in support of
Central Processor programs. User programming
of the Peripheral Processors is possible through
use of the ASPER assembly language, but such
programming is not recommended unless absolutely essential.
.14
Availability: .••.••• 9 months.
• 15
First Delivery: ••••• 1965.
· 16
Reserved Storage: •.• none.
•2
PHYSICAL FORM
• 21
Storage Medium: ••.• magnetic core.
.22
Physical Dimensions: . array size is 4,096 bits by
12 bits.
.23
Storage Phenomenon: • direction of magnetization.
· 24
Recording Permanence
.241 Data erasable by
instructions: ••.•••
. 242 Data regenerated
constantly: ••..•••
• 243 Data volatile: ..•.••
• 244 Data permanent: •••.•
• 245 Storage changeable: ••
.25
yes •
no.
no.
no.
no.
Data Volume per Memory Bank
Words: •••••••••• 4,096.
Characters: •...••• 8, 192.
Instructions: •.•.••• 4,096.
• 26
Banks per Physical
Unit: •.....•••..• one per Peripheral Processor.
.27
Interleaving Levels: •• l.
.28
Access Technique: ••• coincident current.
.29
Potential Transfer Rates
.292 Peak data rates: 6400 and 6600 peripheral
memories Cycle rate: ••••••• 1 J.l.sec.
Unit of data: •••••• 12-bit word.
Data rate: .••••••• 2 million char/sec.
Peak data rates: 6800 peripheral memory Cycle rate: ..•••.. 0.25 J.l.sec.
Unit of data: •.•.•. 12-bit word.
Data rate: ••••••• 8 minion char/sec.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporetion end AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
260:042.300
.3
DATA CAPACITY: ••• every Control Data 6000
Series system includes
10 independent Peripheral
and Control Processor
memory units, each of
which contains 4,096 12bit words.
.4
CONTROLLER: ••.•• no independent controller.
•5
ACCESS TIMING
• 52
Simultaneous Operations: ••..••••••• one operation in each of the
10 Peripheral and Control
Processor memory units.
• 53
.6
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: •.•.••. none.
.7
PERFORMANCE
.72
Transfer Load Size: •. from 10 to 8, 190 characters.
.73
Effective Transfer
Rate: •.•..•.•••• 2 million char/sec in 6400
and 6600 •
8 million char/sec in 6800 •
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Check or Interlock
Invalid address:
Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
Timing c-onflicts:
Access Time Parameters and Variations
.531 For uniform access (6400, 6600) Access time: •••••. 0.5 fJ,sec.
Cycle time: • . • • . . • 1. 0 fJ,sec.
For data unit of: ••. 12-bit word.
For uniform access (6800) Access time: ••.... 0.125 fJ,sec.
Cycle time: ••.•..• 0.250 fJ,sec.
For data unit of: •• , 12-bit word.
impossible.
impossible.
no check.
no check.
no check.
no check.
check
Action
Central Processor accesses are
given priority.
INTERNAL STORAGE: CENTRAL MEMORY (CONTINUED FROM PAGE 260:041. 130)
.72
With self (Contd. ): ... 2.5 million char/sec (via
6400 Central Processor);
13.3 million char/sec (via
6600 Central Processor).
Transfer Load Size (Contd.)
With Extended Core
Store: ..••••..• 131,072 60-bit words.
With 6603 Disk File: . 4,096 12-bit words.
.73
.73
With a Peripheral
Processor Core
Store: • . . . . . . . • 8 million char/sec.
With Extended Core
Store: . . . . . . . . . 192 million char/sec (32K .
systems) or 240 million
char/sec (65K and 131K
Systems).
With 6603 Disk File: • 1. 2 million char/sec.
With self: . . . . . . • . 4 million char/sec (via Peripheral Processors); 53.2
million char/sec (via
Central Processor).
Effective Transfer Rate (6400/6600)
With a Peripheral
Processor Core
Store: . • . . . . . • . 2 million char/sec
With Extended Core
Store: . . . . . . . . . 48 million char/ sec.
(32K systems) or 60 million
char/sec (65K and 131K
systems).
With 6603 Disk File:. 1.2 million char/sec.
With self: . . . . • . • . 1 million char/sec (via
Peripheral Processors);
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Check or Interlock
Action
Invalid address:
check
Invalid code:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
Timing conflicts:
Reference to locked area:
not possible.
none.
none.
none.
none.
not possible.
check
Control is transferred to
Peripheral Processor monitor.
Error
11/65
Effective Transfer Rate (6800)
A
Control is transferred to
Peripheral Processor monitor.
AUERBACH
~
-&.
260:043. 100
STANDm
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
INTERNAL STORAGE
EXTENDED CORE STORAGE
/AEDP
\
-
AUERBAC~
~'-.
REPORTS
INTERNAL STORAGE: EXTENDED CORE STORAGE
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . . . . . . . . . . 6400 Extended Core Storage.
6600 Extended Core Storage.
6800 Extended Core Storage.
.12
.13
Basic Use: . . . • . . • . fast auxiliary core storage.
Description
The Extended Core Storage provided for use with
the Control Data 6000 Series computer systems
offers very fast and comparatively inexpensive
auxiliary core storage in capacities of up to 167
million characters. The peak data transfer rate
that can be achieved in moving blocks of data betwee
the Extended Core Storage and the Central Memory
unit is 400 million characters per second in Control
Data 6800 systems.
The primary role of Extended Core Storage in the
6000 Series computer systems is to hold large
numbers of scheduled programs and data in readiness for immediate transfer to Central Memory
for use by the Central Processor. When Extended
Core Storage is included in a 6000 Series system,
the multiprogramming capabilities are made even
more powerful and efficient than with abasic system.
Not only can the large Central Memory hold several programs or segments of programs for alternate execution by the Central Processor, but the
Extended Core Storage can exchange the entire contents of Central Memory within a few milliseconds
to provide the Central Processor with rapid access
to a vast store of programs. The entire 1,310,720
characters contained in a Control Data 6800 Central
Memory can be exchanged with the same number of
characters stored in Extended Core Storage in 6.5
milliseconds.
(
(
The transfer rates are so impressive that Control
Data plans to utilize the concept of swapping programs between Extended Core Storage and Central
Memory as the heart of its time-sharing system
for the 6000 Series. Rather than having a relatively
small number of program segments arranged in
independent "pages" of Central Memory, Control
Data advocates arranging a large number of program segments in Extended Core Storage. The
roll-in/roll-out method is then utilized to provide
the Central Processor with almost immediate
access to any program and to switch programs with
little delay when each "time-slice" is completed.
The high data transfer rates are made possible by
synchronization of the access and cycle times of
the Extended Core Storage with those of Central
Memory, and by the use of a special, synchronously
designed data channel to connect these two storage
units. Other vital factors in the speed potential of
the Extended Core Storage are its parallel access
method (capable of accessing either 480 or 960
bits simultaneously) and its division into up to four
independent modules or banks, all of which can be
accessed simultaneously. Successive data words
are stored in different banks so that the maximum
number of banks can be concurrently used in the
transfer of large blocks of data .
The Extended Core Storage that is provided for
use with the Control Data 6400 and 6600 computer
systems is physically different from that supplied
for use with the 6800 system, although their
functions are identical. The 6400's Extended
Core Storage is arranged in the form of 16,384
480-bit words per bank, which is equivalent to
131,072 60-bit computer words per bank. Four
banks can be arranged in a bay that contains
524,288 60-bit words, and four bays can be joined
to form a 2,097, 152-word "star." A total of 8
stars of Extended Core Storage (167,772,160
characters) can be accessed by a single 6400 or
6600 computer system, and each 60-bit word is
individually addressable.
The cycle time for the Extended Core Storage used
with the 6400 and 6600 computer systems is 3.2
microseconds per 480-bit memory-bank word.
Therefore, the data transfer rate per bank of
1,310,720 characters is 25 million characters per
second. Although a maximum of 128 banks of
storage can be connected, only four can be
simultaneously accessed by the Central Processor.
Thus, the maximum data transfer rate between
the Extended Core Storage and Central Memory of a
Control Data 6400 and 6600 is 100 million characters
per second. Table I presents the capacities and
speeds of the 6400/6600 Extended Core Storage
and compares these characteristics with those of
the faster 6800 Extended Core storage.
The 6800 Extended Core Storage is organized in
banks of 8,192 960-bit words, with a cycle time
of 1.6 microseconds. Four memory banks can be
grouped in a bay, and a maximum of 2 bays can be
supported by a 6800 system, providing a total
storage capacity of 20,971,520 characters. The
data transfer rate per bank is 100 million characters per second. Since a maximum of four
banks are accessed simultaneously, the maximum
transfer rate per 6800 computer system is 400
million characters per second.
Data transfers between Extended Core Storage and
Central Memory are effected by means of two
Central Processor instructions and two central
registers. The AO register specifies the initial
17-bit transfer address in Central Memory of a
word or block of words, and the XO register
specifies the initial 24-bit transfer address in
Extended Core Storage. The Read and Write
Extended Core instructions transfer data between
Extended Core Storage and Central Memory,
beginning at the locations specified in the XO and
AO registers, respectively. During the transfer
of data to or from Extended Core Storage, the
Central Memory can be periodically accessed by
the Central Processor and the Peripheral and
Control Processors.
Extended Core Storage can also be utilized in those
6400 and 6600 computer systems that make use of
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
260:043.130
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
TABLE I:
EXTENDED CORE STORAGE CHARACTERISTICS
Control Data
Computer System
Extended Core Storage
Capacities in 60-bit
Words*
131,072
Number of Characters
Accessed per Cycle
80
262,144
6800
1,048,576
80
80
3.2
3.2
3.2
Number of
Memory Banks
1
2
8
25
50
100
*
524,288
1,048,576
160
3.2
160
1.6
1.6
16
4
8
100
400
/-
400
Larger Extended Core Storage capacities, ranging up to 16,777,216 60-bit words, are
available upon request.
of results whenever such verification is thought to
be absolutely essential. Memory protection is provided by the upper and lower boundaries associated
with every problem program.
Description (Contd.)
the 6411 Augmented Input-Output Buffer and Control
device (see Section 260:101). With this configuration,
data can be transferred not only between Central
Memory and Extended Core Storage, but also between
the 6411's Main Memory and Extended Core Storage.
The Main Memory of the 6411 can be used to gather
programs from remote locations and transfer them
to Extended Core Storage for eventual execution by
the Central Processor. This configuration seems
well-adapted for use in Control Data's approach
to time-shared operations.
The transfer of data between Extended Core Storage
and the 6411's Main Memory is effected by two instructions in the 6411's Peripheral and Control
Processors: Read Program Address and Exchange
Jump. These Peripheral Processor instructions
normally communicate with the Central Processor,
but when used with the Peripheral Processors of the
6411 unit, they are free to take on other meanings
because there is no Central Processor in the 6411
subsystem. In configurations that employ a 6411
and Extended Core Storage, the Read Program
Address instruction examines the "busy" status of
the data channel that connects the Main Memory of
the 6411 to the Extended Core Storage. The
Exchange Jump instruction in this environment
initiates a memory read or write operation and
specifies the word count and starting addresses in
Main Memory and Extended Core Storage.
The Extended Core Storage has four independent
access trunks, enabling it to be shared by up to
four Control Data 6000 Series computer systems
(or 6411 Augmented Input-Output Buffer and Control
devices) for multiprocessing purposes.
As in the other Control Data 6000 Series core storage units, there are no provisions for parity checking
in the Extended Core Storage. Software checking
schemes are recommended to verify the validity
11/65
2,097,152
80
Cycle Time,
in Microseconds
Peak Transfer Rate,
Millions of Characters per Second
.13
6400 and 6600
In summary, the Extended Core Storage is capable
of transferring blocks of data at rates that are more
than ten times faster than those of any commerciallyavailable disc or drum storage device or any
previously-announced competitive mass core storage
device. The price of the Extended Core Storage is
about one-tenth that of the 6000 Series Central
Memory units, on a character-for-character basis.
(See Section 260:221 for detailed pricing information.)
The extremely high data transfer rates of the Extended Core Storage, combined with its comparatively low cost, make the use of this unit worthy
of serious consideration by all prospective and
current users of the Control Data 6000 Series.
.14
Availability: . . . . • . . ?
.15
First Delivery: . . . . . 1966.
.16
Reserved Storage: .•• none.
\
·2
PHYSICAL FORM
• 21
Storage Medium: .•.• magnetic core.
· 23
Storage Phenomenon: . direction of magnetization.
· 24
Recording Permanence
.241 Data erasable by
instructions: . . . . . . yes.
· 242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . . . . . . no.
.243 Data volatile: . . . . . . no.
.244 Data permanent: .•.. no.
.245 Storage changeable: .. no.
.25 Data Volume per Bank (6400 and 6600)
A
,/
480-bit words: ....•. 16,384.
Characters: . . . . . • . 1,310,720.
AUERBACH
~
(Contd.)
260:043. 250
INTERNAL STORAGE: EXTENDED CORE STORAGE
.25
Data Volume per Bank (6800)
.5
ACCESS TIMING
960-bit words: ••..•. 8,192.
Characters: . . . . . . . 1,310,720.
. 52
Simultaneous Operations: •.•••....•• up to 4 memory banks can
-transfer data simultaneously.
.53
Access Time Parameters and Variations
.26
Banks per Physical
Unit: . . • . . . . . . . . up to 16 per "star."
· 27
Interleaving Levels: .• one per bank, to a maximum
of four levels.
· 28
Access Technique: ... coincident current.
· 29
Potential Transfer Rates
· 292 Peak data rates (6400, 6600) Cycle time: . . . . . . 3.2 ,""sec per 480-bit
memory-bank word.
Unit of data: . . • . . . 60-bit computer word.
Conversion factor: .. 8 computer words per
memory-bank word.
Gain factor: " •••• up to 4 banks can be
accessed simultaneously.
Data rate: ••.•..•. 2.5 million computer
words/sec/bank.
Compound data
rate: ..•.••.•.• up to 10 million words/sec.
Peak data rates (6800) Cycle time: .•.•... 1. 6 ,""sec per 960-bit
memory-bank word.
Unit of data: . . . . . . 60-bit computer word.
Conversion factor: •• 16 computer words per
memory-bank word.
Gain factor: ..•••. up to 4 banks can be
accessed simultaneously.
Data rate: . . . . . . • . 10 million computer words/
sec/bank.
Compound data rate:. up to 40 million words/sec.
. 531 For uniform access (6400, 6600) Access time: .••••• 1.6 ,""sec.
Cycle time: •••••.• 3.2 ,""sec.
For data unit of: ••• 480 bits.
For uniform access (6800) Access time: •••••• 0.8 ,""sec.
Cycle time: .•••••. 1.6 ,""sec.
For data unit of: ••• 960 bits.
•6
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: •••••.• none.
.7
PERFORMANCE
.72
Transfer Load Size
With Central
Memory: ••.•••• 1 to 131K 60-bit words.
.73
.8
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and System
Sizes: ••••••••• see table below.
.32
Rules for Combining Modules: ..•• modules of 6400/6600 and
6800 Extended Core Storage cannot be intermixed
in the same system.
Effective Transfer Rate (60-bit words/sec)
With 6400 and 6600
computer systems: .. 8 million (32K systems).
10 million (65K, 131K
systems).
With 6800 computer
systems: .••.•••• 32 million (32K systems).
40 million (65K, 131K
systems).
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Check or Interlock
.4
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
Timing conflicts:
Reference to protected area:
CONTROLLER: .••.. no separate controller.
• 31
no check.
no check.
no check.
no check.
not possible.
program
boundary
check
data transfer
is aborted.
Module and System Sizes
Minimum Storage
Identity:
Words (60-bit):
Characters:
Banks:
©
Bank
131,072
1. 3 million
Bay
524,288
5.2 million
1
4
Maximum Storage
Star
2,097,152
21 million
16
8 Stars
16,777,216
168 million
128
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
260:044. 100
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
INTERNAL STORAGE
6603 DISK FILE
INTERNAL STORAGE: 6603 DISK FILE
.1
GENERAL
· 11
Identity: . . . . . • . . . . Control Data 6603 Disk File.
· 12
Basic Use: ...••..• auxiliary storage and
System Disk.
· 13
Description
In the outer two zones of each disc surface, the
256 recording tracks are divided into 128 sectors.
The 256 recording tracks of the inner two zones
are divided into 100 sectors. Physically, each
sector on a particular track holds 351 bits of
information. Logically, however, a sector spreads
over the 12 corresponding tracks of 12 disc surfaces, since these 12 tracks are read and recorded
simultaneously. Therefore, a logical sector consists of 351 12-bit words. The first four 12-bit
words of each sector are used for synchronization
purposes and the last word is used for parity
checking, so the data capacity of each sector is
346 twelve-bit words.
The Control Data 6603 Disk File is a singlemodule, high-performance disc storage unit that
can be used with Control Data 6000 Series computer systems as the System Disk. The 6603 is a
Bryant disc file that uses 14 non-removable discs
and is capable of storing up to 80 million 6-bit
characters. Parallel accessing of 12 disc surfaces
contributes to transfer rates that range between
1. 0 and 1. 3 million characters per second. Up to
eight 6603 Disk Files can be connected to a 6000
Series computer system.
Each of the 24 disc recording surfaces is provided
with four read-write heads, one per zone, attached
to a common arm. Each arm assembly is in turn
attached to a common head-positioning axis that
moves all of the arms in unison. In anyone
position of the comb-like multiple-arm access
mechanism, approximately 88,500 characters can
be read or recorded on the outer zones using the
12-head parallel accessing method. The 6603 Disk
File has a total of 8 such 12-head groups, each of
which can alternately access 88,500 (outer zones)
or 69,200 (inner zones) characters without any
arm movement. As each head-group completes its
reading or recording operation, a "revolution mark"
on the disc is sensed. At this point another headgroup can be specified to continue the data transfer
operation. As a result, approximately 631,104
characters can be accessed while the access
mechanism is in anyone position, with head-group
switching being performed electronically.
The System Disk is an integral part of every Control Data 6000 Series computer system. Its use is
normally directed and regulated exclusively by
SIPROS, the 6000 Series operating system, although
direct user access to the unit is also possible. The
principal functions of the System Disk include the
following:
•
To accumulate portions of a program's output
when the program is being processed periodically, as in a multiprogramming or timesharing environment;
•
To store the input job stack, providing Central
Memory and/or Extended Core Storage with
quick access to scheduled programs and their
data;
•
To gather input data from relatively slow input
devices, and to transfer this information as
complete data sets to core storage for noninterrupted processing;
•
To store the results of program compilations
when these programs are not scheduled for
immediate execution;
•
To hold in residence the 6000 Series system
library; and
•
To provide SIPROS with the generalized services
of random-access, intermediate storage.
Each of the 24 usable disc surfaces has a storage
capacity of approximately 20 million bits of information, spread throughout 58,368 346-bit physical
sectors. Since all reading and writing operations
transfer 12 bits in parallel, the 6603 Disk File's
data word is considered to be 12 bits in length.
Each logical sector, consisting of 346 twelve-bit
words, is individually addressable. The total data
storage capacity of a 6603 Disk File consists of
116,736 addressable sectors that contain
40,390,656 twelve-bit words.
Data records can be of variable length and do not
need to coincide with sector boundaries. The
6603's synchronization device inserts four words
of zeros at the beginning of each record and a
parity word at the end of each record. The 12-bit
parity word is read during every read operation
and is compared to a newly-generated parity word
to ensure the validity of data transfers. However,
the Disk File does not automatically regenerate
and compare the parity word after a write operation.
The Control Data 6607 and 6608 Disk Files (described in the following report section, 260:045)
can also be used as the System Disk in a 6000
Series computer system. The 6607 and 6608, which
are manufactured by Control Data Corporation, are
expected to supersede the Bryant-made 6603 in 6000
Series systems within the near future.
The 6603 Disk File contains 14 discs, each coated
on both sides with a magnetic-oxide material.
Twenty-four of the twenty-eight disc surfaces are
used for recording data, two are used for timing
purposes, and two are used for spares. Each disc
surface is divided into four concentric zones, and
each zone is further divided into 128 concentric
recording tracks.
11/65
The total time required to read or write data consists of the time required to position the access
arm to the selected track, the time required to
wait for the selected sector on the track, and the
time required to transfer the data. Whenever a
IA
AUERBACH
~
(Contd.)
260:044.130
INTERNAL STORAGE: 6603 DISK FILE
.13
. 14
Description (Contd.)
.29
different track is selected, a fixed track-positioning delay of 120 milliseconds occurs, allowing any
mechanical vibrations to cease before data transmission starts. The discs revolve at a rate of 900
to 950 rpm, or one revolution every 63 to 66 millisecohds, so the average rotational delay is about
33 milliseconds. The total average access time
for data accessing that requires arm movement is
therefore 153 milliseconds. In situations that do
not require head positioning, the significant timing
considerations are the time to switch electronically
between the eight read-write head-groups (0 to 66
milliseconds), and the rotational delay (0 to 66
milliseconds). Head-group switching time is overlapped with track positioning delay when access arm
movement is required.
.291 Peak bit rates Cycling rates: . . . . .
Bit rate per track: ..
.292 Peak data rates Unit of data: . . • . . .
Conversion factor: ..
Gain factor: ..•.•.
Loss factor: . . . . . .
Data rate Outer zones: .•...
Inner zones: . . . . .
. 15
First Delivery: .•... 1965.
. 16
Reserved Storage
Purpose
'-
Number of locations
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
. 21
Storage Medium: . . . . disc .
.22
Physical Dimensions
. 23
Storage Phenomenon: . direction of magnetization .
.24
Recording Permanence
.241 Data erasable by
instructions: •..•.•
.242 Data regenerated
constantly: .. . . . . .
. 243 Data volatile: . • . . . .
.244 Data permanent: ..•.
• 245 Storage changeable: ..
yes.
no.
no .
no.
no .
Data Volume per Band of 12 Tracks
Outer Zones
Inner Zones
Words: ...••.•.••. 44,288
Characters: ..••••• 88,576
Instructions: • . . . . . . 44,288
34,600
69,200
34,600
.26
Bands per Physical
Unit: . . . . . . . . • . . 1,024
800
.27
Interleaving Levels: .• 1 (i. e., no interleaving
when reading or recording is performed
under control of standard
software).
(
.28
Module and System Sizes
6603.
14 .
40.4 million.
80.8 million .
40.4 million .
1.
Rules for Combining
Modules: .••.•.•. up to eight 6603 Disk Files
per system.
.4
CONTROLLER: . . . . . no independent controller.
.5
ACCESS TIMING
.51
Arrangement of Heads
Heads per stack: ..•
Stacks per system: ..
Stacks per yoke: ...
Yokes per system: ..
.512 Stack movement: ...•
12.
8.
8.
1.
vertically across the face
of 14 recording surfaces.
.513 Stacks that can access
any particular
location: . . . • • . . . . 1.
.514 Accessible locations:
By single stack With no movement: . outer zones: 44,288
12-hit words.
inner zones: 34,600
12-bit words.
With all movement:. outer zones: 5,668,864
12-bit words.
inner zones: 4,428,800
12-bit words.
By all stacks With no movement: • 315,552 words per system.
.52
Simultaneous
Operations: . . . . . . . only one operation at a
time per 6603 Disk File.
.53
Access Time Parameters and Variations
Variation
Track positioning:
0 to 120
Head-group selection: 0 to 66 msec
(overlapped with
track positioning time)
Sector positioning:
0 to 66 msec
Data transfer:
0.5 to 65 msec
Total:
0.5 to 251msec
Possible starting stage
yes.
©
671,051 12-bit words/sec.
524,246 12-bit words/sec.
.32
moving heads.
yes.
yes.
no.
word.
12 bits/word.
12 tracks/band.
none (no interleaving).
DATA CAPACITY
Identity: . . . . . . • . . .
Discs: . . . . . . . . . . .
Words (12-bit): . . . . .
Characters: . . . . . • .
Instructions: . . . . . . .
Modules: . . . . . . . . .
Access Techniques
.281 Reading and recording
method: . • • • . . . . .
.282 Type of access Description of stage
Track positioning: .•
Head-group
selection: ..••...
Sector positioning: ..
Data transfer: .•••.
900 to 950 rpm.
700,000 bits/sec/track.
.511 Number of stacks -
.222 Disc Diameter: • . • . • . • . ?
Thickness or length: • ?
Number on shaft: ..• 14.
.25
.31
Availability: .••.... 6 months.
Synchronization: ..•. 4 words/sector.
Parity: . . • . • • . . . . . 1 word/sector.
Head-group switching: 351 words/track.
\
.3
Potential Transfer Rates
.6
Example
120 msec.
33 msec.
33 msec.
0.5 msec.
153.5msec.
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: ...•••. none.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
260:044. 700
.75
Read-Only Reference Cycle Rate
.7
PERFORMANCE
.72
Transfer Load Size: .. 1 to 44,288 12-bit words.
6. 7 references/sec, based on random reference
to a record.
.73
Effective Transfer Rate
15 references/sec, based on reference without
head repositioning.
With outer zone
sectors: •••...•.. 671,051 12-bit words/sec.
With inner zone
sectors: . • . . . . . . . 524,246 12-bit words/sec
.8
(exclusive of access times).
.74
Update Cycle Rate
3.6 references/sec, based on random reference
to a record, updating and read-verifying it.
4.0 references/sec, based on random reference
to a record, updating it, but not read-verifying.
30 references/sec, based on reference without
head repositioning or head-group selection.
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Check or Interlock
prevented by software.
none.
Recovery of
data:
5.0 references/sec, based on updating and readverifying a record without head repositioning.
Action
Error
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Recording of
data:
Dispatch of
data:
.~..
generate and record
12-bit parity word.
regenerate and com- set testable
pare parity word
indicator.
none.
/
./
11/65
A
AUERBACH
•
260:045.100
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
INTERNAL STORAGE
6607/6608 DISK FILE
INTERNAL STORAGE: 6607/6608 DISK FILE SYSTEMS
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . . . .
6607 Disk File System.
6608 Disk File System.
807 Disk File.
808 Disk File.
.12
Basic Use:
auxiliary storage and System Disk.
.13
Description
The 807 Disk File contains 36 aluminum diSCS, 26
inches in diameter, coated on both sides with a
magnetic-oxide material. The 808 Disk File contains 72 discs of the same type. Four 807 discs
are not available for recording data, but are used
for timing purposes and for spares. Eight 808
discs are Similarly unavailable. Therefore, 64
and 128 disc surfaces are available for storing data
in the 807 and 808 Disk Files, respectively.
The Control Data 6607 and 6608 Disk File Systems
provide large-capacity, high-performance. disc
storage for the Control Data 6000 Series computer
systems. Announced in September 1965, the 6607/
6608 Disk Systems offer considerable performance
improvements over the 6603 Disk File (described
in Section 260:044), and, like the 6603, can be
used as System Disk units for the 6000 Series computer systems. The 6607/6608 Disk Systems are
manufactured by Control Data Corporation.
Each disc surface is divided into 192 concentric
storage tracks, and each track is segmented into
16 sectors. Up to 2,560 data bits of information
can be stored in each sector, or 7. 8 million bits
per surface. Reading and recording of data are
performed simultaneously on 12 corresponding
tracks of 12 different disc surfaces, establishing
the basic unit of data as a 12-bit word. Thus,
each access to a selected disc sector makes available 2,560 twelve-bit words or 5,120 characters.
The 6607/6608 Disk Files can store up to 168
million characters of information and can transfer
data at a rate of 1. 67 million characters per second. More than 5 million characters can be accessed in anyone position of the access mechanism
via electronic head-switching, and the maximum
length of time required to position the read/write
access arms to any selected data track is 100
milliseconds. Up to eight independently-operating
6607 or 6608 Disk File Systems can be connected
to a Control Data 6000 Series computer system.
The Control Data 807/808 Disk Files are the basic
components of the 6607/6608 Disk File Systems.
In addition to the 807/808 components, the Disk
Systems also include built-in dual-channel controllers. The 6607 system consists of an 807 Disk
File and a time-shared, dual-channel controller.
The 6608 consists of an 808 Disk File, a timeshared, dual-channel controller, and (optionally) a
second dual-channel controller to provide simultaneous read/write operations on each half of the
808 Disk File.
,
I
The basic structure of the 807 Disk File consists
of two vertical shaft assemblies, each controlling
18 non-removable discs. The discs on both shafts
are accessed by a single hydraulic actuator assembly that contains two grolIPs (or "combs") of
16 access arms. The access arms move in unison
across the surfaces of the discs on each shaft. The
requested positioning of one group of access arms is
automatically countered by diametrically-opposed
movement of the other group of arms in order to
minimimize mass imbalance and reduce vibrations.
The 808 Disk File, used exclusively in the 6608
Disk File System, also consists of two vertical
shaft assemblies, but with twice the number of
discs and two independently-operating actuator
arms. Thus, the 808 Disk File can be considered
to be two 807 Disk Files, physically and logically
integrated into a Single, dual-functioning unit.
The newly-designed actuator assembly controls the
accessing of data on 64 disc surfaces. Each of the
actuator's two combs contains 16 access arms, and
each arm contains two 6-head stacks of read-write
heads mounted back-to-back in order to provide
simultaneous access to corresponding tracks of an
upper and lower disc surface. The six-head stack
can access six adjacent tracks per surface without
requiring arm movement. Since each disc surface
contains 192 data tracks, the 6-head access arms,
mOving in unison, need to move to only 32 discrete
positions per surface to provide access to all data
stored on each surface of the entire file.
In anyone of the 32 positions of the actuator assembly's duplex, reactively-functioning, comblike access mechanisms, more than 2.625 million
characters (5.25 million in the 808 Disk File) are
accessible via electronic head-switching. The
total storage capacity of the 807 Disk File is approximately 84 million characters. The capacity
of the 808 Disk File, which uses twice the number
of discs and a second actuator assembly, is approximately 168 million characters.
The 807/808 Disk Files provide fast random access
to any part of the file. If the addressed sector
is not among the 16.4 or 32.8 thousand sectors
that are rotating directly under the read-write
heads at any time, repositioning of the access arms
is required. In this Situation, any 5, 120-character
sector can be accessed in between 34 and 152. 5
milliseconds. Access arm positioning requires
from 34 to 100 milliseconds, and the disc rotational
delay, at 1140 disc revolutions per minute, is a
maximum of 52.5 milliseconds. The comparatively
short access arm positioning time is made possible
by reducing the number of discrete head positions
per track and by minimizing the settling time after
arm pOSitioning by means of the self-balancing
actuator assembly.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
260:045, 130
,13
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
Description (Contd, )
. 28
The maximum data recording density on the 807/808
discs is 850 bits per inch. Reading and recording
12 bits in parallel, the 807/808 Disk Files produce
data transfer rates of 1. 67 million characters per
second.
.281 Reading and recording
method: . • . . . . • . moving heads.
.283 Type of access Description of stage
Possible starting stage
The read-write heads are positioned to "fly" at approximately O. 0004 inch from the disc surface. If
for any reason the disc rotational speed drops below
a certain level, the read-write heads are automatically retracted.
. 14
Access Techniques
Access arm positioning:
Head-group selection:
Rotational delay:
Data transfer:
.29
Potential Transfer Rates
The smallest record that can be written is the size
of one logical sector, or 2,560 12-bit words. If
a program calls for fewer words to be written, the
remainder of the sector is filled with zeros. After
each sector is written, an automatic 12-bit parity
word is generated and written as the sector's
2, 561st word. Subsequent Disk File read instructions automatically regenerate the parity word and
compare it to the original. Parity errors 'are indicated by setting a specific bit in the status word
that the Disk File controller constructs for testing
by the 6000 Series Peripheral and Control Processors.
.291 Peak bit rates Cycling rates: ...•
BitS/inch/track: ..
Bit rate per track: .
.292 Peak data rates Unit of data: . . . . .
Conversion factor: .
Gain factor: .
Loss factor: ..•.
Data rate: . . . . . .
Compound data
rate: . . . . . . . . .
Each 807 Disk File that is used with a Control Data
6000 Series computer system is capable of performing only one read, write, or seek operation at any
one time. However, the 808 Disk File can be
supplied with an optional controller that permits
read/write/seek overlap on each half of the Disk
File.
.3
DATA CAPACITY
.31
Module and System Sizes
Discs:
Words (12-bit):
Characters:
Instructions:
Modules:
Availability: . • . . . . . ?
. 15
First Delivery: . • . . . third quarter, 1966 .
.16
Reserved Storage
Purpose
Number of locations
Synchronization:
Parity:
127 12-bit words.
1 12-bit word.
CONTROLLER: . . ..
Storage Medium: . . . . magnetic discs.
.5
ACCESS TIMING
Physical Dimensions
.51
Arrang.ement of Heads
Recording Permanence
. 241 Data erasable by
instructions: . . . . . . yes.
.242 Data regenerated
constantly: . . . . . . . no.
.243 Data volatile: . • . . . . no.
.244 Data permanent: . . . . no.
.245 Storage changeable: .. no.
. 25
Data Volume per Band of 12 Tracks
Words: . • . . . . . . . . . 40,960 12-bit words.
Characters: . . • . . . . 81, 920 characters.
Instructions: . • • . . . . 40,960 12-bit instructions.
. 26
Bands per Physical
Unit: . . . . . . . . . . . 192.
.27
Interleaving Levels: .. 1 (1. e., no interleaving).
808 File
64.
84 million.
168 million.
84 million .
1.
.4
.22
. 24
1,666,667 12-bit words/sec
(808 Disk File only).
Rules for Combining
Modules: . . • . . . . up to eight 807 or 808 Disk
Files per system.
.21
Storage Phenomenon: . direction of magnetization.
word.
12 bits/word.
12 tracks/band.
none (no interleaving).
833,333 12-bit words/sec.
.32
PHYSICAL FORM
. 23
1140 rpm.
850 bits/inch maximum.
833,333 bits/sec/track.
807 File
32
42 million
84 million
42 million
1
.2
.222 DiscDiameter: . . . . . . . . 26 inches.
Number on shaft: . . . 36.
yes.
yes.
yes.
no.
controller is an integral
part of 6607/6608 Disk
File Systems.
.511 Number of stacks 807
808
Heads per stack: ..
6
6.
Stacks per system: . 64
128.
Stacks per yoke: .. 64
128 .
Yokes per system: .
1
2.
. 512 Stack movement: . . . horizontally across the disc
surfaces .
.513 Stacks that can access
any particular location: . . . . • . . . . . 1.
.514 Accessible locations
(by all stacks, with
no arm movement):. 2.625 (807) or 5.25 (808)
million characters per
Disk File.
.52
Simultaneous Operations: • . . • . . . . .
only one operation at a
time in the 807 Disk File;
two simultaneous operations available with optional
equipment in the 808 Disk
File.
(Contd.)
11/65
A
AUERBACH
•
260:045. 530
INTERNAL STORAGE: 6607/6608 DISK FILE
.53
\
Access Time Parameters and Variations
Stage
Access arm
positioning:
Example
5.0 references/second, based on random reference
to a record of 2,560 12-bit words, updating it, and
read-verifying it.
0, or 34 to
100 msec
100 msec.
6.7 references/second, based on random reference
to a record of 2,560 12-bit words, updating it, but
not read-verifying it.
7.5 references/second, based on updating this
record and read-verifying it, but without head
repositioning.
.75
10.4 references/second, based on random reference to a record of 2,560 12-bit words.
3.0 msec.
129.3 msec.
34.1 references/second, based on reference to a
record of 2,560 12-bit words without head positioning.
CHANGEABLE
STORAGE: .••.••. none.
PERFORMANCE:
.72
Transfer Load Size: .. 2,560 to 40, 956 12-bit
words.
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Check or Interlock
Error
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Effective Transfer
Rate:
. .... .... . 833,333 12-bit words/sec,
exclusive of access times.
\
Read-Only Reference Cycle Rate
26.3 msec.
.7
.73
Update Cycle Rate
Variation
Head-group
selection (time
is overlapped
with arm positioning
time):
Rotational deo to 52.5 msec
lay:
Data trans3. 0 to 48 msec
fer:
3. 0 to 200. 5 msec
Total:
.6
.74
Dispatch of data:
Action
prevented by software.
none.
generate and record
12-bit parity word.
regenerate and com- set testable
pare parity word
indicator .
none.
,,
("
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
260:046. 100
&.
ST"''''
IA\EDP
-
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
INTERNAL STORAGE
850 SERIES DISK DRIVES
AUERBACH
REPORTS
INTERNAL STORAGE: 850 SERIES DISK DRIVES
.1
· 11
· 12
· 13
disc surface. The ten data tracks that can be accessed when the ten-armed access mechanism is in
any given position are referred to as a "cylinder."
The total number of characters that can be stored
per cylinder and accessed by electronic switching,
without access arm positioning, is 20,000 characters
in Model 852 and 40, 960 characters in Models 853
and 854.
When access arm positioning is required to read or
record on a selected track, the access time ranges
from 30 to 145 milliseconds, assuming that the
Direct Seek feature is installed. Without Direct
Seek, the access arm moves to the selected track
only after first returning to a starting or "home"
position, and access times will be significantly
longer.
Random record access time is also affected by the
rotational delay, or the time required for the addressed record to pass under the read-write head
once the proper track has been selected. This rotational delay varies from 0 to 40 milliseconds in
the 852 Disk Storage Drive, and from 0 to 25 milliseconds in the 853 and 854 Disk Storage Drives. The
total update cycle time to read a randomly-addressed
100-character record, update it, and perform a
write-check operation is 159 milliseconds in Model
852. This same random update and check operation
can be performed in 120 milliseconds in Models
853 and 854.
The principal performance difference between the
852 and 853 Disk Storage Drives lies in the disc
rotational speed. The discs of Model 852 rotate at
1500 rpm, and those of Model 853 rotate at 2400
rpm. The principal difference between the 853 and
854 Disk Storage Drives lies in the storage capacity
of each unit's disc surfaces. Model 853's disc surfaces contain 100 data tracks each, whereas Model
GENERAL
Identity:
. • . . . . . . 852 Disk Storage Drive.
853 Disk Storage Drive.
854 Disk Storage Drive.
Basic Use: . . . .
. . random-access auxiliary
storage.
Description
The Control Data 850 Series Disk Storage Drives,
announced in September 1965, provide Control
Data 3000 and 6000 Series users with randomaccess "Disk Pack" storage facilities. On-line data
capacities per Disk Storage Drive range from 2 to
8.2 million characters, and access times vary from
30 to 145 milliseconds. The Model 852 Disk Storage Drive uses the same data recording mode as the
IBM 1311 Disk Storage Drive, and their respective
Disk Packs are functionally interchangeable.
The 852, 853, and 854 Disk Storage Drives each
hold a single removable Disk Pack that consists of
6 discs. Ten of the 12 available disc surfaces are
used for recording data. There are 100 data tracks
on each disc surface in Models 852 and 853, and
200 data tracks on each Model 854 disc surface.
The total storage capacity of Model 852 is 2 million or 2. 98 million characters. Model 853 can
store up to 4. 1 million characters, and Model 854,
with twice as many data recording tracks as Model
853, can store up to 8.2 million characters.
Table I compares the characteristics of the three
models of the 850 Series Disk Storage Drives.
Each 850 Series Disk Storage Drive is serviced by
a single comb-like access mechanism that moves
horizontally between the disc surfaces. Each of the
ten access arms that make up the access mechanism contains a single dual-gap read-write head to
service all 100 tracks (or 200 in Model 854) of one
TABLE I: CHARACTERISTICS OF CONTROL DATA 850
SERIES DISK STORAGE DRIVES
MODEL NUMBER
Storage Capacity per Pack
(millions of characters)
Disc s per Pack
Recording Surfaces per Pack
Tracks per Disc Surface
Sectors per Track
Characters per Sector
11/65
852
853
2.0 (Sector Mode)
2. 98 (Track Mode)
4.09
854
8.19
6
6
6
10
10
10
100
100
100
20
16
16
100
256
256
Characters Stored per Track
2, 000 (Sector Mode)
2,980 (Track Mode)
4,096
4,096
Disc Rotation Speed (rpm)
1,500
2,400
2,400
Rotational Delay (msec)
o to 40
o to
Access Time with Direct
Seek (msec)
30 to 145
30 to 145
30 to 145
Data Rate (char Isec)
77,730
208,333
208,333
/fa
AUERBACH
~
25
o to 25
(Contd.)
INTERNAL STORAGE: 850 SERIES DISK DRIVES
• 13
Description (Contd.)
.27
Interleaving Levels: •• 1 (i. e., no interleaving) •
854 has 200 data tracks per surface. A total of up
to 4.096 million characters can be stored on-line in
each 853 Disk Storage Drive, and up to 8. 192 million characters in each 854 Disk Storage Drive.
• 28
Access Techniques
The 852 Disk Storage Drive can store up to 2 million 7bit characters when recording is performed in the
Sector Mode. In this mode, each track is divided
into 20 sectors, and each sector holds a 5-character
address and up to 100 7-bit alphameric characters
of data. When data is recorded in the Full-Track
Mode (i. e., with each record occupying a full data
track), each track can hold 2,980 seven-bit characters, for a total drive capacity of 2. 98 million
characters. The 852 Disk Storage Drive records
data in the NRZI (Non-Return to Zero) data recording
mode. A parity bit is generated and recorded with
each character of data.
The 853 and 854 Disk Storage Drives use the "double-frequency" recording technique and record
data only in the Sector Mode - never in the FullTrack Mode. Normally each read and write operation transfers a full sector of data (i. e., 256
six-bit characters). However, if reading and recording are selected to be performed in the End of
Record Mode, these operations can be terminated
prior to the end of the associated sector by means
of an End of Record mark. A 16-bit check character is generated with every record that is recorded.
This check character is regenerated and compared
with the recorded version each time the record is
read; unequal comparison results in a data transmission error signal.
.14
260:046.130
Availability: • • • . . . . ?
· 15
First Delivery: • . . . . 3rd quarter, 1966.
• 16
Reserved Storage: . . . none.
•2
PHYSICAL FORM
· 21
Storage Medium: . . . • multiple magnetic discs.
· 22
Physical Dimensions
.281 Reading and recording
method: • . . • . • . . • magnetic heads which move
horizontally in unison on
a comb-like access arm
mechanism.
.283 Type of access Description of stage Possible starting stage
Move heads to selected track (cylinder): •.••••••. if new cylinder is selected.
Wait for beginning
of selected track: .. if same cylinder was previously selected.
.29
Model 852
Cycling rate: . . . 1500 rpm.
Bits/inch/
track: . . . . . • 988 bpi max.
Bit rate per
track: . . . . . . 699, 530
bits/sec/
track
.292 Peak data rates Unit of data: . . . character
Conversion
factor: . . . . . . 7 bits per
character
(6 plus parity)
Data rate: . . . . . 77, 730 characters per
second
DATA CAPACITY
.3
.31
o
\,
24
Recording Performance
.241 Data erasable by
instructions: .•••.• yes.
· 242 Data regenerated
constantly: 0 0 0 0 0 • 0 no.
. 243 Data volatile: 0 ••••• no.
o 244
Data permanent: •••• no .
. 245 Storage changeable: .. yes, see Paragraph 06.
025
\
.26
852
variable
2,000 or 2,980
2,000 or 2,980
variable
20 or 1
853/854
variable.
4,096.
4,096.
variable.
16.
Bands per Physical
Unit: •. 0 ••••••.. Models 852 and 853:
100 per disc surface.
Model 854: 200 per disc
surface.
1105 bpi max.
1,250,000
bits/ sec/track.
character.
6 bits per character.
208,333 characters per second.
852
6
1, 000
100
variable
2,000,000 or
2,980,000
1
853
6
1,000
200
variable
4,096,000
854
6
2,000
200
variable
8,192,000
1
1
.32
Rules for Combining
Modules: ••••.••• up to 8 Model 852, 853, or
854 Disk Storage Drives
can be connected to a
basic 6000 Series computer
system •
.4
CONTROLLER
.41
.5
Identity: •••••••••• controller is an integral
part of each 852 Disk
Storage Drive.
3234 Disk Storage Controller services up to 8 Model
853 and/or 854 Disk Storage Drives.
ACCESS TIMING
.51
Arrangement of Heads
Data Volume per Band of 1 Track
Words .••. 0 0 . 0 ••.
Characters: •.••.••.
Digits: .•••.••.••.
Instructions: . . . . • • .
Sectors: .•.•••••••
i
Modules:
Storage Phenomenon: 0 direction of magnetization.
Models 853/854
2400 rpm.
Module and System Sizes
Model:
Discs:
Tracks:
Cylinders:
Words:
Characters:
.222 DiscDiameter: . • • . . • . . 14 inches.
Number on shaft: . . . 6.
.23
Potential Transfer Rates
.291 Peak bit rates -
.511 Number of stacks Heads per stack:
Stacks per drive:
Stacks per yoke:
Yokes per drive:
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
1.
10.
10.
1.
11/65
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
260:046. 512
"512 Stack movement: .••. horizontally across disc
surface to one of 100
(Models 852 and 853) or
200 (Model 854) tracks.
• 513 Stacks that can access any particular location: • . •. . 1•
. 514 Accessible locations:
By single stack With no movement:. 1 track.
With all movement: 100 tracks (852 and 853);
200 tracks (854).
By all stacks With no movement: . 10 tracks per drive.
.52
· 53
PERFORMANCE
. 72
Transfer Load Size
Single track:
Cylinder:
Cylinder mode,
I-way transfer: . . . . . . . 69,840 char/sec* 193,750 char/sec*
*
.74
CHANGEABLE STORAGE
Cartridges (Disk Packs)
.611 Cartridge capacity .
Model 852:
.
Model 853: ..
Model 854: ..
.612 Cartridges per
module: . . . .
.613 Interchangeable: . . . .
Based on random accessing and transferring of one
cylinder (see Paragraph. 7 2 above) of data.
Update Cycle Rate
With no overlapping
of seektimes: . . .
6.3 (Model 852) or 8.3
(Models 853/854) references/second.
With maximum overlapping of seek times: 9. 8 (Model 852) or 15. 8
(Models 853/854) references/second .
Access Time Parameters
and Variations: . . . . see Table II.
. 61
852
853/854
1 to 2,000 chars. 1 to 4,096 chars •
up t020, 000
up to 40,960
chars.
chars.
Effective Transfer Rate
.73
Simultaneous
Operations: . . . . . . . a read, write, or seek
operation in any Storage
Drive can be overlapped
with a seek operation in
any other Drive. The Seek
Overlap feature is standard on all models.
.6
· 62
.7
Note: Based on random accessing of one 100character record, and reading, updating,
and rereading for checking purposes •
2,980,000 characters.
4,096,000 characters.
8, 192,000 characters.
.75
1.
yes, between all Disk Storage Drives of the same
model; Model 852 Disk
Packs can also be interchanged with the IBM 1316
Disk Packs used with IBM
1311 Disk Storage Drives.
Note: Based on random accessing and reading of
one 100-character record, with no updating
or rewriting.
Loading Convenience
.621 Possible loading While computing system
is in use: . . . . . . . yes.
While storage system
is in use: . . . • . • . yes, if the particular Disk
Storage Drive is not being
addressed.
· 622 Method of loading: ..• operator.
· 623 Approximate change
time: . . . • •
. . 1 minute.
· 624 Bulk loading:
.• no; only one cartridge of 6
discs is loaded at anyone
time.
Read-Only Reference Cycle Rate
With no overlapping of
seek times: . . . . . . . 12.7 (Model 852) or 14. 1
(Models 853/854) references/ second.
With maximum overlapping of seek
times: •••••••••• 47.1 (Model 852) or 76.9
(Models 853/854) references/ second.
.8
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Check or Interlock
Invalid address:
prevented by software.
none.
parity, cyclic
code
parity, cyclic
code
none.
Receipt of data:
Recording of data:
Recovery of data:
Dispatch of data:
Action
set testable
indicator.
set testable
indicator.
TABLE II: VARIATIONS IN ACCESS TIME (USING
DIRECT SEEK FEATURE)
Model 852
Variation,
Average,
msec
msec
Models 853 and 854
Variation,
Average,
msec
msec
30 to 145
57.5
30 to 145
Wait for beginning of
selected track:
o to 40
20.
o to 25
12.5
Transfer data:
24 per track
24.
23.1 per
track
23.1
Stage
Move head to selected
track (cylinder):
Total:
11/65
101.5
fA
AUERBACH
•
57.5
-93.1
-
/
260:051. 100
--.
1. "''''''
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
CENTRAL PROCESSORS
/&..EDP
-
AUERBACH
RfPURTS
CENTRAL PROCESSORS
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . . . . • • • . . 6400 Central Processor;
6600 Central Processor;
6800 Central Processor.
.12
Description
The central processor of a Control Data 6000
Series computer system is the largest and most
powerful of the 11 processors included in every
system. The central processor should not be confused with the 10 subsidiary Peripheral and Control Processors that are described in the 'following
report sectioI)., 260:052. The central processor is
a high-speed, parallel-functioning arithmetic,
logical, and control device that can effectively
share its operations between multiple programs
concurrently residing in Central Memory or in the
Extended Core Storage.
Among the outstanding features of the 6000 Series
central processor are the following:
o Parallel execution of up to 10 arithmetic/logical operations.
o Simultaneous accessing of up to 8 Central Memory locations, providing anticipated instruction
access and operand preparation, and resulting
in virtually no central processor delays caused
by the need to await completion of Central Memoryaccesses.
• An instruction stack of 8 words (up to 32 instructions), facilitating the look-back operations used
in program looping.
o Exchange Jump and Internal Jump facilities to
switch control between central processor programs in less than 5 microseconds.
Unlike typical central processors, the Control Data
6000 Series central processor can be almost exclusively engaged in performing high-speed, highlyproductive computations. Time-consuming inputoutput and data manipulation operations can be
performed by the 10 Peripheral and Control Processors. If the peripheral processors should become overloaded, the central processor can be
utilized to assist in the brute data processing.
Three basic central processors are offered with
the 6000 Series - a different processor for use
with the 6400, 6600, and 6800 computer systems.
The central processors have similar roles in their
respective systems and are closely related in their
hardware organization. The 6400 and 6600 central
processors have the same clock-cycle time of 100
nanoseconds; the ultra-high-speed 6800 central
processor has a clock-cycle time of 25 nanoseconds.
(
\.
The 6400 central processor can optionally function
in parallel with another 6400 central processor,
providing true multiprocessing facilities that include
12 independently-operating processors (2 central and
10 peripheral). However, the 6400 Central Proc-
©
essor has no instruction stack, nor can it execute
more than one instruction at a time.
The 6600 and 6800 central processors feature a
high degree of processing simultaneity through the
use of an eight-word instruction stack and 10 independent arithmetic-logical units. The result is
effective overlapping of instruction access and execution. The principal difference between the 6600
and 6800 central processors lies in internal circuit
performance: the 6800 can execute instructions
approximately four times faster than the 6600 central processor.
This report section describes the general functional
characteristics on the three central processors
available with the Control Data 6000 Series. Performance timings are not included in this section,
since they vary among the processors. Instead, the
central processor performance measurements are
included in the Central Processor sections of the
the individual subreports on the 6400, 6600, and
6800 computer systems, Sections 263:051, 264:051,
and 265:051, respectively.
. 121 Central Registers and Instruction Stack
The central processor can be accessed by the Peripheral and Control Processors only through the
Central Memory, and all accesses to Central Memory are performed through central registers. Instructions and operands are drawn from registers
that are constantly being refilled from Central Memory in order to minimize central processor dependence on or delays from any other parts of the system.
An eight-word instruction stack provides the central
processor with the present instruction and the seven
previous instruction words. Instruction words from
Central Memory enter the bottom of the stack and
push up the preceding instructions. Programs that
branch back to an instruction in the previous stack
registers can be contained entirely within the stack
loop, minimizing the time expenditures for repeated
accesses to the same instructions. In straight-line
programs, only the bottom two stack registers are
used, providing effective overlapping of instruction
access. (In the 6400 central processor, the tworegister sequential buffer or stack is the only instruction stacking mechanism available. )
The 24 high-speed central registers also contribute
to the high degree of overlap in instruction preparation and to the consequent speed of instruction execution. These registers act as buffers between the
relatively slow Central Memory and the rapid processing units, supplying addresses and operands in
anticipation of the central processor's needs. Eight
of these registers (B or B-line) are 18-bit index
registers, used to increment or decrement the contents of any of the 24 central registers. Eight
registers (A) are used as 18-bit address registers,
serving to address the five Read Central Memory
and two Store Central Memory trunks. Eight 60-bit
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc,
11/65
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
260:051. 121
enters the instruction stack and maintains a record of the current use of each of the central registers and functional units. The scoreboard determines logical dependencies between instructions
and delays the execution of dependent instructions
until required operands are made available from
the execution of previous instructions. Thus,
hardware protection is included to ensure that the
automatic resequencing and parallel execution of
instructions will not result in errors in logic.
.121 Central Registers and Instruction Stack (Contd.)
floating-point registers (X) are used as operand
registers, with direct access to and from Central
Memory.
Any change in the A registers (caused by the arrival of a new instruction) implicitly causes the corresponding operand registers to be filled with the
addressed data from Central Memory, or the results of some computational instruction to be stored
in Central Memory. Since there are only eight
central registers of each variety, and since the instructions address these registers directly, very
short instruction lengths can result. For example,
a three-address Add instruction can require only 15
bits, or one-fourth of an instruction word.
Another central processor register, the P or Program Address Register, is an 18-bit counter that
holds the address of the current instruction word.
It is normally advanced by one when the entire instruction word has been executed. However, branch
instructions set the P register to the address of
the destination instruction, and the Exchange Jump
instruction (see Paragraph. 123 below) sets the Program Address register to the first instruction of
the next program to be executed within the Central
Processor.
.123 Instruction Format
The Control Data 6000 Series central processors
use two instruction formats: a 15-bit and a 30-bit
format, which can be intermixed within a 60-bit
instruction word. In most 15-bit formats, a 6-bit
operation code specifies the functional unit and
code, and three 3-bit addresses specify the operand
registers where the operands can be found and the
result stored. The 30-bit format consists of a
6-bit operation code, two 3-bit register addresses
(where one operand can be found and the result
stored), and an 18-bit second operand that is used
directly. The diagrams below illustrate the two
basic instruction formats.
3
~~
. 122 Arithmetic Units
The central registers of a Control Data 6000 Series
central processor can collectively be considered as
a control unit that effectively isolates the operations
of the arithmetic unit. It is in this arithmetic unit
that all central processor arithmetic and logical
operations take place.
The central processor of the 6400 computer system
contains a unified three-address arithmetic unit
that accepts each instruction in sequence and executes it in the same sequence. Instruction preparation is still overlapped with instruction execution,
but only one instruction can be executed at any
given time.
By contrast, the central processors of the 6600 and
6800 computer systems utilize an arithmetic unit
that consists of 10 fast functional units, each of
which can perform computqtional and logical work
concurrently with the others. Included among the
independent functional units are two Increment units, two Multiply units, and one of each of the following: Add, Long Add, Divide, Shift, Boolean,
and Branch. These functional units will accept and
concurrently perform as many instr!lctions as there
are appropriate functional units available, provided
that there is no logical interdependence between the
sequential instructions. The three-address structure of the functional units and the specific design of
the 6000 Series instruction repertoire tend to increase the probability of logical independence of
consecutive instructions.
_3
_
m
3
__
3
k
i
~
f
~-L
3- L_3_
__
~
3
__
~
15 bits
K
3
~~
3
__
~
18
________________
130 bits
~
f: ••. instruction type.
m: ..• operation code.
i: ... result operand register.
j: ••• operand register or shift count.
k: ... operand register or shift count.
K: ..• literal operand.
.124 Instruction Repertoire
The central processor of the Control Data 6000
Series has an instruction set which is separate and
distinct from that of the Peripheral and Control
Processors. The central processor's instruction
repertoire contains only 86 instructions, which fall
into a mere nine logical classes. For example, the
"SET" instruction class consists of 33 instructions
that "set" one of the 24 operational registers to
some particular value. The value is determined
either from the contents of two of the operational
registers or from a literal written into the instruction and the contents of one of the operational registers. In all cases, two values are used to determine the resultant final value to be inserted into the
designated operational register. (One of the operational registers is permanently set to zero, however, so a programmer can easily use only a single
value if he wishes.) The two values can be added
together, or one can be subtracted from the other.
The 33 different Set instructions are all written by
using the same single-letter mnemonic code S (for
Set), followed by three register names (or two register names and a literal) separated by a plus or a
minus Sign. For example "SA3 B4 + 28" simply
means "Set Register A3 to the contents of Register
B4 plus 28." Similarly, "SA5 A5-B5" will decrement Register A5 by the contents of Register B5.
Because all of the Set instructions use this format
and the same one-letter mnemonic code, the programmer will soon view the 33 Set instructions as
a single, highly versatile instruction.
(Contd.)
When the parallel operations of the multiple functional units are utilized, it is entirely possible that
the instruction execution sequence will not follow
the order in which the instructions were originally
written on the coding sheet. If the execution of an
instruction must be delayed because its operands
are not immediately available, the next instruction(s) may be executed before or in parallel with
the original instruction. A hardware device, called
the "scoreboard," monitors each instruction as it
t 1/65
m
f
A
AUERBACH
260:051. 124
CENTRAL PROCESSORS
.124 Instruction Repertoire (Contd.)
Other classes of closely related instructions include the 8 Boolean operations, the 12 floatingpoint operations (add, subtract, multiply, and divide in either single-length unrounded, singlelength rounded, or double-length unrounded form)
and the 18 jump instructions. This leaves only 15
other instructions that the programmer will need
to remember in addition to these four general categories. The surprising simplicity of the Central
Processor instruction code has a major effect on
the operational efficiency of the Control Data 6000
Series systems, because it makes hand coding relatively easy to learn, easy to check, and easy to
revise when necessary.
With such a small instruction repertoire, attention is naturally focused on those instructions
which are not present although they might be expected in such expensive systems. In considering
these apparent omissions, it is important to consider the limited role of the Central Processor,
and the type of work for which the Control Data
6000 Series systems were designed.
Monitoring and executive functions and control of
input-output operations are not expected to be performed by the Central Processor; these are functions of the Peripheral Processors exclusively.
Th~ predominance of floating-point operations reflects the computational needs of the atomic energy
industry, for which the system was originally
designed. However, in view of Control Data's
promotion of the system for commercial as well as
scientific purposes, the absence of fixed-point
multiplication and division instructions and of any
radix conversion instructions is particularly conspicuous. Another noticeable lack in the instruction set is the absence of any mass data transfer
instructions. Two words is the largest possible
load that can be transferred during a single operation, and such an operation requires the execution
of several Set instructions. Less obvious omissions are some of the more sophisticated instructions present in the slower· Control Data 3600 computer - including a very useful off-line search instruction which can search through core memory
for either equality or threshold conditions, and
which has unusually flexible incrementing capabilities. The provision of such facilities would have
increased the cost of the 6000 Series systems, and
on balance it was thought more desirable to handle
operations such as data moving, searching, and radix
conversion through a "brute force" approach which
takes advantage of the high speeds of the Central
Processors.
i
\.
In their handling of the 60-bit floating-point operands, the 6000 Series central processors use the
concepts of out-of-range numbers and indefinite
operands. Special codes permit identification of
operands in each of these categories. A'number
which is out-of-range is simply a number whose
binary exponent is greater than 1024 or less than
-1024. An out-of-range number is treated as infinity or zero, as appropriate. Operations using
ou~-of-range numbers as operands are specially
handled. In some cases the results of such operations can continue to be used (e. g. ,cO+oo, which
is defined as yielding 00). In other cases the results must be designated as "indefinite" operands
(e. g. ,00 -cO, the result of which cannot be guessed).
The use of any indefinite operand in an operation
makes all the results of that operation indefinite
also.
A complete list of the 6000 Series central processor instruction set is presented in Section 260: 121
of this report.
.125 Interrupt Facilities
Since the Control Data 6000 Series central processor performs no input-ouwut or system control
functions, its interrupt facilities are predictably
simple. If an attempt is made to address a Central Memory location that is outside the range of
the program being executed, the central processor
is interrupted. This control is made possible by
means of the memory protection scheme utilized
by the central processor and Central Memory (see
Section 260:041). Each program in Central Memory has an upper and lower boundary associated
with it, and this range cannot be exceeded during
the program's execution. During the floatingpoint arithmetic operations, interrupts also occur
if the operands are out-of-range (i. e., exponent
overflow) or if erroneous "indefinite" results are
developed (see Paragraph. 124 above). Interrupt
control is normally handled by the executive/monitor routines of SIPROS, the integrated operating
system that resides in one of the Peripheral and
Control Processors.
The Exchange Jump facility, used by the Peripheral Processors to initiate and exchange programs
in the central processor; causes external interruption of the central processor. The Peripheral and
Control Processor, under the direction of SIPROS,
interrupts the central processor and provides it
with the initial address of a I6-word package in
Central Memory. The Exchange Jump package
contains such information as the initial contents
of the 24 central registers, the program's upper
and lower boundaries, and the current program
address. The central processor enters this information in the appropriate registers and then
stores the corresponding information from the interrupted central processor program in the same
16 words of Central Memory. Using the Exchange
Jump facility, two programs can be exchanged in
the central processor in less than five microseconds. This facility is a key factor in achieving
efficient performance in multiprogramming and
time-sharing operations.
The Internal Jump instruction, a modified version
of the Exchange Jump instruction, enables the
central processor to interrupt itself or another
central processor and then perform the same program-switching operation as that effected by Exchange Jump. Thus, the central processor has
the ability to operate in two states: normal and
monitor. The central processor's ability to initiate program switching without resorting to the
executive control programs in the Peripheral
Processor will considerably increase the efficiency
of multiprogramming and time-sharing operations.
Both the Internal Jump and Exchange Jump instructions are available in the 6400, 6600, and 6800
central processors.
• 126 Inter-Series Compatibility
Control Data states that any program written for
and compiled on a specific member of the Control
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
If/65
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
260:051. 126
• 126 Inter-Series Compatibility (Contd. )
Data 6000 Series will run on any other member of
the Series without prior modifications. The sequence of instruction execution and the instruction
execution times may vary between the Control
Data 6400, 6600, and 6800 central processors, but
the results of the program's operation will be the
same.
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
.21
Operations and Operands
OQeration
and Variation
.211
.212
.213
.214
• 215
• 216
• 217
• 218
.219
• 13
Availability: •••••.• 6400 - 6 months •
6600 - 6 months.
6800 - 1 year.
. 14
First Delivery: ••••• 6400 - 1966.
6600 - 1965.
6800 - 1967.
Provision
Fixed point Add- subtract: automatic
binary
60 bits
Multiply:
none. *
Divide
none. *
Floating point Add- subtract: automatic
binary
96 & 12 or 48 & 12 bits.
Multiply:
binary
automatic
96 & 12 or 48 & 12 bits.
Divide:
binary
automatic
96 & 12 or 48 & 12 bits.
Boolean AND:
binary
automatic
60 bits.
Inclusive OR: automatic
binary
60 bits.
Exclusive OR: automatic
binary
60 bits.
Comparison Numbers:
automatic
18 or 60 bits.
Absolute:
none.
Letters:
18 or 60 bits.
automatic
Mixed:
18 or 60 bits.
automatic
Collating
sequence:
A-Z, 0-9, blank, +, -, *, /, (,),
# •. , •.
Code translation: • • • • • none •
Radix conversion: •••• none.
Edit format: • • . • • • • • only between fixed and floating point
formats.
Table look-up:.. . • • • • none •
Size
Others Provision
Binary shift:
automatic
60 bits.
Normalization: automatic
12 + 48 bits.
• 22
Special- Cases of Operands
.221
• 222
Negative numbers: .••. one's complement.
Zer\>: •••••.•••••• one form.
• 23
Instruction Formats:
see Paragraph. 123, above •
.234
Basic address structure: ••••• . •• • • • • 3-address.
.235 Literals Arithmetic: . . • . • . •• 18 bits.
Comparisons and
tests: • . • . • • • • • • • 18 bits.
Incrementing modifiers: ••...••••• 18 bits.
.236 Directly addressed operands .2361 Internal storage type Minimum size
Registers:
118-bit word
Core Storage:
1 60-bit word
Extended Core Storage:
1 60-bit word
• 2362 Increased address capacity: none •
.237 Address indexing • 2371 Number of methods: •• one •
*
11/65
Maximum size
2 60 bit-words
2 words
Volume accessible
24 registers
131,072 words
131,072 words
16, 777,216 words
Fixed-point mUltiply and divide operations can be performed indirectly in
the floating-point functional units with the assistance of the pack and shift
instructions.
A
AUERBACH
'"
(Contd.)
CENTRAL PROCESSORS
260:051. 2373
.2373 Indexing rule: •.•••• base address field and index field are added
to form core address. Indexing is not
used to select register addresses. Overflows cause program interrupts.
• 2374 Index specification: ... within the instruction.
.2375 Number of potential
indexers: ... " . . . . 8.
.2376 Addresses which can be indexed Type of address
Application
Core memory:
selection of operands
for later instructions,
and storage addresses
for instruction results.
• 2377 Cumulative indexing: . . . . not possible.
.2378 Combined index and
step: . • . . . . . . . • • • . yes.
. 238 Indirect addressing: ••.. none.
.239 Stepping .2391 Specification of incre.ment: ..••.•...••.• in register.
• 2392 Increment sign: • . . .. • . . positive or negative •
• 2393 Size of increment: .•... 18 bitS •
• 2394 End value: .•.••.•..• specified in test
instruction•
. 2395 Combined step and
test: ..•.••..••.•. not available .
• 24
Special Processor Storage
\,
.241
.242
Category of
storage
A registers:
B registers:
X registers:
Category of
storage
A, B,X
Registers:
\.
Size in
Program
bits
usage
8
18
address storage.
18
index storage.
8
60
operand storage.
8
Total number
Access time,
Cycle time,
of locations
~
IJ.sec
Number of
locations
24
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
· 3-1
Instruction Sequencing: the instructions are placed
in the instruction stack
in ordinary sequence;
their execution sequence
is determined by the availability of the operands and
the functional units, as
explained in Paragraphs
.121 and. 122.
.32
Look-Ahead: . . . . . . . see Paragraphs. 121 and
. 122 for descriptions of
the various facilities incorporated to ensure effective utilization of the central processor.
• 33
Interruption
• 331 Possible causes In-out units: •....•
In-out controllers: ..
Storage access: .••.
Processor errors: ..
Other: ....•••..•
0.1(6400,
6600)
0.025 (6800)
0.025 (6800)
· 334 Interruption conditions: Peripheral Processor or
Central Processor monitor control is enabled.
.335 Interruption process Registers saved: ... all operational registers are
saved, ready for Exchange
Jump or Internal Jump program switching.
Destination: . . . . . . processor waits until program switching is completed and new program is
initiated.
· 336 Control methods Determine cause: ... handled by executive program, with assistance of
special hardware diagnostic program where necessary.
.34
no.
no.
yes.
yes.
Exchange Jump request
from a Peripheral Processor, or Internal Jump
request from Central
Processor.
. 332 Control by routine: •.. handled in Peripheral Processor.
O. 1 (6400, 6600)
Multiprogramming
• 341 Method of control: ... Peripheral Processors
constantly monitor current central processor
program, and prepare
further programs. Highest priority program which
is ready is immediately
instituted as the active
program .
· 342 Maximum number of
programs: .••..•. no limit.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
260:051. 343
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
.343 Precedence rules: ••. priority algorithm in Per-
Control Data 6400 - Section 263:051
Control Data 6600 - Section 264:051
Control Data 6800 - Section 265:051.
ipheral Processor program .
• 344 Program protection-
.5
Storage: .•••••••• each program can access
only one contiguous area
of central memory.
Maximum separate
units: ••.•••••• no hardware limit.
• 35
.4
Multi-sequencing: ••• the sequencing of the central processor is completely independent of the
sequencing of the various
Peripheral Processors.
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
The performance of each Control Data 6000 Series
system, in terms of both basic instruction times
and speeds on our standard measures of performance, is shown in the Central Processor section of
the appropriate subreport:
11/65
A
AUERBACH
~
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
Error
Check or Interlock Action
Overflow:
check
Underflow
(float-pt) :
check
Zero divisor:
check
Invalid data:
Invalid operation:
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
not possible.
not possible.
no check.
check
no check.
no check.
flag set, result set to
maximum
value .
flag set, result set to
zero.
flag set, result set to
maximum
value .
program halt •.
-1.
260:052. 100
STiNDARD
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
PERIPHERAL AND
CONTROL PROCESSORS
/AEDP
AUERBAC~
REPOITS
i.---
PERIPHERAL AND CONTROL PROCESSORS
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
.... 6400 Peripheral and
Control Prooessor;
6600 Peripheral and
Control Processor;
6800 Peripheral and
Control Processor.
Description
Every Control Data 6000 Series computer system
includes 10 logically independent Peripheral and
Control Prooessors in addition to the high-speed
Central Processor described in the preceding report section. Each Peripheral and Control
Processor has an associated core storage unit
consisting of 4,096 twelve-bit words, and the
necessary arithmetic and logical capabilities to
enable it to execute independent programs. The
Central Processor's program is not delayed in any
way by the multiprocessing operations of the 10
Peripheral and Control Processors.
The prinoipal roles of the Peripheral and Control
Processors in the 6000 Series computer system
can be summarized as follows:
•
To control all input-output operations through
direct communication with the 12 Data Channels.
•
To perform executive and monitor control
services for the entire system.
•
To direct the buffered overlapping of high-speed
disc-file operations.
•
To perform "off-line" data transcription operations.
•
To serve the program in the Central Processor
by performing necessary but time-consuming
operations such as file searching and array
manipulations.
•
To exchange operating programs in the Central
Processor in order to ensure that the Central
Processor remains productively occupied.
•
To perform high-speed block transfers of data
to and from the Central Memory.
The Peripheral and Control Processors that are
used with the Cont:r:ol Data 6400 and 6600 computer
systems have a clock cycle time of 1 microsecond;
those used with the 6800 computer system have a
clock cycle time of 250 nanoseconds. Data transmission between any of the input-output Data
Channels and the memory unit of a Peripheral and
Control Processor can proceed at 2 million characters per second in the 6400 and 6600 computer
systems, and at 8 million characters per second in
the 6800 computer system.
This report section describes the general functional
characteristics of the Peripheral and Control
Processors. The individual subreports for each
computer system in the Control Data 6000 Series
contain the processing performance measurements
for the Peripheral and Control Processors, as
follows:
6400 Peripheral
and Control
Processors: . . . .
6600 Peripheral
and Control
Processors: ....
6800 Peripheral
and Control
Processors: . . . .
. 121 Multiplexed Instruction
Section 263:052.
Section 264:052.
Section 265:052.
Execution
The instructions within the programs of each
Peripheral Processor are executed in the normal
sequential order. Each of the 10 programs operates from a separate, individual memory unit, and
each uses four separate registers within a Register
Barrel. A single instruction execution unit, called
the Instruction Control device, is shared by the
10 Peripheral and Control Processors, with each
processor receiving a turn during every I-microsecond or O. 25-microsecond cycle. The execution
of most instructions requires from two to four
cycles or passes through the Instruction Control
device.
One instruction from each of the 10 peripheral
programs enters the Register Barrel and begins
its circular tour to the Instruction Control device.
During 90 percent of the instruction cycle, the
instruction is being interpreted and prepared for
execution. Only 10 percent of the instruction
cycle is spent in the Instruction Control device,
which actually executes the instruction. This
multiplexed arrangement provides each Peripheral
Processor with an assurance of executing one
instruction or portion of an instruction every
1 microsecond (in the 6400 and 6600 systems) or
every 250 nanoseconds (in the 6800 system).
. 122 Instruction Format
Peripheral and Control Processor instructions can
have a 12-bit or a 24-bit format. The 12-bit
format has a 6-bit operation code, F, and a 6-bit
operand or operand address, d, as illustrated
on the next page. The 24-bit format uses an
additional 12-bit quantity, m, to form with d an
18-bit operand or operand address.
These formats provide for 6-bit or 18-bit operands
and 6, 12, or 18-bit addresses. The quantities d
or dm can be used directly in some instructions as
literals. The 6-bit segment d can directly address
one of the first 64 addresses in the processor's
memory unit, or it can provide an indirect address,
the content of which is the address of the desired
operand. In order to address any of the 4,096
words of a Peripheral and Control Processor's
core storage unit, the quantities m and d (possibly
zero) are added together to produce the 12-bit
operand address.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
260:052. 122
A complete list of the instruction set for the
Control Data 6000 Series Peripheral and Control
Processors is presented in Section 260: 121.
. 122 Instruction Format (Contd.)
The diagram below illustrates the two basic
instruction formats.
. 124 Interrupt Facilities
12-Bit Format:
24-Bit Format:
F
d
6
6
F
d
m
6
6
12
Two basic Data Channel conditions can be tested by
the Peripheral and Control Processors to assist in
the control of input-output operations. Each of the
12 basic Data Channels has an active/inactive flag
to signal the testing processor that the channel has
been selected for use and is busy with an external
device. Each channel also has a full-empty flag to
indicate that a word (data or I/O control) is available in the 12-bit data register associated with
each Data Channel. A thirteenth Data Channel is
used in all 6000 Series systems for communication
with a real-time clock that runs continuously and
is incremented once every Peripheral Processor
clock cycle. The clock's value can be tested at
any time by the Peripheral and Control Processors,
and can be used to determine program running time
or the time of day, as required. None of the above
I/O flags or conditions can actually interrupt the
Peripheral and Control Processors' programs;
these processors must test the flags and indicators,
and initiate appropriate action depending on the
results of the tests.
F: . . . . . . . . . . . . operation code.
d: . . . . . . . . . . . . literal, address. or index
value.
m: . • . . . . . . . . . portion of a literal or
address.
. 123 Instruction Repertoire
The instruction repertoire of the Peripheral and
Control Processors is normally of no concern to
the programmer of a Control Data 6000 Series
computer system because these processors normally are not programmed by the user. They are
usually assigned tasks by SIPROS, the integrated
operating system for the 6000 Series. SIPROS
controls a sufficiently large number of system
routines to provide all input-output, data transcription, and standard system servicing operations.
The Exchange Jump instruction gives the Peripherai
and Control Processors the ability to interrupt the
Central Processor and exchange its currentlyoperating program with another from Central
Memory. When each program that is to be executed in the Central Processor is loaded into
Central Memory, a 16-word "control package" is
loaded with it. Exchange Jump signals the Central
Processor to exchange the contents of its registers
and other control information with the 16-word
control package for the program that has been
selected for -initiation. The control package
includes such information as the initial contents of
the eight A and eight X Central Processor registers,
the Central Memory reference address of the
program, the program execution address (P
register), and the Field Length of the program for
purposes of memory protection. A complete
exchange of Central Processor programs can be
performed in less than five microseconds.
The programmer generally writes his program for
execution by the Central Processor and allows
SIPROS to determine when and to what extent the
Peripheral and Control Processor programs should
be utilized. However, in those cases in which the
FORTRAN, COBOL, or ASCENT (Central Processor
assembly language) programmer explicitly chooses
to perform specific routines in the Peripheral and
Control Processors, he can code these routines
in-line by means of the ASPER Peripheral
Processor assembly language (see Section 260:172).
The Peripheral and Control Processors have an
instruction repertoire of 64 instructions, including
fixed-point binary addition and subtraction, testing,
incrementing, jumps, shifts, and input-output
device control. Two additional instructions are
included to transmit blocks of data between the
peripheral memory units and Central Memory. No
instructions are supplied to provide automatic
editing, code translation, or radix conversion
facilities.
. 125 Software Assignments
The Peripheral and Control Processors are
normally assigned programs by SIPROS, the operating system for the Control Data 6000 Series,
according to demands within users' programs and
requirements of the system's supervision. Two of
the Peripheral and Control Processors are permanently assigned to system control activities,
and two additional Peripheral Processors are
dedicated for use by the system whenever disc file
input-output operations occur. The remaining
Peripheral Processors, called Pool Processors,
are available for performing any tasks assigned
them by SIPROS in service of the Central
Processor program, the programs in the other
Peripheral and Control Processors, and the
routines of SIPROS itself. Table I shows the typical assignments of Peripheral and Control
Processors within a Control Data 6000 Series system. The Executive/Monitor routines and other
services of SIPROS are described in Section 260: 191
of this report.
(Contd.)
Two instructions can be used by the Peripheral and
Control Processors to communicate with the
Central Processor. The Exchange Jump instruction,
described in Paragraph .124, enables a Peripheral
and Control Processor to remove a Central Processor program from operation. and to replace it
with another program in Central Memory. all in
less than 5 microseconds. Another instruction,
called Read Program Address, permits the
Peripheral and Control Processor to monitor the
status of the current Central Processor program.
Any delays or program exits within the Central
Processor program can then be determined, and
another program can be initiated by means of the
Exchange Jump instruction.
11/65
A
AUERBACH
•
/'
./
PERIPHERAL AND CONTROL PROCESSORS
I
TABLE I: ALLOCATION OF PERIPHERAL
PROCESSORS
"
PERIPHERAL
PROCESSOR (PP)
1
Executive & Monitor PP;
this processor is permanently dedicated.
2
Disk Executive PP;
this processor is permanently dedicated.
3
Primary Disk Slave PP;
this unit is dedicated
whenever there are any
disk requests.
4
Secondary Disk Slave PP;
this unit is dedicated
whenever there are any
disk requests.
5-10
Pool PP's;
these units are available
for other system operations, off-line
transcriptions, and
internal operations, as
stipulated in user's
program.
. 13
Availability: " . . . . . 6 months .
. 14
First Delivery: . . . . . 1965 (with 6600 system) .
.2
PROCESSING FACILITIES
.21
• 214
. 215
. 216
. 217
. 218
Operations and Operands
Operation
Provision
and Variation
Fixed point automatic
binary
12 bits.
Add/subtract:
Multiply:
none.
none.
Divide:
none.
Floating point:
BooleanAND:
automatic }
Inclusive OR:
automatic
binary
12 bits.
Exclusive OR:
automatic
Comparison: . . . . • . . no automatic facilities •
Code translation: .... none .
Radix conversion: ... none .
Edit format: . . . . • . . none .
Table lookup: . . . . . . none .
.22
Special Cases of Operands
.211
.212
.213
(
DUTIES
260:052. 130
.236 Directly addressed operands Internal storage
type: .. , . . . . . . . Peripheral Core Storage.
Minimum size: .... 12-bit word.
Maximum size: .... 12-bit word.
Volume accessible: .4,096 words.
Increased address
capacity: . . . . . . . use of A register to hold
address makes all of
Central Memory
accessible.
.237 Address indexing: ... none as such; address
increment values can be
included within an
instruction.
.238 Indirect addressing: .. specified in operation code;
not recursive.
.239 Stepping: . . . . . . . . . any 12-bit word can be
stepped by +1 or -1.
.24
Instruction Formats: . see Paragraph .122 .
• 234 Basic address
structure: .•....•.
.235 Literals Arithmetic: . . . . . • .
Comparisons and
tests: . . • . . . . . . .
Incrementing
modifiers: .....•
one-address.
18 bits.
18 bits.
6 bits.
©
Category of
storage
Size in
bits
A Register:
18
P and Q Registers:
12
K Register:
9
Program
usage
adder in each
processor.
program addressing and
incrementing operations.
operation control.
.3
SEQUENCE CONTROL FEATURES
.31
Instruction
Sequencing: . . . . . . . see Paragraph .121.
. 32
Look-Ahead: . . . . . . . none .
. 33
Interruption: . . . . . . . none; see Paragraph . 124 .
.34
Multiprogramming: .. none; i. e., only one
program at a time per
Peripheral Processor.
.35
Multi-sequencing: ... achieved through assignment, by either SIPROS
or the programmer, of
appropriate portions of
user programs to
individual Peripheral
and Control Processors.
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
The performance of the Control Data 6000 Series
Peripheral and Control Processors, in terms of
both their basic instruction times and speeds on
our standard measures of performance, is shown
in the appropriate subreport section for each
6000 Series computer system:
. 221 Negative numbers: ... one's complement .
.222 Zero: •••.••.••••• two forms; negative zero
is considered non -zero
in tests for zero.
.223 Operand size
determination: . . . . . determined by the instruction requirements.
. 23
Special Processor Storage
6400 Peripheral and
Control Processors: . Section 263:052.
6600 Peripheral and
Control Processors: . Section 264: 052.
6800 Peripheral and
Control Processors: . Section 265:052.
.5
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
ID:!2!:
Check or Interlock
Overflow:
Invalid data:
Invalid operation:
Arithmetic error:
Invalid address:
Receipt of data:
Dispatch of data:
no check.
not possible.
not possible.
no check.
no check.
no check.
no check.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
-
260:061. 100
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
CONSOLES
6602 DISPLAY CONSOLE
CONSOLES: 6602 DISPLAY CONSOLE
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . • • . . . . . . . 6602 Display Console .
.12
Associated Units: .•.. none.
.13
Description
this data, and displays it on one of the cathode-ray
display screens. The keyboard input itself and
system directives to the operator are usually presented on one display screen, and status information concerning the current problem program and
other concurrently-running programs is displayed
on the other screen.
The 6602 Display Console is an essential unit in .
every Control Data 6000 Series computer system.
It consists of two cathode-ray display units and a
manual keyboard, providing communication capabilities between the system operator and the SIPROS
operating system, which, in turn, can communicate
with every device in the computer system complex.
The 6602 Display Console does not have the capability to display automatically the contents of any
of the registers or memory locations, but equivalent
functions can be performed by means of the SIPROS
control program in one of the Peripheral and Control Processors. According to the data entered
manually via the Display Console's keyboard, the
control program can also alter the contents of the
Central Memory and the main registers, and can
interrupt, step, and/or terminate a program in
the Central Processor.
The 6602 Display Console is connected to the computer system by means of a permanently-assigned
Data Channel. It therefore functions in much the
same way as any input-output subsystem. Additional
Display Consoles can be added if desired, but a
Data Channel must be reserved for the use of each
Display Console that is added.
The operator enters information into the system
through the 50 alphanumeric keys on the Display
Console's keyboard. This keyboard is used to
initiate a control program in one of the Peripheral
and Control Processors. The control program
examines the keyboard input, extracts requested
data from various parts of the system, formats
The use of multiple 6602 Display Consoles can be
controlled by a single Peripheral and Control
Processor. This usage could conceivably reduce
system idle time by allowing the simultaneous debugging and monitoring of a number of unrelated
problems that are currently being multiprogrammed
in the system.
. 14
Availability: . . . . . . . 6 months .
. 15
First Delivery: . . . . . 1965 .
./
Figure 1: View of 6602 Display Console
11/65
A
AUERBACH
~
260:062.100
1.
~EDP
STANDARD
\
AUERBACH
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
CONSOLES
6060 REMOTE CALCULATOR
REPORTS
CONSOLES: 6060 REMOTE CALCULATOR
.1
GENERAL
· 11
Identity: • . • . • . . . . . 6060 Remote Calculator.
· 12
Associated Units: . . . . 6677 Multiplexor.
310 Acoustic Coupler or
Bell System 103A Data
Set.
· 13
Description
The Control Data 6060 Remote Calculator is a
desk-type electronic calculator that permits users
in remote locations to utilize the mathematical
processing capabilities of a large-scale computer
center. Using the Remote Calculator, the operator simply keys in his problems in standard FORTRAN-like mathematical notation and calls for a
display of the solution. His statements are transmitted to the computer center over voice-grade
telephone lines.
The 6060 Remote Calculator is a portable device,
weighing approximately 40 pounds, that can be used
wherever there is a normal telephone hand-set.
After the computer center has been called, the
telephone hand-piece is placed on a Control Data
310 Acoustic Coupler which connects to the Remote
Calculator. Remote operations can begin at once.
Communication between the Remote Calculator and
the computer center can alternatively be established via a Bell System 103A Data Set.
The 6060 Remote Calculator's interface at the computation center is the Control Data 6677 Multiplexor. Up to 128 Remote Calculators can be connected to each 6677 Multiplexor, and up to four
Multiplexors can be connected to one Peripheral
and Control Processor through the standard inputoutput Data Channels.
When requests for specific mathematical functions
and procedures are entered at the Remote Calculator and transmitted to an assigned Peripheral and
Control Processor, a resident control program,
REM COP , translates and monitors these requests
and enters the desired programs into the Central
Processor's work queue. As soon as the problem
has been solved, REMCOP transmits the solution
to the Remote Calculator for display.
The 6060 Remote Calculator consists of an illuminated 12-digit decimal display panel and five basic
groups of keys spread over the inclined surface of
the keyboard. The display panel is used to view
the problem statement as it is keyed in, assisting
in the correction of keyboard errors. The display
panel also presents the computer system's solution to the mathematical problem.
The data entry section of the keyboard permits
direct entry of numeric values and mathematical
operation symbols. The "variables" keys provide
the facility for attaching alphabetic variable names
to user-provided values for use in the problem
statements. A third group of keys provides 32
standard mathematical functions that can be called
for to assist in obtaining the desired solution.
The variety of keyboard functions can be altered
to meet the specific needs of each user. The
status keys provide basic communication ability
with the Control Data 6000 system and also serve
as status illuminators. One of these keys also
provides access to any named mathematical function in the central computer's memory. The
fifth group of keys controls the execution and display of the computational statements and solutions.
First deliveries of the 6060 Remote Calculator are
scheduled for 1966. No details are available to
date concerning the demand on the Central Processor caused by Remote Calculator operations.
(
©
'965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
260:063. 100
14
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
CONSOLES
6090 ENTRY/DISPLAY CONSOLE
AUERBACH
STANDARD
ED:!?
REPORTS
CONSOLES: 6090 ENTRY/DISPLAY CONSOLE
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . . .
.12
Associated Units: •... Model 6090 Central Control
Unit.
Model 6678 Multiplexor.
.13
Description
6090-2, which displays 20 lines of 50 symbols. The
symbol repertoire includes the upper case alphabet,
the numerals 0 through 9, the period, comma,
semicolon, and several other special characters.
. 6090 Entry/Display Console
(formerly Model dd12
Remote Data Display).
Data is entered on the Entry/Display Console keyboard, where it is converted into 6-bit characters
by the 6090 Central Control Unit. The Central
Control Unit then generates the display of this
information and transmits it to the computer center.
The display of information retrieved from the computer and transmitted over standard telephone lines
is also controlled by the Central Control Unit.
The Control Data 6090 Entry/Display Console is the
basic component of a high-speed data entry and
retrieval system for the Control Data 6000 Series.
The 6090 uses a 14-inch rectangular cathode-ray
tube to display both the entered and retrieved
information. A standard typewriter-styled keyboard is used to enter requests for data. The
Entry/Display Console system can be augmented
by a 75-card-per-minute card reader and/or a
100-line-per-minute line printer. The printer can
provide hard-copy records of the data requests and
the retrieved information. The 6090 Entry/Display
Console is normally used as a remote device,
communicating with the central computer over
voice-grade telephone lines. Up to 64 Entry/
Display Consoles can be multiplexed into a single
6000 Series Data Channel by means of a Model 6678
Multiplexor.
The 6090 Entry/Display Console displays up to 1, 000
symbols on a 14-inch rectangular screen. The
console is available in two models: Model 6090-1,
which displays 10 lines of 50 symbols, and Model
/
Data transfers use the 6-bit character as the basic
unit of information. The transmission of these
characters is protected by the automatic generation
and validation of a parity bit for each character.
As announced, the 6090 Entry/Display system is
general in its design and can be modified to suit
specific requirements.
No details are available to date concerning the software support available for use with the 6090
Entry/Display Consoles. However, it is known that
this software will be integrated with the SIPROS
software package.
The 6090 is manufactured by Control Data
Corporation.
. 14
Availability:
. 1 year .
.15
First Delivery: .
. December 1966.
/
11/65
A
AUERBACH
$
260:071. 100
1&
AUERBACH
STANDARD
ED)?
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT
405 CARD READER
REPORTS
INPUT·OUTPUT: 405 CARD READER
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: . . . .
. 12
Description
Processors. The program facilities available with
the Control Data 405 Card Reader do not differ
significantly when different controllers are used,
except that where the controller can be physically
connected to two data channels, it is possible to
switch one card reader between the two computer
systems by connecting the two channels to different
systems.
. 405 Card Reader.
3248 Card Reader
Controller.
3447 Card Reader
Controller.
3649 Card Reader
Controller.
A single card read instruction defines an area in
core storage which is to be filled with data read by
the .card.reader. As many cards as are necessary
to fIll thIS area are read in under the supervision
of a card reader controller, without further program intervention being necessary.
The Control Data 405 Card Reader is a fast, asynchronous photoelectric reader that operates at
1,200 cards per minute when reading full 80-column
cards, and at up to 1,600 cards per minute with
51-column stub cards. The input hopper can hold
4,000 cards. Two output stackers are provided:
one main stacker which can hold 4, 000 cards, and
a rej ect stacker which can hold 240 cards. The
cards are turned individually as they are being
read so that the card deck in the output stacker is
in exactly the same order as it was before being
read.
Data Channel control flags can be set when the
card reader becomes available, when a card read
operation is successfully completed, or when for
some reason a card read operation ends without
being successfully completed. The Peripheral
Processor program can test all of these conditions.
In addition, status indicators show: whether the
unit is currently able to respond to an instruction;
which interrupt conditions are presently activated;
whether the card presently being read is a binary
card; whether a card jam, empty input hopper, or
full output hopper condition is present; whether a
card read error has been noted; and whether the
operator has set a switch on the reader indicating
that the last card of the card file being read is
physically in the card reader.
The card read operation proceeds serially, columnby-column. Two separate photoelectric read
stations read each column, and the two readings
are checked within the card reader before the
column image is forwarded to the card reader
controller. Conversion from Hollerith to BCD
code is normally executed automatically on all
cards which do not have positions 5 and 7 punched
in column 1. The conversion can, however, be
inhibited by program where desirable.
Each card reader must have its own individual card
reader controller, so the number of card readers
which can be connected to a computer system is
related to the number of data channels and the
number of selectable positions on each data
channel.
There are three different Card Reader Controllers.
The controllers differ in their buffering provisions
and in the number of data channels which can be
connected to each controller. The available controller models and their characteristics are:
The card reading operation does not delay the
Central Processor in any way. However, its
operation does place a small load upon the
Peripheral Processor that controls the card reading. Since the amount of this delay varies with
each member of the Control Data 6000 Series, it
is presented in the Simultaneous Operations section
of the subreport on each system.
Model 3248: unbuffered, one data channel
connection.
Model 3447: full-card buffer, one data channel
connection.
Model 3649: full-card buffer, two data channel
connections.
The Card Reader Controllers intervene between the
6681 Data Channel Converter and the card reader
itself. The Data Channel Converter connects to
one of the 12 6000 Series Data Channels, which, in
turn; communicates with one of the 10 Peripheral
.13
Availability: . . . . . . . 4 months.
. 14
First Delivery: . . . . . 1963.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH info, inc.
11/65
260:072.100
1&
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT
CARD PUNCHES
STANDARD
EDP
AUERBACH
R£PDRTS
INPUT·OUTPUT: CARD PUNCHES
.1
.11
.12
•
GENERAL
Identity:
. 415 Card Punch.
IBM 523 Card Punch.
IBM 544 Card Punch.
3245 Card Punch Controller.
3446 Card Punch Controller.
3644 Card Punch Controller.
Where the controller does contain a fullcard buffer, the data can be supplied in
BCD column-by-column format and automatically "turned around" in the buffer
and converted to the row-by-row format
required by the card punch without any
program supervision. At the same time,
automatic conversion from internal BCD
to Hollerith coding can occur if desired.
Description
A Control Data 415 Card Punch can be connected to
any Control Data 6000 Series computer through a
Card Punch Controller. The punch operates at
250 cards per minute and uses a row-by-row
punching technique. The punched data is then read
at a post-punch read station, which counts the number of holes in the card. Subsequent to the postpunch read station, a card can be offset in the
output stacker so that the operator can take any
necessary action to remove mispunched cards from
the card files.
• Switching Between Computer Systems:
Where the controller can be physically connected to two data channels, it is possible
to switch the card punch unit from one
computer system to the other by connecting
the two data channels to different computer
systems and using either channel as required. Special instructions are available
to reserve the punch for one system at a
time, to allow for controlled operation.
IBM 523 or 544 Card Punches can be used in place
of the Control Data 415 Card Punch. These IBM
card punches operate at 100 and 250 cards per
minute, respectively, and are functionally equivalent to the Control Data 415 except that they have
no provision for offsetting mispunched cards.
A single card punch instruction defines an area in
core storage whose contents are to be punched out.
As many cards as are needed to accommodate all
of the data in the designated area will be punched
in response to the instruction.
There are three different Card Punch Controllers,
anyone of which can control one card punch unit.
The controllers differ in their buffering provisions
and in the number of data channels which can be
connected. The available controller models and
their major characteristics are as follows:
Model 3245: unbuffered
one data channel
connection.
Model 3446: full-card
buffer
one data channel
connection.
Model 3644: full-card
buffer
two data channel
connections.
Data Channel control flags can be set when the
card punch becomes available, when an operation
is successfully completed, or when for some
reason an operation ends without being success-fully completed. In addition, status indicators
show whether the unit is currently able to respond
to an instruction, what interrupt conditions are
presently activated, and whether there has been a
failure to feed a card.
Each card punch must have its own individual controller, so the number of card punches that can
be connected to a computer system is related to
the number of data channels and the number of
selectable positions on each data channel.
The Card Punch Controllers intervene between the
6681 Data Channel Converter and the card punch
itself. The Data Channel Converter connects to
one of the 12 6000 Series Data Channels, which, in
turn, communicates with one of the 10 Peripheral
Processors. The available program facilities differ
depending on which controller is used. The differences in program facilities are:
• Error Checking: Where the controller does
not have a full-card buffer, the hole count
reported by the post-punch read station cannot be used because no equivalent hole-count
of the card image exists; therefore, no comparison between the two counts can be made.
11/65
Card Punch Coding: Where the controller
does not contain a full-card buffer, the computer must provide the data in exactly the
form in which it is to be punched.
The card punching operation does not delay the
Central Processor in any way. However, its
operation does place a small load upon the
Peripheral Processor that controls the card punching. Since the amount of this delay varies with
each member of the Control Data 6000 Series, it
is presented in the Simultaneous Operations section
of the subreport on each system.
.13
Availability:..
. ... 4 months.
.14
First Delivery:
. . . . December 1964.
fA
AUERBACH
~
-&.
260:073. 100
STAND""
~EDP
-
AUERBAC~
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT
PAPER TAPE
READER/PUNCHES
"'DRTS
INPUT·OUTPUT: PAPER TAPE READER/pUNCHES
.1
GENERAL
.122 3694 Paper Tape Reader/Punch
.11
Identity: . . . . . . . . . . 3691 Paper Tape Reader/
--Punch.
3694 Paper Tape Reader/
Punch.
. 12
Description
The 3694 Paper Tape Reader/Punch is a freestanding unit, about 60 inches high, 24 inches
deep, and 42 inches wide. A large proportion of
the total space is taken up by the spooling facilities which are a feature of this unit. Two separate data channels can be connected to the selfcontained control mechanism within the 3694
Paper Tape Reader/Punch, so that concurrent
paper tape reading and punching can take place.
• 121 3691 Paper Tape Reader/Punch
The 3691 Paper Tape Reader/Punch is a freestanding unit which in its normal version is 36
inches high, 28 inches deep, and nearly 48 inches
wide. A "ruggedized" version, built to withstand
adverse physical conditions, has different dimensions, which are summarized in the Physical Characteristics section of this Computer System Report,
on page 260:211. 100.
The Paper Tape Reader operates at a peak speed
of 1,000 characters per second, using standard
paper or plastic tape with fully-punched holes.
Reading operates photoelectrically, in either the
forward or reverse direction. Control Data is
currently using a Digitronics Corporation paper
tape reader for this unit.
The 3691 contains logically-separate reading and
punching sub-units and a single data channel connection for their joint use. The single data channel connection makes it impossible to run the
reader and the punch concurrently. Spooling facilities are not provided.
\
".
The Paper Tape Punch is supplied by the National
Cash Register Corporation, and operates at a
rated speed of 110 characters per second.
Five, seven, or eight-level paper tape can be used
by either unit; a manual switch selection and tape
width adjustment are necessary when a different
type of paper tape is mounted. Character parity
can be optionally used on both reading and punching,
under program control. Each tape character can
be read into, or punched from, a separate computer word location; or, alternatively, a packed
format can be used. In the packed format, a 12bit peripheral computer word stores either two
5-bit characters or one 7-bit or 8-bit character.
Conversion to or from the appropriate internal
code must be accomplished by programming.
The Paper Tape Reader operates at a peak speed
of 350 characters per second, in the forward direction only. A Control Data Model 350 photoelectric reader is currently being used.
The Paper Tape Punch is supplied by the National
Cash Register Company, and operated at a rated
speed of 110 characters per second.
(
"-.
Five, seven, or eight-level paper tape can be used
by either unit; a manual switch selection and tape
width adjustment are required when a different
type of paper tape is mounted. There are no provisions for automatically checking the parity of the
characters on the paper tape itself, and any required checking or preparation of parity-checked
characters must be handled by the program. Each
tape character can be read into, or punched from,
a separate computer word location; or, alternatively, a number of characters can be packed into a
single word. In the packed format, a 12-bit peripheral computer word stores either two 5-bit
characters or one 7-bit or 8-bit character. Conversion to or from the appropriate internal code
must be accomplished by programming.
Data 'channel control flags are set when the unit becomes available, when an operation ends successfully, or when for some reason an operation ends '
without being successfully completed. In addition,
status indicators show whether the unit is ready
to respond to an instruction, whether the punch
tape supply is low, and whether the punch or the
reader unit was last connected to the data channel.
Data channel control flags are set when the unit
becomes available, when an operation ends successfully, or when for some reason an operation
ends without being successfully completed.
• 123 Processor Demands
The paper tape reading and punching operations do
not place any load on the Central Processor. However, these operations do place a small load on the
Peripheral Processor that controls the paper tape
reading and/or punching. Since the size of this
demand, or "interference, " varies with each member of the Control Data 6000 Series, it is presented in the Simultaneous Operations section of
the subreport on each system.
. 13
.14
Availability: •.•.••• 6 months •
First Delivery
3691 Paper Tape
Reader /Punch:
3694 Paper Tape
Reader /Punch:
1963.
1964.
\,
© , 965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
260:081. 100
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT
3152 LINE PRINTER
INPUT-OUTPUT: 3152 LINE PRINTER
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . • . . . . . . . 3152 Line Printer.
. 12
Description
hole in the specified channel of the format tape.
All paper-positioning instructions can take place
either before or after printing, as the program
directs.
The Control Data 3152 Line Printer operates at up
to 150 single-spaced alphanumeric lines per minute.
It contains its own control unit, which is connected
to one channel via the 6681 Data Channel Converter,
and a 120-character line buffer. The 3152 is a
drum printer; it normally uses a 63-character
drum, although alternative drums are available.
The drum revolution time is 400 milliseconds, and
an infinite clutch is used so that asynchronous
printing is possible. Paper control is handled
either by the program directly, or by a combination
of the program and a 6-level format tape. Skipping over non-printed areas takes place at approximately 100 line-spaces per second. The effective
speed of the 3152 Printer, including allowances for
paper advance, is summarized in Table I.
Program facilities include printing with single or
double spacing, page ejection, and automatic
advancing to the last line of a page. In conjunction
with the 132-position, 6-level format loop which is
mounted by the operator before printing starts, the
program can instruct the paper to be positioned at
the line position corresponding to the next punched
Data channel control flags can be set when the
printer becomes available, when an operation is
successfully completed, or when for some reason
an operation ends without being successfully completed. In addition, status indicators show whether
the printer is ready to respond to an instruction,
whether the paper supply is exhausted, or whether
the printed form is positioned at the last line of the
page.
/
Printing and spacing operations do not delay the
Central Processor in any way. However, these
operations do place a small load on the Peripheral
Processor that controls them. Since the amount
of this delay varies with each member of the
Control Data 6000 Series, it is presented in the
Simultaneous Operations section of the subreport
on each 6000 Series computer system.
The 3152 Printer is manufactured by Control Data
Corporation.
.13
Availability: . . . . . • . 4 months.
.14
First Delivery: . . . . . June 1963.
TABLE I: EFFECTIVE SPEED OF THE CONTROL DATA 3152 PRINTER
Lines Advanced per
Line Printed
6
12
18
24
30
(1
(2
(3
(4
(5
Printed Lines per Minute
Using AUERBACH Standard
Character Set*
1
2
3
4
5
150
150
150
150
150
inch)
inches)
inches)
inches)
inches)
150
118
108
100
90
* 0-9, A-Z, minus, comma, period, dollar sign.
./
11/65
A
AUERBACH
•
260:082. 100
1&
AUERBACH
STANDARD
EDP
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT
IBM 1403 PRINTER
REPORTS
INPUT-OUTPUT: IBM 1403 PRINTER
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
in detail in the IBM 1410 Computer System Report,
on page 402: 082. 100.
.. IBM 1403 Printer, Models
2 and 3.
Control Data Line Printer
Controller, Model 3258.
Data channel control flags can be set when the
printer becomes available, when an operation is
successfully completed, or when for some reason
an operation is ended without being successfully
completed. In addition, status indicators show
whether the printer is available to respond to an
instruction and whether the paper supply is exhausted.
Description
Either Model 2 or Model 3 of the IBM 1403 Printer
can be connected to a Control Data 6000 Series
computer system by means of a Model 3258 Line
Printer Controller. A separate controller is
required for each printer which is to be connected
to the computer system. Up to 8 controllers can
be connected to each 6681 Data Channel Converter.
The IBM 1403 Model 2 operates at a peak speed of
600 lines per minute and uses a horizontal-chain
printing mechanism. The 1403 Model 2 is described in detail in the IBM 1401 Computer System
Report, on page 401:081.100. The newer Model 3
can operate at 1,100 alphanumeric lines per minute,
using a train of type slugs which move through a
horizontal channel. The 1403 Model 3 is described
Printing operations do not delay the Central
Processor in any way. However, these operations
do place a small load on the Peripheral Processor
that controls them. Since the amount of this delay
varies with each member of the Control Data 6000
Series, it is presented in the Simultaneous Operations section of the subreport on each 6000 Series
computer system.
.13
Availability: . . . . . . . ?
.14
First Delivery: . . . . . October 1964 (with Control
Data computer system).
\"
(
"
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
&
260:083.100
STAHDARD
/AEDP
AUER8AC~
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT
501 AND 505 LINE PRINTERS
REPORTS
INPUT-OUTPUT: 501 AND 505 LINE PRINTERS
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity:
tape. Skipping over non-printed areas takes place
at 150 line-spaces per second. The effective
speeds of both printers, including allowances for
paper advance, are summarized in Table I.
••••••..• 501 Line Printer.
505 Line Printer.
3256 Line Printer
Controller.
3659 Line Printer
Controller.
• 12
Program facilities include printing with single or
double spacing, page ejection, and an automatic
advance to the last line of a page. In conjunction
with the 132-position, 6-level format loop which is
mounted by the operator before printing starts, the
program can instruct the paper to be positioned at
the line position corresponding to the next hole
punched in the specified channel of the format tape.
All paper-positioning instructions can take place
either before or after printing, as the program
directs.
Description
The Control Data 501 and 505 Line Printers operate at up to 1,000 and 500 single-spaced alphanumeric lines per minute, respectively. Except
for their operating speeds, the two units are functionally identical. Each printer contains its own
136-character line buffer and can be connected to
a 6000 Series computer system through either the
3256 or 3259 Controller. Up to 8 of these controllers can be connected to each 6681 Data Channel
Converter. The 3659 Controller has two channel
connections, permitting two computer systems to
share its use.
Data Channel control flags can be set when the
printer becomes available, when an operation is
successfully completed, or when for some reason
an operation ends without being successfully completed.
In addition, status indicators show whether the
printer is available to respond to an instruction,
whether the paper supply is exhausted or the
paper torn, or whether the printed form is currently positioned at the last line of the page.
Physically, the printer is enclosed in a four-foothigh cabinet, similar to those used for peripheral
control equipment. The cabinet has semi-translucent front panels, through which the operator can
observe the printing operation. The use of the cabinet reduces the noise level during printing.
'Printing operations do not delay the Central Processor in any way. However, these operations do
place a small load on the Peripheral Processor
that controls them. Since the amount of this delay
varies with each member of the Control Data 6000
Series, it is presented in the Simultaneous Operations section of the subreport on each 6000 Series
computer system.
Both the 501 and 505 are drum printers, and both
normally employ a 63-character drum, although alternative drums are available. The drum revolution time is 60 milliseconds on the 501 and 120 milliseconds on the 505; an asynchronous clutch is
used so that printing of a line can be initiated at any
time.
.13
• 14
Availability: ••••••• 4 months.
First Delivery
501 Printer: ••.•••• June 1964.
505 Printer: •.••••• Spring 1965.
Paper control is handled by the program, either
directly or in conjunction with the 6-level format
TABLE I: EFFECTIVE SPEEDS OF THE CONTROL DATA 501 AND 505 PRINTERS
Lines Advanced per
Line Printed
Printed Lines per Minute
Using AUERBACH Standard
Character Set*
501 Printer
1
2
3
4
5
6
12
18
24
30
(1
(2
(3
(4
(5
505 Printer
1,000
750
714
667
600
500
500
500
400
375
571
416
333
267
227
375
300
250
215
187
inch)
inches)
inches)
inches)
inches)
* 0-9, A-Z, minus, comma, period, dollar sign
11/65
A
AUERBACH
~
-&
260:091. 100
STANDARD
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT
7-TRACK TAPE UNITS
AEDP
AUERBAC~
_-------J
REPORTS
INPUT-OUTPUT: 600 SERIES 7-TRACK MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
from the magnetic tape units, but a small demand
is placed on the memory of the Peripheral Processor that controls these operations. Since the
amount of this delay varies with each member of
the Control Data 6000 Series, it is presented in
the Simultaneous Operations section of the subreport on each 6000 Series computer system.
Control Data 601 through
607 M8.0onetic Tape Units
and associated Magnetic
Tape Controllers.
The Control Data 600 Series of 7 -track magnetic
tape units offers packing densities of 200,556, or
800 characters per inch and tape speeds of 37.5,
75, or 150 inches per second. The 7-track tape
units record one parity bit and six data bits in each
tape row. These units, which are compatible with
the IBM 729 Magnetic Tape Units and other equivalent units, are described in this section and summarized in Table 1. The 9-track units, which record eight data bits and one parity bit in each tape
row and are compatible with the IBM 2400 Series
Magnetic Tape Units used in the IBM System/360,
are described in the next section of this Computer
System Report, on page 260:092.100. Compatibility
between the two groups of units is limited to their
mutual use of one-half-inch magnetic tape reels as
a recording medium, and to the possible modification of 9-track units so that they can read or write
7 -track magnetic tape instead of (not as well as) 9track magnetic tape.
-
The effective data transfer rates are controlled by
the time taken to pass over the inter-block gap and
by the length of each physical tape block. All Control Data 7 -track magnetic tape units use the IBMcompatible three-quarter-inch inter-block gaps, S'O
that their performance when the tape speed is low
and short blocks are in use is not as high as thatof
other magnetic tape units which have otherwise
identical specifications but which are able to use
shorter inter-block gaps (e. g., the Honeywe1l204B
Series).
The Control Data Magnetic Tape Unit Controllers
can control a maximum of from 4 to 16 tape units
each, depending on which model is selected (see
Table II). All the tape units connected to a particular controller must have the same physical
tape speed.
Each controller can handle as many simultaneous
data transmissions as it has data channels connected to it. Models are available with one, two,
three, or four possible data channel connections,
as shown in Table II. These data channels are
connected to a 6681 Data Channel Converter, which
provides the interface between the tape controllers
The peak data transfer rates of the 7-track magnetic tape units vary from 20,850 to 120,000 characters per second, depending upon which specific
unit is in use. The Central Processor is not delayed in any way during data transmissions to and
TABLE I: CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CONTROL DATA 7-TRACK MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
Model
No.
Tape
Speed,
inches
per sec
Recording
Density,
bits per
inch
Peak
Speed,
char
per sec
Interblock Gap Lengths
inches
msec (1)
chars (2)
Efficiency, %(3)
100-char
blocks
1,000-char
blocks
Rewind
Speed,
inches
per sec
601
37.5
556
200
20,850
0.75
0.75
20.0
20.0
417
150
19%
40%
71%
87%
200
603
75.0
556
200
41,700
0.75
0.75
10.0
10.0
417
150
19%
40%
71%
87%
350
604
75.0
800
556
200
60,000
0.75
0.75
0.75
10.0
10.0
10.0
600
417
150
14%
19%
40%
62%
71%
87%
350
606
150.0
556
200
83,400
0.75
0.75
5.0
5.0
417
150
19%
40%
71%
87%
350
607
150.0
800
556
200
120,000
0.75
0.75
0.75
5.0
5.0
5.0
600
417
150
14%
19%
40%
62%
71%
87%
350
I
\
',,-
(1)
(2)
(3)
Time in milliseconds to traverse each interblock gap when reading or writing consecutive blocks.
Number of character positions occupied by each interblock gap.
Effective speed at the indicated block size, expressed as a percentage of peak speed.
© '965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
! 1/65
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
260:091. 120
TABLE II: CONTROLLERS FOR CONTROL DATA 7-TRACK MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
Controller
Model
No. of
Channels
Max. No.
of Tapes
Acceptable Tape
Unit Models*
3127
3228
3229
1
1
1
4
4
8
601
604 or 607
604 or 607
3421
3422
3423
2
2
2
4
6
8
604 or 607
604 or 607
604 or 607
3622
3625
3626
3623
3624
2
3
3
4
4
16
8
16
8
16
606
606
606
606
606
or
or
or
or
or
607
607
607
607
607
* Tape units with different tape transport speeds must not be connected
to the same magnetic tape controller .
• 12
Description (Contd.)
and a 6000 Series Data Channel. Where there are
multiple data channels connected to a single magnetic tape controller, it is not necessary that each
data channel be connected to the same Control Data
computer system. Where there are two computers
at a single site, it is common practice to connect
a single tape controller to both computer systems.
This allows both computers to use any of the magnetic tape units connected to the controller, and
eliminates the necessity for special switching
devices.
The 7-track magnetic tape units can use pure
binary or BCD formats and can read backward as
well as forward. Writing must always operate in
the forward direction. Searching backward or forward to find a file mark, and rewinding with or
without automatic unloading of the tape reel, can
be handled by the magnetic tape subsystem independently of the Peripheral Processor once the operation has been initiated.
Data channel control flags can be set under three
separate conditions: when a tape unit becomes available, when an operation ends normally (i. e. , successfully) , and when something has prevented an
operation from being successfully completed. In
addition, there are 11 status codes which can be
tested by. the Peripheral Processor program.
These status codes are available for use whenever
required. They iI).dicate whether a tape unit is
available or not: whether the tape is positioned at
a file mark, at the load point, or at the physical
end of the tape; what density is currently being
used, whether writing is permitted, and whether
data has been lost through timing conflicts or is of
dubious value because of the known occurrence of
a transverse or longitudinal parity error.
. 13
Availability: .• . • ..
.14
First Delivery
Model 601
Mode1603
Model 604
Model 606
Mode1607
11/65
.••..•.
.....•.
....•••
.•••...
.2
PHYSICAL FORM
Each tape drive is a single unit. The drive past
the read, write, and erase heads uses pneumatic
capstans. The magnetic tape passes through
vacuum reservoirs immediately before and after
passing under the heads themselves. The vacuum
reservoirs are vertical and can hold about seven
feet of tape except on the tape units which operate
at 37. 5 inches per second; on these units the reservoirs are placed horizontally and have a capacity of about three feet of tape.
There are three heads: the erase head followed by
the write head and the read head. The gaps between
the heads are 0.4375 inches between the erase and
write heads, and O. 3 inches between the write and
read heads.
.3
EXTERNAL STORAGE
The Control Data 600 Series Magnetic Tape Units
use one-half-inch plastic tape. Normally 2,400foot reels are used, but some installations are successfully using 3, 600-foot reels with these tape
units.
The coding used is exactly the same as that used
with the IBM 729 Magnetic Tape Units.
.4
CONTROLLERS
All tape units must be connected to a controller.
The wide range of available controllers is shown
in Table II.
.5
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE
The tape units can read a single block in the forward or reverse direction, or write a block in the
forward direction only. The size of the block is
determined by the amount of storage specified as
the input or output area in the instruction, and is
limited only by the amountof core storage available.
An end-of-file mark can be written and is preceded
by a 6-inch gap. Search operations to find the endof-file mark can be conducted in either direction.
A special instruction is available to erase 6 inches
of tape, in order to skip over a bad spot on the tape.
6 months .
January 1965.
March 1963.
May 1964.
August 1962.
May 1964.
IA
AUERBACH
•
(Contd.)
INPUT-OUTPUT: 7-TRACK TAPE UNITS
.5
260:091.500
are marked 1 through 8 and two marked "stand-by."
Single button controls are used to bring the mounted
tape to the load point and to prepare a tape reel for
dismounting. Loading and unloading a reel of tape
takes approximately one minute, and the tape unit
must be stopped while this is done.
PROGRAM FACILITIES AVAILABLE (Contd.)
The program can select either binary or BCD codes
and can test the control flags to determine when a
tape unit becomes available, when an operation is
completed normally, or when an operation is completed in some abnormal manner.
The peak frequency of reloading is directly related
to the tape transport speed, and is once every 13,
6.5, or 3.25 minutes for units with tape speeds of
37.5, 75, and 150 inches per second, respectively.
The current status of a tape unit can be tested at
any time. Special status indicators show: whether
the unit is available or not; whether the tape is
positioned at a file mark, at the load point, or
whether it is approaching the physical end of the
tape; what denSity is currently being used; and
whether the tape reel presently mounted can be
written on. Error status indicators show whether
any data has been lost through timing conflicts or
whether any parity errors have been found.
.6
ERRORS, CHECKS, AND ACTION
.8
Parity errors cause the setting of an indicator that
can be tested by the Peripheral Processor programs. Such errors may be noted either during
the automatic read-back operation, which occurs
while writing is in progress, or during normal reading. Two parity checks are made, one on each 6-bit
data character transferred and one on the longitudinal parity character at the end of each physical
tape block.
PERFORMANCE
The major performance characteristics of the Control Data 600 Series of magnetic tape units (7 -track)
are summarized in Table 1. The effective speed of
any particular tape unit at any particular block size
can be calculated by using the formula "Effective
speed = Peak speed x Block length in chars/ (Block
length + Interblock gap length in chars)." The required values are included in Table 1. Alternatively, the effective speeds can be read from the
graphs at the end of this section.
.7
Errors which arise from timing conflicts and which
lead to a loss of data are similarly handled-by
setting a testable indicator.
Checks are made for the approaching end of the tape,
and for a match between the actual length of an incoming tape block and the input area set aside to
receive the block. Indicator settings are available
to notify the program of the result of these checks.
No explicit check is made upon the adequacy of the
plastic tape itself; reliance is placed upon the parity
checks on the data recorded on the tape.
EXTERNAL FACILITIES
The unit number is displayed on a dial at the top of
the unit. There are ten positions, eight of which
EFFECTIVE SPEED: CONTROL DATA 601, 603, and 606 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
(Recording density: 556 char/lnoh)
100,000
.,
I"
4
/
I
V
/
10,000
.,
/
I.
Effective Speed,
Char/sec.
I
1,000
~
/
,...
i-'
/
./
4
"
~
""'" t...-
/
V
/
/
/
i.-'
/
7
4
2
100
(
10
2
4
7
100
2
4
7
2
4
7
1,000
10,000
Characters Per Block
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporotion and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
260:091. 901
EFFECTIVE SPEED: CONTROL DATA 604 AND 607 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
(Recording density: 800 char/inch)
2
lOa, 000
\',Q1
7
/
2
V
7
I, 000
/~
,/
IL
V
4
2
/
/
la, 000
Effective Speed,
char/sec.
~
./
4
/
/
Y
V
./
1/
7
4
2
100
10
2
4
7
100
2
4
7
Characters Per Block
11/65
fA.
AUERBACH
~
1,000
2
4
7
10, 0000
.&.
fA.
AUERBAC~
260:092.100
STlHOARD
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT
9-TRACK TAPE UNITS
EDP
REPORTS
..-
INPUT·OUTPUT: 600 SERIES 9·TRACK MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: •••••••..• Control Data Magnetic
Tape Units, Models 692,
694, 696, and associated
Magnetic Tape controllers
.12
Description
record. This check is based on an 8-bit character
that is generated from the data bytes during the
write operation and then recorded at the end of the
tape block. During subsequent read operations,
the check character is regenerated and compared
to the check character that was originally recorded.
Models 3825, 3826, and 3827 controllers have been
announced for the 9-track Control Data tape units.
The ratio of data channel connections to magnetic
tape unit connections is unusually high, one data
channel being provided for every two magnetic
tape units which can be connected. Preliminary
indications are that it will be possible to connect
any of the three 9-track tape unit models to any
of the three controller models. The number of
magnetic tape units and data channels that can be
connected to each controller model are as follows:
The Control Data 692, 694, and 696 Magnetic Tape
Units use 9-track coding, with a recording density
of 800 bits per inch. Their peak data transfer
rates are 30, DOD, 60, 000 and 90, 000 bytes per
second, respectively, and the tape recordirig used is
compatible with the IBM 2400 Series 800 bpi magnetic
tape units, since they use the same coding, the
same checking, and the same denSities. They are
not compatible under normal circumstances with
the other tape units used with the Control Data
6000 Series; however, they can be modified to read
and write seven-track tape instead of (not as well
as) nine-track tape.
Controller Model:
Magnetic Tape Units:
Data Channels:
The effective data transfer rates are affected by
the time taken to pass over the interblock gap and
by the physical length of each magnetic tape block.
The interblock gap length is 0.6 inch, and the effective data transfer rates for various block lengths
are shown in both Table I and the graph on the next
page.
3827
4
6
8
234
The physical and functional details of the Models
692, 694, and 696 Magnetic Tape Units are, except for the coding and checking methods, identical with those of the Control Data 7-track magnetic tape units; these are described in detail in
the preceding report section, 260:091. The
major design features of these tape units are the
use of vacuum capstans and vacuum reservoirs
for tape control, combined read/write heads for
read-after-write checking, and automatic searching
for end-of-file marks in either the forward or
backward direction.
The peak speeds of the Control Data 692, 694, and
696 tape units are 30,000, 60,000 and 90,000 eight-bit
bytes per second, respectively. These speeds are
functionally equivalent to 40,000, 80,000, and
120,000 six-bit characters per second, respectively, unless the data is recorded in the 8-bit Extended BCD or 4-bit packed decimal codes used in
the IBM System/360.
The reading and recording operations are checked
by the standard row and track parity checking
schemes. In addition, a cyclic code check is used
to test the validity of each tape block or physical
3825 3826
The 9-track magnetic tape units are manufactured
by Control Data Corporation.
.14
Availability: • • • . •.
?
.15
First Delivery: • • .•
?
TABLE I: CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CONTROL DATA 9-TRACK MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
Model
No.
(.
"
Tape
Speed,
inches
per sec
Recording
Density,
bits per
inch
Peak
Speed,
bytes per
sec
inches
msec (1)
chars (2)
Interblock Gap Lengths
Efficiency, % (3)
100-char
blocks
1,000-char
blocks
Rewind
Speed,
inches
per sec
692
37.5
800
30,000
0.6
16.0
480
17
68
200
694
75.0
800
.60,000
0.6
8.0
480
17
68
350
696
112.5
800
90,000
0.6
5.4
480
17
68
?
(1) Time in milliseconds to traverse each inter block gap when reading or writing consecutive blocks.
(2) Number of character positions occupied by each inter block gap.
(3) Effective speed at the indicated block size, expressed as a percentage of peak speed.
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
260:092.901
EFFECTIVE SPEED: CONTROL DATA 692, 694, AND 696 MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
(Recording density: 800 bytes/inch)
10,000,000
7
4
2
1,000,000
7
4
2
100,000
7
",
Effective Speed,
char/sec.
4
/
2
i,;
10,000
I." l.;'
./
4
2
1,000
7
//
L..oio-''''
692
".",.--
i"'"
~
~'"
~
~~
)f'/
i,;"
/
./
~
,"
.~
7
t:/
, "/
,
l..t1'
69 6
..---
/
~
/' V
~
,
I
4
2
100
2
10
4
2
7
4
7
2
1,000
100
4
7
10,000
Characters Per Block
/
11/65
fA.•
AUERBACH
260:093. 100
.£
STlNDAID
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
14-TRACK TAPE UNIT
./I&..EDP
. . . --_..J
AUERBACH
REPORTS
~_
INPUT·OUTPUT: 626 14·TRACK MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
(
\
"
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: .••••••••• Control Data 626 Magnetic
Tape Unit and 6622
Magnetic Tape Controller.
.12
Description
The Control Data 626 Magnetic Tape Unit is the only
14-track magnetic tape equipment available with the
6000 Series. The 626 uses one-inch tape, recorded
at 800 rows per inch, with a tape speed of 150
inches per second. Each row contains two 6-bit
characters and a parity bit for each character.
The resulting peak data transfer rate is 240, 000
six-bit characters per second.
Functionally, there is no compatibility between the
Control Data 626 Magnetic Tape Unit and any other
magnetic tape equipment in the industry. Unlike
the 7-track and 9-track 600 Series models described in Sections 260:091 and 260:092, the
Model 626 is designed simply to provide high data
transfer rates within a Control Data 6000 Series
computer system.
\
"
Operational characteristics and data transfer
efficiencies of the 626 Magnetic Tape Unit are
shown in Table I, in a format that facilitates
comparisons with other tape units. The effective
data transfer rates are affected by the time required to pass over the interblock gap and by the
physical length of each magnetic tape block. The
interblock gap length is 0.75 inch, and the effective
data transfer rates for various block lengths are
shown in the graph on the next page.
The physical and functional details of the Model
626 are essentially identical with those of the
Model 607, as described in Section 260:091. Noteworthy features include the use of vacuum capstans
and vacuum reservoirs for tape control, combined
read/write heads for read-after-write checking,
and automatic searching for end-of-file marks in
either the forward or backward direction.
The Model 6622 Magnetic Tape Controller can
handle up to four Model 626 Magnetic Tape Units.
However, since the 6622 Controller provides only
a single data channel, only one tape unit per
Controller can be writing or reading at anyone
time.
TABLE I: CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CONTROL DATA 626 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
Model
No.
626
(1)
(2)
(3)
Tape
Speed,
inches
per sec
Recording
Density,
bits per
inch
150
800
Interblock Gap Lengths
Peak
Speed,
bytes per
inches msec (1) chars (2)
sec
240,000
0.75
5.0
1,200
Efficiency, % (3)
100-char
blocks
7.6
1,000-char
blocks
Rewind
Speed,
inches
per sec
45
350
Time in milliseconds to traverse each interblock gap When reading or writing consecutive blocks.
Number of character positiQns occupied by each interblock gap.
Effective speed at the indicated block size, expressed as a percentage of peak speed.
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
260:093.901
EFFECTIVE SPEED: CONTROL DATA 626 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
10,000,000
7
4
2
,/
1,000,000
7
4
2
V
100,000
7
""..
~ ioo-"
~
~
Effective Speed,
char/sec.
~
4
V'
/
2
~
10,000
7
/
/
4
2
/
1/
1,000
7
4
2
100
10
2
4
7
100
2
4
7
1,000
2
4
7
10,000
Characters Per Block
/'
11/65
fA
AUERBACH
~
-
~
260:101. 100
STANDARD
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT
AUGMENTED I/O
BUFFER AND CONTROL
~\\EDP
-
AUERBACH;
REPORTS
INPUT-OUTPUT: AUGMENTED INPUT-OUTPUT BUFFER AND CONTROL
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
Description
. 6411 Augmented InputOutput Buffer and
Control.
The 6411 Augmented Input-Output Buffer and Control unit is a large-scale, multiple-device subsystem that is designed to virtually double the
input-output and control facilities of a Control
Data 6400 or 6600 computer system. The 6411
is, in effect, an additional basic 6000 Series computer system without a Central Processor and with
a smaller Central Memory.
The components of a 6411 Input-Output Buffer
and Control unit include:
•
12 high-speed, bi-directional Data Channels;
•
10 logically independent Peripheral and Control Processors, each with a private core
storage unit that consists of 4, 096 12-bit
words; and
•
1 Main Memory unit consisting of 16,384
60-bit words of core storage, with a cycle
time of 1 microsecond, accessible to all of
the Peripheral and Control Processors.
Up to twelve 6411 Input-Output Buffer and Control
units can be connected to a 6400 or 6600 computer
system, providing extensive, flexible, and powerful input-output and multiprocessing facilities.
The 6411 can function as an on-line satellite computer system for a Control Data 6400 or 6600,
connected via the Standard Data Channels. Data
from a wide variety of sources, both remote and
local, can be buffered in the 6411, selected,
gathered, batched, and scheduled for transmission
to Central Memory for eventual processing by the
Central Processor, without placing any demands
or delays on. any other part of the 6000 Series
computer system. Another use of the 6411 unit
is to provide specific groups of I/O devices or
classes of data with individual and absolutely
private storage and processing units. This
arrangement can also be used to advantage in
remote time-sharing operations.
The 6411 Augmented Input-Output Buffer and
Control unit is controlled and integrated with the
rest of the 6000 Series system by means of a
modified version of the SIPROS operating system. One of the Peripheral and Control Processors within the 6411 subsystem is designated
as the Executive/Monitor control processor for
the entire 6411. This control system works in
conjunction with, although subordinate to, the
SIPROS Executive/Monitor in the central computer system.
The instruction repertoire of the Peripheral Processors within the 6411 unit is identical with that of
the basic 6000 Series Peripheral and Control Processors described in Section 260:052. However, the
two instructions that normally provide communication with the Central Processor are modified as
used in the 6411 subsystem because no Central
Processor is included in the 6411. The Read Program Address instruction in the 6411 examines the
status of the data trunk that can be used to link the
6411's Main Memory and the optional Extended
Core Storage unit (see Section 260:043). The 6411
unit uses the Exchange Jump instruction to initiate
block data transfers between its Main Memory unit
and the Extended Core Storage unit.
It is significant to note that the 6000 Series programmer need not be concerned about the instruction set or processing capabilities of the 6411 's
Peripheral and Control Processors, since he
normally programs exclusively for the Central
Processor. All Peripheral Processor task
assignments are normally designated by the 6411's
Executive/Monitor operating system. The programmer, however, can explicitly assign tasks
to the Peripheral and Control Processors by
coding specialized routines in the ASPER assembly
language (described in Section 260:172).
i
\
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
/
-&. "..,,"
260:102.100
~EDP
\.
-
AUERBACH
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT
TERMINAL CONTROLLER
REPORTS
INPUT·OUTPUT: 3276 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL CONTROLLER
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity . . . . . . . . . . Control Data 3276-A
Communication Terminal
Controller.
.12
Description
The Control Data 3276 Communication Terminal
Controller is a multiplexing control unit, originally
developed for Control Data's 3000 Series computers,
that enables a wide variety of standard and specialized data communications devices to be connected
to the standard 6000 Series data channels via a6681
Data Channel Converter. Numerous data set adapters and terminal units are provided by Control
Data to function under control of the 3276 Controller, providing the 6000 Series with the capability to
communicate with specialized remote devices
("Class A" operations), generalized, conversational
remote devices ("Class B" operations), and remote
computer centers ("Class C" operations).
(
• Converts the input bit-serial characters (one bit
at a time) to parallel characters of up to 8 data
bits for transmission to the Peripheral Processors.
• Converts the output parallel characters sent
from the Peripheral Processors and transmits
these characters, one bit at a time, to the
3276's output channels for bit-serial transmission.
• Connects the Peripheral Processors to transmission lines of widely varying speeds.
• Sends to the Peripheral Processors status response codes such as Character Ready, Character Request, Character Lost, Channel Idle,
and Broken Circuit.
• Distributes input-output data between the Peripheral Processors and the external communications lines.
The 3276 Communication Terminal Controller is
capable of controlling up to 32 simplex telegraphgrade lines (16 sending lines and 16 receiving), or
up to 16 half-duplex or full-duplex telegraph-grade
lines, or up to 8 half-duplex or full-duplex voicegrade lines. A maximum of eight 3276 Controllers
can be connected to each 6000 Series data channel
through a single 6681 Data Channel Converter interface. The 3276 provides the necessary speed
conversion for all data being transmitted to and
from the high-speed data channels, and performs
the serial-to-parallel bit transmission conversions
required to communicate with the 6000 Series computer system.
Table I lists the principal terminal units that can
be included within the modular 3276 Communication Terminal Controller. The table also indicates
the type and speed of the transmission lines that
are required for use with these terminal units.
Standard data sets are also listed for those terminal units that require them.
Data is transferred to the computer in groups of
12-bit words. Four bits of each word are character-transfer status bits, and the remaining eight
bits are data bits. Many of Control Data's terminal units cannot perform automatic parity checking. Instead, this operation is performed under
program control in the 6000 Series Peripheral and
Control Processors.
• 311 Data Set Adapter - provides the interface
for IBM 1009 Data Transmission Units, IBM
1013 Card Transmission Terminals, and IBM
7702 Magnetic Tape Transmission Terminals.
Besides its multiplexing operations, the 3276 Communication Terminal Controller performs the following functions:
• Decodes the "connect codes" sent by the Peripheral and Control Processors to the individual
remote input-output units. A Read Connect Code
causes the 3276 to scan the status of the lowspeed input units. (The 3276 cannot interrupt
the Peripheral and Control Processors when
data is available for processing; these processors must periodically connect to and interrogate the 3276 by program to determine
whether input data is available.)
Described below are these and other Control Data
terminal units and data set adapters that can be
controlled by the 3276 Communication Terminal
Unit, plus some of the remote devices that can be
connected to these terminals.
• 312 Data Set Adapter - provides the same interfacing capabilities as the 311 Data Set Adapter, but transmits data over 2,OOO-bps lines
rather than the 311 's 2,400-bps lines.
• 313 Data Set Adapter - provides the terminal
connection between half- or full-duplex lowspeed (200-bps) communications lines and the
3276 Controller. Models 33 and 35 Teletype
units and IBM 1050 Data Communication Systems can be controlled by the 313.
• 314 Data Set Adapter - enables the connection
of standard TWX equipment, the IBM 1050,
Models 33 and 35 Teletype units, Control Data's
8092 Teleprogrammer System, and Control
Data 160-A and 8090 computer systems.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
260: 102. 120
. 12
Description (Contd. )
•
•
•
minals (1,050 words per minute) can be connected via the 317.
315 Data Set Adapter - communicates with
Control Data's 1010 Card Jnput Station and 8011
Data Collector, as well as with AT&T's Dataspeed Type 5 equipment (750 words per minute).
316 Data Set Adapter - can control the same
remote devices as the 315 Data Set Adapter; if
both adapters are used in the same communication system, one for receiving and one for sending data, they can be operated with a Model 801
Data-Phone Automatic Calling Unit.
317 Data Set Adapter - provides the terminal
connection between half- or full-duplex mediumspeed communications lines (up to 1,200 bps)
and the 3276 Controller. Dataspeed Type 2 terTABLE I:
Terminal
Unit No.
•
318 Data Set Adapter - provides the same terminal unit capabilities as the 317 Data Set Adapter. Unlike the 317, the 318 Data Set Adapter
can be operated with a Model 801 Data-Phone
Automatic Calling Unit.
•
321 Teletype Terminal Unit - communicates
over private or leased telegraph-grade lines
with the IBM 1050 system and with standard
Teletype equipment.
•
323 Teletype Terminal Unit - provides the same
interfacing capabilities as the 321 Teletype Terminal Unit, but can only send or receive data.
(The 321 serves as both an input and output terminal unit.)
TERMINAL UNITS USED WITH THE 3276 COMMUNICATION
TERMINAL CONTROLLER
Type of Line
Data Sets
Required
Terminal Positions
Required*
Send
Receive
311
2400-bps leased
telephone line
201B
2
2
312
2000-bps telephone
network
201A and
801 Dialer
2
2
313
200-bps leased
telephone line
103A
1
1
314
200-bps TWX
network
103A and
801 Dialer
2
2
315
750-wpm telephone
line
402C
2
-
316
750-wpm telephone
line
402D
-
2
317
1050-wpm telephone
line
202C
2
2
318
1050-wpm telephone
line
202D and
801 Dialer
2
2
321
Full- or halfduplex telegraphgrade
None
1
1
323
Simplex telegraphgrade
None
1
-
323
Simplex telegraphgrade
None
-
1
* Each 3276 Communication Terminal Controller contains 32 terminal positions 16 send and 16 receive.
/
It!65
£.
260;103.100
STA"'"
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
INPUT-OUTPUT
DATA SET CONTROLLERS
/AEDP
AUERBAC~
REPORTS
~_-------J
INPUT·OUTPUT: 6600 SERIES DATA SET CONTROLLERS
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity; •••••••••• 6675 Data Set Controller.
6676 Data Set Controller.
6677-A Multiplexor.
6677-B Multiplexor.
6678 Data Set Controller.
.12' Description
The 6600 Series Data Set Controllers are singlecircuit multiplexing terminal units that can connect
a wide variety of remote data communications devices and remote computer systems directly to the
input-output data channels of the 6000 Series computer systems. These controllers communicate
with the remote devices over the public or private
communications line facilities of the telephone or
telegraph companies and use standard data set
modems as interfaces at the remote and central
ends of the transmission lines.
.I
\.
bits per second. Bell System 301B Data Sets are
the standard modems used at either end of the transmission line, but Models 201A, 201B, and 301C
can also be used. Up to four 301B Data Sets can be
multiplexed into each 6675 Data Set Controller. If
slower-speed data sets are used, a maximum of 20
such devices can be used with a 6675 Controller. In
addition to the 6675 Controller at the central 6000
Series computer site, another 6675 Controller is
required at the remote site if the remotely-linked
computer is also a 6000 Series system. If the remote computer is a Control Data 1600 Series
system, a Model 8529 or 68529 Data Set Controller
must provide the immediate interface; if the remote
computer is a Control Data 3000 Series system, a
Model 3275 or 63275 Data Set Controller is required
as the immediate interfacing unit.
.122 6676 Data Set Controller
The 6676 Data Set Controller can control up to
64 Bell System 103A2 Data Sets located at the
The 6600 Series Controllers assemble the serial
central 6000 Series computer site. Data is transdata received from the data sets into 12-bit parallel
mitted over private telegraph-grade lines (up to 20
data for use by the 6000 Series Peripheral and Conmiles) or over voice-grade telephone lines at 110
trol Processors, and they perform the converse
bits per second. At the remote end of the commundata manipulation operations when data is transications link, a Bell System 101C Data Set intermitted to the remote stations. In addition, each
faces with a standard Model 33 or 35 Teletype
Controller generates a 12-bit error-check code
terminal unit of either the ASR or KSR type. Up
word in its cyclic encoding unit during the transto 200 Teletype stations can communicate with a
mission and receipt of each data block. If Consingle 6000 Series data channel through use of this
trollers are used at both ends of the transmission
communications network.
lines, the code word can be generated at both
locations and compared to detect data transmission
.123 6677-A and 6677-B Multiplexors
errors. Control Data states that the reliability
The 6677-A Multiplexor can control up to 64 Bell
factor for this technique of error detection is
System 103A or 103F Data Sets; the 6677-B can
better than 99.9%, provided that the data block
control up to 128 data sets of the same type. Data
length does not exceed 4,096 bits.
is transmitted over telephone lines at a speed of
The maximum number of 6600 Series Data Set
240 bits per second. A typical remote device used
Controllers that can be connected directly to each
with the 6677 Multiplexors is Control Data's 6060
6000 Series data channel is a function of the 6000
Remote Calculator (see Report Section 260;062).
Series operating system and the maximum duty
.124
6678 Data Set Controller
cycles of the system; therefore, it can only be
determined by a throughput analysis of each proThe 6678 Data Set Controller can control up to 64
posed data communications system configuration.
Bell System 201A or 201B Data Sets, but the two
data set models cannot be intermixed on the same
.121 6675 Data Set Controller
6678 Controller. A typical remote device used
The 6675 Data Set Controller can be used to connect
with the 6678 Data Set Controller is Control
a central 6000 Series computer system with a reData's 6090 Entry/Display system (see Report
mote Control Data 1600 Series, 3000 Series, or
Section 260;063). Data is transmitted between the
another 6000 Series computer system. Data
6678 Data Set Controller and its remote devices
over telephone lines at a rate of either 2, 000 or
transmission between the systems is accomplished
over Telpak A telephone lines at the rate of 40, 800
2,400 bits per second.
(
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
260: 111. 100
~
STAND'"
/l&..EDP
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
_-------1
AUERBACH
REPORTS
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
.1
GENERAL
A Control Data 6000 Series computer system can concurrently:
•
Execute up to 10 independent instructions from a single Central Processor program;
and
•
Execute up to 10 independent peripheral programs, one in each of the Peripheral
and Control Processors; and
•
Transfer data between Central Memory and Extended Core Storage; and
•
Control up to 12 input-output operations, one on each Data Channel; and
•
Handle as many additional input-output operations as can be supported on the Data
Channels by multiplexing or buffering the -individual peripheral devices or their
controllers.
/-
Input-output operations place no demands (or "interference" delays) on the Central
Processor because they are controlled by the independently-operating Peripheral and
Control Processors. Even accesses to Central Memory by the Peripheral Processors
normally impose no delays upon the Central Processor, since up to 10 Central Memory
banks can be accessed simultaneously. Whenever a Peripheral Processor and the Central
Processor attempt to access the same Central Memory bank at the same time, the Central
Processor's access request is given priority.
Every input-output operation does cause a certain amount of delay to the Peripheral
Processor that is controlling it. The amount of this delay is frequently multiplied because
of the manner in which the SIPROS I/O routines handle the slower input-output operations.
In fact, a given set of input-output data will, in many cases, pass into and out of the memoryof a Peripheral Processor four times before the input or output operation is complete.
Typically, data can pass from the input Data Channel, to the memory of a Peripheral and
Control Processor, to the System Disk for batching, back to the memory of the Peripheral
Processor, and finally to Central Memory for processing. This path is reversed for an
output operation.
This four-way Peripheral Processor loading (or the corresponding two-way loading when
the System Disk is not used for intermediate storage) has been calculated for each of the
major peripheral devices. Because these times will vary for the three computer systems
within the Control Data 6000 Series, the Simultaneous Operations section of the appropriate
Computer System Subreport should be consulted to obtain these I/O timing delays:
Control Data 6400 . . . . Section 263: 111.
Control Data 6600 . . . . Section 264: 111.
Control Data 6800 . . . . Section 265: 111.
/
11/65
A
AUERBACH
~
\
260: 121. 100
~
STAMDARD
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
INSTRUCTION LISTS
IABD:!?
AUERBAC~
REPORTS
I...--""_~"""'-_...J
INSTRUCTION LISTS: CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
This section of the Control Data 6000 Series report presents two separate and distinct instruction lists - one for the 6000 Series Central Processors and one for the Peripheral and Control Processors that are included as integral, independently-functioning parts of every 6000 Series
system. Both instruction lists include brief descriptions of the instructions, as well as the time
required to execute each instruction. Immediately following each instruction list is a table explaining
the symbols used in the descriptions.
TABLE I: CENTRAL PROCESSOR INSTRUCTION LIST
Mnemonic
Description
Fl..mctional
Unit
BRANCH
Program Stop
PS
RJ
JP
ZR
NX
Return jump to K
Jump to Bi + K
Jump to K if Xi = 0
Jump to K if Xj
m
OR
DF
EQ
ZR
NE
NZ
--13
14*
9
9
--12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
Bj
EO
9
8*
8'
8*
S'
9
8*
8*
8'
S*
12
12
12
12
12
Bi > Bj
Bi 2: BO
Bi ::. Bj
Bi < BO
8'
8*
S*
8*
8*
8*
8*
8'
12
12
12
12
Transmit Xj to Xi
Logical product of Xj & XI< to Xi
Logical sum of Xj & Xk to Xi
Logical difference of Xj & Xk to Xi
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
Transmit the complement of Xk to Xi
Logical product of Xj & Xk; complement
to Xi
Logical sum of Xj & Xk; complement
to Xi
Logical difference of Xj & Xk; complement to Xi
3
3
3
3
4
4
3
3
4
3
3
4
Left shift Xi, jk places
Arithmetic right shift Xi, jk places
Left shift Xk nominally Bj places to Xi
Arithmetic right shift Xk nominally
Bj places to Xi
Normalize Xk to Xi and Bj
Round and normalize Xk in Xi & Bj
Unpack XI< to Xi and Bj
Pack Xi from Xk and Bj
Form mask in Xi, jk bits
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
5
5
4
4
3
3
3
4
4
3
3
3
6
6
6
6
5
Floating sum of Xj and Xk. to Xi
Floating difference Xj and Xk to Xi
Floating double precision sum of Xj
and XI< to Xi
Floating double precision difference
ofXj & XI< to Xi
Round floating sum of Xj and Xk to Xl
Round floating difference of Xj and
XI< to Xi
4
4
4
4
11
11
4
4
11
4
4
4
4
11
Integer sum of Xj and XI< to Xi
Integer difference of Xj and Xk to Xi
3
3
3
Kif
if
if
if
if
K
K
K
to K
Xj is
Xj is
Xj is
Xj is
Xj is
plus (positive)
negative
in range
out of range
definite
Jump to K if Bi = EO
Jump to Kif Bi
Jump to K if Bi
GE
PL
LT
NG
13
14*
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
to
to
to
to
Jump to K if Xj is indefinite
Jump to K if Bi = Bj
ill
\.
0
---
9
9
9
9
9
Jump
Jump
Jump
Jump
Jump
PL
NG
f
.
Execution Time in Minor Cycles
6400
6S00
6600
(25 nsf cycle) (100 nsf cycle) (100 ns/cycle)
Jump
Jump
Jump
Jump
to
to
to
to
Kif
Kif
Kif
K if
f
f
BOOLEAN
BXi
BXi
BXi
BXi
BXi
BXi
BXi
BXi
SHIFT
LXi
AXi
LXi
AXi
NXi
ZXi
UXi
PXi
MXi
3
ADD
FXi
FXi
DXi
DXi
RXi
RXi
4
4
11
11
LONG ADD
IXi
IXi
3
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
6
6
11/65
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
260:121. 101
TABLE I: CENTRAL PROCESSOR INSTRUCTION LIST (Contd.)
Mnemonic
Execution Time in Minor Cycles
6800
6600
6~0
(25 ns/cycle) (100 ns/cycle) (100 n~/cycle)
Description
Functional
Unit
MULTIPLY
FX!
RXI
DX!
Floating product of Xj and Xl< to X!
Round fioating product of Xj & Xl< to X!
Floating'double precision product of
Xj& Xl< to X!
10
10
10
Floating divide Xi by Xl< to X!
Round fioatlng divide Xi by Xl< to X!
No operation
Count the nwnber of 1's In Xl< to X!
29
29
DIVIDE
FX!
RX!
NO
CX!
10
10
10
56
56
56
29
29
56
56
---
---
--8
68
5
5
5
5
5
8
/
INCREMENT
* Add
SA!
SA!
SAl
SA!
SA!
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
A!
A!
A!
Ai
A!
to
to
to
to
to
Ai
Ai
Bj
Bi
Xi
+
+
+
+
+
K
compleme nt of K
K
complement of K
K
a
a
a
a
3
a
a
3
a
a
SA!
SAi
SA!
SA!
SA!
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
A!
A!
Ai
A!
A!
to
to
to
to
to
Xi
Xi
Ai
Aj
Bj
+ cpmplement of K
+ Bk
+ Bi
3
a
a
3
3
3
a
a
a
a
5
5
5
5
5
SA!
SBI
SBI
SBi
SBi
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
A! to Bj Bi to Aj +
Bi to Aj +
Bi to Bj +
Bi to Bj +
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
5
5
5
5
5
SBI
SBi
SBi
SBi
SBi
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
to
to
to
to
Bi to
a
3
a
a
a
a
a
3
a
a
5
5
5
5
5
SBI
SBI
SX!
SX!
SX!
Set BI to Bi + Bk
Set BI to Bi - Bk
Set Xi to Ai + K
Set X! to Bj + K
a
a
a
a
a
3
a
a
a
a
5
5
5
5
5
SX!
SX!
SX!
SX!
SX!
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
3
3
a
a
a
3
a
a
a
a
5
5
5
5
5
SX!
SX!
SlG
?
?
Set lG to Ai - Bk
Set lG to Bi + Bk
Set Xi to Bi - Bk
Read Mass Core
Write Mass Core
a
a
a
?
?
a
a
a
?
?
5
5
5
?
?
BI
BI
Bi
Bi
Xj
Xj
Xj
Aj
Aj
- Bk
+ Bk
Bk
K
complement of K
K
complement of K
+K
+ complement of K
+ Bk
+ Bk
- Bk
Set Xi. to Aj + complement of K
Xi to Bj + complement of K
X! to Xi +
Xi to Xj +
Xi to Xi +
X! to Aj +
K
complement of K
Bk
Bk
6 minor cycles to branch time for a branch to an instruction which is out of the stack.
Interpretation of Descriptive Symbols
A
B
j
jk
k
K
X
11/65
One of eight IS-bit address registers.
One of eight IS-bit index registers; BO is fixed and equal
to zero.
Register specified by the 3-bit i portion of the instruction.
Register specified by the a-bit i portion of the Instruction.
Constant, indicating number of shifts to be taken (6 bits).
Register specified by the a-bit k portion of the instruction.
Constant, indicating branch destination or operand (18 bits).
One of eight 60-bit operand registers.
A
(Contd.)
AUERBACH
~
260: 121. 102
INSTRUCTION LISTS
TABLE II: PERIPHERAL AND CONTROL PROCESSOR INSTRUCTION LIST
\
Description
Mnemonic
\
(
/
Execution TIme
In Major Cycle. *
1
Pass
PSN
LJM
RJM
UJN
ZJN
Long jump to m + (d)
Return jump to m + (d)
Unconditional jump d
Zero jump d
NJN
PJN
MJN
SHN
LMN
Nonzero jump d
Plus jump d
Minus jump d
Shift d
Logical difference d
1
1
1
1
1
LPN
SCN
LDN
LCN
ADN
Logical product d
Sele oti ve clear d
Load d
Load complement d
Add d
1
1
1
1
1
SBN
LDC
ADC
LPC
LMC
Subtract d
Load dm
Adddm
Logical product dm
PSN
PSN
EXN
RPN
LDD
Pass
Logic~
difference dm
2-3
3-4
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
Pass
Exchange jump
2 (mInimum)
Read program address
Load (d)
1
2
ADD
SBD
LMD
STD
RAD
Add (d)
Subtract (d)
Logical difference (d)
Store (d)
Replace add (d)
2
2
2
2
3
AOD
SOD
LD!
AD!
SBI
Replace add one (d)
Replace subtract one (d)
Load (d»
Add «d»
Subtract «d»
3
3
3
3
3
LMI
S11
RAI
AOI
SOl
Logical difference «d»
Store «d»
Replace add «d»
Replace add one «d»
Replace subtract one «d»
3
3
4
4
4
LDM
ADM
SBM
LMM
STM
Load (m + (d»
Add (m + (d»
Subtract (m + (d»
Logical difference (m + (d»
Store (m + (d»
RAM
AOM
SOM
CRD
CRM
Replace add (m + (d»
Replace add one (m + (d»
Replace subtract one (m + (d»
Central read from (A) to d
Central read (d) words from (A) to m
4-5
4-5
4-5
6 (minimum)
5 plus 5/word
CWD
CWM
AJM
IJM
FJM
Central write to (A) from d
Central write (d) words to (A) from m
Jump to m if channel d active
Jump to m if channel d inactive
Jump to m if chaaael d full
6 (minimum)
5 plus 5/word
2
2
2
EJM
IAN
lAM
OAN
OAM
Jump to m If chaaael d empty
Input to A from channel d
Input to (A) words to m from channel d
Output from A on channel d
Output (A) words from m on chanael d
2
2
4 plus l/word
2
4 plus l/word
ACN
DCN
FAN
FNC
Activate channel d
Di Beonneet channel d
Function (A) on channel d
FtUlction m on channel d
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
2
2
2
2
*The 6400/6600 Peripheral Processor Major Cycle time is 1 microsecond; the 6800's
Major Cycle time is 250 nanoseconds.
\
Interpretation of Descriptive Symbols
d
(d)
«d»
m
m+ (d)
(m+
dm
(d»
©
Implies d itself (6-bit literal).
Implies the contents of d.
Implies the contents of the location speCified by d.
Implies m itself (12-hit quantity)' used as an address.
The contents of d are added to m to form an operand (jwnp address).
The contents of d are added to m to form the address of the operand.
Implies an lS-bit quantity with d as the upper 6 bits and. m as the lower 12 bits.
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
-£
260: 141. 100
SImARD
~EDP
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
DATA CODE TABLE
-
AUERBACH
REPORTS
DATA CODE TABLE
Character
Internal
BCD*
Tape and
Printer
BCD*
Card
Character
Internal
BCD*
Card
0
00
12
0
P
47
47
11-7
1
01
01
1
Q
50
11-8
2
02
02
2
R
50
51
51
11-9
3
03
03
3
S
62
22
0-2
4
04
04
4
T
63
23
0-3
5
05
05
5
U
64
24
0-4
6
06
06
6
V
65
25
0-5
7
07
07
7
W
66
26
0-6
8
10
10
8
X
67
27
0-7
9
11
11
9
Y
70
30
0-8
A
21
61
12-1
Z
71
31
0-9
B
22
62
12-2
=
13
13
3-8
C
23
63
12-3
- (dash)
14
14
D
24
64
12-4
+
20
60
12
E
25
65
12-5
+0
32
72
12-0
F
26
66
12-6
33
73
12-3-8
27
67
12-7
)
34
74
12-4-8
H
30
70
12-8
- (minus)
40
40
11
I
31
71
12-9
-0
52
52
11-0
J
41
41
11-1
$
53
53
11-3-8
K
42
42
11-2
*
54
54
11-4-8
L
43
43
11-3
(space)
60
20
blank
M
44
44
11-4
/
61
21
0-1
N
45
·46
45
11-5
,
73
33
0-3-8
46
11-6
(
74
34
0-4-8
* Octal representation of 6-bit BCD codes is shown.
A
AUERBACH
•
/'
4-8
G
0
11/65
Tape and
Printer
BCD*
\
\
1.
260:151. 100
STAND'"
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
/AEDP
AUERBAC~
-
REPORTS
~
PROBLEM ORIENTED FACILITIES
.1
.11
UTILITY ROUTINES
Input files can be on either magnetic tape or disc
file storage, and can be written in either binary
or BCD form. Fixed or variable-length records
can be sorted, in either ascending or descending
sequence. Control cards can specify exits to
user-supplied routines at various stages in the
sort/merge process.
Simulators of Other Computers
IBM 7090/7094 Simulator
Reference: . . . . . . . . preliminary information.
Date available: . . . . . December 1965.
De~cription:
This simulator accepts 7090/7094 machine-language
programs and converts them to instruction and data
formats that are directly executable on any 6000
Series system. The maximum size object program
that can be simulated is 32K 7090/7094 words.
Standard input-output operations are simulated, and
provisions will also be included to handle other
I/O equipment, such as disc files, drums, and
data cells. The simulator operates under the control of the SIPROS operating system and utilizes
about 40, 000 words of 6000 Series Central Memory.
In most cases, according to Control Data, the simulated programs run at approximately the same
speed as the original programs on an IBM 7090.
\
. 12
Simulation by Other
Computers: . . . . . . . none.
.13
Data Sorting and Merging
No timing information for the 6000 Series Sort/
Merge has been released to date.
. 14
Report Writing: . . . . . facilities will be provided
both in the COBOL language and in the Linear
Programming System
(see Paragraph . 17)
.15
Data Transcription
6000 Series Utility Programs
Reference: . . . . . . . . 6000 Series Computer
Systems Manual (preliminary edition) .
Date available: ...... December 1965 .
Description:
Data transcription routines are contained in the
6000 Series library system (LIBRIOUS) and operate under control of the SIPROS operating system.
These routines can be used as necessary by the
SIPROS Executive, or they can be called for by
operating programs, or they can be summoned by
control cards to perform "off-line" data transcriptions.
6000 Series Sort/Merge
Reference: . . . . . . . . 6000 Series Computer Systems Manual (preliminary
edition).
Record size: . . . . . . . not specified to date.
Block size: . . . . . . . . not specified to date.
Key size: . . . . . . . . . not specified to date.
File size: . . . . . . . . . not specified to date.
Number of tapes/
discs: . . . . . . . . . . 3 to 16 tapes, or minimum
of one disc unit.
Date available: . . . . . July 1966.
Description:
(
I
~-
SIPROS assigns a Peripheral and Control Processor to perform each data transcription task
and calls the designated routine from the library.
The standard routines supplied include:
Card to Card
Card to Print
Card to Tape
Tape Comparison
Card to Disk
Tape to Card
Tape to Print
Tape to Tape
Disk to Card
Disk to Print
Disk to Tape.
The 6000 Series Sort/Merge package is a generalized program that is designed to function as an
integral part of the SIPROS operating system. Incoming files on tape or disc units can be sorted as
an independent operation or as an integrated subtask of a total processing job. The Sort/Merge
program is baSically disc-oriented for efficiency
of operation, but magnetic tape units can also be
utilized, depending on disc availability at sort time.
Optimized input-output routines have not been
included in the Sort/Merge package, since it is
assumed that all I/O operations will be overlapped
with the execution of several other programs by the
Central Processor. Internal sorting operations
will take advantage of as much core and disc storage as is specified by parameter cards as being
currently available. Merging is accomplished
through use of a polyphase technique. Only the
several sorting keys within each record need to be
sorted; the data portions of the records can be
stripped off at input time and later retrieved after
the keys have been sorted into the proper sequence.
Code conversion can also be specified by control
card, permitting data transcriptions and code
conversions to be performed during a single oper·
ation. For example, the Card to Tape routine
permits conversion from Hollerith to BCD, Hollerith to Display code, or no conversion (binary
cards). Variously-coded magnetic tapes can be
dumped in octal mode.
.16
File Maintenance
6000 Series File. Manager
Reference: . . . . . . . . preliminary information.
Date available: . . . . . June, 1966.
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/66
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
260:151. 160
. 16
File Maintenance (Contd.)
Description:
The File Manager system for the 6000 Series provides a simplified method for controlling the storage, retrieval, usage, and modification of data
files recorded on mass storage devices. The various facilities of the File Manager can be called
for by means of system macro-instructions. Alternatively, these facilities can be utilized by means
of control card statements entered in the input job
stream. The control cards serve both to designate
the files that are to be maintained and to specify the
type of maintenance operation to be performed.
The 6000 Series File Manager operates under control of the SIPROS operating system. The File
Manager also makes use of SIPROS' I/O control
routines, device assignment and memory allocation routines, and Peripheral Processor scheduling
routines. All File Manager functions can be
carried out by a single Peripheral Processor, but
the use of additional Processors will increase the
File Manager's efficiency.
complete control language, and a report writer .
LP-66 operates under control of the SIPROS operating system and is implemented in a combination
of FORTRAN-66 and ASCENT programming languages. An optimization routine and other selected
subroutines are called from the FORTRAN-66
library. The availability date for LP-66 is currently undetermined.
.182 Matrix Algebra
A Matrix Algebra package will be available to 6000
Series users in April 1966. Individual matrix
manipulation subroutines are provided to aid in
the solutiori of specific matrix handling problems.
The supplied matrix operations include: Move,
Transpose, Add, Subtract, Multiply, Invert,
Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors, and facilities to
solve simultaneous equations.
.183 Statistical Programs
The 6000 Series Statistical Programs package consists of four basic programs;
Files and portions of files (as small as individual
records) can be created, stored, displayed, dumped,
deleted, and modified temporarily or permanently.
In addition, the status of stored files can be determined and logged, and file directories can be
altered. The File Manager will be usable with any
of the following classes of mass storage devices:
magnetic tapes (dumping and reloading only),
drums, diSCS, auxiliary core storage, and data
cells.
.17
other
•
Basic Descriptive Statistics - computes mean,
standard deviation, third and fourth moments,
skewness, kurtosis, and associated standard
errors for each of a series of variables.
•
Normal Probability Function - computes the
ordinate or several other functions of the failarea probability of the normal distribution N
for a given value of an argument.
•
Correlation Matrix - generates a matrix whose
element aij is the correlation coefficient between
the ith and jth variables. Eigenvalues and
eigenvectors of the correlation matrix are
also obtained to enable principal-components or
factor analysis to be performed.
•
Random Number Generator - produces a
stream of random, equi-probable decimal
digits.
Mathematical Subroutine Library
Reference: • . . . . . . . 6000 Series Computer
Systems Manual (preliminary edition).
Date available: . . . . . April 1966.
Description:
The Mathematical Subroutine Library is a part of
LIBRI6us, the 6000 Series Library System of I/O
and Utility Systems. The Mathematical library
contains a complete set of standard FORTRAN
mathematical subroutines that have been specially
developed to take advantage of the 6000 Series'
advanced hardware. Considerations in the development of these subroutines have included the 60-bit
data word, the 8-word instruction stack, the 24
central operating registers, and. the 10 Central
Processor functional units (see Report Section
260:051). All mathematical subroutines are equally
accessible to FORTRAN and ASCENT (Central Processor Assembly System) programmers.
Among the available mathematical subroutines are
the following: Square Root, Cube Root, Sin, Tan,
Arctan, ArCSin, Exponential, and Logarithm.
Report Section 260:161 contains a complete list
of the mathematical functions available through use
of the FORTRAN-66 language. No details are currently available concerning the execution speeds of
these routines.
.18
The Statistical Programs Package operates under
control of the SIPROS operating system and will
be available in March 1966.
.184 PERT
Several PERT programs are available for use
with the 6000 Series. The NASA-FORTRAN PERTTIME n program has been converted for use with
the 6000 Series, and a companion PERT-COST
program is currently under development. In
addition, Control Data will supply its own combined PERT-TIME/COST package which produces
the standard PERT-TIME reports plus four PERTCOST reports: management summary, project
status, financial plan and status, and manpower
loading. Control Data's PERT-TIME will be
available in June 1966; PERT-COST will be available in October 1966.
.185 SIMSCRIPT
Application Packages
A compiler for the SIMSCRIPT simulation language
will be provided for use with the 6000 Series and
will be available in June 1966. No details concerning Control Data's SIMSCRIPT language and
compiler are currently available.
.181 Linear Programming System (LP-66)
The 6000 Series Linear Programming System includes "technologically current" LP algorithms, a
2/66
./
A
AUERBACH
'"
,/
260: 161. 100
1.
STANDARD
/AEDP
AUERBAC~
•
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
FORTRAN 66
REPORTS
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN 66
I
\
.1
GENERAL
... Control Data 6000 Series
FORTRAN 66.
.11
Identity:
. 12
Origin:
.13
Reference: . . . . .
.14
Description
. . . . . . . . . . Control Data Corporation
.. FORTRAN 66 Programming System/Reference
Manual, No. 60101500A.
Several varieties of the FORTRAN language can
be used with the Control Data 6000 Series. Early
users of 6000 Series systems were supplied with
a FORTRAN IV language and compiler that' runs
under control of the interim-designed Chippewa
operating system. Standard FORTRAN IV language
facilities were provided, a~d compilation speeds
up to 12,000 statements per minute were achieved.
However, the efficiency of the generated object
code was not high, and the many unique features
of the 6600 and 6800 Central Processors were not
effectively utilized. The language facilities of
Chippewa FORTRAN IV include mixed-mode
arithmetic, double-precision and complex variables, and the ability to intermix FORTRAN II
statements whenever they are not inherently
incompatible with FORTRAN IV.
FORTRAN 66, however, is the official FORTRAN
language for the Control Data 6000 Series. The
FORTRAN 66 compiler has been specifically designed to take full advantage of the 6000 Series
hardware. It operates under control of the
SIPROS operating system and can utilize the extensive hardware and software facilities of the
total system.
FORTRAN 66 LANGUAGE
,/
' '----
The FORTRAN 66 language is a greatly expanded,
though completely compatible, version of FORTRAN 63, a dialect of FORTRAN IV implemented
by Control Data for its 1600 and 3000 Series systems. The widely-used IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN IV language is basically a compatible subset of FORTRAN 66, yet some incompatibilities
do exist. Paragraph. 142 lists the few deficiencies
of FORTRAN 66 relative to IBM's FORTRAN IV,
and Paragraph. 143 lists the major extensions of
FORTRAN 66 relative to the same 7090/7094
FORTRAN IV language.
For those users who insist on coding in "pure"
FORTRAN IV, Control Data has provided its
FORTRAN 66 compiler with an optional running
mode to handle programs written in ASA-standard
FORTRAN IV. When the FORTRAN IV subsetcompiler is called for, an expanded diagnostic
package can be provided because the FORTRAN
IV compiler consumes less space in Central
Memory.
Control Data's implementation of FORTRAN 66
includes many of the newest and most powerful
features of the FORTRAN language. Special
emphasis is placed on both speed of compilation
and object program efficiency. Listed below are
some of the principal features of the FORTRAN
66 language/ compiler .
• FORTRAN 66 includes all FORTRAN 63 facilities; hence, it is compatible with FORTRAN 63
and essentially with FORTRAN IV.
• Assembly-language and FORTRAN 66 statements
can be intermixed on a line-for-line level.
Total communication between the two source
languages is provided. FORTRAN statement
numbers can be referred to in ASCENT (Central Processor Assembly System) instructions,
and symbolic ASCENT location tags can be
referred to in the FORTRAN statements. In
a similar fashion, data values .computed by
ASCENT instructions or generated by pseudooperations can be referenced as FORTRAN
operands, and values computed by FORTRAN
procedures can be used as arguments in
ASCENT instructions.
• Input-output buffering facilities can be selected
to be performed automatically or under control
of the FORTRAN programmer. Direct buffer
control statements are provided, as well as
several statements that check the status of
input-output operations and buffer transfer
activities.
• Special ENCODE/DECODE statements are included to permit code and radix conversions to
be performed while moving data through core
storage.
• 'Central Processor register names can be
used directly as operands. This feature permits the programmer to perform computations from the central registers, eliminating
the need for many redundant memory accesses.
This feature also provides another communications link between the FORTRAN and ASCENT
source languages.
•
FORTRAN 66 built-in functions and mathematical subroutines utilize specialized coding
techniques that maximize the use of the 6000
Series' 60-bit word length and the parallel
instruction execution facilities in the 6600 and
6800 Central Processors. Table II lists the
basic library functions provided with FORTRAN 66.
• An object code optimization algorithm is provided to permit debugged source programs to
be recompiled in a manner that approaches
the execution-time efficiency of machine-Ianguage-coded programs. When the FORTRAN
compilation is performed in the optional optimization mode, the compiler performssimulations of various Central Processor instruction execution sequences in order to determine
efficient scheduling of the 10 functional units
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/66
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
260: 161. 140
.14
Description (Contd.)
object code. The Machine Mode compiler will
normally not be used until the user at the remote
terminal is reasonably certain that the program
has been completely debugged.
.141 Availability
and to provide anticipatory loading of the 24
central registers.
Paragraph . 143 lists several other important
features included in the FORTRAN 66 language.
FORTRAN 66 Compiler
Control Data states that the FORTRAN 66 compiler, when operating in the optimization mode,
generates object code that is at least 80% as
efficient as good machine coding in the complex
6600/6800 Central Processors. Compilation
speeds up to 10,000 statements per minute have
been achieved when unoptimized object code is
generated. No times are currently available for
measuring the compilation speed of the FORTRAN
66 compiler when optimized object code is produced.
Language specifications: . . . . . . . . .
Compiler Preliminary
version:
..
Complete
version:
..
Time-sharing
version: . . . .. ..
April 1966.
3rd quarter 1967.
/
(1) Logical constants TRUE and FALSE cannot
be defined.
(2) Logical expressions cannot be used as parameters in function definitions or in CALL
subroutine statements.
(3) The settings of sense switches and sense
lights cannot be altered during a program's
execution.
(4) The BLOCK DATA statement is not provided;
however, any labelled COMMON data block
can be initialized through use of the FORTRAN
66 DATA statement.
Time-Sharing FORTRAN 66
.143 Extensions of FORTRAN 66 Relative to IBM 70901
7094 FORTRAN IV*
(1) Numerous language capabilities are extended
as indicated in Table I.
(2) Mixed-mode arithmetic is permitted in logical and arithmetic expressions and in the
formation of subscripts.
(3) Assembly-language statements can be intermixed with FORTRAN 66 statements.
(4) Hollerith-coded constants are permitted in
arithmetic expressions.
• Syntax analysis of the most recently entered
FORTRAN statement within an average of
three seconds of the statement's entry.
(5) Logical bit-by-bit masking of variables by
constants or other variables can be performed through use of the AND, NOT, and OR
operators.
• Interline diagnostics of previously-entered
statements, categorizing the errors and indicating the degree of acceptability.
•
Start and stop control of the executing program
at specified statements.
(6) ENCODE and DECODE statements are implemented to facilitate code and radix conversions.
•
Console displays of symbolically-specified
variables or arrays, or of the contents of
symbolically-specified consecutive memory
locations.
(7) BUFFER IN and BUFFER OUT statements
are included to increase overlapping of inputoutput data transfers.
•
Source statement insertion and deletion at any
specified point in the program.
•
Listings of program segments or of the entire
compiled program.
•
Complete system object-program diagnostics
that can be displayed on console devices or
printed as hard-copy documentation.
(8) Checks for the status of input-output operations by designated I/O units are provided.
Variations of the IF statement permit specific checks for operation-complete, operation-incomplete, end-of-file, end-of-tape,
and parity errors.
(9) Logical unit numbers can be specified for
input-output operations.
The Machine Mode FORTRAN compiler for 6000
Series Time-Sharing systems will provide all of
the language facilities of FORTRAN 66 and will
particularly emphasize the generation of efficient
2/66
December 1965.
.142 Restrictions of FORTRAN 66 Relative to IBM
7090/7094 FORTRAN IV*
Control Data estimates that the size of the complete compiler plus the Central Processor and
Periphera,l Processor assemblers will be approximately 8 to 12 thousand 60-bit words. The
assemblers are normally loaded with the FORTRAN compiler to facilitate the handling of source
programs that use intermixed FORTRAN and
assembly-language statements. Working storage
and symbol table requirements can consume
another 12 to 16 thousand words of storage if the
compiler is to perform efficiently.
Included in Control Data's scheduled software for
support of integrated Time-Sharing 6000 Series
systems is an Interpretive Mode FORTRAN 66
compiler and a companion Machine Mode compiler.
The Interpretive Mode FORTRAN compiler will
be written in re-entrant coding to permit efficient
utilization of core storage and to minimize program swap time. In addition to the full FORTRAN
66 capabilities, the Interpretive Mode FORTRAN
system will provide remote terminal users with
the following facilities:
April 1965.
/
* Detailed specifications of the IBM 7090/7094 FORTRAN
IV language are provided in Report Section 408:162.
A
(Contd. )
AUERBACH
'"
260:161. 143
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: FORTRAN 66
TABLE I: COMPARATIVE FORTRAN LANGUAGE CAPABILITIES
FORTRAN IV
(7090/7094)
FORTRAN 66
Sense lights:
Sense switches:
Integer magnitude:
Integer accuracy:
Single-precision
magnitude:
Single-precision
accuracy:
Double-precision
magnitude:
Double-precision
accuracy:
Statement numbers:
Variable names:
Continuation cards:
Character set:
Multiple replacement statements:
Multiple state;ments
per line:
60 (simulated)
60 (simulated)
259-1
18 digits
4
6
235-1
10 digits
1O±308
l(r~38
15 digits
8 digits
1O±308
1O±38
29 digits
1 to 99999
1 to 8 alpha. chars.
no limit (a statement may
have up to 660 operators,
delimiters, and identifiers)
A-Z; 0-9; 10 symbols;
blank
16 digits
1 to 32767
1 to 6 alpha. chars.
1 to 19
A-Z; 0-9; 9 symbols
(no $); blank
yes
no
yes
no
.143 Extensions of FORTRAN 66 Relative to IBM
7090/7094 FORTRAN IV (Contd.)
(10)
Subroutines can be entered at any specified
entry points.
(11)
In the logical IF statement, an explicit destination can be specified for the false condition as well as for the true condition.
(12)
Complex expressions can be used in the
three-way branching IF statement, although
only the real part is tested for zero.
(13)
The control variables within a DO loop
can be dynamically altered during the
execution of the loop. In addition, primary DO loop control is tested before
the loop is initially entered, permitting
all passes through the loop to be bypassed
when appropriate.
\
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/66
260:161. 144
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
TABLE II: STANDARD FORTRAN 66 LIBRARY FUNCTIONS
ABSF(X)
XABSF(i)
INTF(X)
XlNTF(X)
}
}
Actual
Parameter
Type
Definition
Form
Absolute Value
Real
Integer
Real
Integer
Truncation, integer
Real
Real
Real
Integer
MODF(XI, X 2)
Xl modulo X2
Real
Real
XMODF(i 1, i2)
i1 moc\ulo i2
Integer
Integer
Integer
Real
.....
MAXOF(il, i2 •... )
Real
Heal
XMAXOF(i}, i2, ... )
Integer
Integer
XMACIF(XI' X 2, ... )
Real
Integer
MINOF(iI. i 2, ... )
Integer
Real
MINIF(XI, X2, ... )
Real
Real
Integer
Integer
Real
Integer
MAXIF(XI, X2, ... )
Determine maximum argument
Determine minimum argument
XMINOF(il,i2,' .. )
XMINIF(XI' X2, : .. )
SINF(X)
Sine X, raciians
Heal
Real
Real
COSF(X)
Cosine X, radians
Real
TAN F (X)
Tangent X, radians
Real
Heal
ASINF(X)
Arcsine X, radians
Real
Real
ACOSF(X)
Arccos, X, radians
Real
Real
ATAN F (X)
Arctangent X, radians
Real
Heal
TANHF(X)
Hyperbolic tangent X, raciians
Real
Heal
SQRTF(X)
Square root of X
Real
Real
LOGF(X)
Natural log of X
Real
Real
EXPF(X)
e to Xth power
Real
Real
SIGNF(XI, X2)
Sign of X2 times IXII
Real
Real
XSIGNF(iI, i2)
Sign of i2 times lill
Integer
Integer
Real
Real
Integer
Integer
Real
Real
Integer
Real
DIMF(XI, X2)
{IfIf
XDIMF(il, i2)
{IfIf ili I ::;>
Xl > X2: Xl - X2
Xl .:::; X2: 0
i2: il - i 2
i 2: 0
CUBERTF(X)
Cube root of X
FLOATF(I)
Integer to Real conversion
RANF(N)
Generate random number
-Real
-Integer
(Repeated executions give
uniformly distributed numbers)
+Real
+ Integer
XFIXF
2/66
Mode of
He suit
}
}
Real
Integer
POWER(X I , X2)
Real to Integer conversion
X l x2
ITOJ(I, J)
IJ
Integer, Integer
Integer
XTOI(X, I)
Xl
Real, Integer
Real
ITOX(I, X)
IX
Integer, Real
LENGTHF(i)
Number of words read on unit i
A
AUERBACH
'"
Real
Real, Real
Integer
Integer
Real
Real
Integer
/'
260: 162. 100
~
""OARD
AEDP
\,
AUERBAC~
•
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE
COBOL
R[PORTS
PROCESS ORIENTED LANGUAGE: COBOL
(
".
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . • . . . . . . . 6000 Series COBOL.
• 12
Origin: • . . . . . . . . . . unspecified subcontractor.
.13
Reference: . . . • . . . . Control Data 6000 Series
Preliminary Technical
Information Manual.
.14
Description
Control Data plans to supply for its 6000 Series
systems a COBOL language that will include all the
features of COBOL-61 Extended, plus all the language facilities of COBOL-65 as recently approved
by the Department of Defense. The COBOL compiler will be written by an independent software
house and will probably be available in mid-1967.
Like all other software systems provided for use
with the 6000 Series, the COBOL compiler will
utilize the facilities of and operate under control
of the SIPROS operating system in a multiprogramming environment.
A complete listing of language specifications for
6000 Series COBOL has not been released to date.
However, Control Data has offered the following
language features as representative samplings
from the extensive facilities to be provided in its
new COBOL language:
•
•
I"
The SEGMENTATION feature allows the programmer to subdivide his program into various
logical segments. When the executing object
program requires additional program segments, they are loaded automatically by the
SIPROS operating system.
The library control statements COpy and INCLUDE permit access to an open-ended COBOL
library. These statements enable stored
portions of the Environment, Data, and Procedure Divisions to be retrieved from the
library at compilation time and to be inserted
in line with the source program.
•
The source-language debugging verbs MONITOR, TRACE, and DUMP provide comprehensive diagnostics at programmer-specified
points during the execution of the object program.
•
The COBOL user can specify the collating sequence to be followed during the execution of
each object program. This facility will ease
the conversion problems normally encountered
when attempting to compile and execute
COBOL programs written for computers with
internal characteristics that differ from the
compiling computer .
• The SEARCH verb and its several options
facilitate table lookup operations.
•
The SET verb provides the user with direct
control of the central processor's 24 operating
registers.
•
The Report Writer package permits the programmer to generate printed reports by
simple data and report format specifications.
The verbs GENERATE, INITIATE, and TERMINATE control the Report Writer's operations.
•
The Mass Storage File Descriptor and several
new input-output verbs provide the COBOL
programmer with direct control over the storage and retrieval of data files written on mass
storage devices.
•
The ADD, SUBTRACT, and MOVE verbs include the CORRESPONDING option.
•
The SAME AREA clause permits the programmer to specify that two or more files
are to use the same input-output memory
area.
•
The special symbols ** and t specifyexponentiation in arithmetic expressions, and the symbols
~ and ~ can be used in relational expressions.
Control Data's 6000 Series COBOL will also
implement a number of features originally listed
as "electives" in the D. O. D. COBOL-61 language
specifications. Table I presents a partial list
of these features.
Compiler
The 6000 Series COBOL compiler will be a threepass translator, including an optional objectcode optimization pass. The compiler will emphasize efficiency, both in the compilation process and in the object code generated. Control
Data expects that compilation speeds of up to
6, 000 statements per minute will be achieved
when compiling on the 6600 computer system.
.141 Availability
Language: ........?
Compiler: . . . . • . . . . mid-1967.
(
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/66
260: 162. 141
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
TABLE I: PARTIAL LIST OF COBOL-61 ELECTIVES TO BE
IMPLEMENTED IN 6000 SERIES COBOL
Key
No.*
1
2
3
4
5
6
Elective
Comments
Characters and Words
Formula characters
Relationship characters
Semicolon
Long literals
Figurative constants
Figurative constants
+, -, *, /, **,
=, >, <, <" >.
Can be usedfor punctuation.
Maximum size is 4,095 characters.
HIGH or LOW BOUND(S) are available.
HIGH or LOW VALUE(S) are available.
14
20
Record Description
Item length
Conditional ranges
22
24
25
26
Verbs
COMPUTE
ENTER
INCLUDE
USE
27
Verb Options
LOCK
28
MOVE CORRESPONDING
30
32
37
38
39
ADVANCING
Formulas
Complex conditionals
Complex conditionals
Conditional statements
40
Environment Division
SOURC E-COMPUTER
41
OBJECT-COMPUTER
42
SPECIAL-NAMES
43
45
FILE-CONTROL
I/O CONTROL
Computer description can be given,
with MEMORY SIZE specification.
Computer description can be given,
with MEMORY SIZE specification.
Hardware devices and their status conditions can be assigned special names.
Library descriptions can be copied.
Library control sections can be copied.
48
49
Special Features
Library
Segmentation
Library routines can be called.
Program segmentation is permitted.
Variable-length items can be specified.
VALUES can be ascribed to conditionals.
Algebraic formulas can be used.
Non-COBOL languages can be entered.
Library routines can be called.
Non-standard I/O error and label
handling routines can be used.
Locks rewound tapes and· files on disc
storage.
Commonly named items in a group can be
moved.
Paper advance can be specified.
Algebraic formulas can be used.
ANDs and ORs can be intermixed.
Nested conditionals can be used.
IF, SIZE ERROR, AT END, ELSE
(OTHERWISE) can be followed by an
imperative statement.
* See Users' Guide, page 4:161. 300.
2/66
t.
A
AUERBACH
'"
260: 171. 100
,
\
1&•
AUERBACH
SUNDUD
EDP
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE
ASCENT
REPORTS
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: ASCENT
.1
GENERAL
. 11
Identity: ••••...•.. ASCENT - Assembly
--§ystem, CENTral
Processor.
.12
Origin: . . • • • . . . . . . Control Data Corporation.
.13
Reference: • . . . . . . . ASCENT Programming
System/Reference Manual,
No. 60101600A.
.14
Description
.141 General Facilities
The ASCENT language is a symbolic, machineoriented language that is used in writing assemblylanguage-level programs for the Central Processors of 6000 Series computer systems. Peripheral Processor programs are written in another
assembly language, ASPER, which is described in
Report Section 260:172. ASCENT provides the
programmer with direct, simplified acess to the
6000 Series hardware features and to the many system control facilities of the SIPROS operating system (described in Report Section 260:191).
Among the most useful features of the ASCENT assembly system are the following:
•
•
Use of a powerful and flexible macro-instruction
system that will reduce the time required for
program coding.
Provisions to relegate all input-output control
operations to the SIPROS operating system.
o Use of a pseudo-operation system for assembler
control.
•
•
I
\
Ability to intermix ASCENT and FORTRAN
statements on a line-for-line basis. Both
ASCENT and FORTRAN refer to the 24 Central
Processor registers by the same register
names.
Ability to call ASPER Peripheral Processor
routines from a library or from own-coding
appended to the ASCENT program.
• Access to a complete subroutine library, the
contents of which are called during program
execution.
. 142 Instruction Format
I
~-
/
The ASCENT language uses one basic instruction
format that consists of an 8-character instruction
location symbol (optional), a variable-length
Opcode (operation code) field, and up to two symbolic addresses or literals. Provision is also
made for inclusion of the programmer's comments.
Up to six symbolic instructions can be placed on
each source card.
The mnemonic Opcode generally consists of a oneor two-letter symbolic code and a Central Processor register designation which indicates the
register that is to receive the action or the result
of the instruction. The address fields can contain
the actual names of the central registers to be used
in executing the instruction. Thus, the ASCENT
instruction.
SA3
= X5
+ B2
is interpreted as meaning Set Address Register 3
equal to the sum of the contents of Operand (X)
Register 5 and Index (B) Register 2. This example
also illustrates the way in which the arithmetic
operators +, -, *, and / can be used in conjunction
with an abbreviated mnemonic code to define a computational operation. These operators can also be
used in address modification operations. Mnemonic
operation codes are provided for every
Processor instruction.
Many instructions include the facility for use of
literals. Literal data can assume any of the
following forms:
• Constant - decimal integers, octal digits,
single-precision floating-point, complex, or
double-precision floating-point.
• Symbol any arrangement. of numbers and
letters that contains no more than 8 characters.
• Symbol:!:I - where I is an integer, octal, or
symbolic constant.
• Symbol-Symbol - another form of address
modification.
Table I presents sample coding in the ASCENT assembly language, illustrating various types of
symbolic Central Processor instructions.
. 143 Macro Instructions
The ASCENT language provides it full complement
of system macros and facilities to permit the use of
user-supplied macro-instructions. The system
macro-instructions provide the communication links
between a Central Processor program and the ten
Peripheral Processors. Most system macros give
the programmer the capability to direct the system's input-output operations, but other macros
are available to request equipment assignment, to
check the status of external operations, to control
the use of program overlays, and to coordinate the
interrelationships that can exist between Central
Processor and Peripheral Processor programs.
Table II lists the standard system macros supplied
with the ASCENT assembly system.
As an aid to efficient multiprogramming, each system macro can be executed in a buffered or nonbuffered mode. In the non-buffered mode, with the
letter "w" appended to the macro code, the associated Central Processor Program waits until the
macro-operation is completed or aborted. (Control
is transferred to SIPROS during this delay, permitting other Central Processor programs to be
initiated.) In the buffered mode, the macro code is
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/66
260:171. 143
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
TABLE I: SAMPLE ASCENT CODING
START
START 1
START2
BX6
BX4
FX7
BX3
EQ
SA7
SA7
NZ
RJ
RDC
SB1
LXI
SB6
JP
Code
RQT~
DRT~
SFFN
SFBN
WFMW
RWLW
RWUW
FSPW
BSP~
RFC~
RFBW
WRCW
WRBW
RDHW
RDRW
WRDW
SSPW
DSPW
FC7~
FC8W
MC~
MC2~
MC3W
MC4W
MC5W
REMARKS
INSTRUCTION
LOCATION
Xl
-X3
X6*X4
-X4 +X1
B5 B2 AB
B2 + DATA
DATA
Xl ABC
SUB
1, ST, (BA) , (BA + 8),8,2
SA2 DATA+1
1
$
MX2 48
6 $
-8 $
B6 + DATA
SA5
B2+BETA
$ JP AB+2
$ SB7 B5-B6
TABLE II:
ASCENT SYSTEM MACRO INSTRUCTIONS
Meaning
Code
Request tape assignment from system.
Release tape back to system.
Search file mark forward.
Search file mark backward.
Write file mark.
Rewind tape to load point.
Rewind tape for unload.
Forespace.
Backspace.
Read tape forward coded mode.
Read tape forward binary mode.
Write tape coded mode.
Write tape binary mode.
Read record and hold data on disc.
Read record and release data on disc.
Write record on disc.
Single space printer.
Double space printer.
Select Format Channel 7.
Select Format Channel 8.
Select Monitor Channel 1Select Monitor Channel 2.
Select Monitor Channel 3.
Select Monitor Channel 4.
Select Monitor Channel 5.
MC6}y
CMC}y
SPA}y
PRN!y
PCH!y
RDC!y
DSR!y
DSLW
DHR}Y
DHL}Y
RDP}y
RTY!y
WAI}Y
TPP}y
I
ROMN
DRM!y
RQDW
DRDN
LOAD
.143 Macro Instructions (ConW.)
used without the letter "W". In this case the program that initiated the system macro can continue
processing while the macro-operation is concurrently being processed in a Peripheral Processor.
In the buffered mode of operation, the Central Processor program must do its own checking to determine when the asynchronously-processed macrooperation has been completed.
Meaning
Select Monitor Channel 6.
Clear Monitor Channels 1 - 6.
Suppress space after next print.
Print single line or multiple lines.
Punch cards.
Read cards.
Display on right scope for system
time limit.
Display on left scope for system
time limit.
Display on right scope and hold
indefinitely.
Display on left scope and hold
indefinitely.
Remove display.
Read console typewriter.
Check status word.
Transfer program SYMBOL from CM
to PP memory and begin execution
with first ASPER instruction.
Hequest memory.
Release memory.
Request disc space.
Release disc space.
Load segment SYMBOL.
the assembler and over the form and contents of its
output. Several pseudo-operations are also provided to direct the assembler to perform specified
code and radix conversion operations on lists of
data. Table III is a list of the standard pseudooperations available with the ASCENT assembler.
.145 ASCENT Translator
The ASCENT translator (i. e., the program that
performs the assembly) operates under the control
of SIPROS in the standard 6000 Series multiprogramming and multiprocessing environments.
Because a single translator program is used
throughout the 6000 Series, identical (and therefore
unoptimized) object code is produced for the 6400
Central Processor and the more advanced 6600/
6800 Central Processors. The listing generated
by the translator includes conventional assemblylanguage error indications. It also includes an assembly summary report that provides information
such as the number of errors detected, the number
The programmer can define his own macro routines
through the use of a few simple pseudo-operation
statements. After the new routine is named and its
list of parameters specified, the programmer codes
the macro routine in exactly the same manner as he
codes the other sections of the ASCENT program.
.144 Pseudo-Instructions
The ASCENT language includes conventional assembler-control statemeJrts to provide the programmer with some control over the operations of
2/66
.X1 TO X6
.-X3 TOX4
· FLOATING X6*X4 to X7
.X1+COMP. X4 TO X3
.IF B5= B2, GO TO AB
· STORE X7 TO DATA + B2
• STORE X7 TO BO + DATA
· IF Xl NOT ZERO, GO TO ABC
· RETURN JUMP TO SUB
. LIST
. PACKED CARD
· MAXIMUM 6 PER CARD
· BEGIN REMARKS WITH PERIOD
.JUMP TO B2+BETA
A
(Contd.)
AUERBACH
'"
/'
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: ASCENT
TABLE III:
260:171. 145
ASCENT PSEUDO-INSTRUCTIONS
MEANING
OPCODE
ASCENT
END
ASPER
SUBROUTINE
BSSD
BSS
BSSZ
I
\
EQU
DPC
BCD
CON
LIST
SPACE
EJECT
Defines CP program
Defines end of CP program
Defines PP routine
Defines subroutine name
Reserves disc space
Reserves Central Memory region
Reserves Central Memory region and
presets it to zero
Equates a symbol to a value
Inserts display-coded characters into
program
Inserts BCD characters into program
Defines constants in program
Controls side-by-side listing
Spaces sidc-by-side listing
Ejects page on side-by-side listing
.145 ASCENT Translator (Contd.)
.3
LABELS
of symbols assigned, the length of the ASCENT
program, the lengths of any ASPER programs that
may have been included, and a list of symbols that
are undefined, duplicated, or not referenced.
.31
Gcneral
. 15
Publication
Date: • • • • . . . . . . . April 1965.
. 312 Common label
formation rule:
.313 Reserved labels For operand
registers: . . . . . . .
For index registers:.
For address
registers: . . . . . . .
. 314 Other restrictions: . . .
. 315 Designators: . . • • . . .
. 316 Synonym s permitted: ..
. 16
Delivery Date: •••.•. ?
.2
LANGUAGE FORMAT
.21
Diagram:
• 22
Legend
Location:
. . see Table I for an example
of ASCENT coding.
•.•• assigns a symbolic name
to a statement.
Instruction Opcode: •.••••.•. defines a machine instruction
code or a pseudo-code.
Address: • . . . • . . . . supplies the instruction with
appropriate operands that
consist of either a register
name, two register names
connected by an arithmetic
operator, or a register
name and a constant connected by an operator.
Remarks: .
. . used only for programmersupplied comments.
.23
Corrections:
.24
Special Conventions
.311 Maximum number
of labels: ..•.
· yes; 8 or fewer alphameric
characters .
Xo throughX7 .
BO through B7.
AO through A 7 .
none •
none .
yes; EQU pseudo .
.4
Universal Labels
Existence: ..••..•. mandatory if referenced by
another instruction.
Formation rule First character:. · alphabetic.
Last character: . · alphameric.
Others: . . . . . . . . · alphameric.
Number of
characters: .
· 1 to 8.
Local Labels
Region: . . . . . . . . · all library routines and all
routines that are local to
a subprogram or overlay
segment.
Existence: . . . . · mandatory if referenced by
another instruction .
Formation rule: . · same as for universal labels.
DATA
.41
Constants
.32
.33
••.••• no special provisions.
• 241 Compound addresses: • joined by the arithmetic
operators+, -, *, and/.
.242 Multi-addresses: .••. separated by the space
character.
.243 Literals: ••.•.•.•. enclosed within parentheses •
. 244 Special coded
addresses: . . . . . . . * represents the current
value of the location
counter •
. 245 Others: . • • • • . . . . . $ indicates the start of the
next instruction on a
multiple -instruction
source card.
•. determined by individual
installations .
.411 Maximum size constants:
Integer Decimal: ..••••• 18 decimal digits.
Octal: ••••••••• 20 octal digits.
Fixed numeric: .•.. not available.
Floating numeric (single precision) Decimal: .•••••• 15 and 3 decimal digits.
Floating numeric (double precision) -
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/66
260: 171. 411
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
.411 Maximum size constants: (Contd.)
Decimal: •••••••• 29 and 3 decimal digits.
Complex numeric Decimal: .•••••• 2 single-precision floatingpoint numbers.
Alphabetic: ••••••• not available.
Alphameric: .••..• not available •
• 412 Maximum size literals: same as constants; see
Paragraph.411.
.42
Working Areas
• 51
Direct Operation Codes
43.
none.
none.
1.
none.
Translator Control
.541 Method of control Allocation counter: •. EQU pseudo instruction.
Label adjustment: .• by arithmetic operators and
literal or symbolic data.
Annotation: ••••••. Remarks field on coding
sheet.
. 542 Allocation counter Set to absolute: •... not possible.
Set to label: •••••• EQU pseudo instruction.
Step forward: ••••• not possible.
Step backward: •..• not possible.
Reserve area: .•••• BSS and BSSZ.
.543 Label adjustment Set labels equal: •••• EQU.
Set absolute value: .• not possible.
Clear label table: ••• ?
2/66
Special Functions
· 64
SFF - Search File Mark
Forward.
Elaborate: .•••••• TPP - Transfer control
from Central Memory
program to a Peripheral
Processor program.
.523 New macros: .•••••• inserted through use of
MACRO pseudo-instruction.
• 53 Interludes: .••••••• none •
.54
Special Arithmetic: ••• none.
• 62
Overlay Control
/
Data Editing
.641 Radix conversion: ••• binary to decimal;
jecimal to binary.
• 642 Code translation: .••. BCD to or from Hollerith;
BCD to or from Display
Code.
.643 Format control: ••••• own coding required.
· 511 Mnemonic Existence: . . • . • . . alternative.
Number: ••••.••.. 84.
Example: ••••.••• RJ - Return Jump.
· 512 AbsoluteExistence: . . . • . . . . alternative.
Number: . . . . . . . . . 71.
Example: . . . . . . . . 10 - Move Xj to Xi'
.52 Macro-Codes
.521 Number available Input-output: •...•.
Arithmetic: ..•.•.•
Math functions: .•..
Error control: .••••
Res~arts: .•.•••••
.522 Examples Simple: ••••••••.
.61
.631 Facilities: . • . . . . • . each Central Processor
program can have a basic
segment and one additional
segment residing in Central
Memory at any given time •
Further segments must be
overlaid as required •
• 632 Method of call: .••••. LOAD pseudo-operation.
• 431 Data layout: .••••••• defined in pseudo and
macro instructions.
. 432 Data type: •.•••.••• defined in macro
instructions •
. 433 Copy layout: •••.••. not available.
PROCEDURES
SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE
.63
Input-output Areas
.5
•6
.621 Facilities: •••••••• standard FORTRAN functions
are available in the subroutine library •
.622 Method of call: .••.•• CALL pseudo-instructions.
• 421 Data layout Implied by use: ..•. no.
Specified in program: yes, by use of macro
instructions.
.422 Data type: ••••••••• tabulated in program.
.423 Redefinition: ••••••• not possible.
.43
• 544 AnnotationComment phrase: ••• written alongside the
symbolic instruction.
Title phrase: .••••• included in header card.
.65
Input-Output Control: • handled by system macroinstructions.
· 66
Sorting: ..•••••••• not available in ASCENT
--language.
.67
Diagnostics: ••••... no object-program diagnostics can be embedded
through ASCENT" instructions.
.7
LIBRARY FACIliTIES
.71
Identity: •••••.•••• System Disk Library.
• 73
Storage Form: .•.••. disc file •
.74
Varieties of Contents: • SIPROS system control
and I/O routines; system
and user-supplied subroutines.
.75
Mechanism
.751 Insertion of new
item: .•••••••.•. ?
.752 Language of new
item: ••••••••••• ASCENT, ASPER, and/or
FORTRAN.
.753 Method of call: •••••. CALL pseudo-operation.
.76
Insertion in Program
· 761 Open routines exist: .. yes.
.762 Closed routines exist: • yes •
.763 Open-closed is
optional: •••.•••• yes.
.764 Closed routines
appear once: •••••• yes.
.8
MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES
• 81
Macros: •••••••••• see Table II .
.82
Pseudos: •••••.••• see Table
A
AUERBACH
'"
/
m.
260:172.100
1&
AUERBACH
STANDARD
EDP
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE
ASPER
REPORTS
~
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: ASPER
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . . . . . . . . . ASPER - Assembly System,
--PERipheral Processors.
.12
Origin: . . . . . . • . . • Control Data Corporation.
.13
Reference: . . . . . . . • ASPER Programming
System/Reference
Manual, No. 60101700A.
. 14
Description
.141 General Facilities
The ASPER language is a symbolic, machineoriented language that is used in writing assemblylanguage-level programs for the ten Peripheral
and Control Processors that are included in every
6000 Series computer system. Central Processor
assembly-language programming is done in the
ASCENT language (described in Report Section
260:171).
It is generally not necessary for users to write
programs for the Peripheral Processors because
their tasks are usually directly assigned by the
SlPROS operating system. However, direct programming of these Processors in the ASPER
language can be desirable if, for example, a
specialized, independently-operating utility
routine is planned, or if non-standard supporting
tasks are to be assigned to the Peripheral Processors to operate asynchronously with the main
Central Processor program.
Some of the principal features of the ASPER
assembly system are the following:
o
Aj:cess to all symbols within the ASCENT or
FORTRAN source-language Central Processor
program with which the ASP ER program is
associated. This facility also provides
access to variables in COMMON Central
Memory storage.
•
Ability to reserve storage blocks in Central
Memory for private use by the associated
Peripheral Processor program.
•
An overlay control system to assist in the
efficient utilization of the relatively small
Peripheral Processor memory units (4,096
12-bit words each).
•
A macro instruction system to permit the use
of other Peripheral Processors in performing
system-supervised input-output operations.
•
Other system macros to request loading of
other Peripheral Processor programs, a
facility that permits each Peripheral Processor
to share in the system control functions of the
SlPROS operating system.
I
\
.142 Instruction Format
The ASPER language uses one basic instruction
format that includes an optional 8-character instruction location symbol, a mnemonic or machine
language Opcode, an address field (whose content
and length vary according to the type of instruction), and a remarks field for programmer's
comments. The address portion of the instruction
can consist of a symbol, a symbol modified by
the arithmetic operators + and - used in conjunction with a constant, a symbol minus another
symbol, or a simple constant. Up to six symbolic instructions can be placed on each source
card .
The third letter of the three-letter mnemonic
operation code designates the type of address
that is to be used in interpreting the symbolic
instruction, as shown below:
Mnemonic ends in N: . . . . . . . . . . . . . no address; direct 6-bit
operand.
D: . . . . • . . . . . . . . direct address.
I: . . • . . . . . . . . . . indirect address.
M: . . . . . . . . . . . . . indexed direct address.
C: . . . . . . . . . . . . . no address; direct 18-bit
operand.
A complete list of the standard ASPER symbolic
Peripheral Processor instructions is shown on
page 260:121.102, in the Instruction List section.
Of the 62 listed instructions, it should be noted
that most fall into a few basic functional categories such as Add, Subtract, Load, etc. The
repertoire is not exceptionally rich.
.143 Macro-Instructions
The ASPER language provides a comprehensive
set of system macro-instructions that, in conjunction with the pseudo-instructions, serve to
integrate the ASP ER program into the overall
6000 Series system and to coordinate the functions
of the ASP ER program with the many control
functions of the SlPROS operating system. Specifically, the system macros provide direct communication links between the ASPER routine and
the system-control Peripheral Processors in
which various parts of SlPROS reside. (See
Report Section 260:191 for a description of the
SlPROS system.)
The ASPER macro-instructions direct SlPROS to
perform input-output operations, to assign I/O
devices and reserve core storage areas, to check
the status of external operations, to load program overlays, and to provide scheduling services
for use of the I/O channels. Table I lists the
standard ASPER system macros and identifies
their usage.
Most of the system macros provide a choice of
buffered or non-buffered modes of operation. In
the non-buffered mode, with the letter "W" appended to the macro operation code, the processing
is discontinued until the macro-initiated operation
is completed or aborted. In the buffered mode,
without the addition of "w" to the macro code,
the ASPER routine continues processing while the
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/66
260: 172. 143
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
TABLE I: ASPER SYSTEM MACRO-INSTRUCTIONS
Code
RQT~
DRT~
SFFW
SFB~
WFM:,!£
RWLW
RWUW
FSP:,!£
BSP:,!£
RFC:,!£
RFB!£"
WRC:,!£
WRBW
RDHW
RDR!£"
WRD~
SSP::,!£
DSP::,!£
FC7~
FC8:,!£
MC1:'!£
MC2:,!£
MC3W
MC4W
MC5W
MC6~
Meaning
Code
Request tape assignment from system
Release tape back to system
Search file mark forward
Search file mark backward
Write file mark
Rewind tape to load point
Rewind tape for unload
Forespace
Backspace
Read tape forward coded mode
Read tape forward binary mode
Write tape coded mode
Write tape binary mode
Read record and hold data on disc
Read record and release data on disc
Write record on disc
Single space printer
Double space printer
Select Format Channel 7
Select Format Channel 8
Select Monitor Channel 1
Select Monitor Channel 2
Select Monitor Channel 3
Select Monitor Channel 4
Select Monitor Channel 5
Select Monitor Channel 6
Meaning
CMC::,!£
SPAW
PR~
PCH:,!£
RDC:,!£
DSR!£"
DSL:,!£
DHR:,!£
DHLW
RDP!£"
RTy!£"
WAIY{
TPP:,!£
RQMY{
DRMY{
RQDY{
DRDW
RQC~
DRCW
DRPP
LOAD
Clear Monitor Channels 1 - 6
Suppress space after next print
Print single line or multiple lines
Punch cards
Read cards
Display on right scope for system
time limit
Display on left scope for system
time limit
Display on right scope and hold
indefinitely
Display on left scope and hold
indefinitely
Remove display
Read console typewriter
Check status word
Transfer program SYMBOL from CM
to PP memory and begin execution
with first ASP ER instruction
Request memory
Release memory
Request disk space
Release disk space
Request I/O channel
Release I/O channel
Release Peripheral Processor
Load segment SYMBOL
.143 Macro-Instructions (Contd.)
.15
Publication Date: . . . . April 1965 .
macro-initiated routine is being processed asynchronously in another Peripheral Processor. In
the buffered mode, the ASPER routine must perform its own checks to determine when the macrooperation is completed.
Facilities to provide programmer-defined macro
routines are not implemented in the ASP ER
language .
• 144 Pseudo-Instructions
The 17 standard ASPER pseudo-instructions provide the means for the programmer to direct the
assembler to perform certain functions. Among
the functions controlled by these pseudo-instructions
are overlay and subroutine identification and definition, memory assignments according to type
(absolute or relocatable), reservation of storage
areas on the System Disk and in specified areas
of Peripheral Processor and Central Memory, conversion of data codes and radices, and formatting
of the output assembly listing. A listing of the
ASPER p.seudo-instructions is presented in Table II.
. 145 ASPER Translator
. 16
Delivery Date: . . . . . . ?
.2
LANGUAGE FORMAT
.21
Diagram
Like all standard 6000 Series software packages,
the ASPER translator (or assembler) operates
under the supervision of SIPROSin a multiprogramming and multiprocessing environment. The
listing generated by the translator includes conventional assembly-language error indications. It
also includes an assembly summary report that
provides information such as the number of errors
detected, the number of symbols assigned, the
length of the associated ASCENT Central Processor
program, the length of the ASPER program, and a
list of symbols that are undefined, duplicated, or
not referenced.
2/66
A
Location
.22
Opcode
Address
Remarks
Legend
Location: • . . . . . . . . assigns a symbolic name
to a statement.
Opcode: • . . . • . . . • . defines a machine instruction
code, a macro code, or
a pseudo code.
Address: . • . . • . . . . specifies a direct or indirect
operand address, or a
direct operand.
Remarks: • . . . . . . • . used for programmersupplied comments.
.23
Corrections: . . . . . . . no special provisions •
· 24
Special Conventions
.241 Compound addresses: • joined by the arithmetic
operators + and -.
· 242 Multi-addresses: ..•• not permitted.
.243 Literals: • . • • . . . . . enclosed within parentheses.
• 244 Special coded
addresses: . . . . . • . * represents the current
value of the location
counter.
.245 Others: •..•••...• $ indicates the start of the
next instruction on a
multiple-instruction source
card.
(Contd. )
AUERBACH
em
260: 172.300
MACHINE ORIENTED LANGUAGE: ASPER
TABLE II: ASPER PSEUDO-INSTRUCTIONS
OPCODE
ASPER
SUBP
ORG
ORGR
BSSD
BSS
BSSZ
BSSCM
EQU
DPC
BCD
CON
COND
END
LIST
SPACE
EJECT
.3
\
"
MEANING
Defines PP program
Defines overlay
Assigns program words to direct locations, nonrelocatable
Assigns program words to nondirect locations, relocatable
Reserves disc space
Reserves Peripheral Memory region
Reserves Peripheral Memory region and presets it to zero
Reserves Central Memory region
Equates a symbol to a value
Inserts display-code characters into program
Inserts BCD characters into program
Constructs 12-bit constants
Constructs IS-bit constants
Defines end of PP program
Controls side-by-side listing
Spaces side-by- side listing
Ejects page on side-by-side listing
LABELS
.337 Labels for variables: . same as procedures.
.31 General
. 311 Maximum number of
labels: . . . . .
. determined by individual
installations .
. 312 Common label
formation rule:
.. yes; S or fewer alphameric
characters.
. 313 Reserved labels:
.. none.
. 314 Other restrictions: ... none.
. 315 Designators: . . . . . . . none.
• 316 Synonyms permitted: . yes; EQU pseudo.
.32
Universal Labels
. 321 Labels for procedures Existence: . . . . .
mandatory if referenced
by another instruction.
. 323
.324
. 325
.326
Formation rule First character:
alphabetic.
Last character: .
alphameric.
Others: . . . . . • . . . . alphameric.
Number of characters: . 1 to S.
Labels for library
routines: . . . . . . . . same as procedures .
Labels for constants: . same as procedures.
Labels for files: . . . . same as procedures .
Labels for records: .. same as procedures.
Labels for variables: . same as procedures.
. 33
Local Labels
. 322
. 331 Region: . . . . . . . . . . local to a subprogram or
overlay segment .
. 332 Labels for procedures Existence: . . . . . . . mandatory if referenced
by another instruction.
Formation rule: . . . . same as for universal
labels.
. 333 Labels for library
routines: . . . . .. . library routines are always
universal.
.334 Labels for constants: . same as procedures.
.335 Labels for files: .. . same as procedures.
. 336 Labels for records: .. same as procedures.
.4
.41
Constants
.411 Maximum size constants:
Integer Decimal: . . .
. 0 through 4,095.
Octal: . . . . .
. 4 octal digits.
Fixed numeric:
. not available .
Floating numeric: .. not available .
Alphabetic: . .
. not available .
Alphameric: .
. . not available .
.412 Maximum size
literals: . . . .
same as constants; see
Paragraph . 411 .
.42
Working Areas
.421 Data layout Implied by use: . . . . no.
Specified in program: yes, by use of macroinstructions.
.422 Data type: . . . . . . . . . tabulated in program .
.423 Redefinition: . . . . . . . not possible.
.43
Input-Output Areas
.431 Data layout:
· . defined in pseudo and macro
instructions.
· defined in macro instructions .
· not available .
. 432 Data type: ..
. 433 Copy layout:
.5
PROCEDURES
. 51
Direct Operation Codes
. 511 MnemonicExistence:
Number:.
Example: ..
. . . alternative.
· . 62.
· RAM - Replace Add to
Memory.
.512 AbsoluteExistence:
Number:.
Example: ..
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
· alternative.
· . 64 .
· .02 - Return Jump.
2/66
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
260: 172. 520
· 52
can be processed asynchronously with the ASP ER
program .
. 622 Method of call: . . . • . system macro codes.
Macro-Codes
· 521 Number available Input-output: . . . . . . 41.
Arithmetic: . . . . . . . none.
Math functions: . . . . none.
Error control: . . . . . 1.
Restarts: . . . . . . . . none.
Memory assignment
control: . . . . . . . . 2.
Processor assignment
control: . . . . . . . . 1.
Segment loading
control: . • • . . . . . 2.
· 522 ExamplesSimple: . . . . . . . . . SFF - Search File Mark
Forward.
Elaborate: . . . . . . . TPP - Transfer control
from Central Memory
program to a Peripheral
Processor program.
.523 New macros: . . . . . . . not available.
. 53
Interludes: . . . . . . . • none.
.54
Translator Control
• 63
.631 Facilities: . . . • . . . . any number of defined
overlay segments can
be called in during
execution of ASP ER
program .
.. LOAD macro-instruction.
. 632 Method of call:
.64
SPECIAL ROUTINES AVAILABLE
• 61
Special Arithmetic: .. none.
· 62
Special Functions
.621 Facilities: . . . . . . . • Central Processor programs
and ASPER macro routines
2/66
Data Editing
· 641 Radix conversion: ... binary to decimal;
decimal to binary.
· 642 Code translation: . . . . BCD to or from Hollerith;
BCD to or from Display
Code.
.643 Format control: . . . . . own coding required.
· 644 Method of call: . . . . . handled by system
macro instructions .
. 541 Method of control Allocation counter: .. EQU pseudo-instruction.
Label adjustment: .. by arithmetic operators
(+ and - only) and
symbolic data.
Annotation: . . . . . . . Remarks field on coding
sheet.
.542 Allocation counter Set to absolute: . . . . not possible.
Set to label: . . . . . . EQU pseudo-instruction.
Step forward: . . . . . not possible.
Step backward: . . . . not possible.
Reserve area: . . . . . use of ORG, ORGR, and
several other pseudoinstructions.
.543 Label adjustment Set labe(ls equal: ... EQU pseudo-instruction.
Set absolute value: .. use of ORG pseudoinstruction.
Clear label table:. .. ?
· 544 AnnotationComment phrase: ... written alongside the symbolic instruction.
Title phrase: . . • . . . use of ASPER and SUBP
header cards.
.6
Overlay Control
.66
Sorting: . . . . . . . . . . not available in ASPER
language .
. 67
Diagnostics: ...
.7
LIBRARY FACILITIES
.. no object-program diagnostics can be embedded
through ASP ER instructions.
. 71
Identity: . . . . . . . . . . System Disk Library .
.73
Storage Form: . . . . . . disc file.
.74
Varieties of Contents:. SIPROS system control
and I/O routines; system
subroutines.
.75
Mechanism
.751 Insertion of new item:. ?
.752 Language of new item: ASPER.
.753 Method of call: . . . . . SUBProgram pseudoinstruction.
.76
Insertion in Program
.761 Open routines exist: .. yes.
.762 Closed routines exist: . yes.
· 763 Open-closed is
optional: . . . . . . . . . yes.
.764 Closed routines appear
once: . . . . . . . . . . . yes .
.8
MACRO AND PSEUDO TABLES
.81
Macros: . . . . . . . . . . see Table 1.
.82
Pseudos: . . • . . • . • . see Table II.
A
AUERBACH
'"
260:191. 100
A.
AUERBACH
STANDARD
EDP
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
SIPROS
REPORTS
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT: SIPROS
.1
GENERAL
• 11
Identity: •••••..••• SIPROS - SImultaneous
PRocessing Qperating
~ystem.
• 12
Description
• 121 General Facilities
Control Data's Simultaneous Processing Operating
System (SIPROS) is a comprehensive control system designed to coordinate the parallel and independent operations of the multiple-processor,
multiprogramming 6000 Series systems. SIPROS
has been advertised as the official 6000 Series
operating system, designed to supplant the
"Chippewa" operating system that was supplied
to early 6000 Series users as an interim system.
However, the basic facilities originally provided
by Chippewa have been improved and expanded by
both Control Data and the early 6000 Series users.
At the request of its users, Control Data is currently re-evaluating the entire software problem.
The ultimate form and content of 6000 Series software are, therefore, undetermined at present.
(
\,
I
\
SIPROS provides the control routines necessary to
supervise the execution of many main programs or
program segments residing in Central Memory
and the concurrent execution of independentlyfunctioning programs in each of the ten Peripheral
and Control Processors that are basic to every
6000 Series system. The standard version of
SIPROS controls stacked-job processing of a large
number of programs scheduled on the System Disk.
Specialized executive routines can be supplied for
conversational-mode remote terminal processing;
these special-purpose routines are integrated into
the SIPROS system and can utilize the many general-purpose SIPROS facilities. The full version
of the standard SIPROS operating system is scheduled for delivery in April 1966. An improved and
expanded version of SIPROS, designed specifically
for control of remote-console time-sharing operations, is scheduled for delivery during the third
quarter of 1967. The general facilities of TimeSharing SIPROS are described in Paragraph. 125
of this report section.
The major objective of SIPROS is to handle dynamically-changing situations in which many jobs are
being processed concurrently, with input-output
operations, computations, compilations, and
system and program testing operations being
simultaneously active. SIPROS constantly evaluates the status of all parts of the system and attempts to maximize the use of all system components - especially the Central Processor. Thus,
proceSSing and input-output optimization procedures are performed automatically, without extensive pre-planning by the programmer and/or
system operator.
SIPROS performs the following major functions in
the 6000 Series systems:
• Controls the operation of all standard 6000
Series language processors and utility routines.
• Provides for automatic stacked-job processing,
centered around the System Disk.
• Automatically controls the physical assignment
of input-output devices and core storage according to equipment availability. (Operator-defined
I/O unit assignment is also possible.)
.. Performs switching control functions between
the several active programs residing concurrently in Central Memory.
• Assigns tasks to the ten Peripheral and Control
Processors and supervises their concurrent
operation.
• Provides for "continuous mode" operation of
relatively slow output devices (card punch,
printer, plotter, etc.) by storing the output data
of a particular job on disc storage until the job
is complete and then performing the output operation. Input data from low-speed devices can
similarly be buffered by storing a job's total
input on intermediate disc storage.
.. Performs integrated diagnostic routines to check
the functioning of various system components
(including Central Memory and the Central
Processor's functional units) during the processing of the day's scheduled jobs.
o Provides full accounting information for each
job processed at the conclusion of the job or upon
operator request. Logged status data can be displayed on the system's console device and/or
line printer. Usage of the Central Processor,
Peripheral Processors, and I/o devices is
measured and displayed.
• Enables the operator to override SIPROS and
standard installation conventions and parameters
through use of the console keyboard. The operator can modify job priorities, introduce new
jobs, delete active jobs, remove specified I/O
devices from "available" status, etc.
• Provides an automatic file-management system,
File Manager, for simplified file control and
updating by control cards. The File Manager is
described in Paragraph 260:151.16.
• Provides access to a complete library of system
and problem programs stored on the System Disk,
and supervises the operations of LIBRIOUS, the
system librarian routine.
.122 SIPROS Residence and System Overhead
SIPROS is a complex, multi-part operating system
whose control routines and various functions are
supervised by the SIPROS Executive routine that
resides in one of the Peripheral Processors. The
SIPROS Monitor routine (see Paragraph. 124)
shares the use of this reserved Peripheral Processor. Another reserved Peripheral Processor
© 1966 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
2/66
260: 191. 122
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
• 122 SIPROS Residence and System Overhead (Contd.)
houses SIPROS' Disk Executive and Display routines, which control all disc file and console display operations. The Disk Executive can load
disc file input-output routines into two additional
slave Peripheral Processors that actually perform
the disc I/O operations.
also be designated as changing or fixed; changing
priorities will be modified periodically by SIPROS
to ensure that lower-priority programs will receive
a proportionate amount of processing time and will
not be ignored due to the insistent demands of higherpriority programs with which the less important jobs
may co-exist. A Central Processor program that is
currently being processed loses control whenever it
encounters a program wait, such as a wait for an
input-output operation to be completed. The SIPROS
Monitor then switches control to the next eligible job
in priority sequence.
All remaining Peripheral Processors (including
the disc slave Processors when not· engaged in
specifically-assigned disc I/O operations) are
termed "Pool" Peripheral Processors. Located
in the upper 512 12-bit words of each Pool Processor's core memory is a control routine called
the PP Resident, whose function is to interpret
SIPROS-directed task assignments and to load the
required system or user program into the remaining block of Peripheral Processor core storage.
The PP Resident then initiates processing of the
assigned task.
Adequate memory protection for the multiprogrammed 6000 Series systems is provided by a combined
hardware-software technique that recognizes the
upper and lower bounds of each program and prohibits unauthorized Central Memory accesses beyond
these boundaries. Any attempt to access memory
beyond the legal limits results in an "Address Out
of Range" error stop and a diagnostic map and/or
dump of the job's allocated memory area.
Another control routine that is a standard element
within the SIPROS operating system is the Central
Processor Resident. This is a small routine that
resides in Central Memory with each operational
program. The Central Processor Resident routine
serves as the communication link between its associated program and the SIPROS Executive; it
performs such tasks as interpreting the program's
system macro requests, supplying the programmer's parameters to the macro routines, and
loading I/o buffer areas with print, punch, and
card reader data that is to be transferred to temporary storage on the System Disk.
. 124 Principal Control Programs
Executive: The SIPROS Executive schedules the
operations of the Central Processor, the Peripheral
Processors, the 12 input-output channels, and the
peripheral equipment (except for disc file units).
The Executive also maintains a status list for each
active job in the system, whether currently in
Central Memory or stacked in the System Disk.
The Executive continuously examines these status
lists and initiates appropriate action upon detecting
status changes.
The system overehead associated with any operating system is generally expressed not only in
terms of the equipment that is reserved for use by
the operating systems, but also in terms of the
amount of Central Processor time that is required
to perform the executive/monitor functions. However, in the Control Data 6000 Series computer
systems, the SIPROS operating system imposes
no demands upon the Central Processor, which can
therefore devote all of its time to the processing
of users' programs. The Peripheral Processors
perform all of SIPROS' control functions, and the
Central Memory accesses required for SIPROS
operations can be completely overlapped with
Central Memory accesses by the Central Processor, which is given priority whenever there are
conflicting requests for access to a particular
memory bank.
Monitor: The SIPROS Monitor routine resides in a
reserved Peripheral and Control Processor together
with the Executive described above. The Monitor
works in conjunction with the Executive, continuously
checking the progress of the program in Central
Memory that is being executed by the Central Processor. Any need for action, such as an I/o request,
is relayed to the Executive for initiation of appropriate action. As the Monitor cycles through its
list of jobs and finds "wait" conditions, it switches
control to the next eligible job in priority sequence.
Disk Executive: The Disk Executive routine of
SIPROS directs the activities of the System Disk.
This routine also schedules all disc file read/write/
search requests from processing programs and
assigns two slave Peripheral and Control Processors
to perform these disc operations. The scheduling
function ensures that all disc requests that can be
performed at the current position (and the next requested positions) of the disc read/write heads will
be performed consecutively. The Disk Executive
also coordinates all disc file operations by ordering
the repositioning of heads ori one file while the slave
processors are reading or writing from another disc
file unit.
. 123 Multiprogramming and Multiprocessing
The standard environment in which SIPROS functions consists of many programs concurrently residing in Central Memory, with each program
periodically receiving processing control. Simultaneously, the ten Peripheral and Control processors can be performing other independent tasks,
both system control functions and jobs assigned by
the Executive, either in support of Central Processor programs or as independent "off-line" operations (such as data transcriptions).
Batch Loader: The SIPROS Batch Loader routine
is called by the Executive whenever available space
on the System Disk is detected. The Batch Loader
then examines the system's input units (either card
readers or magnetic tapes) and loads any jobs
waiting in the input job stream into the System Disk
until the latter device again becomes filled or until
the input stream is exhausted. The operations of
the Batch Loader are directed in large part by each
job's control cards. From information contained
(Contd. )
A comprehensive priority system determines the
order in which SIPROS assigns equipment to the jobs
in Central Memory and initiates their execution.
Priorities can be assigned by the programmer, by
the operator, or by the system, and different priorities can be assigned to the program's main processing and its input-output operations. Priorities can
2/66
fA
AUERBACH
~
;/
-
- - [.7'"
4
"\]\Sl:~
~
~
-
- - -VIlA
/- - - - - - - VIllA
2
------
0.1
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
2
6400 C1?-
0.01
----
~
7
4
2
I
V
./
/
0.001
7
4
2
1(7
......
.....
6
n
i
..-'
~.
-'
0.0001
0.0
V
0.1
66 00C1?
-'
/
/
~
~~
....
----
_6800 C1?
--
-
--
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
I
I
\
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
LEGEND
(
"
-
-
- 6400 CP - 6600 CP - -6800 CP -
Elapsed time for main processing run (Files 3 & 4 unblocked).
Elapsed time for main processing run (Files 3 & 4 blocked).
6400 Central Processor time for main processing run.
6600 Central Processor time for main processing run.
6800 Central Processor time for main processing run.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
260: 201. 120
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
Standard File Problem B
• 12
.122 Computation: . . . . . . . standard .
• 123 Timing basis: ..•..• using estimating procedure
.121 Record sizes -
outlined in Users' Guide,
Master file: •.•.•• 54 characters.
Detail file: ..••••. 1 card.
Report file: •.•.•.. 1 line.
4:200.12, adjusted for
multiprocessing.
.124 Graph: ...•••.•... see graph below.
1.0
------
~
7
~
"\Jln.~ ~
'-l\\V
·7
4
V
/'
~
~
---;;7'
----,.. ,.,."
V-- .- ,..
2
"\J~--
"\Jli1~--
,.,.----
---
----
----
0.1
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
2
0.01
.-
7
;"
4
~/
2
.JII'
.
~oooo cp----
7
7
,.
4
I
2
r/
-
/'"
7
0.001
_MOO CP-
~
-'
17
.1
7
_ 0800 CP
V~
~
---
--...
-
---
/
0.0001
0.0
o. 1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
LEGEND
-
-
- 6400 CP - 6600 CP - -6800 CP -
11/65
-
-
-
-
Elapsed time for main processing run (Files 3 & 4 unblocked).
Elapsed time for main processing run (Files 3 & 4 blocked).
6400 Central Processor time for main processing run.
6600 Central Processor time for main processing run.
6800 Central Processor time for main processing run.
fA.•
AUERBACH
(Contd.)
260:201. 130
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.132 Computation: • . . . . . . standard .
.133 Timing basis: . • . . . . using estimating procedure
Standard File Problem C
• 13
.131 Record sizes -
outlined in Users' Guide,
Master file: ....•• 216 characters.
Detail file: .•••••. 1 card.
Report file: ••••••. 1 line.
1.0
4:200.13, adjusted for
multiproces sing.
.134 Graph: . • . . . . . . . . . see graph below.
-
VIlA
VilA
7
'1i.11~
----
4
=----
VIllA
2
0.1
7
4
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
2
0.01
7
AfJ"
./
4
,/
_____ 640 0 CP -
--
.--
[1'''''
2
I
0.001
.:;~-----#
n
II
7
""
d
.v
/'
4
/
f/
2
/
0.0001
0.0
V
0.1
660 0CP -
,~
------
_
6800 CP
---
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
LEGEND
(
-
-
-
-
-
6400 CP
6600 CP
6800 CP
-
-
Elapsed time for main processing run (Files 3 & 4 unblocked).
Elapsed time for main processing run (Files 3 & 4 blocked).
6400 Central Processor time for main processing run.
6600 Central Processor time for main processing run.
6800 Central Processor time for main processing run.
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
260 : 20 1. 140
• 14
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
Standard File Problem D
.142 Computation: . . . . . . • trebled •
• 143 Timing basis: ••••.. using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.14, adjusted for
multiprocessors.
.144 Graph: ..•..•••.•. see graph below.
.141 Record sizes Master file: . • . . . . 108 characters.
Detail file: ..•••.. 1 card.
Report file: ••.••.• 1 line.
-
1.0
7
~'\\-~
/'
4
.
/
---
2
V'
b
'l"11l
:..-..-
- - ---VilA
---VillA
~-----
---
/'
0.1
7
.-----
4
-
........ G4()() C l ' -
Time in Minutes to
Process 10,000
Master File Records
2
,./
i-""""
/
0.01
7
,
_G6()() C l ' -
I
4
I
I
,/
2
I
V
,
I
7
I
I
~...
I
4
~
~.
•
0.001
I
-
. - - - - 6S()() Cl'-
--
----
/
2
0.0001
0.0
O. 1
0.33
1.0
Activity Factor
Average Number of Detail Records Per Master Record
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
LEGEND
-
-
- - - -
6400
6600
6800
CP CP CP -
-
Elapsed time for main processing run (Files 3 & 4 unblocked).
Elapsed time for main processing run (Files 3 & 4 blocked).
6400 Central Processor time for main processing run.
6600 Central Processor time for main processing run.
6800 Central Processor time for main processing run.
(Contd.)
11/65
IA
AUERBACH
~
260: 201. 200
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
•2
SORTING
.21
Standard Problem Estimates
.212 Key size: . • . • . . . . . 8 characters .
.213 Timing basis: . • . . . • using estimating procedure
outlined in Users'
Guide, 4:200.213 •
.214 Graph: . . . • • . . . . • . see graph below.
• 211 Record size: .•••••• 80 characters.
1,000.0
7
4
2
100.0
7
4
2
Time in Minutes to
Put Records Into
Required Order 10.0
V
,
7
4
/
4~
2
/
/
/
I
I
/
,/
/
/
1'1 4~
1.0
,
7
!./
/
4
V /
2
II
I
0.1
I
\~
/
/
100
2
4
V
7
1,000
2
4
7
10,000
2
4
7
100,000
Number of Records
(Roman numerals denote standard System Configurations.)
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporotion and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
260 : 201. 300
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
•3
MATRIX INVERSION
.31
Standard Problem Estimates
• 311 Basic parameters: ... general, non-symmetric
matrices, using floating
point to at least 8 decimal
digits precision.
.312 Timing basis: ....•. using estimating procedure
outlined in Users' Guide,
4:200.312 .
. 313 Graph: . . . . . . . . . . . see graph below .
1.0
7
I
I
4
2
I
I
I
I
I
IJ
II
./
I II
YII
0.1
7
I
I
4
II
2
II
II
0.01
7
Time In Minutes
for Complete
Inversion
f- <::>
~t f-9
I
IJ
II
2
J
/
&1
II
I
0.001
II
i!S1
:
,
.'
/
0"
/
'
7
,,"",'"
/
4
/
2
l/~
/
0.01
V
/
0"
,,'
.'
~,
,,'"
0'1
,,'0
1
(1-
/
/
4
V
/
/
0.001
V
2
0.1
/'
/
2
4
2
1
4
2
7
10.0
1.0
4
1
100.0
C, Number of Computations per Input Record
LEGEND
------------- 6400 CP - 6600 CP - 6800 CP -
Elapsed time.
6400 Central Processor time.
6600 Central Processor time.
6800 Central Processor time.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
260:211. 101
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Unit
Width,
inches
6401 Central Computer
6404 Central Computer
6405 Central Computer
6411 Augmented I/O
Buffer and Control
165
165
165
6601 Central Computer
6604 Central Computer
6605 Central Computer
165
165
165
98.5
Height,
inches
Weight,
pounds
Power,
KVA
98.5
32
32
79.8
79.8
79.8
11,400
7,800
7,800
27.97
18.65
18.65
95,400
69,250
69,250
32
79.8
4,200
9.31
31,400
1.65
98.5
98.5
79.8
79.8
79.8
15,000
11,400
11,400
37.3
27.97
27.97
102,000
95,400
95,400
Depth,
inches
BTU
per hr.
6602 Console Display
6060 Remote Calculator
60
19.4
52
23.1
48.5
9.5
900
40
5 amps.
10 amps.
2,100
?
852 Disk Storage Drive
853 Disk Storage Drive
854 Disk Storage Drive
24
24
24
36
36
36
40.8
40.8
40.8
480
480
480
9 amps.
9 amps.
9 amps.
3,000
3,000
3,000
6603 Disk System:
Main Cabinet
Auxiliary Cabinet
60
22
46
46
53
53
2,800
850
5 amps.
70 amps.
24,000
6607 Disk System:
Disk File Cabinet
Auxiliary Cabinet
108
48
39
39
77
3,350
1,000
?
?
34,100
77
6608 Disk System:
Disk File Cabinet
Auxiliary Cabinet
108
48
39
39
77
77
4,000
1,000
?
?
44,370
626 Magnetic Tape
Transport
28
33
72
1,200
11 amps.
11,000
General Purpose Peripheral Controller
Cabinet
48
32
48
800
5 amps.
3,900
3276 Communication
Terminal Controller
32.8
29.8
68.8
700
12 amps.
5,900
General Requirements
Temperature: 72° ± 3°F.
Relative Humidity: 35% - 50%.
Power 1. 50/60-cycle, single-phase, 115±10 vac. This provides power to each cabinet for blowers
and utility outlets.
2. 400-cycle, 3-phase, 208 vac, 4-wire. This is produced by a motor-generator frequency
converter and provides primary power for the dc supplies. The motor-generator frequency
converter requires 3-phase, 3- or 4-wire, 50/60-cyc1e power, at a line-to-line voltage of
either 208, 220, or 440 vac.
3. Peripheral equipment will require either 50/60 cycle, 3-phase, 4-wire, Y -connected,
208 ± 20 vac; or 50/60 cycle, single-phase, 115 ± 10 vac.
11/65
A
AUERBACH
•
---
---
---
260:221. 101
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
PRICE DATA
PRICE DATA
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
CENTRAL
PROCESSORS
No.
Name
PRICES
Monthly
Rental
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchase
$
$
$
6401
Central Computer for 6400 system, with 131,072 words of
core storage , 10 Peripheral
Processors with storage, power
and cooling apparatus
50,000
6,100
2,100,000
6404
Central Computer - same as
6401, but with 65,536 words of
core storage
30,950
3,525
1,300,000
6405
Central Computer - same as
6401, but with 32,768 words of
core storage
17,850
2,340
750,000
6410
Additional Central Processor,
with arithmetic and control
functions of the basic 6400
Central Processor
9,700
1,000
410,000
6411
Augmented Input-Output Buffer
and Control, with 16,384 words
of core storage and 10 Peripheral Processors with storage
7,100
530
340,000
6601
Central Computer for 6600 system, with 131,072 words of core
storage, 10 Peripheral Processors with storage, power and
cooling apparatus
71,500
7,210
5,110,000
6604
Central Computer - same as 6601
but with 65,536 words of core
storage
53,500
6,400
3,450,000
6605
Central Computer - same as 6601
but with 32, 768 words of core
storage
41,900
5,700
2,600,000
6801
Central Computer for 6800 system
with 131,072 words of core storage, 10 Peripheral Processors
with storage, power and cooling
apparatus
77,500
7,210
3,600,000
6804
Central Computer - same as 6801
but with 65,536 words of core
storage
53,500
6,400
2,400,000
6805
Central Computer - same as 6801
but with 32,768 words of core
storage
41,900
5,700
1,800,000
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Infa, Inc.
11/65
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
260:221. 102
IDENTITY OF UNIT
CLASS
BULK
CORE
STORAGE
INPUTOUTPUT
PRICES
Name
No.
Monthly
Maintenance
Purchase
$
$
$
6830
Extended Core Storage; 524,288
words
29,000
1,800
800,000
6831
Extended Core Storage; 1,048,576
words
58,000
2,800
1,600,000
Consoles and Disl2la:z::s
Console Display (with controller)
Remote Calculator
900
125
160
18
45,750
4,500
Disk
Disk
Disk
Disk
?
320
470
?
?
?
?
14,200
21,000
6602
6060
852
853
854
6603
6607
6608
626
6622
File Storage
Storage Drive
Storage Drive
Storage Drive
Disk System
Disk System
Disk System
Magnetic Tape
Magnetic Tape Transport; 240,000
characters/sec, 14 tracks.
Magnetic Tape Controller
Data Communications
Communication Terminal Controller
6675-D Data Set Controller
Data Set Controller
6676
6677-A Multiplexor
6677-B Multiplexor
6678
Data Set Controller
3276
DATA
CHANNEL
CONVERTER
Monthly
Rental
6681
Data Channel Converter
6682
Satellite Coupler, for direct connection of 6000 Series Data
Channels
5,600
4,900
7,250
610
610
755
225,000
200,000
295,000
1,075
185
51,600
560
85
24,000
250
55
12,500
1,450
1,900
1,250
1,500
1,900
180
120
110
130
150
60;000
75,000
50,000
60,000
75,000
310
40
13,500
90
12.50
4,100
NOTE: FOR PRICES OF THE CONTROL DATA 3000 SERIES PERIPHERAL UNITS,
SEE PAGE 245:221.101.
/
11/65
A
AUERBACH
~
CDC 6400
Control Data Corporation
\
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
CDC 6400
Control Data Corporation
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
-&
263:011. 100
SlIm"
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
6400 COMPUTER SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
/AEDP
AUERBAC~
_-----.....J
IE PORTS
INTRODUCTION
The Control Data 6400 Computer system is characterized by a Central Processor that executes one instruction at a time using an internal clock-cycle time of 100 nanoseconds. A tworegister instruction access buffer or stack is used to minimize delays in instruction retrieval.
The 6400 utilizes a Central Memory with a cycle time of one microsecond per 60-bit word. Up
to 10 banks of Central Memory can be accessed concurrently. The ten Peripheral Processors
that form an integral part of the 6400 system have fairly complete instruction sets and individual,
independent core storage units of 4,096 12-bit words, with a cycle time of one microsecond.
This report concentrates upon the performance of the Control Data 6400 system in particular. All general characteristics of the 6000 Series hardware and software are described in
Computer System Report 260: Control Data 6000 Series - General.
The System Configuration sectil:m which follows shows the Control Data 6400 in the following
standard configurations:
V:
VI:
VIlA:
VITIA:
6-Tape Auxiliary Storage System
6-Tape Business/Scientific System
10-Tape General System (Integrated)
20-Tape General System (Integrated).
These configurations were selected to show the 6400 both in its minimum configurations
(V and VI) and in larger multi-tape configurations (VIlA and VIIIA). Multiprogramming and multiprocessing are the 6400's normal modes of operation. As a result, the main processing runs and
the input-output data transcription runs in our standard benchmark problems are assumed to be
performed in parallel.
The system configurations are arranged according to the rules in the Users' Guide, page
4:030.120, and any significant deviations from the standard specifications are listed. The principal deviations include the ten Peripheral Processors that are standard in every 6000 Series
system, and the System Disk, required for use by the SIPROS operating system.
Section 260:051 provides detailed central processor timing data for the 6400. See Section
260:051 for the other characteristics of the program-compatible 6000 Series processors.
System Performance measurements for the 6400 computer system are presented in Section
260:201, together with the measurements for the 6600 and 6800 systems for ease of comparison.
The software that is provided for all 6000 Series systems is described in Sections 260: 151
through 260:191.
I
\
',,-
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
-
263:031. 100
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
6400 COMPUTER SYSTEM
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The basic Control Data 6000 Series system configuration possibilities are summarized in report Section 260:031. This section shows the Control Data 6400 Computer System arranged in several
configurations that conform to our Standard Configurations, as defined in the Users' Guide, page
4:030.120. Note that the 6681 Data Channel Converter is used in each configuration. This device permits the use of any peripheral units that are used with the Control Data 3000 Series computer systems .
•1
6-TAPE AUXILIARY STORAGE SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION V
Deviations from Standard Configuration: . . . . . . . . . . . . auxiliary storage capacity is 65% larger.
card reader is 140% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
magnetic tapes are 40% faster.
320,000 additional characters of core storage.
Equipment
Rental
828 Disk File (33 million char)
3432 Controller
$ 2,400
1,050
6607 Disk System *
with controller
(84 million characters)
4,900
6400 Central
Processor with 32K
60-bit words of storage
10 Peripheral Processors, each
with 4K 12-bit words of storage
17, 850
10 x 12 Bus
12 Input/Output Channels
6602 Console Display
900
405 Card Reader (1, 200 cpm)
3248 Controller
400
100
415 Card Punch (250 cpm)
3245 Controller
295
330
505 Line Printer (500 lpm)
3256 Line Printer Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
635
515
310
603 41. 7KC Magnetic Tape Units (6)
3229 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
TOTAL:
*
3,300
600
310
$33,895
Provided for operating system purposes.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
263:031. 200
.2
6-TAPE BUSINESS/SCIENTIFIC SYSTEM; CONFIGURATION VI
Deviations from Standard Configuration ••.••••.••.•. card reader is 140% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
magnetic tapes are 40% faster.
240,000 additional characters of core storage.
Equipment
Rental
6607 Disk System *
with controller
(84 million characters)
$ 4,900
6400 Central
Processor with 32K
60-bit words of storage
10 Peripheral Processors, each
with 4K 12-bit words of storage
17,850
10 x 12 Bus
12 Input/Output Channels
6602 Console Display
900
405 Card Reader (I, 200 cpm)
3248 Controller
400
100
415 Card Punch (250 cpm)
3446 Controller
295
450
505 Line Printer (500 lpm)
3256 Line Printer
6681 Data Channel Converter
635
515
310
603 41. 7KC Magnetic Tape Units (6)
3229 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
TOTAL:
*
3,300
600
310
$30,565
Provided for operating system purposes.
/
(Contd. )
11/65
A
AUERBACH
~
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
.3
263:031. 300
10-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (INTEGRATED); CONFIGURATION VIlA
Deviations from Standard Configuration: .•.•.•.•...• card reader is 140% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
200,000 additional characters of core storage.
Equipment
Rental
6607 Disk System*
with controller
(84 million characters)
$ 4,900
6400 Central
Processor with 32K
60-bit words of storage
10 Peripheral Processors, each
with 4K 12-bit words of storage
17,850
10 x 12 Bus
12 Input/Output Channels
/
\
6602 Console Display
900
405 Card Reader (1,200 cpm)
3248 Controller
400
100
415 Card Punch (250 cpm)
3446 Controller
295
450
505 Line Printer (500 lpm)
3256 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
635
515
310
604 60KC Magnetic Tape Units (6)
3229 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
3,600
600
310
604 60KC Magnetic Tape Units (4)
3228 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
2,400
425
310
TOTAL:
$34,000
* Provided for operating system purposes.
"
..
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
263:031. 400
.4
20-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (INTEGRATED); CONFIGURATION VIllA
Deviations from Standard Configuration: .••••• • • . . . . card reader is 20% faster.
card punch is 25% faster.
80,000 additional characters of core storage.
Equipment
Rental
6607 Disk System *
with controller
$ 4,900
6400 Central
Processor with 32K
60-bit words of storage
10 Peripheral Processors, each
with 4K 12-bit words of storage
17,850
10 x 12 Bus
12 mput/Output Channels
6602 Console Display
405 Card Reader (1,200 cpm)
3248 Controller
900
400
·100
415 Card Punch (250 cpm)
3446 Controller
295
450
505 Line Printer (500 Ipm)
3256 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
635
515
310
607 120KC Magnetic Tape Units (6)
3229 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
5,250
600
310
607 120KC Magnetic Tape Units (4)
3228 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
3,500
425
310
'\
607 120KC Magnetic Tape Units (6)
3229 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
5,250
600
310
607 120KC Magnetic Tape Units (4)
3228 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
3,500
425
310
TOTAL:
*
11/65
Provided for operating system purposes.
fA
AUERBACH
$
$47,145
263:051. 100
1&
AUERBACH
STANDARD
EDP
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
6400 COMPUTER SYSTEM
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
REPORTS
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity: . . . . . . . • • . Control Data 6400 Central
--Processor.
.12
Description
See Section 260:051 for a comprehensive description of the characteristics of all the Control Data
6000 Series Central Processors.
See Section 263:011 for a summary of the distinguishing features of the Control Data 6400 Central
Processor as used in Control Data 6400 c,omputer
systems.
The Instruction Times and Processor Performance
Times for the Control Data 6400 Central Processor,
in fixed-point and floating-point arithmetic modes,
are listed below. See Paragraphs 4:050.41 and
4:050.42 of the Users' Guide for the definitions of
these standard measures of central processor
performance.
\
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
.41
Instruction Times in Microseconds
.411 Fixed point Add-subtract: .••.. O. 6
Multiply: .•..••.. instruction not
Divide: . . . . . . • . . instruction not
.412 Floating point Add-subtract: . . . . . 1.1
Multiply: . . . . . . . . 5.7
Divide: . . . . . . . . . 5.6
.413 Additional allowance for Indexing: . . . . • . • . not used.
Indirect addressing: . 1.0
Recomplementing: •. 0
.414 Control Compare: . . . • . • . . 1. 2
Branch: .•..••••. 1. 2
Compare and branch: 1. 2
• 415 Counter control Step: . . . • . • • . . . . 0.5
Step and test: . . . . . instruction not
Test: . . . . • . . . . . • 1.2
• 416 Edit: ..••.•••.... instruction not
available.
available.
available.
available .
.417 Convert: ...••.••.. instruction not available .
.418 Shift: . . . . . . • . . • . . 0.6
.42
Processor Performance in Microseconds
Fixed point Floating point
.421 For random addresses 2.1
2.0
c = a + b: .•••••••
2.0
2.1
b = a + b: ••••••••
LON
LIN
Sum N items: ..•..
7.1
c = ab: ....•.•••.
7.1
c = alb: ..•..••..
.422 For arrays of data 4.2
ci = ai + bj:. . . . . • .
4.3
4.2
bj = ai +bj:. • • • •• .
4.3
3.8N
Sum N items: • . • • .
3.9N
6.8
c = c + aibj: . . • . . .
.423 Branch based on comparison Numeric data: ..•.• 1.0 + 6.1N
Alphabetic data: .••• 1.0 + 6.1N
.424 Switching Unchecked: . . . . . . . 3.4
Checked: . . . . . • . . 6.3
List search: . . . . . . 1.0 + 5.1N
.425 Format control: . . . . . normally performed by
Peripheral Processors .
.426 Table lookup, per comparison For a match: . . . • . . 5.1
For least or
greatest: . . . . . . . 4.1
For interpolation
point: . . • . . . . . . . 5.1
.427 Bit indicators Set bit in separate
location: . . . . . • • . 1. 0
Set bit in pattern: ... 2.4
Test bit in separate
location: . . . . . • . . 1. 7
Test bit in pattern: .. 2.6
Test AND for B bits: 3.1
Test OR for B bits: .3.1
.428 Moving With self: .•.••... 0.5 million words/sec .
With a Peripheral
Processor Memory: 2 million words/sec.
With an Extended
Core Memory: . . . . 10 million words/sec.
\,
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
-~
263:052. 100
SlIM""
A\\EDP
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
6400 COMPUTER SYSTEM
PERIPHERAL PROCESSORS
-
AUERBAC~
REPORTS
PERIPHERAL AND CONTROL PROCESSORS
.1
GENERAL
. 418 Shift:.... . . . . . ..
. 11
Identity:.......... Control Data 6400
Peripheral and Control
Processors.
Description
.42
.12
See Section 260 :052 for a comprehensive description of the functional characteristics of all the
Control Data 6000 Series Peripheral and Control
Processors.
The Instruction Times and Processor Per·formance
times for the Control Data 6400 Peripheral and
Control Processors, in the fixed-point binary
arithmetic mode, are listed below. See Paragraphs 4:050.41 and 4:050.42 of the Users' Guide
for the definitions of these standard measures of
processor performance.
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
.41
Instruction Times in Microsecorids
.411 Fixed point Add-subtract: . • .. 2.0
Multiply: . . . . . . . not available.
Divide: • . . . . . • . not available .
. 412 Floating point: . . . .. not available.
. 413 Additional allowance for Indexing: •..•.•. 1. 0
Indirect addressing: 1. 0
.414 ControlCompare: . . . . . .• not available.
Branch: . . . . . . .. 1. 0
Compare and
branch: . . . . . . • not available.
. 415 Counter control Step:.. . . . . . . .. 4.0
Step and te s t:. . . .. not available.
Test: . . • . . . . . .. 2.0
.416 Edit: . . . . . . . . • .. not available.
. 417 Convert:......... not available.
.421 For random addresses
c = a + b: • . • . . ..
b = a + b: • . • . . .•
Sum N items: . . . .
.422 For arrays of data -
.423
• 424
.425
.426
.427
. 428
1. 0
Processor Performance in Microseconds
6.0
3.0
2. ON
Ci=~+bj:"""
17.0
bj = ai:- bj: . . . . .. 14.0
Sum N Items: . . . . 5.0N
Branch based on comparison Numeric data: . . .. 60
Alphabetic data: . .. 60
SwitchingUnchecked: • . . • .. 22
Checked: . . . . . . . 34
List search: . . ... 14 + 10CN, where C =
number of characters in
the item .
Format control, per character Unpack: .. . . . . .. ?
Compose: . . . . . .. ?
Table lookup, per comparison For a match: . . . . . . 10C.
For least or
greatest: . . . . . . • 25 •
For interpolation
point: . . . . . . . . . • 25.
Bit indicators Set bit in separate
location: . . . . . . . . 3.
Set bit in pattern: ... 9.
Test bit in separate
location: . . . . . . . 2 .
Test bit in pattern: .. 8.
Test AND for B bits:. 8.
Test OR for B bits: .8 .
Moving: . . . . . . . . . . 5 + 2. 5C, where C = number of 6-bit characters
moved .
/'
11/65
fA
AUERBACH
~
-£
263:111. 100
STANDARD
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
6400 COMPUTER SYSTEM
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
/A"EDP
AUERBACH
R[PORTS
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
A Control Data 6400 computer system can concurrently:
It
Execute one Central Processor machine instruction (or two using the
Dual Processor configuration); and
o
Perform 10 independent peripheral programs, one in each of the
Peripheral and Control Processors; and
•
Perform an additional 120 independent peripheral programs through
use of the full complement of 12 Augmented Input-Output Buffer subsystems; and
•
Access up to 10 banks of Central Memory; and
•
Perform a mass data transfer between Central Memory and Extended
Core Storage; and
o
Control up to 12 input-output operations, one on each Data Channel; and
o
Control as many further input-output operations as there are additional
Data Channels and/or multiplexing and buffermg capabilities of individual
I/O devices and controllers.
The Central Processor is normally not delayed in any way by input-output operations.
However, a Peripheral and Control Processor is delayed to some extent during each I/O operation.
Table I lists the amount of Peripheral and Control Processor input-output delay for each of the
peripheral units that can be connected to the Control Data 6400 computer system, including
several devices originally used with the Control Data 3000 Series.
Also included in Table I is the amount of Data Channel time that is consumed during
each input-output operation. Because the data transfer rate between Data Channels and
Peripheral Processors is so high (2 million characters per second), the individual Data
Channels can be effectively multiplexed between several input-output devices. The extent
of Data Channel multiplexing varies from one peripheral device to another and is therefore
discussed in the individual report sections that describe the various peripheral devices.
I
\
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporafion and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
263: 111. 101
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
TABLE I: SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
Cycle
Time,
DEVICE
Start Time
msee.
Time,
msee.
PP
Use %
CP
Us. %
Data Transmission
Channel
Use
Time,
PP
Use %
msee.
CP
Use %
stop Time
Channel
Use
Time,
msee.
PP
Use %
CP
Use %
Channel
Use
828, 838 Disk Files
52.0
250 av
0.0
0.0
1 maee
Var
Yes
0.0
---
40.0
25.0
25.0
66.6
52.5
77.5
70.0
70.0
93.0
59.3
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Var
Var
Var
Var
Var
6.4 or
11.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
0.0
852 Disk Transport
853 Disk Transport
B54 Disk Transport
6603 Disk File
6607/660B Disk File
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
-----------
---
-------------
3235 Drum Storage
861 Drum Storage
862 Drum Storage
6430 Extended
Core Storage
34.4
34.4
17.2
17.2 av
17.2av
8.6 av
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1 msee
?
Var
Var
Var
16.8
200.0
200.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
Yes
Yes
0.0
0.0
0.0
---
0.0
0.0
0.0
---
Var
0.0
?
No
0.0
---------
---------
-------
50.0
1B.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
32.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
0.0
---
50.0
42.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
B.O
<0.1
0.0
Yes
0.0
---
-----
---
240.0
4B.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
190.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
240.0
48.0
<0.1
0.0
2.2 msee
190.0
<0.1
0.0
No
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
600.0
B4.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
514.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
600.0
B4.0
<0.1
0.0
2.2 msee
514.0
<0.1
0.0
No
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
240.0
4B.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
190.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
240.0
4B.0
<0.1
0.0
2.2 maee
190.0
<0.1
0.0
No
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
405 Card Reader,
1,200 cpm, unbuffered
405 Card Reader,
1, 200 cpm, buffered
415 Card Punch,
250 cpm, unbuffered
415 Card Punch,
250 epm, buffered
523 Card Punch,
100 cprn, unbuffered
523 Card Punch,
100 cpm, buffered
544 Card Punch,
250 epm, unbuffered
544 Card Punch,
250 cpm, buffered
3691 Paper Tape Reader,
350 eps
3691 Paper Tape Punch,
110 cps
3694 Paper Tape Reader,
av
av
av
av
av
--0.0
?
---
---
2.9
?
0.0
0.0
Yes
2.9
<0.1
0.0
Yes
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
9.0
?
0.0
0.0
Yes
9.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
3.0
0.0
0.0
No
1.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
1.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
O.B
0.0
0.0
No
3694 Paper Tape Punch,
110 eps
?
9.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
9.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
3.0
0.0
No
400 +
9.7LS
100 +
5LS
55 +
5LS
60 +
6.7LS
120 +
6.7LS
-----
---
0.0
3152 Line Printer,
150lpm
1403 Model 2 Printer.
600lpm
1403 Model 3 Printer,
l,100lpm
501 Printer,
l,OOOlpm
505 Printer,
500lpm
?
0.0
---
375
?
0.0
0.1 msec
0.0
0.0
No
---
---
BO
?
0.0
0.1 maee
0.0
0.0
No
---
-----
O.lmsee
0.0
0.0
No
0.0
U.O
No
0.0
-------
25 +
9.7LS
20 +
5LS
20 +
5LS
13 +
6.7LS
13 +
6.7LS
0.0
0.0
No
601 Magnetic
20.B KC
603 Magnetic
41.7 KC
604 Magnetic
60.0 KC
606 Magnetic
B3.4 KC
607 Magnetic
120 KC
626 Magnetic
240 KC
692 Magnetic
30 KB
694 Magnetic
60 KB
696 Magnetic
90 KB
---------------
3.0
0.0
2.75
0.0
2.75
0.0
2.75
0.0
2.75
2.75
1,000 cps
Tape Unit,
Tape Unit,
Tape Unit,
Tape Unit,
Tape Unit.
Tape Unit,
Tape Unit,
Tape Unit,
Tape Unit,
3692 Program Controlled
Input- Output Typewriter
3293 Incremental
Plotter
Note:
----67
3.3
or 5.0
0.0
0.0
?
0.0
45
?
0.0
0.1 msec
---
105
?
0.0
0.1 msec
O.
Yes
Var
4.1
0.0
Yes
3.0
0.0
0.0
No
0.0
Yes
Var
B.3
0.0
Yes
2.25
0.0
0.0
No
0.0
Yes
Var
12.0
0.0
Yes
2.25
0.0
0.0
No
0.0
Yes
Var
16.7
0.0
Yes
1.75
0.0
0.0
No
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
24.0
0.0
Yes
1. 75
0.0
0.0
No
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
4B.0
0.0
Yes
1.75
0.0
0.0
No
?
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
?
0.0
Yes
?
0.0
0.0
No
?
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
?
0.0
Yes
?
0.0
0.0
No
?
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
?
0.0
Yes
?
0.0
0.0
No
0.0
100.0
---
---
---
Var
No
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
No
0.0
100.0
--0.0
---
0.0
0.0
-----
0.0
No
35
0.0
PP Use is the percentage of the total input-output time during which a single Peripheral
and Control Processor is used. In the calculation of Peripheral and Control Processor
usage, it is assumed that temporary I/O storage is provided by the 6607 System Disk,
except in those cases in which the I/o operation is itself a disc file or drum operation.
CP Use is the percentage of the total input-output time during which the Central Processor is used.
av:
LS:
Var:
11/65
Average time; see main report section on this device for details.
Number of lines skipped between successive printed lines.
Data transmission time varies with record length.
A
AUERBACH
~
---
No
r
~(
CDC 6600
Control Data Corporation
l
.
(
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
CDC 6600
/
Control Data Corporation
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
264:011. 100
&. "'.....
~'\EDP
REPORTS
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
6600 COMPUTER SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
AUERBACH
INTRODUCTION
The Control Data 6600 computer system is characterized by a Central Processor that can
execute up to ten instructions simultaneously and can utilize an eight-word instruction stack for
register-speed program looping operations. The Central Processor functions at an internal clockcycle rate of 100 nanoseconds. The 6600 can concurrently access up to 10 core storage locations
in the Central Memory, which features a basic cycle time of one microsecond per 60-bit word.
The ten Peripheral Processors that form an integral part of the 6600 system have fairly complete
instruction sets and individual, independent core storage units of 4,096 12-bit words, with a cycle
time of one microsecond. When auxiliary mass storage is included in a 6600 system in the form
of the Extended Core Storage unit, the system is well suited for time-sharing applications using the
"roll-in/roll-out" mode of operation.
This report concentrates upon the performance of the Control Data 6600 system in particular.
All general characteristics of the 6000 Series hardware and software are described in Computer
System Report 260: Control Data 6000 Series - General.
The System Configuration section which follows shows the Control Data 6600 in the following
standard configurations:
VIlA:
VIIIA:
10-Tape General System (Integrated)
20-Tape General System (Integrated).
These configurations were selected because multiprogramming and multiprocessing are the
6600's standard modes of operation. To reflect this type of operation, the main processing runs
and the input and output data transcription runs in our standard benchmark problems are assumed
to be performed in parallel.
The system configurations are arranged according to the rules in the Users' Guide, page
4:030.120, and any significant deviations from the standard speCifications are listed. The principal
deviations include the ten Peripheral Processors that are standard in every 6000 Series system,
and the System Disk, required for use by the SIPROS operating system.
Section 260:051 provides detailed central processor timing data for the 6600. See Section
260:051 for the other characteristics of the program-compatible 6000 Series processors.
System Performance measurements for the 6600 computer system are presented in Section
260:201, together with the measurements for the 6400 and 6800 systems for ease of comparison.
Software for all 6000 Series systems is described in Sections 260:151 through 260:191.
\, ..
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
-
264:031. 100
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
6600 COMPUTER SYSTEM
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The basic Control Data 6000 Series system configuration possibilities are summarized in
report Section 260:031. This section shows the Control Data 6600 Computer System arranged in two
configurations that conform to our Standard Configurations, as defined in the Users' Guide, page
4:030.120. Note that the 6681 Data Channel Converter is used in each configuration. This device
permits the use of any of the peripheral units that are used with the Control Data 3000 Series computer systems •
•1
10-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (INTEGRATED); CONFIGURATION VIlA
Deviations from Standard Configuration: .•.•••••••••. card reader is 140% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
200,000 additional characters of core storage.
Equipment
Rental
6607 Disk System *
with controller
$ 4,900
6600 Central
Processor with 32K
60-bit words of storage
10 Peripheral Processors, each
with 4K 12-bit words of storage
41,900
10 x 12 Bus
12 Input/Output Channels
(
6602 Console Display
900
405 Card Reader (1,200 cpm)
3248 Controller
400
100
415 Card Punch (250 cpm)
3446 Controller
295
450
505 Line Printer (500 lpm)
3256 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
635
515
310
604 60KC Magnetic Tape Units (6)
3229 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
3,600
600
310
604 60KC Magnetic Tape Units (4)
3228 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
2,400
425
310
TOTAL:
\
"
*
$58,050
Provided for operating system purposes.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
264:031. 200
.2
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
20-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (INTEGRATED); CONFIGURATION VIlIA
Deviations from standard Configuration: • • • • • • • . • . . • card reader is 20% faster.
card punch is 25% faster.
80,000 additional characters of core storage.
Equipment
Rental
6607 Disk System*
with controller
(84 million characters)
$ 4,900
6600 Central
Processor with 32K
60-bit words of storage
10 Peripheral Processors, each
with 4K 12-bit words of storage.
/
41,900
10 x 12 Bus
12 Input/Output Channels
6602 Console Display
900
405 Card Reader (1,200 cpm)
3248 Controller
400
100
415 Card Punch (250 cpm)
3446 Controller
295
450
505 Line Printer (500 lpm)
3256 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
635
515
310
607 120KC Magnetic Tape Units (6)
3229 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
5,250
600
310
607 120KC Magnetic Tape Units (4)
3228 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
3,500
425
310
607 120KC Magnetic Tape Units (6)
3229 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
5,250
600
310
607 120KC Magnetic Tape Units (4)
3228 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
3,500
425
310
TOTAL:
* Provided for operating system purposes.
11/65
fA
AUERBACH
•
$71,195
\
I
264: 051. 100
~
AUERBACH
STANDARD
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
6600 COMPUTER SYSTEM
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
ED]?
REPBITS
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.1
GENERAL
.418 Shift: . '. . . . . . . . . . . 0.3
· 11
Identity: • . . . . . . . . . Control Data 6600 Central
--Processor.
.42
.12
Description
See Section 260:051 for a comprehensive description of the characteristics of all the Control Data
6000 Series Central Processors.
See Section 264:011 for a summary of the distinguishing features of the Control Data 6600 Central
Processor as used in Control Data 6600 c0mputer
systems.
The Instruction Times and Processor Performance
Times for the Control Data 6600 Central Processor, in fixed-point and floating-point arithmetic
modes, are listed below. See Paragraphs 4:050.41
and 4:050.42 of the Users' Guide for the definitions
of these standard measures of central processor
performance. The Processor Performance Times
shown in Paragraph. 42 of this section assume that
all counts, increment values, and sub-totals are
maintained in the 24 central registers, and that all
other operands are held in Central Memory.
I
\
"
(
·4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
.41
Instruction Times in Microseconds
· 411 Fixed point Add-subtract: . . . . . 0.3
Multiply: . . . . . . . . . instruction
Divide: . . . . . . . . . . instruction
· 412 Floating point Add-subtract: . . . . . 0.4
Multiply: . . . . . . . . 1. 0
Divide: . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
· 413 Additional allowance for Indexing: . . . . . . . . . not used.
Indirect addressing: • 1. 0
Recomplementing: .. 0
.414 ControlCompare: . . . . . . . . 0.9
Branch: . . . . . . . . . O. 9
Compare and branch: 0.9
· 415 Counter control Step: • . . . . . . . . . . 0.3
Step and test: . . . . . . instruction
Test: . . . . . . . . . . . 0.8
.416 Edit: . . . . • . . . . . . . instruction
. 417 Convert: . . . . . . . . . instruction
©
Fixed
point
.421 For random addresses c = a + b:. • . . • . . . .
b = a + b: . . . . . . . .
Sum N items: . . . . .
c = ab: . . . . . . . . . .
c = alb: . . . . . . . . .
~=~+bj=
•••..•.
bj=~:bj: •..•..•
.423
.424
.426
.428
not available.
not available.
1.0
1.0
0.6N
1.2
3.1
.422 For arrays of data -
.427
not available.
1.0
1.0
0.6N
Floating
point
Floating
point
.425
not available.
not available.
Processor Performance in Microseconds
2.0
2.0
1.2N
2.0
2.0
1.2N
1.2
Sum N Items:. . . . . .
c = c + ~bj= •••.•.
Branch basea on comparison Numeric data: . . . . . 2.0 + 2. IN
Alphabetic data: . . . . 2. 0 + 2. IN
Switching Unchecked: . . . . . . . 4.4
Checked: . . . . . . . . . 5.2
List search: . . . . . . 1. 4 + 3. ON
Format control: . . . . . normally performed by
Peripheral Processors.
Table lookup, per comparison For a match: . . . . . . 1. 1
For least or greatest: 1. 1
For interpolation
point: . . . . . . . . . . 1. 8
Bit indicators Set bit in separate
location: . . . . . . . 0.3
Set bit in pattern: ... 0.3
Test bit in separate
location: . . . • . . . . 1. 0
Test bit in pattern: .. 1. 3
Test AND for B bits:. 2.0
Test OR for B bits: .. 2.0
Moving With self: . . . . . . . . 1 million words/sec.
With a Peripheral
Processor Memory: 2 million words/sec.
With an Extended
Core Memory: . . . . 10 million words/sec .
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
264:052. 100
1&
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
6600 COMPUTER SYSTEM
PERIPHERAL PROCESSORS
AUERBACH
STANDARD
ED:!?
REPBRTS
PERIPHERAL AND CONTROL PROCESSORS
.1
GENERAL
· 11
Identity:
· 12
· 418 Shift: . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. 0
. . . . Control Data 6600
Peripheral and Control
Processors.
Description
See Section 260:052 for a comprehensive description of the functional characteristics of all the
Control Data 6000 Series Peripheral and Control
Processors.
The Instruction Times and Processor Performance
times for the Control Data 6600 Peripheral and
Control Processors, in the fixed-point binary
arithmetic mode, are listed below. See Paragraphs 4:050.41 and 4:050.42 of the Users' Guide
for the definitions of these standard measures of
processor performance.
·4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
· 41
Instruction Times in Microseconds
· 411 Fixed point Add-subtract: . . . . . . 2. 0
Multiply: . . . . . . . . . not available.
Divide: . . . . . . . . . . not available.
.412 Floating point:
not available.
.413 Additional allowance for Indexing: . . . . . . . . . . 1. 0
Indirect addressing: .. 1. 0
.414 Control Compare: . • . . . . . . . not available.
Branch: . . . . . . . . . . 1. 0
Compare and branch: . not available.
· 415 Counter control Step: . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0
Step and test: ... .. not available.
Test: .. . . . . . . ..2.0
.416 Edit: . .. . . . . . . .. not available.
· 417 Convert:. . . . . . . .. not available.
11/65
.42
Processor Performance in Microseconds
· 421 For random addresses c = a +b: . . .
6.0
b = a + b: . . . . . • . . 3.0
Sum N items: . . . . . 2. ON
· 422 For arrays of data ci = ai + bj=
17. 0
bj = ai + bj= . . . . . . . 14.0
Sum N items: . . . . . . 5. ON
.423 Branch based on comparison
Numeric data: . . .. 60
Alphabetic data: . .
60
· 424 Switching Unchecked: . . . . .
22
Checked: . . . . . .
34
List search: . . . .
14 + 10CN, where C =
number of characters
in the item.
.425 Format control, per character
Unpack: . . . . . . . . . ?
Compose: . . . . . . . . ?
· 426 Table lookup, per comparison
For a match: . . .
. 10C
For least or
greatest: . . . .
. 25
For interpolation
point: . . . . . . . . 25
· 427 Bit indicators Set bit in separate
location: . . . . . . . 3
Set bit in pattern: .. 9
Test bit in separate
location: . . . . . . . . 2
Test bit in pattern: .. 8
Test AND for B bits:. 8
Test OR for B bits: .. 8
.428 Moving: . . . . . . . . . . 5 + 2. 5C, where
C = number of 6-bit
characters moved.
A
AUERBACH
~
-
264:111. 100
~ ST""RD
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
6600 COMPUTER SYSTEM
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
A-EDP
\ '---
-
AUERBACH
REPDRTS
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
A Control Data 6600 computer system can concurrently:
~
..
•
Execute up to 10 Central Processor machine instructions; and
•
Perform 10 independent peripheral programs, one in each of the
Peripheral and Control Processors; and
•
Perform an additional 120 independent peripheral programs through
use of the full complement of 12 Augmented Input-Output Buffer subsystems; and
•
Access up to 10 banks of Central Memory; and
•
Perform a mass data transfer between Central Memory and Extended
Core Storage; and
•
Control up to 12 input-output operations, one on each Data Channel; and
•
Control as many further input-output operations as there are additional
Data Channels and/or multiplexing and buffering capabilities of individual
I/O devices and controllers.
The Central Processor is normally not delayed in any way by input-output operations.
However, a Peripheral and Control Processor is delayed to some extent during each I/O operation. Table I lists the amount of Peripheral and Control Processor input-output delay for each
of the peripheral units that can be connected to the Control Data 6600 computer system, including several devices originally used with the Control Data 3000 Series.
Also included in Table I is the amount of Data Channel time that is consumed during
each input-output operation. Because the data transfer rate between Data Channels and Peripheral Processors is so high (2 million characters per second), the individual Data Channels
can be effectively multiplexed between several input-output devices. The extent of Data Channel
multiplexing varies from one peripheral device to another and is therefore discussed in the
individual report sections that describe the various peripheral devices.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
264: 111. 101
TABLE I: SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
DEVICE
Time,
msee.
PP
Use%
CP
Use %
Stop Time
Data Transmission
Start Time
Cycle
Time,
msee.
Channel
Use
Time,
PP
Use %
msee.
CP
Use %
Time,
msee.
Channel
Use
PP
Use %
CP
Use %
Channel
Use
---
---------
-----
-------
---------
828, 838 Disk Files
52.0
250 av
0.0
0.0
1 msee
Var
Yes
0.0
---
40.0
25.0
25.0
66.6
52.5
77.5 av
70.0 av
70.0 av
0.0
0.0
0.0
--0.0
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Var
Var
Var
Var
Var
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
---
93.0 av
59.3 av
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
6.4 or
11.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
200,0
200.0
0.0
852 Disk Transport
853 Disk Transport
854 Disk Transport
6603 Disk File
6607/660B Disk File
3236 Drum Storage
34.4
34.4
17.2
17.2av
17.2 av
8.6 av
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1 maee
?
?
Var
Var
Var
16.B
200.0
200.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
Yes
Yes
0.0
0.0
0.0
---
---
0.0
0.0
0.0
---
Var
0.0
?
No
0.0
---
-----
50.0
1B.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
32.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
0.0
---
---
50.0
42.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
B.O
<0.1
0.0
Yes
0.0
---
---
---
240.0
4B.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
190.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
861 Drum Storage
862 Drum ·Storage
6630 Extended Core
Storage
405 Card Reader.
1,200 cpm, unbuffered
405 Card Reader I
1,200 cpm, buffered
415 Card Punch,
250 cpm, unbuffered
415 Card Punch,
250 cpm, buffered
523 Card Punch,
100 cpm, unbuffered
523 Card Punch,
100 cpm, buffered
-----
0.0
0.0
---
---
---
-----
---
---
240.0
4B.0
<0.1
0.0
2.2 maee 190.0
·<0.1
0.0
No
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
600.0
B4.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
514.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
600.0
B4.0
<0.1
0.0
2.2 maee 514.0
<0.1
0.0
No
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
240.0
4S.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
190.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
240.0
4B.0
<0.1
0.0
2.2 msee 190.0
<0.1
0.0
No
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
544 Card PWlch,
250 cpm, unbuffered
544 Card Punch,
250 cpm, buffered
3691 Paper Tape Reader,
350 cps
3691 Paper Tape Punch,
110 cps
3694 Paper Tape Reader,
1, 000 cps
3694 Paper Tape Punch,
110 cps
3152 Line Printer,
150lpm
1403 Model 2 Printer,
600 lpm
1403 Model 3 Printer,
1,100 Ipm
501 Printer,
1,000 lpm
505 Printer,
500 lpm
601 Magnetic
20.S KC
603 Magnetic
41.7 KC
604 Magnetic
60.0 KC
606 Magnetic
83.4 KC
607 Magnetic
120 KC
626 Magnetic
240 KC
692 Magnetic
30 KB
694 Magnetic
60 KB
696' Magnetic
90 KB
Tape Unit,
Tape Unit,
Tape Unit,
Tape Unit,
Tape Unit,
Tape Unlt,
Tape Unit,
Tape Unit.
Tape Unit,
'
3692 Program Controlled
Input-Output Typewriter
3293 Incremental
Plotter
Note:
2.9
?
0.0
0.0
Yes
2.9
<0.1
0.0
Yes
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
9.0
?
0.0
0.0
Yes
9.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
3.0
0.0
0.0
No
1.0
?
0.0
0.0
Yes
1.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
O. S
0.0
0.0
No
9.0
?
0.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
9.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
3.0
0.0
0.0
No
---
---
---
375.0
?
0.0
0.0
0.0
No
0.0
-----
-----
---
0.0
0.0
---
0.0
---
0.1 mseo 25 +
9.7LS
0.1 maee 20 +
5LS
0.1 msee 20 +
5LS
0.1 msec 13 +
6.7LS
O.lmsec 13 +
6.7LS
---
3.0
---
2.75
400 +
9.7LS
100 +
5LS
55 +
5LS
60 +
6.7LS
120 +
6.7LS
SO.O
?
0.0
35.0
?
0.0
---
-----
45.0
?
0.0
---
---
105.0
?
0.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
4.1
0.0
Yes
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
B.3
0.0
Yes
0.0
0.0
No
0.0
0.0
No
0.0
0.0
No
0.0
0.0
No
3.0
0.0
0.0
No
2.25
0.0
0.0
No
-----
2.75
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
12.0
0.0
Yes
2.25
0.0
0.0
No
2.75
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
16.7
0.0
Yes
1.75
0.0
0.0
No
---
2.75
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
24.0
0,0
Yes
1.75
0.0
0.0
No
---
2.75
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
4S.0
0.0
Yes
1.75
0.0
0.0
No
---
?
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
?
0.0
Yes
?
0.0
0.0
No
?
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
?
0.0
Yes
?
0.0
0.0
No
?
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
?
0.0
Yes
?
0.0
0.0
No
0.0
100.0
--0,0
---
---
Var
No
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
No
0.0
100.0
---
---
---
----67
3.3
or 5.0
0.0
No
0.0
PP Use is the percentage of the total input-output time during which a single Peripheral
and Control Processor is used. In the calculation of Peripheral and Control Processor
usage, it is assumed that temporary I/O storage is provided by the 6607 System Disk,
except in those cases in which the I/O operation is itself a disc file or drum operation.
CP Use is the percentage of the total input-output time during which the Central
Processor is used.
av:
LS:
Var:
11/65
0.0
Average time; see main report section on this device for details.
Number of lines skipped between successive printed lines.
Data transmission time varies with record length,
A
AUERBACH
~
No
\
CDC 6800
Control Data Corporation
\
",---
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
-
CDC 6800
Control Data Corporation
AUERBACH INFO, INC.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
-
265:011. 100
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
6800 COMPUTER SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
The Control Data 6800 computer system features a Central Processor that can execute up
to ten instructions simultaneously at an internal clock-cycle rate of 25 nanoseconds. The Central
Processor also utilizes an eight-word instruction stack for register-speed program looping operations. Up to 10 banks of Central Memory can be accessed concurrently, with a basic cycle time
of 250 nanoseconds per 60-bit word. The ten Peripheral Processors that form an integral part
of the 6800 system utilize fairly complete instruction sets and independent core storage units of
4,096 12-bit words, with a cycle time of 250 nanoseconds. When auxiliary mass storage is included in a 6800 system in the form of the Extended Core Storage unit, the system is well suited
for time-sharing applications using the "roll-in/roll-out" mode of operation.
This report concentrates upon the performance of the Control Data 6800 system in particular.
All general characteristics of the 6000 Series hardware and software are described in Computer
System Report 260: Control Data 6060 Series - General.
The System Configuration section which follows shows the Control Data 6800 in the following
standard configurations:
VIIA:
VIIIA:
10-Tape General System (Integrated)
20-Tape General System (Integrated).
These configurations were selected because multiprogramming and multiprocessing are the
6800' s standard modes of operation. To reflect this type of operation, the main processing runs
and the input and output data in our standard benchmark problems are assumed to be performed
in parallel.
The system configurations are arranged according to the rules in the Users' Guide, page
4:030.120, and any significant deviations from the standard specifications are listed. The principal deviations include the ten Peripheral Processors that are standard in every 6000 Series
system, and the System Disk, required for use by the SIPROS operating system.
Section 260:051 provides detailed central processor timing data for the 6800. See Section
260:051 for the other characteristics of the program-compatible 6000 Series processors.
System Performance measurements for the 6800 computer system are presented in Section
260:201, together with the measurements of the 6400 and 6600 systems for ease of comparison.
Software for all 6000 Series systems is described in Sections 260:151 through 260:191.
(
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
\
-£
I
'''--
265:031. 100
/Ii&
-
AUERBAC~
SI .. ,. ..
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
6800 COMPUTER SYSTEM
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
EDP
REPDR1'S
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The basic Control Data 6000 Series system configuration possibilities are summarized in
report Section 260:031. This section shows the Control Data 6800 Computer System arranged in two
configurations that conform to our Standard Configurations, as defined in the Users' Guide, page
4:030.120. Note that the 6681 Data Channel Converter is used in each configuration. This device
permits the use of any of the peripheral units that are used with the Control Data 3000 Series computer systems •
.1
10-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (INTEGRATED); CONFIGURATION VIlA
Deviations from Standard Configuration: •• . • • • . • • . . . card reader is 140% faster.
card punch is 150% faster.
200,000 additional characters of core storage.
Equipment
Rental
6607 Disk System*
with controller
(84 million characters)
$ 4,900
6800 Central
Processor with 32K
60-bit words of storage
10 Peripheral Processors, each
with 4K 12-bit words of storage
41,900
10 x 12 Bus
12 Input/Output Channels
*
6602 Console Display
900
405 Card Reader (1,200 cpm)
3248 Control
400
100
415 Card Punch (250 cpm)
3446 Controller
295
450
505 Line Printer (500 lpm)
3256 Control
6681 Data Channel Converter
635
515
310
604 60KC Magnetic Tape Units (6)
3229 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
3,600
600
310
604 60KC Magnetic Tape Units (4)
3228 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
2,400
425
310
TOTAL:
$57,740
Provided for operating system purposes.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporotion and AUERBACI:i Info, Inc.
11/65
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
265:031. 200
.2
20-TAPE GENERAL SYSTEM (INTEGRATED); CONFIGURATIONVIIIA
Deviations from standard Configuration: • • • • • • • • • • • • card reader is 20% faster.
card punch is 25% faster.
80,000 additional characters of core storage.
Equipment
Rental
6607 Disk System *
with controller
(84 million characters)
$ 4,900
6800 Central
Processor with 32K
60-bit words of storage
10 Peripheral Processors, each
with 4K 12-bit words of storage
41,900
10 x 12 Bus
12 Input/Output Channels
6602 Console Display
900
405 Card Reader (1,200 cpm)
3248 Controller
400
100
415 Card Punch (250 cpm)
3446 Controller
295
450
505 Line Printer (500 lpm)
3256 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
635
515
607 120KC Magnetic Tape Units (6)
3229 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
5,250
600
310
607 120KC Magnetic Tape Units (4)
3228 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
3,500
425
310
607 120KC Magnetic Tape Units (6)
3229 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
5,250
600
310
607 120KC Magnetic Tape Units (4)
3228 Controller
6681 Data Channel Converter
3,500
425
310
TOTAL:
*
11/65
Provided for operating system purposes.
A
AUERBACH
~
$70,885
-1.
265:051.100
"AND'"
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
6800 COMPUTER SYSTEM
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
/AEDP
-
AUERBAC~
REPORTS
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
.1
GENERAL
· 11
Identity: ..•••..•.. Control Data 6800 Central
Processor.
· 12
Description
See Section 260:051 for a comprehensive description of the characteristics of all the Control Data
6000 Series Central Processors.
.416 Edit: . . • . . • . . • . . • instruction not available •
.417 Convert: .•.••••.• instruction not available.
.418 Shift: •••.•••••••• 0.075
.42
.421
See Section 265:011 for a summary of the distinguishing features of the Control Data 6800 Central Processor as used in Control Data 6800 computer systems.
The Instruction Times and Processor Performance
Times for the Control Data 6800 Central Processor,
in fixed-point and floating-point arithmetic modes,
are listed below. See Paragraphs 4:050.41 and
4:050.42 of the Users' Guide for the definitions of
these standard measures of central processor performance. The Processor Performance Times
shown in Paragraph. 42 of this section assume that
all counts, increment values, and sub-totals are
maintained in the 24 central registers, and that all
other operands are held in Central Memory.
,
',,--
(
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
• 41
Instruction Times in Microseconds
• 411 Fixed point Add-subtract: . . . . . 0.08
Multiply: ••••••.• instruction not available.
Divide: ••.••..•.. instruction not available.
• 412 Floating point Add-subtract: .•••. 0.1
Multiply: ••••.••. 0.25
Divide: •..•••.••• O. 73
.413 Additional allowance for Indexing: ••.•.•.. not used.
Indirect addressing: . 0.25
Recomplementing: •. 0
.414 ControlCompare: .•••.•.. O. 23
Branch: ..••••.•• 0.23
Compare and branch: 0.23
• 415 Counter control Step: ••.•••••... 0.08
Step and test: •••.• instruction not available.
Test: •.....••••• 0.20
.422
.423
.424
.425
.426
.427
.428
Processor Performance in Microseconds
Fixed
Floating
point
point
For random addresses - - c = a + b: ..•.••.• 0.25
0.25
b = a + b: .••.•••• 0.25
0.25
Sum N items: .•..• O. 15N
0.15N
0.30
c = ab: ...••••.•
c = alb: . • . . . . • • •
0.78
Floating
Fixed
point
point
For arrays of data 1.25
ci = ai + br • • . . • . . 1. 25
1.25
bj = ai -: bj: .•••••• 1.25
0.3N
Sum N ltems: ••••• O. 3N
0.3
c = c + aibr •.••••
Branch based on comparison Numeric data: •..•• O. 5 + O. 5N
Alphabetic data: ••.. O. 5 + O. 5N
Switching Unchecked: •••••. 1. 1
Checked: •.•••••• 1. 3
List search: •••••• 0.35 + O. 75N
Format control: ••..• normally performed by
Peripheral Processors •
Table lookup, per comparison For a match: ••••• 0.45
For least or greatest: 0.28
For interpolation
point: ••••••••• 0.45
Bit indicators Set bit in fleparate
location: ••.•••• 0.05
Set bit in pattern: .. 0.30
Test bit in separate
location: ••.•••• 0.20
Test bit in pattern: •• ?
Test AND for B bits:. 0.40
Test OR for B bits: • O. 80
Moving With self: •••••.•• 4 million words/sec.
With a Peripheral
Processor Memory: 8 million words/sec.
With an Extended
Core Memory: ••• 40 million words/sec.
© 1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
265:052. 100
1&
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
6800 COMPUTER SYSTEM
PERIPHERAL PROCESSORS
AUERBACH
STANDARD
EDP
REPORTS
PERIPHERAL AND CONTROL PROCESSORS
.1
GENERAL
.11
Identity:
.12
.418 Shift: . . . . • • • . . • . . 0.25
Control Data 6800
Peripheral and Control
Processors
. 42
Description
See Section 260:052 for a comprehensive description of the functional characteristics of all the Control Data 6000 Series Peripheral and Control Processors.
The Instruction Times and Processor Performance
times for the Control Data 6800 Peripheral and
Control Processors, in the fixed-point binary
arithmetic mode, are listed below. See Paragraphs
4:050.41 and 4:050.42 of the Users' Guide for the
definitions of these standard measures of processor performance.
.4
PROCESSOR SPEEDS
.41
Instruction Times in Microseconds
.411 Fixed point Add-subtract: . . . . . 0.5
Multiply: . . . . . . . . not available.
Divide: . • . . . . . . . . not available.
.412 Floating point: .•...• not available.
.413 Additional allowance for Indexing: . . . • . . . . 0.25
Indirect addressing: . 0.25
.414 Control Compare: . . . . • . . . not available.
Branch: . . . . • . . . . 0.25
Compare and branch:. not available.
.415 Counter control Step: •...••••... 1. 0
Step and test: . . . • . . not available.
Test: . . . . . . . . . . • 0.5
. 416 Edit: . . . . . . . • . . . • not available .
. 417 Convert: . . . . . • • • • . not available •
11/65
Processor Performance in Microseconds
.421 For random addresses c=a+b: . . • . • . • . 1.5
b=a+b: . • . • . . • . 1.5
Sum N items: .••.. O. 5N
.422 For arrays of data ci = ai + bj= ...•••• 4.25
bj = ai + bj= . . . . . . . 3. 50
Sum N items: . . • . . . 1.25N
.423 Branch based on comparison Numeric data: . . . . . 15
Alphabetic data: ...• 15
. 424 SwitchingUnchecked: ..••..• 5. 5
Checked: . . . . . . . • 8.5
List search: . . • . . . 3.5 + 2. 5CN, where C =
number of characters in
the item.
.425 Format control, per character Unpack: . . . . . • . . • ?
Compose: . . . . . . • . ?
.426 Table lookup, per comparison For a match: . . . • . 2. 5C
For least or greatest: 6.25
For interpolation
point: . . . . . . . . . 6.25
.427 Bit indicators Set bit in separate
location: . . . . . . . . 0.75
Set bit in pattern: ..• 2.25
Test bit in separate
location: . . • • . . . O. 5
Test bit in pattern: .. 2.0
Test AND for B bits: 2. 0
Test OR for B bits: .. 2.0
.428 Moving: . . . . . . . . . . 1. 25 + O.6C, where C =
number of 6- bit characters moved.
A
AUERBACH
~
r--
265: 111. 100
£.
~EDP
STAND'"
AUERBACH
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
6800 COMPUTER SYSTEM
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
REPORTS
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
\.
A Control Data 6800 computer system can concurrently:
•
Execute up to 10 Central Processor machine instructions; and
•
Perform 10 independent peripheral programs, one in each of the Peripheral
and Control Processors; and
•
Access up to 10 banks of Central Memory;
•
Perform a mass data transfer between Central Memory and Extended Core
Storage; and
•
Control up to 12 input-output operations, one on each Data Channel; and
•
Control as many further input-output operations as there are additional
Data Channels and/or multiplexing and buffering capabilities of individual
I/O devices and controllers.
an~
The Central Processor is normally not delayed in any way by input-output operations.
However, a Peripheral and Control Processor is delayed to some extent during each I/O operation. Table I lists the amount of Peripheral and Control Processor input-output delay for each
of the peripheral units that can be connected to the Control Data 6800 computer system, including several devices originally used with the Control Data 3000 Series.
Also included in Table I is the amount of Data Channel time that is consumed during
each input-output operation. Because the data transfer rate between Data Channels and Peripheral Processors is so high (8 million characters per second), the individual Data Channels
can be effectively multiplexed between several input-output devices. The extent of Data Channel
multiplexing varies from one peripheral device to another, and is therefore discussed in the
individual report sections that describe the various peripheral devices.
/"
I
i
\"
©
1965 AUERBACH Corporation and AUERBACH Info, Inc.
11/65
\"
• 5"
",
265: III. 101
CONTROL DATA 6000 SERIES
TABLE I: SIMULTANEOUS OPERATIONS
Time,
rnsee.
~
I.
"
PP
Use%
CP
Use %
Channel
Use
Time,
msee.
PP
Use %
Stop Time
CP
Use %
Channel
Use
Time.
msee.
PP
Use %
CP
Use %
Channel
Use
---
0.0
1 msee
Var
1.6 or
2.2
0.0
Yes
0.0
---
---
100.0
0.0
Yes
Var
200.0
0.0
Yes
0.0
0.0
---
---
100.0
0.0
Yes
Var
200.0
0.0
Yes
0.0
0.0
100.0
0.0
Yes
Var
200.0
0.0
Yes
0.0
0.0
100.0
---
Yes
Var
?
0.0
Yes
0.0
0.0
-------
59.3 av
100.0
0.0
Yes
Var
?
0.0
Yes
0.0
0.0
---
---------
34.4
17.2 av
0.0
0.0
1 msee
Var
4.2
0.0
Yes
0.0
861 Drum Storage
34.4
17.2 av
0.0
0.0
?
Var
?
0.0
Yes
0.0
-------
---
828, 838 Disk Files
52.0
250 av
852 Disk Transport
40.0
77.5 av
853 Disk Transport
25.0
70.0 av
854 Disk Transport
25.0
70.0 av
6603 Disk File
66.6
93.0 av
6607/6608 Disk File
52.5
3236 Drum Storage
0.0
862 Drum Storage
17.2
B.6 av
0.0
0: 0
?
Var
?
0.0
Yes
0.0
-------
"6830 Extended
Core Storage
---
0.0
0.0
0.0
---
Var
0.0
?
No
0.0
---
---
---
405 Card Reader,
1,200 CPlll. unbuffered
50.0
18.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
32.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
0.0
---
50.0
42.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
8.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
0.0
---
-----
---
405 Card Reader,
1,200 cpm, buffered
240.0
48.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
190.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
240.0
48.0
<0.1
0.0
2.2 msec
190.0
<0.1
0.0
No
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
600.0
84.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
514.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
600.0
84.0
<0.1
0.0
2.2 msse
514.0
<0.1
0.0
No
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
240.0
48.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
190.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
240.0
4B.0
<0.1
0.0
2.2 msee
190.0
<0.1
0.0
No
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
415 Card Punch,
250 cpm, unbuffered
415 Card Punch,
250 cpm, buffered
523 Card Punch,
100 cpm, unbuffered
523 Card Punch,
100 cpm, buffered
544 Card Punch.
250 cpm, unbuffered
544 Card Punch,
250 cpm, buffered
.:.
Data Transmission
Start Time
Cycle
Time,
msee.
DEVICE
---
---
---
3691 Paper Tape Reader,
350 cps
2.9
?
0.0
0.0
Yes
2.9
<0.1
0.0
Yes
2.0
0.0
0.0
No
9.0
?
0.0
0.0
Yes
9.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
3.0
0.0
0.0
No
1.0
?
0.0
0.0
Yes
1.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
O. B
0.0
0.0
No
9.0
?
0.0
0.0
Yes
9.0
<0.1
0.0
Yes
3.0
0.0
~.
No
400 +
9.7LS
100 +
5LS
55 +
5LS
60 +
6.7LS
120 +
6.7LS
0,0
---
---
375
<0.1
0.0
0.1 msec
0.0
0.0
No
---
BO
<0.1
0.0
0.1 msec
0.0
0.0
No
---
35
<0.1
0.0
0.1 meec
0.0
0.0
No
---
45
<0.1
0.0
0.1 meec
0.0
0.0
No
---
105
<0.1
0.0
0.1 meec
25 +
9.7LS
20 +
5LS
20 +
5LS
13 +
6.7LS
13 +
6.7LS
0.0
0.0
No
-----
3691 Paper Tape Punch,
110 cps
3694 Paper Tape Reader.
1,000 cps
3694 PaRer Tape Punch,
~.
110 cps
3152 Line Printer,
150lpm
1403 Model 2 Printer,
600lpm
1403 Model 3 Printer,
l,100lpm
501 Printer,
1,000 Ipm
505 Printer,
500lpm
601 Magnetic Tape Unit,
20.B KC
603 Magnetic Tape Unit.
41.7 KC
604 Magnetic Tape Unit,
60.0 KC
606 Magnetic Tape Unit.
83.4 KC
607 Magnetic Tape Unit,
120 KC
626 Magnetic Tape Unit,
240 KC
'
692 Magnetic Tape Unit,
30 KB
694 Magnetic Tape Unit.
60 KB
696 Magnetic Tape Unit.
90 KB
3692 Program COll;trolled
Input-Output Typewriter
3293 Incremental
Plotter
Note:
0.0
-----
0.0
---
0.0
---
-----------
3.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
1.1
0.0
Yes
3.0
0.0
0.0
No
2.75
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
2.1
0.0
Yes
2.25
0.0
0.0
No
---
2.75
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
4.0
0.0
Yes
2.25
0.0
0.0
No
---
2.75
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
4.3
0.0
Yes
1. 75
0.0
0.0
No
---
2.75
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
6.0
0.0
Yes
1. 75
0.0
0.0
No
---
2.75
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
12.0
0.0
Yes
1. 75
0.0
0.0
No
---
?
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
?
0.0
Yes
?
0.0
0.0
No
---
?
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
?
0.0
Yes
?
0.0
0.0
No
---
?
0.0
0.0
Yes
Var
?
0.0
Yes
?
0.0
0.0
No
--0.0
---
---
Var
No
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Yes
No
0.0
100.0
---
---
---
67
3.3
0.0
0.0
100.0
0.0
No
0.0
or 5.0
PP Use is the percentage of the total input-output time during which a single Peripheral and Control Processor is used, In the calculation of Peripheral and
Control Processor usage, it is assumed that temporary I/O storage is provided
by the 6607 System Disk, except in those cases in which the I/O operation is itself
a disc file or drum operation.
CP Use is the percentage of the total input-output time during which the Central
Processor is used.
av:
Average time; see "main report section on this device for details.
Number of lines skipped between successive printed lines.
Var: Data transmission time varies with record length,
LS:
1I/65
0
fA
AUERBACH
~
0.0
No
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19 Create Date : 2018:05:10 10:11:48-08:00 Modify Date : 2018:05:11 14:14:17-07:00 Metadata Date : 2018:05:11 14:14:17-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:359dfac7-1706-d84b-b20e-9a9e4c82807c Instance ID : uuid:c83ebdca-1f9b-c64e-a6c9-478dbf402777 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 1041EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools